JP6713514B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a ball game machine (generally referred to as “pachinko machine”) or a rotating drum type game machine (generally referred to as “pachi-slot machine”).

2. Description of the Related Art In recent years, a gaming machine has been known in which a molded body that can operate to form a decorative form is provided in a gaming machine frame (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2016-093655, A

In recent years, in such a gaming machine, a plurality of shaped bodies may be provided on the frame body. However, when a plurality of shaped bodies are provided, any one of the plurality of shaped bodies is notable for its position, operation amount, or the like. There was a risk that the interest level would not be sufficiently enhanced due to the plurality of shaped bodies provided to improve the performance.

It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine having a plurality of movable shaped bodies in a frame body, which can improve the interest of the gaming machine.

The gaming machine according to [Means 1] uses a frame forming the outer shape of the gaming machine, a lottery means for performing a lottery based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and a predetermined display means based on a lottery result of the lottery means. And a first modeling object that is provided on the frame body and can be driven by the effect executing means, and a second modeling object that is provided on the frame body and that can be driven by the effect performing means. A body, wherein the effect performing means displays a specific effect display on the predetermined display means based on the lottery result and drives the first modeling object, and A second display mode of driving the second shaped body after displaying a dynamic display using a simulated image imitating the second shaped body on a predetermined display means; In the second effect mode, the driving of the second modeling object is performed from before driving to after driving at a position where the display of the simulated image of the second modeling object does not overlap in front view, and the second modeling object The display of the simulated image of the second molded body that is displayed before the body is driven is not hidden even when the second molded body is driven and is displayed. Is a gaming machine characterized by.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving interests.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front left. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state where the door frame was opened from the main body frame and the main body frame was opened from the outer frame. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame as seen from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame as seen from behind. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the outer frame and was seen from the front. (A) is a perspective view of a portion of the outer frame-side upper hinge member in the outer frame as viewed from below with the left frame member omitted, and (b) is an exploded perspective view showing (a) in an exploded manner. is there. FIG. 6A is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and FIG. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the state which the main body side upper hinge member is attached to. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect|action of the lock member in an outer frame. It is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right side view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is sectional drawing cut|disconnected by the AA line in FIG. It is sectional drawing cut|disconnected by the BB line in FIG. It is sectional drawing cut|disconnected by the CC line in FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit in a door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is a front view of the production operation unit in a door frame, (b) is a right side view of the production operation unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which saw the production operation unit from the back. It is the explanatory view which saw the production operation unit from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. It is sectional drawing cut|disconnected by the DD line in FIG. 34 (a). It is sectional drawing cut|disconnected by the EE line in FIG.34(b). 34A is a cross-sectional view taken along line FF in FIG. 34B, and FIG. 34B is an enlarged view of a portion A in FIG. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the production operation unit for every main member and saw it from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembles the production operation unit for each main member and is seen from the rear. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and viewed from the rear. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the decoration board unit of the production operation unit and was seen from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which pressed the operation button in the cross section of the production|operation production unit of FIG. (A) is a view of the production operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, showing a portion of the operation button that is notched and is intended to be hidden by the first button decoration portion or button frame of the operation button. It is an explanatory view shown, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a portion which is about to be concealed by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in a sectional view of a production operation unit. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the external appearance of the production operation unit by the perspective view seen from the front, (b) is explanatory drawing which looked at the external appearance of the production operation unit from the direction which the center axis of an operation button has extended. .. (A) is a front view of the door frame left side unit in a door frame, (b) is a perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit from the front, (c) is a door frame left side unit seen from the back. FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from back. It is sectional drawing cut|disconnected by the LL line in FIG. 47 (a). (A) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit seen from the front, and (c) is a door frame right side unit seen from the back. FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from back. FIG. 52 is a cross-sectional view taken along line MM in FIG. 51( a ). 51A is a sectional view taken along line NN in FIG. 51A, and FIG. 51B is a sectional view taken along line OO in FIG. 51A. (A) is a front view of the door frame top unit in a door frame, (b) is a perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit from the front, (c) is a perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit from the back. Is. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from back. It is sectional drawing cut|disconnected by the PP line in FIG. It is a front view of a game board. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board for every main composition, and was seen from the front. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board for every main composition, and was seen from the back. It is a front view of the game board excluding the front unit and the back unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the game board of FIG. 63, and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the game board of FIG. 63, and was seen from back. It is explanatory drawing which expands and shows the site|part of a function display unit in the state which attached the game board to the pachinko machine. FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of a game panel of a different form from FIG. 63 seen from the front together with a front component member, a substrate holder, and a main control unit. FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 67 seen from the rear. It is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board. FIG. 70 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 69. It is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input/output to/from a lending device connection terminal board for gaming balls or the like that relays electrical connection between a payout control board, which constitutes a main board, a CR unit, and a frequency display board. FIG. 70 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 69. It is a block diagram which shows the outline of a peripheral control MPU. FIG. 3 is a block diagram of the vicinity of a VDP with a built-in sound source in the liquid crystal and sound control unit. It is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko machine. FIG. 76 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 75. It is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of a main control board. It is a circuit diagram showing a power failure monitoring circuit. It is a circuit diagram showing a communication interface circuit between the main control board and the peripheral control board. It is a circuit diagram showing a circuit and the like of the payout control unit. It is a circuit diagram showing a payout control input circuit. FIG. 82 is a circuit diagram illustrating a sequel to FIG. 81. It is a circuit diagram showing a payout motor drive circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows a CR unit input/output circuit. FIG. 4 is an input/output diagram showing various input/output signals to/from a main control board and various output signals to an external terminal board. It is a figure which shows the arrangement|sequence of the output terminal of an external terminal board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the liquid crystal module circuit which draws the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. It is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board. 6 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. 89 is a table showing a continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board of FIG. 89 to the peripheral control board. It is a table showing an example of various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of main control side power supply turn-on. 92 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the main control-side power-on process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of main control side timer interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part power-on processing. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part 1ms timer interruption processing. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part blackout notice signal interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of LOCKN signal history creation processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a connection malfunction determination process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of connection restoration processing. 6 is a timing chart for explaining the timing of outputting a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the upper plate side liquid crystal transmitter IC. It is a circuit diagram showing an example of a conventional magnetic sensor input circuit provided in the gaming machine. It is a circuit diagram showing an example (Example 1) of a magnetic sensor input circuit provided in the gaming machine of the embodiment. It is a circuit diagram showing an example (Example 2) of a magnetic sensor input circuit provided in the gaming machine of the embodiment. It is a circuit diagram showing an example (Example 3) of a magnetic sensor input circuit provided in the gaming machine of the embodiment. It is a figure which shows the operating state of a magnetic sensor and each transistor in tabular form. It is a figure which shows the circuit structure when the some sensor signal input part respectively connected to each of a some magnetic detection sensor is connected in parallel to the base terminal of the transistor of a detection circuit part. FIG. 6A is a diagram showing a signal waveform input to a sensor signal input unit in the conventional example, and FIG. 6B is a diagram showing a signal waveform input to a sensor signal input unit in the embodiment. FIG. 6A is a diagram showing a signal waveform input to a sensor signal input unit in the conventional example, and FIG. 6B is a diagram showing a signal waveform input to a sensor signal input unit in the embodiment. It is a circuit diagram which shows an example of the magnetic sensor input circuit of another Example. It is a figure which shows an example of a circuit structure which arrange|positioned the voltage output part, the voltage raising part, and the detection circuit part on the same board|substrate. It is a figure which shows the example of a circuit structure which has arrange|positioned the voltage raising part and the detection circuit part on the same board|substrate, and has arrange|positioned the voltage output part on another board|substrate (sensor board|substrate). It is a figure which shows the example of a circuit structure which arrange|positioned the voltage output part and the voltage raising part on the same board|substrate, and arrange|positioned the detection circuit part on another board|substrate (for example, main control board). The figure which shows the circuit structure which connected the several sensor in parallel to the voltage output part. It is a figure which shows typically a mode that the integration in the 1st control part MCG is achieved only by the component (discrete component) with high security performance with respect to fraud. It is a figure which shows the partial area|region in the base substrate about the base substrate of the main control substrate concerning a modification. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the acquisition principle of the operation information in the opening window vicinity. FIG. 121 is a sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 119. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing a relationship between a special operation receiving portion when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front and various effect members arranged at positions overlapping the special operation receiving portion in the front view. is there. (A) is a figure explaining the 1st operation control mode to a display part, (b) is a figure explaining the 2nd operation control mode to a display part. It is a figure explaining the 3rd operation control mode with respect to a display part. It is a figure explaining the 3rd operation control mode with respect to a display part. It is a figure explaining the 3rd operation control mode with respect to a display part. It is a figure explaining the 4th operation control mode with respect to a movable body. It is a figure explaining the 4th operation control mode with respect to a movable body. It is a flow chart which shows the example of control about the detection information analysis processing of a physical object performed in peripheral control part regular processing. (A) is a time chart which shows control when production reception is generated in a plurality of operation parts, and (b) shows a state of production operation when production reception is generated in a plurality of operation parts. FIG. It is a figure showing example 1 of an effect using a special operation receiving part. It is a figure showing example 1 of an effect using a special operation receiving part. It is a figure showing example 2 of production using a special operation receiving part. It is a figure showing example 2 of production using a special operation receiving part. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about special design and special electric auditors product control processing (Step S114). It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 1st starting opening passage processing (Step S5322). It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 2nd starting opening passage processing (Step S5234). It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the first special design process processing (Step S5238). It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 1st special design normal processing (Step S5280). It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about big hit judging processing (Step S5305). (A) is a diagram showing a big hit determination table, (B), (C) is a diagram showing a symbol determination table. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure concerning 1st special design stop design setting processing (step S5281). It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 1st fluctuation pattern setting processing (Step S5282). It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol change processing (Step S5283). It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the first special design stop processing (Step S5284). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a normal symbol and a normal electric auditors product control process (step S116). It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about gate section passage processing (Step S5402). It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about normal design normal processing (Step S5403). It is the figure which shows the decision table T1 of the production pattern (variation production) which is referred to in the production design fluctuation start processing when it is in the normal game state. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the processing procedure regarding the lottery regarding the notice production which appears within the execution period (variation time of the design) of the production pattern (the notice lottery which is done inside production design variation start processing). It is a figure which shows an example of the timer advance notice determination table T2 which is referred to when the fluctuation (suspended to be exhausted) is not the target of the timer prefetch effect (second timer advance notice lottery) in the normal game state. (A) is a figure which shows an example of the 1st mission production determination table T3a (1st mission production lottery) referred when the notice side timer production is performed in a normal game state, (b) is a normal game It is a figure which shows an example of the 2nd mission effect determination table T3b (2nd mission effect lottery) referred when the notice side timer effect is not performed in a state. It is a figure which shows an example of the advance notice timer type determination table T4 referred to in advance notice timer type lottery (step S5505). Reach type and processing status (when the decision is made to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) and when it is not made to make the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) It is a figure which compares and shows the appearance upper limit number of the timer object candidate production defined according to the below-mentioned 5th processing status and 6th processing status other than the 1st-4th processing status. In the case of the single timer mode (YES in step S5506), and in the first processing situation in which it is determined to execute the mission effect (let the conversation notice appear) (YES in step S5507), step S5508 It is a figure which shows an example of the table T5a referred in the process of. In the case of the single timer mode (YES in step S5506), and in the second processing situation in which it is determined not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation announcement appear) (NO in step S5507), step S5523 It is a figure which shows an example of the table T5b referred in the process of. In the case of the double timer (NO in step S5506), and in the third processing situation in which it is determined to execute the mission effect (make the conversation announcement appear) (YES in step S5532), step S5533. It is a figure which shows an example of the table T5c referred in the process of. In the case of the double timer (NO in step S5506), and in the fourth processing state in which it is determined not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation announcement appear) (NO in step S5532), step S5543 It is a figure which shows an example of the table T5d referred in the process of. In the first processing situation, which is the mode of the single timer (YES in step S5506), and the determination (YES in step S5507) to execute the mission effect (make the conversation announcement appear) is performed, the processing of step S5508 It is a figure which shows an example of the table T6a-1 referred to when it is determined that the number of notices is set to 1 as a result of having performed (step S5509). In the second processing situation, which is the mode of the single timer (YES in step S5506), and the determination (NO in step S5507) that the mission effect (let the conversation notice appear) is not executed, the processing of step S5523. It is a figure which shows an example of the table T6b-1 referred to when it is determined that the number of notices is set to 1 as a result of having performed (step S5524). In the fourth processing situation, which is a double timer mode (NO in step S5506), and is determined not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation announcement appear) (NO in step S5532), the process of step S5543 It is a figure which shows an example of the table T6d-2 referred when the number of notices is decided to be 2 as a result of having performed (step S5544). Corresponds to the character reach in the second processing situation in which the mode is a single timer (YES in step S5506) and the determination (NO in step S5507) that the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is not executed (NO in step S5507). 9 is a time chart for explaining specific contents of a count display lottery (step 510) performed when a change number to be selected is selected. Corresponding to SP reach in the second processing situation in which the mode is a single timer (YES in step S5506), and it is determined not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5507). 9 is a time chart for explaining specific contents of a count display lottery (step 510) performed when a change number to be selected is selected. It is a figure which shows an example of the table T7a referred by the 1st timer non-target announcement lottery (step S5512). It is a diagram showing an example of a table T7b referred to in the second timer non-target announcement lottery (step S5525). In the case of the fifth processing state in which it is decided not to execute the advance notice timer effect (NO in step S5503) and to execute the mission effect (make the conversation announcement appear) (YES in step S5552). It is a figure which shows an example of the table T5e referred in the process of step S5553. In the case of the sixth processing state in which it is decided not to execute the advance notice timer effect (NO in step S5503) and not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation announcement appear) (NO in step S5552). It is a figure which shows an example of the table T5f referred in the process of step S5563. In the fifth processing situation in which it is decided not to execute the advance notice timer effect (NO in step S5503) and to execute the mission effect (make the conversation announcement appear) (YES in step S5552), step S5553. It is a figure which shows an example of the table T6e-1 referred to when it is determined that the number of notices is set to 1 as a result of performing the process of (5555). In the fifth processing situation in which it is decided not to execute the advance notice timer effect (NO in step S5503) and to execute the mission effect (make the conversation announcement appear) (YES in step S5552), step S5553. It is a figure which shows an example of the table T6e-2 referred to when it is determined that the number of notices should be set to 2 as a result of performing the process of (5555). In the sixth processing situation in which it is determined that the advance notice timer effect is not executed (NO in step S5503) and the mission effect (make the conversation announcement appear) is not executed (NO in step S5552), step S5563. It is a figure which shows an example of the table T6f-1 referred to when it is determined that the number of notices is set to 1 as a result of performing the process of (6) (step S5564). In the sixth processing situation in which it is determined that the advance notice timer effect is not executed (NO in step S5503) and the mission effect (make the conversation announcement appear) is not executed (NO in step S5552), step S5563. It is a figure which shows an example of the table T6f-2 referred to when it is determined that the number of notices should be 2 as a result of performing the process of (6) (step S5564). (A), the variable information display is in the state of executing the pending information (first special symbol) and the variable display is in the state of non-execution of the three pending information (all first special symbol) is stored. It is a figure which shows an example about the table T7a referred to in a 1st special figure prefetching process, when a new winning (1st special symbol) generate|occur|produces in a state. In addition, (b), the suspension information in the state that the variable display is being executed (first special symbol) and the two suspension information in the state that the variable display is not being executed (both are the first special symbol) are stored. It is a diagram showing an example of a table T7b that is referred to in the first special diagram prefetching process when a new winning (first special symbol) occurs in the state that is. (A), (b) is a figure which shows the example about the table T8a-1 and the table T8a-2 which are referred when determining the execution mode of a timer look-ahead production in the situation where the number of changeable look-ahead is four. .. (A), (b) is a figure which shows an example about the table T8b-1 and the table T8b-2 which are referred when determining the execution mode of a timer look-ahead production in the situation where the number of changeable look-ahead is three. .. Usually referred to when there is no big hit symbol appearing in the pending information in which the variable display is being executed and the pending information in which the variable display is in the unexecuted state (for example, hold 1 to hold 3) It is a figure which shows the hour holding change table T9a. Special reference to be made when there is something that causes a big hit symbol to appear in the pending information in which the variable display is in the running state and the pending information in which the variable display is in the unexecuted state (for example, hold 1 to hold 3) It is a figure which shows the hour holding change table T9b. It is a figure which shows an example of the process procedure regarding the process performed in order to implement the one-time production. It is the figure which shows the timer production example concretely. It is the figure which shows the timer production example concretely. It is the figure which shows the timer production example concretely. It is the figure which shows the timer production example concretely. (A) is a mode of a single timer (YES in step S5506), and in the second processing situation in which it is determined not to execute the mission effect (let the conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5507). It is a time chart for explaining the specific content of the timer target exclusion effect that is performed. (B) is a single timer mode (YES in step S5506), and in the second processing situation in which it is determined not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5507). It is a time chart for explaining the specific content of the timer target exclusion effect that is performed. It is a single timer mode (YES in step S506), and the timer target advance is performed in the second processing situation in which it is determined not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (NO in step S507). It is a time chart for explaining specific contents of the effect. It is a figure which shows an example about the content of the determination process regarding whether to generate the timer target advance effect, and at which timing the timer target advance effect is generated. It is a figure which shows an example about the content of the determination process which determines what kind of production mode to generate at the timing, when performing the timer target advance production at any one of the timings Ta1 to Ta3. It is a figure which shows an example about the content of the determination process which decides what kind of production mode to generate at those timings when performing the timer target advance production at any two timings of timings Ta1 to Ta3. It is a figure which shows an example about the content of the determination process which decides what kind of production mode to generate at those timings when performing the timer target advance production at all timings Ta1 to Ta3. In the second processing situation, which is a single timer mode (YES in step S506), and is determined not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation announcement appear) (NO in step S507), the number of announcements is 2 It is decided that it is one (step S523), and it is decided to give "conversation notice" at the earlier timing and to perform "characteristics A operation 1" at the later timing. 3 is a time chart for explaining specific contents of FIG. (A) is a single timer mode (YES in step S506), and in the second processing situation in which it is determined not to execute the mission effect (let the conversation notice appear) (NO in step S507). 7 is a time chart for explaining specific contents of the timer target suppression control that is performed. (B) is a diagram showing an example of a table referred to in the timer target suppression control when the ratio of occurrence of the suppression period is varied depending on the type of effect mode that appears as the effect of the timer object. (A) is a single timer mode (YES in step S506), and in the second processing situation in which it is determined not to execute the mission effect (let the conversation notice appear) (NO in step S507). It is a time chart for explaining the specific content of the timer effect for which a new timer that is performed is an effect target. (B) is a single timer mode (YES in step S506), and in the second processing situation in which it is determined not to execute the mission effect (let the conversation notice appear) (NO in step S507). It is a time chart for explaining the specific content of the timer effect for which a new timer that is performed is an effect target. A timer mode effect that is a mode of a single timer (YES in step S506) and is performed in the second processing situation in which it is determined not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (NO in step S507). 3 is a time chart for explaining specific contents of FIG. (A) to (c) are aspects of a single timer (YES in step S506), and it is determined that the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is not executed (NO in step S507). 5 is a time chart for explaining specific contents of count output suspension control performed in the processing situation of FIG. It is a flow chart which shows an example about the processing procedure when realizing count output stop control. It is the figure in order to explain the concrete contents of the timer plus production. It is a figure for explaining the concrete contents of timer stagnation production. It is a figure for explaining the concrete content of the progress production which leads to a timer target production. It is a figure for explaining the concrete contents of the operation production in a timer. It is a figure for explaining the concrete contents of timer concealment production. It is the figure which shows the timer production example concretely. It is the figure which shows the timer production example concretely. It is the figure which shows the timer production example concretely. It is the figure which shows the timer production example concretely. It is the figure which shows the timer production example concretely. It is the figure which shows the timer production example concretely. It is the figure which shows the timer production example concretely. It is the figure which shows the timer production example concretely. It is the figure which shows the timer production example concretely. It is the figure which shows the timer production example concretely. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound control by the fixed channel system as a comparison object with respect to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound definition table for implement|achieving the sound control by a fixed channel system. The relationship between the game state, the reproduced sound and the reproduced channel is shown. It is the timing chart which shows one example of the production time chart. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound control by the automatic channel system as this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound definition table for implement|achieving the sound control by an automatic channel system. It is a figure showing a relation with a game state, reproduction sound, and a priority. It is the timing chart which shows one example of the production time chart. It is a figure which shows an example of the work information for an automatic channel control stored in the work area for AUTO group channel control provided in the peripheral control RAM. It is a flow chart which shows an example of search processing of a vacant channel at the time of performing sound control when only one AUTO group is defined in an automatic channel system. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation pattern of the sound control by each channel system or those combinations. It is a figure which shows an example of the structure table of the reproduction|regeneration channel in the sound source control in this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a procedure of free channel search processing when performing control which outputs a sound of this embodiment. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing an example of conditions for selecting a channel for replacing the output of sound (stopping reproduction of sound) when the channel is not empty at the time of outputting a new sound in the present embodiment. It is a timing chart showing an example of effect for explaining the sound control of the present embodiment, (A) shows the timing at which the sound effect is reproduced, and (B) shows the channel to which each sound effect is output. It is a figure which shows an example of the priority order of the sound effects in the production example of this embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the volume change of the effect sound in the first half variation of this embodiment, (A) shows the output timing of the effect sound effect, and (B) shows the volume change of each effect sound. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen structure of the production in the modification of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the structure table of the reproduction|regeneration channel in the sound source control in the modification of this embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the volume change of the effect sound in the latter half of the variation of the modification of this embodiment, (A) shows the output timing of the effect sound effect, and (B) shows the volume change of each effect sound. It is a figure which shows an example of the volume control table classified by channel group which shows the priority of the volume (volume) control for every group in this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of group volume control processing which performs sound control corresponding to the group to which the outputted sound of this embodiment is carried out. It is a timing chart for explaining the procedure of controlling the volume in the present embodiment in chronological order, (A) shows the execution timing of the effect, (B) shows the volume of each effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound effect volume control table which shows the volume (volume) control for every total reproduction time (output time) of the sound in this embodiment. It is a first half of a flowchart showing a procedure of a volume control process for performing sound control based on a parameter set for each sound effect of the present embodiment. It is the latter half of the flowchart showing the procedure of the volume control processing for performing sound control based on the parameter set for each sound effect of the present embodiment. It is a timing chart for explaining the procedure of controlling the volume in the present embodiment in chronological order, (A) shows the execution timing of the effect, (B) shows the volume of each effect. It is a figure which shows an example of a sound definition table. FIG. 25 is a diagram showing notification contents, notification modes, notification times, and conditions (cancellation conditions) for ending notification, for each type of notification sound illustrated in FIG. 244. (A) is an example of the processing when the output condition (abnormality detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced FIG. (B) is an example of the processing when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced FIG. (C) is an example of the processing when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced FIG. (A) is a figure which shows an example about the process when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound which belongs to a 2nd notification group is satisfy|filled, while the 1 notification sound which belongs to a 1st notification group is reproduced. Is. FIG. 7B is a diagram showing an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while the one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced. Is. FIG. 6C is a diagram showing an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced. Is. FIG. 9D is a diagram showing an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced. Is. It is a time chart which shows an example as a mode which notifies the state of a game machine. It is a time chart which shows an example as a mode which notifies the state of a game machine. It is a time chart which shows an example as a mode which notifies the state of a game machine. It is a time chart which shows an example as a mode which notifies the state of a game machine. It is a time chart which shows an example as a mode which notifies the state of a game machine. It is a time chart which shows an example as a mode which notifies the state of a game machine. It is a figure explaining the contents of the notification process under production progress for every notification state of the pachinko machine 1 concerned. It is a figure explaining the content about the process regarding volume adjustment. It is a figure explaining the content about the process regarding volume adjustment. It is a figure explaining the content about the process regarding volume adjustment. It is a time chart which shows an example about channel reservation processing. It is a time chart which shows an example about channel reservation processing. It is a time chart which shows an example about channel reservation processing. It is a time chart which shows an example about channel reservation processing. It is a time chart which shows an example about channel reservation processing. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure for processing related to setting a channel restriction level. It is a figure which shows an example about the content of restrictions defined separately according to a channel restriction level. It is a figure which shows another example about the content of restrictions determined separately according to a channel restriction level. It is a time chart which shows an example of the allocation situation of each channel when a channel special opening process is performed. 7 is a time chart showing an example of the allocation status of each channel when the suppressed operation sound output process is performed. 9 is a time chart showing an example of the allocation status of each channel when the processing related to the channel allocation cancellation operation is performed. Examples of the allocation status of each channel when the movable body abnormality is detected in the process of operating the movable decorative body according to the variation pattern (effect pattern) according to the big hit determination, and the situation on the movable decorative body side It is a time chart shown. The assignment status of each channel when the movable body abnormality is detected and the movable state when the movable body abnormality is detected not in the process of operating the movable decorative body according to the variation pattern (effect pattern) according to the big hit determination but in the process other than this. It is a time chart which shows those examples about the situation on the side of a decorative body. It is a time chart showing an example of the allocation situation of each channel and the situation on the side of the movable decorative body when a movable body abnormality simultaneously occurs in a plurality of movable decorative bodies at a specific timing in the period in which the symbol variation is performed. .. A time chart showing an example of the allocation state of each channel and the situation on the movable decorative body side when a movable body abnormality occurs in a plurality of movable decorative bodies at two different timings in the period in which the symbol variation is performed. is there. It is a time chart which shows the example about the control content for implement|achieving an automatic multiple times operation function (auto continuous hitting function). 9 is a time chart showing an example of display contents when an operation is performed a plurality of times. It is a time chart which shows the example about the control content for implement|achieving an automatic multiple times operation function (auto continuous hitting function). It is a time chart showing an example of an effect using an automatic multiple times operation function (auto continuous hitting function). It is a time chart showing an example of an effect using an automatic multiple times operation function (auto continuous hitting function). It is a front view of a gaming machine provided with a sword effect operation unit. It is a right side view of a game machine provided with a sword effect operation unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the selection table of the production pattern in the production mode which can perform sword extraction production, (A) shows an example of the selection table which selects the presence or absence of the extraction preparation transition production according to the type of variation pattern, (B) ) An example of a selection table for selecting the presence/absence of the uncut sword production is shown. It is a state transition diagram explaining the sword removal operation of the sword decoration body when the aura member is provided on the sword part (sword blade part) itself, (A) Sword storage state, (B) First sword removal state, (C) Second Shows the sword removal state. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view explaining the operation of the aura member. It is a state transition diagram explaining the sword removal operation|movement of the sword decoration body when an aura member is provided in a sheath part, (A) Sword storage state, (B) 1st sword removal state, (C) 2nd sword extraction state is shown. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view explaining the operation of the aura member. It is a production transition diagram of a sword production. It is a production transition diagram of a sword production. It is a production transition diagram of a sword production. It is a production transition diagram of a sword production. It is a production transition diagram of a sword production. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the state change timing of a sword ornament and the operation effective period concerning an operating means. It is an example of the production transition diagram of the sword production of the modification 1. It is an example of the production transition diagram of the sword production of the modification 1. It is an example of the production transition diagram of the sword production of the modification 1. 9 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the timing of changing the state of the sword decoration and the operation timing of the operating means in Modification 1. It is an example of an effect transition diagram of the cutting-out effect of the modified example 2. It is an example of an effect transition diagram of the cutting-out effect of the modified example 2. It is an example of an effect transition diagram of the cutting-out effect of the modified example 2. It is an example of an effect transition diagram of the cutting-out effect of the modified example 2. It is an example of an effect transition diagram of the cutting-out effect of the modified example 2. It is a figure explaining a screen transition of a production display device and a movement transition of a sword decoration in a princess reach production. It is a figure explaining a screen transition of a production display device and a movement transition of a sword decoration in a princess reach production. It is a figure explaining a screen transition of a production display device and a movement transition of a sword decoration in a princess reach production. It is a figure explaining a screen transition of a production display device, a state transition of an operation button, and a movement transition of a sword ornament in a reach production including operation production of an operation button used multifacetedly. It is a figure explaining a screen transition of a production display device, a state transition of an operation button, and a movement transition of a sword ornament in a reach production including operation production of an operation button used multifacetedly. It is a figure explaining a screen transition of a production display device, a state transition of an operation button, and a movement transition of a sword ornament in a reach production including operation production of an operation button used multifacetedly. It is a figure explaining a screen transition of a production display device in a reach production, a state transition of an operation button, and a movement transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining a screen transition of a production display device in a reach production, a state transition of an operation button, and a movement transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining a screen transition of a production display device in a reach production, a state transition of an operation button, and a movement transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining a screen transition of a production display device in a reach production, a state transition of an operation button, and a movement transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining a screen transition of a production display device in a reach production, a state transition of an operation button, and a movement transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining the form of the sword decoration used for a pseudo continuous production. It is the figure which shows the production transition example of the pseudo continuous production which is common to all production patterns. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition of the production|presentation of whether the operation opportunity of a sword decoration is given, while a pseudo continuous change (re-change) is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition of the production|presentation of whether the operation opportunity of a sword decoration is given, while a pseudo continuous change (re-change) is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition of the production|presentation of whether the operation opportunity of a sword decoration is given, while a pseudo continuous change (re-change) is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition of the post-operation production of the sword decoration body (falling production of a specific decoration member SDY (shadow cast)) during pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) common to all the production patterns. It is the figure which shows the production transition example which becomes the feature of the pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern and the pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern. It is the figure which shows the production transition example which becomes the feature of the pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern and the pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern. It is the figure which shows the production transition example which becomes the feature of the false restoration sword LV1 production pattern. It is a figure explaining the kind of the effect pattern which can be selected based on a change pattern. It is an operation execution timing chart of the sword decoration and the specific decoration member SDY (slave accessory) in the pseudo continuous production, and shows a sword LV1 weak production pattern (sword LV1 strong production pattern). It is an operation execution timing chart of the sword decoration and the specific decoration member SDY (slave accessory) in the pseudo continuous production, and shows a sword LV2 weak production pattern (sword LV2 strong production pattern). It is an operation execution timing chart of the sword decoration and the specific decoration member SDY (slave accessory) in the pseudo continuous production, and shows a sword LV3 weak production pattern (sword LV3 strong production pattern). It is an operation execution timing chart of the sword decoration and the specific decoration member SDY (shadow product) in the pseudo continuous production, and shows the pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern). It is an operation execution timing chart of the sword decoration and the specific decoration member SDY (blind accessory) in the pseudo continuous production, and shows a pseudo revival sword LV1 production pattern. When it is determined that either the operation button or the sword ornament is enabled during the reach effect by lottery by the peripheral control board, based on the change effect (reach effect) of the change pattern drawn by the main control board. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition of the reach production|generation which the pre-operation suggestion production of a 1st suggestion pattern is performed. When it is determined that either the operation button or the sword ornament is enabled during the reach effect by lottery by the peripheral control board, based on the change effect (reach effect) of the change pattern drawn by the main control board. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition of the reach production|generation which the pre-operation suggestion production of a 1st suggestion pattern is performed. Similar to the above-described first suggestion pattern, when it is determined that either the operation button or the sword ornament is enabled during the reach production, the reach production of the pre-operation suggestion production of the second suggestion pattern is executed. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition. Despite the fact that the second suggestion pattern was performed as the pre-operation suggestion effect, the operation button of the sword decoration was once activated and the operation button of the sword ornament was activated, and then the sword ornament was activated. It is a figure which shows the pre-operation suggestion production of a pattern. It is a figure showing the 1st production mode about a specific operation relation production. It is a figure showing the 1st production mode about a specific operation relation production. It is a figure showing the 2nd production mode about specific operation relation production. It is a figure showing the 2nd production mode about specific operation relation production. It is a figure showing the 2nd production mode about specific operation relation production. It is a figure showing the 2nd production mode about specific operation relation production. It is a figure showing a 3rd production mode about specific operation relation production. It is a figure showing a 3rd production mode about specific operation relation production. It is a figure showing a 3rd production mode about specific operation relation production. It is a figure showing a 3rd production mode about specific operation relation production. It is a figure which shows another example of a specific operation-related effect. It is a figure explaining an example about the production when "specific operation relation production" is set up as the production object of a timer production. It is a time chart explaining an example of production contents for each type of production when a plurality of types (predecessor productions A, B1, B2, C) are prepared as a precursor production. It is the figure which shows those production contents regarding the production contents when the aura production which is not the specific operation connection production is done, and the production contents when the aura production as the specific operation connection production is done. It is a figure which shows another example of the effect content when a specific operation related effect is performed as a precursor effect. It is the figure which shows the production example where the button image BTG is displayed in the mode where the princess character is added (specific production mode). It is a figure which shows the example of an effect|action in the case where the operation error between the 1st operation mode and the 2nd operation mode generate|occur|produces in the player side in the effect pattern in which a specific operation related effect is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect|action in the case where the operation error between the 1st operation mode and the 2nd operation mode generate|occur|produces in the player side in the effect pattern in which a specific operation related effect is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect at the time of displaying the sword decoration image SYG in a special mode. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect|action when a 1st omen effect is performed. It is a time chart which shows an example of an effect when the first omen effect is performed. It is the figure which shows the concrete example of the production where expectation is shown with the automatic production function. It is the figure which shows the concrete example of the production where expectation is shown with the automatic production function. It is the figure which shows the concrete example of the production where expectation is shown with the automatic production function. It is a figure for explaining operation standardization control in the automatic button production state. It is a figure for explaining operation standardization control in the automatic button production state. It is a figure for explaining operation standardization control in the automatic button production state. It is the figure in order to explain the stable side automatic production processing when it is in automatic button production state. It is the figure in order to explain the stable side automatic production processing when it is in automatic button production state. It is the figure in order to explain the stable side automatic production processing when it is in automatic button production state. It is the figure in order to explain the production acceptance processing which responds to indicatory type when it is in automatic button production state. It is the figure in order to explain the production acceptance processing which responds to indicatory type when it is in automatic button production state. It is the figure in order to explain the production acceptance processing which responds to indicatory type when it is in automatic button production state. It is the figure in order to explain the production acceptance processing which responds to indicatory type when it is in automatic button production state. It is the figure in order to explain the production acceptance processing which responds to indicatory type when it is in automatic button production state. (A) is a time chart showing an example of an effect when operated multiple times in a single-shot operation mode when not controlled to the automatic button effect state, and (b) is controlled to the automatic button effect state. It is a time chart which shows an example of an effect when it is operated in a mode of long pressing when it is not performed. (A) is a time chart showing an example of an effect when the automatic effect function is activated in the automatic button effect state, and (b) is a long press while the automatic effect function is activated in the automatic button effect state. It is a time chart showing an example of an effect when an operation is started in a mode. When the automatic button production state is controlled and the number of holdings is three production situations, the pattern variation is started in the "first production pattern in which the specific production reception period in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears can be set", It is a time chart which shows a processing example when an operation for canceling the automatic button effect state (cancellation operation) or an operation for setting (setting operation) is performed within the execution period of the symbol variation. When the automatic button production state is controlled and the number of holdings is three production situations, the pattern is "second production pattern (displacement variation) in which a specific production reception period in which an instruction display prompting an operation appears cannot be set" A time chart showing a processing example when the variation is started and an operation for releasing the automatic button effect state (release operation) or an operation for setting (setting operation) is performed within the execution period of the symbol variation. is there. When the automatic button production state is not controlled, the symbol variation is started in the "3rd production pattern in which the specific production reception period (specific effective period) in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears" can be set, and the execution period of the symbol variation It is a time chart which shows an example of a process when an operation for setting to an automatic button effect state is performed. It is the figure which shows the production example when production is advanced with 3rd production pattern. It is a figure showing a modification about a prohibition period concerning "specific processing concerning production such as production setting". It is a figure showing a modification about a prohibition period concerning "specific processing concerning production such as production setting". It is a time chart which shows an example of the production process regarding the special production reception period. It is a time chart which shows the contents of processing when operating a movable decoration when a specific condition is established. 37 is a time chart showing a modification example of the example shown in FIG. 374. It is a time chart which shows the processing content when the timing tm1 when a new symbol variation starts in a situation where a specific movable ornament is in an abnormal state. It is a time chart which shows the processing content when the timing tm11 at which a special effect pattern is started arrives in a situation where a specific movable ornament is in an abnormal state. 9 is a time chart showing an example of processing until the sword ornament 5001 is returned to the original position. It is a time chart which shows the operation state of the operation button in a series of operation confirmation periods. (A) is a time chart showing the abnormality determination timing of the operation button in a period other than the arbitrary operation confirmation period, and (B) is a time chart showing the abnormality determination timing of the operation button in the arbitrary operation confirmation period. (A) is a time chart showing the operating state of the sword decoration during the operation reception period, and (B) is a time chart showing the relationship between the operating state of the sword decoration during periods other than the operation reception period and abnormality detection. And (C) is a time chart showing the relationship between the operation state of the sword decoration and the abnormality detection during the operation acceptance period. (A) is a time chart showing the abnormality determination timing of the operation button, and (B) is a time chart showing the abnormality determination timing of the movable ornament provided on the game board. (A) is a time chart showing the operation state of the operation button in the normal button protrusion effect, and (B) is a time chart showing the operation state of the operation button in the abnormal button occurrence effect. .. (A) is a time chart showing the operation state of the operation button in the normal button production in the normal state, and (B) is a time chart showing the operation state of the operation button in the normal button production when an abnormality occurs. .. (A) is a time chart showing the relationship between the operating state of an operation button and a notification mode when an abnormality occurs during the operation acceptance period, and (B) is a time chart of the operation button when an abnormality occurs during the automatic operation confirmation period. It is a time chart which shows the relation between an operating state and a notice mode. It is a time chart which shows the flow of the production at the time of the abnormal occurrence of a movable decoration. (A) is a time chart showing the operation states of the operation button cover and the operation button during the operation acceptance period, and (B) shows the operation states of the operation button cover and the operation button when an abnormality occurs during the operation acceptance period. It is a time chart. (A) is a time chart showing the operating states of the operation button cover and the operation button when an abnormality occurs in the non-time saving state, and (B) shows the operation button cover and the operation button when the abnormality occurs in the time saving state. It is a time chart which shows an operating state. It is the functional block diagram which explains the constitution and outline of the function in order to execute the production control in this execution form. It is a figure which shows an example of the module structure in the peripheral control part of the game machine of this embodiment. It is the explanation drawing which shows the basic concept of production control in the game machine of this execution form. It is a diagram illustrating a configuration until data required for effect control of the gaming machine of the present embodiment is acquired. It is a figure explaining the liquid crystal drawing effect of the advance notice of step of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the flow at the time of execution of the scheduler data of this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the function of the sound module of this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the function of the lamp module of this embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a function of sequence control in production control of a game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a function of a lamp and sound in production control of a game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of functions, such as a sound and a motor, in production control of a game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the scheduler definition of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of operation|movement of the accessory which is controlled using the scheduler data of this embodiment. It is the figure which shows the execution timing of the notice production which is executed in the series of fluctuation display from the start of fluctuation of the special design in this execution form to the stop, shows one example of the scheduler and the scheduler data which are used. It is a figure explaining the content of the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_STP" which performs lighting/blinking control of the lamp in the advance notice of step up of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the content of the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" which controls the lamp in the button cut-in advance notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the whole flow in a starry thing notice of this embodiment, and scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1" which controls a left starry thing. It is a figure explaining the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2" which controls the right star role thing in a star role thing notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA3" which controls a middle star role thing in a star role thing notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the content of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" which performs motor control in the logo accessory fall notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the scheduler data performed when the power supply of the game machine of this embodiment is turned on. It is a figure explaining composition for processing a command and scheduler data in a peripheral control board of a game machine of this embodiment, and a relation of these composition. It is a figure explaining the process of performing scheduler data at the time of power activation of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the notice production in a series of variation display from the variation start of a special symbol to this stop in this embodiment, and (A) performs the production performed from the variation start to the end and the said production. 3B shows the scheduler data and the scheduler to be executed, and FIG. 6B is a diagram for explaining the position of the hook-and-knuckle object in the advance notice of the hook-and-knuckle object. It is a figure explaining the content of the button-coupling material first-half fall notice scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1" which performs motor control in the first-half part of the button-coupling material fall notice of this embodiment which is the first half of the notice. It is a figure explaining the first half of the Kakuyoke late fall notice scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" which performs motor control in the Kakuyoke late fall notice which is the latter half of the Kakuyomi fall notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the latter half of the Kakuyoke latter half fall notice scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" which performs motor control in the latter half notice of the Kakuyomi fall notice of this embodiment which is the latter half of the notice. It is a figure explaining the liquid crystal production block data combination number table (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) classified by variation pattern which stores the combination of the liquid crystal production block data corresponding to the variation pattern command in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the liquid crystal pattern block data combination number table (ZUG_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) classified by fluctuation pattern which stores the combination of the liquid crystal pattern block data corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command in this embodiment. It is the figure which explains the sub production block data combination number table (SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) classified by the variation pattern which stores the combination of the sub production block data corresponding to the variation pattern command in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining an outline of production control of the first half fluctuation (normal fluctuation 12 seconds) of fluctuation pattern "10H03H" in this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the sub production block data control start processing of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the sub production block data control starting processing of this embodiment. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure of sub production block data control renewal processing of this execution form. It is a figure explaining the procedure which performs notice production in the change display corresponding to variation pattern "10H03H" of this embodiment, (A) is the timing which performs notice production, and the execution time of the notice production concerned, (B) is. The scheduler data driven by each scheduler in order to execute the notice production is shown. It is a figure explaining the relationship between the liquid crystal effect block data according to the variation pattern of this embodiment, and the liquid crystal pattern block data according to the variation pattern. It is a figure which shows the image which creates the data file for drawing of the step-up notice for liquid crystal display of this embodiment by a step-up production unit (step-up 1 production-4 production) with a video composition/motion creation graphic tool. It is the figure which explains the constitution of the production block data of step up announcement of this execution form, (A) shows the constitution of the liquid crystal production block data of step up announcement, (B) shows the constitution of the sub production block data of step up announcement. Show. It is a figure which shows an example of the scheduler function for liquid crystal productions of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the parameter for the liquid crystal production scheduler function in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the parameter for the liquid crystal production scheduler function in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the composition of the production switch in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of a structure of the production SW group of this embodiment. It is the figure which shows one example of the production SW starting command table of this execution form. It is a figure which shows an example of a step-up notice in this embodiment, (A) shows the stage in which a step-up notice production is performed, (B) shows an example of the screen displayed on a liquid crystal display device at each stage. .. It is the figure which explains the execution procedure of the advance notice which uses the production SW in this execution form. It is a figure explaining the execution procedure of a step-up notice using production SW in this embodiment, (A) is liquid crystal production scheduler data for executing step-up notice 1, (B) is step-up notice 1 liquid crystal production The drawing image using scheduler data is shown. It is a figure explaining master data defined on liquid crystal production scheduler data for every drawing division in this embodiment, and production SW corresponding to replacement data replaced with the master data concerned. It is a figure explaining the control procedure by the production switch of this embodiment, especially shows the evaluation procedure which sets production SW to ON. It is a figure explaining an example of the function defined in the production SW command analysis module of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the details of composition of a production SW information table of this embodiment, (A) is an example of a program code which defines a production SW information table, (B) is a bit assignment of production SW control information, and (C). Is a diagram showing an example of an effect SW group. It is a figure which shows an example of the program code which defines the production SW number corresponding to production SW in this embodiment. It is the figure which shows one example of the program data code which defines the production SW flag and production SW information table of this execution form, (A) shows production SW flag, (B) shows production SW information table. It is a figure showing an example of program data which defines the production SW replacement table information and the production SW replacement table contained in the production SW information table of this embodiment, (A) production SW substitution table information, (B) production SW. The replacement table is shown. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the layer information table of this embodiment, (A) is a list which stores the address which stores each layer information table, (B) is the content of the layer information table (for background). Indicates. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the layer information table of this embodiment, (A) shows the content of the layer information table (first half of notice), (B) shows the content of the layer information table (first half of notice). Show. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the liquid crystal layer table and liquid crystal effect common block in this embodiment, (A) shows the liquid crystal layer table of a step-up notice effect, and (B) shows the structure of a liquid crystal effect common block. .. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the liquid crystal effect block (LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1-4) of each step of the step-up advance notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the outline of the button mini-character production of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the liquid crystal layer table corresponding to the button mini-character production in this embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of program data which defines an individual common block of button mini-character production in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the liquid crystal effect block data for performing the button mini-character effect in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the drawing division which can be judged in the callback function at the time of callback execution by the production|generation SW of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the drawing result of an individual layer at the time of the notice production execution of this embodiment, and the drawing result of all layers. It is a figure explaining an example of a common block over a plurality of periods of this embodiment, (A) shows the execution timing of symbol display and notice production, and (B) shows the composition of the liquid crystal notice production block by a common block. It is a figure explaining the conventional structure which writes an image in a frame buffer by each writing the image written in each layer. It is a figure explaining the procedure which converts the image file stored in the off-screen buffer in this embodiment, and writes it in a frame buffer. It is a figure explaining the procedure which stores a display list command group in this embodiment in a peripheral control RAM temporarily, and transfers to a sound source built-in VDP. It is a figure explaining the procedure which transfers to the sound source built-in VDP, without storing the display list command group in this embodiment in peripheral control RAM. It is a figure showing an example of composition which has a plurality of display fields which display an identification pattern in this embodiment variably, and (A) is an example of composition which has display field A and display field B of an identification pattern on one display screen, ( B) is an example of a configuration having a display area A and a display area B of the identification symbol on each display screen when it has two display screens. It is a figure explaining the emphasis mode of the display field which performs change display of an identification pattern in this embodiment, and (A) is a normal mode which displays display field A and display field B in a standard mode (regular size). , (B) are emphasis modes A for displaying the display area A in an emphasis mode, and (C) are emphasis modes B for displaying the display area B in an emphasis mode. It is a figure explaining an example of the screen transition of the composition which performs change display of an identification pattern of this embodiment in display area A and display area B, respectively, and interlocks when a part of variation of an identification pattern stops in display area A. Then, an example in which the variation of the identification symbol stops in the display area B will be described. It is a figure explaining an example of the screen transition of the composition which carries out the variable display of the identification pattern of this embodiment in display area A and display area B, respectively, regardless of the display mode of display area A. The example which displays all the stop symbols is shown. It is a figure which shows an example of a structure of the production block of the timer production of this embodiment. It is the figure which shows the execution example of the timer production of this execution form. It is a figure which shows an example of a structure of the production block of the background production of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of execution of the background production of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the mini-character production of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example in which an identification pattern is variably displayed in each of a plurality of display areas of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example which carries out the variable display of the identification pattern independently in each of the some display area of this embodiment, and it carries out the variable display in the equivalent mode at predetermined timing. It is a diagram showing an example in which the identification symbols are variably displayed in a plurality of display areas of the present embodiment, and stopped with different symbols. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the game board of the game machine in this embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the shape of the character accessory in this embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the shape of the snowman accessory in this embodiment, (A) is a figure seen from the front and (B) is seen from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view of the character accessory of this embodiment. It is the figure which looked at the cover member of the character combination of this embodiment from the back side. It is a figure which shows the front side of the character accessory substrate of the character accessory of this embodiment of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the state which accommodated the character accessory board in the cover member of the character accessory of this embodiment, and shows the back surface side of the character accessory board. It is a figure explaining the physical relationship of the light-emitting body and the transmissive part and non-transmissive part of the cover member in the character accessory of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the light guide member which diffuses the light from the light emission body in the character accessory of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the front side of the character accessory substrate of the character accessory of the modification 1 of this embodiment of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the state which accommodated the character accessory board in the cover member of the character accessory board of the modified example 1 of this embodiment, and shows the back surface side of the character accessory board. It is a figure explaining the positional relationship of the light-emitting body and the transmissive part and non-transmissive part of a cover member in the character accessory of the modification of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the front side of the character accessory substrate of the character accessory of the modification 2 of this embodiment of this embodiment, and has shown the state in which the character accessory substrate and the light guide member have overlapped. It is a figure which shows the state which accommodated the character accessory board in the cover member of the character accessory board of the modification 2 of this embodiment, and shows the back surface side of the character accessory board. It is a figure which shows the state which attached the character accessory of the modification 2 of this embodiment to the game board. It is a figure showing a sectional view of a snowman role thing of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the front side cover member of the snowman accessory of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the back side cover member of the snowman accessory of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the front side of the snowman board|substrate of the snowman accessory of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the back surface side of the snowman board|substrate of the snowman accessory of this embodiment of this embodiment. It is the figure which looked at the section in the horizontal direction of the snowman accessory of this embodiment from above. It is the figure which looked at the cross section in the horizontal direction of the snowman accessory in the modification of this embodiment from above. It is a figure showing the whole game board of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the front view, perspective view, and exploded perspective view of the rabbit accessory of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the front view and rear view of the face board|substrate of the rabbit accessory of this embodiment. It is a perspective view of the face cover part of the rabbit accessory of this embodiment. It is a perspective view showing the state where the rabbit accessory of the present embodiment is in the standby position. It is the figure which showed one Example about the rabbit accessory of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed one Example about the rabbit accessory of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed one Example about the rabbit accessory of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the whole game board in the modification of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the stump accessory of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the stump accessory of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the stump box part of this embodiment, its exploded view, the front view of a rear wall cover, and the front view of a rear wall board. It is the figure which showed the stump box part in the modification of this embodiment, its exploded view, the front view of a rear wall cover, and the front view of a rear wall board. It is the figure which showed the Example about the herb part of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the Example about the grass role thing in the modification of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the Example about the grass role thing in the modification of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the Example about the grass role thing in the modification of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the Example about the grass role thing in the modification of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the Example about the grass role thing in the modification of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the Example about the grass role thing in the modification of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the Example about the grass role thing in the modification of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the Example about the grass role thing in the modification of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the Example about the grass role thing in the modification of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the Example about the grass role thing in the modification of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the Example about the grass role thing in the modification of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the Example about the grass role thing in the modification of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the front view, perspective view, and exploded perspective view of the rabbit accessory in the modification of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the example about the mountain accessory of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the board back grass accessory of this embodiment. In the stump box portion shown in FIGS. 498(A) and 499(A) of the present embodiment, the box upper wall portion, the box right wall portion, the box lower wall portion, and the box left wall portion are respectively moved from the standby position to the moving position. It is the figure which showed the state moved. It is the figure which showed the example which provided the grass plate part provided fixedly instead of the 1st grass movable part and the 2nd grass movable part in front of the stump box part of this embodiment, without providing the stump plate part. is there. It is a figure showing the modification of Drawing 517 of this embodiment. It is a figure showing the modification of Drawing 518 of this embodiment. It is a figure showing the modification of Drawing 518 of this embodiment. It is a figure showing the modification of Drawing 518 of this embodiment. (A), (B) is a figure which showed the example of a structure of the box back wall part of FIG. 520 of this embodiment, (C), (D) of the box back wall part of FIG. 521 of this embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of composition. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of this execution form, (A) and (B) the front view, (C) the plan view, (D) and (E) the right side view. It is a time chart which shows the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission production state in each production pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission production state in each production pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, and the change of the state of the moving state of a frame movable body, and the light emission production state with progress of time. It is the figure which showed typically the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, and the change of the state of the moving state of a frame movable body, and the light emission production state with progress of time. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) and (D) are plan views, (E) and (F) are right side views. is there. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) and (D) are plan views, (E) and (F) are right side views. is there. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) is a front view, (C) is a top view, (D) and (E) is a right view. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) and (D) are plan views, (E) and (F) are right side views. is there. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) is a front view, (C) is a top view, (D) and (E) is a right view. It is a time chart of the modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission effect state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of the modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission effect state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) is a front view, (C) is a top view, (D) and (E) is a right view. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) is a front view, (C) is a top view, (D) and (E) is a right view. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) is a front view, (C) is a top view, (D) and (E) is a right view. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) and (D) are plan views, (E) and (F) are right side views. is there. It is a time chart of the modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission effect state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of the modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission effect state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) is a front view, (C) is a top view, (D) and (E) is a right view. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) is a front view, (C) is a top view, (D) and (E) is a right view. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) is a front view, (C) is a top view, (D) and (E) is a right view. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) is a front view, (C) is a top view, (D) and (E) is a right view. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) is a front view, (C) and (D) is a top view. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) is a right view. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) is a front view, (C) is a top view, (D) and (E) is a right view. It is a time chart of the modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission effect state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of the modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission effect state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) is a front view, (C) is a top view, (D) and (E) is a right view. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) is a front view, (C) and (D) is a top view. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) is a right view. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) is a front view, (C) and (D) is a top view. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) is a right view. It is a time chart of the modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission effect state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of the modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission effect state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of the modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission effect state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of the modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission effect state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of the modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission effect state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of the modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission effect state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of the modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission effect state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of the modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission effect state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of the modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission effect state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of the modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission effect state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of the modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission effect state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of the modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission effect state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of the modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission effect state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of the modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission effect state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of the modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission effect state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of the modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission effect state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of the modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission effect state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of the modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission effect state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of the modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission effect state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of the modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission effect state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of the modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission effect state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of the modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission effect state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a front view of the game board in 2nd Embodiment. It is an exploded front perspective view of the game board in the second embodiment. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the game panel in 2nd Embodiment. It is an expansion right front perspective view of the game panel in 2nd Embodiment. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the area|region cover member in 2nd Embodiment. It is a layout plan view of an obstacle nail in the right game area in the second embodiment. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of the area|region cover member in 2nd Embodiment. It is sectional drawing of the obstacle nail in the right side game area in 2nd Embodiment, (a) is a sectional view of the place where one obstacle nail is accommodated in a penetration part, (b) is two obstacle nails. A sectional view of a portion accommodated in the penetration portion is shown, and a sectional view of a portion where three obstacle nails are accommodated in the penetration portion is shown in (c). It is a front view showing an example of a nail sheet. It is a front view which shows an example of the usage type of a nail sheet. It is an example of the installation aspect of the area cover member in 3rd Embodiment, (a) is a front view which shows an example of the installation method of an area cover member, (b) is a front view which shows an example of the installation state of an area cover member. In the figure, (c) shows a sectional view when the area cover member is attached to the existing member, and (d) shows a sectional view when the area cover member is integrated with the existing member. In the installation example of a plurality of types of area cover members in the third embodiment, (a) is an installation mode of the area cover member with the right side penetration portion shifted inward, and (b) is the left side penetration portion inward. The mode of installation of the shifted area cover member is (c) the mode of installation of the area cover member with both penetrations displaced inward, and (d) the mode of installation of the area cover member with the right side penetration displaced outward. However, (e) is a front view showing an installation mode of the area cover member in which the left-side penetrating portion is offset to the outside, and (f) is an installation mode of the area cover member in which both penetrating portions are offset to the outside. ing. It is another embodiment of the area|region cover member in 3rd Embodiment, (a) is a front view which shows an example of the installation method of an area cover member, (b) is a front view which shows an example of the installation state of an area cover member. However, (c) is an installation mode in which the area cover member is rotated 180 degrees to shift both penetrations inward, and (d) is an installation mode in which the area cover member is rotated 90 degrees to the right and both penetrations are inward. In the shifted installation mode, (e) is a front view showing the installation mode in which the area cover member is rotated 90 degrees to the left to shift both penetrations inward. It is another embodiment of the area|region cover member in 3rd Embodiment, (a) is a front view which shows an example of the installation method of an area cover member, (b) is a front view which shows an example of the installation state of an area cover member. However, (c) is a front view showing an installation mode in which the area cover member is moved downward and the penetrating portions on both sides are shifted downward. It is another embodiment of the area|region cover member in 3rd Embodiment, Comprising: (a)-(d) shows the shape of the penetration part which can be variously applied by the front view, respectively. It is another embodiment of the area|region cover member in 3rd Embodiment, (a) is the installation aspect of the area|region cover member which accommodates two obstruction nails in the penetration part of both sides, (b) is two penetration parts. While installing the obstacle nail of, the installation mode of the area cover member with both penetrating portions shifted inward, (c) is a front view showing an example of installing the area cover member from the front side to the game panel, (D) and (e) are cross-sectional views showing an example of a case where the area cover member is installed on the game panel from the front side. It is another embodiment of the area cover member in the third embodiment, (a) is a front view showing an example of fixing the area cover member from the rear of the game panel, (b) is a game panel the area cover member. The cross-sectional views showing an example of the case of fixing from the rear are respectively shown. It is another embodiment of the area cover member in the third embodiment, (a) is a front view showing a part of the left side game area before the area cover member is installed, (b) is the left side after the area cover member is installed. Front views showing a part of the game area are shown respectively. It is another embodiment of the area|region cover member in 3rd Embodiment, Comprising: (a) is the front view which showed the installation aspect of the area|region cover member which shifted and formed the penetration part below, (b) shows the penetration part upwards. The front view which showed the installation aspect of the area|region cover member shifted and shape|molded is each shown. It is an example of the installation mode of the decorative seal to the area cover member, (a) is a front view showing the area cover member before the installation of the decorative seal, (b) is a mode in which the decorative seal is attached to the entire periphery of the penetration portion Is shown, and (c) is a front view showing a mode in which a decorative seal is attached to a part of the periphery of the penetrating portion. It is an example of an accommodation mode of an obstacle nail in a penetration part formed in a field cover member, and in (a)-(c), in the penetration part which formed the convex part in the front side and the game panel side of a field cover member. The manner in which the obstacle nails are accommodated is shown in a sectional view. It is an example of the accommodation aspect of the obstacle nail in the penetration part formed in the area cover member, and (a)-(g) shows the obstacle nail in the penetration part which formed the convex part in the center part of the area cover member cross section. The accommodation modes are respectively shown in cross-sectional views. It is an example of the accommodation aspect of the obstacle nail in the penetration part formed in the area cover member, and (a)-(d) shows the obstacle nail in the penetration part which formed the convex part in the game panel side of the area cover member. The accommodation modes are respectively shown in cross-sectional views. It is an example of the mode of accommodation of an obstacle nail in the penetration part formed in the field cover member, and is the accommodation of the obstacle nail in the penetration part which formed the convex part in the front side of the field cover member in (a)-(d). Aspects are each shown in cross-section. It is an example of an accommodation mode of an obstacle nail in a penetration part formed in a field cover member, and (a)-(e) is a sectional view showing a mode of accommodation of an obstacle nail in a penetration part which closed the front side of a field cover member. , Respectively. It is an example of an accommodation mode of an obstacle nail in a penetration part formed in a field cover member, and an accommodation mode of an obstacle nail in a field cover member which formed a rib around a penetration part in (a)-(c) is a section. Each is shown in the figure. It is an example of an accommodation mode of an obstacle nail in a penetration part formed in a field cover member, and is a front view of a visual aspect before cheating in (a) and a visual aspect after cheating in (b), respectively. It is shown. The front view of another embodiment of the area cover member in the third embodiment is shown. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine in this execution form, (A) and (B) the front view, (C) the plan view, (D) and (E) the right side view. (A) And (B) is a front view showing a pachinko machine of a modification in this embodiment. (C) is a front view of the root vegetable frame movable body which the pachinko machine in this embodiment has. It is a time chart showing an effect mode in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is the figure which showed the production aspect of the pachinko machine in this execution form. It is the figure which showed the production aspect of the pachinko machine in this execution form. It is the figure which showed the production aspect of the pachinko machine in this execution form. It is a time chart showing an effect mode in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is the figure which showed the production aspect of the pachinko machine in this execution form. It is a time chart showing an effect mode in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart showing an effect mode in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is the figure which showed the production aspect of the pachinko machine in this execution form. It is the figure which showed the production aspect of the pachinko machine in this execution form. It is a time chart showing an effect mode in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart showing an effect mode in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart showing an effect mode in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart showing an effect mode in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart showing an effect mode in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart showing an effect mode in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 10.
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine which is an embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the back. FIG. 8 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 10 is a front view of the pachinko machine, a door frame, a game board, a body frame, and an outer frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled and was seen from the back.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front surface of the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that is openably and closably supported and is also openably and closably attached to the outer frame 2, and is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3 And a game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game ball is hit by.

As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20, which are vertically separated from each other and extend horizontally, and an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member. A left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 that connect both ends of 20 and extend vertically are provided. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same front and rear widths. In addition, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the horizontal lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

The outer frame 2 is attached to the curtain plate member 50 that connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 to each other and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20, and is attached to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 when viewed from the front. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end side of the curtain plate member 50 in front view and the left frame member 30 are provided. The body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached to be openable and closable by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a through-hole 111 that penetrates in the front and back in a rectangular shape in which the outer shape in a front view extends vertically, and a through-hole of the door frame base unit 100. The handle unit 300, which is attached to the lower right corner of the front surface below 111, and which can be operated by the player to drive the game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and the through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100. The dish unit 320 mounted on the lower front side on the lower side, and the dish unit 320 mounted on the center of the dish unit 320 and provided to the player according to the game state that changes when a game ball is driven into the game area 5a. A door operation unit 400 capable of presenting a participation-type effect, and a door frame left side unit 530 mounted on the left side of the front side of the door frame base unit 100 on the left side above the plate unit 320 above the through hole 111. A door frame right side unit 550 attached to the right side of the front surface on the right side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit 320, a door frame left side unit 530, and a door frame right side unit 550. And a door frame top unit 570 attached to the upper front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the through hole 111.

The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is a frame-shaped main body frame base 600, a part of which can be inserted into the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame base 600. It is attached to both the upper and lower ends on the left side in front view, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame of the door frame 3 are attached. A body frame side upper hinge member 620 and a body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge members 150 are rotatably attached respectively, a reinforcing frame 660 attached to a left side surface of the body frame base 600 in a front view, and a body frame base 600. A ball launching device 680 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the game board 5 for hitting a game ball in the game area 5a of the game board 5, and an outer frame 2 and a main body frame attached to the right side surface of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. 4, and a locking unit 700 for locking between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and a rear side attached along the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 in a front view, which is a reverse for paying out game balls to the player side. The L-shaped payout unit 800, the board unit 900 attached to the lower portion of the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 600 so as to be openable and closable on the rear side of the main body frame base 600. And a back cover 980 that covers the rear side of the vehicle.

The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 is an inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 that is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and is attached to the upper part of the payout unit base 801 and extends leftward and rightward. A ball-shaped tank 802 that stores game balls supplied from a box-shaped island facility (not shown), and a game ball inside the ball tank 802 that is attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802 to the left when viewed from the front. A tank rail 803 that extends to the left and right to guide, a ball guide unit 820 that is attached to the rear surface of the upper left side of the payout unit base 801 when viewed from the front, and guides the game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner, and a ball guide unit 820. The game balls that are detachably attached from the payout unit base 801 on the lower side and are guided by the ball guiding unit 820 are paid one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950. The payout device 830 for paying out and the game balls that are attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and guided by the payout device 830 are guided downward, and the game balls are stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 according to the state of storage of the game balls. The upper full sphere path unit 850 to be discharged from either the normal discharge port 850d or the full discharge port 850e, and the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full sphere path unit 850 attached to the lower end of the dispensing unit base 801 A normal guiding path 861 that guides the game ball forward and guides it from the front end to the through-ball passage 273 of the door frame 3 and a game ball that is discharged from the full tank discharge port 850e is guided forward to fill the door frame 3 from the front end. And a lower full tank ball path unit 860 having a tank guide path 862 for guiding to the tank receiving port 274.

The board unit 900 of the body frame 4 includes a board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the body frame base 600 and a lower portion for bass sound which is attached to the rear side of the body frame base 600 on the front view left side of the board unit base 910. A speaker unit 920 having a speaker 921, a power supply board box 930 in which a power supply board is housed inside and mounted on the rear side of the board unit base 910 on the right side in front view are mounted on the rear side of the speaker unit 920. An interface control board box 940 in which an interface control board is housed, a power supply board box 930 and a payout control board 951 which is mounted across the interface control board box 940 and which controls the payout of gaming balls are housed inside. And a payout control board box 950.

As shown in FIG. 9 and FIG. 10, the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a into which the game ball is driven, and places the game ball emitted from the ball emitting device 680 at the upper part of the game area 5a. A front component member 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 for guiding to, and a flat game panel 1100 attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and partitioning the rear end of the game area 5a. There is.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle 302 in a state where the game balls are stored in the upper plate 321, the ball is emitted by the ball launching device 680 with a strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 302. It is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. When the game balls hit in the game area 5a are received in the winning openings, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 by the payout device 830 according to the received winning openings. Since the interest of the player can be enhanced by paying out the game balls, the game balls in the upper plate 321 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the player can enjoy the game.

[2. Overall structure of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 16. 11 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. 13 is a perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 14 is a perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the rear. FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame as disassembled and seen from the front. 16A is a perspective view of a portion of the outer frame-side upper hinge member in the outer frame as viewed from below with the left frame member omitted, and FIG. It is a figure. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which a pachinko machine 1 such as a game hall is installed.

As shown in the drawing, the outer frame 2 connects the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 that are vertically separated and extends to the left and right, and connects both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 to each other. A left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 extending in the direction. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same front and rear widths. In addition, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the horizontal lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. Further, the outer frame 2 is assembled such that the left and right end surfaces of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and the left and right side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 face outward in the same plane. Has been.

The outer frame 2 includes an outer frame-side upper hinge member 60 attached to the left end of the upper frame member 10 in a front view, and a lock member 66 attached to a lower surface of the outer frame-side upper hinge member 60. An outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end of the curtain plate member 50 in front view and the left frame member 30 is provided. The outer frame-side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame-side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 allow the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 to be openably and closably attached.

The outer frame 2 is attached to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 and the curtain plate member 50 that connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 to each other and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20. A curtain plate reinforcing member 80 whose both ends are attached to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 respectively, a flat plate-like left sliding member 81 attached to a position on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 to the left from the left and right center, and a curtain. A plate-shaped right sliding member 82 attached to a position near the right end on the upper surface of the plate member 50. The curtain plate reinforcing member 80 is formed of a solid member (eg, wood, plywood, etc.) and is attached to the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40.

Further, the outer frame 2 includes an upper frame member 10 and a left frame member 30, an upper frame member 10 and a right frame member 40, a lower frame member 20 and a left frame member 30, and a lower frame member 20 and a right frame member 40, respectively. The connecting member 85 is connected. Further, the outer frame 2 includes an upper hook member 90 and a lower hook member 91 which are attached to the inner side (left side surface side) of the right frame member 40 and to which an outer frame hook 703 of the locking unit 700 described later is locked. Is prepared.

[2-1. Upper frame member]
The upper frame member 10 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material having a predetermined thickness (eg, wood, plywood, etc.). The upper frame member 10 is provided with engagement notches 11 that vertically penetrate and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction at the left and right ends. Inside the engagement notch 11, the upper lateral fixing portion 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B of the connecting member 85 described later are attached. Further, the upper frame member 10 includes mounting step portions 12 that are recessed from the general surface on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion in front view. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to the attachment step portion 12.

[2-2. Lower frame member]
The lower frame member 20 of the outer frame 2 is made of a solid (solid) material having a predetermined thickness (eg, wood, plywood, etc.). The lower frame member 20 is formed such that the left and right lengths and the upper and lower thicknesses are the same as the left and right lengths and the upper and lower thicknesses of the upper frame member 10, and the front and rear width is the upper frame member 10. Is formed to be longer than the width in front of and behind. The lower frame member 20 includes engagement notches 21 that vertically penetrate and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at positions closer to the rear side than the center in the front-rear direction at the left and right ends. In the engagement notch 21, the lower left side connecting member 85C and the lower right side connecting member 85D of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are attached.

Further, the lower frame member 20 includes front end cutouts 22 that are recessed rearward from the front surfaces of the left and right ends. In the lower frame member 20, the width in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front end cutout 22 to the rear surface of the lower frame member 20 is formed to be the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the upper frame member 10. In the state where the lower frame member 20 is assembled to the outer frame 2, the portion between the left and right front end cutouts 22 is inserted into the curtain plate member 50.

[2-3. Left frame member and right frame member]
The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and are formed of a metal extruded shape member such as an aluminum alloy. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed in mutually symmetrical shapes in a plan view. When assembled as the outer frame 2, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are recessed inward from a position that is rearward with respect to the center in the front-rear direction to a position near the rear end on the side surface that is the outer side in the left-right direction. The recesses 31 and 41 and the protrusions 32 and 42 that bulge from the side surface on the opposite side of the recesses 31 and 41 and are hollow inside. The strength and rigidity of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are enhanced by the protrusions 32 and 42. Further, in the protrusions 32 and 42, the lower lateral fixing portions 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are inserted and attached.

Further, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 have a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on their surfaces. With the plurality of grooves, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed or transported in an island facility such as a game hall, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily gripped by the operator's fingers and can be held easily. The design of the appearance of the machine 1 can be improved.

[2-4. Curtain board member]
The curtain plate member 50 of the outer frame 2 is formed in a box shape whose rear side is open. The curtain plate member 50 has a rearward extending portion 51 extending rearward in the shape of a flat plate near the left end in front view on the upper surface, and a U-shape having a size allowing a game ball to pass from the left end of the rearward extending portion 51. A left discharge hole 52 which is cut out and penetrates vertically, and a right discharge hole 53 which penetrates vertically with a size allowing a game ball to pass on the right side of the left discharge hole 52 in the rear extension part 51, The standing wall portion 54 extending upward in a flat plate shape from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 including the rear end of the rearward extending portion 51, and the front surface bulging forward from the vicinity of the upper end of the standing wall portion 54 so that the front surface is upward. And a return portion 55 that is inclined so as to be directed rearward as it goes toward.

The curtain plate member 50 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is placed so that the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is placed on the front upper surface of the rear extending portion 51 and the upper surface of the rear extending portion 51. A horizontal portion 71 described later is attached. The left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 is formed at a position corresponding to a discharge hole 74, which will be described later, of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state of being assembled to the outer frame 2. Further, the right discharge hole 53 is formed at a position on the right side of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state of being assembled to the outer frame 2. The right discharge hole 53 is formed larger than the left discharge hole 52.

Further, the curtain plate member 50 is inclined such that the upper surface on the right side of the rear extending portion 51 is lower on the front end side. Further, the curtain plate member 50 has a left mounting portion 56 for mounting the left sliding member 81 on the right side of the rear extending portion 51 on the upper surface, and a right mounting portion for mounting the right sliding member 82 near the right end on the upper surface. And a part 57. On the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the lower surface of the main body frame 4 is placed via the left sliding member 81 and the right sliding member 82.

As shown, the curtain plate member 50 has a shallow relief-like decoration formed on the front surface. Although not shown in the drawings, the curtain plate member 50 has a box-shaped interior partitioned by a plurality of ribs in a lattice pattern to enhance strength and rigidity. Further, the curtain plate member 50 is formed so that the front half of the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 can be housed inside.

[2-5. Outer frame side upper hinge member]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 has a horizontally extending flat plate shape and a rectangular outer fixing portion 61, and a flat plate shape extending forward from the front end of the upper fixing portion 61. Of the front extension portion 62, a bearing groove 63 extending vertically from the right end of the front extension portion 62 to the left and right center of the front extension portion 62, and penetrating vertically. A plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 64 extending downward from the left side, and a horizontal fixing portion extending downward from the end side from the left end to the front end of the front extending portion 62 to the portion where the bearing groove 63 is open. And a flat plate-shaped hanging portion 65 that is continuous with the portion 64 (see FIG. 16B and the like).

In the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the upper fixing portion 61 is placed on the upper surface of the mounting step portion 12 of the upper frame member 10 in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, and is fixed by a screw (not shown). There is.
Further, the front extending portion 62 extends forward of the front end of the upper frame member 10. Further, the lateral fixing portion 64 is fixed to the left frame member 30 with a screw in a state of being inserted from above into the concave portion 31 of the outer side surface of the left frame member 30.

The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 to move the main body frame 4 by inserting the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 into the bearing groove 63. It can be opened and closed. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

[2-6. Lock member]
As shown in FIG. 16, the lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 includes a strip-shaped lock main body 66a whose right and left sides extend in the front-rear direction with a predetermined width, and an operating portion which protrudes rightward from the rear end of the lock main body 66a. 66b, an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 66a, and diagonally forward left, and a mounting hole vertically penetrating near the rear end of the lock body 66a. 66d. The lock member 66 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 66 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 by the attachment screw 67.

The rear end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is attached to a position rearward of the bearing groove 63 in the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 through the attachment hole 66d.
Further, when the lock member 66 is attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the lock body 66a can block the bearing groove 63 in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end is the outer frame side upper hinge member. It extends forward so that it can come into contact with the portion of the hanging portion 65 of the portion 60 that extends to the opening of the bearing groove 63 (see FIG. 18).

Further, the tip end of the elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. The lock member 66 is biased by the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c in a direction in which the front end rotates leftward about the mounting hole 66d. Therefore, in the normal state, the right side surface near the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is in contact with the hanging portion 65 (see FIG. 18). In this state, a space for accommodating a main body frame upper hinge pin 622, which will be described later, of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 63 on the front side of the lock main body 66a.

The lock member 66 can rotate the lock body 66a against the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c by operating the operation portion 66b. Then, by operating the operating portion 66b to rotate the lock body 66a in the direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, the lock body 66a can be retracted from the bearing groove 63 in plan view, and the bearing groove 63 Can be in the state of being fully threaded. Accordingly, the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 can be inserted into the bearing groove 63, and the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-7. Outer frame side lower hinge member]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 stands horizontally from a flat plate-shaped horizontal portion 71 and a portion on the left side of the horizontal portion 71 which is located rearward of the center in the front-rear direction. A rising flat plate-shaped rising portion 72, an outer frame lower hinge pin 73 projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 71, and a horizontal portion 71 that vertically penetrates so that only one game ball can pass through. And a discharge hole 74 having a size. The outer frame-side lower hinge member 70 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the bottom side in a plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 has a columnar shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape with an upper end narrowed at an upper portion in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 is attached to a position near the front end of the horizontal portion 71 on the left side. The discharge hole 74 is formed in the horizontal portion 71 so as to contact the center portion of the rising portion 72 in the front-rear direction and extend in an inverted U shape from the left side of the horizontal portion 71 to the right. The discharge hole 74 has substantially the same size as the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50.

In the outer frame-side lower hinge member 70, the horizontal portion 71 is placed on the upper surface near the left end of the curtain plate member 50 and the rear extending portion 51 when the outer frame 2 is assembled. However, it is fixed to the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 by screws (not shown) that penetrate the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. Further, in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the rising portion 72 is attached to a portion of the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 on the front side of the projecting portion 32 by a screw (not shown). The outer frame-side lower hinge member 70 is configured such that the outer frame-side lower hinge pin 73 is inserted into a lower-body-frame-side lower hinge hole (not shown) in the main body frame-side lower hinge member 640 of the body frame 4 so that the outer frame-side lower hinge pin 73 is moved upward. The main body frame 4 can be mounted so as to be openable and closable in cooperation with the hinge member 60.

Further, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 74 coincides with the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50. Thereby, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 can be dropped (discharged) to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 through the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52. More specifically, when closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, a game ball dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 as the main body frame 4 is closed. Since the distance between and is gradually narrowed, rolling is performed to the rear side with a wide interval, and the balls can be discharged from the discharge hole 74. At this time, the discharge hole 74 is formed at a position substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state of being assembled to the pachinko machine 1. By ejecting the game ball dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the discharge hole 74, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball from rolling rearward of the main body frame 4, and the outer frame side. It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to stay in the lower hinge member 70.

[2-8. Connection member]
The connecting member 85 of the outer frame 2 includes an upper left connecting member 85A connecting the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, an upper right connecting member 85B connecting the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, and a lower frame member. There are a lower left connecting member 85C connecting the 20 and the left frame member 30 and a lower right connecting member 85D connecting the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40.

The connecting member 85 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 86, a plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extending upward from either one of the left and right sides of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and a horizontal fixing portion. The plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends downward from the same side as the portion of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extending in 86. The connecting member 85 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends upward from the center of the horizontal fixing portion 86 in the front-rear direction, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. It extends downward. That is, in the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, two lower horizontal fixing portions 88 are provided spaced apart in the front-rear direction. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the upper frame member 10 while being in contact with the lower surface of the upper frame member 10. Further, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is inserted into the engagement notch 21 of the upper frame member 10 and fixed to the left and right ends of the upper frame member 10. Further, the front lower lateral fixing portions 88 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the inner side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 on the front side of the projecting portions 32 and 42, respectively.
Further, the lower lateral fixing portions 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are inserted into the protruding portions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and screwed from the outer side surface. Are fixed to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively.

In the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D, the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 projects rearward from the rear end of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and more than the horizontal fixing portion 86 of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. A lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends below the horizontal fixing portion 86 from the lower end of the portion protruding rearward. Further, the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D further include a bent portion 89 protruding from the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 to the same side as the horizontal fixing portion 86. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed in contact with the upper surface of the lower frame member 20. Further, the upper horizontal fixing portions 87 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed to the inner side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 on the front side of the projecting portions 32 and 42, respectively. Furthermore, the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right fixing member 88 of the lower right connecting member 85D are inserted into the engaging notches 21 of the lower frame member 20 and fixed to the end surfaces of the lower frame member 20 in the left-right direction, respectively. It

[2-9. Outer frame side upper hinge member lock mechanism]
Next, in the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, FIGS. It will be described with reference to FIG. 17A is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and FIG. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the state in which the main body side upper hinge member is attached to the hinge member. FIG. 18 is an explanatory view showing the action of the lock member in the outer frame.

In the state where the lock member 66 in the outer frame 2 is attached to the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 (normal state), the tip of the elastic portion 66c contacts the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65. The lock main body 66a closes a part of the bearing groove 63 bent in a V shape, and the tip portion of the lock main body 66a does not close the deepest part of the bearing groove 63. A space into which the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 can be inserted is formed in the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63.

In the support mechanism of the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 using the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the lock member 66 in the present embodiment, the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted in the deepest part of the bearing groove 63, and the front end of the lock main body 66a. The right side surface of the lock body 66a is close to the right side hanging portion 65 (in this state, there is a slight gap between the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a and the right side hanging portion 65, and they are in contact with each other. In the normal axial support state, the center of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame located at the deepest part of the bent bearing groove 63 and the front end surface of the lock main body 66a are diagonally displaced and face each other. It is in a state.

In this normal axial support state, the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 that supports the heavy main body frame 4 is in contact with the front end portion of the bearing groove 63. Almost no load is applied from 622 to the front end surface of the lock body 66a. That is, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66. Since the front end surface of the lock body 66a is formed in an arc shape, the lock member 66 can be smoothly rotated when the operation portion 66b is rotated to rotate the lock member 66. There is. Further, in the figure, the arc center of the front end face of the lock body 66a is the center of the mounting hole 66d (the rotation center of the lock member 66).

Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is removed along the inclination of the bearing groove 63 formed in the V shape and comes into contact with the arcuate front end surface of the lock main body 66a, the acting force is exerted. F is a component force F1 (the normal direction of the arc of the front end surface of the lock body 66a) acting on the contact portion between the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 and the arcuate front end surface, and the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 and the bearing groove 63. When the force is divided into a component force F2 acting on the abutting portion with the inner surface of one side, the direction of the component force F1 is directed to the center of the mounting hole 66d (mounting screw 67) (rotation center of the lock member 66). The moment that causes the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 to rotate away from the right hanging portion 65 does not work, and the main body frame hinge pin 622 causes the front end portion of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 and one of the bearing grooves 63 to move. The state of being sandwiched between the inner surface and the inner side surface is retained.

Therefore, even when the lock member 66 is in the normal axial support state or the action force of the main body frame hinge pin 622 is applied, the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 is not always loaded, and is integrally formed of synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation of the elastic portion 66c caused by creep and prevent the hinge pin 622 on the main frame from coming off the bearing groove 63 for a long period of time. Even if an unreasonable force is applied and the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is rotated in the direction of moving to the right, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a comes into contact with the drooping portion 65 and further Since it does not rotate, the lock member 66 does not protrude to the outside of the front extension portion 62.

Even if the shape of the front end surface of the lock body 66a is not arcuate, the position where the rotational moment is not generated by the action of the component force F1 described above or the front end portion of the lock member 66 faces the outside of the front extension portion 62. By locating the rotation center of the lock member 66 (the shaft fixed by the mounting screw 67) at a position where a rotation moment for rotating the lock member 66 is generated, the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 is not always loaded. Even if the lock member 66 rotates, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a only abuts on the hanging portion 65, so that the lock member 66 does not protrude to the outside of the front extension 62.

When the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 is supported by the bearing groove 63 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the main body frame is inserted into the bearing groove 63 from the open side of the bearing groove 63. Insert the hinge pin 622. When the body frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the bearing groove 63, the body frame upper hinge pin 622 comes into contact with the right side surface of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66, and the front end of the lock body 66a is resisted against the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates about the mounting screw 67 so as to move to the left. As a result, the lock body 66a that closed the bearing groove 63 retracts to open the bearing groove 63, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be moved to the deepest portion (front end) of the bearing groove 63.

Then, when the body frame upper hinge pin 622 is moved to the deepest part of the bearing groove 63, the contact between the body frame upper hinge pin 622 and the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is released, and the lock body 66a is biased by the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates so that the front end of the lock member 66 moves to the right, and the lock member 66 returns to the normal state. As a result, the main body frame hinge pin 622 is in a state of being housed in the space in the bearing groove 63 on the front side of the front end of the lock main body 66 a, and the main body frame hinge pin 622 is rotatable at the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63. It will be held (locked).

When removing the main body frame hinge pin 622 from the inside of the bearing groove 63, the operating portion 66b of the lock member 66 is operated to rotate the lock member 66 so that the front end of the lock main body 66a moves to the left, and the elastic portion. The lock body 66a is retracted from the bearing groove 63 against the biasing force of 66c.
As a result, the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 and the opening are in communication with each other, and the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-10. Crime prevention mechanism and ball bite prevention mechanism at the lower hinge member on the outer frame side]
Prevention of ball biting for preventing the game ball from being caught between the crime prevention mechanism in the outer frame 2 lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment. The mechanism will be described.

In the assembled state of the outer frame 2, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 in front view. The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame-side lower hinge member 70 is attached in a state of being mounted on the vicinity of the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 and the upper surface of the rear extension portion 51. The curtain plate member 50 includes a standing wall portion 54 that rises upward from the rear end of the upper surface. As a result, even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is allowed to enter the rear side of the main body frame 4 (pachinko machine 1) through the gap between the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. Since the tip of the unauthorized tool comes into contact with the standing wall portion 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the unauthorized tool can be prevented from being inserted further rearward. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed via the outer frame side lower hinge member 70.

Further, since the upper end of the standing wall portion 54 is provided with the barb portion 55 extending forward, when the illegal tool contacting the standing wall portion 54 is bent upward, the barb portion 55 causes the tip of the illegal tool to be bent. Since it can be folded back further forward, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the rear side of the main body frame 4, and an illegal act is performed through the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70. Can be reliably prevented.

By the way, when the standing wall portion 54 extending upward is provided at the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the game ball is on the outer frame side with the main body frame 4 opened with respect to the outer frame 2. When falling on the lower hinge member 70 (horizontal portion 71), the game balls on the horizontal portion 71 are not discharged rearward from the rear end of the horizontal portion 71 due to the presence of the standing wall portion 54, so the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 There is a risk that it will be caught between and. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the horizontal hole 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the rearward extending portion 51 of the curtain plate member 50 have a discharge hole 74 through which a game ball can pass and a left discharge hole 52. , And the right discharge hole 53, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 can be discharged downward from the discharge hole 74 and the like, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 It is possible to reduce that the game ball is sandwiched between.

Therefore, by sandwiching the game ball between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is damaged, and the main body frame 4 does not close in a normal state and the outer frame 2 It is possible to prevent a gap from being formed between the main body frame 4 and an illegal act using the gap.

[3. Overall structure of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 30. 19 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine, FIG. 20 is a right side view of the door frame, FIG. 21 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 22 is a rear view of the door frame. 23 is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the front right, FIG. 24 is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the left front, and FIG. 25 is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the back. 26 is a sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 19, FIG. 27 is a sectional view taken along the line BB in FIG. 19, and FIG. 28 is a sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. It is a figure. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear.

As shown in FIG. 29, FIG. 30, etc., the door frame 3 is attached to a rectangular frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 whose outer shape in a front view extends vertically, and a lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100. Handle unit 300, a dish unit 320 attached to the lower front portion of the door frame base unit 100, a performance operation unit 400 attached to the center of the dish unit 320, and a door frame base unit above the dish unit 320. Door frame left side unit 530 attached to the front left part of 100, door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right part of door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit 320, and door frame left side The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper part of the front side of the door frame base unit 100 above the unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550.

The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, which will be described in detail later, is a plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a through-hole 111 penetrating forward and backward in a rectangular shape (quadrangle) whose outer shape in a front view extends vertically. And a frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, and upper and lower ends on the left end side in front view of the reinforcing unit 130 and attached to the main body frame 4 so as to be hinge-rotatable. An upper hinge member 140 on the door frame side and a lower hinge member 150 on the door frame side, a glass unit 190 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and closing the through hole 111, and a security cover 200 covering the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190, The door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, which are attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to penetrate through the door frame base 110 and project forward, and which can be opened and closed, and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, are locked. An opening/closing cylinder unit 210 for playing, a ball feeding unit 250 mounted on the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110 for sending game balls to the ball launching device 680, and a ball launching device 680 mounted on the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110. The foul cover unit 270, which receives the game balls that have been fired by the player and has not reached the game area 5a and discharges them to the lower plate 322, is provided.

Although the handle unit 300 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail later, the player rotates the rotatable handle 302 so that the game balls stored in the upper tray 321 are moved according to the rotation angle of the handle 302. It can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5 with high strength.

The dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, which will be described in detail later, is attached to a lower portion of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, and the front surface bulges forward, The effect operation unit 400 is attached to the front end of the center in the left-right direction. The plate unit 320 stores an upper plate 321 that stores a game ball to be driven into the game area 5a, and a game ball that is arranged below the upper plate 321 and is supplied from the upper plate 321 and the foul cover unit 270. Within the range of the storable lower plate 322, the upper plate ball removal button 327 for drawing the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 to the lower plate 322, and the balance of the cash or the prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine. A ball lending button 328 for lending a game ball to the player, a return button 329 for returning a cash or a prepaid card from which a game ball lent from the ball lending machine is returned, and a cash inserted in the ball lending machine. Or a ball lending/returning display unit 330 that displays the remaining number of prepaid cards, a production selection left button 331 and a production selection right button 332 that can be operated by the player at the time of presentation, and a lower plate 322. It is provided with a lower dish ball removal button 333 for discharging the game ball to the lower side of the dish unit 320.

The effect operation unit 400 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front part of the plate unit 320 at the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, can be pressed by the player, and presents effect images to the player. Is something that can be done. The effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail later, but a large operation button 410 that can be operated by the player, and a door frame side effect that is arranged in the operation button 410 so that the player can visually recognize the effect image. And a display device 460.

Although the details of the door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 will be described later, the door frame left side unit 530 is mounted on the left side of the front side on the left side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit 320, and the through hole 111 ( The left outer side of the game area 5a) is decorated. The door frame left side unit 530 is provided with a left unit decoration lens member (not shown) capable of light emission decoration.

Although the details of the door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 will be described later, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right side of the front side on the upper side of the dish unit 320 than the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100, and the through hole 111 ( The outside right side of the game area 5a) is decorated. The door frame right side unit 550 is protruded forward more than the door frame left side unit 530, and is provided on the front end with the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 provided on both left and right sides. The right unit decorative lens member 561 is provided. The door frame right side unit 550 can make the right unit left decoration member 554, the right unit right decoration member 557, and the right unit decoration lens member 561 emit light.

The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 is mounted on the upper side of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 and on the upper side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100. The upper part of the frame 3 is decorated. The door frame top unit 570, which will be described in detail later, has a pair of left and right upper speakers 573, a top middle decoration member 576 that projects forward at the center of the front surface, and a left and right side of the top middle decoration member 576. The decoration includes a top left decoration lens member 579 and a top right decoration lens member 580. The door frame top unit 570 can decorate the top middle decoration member 576, the top left decoration lens member 579, and the top right decoration lens member 580 with light emission decoration.

[3-1. Overall structure of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31A is a perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 31B is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the rear. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear. is there.

The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the main body frame 4 such that the left side in front view closes the front surface of the main body frame 4 so that the door frame base unit 100 can be opened and closed (the hinge can be rotated). The door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 300 in the lower front corner, a dish unit 320 to which the effect operation unit 400 is attached on the lower front surface of the through hole 111, and a door frame left side unit 530 on the left outer front surface of the through hole 111. The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the outer right front surface of the through hole 111, and the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the through hole 111.

As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33 and the like, the door frame base unit 100 includes a plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a through-hole 111 penetrating in the front and rear direction in a rectangular shape in which the outer shape in a front view extends vertically. The frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, and the upper and lower ends of the reinforcing unit 130 on the left end side in a front view of the main frame 4 protruding forward from the door frame base 110. A door frame side upper hinge member 140 and a door frame side lower hinge member 150 rotatably attached to the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640, and a front surface of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110. A door frame left side decoration board 160 mounted on the left side in the view and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a glass unit 190 detachably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110 so as to be rotatable. And a glass unit mounting member 170 for.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110 at the lower right corner in a front view, and a cylindrical handle attachment member 180 for attaching the handle unit 300, and to the rear surface of the door frame base 110. A glass unit 190 that closes the through hole 111, a security cover 200 that covers the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190, and an open/close cylinder unit that is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to penetrate the door frame base 110 and project forward. 210, a ball feeding unit 250 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a foul cover unit 270 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110.

Further, although not shown, the door frame base unit 100 includes various decorative substrates provided in the door frame 3, a ball feeding solenoid 255, a handle rotation detection sensor 307, a handle touch sensor 310, a one-shot button operation sensor 312, Ball lending button 328, return button 329, ball lending return display unit 330, effect selection left button 331, effect selection right button 332, vibration motor 424, press detection sensor 440, door frame side effect display device 460 (liquid crystal display device 461) , The upper speaker 573, and the like, and a door body relay board for relaying the connection between the door frame relay board 911 of the board unit 900 in the body frame 4.

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame base 110 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangle) whose outer shape in a front view extends vertically. The door frame base 110 has a through-hole 111 penetrating in the front-rear direction and having an inner peripheral shape in a front view that is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape extending vertically. The through-hole 111 has upper and left and right sides forming an inner circumference approaching the outer periphery of the door frame base 110, respectively, and a lower side forming an inner circumference moves up and down from the lower end of the door frame base 110. It is located at a height of about 1/3 of the direction. Therefore, the door frame base 110 is formed in a frame shape as a whole by the through holes 111 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The door frame base 110 is integrally formed of synthetic resin.

The door frame base 110 is formed at the lower right corner of the front surface when viewed from the front, and has a handle mounting seat surface 112 that is inclined so that the left end side projects slightly more forward than the right end side, the handle mounting seat surface 112, and the through hole 111. And a cylinder mounting portion 113 to which the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 of the opening/closing cylinder unit 210 is mounted, and a recessed portion from the rear surface toward the front near the right end in front view, and the opening/closing cylinder unit 210 penetrates back and forth in the cylinder mounting portion 113. Cylinder insertion hole 114 through which the cylinder lock 211 is inserted, and the cylinder insertion hole 114 and the handle mounting seat surface 112 penetrate forward and backward on the left side in a front view, and the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b of the ball feeding unit 250 are forwardly moved. And a ball feeding opening 115 for facing the above.

Further, the door frame base 110 penetrates to the left from the center of the door frame base 110 in the left-right direction and at the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 112, and faces the ball discharge port 276 of the foul cover unit 270 forward. The bottom plate passage opening 116 and the front end of the door frame base 110 are adjacent to the lower end of the through opening 111 near the left end of the front side of the door frame base 110 so that the penetration ball passage 273 of the foul cover unit 270 faces forward. The plate passage opening 117, the glass unit mounting portion 118 into which the glass frame 191 of the glass unit 190 is inserted, which is recessed from the rear surface toward the front along the inner circumference of the through opening 111, and the left and right sides of the door frame base 110. A speaker insertion port 119 that penetrates in the front and rear at a corner and into which the rear end of the upper speaker 573 of the door frame top unit 570 is inserted.

[3-1b. Reinforcement unit]
The reinforcing unit 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 and 33 and the like. The reinforcing unit 130 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 to reinforce the door frame base 110 and increase the strength and rigidity of the door frame base 110 (door frame 3). The reinforcing unit 130 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 extending leftward and rightward along the upper side of the rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a middle reinforcing leftward extending rightward attached to the lower side of the through hole 111 on the rear surface of the door frame base 110. A sheet metal 132, a left reinforcing sheet metal 133 that is attached along the left side in front view on the rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a right reinforcement that is attached vertically along the right side in front view on the rear surface of the door frame base 110. A sheet metal 134 and a locking engagement portion 135 attached to the rear surface of the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 and to which the door frame hook 702 of the locking unit 700 is engaged are provided.

In the reinforcing unit 130, the left and right ends of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 are connected and fixed to the upper ends of the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 by screws, and the left end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected to the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 by screws. It is fixed. The right end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected and fixed to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 via a cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 of the opening/closing cylinder unit 210 described later. Therefore, the reinforcing unit 130 is formed in a frame shape by the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the like.

The upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the locking engagement portion 135 of the reinforcing unit 130 are each formed by appropriately bending a metal plate.
The middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 has a notch 132a penetrating forward and backward at a position corresponding to the upper plate passage opening 117 of the door frame base 110.

Although not shown in detail, the reinforcing unit 130 has a portion that is bent in the front-rear direction in each of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, The strength and rigidity of the parts are enhanced, while preventing unauthorized entry of external tools such as piano wires and flat-blade screwdrivers.

[3-1c. Door frame side upper hinge member]
The door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The door frame side upper hinge member 140 is attached to the door frame base 110, and has a pair of protruding pieces 141a that are vertically separated from each other, and a pair of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 and the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141. A cylindrical door frame upper hinge pin 142, which penetrates the piece 141a and has an upper end inserted into the upper hinge hole 623 for the door frame of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620, and a pair of projecting pieces 141a of the door frame upper hinge pin 142. The disk-shaped brim member 143 mounted at a position between the two, and the disc-shaped brim member 143 is interposed between the brim member 143 and the lower projecting piece 141a of the pair of projecting pieces 141a, and the door frame hinge pin 142 is provided. And a lock spring 144 that urges the door frame upper hinge pin 142 upward.

Although not shown, the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 has a flat plate-like mounting piece that connects the rear ends of the pair of projecting pieces 141a to each other. It is formed in a letter shape. In the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141, a mounting piece connecting a pair of projecting pieces 141a is mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 with a screw.

A portion (upper end) of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 protruding above the upper protruding piece 141 a is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620. Further, although not shown, the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is bent in the horizontal direction at a portion projecting below the lower projecting piece 141a. The bent portion abuts the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 141a, thereby restricting the upward movement of the door frame upper hinge pin 142.

The collar member 143 is an E ring, and is inserted and held in a groove formed on the outer periphery of the door frame upper hinge pin 142. The lock spring 144 is a coil spring through which the hinge pin 142 on the door frame can be inserted, and its upper end abuts on the flange member 143 and its lower end abuts on the lower protruding piece 141a. The lock spring 144 is interposed between the flange member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a in a compressed state, and urges the door frame upper hinge pin 142 upward through the flange member 143. ..

The door frame upper hinge member 140 is in a state in which the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is biased upward by the lock spring 144, and the horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 projects downward. By contacting the lower surface of the piece 141a, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 projects above the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 141a by a predetermined amount.

The door frame side upper hinge member 140 has a lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 that is bent horizontally and is pulled downward against the biasing force of the lock spring 144 by the operator. The upper hinge pin 142 can be moved downward as a whole, and the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 can be recessed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 141a.
Therefore, the door frame side upper hinge member 140 inserts the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 from below or pulls it out. You can Accordingly, by inserting the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame upper hinge member 140 into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620, the front left upper end of the door frame 3 in front view. The hinge can be rotatably supported with respect to the main body frame 4.

Further, in the door frame side upper hinge member 140, a portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 supported by the pair of projecting pieces 141a of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 is a door frame of the door frame lower hinge member 150 described later. It is supported coaxially with the lower hinge pin 152. Accordingly, the door frame 3 upper hinge member 140 and the door frame lower hinge member 150 can rotate the door frame 3 relative to the main body frame 4 in a favorable state.

[3-1d. Door frame side lower hinge member]
The door frame side lower hinge member 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. The door frame side lower hinge member 150 includes a door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 having a flat plate-shaped extending piece 151a attached to the door frame base 110 and extending forward, and a door frame lower hinge shaft bracket. A cylindrical door frame lower hinge pin 152 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) protruding downward from the vicinity of the front end portion of the extending piece 151a.

The lower door frame hinge shaft bracket 151 has a flat plate-shaped extending piece 151a extending horizontally from the rear end of the flat plate-like extending piece 151a (not shown), and has an overall shape in a side view. Are formed in a substantially L shape. The door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 has an attachment piece (not shown) attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 with a screw.

The lower end of the door frame lower hinge pin 152 is formed into a truncated cone shape that narrows downward. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is rotatably inserted from above into a door frame hinge hole 644 of a main body frame side lower hinge member 640 in the main body frame 4 described later. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is arranged coaxially with the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140.

The door frame lower hinge member 150 can hinge-rotate the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 152 into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the body frame lower hinge member 640. Can be supported by.

[3-1e. Door frame left side decoration board]
The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is attached to the front side of the door frame base 110 on the left side of the through hole 111 in front view. The door frame left side decoration board 160 extends vertically from the height of a position lower than the speaker insertion opening 119 on the left side in front view of the door frame base 110 to the height near the vertical center of the through opening 111. The frame left side upper decorative substrate 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative extending vertically from the height of the lower position of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 161 to approximately the same height as the lower end of the upper plate passage opening 117. And a substrate 162.

The door frame left side upper decoration substrate 161 and the door frame left side lower decoration substrate 162 of the door frame left side decoration substrate 160 are respectively provided with a plurality of LEDs 161a and 162a capable of irradiating light forward on the front surface. These LEDs 161a and 162a are full-color LEDs.

The door frame left side decoration board 160 is located behind the door frame left side unit 530, which will be described later, in a state where the door frame 3 is assembled, and includes a plurality of LEDs 161a and 162a provided (mounted) on the front surface. By appropriately emitting light, the left unit decoration lens member of the door frame left side unit 530 can be made to emit light.

[3-1f. Glass unit mounting member]
The glass unit mounting member 170 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The glass unit attachment member 170 is rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, and is for detachably attaching the glass unit 190. The glass unit mounting member 170 includes a disk-shaped base 171 mounted rotatably around an axis extending in the front-rear direction on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and a rod-shaped projection from the base 171 in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. And a projecting portion 172 that is open.

The glass unit mounting member 170 is rotatably mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base 110, below the pair of speaker insertion openings 119, and on the outer side of the glass unit mounting portion 118.

The glass unit mounting member 170 is in a state in which the projecting portion 172 is rotated so as to project upward from the base portion 171, so that the projecting portion 172 is located outside the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110 in a rear view. The glass unit 190 can be inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, and the glass unit 190 can be removed from the glass unit mounting portion 118.

When the glass unit 190 is inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the projecting portion 172 projects downward from the base 171. When the glass unit 190 comes into contact with the rear side of the mounting piece 191a of the unit 190 and the rearward movement of the upper portion of the glass unit 190 is restricted, the glass unit 190 can be mounted on the door frame base 110.

Since the protrusion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotatably mounted on the door frame base 110, the center of gravity of the glass unit mounting member 170 is located inside the protrusion 172. .. From this, when the glass unit mounting member 170 can freely rotate, the protruding portion 172 becomes stable in a state of protruding downward from the base portion 171. Further, in the glass unit mounting member 170, the rearward movement of the glass unit 190 is restricted by the protruding portion 172 when the protruding portion 172 is in the rotational position where the protruding portion 172 projects downward from the base portion 171, so that the glass unit mounting member 170 is mounted. Even if vibration or the like is applied to the member 170, the entire protruding portion 172 does not rotate so as to project upward from the base portion 171, and the rearward movement restriction of the glass unit 190 is naturally released. Absent.

When the glass unit 190 is removed from the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the projecting portion 172 projects upward from the base 171, and the projecting portion 172 is attached to the mounting piece 191a of the glass unit 190. By moving the glass unit 190 further outward, the upper side of the glass unit 190 can be moved backward, and the glass unit 190 can be removed from the door frame base 110.

[3-1 g. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The handle attachment member 180 is for attaching the handle unit 300 to the front surface of the door frame base 110. As shown in FIG. 32, FIG. 33, etc., the handle attaching member 180 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 181 extending in the front-rear direction, and a rear end of the tubular portion 181 outward in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tubular portion 181. An annular flange portion 182 that extends and a plurality of protrusions that protrude into the tubular portion 181 and extend over the entire axial length of the tubular portion 181 and that are arranged at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 181 ( In this example, three protrusions 183 are provided, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 184 that connect the outer peripheral surface of the tubular portion 181 and the front surface of the flange portion 182 and are arranged in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 181 are provided. ..

The handle attachment member 180 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 112 with a screw in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 182 is in contact with the front surface of the handle attachment seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110.

The inner diameter of the tubular portion 181 is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 301a of the handle base 301 of the handle unit 300. One of the three protrusions 183 is provided on the upper side of the tubular portion 181, and the other two are provided on the lower side of the tubular portion 181. These three protrusions 183 are formed at positions corresponding to the three groove portions 301c in the handle base 301. Therefore, the handle attachment member 180 can insert the base portion 301a of the handle base 301 into the tubular portion 181 only when the three protrusions 183 are aligned with the three groove portions 301c of the handle base 301. The rotation position of the handle base 301 (handle unit 300) with respect to the door frame base 110 can be restricted.

Since the axis of the tubular portion 181 extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange portion 182, the handle attaching member 180 can be attached to the inclined handle attaching seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110, thereby The axis of 181 is inclined so as to extend to the front right, and the handle unit 300 can be attached to the door frame base 110 in the same inclined state.

[3-1h. Glass unit]
The glass unit 190 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The glass unit 190 closes the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 so that the rear side can be visually recognized. The glass unit 190 is a frame-shaped glass frame 191 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 and can be attached to the glass unit attachment portion 118, and the inside of the glass frame 191 is closed and the outer periphery is a glass frame. And two transparent glass plates 192 attached to 191. The two glass plates 192 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 191, respectively, and are separated from each other in the front-rear direction so as to form a space therebetween (see FIG. 26 and the like).

The glass frame 191 has a pair of mounting pieces 191a extending outward in a flat plate shape from positions below the upper left and right upper corners in a front view, and a band protruding downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. And a plate-shaped locking piece 191b. The attachment piece 191 a of the glass frame 191 can be brought into contact with the protrusion 172 of the glass unit attachment member 170. The locking piece 191b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 (see FIG. 26).

In this glass unit 190, the locking piece 191b of the glass frame 191 is inserted from above from the rear side of the door frame base 110 into the gap between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130. , The front end of the glass frame 191 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated, and the projection 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 is attached to the mounting piece 191a of the glass frame 191. It is attached to the door frame base 110 by bringing it into contact with the rear surface.

When the glass unit 190 is detached from the door frame base 110, it can be detached in the reverse order of the above. As a result, the glass unit 190 can be attached to and detached from the door frame base 110.

[3-1i. Security cover]
The security cover 200 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The security cover 200 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 so as to cover the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190, and is made of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 200 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 201 having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape, a flat plate-shaped rear projecting piece 202 protruding rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 201, and separated from each other in the left and right directions. And a pair of locking pieces 203 projecting forward of the main body 201 and capable of being locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110.

The main body 201 of the security cover 200 is formed so that the lower end thereof protrudes below the lower end of the glass unit 190 when attached to the door frame base 110. Further, the main body 201 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5a of the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 201 is formed in a shape along a part of an inner rail 1002 of the front component member 1000, an out guiding part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and a right rail 1005, which will be described later. And, it is formed so as not to project into the game area 5a when assembled in the pachinko machine 1.

The rear protrusion 202 is formed over substantially the entire outer peripheral edge of the main body 201. Therefore, the security cover 200 is formed in a shallow box shape opened rearward by the main body 201 and the rear protruding piece 202, and has high strength and rigidity. Further, as shown in FIG. 33, the rear protruding piece 202 also protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201, which is different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 201. A rear protrusion 202 that protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 is formed so as to follow a part of the outer rail 1001 in the front component member 1000 of the game board 5 when assembled in the pachinko machine 1. ing.

The rear protrusion 202 is not formed in a portion of the game board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the state of being assembled to the pachinko machine 1. Thereby, the game ball (the game ball shot by the ball launching device 680) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not come into contact with the rear projecting piece 202 of the security cover 200, and within the game area 5a. It does not hinder the driving of the game ball.

The pair of locking pieces 203 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110. Thereby, the security cover 200 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base 110.

In the security cover 200 assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body portion 201 contacts the rear surface of the glass unit 190 (the rear end of the glass frame 191), and a portion protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body portion 201 is provided. The removed rear projecting piece 202 is in a state of being inserted into the crime prevention recess 1008 of the front component member 1000 described later. Further, the security cover 200 is in a state in which the rear projecting piece 202 projecting rearward from the lower side of the main body portion 201 projects rearward from the front surface of the front component member 1000 so as to contact the lower surface of the front component member 1000. .. As a result, the gap between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projection 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000, so that the game is played. Even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is made to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of the board 5 through the crime prevention cover 200 and the front component member 1000, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 202 and the crime prevention recess 1008. It is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

[3-1j. Open/close cylinder unit]
The opening/closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The opening/closing cylinder unit 210 is attached from the rear side to the cylinder attachment portion 113 at a position between the through hole 111 and the handle attachment seat surface 112 near the right end of the door frame base 110 in a front view, and cooperates with a locking unit 700 described later. It works to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

The open/close cylinder unit 210 has a cylinder-shaped cylinder lock 211 having a keyhole 211a on the front surface and extending in the front-rear direction, and a lock unit attached to the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 for rotating the key inserted in the keyhole 211a. A rotation transmission member 212 that transmits the key to the key cylinder 710 of the 700, and a cylinder mounting metal plate 213 that mounts the cylinder lock 211 to the door frame base 110 (reinforcement unit 130) are provided.

The cylinder lock 211 can rotate the key by inserting a corresponding key (not shown) into the key hole 211a. If the corresponding key is a clockwise key or a counterclockwise key when viewed from the front. It can be rotated by a predetermined angle in the direction of.

The rotation transmitting member 212 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear (specifically, a conical cylindrical shape whose diameter increases toward the rear), and extends from the rear end to the front at positions facing each other with the central axis interposed therebetween. It has a pair of notches 212a that are notched. The rotation transmitting member 212 is formed so that the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from the rear side, and the protrusion of the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted into the pair of notches 212a. By doing so, the rotation of the rotation transmission member 212 (the key inserted in the key hole 211a of the cylinder lock 211) can be transmitted to the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 to rotate the key cylinder 710.

The cylinder mounting metal plate 213 is formed by bending a single metal plate, and is formed in a convex shape projecting forward in a plan view. More specifically, the cylinder mounting metal plate 213 includes a rectangular flat plate-shaped front plate portion 213a extending vertically in a front view, and a pair of side plate portions 213b extending rearward from both right and left sides of the front plate portion 213a. And a pair of mounting plate portions 213c that extend in a flat plate shape in the direction away from each other from the rear sides of the pair of side plate portions 213b. The front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting metal plate 213 is penetrated by the cylinder lock 211 from the rear at a position substantially in the vertical direction, and the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 is attached to the rear surface of the front plate portion 213a. In the pair of mounting plate portions 213c of the cylinder mounting metal plate 213, the mounting plate portion 213c on the left side when viewed from the front is mounted on the right end of the middle reinforcing metal plate 132 of the reinforcing unit 130, and the mounting plate portion 213c on the right side when viewed from the front side of the reinforcing unit 130. It is attached to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134. Thus, the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 connects the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 to the reinforcing unit 130.

When the open/close cylinder unit 210 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the front end of the cylinder lock 211 protruding forward from the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 has a cylinder insertion hole from the rear side of the door frame base 110. The front plate portion 213a and the pair of side plate portions 213b of the cylinder mounting metal plate 213 are housed in a box-shaped cylinder mounting portion 113 that is opened rearward while being inserted into 114 and protruding forward of the door frame base 110. ing.

[3-4. Overall configuration of production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the effect operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 to 41 and the like. 34A is a front view of the effect operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 34B is a right side view of the effect operation unit. Further, FIG. 35A is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 35B is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the rear.
FIG. 36 is an explanatory diagram of the effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. 37 is a sectional view taken along the line DD in FIG. 34(a), and FIG. 38 is a sectional view taken along the line EE in FIG. 34(b). FIG. 39(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line FF in FIG. 34(b), and FIG. 39(b) is an enlarged view of a portion A in (a). FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. The effect operation unit 400 is attached to the front part of the plate unit 320 at the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and can be pressed by the player and can present an effect image to the player. Is.

The effect operation unit 400 has a circular outer shape and is transparently formed on the center side excluding the outer peripheral edge, and the operation button 410 that can be pressed by the player and the effect operation unit of the dish unit cover 326 surrounding the outer periphery of the operation button 410. A frame-shaped frame unit 415 attached to the attachment portion 326a, a decorative substrate unit 420 arranged rearward of the operation button 410 and capable of illuminating and decorating the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415, and a frame. A base unit 430 attached to the rear side of the unit 415 and having operation buttons 410 and a decorative substrate unit 420 attached to the front surface, and a base unit 430 attached to the base unit 430 so as to be visible from the player side through the operation buttons 410. And a door frame side effect display device 460 capable of displaying an image.

[3-4a. Manual operation button]
The operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. FIG. 42(a) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 42(b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and seen from the rear. The operation button 410 is formed in a circular shape having a diameter that is slightly smaller than the height of the dish unit 320 in the vertical direction, and the center side excluding the outer peripheral edge is formed transparent. The operation button 410 has a transparent button lens 411 formed in a curved surface shape (a part of a spherical surface) so that the outer circumference is circular and the central side bulges forward, and the front side of the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. An annular button frame 412 that is attached is provided, and a cylindrical button base 413 that is attached to the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 and the button base 413 are formed of a member that does not allow light to easily pass therethrough.

The entire button lens 411 is formed to have a substantially constant thickness. In addition, the button lens 411 is formed in a smooth curved surface shape without unevenness on the front surface side. The button lens 411 extends a predetermined length toward the center side (inside) in a state of being recessed in a W-shaped cross section from the back surface at a position on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412, and is arranged in a row in the circumferential direction. One button decoration portion 411a and a row extending within a predetermined angle range in the circumferential direction at a position on the outer peripheral side of the first button decoration portion 411a, extending on the axis line toward the center side in a state of being recessed in a circular arc shape from the back surface. A plurality of (six) second button decoration portions 411b are provided.

As shown in the figure, the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 extends from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 toward the center side when assembled to the operation button 410, and one group on the left and right sides is a group on the both upper and lower sides. It extends longer than the center.

Each of the plurality of second button decoration portions 411b of the button lens 411 extends in an arc shape on the same circumference, and three second button decoration portions 411b are formed on each of the left and right sides. These second button decorations 411b are formed so as to face the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412, and project forward so that the front surface side is substantially flush with the front surface of the button frame 412.

The button lens 411 exhibits a lens effect in which light is refracted by the unevenness of the W-shaped cross section and the arc-shaped cross section formed on the back surface in the portions of the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button decoration portion 411b. Therefore, the rear side is not clearly visible.

The button frame 412 is formed in an annular shape, and is provided with a plurality (six) of frame opening portions 412a penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in an arc shape with a predetermined length in the circumferential direction. The six frame openings 412a are provided on each of the left and right sides, three each, and correspond to the six second button decorations 411b of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 has a plated layer having metallic luster on the surface.

The button base 413 includes a substantially cylindrical main body portion 413a extending in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 413b protruding outward from the front end of the main body portion 413a, and a main body portion 413a from the rear side of the flange portion 413b. A plurality of (four) guide boss portions 413c that are arranged rearward along the outer circumference of the cylinder and are arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction, and from the rear side of the flange portion 413b along the outer circumference of the main body portion 413a. A plurality of (three) detection pieces 413d that project rearward in the shape of a strip plate and are arranged in the circumferential direction, and penetrate the flange portion 413b back and forth outside the main body portion 413a and have a predetermined length along the outer circumference. And a plurality of (six) base openings 413e formed in the circumferential direction, and a cylindrical shape that extends forward from the front end of the main body 413a to the front end side along the inner surface of the button lens 411. And an inner extending portion 413f that is narrowed to the (center side).

The outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 and the button frame 412 are attached to the outer peripheral surface of the inner extending portion 413f of the button base 413 and the front surface of the flange portion 413b. The four guide boss portions 413c are arranged at portions corresponding to the four corners of the upper, lower, left, and right with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body 413a. These four guide boss portions 413c are slidably inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, respectively. The three detection pieces 413d are arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction so that two detection pieces 413d are arranged on the upper side and one on the lower side with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body 413a. These three detection pieces 413d are detected by the pressing detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430 when the operation button 410 is pressed.

The six base openings 413e are provided on each of the left and right sides, three each, and correspond to the second button decoration portion 411b of the button lens 411 and the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412. At the site of the base opening 413e in the button base 413, a part of the main body 413a and the inner extending portion 413f is recessed inward from the outer peripheral side. An inner diameter of a front end of the inner extending portion 413f that is narrowed inward is substantially equal to an inner diameter of the button frame 412.

The operation button 410 has a front surface bulging forward in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) and is transparently formed, and a door frame side effect display device 460 arranged on the rear side. The display screen of can be viewed from the front. In the operation button 410, the four guide boss portions 413c are slidably inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430, and the operation button springs 438 inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431. Is urged forward by. The operation button 410 is prevented from further moving forward by contacting the front side of the outer peripheral edge with the frame unit 415 by the biasing force of the operation button spring 438 of the base unit 430, and the biasing force of the operation button spring 438. By pressing the switch against, the rear end moves rearward until it comes into contact with the front surface of the base unit 430. When the operation button 410 is pressed and moved rearward, at least one of the three detection pieces 413d is detected by the press detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430. The operation button 410 is operated by the detection of the detection piece 413d by the pressure detection sensor 440.

Further, the operation button 410 is a first button decoration formed over the entire circumference so as to extend from the inner peripheral end of the button frame 412 in the transparent button lens 411 to the center side in the assembled state of the effect operation unit 400. By the portion 411a, the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the operation button inner decoration member 432 of the base unit 430 can be made invisible to the player.

Further, in the operation button 410, the front end opening of the cylindrical button base 413 is closed by the button lens 411 and the button frame 412, and the operation button is attached by the button frame 412 attached to the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. With respect to the outer diameter of 410, a transparent portion whose rear can be visually recognized is formed so as to be narrowed inward from the outer circumference. The presence of the button frame 412 also makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the operation button inner decoration member 432 of the base unit 430.

Further, in the state where the operation button 410 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the rear end of the tubular button base 413 (main body portion 413a) passes through the inner peripheral side of the decorative substrate unit 420 and is more than the front surface of the decorative substrate unit 420. It will be in a state of protruding backward. As a result, the light emitted forward from the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b mounted on the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423 of the decoration board unit 420, respectively, is changed. It is possible to prevent leakage from the outside to the inside of the base 413, and at the same time, the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower part of the base unit 430 can be prevented. It is possible to prevent the light emitted from the LED mounted on the decorative substrate 436 from the front side from leaking from the inside to the outside of the button base 413. Therefore, the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b of the decoration board unit 420, the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper decoration board 435, and the operation button of the base unit 430. It is possible to prevent the LEDs mounted on the lower inner decoration substrate 436 from being light-emitted on portions other than the target area for light emission decoration, and it is possible to perform light-emission decoration with good appearance.

[3-4b. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 41 and the like. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front side to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 so as to surround the outer periphery from the front side of the operation button 410, and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The outer shape of the frame unit 415 is formed in a shape that matches the front end side of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a.

The frame unit 415 is a frame-shaped frame main body 416 attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 and having a circular central opening 416a, and frame main bodies 416 on both left and right sides of the central opening 416a. And a pair of translucent frame side lenses 417 that are attached from the rear side, and a translucent frame top lens 418 that is attached to the frame main body 416 from the front side above the central opening 416a. There is.

The frame main body 416 has a circular central opening 416a that has a smaller diameter than the outer diameter of the operation button 410 and penetrates forward and backward, and a central opening 416a that penetrates forward and backward on both left and right outer sides of the central opening 416a. A plurality of (six) outer peripheral openings 416b that extend in an arc shape along the peripheral edge of and are arranged in the circumferential direction, and a notch 416c that is notched with a predetermined width on the upper front surface of the central opening 416a. , Are provided. The central opening 416a is formed to have substantially the same size as the outer diameter of the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410. As a result, the front end side of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 can come into contact with the rear side of the outer periphery of the frame opening 412a.

Six outer peripheral openings 416b are provided on each of the left and right outer sides of the central opening 416a, and three outer peripheral openings 416b are provided, and are closed by a frame side lens 417 from the rear side. The notch 416c also penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the frame top lens 418 is fitted from the front side.

Further, the frame main body 416 includes an inner cylindrical portion 416d having a substantially cylindrical shape that extends rearward from a position slightly outside the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a. The inner cylindrical portion 416d extends rearward from a position between the central opening 416a and the outer peripheral opening 416b, and a portion corresponding to the cutout portion 416c is cut out. In the state where the effect operation unit 400 is assembled, the inner tubular portion 416d has the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423 of the decoration board unit 420. And is located between the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b (see FIG. 38).

Further, the frame main body 416 is provided with a pair of attachment portions 416e that extend outward at the left and right upper portions of the outer periphery and are attached to the performance operation unit attachment portions 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320. The frame main body 416 (production operation unit 400) is attached to the production operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 at the left and right sides of the pair of attachment portions 416e and the cutout portion 416c.

The frame main body 416 has a metal on substantially the entire surface except a portion having the same width as the cutout 416c on the side opposite to the cutout 416c side (the side where the frame top lens 418 is attached) with the central opening 416a interposed therebetween. A plated layer having a luster is formed.

The frame side lenses 417 close the outer peripheral openings 416b, which are formed on the left and right of the frame main body 416, respectively, from the rear side. The front side of the frame side lens 417 is formed into a smooth surface with no unevenness, and a plurality of unevenness is formed along the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a on the rear side (see FIGS. 39 and 46). The light is refracted by the plurality of irregularities, so that the rear side of the frame side lens 417 cannot be seen.

The frame top lens 418 has a substantially rectangular outer shape so that the frame top lens 418 is fitted into the cutout portion 416c of the frame body 416 from the front side. The front surface side of the frame top lens 418 is formed smoothly. Further, in the frame top lens 418, a plurality of irregularities extending in a zigzag shape along the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a on the rear surface side are provided in a plurality of rows in the radial direction of the central opening 416a (see FIGS. 37 and 46). reference). The light is refracted by the plurality of irregularities, so that the rear side of the frame top lens 418 cannot be seen.

In the frame unit 415, in the state where the effect operation unit 400 is assembled, the pair of frame side lenses 417 includes the second LED 422b and 423b of the operation button left outside decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outside decoration substrate 423 of the decoration substrate unit 420. And the frame top lens 418 is located in front of the frame top lens decoration substrate 437 of the base unit 430, and the second LEDs 422b and 423b mounted on the frame top lens 418 can perform light emission decoration. ..

[3-4c. Decorative board unit]
The decorative substrate unit 420 of the rendering operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 43 and the like. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the decorative operation board unit of the effect operation unit that is disassembled and seen from the front. The decorative substrate unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the base unit 430 below the frame unit 415, and the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be illuminated and decorated. Vibration can be applied to the operation unit 400.

The decorative board unit 420 includes a C-shaped board base 421 having an open upper side, an operation button left outer decoration board 422 and an operation button right outer decoration board 423 attached to the left and right front surfaces of the board base 421, respectively. A vibration motor 424 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the substrate base 421 and a motor cover 425 attached to the front surface of the substrate base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424 are provided.

The substrate base 421 is formed such that the inner peripheral side thereof is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the tubular main body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and the outer peripheral side thereof is larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413. Moreover, it is formed smaller than the outer diameter of the frame unit 415.

The operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 has a plurality of first LEDs 422a mounted along the inner periphery of the substrate base 421 on the front surface side and an inner periphery of the substrate base 421 radially outside the plurality of first LEDs 422a. And a plurality of second LEDs 422b mounted along the same.
The operation button right outside decoration substrate 423 extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The operation button right outer decoration board 423 is provided on the front side with a plurality of first LEDs 423a mounted along the inner circumference of the board base 421, and on the inner circumference of the board base 421 radially outside the plurality of first LEDs 423a. And a plurality of second LEDs 423b mounted along the same. The front and rear surfaces of the operation button left outside decoration board 422 and the operation button right outside decoration board 423 are white.

An eccentric weight 424a is attached to the rotation shaft of the vibration motor 424, and vibration can be generated by rotating the weight 424a.

In the state where the decorative board unit 420 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the rear end side of the tubular body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is inserted inside the board base 421. Further, in the decorative board unit 420, the respective first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423 are located behind the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410, respectively. The second LEDs 422b and 423b are located behind the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. Further, when assembled in the rendering operation unit 400, a frame is provided between the respective first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423 and the respective second LEDs 422b and 423b. The inner cylindrical portion 416d of the unit 415 is located (see FIG. 38).

Therefore, the decoration board unit 420 causes only the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 to emit light by the light from the respective first LEDs 422a and 423a on the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423. In addition, it is possible to light and decorate only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 by the light from the respective second LEDs 422b and 423b.

In addition, the decorative substrate unit 420 can generate vibration by rotating the weight 424a of the vibration motor 424 and vibrate the effect operation unit 400 as a whole.

[3-4f. Effect of production operation unit]
The effect of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 44 to 46 and the like. FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram showing a state where the operation button is pressed in the sectional view of the effect operation unit in FIG. 37. FIG. 45(a) is a view of the effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, and a part of the operation button is cut out to be hidden by the first button decoration portion or the button frame of the operation button. It is explanatory drawing which shows a site|part, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the site|part which is about to be hidden by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in the cross section of a production|operation operation unit. FIG. 46(a) is an explanatory view showing the appearance of the effect operation unit in a perspective view as seen from the front, and FIG. 46(b) is an explanatory view of the appearance of the effect operation unit as seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. Is.

The effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment can show an effect image to the player according to the game state that changes when a game ball is hit in the game area 5a of the game board 5, and the player can operate the operation image. It is possible to allow the player to participate in the effect presented to the player by operating the button 410 to entertain.

The effect operation unit 400 is formed to have substantially the same height as the height of a portion of the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 below the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110. Moreover, the overall width of the effect operation unit 400 is formed to be slightly larger than 1/3 of the overall width of the door frame 3. The effect operation unit 400 is arranged in the center in the left-right direction below the game area 5a (the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110) in a front view.

In the effect operation unit 400, the upper part of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. When the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the dish unit 320, a gap is formed between the bottom surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay substrate cover 442, which is the bottom surface, and the top surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320. Are formed. That is, the production operation unit 400 is attached only to the upper portion of the dish unit 320, and is attached in a suspended state.

Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner circumference of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. Is installed as. As a result, in the effect operation unit 400, the central axis line CL of the transparent operation button 410 bulging forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) is at an angle of 63 degrees with respect to the vertical line. It is inclined so as to move upward as it goes forward. Thus, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the head of the player is placed above the dish unit 320 (production operation unit 400). Since it is located in front of the center of the game area 5a on the game board 5, the central axis line CL of the operation button 410 passes near the head of the player. Therefore, when the player drops his line of sight from the game area 5a to the effect operation unit 400 (operation button 410), the operation button 410 is as close as possible to its front view (projection view from the direction parallel to the central axis CL). As a result, the operation button 410, the door frame side effect display device 460 and the like in the operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state.

In the effect operation unit 400, the four guide boss portions 413c of the operation button 410 are slidably inserted into the four holding holes 431b of the base unit 430, respectively, and the operation button spring 438 urges the guide button bosses 413c forward. In the normal operation state (state in which the operation button 410 is not pressed), the effect operation unit 400 causes the front end of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 to move to the frame unit 415 by the urging force of the operation button spring 438. The frame body 416 is in contact with a portion of the rear surface near the central opening 416a.

In the normal state, the effect operation unit 400 projects forward from the central opening (center axis CL side) from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410 through the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415. There is. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) of the operation button 410, a portion that protrudes forward from the inner circumference (inner side) of the button frame 412 is The frame unit 415 projects forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 (see FIG. 37 and the like).

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 is about 15 cm, and the button lens 411 (the front end thereof) is located in the frame unit in the central axis CL direction of the operation button 410. It projects about 4 cm forward from the front surface of 415.

In a normal state, when the player presses the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400, the operation button 410 moves rearward along the central axis line CL against the biasing force of the operation button spring 438. Then, when the rear end of the operation button 410 comes into contact with the front surface of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, the backward movement is restricted and the backward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, he or she pushes the button lens 411 which is bulged forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface).

Since the operation button 410 has a very large outer diameter as compared with the operation button for performance provided in the conventional pachinko machine, it is pressed near the peripheral edge away from the central portion of the button lens 411. Is likely to be. More specifically, the operation button for the effect in the conventional pachinko machine is attached so that its central axis extends substantially parallel to the vertical line, whereas the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment. Since the central axis line CL is attached so as to be inclined with respect to the vertical line, when the player presses the operation button 410 from above as in the conventional pachinko machine, as shown by a white arrow in FIG. 44, A portion of the operation button 410 away from the central axis line CL will be pressed.

By the way, since the operation button for the performance in the conventional pachinko machine has a flat surface for the player to press, when the operation button is enlarged with the part to be pressed kept flat. , If you press a part off the center of the operation button, the pressing surface will tilt so that the pressed part will retract first, and the operation button will not be able to recede straightly. There is a possibility that the pressing operation may not be possible.

On the other hand, in the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment, the portion (button lens 411) pressed by the player has a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) bulging forward. Therefore, when a position away from the center of the operation button 410 is pressed, the force is distributed to the entire operation button 410, the operation button 410 becomes difficult to tilt, and the operation button 410 moves straight backward. You can Therefore, no matter which position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can be smoothly retracted without tilting, so that the pressing operation can be reliably detected and the operation button 410 is pressed. It is possible to fully enjoy the performance to operate.

In addition, in the effect operation unit 400, the vibration motor 424 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the board base 421 in the decorative board unit 420, and as described above, only the upper part is a plate so that the effect operation unit 400 can be hung. Since it is attached to the performance operation unit attachment portion 326a of the unit cover 326, when the vibration motor 424 rotates the weight 424a to generate vibration, vibration is generated at a portion farthest from the attached portion. The entire production operation unit 400 can be vibrated largely (strongly), and the vibration can be transmitted to the player touching the production operation unit 400. Further, since the vibration motor 424 is arranged immediately below the position (the position of the white arrow in FIG. 44) that the player can relatively easily press, the player who presses the operation button 410 can be operated. Strong vibrations can be transmitted to surprise the player and entertain the production.

Furthermore, the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the dish unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 forming the lower surface and the bottom plate of the dish unit cover 326 are formed. Since a gap is formed between the upper surface of the portion 326i and the lower surface of the leg portion 442a until the lower surface of the leg portion 442a abuts the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i when the operation button 410 is strongly pressed or hit downward. The impact can be absorbed by bending the mounting portion 416e of the unit 415, the performance operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, and the like downward. Further, after the lower surface of the leg portion 442a contacts the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the downward movement of the performance operation unit 400 is restricted, and the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the performance operation unit mounting of the plate unit cover 326 are mounted. It is possible to avoid applying unreasonable force to the portion 326a and the like, and prevent damage to the performance operation unit 400 and the like. Therefore, even when the player is presented with an effect of pressing the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 or the like, even if the operation button 410 is pressed or hit with a strong force, the operation button 410 or the effect operation unit Since 400 etc. will not be damaged, it is possible to avoid interruption of the game due to damage, suppress the decline in the interest of the player, and increase the burden on the game hall side by making it difficult to damage. Can be suppressed.

As described above, the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 that is pressed by the player is formed in a flat plate shape because it is formed in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) protruding forward. Compared with the case, the strength and rigidity are higher, and even when hit hard, the impact can be dispersed to the entire button lens 411, which makes it less likely to be damaged.

Also, in the effect operation unit 400, as shown in FIG. 46, since the button lens 411, the frame side lens 417, the frame top lens 418, and the operation button inner decoration member 432 are formed of transparent members, The decoration by the unevenness such as the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the first button inner decoration portion 432f, and the second button inner decoration portion 432g formed on the back surface is the front side (player side). ) Can be seen from. In addition, in the area where the uneven decoration is formed, the light is complicatedly refracted due to the change in the plate thickness, so that it is difficult to visually recognize the rear side through the area where the uneven decoration is formed. ..

Since the effect operation unit 400 includes the first button decoration portion 411a extending from the inner circumference of the button frame 412 in the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 toward the center side, the uneven decoration of the first button decoration portion 411a. With this, it is possible to make it difficult to see the rear part at the outer peripheral part of the part inside the button lens 411. Behind the portion where the first button decoration portion 411a is formed (rear in the central axis CL direction), the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the peripheral wall portion of the operation button inner decoration member 432. A gap is formed between the outer peripheral surface of 432a and the outer periphery of the operation button inner decoration member 432 from the front side (player side) by the first button decoration portion 411a located in front of the gap. It can be hard to see. Accordingly, even if the operation button interior decoration member 432 whose position is fixed is provided in the operation button 410 that can be pressed, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the operation button 410 from being deteriorated. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, and it is possible to arrange the operation button inner decoration member 432 in the transparent operation button 410 without any problem, and to improve the appearance of the operation button 410.

More specifically, in the effect operation unit 400, the outer periphery of the operation button inner decoration member 432 of the base unit 430 is defined by the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, and the button frame 412. The unit base 431, the decorative substrate unit 420, and the like, which are on the outer side and on the rear side (back side), are formed so as not to be seen from the player side through the transparent button lens 411. Specifically, in FIG. 45, the part of the cross hatch surrounded by the one-dot chain line is made invisible to the player. As described above, since the operation button 410 includes the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like, the outer side or the inner side of the operation button inner decoration member 432 is difficult to see and hidden. Therefore, it is possible to improve the appearance of the operation button 410, and by extension, the effect operation unit 400 as a whole.

In addition, in the effect operation unit 400, the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 extends toward the central axis line CL of the operation button 410 and is arranged in the circumferential direction. Then, the second button inner decoration portion 432g formed on the front plate portion 432b of the operation button inner decoration member 432 arranged on the rear side inside the operation button 410 extends in an octagonal shape with the central axis CL as the center. Since they are arranged in concentric circles, the uneven line of the first button decoration portion 411a and the uneven line of the second button inner decoration portion 432g intersect each other as shown in FIG. The decoration can be shown to the player.

Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button interior decoration portion 432g are separated from each other in the front-rear direction (the direction in which the central axis CL extends), so that the first button decoration portion 411a and the first button decoration portion 411a are separated. With the second button interior decoration portion 432g, a geometric pattern having a three-dimensional feeling with a depth can be shown to the player, and the decoration including the inside of the operation button 410 can be enjoyed.

Further, in the effect operation unit 400, since the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button decoration portion 432g are separated from each other in the front-rear direction, when the player's eyes move, the first button decoration portion 411a becomes uneven. Since the degree of overlap between the line and the uneven line of the second button interior decoration portion 432g changes, the moving decoration can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained.

In this way, the effect operation unit 400 provides the player with a three-dimensional decoration that is moving and three-dimensional by the first button decoration portion 411a of the operation button 410 and the second button decoration portion 432g of the operation button inner decoration member 432. Since it can be shown, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal can be obtained.

In addition, the effect operation unit 400, inside the operation button 410 (inside the button frame 412), behind the operation button inner decoration member 432, the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button. An upper inner decoration board 435 and an operation button lower inner decoration board 436 are arranged, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof are caused to emit light, whereby the operation button inner decoration member 432 of the operation button 410 emits light. Can be decorated.
That is, the inside of the operation button 410 can be illuminated by the operation button left inside decoration board 433, the operation button right inside decoration board 434, the operation button upper inside decoration board 435, and the operation button below inside decoration board 436. As shown in FIG. 38, the LEDs mounted on the front surface of the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436 are as shown in FIG. When viewed from the direction in which the central axis line CL extends, since it is arranged inside the cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, light from them does not leak to the outside of the main body 413a. Therefore, only the inside of the operation button 410 can be favorably illuminated.

Further, the effect operation unit 400 includes the operation button left outside decoration board 422 of the operation board unit 420 behind the second button decoration portion 411b facing the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the operation button 410. The first LED 422a and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outside decoration substrate 423 are arranged, and the six second button decoration portions 411b of the operation button 410 are illuminated and decorated by causing the first LEDs 422a and 423a to emit light. You can As shown in FIG. 38, the first LED 422a of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decoration board 423 are the cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the frame unit. It is positioned between the tubular inner cylinder portion 416d of the frame body 416 of the frame 415, and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not leak to the inside of the body portion 413a or the outside of the inner cylinder portion 416d. Only the second button decoration portion 411b of the button 410 can be excellently illuminated and decorated.

Further, in the rendering operation unit 400, the second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board are provided behind the frame side lens 417 facing the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415. The second LED 423b of 423 is arranged, and the frame side lens 417 can be illuminated and decorated by making these second LEDs 422b and 423b emit light. The second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the second LED 423b of the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 are provided between the cylindrical inner cylinder portion 416d of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame body 416. Since the light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b is not leaked to the inside of the inner cylindrical portion 416d or the outside of the frame main body 416, only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be favorably illuminated and decorated. ..

Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the frame top lens decoration board 437 in the base unit 430 is arranged behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415, and a plurality of frames are mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decoration board 437. The frame top lens 418 can be made to emit light by making the LED of the above emit light. From the lower side of the unit base 431 of the unit base 431 where the frame top lens decoration substrate 437 is attached, a flat light shielding wall portion 431c projects forward to the vicinity of the rear lower end of the frame top lens 418, Light from the LED of the top lens decoration substrate 437 does not leak to the operation button 410 or the frame side lens 417 side, and only the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 can be excellently illuminated and decorated.

[3-5. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50. 47A is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, FIG. 47B is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit seen from the front, and FIG. 47C is a rear view of the door frame left side unit. It is the perspective view seen from. FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the rear. 50 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line LL in FIG. 47(a). The door frame left side unit 530 covers the front side of the door frame left side upper decoration board 161 and the door frame left side lower decoration board 162 (door frame left side decoration board 160) on the upper side of the dish unit 320. It is attached to the front left part of the 100 on the left side of the through hole 111. The door frame left side unit 530 is for decorating the left side in front view of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110.

The door frame left side unit 530 includes a vertically extending strip-shaped left unit base 531 attached to the front side of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 on the left side in front view of the through hole 111, and a left unit base 531. A transparent strip-shaped left unit diffusing lens member 532 attached to the front surface, and a translucent member arranged in front of the left unit diffusing lens member 532 and having a polyhedral decoration at the front end. A left unit decorative lens member (not shown) and a left unit decorative lens member, which is attached to the front upper portion of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member, protrudes forward in a tubular frame shape, and extends vertically A decoration base 534, a left unit lower decoration base 535 that is attached to the lower front surface of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decoration lens member, and protrudes forward in a frame shape shorter than the left unit upper decoration base 534; A transparent left unit decoration cover 536 attached to the front side of the left unit base 531 so as to cover the front end side of the left unit decoration lens member from the front side of the left unit upper decoration base 534 and the left unit lower decoration base 535; And a plurality of decorative members 537 attached to the front side of the decorative cover 536.

The left unit base 531 of the door frame left side unit 530 is formed in a shallow box shape with an open rear side, and has a plurality of openings 531a penetrating in the front and rear direction on the front surface. As shown, the plurality of openings 531a have circular holes and vertically extending rectangular holes. The left unit base 531 includes LEDs 161a and 162a mounted on the front surface of the door frame left side decoration board 160 (door frame left side upper decoration board 161 and door frame left side lower decoration board 162) from a plurality of openings 531a. It is attached to the front left side of the door frame base 110 so as to face forward. The openings 531a of the left unit base 531 are formed so that the LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are located at substantially the center in the vertical direction when assembled on the door frame 3. The left unit base 531 is formed of an opaque member.

Further, the left unit base 531 has a left reflection standing wall portion 538 (see FIGS. 5 and 23) which is erected from the glass plate 192 arranged so as to close the through hole 111 toward the front side. ing. In the left side reflection standing wall portion 538, an inner side surface which is flat and has a surface facing the through hole 111 is provided as a reflection surface capable of reflecting light. The reflecting surface may be provided not only by providing the inner side surface of the left-side reflection standing wall portion 538 with a reflecting material such as metal or resin, but also by attaching a reflecting seal to the inner side surface. It is possible. Further, as will be described later, the left side reflection standing wall portion 538 is formed by the left unit base 531 and serves as a part (left side portion) of the above-described reflection standing wall portion 33.

The left unit diffusion lens member 532 is formed of a transparent member and is vertically divided into an upper diffusion lens member 532A and a lower diffusion lens member 532B. The left unit diffusion lens member 532 includes a circular lens portion 532a having a circular shape in a front view corresponding to the circular opening 531a in the left unit base 531 and a square lens having a square shape in a front view corresponding to the square opening 531a. And a lens portion 532b. When the door frame left side unit 530 is assembled to the door frame 3, the LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decoration board 160 are located immediately after the centers of the circular lens portion 532a and the rectangular lens portion 532b. Has been formed.

The circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 is formed in a convex lens shape with smooth front and rear surfaces. With this circular lens portion 532a, it is possible to irradiate the light from the LEDs 161a, 162a arranged rearward to the front in a dot-like manner. By the light emitted forward from the circular lens portion 532a, the circular decoration portion of the left unit decoration lens member can be illuminated and decorated.

The rectangular lens portion 532b of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 includes a central diffusion reflection portion 532c which is recessed conically rearward at the center of the front surface, and a front diffusion lens portion 532d formed outside the central diffusion reflection portion 532c on the front surface. , An input lens portion 532e that bulges backward in a curved surface shape at the center of the rear surface (immediately after the central diffuse reflection portion 532c), and forward as the distance from the input lens portion 532e increases on the outside of the input lens portion 532e on the rear surface. And a front reflector 532f that is inclined so as to move.

The front diffusion lens portion 532d of the rectangular lens portion 532b is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by a line extending radially around the central diffuse reflection portion 532c. More specifically, in the front diffusion lens portion 532d, the groove portion is recessed rearward in an arc shape in the cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction, and the mountain portion between the grooves is forwardly directed. It bulges out in an arc shape, and the front surface is formed in a smooth wavy shape. Further, the front diffusion lens portion 532d is formed such that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately located in the circumferential direction with the radially extending lines that are divided in the circumferential direction as boundaries.

The front reflecting portion 532f of the rectangular lens portion 532b is formed by a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves that are divided in the circumferential direction by a line extending radially around the input lens portion 532e. The plurality of grooves are recessed in a V shape from the rear to the front, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The cross-sectional shape of the front reflecting portion 532f when cut along the radial direction is a sawtooth shape in which a mountain portion between the grooves is formed in a triangular shape in which the peaks are pointed rearward. The front reflector 532f is formed so that the groove and the mountain portion move forward as the distance from the center increases. Further, the front reflection portion 532f is formed such that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately located in the circumferential direction with the radially extending lines that are divided in the circumferential direction as boundaries. The radially extending lines that are divided in the circumferential direction coincide with the radially extending dividing lines in the front diffusion lens portion 532d.

In the rectangular lens portion 532b assembled to the door frame 3, the LEDs 161a and 162a corresponding to the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are located immediately after the input lens portion 532e.

Light emitted from the LEDs 161a and 162a to the front of the rectangular lens portion 532b is input into the rectangular lens portion 532b from the input lens portion 532e. Since the input lens section 532e bulges backward in a curved surface shape (convex lens shape), the light that spreads forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is refracted so as to travel forward in parallel, and the input light of Almost all can be guided to the conical central diffuse reflection section 532c. Then, the light guided to the central diffuse reflection section 532c is orthogonal to the axis extending in the front and rear direction (parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decoration board 160) due to the inclined conical surface of the central diffuse reflection section 532c. It is reflected so as to diffuse in various directions), and travels from the center side to the outside along the front surface of the rectangular lens portion 532b. Further, the light reflected by the central diffuse reflection section 532c travels from the center side to the outside (direction away from the center line of the central diffuse reflection section 532c) over the entire thickness of the rectangular lens section 532b in the front-rear direction.

When the light reflected from the center side to the outside substantially parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decoration substrate 160 in the rectangular lens portion 532b reaches the saw-shaped front reflection portion 532f, the light is reflected by the front reflection portion 532f. Reflect to the side. At this time, since the front reflecting portion 532f is inclined so that the rear surface thereof moves forward as the distance from the central diffuse reflecting portion 532c increases, the thickness of the rectangular lens portion 532b in the front-rear direction becomes thinner as the distance from the center increases. (See FIG. 50). Accordingly, the light that is reflected outward in the central diffuse reflection portion 532c over the entire thickness of the rectangular lens portion 532b in the front-rear direction is sequentially moved forward by the front reflection portion 532f from the center side toward the outside. Can be reflected.

Then, the light reflected forward by the front reflecting portion 532f passes through the front diffusion lens portion 532d and is emitted forward from the rectangular lens portion 532b. At this time, since the front diffusion lens portion 532d has a wavy cross section, the light reflected forward by the front reflection portion 532f can be diffused in various directions, and the rectangular lens portion 532b can be diffused. It is possible to irradiate the front surface (the rear surface of the left unit decoration lens member) substantially uniformly from the front surface of the.

In the prismatic lens portion 532b, in the front diffusion lens portion 532d and the front reflection portion 532f, a plurality of concentric circular grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves are separated by the dividing lines. Are radially displaced so that concentric arcuate grooves are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction. Therefore, the light radiated forward from the front surface of the rectangular lens portion 532b has a concentric circular stripe pattern. It is possible to prevent the light from becoming light, and it is possible to irradiate light with more uniform light and shade to the front. As a result, the multi-faced decorative portion in front of the rectangular lens portion 532b of the left unit decorative lens member can be substantially uniformly illuminated and decorated.

The left unit decorative lens member (not shown) is formed along the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536. The left unit decorative lens member is positioned in front of the circular decorative portion 532b of the left unit diffusing lens member 532 and the circular decorative portion formed in a position in front of the circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusing lens member 532. And a multifaceted decorative portion formed on the portion. The circular ornamental portion is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer circumference of a cylindrical portion whose front surface extends shortly before and after the depression. In the polyhedral decoration, a plurality of quadrangular pyramid-shaped parts are vertically arranged on the front surface of a vertically extending rectangular parallelepiped, and a plurality of triangular polyhedrons are vertically arranged on both left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped part. It is formed in the shape as described above. The circular decoration portion and the multifaceted decoration portion are formed in the same shape as the circular decoration portion 561a and the multifaceted decoration portion 561b of the right unit decoration lens member 561 in the door frame right side unit 550.

The left unit decorative lens member can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the transparent left unit decorative cover 536. Further, in the left unit decorative lens member, the multi-faceted decorative portion is forward from the rectangular lens portion 532b of the left unit diffusing lens member 532 by the light whose circular decorative portion is irradiated forward from the circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusing lens member 532. Each of the lights is illuminated and decorated with light.

The left unit upper decoration base 534 is a quadrangle that extends vertically in a front view, and is formed in a rectangular tube shape that extends in the front-rear direction. The left unit upper decorative base 534 is inclined such that a portion constituting a lower surface on the outer periphery thereof projects downward from the front end side toward the rear end side, and the lower portion of the portion penetrates back and forth. The left unit upper decorative base 534 is formed of a non-translucent member.

The left unit lower decoration base 535 is formed in a U shape that is open upward when viewed from the front. The left unit lower decoration base 535 is inclined to the rear end so that the upper side from the substantially center in the vertical direction at the front end moves backward as it goes upward. The left unit lower decorative base 535 is formed of a non-translucent member.

The left unit decorative cover 536 extends vertically over the entire height of the door frame left side unit 530. The left unit decorative cover 536 is bent so that an intermediate portion in the up-down direction is recessed rearward, and a lower portion is bent rearward along the front end of the left unit upper decorative base 534, and a left-shaped portion. The upper part is bent backward so as to follow the front end of the unit lower decoration base 535, and the lower end of the upper dogleg part and the upper end of the lower dogleg part are connected. And a linear portion.

The upper and lower ends of the left unit decorative cover 536 are attached to the front surface of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the front surface of the left unit lower decorative base 535, respectively. The left unit decorative cover 536 is formed of a transparent member, and the left unit decorative lens member arranged on the rear side can be viewed from the front side.

The decorative member 537 extends vertically short and is attached to the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decoration member 537 is formed of a non-translucent member.

[3-6. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 51 to 55 and the like. 51A is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, FIG. 51B is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit seen from the front, and FIG. 51C is a rear view of the door frame right side unit. It is the perspective view seen from. 52 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the rear.
54 is a cross-sectional view taken along line MM in FIG. 51(a). FIG. 55(a) is a sectional view taken along line NN in FIG. 51(a), and FIG. 55(b) is a sectional view taken along line OO in FIG. 51(a). The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit 320.

The door frame right side unit 550 includes a vertically extending box-shaped right unit base 551 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the through-hole 111 in front view, and a front surface of the right unit base 551. The door frame right side decoration board 552 mounted on the front side of the door frame right side decoration board 552 is attached to the left side of the front of the right unit base 551 in the front view center and extends in the vertical direction and the front-back direction. A transparent plate-shaped right unit left diffusing lens member 553, a sheet-shaped right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side surface of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553, and a right unit left decorative member And a transparent unit right unit left cover 555 attached to the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 so as to cover the left side of the unit 554.

In addition, the door frame right side unit 550 includes the right side left diffusion unit and the right unit left diffusion lens 553 on the front side of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 and on the right side of the front of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 in front view. The right unit right diffusion lens member 556, which is a transparent flat plate and is attached to the member 553 and extends in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction, and is attached to the right side surface of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 and is decorated. A sheet-shaped right unit right decoration member 557, and a transparent plate-shaped right unit right cover and 558 attached to the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 so as to cover the right side of the right unit right decoration member 557. There is.

Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is disposed between the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556, and is shallow in the front and right directions and is open in the vertical direction and the front and rear direction. A box-shaped and opaque right unit left light-shielding member 559 and a right unit right diffusing lens member 556 on the left side are attached to the right unit left light-shielding member 559 so as to close the open right side. The right unit right light blocking member 560, which is a flat plate-shaped unit, is provided.

Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the front ends of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556, and has a translucent right with a polyhedral decoration at the front end. The unit decoration lens member 561, the right and left sides of the right unit decoration lens member 561, and the front ends of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 are attached to the front surface of the right unit base 551. A frame-shaped right unit decoration base 562 that penetrates the front and rear, a transparent right unit cover 563 attached to the front side of the right unit decoration base 562 so as to close the front end opening of the right unit decoration base 562, and a right unit cover. And a plurality of decorative members 564 attached to the front side of 563. Although illustration is omitted, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached so as to vertically penetrate the right unit base 551, and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame of the door frame top unit 570. A connection cable for connecting to the top unit relay board 589 is provided.

The right unit base 551 of the door frame right side unit 550 is a quadrangle that is long in the up and down direction when viewed from the front, and extends in a rectangular tube shape that is short in the front-rear direction and is formed in a box shape in which the vicinity of the center in the front-rear direction is closed. Has been done. The right unit base 551 is formed of a non-translucent member.

Further, the right unit base 551 has a right reflection standing wall portion 568 (see FIG. 6 and FIG. 24) which is erected from the glass plate 192 arranged so as to close the through hole 111 toward the front side. ing. In the right side reflection standing wall portion 568, an inner side surface that is flat and is provided so as to face the through hole 111 is provided as a reflection surface capable of reflecting light. Note that, like this inner surface of the left reflective standing wall portion 538, this reflective surface is provided on the inner side surface of the right reflective standing wall portion 568 itself from a reflective material such as metal or resin, and also reflects on the inner surface. It can also be provided by attaching a seal for use. Further, as will be described later, the right side reflection standing wall portion 568 is formed by the right unit base 551 and serves as a part (right side portion) of the reflection standing wall portion 33 described above.

The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is formed in a strip plate shape extending vertically. The door frame right side decoration board 552 is a left LED 552a mounted on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the front side, a right LED 552b mounted on the right side of the center in the left-right direction on the front side, and mounted on the center in the left-right direction on the front side. And a plurality of middle LEDs 552c.
The left LED 552a of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 is for allowing the right unit left decoration member 554 to emit light through the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. The right LED 552b is for allowing the right unit right decoration member 557 to emit light through the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The middle LED 552c is for making the right unit decorative lens member 561 emit light.

The front and rear surfaces of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 are formed in white. The door frame right side decorative board 552 is vertically divided into an upper door frame right side upper decorative board 552A and a lower door frame right side lower decorative board 552B. Although illustration is omitted, the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B is connected to the door main body relay board of the door frame base unit 100, and the door frame right side upper decorative board 552A is the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B. It is connected to the.

The right unit left diffusing lens member 553 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 553a extending in the vertical direction and the front-back direction, and a rear wall portion 553b protruding from the rear side of the main body portion 553a to the right side in front view in a short flat plate shape. A cutout portion 553c that is cut out in a quadrangular shape from the right end side in front view of the rear wall portion 553b to the left side and is formed in plural at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a right unit left decorative member on the left side in front view of the main body portion 553a. A housing recess 553d that is shallowly recessed so as to accommodate 554, an input lens portion 553e that is provided rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a, and is provided in plurality in the up-down direction, on the right side of the main body portion 553a when viewed from the front. The input lens portion 553e is provided with a plurality of side surface reflection portions 553f arranged in the vertical direction so as to be located at the center in the vertical direction.

The main body 553a of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 has a shape in a side view in which the upper corner of the front end side of a vertically extending quadrangle is notched obliquely in a C-chamfered manner, and the lower side is upward as it goes forward. It is formed in a shape that is inclined so as to move to. Also, as shown in FIG. 55, the main body portion 553a is entirely moved with respect to the vertical line on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552 so as to move to the right in front view from the rear end side toward the front. It is slightly inclined. The front end of the main body portion 553a, when assembled to the door frame 3, projects forward more than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530.

The rear wall portion 553b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the right end of the rear wall portion 553b extends to substantially the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The left end of the rear wall portion 556b of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is in contact with the right end of the rear wall portion 553b.

The plurality of cutout portions 553c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decoration board 552. When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 faces forward from the plurality of cutouts 553c, and the plurality of middle LEDs 552c satisfactorily emits light from the right unit decoration lens member 561. Can be decorated.

The housing recess 553d has a flat bottom surface, and the outer peripheral shape thereof is substantially the same as the outer shape of the right unit left decoration member 554. Accordingly, the right unit left decoration member 554 can be accommodated.

The plurality of input lens portions 553e project rearward at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a. Specifically, the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is formed at approximately the center in the vertical direction when the right diffusion lens member 553 is divided into six equal parts in the vertical direction. Although not shown in detail, the input lens portion 553e is a rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending quadrangle is projected rearward, and is depressed forward from the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion so as to be curved in a spherical shape. And a part. These input lens portions 553e are respectively positioned immediately before the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decoration board 552 in a state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. Thereby, the light from the left LED 552a can be input so as to be widely diffused in the main body portion 553a.

A plurality of (six) side surface reflection parts 553f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflection part 553f is formed by a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves divided in the circumferential direction by a line extending radially around the input lens part 553e. In each of the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves, the surface on the side closer to the input lens portion 553e is inclined with respect to the surface of the main body portion 553a and the surface on the side farther from the input lens portion 553e is formed on the main body portion. It extends perpendicularly to the surface of 553a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side surface reflection portion 553f is formed in a pointed triangular shape such that a mountain portion between the grooves is directed to the center side when the side surface reflection portion 553f is cut in the radial direction around the input lens portion 553e. , The whole is formed in a saw shape. Further, the side surface reflection portion 553f is formed such that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with a radial line dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction as a boundary. ing.

In the right unit left diffusing lens member 553, the light emitted from the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 to the front is transferred from the rear surface of the input lens unit 553e into the main unit 553a of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553. It is incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 553e is curved forward, the curved surface refracts the light from the left LED 552a so as to spread it, and the input lens portion 553e in the main body portion 553a. It will be spread radially toward the front centering around.

The main body portion 553a is slightly inclined with respect to the line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decoration board 552 so that the entire main body portion 553a moves to the right as viewed from the front as it moves toward the front. The light emitted from the left LED 552a mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative substrate 552 and entering the main body portion 553a from the input lens portion 553e strikes the flat left surface inside the main body portion 553a. However, the direct light from the left LED 552a is not emitted to the outside from the left surface of the main body portion 553a due to the angle of incidence with respect to the left surface of the main body portion 553a, and is reflected to the side surface reflection portion 553f side at the inner surface of the left surface. Becomes

Then, the light incident forward from the input lens portion 553e into the main body portion 553a is reflected leftward in front view by hitting the sawtooth side surface reflection portion 553f, and outward from the left surface of the main body portion 553a. It will be irradiated. Note that light is emitted outward (to the right in front view) from the right surface (side surface reflection portion 553f) of the main body portion 553a, but the right unit left light shielding member 559 arranged on the right side of the main body portion 553a is white. Since it is a member, the left surface of the right unit left light shielding member 559 is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit left light shielding member 559 is emitted to the left side through the main body portion 553a. .. Therefore, from the left surface of the main body portion 553a, the light reflected to the left by the side surface reflection portion 553f in the main body portion 553a and the light reflected from the side surface reflection portion 553f to the right side to the left side of the right unit left light shielding member 559 are left. The light reflected toward one side and passing through the main body 553a is emitted to the left, so that the right unit left decoration member 554 attached to the left side of the main body 553a can be illuminated and decorated with good brightness. it can.

Further, in the side surface reflection portion 553f, the plurality of concentric circular grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and the concentric circular arc-shaped grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary to form the concentric circular groove. Are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction, so that the light emitted from the left surface of the main body portion 553a to the outside (to the left) is prevented from being light having the light and shade of a concentric stripe pattern. It is possible to illuminate the left side with a lighter and more uniform light. As a result, the right unit left decoration member 554 accommodated in the accommodation recess 553d on the left side of the main body portion 553a can be illuminated substantially uniformly.

Since the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 is formed of a transparent member, the side surface reflection formed on the opposite side from the front view left side of the main body 553a (the side on which the housing recess 553d is formed). A pattern composed of a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves of the portion 553f and radially extending lines can be visually recognized. Therefore, when the transparent portion is formed in the right unit left decoration member 554, the pattern of the side surface reflection portion 553f of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 can be visually recognized through the transparent portion, and the transparent portion in the right unit left decoration member 554 is transparent. Such a portion can be decorated by the side surface reflection portion 553f.

The right unit left decoration member 554 is formed in a thin sheet shape, and the decoration such as the manufacturer logo of the pachinko machine 1 or the logo according to the concept of the presentation presented to the player on the game board 5 is translucent. Has been applied. The right unit left cover 555 protects the outer surface of the right unit left decorative member 554 when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

The right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed substantially symmetrically with the right unit left diffusion lens member 553, and has the same configuration. More specifically, the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 556a extending in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction, and a rear wall projecting from the rear side of the main body portion 556a to the left side in a front view in a short flat plate shape. A portion 556b, a rear wall portion 556b, a notch portion 556c which is notched in a quadrangular shape from the left end side in a front view to the right side, and is formed at predetermined intervals in the up-down direction, and the right side in a front view of the main body portion 556a. A housing recess 556d that is shallowly recessed so as to house the unit right decorative member 557, an input lens portion 556e that protrudes rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a, and is provided in the vertical direction, and a front view of the main body portion 556a. On the left surface side, a plurality of side surface reflecting portions 556f are arranged in the vertical direction so that each input lens portion 556e is at the center in the vertical direction.

The main unit 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 has a shape in a side view whose upper corner on the front end side of a vertically extending quadrangle is notched obliquely in a C-chamfered manner, and the lower side is upward as it goes forward. The right unit left diffusing lens member 553 has an outer shape that is substantially the same as the main body 553a of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553. Further, as shown in FIG. 55, the main body portion 556a is entirely moved with respect to a vertical line on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552 so as to move leftward when viewed from the front as it goes from the rear end side to the front side. It is slightly inclined. The front end of the main body portion 556a, when assembled to the door frame 3, projects forward more than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530.

The rear wall portion 556b, when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, has its left end extending substantially to the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The right end of the rear wall portion 553b of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 is in contact with the left end of the rear wall portion 556b.

The plurality of cutout portions 556c are formed in the vertical direction at predetermined intervals, and a part thereof corresponds to the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decoration board 552. The plurality of cutouts 556c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of cutouts 553c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Therefore, in the state in which the door frame right side unit 550 is assembled, the rectangular opening that penetrates in the front and rear direction is formed by the cutout portion 553c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the cutout portion 556c of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. Is formed, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 faces forward from the opening, and the right unit decoration lens member 561 can be favorably illuminated and decorated by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c.

The housing recess 556d has a flat bottom surface, and the outer peripheral shape thereof is substantially the same as the outer shape of the right unit right decorative member 557. Thereby, the right unit right decoration member 557 can be accommodated.

The plurality of input lens portions 556e project rearward at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a. Specifically, the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed at approximately the center in the vertical direction when the right diffusion lens member 556 is divided into six equal parts in the vertical direction. Although not shown in detail, the input lens portion 556e is a rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending quadrangle is projected rearward, and is recessed forward from the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion so as to be curved spherically. And a part. These input lens portions 556e are respectively positioned immediately before the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decoration board 552 in a state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. This allows the light from the right LED 552b to be input so as to be diffused widely within the main body 556a.

A plurality of (six) side reflection parts 556f are provided in the vertical direction. Each of the side surface reflection portions 556f is formed by a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves that are divided in the circumferential direction by a line that extends radially around the input lens portion 556e. In each of the plurality of concentric arcuate grooves, the surface on the side closer to the input lens portion 556e in each groove is inclined with respect to the surface of the main body portion 556a, and the surface on the side far from the input lens portion 556e is the main body portion. It extends perpendicularly to the surface of 556a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side surface reflecting portion 556f has a cross-sectional shape formed into a sharp triangular shape such that a mountain portion between the grooves is directed toward the center when cut in the radial direction around the input lens portion 556e. , The whole is formed in a saw shape. Further, the side surface reflection portion 556f is formed such that groove portions and mountain portions are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with a radial line dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction as a boundary. ing.

In the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, the light emitted forward from the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 goes from the rear surface of the input lens portion 556e into the main body portion 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. It is incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 556e is curved forward, the curved surface refracts the light from the right LED 552b so as to spread the light, and the input lens portion 556e in the main body portion 556a. It will be spread radially toward the front centering around.

The main body portion 556a is slightly inclined with respect to the line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decoration board 552 so that the entire main body portion 556a moves leftward when viewed from the front as it moves toward the front. The light emitted from the right LED 552b mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative substrate 552 and incident on the main body 556a from the input lens unit 556e strikes the flat right surface of the main body 556a. However, the direct light from the right LED 552b is not emitted to the outside from the left surface of the main body portion 556a due to the angle of incidence with respect to the right surface of the main body portion 556a, and is reflected to the side surface reflection portion 556f side on the inner surface of the right surface. Becomes

Then, the light incident forward from the input lens portion 556e into the main body portion 556a is reflected to the right in a front view by hitting the sawtooth side surface reflection portion 556f, and outward from the right surface of the main body portion 556a. It will be irradiated. Although light is emitted outward (left in front view) from the right surface (side surface reflecting portion 556f) of the main body 556a, the right unit right light shielding member 560 arranged on the left side of the main body 556a has a white color. Since it is a member, the right surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560 is illuminated brightly, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit right light shielding member 560 is emitted to the right side through the main body 556a. .. Therefore, from the right surface of the main body portion 556a, the light reflected to the right by the side surface reflection portion 556f in the main body portion 556a and the light reflected to the left from the side surface reflection portion 556f to the right surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560 Light that is reflected toward one side and passed through the main body 556a is emitted to the right, so that the right unit right decorative member 557 attached to the right side of the main body 556a can be illuminated and decorated with good brightness. it can.

In the side surface reflection portion 556f, the concentric circular grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and the concentric arc-shaped grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary to form the concentric arc-shaped grooves. Are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction, so that the light radiated outward (to the right) from the right surface of the main body portion 556a is prevented from becoming light having a concentric circular stripe pattern. It is possible to irradiate the light with a more uniform light and shade to the right. As a result, the right unit right decoration member 557 accommodated in the accommodation recess 556d on the right side of the main body portion 556a can be substantially uniformly illuminated.

Since the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed of a transparent member, the side surface reflection formed on the opposite side from the right side in the front view of the main body 556a (the side where the housing recess 556d is formed). A pattern made up of a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves of the portion 556f and radially extending lines can be visually recognized. Therefore, when the transparent portion is formed in the right unit right decoration member 557, the pattern of the side surface reflection portion 556f of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 can be visually recognized through the transparent portion, and the transparent portion in the right unit right decoration member 557 is transparent. Such a portion can be decorated by the side surface reflection portion 556f.

The right unit right decoration member 557 is formed in a thin sheet shape, and the decoration such as the manufacturer logo of the pachinko machine 1 or the logo according to the concept of the effect presented to the player on the game board 5 is translucent. Has been applied. The right unit right cover 558 protects the outer surface of the right unit right decoration member 557 when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.
The right unit right decoration member 557 and the right unit right cover 558 are formed substantially symmetrically with the right unit left decoration member 554 and the right unit left cover 555. The decorations applied to the right unit left decoration member 554 and the right unit right decoration member 557 may be the same or different decorations.

The right unit left light shielding member 559 is formed to have a shape in a side view that is substantially the same as the shape of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 in a side view.
The right unit left light shielding member 559 is formed in a shallow box shape with the front and right sides thereof open.
The right unit left light shielding member 559 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 559a extending in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction, a rear wall portion 559b protruding from the rear side of the main body portion 559a to the right side in a front view in a short flat plate shape, and the rear portion. A plurality of notched portions 559c, which are formed in a rectangular shape from the right end side of the wall portion 559b in a front view to the left and are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and extend from the right surface of the main body portion 559a to the right and A plurality of flat plate-shaped reinforcing portions 559d extending from the wall portion 559b to the front end of the main body portion 559a are provided.

The main body portion 559a of the right unit left light-shielding member 559 has a shape in a side view in which an upper corner of a vertically extending quadrangle is notched obliquely in a C-chamfered shape, and the lower side is upward as it goes forward. The main unit 553a and 556a of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 are formed to have substantially the same outer shape.

The rear wall portion 559b, when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, has its left end extending to the right of the right unit base 551 substantially in the left-right direction. The left surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560 is in contact with the right end of the rear wall portion 559b.

The plurality of cutouts 559c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decoration board 552. The plurality of cutouts 559c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of cutouts 553c and 556c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. Therefore, in the state in which the door frame right side unit 550 is assembled, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 faces forward from the plurality of notches 559c, and the plurality of middle LEDs 552c favorably emit the right unit decoration lens member 561. Can be decorated.

The plurality of reinforcing portions 559d are provided in three sets with a predetermined distance in the vertical direction, with one pair of the reinforcing portions 559d having a height substantially equal to the left and right widths and vertically spaced. The reinforcing portion 559d of each set is formed at a position behind the decorative member 564 attached to the right unit cover 563. The strength and rigidity of the entire door frame right side unit 550 are increased by the plurality of reinforcing portions 559d.

The right unit right light-shielding member 560 has a shape in a side view in which an upper corner of a vertically extending quadrangle is notched obliquely in a C-chamfered manner, and the lower side moves upward as it goes forward. The right unit left light shielding member 559 is formed to have an inclined shape, and has substantially the same shape as the main body portion 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559. The right unit right light blocking member 560 closes the right side opening of the right unit left light blocking member 559 formed in a shallow box shape to the right when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

The right unit left light blocking member 559 and the right unit right light blocking member 560 are each formed of a white member. As shown in FIG. 55, the right unit left light blocking member 559 and the right unit right light blocking member 560 are assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the respective main body portion 559a and the right unit right light blocking member 560 are connected to the right unit. The left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 are arranged so as to be close to the main body portions 553a and 556a. As a result, the main body portion 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are separated from each other in the left-right direction, forming a space extending in the up-down direction and the front-back direction with a predetermined width in the left-right direction. .. The light emitted forward from the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 through the space formed between the main body portion 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 is the right unit decoration. The rear side of the lens member 561 is irradiated.

Further, the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are formed of a non-translucent member, and irradiate forward from the left LED 552a, the middle LED 552c, and the right LED 552b on the door frame right side decoration substrate 552, respectively. The left light 552a, the right LED 552b, and the right unit left decoration member 554, the right unit right decoration member 557, and the right unit decoration lens member 561 respectively correspond to the left LED 552a, the right LED 552b, and It can be illuminated and decorated only by the middle LED 552c.

Further, the right unit left light-shielding member 559 and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are arranged on the rear side of the respective divided spaces because the internal space is divided into four vertically by the three reinforcing portions 559d. By the LED 552c in the door frame right side decoration substrate 552, it is possible to prevent light from interfering with each other, so that the portion of the right unit decoration lens member 561 located in front of each space can be prevented. , Each can be independently illuminated. That is, on the front end side of the door frame right side unit 550, it is possible to vertically divide into a plurality of (four) regions and individually light-embellish them.

The right unit decorative lens member 561 is formed in a shape along the front end shapes of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 includes a circular decorative portion 561a formed in a circular shape in a front view and a polyhedral decorative portion 561b extending vertically and formed with a plurality of polyhedrons. The circular decorative portion 561a is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a cylindrical portion whose front surface is recessed and extends shortly before and after the depression. In the multifaceted decoration portion 561b, a plurality of quadrangular pyramid-shaped portions are vertically arranged on the front surface of a vertically extending rectangular parallelepiped, and a plurality of triangular polyhedrons are vertically arranged on both left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. It is formed in the shape that it was installed.

More specifically, in the right unit decorative lens member 561, a plurality of circular decorative portions 561a and a multifaceted decorative portion 561b are divided into four spaces by the three sets of reinforcing portions 559d in the right unit left light shielding member 559. In the three parts from the top of the front part, the multi-faced decoration parts 561b are arranged on the upper and lower sides of the circular decoration part 561a arranged at the center in the up-and-down direction. It is formed so that only the portion 561b is arranged.

The right unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front ends of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the transparent right unit cover 563. The right unit decorative lens member 561 is illuminated and decorated by the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 arranged rearward.

The right unit decoration base 562 is formed in a tubular frame shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction. The right unit decoration base 562 is formed in a shape that conforms to the shapes of the front end and the upper end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decoration base 562 is formed so as to cover both left and right outer sides near the front end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, and both right and left sides of the right unit decoration lens member 561. The front end of the right unit decoration lens member 561 slightly projects forward from the front end of the right unit decoration base 562 when assembled in the door frame right side unit 550. The right unit decoration base 562 is formed of a non-translucent member.

The right unit cover 563 is formed so as to be able to close the front end opening of the right unit decoration base 562. The right unit cover 563 is formed of a transparent member, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 arranged on the rear side can be viewed from the front side.

The decoration member 564 extends vertically short and is attached to the front surface of the right unit cover 563 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decoration member 564 is formed of a non-translucent member. The three decoration members 564 divide the right unit cover 563 (right unit decoration lens member 561) into four parts in the vertical direction.

The door frame right side unit 550, in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3, protrudes forward in a plate shape larger than the door frame left side unit 530, and slightly protrudes forward from the front end of the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320. There is. The door frame right side unit 550 independently includes a right unit left decoration member 554 and a right unit right decoration member 557 provided on the protruding left and right side surfaces, and a right unit decoration lens member 561 provided at the front end. It can be used as a luminous decoration.

The door frame right side unit 550 has a plate-like shape and protrudes largely to the front. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, the door frame right side unit 550 is adjacent to the pachinko machine on the right side. It is possible to exert an effect like a partition between the spaces. As a result, it is possible to make a player playing on the pachinko machine 1 feel as if he/she is playing in a private room, and to allow other players around him to play in a relaxed atmosphere without hesitation. You can

Further, since the door frame right side unit 550 is largely projected forward, in the gaming hall where the pachinko machines 1 are arranged side by side, even if the pachinko machines 1 are not located in front of the pachinko machines 1, the island equipment The pachinko machine 1 can be visually recognized even from the lateral direction along the line, and the pachinko machine 1 can be conspicuous in a game hall where a large number of pachinko machines are arranged. Therefore, when the right unit left decoration member 554 and the right unit right decoration member 557 on both the left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550 are decorated with light emission, even if the book is not located near the front of the pachinko machine 1, the book is viewed from a distance. The presence of the pachinko machine 1 can be notified, and the pachinko machine 1 can be highly appealing to the player.

Furthermore, in the door frame right side unit 550, when a problem such as a ball clogging or an error occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens on both left and right sides. By illuminating and decorating the members 561 and the like in a unique manner, it is possible to immediately notify the attendant of the game hall of the occurrence of the problem and recognize the problem quickly. Therefore, the interruption of the game of the player can be resolved at an early stage, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed and reducing the interest in the game.

[3-7. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 56 to 59 and the like. 56A is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, FIG. 56B is a perspective view of the door frame top unit seen from the front, and FIG. 56C is a view of the door frame top unit seen from the rear. It is a perspective view. FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and seen from the rear. 59 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line P-P in FIG. 56. The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper side of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 and to the upper side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the center of the left and right sides of the center base 571 at the center in the left-right direction above the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100. A pair of side bases 572 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110, a pair of upper speakers 573 attached to the front surfaces of the pair of side bases 572, and extending left and right, with the center in the left-right direction protruding forward. A pair of openings 574a penetrating forward and backward at the front position of the pair of upper speakers 573, which are box-shaped with the rear open, and from the position closer to the center in the left-right direction than the pair of openings 574a. Each of the slits has a plurality of slits 574b (three in each of the left and right) that extend from each other, penetrate through each in the front-rear direction, and are vertically separated from each other, and are attached to the front side of the central base 571 and the pair of side bases 572. A unit main body 271 and a speaker cover 575 made of punching metal, which are arranged in front of the pair of upper speakers 573 and are attached to the rear side of the unit main body 271 so as to close the pair of openings 574a, respectively. ing.

Here, although illustration is omitted, each of the pair of side bases 572 (the left side base 572a and the right side base 572b) has an internal space opened only toward the side where the opening window is provided. In the inner space of the outer window, the outer light emitting section 34 (the left outer light emitting section 34a, the right outer light emitting section 34b) is provided so as to emit light from the outer side to the outer side of the opening window, and from the outer side of the opening window. The outer peripheral light detecting section 35 (the left outer peripheral light detecting section 35a, the right outer peripheral light detecting section 35b) for detecting the light of the outer peripheral light is provided.

That is, as will be described later, according to such a structure, the outer-peripheral-light-emitting portion 34 and the outer-peripheral-light detecting portion 35 are arranged outside the outer periphery of the opening window. It becomes possible to make the substantially entire area of the window function as a portion (operation receiving portion) for receiving an operation by the player. In addition, the outer-periphery-light detecting unit 35 is not disposed in the exposed state, but is disposed in the internal space 3435 (see FIG. 119) of the side base 572 that is opened only toward the side where the opening window is provided. Therefore, when detecting the light by the outer peripheral light detecting section 35, it is possible to preferably eliminate the effect light that may be a disturbance.

The door frame top unit 570 is mounted on the front surface of the unit main body 271 at the center in the left-right direction and has a translucent top middle decoration member 576 and is mounted on the rear side of the top middle decoration member 576. A door frame top middle decoration board 577 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface, and a plurality of slits 574b respectively attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 are closed, and both left and right ends of the top middle decoration member 576 are closed. A plurality of transparent flat plate-shaped light guide members 578 (three in each of the left and right) extending from the vicinity to the vicinity of the left and right ends of the unit main body 271 across the opening 574a and the top middle decoration member 576 on the front surface of the unit main body 271. Top left decorative lens member 579 and top right decorative lens member 580 attached to the left and right sides and covering the front surfaces of the plurality (three) of light guide members 578, and top left decorative lens member 579 and top right decoration. Top middle left decoration members 581 attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 from the front sides of the lens members 580 and extending from both left and right sides of the top middle decoration member 576 to the vicinity of the center side end of the opening 574a. And a top middle right decoration member 582.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached inside the left and right side surfaces of the unit main body 271, respectively, and the LEDs are respectively mounted on the portions of the plurality (three) of light guide members 578 facing the left and right outer ends. The door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 that are present, and a plurality of (three) slits 574b formed respectively on the left and right sides of the center of the rear side of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction penetrate therethrough. A pair of substrate bases 585 attached to the respective parts, and a door in which a plurality of LEDs 586a and 587a are mounted at positions behind the slits 574b of the unit main body 271 respectively attached to the front surfaces of the pair of substrate bases 585. The frame top middle left decoration board 586 and the door frame top middle right decoration board 587 are attached to the front side of the door frame top middle left decoration board 586 and the door frame top middle right decoration board 587 to the rear side of the unit main body 271, respectively. And a pair of light blocking members 588.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 is provided on the central base 571 so as to cover the door frame top unit relay board 589 attached to the front surface of the central base 571 in the unit main body 271 and the front surface of the door frame top unit relay board 589. The relay board cover 590 attached, the upper cover 591 attached to the unit body 271 so as to close the upper opening 574c of the unit body 271, and the unit lower cover 574d so as to close the lower opening 574d of the unit body 271. A lower cover 592 attached to the main body 271.

The center base 571 of the door frame top unit 570 is formed in a quadrangle extending in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The central base 571 is formed in a box shape that is open rearward, and has a plurality of irregularities on the front surface. The pair of side bases 572 are attached to the left and right ends of the center base 571, respectively. The pair of upper speakers 573 are attached to the front surfaces of the side bases 572, respectively. The pair of upper speakers 573 are obliquely attached such that the front surface of each of the upper speakers 573 assembled to the door frame top unit 570 is rearward so that the side closer to the center of the door frame top unit 570 in the left-right direction moves rearward. The pair of upper speakers 573 are full-range cone-type speakers capable of outputting sound in a wide frequency band.

The unit main body 271 is formed in such a shape that the lower portion near the left and right ends of a quadrangle extending left and right bulges downward as viewed from the front. In other words, the unit main body 271 is formed such that the shape of the unit main body 271 in a front view is a rectangular shape that extends laterally and is cut out in a trapezoidal shape that is narrowed upward from the lower end side. The unit main body 271 has a quadrangle extending in the left-right direction in plan view, and a bottom portion having a half width of the quadrangle (the length in the left-right direction) centered on the center in the left-right direction on the front end side of the quadrangle. Is formed in a shape that is a combination of a trapezoid that protrudes forward and a square that protrudes forward with the front end side of the trapezoid as a long side. Therefore, in the unit main body 271, both sides of the portion projecting forward at the center in the left-right direction on the front surface connect the left end of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction and the left end in the front end of the front projecting portion. It is located behind (recessed).

The unit main body 271 is formed with openings 574a penetrating in the front-rear direction, respectively, at portions on the front surface from positions on both sides in the left-right direction to positions outside the portions protruding forward. In addition, the unit main body 271 has a plurality of slits that extend laterally at a predetermined height in the vertical direction and penetrate in the front-rear direction in a portion that extends obliquely to the frontwardly protruding trapezoidal portion. 574b is formed. The plurality of slits 574b extend from the vicinity of the front end of the portion of the front surface of the unit main body 271 that extends obliquely forward to the left and right to the vicinity of the opening 574a. Further, the plurality of slits 574b are formed on both sides of the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction, and three slits 574b are vertically spaced apart from each other.

Further, the unit main body 271 has an upper opening 574c that is cut out in a square shape from the rear end toward the front in the center of the upper surface in the left-right direction, and a lower opening 574d that is cut away from the rear end toward the front in the left-right direction on the lower surface. , Are provided. The upper opening 574c of the unit main body 271 is closed by the upper cover 591. The lower opening 574d is closed by the lower cover 592.

In addition, the unit main body 271 is provided with a top left decoration portion 574e and a top right decoration portion 574f that extend vertically at both left and right ends. The front surface of the top left decorative portion 574e is formed at a position in which the front-rear direction is substantially the same as the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The top right decorative portion 574f is formed such that its front surface is located in front of the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The unit main body 271 is formed of an opaque member.

The top middle decoration member 576 is attached to the front end of the portion of the front surface of the unit main body 271 that projects forward at the center in the left-right direction. The decoration member 576 in the top has a shape in a front view that is bent so that the central portion of the lower side of the substantially square is located downward, and extends outward in the left-right direction from the upper ends of the right and left sides of the variable pentagon. The right side of the pentagon and the lower ends of the right and left sides of the pentagon are connected to each other to form a substantially right triangle. The decoration member 576 in the top is inclined so that the variable pentagonal portion on the front surface moves backward as it goes downward. The top middle decoration member 576 is formed in a three-dimensional shape as a whole, and has translucency.

The door frame top middle decorative board 577 is rearwardly of the top middle decoration member 576 in a state in which the front surface is inclined so as to move backward as it goes downward along the front surface of the variable pentagonal portion of the top middle decorative member 576. Mounted on the side. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the door frame top middle decoration board 577, and the top middle decoration member 576 can be made to emit light by making these LEDs emit light.

The light guide member 578 is formed of a transparent member. The light guide member 578 is formed in a shape along both left and right sides of the front end of the front surface of the unit main body 271 with respect to the front end. Explaining the side close to both ends in the left-right direction of the unit main body 271 as the end side and the side close to the center as the center side, the light guide member 578 is a straight part that extends straight left and right from the end side toward the center side. 578a, and an arc portion 578b extending in an arc shape having a large radius so as to move forward from the end side on the center side of the straight portion 578a toward the center side. In the light guide member 578, the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the height in the vertical direction at the straight portion 578a, and the depth in the front-rear direction is larger than the height in the vertical direction at the arc portion 578b. Further, the light guide member 578 is formed such that the height in the vertical direction is constant in the straight portion 578a, and the height in the vertical direction is reduced in the arc portion 578b toward the center side. In the state where the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the straight portion 578a is located immediately before the opening 574a of the unit body 271, and the arc portion 578b closes the slit 574b of the unit body 271 from the front. There is.

The light guide member 578 includes a diffusive reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a and having a saw-like concavo-convex portion, and a diffusion input portion 578d formed on the rear surface side of the arc portion 578b and formed of a plurality of irregularities. Is equipped with.

In the state where the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the left and right outer ends thereof face the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decoration substrate 583 or the door frame top right decoration substrate 584. At the same time, the diffusion input unit 578d faces the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decoration board 586 or the door frame top middle right decoration board 587. When the light from the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 is incident from the ends on both the left and right outer sides of the light guide member 578, the light is transmitted to the straight portion 578a. While advancing inside, the diffuse reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a sequentially reflects the light forward from the end portion side, and the entire front surface of the straight portion 578a emits light forward. A top left decorative lens member 579 or a top right decorative lens member 580 is arranged in front of the light guide member 578, and a portion of these in front of the straight portion 578a is decorated with light emission.

Further, the light guide member 578 receives light from the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decoration substrate 586 or the door frame top middle right decoration substrate 587 from the diffusion input portion 578d formed on the rear surface of the arc portion 578b. Then, the light is widely diffused into the arc portion 578b due to the unevenness of the diffusion input portion 578d, and the light is emitted forward from the entire front surface of the arc portion 578b. As a result, the portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the arc portion 578b can be decorated with light emission.

As described above, the light guide member 578 includes the LEDs 583a and 586a of the door frame top left decoration board 583 and the door frame top middle left decoration board 586, or the door frame top right decoration board 584 and the door frame top middle right decoration board 587. Light from the LEDs 584a and 587a can be guided to light-emit the entire top left decorative lens member 579 or top right decorative lens member 580 arranged in the front in a good (uniform) state.

The top left decorative lens member 579 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 arranged on the left side of the center of the front surface of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction. The top left decorative lens member 579 has three decorative lens portions 579a that individually accommodate the three light guide members 578 from the front. The decorative lens portion 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 is formed in a shape following the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and the upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 579a, projections and depressions of a square truncated pyramid are arranged in a row on the left and right.

The top left decoration lens member 579 extends from the left end of the top middle decoration member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the right end of the top left decoration portion 574e of the unit main body 271. That is, the top left decoration lens member 579 decorates substantially the entire left side of the top middle decoration member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top left decoration lens member 579 is illuminated and decorated by the LEDs 583a and 586a of the door frame top left decoration substrate 583 and the door frame top middle left decoration substrate 586 through the three light guide members 578.

The top right decorative lens member 580 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 arranged on the right side of the center of the front surface of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction. The top right decorative lens member 580 has three decorative lens portions 580a that individually accommodate the three light guide members 578 from the front. The decorative lens portion 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 is formed in a shape following the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and the upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 580a, projections and depressions of a square truncated pyramid are provided in a row on the left and right.

The top right decoration lens member 580 extends from the right end of the top middle decoration member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 to the left end of the top right decoration portion 574f of the unit body 271. That is, the top right decoration lens member 580 decorates substantially the entire right side of the top middle decoration member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top right decorative lens member 580 is illuminated and decorated by the LEDs 584a and 587a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 through the three light guide members 578.

The top middle left decoration member 581 is attached to the front surface of the unit body 271 from the front of the top left decoration lens member 579 between the opening 574a on the left side on the front surface of the unit body 271 and the top middle decoration member 576. The top middle left decoration member 581 is attached to the top left decoration lens member 579 so as to fill up between the three decoration lens portions 579a of the top left decoration lens member 579 when assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The decoration lens member 579 projects forward from the front surface of the decoration lens member 579. The top middle left decoration member 581 is formed of a non-translucent member.

The top middle right decoration member 582 is attached to the front surface of the unit body 271 from the front of the top right decoration lens member 580 between the opening 574a on the right side on the front surface of the unit body 271 and the top middle decoration member 576. The top middle right decorative member 582 is attached to the door frame top unit 570 so as to fill the space between the three decorative lens portions 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 when assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The decorative lens member 580 projects forward from the front surface. The top middle right decoration member 582 is formed of a non-translucent member.

The door frame top left decorative substrate 583 is attached inside the left side surface (top left decorative portion 574e) in the unit main body 271 with the surface on which the LED 583a is mounted facing rightward. On the door frame top left decorative substrate 583, an LED 583a is mounted at a position facing the left end faces of the three light guide members 578 attached to the front surface on the left side of the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction (see FIG. 59). ). The three LEDs 583a can each independently emit light. By the LED 583a of the door frame top left decoration substrate 583, the portion of the top left decoration lens member 579 located in front of the opening 574a on the left side of the unit main body 271 is inserted through the straight portions 578a of the three light guide members 578. Can be decorated with luminous.

The door frame top right decoration board 584 is attached inside the right side surface (top right decoration portion 574f) in the unit main body 271 with the surface on which the LED 584a is mounted facing left. On the door frame top right decoration board 584, an LED 584a is mounted at a position facing the right end surfaces of three light guide members 578 attached to the front surface on the right side of the center of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction (see FIG. 59). ). The three LEDs 584a can each independently emit light. The LED 584a of the door frame top right decoration substrate 584 allows the portion of the top right decoration lens member 580 located in front of the opening 574a on the right side of the unit main body 271 via the straight portions 578a of the three light guide members 578. Can be decorated with luminous.

The pair of substrate bases 585 are attached to the rear side of the unit main body 271 where the plurality of slits 574b are formed. The pair of substrate bases 585 are formed substantially symmetrically with each other. The board base 585 has a side wall that is substantially square in a side view and that has sides that extend in the vertical and front and rear directions, a rear wall in a front view that extends outward in the left-right direction at a right angle from the rear side of the side wall, and a front end of the upper side of the side wall. A line that connects the upper side of the side wall to the middle is taken as a hypotenuse, and connects the upper side of the side wall and the upper side of the rear wall.The upper wall of the right-angled triangle is connected to the upper side of the side wall and the lower side of the rear side of the rear wall. And a lower wall of a right-angled triangle, and is formed in a triangular columnar box shape with an opening between upper and lower hypotenuses. The substrate base 585 is attached to the unit main body 271 so that the open portion is closed by the unit main body 271. To the board base 585, the door frame top middle left decoration board 586 or the door frame top middle right decoration board 587 is attached so that the open portion is closed.

The door frame top middle left decoration board 586 is attached to the board base 585 so that a box-shaped open portion is closed from the front in the board base 585 attached to the left side of the left and right center of the unit main body 271. To be The door frame top middle left decoration board 586 is attached to the front surface of the board base 585, so that the front surface moves leftward and rightward so as to move forward toward the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction. It will be tilted. Accordingly, the door frame top middle left decoration substrate 586 is a state where the front surface of the door frame top unit 570 is assembled with the door frame top unit 570, and the three slits 574b on the left side of the center of the unit main body 271 are formed. Is almost parallel to.

A plurality of LEDs 586a are mounted on the door frame top middle left decoration substrate 586 at positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit main body 271. As a result, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is in a state of being assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the plurality of LEDs 586a are facing forward from the three slits 574b on the left side of the center of the unit main body 271. The door frame top middle left decoration substrate 586 causes a plurality of LEDs 586a to emit light, thereby causing the portion near the top middle decoration member 576 of the top left decoration lens member 579 to emit light through the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

The door frame top middle right decoration board 587 is attached to the board base 585 so as to close the box-shaped open part from the front in the board base 585 attached to the rear side on the right side from the left-right center of the unit main body 271. To be The door frame top middle right decoration board 587 is attached to the front surface of the board base 585, so that the front surface moves to the left and right so as to move forward toward the center of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction. It will be tilted. Accordingly, the door frame top middle right decoration board 587 is a surface of a portion where the three slits 574b on the right side of the left-right center of the unit main body 271 are formed when the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570. Is almost parallel to.

A plurality of LEDs 587a are mounted on the door frame top middle right decoration board 587 at positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit main body 271. As a result, when the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the plurality of LEDs 587a face forward from the three slits 574b on the right side of the center of the unit body 271. The door frame top middle right decoration substrate 587 causes a plurality of LEDs 587a to emit light, thereby causing the portion of the top right decoration lens member 580 near the top middle decoration member 576 to emit light through the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

The pair of light shielding members 588 are attached to the front rear side of the unit main body 271 at a position between the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 and the unit main body 271. The pair of light blocking members 588 are made of a non-translucent member and are formed substantially symmetrically with each other. The light blocking member 588 is provided between the upper and lower LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decoration board 586 and the door frame top middle right decoration board 587 arranged in line corresponding to the three slits 574b in the unit body 271. It is partitioned. With this light blocking member 588, light can be guided forward by the light guide member 578 only by the LEDs 586a and 587a located immediately after each light guide member 578, and the top left decoration lens member 579 and the top right decoration are provided. The decorative lens portions 579a and 580a of the lens member 580 can be favorably illuminated and decorated in a state where they are independent of each other.

The door frame top unit relay board 589 is attached to the front surface of the central base 571.
The door frame top unit relay board 589 includes a pair of upper speakers 573, a door frame top middle decoration board 577, a door frame top left decoration board 583, a door frame top right decoration board 584, a door frame top middle left decoration board 586, and a door. The connection between the right top decoration board 587 of the frame top and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 is relayed. The door frame top unit relay board 589 is connected to the door body relay board via a connection cable (not shown) provided in the door frame right side unit 550. The front side of the door frame top unit relay board 589 is covered with a relay board cover 590.

The door frame top unit 570 includes a top middle decoration member 576 that projects forward at the center in the left-right direction, and the front surfaces on the left and right sides of the top middle decoration member 576 are curved so as to be hollowed backward. Therefore, it is possible to make the player illusion that only the top middle decoration member 576 is largely projected forward, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, the door frame top unit 570 includes a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580, which decorate the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 arranged in the center, and the left and right top middle decorative member 576. It is formed so as to extend from both sides to the top left decorative portion 574e and the top right decorative portion 574f formed at both left and right ends of the unit main body 271. Thereby, the upper part of the front surface of the door frame 3 can be entirely decorated by the door frame top unit 570.

At this time, in the door frame top unit 570, the front surface is protected by speaker covers 575 made of punching metal behind the left and right ends near where the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 are arranged. Since the upper speaker 573 is provided, and the speaker cover 575 faces forward from between the three decorative lens portions 579a and 580a that are vertically spaced apart from each other on the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580, The sound output from the left and right upper speakers 573 can be heard by the player in a good state, and a good stereo sound can be enjoyed.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 includes the door frame top left decoration board 583, the door frame top right decoration by the plurality of light guide members 578 provided on the rear side of the top left decoration lens member 579 and the top right decoration lens member 580. Light from the substrate 584, the door frame top middle left decoration substrate 586, and the door frame top middle right decoration substrate 587 can be guided to the top left decoration lens member 579 and the top right decoration lens member 580. 579 and the entire front surface of the top right decorative lens member 580 can be favorably illuminated and decorated. Therefore, the door frame top unit 570 can light and decorate the entire front surface of the upper part of the door frame 3 including the front of the left and right upper speakers 573.

[3-8. Effect of door frame]
The function and effect of the door frame 3 will be described. The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has a through hole 111 penetrating the front and rear of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 in the vertical and horizontal directions as compared with the conventional pachinko machine. The heights of the dish unit 320 and the door frame top unit 570 in the up-down direction are reduced according to the expansion of the through-hole 111, and the widths of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 in the left-right direction. Is small. This allows the front surface of the game board 5 (game area 5a) attached to the main body frame 4 to be viewed as broadly as possible by the player (front) through the through hole 111 (glass unit 190). The game board 5 has a large game area 5a.

The door frame 3 has an effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) that has a large hemispherical operation button 410 in the center of the plate unit 320 that bulges forward in the left-right direction below the through hole 111. The front surface of the lower halves (the portion below the upper plate 321) on the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 400 (the front surface of the plate front lower decorative portion 326c) is recessed so as to be hollowed back (the plate unit It is formed in a concave shape so that the front faces on the left and right sides of the production operation unit 400 are located rearward rather than the straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of 320 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the production operation unit 400). ing. As a result, the effect operation unit 400 attached to the front surface of the plate unit 320 at the center in the left-right direction appears to project largely forward, so that the effect operation unit 400 is conspicuously highlighted to the player. Therefore, the production operation unit 400 can be strongly focused.

As for the door frame 3, the effect operation unit 400 arranged on the front surface of the dish unit 320 below the through hole 111 is tilted so that the large hemispherical transparent operation button 410 is directed obliquely upward and forward. Since the player is attached in a state, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1, the operation button 410 faces the player's head (face), and the player drops his or her line of sight to direct the effect operation unit 400. When viewed, the operation button 410 can be seen in a state close to the front, and the large and round operation button 410 can be visually recognized intensely, and the sense of expectation for the effect using the operation button 410 can be increased. At the same time, the effect image displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 arranged in the transparent operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state, and the effect image can be sufficiently enjoyed.

Further, since the door frame 3 is provided with the operation button 410 that has a large diameter and is substantially rounded and bulged forward in the same height as the overall height of the dish unit 320, when operating the operation button 410, a short distance of hand movement is required. Since any part of the operation button 410 can be touched, “fast pressing” of the operation button 410 can be performed relatively easily. Further, since the operation button 410 that is large in diameter and bulges forward in a circle is attached in a tilted state, not only can it be pressed from above like the operation button of a conventional pachinko machine, but also left and right. On the other hand, the operation can be performed favorably even from the front, and the operation button 410 with good operability can further enhance the effect using the operation button 410.

Further, the door frame 3 is mounted with the rendering operation unit 400 in a suspended state by the dish unit 320, and is provided with the vibration motor 424 for generating vibration in the lower portion of the rendering operation unit 400, so that the game is played. When the vibration motor 424 is rotated in accordance with the state to generate vibration, a strong vibration can be transmitted to the player's hand touching the upper portion of the operation button 410, which makes the player surprised. It is possible to make the production using 410 even more enjoyable.

Furthermore, since the door frame 3 is provided with a large operation button 410 (rendering operation unit 400) over the entire height of the plate unit 320 in the center of the front surface of the plate unit 320, the upper plate 321 is larger than the conventional pachinko machine. Since the lower plate 322 underneath becomes inconspicuous, it is possible to make it easier for a player who is familiar with conventional pachinko machines to recognize that it is clearly different, and to appeal to the player. The pachinko machine 1 having high strength can be provided.

Further, the door frame 3 is formed so that the lower plate 322 wraps around the lower side of the effect operation unit 400 with respect to the lower plate opening 326d that is opened on the left side of the effect operation unit 400 on the front surface of the plate unit 320. Therefore, the volume of the lower tray 322 can be increased with respect to the size of the lower tray opening 326d, and a sufficient number of game balls stored in the lower tray 322 can be secured. Further, since the rear part of the lower plate 322 wraps around to the rear side of the effect operation unit 400, when the player puts his left hand in the lower plate 322 or puts his finger on the lower plate opening 326d. Since it is difficult for the fingertips to touch the wall behind the lower plate 322, it is possible to make the player less likely to feel uncomfortable, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game, and the size of the lower plate opening 326d is increased. It can be recognized by tactile sense that the lower plate 322 has a larger volume than that.

Further, the door frame 3 has a lower tray ball supply port 323c through which the game balls from the upper tray 321 are discharged to the lower tray 322, and a lower tray for pulling out the game balls of the lower tray 322 into a dollar box or the like below the tray unit 320. The countersunk hole 322a is linearly arranged in the front-rear direction, and is arranged outside the right side of the lower plate opening 326d (right side of the left end of the frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400) in a front view. That is, the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a are connected to the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (outer right side of the lower plate opening 326d) of the plate unit cover 326, and the front end of the lower plate cover 340. Since it is arranged on the rear side of the side, etc., the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a cannot be seen from the player side, and the appearance of the dish unit 320 (pachinko machine 1) can be refreshed, The appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

Further, in the lower plate 322, the door frame 3 has the lower plate ball removing hole 322a arranged below (in front of) the lower plate ball supply port 323c. Then, the game balls discharged from the upper plate 321 or the like to the lower plate 322 are immediately discharged from the lower plate ball removal hole 322a to the lower dollar box or the like when entering the lower plate 322. At this time, since the player side cannot see the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a, the flow of the game balls discharged from the upper dish 321 and the like through the lower dish 322 to the dollar box is also possible. I can't see. As a result, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the game balls of the upper plate 321 and the game balls or the like paid out from the payout device 830 when the upper plate 321 is full are directly discharged to the dollar box. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower plate 322, and to depress the player by devoting himself/herself to the game (game ball driving operation, effect image, etc.). it can.

In addition, the door frame 3 has a lower plate 322 having a lower plate ball-draining hole 322a at a position closer to the front left of the lower plate ball-feeding port 323c and a lower plate 322 on the right side than the lower plate ball-draining hole 322a. Since the raised wall is obliquely curved so as to face the direction of the lower dish ball removal hole 322a, the game balls supplied from the lower dish ball supply port 323c to the lower dish 322 are directly changed to the lower dish ball. It can be guided to the hole 322a, or can be indirectly guided to the lower dish ball hole 322a by being reflected on the right wall portion. As a result, in a state where the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is left open, the game balls supplied to the lower dish 322 from the lower dish ball supply port 323c are areas on the left side of the lower dish ball removal hole 322a in the lower plate 322. Since it can be discharged downward from the lower plate ball removal hole 322a without entering the (lower plate first area A1), the lower plate 322 of the lower plate 322 can be seen without showing the game balls circulating in the lower plate 322 to the player. The game ball can be discharged downward (dollar box), and the same effect as the above can be obtained.

Further, the door frame 3 includes a lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326, which the lower plate 322 faces forward, between the effect operation unit attachment 326a (effect operation unit 400) and the lower speaker opening 326e. Therefore, even if the player puts his/her hand on the lower plate opening 326d or puts his/her hand on the lower plate 322, the front of the lower speaker opening 326e is not blocked by the player's hand, so the main body frame 4 The sound from the lower speaker 921 of the board unit 900 can be favorably output to the front, and the sound of the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed. Further, when the player puts his or her hand on or comes close to the lower plate 322, it is possible to make the player tactilely feel the vibration due to the deep bass from the lower speaker 921 that is output forward from the lower speaker port 326e. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, since the door frame 3 is provided with a door frame right side unit 550 which is plate-like and protrudes largely forward from the right side of the through-hole 111, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, the door is opened. Since the frame right side unit 550 can exert an effect like a partition between the pachinko machine adjacent to the right side, the player playing the pachinko machine 1 can play in a private room. It is possible to make the player feel as if he/she is playing, and to let the other players around play the game in a relaxed atmosphere.

Further, the door frame 3 is a plate-like, and the front end and both the left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550, which largely protrudes forward, can be light-embellished, so that the pachinko machine 1 is installed in a lined gaming hall. Even if the pachinko machine 1 is not located in front of the pachinko machine 1, it can notify the existence of the pachinko machine 1 from a distance such as from the lateral direction along the island facility, and has a high appealing power to the player. It can be machine 1.

Further, in the door frame top unit 570 on the upper side of the through-hole 111, the door frame 3 is provided with a top middle decoration member 576 that projects forward at the center in the left-right direction, and the left and right front surfaces of the top middle decoration member 576 are A shape that is recessed so as to be hollowed backward (a top middle decoration member in the door frame top unit 570 is more than a straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of the door frame top unit 570 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the top middle decoration member 576. The front surfaces of the left and right sides of 576 are formed in a concave shape so that they are located rearward. As a result, since only the top middle decoration member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 seems to be largely projected forward, the top middle decoration member 576 can be conspicuously emphasized to the player, It is possible to draw a strong attention to the middle decoration member 576.

By the way, in the conventional pachinko machine, a pair of upper speakers spaced apart from each other on the left and right are provided on the upper part of the door frame, and two upper speakers are conspicuous. On the other hand, in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment, in the door frame top unit 570 attached to the upper side of the through hole 111, a pair of upper parts whose front surfaces are protected by speaker covers 575 made of punching metal at both left and right ends. In addition to the speaker 573, a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 are provided which extend from the left and right sides of the central top middle decorative member 576 to the left and right ends in front of the speaker cover 575. The entire left front surface of the left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be decorated with light emission. As a result, the upper part of the front surface of the door frame 3 can be entirely decorated, so that the pair of upper speakers 573 are inconspicuous in the upper part of the door frame 3, and the decoration distinct from that of the conventional pachinko machine is applied. It is possible to make the player recognize at a glance that it is present, and to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to the player. At the same time, the pair of upper speakers 573 allows the player to enjoy good stereo sound. it can.

As described above, in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment, the effect operation unit 400 attached to the dish unit 320 and the top middle decoration member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 are provided below and above the through hole 111. , Each of which has a large protrusion to the front at the center in the left-right direction, it is possible to show the player a uniform decoration in the top and bottom where a virtual line passing through the center in the left-right direction is conspicuous, and by the sophisticated decoration The pachinko machine 1 can be made more prominent than other pachinko machines and has a high appeal.

Further, since the door frame 3 projects the front middle decoration member 576 and the effect operation unit 400 of the door frame top unit 570 arranged vertically at the center in the left-right direction, the middle middle decoration member 576. When the effect operation unit 400 is decorated with light, the player can see a light emitting line extending vertically in the center of the front surface of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction, and the player's line of sight is arranged in the center of the left-right direction. It can be guided to the operation button 410 or the like of the effect operation unit 400.

[5. Overall structure of game board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 60 to 66 and the like. FIG. 60 is a front view of the game board. FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the front, and FIG. 62 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the back. 63 is a front view of the game board without the front and back units, FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 63 as seen from the front, and FIG. 65 is the game board of FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view disassembled and seen from back. FIG. 66 is an explanatory view showing a part of the function display unit in an enlarged manner from the front with the game board attached to the pachinko machine.

The game board 5 has a game area 5a in which a game ball is hit by the player operating the handle 302 of the handle unit 300. Further, the game board 5 is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and the front component member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game region 5a and has an outer shape of a substantially quadrangular shape in a front view. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 for partitioning, a substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a game ball attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 are driven by hitting the game balls into the game area 5a. It is provided with a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 for controlling the contents of the game. On the front surface of the game panel 1100, a plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with the game balls are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion inside the game area 5a (not shown).

In addition, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a function display unit 1400 visibly attached to the player side in the lower left corner of the front component member 1000, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of 1100, a game board side effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a front surface of the game panel 1100. Further includes a front unit 2000 attached to the front panel and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. A game board side effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the game board side effect display device 1600.

The game panel 1100 is formed so that the outer periphery thereof is slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000, and holds the transparent flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 and the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110, and the front component member 1000. A frame-shaped panel holder 1120, which is attached to the rear side and to which the back unit 3000 is attached, is provided on the rear surface.

The table unit 2000 has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 that are always open to receive the game balls that have been driven into the playing area 5a, and a plurality of general winning openings 2001 at different positions in the playing area 5a. A first starting opening 2002 that is always open to receive a ball, a gate portion 2003 attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a for detecting passage of a game ball, and a game ball passing through the gate portion 2003. According to the result of the ordinary lottery by lottery, the second starting opening 2004 that allows the acceptance of the game ball and the first special lottery by accepting the game ball into the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 It is provided with a special winning opening 2005 which allows the game balls to be accepted in either case in accordance with the result of the lottery or the result of the second special lottery.

Further, the table unit 2000 is mounted right above the outlet 1126 in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction, and has a starting opening unit 2100 having a first starting opening 2002 and a special winning opening 2005, and a starting opening unit. The lower side unit 2200 which is attached along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the front side of 2100 and has a plurality of general winning openings 2001, and the side unit which is attached above the left end of the lower side unit 2200 in front view. The upper 2300, and a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 having a gate portion 2003 and a second starting opening 2004, which are attached to the center of the game area 5a.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and is attached to the back surface of the back box 3010 and the back box 3010 having a square opening 3010a on the back wall, which is open to the front, and is attached to the back surface of the back box 3010. And a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the board side effect display device 1600.

Further, the back unit 3000 includes a back left middle decoration unit 3050 that is attached upward from the vertical center on the left side in front view at the front end in the back box 3010, and a back unit below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. A rear lower back movable effect unit 3100 attached near the rear wall of the box 3010, a back upper left movable effect unit 3200 attached on the left side in front view above the opening 3010a in the rear box 3010, and a back box. A rear left movable effect unit 3300 attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the front view in 3010, and a back upper attached to the right center of the front side above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 from the center in the left-right direction. A movable effect unit 3400 and a lower back movable effect unit 3500 attached below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and in front of the lower back movable effect unit 3100 are provided.

[5-1. Previous component]
Next, the front component 1000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 and 65. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, has a substantially circular inner shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction, and defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a by the inner periphery of the inner shape. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape from a lower end on the left side to a left side in a center view in a front view in a clockwise circumferential direction, and extends to a diagonally upper right position after passing through an upper end in the left-right direction in a front view. An inner rail 1002 that is arranged inside the front component member 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from a lower center in the left-right direction in a front view to an obliquely upper left portion in a front view, and a lower end of the inner rail 1002 on the right side in a front view. And an out guide portion 1003 that is formed at the lowest position in the region 5a and is inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

Further, the front constituent member 1000 has a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined from the right end of the out guiding portion 1003 in a front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front constituent member 1000 so that the right end side is slightly higher. From the right end of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000, and the upper part is curved inward of the front component 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail. The upper end of 1001 is connected, and the stop part 1006 with which the game ball rolling along the outer rail 1001 abuts is provided.

The front component 1000 is rotatably supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the outer rail 1001. A backflow preventing member that is rotated in a rotating direction and is rotatable only between an open position in which the outer rail 1001 and the outer rail 1001 are opened, and is biased by a spring (not shown) so as to return to the closed position side. 1007 is provided.

Further, the front constituent member 1000 includes the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 outside the vicinity of a portion that extends substantially vertically from the lower ends, the outer side of the out guiding portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outer side of the right rail 1005. Each of the parts has a security recess 1008 that is recessed rearward from the front end. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security recess 1008 has a rear protrusion 202 protruding rearward of the security cover 200 in the door frame 3. It will be inserted. As a result, the gap between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projection 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000, so that the game is played. Even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is made to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of the board 5 through the crime prevention cover 200 and the front component member 1000, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 202 and the crime prevention recess 1008. It is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

Further, the front component member 1000 includes a plurality of positioning protrusions 1009 protruding rearward from the rear end of the inner rail 1002. By inserting these positioning protrusions 1009 into the inner rail fixing holes 1116 formed in the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, the inner rail 1002 can be positioned and fixed to the front surface of the panel plate 1110.

Further, the front component 1000 includes a plurality of mounting bosses 1010 protruding rearward from the rear surface. The plurality of mounting bosses 1010 can be positioned between the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1100) by being inserted into the mounting holes 1128 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100.

In addition, the front component 1000 includes a notch 1011 that is notched upward from the lower end at the lower left corner when viewed from the front. The notch portion 1011 coincides with the notch portion 1127 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch portion 1011 penetrates the notch portions 1011 and 1127 to form a lower full ball path. The front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862 of the unit 860 are adapted to face forward.

[5-2. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62, 64 and 65, and the like. The game panel 1100 has a flat panel panel 1110 formed of a transparent synthetic resin and having an outer periphery formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000, and holds the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. And a frame-shaped panel holder 1120, which is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached on the rear surface.

The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is made of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The plate thickness of this panel plate 1110 is thinner than that of the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1150), and is the minimum necessary thickness that can be sufficiently retained even if an obstacle nail is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. (8 to 10 mm). In this example, the panel plate 1110 is made of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel plate 1110 is formed with an out recess 1111 which is recessed upward from the lower end at the lowest position in the game area 5a. Further, the panel plate 1110 is formed with a plurality of openings 1112 penetrating in the front-rear direction and for mounting the front unit 2000.

In addition, the panel plate 1110 includes a plurality of fitting holes 1113 that are arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery and are formed of circular holes that penetrate in the front-rear direction, and a long hole 1114 that is disposed in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the lower left portion that penetrates in the front-rear direction and extends in the up-down direction. , Are provided. The fitting hole 1113 and the long hole 1114 are arranged outside the game area 5a, and perform positioning with the panel holder 1120. In addition, the panel plate 1110 is provided with stepped engagement step portions 1115 having recessed front sides on both ends of the upper side and both ends of the lower side, respectively. These engaging step portions 1115 are notched to approximately half the plate thickness of the panel plate 1110, and are arranged outside the game area 5a like the fitting holes 1113 and the long holes 1114, It is for engaging and fixing the panel plate 1110 to the panel holder 1120.

Further, the panel plate 1110 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1116 at predetermined positions. The inner rail 1002 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing the positioning protrusion 1009 protruding from the rear side of the inner rail 1002 into the inner rail fixing hole 1116.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 has a size that includes the panel plate 1110 and has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is formed to be thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this example). The panel holder 1120 is made of synthetic resin (for example, thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 holds the panel plate 1110 in a detachable manner and has a holding step portion 1121 that is recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and has a size substantially equal to the game area 5a inside the holding step portion 1121 in the front-rear direction. And a through hole 1122 penetrating therethrough.

The holding step portion 1121 of the panel holder 1120 has a depth from the front surface that is substantially the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1110, and the front surface of the panel plate 1110 held in the holding step portion 1121 corresponds to the panel holder 1120. It is almost flush with the front. The front step inner peripheral surface of the holding step part 1121 is formed to have a size such that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110. With this clearance, even if the panel plate 1110 relatively expands and contracts due to temperature changes and changes over time, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is arranged at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 1113 and the elongated hole 1114 formed in the panel plate 1110 held by the holding step portion 1121, and extends from the front surface of the holding step portion 1121 toward the front. A plurality of projecting pins 1123 that extend and can be fitted and inserted into the fitting holes 1113 and the long holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110 are provided. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 1123 into the fitting holes 1113 and the long holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110, the panel holder 1120 and the panel plate 1110 can be positioned relative to each other.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is provided with engaging claws 1124 and engaging pieces 1125 that engage with the engaging step portion 1115 at positions corresponding to the engaging step portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110. More specifically, the engaging claw 1124 is arranged on the upper holding step 1121 of the panel holder 1120, corresponds to the upper engaging step 1115 of the panel plate 1110, and extends from the front surface of the holding step 1121 to the front. It projects toward and is elastically engaged with the engagement step portion 1115.
The engaging claw 1124 has a size such that the tip thereof does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1120.

The engaging piece 1125 of the panel holder 1120 is arranged below the holding step 1121 of the panel holder 1120 and corresponds to the lower engaging step 1115 of the panel plate 1110.
The engagement piece 1125 is formed along the front surface of the panel holder 1120 (upward) along the front surface of the panel holder 1120 with a gap formed between the engagement piece 1125 and the front surface of the holding step portion 1121 so that the engagement step portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110 can be inserted. A predetermined amount extends toward the center side). By engaging the engaging step 1115 of the panel plate 1110 with the engaging claw 1124 and the engaging piece 1125, the panel plate 1110 is detachably held with respect to the panel holder 1120.

In addition, the panel holder 1120 is provided with an out port 1126 penetrating back and forth in the lowest position in the game area 5a. In the panel holder 1120, the lower rear surface of the outlet 1126 has the same width as the outlet 1126 and is recessed forward to the lower end.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is provided with a notch 1127 that is notched upward from the lower end at the lower left corner when viewed from the front. The cutouts 1127 match the cutouts 1011 of the front component member 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the cutouts 1011 and 1127 penetrate the lower full tank ball path unit 860. The front end openings of the normal guideway 861 and the full guideway 862 face forward.

Further, the panel holder 1120 has a plurality of mounting holes 1128 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the plurality of mounting bosses 1010 in the front component member 1000. By inserting the mounting bosses 1010 of the front constituent member 1000 into the plurality of mounting holes 1128, the panel holder 1120 can be mounted on the rear side of the front constituent member 1000, and at the same time, the panel holder 1120 can be attached to the panel holder 1120. 1120 (gaming panel 1100) can be positioned.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is provided with a rectangular insertion hole 1129 penetrating in the front-rear direction above the cutout portion 1127. The rear end of the function display unit 1400 is inserted into the insertion hole 1129.

When the game panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000, the out port 1126 of the panel holder 1120 is opened to the rear side of the out guide portion 1003 of the front component member 1000. As a result, the game ball flowing down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1126 by the out guiding portion 1003, and is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126.

[5-2a. Second embodiment of game panel]
Next, a game panel 1150 of an embodiment different from the above game panel 1100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. 67 is an exploded perspective view of a game panel having a different form from FIG. 63 as seen from the front together with a front component member, a substrate holder, and a main control unit. 68 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 67 seen from the rear. This game panel 1150 is formed of a wood board material such as plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm). This game panel 1150 is formed with the same thickness as the panel holder 1120 of the above-mentioned game panel 1100.

The game panel 1150 has an outer shape that is substantially the same as the outer shape of the front component member 1000. The game panel 1150 is provided with an out port 1151 penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out guiding part 1003 of the front component member 1000 at a lower portion substantially in the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. In the gaming panel 1150, the lower rear surface of the outlet 1151 is recessed forward to the lower end with the same width as the outlet 1151.

In addition, the game panel 1150 penetrates laterally in the front-rear direction to the left side in the front view of the lower end and is opened downward and has a notch 1152 having the same shape as the notch 1011 of the front component member 1000, and a vertical direction above the notch 1152. And a square insertion hole 1153 which penetrates through the rear end of the function display unit 1400.

In addition, the game panel 1150 has a plurality of inner rails that penetrate through the positioning protrusions 1009 at the positions corresponding to the plurality of positioning protrusions 1009 that project rearward from the inner rails 1002 of the front component member 1000. The fixing hole 1154 is provided. Further, the game panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 1155 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the plurality of mounting bosses 1010 in the front component member 1000. By inserting the mounting boss 1010 of the front component 1000 into the plurality of mounting holes 1155, the gaming panel 1150 can be mounted on the rear side of the front component 1000, and at the same time, the gaming panel with the front component 1000. The 1150 can be positioned.

Further, although not shown, the game panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of openings penetrating in the front and back for attaching the front unit 2000, similar to the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 in the above-mentioned game panel 1100. ing.

The game panel 1150 is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000, and the out port 1151 is opened to the rear side of the out guide portion 1003 of the front component member 1000. As a result, the game ball flowing down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1151 by the out guiding portion 1003, and is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1150 through the out port 1151.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 to 65 and the like. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with its upper and front portions open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to decrease toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 can cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side in a state of being assembled to the game board 5. As a result, it is possible to receive all the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the outlet 1126 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000, and are formed on the bottom surface. It is possible to discharge downward from the discharged portion 1201.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 to 65 and the like. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. This main control unit 1300 is provided with a main control board 1310 for controlling game contents and payout of game balls, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. ..

The main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms. When the main control board box 1320 is closed by using one sealing mechanism, next, in order to open the main control board box 1320, the sealing mechanism is destroyed. Therefore, a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left. Therefore, the unauthorized opening/closing of the main control board box 1320 can be found by looking at the traces of the opening/closing, and the deterrence of the unauthorized act on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

The various board boxes 930, 950, 1320, 1520, 3042 including the main control board box 1320 are all provided as transparent members so that they can be visually confirmed from the outside. There is. That is, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in particular, the surface of the payout control board 951 in the payout control board box 950 or the main control board 1310 in the main control board box 1320 which is inferior in fraud suppression performance. Since the mounting area is provided, it is important to secure such transparency in order to obtain various actions and effects related to fraud countermeasures described later.

[5-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 to 66 and the like. As shown, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component member 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be viewed from the front (player side) through the through hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 66). The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 to display a game state (game state), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 66, the function display unit 1400 includes a state indicator 1401 including one LED for displaying a game state, and four LEDs for displaying a normal lottery result obtained by passing a game ball to the gate portion 2003. A normal symbol display 1402 made up of, a normal hold display 1408 made up of two LEDs for displaying the number of holdings relating to the passage of the game ball to the gate 2003, and a lottery by receiving the game ball into the first starting opening 2002. The first special symbol display 1403 consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the result of the first special lottery, and the first special holding consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of holdings for receiving the game ball into the first starting opening 2002. Number display 1404, a second special symbol display 1405 consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the result of the second special lottery drawn by receiving the game ball to the second start opening 2004, and to the second start opening 2004 When the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is a "big hit" or the like, the second special hold number indicator 1406 including two LEDs for displaying the number of reserves related to the acceptance of the game balls It mainly includes a round indicator 1407 including three LEDs for displaying the number of times the opening/closing pattern is repeated (the number of rounds).

In this function display unit 1400, the number of holdings, symbols, etc. can be displayed by appropriately turning on/off, blinking, etc. of the provided LEDs.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described with reference to FIG. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the game board side effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 that controls an effect presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board box 1520 that houses the peripheral control board 1510. ing. Although not shown, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit for controlling a light emission effect, a sound effect, a movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit for controlling an effect image. ..

[5-7. Game board side effect display device]
Next, the game board side effect display device 1600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 62. The game board side effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. More specifically, the game board side effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010 in the approximate center. The game board side effect display device 1600 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 with the game board 5 assembled. The game board side effect display device 1600 is a full-color liquid crystal display device using a white LED as a backlight, and can display a still image or a moving image.

The game board side effect display device 1600 includes two left fixing pieces 1601 protruding outward from the left side surface in front view and a right fixing piece 1602 protruding outward from the right side surface in front view. This game board side effect display device 1600 has two fixing grooves that are open to the left inner peripheral surface in front view in a frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of a back box 3010 described later with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two left fixing pieces 1601 into the rear box 3010 from the diagonal rear of the back box 3010, the right fixing piece 1602 side is moved forward, and the right fixing piece 1602 is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020 to lock. It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding the mechanism 3020 downward.

[5-8. Table unit]
Next, the table unit 2000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62. The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, the front end projects forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end penetrates the opening 1112. And the panel plate 1110 projects rearward from the rear surface.

In the table unit 2000 of the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 2001 that are capable of accepting game balls that have been driven into the gaming area 5a and are always open, and a plurality of general winning openings 2001 are within the gaming area 5a. The first starting opening 2002 which is always open to receive the game ball at different positions, the gate portion 2003 which is attached at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball, and the game ball is the gate The second starting opening 2004 that allows the game balls to be accepted according to the result of the ordinary drawing that is selected by passing through the section 2003, and the lottery by accepting the game balls to the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004. According to the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery, a special winning opening 2005 that allows the game balls to be accepted is provided.

The plurality of general winning openings 2001 are arranged in the lower part of the game area 5a. The first starting port 2002 is arranged right above the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a.
The gate portion 2003 is arranged substantially right below the hitting portion 1006 at the upper right of the front view in the game area 5a. The second starting port 2004 is arranged right below the gate portion 2003 in the front view. The special winning opening 2005 is arranged between the first starting opening 2002 and the out opening 1126.

Further, the table unit 2000 is mounted right above the outlet 1126 in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction, and has a starting opening unit 2100 having a first starting opening 2002 and a special winning opening 2005, and a starting opening unit. The lower side unit 2200 which is attached along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the front side of 2100 and has a plurality of general winning openings 2001, and the side unit which is attached above the left end of the lower side unit 2200 in front view. An upper 2300 and a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 that is attached to the center of the game area 5a and has a gate portion 2003 and a second starting opening 2004 are provided.

The starting opening unit 2100 is arranged immediately above the out opening 1126 near the lower end of the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front. In this starting opening unit 2100, the first starting opening 2002 is open upward with a size capable of accepting only one game ball at a time, and the special winning opening 2005 allows a plurality of game balls at a time ( For example, 4 to 6 pieces) are extended to the left and right in a size that can be received, and are formed to be openable and closable according to the game state.

The side unit lower 2200 extends in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting opening unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front. The lower side unit 2200 has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 that can always receive game balls.

The side unit upper 2300 is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front slightly downward from the vertical center in the upper left of the side unit lower 2200 in a front view in the game area 5a. The side unit upper 2300 is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the left end of the shelf is close to the inner rail 1002, and the game ball flowing down along the inner rail 1002 is moved to the right (the game area 5a). Can be guided to the left-right direction center).

The center accessory 2500 is arranged in the game area 5a, above the starting opening unit 2100 and the side unit lower 2200, slightly in the center of the front view, and on the front surface of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100. Installed. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and visually recognizes the game board side effect display device 1600 arranged behind the game panel 1100 and the effect units and the like provided in the back unit 3000 from the front through the frame. be able to. The center accessory 2500 has a gate portion 2003 and a second starting port 2004.

The frame-shaped center accessory 2500 has the entire circumference excluding the lower side projecting forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the game ball hit in the game area 5a is in the frame. It cannot be entered.

The center accessory 2500 has a warp entrance 2520 in which a game ball in the game area 5a is opened so that the game ball in the game area 5a can enter the outer peripheral surface on the left side in front view, and the game ball entering the warp entrance 2520 can be discharged into the frame. It is provided with a warp outlet 2522 that is open, and a stage 2530 that rolls the game ball emitted from the warp outlet 2522 in the left-right direction and then releases it into the game area 5a. The starting opening unit 2100 is arranged immediately below the stage 2530, and when the game ball is discharged downward from the center of the stage 2530, the game ball is received in the first starting opening 2002 with an extremely high probability.

[5-9. Back unit]
Next, the back unit 3000 of the game board 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100. Further, a game board side effect display device 1600 and a peripheral control unit 1500 are attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000.

The back unit 3000 includes a back box 3010 attached to the back surface of the panel holder 1120 and having a front opening, and a back box 3010 having a square opening 3010a in the back wall, and a back side of the back box 3010 below the opening 3010a. And a box-shaped production drive board box 3042 which is attached so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the left-right direction and accommodates the production drive board.

In addition, the back unit 3000 includes a back left middle decoration unit 3050 that is attached upward from the vertical center on the left side in front view at the front end in the back box 3010, and a back unit below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. A rear lower back movable effect unit 3100 attached near the rear wall of the box 3010, a back upper left movable effect unit 3200 attached on the left side in front view above the opening 3010a in the rear box 3010, and a back box. A rear left movable effect unit 3300 attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the front view in 3010, and a back upper attached to the right center of the front side above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 from the center in the left-right direction. A movable effect unit 3400 and a lower back movable effect unit 3500 attached below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and in front of the lower back movable effect unit 3100 are provided.

The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-like shape with an open front, a square opening penetrating the rear wall, and a flat plate frame-like shape projecting rearward at a distance from the periphery of the opening 3010a. A liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, and two fixing grooves 3010c that are recessed outward from the inside of the frame in the left side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b in rear view and into which the left fixing piece 1601 of the game board side effect display device 1600 is inserted. The liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is provided with a cutout portion 3010d that is cut out from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 at the center in the up-down direction on the right side of the rear view and to which the lock mechanism 3020 is mounted.

The opening 3010a is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the game board side effect display device 1600. Further, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in such a size that the game board side effect display device 1600 can be fitted into the frame. In the back box 3010, the lock mechanism 3020 is attached to the rear surface of the notch 3010d on the rear surface so as to be vertically slidable.

Further, the back box 3010 includes a flat plate-shaped fixing piece portion 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece portion 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 in a state where the front surface is in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100. The back box 3010 has bosses and mounting holes for mounting the movable effect units and the like formed at appropriate positions.

The back unit 3000 uses the back lower back movable effect unit 3100, the back upper left movable effect unit 3200, the back left movable effect unit 3300, the back middle movable effect unit 3400, the back lower front movable effect unit 3500, etc. as appropriate. It is possible to perform a light emitting effect, a movable effect, a display effect, and the like, and it is possible to entertain the player with various kinds of effects, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

[6. Game contents]
Next, the game contents by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 60 and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player rotates the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 arranged at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3, whereby the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 are stored. , Is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 on the game board 5, and the game with the game ball is started. The game ball hit to the upper part in the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the hitting strength. Note that the driving strength of the game ball can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 302, and can be driven more strongly as it is rotated clockwise, and a maximum of 100 game balls per minute in a row, that is, , You can hit a game ball at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and the game balls serve as obstacle nails. By abutting, the flow velocity of the game ball is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail, a wind turbine (not shown) that rotates by abutting the game ball is provided at an appropriate position.

When the game ball that has been driven into the upper part of the center character 2500 enters the outer peripheral surface of the center character 2500 toward the left side in front view as compared with the highest part, while contacting a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown), The area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 flows down. Then, when the game ball flowing down the area on the left side of the center role object 2500 enters the warp entrance 2520 opening on the outer peripheral surface of the center role object 2500, it is supplied from the warp exit 2522 to the stage 2530.

The game ball supplied to the stage 2530 rolls on the stage 2530, moves back and forth from side to side, and is discharged forward. When the game ball is released from the center of the stage 2530 into the game area 5a, it is located immediately above the first starting port 2002, so that it is received in the first starting port 2002 with a high probability. When the game balls are received in the first starting opening 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out from the payout device 830 to the upper plate 321 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. ..

When the game ball rolling on the stage 2530 is discharged into the game area 5a from other than the center, it flows down toward the starting opening unit 2100. The game ball released from the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be received in the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, the large winning opening 2005 in the open state, or the like.

By the way, when the game ball flowing down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, the side unit upper 2300 moves it toward the center in the left-right direction, and the general winning opening 2001 or the first winning unit of the side unit lower 2200. There is a possibility of being accepted in the starting port 2002 or the like. When the game balls are received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. ..

On the other hand, when the game ball hit in the upper part of the center character 2500 in the game area 5a enters to the right of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center character 2500 (so-called right hit), On the downstream side, the area where the gate portion 2003 and the second starting port 2004 are provided flows down.

Then, when the game ball hit to the right passes through the gate portion 2003, a normal lottery is performed in the main control board 1310. If the ordinary lottery result of the lottery is "normal win", the second starting opening 2004 is set for a predetermined time ( For example, during the period of 0.3 to 10 seconds), the open state is set, and the game ball can be received in the second starting opening 2004. Then, when the game balls are received in the second starting opening 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out from the payout device 830 to the upper plate 321 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. It

In the present embodiment, in the ordinary lottery performed by the game balls passing through the gate section 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the ordinary lottery to the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result (for example, 0. 01 to 60 seconds, also referred to as a normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of this ordinary lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second starting port 2004 is normally opened after the elapse of the variable time.

Also, if the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 between the time the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 and the time when the result of the normal lottery is suggested, the suggestion of the result of the normal lottery cannot be started. The start of suggestion of the result is held until the suggestion of the result of the ordinary drawing has been completed. The maximum number of ordinary lottery results to be held is limited to four, and if the number is more than that, even if a game ball passes through the gate unit 2003, the number is discarded without being held. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side due to the accumulation of reservations.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a game ball is received in the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004, an advantageous game state advantageous to the player (for example, "big hit", " A lottery of the special lottery result for generating "middle hit", "small hit", "probability change hit", "time reduction hit", etc.) is performed. Then, the special lottery result selected by lottery is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as special variation time). The special lottery results that are selected by receiving the game balls in the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004 include "miss", "small hit", "2R big hit", "5R big hit", " 15R big hit, “probability change (probability change) hit”, “time reduction (time reduction) hit”, “probability change time short hit”, “probability change time short hit”, and the like.

In the case where the special lottery results (the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result) that are drawn by receiving the game balls into the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004 are the special lottery results that cause the advantageous gaming state. After the elapse of the special variation time, the special winning opening 2005 becomes ready to receive the game balls in a predetermined opening/closing pattern. When the game ball is received in the special winning opening 2005 when the special winning opening 2005 is open, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of game balls from the payout device 830 by the main control board 1310 and the payout board. Are dispensed to the upper plate 321. Therefore, by allowing the special winning opening 2005 to receive the game balls when the special winning opening 2005 can accept the game balls, a large amount of the game balls can be paid out and the player can be entertained.

When the special lottery result is "small hit", after the special winning opening 2005 is in an open state in which a game ball can be received for a predetermined short time (for example, 0.2 seconds to 0.6 seconds). The opening/closing pattern for closing is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is "big hit", a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the special winning opening 2005 is in an open state in which a game ball can be received, or the special winning opening 2005 Accepting a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls, if any of the conditions is satisfied, a predetermined opening and closing pattern (one opening and closing pattern is called one round) that makes the game ball into an unacceptable closed state. Repeat the number of times (predetermined number of rounds). For example, if "2R jackpot" is 2 rounds, "5R jackpot" is 5 rounds, and "15R jackpot" is 15 rounds, the advantageous gaming state advantageous for the player is generated.

In the case of "big hit", change the probability that special lottery results such as "big hit" will be drawn after the big hit game ("probability change"), or change the display time of the effect image that suggests the special lottery result. (“Short-time winning”) There is a “hit”.

In the present embodiment, during the period from the start of the special lottery by the receipt of the game balls to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 to the suggestion of the special lottery result selected by the lottery, the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2002 (2) When the game ball is accepted in the starting port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started. Therefore, the suggestion of the special lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. It The number of reserved special lottery results to be reserved is up to four for the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, and for more than that, the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening are held. Even if a game ball is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is discarded without being held. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side due to the accumulation of reservations.

The suggestion of the special lottery result is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the game board side effect display device 1600. In the function display unit 1400, the main control board 1310 is directly controlled to suggest the special lottery result. The suggestion of the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400 suggests the special lottery result by a combination of the LEDs that are turned on after a plurality of LEDs are repeatedly turned on and off to blink for a predetermined time.

On the other hand, in the game board side effect display device 1600, based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 is indirectly controlled to suggest the special lottery result as an effect image. The effect image suggesting the special lottery result on the game board side effect display device 1600 is displayed in a varying manner by varying each symbol row in a state where three symbol rows each including a plurality of symbols are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction. Each of the three symbol columns that are stopped and displayed is stopped and displayed so that the symbols of the three symbol columns that are stopped and displayed are a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. If the special lottery result is other than "miss", after three symbols are stopped and each symbol is stopped and displayed, a confirmed image indicating the special lottery result is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, An advantageous game state (for example, a small-hit game, a big-hit game, etc.) corresponding to the selected special lottery result occurs.

In addition, the time (LED blinking time (fluctuation time)) that suggests the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400, and the time that suggests the special lottery result in the game board side effect display device 1600 (the symbol sequence varies) The time until the confirmation image is displayed) is different, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the game board side effect display device 1600, the effect operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 according to the special lottery result that has been drawn. Operation buttons 410, door frame side effect display device 460, various ornaments of center accessory 2500, various ornaments of back unit 3000, back lower back movable effect unit 3100, back upper left movable effect unit 3200, back left movable effect. By appropriately using the unit 3300, the back inside movable effect unit 3400, the back lower movable effect unit 3500, and the like, it is possible to perform light emission effect, movable effect, display effect, and the like. It is possible to entertain the player and prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

[Relationship between the present embodiment and the present invention]
The door frame 3 in the present embodiment is the door unit of the present invention, the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment is the main unit of the present invention, and the through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment is the present invention. , The plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment is the bulging portion of the present invention, and the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 and the second effect operation unit 400A of the present embodiment. The button lens 411 corresponds to the first decorative body of the present invention, and the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 in the present embodiment corresponds to the first decorative portion of the present invention.

Also, the decoration member in the operation button of the base unit in the present embodiment, the main screen 471 and the sub-screen 472 of the screen unit 470 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A are the second decorative body of the present invention, and the main screen in the present embodiment. The second button inner decoration portion 432g of the operation button inner decoration member 432, the peripheral decoration portion 472a of the screen unit 470, the sub-screen decoration member 476, and the peripheral decoration member 478 correspond to the second decoration portion of the present invention, respectively. ..

Further, each LED mounted on the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436 and the sub-screen decoration board in this embodiment. The LED 477a of 477 is the light emitting body of the present invention, the door frame side effect display device 460 in the present embodiment is the back side decoration means of the present invention, the frame unit 415 in the present embodiment, the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, and The unit bases 451 of the second base unit 450 respectively correspond to the base portion of the present invention.

[8. Characteristic effect of this embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the operation of the effect operation unit 400 (or the second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the front surface of the dish unit 320 that bulges forward in the door frame 3. When the button lens 411 of the button 410 is viewed from the outside, the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g of the operation button inner decoration member 432 (or the screen unit 470 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A). Peripheral decoration portion 472a, sub-screen decoration member 476, peripheral decoration member 478, etc.), the first button decoration portion 411a and the door frame side effect display device 460 overlap, etc. Since it is possible to show the player a decoration full of decorativeness that does not have a perspective, it can attract the player's attention strongly, and the appeal of the player can be differentiated from other pachinko machines. It can be a high pachinko machine 1.

Further, the operation button internal decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A (screen unit 470)), the door frame side effect display device 460, and the like are arranged in the moving direction of the button lens 411 (operation button 410). In addition, since the button lens 411 is supported by the unit base 431 (unit base 451) so that it can be moved by the player's operation, the player operates (presses) the button lens 411 to move it. As a result, the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button interior decoration portion 432g (or the peripheral decoration portion 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.) approach or leave, Due to a change in the distance between the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button interior decoration portion 432g (or the peripheral decoration portion 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.), It is possible to change the perspective of the decoration that appears to be overlapped with the in-button decoration portion 432g (or the peripheral decoration portion 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.) and the first button decoration portion 411a. The decoration (intersection mode) by the second button decoration portion 432g (or the peripheral decoration portion 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.) can be changed by the player, and the player can be changed. It can be enjoyed and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, since the center of the button lens 411 is bulged outward, which is the side opposite to the operation button inner decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A), the button lens 411 becomes the first decoration body. Since a space is formed between the second decoration and the second decoration, the distance from the player to the first button decoration 411a of the button lens 411 and the second button of the operation button interior decoration member 432 are seen. The distance to the inner decoration portion 432g (or the peripheral decoration portion 472a of the screen unit 470, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.) is significantly different, and the button lens 411 is operated to move it. Even when the player's eyes are not moved, the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g (or the peripheral decoration portion 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.) Since the crossing manner (the degree of overlap) with and changes, the moving decoration can be shown to the player, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted.

Furthermore, since the transparent button lens 411 is provided with the first button decoration portion 411a having a radial decoration toward the center on the outer peripheral edge, the center side of the button lens 411 where the first button decoration portion 411a is not provided. Through, the operation button inner decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) and the door frame side effect display device 460 can be visually recognized well through the radial direction of the first button decoration portion 411a. The player's line of sight can be directed to the center of the button lens 411 by the decoration, and the operation button inner decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) and the door frame can be passed through the center of the transparent button lens 411. The player's interest can be strongly directed to the side effect display device 460.

Further, since the operation button inner decoration member 432 is provided with the second button inner decoration portion 432g having a plurality of concentric polygonal decorations centered on the center, when viewed from the outside, the button lens 411 is formed. The decoration of the first button decoration portion 411a and the decoration of the second button inner decoration portion 432g of the operation button inner decoration member 432 intersect with each other, and the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g. It is possible to surely bring out the perspective of the decoration by means of, and to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to the player by making the decoration by the first button decoration part 411a and the second button interior decoration part 432g stand out. it can.

Further, since the decoration of the second button internal decoration portion 432g of the operation button internal decoration member 432 has a plurality of concentric polygonal decorations centered on the center, the second button internal decoration portion 432g of By decoration, the player's line of sight or interest can be directed to the door frame side effect display device 460 seen in the center of the operation button interior decoration member 432, and the decoration (effect image) of the door frame side effect display device can be enjoyed. it can.

Furthermore, the LEDs mounted on the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436 (or the sub-screen decoration board 477). When the LED 477a) is made to emit light, the decoration member 432 (or the sub-screen decoration member 476) in the operation button can be made to emit light by the light, and further, the button lens 411 can also be made to emit light. In addition to the decoration of the button decoration portion 411a and the second button interior decoration portion 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476), the player can be entertained by light emitting decoration. At this time, the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inside decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inside by the second button inside decoration portion 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476). Since the light from each LED (or LED 477a) of the decoration board 436 can be diffused, in the second button interior decoration portion 432g, the operation button left inside decoration board 433, the operation button right inside decoration board 434, and the operation button above. The interior decoration board 435 and the operation button lower interior decoration board 436 are made to emit light by direct light from each LED (or LED 477a), while the first button decoration part 411a is used for the second button interior decoration. The indirect light diffused by the portion 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476) is used for light emission decoration, whereas the second button interior decoration portion 432g (sub-screen decoration member 476) is strongly illuminated. Since the first button decoration portion 411a is lightly and lightly decorated, each LED of the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436. When the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476) are viewed from the outside (or the LED 477a) is illuminated, the perspective is emphasized. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 with a high appeal that allows the player to see the decoration and can strongly attract the player's interest.

Further, since the operation button inner decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) is arranged in the moving direction of the button lens 411, the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decoration member 432 (or the door). It is not necessary to secure a space for moving the button lens 411 in a portion outside the outer periphery of the frame side second effect display device 460A), and the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decoration member 432 (or the door frame) It is possible to widen the side second effect display device 460A) to the outside and make the size as large as possible, and the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device) can be enlarged. 460A) can be highlighted. Further, as described above, since it is not necessary to secure a space for moving the button lens 411 outside, by arranging the frame unit 415 at a portion outside the button lens 411, the entire pachinko machine 1 can be operated. The pachinko machine 1 can be improved in decorativeness, has a good appearance, and has a high appealing power that can strongly attract the interest of the player.

Further, since the center of the button lens 411 is bulged outwardly, when the player hits the button lens 411 or impacts a part of the surface, the button lens 411 has a flat shape. Compared to the case, the applied impact force is easily dispersed in the entire button lens 411, so that the button lens 411 can be made hard to break (hard to break). Therefore, when the button lens 411 is damaged during the game, it is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted, causing some players to feel annoyed and less entertaining, and to damage the button lens 411. Since it becomes difficult, it is possible to suppress an increase in the load on the gaming hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game area 5a of the game board 5 arranged in the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the front through the through hole 111. The unit base 431 (second base unit 450) of the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A) attached to the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 that bulges forward on the side has an outer diameter of 10 cm. An operation button 410 that is movable (advance and retreat) when operated by a player in a circular shape of approximately 15 cm that is within a range of -30 cm, and an operation button interior decoration that is visible from the front through a transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410. Since the member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) and the frame-shaped frame unit 415 in which the operation button 410 is arranged in the frame are attached, In the pachinko machine, the production operation unit 400 (the second production operation unit 400A) having the operation buttons 410 as large as possible can be seen at the position where the storage bowl of the game ball is conspicuous, so that at a glance to the player It can be recognized that the pachinko machine is different from the conventional pachinko machine, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal can be obtained. The frame unit 415 is provided with a translucent frame side lens 417, and the translucent second button decoration is provided on the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) so as to be adjacent to the frame side lens 417. The operation button left outside decoration board 422 and the operation button right outside decoration board 423 which are provided with the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration section 411b and are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450). The frame side lens 417 and the second button are provided with the first LEDs 422a and 423a for making the second button decoration portion 411b emit light and the second LEDs 422b, 423b for making the frame side lens 417 emit light. An inner cylindrical portion 416d of the frame main body 416 that partitions the decorative portion 411b from each other, and a main body portion 413a and an inner extending portion 413f of the button base 413 that partition the second button decorative portion 411b and the center side of the button lens 411 are provided. Therefore, the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a illuminates the center side of the frame side lens 417 and the button lens 411 and the second LED 422b by the inner cylindrical portion 416d and the main body portion 413a and the inner extending portion 413f. , 423b from illuminating the second button decoration portion 411b can be prevented, and the adjacent frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b can be independently illuminated and decorated. it can. Therefore, the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b can be clearly illuminated and decorated, respectively, so that a good-looking luminous effect can be performed. In addition, the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b that are adjacent to each other are appropriately combined with lights, lights, blinks, brightness, colors, and the like to perform various patterns of light emission effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired and to entertain the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from having less interest in the game.

In addition, the first LEDs 422a and 423a that cause the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 to emit light and the second LEDs 422b and 423b that cause the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 to emit light are included in one operation button left outside decoration. Since the operation button left outside decoration board 422 and the operation button right outside decoration board 423 are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450) in preparation for the board 422 and the operation button right outside decoration board 423, the second button decoration portion is provided. Compared to the case where the substrate is provided for 411b (operation button 410), the first LEDs 422a, 423a can be kept away from the second button decoration portion 411b as much as possible, and the light from the first LEDs 422a, 423a can be sufficiently supplied. The second button decoration portion 411b can be irradiated with the light in a diffused state. Therefore, since the second button decoration portion 411b can be uniformly light-emitted, the second button decoration portion 411b and the frame side lens 417 can be made to look good, and the player's interest is strongly attracted. It is possible to entertain the player, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

Further, since the operation button left outside decoration board 422 and the operation button right outside decoration board 423 are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450), the operation button left outside decoration board 422 is moved as the operation button 410 moves back and forth. Also, the wiring connected to the operation button right outside decoration substrate 423 is not bent or extended, and disconnection of the wiring due to fatigue can be eliminated. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 (second button decoration portion 411b) is moved, the wiring is not broken, so that the operation button 410 can be moved (operated) and the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b can be moved. It is possible to entertain the player with the light-emitting decoration without any problem, and it is possible to prevent the player's interest from decreasing.

Further, since the second button decoration portion 411b is provided on the outer edge of the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410, the rear operation button interior decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are passed through the transparent button lens 411. When (door frame side second effect display device 460A) is viewed, the outer edge of the operation button interior decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) is set to the second button decoration portion 411b. Are decorated, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. Then, the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b are appropriately made to emit light, so that the operation button inner decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be seen rearward. As described above, the second button decoration portion 411b and the frame side lens 417 that decorate the outer edge of the button lens 411 can be light-embellished in various patterns as described above. The door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be strongly attracted, and the light emission effect and operation of the operation button 410, and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second It is possible to entertain an effect image or the like by the effect display device 460A) and suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, since the player can operate the button lens 411 (the operation button 410) having the second button decoration portion 411b on the outer edge, the operation button 410 can be operated by the player during execution of the player participation type effect. By performing the operation, the player can enjoy the operation of the operation button 410 (player participation type effect), and it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from being lowered. Then, at the time of executing the player participation type effect, the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are illuminated and decorated to attract the player's interest to the operation button 410. Therefore, the player can be prompted to operate the operation button 410, and the player can be allowed to participate in the player participation type production and be entertained.

Further, since only the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 is provided with the non-translucent main body portion 413a and the inner extending portion 413f capable of emitting and decorating by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, the second portion of the operation button 410 A region closer to the center than the button decoration portion 411b is not illuminated (illuminated) by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, and the operation button 410 (button lens 411) is arranged rearward because the center side becomes brighter. It is possible to prevent the operation button interior decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) from being hard to see from the front. Therefore, the second button decoration portion 411b can be illuminated and decorated in a good state, and the rear operation button inner decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect) can be provided through the transparent button lens 411. The display device 460A) can be visually recognized in a good state, and the player can be fully entertained with decorations, light emission effects, and the like, and a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

In addition, since the inner cylindrical portion 416d extends from the rear side of the frame unit 415 having the frame side lens 417, on the rear side of the frame unit 415, the second button decoration of the frame side lens 417 and the operation button 410 is performed. The inner cylindrical portion 416d can be completely partitioned from the portion 411b. On the other hand, at the end portions (rear end portions) of the inner tubular portion 416d on the side closer to the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423, light from the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b is emitted. Since the rear end of the inner tubular portion 416d is located closer to the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423 than the diffusion range, the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer Even if a gap is formed between the front surface of the decorative substrate 423, the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a illuminates the frame side lens 417, and the light from the second LED 422b 423b illuminates the second button decoration portion 411b. There is nothing to do. Therefore, the inner tubular portion 416d can reliably block light, and the pachinko machine 1 that reliably exhibits the above-described operational effects can be realized.

Further, since the main body portion 413a and the inner extending portion 413f of the button base 413 are configured to extend from the rear side of the operation button 410 (button lens 411), on the rear side of the operation button 410, the second button decoration portion 411b. The space between the center of the button lens 411 and the center of the button lens 411 can be completely partitioned by the body portion 413a and the inner extending portion 413f. On the other hand, the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423 are closer to the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423 than the operation button left outer decoration board 423 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423. Since the light also extends rearward, the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not go under the rear end of the main body 413a, and the intrusion of light into the center side of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 can be completely blocked. You can Therefore, the second LED decoration portion 411b can be illuminated and decorated in a good condition by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, and the rear operation button interior decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (through the transparent button lens 411). The door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be visually recognized in a good state, and the player can be fully entertained with decoration, light emission effect, and the like, and a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

Further, when viewed from the front, the second button decoration is provided in front of a portion outside the operation button inner decoration member 432 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) arranged behind the operation button 410 (button lens 411). Since the portion 411b is positioned, the operation button inner decoration member 432 (the door frame side second member) is inserted through the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decoration member 432 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A). It is possible to make the outer member and the rear side (back side) of the effect display device 460A) invisible by the second button decoration portion 411b, and prevent the appearance of the operation button 410 from being deteriorated. In addition, at this time, when the second button decoration portion 411b is illuminated and decorated by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, the operation button inner decoration member 432 (the door frame side second effect) with respect to the brightness of the second button decoration portion 411b. Since the outer side and the rear side of the display device 460A) are relatively dark, it is possible to make the members on the outer side and the rear side of the operation button inner decorative member 432 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) less visible. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the appearance of the operation button 410, the frame unit 415, the operation button interior decoration member 432, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), etc. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, since the outer peripheral shape of the operation button 410 is circular, the second button decoration portion 411b provided on the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) and the frame adjacent to the second button decoration portion 411b. The side lens 417 has a shape extending in an arc shape.
Therefore, by causing the first LEDs 422a and 423a and the second LEDs 422b and 423b to appropriately emit light, a light emission effect in which light gurgles around the outer edge of the operation button 410, or light emission in which light spreads from the inside to the outside of the operation button 410. Since it is possible to show the player the effect and the light emission effect such that the light is converged from the outside to the inside of the operation button 410, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the various light emission effects, and to make the player enjoyable. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 in the door frame 3, the stored game balls are driven into the game area 5a and the upper plate 321 used for the game is displayed. Along with the installation, the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is detachably attached to the front side and the lower side of the upper plate 321, and an installation space of a predetermined size is provided behind the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). The remaining space of the mounting space 326j is formed, and a part of the lower plate body 325 corresponding to the lower plate first area A1 is arranged on the left side of the remaining space of the mounting space 326j. Since the lower plate 322 capable of storing the game balls is attached by extending the region corresponding to the lower plate second area A2 in the lower plate body 325, the lower plate 322 looks small when viewed from the front. As a result, the lower plate 322 can be made inconspicuous, and the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) can be made relatively inconspicuous. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) can be seen at a position where the upper plate and the lower plate were seen side by side in the conventional pachinko machine. However, it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal that can make the player recognize that it is different from the conventional pachinko machine at a glance and can strongly attract the player's interest. it can.

Further, in the lower plate second region A2 portion of the lower plate body 325 of the lower plate 322, the main body standing wall portion 325b extending upward from the outer periphery extends upward, and the mounting space 326j extends to the remaining space side. Since the lower plate covers 340 and 340A for restricting the movement of the game balls are provided, it is possible to prevent the game balls in the lower plate 322 from contacting the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). The game balls supplied in the lower plate 322 and the game balls stored in the lower plate 322 come into contact with or press the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). Can be prevented. Therefore, the game ball does not contact the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), and the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is not damaged by the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being lowered by the interruption of the game due to the damage of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), and the pachinko machine 1 is installed. It is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side.

Further, lower plate cover 340, 340A for restricting the movement of the game ball to the space of the lower plate second region A2 of the lower plate body 325 of the lower plate 322 to the remaining space of the main body standing wall portion 325b and the mounting space 326j. Since it is provided with, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering (spilling) from the lower plate body 325 into the remaining space of the mounting space 326j. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable or uncomfortable by the game ball invading the remaining space of the mounting space 326j. Can be suppressed.

Further, since the lower plate cover 340, 340A covers the lower plate second region A2 of the lower plate body 325 of the lower plate 322, the game balls supplied in the lower plate 322 bounce in the lower plate 322. Even if it jumps up, it is possible to reliably prevent the mounting space 326j from entering the remaining space side, and it is possible to surely obtain the above-described operational effects. Further, since the lower plate cover 340, 340A covers the lower plate second region A2 of the lower plate main body 325, the player can move the lower plate main region 325 to the lower plate first region A1 side (the lower plate opening portion). Since the lower plate covers 340 and 340A can prevent the fingertips and the like from entering the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j when the hand is put into the lower plate second area A2 from 326d), the fingertips can be restricted. It is possible to prevent the player from being injured by touching the lower surface of the upper plate 321 or the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), etc., and making the player play in a safe state. You can

Furthermore, since there is a gap between the lower plate covers 340 and 340A and the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), impact and pressure due to contact of the game balls with the lower plate covers 340 and 340A, etc. Is not transmitted from the lower plate covers 340, 340A to the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), the damage of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is ensured. Can be prevented.

In addition, since the lower dish ball removing hole 322a is provided in front of the lower dish ball supply port 323c in the lower plate second area A2 of the lower plate body 325 of the lower plate 322, the lower plate ball removing hole 322a is opened. In the state, the game ball discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 323c can be directly inserted into the lower plate ball removal hole 322a and discharged downward (dollar box), and the game ball is the main body of the lower plate body 325. It is possible to make it difficult to reach the front end side of the standing wall portion 325b. Even if the game ball jumps over the lower plate ball removal hole 322a, since the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are provided as described above, the game ball is the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). Since it is possible to prevent contact with the rear side, it is possible to prevent damage to the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), reduce interruption of the game, and reduce interest in the game for the player. Can be suppressed.

Further, since the bottom wall portion 325a of the lower tray body 325 near the front end of the lower tray 322 is higher toward the front, the game ball heading toward the front end side of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower tray body 325 is inclined. As it climbs the bottom surface, the moving speed of the game ball can be reduced. Therefore, since the speed of the game ball that abuts on the lower plate cover 340, 340A can be slowed down, the lower plate cover 340, 340A reliably restricts the game ball from moving to the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j. At the same time, it is possible to reduce the impact when the game ball comes into contact with the lower plate covers 340, 340A and the main body standing wall portion 325b, and to prevent them from being damaged.

Further, since at least the lower tray covers 340 and 340A are separate members, when the lower tray covers 340 and 340A are damaged, they can be easily repaired by simply replacing the lower tray covers 340 and 340A. It is possible to reduce the increase in the burden on the side of the game hall where 1 is installed.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the center in the left-right direction of the front surface swells to the frontmost below the game area 5a of the game board 5 where a game is received in the general winning opening 2001 or the like. The dish unit cover 326 of the ejected dish unit 320 is provided, and the production operation unit 400 and the second production operation unit 400A are detachably attached to the most forwardly bulged portion of the dish unit cover 326, and the dish 321 is attached to the dish unit cover 326. And a lower plate 322, a storage plate capable of storing a game ball is provided, and the storage plate (upper plate 321 and lower plate 322) is provided outside the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) in a front view. There is a lower plate first area A1 located and a lower plate second area A2 located in the rear space of the mounting space 326j that is behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) in front view. Therefore, when viewed from the front, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) can be made conspicuous, and the storage trays (the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322) can be made small to make them inconspicuous. it can. Therefore, since the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) that stands out can be seen in the parts where the upper plate and the lower plate were visible in the conventional pachinko machine, the game machine different from the conventional pachinko machine to the player. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 with a high appealing power that can be recognized at a glance and can strongly attract the interest of the player.

Further, since the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is attached to the center of the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 in the left-right direction, a portion of the surface of the plate unit cover 326 where the lower plate 322 is open is located. Although smaller, the first of the lower plate main body 325 having the lower plate second area A2 located in the rear space of the mounting space 326j that is behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) in front view. Since the additional part 325B, the second additional part 325C, and the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are provided, it is possible to store the game balls in a range in the lower plate 322 that cannot be seen from the front (lower plate second region A2). it can. Therefore, it is possible to sufficiently secure the storage amount of the game balls contrary to the appearance from the front, so that the player can concentrate on the game without worrying about the remaining amount of the game balls in the lower plate 322. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, the lower tray main body 325 or the main body portion 325A having the lower tray first area A1 is provided with the lower tray covers 340 and 340A having the lower tray second area A2, the first extension portion 325B, and the second extension. Since the lower plate 322 is configured by attaching (combining) the parts 325C, a plurality of lower plate covers 340, 340A having different sizes, the first extension part 325B, the second extension part 325C, etc. are prepared in advance. By installing the lower tray covers 340, 340A, the first extension section 325B, and the second extension section 325C of a size corresponding to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and the size of the attachment space 326j in the dish unit cover 326, The volume of the dish 322 can be optimized. Further, as described above, by rearranging (replacing) the lower tray covers 340, 340A and the first extension part 325B and the second extension part 325C, it is possible to correspond to the size of the rear space of the mounting space 326j. Since the size of the rear space depends on the amount of rearward projection of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), various effect operation units 400 (second The lower plate 322 that is compatible with the rendering operation unit 400A) can be provided, and the versatility of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced.

Further, since the lower plate 322 is provided with the bottom wall portion 325a and the main body standing wall portion 325b that rises from the outer peripheral end of the bottom wall portion 325a, the lower plate 322 becomes a container shape that is recessed downward, and a game ball. Can be reliably stored. Further, since the lower tray covers 340, 340A have the cover standing wall portion 340a rising from the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower tray body 325, the lower tray covers 340, 340A of various shapes are prepared in advance. In addition, by combining (attaching) the lower tray covers 340, 340A having shapes according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and the size (shape) of the rear space of the mounting space 326j, various forms can be accommodated. Therefore, it is possible to obtain the same effects as the above.

In the lower tray 322 composed of the lower tray body 325 and the lower tray covers 340 and 340A, the lower tray covers 340 and 340A are combined (attached) to the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower tray body 325. Therefore, since the portion of the lower plate 322 on which the game balls are placed becomes the lower plate body 325, the lower plate body 325 and the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are placed on the part where more game balls are loaded due to storage. No boundary (seam, division line PL) is located. Therefore, since the load of the stored game balls is received only by the lower plate body 325, a force that separates the lower plate covers 340 and 340A from the lower plate body 325 even if a large number of game balls are stored. There is no action, and it is possible to prevent the lower tray covers 340 and 340A from coming off from the lower tray body 325.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper plate capable of storing the game balls below and in front of the game area 5a of the game board 5 in which the game is received in the general winning opening 2001 or the like. 321 and the lower plate 322 are provided, and the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball removal hole 322a in the lower plate 322 are provided by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) arranged in the center in the left-right direction. Since more than half of the lower plate 322 including and is difficult to see from the front (player) (makes it difficult to see), the pachinko machine 1 can have a clean appearance and a good appearance, which is of interest to the player. The pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power capable of strongly attracting can be obtained. In addition, since it is difficult to visually recognize the game ball heading from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball removal hole 322a by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), it is possible for the player to play a game in the lower plate 322. It is possible to prevent the flow of the ball from being noticed and prevent the player from being distracted, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, by the effect operation unit 400 (the second effect operation unit 400A), the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate on the bottom of the lower plate 322 for guiding the game ball from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball removal hole 322a. Since it is difficult to visually recognize the part between the ball removing hole 322a, the game ball guided by the guiding means such as the ball guiding portion 322c and the buffer portion 322d, the lower plate ball removing hole 322a is left open. The game ball supplied to the lower plate 322 from the lower plate ball supply port 323c is smoothly (immediately) discharged from the lower plate ball extracting hole 322a by being guided by the guiding means, and thus, to the player. It is possible to make the illusion that the game balls are discharged to the lower side (dollar box) of the lower plate 322 without passing through the lower plate 322. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance that the game ball passes through the lower plate 322, and it is possible to prevent the player from devoting himself/herself to the game and suppressing a decrease in interest.

Further, since the rendering operation unit 400 (the second rendering operation unit 400A) makes it difficult to visually recognize more than half of the lower dish 322 including the lower dish ball supply port 323c, the lower dish ball removal hole 322a, and the like from the front, it is probable. In addition, the lower dish ball supply port 323c, the lower dish ball removal hole 322a, and the like are located behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). That is, since more than half of the lower plate 322 is made to wrap around behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), the actual lower plate is larger than the size of the lower plate 322 seen from the front. Since the size (capacity) of 322 is large, it is possible to secure a sufficient storage amount of the game balls in the lower plate 322 as compared with the appearance.

Further, in the state where the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is open, the game balls discharged from the lower dish ball supply port 323c into the lower dish 322 are the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball on the bottom surface of the lower plate 322. Since it can be smoothly guided to the lower plate ball hole 322a and discharged to the lower part of the lower plate 322 (dollar box) by a part between the hole 322a, the ball guiding part 322c, the buffer part 322d and the like. It is possible to prevent the game balls from circulating around the lower plate 322, and it is possible to reliably make the game balls circulating in the lower plate 322 difficult to visually recognize from the front (player). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the flow of the game balls in the lower plate 322, to prevent the player's distraction, and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, if the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is left open, the game balls supplied from the lower dish ball supply port 323c to the lower plate 322 are immediately noticed to the player by the ball guiding portion 322c and the like. Since it can be discharged downward from the lower plate ball removal hole 322a, it gives the player the illusion that the game ball is discharged below the lower plate 322 (dollar box) without passing through the lower plate 322. You can As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance that the game ball passes through the lower plate 322, and it is possible to prevent the player from devoting himself/herself to the game and suppressing a decrease in interest.

Further, since the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A) makes it difficult to visually recognize from the front more than half of the storage area (storage area) of the game balls in the plan view of the lower plate 322, the lower plate that can be seen from the front. Since the actual lower plate 322 is more than twice as large as the visible size with respect to the size of 322, it is possible to sufficiently secure the storage amount of the game balls, as in the lower plate of the conventional pachinko machine.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the door frame 3 that bulges forward in the front view below the game area 5a of the game board 5 in which a game is played in which the general winning opening 2001 or the like is received. Production operation unit attachment for attaching a large-scale production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) having the same height as the overall height of the dish unit cover 326 in the center of the front side of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320 of FIG. In addition to having the portion 326a, the dish front lower decorative portion 326c below the approximately center in the vertical direction on both the left and right sides of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a on the front surface of the dish unit cover 326 is recessed so as to be hollowed back. Because of the shape, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a can be made to appear as if it protrudes largely forward, and the effect operation unit 400 (second effect). The operating unit 400A) can be highlighted. Therefore, in the conventional pachinko machine, the large production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) can be seen in an emphasized state at the position where the upper plate and the lower plate were seen side by side, so that the player can see it. On the other hand, at a glance, it can be recognized that it is different from the conventional pachinko machine, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal can be obtained. Then, the lower plate 322 is recessed rearward from the plate front lower decorative portion 326c which is recessed rearward on the left and right outer sides of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326. Since a part is made to wrap around behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), it is possible to sufficiently secure the storage amount of the game balls in the lower plate 322 (volume of the lower plate 322). The lower plate 322 does not have to be played while worrying that the lower bowl 322 is filled with game balls, the player can concentrate on the game, and it is possible to entertain the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, since a part of the lower plate 322 wraps around behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), when the player puts his/her hand in the lower plate 322 from the front, the fingertips are in the lower plate. It is possible to make it difficult to touch the rear wall of the plate 322 (front surface of the plate unit base 323), the lower plate cover 340, and the like. As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize by tactile sense that the storage amount of the game balls is sufficiently secured, and in the state where the game balls are stored in the lower plate 322, the inside of the lower plate 322 is Since it is possible to recognize that a large number of game balls are stored in the game, it is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction, entertain the game, and suppress a decrease in interest. Further, since the fingertips of the hand placed in the lower plate 322 are hard to touch the rear wall of the lower plate 322, the lower plate cover 340, etc., the player is given the same feeling as the lower plate in the conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, it is possible to reduce a feeling of strangeness given to a player who has become accustomed to a conventional pachinko machine, which can reassure the player and prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, since the lower plate 322 is formed so as to become wider toward the back side (rear side), a sufficient storage amount of the game balls can be secured even if the front side is small. In other words, since the portion of the lower plate 322 on the front end side is made small, the lower plate 322 is made inconspicuous on the front surface (the plate front lower decorative portion 326c) of the plate unit cover 326 where the lower plate 322 is open. Therefore, it is possible to make the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) relatively conspicuous. Therefore, the production operation unit 400 (the second production operation unit 400A) can be provided while ensuring a sufficient storage amount of the game balls in the lower plate 322, and the appealing power to the player can be increased and the player It can be enjoyed and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the lower plate cover 340 covers the side and the upper side of the portion of the lower plate 322 that wraps around behind the effect operation unit 400 (the second effect operation unit 400A), the player can move the inside of the lower plate 322. It is possible to prevent a fingertip or the like from touching the inner surface of the dish unit cover 326 or the rear surface of the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A) and injuring it when putting a hand, and You can play in a safe state. Further, the lower plate cover 340 can prevent the game balls from entering (spilling) from the lower plate 322 into the plate unit cover 326.

Further, since the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is arranged at the center of the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 in the left-right direction, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is placed from the player side. The pachinko machine 1 can be made more prominent and highly appealing to the player, and the decoration by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) can be easily seen. By doing so, it is possible to entertain the decoration and effect of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) and suppress a decrease in the player's interest.

Further, since the lower plate 322 is provided with the lower plate ball supply port 323c capable of communicating with the upper plate 321, and the lower plate ball removal hole 322a penetrating vertically so as to be opened and closed, the conventional pachinko machine Since it has the same function as the lower plate in, the player who is accustomed to the conventional pachinko machine does not get confused about the function of the lower plate 322 when playing with the pachinko machine 1, and is the same as the conventional one. It is possible to play the game with a feeling of being able to dedicate the player to the game and entertain the game. Further, since the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a are arranged behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), respectively, when viewed from the front, the lower plate ball supply port 323c is formed. The lower plate ball punching hole 322a is invisible from the player side, the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be made clean and the appearance can be improved, and the pachinko machine with a high appeal that can strongly attract the player's attention. It can be machine 1.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the plate unit 320 that bulges forward is located below the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 facing the game area 5a of the door frame 3. Of the door frame side effect display device 460 capable of presenting effects to the player, on the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the dish unit cover 326. The operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A) that decorates the outside is attached, and the outer diameter is set so as to surround the outer periphery of the operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit 470). Is about 15 cm and the center is bulged in a direction (outward) distant from the base unit 430 (second base unit 450), and an operation button 410 having a transparent button lens 411 is attached to the outer periphery of the button lens 411. A tubular button base 413, which includes the one button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, and the button frame 412, and projects from the button lens 411 side to the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side. Since the first button decoration portion 411a, the button base 413, etc. are provided, the operation button inner decoration member 432 (the door frame side second It is possible to reduce the visibility of the outer edge and the back side (rear side) of the screen unit 470) of the effect display device 460A, and it is possible to improve the appearance of the operation button 410. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the appearance of the operation button 410, the operation button interior decoration member 432 provided inside, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), and the like. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the button base 413 of the operation button 410 allow the clearance between the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit 470). Since it is possible to make the outer edge and the back side of the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) invisible, the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit) can be made larger by increasing the outer diameter of the operation button 410. 470), even if the gap between them becomes relatively large, it can be well hidden by the first button decoration portion 411a, etc., so that a large operation button with an outer diameter of about 15 cm can be prevented while preventing deterioration of appearance. 410 (button lens 411) can be embodied without problems. Therefore, the operation button 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be upsized, so that the pachinko machine 1 can be made conspicuous and the player's interest is strong. The pachinko machine 1 can be attracted to and highly appealing.

Further, since the button base 413 (main body portion 413a) protruding from the button lens 411 side to the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side in a cylindrical shape is provided, the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 ( When the gap between the screen units 470) is viewed obliquely, the inner wall of the button base 413 can shield and hide an object outside the operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit 470). The appearance of the button 410 can be further improved.

Further, since the transparent button lens 411 has a three-dimensional shape (hemispherical body shape) that swells in a direction (outward) away from the base unit 430 (second base unit 450), the vicinity of the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 is reduced. The surface is a plane formed by the opening on the front end side of the button base 413 (a plane orthogonal to the direction in which the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) and the button lens 411 are aligned, that is, the forward/backward direction of the operation button 410). The light is easily refracted when viewed from the player side, since the light is inclined with respect to a plane orthogonal to the plane.
Therefore, the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decoration member 432 (the screen unit 470) are combined with the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the button base 413 provided on the outer peripheral edge. It is possible to make it difficult to see the outer edge or the back side of the operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) through the gap between the above and the above), and it is possible to reliably obtain the above-described effects.

Further, since the button lens 411 is formed in a three-dimensional shape that bulges outward, the volume inside the operation button 410 increases, so that the operation button interior decoration member 432 and the door frame arranged in the operation button 410 are arranged. It is possible to make the side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) larger or easier to move, and the door frame side effect display device to entertain the player with the operation button 410. It is possible to easily provide 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), and it is possible to embody the pachinko machine 1 that further amuses the player.

Furthermore, since the button lens 411 is formed in a three-dimensional shape, the design (decoration) is given to the operation button 410, so that the operation button 410 is conspicuous in the pachinko machine 1 and the player's interest is increased. Can be directed, and it is possible to easily select the present pachinko machine 1 as a pachinko machine to play.

Further, in the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, and the button frame 412 provided on the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411, the button frame 412 is opaque, so that the button frame 412 has a button The back side of the operation button 410, the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470), etc. can be surely hidden from the gap between the lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470), and the operation can be reliably hidden. The appearance of the button 410 or the like can be reduced and the appearance can be improved.

In addition, the button lens 411 is provided with an opaque button frame 412 with a predetermined width from the outer peripheral end to the inner side, and cooperates with the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button decoration portion 411b to cooperate with the player. Since it is possible to make the gap between the main body portion 413a of the button base 413 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) of the operation button 410 difficult to see from the side, the main body portion 413a and the operation button interior decoration member 432 ( The gap between the screen unit 470) and the screen unit 470) can be increased, and a space for moving the operation button 410 and the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A can be easily secured by that amount. Can be moved satisfactorily.

Further, since the outer circumference of the button lens 411 has a cylindrical shape, the directionality of the outer circumference is lost as compared with the case where the button lens 411 has a polygonal shape, so that the operation button 410 can be easily moved smoothly. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 is enlarged, the pressing operation can be performed without any problem, and the player can surely enjoy the player participation type effect using the operation button 410 and suppress the deterioration of interest.

Further, since the operation button 410 is upsized, it is easy to perform the player participation type effect that causes the player to operate the operation button 410 without performing operation while confirming the position of the operation button 410. Since it is possible to easily touch and press the operation button 410, it is possible to make the player easily participate in the player participation type production using the operation button 410, which makes the player entertaining and is less entertaining. Can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) is provided in the operation button 410, the effect of the player is operated by presenting effect images according to the game state. The door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) in the button 410 can be strongly attracted, and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) is used. It is possible to entertain the effect, and it is possible to prompt the player to operate the operation button 410 by means of an effect image, light emission effect, or the like by the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A). , It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest by having the player actively participate in the player participation type production and entertaining. In addition, by executing the effect in the operation button 410, it is possible to think that there is something good for some players, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress the decline in interest. You can

Further, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be visually recognized through the transparent button lens 411 (the part inside the first button decoration portion 411a) of the large-sized operation button 410. Therefore, the player can immediately recognize that the operation button 410 of the pachinko machine 1 is obviously different from the operation button of the conventional pachinko machine, and the appealing power to the player is high. The pachinko machine 1 can be used, and the player's expectation for production using the operation button 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) in the operation button 410 is increased. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to the preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements can be made without departing from the gist of the present invention as shown below. And the design can be changed.

That is, in the above embodiment, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine is shown, but the invention is not limited to this, and a pachi-slot machine, or a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachi-slot machine are fused, It may be applied, and even in this case, the same effect as the above can be obtained.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 has the first button decoration portion 411a formed on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the button lens 411 without the first button decoration portion 411a may be used.

Further, in the above embodiment, the opaque button frame 412 is attached to the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the button frame 412 is not attached and the button frame 412 is not attached. A decorative portion for hiding the rear side may be formed over the entire circumference at a portion of the lens 411 corresponding to the button frame 412.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the operation button 410, the base unit 430 (the first unit) so as to surround the entire outer circumference of the operation button inner decoration member 432 and the door frame side second effect display device 460A from the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. Although the one including the button base 413 (main body portion 413a) projecting cylindrically toward the second base unit 450 side is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation button interior decoration member 432 and the door frame side second effect are shown. At least one of the display device 460A may protrude toward the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side so as to surround only a part of the entire outer circumference. The button base 413 may have a shape along the outer circumference of the button lens 411 or a shape not along the outer circumference of the button lens 411. The button base 413 may have a decoration (planar decoration by sticking or printing a seal, three-dimensional decoration by unevenness such as relief) on at least the inner wall side.
Further, the button base 413 may be translucent or non-translucent. The button base 413 may be colored or may be colorless and transparent. Further, when the button base 413 is made transparent, it is desirable that at least one of the inner wall side and the outer wall side is subjected to light diffusion processing such as grain, slit, prism and the like.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example in which the lower plate 322 is recessed rearward only from the left outer side portion of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 has been described. The lower plate is not limited to the above, but is recessed rearward from both left and right sides of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) and is connected to each other behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). 322 may be used, or it may be recessed rearward only from the right outer side portion of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), and a part of it may go around behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). You may want to stay.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the shape of the portion (the shape of the plate front lower decorative portion 326c) in which the lower plate 322 is recessed rearward on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 (the shape of the front end of the lower plate 322) is curved backward. Although an example in which the shape is concave is shown, the shape is not limited to this, and a polygonal prismatic surface or a front surface concave in a polyhedral shape may be used.

Further, in the above embodiment, an example in which the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is attached to the front surface of the dish unit cover 326 has been shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and “operation dial, touch panel, etc. "Equipment with an operating device", "equipment with a rotating body having a decoration on its surface", "equipment with a decoration and a movable device for moving the decoration", "game Characters, items, logos according to the concept of the machine, and those with a decorative body that imitates the scene (diorama) etc. in three dimensions", "Characters, items, logos according to the concept of the gaming machine, and predetermined patterns A member such as a unit or a panel provided with ", etc., which is decorated by a seal, printing, or the like" may be attached. Further, the number of members to be mounted in the mounting space 326j (production operation unit mounting portion 326a) does not have to be one, and a plurality of (two or more) members may be mounted. For example, separate members may be attached, such as a member attached to the upper half of the attachment space 326j and a member attached to the lower half of the attachment space 326j.

Further, in the above embodiment, the dish unit cover 326 is formed with the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a that is open to the front for attaching the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). However, the plate unit cover (for example, a panel-shaped cover portion) does not have an opening (effect operation unit attachment portion 326a) for attaching the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). A space corresponding to the mounting space 326j (or the remaining space of the mounting space 326j) may be formed behind the dish unit cover. It should be noted that it is desirable to decorate the front surface of such a plate unit cover with characters, items, logos, predetermined patterns, etc. according to the concept of the gaming machine, by sticking, printing, attaching decorative members, etc. ..

Further, in the above-described embodiment, an area slightly larger than a half of the storage area (storage area) of the game balls in plan view of the lower plate 322 is defined by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) as the covering portion. Although the example of covering from the front to be difficult to see is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to make the area less than half of the storage area of the game balls in the lower plate 322 difficult to see from the front, The entire plate 322 may be made difficult to be seen from the front.

Further, in the above embodiment, the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are partially provided in the circumferential direction in an arc shape. However, the second button decoration portion 411b and the frame side lens 417 may have an annular shape extending over the entire circumference.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as the second button internal decoration portion 432g of the operation button internal decoration member 432 of the effect operation unit 400, a decoration having a plurality of concentric polygons centered on the center is shown. The present invention is not limited to this, and the second button interior decoration portion 432g may be a decoration having a plurality of concentric circles (including an ellipse) centered on the center.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the transparent button lens 411 (front member) of the operation button 410 is used, and the operation button inner decoration member 432, the door frame side effect display device 460, and the door frame side second effect are arranged on the rear side. Although the rear member such as the display device 460A is always visible, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least one of the front member and the rear member arranged in the front and rear (or the upper and lower) is provided under predetermined conditions. It is also possible to adopt a configuration having variable light transmission means that allows the rear side to be visually recognized when the above condition is satisfied. Here, as the variable light transmitting means, "a rear surface can be visually recognized due to a difference in brightness between the front side and the rear side like a magic mirror", "a transparent state by turning on/off a power source like a liquid crystal film" And becomes opaque so that the rear side can be visually recognized." The front member and the rear member may be movable or may not be relatively movable.

By having the variable light transmitting means in at least one of the front member and the rear member, in a normal state, only the front member or the front member and the rear member are in a visible state, The decoration of the visible member can be shown to the player. In a special state, by satisfying a predetermined condition, a rear member (a rear member or a member arranged on the rear side of the rear member) that cannot be seen in a normal state can be seen. The member and the rear member, or the front member, the rear member, and the member on the rear side of the rear member can show an overlapping decoration. Therefore, various decorations (decorative effects) can be shown to the player by using the front member and the rear member, the player can be prevented from getting tired, and the player can be entertained. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the.

More specifically, for example, when the front member is provided with a variable light transmitting means such as a magic mirror, in a normal state, by darkening the rear side of the front member, only the decoration of the front member can be achieved. It can be visually recognized by the player. Then, when the front member and the rear member, or the rear side of the rear member is brightened by the light of the light emitting portion such as the LED, the satisfaction condition of the variable light transmitting means in the front member is satisfied, and the rear member is passed through the front member. The member is made visible, and the player can see the decoration in which the decoration of the front member and the decoration of the rear member are overlapped with each other.

Alternatively, when the front member is made transparent and the rear member is provided with a variable light transmitting means such as a magic mirror, the surface of the rear member can be seen through the front member in a normal state. The player can see the decoration by the surface of the player. Then, when the rear side of the rear member is brightened by the light of the light emitting portion such as the LED, the condition for satisfying the variable light transmitting means in the rear member is satisfied, and the rear side can be visually recognized through the rear member. Through the member, a member on the rear side of the rear member (for example, a display device, a decorative body such as a character) can be shown to the player.

Furthermore, when both the front member and the rear member have variable light transmitting means such as a magic mirror, in a normal state, only the decoration of the front member can be shown to the player, When the space between the rear member and the rear member is brightened by the light of the light emitting portion such as an LED, the condition for satisfying the variable light transmitting means in the front member is satisfied, and the surface of the rear member becomes visible through the front member. The player can show the decoration by the rear member. On the other hand, the rear side of the rear member is brightened by the light of the light emitting portion such as the LED (or the space between the front member and the rear member and the rear side of the rear member are simultaneously illuminated by the light of the light emitting portion such as the LED. ) And the conditions for satisfying the variable light transmitting means in the front member and the rear member, respectively, are satisfied, and a member on the rear side of the rear member through the front member and the rear member (for example, a display device, a decorative body such as a character). Can be shown to the player.
With this, by appropriately selecting a region to be brightened by the light of the light emitting unit, the visible range can be changed in multiple stages, and a variety of decorations can be enjoyed by the player.

In the above specific example, since the variable light transmission means is like a magic mirror, it looks like a mirror in the state where the back side is dark, so that the surface of the front member or the rear member is The glittering decoration can be shown to the player.

Further, in the above-mentioned specific examples, the variable light transmitting means is described as a magic mirror, but the same effect can be obtained even when the variable light transmitting means is a liquid crystal film. Further, when a variable light transmitting means such as a liquid crystal film is used, light can be transmitted even in an opaque state (it has a light transmitting property). If the rear side of the member can be made brighter (or light-emitted) by the light of a light-emitting portion such as an LED, a variety of light-emission effects and decoration effects can be shown to the player. ..

[7. Main control board, payout control board and peripheral control board]
Next, a control board that performs various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 74. 69 is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board, FIG. 70 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 69, and FIG. 71 is a payout control board, a CR unit, and a frequency forming the main board. FIG. 72 is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input/output to/from a lending device connection terminal board for gaming balls for relaying electrical connection with a display board, FIG. 72 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 69, and FIG. FIG. 74 is a block diagram showing an outline of a peripheral control MPU, and FIG. 74 is a block diagram of the vicinity of the VDP with a built-in sound source in the liquid crystal display control unit.

As shown in FIG. 69, the pachinko machine 1 has, as shown in FIG. 69, a first control unit MCG that performs a control power source (for example, +5V) generation process and controls a game including payout of prize balls. , And a second control unit SCG that produces an effect relating to the game progressed by the first control unit MCG.

More specifically, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment employs a structure in which various controls are shared by preparing a plurality of boards, and the main control board 1310 is used as the first control unit MCG. A payout control board 951 and a power supply board 931 are provided, and a peripheral control board 1510 is provided as the second control unit SCG. Hereinafter, in describing the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, first, the first control unit MCG will be described in the order of the main control board 1310, the payout control board 951, and the power supply board 931. The 2 control unit SCG (peripheral control board 1510) will be described.

[7-1. Main control board]
Of the first control unit MCG, the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game controls the power-on process executed when the power is turned on as shown in FIG. Main control MPU1310a, which is a microprocessor having various built-in control programs such as a main control program for controlling game operations and various commands executed after being executed, and a RAM for temporarily storing data, and various A main control input circuit 1310b to which a detection signal from a detection switch is input, a main control output circuit 1310c for outputting various signals to an external board, and a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d for driving various solenoids. , And a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e that monitors a sign of a power failure or a momentary power failure of a predetermined voltage.

The main control MPU 1310a has a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"). In addition, a watchdog timer 1310af (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in WDT 1310af") that monitors the operation (system) thereof, a function for preventing fraud, and the like are also incorporated.

The main control MPU 1310a has a built-in nonvolatile RAM. This non-volatile RAM stores in advance a unique ID code with a unique code (a code that exists only once in the world) for identifying an individual by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a. Since the ID code once assigned is stored in the nonvolatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten even by using an external device. The main control MPU 1310a can retrieve the ID code from the nonvolatile RAM and refer to it.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a is a hard random number circuit 1310an (hereinafter, referred to as "main control built-in Hard random number circuit 1310an"). This main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an generates random numbers within a predetermined numerical value range (in the present embodiment, the numerical value value 0 is set as the minimum value and the maximum value is the value 32767 is preset). The predetermined value is not fixed as the initial value (that is, the initial value is not fixed), and the circuit is configured so that a different value is set every time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an first sets a clock signal (input to the main control MPU 1310a as an initial value within a predetermined numerical range). Based on the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator, which will be described later), other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted at high speed one after another without duplication, and all values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted. After that, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a, without overlapping with other values within the predetermined numerical range. Extract one after another. Such a high-speed lottery is repeatedly performed by the main-control-internal hard random number circuit 1310an, and the main-control MPU 1310a gives a big hit to the value extracted by the main-control internal hard-random number circuit 1310an at the time of obtaining the value from the main-control internal hard-random number circuit 1310an. It is set as a random number for judgment.

The main control input circuit 1310b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information input with the detection signals from the various detection switches to its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 1310b is configured as a circuit to which the system reset signal from the main control system reset described later is not input. That is, in the main control input circuit 1310b, the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals is not reset by the main control system reset, which will be described later, so that the various signals based on the information are changed. It is configured as a circuit output from the output terminal.

The main control output circuit 1310c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external board or the like are input to the various input terminals. Reset control main control output circuit 1310ca having a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the stored information, and no reset function main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset terminal provided with the reset function It consists of and. The main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is input. That is, the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function outputs information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like by being reset by a main control system reset, which will be described later. Is configured as a circuit in which no signal based on is output from the various output terminals. On the other hand, the main control output circuit 1310cb without the reset function is configured as a circuit to which the system reset signal from the main control system reset described later is not input. In other words, the main control output circuit 1310cb without the reset function outputs the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like by not being reset by the main control system reset described later, so that It is configured as a circuit in which the base signal is output from its various output terminals.

As shown in FIG. 60, a first starting port sensor 4002 for detecting a game ball entering the first starting port 2002, a second starting port sensor 4004 for detecting a game ball entering the second starting port 2004, and general. The detection signal from the general winning hole sensor 4020 that detects the game ball that entered the winning hole 2001 and the signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e are input terminals of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. Has been entered in. In addition, in the gate sensor 4003 which detects the game ball which passes the gate section 2003 which is shown in FIG. 60, the count sensor 4005 which detects the game ball which has entered the special winning opening 2005, and the back unit 3000 which is shown in FIG. A detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 that is attached and detects fraudulent activity using a magnet is a predetermined input of the main control MPU 1310a via the panel relay board 4161 attached to the game board 5 and the main control input circuit 1310b. It is input to the input terminal of the port.

The main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca based on the detection signal from each of these switches, thereby the main control output circuit with reset function. 1310ca outputs a control signal to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and outputs a drive signal from the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d to the starting opening solenoid 2107 and the attacker solenoid 2108 via the panel relay board 4161, or a predetermined output port thereof. By outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function through the panel relay board 4161, and the function display unit 1400 through the first special symbol display 1403 , A second special symbol display device 1405, a first special reserved number display device 1404, a second special reserved number display device 1406, a normal symbol display device 1402, a status display device 1401, and a round display device 1407 to output a drive signal or To do.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information regarding the game (game information) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with the reset function, so that the payout control is performed from the main control output circuit 1310ca with the reset function. By outputting various information regarding the game (game information) to the board 951 and outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, the main function with reset function The control output circuit 1310ca outputs a signal (power failure clear signal) to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e.

In the present embodiment, a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used for the first starting port sensor 4002, the second starting port sensor 4004, the gate sensor 4003, and the count sensor 4005. Contact type ON/OFF operation type mechanical switches are used for the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 and frequently passes through the gate portion 2003, so the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and The detection of the game ball by the gate sensor 4003 also frequently occurs. Therefore, a proximity switch having a long life is used for the first starting port sensor 4002, the second starting port sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003. In addition, when the big hit game state which is advantageous to the player occurs, the special winning opening 2005 is opened and the game ball is frequently entered, so that the count sensor 4005 also frequently detects the game ball. Therefore, the count sensor 4005 also uses a proximity switch having a long life. On the other hand, the general winning hole sensors 4020, 4020 are not frequently detected in the general winning hole 2001, 2012 where the game ball does not enter frequently. For this reason, a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch is used for the general winning opening sensors 4020, 4020.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to payout as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function, so that the payout control from the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function is performed. Various commands are transmitted to the board 951 as serial data. When the payout control board 951 normally receives various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, the payout control board 951 outputs a signal (payer ACK signal) to that effect to the main control board 1310. This signal (payment main ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951 as serial data at the main control input circuit 1310b, so that the main control input circuit 1310b inputs the predetermined serial input port. Various commands are received as serial data at the terminal. When the main control MPU 1310a completes the normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 951 as serial data, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a signal (main payout ACK signal) to that effect from the output terminal of the predetermined output port with the reset function. The signal is output to the circuit 1310ca, and a signal (main payment ACK signal) is output from the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca to the payout control board 951.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands relating to the control of the game effect and various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310cb without the reset function. , Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset function to the peripheral control board 1510.

Here, the main serial transmission port for transmitting various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 as serial data will be briefly described. The main control MPU 1310a is mainly configured by a main control CPU core 1310aa. In addition to the main control built-in RAM, the main control serial transmission port 1310ae, which is one of various main control serial I/O ports, etc., connects the bus 1310ah. They are connected via a circuit (see FIG. 79). The main serial transmission port 1310ae transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data, and mainly includes a transmission shift register 1310eaa, a transmission buffer register 1310aeb, and a serial management unit 1310aec (see FIG. 79). When the main control CPU core 1310aa sets the command in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb and outputs the transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec, the serial management unit 1310aec outputs the command set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb from the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. The data is transferred to the transmission shift register 1310eaa and started to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as the main circumference serial data. In this embodiment, the storage capacity of the transmission buffer register 1310aeb has 32 bytes. The main control CPU core 1310aa continuously transmits a plurality of commands to the peripheral control board 1510 by setting a plurality of commands in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb and then outputting a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec.

The power supply board 931 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as a “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. BC0 (see FIG. 75). The capacitor BC0 allows the main control MPU 1310a to store various information in the main control built-in RAM in the power-off processing even when the power is turned off. Various types of information stored in the RAM with built-in main control are operation signals (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 to be described later is operated within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. Is output from the payout control board 951 and is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. At this time, the main control MPU 1310a completely erases it from the main control internal RAM. It is supposed to be (cleared).

[7-2. Discharge control board]
Of the first control unit MCG, a payout control board 951 for controlling payout of gaming balls and the like, as shown in FIG. And an error LED indicator 860b for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1. The operation switch 954, which also has a function as a RAM clear switch, is a RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a (hereinafter, referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) based on a detection signal output by being operated. The RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in (.

[7-2-1. Dispensing control unit]
As shown in FIG. 70, the payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to payout controls the power-on process executed when the power is turned on, and also pays out the game medium executed after a predetermined time has elapsed after the power was turned on. Detecting from a payout control MPU 952a, which is a microprocessor having a ROM for storing various control programs including a payout control program for controlling operations and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and various detection switches for payout. A payout control input circuit 952b to which a signal is input, a payout control output circuit 952c for outputting various signals to an external board, and a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830. A CR unit input/output circuit 952e for exchanging various signals with the CR unit 6 is provided. The payout control MPU 952a has a built-in RAM (hereinafter, referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”) and a built-in ROM (hereinafter, referred to as “payout control built-in ROM”). In addition, a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud are also built in.

Under the control of the payout control MPU 952a, the payout control program serially outputs various information regarding the game (game information) from the main control board 1310 and various commands regarding the payout as main pay serial data reception signals via the payout control input circuit 952b. Receive serial data with. In addition, the payout control program generates a frame state 1 command (corresponding to a first error occurrence command) when an error occurs in the payout operation of the game ball, or operates the operation switch 954 as an error canceling unit. A 16-bit (2-byte) error cancel navigation command (corresponding to the first error cancel command) is created based on the signal (detection signal), and these error occurrence command and error cancel navigation command are respectively transmitted to the payer serial data. The signal is output as serial data of the serial system to the receiving port of the main control board 1310 via the payout control I/O port 952b (command transmitting means).
In addition, this payout control program executes payout control after a predetermined time has passed since the power was turned on, that is, after the payout control main process is executed or the payout control unit timer interrupt process is executed to start payout control. When an error occurs in the operation, the error is canceled based on the detection signal generated by the operation of the operation switch 954, and the output of warning information corresponding to the error is stopped (error cancellation control means).

Further, this payout control program outputs a door frame opening command (first door opening command) when a detection signal (door frame opening detection signal) accompanying the opening operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618. When a detection signal (main frame opening detection signal) associated with the opening operation is input from the main frame opening switch 619, a main frame opening command (first main frame opening command) is output. On the other hand, the payout control program sends a door frame closing command (first door frame closing command) when a detection signal (door frame closing detection signal) accompanying the closing operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618. In addition to outputting, when a detection signal (main body frame closing detection signal) accompanying the closing operation is input from the main body frame opening switch 619, a main body frame closing command (first main body frame closing command) is output.

The payout control input circuit 952b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information input with the detection signals from the various detection switches to its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the payout control input circuit 952b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is not input.
That is, in the payout control input circuit 952b, the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals is not reset by the payout control system reset, which will be described later, so that the various signals based on the information are changed. It is configured as a circuit output from the output terminal.

The payout control output circuit 952c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external board or the like are input to the various input terminals. Resetting function-equipped payout control output circuit 952ca having a reset function for forcibly resetting the generated information and reset function-less payout control output circuit 952cb having no reset terminal and having no reset function It consists of and. The payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is input. That is, in the payout control output circuit 952ca with the reset function, the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like is reset by a payout control system reset to be described later, and thus the information is output. Is configured as a circuit in which no signal based on is output from the various output terminals. On the other hand, the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is not input. In other words, the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function outputs the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like because it is not reset by the payout control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit in which the base signal is output from its various output terminals.

A ball-out detection sensor 827 that detects a ball out of the game ball in the supply passage of the ball guiding unit 820 of the payout unit 800, and a payout detection sensor 842 that detects a game ball discharged from the payout outlets 831b and 832b of the payout device 830. The detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 840 that detects the rotation of the payout blade 839 is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control input circuit 952b. In the following description, the blade rotation detection sensor 840 will be simply referred to as the rotation detection sensor 840 in this specification.

The detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618 that detects the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4 and the body frame opening switch 619 that detects the opening of the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are output to the payout control input circuit 952b. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the.

Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 for detecting whether or not the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. It is inputted to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the substrate 931 and the payout control input circuit 952b.

The payout control MPU 952a receives various commands relating to the payout from the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b at the input terminal of the serial input port thereof in the serial data system, or the operation signal of the operation switch 954 (detection). Signal) is output to the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b. When the payout control MPU 952a completes the normal reception of various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, the payout control MPU 952a outputs a signal (payment main ACK signal) to that effect from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output with reset function. By outputting to the circuit 952ca, the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function outputs a signal (payment ACK signal) to the main control board 1310.

Further, the payout control MPU 952a sends various commands for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the serial output port to the reset functionless payout control output circuit 952cb, thereby performing the reset functionless payout control. Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the output circuit 952cb to the main control board 1310.
When the main control board 1310 normally receives various commands from the payout control board 951 as serial data, it outputs a signal (main payout ACK signal) to that effect to the payout control board 951. This signal (main payout ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control input circuit 952b.

Further, the payout control MPU 952a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function to thereby output the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function. From the payout motor drive circuit 952d, the drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 952d to the payout motor 834, or from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, the status of the pachinko machine 1 is indicated by an error LED indicator. By outputting the drive signal for displaying on 860b to the payout control output circuit 952ca with the reset function, the drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with the reset function to the error LED indicator 860b.

The error LED indicator 860b is a segment indicator and displays alphanumeric characters, figures, etc. to indicate the state of the pachinko machine 1. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED indicator 860b include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it indicates that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it indicates that "connection is abnormal" (specifically, the main control board 1310 and That there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 951 and the board, and when the number "1" is displayed, it means "out of ball" (specifically, out of ball). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 827, it notifies that there is no game ball in the supply passage of the payout device 830), and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that it is "ball ball" (specifically At the entrance of the distribution space that communicates with the supply passage of the payout device 830 based on the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, the payout rotary body and the game ball are meshed in the vicinity of the entrance, and the payout rotary body becomes difficult to rotate. "Payout detection sensor error" when the number "3" is displayed (specifically, the payout detection sensor 842 is defective based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842). That a “retry error” occurs when the number “5” is displayed (specifically, the number of retries of the payout operation has reached the preset upper limit value). When the number “6” is displayed, it means “full tank” (specifically, the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 is stored based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279). When the number "7" is displayed, it indicates "CR not connected" (electrical connection in any of the payout control board 951 to the CR unit 6) Is notified), and when the number “9” is displayed, it means “in stock (there is a prize ball stock (not yet paid))” (specifically, a game ball that has not been paid out yet) That the number of balls has reached a predetermined number).

Further, the payout control MPU 952a outputs the number of balls actually paid out from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function to thereby output the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function. It outputs the number of balls actually paid out to the external terminal board 784 through a resistor (not shown).

Further, the payout control board 951 outputs various information (game information) about the game from the main control board 1310 to the external terminal board 784 via a resistor (not shown). The external terminal board 784 is provided with a plurality of photocouplers (not shown) (infrared LEDs and photo ICs are built in), and a game hall (hall) through the plurality of photocouplers. ), the number of balls of the game ball and various information (game information, error contents regarding the payout operation of the game ball or the fact that there was an error) are transmitted to the hall computer.
The external terminal board 784 and the hall computer are electrically insulated from each other by a plurality of photocouplers, and an abnormal voltage is applied to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko machine 1 to cause the hall computer. The computer does not malfunction or break down, and the hall computer uses the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko machine 1 as a main control board 1310 for advancing a game and a payout control board 951 for controlling payout and the like. An abnormal voltage is applied to prevent malfunction or failure. The hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

A ball lending request signal for a game ball from the ball lending button 328 and a return request signal for a prepaid card from the return button 329 are first displayed as a frequency display plate 365, a main door relay terminal plate 880, and a terminal for connecting a lending device such as a game ball. It is adapted to be input to the CR unit 6 via 869.
The CR unit 6 transmits a signal specifying the number of balls of the game ball to be lent out according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 951 in a serial manner through the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and this signal is the CR unit. It is adapted to be inputted to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the input/output circuit 952e. In addition, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining amount of the inserted prepaid card in accordance with the number of balls of the rented gaming ball, and at the same time, outputs a signal for displaying the remaining amount on the ball loan display unit 330. The equal lending device connection terminal plate 869, the main door relay terminal plate 880, and the frequency display plate 365 are output, and this signal is input to the ball lending display unit 330. Further, the CR unit lamp 365d adjacent to the ball lending/returning display section 330 is configured such that the supply voltage from the CR unit 6 is inputted through the lending device connection terminal plate 869 for gaming balls and the main door relay terminal plate 880. ing.

The power supply board 931 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 951 includes a capacitor BC1 (see FIG. 75) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control board 951 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. There is. With this capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU 952a can store various information in the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. The various information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is such that when the operation switch 954 is operated within a predetermined period after the power is turned on, the operation signal is a predetermined signal of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control input circuit 952b. The payout control MPU 952a, which is input to the input terminal of the input port, determines as a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM. It is supposed to be completely erased. This operation signal (RAM clear signal) is output to the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function, and is also output from the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function to the main control board 1310.

[7-2-2. Exchange of various signals with the terminal connection device for lending equipment such as game balls]
Here, the exchange of various signals between the payout control unit 952 and the CR unit 6 and the exchange of various signals between the CR unit 6 and the frequency display plate 365 will be described with reference to FIG. 71. As shown in FIG. 71, the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 relays the electrical connection between the CR unit 6 and the payout control board 951, and also the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365. The electrical connection between the boards is also relayed (to be precise, the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 is electrically connected to the frequency display board 365 via the main door relay terminal board 880). , The CR unit 6 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected, the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 are electrically connected, and the main door relay The terminal board 880 and the frequency display board 365 are electrically connected). Between the CR unit 6 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, between the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the payout control substrate 951, between the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay The board with the terminal board 880 and the board with the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 and the frequency display board 365 are electrically connected by respective wirings (harnesses). Further, AC24V to be described later from the power supply board 931 is supplied to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. The CR unit 6 creates a predetermined voltage VL (DC +12V (DC +12V, hereinafter referred to as "+12V") in this embodiment) from the supplied AC 24V by a built-in voltage creating circuit (not shown) and the ground LG. , While supplying to the payout control board 951 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, while supplying to the frequency display plate 365 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 ..

The frequency display plate 365 is provided with a ball lending button 328, which is a push button switch, at a position corresponding to the ball lending button 328 on the component surface, and a push button switch at a position corresponding to the return button 329 of the ball lending unit 360. The return button 329 is mounted, and the ball lending display unit 330, which is a segment display, is mounted at a position corresponding to the remaining loan display unit 363 of the ball lending unit 360.

The ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 are electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6 through the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. When the ball lending button 328 is pressed, the ball lending button 328 is turned on (turned on), and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is transmitted to the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game. It is adapted to be input to the CR unit 6 through a ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. When the return button 329 is pressed, the return button 329 switches on (turns on) the return button 329, and the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is connected to the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball lending device connection. Input is made to the CR unit 6 via the terminal plate 869.

The ball lending/returning display unit 330 has three segment display units arranged in a line, and one of the three-digit segment display units is sequentially driven by a so-called dynamic lighting system. The digit segment indicator is controlled to light. By such lighting control, the ball loan display unit 330 displays the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted in the CR unit 6 or an error of the CR unit 6. The ball lending/returning display unit 330 includes digit signals DG0 to DG2 (three signals in total) for designating a 1-digit segment display out of the 3-digit segment display and the designated 1-digit segment display. Segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G (7 signals in total) for designating the contents to be displayed by lighting up, are from the CR unit 6 to the rental ball connection device connection terminal board 869 and main door relay terminal. When input through the plate 880, the one-digit segment display sequentially emits light according to the input digit signals DG0 to DG2 and the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G, and these three-digit segment display is performed. The content of light emitted from the container can be visually confirmed through the remaining lending display portion 363.

A CR unit lamp 365d is mounted on the frequency display plate 365 adjacent to the ball loan display unit 330. In the CR unit lamp 365d, the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is input via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. The predetermined voltage VL is input to the CR unit 6 as a ball lending enable signal TDL through the current limiting resistor mounted on the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 via the CR unit lamp 365d. The CR unit 6 creates a predetermined voltage VL from the AC 24V supplied from the power supply board 931 by the built-in voltage creating circuit, and when the ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 are in a valid ball lending state. Controls the logic of the ball lending enable signal TDL to cause the CR unit lamp 365d to emit light, and this light emission can be visually confirmed through the remaining lending display portion 363. In addition, the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G are input to the ball lending display unit 330 through the current limiting resistor mounted on the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869.

In the CR unit 6, the ball lending button 328 is pressed and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is transmitted from the frequency display plate 365 through the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. When input, BRDY, which is a ball rental request signal, is output to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) via the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal plate 869. Then, the CR unit 6 issues a single payout operation start request signal for paying out a predetermined number of lent balls (25 balls in the present embodiment, which corresponds to 100 yen in amount) in one payout operation. BRQ is output to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) via the lending device connection terminal board 869 for gaming balls and the like. The payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) to which BRDY and BRQ are input is EXS, which is a signal for informing that one payout operation has started or ended, and a game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. Via the terminal, the PRDY, which is a signal for outputting to the CR unit 6 or for notifying that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is possible or impossible, is connected to the rental ball connection terminal board for the game ball, etc. It outputs to CR unit 6 via 869. Note that, for example, when the ball clerk button 328 is pressed, 200 yen worth of game balls are paid out, and when the hall clerk or the like has preset the CR unit 6, the payout operation is performed once. It is supposed to be performed twice consecutively, and if 25 balls for 100 yen are paid out, 25 balls for 100 yen will be paid out continuously, and 50 balls for a total of 200 yen will be paid out. Become.

In the CR unit 6, the return button 329 is pressed and the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is input from the frequency display plate 365 through the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball or other lending device connection terminal plate 869. Then, the prepaid card is ejected from an insertion slot (not shown) and returned. The returned prepaid card stores the remaining amount obtained by subtracting the amount corresponding to the number of game balls dispensed as a result of the ball lending button 328 being pressed.

[7-3. Power board 931]
Next, the power supply board 931 of the first control unit MCG will be briefly described. The power supply board 931 includes a power supply switch 934 that can electrically connect or disconnect 24 V AC (24 V AC) supplied from the Pachinko Island facility, and a power control unit 935 that generates various power supplies. , A firing control unit 953 for controlling the firing by the firing solenoid 682 of the hitting ball launching device 650 shown in FIG. 5 and the ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 255 of the ball feeding unit 250 shown in FIG.

[7-3-1. Power control unit]
The power supply control unit 935 operates the power switch 934 to improve the power factor of the synchronous rectification circuit 935a that rectifies the AC 24 V (AC24V) supplied from the pachinko island facility and the power rectified by the synchronous rectification circuit 935a. A power factor correction circuit 935b, a smoothing circuit 935c that smoothes the power whose power factor has been improved by the power factor correction circuit 935b, and various direct currents that are supplied from the power smoothed by the smoothing circuit 935c to various substrates. And a power generation circuit 935d that generates a power source.

[7-3-2. Firing controller]
A firing control unit 953 that performs firing control by the firing solenoid 682 and ball delivery control by the ball delivery solenoid 255 mainly includes a firing control circuit 953a. The firing control circuit 953a, an operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307 that electrically adjusts the strength (firing strength) at which the game ball is launched toward the game area 5a according to the rotation position of the handle 302, and the palm of the handle 302. A detection signal from the steering wheel touch sensor 310 that detects whether or not a finger is touching, and a single-shot button operation sensor 312 that detects whether to forcibly stop the launch (launch) of the game ball according to the player's intention. The detection signal from the input terminal is input through the handle relay terminal plate 315. In addition, when the CR unit 6 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected to the launch control circuit 953a, a CR connection signal indicating that effect is input via the payout control board 951. ..

The firing control circuit 953a controls the drive current for launching (launching) the game ball toward the game area 5a based on the operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307, and outputs the adjusted drive current to the launch solenoid 682. Meanwhile, by outputting a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 255 via the handle relay terminal plate 315, the ball feeding member of the ball feeding unit 250 receives one game ball stored in the upper tray 321 of the dish unit 320, The game ball received by the ball sending member is controlled to be sent to the hitting ball launching device 650 side.

[7-4. Peripheral control board]
For the first control unit MCG, the peripheral control board 1510 of the second control unit SCG performs performance control based on various commands from the main control board 1310, as shown in FIG. 72, and 19 and the peripheral control unit 1511 for exchanging control commands and various information (various data) with the effect display drive board 4450 that draws the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460, the game board side effect display device 1600, and the door. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls the drawing of the frame-side effect display device 460, while controlling the sound such as the music and the sound effect that flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the calendar information and the time/minute that specify the date. A real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as "RTC") control unit 4165 that holds time information that specifies seconds, and a knob that rotates the volume of music and sound effects that flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. A volume control volume 1510a that is adjusted by operation is provided.

[7-4-1. Peripheral controller]
As shown in FIG. 72, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs the effect control controls the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a microprocessor and the power-on process executed when the power is turned on, and after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on. A peripheral control ROM 1511b that stores various control programs such as sub-control programs that are executed and controls production operation, various data, various control data, and various schedule data, and a VDP from a sound source built-in VDP 1512a of a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later Various information that continues across the peripheral control unit steady process executed each time a blank signal is input (for example, schedule data defining a screen to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600, various LED light emission modes, etc.) Peripheral control RAM 1511c storing information for managing schedule data and the like for defining, and various types of information that continues across days (for example, information for managing the history of a jackpot gaming state and special information) Peripheral control SRAM 1511d for storing information for managing effect flags, and peripheral control external watchdog timer 1511e for monitoring whether peripheral control MPU 1511a is operating normally (hereinafter, "peripheral control external WDT 1511e"). ]) is provided.

The peripheral control RAM 1511c can retain the stored content only for a time such that an instantaneous power failure occurs and the power is immediately restored, and the power is cut off for a long time (when a long power failure occurs. ), the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is supplied with backup power from an unillustrated large-capacity electrolytic capacitor (hereinafter, referred to as “SRAM electrolytic capacitor”) provided on the power supply substrate 931. By doing so, the stored contents can be retained for about 50 hours. By providing the electrolytic capacitor for SRAM on the power supply board 931, when the gaming board 5 is removed from the pachinko machine 1, backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, so the peripheral control SRAM 1511d stores the stored contents. You can no longer hold and lose its contents.

The peripheral control external WDT 1511e is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is running out of control, and when the timer is up, it is reset by hardware. That is, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a does not output the clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period (until the timer expires), the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset. When the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period, it can restart the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, and therefore is not reset.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a has a plurality of built-in parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc. When receiving various commands from the main control board 1310, each decorative board of the game board 5 is based on these various commands. Lamp light emitting data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided in the lamp from a serial I/O port for a lamp driving board through a peripheral control output circuit (not shown) The game board side motor drive data for transmitting to the drive board 4170 or outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 is serial for the motor drive board. Door side motor drive for transmitting from the I/O port to the motor drive board 4180 via the peripheral control output circuit and for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 3 Data is transmitted from the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the door frame. Door side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs and the like provided on each decoration board of No. 3 is output from a peripheral I/O port for peripheral decoration drive amplifier board LED for peripheral control. It is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882.

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are input to the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). In addition, from the detection signal from the rotation detection switch for detecting the rotation (rotational direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and the press detection switch for detecting the operation of the pressing operation unit 405, which are provided in the effect operation unit 400. Detection signal is serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the serialized production operation unit detection data is output from the door-side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. , The frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral control input circuit, to the production operation unit detection serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, photosensors, etc.) for detecting original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are game board sides (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180. Serialized by the serial transmission circuit, this serialized movable body detection data is input from the game board side serial transmission circuit to the motor control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via the peripheral control input circuit. There is. The peripheral control MPU 1511a is configured to exchange various data between the peripheral control board 1510 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input/output of the motor drive board serial I/O port.

Note that the peripheral control MPU 1511a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "peripheral control built-in WDT"), and its own system runs out of control by using the peripheral control built-in WDT and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e together. Is diagnosed.

[7-4-1a. Peripheral control MPU]
Next, the peripheral control MPU 1511a, which is a microcomputer, will be described. As shown in FIG. 73, the peripheral control MPU 1511a has a peripheral control CPU core 1511aa as the center, a peripheral control internal RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control DMA (abbreviation of Direct Memory Access) controller 1511ac, a peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and various peripheral control serial I. /O port 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, peripheral control analog/digital converter (hereinafter referred to as peripheral control A/D converter) 1511ak, and the like.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads/writes various data from/to the peripheral control internal RAM 1511ab and peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac via the internal bus 1511ah, while at the same time, peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, peripheral control internal WDT 1511af, Peripheral control Various parallel I/O ports 1511ag and peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak are read/written with various data via internal bus 1511ah, peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and peripheral bus 1511ai.

Further, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads various data into the peripheral control ROM 1511b through the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h, while the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are read. Then, various data are read and written via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes storage devices such as the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, the peripheral control ROM 1511b, the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, various peripheral control built-in serial I/O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, and peripheral control various parallel I. It is a dedicated controller that independently transfers data between the I/O port 1511ag and the input/output device such as the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak without the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. ~ DMA3 has four channels.

Specifically, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes a storage device of the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab built in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, various peripheral control built-in serial I/O ports 1511ae and a peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af. , Peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and peripheral control A/D converters 1511ak and other input/output devices for independent data transfer without the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. Further, while reading/writing to/from the storage device of the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab via the internal bus 1511ah, various peripheral control serial I/O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and Reading/writing is performed with respect to the input/output device such as the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and the peripheral bus 1511ai.

Further, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is a storage device such as a peripheral control ROM 1511b, a peripheral control RAM 1511c, and a peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and various peripheral control serial I/Os built in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. O port 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak, and other input/output devices without the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. In order to independently transfer data, the peripheral control ROM 1511b, the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, and other storage devices are read and written via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and the external bus 1511h, while various peripheral control various types are performed. For peripheral I/O port 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak, and other input/output devices, peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and peripheral bus 1511ai are used. Read and write.

The peripheral control bus controller 1511ad controls the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral bus 1511ai, and the external bus 1511h to control the central processing unit of the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa, the peripheral control internal RAM 1511ab, the peripheral control ROM 1511b, the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the peripheral control. Various devices such as a storage device such as an SRAM 1511d and various input/output devices such as peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak It is a dedicated controller for exchanging various data between them.

Peripheral control Various serial I/O ports 1511ae include serial I/O ports for lamp drive boards, serial I/O ports for motor drive boards, serial I/O ports for frame decoration drive amplifier board motors, frame decoration drive amplifier board LEDs. Serial I/O port, a frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port, a main control board serial I/O port, and a production operation unit information acquisition serial I/O port.

The peripheral control built-in watchdog timer (WDT with built-in peripheral control) 1511af is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is running out of control. When this timer expires, it is reset by hardware. It has become. That is, when the watchdog timer is started, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer within a certain period (until the timer expires) to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and resets the signal. Will be required. When the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs the clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af within a certain period of time, it can restart the timer count, and therefore is not reset.

The peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag output various latch signals such as a game board side motor drive latch signal and a door side motor drive light emission latch signal, and also output a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, Detection signals from various detection switches for detecting original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the board 5 are serialized by a game board side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180, and the serial signals are serialized. It outputs a movable body information acquisition latch signal for receiving the converted movable body detection data from the game board side serial transmission circuit at the motor drive board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a.
This LED is a high-intensity white LED, and is a confirmation notification lamp for notifying that the occurrence of the big hit game state has been confirmed. In the present embodiment, by adopting a configuration in which the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag are electrically directly connected, the path between the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag is shortened. Therefore, it is possible to take noise countermeasures for the lighting control of the LED, which has a significant meaning in the game. The LED lighting control is executed in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, and other LEDs other than this LED are executed in the peripheral control unit steady process described below. It has become.

The peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak is electrically connected to the volume adjusting volume 1510a, and the resistance value is changed by rotating the knob of the volume adjusting volume 1510a, and the resistance at the rotating position of the knob is changed. The voltage divided by the value is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and is converted into a value of 1024 steps from value 0 to value 1023. In the present embodiment, the value of 1024 levels is divided into 7 and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the board volume 0 toward the board volume 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, which will be described later) is controlled so that the volume is set to the substrate volumes 0 to 6, so that music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. In this way, music and sound effects are made to flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob portion.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying a clerk in the hall of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or a fraudulent activity on the pachinko machine 1 and contents related to game performance are announced. (For example, the screen unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 is rendered as a more powerful one, or it is announced that there is a high possibility that the game state will be advantageous to the player). The notification sound and the notification sound are also flown from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion. The volume of the sound can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source described later) by a program. The volume adjusted by this program is different from the above-described seven levels of the substrate volume, and it is possible to smoothly change from mute to maximum volume.
As a result, for example, even when a clerk in the hall or the like turns the knob of the volume adjusting volume 1510a to set the volume to a low level, music such as sound or sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is produced. Although the sound is low, when the pachinko machine 1 is out of order or when the player is cheating, the notification sound set to a large volume (in this embodiment, the maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk or the like in the hall from becoming less likely to notice a malfunction or a player's cheating by the notification sound. Also, based on the current board volume that is set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound is reduced so that it does not interfere with the music or the sound effect. There is a possibility of increasing the volume of sound that is played and increasing the volume of the music and sound effects, and rendering the screen unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 more powerful, or shifting to a game state advantageous for the player. You can also announce that it is expensive.

[7-4-1b. Peripheral control ROM]
The peripheral control ROM 1511b stores in advance various control programs for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the RTC control unit 4165, etc., various data, various control data, and various schedule data. The various schedule data includes screen generation schedule data for generating a screen to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating various LED light emission modes, and music. And sound generation schedule data for generating sound effects and the like, and electric drive source schedule data for generating drive modes of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in time series, and defines the order of screens to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Has been done. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by time-sequentially arraying light emission data that defines the light emission modes of various LEDs. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in time series, and defines the order in which music and sound effects flow. The sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel is to be used among a plurality of output channels of the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later, and the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. Among the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source, a track number for instructing which track the sound data such as music and sound effect is to be incorporated is defined. The electric drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids in time series, and defines the operation of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

Various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b may be directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and executed, or may be copied to various control program copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, which will be described later, when the power is turned on. Some of them are read and executed. In addition, various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b may be directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, or when power is turned on to various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c described later. In some, the copied one is read out.

Further, in the peripheral control ROM 1511b, as one of various control programs for controlling the RTC control unit 4165, the brightness of the game board side effect display device 1600 is corrected according to the usage time of the game board side effect display device 1600. A brightness correction program is included. This brightness correction program corrects a decrease in brightness due to secular change of the game board side effect display device 1600 when the LED type backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is mounted. , The date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, the current date and time, the brightness setting information, and the like are acquired from the built-in RAM of the RTC control unit 4165 described later, and the acquired brightness setting information is based on the correction information. To correct. This correction information is stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b in advance. The brightness setting information is, as will be described later, brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, in 100% to 70% increments by 5%, and the current setting. The brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the set game board side effect display device 1600 is included, and for example, the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on and the current date and time. Therefore, when June has already passed from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and the brightness is also acquired. When the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on when the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 75%, the brightness of 80% is added to the correction information acquired by 5% for this 75%. As described above, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on. When December has already passed, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the game board side effect display device is displayed. When the backlight of 1600 is turned on, the game board is based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness becomes 85% which is obtained by adding 10% which is the acquired correction information to 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on.

[7-4-1c. Peripheral control RAM]
As shown in FIG. 73, the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a is a backup that exclusively stores the backup information among various information updated by executing various control programs. A management target work area 1511ca, a backup first area 1511cb and a backup second area 1511cc for exclusively storing a copy of various information stored in this backup management target work area 1511ca, and a peripheral control ROM 1511b. The various control program copy area 1511cd for exclusively storing the copied various control programs, and the copied various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b. Various control data copy areas 1511ce stored exclusively, and a backup non-management target work area 1511cf that stores only various information that is not a backup target among various information updated by executing various control programs, Is provided.

When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (including when power is restored due to an instantaneous power failure or power failure), the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup non-managed work area 1511cf and cleared to zero. For the managed work area 1511ca, the backup first area 1511cb, and the backup second area 1511cc, the power-on state command (see FIG. 89) from the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on starts the RAM clear effect. And the game state (for example, to instruct the start of the effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 69 is operated within a predetermined period after the power is turned on). Sometimes it is cleared to zero.

The backup management target work area 1511ca is production information (1fr) which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit steady process executed each time a V blank signal from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later is input. ) Is dedicatedly stored as a backup target, and the performance information (1 ms), which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt described later, is backed up. It is composed of Bank 0 (1 ms) which is exclusively stored as a target. Here, the names of Bank0(1fr) and Bank0(1ms) will be briefly described. “Bank” is a minimum management unit that represents the size of a storage area for storing various types of information, and is referred to as “Bank”. The following "0" means that it is a storage area that is normally used for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, “Bank0” means that the size of the storage area that is normally used is the minimum management unit. Further, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3”, and “Bank4” provided in an area extending from a backup first area 1511cb to a backup second area 1511cc, which will be described later, are the same storage areas as “Bank0”. It is meant to have a size. As will be described later, “(1fr)” means that when the sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs drawing data for one screen (for one frame) to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, the peripheral control MPU1511a. Since a V blank signal indicating that it is in a state in which the screen data from can be received is output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, each time the V blank signal is input, in other words, one frame (1 frame) Since the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each of them, it is added to “Bank0”, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3”, and “Bank4” (effect information (1fr) and effects described later. The backup information (1fr) is also used in the same meaning). As will be described later, "(1ms)" means that the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs, so that "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", And "Bank4" (also used for production information (1 ms) and production backup information (1 ms) described later with the same meaning).

In Bank0 (1fr), the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, the reception command storage area 1511cac, the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, and the schedule data storage area 1511cae. Etc. are provided. In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, a game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the game board 5 is output. In the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, a lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting for a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame 3 is set. The door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a signal is a storage area in which the received command storage area 1511cac receives various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 and receives the various commands received. The RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad is a storage area in which various information acquired from the RTC control unit 4165 (RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a described later) is set, and the schedule data storage area 1511cae is set. Is a storage area in which various schedule data corresponding to the received command are set based on the command received from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a). In the schedule data storage area 1511cae, various schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 1511b to the various control data copy areas 1511ce are read and set, or in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, various schedule data are directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511b. There are also things that are set.

In Bank 0 (1 ms), the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf, the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah, and the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai, and A drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak and the like are provided. Door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided in the door frame 3 is stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. It is a storage area to be set, and the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag is for outputting drive signals to electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 5. The game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is a storage area in which the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah is provided in the game board 5 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the game board 5. This is a storage area in which various kinds of information obtained by acquiring the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies are set, and detection operation signals from various detection switches provided in the performance operation unit 400 are stored in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai. Based on the above, various information obtained by rotating (rotating direction) the dial operation unit 401 and operation of the pressing operation unit 405 (for example, a dial created based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 400). Rotation (rotation direction) history information of the operation unit 401, operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, and the like) are set in the storage area. In the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak, the effect display drive board 4450 is arranged around. When the drawing data from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the control board 1510 is received and it is determined that the received drawing data is abnormal data, the peripheral control board 1510 and It is a storage area in which various kinds of information acquired regarding the frequency of defects and the occurrence state of defects during connection with the effect display drive substrate 4450 are set.

It should be noted that the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa of Bank0 (1fr) and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf of Bank0 (1ms). The motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag is divided into two areas, a first area and a second area.

In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, when the peripheral control unit steady process described later is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. When the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. Each time the processing is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. Peripheral control unit steady process is executed, for example, when the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa in the current peripheral control section steady process, When the control unit steady process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side light emission data SL-DAT set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa.

When the peripheral controller steady processing is executed, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab is in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, and the door side light emission data STL. -When DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. Each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. It Peripheral control unit regular processing is executed, for example, when the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab in this peripheral control section regular processing, When the peripheral control unit steady process is executed last time, the process is advanced based on the door side light emission data STL-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. Is becoming

The frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf is provided with a door in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf when the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process described later is executed. When the side motor drive data STM-DAT is set and the next peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side motor drive data STM is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. -DAT is set, and every time the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side is set in the first and second areas of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. Motor drive data STM-DAT are alternately set. The peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed. For example, in the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process this time, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. When it is set, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf when the peripheral control section 1ms timer interrupt process is executed last time is set. The processing is carried out based on this.

When the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag sets the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. When the next peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. Every time the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. Peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed, for example, in the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing this time, game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. Sometimes, when the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed last time, the process proceeds based on the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. It is like this.

Next, the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc that exclusively store the copied copy of the production information, which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511ca, will be described. In the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc, two pairs each having two banks as one pair are managed as one page. Performance information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, is used as performance backup information (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). In addition, the performance information (1 ms) which is the content that is copied at high speed to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac and is stored in Bank0 (1ms) which is a storage area that is normally used. As the production backup information (1 ms), the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac controls the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc each time the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed each time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs. It is copied at high speed. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of two banks forming the page match.

Specifically, the backup first area 1511cb has one pair of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) and one pair of Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms), and a total of two pairs are managed as one page. ing. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and that is stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, is stored every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the data to Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms) at high speed, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) match. This is performed depending on whether or not the contents of Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms) match.

In the backup second area 1511cc, two pairs of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) and one pair of Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) are managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area normally used, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and that is stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, is stored every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the data to Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms) at high speed, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) match. It is performed depending on whether or not the contents of Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms) match.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the backup first area 1511cb has one pair of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) and one pair of Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms), that is, two pairs in total. The backup second area 1511cc is an area for managing as a page, and the backup second area 1511cc has two pairs of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) as one pair and Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) as one pair. This is an area for managing as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and the end of each page, that is, at the beginning and the end of the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, is used as effect backup information (1fr) for each frame (1frame) in the peripheral control unit. Every time the regular processing is executed, the contents are copied to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms) which is a storage area normally used. The production information (1ms) is, as production backup information (1ms), a backup first area 1511cb and a backup second area 1511cc each time the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is designed to perform high-speed copying, but the programs for executing the high-speed copy by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac are common. That is, in the present embodiment, the effect information (1fr) and the effect information (1ms) are managed by a common management method (execution of a common program).

[7-4-1d. Peripheral control SRAM]
The peripheral control SRAM 1511d, which is externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, includes a backup management target work area 1511da that stores exclusively backup target information among various information updated by executing various control programs. A backup first area 1511db and a backup second area 1511dc, which exclusively store a copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da, are provided. The contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are power-on state commands from the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (including when power is restored due to momentary power failure or power failure) (see FIG. 89). Is an instruction to start the RAM clear effect and a game state (for example, to instruct the start of an effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 69 is operated within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. Even when) is not cleared to zero. This point is completely different from the point that the backup management target work area 1511ca, the backup first area 1511cb, and the backup second area 1511cc of the peripheral control RAM 1511c are zero-cleared. Further, when the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. It is supposed to be done. By operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, for each content (item) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d (for example, a history of occurrence of a jackpot gaming state). While the contents can be cleared, the contents (items) stored in the peripheral control RAM 1511c are not displayed at all and cannot be cleared in the setting mode. Also in this respect, the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are completely different.

The backup management target work area 1511da is production information (SRAM) that is various information that continues over days (for example, information for managing the history of occurrence of a big hit game state and a special production flag). Information (for example, information) is exclusively stored as a backup target and is configured from Bank 0 (SRAM). Here, the name of Bank0 (SRAM) will be briefly described. As described above, "Bank" is the minimum management unit indicating the size of the storage area for storing various types of information, and is "Bank". The following "0" means that it is a storage area that is normally used for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, “Bank0” means that the size of the storage area that is normally used is the minimum management unit. Then, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3”, and “Bank4” provided in an area extending from a backup first area 1511db to a backup second area 1511dc, which will be described later, are in the same storage area as “Bank0”. It is meant to have a size. Since "(SRAM)" is a backup target of various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3". , And “Bank4” (the effect information (SRAM) and effect backup information (SRAM) described later are also used in the same meaning).

Next, the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc that exclusively store the copied copy of the effect information (SRAM) that is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da will be described. The backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc are managed with two banks as one pair and one pair as one page. Performance information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, is used as performance backup information (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). Then, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc at high speed. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of two banks forming the page match.

Specifically, the backup first area 1511db has Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). It is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) match.

The backup second area 1511dc has Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) as one pair, and one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). It is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) match.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the backup first area 1511db is an area that manages one pair of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as one page, and the backup second area 1511db. 1511dc is an area for managing Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) as one pair, and managing this one pair as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and the end of each page, that is, at the beginning and the end of the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc.

[7-4-2. LCD display controller]
A liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that performs drawing control of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 and sound control of music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is shown in FIG. As described above, a sound source for controlling sound such as music and sound effects is built-in (hereinafter referred to as “built-in sound source”), and drawing of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is performed. In addition to a VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) 1512a with a sound source for controlling, various character data of the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, various kinds of music, sound effects, etc. A liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b for storing sound data, an audio data transmission IC 1512c for transmitting serialized music and sound effects as audio data to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the door frame side effect display device 460. The serialized drawing data is arranged near the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 and is directed to the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320. The door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d that transmits the data and the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, is differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal. In addition to the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is input, and when the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is input, this signal is output. While the circuit is connected for transmission, when a signal from the differential circuit 1512e is not input, a forced switching circuit 1512f for circuit connection for transmitting the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, Equipped with. In the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b, for example, ring image data used to display a ring-shaped display object (annular display object) as sprite data used to display a screen or an image to be described later, and an operation menu background image to be described later. Operation menu background image data to be used, selected display object image data used to display at least one selected display object described below, tone adjustment background image data used to display a volume adjustment screen including a volume scale described below, and a volume adjustment icon described below. In addition to the volume setting icon image data used for display, the body frame backside image data used to display the bodyframe backside image in which the positions of the respective parts on the backside of the body frame 4 are visible to the player, and the display of the service mode screen The service mode screen image data used for, the break timer setting screen image data used for displaying the break timer setting screen, and the break screen image data used for displaying the break screen are stored. The liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b also stores suggestion display object image data used for displaying the suggestion display object for prompting the user to operate the press operation portion 405 (operation portion) of the effect operation unit 400.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 extracts the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. 1511cae is set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the top screen data of the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various types of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. After being extracted from the control data copy area 1511ce and being output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, when the V blank signal described later is input, the first screen data is generated according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae. The next screen data following is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a, in accordance with the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, outputs the screen data arranged in time series to the screen generation schedule data every time the V blank signal is input. Then, the first screen data is output to the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source one by one.

Further, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs the head sound command data of the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. The extracted sound command data is set to 1511cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the sound command data at the head of the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the peripheral After being extracted from the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the control RAM 1511c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, when the V blank signal is input, the first data is generated according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae. The next sound command data following the sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and is output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. As described above, the peripheral control MPU 1511a inputs the sound command data arranged in time series in the sound generation schedule data as the V blank signal according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae. The sound command data at the beginning is output to the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source one by one.

[7-4-2a. VDP with built-in sound source]
When the screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a in addition to the above-described built-in sound source, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a is based on the input screen data, as shown in FIG. 74, from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b to the game board. Side character data and upper plate side character data are extracted to create sprite data to generate drawing data for one screen (for one frame) to be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. VRAM for doing so is also built-in (hereinafter referred to as "built-in VRAM"). The sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs drawing data for the game board side effect display device 1600 from the drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM to the game board side effect display device 1600 from the channel CH1 and for the door frame side effect display device 460. Drawing data from the channel CH2 via the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, By outputting (transmitting) to the door frame side effect display device 460, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are synchronized.

The drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, while the drawing data output from the channel CH2 is relayed from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay. A performance display that is arranged near the terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the door frame side performance display device 460 attached to the right side of the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3 and is housed in the tray unit 320. It is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the drive board 4450. As described above, since the drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600 as described above, the peripheral control board 1510 and the game board side effect display device 1600 are Although attached to the game board 5, the wiring length required for the route from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 is short, but the drawing data output from the channel CH2 is as described above. The peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the game board 5 because it is output from the control board 1510 to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. On the other hand, since the effect display drive board 4450 is housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, from the channel CH2 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450. Since the length of the wiring required for the path is extremely longer than that of the channel CH1, it becomes extremely susceptible to noise. Therefore, for the channel CH2 in which the length of the wiring for transmitting the drawing data becomes extremely longer than that of the channel CH1, in the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, "V-by-One(" By adopting a differential communication called "registered trademark"", the structure is not easily affected by noise.

The channel CH1 uses a differential interface based on a serial method called LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling), while the channel CH2 uses an interface based on a parallel method. The drawing data output from the channel CH2 is composed of three video signals of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three sync signals of a horizontal sync signal, a vertical sync signal, and a clock signal. It is serialized by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 4610d and is housed in the peripheral unit control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is transmitted to the effect display drive substrate 4450. Then, various serialized signals are restored to parallel signals in the effect display drive board 4450 and output to the door frame side effect display device 460.

In this way, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs the screen data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, Based on the input screen data, character data is extracted from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b to create sprite data, and one screen portion (1 to be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (1 The drawing data (for frames) is generated on the built-in VRAM, and of the generated drawing data, image data for the game board side effect display device 1600 is output from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side The image display data for the effect display device 460 is supplied from the channel CH2 to the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. Is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via. That is, the "screen data for one screen (one frame)" means the drawing data for one screen (one frame) displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. It is the data to be generated above.

Further, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs drawing data for one screen (for one frame) from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and also shows image data for the door frame side effect display device 460 from the channel CH2. Output to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. When (transmitted), the V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be received is output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a. In this embodiment, since the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, a V blank signal is output. The interval is about 33.3 ms (=1000 ms÷30 fps). The peripheral control MPU 1511a is configured to execute a peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which will be described later, when the V blank signal is input. Here, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies somewhat depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Also, in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 in which the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the sound source built-in VDP 1512a are mounted, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change to some extent.

The VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source adopts a frame buffer method. This "frame buffer system" holds drawing data for one screen (for one frame) drawn on the screens of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 in the frame buffer (built-in VRAM). The drawing data for one screen (one frame) held in the frame buffer (built-in VRAM) is output to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460.

When the sound command data described above is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a based on a command from the main control board 1310, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a receives music stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b as shown in FIG. By extracting sound data such as sound effects and sound effects and controlling the built-in sound source, the sound data such as music and sound effects are embedded in the track according to the track number specified in the sound command data, and used according to the output channel number. An output channel is set, and music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

The sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track in which the sound data is incorporated. In addition to the sound data and the sub-volume value that adjusts the sound volume, the sound data and the sound volume of the notification sound for notifying the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of the malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or the misconduct to the pachinko machine 1 are adjusted. Subvolume value to be included. Specifically, for the effect sound, the above-mentioned substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a is set as the sub-volume value, and for the notification sound, the volume adjustment is performed. The maximum volume is set as the sub volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion of the volume 1510a.
The sub volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 to shift to a setting mode described later.

The sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel, and a plurality of output channels in the internal sound source of the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source have a plurality of master volume values in the built-in sound source of the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source. Of the tracks, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used are combined, and the volume of the combined effect sound is Actually, the master volume value that is the volume that flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is amplified, and the amplified effect sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

In the present embodiment, the master volume value is set to a fixed value, and when the volume of the synthesized effect sound is the maximum volume, the master volume value is amplified to flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. The volume is set to the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the effect sound, as a sub-volume value for adjusting the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used among the plurality of tracks and the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used. The set volume adjustment volume 1510a is combined with the board volume adjusted by rotating the knob, and the combined volume of the effect sound is actually output from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. To the master volume value, and the amplified effect sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c. For the notification sound, the sound data of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used, The maximum volume is synthesized without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a set as the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used, The volume of the synthesized notification sound is actually amplified to a master volume value that is the volume that flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the amplified notification sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c. ..

Here, when the effect sound is being output from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, it is easy to perform the control of outputting the alarm sound to notify the clerk or the like in the hall of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or a fraudulent act on the pachinko machine 1. To explain, first, forcibly set the sub volume value of the track containing the effect sound to mute, and the sound data of the track in which this effect sound is incorporated, the sub volume value set to the mute, and the notification. The sound data of the track in which the sound is incorporated and the sub-volume value in which the volume of the notification sound is set to the maximum volume are combined, and the volume of the combined effect sound and the volume of the notification sound are actually The master volume value that is the volume that flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is amplified, and the amplified effect sound and notification sound are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

That is, in reality, only the notification sound of the maximum volume is played as the sound played through the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. At this time, since the effect sound is muted, it does not flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the effect sound is proceeding according to the above-described sound generation schedule data. In the present embodiment, the notification sound is made to flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds), and after the predetermined period has elapsed, the sound generation forcibly set to silence is generated. The volume of the effect sound that is proceeding in accordance with the operation schedule data is set again as the sub-volume value by adjusting the substrate volume that is adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a (at this time, the dial of the effect operation unit 400 is set. When the operation mode 401 or the pressing operation section 405 is operated to shift to the setting mode and is adjusted, the sub volume value of the adjusted effect sound is set), from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. It's flowing.

As described above, when the effect sound is being output from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, when the alarm sound is transmitted to notify the clerk or the like in the hall of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or a fraudulent act on the pachinko machine 1, Although the volume of the effect sound is muted and the notification sound flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, since the effect sound that has been muted progresses according to the sound generation schedule data, the notification sound has passed a predetermined period. When the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 stop flowing, the effect sound does not start to flow again from where the notification sound started to flow, but according to the sound generation schedule data until a predetermined period has elapsed since the notification sound started to flow. It started to flow again from the place where it progressed.

[7-4-2b. Liquid crystal and sound control ROM]
As shown in FIG. 74, the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b is for drawing the game board side character data for drawing in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460. The upper plate side character data is stored in advance, and various sound data such as music, sound effects, notification sounds, and notification sounds are also stored in advance.

[7-4-2c. Audio data transmission IC]
When the serialized audio data from the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source is input, the audio data transmission IC 1512c uses a peripheral control output circuit (not shown) and a frame peripheral relay as differential data serial data in which the right audio data is a plus signal and a minus signal. A peripheral control output circuit (not shown) is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and is also used as differential serial data in which the left audio data is a plus signal and a minus signal. , The frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194. As a result, music, sound effects, etc. adapted to various effects are stereo-reproduced from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

The audio data transmission IC 1512c outputs audio data as serial data of the left and right differential systems between the boards from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, for example, a plus signal of left audio data, Even when the negative signal is affected by noise, when the noise component carried on the positive signal and the noise component carried on the negative signal are combined by the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 into one left audio data, Since the noise components are removed by canceling each other, noise countermeasures can be taken.

[7-4-2d. Door frame side production transmitter IC]
As shown in FIG. 74, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d receives the drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. As described above, the channel CH2 uses a parallel interface. The drawing data is composed of three video signals of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three sync signals of a horizontal sync signal, a vertical sync signal, and a clock signal. The green video signal, the blue video signal, and the blue video signal each have 8 bits, that is, 24 bits in total. In the present embodiment, since the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d each have 6 bits, that is, 18 bits in total, the upper 6 bits in each video signal are the door frame. It is input to the side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Since the lower 2 bits are extremely weak color information that is difficult for the human eye to discriminate, the lower 2 bits including the weak color information are invalid although they are output from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a.

Three video signals that are drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, that is, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals that are a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. Is input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d receives three video signals of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, a horizontal synchronization signal, and a vertical synchronization signal. Signal and clock signal and three synchronization signals are serialized into differential serial signals (serial data) called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by THine Electronics Co. These various signals are transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

As described above, the drawing data output from the channel CH1 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, so the route from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600. Although the wiring length required for the (first path) is short, the drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source has the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the door from the peripheral control board 1510. Since it is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the frame 3, the path from the channel CH2 to the door frame side effect display device 460 (first Since the length of the wiring required for the second route) is significantly longer than the length of the wiring required for the first route, it is extremely susceptible to noise.

Specifically, since the door frame 3 is rotatably supported by the body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1 so as to be openable and closable, the door frame 3 is opposite to the locking unit 700 shown in FIG. 5 along the open side of the body frame 4. On the closed side, which is the side, for example, from the peripheral control board 1510 included in the game board 5 mounted on the main body frame 4 to the main body frame 4 side such as the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 included in the door frame 3. It is necessary to pass various wirings that electrically connect the various substrates provided to the various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side. However, on the closed side of the main body frame 4, in addition to the payout device 830, the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 can be guided to the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320, and the upper plate 321 is the game ball. A full tank branching unit 770 that can branch and guide the paid out game balls to the lower plate 322 when the tank is full is arranged.
Further, below the main body frame 4, there is arranged the payout unit 800 shown in FIG. 5 in which the power supply board 931 and the like shown in FIG. 6 to which power is supplied from the pachinko island facility is integrated into a unit. As described above, various wirings for electrically connecting the various substrates provided on the main body frame 4 side and the various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side are drawn near the dispensing device 830, the full tank branching unit 770, the power supply substrate 931 and the like. In addition to the noise caused by driving the payout motor 834 provided in the payout device 830, the noise caused by electrostatic discharge by the game ball and the power line supplied from the pachinko island facility in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. It is in an environment where it receives noise that has entered the.

Therefore, for the channel CH2 in which the length of the wiring for sending the drawing data is extremely longer than that of the channel CH1, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is provided by THine Electronics Corporation. By adopting differential communication called “V-by-One (registered trademark)”, the structure is less susceptible to noise. In the present embodiment, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510, a door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 to be described later included in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, As described above, the differential 1-pair cable is used as the wiring for electrically connecting between the connections, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. This differential 1-pair cable has two wirings. Is a twisted pair cable, not just parallel lines provided in parallel. This twisted pair cable is a cable in which two wires are twisted together, and is also called a twisted pair wire.

Here, a case where parallel lines are adopted as a differential pair cable for electrically connecting the transmitter and the receiver will be briefly described. For the channel CH2 of the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source, in which the length of the wiring for sending the drawing data is significantly longer than that of the channel CH1 of the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source, in the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 Even if the differential communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of the corporation is adopted and the mechanism is not easily affected by noise, the hardware configuration alone causes electrostatic discharge of the game ball. When serial data in parallel lines is affected by noise, noise invading the power line supplied from the pachinko island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., a performance display stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 Since noise is not canceled (removed) when received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the drive substrate 4450, the serial data is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 while being affected. , The drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 as irregular data different from the normal one, and in the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460, a so-called sandstorm appears. There is a problem in that such an image is displayed and it becomes impossible to recognize what the image is.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the length of the wiring for transmitting the drawing data is extremely longer than that of the channel CH1 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source. In the transmitter IC for rendering 1512d, differential communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by THine Electronics Co., Ltd. is adopted to make the mechanism less susceptible to noise, and in addition to such a hardware configuration. And, even if the serial data by the differential method is affected by the noise that has entered the wiring, the twisted pair cable that can cancel (remove) the noise on the receiving side is electrically connected between the transmitter and the receiver. Adopted as a differential 1 pair cable. As a result, even if serial data is affected by the twisted pair cable due to noise due to electrostatic discharge of the game ball, noise that has entered the power line supplied from the pachinko island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., the door frame Since the noise is canceled (removed) when it is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive substrate 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of No. 3, the channel of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a The drawing data output from CH2 is reliably received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 included in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 and output to the door frame side effect display device 460. By doing so, the image generated by the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 can be reliably displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460. By canceling (removing) noise, it is possible to prevent an image that makes it impossible to recognize what the image is like a sandstorm from being displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play the game. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play the game due to the influence of noise.

In this embodiment, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 described below included in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 are described. A frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are interposed between the connections between and, namely, between the transmitter and the receiver. This is because the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are not integrally configured, but are separately assembled, and the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4. After the work of attaching the door frame 3 to the door frame 4, electrically connecting various wirings such as harnesses and twisted cables from various boards provided on the door frame 3 side to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 provided on the body frame 4 side. Thus, various substrates provided on the body frame 4 side and various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side can be electrically connected. With such a configuration, after the door frame 3 is opened from the body frame 4 and various wirings are removed, the door frame 3 is removed from the body frame 4 to perform maintenance of the body frame 4 and the door frame 3. If it can be done and the trouble that has occurred in the door frame 3 cannot be eliminated, another door frame 3 ′ is attached to the main body frame 4 instead of the defective door frame 3, and the door frame 3 By electrically connecting various wirings from various boards provided on the'side to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 provided on the main body frame 4 side, various boards provided on the main body frame 4 side and various boards provided on the door frame 3'side The substrate can be electrically connected.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, in the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510, differential system communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of THine Electronics Co., Ltd. is adopted. In addition to such a hardware configuration, even if serial data by the differential method is affected by noise that has entered the wiring, the noise is canceled (removed) on the receiving side. ) Is used as a differential 1-pair cable that electrically connects the transmitter and the receiver. Specifically, between the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, between the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and between the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the performance display drive. The substrates 4450 and 4450 are electrically connected by a twisted pair cable, respectively, while the power supply wiring and other wirings for transmitting various signals are electrically connected by a harness. Thus, in addition to the video transmission wiring pattern for transmitting the serial data by the differential method transmitted by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, The power supply wiring pattern and various signal wiring patterns for transmitting various other signals are mixed. Therefore, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are formed with the above-described video transmission wiring patterns, which are separated from the power supply wiring pattern and the various signal wiring patterns by a predetermined dimension. In the path from the transmitter to the receiver, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 are straddled, so that the video transmission formed on these relay terminal boards. Between the input and output of the wiring pattern, a part of the signal that transmits serial data by the differential method transmitted by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is reflected and becomes noise, or the output level of the signal decreases. Occurs. Therefore, in the present embodiment, impedance matching is applied to the video transmission wiring patterns formed on the plurality of relay terminal boards.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, between the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, between the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the peripheral door relay. The board of the terminal board 882 and the effect display drive board 4450 are electrically connected to each other by a twisted pair cable, whereas the wiring of the power supply wiring and other wirings for transmitting various signals are electrically connected by harnesses. Of the twisted pair cable, one wiring is red and the other wiring is gray, and the wiring for supplying power in the harness is red and the other wirings are gray. .. Note that the wiring for supplying power may be yellow instead of red.

[7-4-2e. Forced switching circuit, differential circuit]
The signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is supplied to the compulsory switching circuit 1512f, the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is adapted to be transmitted to the stored effect display drive substrate 4450. In addition to the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the forced switching circuit 1512f also outputs LOCKN signal output request data which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. Are differentially input to the plus signal and the minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e. The differential circuit 1512e serializes the LOCKN signal output request data into a differential serial signal (serial data). This LOCKN signal output request data is a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 during a period in which the start screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, or in a customer waiting state. During the period of operation, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 and a door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 to be described later included in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 are described. , Is transmitted as an operation confirmation request of the door frame side effect display device 460 in order to confirm whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the connection of the,, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. The forcible switching circuit 1512f is connected to the circuit so as to transmit these two signals when two signals, which are differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e, are input, while the differential circuit 1512f is differentially connected. When two signals that are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input in the digitizing circuit 1512e, the circuit configuration is such that the signals output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d are connected so as to transmit the signals. Has been done. As a result, when two signals that are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input to the differential circuit 1512e, the two signals are connected because the circuits are connected so as to transmit the two signals. , From the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, while being transmitted to the differential circuit 1512e. When two signals, which are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal, are not input, the circuit is connected so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, and therefore the door frame side effect transmitter. The signal output from the IC 1512d is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. The peripheral control MPU 1511a is demonstrating by the game board side effect display device 1600 while the startup screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 or in a customer waiting state. In the period, the LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted to the effect display drive board 4450 (actually, the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510) housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

The effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 receives the serial signal (serial data) from the peripheral control board 1510 by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, which will be described later, and is serialized. It is mainly composed of a liquid crystal module circuit 4450V that restores the signal to a parallel signal and outputs it to the door frame side effect display device 460.

The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 receives the drawing data from the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, and when it judges that the received drawing data is abnormal data, it sends a LOCKN signal, which will be described later, to that effect to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. , And outputs to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. The LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. Based on the input LOCKN signal, the peripheral control MPU 1511a controls the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source to generate an image for notifying that a predetermined condition is satisfied, and outputs the image to the game board side effect display device 1600. Is displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 to notify.

Further, when the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that the received two signals are LOCKN signal output request data, the LOCKN signal described later is transmitted to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. To the peripheral control board 1510. The LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is not defective when the LOCKN signal is input as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data, and the dish unit of the door frame 3 is detected. While it can be determined that the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the 320 does not have a problem, when the LOCKN signal is not input, it is determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that the effect display drive substrate 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 has a problem, and a notification image (for example, “a problem occurs in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device” is notified. "Please call the clerk.") is output to the game board side effect display device 1600 by controlling the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, and a notification sound to that effect (for example, "a malfunction occurs in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device"). ") is output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c by controlling the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, and a notification sound is output from the speaker provided in the door frame 3. Thereby, it is possible to perform the notification by the notification image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the notification sound repeatedly played from the speaker or the like provided in the door frame 3. At this time, all the LEDs for light emission decoration included in the door frame 3 and various LEDs mounted on various decoration boards included in the game board 5 may be turned on.

[7-4-3. RTC controller]
As shown in FIG. 72, the RTC control unit 4165 that holds calendar information that specifies the date and time information that specifies the hour, minute, and second is mainly composed of the RTC 4165a. The RTC 4165a has a built-in RAM 4165aa that holds calendar information and time information (hereinafter, referred to as "RTC built-in RAM 4165aa"). The RTC 4165a is adapted to be supplied with power from a battery 4165b (a button battery is adopted in this embodiment) as a driving power source and a backup power source for the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. That is, the RTC 4165a is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently of the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1) without being supplied with power from the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1). Thereby, the RTC 4165a can update and hold the calendar information and the time information by the power supply from the battery 4165b even when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a, sets them in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c described above, and sets the acquired calendar information and time information. Based effects can be unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. As such an effect, for example, if it is December 25, the screen of the Christmas tree or the reindeer is unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, or if it is New Year's Eve, the New Year countdown is performed. The screen to be executed may be unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Calendar information and time information are set at the time of factory shipment.

In addition to the calendar information and the time information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores and holds the brightness setting information of the LED when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is equipped with the LED type. There is. When the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is equipped with an LED type, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires the brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa and performs the brightness adjustment of the backlight by PWM control. .. The brightness setting information is brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, in 100% to 70% in 5% increments, and the currently set game. The board side effect display device 1600 and the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the door frame side effect display device 460, are included.

In addition to the calendar information, the time information, and the brightness setting information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa also stores the calendar information, the time information, and the brightness setting information as the information of the year, month, day, hour, minute, and second stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. Input date information is also stored.

When the backlights of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are of the cold cathode tube type, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is set to ON/OFF control or only ON of the backlight. It is supposed to do.

Various information such as calendar information, time information, brightness setting information, and input date/time information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa is set on the manufacturing line of the gaming machine manufacturer.
In the production line, in order to perform various tests such as a display test of the game board side effect display device 1600, the year in which the input date and time information is input on the production line as the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on. It is set to the manufacturing date and time which is month and day and hour, minute and second.

As described above, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa has, in addition to the calendar information and the time information, the brightness setting information and the input date/time information in the case where the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is equipped with the LED type backlight. , Information that needs to be maintained can be stored and retained independently of model information of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, probability of occurrence of big hit game state with low probability or high probability).

Also, the brightness setting information and the like stored and held in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa may be too bright with the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 set to the manufacturing date and time depending on the environment of the hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. , It may be too dark. Therefore, by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400, it is possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the brightness of the backlight to a predetermined brightness. When the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. In addition, when the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the production operation unit 400 is operated during the period in which the demonstration is performed by the game board side production display device 1600 in the customer waiting state, the setting mode is performed. Is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. By operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, the calendar information and the time information are reset, and the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is desired. The brightness can be adjusted. The desired brightness of the backlight of the adjusted game board side effect display device 1600 is overwritten (updated) as the brightness of the LED stored in the brightness setting information.

In the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes the above-described brightness correction program, so that when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is the LED type, the game board side effect is displayed. The decrease in brightness due to the secular change of the display device 1600 is corrected. The peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires the input date and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, identifies the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, and the calendar information and the time for identifying the date. Time information specifying minutes and seconds is acquired, the current date and time is specified, and the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, is adjusted in 5% steps in a range from 100% to 70%. The brightness setting information having the brightness adjustment information for performing and the brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 that is currently set is acquired. The acquired brightness setting information is corrected based on the correction information stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b in advance.

For example, when June has already passed from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on and the current date and time, When the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75%, this 75% is set. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness becomes 80%, which is further increased by 5% which is the correction information acquired with respect to When 12 months have already passed from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b. When the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, 10% which is the acquired correction information is added to the 75% of 85%. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness is obtained.

The current date and time may be specified by directly acquiring the calendar information specifying the date and the time information specifying the hour, minute, and second from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. Current calendar information set in the calendar information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c in the current time information acquisition processing of step S1002 in the control unit power-on processing. And the current time information set in the time information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 may be acquired to specify the current date and time.

[834. Volume control volume]
As described above, the volume adjustment volume 1510a can adjust the volume of the music, the sound effect, etc. flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by rotating the knob portion. As described above, the volume adjustment volume 1510a has a variable resistance value when the knob portion is pivotally operated, and the peripherally controlled A/D converter 1511ak electrically connected to the knob portion has a knob portion. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and is converted into a value of 1024 steps from value 0 to value 1023. In the present embodiment, as described above, the value of 1024 steps is divided into 7 and managed as the substrate volumes 0 to 6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the board volume 0 to the board volume 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source) is controlled so that the volume is set to the substrate volumes 0 to 6, so that music and sound effects can flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

In this way, music and sound effects are made to flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob portion. In addition, in the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying a clerk or the like in the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or a fraudulent act on the pachinko machine 1, and a game effect. The contents related to the notification (for example, the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 is rendered more powerful, or it is highly likely that the game state is advantageous to the player). Etc.) also flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion. To the maximum volume can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source) by a program.

The volume adjusted by this program is different from the above-described seven levels of the substrate volume, and it is possible to smoothly change from mute to maximum volume.
As a result, for example, even when a clerk in the hall or the like turns the knob of the volume adjusting volume 1510a to set the volume to a low level, music such as sound or sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is produced. Although the sound is low, when the pachinko machine 1 is out of order or when the player is cheating, the notification sound set to a large volume (in this embodiment, the maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk or the like in the hall from becoming less likely to notice a malfunction or a player's cheating by the notification sound.

Also, based on the current board volume that is set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music or the sound effect, while It is advantageous for the player to make the screen unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 in addition to music and sound effects by increasing the volume. It is also possible to announce that there is a high possibility that a game state will be entered.

In the present embodiment, the volume of music and sound effects are adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume adjusting volume 1510a, and in addition to the dial operating unit 401 of the effect operation unit 400, By operating the pressing operation unit 405, it is possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the volume of music or sound effect. When the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. In addition, when the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the production operation unit 400 is operated during the period in which the demonstration is performed by the game board side production display device 1600 in the customer waiting state, the setting mode is performed. Is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. By operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, it is possible to adjust the volume of music or sound effect to a desired volume. Specifically, the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob of the volume adjusting volume 1510a from an analog value to a digital value, and Then, the value of the substrate volume can be increased or decreased by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400. There is. This adjusted volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for a track in which sound data of effect sound such as music and sound effect is incorporated among a plurality of tracks in the internal sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, and the effect sound is changed. However, the volume of the above-mentioned notification sound and notification sound is not reflected in the adjustment.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the volume of music or sound effect is adjusted by directly rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, and the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400. There are two methods: a case where the volume of music or a sound effect is adjusted by increasing or decreasing the value of the substrate volume by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of. Since the volume control volume 1510a is mounted on the peripheral control board 1510, the main body frame 4 must be opened from the outer frame 2 without fail. Then, the store clerk in the hall can rotate the knob of the volume adjusting volume 1510a. However, at the volume adjusted by the clerk in the hall, the player may feel small and may be difficult to hear the music or the sound effect, or the player may feel large and feel the music or the sound effect noisy. Therefore, after turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1, within a predetermined time, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the production operation unit 400 are operated, or the customer waits for the demonstration by the game board side production display device 1600. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated during the period in which the operation is performed, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, By operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, the volume of music or sound effect can be adjusted to a desired volume. Thereby, the player can adjust the volume of the music or the sound effect to a desired volume. Therefore, when the clerk in the hall feels the adjusted volume is small and it is difficult to hear the music or the sound effect, the effect operation unit 400 is used. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is operated to increase the volume to a desired level, and when the clerk in the hall feels the volume adjusted to be high and the music or the sound effect is noisy, the effect operation unit The dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of 400 can be operated to reduce the volume to a desired level.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when a state in which no game is being played on the pachinko machine 1 is continued for a predetermined time, and when the player is in a waiting state and a demonstration is repeatedly performed by the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, 10 times). The volume adjusted by the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1 and playing a game last time is canceled and the volume is initialized. In this initialization of the volume, the volume is adjusted by the hall clerk, that is, the volume is adjusted by the hall clerk by directly rotating the knob of the volume adjusting volume 1510a. As a result, if the player who was seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 and was playing a game feels the volume is low and it is difficult to hear music or sound effects, the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 this time. A player who plays a game can operate the dial operation unit 401 and the push operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 to increase the volume to a desired volume, and last time, sit down on the front of the pachinko machine 1 to play the game. If the player feels the adjusted volume to be loud and the music or the sound effect is noisy, the player who sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 and plays the game this time uses the dial operation unit 401 of the production operation unit 400 or The pressing operation section 405 can be operated to reduce the volume to a desired level.

[8. Power system]
Next, the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76.
75 is a block diagram showing the power supply system of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 76 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 75. First, the power supply board 931 will be described, and then the power supplied to each control board and the like will be described. Note that the grounds (GND) of the various boards and the grounds (GND) of the various terminal boards are electrically connected to the grounds (GND) of the power supply board 931 and are the same ground (GND).

[8-1. Power board 931]
The power board 931 is electrically connected to a power cord, and the plug of this power cord is inserted into the power outlet of the Pachinko island facility. When the power switch 934 is operated, the power supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the power board 931 so that the pachinko machine 1 can be turned on.

As shown in FIG. 75, the power supply board 931 includes a power supply control section 935 and a firing control section 953. The power supply control unit 935 is a circuit that creates various DC voltages from AC 24V (AC24V) supplied from the pachinko island facility and supplies backup power to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. The portion 953 is a circuit for driving and controlling the firing solenoid 682 of the hitting ball launching device 650 shown in FIG. 5 and the ball feeding solenoid 255 of the ball feeding unit 250 shown in FIG.

The power supply control unit 935 includes a synchronous rectification circuit 935a, a power factor correction circuit 935b, a smoothing circuit 935c, a power supply generation circuit 935d, and capacitors BC0 and BC1. The AC 24V supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 via the power supply substrate 931 and is also supplied to the synchronous rectification circuit 935a. The synchronous rectification circuit 935a rectifies the AC 24 V (AC24V) supplied from the pachinko island facility and supplies the rectified AC power to the power factor correction circuit 935b. The power factor correction circuit 935b improves the power factor of the rectified electric power to generate direct current +37V (DC+37V, hereinafter referred to as "+37V") and supplies it to the smoothing circuit 935c. The smoothing circuit 935c removes the supplied +37V ripple to smooth +37V and supplies the smoothed +37V to the firing control circuit 953a and the power generation circuit 935d of the firing control unit 953.

The capacitor BC0 supplies backup power to the RAM (RAM with built-in main control) built in the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the capacitor BC1 is built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 952 of the payout control board 951. The backup power is supplied to the specified RAM (RAM with built-in payout control).

The launch control circuit 953a of the launch control unit 953 uses the +37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c as a driving power source, and the gaming ball 5a shown in FIG. The drive current for launching (firing) toward the ball is adjusted and output to the firing solenoid 682, while a constant current is output to the ball feeding solenoid 255 of the ball feeding unit 250 to output the ball of the ball feeding unit 250. The sending member receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320, and controls to send the game ball received by the ball sending member to the ball hitting device 650 side.

The power supply generation circuit 935d is DC+5V (DC+5V, hereinafter referred to as “+5V”), DC+12V (DC+12V, hereinafter referred to as “+12V”) from +37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c, and DC. +24V (DC+24V, hereinafter referred to as "+24V") is created and supplied to the payout control board 951 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, respectively. The power supply system supplied with +5V is supplied as a +5V power supply line, the power supply system supplied with +12V is supplied as a +12V power supply line, and the power supply system supplied with +24V is supplied as a +24V power supply line.

The +5V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935d is supplied to the payout control board 951 as described later. The +5V supplied to the payout control board 951 is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control filter circuit 951a and to the power supply terminal of the payout control internal RAM via the diode PD0. ing. The +12V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935d is supplied to the +5V generation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. The +5V creation circuit 1310g creates +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, from +12V from the payout control board 951. The +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control filter circuit 1310h and the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM via the diode MD0. ing.

The minus terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the plus terminal of the capacitor BC1 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control board 951 and is paid out. It is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 of the control board 951. In other words, +5 V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply substrate 931 causes a current to flow toward the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and the forward direction of the power supply terminal of the payout control RAM by the diode PD0 and the capacitor BC1. Electric current flows to the plus terminal. As described above, the capacitor BC1 is +5V by the electrical connection method in which +5V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 returns to the payout control board 951 and again from the payout control board 951 to the power supply board 931. Are supplied and can be recharged. As a result, when +5V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935d is no longer supplied to the payout control board 951, the charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is supplied to the payout control board 951 as the payout VBB. Therefore, although the current does not flow to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a by the diode PD0 and the payout control MPU 952a does not operate, the memory content is held by supplying the payout VBB to the power supply terminal of the payout control internal RAM. It has become so.

The negative terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the main control internal RAM of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. And is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 of the main control board 1310. In other words, +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g has a current flowing toward the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the power supply terminal of the main control internal RAM, which is the forward direction by the diode MD0, and the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0. The current flows toward the. As described above, the capacitor BC0 is supplied with +5V by the electrical connection method in which +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g is supplied from the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 to the power supply board 931. You can do it. As a result, +12V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is not supplied to the +5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, and the +5V creation circuit 1310g can create +5V. When it disappears, the electric charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied as the main VBB to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. Although the current is blocked by MD0 and does not flow and the main control MPU 1310a does not operate, the main VBB is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM so that the stored contents are retained. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the backup power supply circuit that supplies the backup power supply to the main control built-in RAM is composed of the diode MD0 and the capacitor BC0.

[8-2. Voltage supplied to each control board, etc.]
Next, an outline of the voltage supplied to each control board and the like will be described, and subsequently, the voltage supplied to the payout control board and the voltage supplied to the main control board will be described.

Three types of voltages of +5V, +12V, and +24V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 are supplied to the payout control board 951 as shown in FIG. 75, and among these three types of voltage, +12V and Two types of voltage of +24 V are supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. Further, the three types of voltages of +5V, +12V, and +24V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 are supplied to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the surroundings via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. It is supplied to the control board 1510 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, respectively.

The three types of voltages of +5V, +12V, and +24V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 are, as shown in FIG. 76A, the lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 and the drive source drive circuit of the motor drive board 4180. 4180a, respectively. The lamp driving circuit 4170a of the lamp driving board 4170 outputs various signals such as a lighting signal, a blinking signal and a gradation lighting signal to various decorative boards of the game board 5, and the driving source driving circuit 4180a of the motor driving board 4180 is a game. A drive signal is output to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid of the board 5.

The peripheral control board 1510 includes a +3.3V generating circuit 1510b for generating a direct current 3.3V (DC+3.3V, hereinafter referred to as “+3.3V”) from +5V supplied from the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. ing. The +3.3V generated by the +3.3V generating circuit 1510b is supplied to the liquid crystal module 1600a of the game board side effect display device 1600. Further, +12V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 is supplied to the backlight power supply 1600b of the game board side effect display device 1600.

On the other hand, three types of voltages of +5V, +12V, and +24V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 are supplied to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, as shown in FIG. The frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 includes a +9V creation circuit 194a that creates DC +9V (DC+9V, hereinafter referred to as “+9V”) from +12V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. In addition to +9V created by the +9V creation circuit 194a, a total of four types of voltages of +5V, +12V, and +24V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 are supplied to various decorative substrates of the door frame 3.

Further, +12V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 is supplied to the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x. The upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x creates +3.3V from +12V. The +3.3V generated by the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x is supplied to the various electronic components forming the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V shown in FIG. 74, and the upper plate side liquid crystal module backlight power supply circuit 4450y. And door frame side effect display device 460, respectively. The voltage generated by the upper plate side liquid crystal module backlight power supply circuit 4450y is supplied to the door frame side effect display device 460.

[8-2-1. Voltage supplied to payout control board]
As shown in FIG. 75, the payout control board 951 includes a payout control filter circuit 951a and the like in addition to the payout control MPU 952a and the like. The payout control filter circuit 951a is supplied with +5V from the power supply board 931 and removes noise from this +5V. The +5V is supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply substrate 931 via the diode PD0, and is also supplied to, for example, the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 952. +12V from the power supply board 931 is supplied to, for example, the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952, and is also supplied to the external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 via the payout control board 951. The external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 is a circuit that outputs a signal that conveys the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and game information of the pachinko machine 1 to a hall computer installed in a game hall (hall). Is. The hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1 from the signal output from the external communication circuit 784a. It should be noted that +24 from the power supply board 931 is not used in the payout control board 951 and is supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951.

[8-2-2. Voltage supplied to main control board]
As shown in FIG. 75, the main control board 1310 includes a +5V generation circuit 1310g, a main control filter circuit 1310h, a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, and the like in addition to the main control MPU 1310a and the like. The +5V creation circuit 1310g is supplied with +12V from the power supply board 931 via the payout control board 951, and creates +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, from this +12V. In the main control board 1310, the power supply system created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g and supplied with +5V is a +5V power supply line. In this embodiment, the +5V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 and the +5V power supply line created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 are not electrically connected. Since the circuit is configured as described above, the +5V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is not electrically connected to various electronic components of the main control board 1310, and +5V of the main control board 1310 is not provided. The +5V power supply line created by the creating circuit 1310g is not electrically connected to various electronic components such as other boards except the main control board 1310.

The main control filter circuit 1310h is supplied with +5V created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g, and removes noise from this +5V. The +5V is supplied to the capacitor BC0 of the power supply substrate 931 via the diode MD0 and is also supplied to the main control MPU 1310a and the like, for example. +12V from the payout control board 951 is supplied to, for example, the main control input circuit 1310b, and +24V from the payout control board 951 is supplied to, for example, the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d.

The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is supplied with +12V and +24V from the power supply board 931 via the payout control board 951, and monitors the signs of power failure or momentary power failure of these +12V and +24V. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e outputs a power failure notification signal to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure notification when detecting signs of +12V and +24V power failure or momentary power failure. The power failure notice signal is input to the payout control MPU 952a via the main control board 1310 and the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control board 951. Further, the power failure notice signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control board 1310. The power failure notice signal is input to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 through the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 as shown in FIG. 76(b). At the same time, it is adapted to be input to the decoration board of the door frame or the like through the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194.

In the present embodiment, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e applies the voltage to one of the +12V power line or the +24V power line by monitoring the voltage applied to each of the two power lines, the +12V power line and the +24V power line. Compared with the case of monitoring the generated voltage, it is possible to more accurately grasp the sign of power failure such as power failure or momentary power failure.

[9. Main control board circuit]
Next, the circuit of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 79. 77 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of the main control board, FIG. 78 is a circuit diagram showing a power failure monitoring circuit, and FIG. 79 is a circuit showing a communication interface circuit between the main control board and the peripheral control board. It is a figure. First, the main control filter circuit 1310h shown in FIG. 75 will be described, and subsequently, the power supply created by the main control board 1310, the main control system reset, the main control crystal oscillator, the main control input circuit, the power failure monitoring circuit, and the main control MPU. Various input/output signals to and from the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 for communication between the boards will be described.

The main control board 1310 includes a main control MPU 1310a, a main control input circuit 1310b, a main control output circuit 1310c, a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, a +5V generation circuit 1310g, and a main control circuit shown in FIGS. In addition to the control filter circuit 1310h, as a peripheral circuit, as shown in FIG. 77, a main control system reset MIC1 that outputs a reset signal and a main control crystal oscillator MX0 that outputs a clock signal (in the present embodiment, 24 MHz (MHz) )) is mainly composed.

[9-1. Main control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 77, the main control filter circuit 1310h mainly includes a main control 3-terminal filter MIC0. The main control three-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, which is magnetically shielded with ferrite and has excellent attenuation characteristics. The main control 3-terminal filter MIC0 is applied with +5V created by the +5V creating circuit 1310g at its 1st terminal, its 2nd terminal is grounded (GND), and the noise component is removed from its 3rd terminal. +5V is output. The +5V applied to the first terminal is first electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC0 whose one end is grounded (GND), and thereby the ripple (AC component superimposed on the voltage) is first removed. Have been smoothed.

The +5V output from the third terminal is electrically connected to the other ends of the capacitor MC1 and the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (electrostatic capacitance: 470 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment), one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). By connecting to, the ripple is further removed and smoothed. The smoothed +5V is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1, the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the like. In addition, in the VDD terminal which is a power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the power from the pachinko island facility is cut off, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is subject to the power failure or the momentary power failure. The voltage is applied as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the generation.

The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC3 whose one end is grounded (GND), and +5V applied to the VDD terminal is smoothed by further removing ripples. The VSS terminal which is the ground terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is grounded to the ground (GND).

The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the capacitor MC3 and also to the anode terminal of the diode MD0. A cathode terminal of the diode MD0 is electrically connected to a VBB terminal that is a power supply terminal of a RAM (main control internal RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a, and one end of the capacitor MC4 is grounded to the ground (GND). Is electrically connected to the other end of. The VBB terminal of the RAM with built-in main control is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 and the other end of the capacitor MC4, and is also connected to the plus side of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply substrate 931 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the terminal. That is, +5V, which has been smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 1310h, is applied to the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and via the diode MD0, the VBB terminal of the main control internal RAM and the capacitor BC0. It is designed to be applied to the positive terminal of and. As a result, as described above, +12V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 is not supplied to the +5V generation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 and +5V is generated. When the circuit 1310g cannot generate +5V, the electric charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 1310 as the main VBB, so that the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is connected to the VDD terminal. Although the current is blocked by the diode MD0 and the current does not flow and the main control MPU 1310a does not operate, the memory content is retained by applying the main VBB to the VBB terminal of the RAM with built-in main control.

[9-2. Main control system reset]
As shown in FIG. 77, +5V in which the noise component is removed and smoothed by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1. The main control system reset MIC1 resets the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, and has a delay circuit built therein. The delay capacitance terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC5 whose one end is grounded (GND), and the delay time by the delay circuit is set by the capacitance of this capacitor MC5. You can do it. Specifically, the main control system reset MIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the delay time has elapsed when +5V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold value (for example, 4.25V).

The output terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the SRST terminal which is the reset terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 1310ca with the reset function. The output terminal is an open collector output type, one end of which is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR1 electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and one end of which is a capacitor grounded to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of MC6. The ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC6. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is higher than the threshold value, the output terminal is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor MR1 and the logic becomes HI. This logic is the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output with reset function. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value while being input to the reset terminal of the circuit 1310ca, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic is the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit 1310ca with the reset function. It is input to each reset terminal. Since the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 1310ca with the reset function are negative logic inputs, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes lower than the threshold value, the main control MPU 1310a and the reset function are activated. The associated main control output circuit 1310ca is reset. Note that the power supply terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC7 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND), and +5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. The ground terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[9-3. Main control crystal oscillator]
As shown in FIG. 77, +5V in which the noise component is removed and smoothed by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0. The VDD terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC8, one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND), and +5V input to the VDD terminal is smoothed by further removing ripples. Further, the smoothed +5V is applied to the output frequency selection terminals A, B, C and ST in addition to the VDD terminal. The main control crystal oscillator MX0 outputs a clock signal of 24 MHz from an F terminal, which is an output terminal, by applying +5 V to each of the A terminal, the B terminal, the C terminal, and the ST terminal.

The F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is electrically connected to the CLK terminal which is the clock terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the clock signal of 24 MHz is input. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, is grounded to the ground (GND), and the D terminal for outputting the divided frequency of the F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is not electrically connected to the outside. It is in a state.

[9-4. Main control input circuit]
The main control input circuit 1310b detects from the general winning opening sensors 4020, 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the count sensor 4005, and the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. In addition to the signals, this is a circuit to which an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from an operation switch 954 provided on the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is input. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signal from each switch is input is the same, a circuit to which the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 is input will be described here.

[9-4-1. Circuit to which operation signal (RAM clear signal) from operation switch is input]
First, as described above, the operation switch 954 includes a RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control board 951 and a main control of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. It is operated when clearing the RAM (RAM with built-in main control) built into the MPU 1310a, or when an error is reported after power is turned on, it is operated to cancel the error. Function to clear the RAM within a predetermined period after turning on the power, and error cancellation after turning on the power (after the period for performing the function as RAM clear has passed, that is, after the predetermined period has passed from turning on the power) And the function of performing. Since the main control board 1310 does not have the function of canceling the error that the payout control board 951 has, if the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input within a predetermined period after the power is turned on, the main control board 1310 is controlled. A process for clearing the main control built-in RAM is performed by judging it as a RAM clear signal for clearing the built-in RAM.

To the main control board 1310, an operation signal whose logic is LOW is input from the payout control board 951 when the operation switch 954 is not operated, while a logic signal is output from the payout control board 951 when the operation switch 954 is operated. The operation signal for which HI has become HI is input from the payout control board 951 (detailed description of this point will be given later).

As shown in FIG. 77, the transmission line for transmitting the operation signal from the operation switch 954 provided on the payout control board 951 within a predetermined period after the power is turned on has a pull-up with one end electrically connected to the +12V power line. It is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR2 and also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 via the resistor MR3. The base terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the resistor MR3, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR4 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR0 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR5 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line and also the non-inverting buffer. Main control via ICMIC10 (non-inverting buffer ICMIC10 is provided with eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC10A) is shaped and output without being inverted). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the MPU 1310a.

The circuit for outputting an operation signal from the operation switch 954 on the payout control board 951 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is transmitted. The line is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2. In the main control board 1310, when the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal from the payout control board 951 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW, and the operation switch 954 is operated. In the meantime, the operation signal from the payout control board 951 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 and the logic becomes HI and is input.

A circuit composed of the resistors MR3 and MR4 and the transistor MTR0 is a switch circuit which is turned on/off by an operation signal from the operation switch 954.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, whereby the transistor MTR0 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR5 and the logic becomes HI. The operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. To be done. The main control MPU 1310a must instruct to perform RAM clear for erasing the information stored in the main control internal RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 input to the input terminal PA0 is HI. to decide.

On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the operation signal that is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor MR2 and has the logic of HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 to turn on the transistor MTR0, The circuit will also turn on. Accordingly, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the operation signal from the operation switch 954 whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. To be done. The main control MPU 1310a is for instructing to perform RAM clear for erasing the information stored in the main control built-in RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW. To judge.

The operation signal from the operation switch 954 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2. This is because the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input through the payout control board 951. That is, between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is higher than the control reference voltage of +5V in order to suppress the influence of noise that enters the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards. The signal reliability is enhanced by using +12V which is the voltage. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, and the second starting opening sensor 4004, which are directly input to the main control board 1310, are moved to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor. While being pulled up, the detection signals from the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the count sensor 4005, the general winning opening sensor 4020, and the gate sensor 4003, which are input through the panel relay board 4161 shown in FIG. 69, are sent to the main control board 1310. Since it is not directly input, it is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor like the operation signal from the operation switch 954.

[9-5. Blackout monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 75, the main control board 1310 is supplied with two types of voltages of +12V and +24V from the power supply board 931 via the payout control board 951, and +12V and +24V are input to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. ing. The power outage monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the signs of +12V and +24V power outages or instantaneous blackouts, and when the signs of the power outages or instantaneous blackouts are detected, the power outage notification signal is output as a power outage notice in addition to the main control MPU 1310a and the payout control board. It outputs to the payout control MPU 952a of 951 and the peripheral control board 1510. Here, first, the configuration of the power failure monitoring circuit will be described, and then the power failure or instantaneous power failure of +24V, the power failure or instantaneous power failure of +12V, and the output of the power failure warning signal will be described.

[9-5-1. Configuration of power failure monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 78, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e mainly includes a shunt type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, an open collector output type comparator MIC21, a D type flip-flop MIC22, and transistors MTR20 to MTR23.

The REF terminal which is the reference voltage input terminal and the K terminal which is the cathode terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20 are electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR20 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. +5V is applied, and the current input to the REF terminal is limited by the resistor MR20. The K terminal outputs a reference voltage Vref (2.495 V is set in the present embodiment) which is a comparison reference voltage of the comparator MIC21. The K terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC20 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND), and the reference voltage Vref output from the K terminal is rippled by the capacitor MC20 (multiplied by the voltage). AC component) is removed and smoothed. The A terminal which is the anode terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20 is grounded to the ground (GND).

The comparator MIC21 includes two voltage comparison circuits, one of which (MIC21A) is used to compare the monitor voltage V1 of +24V with the reference voltage Vref, and the other one (MIC21B). , +12V monitor voltage V2 and reference voltage Vref are used for comparison. The monitoring voltage V1 of +24 V is applied to the third terminal which is the positive terminal of the MIC21A, and the reference voltage Vref is applied to the second terminal which is the negative terminal of the MIC21A. The monitor voltage V2 of +12V is applied to the 5th terminal which is the positive terminal of the MIC 21B, and the reference voltage Vref is applied to the 6th terminal which is the negative terminal of the MIC 21B. The results of these comparisons are input to the D type flip-flop MIC22. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 includes two D-type flip-flop circuits, one of which (MIC22A) is used in this embodiment. The Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC21 whose one end is grounded (GND), and +5 V applied to the Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21 is The ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC21, and the GND terminal which is the ground terminal of the comparator MIC21 is grounded to the ground (GND).

[9-5-2. +24V power failure or momentary power failure monitoring]
As described above, the +24V power failure or the instantaneous blackout is monitored by the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC21 comparing the +24V monitoring voltage V1 with the reference voltage Vref. As shown in FIG. 78, the third terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 to which the +24V monitoring voltage V1 is applied, has one end and the other end of the resistor MR21 electrically connected to the +24V power supply line. Is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR22 that is grounded to the ground (GND), the other ends of the resistors MR21 and MR22, and the other end of the capacitor MC23 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). Are electrically connected. The +24V monitoring voltage V1 applied to the third terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is +24V divided by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR21 and MR22, and ripples are removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC23. .. The values of the resistors MR21 and MR22 are set to a preset blackout detection voltage V1pf (21.40V in the present embodiment) when the voltage of +24V is interrupted or a momentary blackout occurs, the voltage starts to drop from +24V. Then, the monitor voltage V1 of +24V is set to have the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

The first terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is an open collector output and is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR23 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. One end is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC24, which is grounded to the ground (GND), and is electrically connected to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22. The capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter.

When the voltage of +24V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the monitoring voltage V1 of +24V becomes higher than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 is +5V by the pull-up resistor MR23. The signal that has been pulled up to the side and has the logic of HI is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the monitoring voltage V1 of +24V becomes lower than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 is the ground (GND). The signal that is pulled to the side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-3. +12V power failure or momentary power failure monitoring]
As described above, the +12V power failure or the instantaneous power failure is monitored by the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC21 comparing the +12V monitoring voltage V2 with the reference voltage Vref. As shown in FIG. 78, the fifth terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 to which the +12V monitoring voltage V2 is applied, has one end and the other end of the resistor MR24 electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. Is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR25 that is grounded to the ground (GND), the other ends of the resistors MR24 and MR25, and the other end of the capacitor MC25 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). Are electrically connected. The +12V monitoring voltage V2 applied to the fifth terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is +12V divided by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR24 and MR25, and ripples are removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC25. .. The values of the resistors MR24 and MR25 are set to a preset power failure detection voltage V2pf (set to 10.47V in this embodiment) when the voltage of +12V starts a power failure or an instantaneous power failure and the voltage starts to drop from +12V. Then, the monitor voltage V2 of +12V is set to have the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

The 7th terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC21 has an open collector output and is electrically connected to the 1st terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC 21A described above, so that one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. Of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 by being electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR23 which is electrically connected and also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC24 which is grounded to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the PR terminal which is a terminal. The capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter as described above.

When the voltage of +12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitor voltage V2 of +12V becomes larger than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the 7th terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 is +5V by the pull-up resistor MR23. The signal that has been pulled to the side and whose logic has become HI is input to the PR terminal that is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the +12V voltage is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the +12V monitoring voltage V2 becomes lower than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is the ground (GND). The signal that is pulled to the side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-4. Output of power failure warning signal]
The D-type flip-flop MIC22 stores the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, according to the change in the edge of the clock signal input to the 1CK terminal, which is the clock input terminal. (Logic) is output from the output terminal 1Q terminal, and a value obtained by inverting the stored value (logic) is output from the output terminal negative logic 1Q terminal. Further, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 releases the latched state when the signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal, and outputs the logic of the signal input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal. The inverted signal is output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal (at this time, the same logic as the signal which is the inverted signal of the signal output from 1Q, that is, the signal which is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal is output. A signal having a logic is output from the negative logic 1Q terminal. On the other hand, when a signal having a logic HI is input to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal, the latched state is set. Further, when the D type flip-flop MIC22 is set to the latch state by inputting the signal whose logic is HI to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal, the logic is LOW to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal. When this signal is input, a state in which a signal whose logic is HI is output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal is maintained (at this time, a signal obtained by inverting the logic of the signal output from 1Q is negative logic). Maintain the status output from the 1Q terminal).

In the D-type flip-flop MIC22, in the present embodiment, since the 1D terminal which is the D input terminal and the 1CK terminal which is the clock input terminal are respectively grounded to the ground (GND), they are connected to the 1CK terminal which is the clock input terminal. The circuit is configured so that the edge of the input clock signal does not change and the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, is not stored and output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal. ing. As described above, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 has a signal from the first terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 that monitors the power failure or the instantaneous power failure of +24V and the power failure of +12V to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal. Alternatively, the signal from the terminal 7 which is the output terminal of the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC21 which monitors the instantaneous power failure is input, and based on these signals, the signal is output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal. The Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC22 whose one end is grounded (GND) and is applied to the Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22. +5V is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor MC22, the GND terminal which is a ground terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and the negative logic 1Q terminal which inverts the logic of the 1Q terminal which is an output terminal is electrically connected to the outside. Is not connected.

In the D-type flip-flop MIC22, in the present embodiment, the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is input to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal via the main control output circuit 1310ca with the reset function. This power failure clear signal is started to be output and stopped after a lapse of a predetermined time in a main control side power-on process, which will be described later, performed by the main control MPU 1310a. Since the CLR terminal has a negative logic input, the logic of the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a becomes LOW and is input to the CLR terminal through the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 is designed to release the latch state when a power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal. At this time, the logic input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal, is inverted to an output terminal. Is output from the 1Q terminal.

On the other hand, when the output of the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is stopped, the logic becomes HI and is input to the CLR terminal via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. The D type flip-flop MIC22 is configured to set the latch state when the power failure clear signal is not input to the CLR terminal, and latches the input state in which the logic is LOW to the PR terminal.

The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The signal output from the 1Q terminal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure notice signal. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the main control output circuit 1310cb without the reset function, and resets the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The functionless main control output circuit 1310cb outputs to the payout control board 951 as a payout power failure notice signal and outputs to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power failure notice signal.

As shown in FIG. 78, the main control input circuit 1310b that electrically connects the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC22, is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR26 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 via the resistor MR27. It is connected. The base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor MR27, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR28 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR20 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line and also has a non-inverting buffer. The main control is performed via the ICMIC 23 (the non-inverting buffer ICMIC 23 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC 23A) is shaped and output without being inverted). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the MPU 1310a.

The circuit composed of the resistors MR27 and MR28 and the transistor MTR20 is a switch circuit which is turned on/off by a signal output from the 1Q terminal which is an output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the transistor MTR20 turns off. , The switch circuit is also turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to +5V and the transistor MTR20 is turned on. The switch circuit is also turned on.

When both the condition that the voltage of +24V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes HI is the preset of the D type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is output to the PR terminal, which is the terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has its logic level LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR29 and the logic becomes HI via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23. The power failure notice signal is the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a. Input to PA1.

On the other hand, when one of the condition that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes LOW is D. Since it is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, has its logic of HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. This turns on the transistor MTR20. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the power failure notice signal whose logic becomes LOW via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a. Input to PA1.

Further, as shown in FIG. 78, the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function that outputs the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 to the payout control board 951 as the payout power failure notice signal is opened. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above, and the transistor MTR21 of the preceding stage is connected via the resistor MR30. It is electrically connected to the base terminal. The base terminal of the preceding-stage transistor MTR21 is electrically connected to the resistor MR30, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR31 having one end grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the previous-stage transistor MTR21 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the previous-stage transistor MTR21 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR32 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. At the same time, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage through the resistor MR33. The base terminal of the latter-stage transistor MTR22 is electrically connected to the resistor MR33, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR34 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC26 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND), and is wired. It is electrically connected to the payout control board 951 via a (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the payout control board 951 via a wiring (harness), the payout control input of the payout control section 952 shown in FIG. In the circuit 952b, one end is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, and the output terminal MPU952a shown in FIG. 70 is electrically connected to an input terminal of a predetermined input port. Connected to each other.

The circuit composed of the resistors MR30 and MR31 and the transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage is a switch circuit in the preceding stage, and the circuit composed of the resistors MR33 and MR34 and the transistor MTR22 in the following stage is a switch circuit in the subsequent stage, and is a D type flip-flop. It is turned on/off by a signal output from the 1Q terminal which is an output terminal of the MIC 22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and The MTR21 is turned off and the switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned off, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage, is increased to +5V by the resistor MR32. As a result, the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage is turned on, and the switch circuit in the latter stage is also turned on. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 is pulled up to +5V and the transistor MTR21 is turned on. The switch circuit of the preceding stage is also turned on, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 of the preceding stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 of the following stage, is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, so that The transistor MTR22 is turned off, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned off.

When both the condition that the voltage of +24V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes HI is the preset of the D type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is output to the PR terminal, which is a terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has its logic set to LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. Transistor MTR21 turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor MR32 and applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage, so that the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is turned on. Accordingly, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 at the subsequent stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 951 via the wiring (harness), and the payout power failure notice signal whose logic becomes LOW is paid out. It is input to the control board 951.

On the other hand, when one of the condition that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes LOW is D. Since it is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, has a logic HI and is applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage. By the input, the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) and applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the following stage, so that the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is turned off. Accordingly, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 of the payout control board 951 via the wiring (harness). The withdrawal power failure notice signal whose logic is HI is input to the withdrawal control board 951.

Further, as shown in FIG. 78, the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function that outputs the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the peripheral power failure notice signal is opened. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above and the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 via the resistor MR35. Is electrically connected to. The base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the resistor MR35, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR36 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR23 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via a wiring (harness).
When the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via a wiring (harness), the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 72, one end thereof is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, and is electrically connected to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Connected.

The circuit composed of the resistors MR35 and MR36 and the transistor MTR23 is a switch circuit which is turned on/off by a signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the transistor MTR23 is turned off. , The switch circuit is also turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to +5V and the transistor MTR23 is turned on, The switch circuit is also turned on.

When both the condition that the voltage of +24V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes HI is the preset of the D type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is output to the PR terminal, which is the terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has its logic level LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness). The peripheral power failure notice signal that has become is input to the peripheral control board 1510.

On the other hand, when one of the condition that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes LOW is D. Since it is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, has its logic HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. This turns on the transistor MTR23. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), and the peripheral power failure notice signal whose logic becomes LOW is the peripheral control board. 1510.

In this way, the main control input circuit 1310b that transmits the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure notice signal, and the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22. The main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function for outputting the signal output from the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power failure warning signal has one transistor each, and the power failure warning signal input to the main control MPU 1310a and the peripherals. While the logic of the peripheral power failure notice signal input to the control board 1510 is the same, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 is output to the output control board 951. The main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function that outputs as a power failure notice signal has two transistors, the front stage and the rear stage, and the logic of the payout power failure notice signal is the logic of the power failure notice signal input to the main control MPU 1310a and the peripherals. The logic of the peripheral power failure advance notice signal input to the control board 1510 is inverted, and is different from the logic of the power failure advance notice signal and the logic of the peripheral power failure advance notice signal.

In addition, the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and the main control MPU1310a via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23. Of the main control output circuit 1310cb without the reset function, the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 at the latter stage of the main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset function is connected via the wiring (harness) to the payout control board. In the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 in 951, one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, and the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function is provided. The collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to a pull-up resistor whose one end is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 via a wiring (harness). It is connected to the. This means that between the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the main control MPU 1310a are connected to each other. Since it is mounted on the main control board 1310, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board, while the main control board 1310 and the payout control board perform the power failure warning by the logic (ON/OFF signal) of the power failure warning signal using the control reference voltage of +5V of the main control MPU 1310a. In order to suppress the influence of noise entering the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards, the main control MPU 1310a and the main control MPU 1310a between the board 951 and the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. The power outage notification is performed by the logic (ON/OFF signal) of the power outage notification signal using +12V, which is a voltage higher than the control reference voltage +5V of the payout control MPU 952a and the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

[9-6. Various input/output signals to main control MPU]
Next, various input/output signals to/from the main control MPU 1310a will be described with reference to FIG. The RXA terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the main control MPU 1310a, receives the serial data from the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 69 as the payer serial data reception signal via the main control input circuit 1310b. .. On the other hand, the TXA terminal and the TXB terminal, which are serial data output terminals of the serial output port of the main control MPU 1310a, use the serial data transmitted from the TXA terminal to the payout control board 951 as the main pay serial data transmission signal without the reset function. The main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset function transmits the main payment serial data transmission signal to the payout control board 951, and the TXB terminal transmits the main data to the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. A main serial output signal 1310cb having no reset function is transmitted as a serial serial data transmission signal, and a main serial output signal 1310cb having no reset function is sent to the peripheral control board 1510.

In addition to the operation signal (RAM clear signal) described above being input to each input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a, for example, a payout indicating that normal reception of the main payment serial data reception signal described above has been completed. The payer ACK signal from the control board 951 is input via the main control input circuit 1310b, and the detection signals from various switches such as the first starting port sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69 are sent via the main control input circuit 1310b. They are input respectively.

On the other hand, from each output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a, for example, the main payment ACK signal indicating the completion of the normal reception of the above payment main serial data reception signal is output to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. Then, the main control output circuit 1310ca with the reset function outputs a main pay ACK signal to the payout control board 951, or a drive signal to the main control output circuit 1310ca with the reset function for the starting opening solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. To output a drive signal from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to the starting opening solenoid 2107 via the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and various displays such as the first special symbol display 1403 shown in FIG. 69. Drive signals to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function and output a drive signal to each display from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, and various information regarding games (game information) Is output to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, and various information (game information) about the game is output from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to the payout control board 951.

[9-7. Interface circuit for communication between main control board and peripheral control board]
Next, a communication interface circuit between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIG. 79. To the main control board 1310, +12V from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 is supplied via the payout control board 951, and the +5V creation circuit 1310g creates +5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a from this +12V. ing. The main circumference serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is influenced by noise that enters a wiring (harness) that electrically connects the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. In order to suppress the noise, the reliability is improved by transmitting by using +12V which is a voltage higher than +5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a.

Specifically, the main control board 1310 causes the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function to function as a communication interface circuit, and the communication interface circuit mainly includes a resistor MR50, resistors MR51 and MR52, and a transistor MTR50. Has been done. On the other hand, in the peripheral control board 1510, a diode AD10, an electrolytic capacitor AC10 (capacitance: 47 μF in this embodiment), a photocoupler AIC10 (infrared LED and photo IC are built in as a communication interface circuit. Is configured.
) Is mainly composed.

+12V supplied from the power supply board 931 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD50 of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, and the negative terminal of the diode MD50 is grounded to the ground (GND). The electrolytic capacitor MC50 (in the present embodiment, the capacitance: 220 microfarads (μF)) is electrically connected to the positive terminal. The cathode terminal of the diode MD50 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, and is electrically connected to the anode terminal (terminal 1) of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a wiring (harness). It is connected to the.
As a result, when the power from the power supply board 931 is no longer supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 due to, for example, a power failure or an instantaneous blackout, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is reduced. +12V can be continuously applied from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510.

In this way, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is charged to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (electrostatic capacity: 470 μF in this embodiment) shown in FIG. 77 when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs. Since the charge is applied as +5V, the main serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a serially manages at least the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. The unit 1310aec can transfer the data to the transmission shift register 41eaa and complete the transmission from the transmission shift register 1310eaa as the main serial data.

As described above, the main circumference serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is transmitted to the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. In order to suppress the influence of intruding noise, the reliability is improved by transmitting using +12V which is a voltage higher than the control reference voltage of +5V of the main control MPU 1310a.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a power failure or an instantaneous power failure occurs, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is applied as +12 V from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, the main serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a transfers the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa to the transmission buffer register 1310aeb to the transmission shift register 41ea by the serial management unit 1310aec. When transmitted from the shift register 1310eaa as main-circulation serial data, a main-circulation serial data transmission signal whose logic is HI can be transmitted from the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 by +12V.

In the present embodiment, the storage capacity of the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main serial transmission port 1310ae built into the main control MPU 1310a has 32 bytes, and one packet is composed of 3 bytes of data. Therefore, a maximum of 10 packets of data is stored in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. Further, in the present embodiment, the transfer bit rate of the main circumference serial data transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a is set to 19200 bps.

The cathode terminal (3rd terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 of the main control board 1310 via the resistor AR10 and its wiring (harness). The resistor AR10 of the peripheral control board 1510 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10.

The TXB terminal for outputting the main-circulation serial data transmission signal from the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 via. The base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is electrically connected to the resistor MR51 and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR52 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR50 is grounded to the ground (GND).

The circuit composed of the resistors MR51 and MR52 and the transistor MTR50 is a switch circuit, and when the logic of the main-cycle serial data transmission signal is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor MTR50 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, no forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510, and the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the main circumference serial data transmission signal is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR50, the transistor MTR50 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. .. As a result, a forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510, so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on.

+5V supplied from the power supply board 931 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode AD10 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the cathode terminal of the diode AD10 and the negative terminal are ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10 which is grounded. The cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10, and is also electrically connected to the Vcc terminal (6th terminal) which is the power supply terminal of the photocoupler AIC10. The emitter terminal (4th terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal (5th terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is a pull-up resistor electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10. It is pulled up to the +5V side by AR11 and electrically connected to the input terminal of the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. When the photocoupler AIC10 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 changes, and the signal is used as the main-circulation serial data transmission signal, and the serial I/O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU1511a. Input to the input terminal of.

Accordingly, as described above, when +5V supplied from the power supply board 931 is not supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 due to, for example, a power failure or an instantaneous blackout, The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor AC10 can be continuously applied as +5 V to the Vcc terminal of the photocoupler AIC10. When +5V is applied from the electrolytic capacitor AC10 when an electric power or an instantaneous blackout occurs, the main-circulation serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is transmitted to the main control MPU 1310a. The data set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the built-in main circumference serial transmission port 1310ae can be transmitted completely, and the main circumference serial data transmission signal in the middle of transmission, that is, the main circumference serial data is cut off. The peripheral control board 1510 can surely receive the signal without any loss.

When the logic of the main-cycle serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and Since the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off when the MTR50 is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor AR11 and the logic becomes HI. While the serial data transmission signal is input to the input terminal of the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the logic of the main circumference serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510. Is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR50 and the transistor MTR50 is turned on to turn on the photocoupler AIC10. The voltage applied to the collector terminal is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the main circumference serial data transmission signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. .. As described above, the logic of the main circumference serial data transmission signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is the same as the logic of the main circumference serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510. Is the logic of.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the +5V power supply line to which the control reference voltage +5V of the main control MPU 1310a is applied and the +12V power supply line to which the communication voltage +12V applied via the diode MD50 are applied. In this case, measures are taken when the control reference voltage and the communication voltage drop due to a power failure or an instantaneous power failure. That is, for the main-circulation serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a, the +5V power supply line and the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 using the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h as the first auxiliary power supply, Are electrically connected in parallel to each other, the electrolytic capacitor of the main control filter circuit 1310h, which is the first auxiliary power supply, even if a control reference voltage applied from the +5V power supply line drops due to a power failure or an instantaneous blackout By applying the control reference voltage from the positive terminal of MC2, the state in which the control reference voltage is applied can be maintained, and is composed of the resistors MR50, MR51, MR52, and the transistor MTR50. For the main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset function to function as a communication interface circuit, +12V applied to the +12V power supply line is applied as a communication voltage to the anode terminal of the diode MD50, and the cathode terminal of the diode MD50. And a positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, which is the second auxiliary power source, are electrically connected in parallel, so that a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the voltage is applied from the +12V power line through the diode MD50 for communication. Even if the voltage drops, the communication voltage is applied from the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, which is the second auxiliary power supply, so that the state in which the communication voltage is applied can be maintained. There is. As a result, it is possible to prevent the command from being interrupted while being transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, and to prevent the command from being lost. Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 reliably receives the command being transmitted. can do. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the missed command immediately after the occurrence of a power failure or at the time of a momentary power failure.

Further, a plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main-circulation serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a are used as main-circulation serial data, and are composed of resistors MR50, MR51, MR52, and a transistor MTR50. 470 μF is set as the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h so that the transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 can be completed via the main control output circuit 1310cb without the reset function that functions as a communication interface circuit. 220 μF is set as the electrostatic capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC50. As a result, even if a power failure or an instantaneous power failure occurs during transmission from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, a reset that causes all the commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb to function as interface circuits as main-cycle serial data. Since it is possible to complete the transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 through the functionless main control output circuit 1310cb, the peripheral control board 1510 does not cut off a plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb and also omits them. It can be received without fail.

[10. Discharge control board circuit]
Next, the circuit of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 and the like will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 to 85. 80 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of a payout control unit, FIG. 81 is a circuit diagram showing a payout control input circuit, FIG. 82 is a circuit diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 81, and FIG. 83 is a payout motor drive. 84 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit, FIG. 84 is a circuit diagram showing a CR unit input/output circuit, and FIG. 85 is an input/output diagram showing various input/output signals to/from the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board. Is. First, the payout control filter circuit will be described, and subsequently, the circuit of the payout control unit, various input/output signals with the main control board, and various output signals to the external terminal board will be described.

[10-1. Discharge control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 80, the payout control filter circuit 951a mainly includes a payout control three-terminal filter PIC0. The pay-out control three-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, and has excellent attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded by ferrite. The No. 1 terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is applied with +5V from the power supply substrate 931 shown in FIG. 75, and is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC0 whose one end is grounded (GND). Therefore, +5V from the power supply board 931 is smoothed by the capacitor PC0 by first removing the ripple (AC component superimposed on the voltage). The 2nd terminal of the payout control 3 terminal filter PIC0 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the 3rd terminal of the payout control 3 terminal filter PIC0 outputs +5V with the noise component removed.

The third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is connected to the other end of the capacitor PC1 and the electrolytic capacitor PC2 (capacitance: 180 microfarads (μF) in the present embodiment) whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). By being electrically connected to each other, ripples are further removed from +5 V output from the third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0, and smoothed. This smoothed +5V is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1, the VCC terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and the like, which will be described later. .. In addition, in the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the power from the pachinko island facility is shut off, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor PC2 is subject to a power failure or a momentary power failure. The voltage is applied as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the generation.

The VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC3 whose one end is grounded (GND), and +5V applied to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by the ripple removed by the capacitor PC3. ing. The VSS terminal which is the ground terminal of the payout control MPU 952a is grounded to the ground (GND).

The VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a is electrically connected to the capacitor PC3 and also to the anode terminal of the diode PD0. A cathode terminal of the diode PD0 is electrically connected to a VBB terminal which is a power supply terminal of a RAM (dispensing control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a, and one end of which is grounded to a capacitor PC4. Is electrically connected to the other end of. The VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 and the other end of the capacitor PC4, and is also connected to the plus side of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply substrate 931 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the terminal. That is, +5V, which has been smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 951a, is applied to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and via the diode PD0, the VBB terminal of the payout control internal RAM and the capacitor BC1. It is designed to be applied to the positive terminal of and. As a result, as described above, when +5V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 is no longer supplied to the payout control board 951, the electric charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is paid out VBB. Since the current is prevented from flowing to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a by the diode PD0 and the payout control MPU 952a does not operate, it is connected to the VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM. The memory contents are held by applying the payout VBB. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the backup power supply circuit that supplies the backup power to the payout control built-in RAM is configured by the diode PD0 and the capacitor BC1.

[10-2. Circuit of payout controller]
In addition to the payout control MPU 952a, the payout control input circuit 952b, the payout control output circuit 952c, the payout motor drive circuit 952d, the CR unit input/output circuit 952e, the payout control unit 952 is reset as a peripheral circuit, as shown in FIG. It mainly includes a payout control system reset PIC1 that outputs a signal and a payout control crystal oscillator PX0 (8 megahertz (MHz) in this embodiment) that outputs a clock signal. Here, the payout control system reset will be described first, and then the payout control crystal oscillator, the payout control input circuit, the payout motor drive circuit, the CR unit input/output circuit, and various input/output signals to the payout control MPU will be described.

[10-2-1. Discharge control system reset]
As shown in FIG. 80, +5V in which the noise component is removed and smoothed by the payout control filter circuit 951a is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1.
The payout control system reset PIC1 resets the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control output circuit 952ca with the reset function, and includes a delay circuit. The payout control system reset PIC1 has a delay capacitance terminal electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor PC5 whose one end is grounded (GND), and the delay time of the delay circuit is set by the capacitance of the capacitor PC5. You can do it.
Specifically, the payout control system reset PIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after a delay time has elapsed when +5V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold value (for example, 4.25V).

The output terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the SRT0 terminal which is the reset terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with the reset function. The output terminal is an open collector output type, one end of which is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR1 electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and one end of which is a capacitor grounded to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of the PC 6. The capacitor PC6 plays a role as a low pass filter. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is higher than the threshold value, the output terminal is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR1 and the logic becomes HI. This logic is the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control output with the reset function. The logic becomes LOW when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value while being input to the reset terminal of the circuit 952ca, and this logic is the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control output circuit 952ca with the reset function. Input to each reset terminal. Since the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with the reset function are negative logic inputs, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes lower than the threshold value, the payout control MPU 952a and the reset function are set. The payout control output circuit 952ca is reset. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC7 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND), and +5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. The ground terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[10-2-2. Discharge control crystal oscillator]
As shown in FIG. 80, +5V in which the noise component is removed and smoothed by the payout control filter circuit 951a is input to the VCC terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0. This VCC terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC8 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND), and +5V input to the VCC terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. Further, this smoothed +5V is applied to the OE terminal which is the output enable (Output Enable) terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, in addition to the VCC terminal. The payout control crystal oscillator PX0 outputs a clock signal of 8 MHz from an OUT terminal which is an output terminal when +5 V is applied to its OE terminal.

The OUT terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0 is electrically connected to the MCLK terminal which is the clock terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and the 8 MHz clock signal is input to the payout control MPU 952a. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, is grounded to the grant (GND).

[10-2-3. Dispensing control input circuit]
The payout control input circuit 952b inputs the payout power failure advance notice signal from the door frame opening switch 618, the main body frame opening switch 619 shown in FIG. 70, and the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. The circuit, the handle relay terminal plate 315 shown in FIG. 70, and a circuit to which a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is input via the power supply substrate 931 and a circuit to which an operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input. .. First, the circuit to which the detection signal from the door frame opening switch is input, the circuit to which the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch is input, the circuit to which the payout power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit is input, A circuit to which a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input and a circuit to which an operation signal from the operation switch is input will be described. It should be noted that various detection switches such as the full tank detection sensor 279, the out-of-ball detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, and the rotation detection sensor 840 shown in FIG. 70 have various output terminals because they have open collector output types. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signal from the switch is input is almost the same, here, the circuit to which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input will be described.

[10-2-3(a). Circuit to which the detection signal from the door frame opening switch is input]
The door frame opening switch 618 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)). When the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. The switch is turned off (disconnected) when the body 3 is closed by the body frame 4. The second terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 has a pull-up resistor PR20 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power line. It is electrically connected to the end and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via the resistor PR21. The base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor PR21 and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR22 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR20, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC20 whose one end is grounded (GND). .. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR20 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR23 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line and also the non-inverting buffer. The payout control is performed via the ICPIC 20 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC 20 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC 20A) is shaped and output without being inverted). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the MPU 952a. When the transistor PTR20 is turned on/off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a as a door opening signal.

Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via the resistor PR21, and also the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. And is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 via the resistor PR24. The base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the resistor PR24, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR25 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR21 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal board 784 via a wiring (harness).
When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal board 784 through the wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal board 784 is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, which is not shown. It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. When the transistor PTR21 is turned on/off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal board 784 as an outer end frame door opening information output signal.

Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via the resistor PR21, and is also +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. Is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 via the resistor PR24, and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 via the resistor PR26 by being pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR20. ing. The base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the resistor PR26, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR27 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR22 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via a wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 has a +12V power source. It is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line. When the transistor PTR22 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as a main frame door opening signal.

The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR20 and the capacitor PC20 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 or when the door frame 3 is closed by the main body frame 4, The door frame opening switch 618 is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing a change in voltage from the door frame opening switch 618 due to a flapping phenomenon in which ON/OFF is repeated for a short time.

A circuit formed of the resistors PR21 and PR22 and the transistor PTR20, a circuit formed of the resistors PR24 and PR25 and the transistor PTR21, and a circuit formed of the resistors PR26 and PR27 and the transistor PTR22 are door frame opening switches. A switch circuit that is turned on/off according to a detection signal from 618.

When the door frame 3 is opened from the body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned on, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor PTR20 is turned on. It turns off and the switch circuit also turns off. Accordingly, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR23 and the door frame opening signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. It Further, when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame open switch 618 is turned on, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor The PTR 21 turns off and the switch circuit also turns off.
As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. Is input to the external terminal board 784. Further, when the door frame 3 is opened from the body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and The PTR 22 turns off and the switch circuit also turns off.
As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A door open signal is input to the main control board 1310.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is off, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR20. Then, the transistor PTR20 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the door frame opening signal whose logic applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. Further, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to +5V, so that the transistor PTR21 is turned ON. However, the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the external terminal board 784. Further, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled up to +5V, so that the transistor PTR22 is turned ON. However, the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the main frame door open signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

As described above, when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame open switch 618 is turned on, and the door frame open signal whose logic becomes HI is the input terminal of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. The outer edge frame door opening information output signal which is input to PA0 and whose logic is HI is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door opening signal whose logic is HI is input to the main control board 1310. When the door frame 3 is closed by the main body frame 4, the door frame open switch 618 is turned off, and the door frame open signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. An outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal board 784, and a main frame door opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

[10-2-3(b). Circuit to which the detection signal from the main frame opening switch is input]
The body frame opening switch 619 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)). When the body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 as shown in FIG. The switch is turned off (disconnected) in a state in which 4 is closed by the outer frame 2. The second terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the first terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 has a pull-up resistor PR28 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power line. It is electrically connected to the end and also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 via the resistor PR29. The base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the resistor PR29, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR30 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). Further, the first terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR28, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC21 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). .. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR23 is grounded to the ground (GND), the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 described above, and is also connected to the external terminal board 784 via a wiring (harness). It is electrically connected. When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the external terminal board 784 through a wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal board 784 is electrically connected to the +12V power source line (not shown). It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. When the transistor PTR23 is turned on/off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal board 784 as an outer end frame door opening information output signal.

The first terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR28 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 via the resistor PR29. And is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 via the resistor PR31. The base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the resistor PR31 and also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR32 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR24 is grounded to the ground (GND), the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 described above, and is shown in FIG. 69 via a wiring (harness). It is electrically connected to the main control board 1310. When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via a wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 has a +12V power source. It is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line. When the transistor PTR24 is turned on/off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as a main frame door opening signal.

The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR28 and the capacitor PC21 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 or when the body frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2. It is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing fluctuations in the voltage from the body frame opening switch 619 due to a flapping phenomenon in which contacts constituting the body frame opening switch 619 repeatedly turn on and off for a short time.

A circuit composed of the resistors PR29 and PR30 and the transistor PTR23 and a circuit composed of the resistors PR31 and PR32 and the transistor PTR24 are switch circuits which are turned on/off by a detection signal from the main frame opening switch 619.

When the body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, the body frame opening switch 619 is turned on, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor PTR23 is opened. It turns off, and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness) and the logic becomes HI. Is input to the external terminal board 784. Further, when the body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, the body frame opening switch 619 is turned on, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor The PTR 24 turns off and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A door open signal is input to the main control board 1310.

On the other hand, when the body frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, the body frame opening switch 619 is turned off, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR28. Then, the transistor PTR23 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic becomes LOW is output. It is input to the external terminal board 784. Further, when the body frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, the body frame opening switch 619 is off, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 can be pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR28. Then, the transistor PTR24 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the main frame door open signal whose logic becomes LOW is the main control board. It is input to 1310.

As described above, when the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, the main frame opening switch 619 is turned on, and the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the external terminal board 784. The main frame door opening signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the main control board 1310, while the main frame opening switch 619 is turned off when the main frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, Is output to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door open signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

In the present embodiment, as described above, one or both of the state where the door frame 3 is closed by the main body frame 4 and the state where the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2. In this case, since the main frame door opening signal is input to the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. Although it is not possible to determine whether the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 based on the above, the door frame 3 and/or It is possible for the player to determine that the main frame 4 is open, which is not the case during the normal game, and the outer end frame door open information output signal is sent to the external terminal board 784. Since the outer end frame door opening information output signal is transmitted to the hall computer through the external terminal board 784, the hall computer, based on the outer end frame door opening information output signal, receives the door frame. Although it is not possible to determine whether the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 are opened from the body frame 4, or the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the door frame 3 and/or the body frame 4 are opened. It is possible for the player to judge that a state that does not occur during the normal game has occurred.

Further, in this embodiment, as described above, the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619 are normally closed switches, so that the door frame opening switch 618 is short-circuited and the switch is turned ON (for some reason). Even if the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 even when the main frame opening switch 619 is short-circuited and the switch is turned on (conducts) for some reason, the main frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. As described above, by adopting the normally closed switches for the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619, it is possible to output the main frame door opening signal to the main control board 1310 even at the time of a short circuit, and at the same time, at the outer end. The frame door opening information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

If the door frame opening switch 618 and the body frame opening switch 619 are changed from a normally closed switch to a normally open (normally open (NO)) switch (door frame opening switch 618′ and body frame opening switch 619′). The door frame opening switch 618′ is turned on (conducts) when the door frame 3 is closed from the body frame 4, and is turned off (disconnected) when the door frame 3 is opened to the body frame 4. .. The body frame opening switch 619′ is turned on (conducts) when the body frame 4 is closed from the outer frame 2, and is turned off (disconnected) when the body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2. Then, even if the door frame opening switch 618′ is disconnected and the switch is turned off (disconnected) for some reason, the door frame 3 remains open from the main body frame 4, and for some reason, the main body is opened. Even when the frame opening switch 619′ is disconnected and the switch is turned off (disconnected), the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2. Thus, even if the door frame opening switch 618' and the body frame opening switch 619' are normally open switches, the main frame door opening signal can be output to the main control board 1310 even when the wire is broken. The outer edge frame door opening information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

[10-2-3(c). Circuit to which the power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit is input]
The transmission line for transmitting the payout power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR40 whose one end is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line and also has resistance. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 via PR41. The base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the resistor PR41, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR42 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR40 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR43 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line and also the non-inverting buffer. The payout control is performed via the ICPIC 40 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC 40 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one (PIC 40A) is shaped and output without being inverted). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the MPU 952a. When the transistor PTR40 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a as a payout power failure notice signal.

The circuit including the resistors PR41 and PR42 and the transistor PTR40 is a switch circuit that is turned on/off by a power failure monitoring advance signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310.

As described above, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors for signs of power failure or momentary power failure of two types of voltages of +12V and +24V from the power supply board 931. If the power failure or momentary power failure is detected, the reset function is not provided. A payout power failure notice signal is output to the payout control board 951 as a power failure notice via the main control output circuit 1310cb. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the signs of power failure or instantaneous power failure of +12V and +24V, and as described above, the condition that the voltage of +24V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, and the voltage of +12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf. When both of the conditions of being large are satisfied, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 951 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes LOW. The payout power failure notice signal is input to the payout control board 951 while the +24V voltage is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the +12V voltage is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf. When the condition is satisfied, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 at the subsequent stage is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor PR40 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. Is input to the payout control board 951.

When both the condition that the voltage of +24V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, that is, there is no sign of power failure or momentary power failure of the voltage of +12V and +24V. At this time, the withdrawal power failure notice signal whose logic is LOW is input to the withdrawal control board 951, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor PTR40 is turned off. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor PR43. As a result, the payout power failure notice signal whose logic becomes HI is input from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, that is, the voltage of +12V and/or +24V When there is a sign of power failure or momentary power failure, the withdrawal power failure notice signal whose logic is HI is input to the withdrawal control board 951. Therefore, the withdrawal power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40. The voltage applied to the transistor PTR40 is turned on by pulling up the voltage to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor PR40, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is lowered to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the payout power failure notice signal in which the logic of the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

Thus, when there is a sign of a power failure or a momentary power failure of the voltage of +12V and/or +24V, the withdrawal power failure notice signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the withdrawal control MPU 952a, When there is no sign of a power failure or a momentary power failure of +12V and +24V, the payout power failure notice signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. As described above, when there is a sign of a power failure or a momentary power failure of the voltage of +12 V and/or +24 V, the power failure notice signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a. On the other hand, when there is no sign of power failure or momentary power failure of +12V and +24V, the power failure notice signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The logic of the payout power failure notification signal input to the payout control MPU 952a and the logic of the power failure notification signal input to the main control MPU 1310a according to the power failure notification are the same logic.

[10-2-3(d). Circuit to which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input]
The detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 provided in the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. 1 is sent through the handle relay terminal plate 315 shown in FIG. 1 and the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. Has been entered in. The output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and one end of the payout control board 951 is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. The pull-up resistor PR44a is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR44a and is electrically connected to the first terminal of the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full-tank detection sensor. The three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full-tank detection sensor is a T-type filter circuit and is magnetically shielded with ferrite and has excellent attenuation characteristics.

The second terminal of the three-terminal filter PIC50 for full tank detection sensor is grounded to the ground (GND), and the third terminal of the three-terminal filter PIC50 for full tank detection sensor is connected to the full tank detection sensor 3 through the resistor PR44b. It is electrically connected to the first terminal of the terminal filter PIC50 and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 via the resistor PR45. As a result, the detection signal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 after the noise component is removed in the full terminal detection sensor three-terminal filter PIC50. The base terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the resistor PR45, is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR46 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND), and is connected to the ground (GND) at one end. It is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC40 which is electrically connected. The capacitor PC40 plays a role as a low-pass filter. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR41 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR47 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line and also the non-inverting buffer. The payout control is performed via the ICPIC 40 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC 40 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC 40B) is shaped and output without being inverted). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the MPU 952a. When the transistor PTR41 is turned on/off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a as a full signal.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR45 and PR46 and the transistor PTR41 is a switch circuit that is turned on/off by a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279.

As described above, the full tank detection sensor 279 is for detecting whether or not the game space in which the accommodation space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is stored is full. In the present embodiment, when the game space in which the accommodation space is stored is not full, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is passed through the handle relay terminal plate 315 and the power supply substrate 931. In the payout control board 951, when the pull-up resistor 44a pulls the signal to +12V and the logic becomes HI, the signal is input to the payout control board 951 while the accommodation space is full of game balls , The signal applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931 and the logic becomes LOW. Is input to the payout control board 951.

When the storage space is not full of game balls stored, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is in the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power board 931. The signal pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor 44a and having the logic of HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 described above, so that the transistor PTR41 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the full signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

On the other hand, when the storage space is full of game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is passed through the handle relay terminal plate 315 and the power supply board 931 and the payout control board. At 951, the signal that is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 described above, so that the transistor PTR41 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor PR47, and the full signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a.

In the present embodiment, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is input to the switch circuit including the resistors PR45, PR46, and the transistor PTR41 via the three-terminal filter PIC50 for full tank detection sensor. Although the circuit configuration is used, the detection signals from the various detection switches such as the out-of-ball detection sensor 827 and the payout detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. The circuit configuration is such that it is directly input to each switch circuit without intervention. Since the full tank detection sensor 279 is provided in the foul cover unit 270 attached to the door frame 3, compared with the out-of-ball detection sensor 827, the delivery detection sensor 842, and the like provided in the dispensing device 830 attached to the main body frame 4. , The path for transmitting the detection signal becomes extremely long, and it is extremely susceptible to noise.

The full tank detection sensor 279 is for detecting whether or not the accommodation space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is full of game balls stored, and the payout control MPU 952a is a full tank detection sensor. When it is determined that the storage space is full with the stored game balls based on the detection signal from 279, the drive control of the payout motor 834 is forcibly stopped to stop the payout of the game balls by the payout rotor. It is designed to control. That is, when noise enters the transmission path (transmission line) that transmits the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279, the payout control MPU 952a does not fill the game ball in which the accommodation space is stored, but the payout motor 834 operates. In some cases, the drive control is forcibly stopped to stop the payout of the game balls by the payout rotating body, and the payout motor 834 is driven even though the storage space is full of the game balls. When the game ball is filled up to the upstream side of the above-mentioned prize ball passage by controlling and rotating the payout rotating body to continue the payout of the game ball, the payout rotating body itself cannot rotate and the payout motor 834. There is also a case where the load is abnormally applied to the payout motor 834 and the payout motor 834 is overloaded and abnormally generates heat and fails, or a mechanism or the like that transmits the rotary shaft of the payout motor 834 to the rotational movement of the payout rotating body fails. is there. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to prevent such a problem from occurring, the circuit configuration is such that the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is first removed by the noise component in the full terminal detection sensor three-terminal filter PIC50. Adopted.

[10-2-3(e). Circuit to which operation signal from operation switch is input]
The output terminal 1 and the output terminal 2 of the operation switch 954 are grounded to the ground (GND), and the output terminal 3 and the output terminal 4 of the operation switch 954 are connected to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48. It is pulled up and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR42 at the preceding stage through the resistor PR49. The base terminal of the transistor PTR42 at the preceding stage is electrically connected to the resistor PR49, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR50 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The fourth terminal, which is the output terminal of the operation switch 954, is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR48 and also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC41 whose one end is grounded (GND). ing. The emitter terminal of the previous-stage transistor PTR42 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the previous-stage transistor PTR42 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR51 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. At the same time, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage via the resistor PR52. The base terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the resistor PR52, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR53 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the rear-stage transistor PTR43 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the rear-stage transistor PTR43 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR54 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. At the same time, the non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one (PIC40C) without inverting it). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. The logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is changed by turning on/off the transistors PTR42 and PTR43 in the previous stage and the signal is changed as the RWMCLR signal to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. Is entered in.

Further, the output terminals of the operation switch 954, that is, the third terminal and the fourth terminal are pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR42 of the preceding stage via the resistor PR49. It is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44 via the resistor PR55. The base terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the resistor PR55, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR56 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR44 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via a wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 77 is +12V. It is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR2 electrically connected to the power supply line. When the transistor PTR44 is turned on/off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a as a RAM clear signal.

The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR48 and the capacitor PC41 is a switch signal generating circuit, and when the operation switch 954 is pressed, the contact that constitutes the operation switch 954 repeatedly turns on and off for a short time. It is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing a change in voltage from the operation switch 954 due to.

A circuit including the resistors PR49 and PR50 and the transistor PTR42 is a switch circuit in the previous stage, and a circuit including the resistors PR52 and PR53 and the transistor PTR43 is a switch circuit in the subsequent stage, and the resistors PR55 and PR56 and the transistor PTR44. Is a switch circuit, which is turned on/off by an operation signal from the operation switch 954.

As described above, the operation switch 954 is provided in the RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control board 951 and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. It is designed to be operated when clearing the built-in RAM (main control built-in RAM), and when an error is reported after the power is turned on, it is operated to clear the error. The function to clear the RAM within a predetermined period from the time and the error release after the power is turned on (after the period for performing the function as RAM clear has passed, that is, after the predetermined period has passed since the power was turned on) And has the function. The operation signal from the operation switch 954 becomes a RAM clear signal in the function of performing the RAM clear within a predetermined period after the power is turned on, while it is after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on). In the function for canceling the error in ), it becomes an error canceling signal.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the output terminals of the operation switch 954, that is, the terminals 3 and 4 are pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48, and the operation signal whose logic becomes HI is the transistor in the previous stage. It is input to the base terminal of the PTR42, the transistor PTR42 of the preceding stage is turned on, and the switch circuit of the preceding stage is also turned on. By lowering the voltage to the ground (GND) side, the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is turned off, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor PR54 and the RWMCLR signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. The payout control MPU 952a performs a RAM clear to erase the information stored in the payout control internal RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. It is determined that the instruction is not given, and after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed from the time when the power was turned on), when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI, error cancellation is performed. Judge that it is not an instruction.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the output signal of the operation switch 954, that is, the output terminals No. 3 and No. 4 are pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48, and the operation signal whose logic becomes HI is the transistor PTR44. Is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44 and the transistor PTR44 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the RAM clear signal whose logic becomes LOW is sent to the main control board 1310. Is entered. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has the logic LOW shown in FIG. 77 as described above when the RAM clear signal whose logic is LOW is input within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. When the RAM clear signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 turns off and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the RAM clear signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to +5V by the resistor MR5 and the logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. When the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is HI, the main control MPU 1310a determines that it does not instruct to perform the RAM clear to erase the information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the operation signal whose logic becomes LOW by pulling down the output terminal 3 and 4 of the operation switch 954 to the ground (GND) side is the transistor of the previous stage. It is input to the base terminal of the PTR42, the front-stage transistor PTR42 is turned off, the front-stage switch circuit is also turned off, and is applied to the collector terminal of the front-stage transistor PTR42, which is the voltage applied to the base of the rear-stage transistor PTR43. The voltage that rises is pulled up to the +5 V side by the resistor PR51, so that the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is turned on, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned on.
As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the RWMCLR signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. The payout control MPU 952a performs a RAM clear that erases information stored in the payout control internal RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. It is determined that the instruction is given, and after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on), when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW, error cancellation is performed. Judge that it is an instruction.

Further, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the output terminals of the operation switch 954, that is, the third terminal and the fourth terminal are pulled down to the ground (GND) side by the pull-up resistor PR48 so that the logic becomes LOW. A signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44, the transistor PTR44 turns off, and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor MR2 of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. The clear signal is input to the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, as described above, when the RAM clear signal whose logic is HI is input within a predetermined period after the power is turned on, this logic shown in FIG. 77 is HI. When the RAM clear signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 turns on and the switch circuit also turns on. As a result, the RAM clear signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. When the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the instruction is to perform the RAM clear to erase the information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

[10-2-4. Discharge motor drive circuit]
Next, a payout motor drive circuit 952d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830 shown in FIG. 5 will be described. As shown in FIG. 83, the payout motor drive circuit 952d mainly includes a voltage switching circuit 952da and a drive ICPIC 60. The power source input terminals 1 and 2 of the voltage switching circuit 952da are electrically connected to the +12V power source line and the +5V power source line, respectively, and +12V and +5V are applied, respectively, and the ground terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da is connected to the ground (GND). It is grounded. A voltage switching signal is input to the power supply switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. This voltage switching signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the power supply switching input terminal of the voltage switch circuit 952da. It is supposed to be done. The power supply output terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da is electrically connected to the cathode terminal 3 and terminal 10 of the drive IC PIC60 via the Zener diode PZD60, and is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout motor 834. No. 3 which is the cathode terminal of the drive IC PIC60 via the Zener diode PZD60 with +12V or +5V as the motor drive voltage based on the voltage switching signal input to the voltage switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. It supplies to the terminal and the 10th terminal, respectively, and supplies to the payout motor 834.

The drive ICPIC 60 includes four Darlington power transistors. In this embodiment, the 6th terminal and the 7th terminal, which are the emitter terminals of the drive ICPIC 60, are grounded to the ground (GND), respectively, and are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC 60. The payout motor drive signal is input to the certain terminals 1, 5, 8, and 12 through the resistors PR60 to PR63, respectively. The 2nd terminal, 4th terminal, 9th terminal and 11th terminal which are collector terminals of the drive ICPIC 60 are the 1st terminal, 5th terminal, 8th terminal and 12th terminal which are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC 60 respectively. Correspondingly, when the payout motor drive signal is inputted to the 1st terminal, the 5th terminal, the 8th terminal, and the 12th terminal which are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC60 through the resistors PR60 to PR63, respectively, the excitation signal is generated. A drive pulse is output to each phase (/B phase, B phase, A phase, /A phase) corresponding to the payout motor 834. This payout motor drive signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function through the resistors PR60 to PR63 to the drive ICPIC 60. The signals are output to the first terminal, the fifth terminal, the eighth terminal, and the twelfth terminal, which are base terminals. These drive pulses are performed by switching the excitation currents flowing in the respective phases (/B phase, B phase, A phase, /A phase) of the payout motor 834, and rotate the payout motor 834. In addition, when the drive pulse (excitation signal) of each phase (/B phase, B phase, A phase, /A phase) is cut off by this switching, a back electromotive force is generated. When the back electromotive force exceeds the withstand voltage of the drive ICPIC 60, the drive ICPIC 60 is damaged. Therefore, as a protection, the Zener diode PZD0 described above is electrically connected to the cathode IC of the drive ICPIC 60 in front of the 3rd terminal and 10th terminal. Adopted a circuit configuration that does.

[10-2-5. CR unit input/output circuit]
Next, the CR unit input/output circuit 952e for inputting/outputting various signals to/from the CR unit 6 shown in FIG. 71 will be described. The payout control board 951 is, as described above, from the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, BRDY which is a ball rental request signal and BRQ which is a single payout operation start request signal. , And the predetermined voltage VL (+12V) and the ground LG created from the AC24V supplied from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 71 are supplied, while the payout control board 951 is connected to the game ball lending device connection. Through the terminal board 869, an EXS signal indicating that one payout operation has started or ended, and a PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out a rental ball is possible or impossible. And output. As shown in FIG. 84, the input/output circuit for inputting/outputting these various signals and the like includes photocouplers PIC70 to PIC74 (infrared LED and phototransistor are incorporated.
) Is mainly composed.

The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 via the resistor PR70. The cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6. The resistor PR60 is a limiting resistor for limiting a current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC70. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on, while the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70. At times, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is grounded to the ground (GND), the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 via the resistor PR71, and the transistor is also connected via the resistor PR72. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the PTR 71. The collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the resistor PR71 and is also electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR73 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line.

The base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the resistor PR71 and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR74 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND).
The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR70 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR75 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line and also the non-inverting buffer. 80 through the ICPIC 80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80A) is shaped and output without being inverted). Is electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a shown in FIG. When the transistor PTR70 is turned on/off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 changes, and the signal is input as a CR connection signal 1 to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

On the other hand, the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the resistor PR72, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR76 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR71 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply substrate 931 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply board 931 via a wiring (harness), one end of the power supply board 931 is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, which is a pull-up resistor (not shown). Is electrically connected to the other end of. When the transistor PTR71 is turned on/off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 changes, and the signal is input to the power supply substrate 931 as a CR connection signal.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR71 and PR74 and the transistor PTR70 is a switch circuit that is turned on/off by turning on/off the photocoupler PIC70.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off and the pull-up resistor PR73 pulls it to the +5V side to turn on the transistor PTR70 and the switch circuit also. It will be turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor PTR70 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PTR75, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. It

The circuit composed of the resistors PR72 and PR76 and the transistor PTR71 is also a switch circuit that is turned on/off by turning on/off the photocoupler PIC70.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off and the transistor PTR71 is turned on by being pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR73, and the switch circuit is also turned on. It will be turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the power supply board 931 via the wiring (harness), and the CR connection signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the power supply board 931. It

On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor PTR71 turns off and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor of the power supply board 931 via the wiring (harness), and the CR connection signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the power supply board 931. To be done.

The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied not only to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 but also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 via the resistor PR77. BRDY from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71. The resistor PR77 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC71. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on while the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. There is. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR78 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. At the same time, the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 is provided with eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one (PIC80B) is shaped and output without being inverted). It is electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the. The photocoupler PIC71 is turned ON/OFF to change the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71, and the signal is input as a BRDY signal to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on. The BRDY signal whose logic is LOW when the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. The BRDY signal whose logic is HI is obtained by pulling up the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR78 and inputting it to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. In this way, the logic of the BRDY signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is the same as the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6.

The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied not only to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 and the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 but also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 via the resistor PR79. The BRQ from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72. The resistor PR79 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC72. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on while the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned off. There is.
The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR80 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. At the same time, the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 is provided with eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one (PIC80C) is shaped and output without being inverted). It is electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the. When the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on/off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 changes, and the signal is input as a BRQ signal to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on. The BRQ signal whose logic is LOW when the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC72 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 turns off. , The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR80, and the BRQ signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. Thus, the logic of the BRQ signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is the same as the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6.

The EXS signal that indicates that one payout operation has been started or ended from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a is output to the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function, and the payout control output circuit without the reset function. 952cb is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR81. The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR82 whose one end is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. The resistor PR82 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC73. When +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, the EXS output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function. When the signal logic is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned on, while +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 through the resistor PR82, and the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a. The photo coupler PIC73 is turned off when the logic of the EXS signal that is output from the output terminal of the above through the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function is HI.
The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is inside the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 by the pull-up resistor PR83. At a predetermined voltage VL and is electrically connected to the built-in control device. When the photocoupler PIC73 is turned on/off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 changes, and the signal is input as EXS to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6.

When +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, the EXS output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function. When the signal logic is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned on, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is lowered to the ground (GND) side and the EXS whose logic is LOW is the CR unit. 6 to the built-in control device. On the other hand, when +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 through the resistor PR82, it is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a through the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function. When the logic of the EXS signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned off. Therefore, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled up to the predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR83 and the logic becomes HI. EXS is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. In this way, the logic of the EXS output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is the same as the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function. It has the same logic.

The PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the ball from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a is possible or impossible is a cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR84. Has been entered in. The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR85 whose one end is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. The resistor PR85 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC74. When +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, PRDY output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function. When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned on, while +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 through the resistor PR85, and the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a. The photocoupler PIC74 is turned off when the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of No. 2 through the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function is HI. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is inside the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 by the pull-up resistor PR86. At a predetermined voltage VL and is electrically connected to the built-in control device. When the photocoupler PIC74 is turned on/off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 changes, and the signal is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6 as PRDY.

When +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, PRDY output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function. When the signal logic is LOW, since the photocoupler PIC74 is turned on, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is lowered to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW. 6 to the built-in control device. On the other hand, when +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 through the resistor PR85, the output is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a through the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function. When the logic of the PRDY signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned off. Therefore, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled up to the predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR86 and the logic becomes HI. PRDY is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. In this way, the logic of PRDY output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is the same as the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function. It has the same logic.

[10-2-6. Various input/output signals to payout control MPU]
Next, various input/output signals input/output from the input/output terminals of various input/output ports of the payout control MPU 952a will be described.

The RXD terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the payout control MPU 952a, receives the serial data from the main control board 1310 as a main pay serial data reception signal via the payout control input circuit 952b, as shown in FIG. To be done. On the other hand, from the TXD terminal which is the serial data output terminal of the serial output port of the payout control MPU 952a, the serial data to be sent to the main control board 1310 is sent to the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function as the payer serial data transmission signal. The payout control output circuit 952cb having no reset function transmits a payer serial data transmission signal to the main control board 1310.

To each input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a, the above-mentioned RWMCLR signal, payout blackout notice signal, door open signal, full signal, various signals from the CR unit 6 (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, CR connection) Signal 1 etc.), for example, the main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310 for notifying the completion of the normal reception of the payment main serial data reception signal described above is sent via the payout control input circuit 952b. For example, the detection signals from the out-of-ball detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, the rotation detection sensor 840, etc. shown in FIG. 70 are input via the payout control input circuit 952b.

On the other hand, from each output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a, the above-mentioned EXS signal and PRDY signal are output to the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function to output the EXS signal from the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function. The PRDY signal is output to the CR unit input/output circuit 952e, or the above-described voltage switching signal is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function to output the voltage switching signal from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the voltage switching circuit 952da. Or output a payout motor drive signal to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function and output a payout motor drive signal from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function to the payout motor 834 via the payout motor drive circuit 952d. In addition to the above, for example, the payer ACK signal for notifying the normal reception of the above-described main pay serial data reception signal is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function and the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function is used. The ACK signal is output to the main control board 1310, or the drive signal of the error LED indicator 860b shown in FIG. 70 is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function to output the drive signal from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function. It outputs to the error LED indicator 860b.

[10-3. Various input/output signals to/from the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board]
Next, various input/output signals between the payout control board 951 and the main control board 1310 and various output signals from the payout control board 951 to the external terminal board 784 will be described with reference to FIG. 85.

[10-3-1. Various input/output signals with main control board]
The payout control board 951 exchanges various input/output signals with the main control board 1310. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 85(a), the payout control board 951 has the above-mentioned payer serial data transmission signal, payer ACK signal, operation signal (RAM clear signal), main frame door opening signal, etc. Is output to the main control board 1310. These output signals are pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310.

On the other hand, the payout control board 951 has, in addition to the main pay serial data reception signal, the main pay ACK signal, and the operation signal (RAM clear signal), the main prize ball number information output signal, the 15 round jackpot information output signal, And 2 round big hit information output signal such as big hit information output signal, information output signal during probability fluctuation, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time saving medium information output signal, starting mouth winning information output signal, etc. A game information signal, a power failure notice signal, and the like regarding the information are input from the main control board 1310. These input signals are pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 of the payout control board 951.

[10-3-2. Various output signals to external terminal board]
The payout control board 951 outputs various signals to the external terminal board 784. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 85(b), in addition to the above-mentioned outer end frame door opening information output signal, the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 reaches 10 balls. The award ball number information output signal output for each, the main award ball number information output signal from the main control board 1310 through the payout control board 951, the big hit information of the 15 round big hit information output signal and the 2 round big hit information output signal Outputting the game information signal such as output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time saving medium information output signal, and starting mouth winning information output signal to the external terminal board 784. To do. These output signals are pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784. In other words, the external terminal board 784 outputs two signals, that is, an outer end frame door opening information output signal from the payout control board 951 side and an award ball number information output signal, and the main award ball number from the main control board 1310 side. Information output signal, 15 round big hit information output signal, 2 round big hit information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time saving medium information output signal, and starting mouth winning information Eight signals, which are output signals, are output (passed) through the payout control board 951.

The signal output from the external terminal board 784 is transmitted to a hall computer installed in a game hall (hole) (not shown), and the hall computer monitors the game of the player. When the 15-round jackpot information output signal or the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer as one jackpot information output signal, the hall computer outputs the number of jackpots in which the number of rounds is two (2 round jackpot). The number of jackpots of the pachinko machine 1 is the sum of the number of jackpots of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of jackpots in which the round reaches 15 times (the number of jackpots of 15 rounds). For this reason, the hall computer cannot grasp the number of occurrences of two rounds of big hits and the number of occurrences of 15 land big hits from the total number of big hits, and therefore the number of big hits actually generated by the pachinko machine 1 is large. It is not possible to know whether it is a 2-round jackpot or a 15-round jackpot. Further, a data counter (not shown) is arranged above the pachinko machine 1, and the player selects whether or not to play the game by referring to the number of occurrences of the jackpot gaming state displayed on the data counter. Some do.

However, the number of occurrences of the big hit game state displayed on the data counter may be biased to the number of occurrences of the two rounds of big hits, so even if the player starts the game, only two rounds of big hits occur. In some cases, a 15-round jackpot does not occur easily. As described above, although the number of times of occurrence of the big hit game state displayed on the data counter can give the player a sense of expectation, it may arouse the player more than necessary.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the 15-round big hit information output signal and the 2-round big hit information output signal are separately output to the hall computer as the big hit information output signal, so that the hall computer generates the number of occurrences of the 2-round big hit. It is possible to accurately grasp the number of 15 rounds of big hits. Therefore, the hall computer can know whether the number of big hits actually generated in the pachinko machine 1 is the big hit of 2 rounds or the big hit of 15 rounds, and the data counter has 15 rounds of big hits. The number of jackpots and the number of jackpots in the second round can be displayed separately or only the number of jackpots in the 15th round can be displayed as the number of jackpots in the gaming state. Absent.

In the present embodiment, the 2-round big hit information output signal is in a state of being output to the hall computer during the period until the 2-round big hit occurs and is ended, and the 15-round big hit information output signal is also the 15-round big hit. It is in the state of being output to the hall computer during the period from the occurrence to the end. In addition to the method of outputting the 2-round jackpot information output signal and the 15-round jackpot information output signal to the hall computer as in the present embodiment, for example, when the 2-round jackpot is generated, the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output for a predetermined period. When the 15 round big hit information is output to the hall computer, the 15 round big hit information output signal is output to the hall computer only for a predetermined period. Such a 2 round big hit information output signal and 15 round big hit information A method of outputting the output signal to the hall computer for the same predetermined period can also be mentioned.

[11. Array of output terminals on external terminal board]
Next, the arrangement of the output terminals of the external terminal board 784 for outputting various signals to the hall computer installed in the game hall (hall) will be described with reference to FIG. 86. The external terminal board 784 is attached to the rear surface of the prize ball base attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and the rear side thereof is covered with the external terminal board cover 786. FIG. 86 is a diagram showing the arrangement of the output terminals of the external terminal board.

As described above, the external terminal board 784 includes the outer end frame door opening information output signal, the award ball number information output signal, the main award ball number information output signal, the 15 round jackpot information output signal and the 2 round jackpot information output signal. When the jackpot information output signal, the probability variation information output signal, the special symbol display information output signal, the normal symbol display information output signal, the time saving medium information output signal, and the starting mouth winning information output signal are input from the payout control board 951. It is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 1.

These various signals will be briefly described. The outer edge frame door opening information output signal does not occur during the normal game by the player that the door frame 3 and/or the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1 is open. The prize ball number information output signal is a signal indicating that the state has occurred, and the prize ball number information output signal is output every time the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 reaches 10 balls. The main prize ball number information output signal, which is a signal to that effect, includes various winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the general winning openings 2001 and 2011, and the large winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. It is a signal that notifies the player that the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball based on the game balls that entered into the ball reaches 10 balls. The 15 round jackpot information output signal indicates that 15 round jackpots have occurred. 2 round big hit information output signal is a signal that indicates that a 2 round big hit has occurred, and a probability fluctuation information output signal has probability fluctuation It is a signal that indicates that it is in a state, the special symbol display information output signal is a special symbol in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The variable display is a signal indicating that it is in a stopped (stopped) state, and the normal symbol display information output signal ends the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 10 ( (Stopped) is a signal that conveys that it is in a state, the time saving medium information output signal is a signal that conveys that a time saving state has occurred, the starting mouth winning information output signal is the first start shown in FIG. Each time a game ball enters the mouth 2002 or the second starting port 2004, it is a signal to that effect.

As shown in FIG. 86, output terminals PT1 to PT10 are horizontally arranged in a line on the external terminal board 784. The output terminal PT1 is provided in white and outputs the prize ball number information output signal. As described above, the prize ball number information output signal is a signal that conveys that fact every time the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 5 reaches 10. In the embodiment, the output terminal PT1 outputs for 0.105 seconds. When the prize ball number information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer causes the payout motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 to generate 10 prize balls each time the prize ball number information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp that the game balls of the balls have been paid out as prize balls, and it is possible to count the number of balls of the paid game balls to grasp the total number of the game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT2 is provided in green and outputs an outer end frame door opening information output signal. As described above, the outer edge frame door opening information output signal is in a state where the door frame 3 and/or the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1 is not opened during the normal game by the player. In this embodiment, the signal is transmitted to the output terminal PT2 while the door frame 3 and/or the main body frame 4 is open. When the outer edge frame door open information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer displays the door frame 3 and the pachinko machine 1 while the outer edge frame door open information output signal is being input. It is possible to understand that the body frame 4 is open.

The output terminal PT3 is provided in gray to output a special symbol display information output signal. As described above, the special symbol display information output signal ends the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 10 (stops). In the present embodiment, it is a signal that indicates the state, and in the present embodiment, the variable display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 ends (stops). Sometimes it is output for 0.128 seconds. When the special symbol display information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer, when the special symbol display information output signal is input, the first special symbol of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to grasp that the variable display of the special symbol has ended (stopped) on the display device 1403 or the second special symbol display device 1405, and counting the number of times, the first special of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to grasp the total number of times the special symbols are variably displayed on the symbol display device 1403 or the second special symbol display device 1405.

The output terminal PT4 is colored yellow and outputs a starting opening winning information output signal.
As described above, the starting-port winning information output signal is a signal that notifies each time a game ball enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 shown in FIG. 8, and in the present embodiment. Each time a game ball enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 from the output terminal PT4, it is output for 0.128 seconds. When the start-port winning information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer inputs the start-port winning information output signal each time the first start port 2002 or the second opening of the pachinko machine 1 is started. It is possible to know that a game ball has entered the starting opening 2004, and the number of times the starting opening winning information output signal is input is counted to the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to grasp the total number of game balls entered.

The output terminal PT5 is provided in black and outputs a 15 round jackpot information output signal. As described above, the 15-round jackpot information output signal is a signal for notifying that the 15-round jackpot is being generated. In the present embodiment, while the 15-round jackpot is being generated from the output terminal PT5, It is supposed to be output. When the 15-round jackpot information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer generates a 15-round jackpot on the pachinko machine 1 while the 15-round jackpot information output signal is input. In addition to being able to grasp the state, the number of times the 15 round jackpot information output signal is input can be counted to grasp the total number of 15 round jackpots that have occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT6 is provided in pink and outputs a 2-round big hit information output signal. As described above, the 2-round jackpot information output signal is a signal indicating that the 2-round jackpot has occurred, and in the present embodiment, while the 2-round jackpot is being generated from the output terminal PT6, It is supposed to be output. When the 2-round jackpot information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer generates a 2-round jackpot on the pachinko machine 1 while the 2-round jackpot information output signal is input. It is possible to know that the state is in addition to counting the number of times the two-round jackpot information output signal is input, and thus to know the total number of two-round jackpots that have occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT7 is a terminal which is colored blue and outputs a normal symbol display information output signal. As described above, the normal symbol display information output signal is a signal that indicates that the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the output terminal PT7, 0.128 seconds is output at the end (stop) of the variable display of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 1402 of the normal display unit 1400. When the normal symbol display information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer, when the normal symbol display information output signal is input, the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to grasp that the variable display of the normal symbol has ended (stopped) in 1402, and the number of times is counted to display the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1 in a variable display. You can grasp the number of times.

The output terminal PT8 is provided in red and outputs the time saving medium information output signal. As described above, the short-time information output signal is a signal that conveys the fact that the short-time state is occurring, and in the present embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT8 while the time-shortening state is occurring. ing. When the time saving/medium time information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer recognizes that the pachinko machine 1 is in the time saving state when the time saving/medium time information output signal is input. At the same time, it is possible to grasp the total number of times that the pachinko machine 1 is in the time saving state by counting the number of times the time saving information output signal is input.

The output terminal PT9 is provided in orange and outputs the information output signal during probability variation.
As described above, the probability fluctuation information output signal is a signal for notifying that the probability fluctuation is occurring, and in the present embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT9 while the probability fluctuation is occurring. It has become so. When the probability fluctuation information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives the probability fluctuation information output signal, and the probability change occurs in the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to grasp that there is, and it is possible to grasp the total number of times that the probability variation has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 by counting the number of times the information output signal during the probability variation has been input.

The output terminal PT10 is light blue and outputs a main prize ball number information output signal. As described above, the main prize ball number information output signal is input to various winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the general winning openings 2001 and 2011, the special winning opening 2005, etc., as shown in FIG. It is a signal that notifies that the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball based on the game ball that has been balled reaches 10 balls. In this embodiment, the signal is output from the output terminal PT10 for 0.128 seconds. It has become so. When the main prize ball number information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer causes the pachinko machine 1 to receive 10 balls as a prize ball each time the main prize ball number information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp that the game balls are to be paid out as prize balls, and also to count the number of game balls to be paid out and to grasp the total number of game balls to be paid out by the pachinko machine 1. can do.
In addition, for example, game balls that are to be paid out as prize balls based on the game balls that have entered the various winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the general winning openings 2001 and 2011, and the special winning opening 2005. When the number of spheres of No. reaches 20 or more and the main award sphere number information output signal is output plural times, the main award sphere number information output signal is 0.256 (=0.128 seconds×2 times) seconds, As in the case of one continuous signal, the signal is output at intervals of 0.128 seconds.

Among the output terminals PT1 to PT10 of the external terminal board 784, the output terminals PT1 and PT2 output various signals output on the payout control board 951 side, whereas the output terminals PT3 to PT10 are the main control board. It is arranged such that various signals output on the 1310 side are output via (passing through) the payout control board 951. The output terminals PT1 to PT10 are respectively colored, and by electrically connecting wirings having connectors colored in the same colors to the output terminals PT1 to PT10 respectively, other wirings are erroneously electrically connected. It is possible to prevent the physical connection. Then, various signals output on the payout control board 951 side are transmitted to the hall computer so that various signals output on the payout control board 951 side and various signals output on the main control board 1310 side are not mixed. Output terminals PT1 and PT2 are arranged in a line on the left side of the external terminal board 784, and output terminals PT3 to PT10 for transmitting various signals output on the main control board 1310 side to the hall computer are connected to the external terminal board 784. By arranging them in a line from the left side of the center toward the right side, in this respect as well, wiring for transmitting various signals output on the payout control board 951 side to the hall computer and various output on the main control board 1310 side. It is possible to prevent accidental electrical connection between the wiring for transmitting a signal to the hall computer and the wiring.

In the present embodiment, the award ball number information output signal output on the payout control board 951 side and the main award ball number information output signal output on the main control board 1310 side are respectively holes from the external terminal board 784. It is configured to communicate to a computer. This is, for example, the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 when the game balls from the pachinko island facility side are not supplied to the prize ball tank 720 shown in FIG. 1 due to some trouble in the pachinko island facility. When a 15-round big hit happens to the pachinko machine 1 at the time when the remaining amount becomes low, the number of game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 for paying out the game balls as prize balls is insufficient, and thus the payout is performed. (In addition, if, for example, a ball clogging or a ball scatter occurs in the payout device 830, the game ball cannot be paid out unless this can be eliminated). Then, the prize ball number information output signal output on the payout control board 951 side, as described above, the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 5 reaches 10 balls. Since it is a signal that conveys that fact, the payout control board 951 can output a prize ball number information output signal and transmit it to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 when the game balls cannot be paid out. become unable. When the game balls are not paid out, the player calls a clerk in the hall. The clerk in the hall, for example, checks the hose-shaped supply nozzle for supplying game balls from the pachinko island facility to the prize ball tank 720 and specifies the position of the ball clogging (in addition, for example, in the payout device 830. Then, the position of the ball clogging or the position of the ball clogging is specified) and the problem is solved, whereby the game ball is returned to the payout state.

However, even when the clerk in the hall is working, the game by the main control board 1310 is in progress, so after the 15 rounds of big hits, the game balls are paid out by the clerk in the hall. When the state returns to the state in which the payout control board 951 pays out the unpaid gaming balls one after another, the payout control board 951 is generated despite the fact that the 15 round big hit ends and the 15 round big hit does not occur. Each time the payout motor 834 actually pays out the prize balls as the number of game balls reaches 10 balls, it outputs a prize ball number information output signal for notifying it and transmitting it to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784. It will be. Then, despite the fact that the 15-round jackpot has not occurred, an extremely large number of game balls will be paid out, so the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 The problem arises that the hall computer cannot accurately grasp the relationship between and.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, regardless of whether or not the payout motor 834 is drive-controlled by the payout control board 951 and the payout balls are actually paid out, that is, it is different from the prize ball number information output signal output from the payout control board 951. As a signal of, the main control board 1310 is a game ball that has entered various winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the general winning openings 2001 and 2011, and the special winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. Whenever the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball reaches 10, the main prize ball number information output signal is output as a signal to that effect and the payout control board 951 and the external terminal board 784 are output. We adopted a system that communicates to the hall computer via the system. As a result, even if the above-mentioned trouble (a trouble such as a ball clogging in the supply nozzle or the like, a ball clogging in the dispensing device 830, a ball clogging, etc.) occurs, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the payout in this gaming state. The relationship between the number of game balls to be put out and the number of balls can be accurately transmitted to the hall computer. Therefore, the hall computer can accurately grasp the relationship between the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of gaming balls to be paid out in the gaming state.

[12. Production display drive circuit]
Next, the circuit of the effect display drive substrate 4450 that draws the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 will be described with reference to FIG. 87. As described above, the effect display drive board 4450 is arranged near the lower side of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 and is housed in the dish unit 320. It is mainly configured by a liquid crystal module circuit 450V that draws a display area of the door frame side effect display device 460. FIG. 87 is a circuit diagram showing a liquid crystal module circuit for drawing a display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device.

[12-1. LCD module circuit]
As shown in FIG. 87, the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the effect display drive substrate 4450 is mainly configured by a door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0.

The liquid crystal module circuit 450V is a serial signal (serial data) by a differential method called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" from THine Electronics Co., Ltd. from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. Are transmitted as a plus signal and a minus signal, they are input to the common mode choke coil SDL0 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, respectively, and the common mode choke coil SDL0 produces a plus signal. The noise can be separated from the minus signal. The noise-separated plus signal and minus signal are input to the RXIN+ terminal and RXIN- terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, respectively. A resistor SDR0 is electrically connected between the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN− terminal. The resistor SDR0 is a terminating resistor (terminator), which prevents the plus signal and the minus signal from being reflected at the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively, and prevents disturbance of the serial signal.

The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 has three video signals of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, based on serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. It is restored to three synchronizing signals of a horizontal synchronizing signal, a vertical synchronizing signal, and a clock signal (that is, a parallel signal before being serialized). As described above, the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal are 8 bits for the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with the built-in sound source, respectively. Since the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d each have 6 bits, that is, a total of 18 bits, they are the upper 6 bits of each video signal.

The liquid crystal module circuit 450V is the serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 as described above, in addition to the signal from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d of the peripheral control board 1510. Two LOCKN signal output request data, which are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e of the peripheral control board 1510, are also input. As described above, the forced switching circuit 1512f of the peripheral control board 1510 transmits the two signals when the two signals that are differentiated into the plus signal and the minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e are input. On the other hand, when the two signals that are differentiated into the plus signal and the minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e are not input, the signals output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d are transmitted. The circuit is configured to be connected as described above. As a result, when two signals that are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input to the differential circuit 1512e, the two signals are connected because the circuits are connected so as to transmit the two signals. From the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, while the difference is transmitted. When two signals that are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input in the activating circuit 1512e, the circuit is connected so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. A signal output from the frame-side production transmitter IC 1512d is stored in the peripheral control board 1510 into the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 and the production display drive board 4450. Is transmitted to the liquid crystal module circuit 450V.

The forced switching circuit 1512f is a signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, that is, a door frame, when two signals that are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e are not input. Serial signal (serial data) by the differential method "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of THine Electronics Co., Ltd. from the side effect transmitter IC 1512d is used as a plus signal and a minus signal from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board. 868, and through the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, is input to the common mode choke coil SDL0, and is input to the RXIN+ terminal and RXIN− terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, respectively, while the differential circuit 1512e. When two signals that are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input from the peripheral control board 1510 through the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, the two signals are It is input to the common mode choke coil SDL0, and then input to the RXIN+ terminal and RXIN- terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that it is a LOCKN signal output request when two signals, which are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e, are input. A LOCKN signal is output from a LOCKN terminal described later to the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. The LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510.

The LOCKN signal output request data which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 is, as described above, the start screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. During the period displayed on the display device 1600 or during the demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 in the customer waiting state, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and effect display In order to confirm whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the door frame side effect display device 460 of the door frame side effect display device 460 is displayed. It is transmitted as an operation confirmation request. The LOCKN signal output request data in this embodiment is differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e, but is a signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, that is, the above-mentioned Zine Electronics stock. The data format is completely different from that of a differential serial signal (serial data) called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of the company. Therefore, when the LOCKN signal output request data is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, it is determined that the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is not a signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d, which is abnormal. As data, a LOCKN signal will be output from the LOCKN terminal described later. In other words, in the present embodiment, the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal, which will be described later, by using the function of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that outputs the LOCKN signal when it is determined that the received data is abnormal data. To forcefully output the LOCKN signal output request data having a structure different in data format from the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. By outputting, it is possible to confirm whether or not a device called the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is operating normally. This makes it possible to confirm whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

The VDD terminal, the VDDO terminal, the LVDSVDD terminal, the PLLVDD terminal, and the PDWN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 are respectively supplied with +3.3V created by the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x shown in FIG. The GND terminal, the GNDO terminal, the LVDS GND application paper, the PLLGND terminal, the EDGE terminal, the OE terminal, the MODE0, and the MODE1 terminals of the frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 are grounded.

The VDD terminal is a power supply terminal for the digital circuit, the capacitor SDC0 is electrically connected between the GND terminal and the GND terminal which is the ground for the digital circuit, and the +3.3 V power supply supplied to the VDD terminal. Removing high frequency noise from the line.

The VDDO terminal is a power supply terminal for TTL (Transistor-Transistor Logic) output, and the capacitor SDC1 is electrically connected between the GNDO terminal serving as the ground for the TTL output and the VDDO terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the +3.3V power line.

The LVDSVDD terminal is a power supply terminal for LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) input, and a capacitor SDC2 is electrically connected between the LVDSDS terminal and the LVDSGND terminal which is the ground for the LVDS input, and is supplied to the LVDSVDD terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the +3.3V power line.

The PLLVDD terminal is a power supply terminal for a PLL (Phase Locked Loop) circuit, and a capacitor SDC3 is electrically connected between the terminal and a PLLGND terminal that serves as a ground for the PLL circuit, and is supplied to the PLLVDD terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the +3.3V power line.

The PDWN terminal informs that the logic becomes HI when +3.3V is supplied (applied) and the normal operation is performed, while the supply of +3.3 is stopped and the logic becomes LOW to power down. It is a terminal to transmit. The PDWN terminal is supplied with +3.3V via the resistor SDR1 and is electrically connected to the other end of the varistor SDZ0 whose one end is grounded. The varistor SDZ0 suppresses noise and overvoltage of the +3.3V electric line supplied via the resistor SDR1.

The EDGE terminal transmits the various signals output from various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, and D0 terminal to D17 terminal) based on the clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal, which will be described later, at the rising edge. This is a terminal for designating either (when the logic transitions from LOW to HI) or when it is a falling edge (when the logic transitions from HI to LOW). As described above, the falling edge is specified by grounding the EDGE terminal to the ground. Incidentally, if the EDGE terminal is connected to +3.3V, the rising edge can be designated.

The OE terminal is for instructing whether or not to permit output of various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, D0 terminal to D17 terminal, and CLKOUT terminal) described later, and in the present embodiment, As described above, by grounding the OE terminal to the ground, the output is always possible. By the way, if the OE terminal is connected to +3.3V, it becomes impossible to output.

The MODE0 terminal and the MODE1 terminal are terminals for selecting an operation mode, and the operation mode can be selected by grounding them to the ground. The operation mode includes a normal mode and a shake hand mode. In the normal mode, three video signals (18-bit video signal) of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal based on serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. In the normal operation mode in which the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 restores to a parallel signal composed of three synchronization signals (3-bit synchronization signal) including a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. is there. In the shake hand mode, the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 included in the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is performed. In this mode, a LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirmation (recovery). The shake hand mode is automatically switched.

For example, three video signals (18-bit video signal) of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal based on serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively, For some reason, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 restores to a parallel signal composed of three synchronization signals (3-bit synchronization signal) including a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. When it is difficult to draw on the door frame side effect display device 460 with such data, the normal mode is automatically switched to the shake hand mode and the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the resistor SDR2 that is a damping resistance, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510 is input. It is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the above. The peripheral control MPU 1511a, when a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the input LOCKN signal, transmits a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d in order to notify the fact to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Is output. When this connection confirmation signal is input to the INIT terminal, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is connected between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. A predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for recovering from the peripheral control board 1510 through the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 to the effect display drive board 4450 for the door frame side effect Transmit to receiver ICSDIC0. By receiving such a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver can be easily restored. The predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. In addition, the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 are connected to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral doors. You may electrically connect directly via the relay terminal board 882.

As described above, the LOCKN terminal is connected between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 included in the effect display drive board 4450, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. This is a terminal for outputting a request to transmit a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (restoring) the connection between the terminals. The LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the resistor SDR2 that is the damping resistance of the effect display drive board 4450, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral control board 1510. It is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the control board 1510.

The SYNC0 terminal to the SYNC2 terminal output three synchronizing signals of a horizontal synchronizing signal, a vertical synchronizing signal, and a clock signal restored based on the serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN− terminal, respectively. It is a terminal. In the present embodiment, since the restored three synchronizing signals of the horizontal synchronizing signal, the vertical synchronizing signal, and the clock signal are not used, the SYNC0 terminal to the SYNC2 terminal are unconnected terminals.

The DE terminal is a terminal that outputs a clock signal output from the CLKOUT terminal and a DE signal that informs that the data output from the data output terminals D0 to D17, which will be described later, is valid or invalid. The DE signal output from the DE terminal is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the resistance SDR3 which is a damping resistance.

The CLKOUT terminal is a terminal for outputting a clock signal DCLK generated by a PLL circuit incorporated in the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. The clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the resistor SDR4 which is a damping resistor.

The D0 terminal to the D17 terminal have three video signals (18 It is a data output terminal for outputting a bit video signal). Blue video signals B0 to B5 (6 bits) are output in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK from 6-bit data output terminals D0 to D5, and each signal line of the blue video signals B0 to B5 is a damping resistor. It is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistance SDRA0. Green video signals G0 to G5 (6 bits) are output from the 6-bit data output terminals D6 to D11 in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line of the green video signals G0 to G5 is a damping resistor. It is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistance SDRA1. Red video signals R0 to R5 (6 bits) are output from the 6-bit data output terminals D12 to D17 in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line of the red video signals R0 to R5 is a damping resistor. It is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistance SDRA2.

The peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, the effect display drive board 4450, and the door frame side effect display device 460 are electrically connected to each other, and the grounds are the same. Has become.

[Mounting mode of each electronic component included in the first control unit MCG and the second control unit SCG]
By the way, it is generally known that surface mounting an electronic component is advantageous in that the hardware circuit can be favorably downsized by integration. However, in the case of integrated circuit parts (parts that are encapsulated in a relatively large package by integrating multiple types of single-function elements (resistive elements, diode elements, or capacitor elements) among electronic parts), By nature, the package is naturally larger than the discrete components (components in which one single-function element is enclosed in a relatively small package), which creates a relatively large space on the back side of the package. In addition, such a space on the back side of the package becomes a portion (a portion where an electronic component (illegal component) is apt to be illegally mounted) that is difficult to visually confirm in the surface mounting state. For this reason, in the field of gaming machines, electronic components have been inserted and mounted on a base plate (so-called base substrate or the like) instead of surface mounting for many years.

That is, the electronic components to be inserted and mounted tend to create a relatively large gap between the package and the base plate. Therefore, by inserting and mounting the electronic component, even in the mounted state, it is possible to maintain the space on the back side of the package as a place that can be easily visually confirmed, and thereby, an illegal component can be mounted. It is controlled appropriately.

However, in recent years, in the field of gaming machines, the space provided for production has become even larger. There is an increasing demand for planning.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, of the first control unit MCG and the second control unit SCG shown in FIG. 69, the second control unit that only performs the effect control regarding the game. Considering that the SCG is not directly related to the privilege obtained by the player and is unlikely to be an illegal target, first, the second control unit SCG is configured by surface mounting.

That is, as described above, the second control unit SCG according to this embodiment is configured to include the peripheral control board 1510 as shown in FIG. Then, the second control unit SCG uses various integrated circuit components and various discrete components mounted on the base substrate of the peripheral control substrate 1510, thereby performing the process of advancing the production according to the result of the process of advancing the game. Is feasible.

Here, examples of various integrated circuit components mounted on the base board of the peripheral control board 1510 include a peripheral control MPU 1511a and a peripheral control ROM 1511b shown in FIG. Further, as various discrete components mounted on the base substrate of the peripheral control substrate 1510, there are, for example, resistors AR10 and AR11 shown in FIG. 79, a diode AD10, an electrolytic capacitor AC10, and the like.

In this regard, in the second control unit SCG according to this embodiment, the lead portions of various electronic components are placed on the surface of the base plate (here, the base substrate of the peripheral control substrate 1510). Only the surface mounting area to be mounted in a form is formed. That is, in this case, the surface mount type components (SMD) are also used as the above-mentioned various electronic components included in the peripheral control board 1510. However, since these electronic components are not directly related to the benefits obtained by the player and are unlikely to be targeted for fraud, the security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components is not affected. The hardware circuit mounted on the pachinko machine 1 can be downsized.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 69, the first control unit MCG according to this embodiment includes the main control board 1310, the payout control board 951, and the power supply board 931. Then, the first control unit MCG uses the various integrated circuit components and various discrete components mounted on the base substrates of these substrates 1310, 951, 931 to control the power supply for control (for example, +5V). It is possible to execute a generation process and a process related to a game including payout of prize balls. However, such a process on the side of the first control unit MCG is directly connected to the bonus grant of the player, so that the first control unit MCG is likely to be an illegal target. Therefore, although the miniaturization of the hardware circuit is required, if the first control unit MCG is simply integrated by surface mounting, the security performance against illegal mounting of electronic components will be significantly reduced, and the game will be enjoyed. The actual situation is that the decline in the price is inevitable.

However, on the other hand, even such a first control unit MCG is mounted on its base plate (the base substrate of the main control substrate 1310, the base substrate of the payout control substrate 951, the base substrate of the power supply substrate 931). Discrete parts among various electronic parts have a smaller package than integrated circuit parts, and even if the electronic parts are illegally mounted on the back side, it is possible to easily confirm them visually. It can be said that the component has relatively high security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components.

That is, the inventor has found that among electronic components mounted on the first control unit MCG, a component having high security performance against fraud (discrete component) and a component having low security performance against fraud (integrated circuit component) are mixed. If attention is paid to the fact that the hardware circuit is further integrated with only components having high security performance against fraud (discrete components), even on the side of the first control unit MCG that is easily subject to fraud, It was found that it is possible to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while maintaining the security performance against illegal mounting of electronic components.

FIG. 117 is a diagram schematically showing how the first control unit MCG is integrated only with components (discrete components) having high security performance against fraud. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 117, it is possible to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while maintaining the security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components even on the side of the first control unit MCG that is likely to be targeted for fraud. Will be described.

As shown in FIG. 117, the first control unit MCG according to this embodiment includes a base plate BB and various electronic components D mounted on the base plate BB. .. Note that FIG. 117 is only a schematic diagram for explaining the principle of the characteristic technique according to the present application. For example, the base plate BB is actually the base substrate of the main control substrate 1310 and the payout control substrate. The base substrate of 951 and the base substrate of the power supply substrate 931 are configured to have three base substrates. An example in which the characteristic technique according to the present application is applied to such an embodiment will be described later. For the sake of convenience, first, for convenience of description, an example in which they are configured by one base substrate will be described.

Here, the base plate BB includes
An insertion mounting area TH in which the lead portion provided in the electronic component is mounted by being inserted into the base plate BB, and the integration mounting performance is poor but the fraud suppression performance is excellent;
A surface mounting area SM, which is mounted with the lead portion provided on the electronic component placed on the surface of the base plate BB and is excellent in integration performance due to multi-layered wiring patterns, but inferior in fraud suppression performance. Both are provided separately in a divided manner.

According to such a configuration, an electronic component that is unlikely to be fraudulent can be mounted in the surface mounting area SM, while it is mounted on the insertion mounting area TH side for an electronic component for which fraud suppression is pursued rather than integration. As a result, it is possible to reduce the size of the hardware circuit, and it is possible to favorably maintain the suppression performance against the mounting of the unauthorized component.

That is, as described above, in the first control unit MCG according to this embodiment, as the various electronic components D,
An integrated circuit component D1 in which a plurality of types of single-function elements are integrated and enclosed in a relatively large package and which has low security performance against unauthorized mounting;
The single-function element is only enclosed in a relatively small package, and is equipped with the discrete component D2 having high security performance against illegal mounting.

In this regard, as a first characteristic technique according to the present application, in the first control unit MCG according to the present embodiment, the integrated circuit component D1 having low security performance is provided with the insertion mounting area TH and the surface. Only the insertion mounting area TH having excellent fraud suppressing performance out of the mounting areas SM is mounted, and only the discrete component having high security performance is mounted in the surface mounting area SM having poor fraud suppressing performance. As a result, it is possible to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while maintaining security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components even on the side of the first control unit MCG that is likely to be targeted for unauthorized use.

Further, in the first control unit MCG according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 117, as the discrete component D2 having the high security performance, the discrete component D2a of the surface mounting type mounted in the surface mounting area SM is provided. , And an insertion mounting type discrete component D2b mounted in the insertion mounting area TH.

That is, as described above, with respect to electronic components, it is generally possible to achieve integration by using the surface mounting type instead of the insertion mounting type. However, when both the insertion mounting area TH and the surface mounting area SM are separately provided as the base plate BB, in the circuit design, for example, the position where the electrically connected integrated circuit component D1 is provided. Also, in consideration of the space in which the wiring patterns related thereto are provided, it is possible to reverse the integration by arranging the electronic components not in the surface mounting area SM but in the insertion mounting area TH. There may be cases.

In this regard, in the first control unit MCG according to the present embodiment, not all of the discrete components D2 are used as the surface mount type discrete components D2a, but the most suitable aspect for integration is achieved. The insertion mounting type discrete component D2b is intentionally used in part. As a result, it is expected that the hardware circuit can be more appropriately downsized while maintaining the security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components.

As shown in FIG. 117, the insertion mounting area TH, which is excellent in fraud suppression performance, is not formed on the surface on one side (back side) of the substrate, but is formed on the surface on the other side (front side) and is a discrete component. And the integrated circuit component are mounted respectively. On the other hand, the surface mounting area SM, which is inferior in fraud control performance, is not formed on the surface on one side (back side) of the substrate, but is formed on the surface on the other side (front side), and the integrated circuit component and the discrete component are separated from each other. It is desirable that only the discrete components are mounted, not the integrated circuit components. That is, in this case, first, the mounting of the mounting electronic component on the back surface side, which is likely to be a blind spot when confirming whether the unauthorized component is mounted, is eliminated. Further, on this, both the integrated circuit component that is easily targeted for fraud and the discrete component that is not easily targeted for fraud are mounted in the insertion mounting area TH that is excellent in fraud suppression performance, while improving the fraud suppression performance. Since only discrete components that are difficult to be fraudulent are mounted in the inferior surface mounting area SM, it is expected to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while maintaining the suppression performance against the mounting of illegal components. Like

Further, in the first control unit MCG according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 117, even in the discrete component D2 having high security performance, the capacitor element having the larger capacitance value (backup In terms of power supply, etc., in consideration of the fact that it has a relatively larger shape than other elements (resistive elements, diode elements, capacitor elements with small capacitance values (for filter circuits, etc.)), the surface mounting area It is not used as the surface mounting type discrete component D2a mounted on the SM, but is prepared only as the insertion mounting type discrete component D2b-C mounted on the insertion mounting region TH. This makes it possible to maintain the security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components more favorably in reducing the size of the hardware circuit.

However, even though the capacitor element having a large capacitance value is larger than the other elements (discrete parts), a large gap is not created between the package and the base plate as compared with the integrated circuit part D1. .. Therefore, the capacitor element may be used as the surface mount type discrete component D2a mounted in the surface mount area SM, and even in this case, security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components is maintained. Is possible.

Moreover, in the first control unit MCG according to the present embodiment, the characteristic second technique, which is based on the viewpoint different from the characteristic first technique according to the present application described above, is inherent. ing.

That is, as shown in FIG. 117, in the first control unit MCG according to this embodiment, one hardware circuit for the purpose of exerting a specific electrical function (for example, backup power supply function). As a discrete circuit (a hardware circuit that does not use the integrated circuit component D1) DHC electrically configured by the discrete component D2. However, the discrete circuit DHC is provided with an electrical structure composed of a plurality of discrete components D2 mounted in the insertion mounting area TH and the surface mounting area SM, respectively.

That is, in this case, although the discrete circuit DHC is one for the purpose of exerting a specific electrical function (for example, a backup power supply function), it is mounted on the insertion mounting area TH on the base plate BB. The electronic component D2b having a shape capable of being possible and the electronic component D2a having a shape capable of being mounted on the surface mounting area SM are mixed. Therefore, when a third party visually recognizes the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG, they have an electrically close role to exert a specific electrical function (for example, backup power supply function). It becomes possible to make it difficult to remember that there is such a problem, and it can be expected that fraud will be suppressed even if the difficulty of understanding the circuit is increased. Further, by mounting a part of the electronic component on the surface mounting area SM, it is possible to expect miniaturization of the hardware circuit.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, it is possible to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while suppressing fraud with respect to electronic components.

However, as described above, the example shown in FIG. 117 is for explaining the principles of the two characteristic techniques according to the present application, and next, an example in which each of the above techniques is applied to the embodiment of the present application will be described. explain.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG includes a base substrate of the main control substrate 1310, a base substrate of the payout control substrate 951, and a base substrate of the power supply substrate 931. And three base substrates. Then, both the insertion mounting area TH and the surface mounting area SM are provided on these base substrates in a divided manner.

However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, of the three base boards, only the insertion mounting area TH is formed on the base board of the power supply board 931 and the base of the main control board 1310 is formed. In the board and the base board of the payout control board 951, both the insertion mounting area TH and the surface mounting area SM are provided separately.

Then, among the various electronic components D mounted on the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG, the diode MD0 (FIG. 75) of the above-mentioned “backup power supply circuit for supplying backup power to the RAM with built-in main control”. Is mounted on the surface mounting area SM of the base substrate of the main control board 1310 as a surface mounting type discrete component D2a. Similarly to this, the diode PD0 (see FIG. 75) of the above-mentioned “backup power supply circuit for supplying backup power to the payout control built-in RAM” is surface-mounted on the base board of the payout control board 951. The surface mount type discrete component D2a is to be mounted in the region SM.

With such a configuration, of the integrated circuit component D1 having low security performance and the discrete component D2 having high security performance, only the discrete component D2 (diode MD0, diode PD0) is the surface mounting type discrete component D2a. The surface mounting areas SM (main control board 1310, payout control board 951) are respectively mounted. This makes it possible to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while maintaining security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components even on the side of the first control unit MCG that is likely to be subject to fraud ( The characteristic first technology according to the present application).

Moreover, in the example applied to this embodiment, in the surface mounting area SM formed on the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG, a specific type of discrete component (here, the diode MD0 and the diode PD0 are both Schottky Only a plurality of diode elements will be mounted. That is, in this case, since all the electronic components mounted in the surface mounting area SM, which is inferior in fraud suppression performance, have the same shape, it is expected that the labor required for fraud confirmation is saved.

Further, in the above-described configuration, the discrete component (the electronic component that plays a part of the power supply function) that the power supply board 931 originally should have is intentionally mounted on the side of the board (main control board 1310) different from the power supply board 931. I have to. That is, even if there is not enough space for forming the surface mounting area SM on the power supply board 931, the surface mounting area SM is formed on another board and the surface mounting type discrete component D2 is mounted there. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in the circuit design of the entire first control unit MCG.

Furthermore, in the above configuration, one discrete circuit DHC (backup power supply circuit) having a plurality of discrete components D2 (here, capacitor element and Schottky diode element) is provided for the purpose of exerting a backup power supply function. Despite being provided, the plurality of discrete components D2 forming the discrete circuit DHC are separately mounted in the insertion mounting area TH (capacitor element) and the surface mounting area SM (Schottky diode element). I have decided.

According to such a configuration, the insertion mounting area TH (power supply board) is formed on the base plate BB even though the discrete circuit DHC (backup power supply circuit) is intended to exhibit the backup power supply function. 931) and an electronic component D2b having a shape that allows mounting on the surface mounting area SM (main control board 1310, payout control board 951) such that the electronic component D2a having a shape that allows mounting become. Therefore, when a third party visually recognizes the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG, they have an electrically close role to exert a specific electrical function (for example, backup power supply function). It is possible to make it difficult to remember that there is a problem, and it is possible to expect fraud suppression even by increasing the difficulty of understanding such a circuit (the second characteristic feature of the present application).

Moreover, in the example applied to this embodiment, a plurality of discrete components D2 included in one discrete circuit DHC (backup power supply circuit) for the purpose of exerting a backup power supply function are inserted in the mounting area TH (capacitor element). And the surface mounting area SM (Schottky diode element) separately, and the discrete component D2 is mounted on two different boards (main control board 1310, payout control board 951 (Schottky diode element), and power supply board). 931 (capacitor element) is separately mounted, that is, in this case, electronic components D2a and D2b mixed for surface mounting and insertion mounting are mounted on different base boards. Therefore, it becomes more difficult to understand the circuit, and further suppression of fraud can be expected.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as is apparent from FIG. 117, the mounting surface of the surface mounting area SM of the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG is the same as the insertion mounting area TH of the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG. It is provided so as to have a smaller area than the mounting surface. Therefore, it becomes difficult for a third party to notice that the surface mounting area SM having poor fraud suppression performance is provided, and suppression of fraud can be expected.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as is apparent from FIG. 117, the number of types of electronic components mounted in the surface mounting area SM of the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG depends on the number of types of the base plate of the first control unit MCG. The number is smaller than the number of types of electronic components mounted in the insertion mounting area TH of the BB. Therefore, the number of types of electronic components to be visually checked to see if the electronic component mounted in the surface mounting area SM, which is relatively inferior in security performance, has been tampered with is relatively reduced. Thus, the visual check can be facilitated.

Further, in the above embodiment, as is clear from FIG. 117, the total number of electronic components mounted in the surface mounting area SM of the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG is the same as that of the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG. It is provided so as to be less than the total number of electronic components mounted in the insertion mounting area TH. Therefore, by relatively reducing the total number of electronic components that are subject to a visual check to see if any illegal activities have been performed on the electronic components mounted in the surface mounting area, which has relatively poor security performance. Therefore, the load on the visual check can be reduced.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the surface mounting area SM is provided on the base board of the main control board 1310 and the base board of the payout control board 951, respectively. It may be formed.

In addition, the surface mounting area SM is formed only on a specific base substrate, and the surface mounting type discrete components D2 that should originally be mounted on another base substrate are also collectively arranged on the specific base substrate. Good. According to such a configuration, when confirming whether or not illegal mounting has been performed, it becomes necessary to focus only on the surface mounting area SM formed on a specific base substrate, and thus it is possible to confirm illegality. It is expected that the labor required will be saved.

However, considering that the integrated circuit component D1 is mounted on any of the three base boards, at least the insertion mounting area TH must be formed on any of the three base boards in order to appropriately suppress fraud. I have to.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG includes the base substrate of the main control substrate 1310, the base substrate of the payout control substrate 951, and the base substrate of the power supply substrate 931. Although the three base substrates are used, they may be collectively configured on one base substrate as schematically shown in FIG. 117.

Further, the “base plate BB of the first control unit MCG” according to the present application essentially means that the surface mounting area SM and the insertion mounting area TH are divided, and this is provided by a plurality of base substrates. Alternatively, it may be provided by one base substrate.

For example, as the base substrate of the main control substrate 1310, a first base substrate having only the insertion mounting area TH formed therein and a second base substrate having only the surface mounting area SM formed therein are provided. By inserting and mounting the board into the inserting and mounting area TH of the first base board, the electronic parts which are inserted and mounted on the first base board while maintaining security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components It is also conceivable that a structure in which the component and the electronic component surface-mounted on the second base substrate are electrically connected to each other is adopted, but in this case, the “base of the first control unit MCG” is used. The “plate BB” is a concept including at least both a first base substrate in which only the insertion mounting area TH is formed and a second base substrate in which only the surface mounting area SM is formed. In other words, such a mode is also one of the modes such as "both the insertion mounting area TH and the surface mounting area SM are provided in the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG in a divided manner". It is included as an aspect.

If the first base substrate having only the insertion mounting area TH formed therein and the second base substrate having only the surface mounting area SM formed therein are provided, the insertion mounting area TH and the surface mounting area SM are provided. It is desirable that the first base substrate and the second base substrate are arranged so that and are oriented in different directions (preferably, orthogonal directions).

That is, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is an electronic component that is enclosed in a relatively small package as a component (surface-mounted component) that is mounted in the surface-mounted region SM that is inferior in fraud suppression performance. By using only discrete components, it is possible to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while eliminating the space for mounting illegal components (reducing the space on the back side).

However, even with such a discrete component (surface-mounted component) having excellent security performance, there is a small space on the back side of the discrete component, which is difficult to visually confirm when mounted in the surface-mounted region SM. Still left. Therefore, as the hall side that operates and manages the pachinko machine 1, it was possible to understand that "there is no space left behind for mounting illegal components on the back side of discrete components (surface mount components)." However, it is impossible to completely eliminate the anxiety such as "it may be installed illegally because an extremely small illegal part is created", and it is difficult to confirm it visually. There is concern that the operation and management of the pachinko machine 1 may become complicated, such as requiring confirmation.

Therefore, it is more desirable to provide each of the base boards of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 in the following manner instead of the above-mentioned manner.

[Modification Example of Each Base Board of Main Control Board 1310 and Dispensing Control Board 951]
FIG. 118 is a diagram showing a partial area of the base substrate MB of the main control substrate 1310 according to the modification. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 118, a modification of the base board MB of the main control board 1310 will be described. It should be noted that although the description of the modified example of the base board of the payout control board 951 is omitted, it can be modified in the same manner as the base board MB of the main control board 1310 described below.

As shown in FIG. 118, the base substrate MB of the main control substrate 1310 according to this modified example is configured to include at least the insertion mounting substrate THB that is inferior in integration performance but is excellent in fraud suppression performance.

Also in the insertion mounting board THB according to this modification, as in the insertion mounting board TH of the above-described embodiment, a plurality of types of electronic components (insertion mounting components) are mounted in such a manner that they are inserted. Also, similarly, these electronic components (insertion mounting components) include both the integrated circuit component D1 having low security performance and the discrete component D2b having high security performance.

However, as apparent from FIG. 118, in the base board MB of the main control board 1310 according to this modification, the insertion mounting board THB and the insertion mounting lead portion are inserted into the insertion mounting board THB. The electronic components to be mounted in such a form are provided. That is, although the base board MB of the main control board 1310 according to this modification has a surface mounting area and a surface mounting component mounted in the area, respectively, at a glance, any of them can be seen. A special mounting structure that does not seem to be provided is adopted.

More specifically, the base board MB of the main control board 1310 according to this modification includes the special mounting component D3 (in the drawing, the special mounting component in addition to the integrated circuit component D1 and the discrete component D2b as the insertion mounting components). D3a, special mounting component D3b). The special mounting component D3 has a built-in electronic component (surface mounting component) to be mounted in a surface mounting region having inferior fraud control performance, but is hidden from the insertion mounting board THB. It is inserted and mounted via a special insertion mounting lead portion TL which will be described later.

According to the special mounting component D3 as described above, the fraud suppression is performed even though the surface mounting region and the electronic component (surface mounting component) mounted in the surface mounting region, which will be described later, are respectively provided therein. Since it has an appearance shape that looks as if it is one insertion mounting component mounted on the insertion mounting board THB with excellent performance, it is expected to be removed from the target component for malicious purposes by a malicious person. Can be done. In the base board MB of the main control board 1310 according to this modification, the portion of the insertion mounting board THB in which the special mounting component D3 is inserted and mounted is the surface mounting in which the surface mounting component is mounted. It will function as an area.

Moreover, in the base board MB of the main control board 1310 according to this modified example, such special mounting components D3 are not collectively (adjacently) arranged at one location, but at a plurality of locations on the base board MB. At least one of the special mounting components D3 (in the figure, the special mounting component D3a) is distributed so as to be surrounded by a relatively large area (insertion mounting area) in which the insertion mounting components D1 and D2b are inserted and mounted. It will be set up.

That is, in this case, in addition to the fact that the surface mounting area that is inferior in fraud suppression performance and the electronic components (surface mounting components) mounted in the surface mounting area are subdivided and become inconspicuous, the fraud suppression performance is combined with the appearance shape described above. The surface mount area is present when a malicious person looks at the base board MB of the main control board 1310, because it is excellently inserted into the insert mount area provided as a relatively large area. In particular, it becomes possible to make it harder to notice, and thereby, it is expected that the hardware circuit can be downsized while maintaining the performance of suppressing the mounting of the unauthorized component more appropriately.

Further, as will be described later, the diode MD0 (see FIG. 75) as the surface mounting type discrete component D2a shown in FIG. 117 is enclosed inside the special mounting component D3a according to this modification. As described above, such a diode MD0 is used in one discrete circuit (backup power supply circuit) for the purpose of exerting a backup power supply function. Nevertheless, even in this modification, the insertion mounting area (capacitor element (capacitor BC0)) and the surface mounting area (Schottky diode element) are used for a plurality of discrete components that form one discrete circuit (backup power supply circuit). (Diode MD0)) and each of them will be mounted. Moreover, regarding the capacitor element (capacitor BC0) to be inserted and mounted in the insertion mounting area, a position (power supply board 931 or the like) which is not adjacent to the special mounting component D3a including the Schottky diode element (diode MD0) in the insertion mounting area. It will be implemented in.

As described above, it is difficult to recall that the electronic component built in the specially-mounted component D3a has a specific electrical function (backup power supply function), and the difficulty of understanding the circuit is increased. As a result, even if it is noticed that there is a surface mounting area that is inferior in fraud control performance, fraud control can be expected.

Next, an example of the structure of the special mounting component D3a according to this modification will be described. Note that, in FIG. 118, for convenience of explanation, a portion where the special mounting component D3a is mounted is enlarged, and a part of the outer package OP of the special mounting component D3a is omitted so that the internal structure is exposed. The figure (the part surrounded by the dotted line) is included.

As shown together with the explanatory diagram, the special mounting component D3a according to this modification includes a special surface mounting substrate SMB as a surface mounting substrate on which a surface mounting type electronic component (surface mounting component) is mounted, A surface mount type discrete component D2a mounted on the special surface mount board SMB, and a special insertion mounting lead section as an insertion mounting lead section to be inserted into the through hole (specific insertion hole) of the insertion mounting board THB. It is provided with a TL and an outer package OP that molds each of these parts with a molding resin.

Here, the special surface mounting board SMB electrically connects the surface mounting lead portion SL and the special insertion mounting lead portion TL provided in the electronic component (surface mounting type discrete component D2a) mounted on the substrate. The wiring pattern HP is formed so as to be electrically connected thereto, and the mounting surface thereof is provided so as to be substantially orthogonal to the mounting surface of the insertion mounting board THB.

The surface area on the mounting surface of the special surface mount board SMB is limited to a size sufficient to mount the surface mount type discrete component D2a, and is required, for example, when the integrated circuit component forming the main control MPU 1310a is mounted. It is designed to have a mounting surface that is smaller than the required area. That is, in the insertion mounting board THB, even when all the electronic components required to operate the pachinko machine 1 are mounted, there is a margin space for further mounting other electronic components. In order to reduce the size of the surface mount board SMB, in a state where the electronic component to be mounted (the surface mount type discrete component D2a) is mounted, there is a sufficient space for further mounting other electronic components. Not left.

With such a configuration, it becomes difficult to improperly perform special fraud on the special surface mount board SMB, so that it is possible to further reduce the size of the hardware circuit while suppressing the mounting of the illegal component. You will be expected.

The surface mount type discrete component D2a has a package structure (inner package) which is itself molded with a molding resin. Then, inside thereof, the Schottky diode element (diode MD0) included in one discrete circuit (backup power supply circuit) is electrically connected to the surface mounting lead portion SL by a bonding wire. That is, the surface mounting type discrete component D2a is provided with the surface mounting lead portion SL formed so as to be pulled out to the outside of the inner package (mold resin). By electrically connecting to the special insertion mounting lead portion TL via the wiring pattern HP formed on the special surface mounting board SMB, other electronic components mounted on the insertion mounting board THB can be obtained. The Schottky diode element (diode MD0) is electrically connected to each other so that the processes associated with each other can be performed.

Furthermore, the surface mount type discrete component D2a is provided with a flat appearance shape (package shape), and is soldered in such a manner that the flat surface faces the special surface mount board SMB. It is surface-mounted. However, as described above, the mounting surface of the special surface mounting board SMB on which the surface mounting type discrete component D2a is mounted is substantially orthogonal to the mounting surface of the insertion mounting board THB.
Therefore, the surface mounting type discrete component D2a provided in the special mounting component D3 is not a flat surface but a thin surface (thin surface) facing the insertion mounting board THB. It will be implemented as a form.

In such a configuration, a thin surface having a relatively small area is opposed to the insertion mounting board THB instead of a flat surface having a relatively large area. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 118, in the insertion mounting board THB, only a small area (two through holes) is left so that one discrete component (insertion mounting type) can be mounted. Even in a situation where the special mounting component D3 is not provided, the special mounting component D3 can be disposed in the small area (two through holes).

It should be noted that the surface mounting type discrete component D2a according to this modification has a size (horizontal length in the drawing) which is set when the special mounting component D3a is mounted on the insertion mounting board THB. It is smaller than the pitch between the through holes into which the special insertion mounting lead portions TL are inserted (installation intervals of specific insertion holes).

In addition, the special insertion mounting lead portion TL has a bifurcated structure in which one end side sandwiches the special surface mounting board SMB from both sides thereof, and the wiring pattern HP is formed in the special surface mounting board SMB. By being soldered at the location, it is fixed to the special surface mounting board SMB and is electrically connected to the surface mounting lead portion SL via the wiring pattern HP. .. On the other hand, the other end side is fixed to the insertion mounting board THB by being soldered while being inserted into the through hole of the insertion mounting board THB, and at the side of the insertion mounting board THB. It is designed to be electrically connected to various electronic components via the wiring pattern.

Further, although the outer package OP has a package structure (inner package) in which the surface mount type discrete component D2a itself is molded with a mold resin, a mold resin different from the mold resin is used. Thus, the surface mount type discrete component D2a is further molded (double molded) on each of the special surface mount boards SMB to be mounted.

With such a configuration, it becomes extremely difficult to perform some kind of fraud on the surface-mounting board having a poor fraud suppressing performance.

In particular, in the special mounting component D3a according to this modification, the external shape produced by the outer package OP of the double mold is different from the external shape of the specific type of surface mounting component which is surface-mounted inside. .. That is, in this case, since the discrete component D2a can be mounted in a state where the external shape of the discrete component D2a itself is concealed, it seems that the surface mount component of a specific type incorporated in the special mount component D3a is not mounted. It becomes difficult to understand the circuit because it looks like, and it is expected that fraud will be suppressed.

Moreover, in the outer package OP, only the special insertion mounting lead portion TL of the special insertion mounting lead portion TL and the surface mounting lead portion SL provided therein is the outer package OP (mold resin). The surface mounting type discrete component D2a is integrally molded with the special surface mounting board SMB so as to be drawn out to the outside of the special mounting component D3a. It is mounted on the insertion mounting board THB as one electronic component having a lead portion TL).

According to such a configuration, the special mounting component D3a is provided even though the surface mounting substrate having poor fraud control performance and the electronic component (surface mounting component) mounted on the substrate are provided inside. Since it will be possible to function as if it is one insertion mounting component that is mounted in the insertion mounting area with excellent fraud suppression performance, it is expected that it will be excluded from the target of malicious purposes by a malicious person. Can be done. In addition, since it can be handled in the same way as one insertion mounting type discrete component in terms of physical distribution and mounting, it can be said that it is also excellent in such ease of handling.

Furthermore, the outer package OP is mounted on the surface mounting type discrete component D2a having a width smaller than the pitch between the through holes by using a molding resin different from the molding resin of the discrete component D2a itself. By integrally molding with the target special surface mount board SMB, the external shape as an electronic component having a size that does not fit within the pitch between the through holes is provided.

That is, as shown in FIG. 117, when the surface mount type discrete component is left in an external shape smaller than the pitch between the through holes in the insertion mounting area (installation hole installation interval), the main control board It becomes easy for a third party to notice that the surface mounting area having poor fraud suppressing performance is provided in the base substrate MB of 1310, which may further promote fraud.

In this regard, in the above configuration, the surface mount type discrete component D2a having a width smaller than the pitch between the through holes is one electronic component having a size that does not fit within the pitch between the through holes. It is designed to be mounted after having an external shape. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 118, the electronic component having the external shape of which the width is smaller than the pitch between the through holes does not exist on the base substrate MB of the main control substrate 1310, and the insertion mounting is performed. Since it becomes possible to make it appear as if only the type of electronic component (inserted mounting component) is mounted, it is possible to improve the suppression performance against the mounting of the unauthorized component.

Furthermore, the appearance shape produced by such an outer package OP is different from the appearance shape of the electronic component which is surface-mounted internally, as well as all the insertion mounting components (special ones) mounted on the insertion mounting board THB. It has a unique external shape different from any of the electronic components (excluding the mounted component D3). That is, the special mounting component D3a according to this modification has an excessive security performance such as protection with a double mold resin for a simple discrete component D2a which can have a limited function as compared with an arithmetic processing unit or the like. After being given, it is designed to have a unique and relatively large appearance as an appearance that intentionally attracts the attention of a malicious person.

With such a configuration, it becomes possible to show the excessive security performance performed on the base substrate MB of the main control substrate 1310 to a third party, so that the willingness to perform fraud decreases. Can be expected.

Furthermore, the outer package OP is provided with an identification number indicating the type of electronic component as the special mounting component D3a. In this modification, the content of the identification number (∘3213) is used as the inner package ( The contents (SD) of the identification number given to the surface mount type discrete component D2a) mounted on the special surface mount board SMB are made different.

With such a configuration, the content (SD) of the identification number given to the specific type of surface mount component does not appear. The fact that the external shape of the specific type of surface mount component is different (combined with the structure of the double mold) makes it possible to make it appear that the specific type of surface mount component is not mounted. Further, it becomes possible to make it appear as if only the insertion mounting type electronic component (insertion mounting component) is mounted, and it is possible to improve the performance of suppressing the mounting of an unauthorized component.

Further, in the special mounting component D3a according to this modified example, the length of the special surface mounting board SMB in the thickness direction is made smaller than the length of the surface mounting type discrete component D2a in the thickness direction. Then, on this, the mounting surface on which the electronic components and the wiring pattern are provided is formed only on one side of the flat surface of the special surface mounting board SMB, and the mold resin is directly attached to the back surface side. It has become.

That is, by adopting such a configuration, not only the unique and asymmetrical appearance shape is formed but also the length of the special mounting component D3a in the thickness direction is determined by the insertion mounting type TH to be mounted in the insertion mounting area TH. It is smaller than the length of the discrete component D2b in the thickness direction. This eliminates the need to secure a special mounting space when mounting the special mounting component D3a on the insertion mounting board THB in combination with the above-described structure in which the mounting surfaces are orthogonal to each other. The special mounting component D3a can be mixed in while the insertion mounting component is mounted.

As described above, the special mounting component D3a according to this modification appears as one insertion mounting type discrete component in appearance, but in reality, the special surface mounting substrate SMB and the surface mounting type discrete component are used. D2a is included therein. That is, in the special mounting component D3a, the special insertion mounting lead portion TL is internally fixed to the special surface mounting board SMB and electrically connected to the surface mounting lead portion SL via the wiring pattern HP. On the other hand, the insertion mounting component has a structure in which the insertion mounting lead portion is electrically connected to a specific electronic component by a bonding wire therein.

Further, in the base substrate MB of the main control substrate 1310 according to this modification, as shown in FIG. 118, a Schottky diode element (diode MD0) is internally provided as a special mounting component D3 having such an internal structure. In addition to the special mounting component D3a for surface mounting, a special mounting component D3b for internally mounting a capacitor element having a small capacitance value is provided.

That is, the special mounting component D3b according to this modified example is a filter for a specific data line between the discrete mounting component D2b provided as a resistance element among the insertion mounting type discrete components D2b mounted in the insertion mounting region TH. It forms a circuit. Recall that even with such a configuration related to the filter circuit, the electronic components included in one discrete circuit have an electrically close role to exert a specific electrical function (filter function). By increasing the difficulty of understanding such a circuit, fraud suppression can be expected.

Regarding the special mounting component D3b, both the resistance element and the capacitor element forming the filter circuit may be internally surface-mounted on the special surface mounting board SMB. However, in this case, each electronic component is arranged side by side in a row, and at least the electronic component having the highest height among the electronic components (inserted mounting components) to be inserted and mounted on the insertion mounting board THB ( For example, in order to reduce the size of the base substrate MB of the main control substrate 1310, it is desirable to keep the external shape lower than that of the capacitor element (not shown in the figure).

Further, the special mounting component D3 may include a plurality of types of electronic components as described above, or may include a plurality of one type of electronic components. In any case, when a plurality of electronic components are built-in, the plurality of electronic components are surface-mounted side by side and in a row on one special surface mount board SMB, and the electronic components are It is desirable that the parts and the special surface mount board SMB are collectively packaged by molding with a molding resin.

However, when a plurality of electronic components are built in the special mounting component D3, the external shape naturally becomes large, and "it is a type of electronic component that is inserted and mounted in this size and shape. There is a concern that it will not be possible to expect the dazzling effect using preconceptions, such as "is it a discrete component of the insertion mounting type?" Therefore, in order to suitably obtain the illusionary effect utilizing such prejudice, one surface mount type discrete component is made into a single body, and the external shape is made different by the double mold structure described above, and its thin shape is thin. It is desirable that the surface is mounted so as to face the insertion mounting board TH.

In addition to forming the double-molded outer package OP with a non-transparent material such as a mold resin, the outer package has an identification number different from the identification number given to the surface mounting type discrete component itself. It can be said that it is also important to increase the difficulty of circuit understanding by attaching to OP.

The special mounting component D3 according to this modified example is a structure having "one surface mounting type discrete component" smaller than "one insertion mounting type discrete component" therein. The size when double-molded will be about the same size as "one insert mounting type discrete component", and it will be possible to expect to have the above-mentioned excellent operational effects. .. Therefore, in a structure in which "one insert-mounting type discrete component" is provided and is double-molded, the size is larger than "one insert-mounting type discrete component". Since it is clear that it is not possible to expect the above-mentioned excellent operational effects.

The techniques described with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118 will be summarized below. Unless otherwise specified, the contents described below can be adopted by both the technique described with reference to FIG. 117 and its modification, and the technique described with reference to FIG. 118 and its modification. The above-mentioned configuration is an effect that can be achieved.

As described above, the technique described with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118 is
· Having a board on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, by using these electronic components, in addition to the control power source (for example, +5V) generation processing, game progress processing including prize ball payout Having a board on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and by using these electronic components, effects related to the game progressed by the first control unit MCG are performed. Second control unit SCG
In a gaming machine equipped with, it is intended to solve problems such as "to downsize the hardware circuit while maintaining security performance against illegal mounting of mounting electronic components". ..

More specifically, in the technique described with reference to FIG. 117 and FIG. 118, first, “of the first control unit MCG and the second control unit SCG shown in FIG. The second control unit SCG, which is only to be performed, is not directly related to the privilege obtained by the player and is unlikely to be an illegal target." Is one of the technical features that it is configured only by surface mounting. That is, in this case, the surface mounting type components (SMD) are also used as the above-mentioned various mounting electronic components included in the peripheral control board 1510, but the player obtains these mounting electronic components. Since it is not directly related to the privilege and is unlikely to be targeted for fraud, the hardware circuit mounted on the pachinko machine 1 does not deteriorate the security performance against illegal mounting of mounting electronic components. It becomes possible to reduce the size.

On the other hand, the process on the side of the first control unit MCG is directly connected to the bonus grant of the player, and thus the first control unit MCG is likely to be an illegal target. Therefore, although it is required to downsize the hardware circuit, if the first control unit MCG is simply integrated by surface mounting, the security performance against illegal mounting of mounting electronic components will be significantly reduced, The reality is that the decline in the interest in playing games is unavoidable.

Therefore, in the technique described with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118, on the substrate included in the first control unit MCG,
An insertion mounting area in which the lead portion provided in the mounting electronic component is mounted in such a manner that it is inserted into the base plate BB, and the integration performance is poor but the fraud suppression performance is excellent;
The surface mounting area in which the lead portions provided in the mounting electronic component are mounted on the surface of the base board BB and are mounted, and the integration performance is excellent due to the multi-layer stacking of wiring patterns, but the fraud suppression performance is poor. Both will be provided first. Then, on this, the following two types of electronic components for mounting having different properties are selectively mounted into the insertion mounting area or the surface mounting area having the above properties in a manner that can solve the above-mentioned problems. And one of them.

-Multiple types of single-function devices are integrated in a relatively large package, and integrated circuit parts with low security performance against unauthorized mounting-Single-function devices are enclosed in a relatively small package Only, discrete parts with high security performance against unauthorized mounting

More specifically, in the first control unit MCG, for the integrated circuit component with low security performance, it is mounted only in the insertion mounting area TH and the surface mounting area which are excellent in fraud suppression performance. In addition, in the surface mounting area where the fraud control performance is inferior, only the discrete component having high security performance is mounted. As a result, it is possible to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while maintaining security performance against unauthorized mounting of the mounting electronic component even on the side of the first control unit MCG that is likely to be a target of unauthorized use.

However, even when the security performance against unauthorized mounting of the mounting electronic components is maintained in this way, the board included in the first control unit MCG is likely to be targeted for unauthorized use. There is no change. Therefore, as for the substrate included in the first control unit MCG, basically, as shown in FIG. 4, FIG. 7, FIG. 62, etc., a transparent cover member (various substrate boxes 930, 950, 1320, etc.) is used. It is desirable that the mounting surface (flat surface) of the pachinko machine 1 is arranged so as to face the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 in a state of being covered by the above). That is, in this case, in addition to making it possible to make a fraudulent act on the mounting surface (flat surface) difficult with the transparent cover member, the first control unit MCG can be simply operated by opening the main body frame 4 from the outer frame 2. Since it becomes possible to monitor (visually) whether or not an unauthorized component is mounted on an unauthorized component, the unauthorized component is used as a substrate (first substrate) on which an integrated circuit component that is likely to be unauthorized is mounted. It is possible to suitably secure the suppression performance and the easiness of monitoring for the mounting of the.

In order to obtain such an effect, as shown in FIGS. 117 and 118, the mounting electronic component is mounted on one surface (back surface) of the substrate of the first control unit MCG. Instead, the mounting electronic component is mounted only on the other surface (front side surface), and the mounting electronic component is covered with the transparent cover member (various board boxes 930, 950, 1320, etc.). It goes without saying that the pachinko machine 1 should be arranged such that the other side (front side) thereof faces the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, among the first control unit MCG, in particular, considering that the main control board 1310 is a portion that directly performs a process of directly granting a privilege to the player, the first control unit MCG has the above-described configurations. It can be said that it is desirable to apply the invention to each of the boards of the main control board 1310 among the boards.

Furthermore, in order to maintain the security performance against the unauthorized mounting of the mounting electronic component more favorably, first, as a substrate included in the main control substrate 1310, an insertion mounting region excellent in fraud suppression performance is formed to form an integrated circuit component. At least a first substrate on which both discrete components are inserted and mounted, and a second substrate on which discrete component components are surface-mounted without forming an integrated circuit component by forming a surface-mounting region having poor fraud control performance are prepared. To The first substrate among the substrates is covered with the transparent cover member (various substrate boxes 930, 950, 1320, etc.) and the one surface (electronic component is not mounted). The other side of the back side) and the other side (front side on which electronic components are mounted) is arranged so as to face the rear side of the pachinko machine 1, while the second board is used. Both the one side surface (the back side surface on which the electronic component is not mounted) and the other side surface (the front side surface on which the electronic component is mounted) do not face the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 and are orthogonal thereto. It is desirable to arrange them so that they are oriented in the direction of movement. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the presence of the surface mounting area (second substrate), which is inferior in fraud suppression performance, from the rear side, so that the security performance against illegal mounting of mounting electronic components is more preferable. You will be expected to keep on.

However, even with such a configuration, if a malicious person attaches to "Are there any surface mounting areas with poor fraud control performance?" There is a concern that the second substrate on which the mounting area is formed may be noticed. In this case, although only the discrete component having high security performance among the integrated circuit component and the discrete component is mounted in the surface mounting area of the second substrate, the illegal action which the hole side has not yet recalled. If it is used (for example, a very small illegal chip is developed), it may cause a loss.

Therefore, regarding the other side surface (front side surface) of the first substrate on which both the integrated circuit component and the discrete component are inserted and mounted in the insertion mounting area having excellent tampering suppression performance, not only the insertion mounting area but also the tampering suppression area Even surface mounting areas with poor performance should be formed on the same surface (front side). Then, no electronic components for mounting are mounted on the surface mounting area, and the other side surface (front side surface) of the first substrate is exposed on the pachinko machine while the pattern wiring as the surface mounting area is exposed. It is desirable to arrange them so as to face the rear side of 1. That is, in this case, when a malicious person tries to perform a cheating act from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1, the surface mounting area of the other side surface (front side surface) of the first substrate arranged so as to face the rear side is Plays a role as an advertising tower that emphasizes that "no electronic components for mounting are mounted in the surface mounting area that is inferior in fraud control performance, and pachinko machine 1 has high fraud control performance" As a result, it becomes possible for a malicious person to lose the motivation to find the second substrate having the surface mounting region having the poor fraud control performance. The surface mounting area formed on the first substrate is preferably provided at a position where it is easy to notice the presence of the first substrate when the first substrate is viewed (such as an end portion of the first substrate).

Also, the pattern wiring as the surface mounting area formed on the first substrate has an independent shape that is not electrically connected between the surface mounting area and the insertion mounting area formed on the same surface. , Although it is electrically connected to the insertion mounting area, it is formed so that the insertion mounting area side is not affected even if an illegal component is mounted on the surface mounting area (progress the game. It is important to form on an output signal that does not need to be used above). On the other hand, in the second board according to this example, unlike the first board, only the surface mounting area of the insertion mounting area and the surface mounting area that is inferior in fraud suppression performance is formed. Electronic components for mounting (here, discrete components) are surface-mounted on the surface-mounting area.

Even when each of the above-mentioned configurations is adopted, a malicious person may find out "the second substrate on which the discrete component is surface-mounted in the surface-mounting area which is inferior in fraud control performance". Sex cannot be completely ruled out. Therefore, of the surface mounting areas of the main control board 1310, the “surface mounting area formed only on the other surface of the first board and not mounted with any mounting electronic component” is the surface mounting area. On the other hand, the "surface mounting area formed only on the other surface of the second board" is arranged while facing the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 with the patterned wiring as exposed. Among the discrete components and the integrated circuit components, only the discrete component which is hard to be illegally targeted is surface-mounted and molded with the molding member (non-transmissive member) together with the second substrate, and the one surface ( Both the back side surface (on which no electronic component is mounted) and the other side surface (front side surface) are arranged so as not to face the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 but to face the direction orthogonal thereto. Is desirable. That is, in this case, it is possible to conceal that the surface mounting region is formed on the second substrate and which type of discrete component is surface mounted on the surface mounting region. Of course, the mold member makes it difficult to perform fraudulent acts on the mounting surface (the surface mounting area with poor fraud control performance is made to function as a special area where it is virtually impossible to mount illegal parts, and Since it is possible to remove it from the object that needs to be monitored for mounting, it is possible to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while maintaining security performance against unauthorized mounting of mounting electronic components. It is expected that the problems such as “things” will be appropriately solved.

However, more preferably, as for the mounting component (here, discrete component) which is surface-mounted in the surface mounting region, as shown in FIG. It should be inserted and mounted in the insertion mounting area TH of the first substrate in a state of being molded by a non-transmissive member). According to such a configuration, the first substrate arranged so as to face the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 (the surface mounting area that gives an impression that "the surface mounting component is not mounted on the pachinko machine 1") and the electronic component Of the board on which the insertion mounting area on which the is mounted is respectively formed), the insertion mounting area includes a molding member (non-transmissive member) for each of the “discrete component”, the “integrated circuit component”, and the “second substrate”. Thus, the "surface-mounting area in a molded state" is inserted and mounted, and the respective electronic components are electrically connected to each other. That is, in this case, when the first substrate is viewed from the rear side, in the insertion mounting area in which both the discrete component and the integrated circuit component are mounted and the fraud suppression performance is excellent, the surface mounting area (the (2 boards) are made difficult to see by the mold member, and it becomes possible to make them function as electrically as if they were inserted mounting parts. Therefore, "security performance against illegal mounting of mounting electronic parts is maintained. At the same time, it is expected that the problem of “miniaturizing the hardware circuit” will be solved more appropriately.

Further, regarding the second board on which the surface mount component is mounted, the second board is inserted and mounted on the first board such that the thin surface of the board faces the rear side (the mutual board surfaces are orthogonal to the first board). In this way, the second substrate in the molded state can be mounted without producing a large blind spot between the first substrate and the first substrate.

Here, even when each of the above-mentioned configurations is adopted, the "second substrate itself which is in a state of being molded by the molding member (non-transmissive member)" is used as a mold member (non-transmissive member) together with an unauthorized component. The hole side is required to regularly check to see if any fraudulent acts such as "Replace with another substrate in a molded state by )." In this respect, if the above-mentioned mold structure is simply adopted, when the above-mentioned misconduct in which the color or material of the mold member is replaced with another substrate having the same structure, the misconduct is performed. It becomes difficult to detect that the electronic component is in a broken state, and the security performance against illegal mounting of the mounting electronic component may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the surface mounting area of the second substrate to be molded, only a specific type of discrete component (mounting electronic component) among various discrete components mounted on the substrate of the main control substrate 1310 is provided. It is desirable to mount the surface on the second substrate and not mount the other types on the second substrate, but mount it only on a different substrate. According to such a configuration, since only discrete components having a specific shape are surface-mounted in the surface-mounting area of the second substrate, the shape of the undulating portion of the molding member ( The degree of swelling of the molding member at the mounting position of the discrete component (see, for example, FIG. 118) is unified. In other words, when a different component is mounted on a different board in which an illegal component is also mounted in addition to a specific type of discrete component, the degree of swelling of the molding member at the mounting position of the unauthorized component is the mounting position of the discrete component of the specific type. The swelling state of the mold member in the above-mentioned will be different. Therefore, due to the difference in the shape of the mold member (the swelling condition is not single), the above-mentioned fraudulent behavior can be easily monitored, and the mounting electronic component can be mounted illegally. It is expected that security performance will be maintained appropriately.

Then, in this case, in at least the board of the main control board 1310 of the first control unit MCG, the discrete components of a specific type are collectively mounted only in the surface mounting area of the second board. It can be said that it is more desirable not to be mounted on a board different from the two boards in order to miniaturize (integrate) the hardware circuit.

However, the "specific type of discrete component" for obtaining the above-mentioned advantageous effects is required to be a mounting electronic component having the same shape, and therefore, for example, as "the specific type of discrete component". If the "Schottky barrier diode" is surface-mounted on the second substrate, the "PN diode" is a "discrete component different from the specific type" and is not mounted on the second substrate and is different from this. It will be required to be implemented in. Strictly speaking, when the “Schottky barrier diode” is surface-mounted on the second substrate as the “specific type of discrete component”, the same “Schottky barrier diode” is mounted on the second substrate. Therefore, it is desirable that the "Schottky barrier diode" of a different product is not mounted on the second substrate but mounted on a different substrate.

However, on the board of the main control board 1310, it is required to mount many types of discrete components in addition to the specific type of discrete components. Therefore, in order to more appropriately miniaturize (integrate) the hardware circuit, only the types of the discrete components to be surface-mounted differ, and other structures (the insertion mounting area is not formed, , The third substrate is the same as the above-mentioned second substrate in that it is mounted on only one side, and the mold structure, etc., and only one type of discrete component different from the specific type is surface-mounted. It is desirable that the third board is inserted and mounted in the insertion mounting area of the first board so as to be electrically connected to another mounting electronic component. With such a configuration, the boards (second board and third board) having the above-described mold structure for each type of discrete parts are different electronic parts (in the example of FIG. 118, the special mounting parts D3a, the special mounting parts D3a, It will be prepared as a mounted component D3b), and the shape to be monitored (the degree of bulge in the molding member) for each board having a mold structure will be unified, and monitoring for the above-mentioned fraudulent activities (for the corresponding board) will be performed. Since it is possible to easily confirm whether electronic components of types that should not be mounted are not mounted, it is possible to maintain the security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components for mounting while maintaining the hardware performance. It becomes possible to preferably solve the problem of "miniaturization of circuit". In addition to the second substrate and the third substrate, a substrate on which only discrete components of a type different from the discrete components mounted on these substrates are surface-mounted may be prepared in the same manner.

When only one discrete component is surface-mounted on the second substrate or the third substrate as shown in FIG. 118, the monitoring is further facilitated and the double mold structure described above is used. Together with this, it becomes possible to more appropriately solve the problem "to downsize the hardware circuit while maintaining security performance against illegal mounting of mounting electronic components".

Further, in the case of including a plurality of substrates molded in this way (here, the second substrate and the third substrate (corresponding to the special mounting component D3a and the special mounting component D3b in the example of FIG. 118)) It is desirable that each surface mounting surface (the surface on the other side described above) be arranged so as to face a specific direction. According to such a configuration, it is possible to collectively confirm the degree of swelling in the mold member of each board from the same direction, and thus monitoring for the above-mentioned fraudulent activities (types that should not be mounted on the corresponding board This makes it easy to confirm whether electronic parts are not mounted.

Furthermore, each member (molding member) for molding the second substrate and the third substrate is provided with a component-side identification display corresponding to the type of the discrete component surface-mounted on the substrate. In addition, it is desirable that the surfaces on which the component-side identification marks are given are arranged so as to face the same direction.
That is, in this case, the “type of component side identification display” and the “shape that should appear on the mold member” attached to the second substrate and the third substrate can be made to correspond one to one. Thus, it becomes possible to facilitate illegal monitoring of whether or not replacement of parts has occurred. At this time, regarding the component side identification display, it is possible to attach it to the mold surface (the surface on the side where the bulge does not occur in the mold member) opposite to the side where the surface mounting area is formed. It is desirable to eliminate the distortion as the identification display and prevent a confirmation error.

Further, according to the above configuration, with respect to the second substrate and the third substrate in which the surface mounting area having the inferiority prevention performance is formed, one electronic component molded together with the discrete components surface mounted on the substrate is formed. The components are respectively provided as components, and are inserted and mounted in such a manner that their respective substrate surfaces are orthogonal to the insertion and mounting region formed on the first substrate. That is, in this case, the second board and the third board on which the discrete components originally provided as the surface mount components are mounted are as if they were insertion mount components without creating a large space between the first substrate and the second substrate. Since it can be inserted and mounted in the first substrate, it is expected that the hardware circuit can be downsized while the performance of suppressing the mounting of the unauthorized component is appropriately maintained.

However, in order to preferably maintain the suppression performance against the mounting of the unauthorized component, the appearance as “an electronic component that is inserted and mounted on the first substrate as if it is an insertion mounted component” is the same as that of the second substrate. The third substrate is required to be provided so as not to be seen by the substrate on which the surface mounting region is formed. Therefore, regarding the second substrate and the third substrate, the plurality of types of discrete components are not surface-mounted, the integrated circuit components are not surface-mounted, and further, as shown in FIG. For example, by mounting only one discrete component on the surface, it is possible to reduce the size of the board and mount it on one insert mounting component (a structure in which an electric element is connected to the insertion mounting lead portion by a bonding wire). It can be said that it is extremely important to make it appear as if it is a general electronic component (discrete component) that it has. That is, the surface mounting area formed on the second board or the third board is at least the insertion mounting area formed on the first board, or the surface mounting area formed on the first board but empty without any mounting. The area is required to be smaller than the surface mounting area.

Furthermore, in this way, the second substrate and the third substrate are made compact, and the first substrate is provided with one electronic substrate including the second substrate and the third substrate. Inserted components that are mounted at a mounting height lower than those of electronic components when they are inserted and mounted as components (discrete components (a general electronic device having a structure in which an electric element is connected to an insertion mounting lead portion by a bonding wire). Components)) and insertion mounting components that are mounted at a mounting height higher than those electronic components (discrete components (general electronic components having a structure in which electric elements are connected to insertion mounting lead portions by bonding wires)). It is more desirable that the and are respectively provided. According to such a configuration, the second substrate or the third substrate having the surface mounting area having poor fraud suppression performance is inserted and mounted in the insertion mounting area having excellent fraud suppression performance formed on the first board. It becomes possible to make it look more suitable as if it were one electronic component. In this sense, the second substrate and the third substrate should be provided as electronic components (mold components) smaller than any of the integrated circuit components to be inserted and mounted on the first substrate, and the second substrate and the third substrate should not be mounted on the first substrate. It can be said that it is also important to provide the electronic component (molded component) smaller than the largest of the discrete components to be mounted.

In addition, a board that corresponds to the type of the electronic component to be mounted is also generally mounted on the board on which the electronic component is mounted, including the substrate (first substrate) on which the insertion mounting area according to this embodiment is formed. A side identification mark is often attached, and, for example, an electrical diagram symbol corresponding to the Schottky barrier diode is provided near the location where the Schottky barrier diode is mounted. However, with regard to the second substrate and the third substrate according to this embodiment, it is possible to conceal which type of electronic component functions as an electronic component so as to increase the difficulty of circuit understanding. It can be said that this is desirable in order to appropriately maintain the suppression performance against the mounting of illegal parts.

Therefore, on the insertion mounting surface of the first board, different board-side identification displays are provided near the respective positions where the second board and the third board are respectively inserted and mounted as one electronic component. However, any of the board-side identification marks, including the board-side identification mark attached to the same type of mounting electronic component, is included in the insertion mounting area of the first control unit MCG. It is desirable to have a unique mode different from the display (for example, a special display mode such as “?” or “*”). That is, in this case, even if the board-side identification display (mounting surface of the first board) provided near the positions where the second board and the third board are respectively inserted and mounted is confirmed, the mode is the same as the mounting electronic equipment of the same kind. Since it is in a unique mode different from the board side identification indication given corresponding to the component, which type is respectively mounted as the discrete component surface-mounted on the second substrate or the third substrate? Can be made difficult to recognize.

However, if a structure is adopted in which it is difficult to understand the circuit by concealing which type of electronic component the second substrate or the third substrate functions as, as described above, In order to grasp the above, it is feared that a malicious person may scrape the mold member and try to confirm the internal element.

Therefore, regarding the second board and the third board, first, the board-side identification mark should not be attached to the surface mounting surface (the surface mounting surface in a molded state) formed on these boards. However, even if a malicious person performs the act of scraping the mold member and checking the inside of the mold member, it is difficult to recognize which type is mounted as the discrete component. Is desirable.

Furthermore, regarding each discrete component surface-mounted in the surface mounting area formed on the second substrate or the third substrate, most of the discrete components inserted and mounted in the insertion mounting area formed on the first substrate are used. Is formed by molding with a first mold member of a different color, and then, a second mold member of the same or similar color as the specific color is used for the second substrate or the third substrate to be mounted. Further, it is preferable that the molded electronic component is inserted and mounted in the insertion mounting region formed on the first substrate. According to such a configuration, the second substrate or the third substrate having the surface mounting area having the inferiority prevention performance is molded in the same manner as the other insertion mounting components, and is molded to the first substrate. Even in the case of inserting and mounting, the manager on the hole side can easily find out where the second board and the third board are, and if the second board and the third board are fraudulent. It becomes possible to easily confirm whether or not there is.

In this case, even a malicious person will be assisted in grasping information as to where the surface mounting area (second board or third board) having poor fraud control performance is provided. It can happen. In this respect, in the above configuration, the discrete component surface-mounted on the surface-mounting area is molded by the second molding member on the second substrate or the third substrate, so that the type of the electronic component is hidden. In addition to increasing the difficulty of understanding the circuit, the second mold member is provided with the same or similar color as the specific color arranged on the first mold member of the surface-mounted discrete component. ing. That is, in this case, in order to grasp the type of the discrete component surface-mounted with respect to the surface-mounting area, the second mold member is scraped by a malicious person and an attempt is made to check the inside. Even if it is, it is difficult to know whether the second mold member that is molded on the second substrate or the third substrate is being scraped or the first mold member inside is being scraped. As a result, it is expected that the type of the electronic component will be kept secret and the difficulty in understanding the circuit will be preferably maintained.

Further, as described above, in this description example, on the insertion mounting surface of the first board, in the vicinity of each position where the second board and the third board are respectively inserted and mounted as one electronic component, on the same mounting surface. The board-side identification display has a unique mode (for example, a special display mode such as “?” or “*”) that is different from any board-side identification display. However, if only the board-side identification display having such a unique form is attached, it is not possible to grasp which type of electronic component functions on the hole side, and maintenance/maintenance cannot be performed. There is a concern that management will be adversely affected. Therefore, in the insertion mounting surface of the first substrate, in the vicinity of each position where the second substrate and the third substrate are respectively inserted and mounted as one electronic component, a substrate having a unique mode in a relatively easily visible position In addition to the side identification mark, the same type of electronic component for mounting (or different position) on the same mounting surface at a position (e.g., directly below the molded second substrate or third substrate) that is relatively difficult to see. It is desirable that the board-side identification display having the same form as the board-side identification display provided corresponding to the same type of mounting electronic component on the board) is also secretly provided.

Further, as described above, in this description example, in the surface mounting area of the second substrate, a specific type (for example, a Schottky barrier diode) of various discrete components mounted on the substrate of the main control substrate 1310 is mounted. Only discrete components (mounting electronic components) of are mounted on the surface. In the surface mounting area of the third substrate, one type (for example, a relatively small specific capacitance) different from the specific type among various discrete components mounted on the substrate included in the main control substrate 1310 is provided. Capacitors) and discrete components (mounting electronic components) are surface-mounted. According to these configurations, it is clear that the second substrate and the third substrate alone cannot function as a discrete circuit having a specific function (for example, a backup circuit or a filter circuit). That is, a mounting electronic component which is surface-mounted in a surface-mounting area formed on a molded substrate (second substrate or third substrate) and a substrate different from the substrate (second substrate or third substrate) (here Then, by forming a specific discrete circuit by the mounting electronic component surface-mounted in the insertion mounting area formed on the first substrate), it is possible to increase the difficulty of understanding the circuit or to mold the molded substrate. (2nd substrate or 3rd substrate) It is difficult to replace itself (because the structure inside the mold is concealed, and it is necessary to make a mold component that does not have a specific circuit function by itself) and it is illegal. Expected to be used for measures.

As described above, in summarizing the techniques described with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118, the configurations having some technical features have been described in the order in which a synergistic effect can be expected. Each configuration is merely one described as the best embodiment, and it is not always necessary to use all of the configurations in implementation, and the configurations are appropriately combined regardless of the order in which they are described. It is possible to carry out.

Next, technical ideas that can be understood from the above-described embodiment and modified examples will be described below.

[Technical thought 1-1]
It has a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and by using these electronic components, a specific control unit capable of respectively performing a control power generation process and a game progress process,
A game machine which can give a privilege to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of the execution process of the game,
The base plate of the specific control unit,
An insertion mounting area in which the lead portion provided in the electronic component is mounted in a manner of being inserted into the base plate,
And a surface mounting area in which the lead portion provided on the electronic component is mounted on the surface of the base plate.
At least one of the surface mount components to be mounted in the surface mount area of the plurality of electronic components is the mold resin even though the surface mount component itself is molded with the mold resin. A gaming machine characterized in that is also molded with another mold resin in the surface mounting area to be mounted.

[Technical thought 1-2]
A first control unit having a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and by using these electronic components, a control power generation process and a game progress process can be respectively executed.
A second control unit having a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and by using these electronic components, a process of advancing an effect according to the result of the process of advancing the game can be executed;
A game machine which can give a privilege to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of the game progress processing,
On the base plate of the second control unit, the insertion mounting area in which the lead portion provided on the electronic component is mounted by being inserted into the base plate, and the lead portion provided on the electronic component are provided on the base plate. Of the surface mounting area that is mounted by being placed on the surface of, only the surface mounting area is provided,
The base plate of the first controller is provided with both the insertion mounting area and the surface mounting area,
Of the plurality of electronic components, a first side surface mount component mounted on the surface mount area provided on the base plate of the first controller and a surface mount area provided on the base plate of the second controller. Although the second-side surface-mounted component to be mounted is itself molded with the molding resin, the second-side surface-mounted component among the first-side surface-mounted component and the second-side surface-mounted component is The gaming machine characterized in that the first side surface mount component is further molded in a surface mount area together with a mold resin different from the mold resin of the first side surface mount component itself.

According to such technical ideas 1-1 and 1-2, although the surface mount component mounted in the surface mount area having inferior tampering prevention performance is itself molded with the mold resin, Since the molding resin other than the molding resin is integrally molded with the surface mounting area to be mounted, it is possible to perform some kind of fraud on the surface mounting area having the poor fraud control performance. It will be extremely difficult.

[Technical idea 2]
It has a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and by using these electronic components, a specific control unit capable of respectively performing a control power generation process and a game progress process,
A game machine which can give a privilege to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of the execution process of the game,
The base plate of the specific control unit,
An insertion mounting board mounted by inserting the insertion mounting lead portion provided in the insertion mounting component of the electronic component,
It has a surface mount plate on which the surface mount lead part provided in the surface mount part of the electronic parts is mounted on the surface.
The surface mount plate,
At least a special surface mounting plate having a special insertion mounting lead portion formed to extend outward from the surface mounting plate to be insertable into the insertion mounting plate,
On the special surface mount plate,
A wiring portion is provided to electrically connect the surface mounting lead portion of the surface mounting component mounted on the special surface mounting plate and the special insertion mounting lead portion,
The surface mount component mounted on the special surface mount plate is
Of the surface mounting lead part and the special insertion mounting lead part, only the special insertion mounting lead part is molded integrally with the special surface mounting plate so as to be pulled out to the outside of the molding resin, A gaming machine mounted on the insertion mounting board as one electronic component having a special insertion mounting lead portion.

In the technical idea 2 as described above, the surface mount component mounted in the surface mount area inferior in fraud suppression performance is made to function as if it is one insertion mount component mounted in the insertion mount area excellent in fraud prevention performance. By being able to do so, it can be expected that the malicious person will be excluded from being the target of malicious purposes.

[Technical idea 3]
It has a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and by using these electronic components, a specific control unit capable of respectively performing a control power generation process and a game progress process,
A game machine which can give a privilege to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of the execution process of the game,
The base plate of the specific control unit,
An insertion mounting board mounted by inserting the insertion mounting lead portion provided in the insertion mounting component of the electronic component,
It has a surface mount plate on which the surface mount lead part provided in the surface mount part of the electronic parts is mounted on the surface.
The surface mount component includes
Includes at least discrete surface mount components that are single-function elements molded with mold resin,
The discrete surface mount component,
The discrete surface mount component has a relatively large external shape by being integrally molded with a surface mount plate to be mounted by a mold resin different from the mold resin of the discrete surface mount component itself, and the base of the specific control unit. A gaming machine having an external shape different from any of the electronic components mounted on the board.

In such a technical idea 3, a mere discrete surface mount component which can have a limited function as compared with an arithmetic processing unit is provided with excessive security performance such as protection by a double mold resin. The appearance shape is unique and has a relatively large appearance shape that attracts the attention of malicious persons. That is, in this case, the excessive security performance performed in the specific control unit can be shown to a third party, so that it can be expected that the willingness to perform fraud is diminished.

[Technical idea 4]
It has a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and by using these electronic components, a specific control unit capable of respectively performing a control power generation process and a game progress process,
A game machine which can give a privilege to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of the execution process of the game,
The base plate of the specific control unit,
An insertion mounting area in which the lead portion provided in the electronic component is mounted in a manner of being inserted into the base plate,
And a surface mounting area in which the lead portion provided on the electronic component is mounted on the surface of the base plate.
In the base plate of the specific control unit, the surface mounting areas are provided at a plurality of locations so that each area is a relatively small area, while the insertion mounting areas are dispersed. A gaming machine provided as a relatively large area surrounding at least one of the provided surface mounting areas.

According to such a technical idea 4, the surface mounting areas, which are inferior in the fraud control performance, are not gathered in one place but are dispersed to make them inconspicuous. It is arranged in such a manner that it is inserted in the insertion mounting area provided as an area. Therefore, it becomes possible to make it difficult for a malicious person to notice that the surface mounting area exists when looking at the base plate of the specific control unit, while maintaining the suppression performance against the mounting of the unauthorized component, It is expected that the hardware circuit will be downsized.

[Technical idea 5]
It has a base plate on which a plurality of electronic circuits are formed, and is provided with a specific control unit that can respectively execute a control power generation process and a game progress process by using these electronic circuits,
A game machine which can give a privilege to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of the execution process of the game,
The plurality of electronic circuits include
A backup power supply circuit that supplies backup power to a predetermined storage unit when the control power supply is cut off is included as a discrete circuit including at least a capacitor and a diode that are electronic components of a single-function element. ,
The base plate of the specific control unit,
An insertion mounting area in which the lead portion provided in the electronic component is mounted in a manner of being inserted into the base plate,
A surface mounting area in which the lead portion provided on the electronic component is mounted on the surface of the base plate.
The insertion mounting area is
The electronic component mounted in the surface mounting region is provided as a relatively large region surrounding the surface mounting region so as to be adjacent to some of the electronic components mounted in the insertion mounting region,
The backup power circuit is
Despite being provided as a discrete circuit having a backup power supply function that supplies backup power to a predetermined storage unit when the control power supply is cut off, the capacitor and the diode of the discrete circuit are provided. One of the electronic components is mounted in the surface mounting region surrounded by the insertion mounting region, and the other electronic component is the one of the electronic components mounted in the surface mounting region of the insertion mounting region. A game machine characterized by being mounted at a position that is not adjacent to a component.

In such a technical idea 5, although it is one discrete circuit for the purpose of exerting a specific electric function (backup power supply function), it is possible to mount it in the insertion mounting area on the base plate. An electronic component having a shape to be fitted and an electronic component having a shape to be able to be mounted on the surface mounting area are mixed. Therefore, it is recalled that when a third party visually recognizes the base plate of the specific control unit, they have an electrical close role to exert a specific electrical function (backup power supply function). By making it difficult to understand the circuit, it becomes possible to expect suppression of fraud.

Moreover, the surface mounting area, which is inferior in fraud control performance, is placed in such a manner that it is inserted into the insertion mounting area, which is superior in fraud control performance and is provided as a relatively large area. The capacitor and the diode included in one discrete circuit for the purpose of exerting the supply function are arranged so as not to be adjacent to each other. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to notice the existence of the surface mounting area having poor fraud control performance, and even when the existence is noticed, the electronic component mounted in the surface mounting area cooperates with other electronic components. Then, it becomes possible to make it difficult to recall what electric function is implemented to exhibit the electrical function, and by further increasing the difficulty of understanding such a circuit, it is possible to appropriately suppress fraud. You can be expected.

[Technical idea 6]
It has a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and by using these electronic components, a specific control unit capable of respectively performing a control power generation process and a game progress process,
A game machine which can give a privilege to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of the execution process of the game,
The base plate of the specific control unit,
An insertion mounting board that is mounted by inserting the insertion mounting lead portion provided in the electronic component,
A surface mount plate on which the surface mount lead portion provided on the electronic component is placed on the surface.
The surface mount plate,
At least a special surface mounting plate having a special insertion mounting lead portion formed to extend outward from the surface mounting plate to be insertable into the insertion mounting plate,
The special surface mount plate is
A wiring part formed to electrically connect the surface mounting lead part of the electronic component mounted on the special surface mounting plate and the special insertion mounting lead part to the insertion mounting plate. The special insertion mounting lead portions are inserted and arranged in the insertion mounting plate so that their mounting surfaces are substantially orthogonal to each other.

A gaming machine characterized by that.

In general, the components mounted on the surface mount plate often have a flat shape. In this respect, according to the technical idea 6, the special surface mounting plate is arranged so that the mounting surfaces of the insertion mounting plate are substantially orthogonal to each other. That is, in this case, a thin surface having a relatively small area is opposed to the insertion mounting board instead of a flat surface having a relatively large area, so that the electronic component is mounted as the insertion mounting board. The special surface mount plate can be arranged even in a situation where only a small possible area (surface area) is left.

[Technical idea 7]
It has a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and by using these electronic components, a specific control unit capable of respectively performing a control power generation process and a game progress process,
A game machine which can give a privilege to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of the execution process of the game,
The base plate of the specific control unit,
An insertion mounting board that is mounted by inserting the insertion mounting lead portion provided in the electronic component,
The surface mounting lead part provided in the electronic component has a surface mounting plate mounted on the surface of the base plate.
Among the plurality of electronic components, the surface mount component mounted on the surface mount plate includes a specific surface mount component having a size that fits within an installation interval of a specific insertion hole provided in the insertion mount plate. Is
The specific surface mount component is
Despite having a size that fits within the installation interval of the specific insertion hole, the specific surface mount component is integrally molded with a surface mount plate to be mounted by a mold resin different from the mold resin of the surface mount component itself. A gaming machine characterized by having an external shape as one electronic component having a size that does not fit within the installation interval of the specific insertion hole by being molded.

That is, when the specific surface mount component is left in an external shape smaller than the installation interval of the insertion holes in the insertion mount plate, it is possible that a surface mount area having poor fraud control performance is provided in the specific control unit. It can be easily noticed by a third party, which in turn can promote fraud.

In this respect, according to the above-mentioned technical idea 7, the specific surface mount component is integrally molded with the surface mount plate to be mounted by a mold resin different from the mold resin of the specific surface mount component itself. Since the appearance shape as one electronic component having a size that does not fit within the installation interval of the specific insertion hole appears, the specific control unit has a surface mounting area with poor fraud control performance. This makes it difficult for third parties to notice.

[Technical idea 8]
A first control unit that has a base plate on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted and that can execute a game progress process by using these electronic components;
A second control unit that has a base plate on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and by which the progress processing of the effect according to the result of the progress processing of the game can be executed,
A game machine which can give a privilege to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of the execution process of the game,
The plurality of mounting electronic components,
It includes a discrete component in which a single-function element is enclosed in a relatively small package, and an integrated circuit component in which a plurality of types of single-function elements are integrated in a relatively large package.
The base plate of the first controller is
An insertion mounting area in which the lead portion provided in the mounting electronic component is mounted by being inserted into the base plate,
And a surface mounting area in which the lead portion provided on the mounting electronic component is mounted on the surface of the base plate.
The base plate of the first control unit includes at least a first substrate and a second substrate as a substrate on which the surface mounting area is formed,
The first substrate is
Neither the discrete component nor the integrated circuit component is mounted in the surface mounting area, and the pattern wiring as the surface mounting area faces the rear side of the game machine in a state of being exposed. It is arranged in
The second substrate is
In the surface mounting area, the integrated circuit component of the integrated circuit component and the discrete component is not mounted, only the discrete component is mounted, and in a direction different from the rear side of the gaming machine. A gaming machine characterized by being provided.

In such a technical idea 8, the first substrate on which the surface mounting area in which no mounting electronic component is mounted and which is in an empty state is formed is prepared, and the first substrate is attached to the surface mounting area. The pattern wiring is arranged so as to face the rear side of the game machine with the pattern wiring exposed. In other words, in this case, when a malicious person tries to perform an illegal act from the rear side of the gaming machine, “a surface mounting area having inferior fraud control performance is not mounted with any mounting electronic component, which is a high illegality as a gaming machine. It comes to play a role as an advertising tower that emphasizes that it has "suppression performance", and it is expected to suppress the installation of illegal parts.

On the other hand, the second substrate is arranged in a direction different from the rear side of the gaming machine so that its presence is hard to notice, and then the integrated circuit is mounted on the surface mounting area. Among the components and the discrete components, the integrated circuit components that are likely to be fraudulent are not mounted and only the discrete components that are hard to be fraudulent are mounted. That is, in this case, in addition to the presence of the first substrate, the presence of the second substrate itself can be made difficult to notice, and even if the presence is noticed, the fraud suppression performance is poor. Since only discrete components that are unlikely to be fraudulent are mounted in the surface mounting area, it is expected that the hardware circuit will be miniaturized while maintaining good suppression performance against illegal component mounting. Become.

[Technical idea 9]
A first controller having a substrate on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and capable of executing a game progress process by using these electronic components;
A second control unit that has a substrate on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and by which the electronic component progress processing can be executed according to the result of the game progress processing;
A game machine which can give a privilege to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of the execution process of the game,
The plurality of mounting electronic components,
It includes a discrete component in which a single-function element is enclosed in a relatively small package, and an integrated circuit component in which a plurality of types of single-function elements are integrated in a relatively large package.
The substrate of the first controller is
The lead board provided on the mounting electronic component is mounted on the first board in which the lead mounting section is formed by being inserted into the board, and the lead section provided on the mounting electronic component is the surface of the board. A second board having a surface mounting area to be mounted thereon and a special insertion mounting lead portion that extends outward and can be inserted into the insertion mounting area of the first board. And
The first substrate includes
By the insertion mounting area in which the insertion mounting lead portion provided in the insertion mounting component can be mounted, and the surface mounting lead portion provided in the surface mounting component are placed on the surface. Although both the surface mountable area that can be mounted are formed, no electronic component for mounting is mounted in the surface mountable area formed on the first substrate, and the pattern wiring as the surface mountable area is formed. It has been left exposed,
The second substrate includes
Only the surface mounting area of the insertion mounting area and the surface mounting area is formed, and only the discrete component of the discrete component and the integrated circuit component is mounted on the second substrate. As one electronic component molded in, by inserting the lead portion for special insertion mounting into the insertion mounting region of the first substrate, various insertion mounting components mounted on the first substrate A gaming machine characterized by being electrically connected between them.

In such a technical idea 9, as a surface mounting area having inferior fraud suppression performance, no mounting electronic component is mounted and the surface wiring area as the surface mounting area is exposed ( A first substrate), and a surface mounting area (second substrate) in which both the discrete component and the integrated circuit component, which are hard to be illegally targeted, are surface-mounted and are molded together with the substrate. Is equipped with. In other words, in this case, when a malicious person tries to perform a fraudulent act from the rear side of the gaming machine, it is difficult to visually recognize the surface mounting area where the mounting electronic component is mounted, and the Since only the surface mounting area where the electronic component is not mounted can be visually recognized, the surface mounting area is described as "No mounting electronic component is mounted in the surface mounting area having poor fraud control performance. It will play a role as an advertising tower that emphasizes that "the game machine has high fraud control performance", and it is expected that the fraudulent parts will be prevented from being mounted.

Moreover, in addition to the surface mounting area, an insertion mounting area excellent in fraud suppression performance is formed on the first substrate in which the surface mounting area that plays the role of the advertising tower is formed. Then, the surface mounting region (second substrate) which is in a state of being molded on each of the substrates is inserted and mounted. That is, in this case, among the board (first board) impressed that “surface-mounted components are not mounted”, among the insertion mounting areas having excellent tampering suppressing performance, the surface mounting areas having poor tampering suppressing performance (first (2 boards) are made to be difficult to see by the mold so that it is expected that the hardware circuit will be miniaturized while maintaining the suppression performance against the mounting of illegal parts. Become.

[Technical idea 10]
A first controller having a substrate on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and capable of executing a game progress process by using these electronic components;
A second control unit that has a substrate on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and by which the electronic component progress processing can be executed according to the result of the game progress processing;
A game machine which can give a privilege to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of the execution process of the game,
The plurality of mounting electronic components,
It includes a discrete component in which a single-function element is enclosed in a relatively small package, and an integrated circuit component in which a plurality of types of single-function elements are integrated in a relatively large package.
The substrate of the first controller is
The lead board provided on the mounting electronic component is mounted on the board in such a manner that the lead board is inserted into the board, and the lead board provided on the mounting electronic component is on the surface of the board. It has a second substrate on which a surface mounting area to be mounted on top is formed,
In the first substrate,
The mounting electronic component is not mounted on the surface on one side, and both the discrete component and the integrated circuit component are mounted on the surface on the other side, and the surface on the other side is the rear side of the gaming machine. While it is arranged so that it faces the side,
In the second substrate,
The mounting electronic component is not mounted on the surface on one side, and the integrated circuit component of the integrated circuit component and the discrete component is not mounted on the surface on the other side, only the discrete component is mounted, and the molding member is mounted. In the state of being molded by, both the one side surface and the other side surface are mounted on the first board in a direction different from the rear side of the gaming machine. And the gaming machine.

According to such a technical idea 10, in the first substrate in which the insertion mounting area excellent in fraud suppression performance is formed, the mounting electronic component is not mounted on one surface and the discrete component is integrated on the other surface. Since both of the circuit parts and the circuit parts are respectively mounted so that the surface on the other side is arranged so as to face the rear side of the gaming machine, integrated circuit parts that are likely to be fraudulent are mounted. As a board (first board) to be mounted, it is possible to preferably ensure the suppression performance against illicit component mounting and the easiness of monitoring.

In addition, regarding the second substrate on which the surface mounting region having inferior tampering prevention performance is formed, the mounting electronic component is not mounted on one surface and the integrated circuit component which is apt to be tampered with is mounted on the other surface. Since only discrete components that are not likely to be fraudulent are mounted instead, it is expected that the hardware circuit will be miniaturized while maintaining the suppression performance against the mounting of illegal components appropriately. Become.

Moreover, in the second board, both the one side surface and the other side surface of the gaming machine are in a state where the surface mounting area on which the discrete component is mounted is molded by the molding member together with the board. It is arranged so as to face in a direction different from the rear side. In other words, in this case, the surface mounting area, which is inferior in fraud control performance, is made to function as a special area in which it is practically impossible to mount an illegal component, and the target for which illegal component mounting is to be monitored (game machine) You can remove it from the confirmation target from the rear side).

In addition, in the surface mounting area (second board) that is excluded from the monitoring target for the mounting of the unauthorized component in this manner, the thin portion of the board faces the rear side (both one surface and the other surface are concerned). Since it is mounted on the first board so as to face in a direction different from the rear side of the gaming machine, the molded state is maintained without creating a large space between the first board. It becomes possible to mount the second substrate.

[Technical idea 11]
A first controller having a substrate on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and capable of executing a game progress process by using these electronic components;
A second control unit that has a substrate on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and by which the electronic component progress processing can be executed according to the result of the game progress processing;
A game machine which can give a privilege to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of the execution process of the game,
The plurality of mounting electronic components,
It includes a discrete component in which a single-function element is enclosed in a relatively small package, and an integrated circuit component in which a plurality of types of single-function elements are integrated in a relatively large package.
The substrate of the first controller is
A first substrate in which an insertion mounting area is formed in which both the discrete component and the integrated circuit component are inserted and mounted,
A second substrate in which the integrated circuit component is not mounted among the discrete component and the integrated circuit component, and a surface mounting area on which a specific type of mounting electronic component of the discrete component is surface mounted is formed; The third substrate in which the integrated circuit component is not mounted among the discrete component and the integrated circuit component, and a surface mounting area is formed in which the mounting electronic component of a type different from the specific type of the discrete component is surface mounted. Has
The second substrate and the third substrate are
By being provided as separate electronic components that are molded together with discrete components that are surface-mounted on those substrates, and are respectively inserted and mounted in the insertion mounting regions formed on the first substrate. It is possible to be electrically connected to various insertion mounting components mounted on the first substrate,
Each member for molding the second substrate and the third substrate is provided with a component side identification mark corresponding to the type of the discrete component surface-mounted on the substrate, respectively. A gaming machine characterized in that the surfaces with identification marks are respectively arranged so as to face a specific direction.

According to such a technical idea 11, both the integrated circuit component that is easily targeted for fraud and the discrete component that is not easily targeted for fraud are mounted on the first substrate on which the insertion mounting region having excellent fraud suppression performance is formed. Then, on the second and third boards in which the surface mounting areas having inferior tampering prevention performance are formed, only discrete components that are difficult to be tampered with are mounted in different types for each board.

Therefore, for electronic components for mounting that are mounted on the insertion mounting area side with excellent fraud suppression performance, the same fraud suppression function as before is maintained, and mounting on the surface mounting area side with poor fraud suppression performance As to the electronic components for electronic parts, it is confirmed whether or not the electronic components for mounting having the shapes corresponding to the electronic components for the second and third boards are respectively mounted (the electronic components of the type that should not be mounted on the corresponding board). It will be easier to confirm whether or not has been implemented). Therefore, even if a fraud is made, it will be possible to easily detect it and it is expected that the hardware circuit will be downsized. become.

Moreover, the second substrate and the third substrate in which the surface mounting area having the inferiority prevention performance is formed are provided as separate electronic components that are molded together with the discrete components that are surface mounted on the substrates. And by being inserted and mounted in the insertion mounting areas formed on the first substrate, it is possible to electrically connect various insertion mounting components mounted on the first substrate. There is. That is, in this case, a specific type of discrete component that is originally provided as a surface mount component and a discrete component of a type different from the specific type are respectively inserted and mounted on the first substrate as if they were insertion mount components. Therefore, it is expected that the hardware circuit can be miniaturized while the suppression performance against the mounting of the unauthorized component is preferably maintained.

Furthermore, each member for molding the second substrate and the third substrate is provided with a component-side identification display corresponding to the type of discrete component surface-mounted on the respective substrates. All the surfaces with the side identification marks are arranged so as to face a specific direction. That is, in this case, the “type of identification indication on the component side” and the “shape that should appear on the molding member” attached to the second and third boards respectively inserted and mounted in the first board are in one-to-one correspondence. Since it becomes possible to deal with them, it becomes possible to facilitate illegal monitoring of whether or not replacement of parts has occurred.

[Technical idea 12]
A first controller having a substrate on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and capable of executing a game progress process by using these electronic components;
A second control unit that has a substrate on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and by which the electronic component progress processing can be executed according to the result of the game progress processing;
A game machine which can give a privilege to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of the execution process of the game,
The plurality of mounting electronic components,
It includes a discrete component in which a single-function element is enclosed in a relatively small package, and an integrated circuit component in which a plurality of types of single-function elements are integrated in a relatively large package.
The substrate of the first controller is
A first substrate in which an insertion mounting area in which both the discrete component and the integrated circuit component are respectively inserted and mounted is formed, and the integrated circuit component among the discrete component and the integrated circuit component is not mounted, and It has a second substrate on which a surface mounting area for mounting discrete components is formed.
The second substrate is
It is provided as one electronic component that is molded together with discrete components that are surface-mounted on the board, and is insert-mounted in such a manner that the board surfaces of the insert-mounting areas formed on the first board are orthogonal to each other. By doing so, it is possible to electrically connect with various insertion mounting components mounted on the first substrate,
The first substrate includes
An insertion mounting component that is mounted with a mounting height lower than the electronic component when the second substrate is inserted and mounted on the substrate as one electronic component, and a mounting height that is higher than the electronic component. A gaming machine characterized in that an insert mounting component is provided therein.

According to such a technical idea 12, both the integrated circuit component that is easily targeted for fraud and the discrete component that is not easily targeted for fraud are mounted on the first substrate on which the insertion mounting region having excellent fraud suppression performance is formed. Therefore, only the discrete component that is difficult to be fraudulent is mounted on the second substrate on which the surface mounting area having poor fraud control performance is formed. It is expected that the circuit will be downsized.

Moreover, the second substrate on which the surface-mounting region having inferior tampering prevention performance is formed is provided as one electronic component molded together with the discrete component surface-mounted on the substrate, and is formed on the first substrate. The board mounting surfaces are inserted and mounted in such a manner that their respective board surfaces are orthogonal to each other. That is, in this case, the second substrate on which the discrete component originally provided as the surface mount component is mounted does not create a large space between the first substrate and the first substrate as if it is the insert mount component. Since it becomes possible to insert and mount the same in the above, it is expected that the hardware circuit can be miniaturized while the suppression performance against the mounting of the unauthorized component is appropriately maintained.

Furthermore, an insertion mounting component mounted on the first substrate at a mounting height lower than that of the electronic component when the second substrate is inserted and mounted on the substrate as one electronic component, and the electronic component. Since the insertion mounting component to be mounted at a higher mounting height is arranged respectively, the second board in which the surface mounting area having the inferiority prevention performance is formed is not formed in the first board. It becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize that it is mounted in the insertion mounting area with excellent suppression performance.

[Technical idea 13]
A first controller having a substrate on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and capable of executing a game progress process by using these electronic components;
A second control unit that has a substrate on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and by which the electronic component progress processing can be executed according to the result of the game progress processing;
A game machine which can give a privilege to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of the execution process of the game,
The plurality of mounting electronic components,
It includes a discrete component in which a single-function element is enclosed in a relatively small package, and an integrated circuit component in which a plurality of types of single-function elements are integrated in a relatively large package.
The substrate of the first controller is
A first substrate in which an insertion mounting area in which both the discrete component and the integrated circuit component are respectively inserted and mounted is formed, and the integrated circuit component among the discrete component and the integrated circuit component is not mounted, and It has a second substrate on which a surface mounting area for mounting discrete components is formed.
The discrete component surface-mounted on the second substrate is molded by a first molding member of a specific color different from most of the discrete components inserted and mounted on the first substrate. And
The second substrate is
An insertion mounting area formed on the first substrate, which is provided as one electronic component molded by a second molding member of the same or similar color as the specific color for the discrete components surface-mounted on the substrate. A game machine characterized by being able to be electrically connected to various insert-mounting components mounted on the first substrate by being inserted and mounted with respect to.

According to such a technical idea 13, both the integrated circuit component that is likely to be fraudulent and the discrete component that is difficult to be fraudulent are mounted on the first substrate on which the insertion mounting region having excellent fraud suppression performance is formed. Therefore, only the discrete component that is difficult to be fraudulent is mounted on the second substrate on which the surface mounting area having poor fraud control performance is formed. It is expected that the circuit will be downsized.

Moreover, the second substrate on which the surface-mounting region having inferior tampering prevention performance is formed is provided as one electronic component molded together with the discrete component surface-mounted on the substrate, and is formed on the first substrate. The inserted mounting area is inserted and mounted. That is, in this case, the second substrate on which the discrete component originally provided as the surface mount component is mounted can be inserted and mounted on the first substrate as if it were the insert mount component. Therefore, it is expected to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while maintaining the performance of suppressing the mounting of the unauthorized component.

Further, regarding the discrete component surface-mounted in the surface-mounting area formed on the second substrate, the first mold member having a color different from that of many of the discrete components inserted and mounted in the insertion-mounting area formed on the first substrate. Then, the second substrates to be mounted are further molded by a second molding member having the same or similar color as the specific color, so as to form one electronic component. I have to.

Therefore, even when the second board having the surface mounting area having the poor fraud control performance is molded in the same manner as other insertion mounting components and is inserted and mounted on the first board, The manager on the side can easily find where the second board is, and can easily confirm whether or not the second board has been tampered with. However, in this case, even a malicious person may be able to assist in grasping information as to where the surface mounting area (second substrate) having poor fraud control performance is provided.

In this respect, in the above configuration, the discrete component that is surface-mounted on the surface-mounting region is molded by the second molding member together with the second substrate, so that the type of the electronic component is hidden and it is difficult to understand the circuit. In addition to improving the property, the second mold member is provided with the same or similar color as the specific color arranged on the first mold member included in the surface-mounted discrete component. That is, in this case, in order to grasp the type of the discrete component surface-mounted with respect to the surface-mounting area, the second mold member is scraped by a malicious person and an attempt is made to check the inside. Even if it is, it is possible to make it difficult to understand whether the second mold member that is molded on the second substrate is being scraped or the first mold member inside is being scraped. As a result, it is expected that the type of the electronic component will be kept secret and the difficulty of circuit understanding will be maintained appropriately.

[Technical idea 14]
A first controller having a substrate on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and capable of executing a game progress process by using these electronic components;
A second control unit that has a substrate on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and by which the electronic component progress processing can be executed according to the result of the game progress processing;
A game machine which can give a privilege to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of the execution process of the game,
The plurality of mounting electronic components,
It includes a discrete component in which a single-function element is enclosed in a relatively small package, and an integrated circuit component in which a plurality of types of single-function elements are integrated in a relatively large package.
The substrate of the first controller is
A first substrate in which an insertion mounting area in which both the discrete component and the integrated circuit component are respectively inserted and mounted is formed, and the integrated circuit component among the discrete component and the integrated circuit component is not mounted, and It has a second substrate on which a surface mounting area for mounting discrete components is formed.
The second substrate is
The first substrate is provided as one electronic component molded together with discrete components surface-mounted on the substrate, and is inserted and mounted in an insertion mounting region formed on the first substrate. It is possible to electrically connect to various insertion mounting parts mounted on
The mounting surface of the second substrate is not provided with any board-side identification indication corresponding to the discrete component surface-mounted on the substrate, and the mounting surface of the first substrate is the one electronic component. As a specific board-side identification mark is attached corresponding to the position where the second board is inserted and mounted, the specific board-side identification mark is attached corresponding to the same type of mounting electronic component. A game machine characterized by being in a unique mode that is different from any of the board-side identification displays included in the insertion mounting area of the game machine, including the board-side identification display.

According to such a technical idea 14, both the integrated circuit component that is easily targeted for fraud and the discrete component that is not easily targeted for fraud are mounted on the first substrate on which the insertion mounting area having excellent fraud suppression performance is formed. Thus, only the discrete component that is difficult to be fraudulent is mounted on the second substrate on which the surface mounting area having inferior fraud control performance is formed. It is expected that the circuit will be downsized.

Moreover, the second substrate on which the surface-mounting region having inferior tampering prevention performance is formed is provided as one electronic component molded together with the discrete component surface-mounted on the substrate, and is formed on the first substrate. The inserted mounting area is inserted and mounted. That is, in this case, the second substrate on which the discrete component originally provided as the surface mount component is mounted can be inserted and mounted on the first substrate as if it were the insert mount component. Therefore, it is expected to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while maintaining the performance of suppressing the mounting of the unauthorized component.

Furthermore, the mounting surface (surface mounting surface) of the second board is not provided with any board-side identification indication corresponding to the discrete component surface-mounted on the board, and the mounting surface of the first board is Is attached with a specific board-side identification display corresponding to a position where the second board as the one electronic part is inserted and mounted. The specific board-side identification display is the same kind of mounting electronic parts. Including the board-side identification display provided corresponding to the above, the board-side identification display provided in the first control unit and the second control unit has a unique mode different from any of the board-side identification display. That is, in this case, even if the specific board-side identification display attached to the mounting surface of the first board is confirmed, the mode is different from the board-side identification display attached corresponding to the same type of mounting electronic component. Because of the unique aspect, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize which type is mounted as the discrete component surface-mounted on the second substrate. In addition, even if an act of a malicious person scrapes the mold member and tries to check the inside of the surface mount area in order to grasp the type of the discrete component mounted on the surface mount area, It is possible to make it difficult to recognize which type is mounted as the discrete component.

[Technical idea 15]
A first control unit having a base plate on which a plurality of electronic circuits are formed, and by using these electronic circuits, a control power generation process and a game progress process can be respectively executed;
A second control unit having a base plate on which a plurality of electronic circuits are formed, and by using these electronic circuits, a process of advancing the production in accordance with the result of the process of advancing the game can be executed;
A game machine which can give a privilege to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of the execution process of the game,
In the plurality of electronic circuits provided in the first control unit,
Consists of electronic components for mounting a single-function element, contains a specific discrete circuit for the purpose of exerting a specific electrical function,
The base plate of the first control unit has an insertion mounting region and a surface mounting region formed on different substrates,
In the specific board of the base plate in which the surface mounting area is formed, only a specific type of mounting electronic component among a plurality of types of mounting electronic components forming the specific discrete circuit is surface-mounted and the specific type is mounted. Various electronic components for mounting mounted on the different substrates by being mounted as one electronic component molded together with the mounting electronic components and being inserted and mounted in the insertion mounting area formed on a substrate different from the specific substrate. Which can be electrically connected to the insert mounting parts of
Other mounting electronic components different from the specific type among a plurality of types of mounting electronic components configuring the specific discrete circuit are inserted and mounted in the insertion mounting area formed on a substrate different from the specific substrate. A gaming machine characterized by being played.

According to such a technical idea 15, only discrete components (mounting electronic components forming a specific discrete circuit) that are not easily fraudulent are mounted on the specific substrate on which the surface mounting area having the inferiority suppression performance is formed. Therefore, it is expected to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while maintaining the performance of suppressing the mounting of the illegal component.

Moreover, in the specific substrate in which the surface mounting area having inferior fraud control performance is formed, only the mounting electronic component of the specific type among the mounting electronic components of the plurality of types forming the specific discrete circuit is surface mounted and the specific type is mounted. Various electronic components for mounting mounted on the different substrates by being mounted as one electronic component molded together with the mounting electronic components and being inserted and mounted in the insertion mounting area formed on a substrate different from the specific substrate. It is designed to be electrically connectable with the insert mounting component.

That is, in this case, since the specific board on which the surface mount component is mounted can be inserted and mounted on the first board as if it is the insert mount component, the suppression performance against the mounting of the unauthorized component is improved. It is expected that the size of the hardware circuit will be reduced while maintaining the above. Further, in the above-mentioned specific board, since only a specific type of mounting electronic component among the mounting electronic components constituting the specific discrete circuit is surface-mounted, it is necessary to confirm whether the surface mounting area is illegal. Will be able to facilitate. Further, since the specific board is molded together with the mounting type electronic components of a specific type, the mounting board is inserted and mounted on another board on which other mounting electronic components are inserted and mounted. To increase the difficulty of circuit understanding of a specific discrete circuit formed over a surface mounting area formed in a board and an insertion mounting area formed on a board different from the specific board, and to be used as a countermeasure against fraud. Will be expected.

[13. Commands related to transmission/reception of main control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 91. 88 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, and FIG. 89 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. 89 is a table showing a continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 89, and FIG. 91 is a table showing an example of various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board. First, the prize ball command, which is a command related to payout, transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board will be described, and subsequently, various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board will be described and received by the main control board. Various commands from the payout control board will be described.

[13-1. Various commands sent from the main control board to the payout control board]
The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 detects from various winning switches such as the general winning opening sensors 4020, 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. When signals are input, a prize ball command for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board based on these detection signals. This prize ball command is a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 (communicating with the pachinko machine 1 to drive the payout motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 (payout device 830) to store the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 as storage pans. When a device for paying out game balls for renting a ball) is electrically connected (such a pachinko machine is referred to as a "CR machine"), as shown in FIG. 88(a), the main control board The prize ball command transmitted from the 1310 to the payout control board 951 includes commands 10H to 1EH (“H” represents a hexadecimal number). In the command 10H, one prize ball is designated, and the command 11H. In the command 1EH, 15 prize balls are specified. The payout control board 951 controls the payout motor 834 to pay out the game balls by the designated number of prize balls.

In addition, a pachinko machine 1 and a ball lending machine (a device which directly pays out game balls as a ball rental to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322, which are storage plates, are installed adjacent to the game hall (hall). 1 is electrically connected to the ball lending machine (such a pachinko machine is referred to as a “general machine”), as shown in FIG. 88(b), from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951. The command 20H to the command 2EH are prepared for the prize ball command to be transmitted to the player. The command 20H designates one prize ball, the command 21H designates two prize balls,... 15 balls are specified. The payout control board 951 controls the payout motor 834 to pay out the game balls by the designated number of prize balls.

As shown in FIG. 88(c), a command 30H is prepared as a common command for the CR machine and the general machine, and the self-check is designated in this command 30H.
By transmitting the command 30H and checking whether the ACK signal is input, the transmitting side transmits the command 30H when the ACK signal to be output as the confirmation of receipt of the command is not input from the receiving side for a predetermined period after transmitting the command. Check the connection status. In the case of the CR machine in this embodiment, the payout control board 951 confirms the connection state with the CR unit 6.

[13-2. Various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 based on the progress of the game. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits). As shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, a status indicating the type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), And a mode showing a variation of the effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits).

As shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, various commands include special figure 1 synchronization effect related, special figure 2 synchronization effect related, jackpot related, power-on, general figure synchronization effect related, ordinary electric figure effect related, notification display, status It is divided into display and other.

[13-2-1. Special figure 1 synchronization production related]
The special figure 1 tuning effect-related is based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69, and its division is, as shown in FIG. 89, the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 69. Concerning the first special symbol display 1403, it is composed of commands named special figure 1 synchronization effect start, special symbol 1 designation, special figure 1 synchronization effect end, and fluctuation state designation.
To these various commands, “A*H” is assigned as the status, and “**H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as the mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). It means that it is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The special figure 1 entrainment effect start command is for instructing the special figure entrainment effect start in the effect pattern designated by the mode, and the special symbol 1 designation command is for designating off, specific big hit, non-specific big hit. The special figure 1 entrainment effect end command is an instruction to end the special figure 1 entrainment effect, and the fluctuation state designation command is an instruction to specify the probability and the time saving state. The probabilities and short-lived states include a low-probability short-lived state that indicates a low-probability state and a short-lived state, a high-probability short-lived state that indicates a high-probability state that is a short-lived state, and a low-probability state. It is composed of a low probability non-time saving state that indicates a state that is not a time saving state, and a high probability non time saving state that indicates a high probability state that is not a time saving state (as a normal gaming state, Low probability non-time saving state is set). Here, the high-probability state is a state in which the probability of a big hit is set higher than the low-probability state (normal game state), and the short-time state is, for example, the normal symbol display 1402 shown in FIG. Compared to the non-time saving state (normal gaming state), the time for displaying symbols in a variable manner is shortened and stopped and displayed in the light emission pattern corresponding to the ordinary lottery result, so that the ordinary lottery result by the ordinary lottery described later in the predetermined time can be displayed. In addition to increasing the number of times of stop display compared to the non-time saving state, the period during which the pair of movable pieces shown in FIG. 8 is opened/closed is made longer than that in the non-time saving state (normal game state), and the period is shown in FIG. A state in which a lottery opportunity for special symbols can be obtained without reducing the number of balls held by increasing the acceptance rate (entering rate) of the game balls to the second starting opening 2004 (in other words, compared with the non-time saving state) The second starting port 2004 is configured by increasing the number of determinations as to whether to open/close the pair of movable pieces and lengthening the period of the opening/closing operation of the pair of movable pieces when opening/closing the pair of movable pieces. It is a state of increasing the acceptance rate of the game balls to (ball entry rate).

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special figure 1 tuning effect start command is sent at the start of the special symbol 1 fluctuation, the special symbol 1 designation command is sent immediately after the start of the special figure 1 tuning effect, and the special figure 1 tuning The production end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 variation time elapses (when the special symbol 1 is confirmed), and the variation state designation command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol winning information designation. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process described later.

[13-2-2. Special figure 2 synchronization performance related]
The special figure 2 tuning effect-related is based on the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 4004 shown in FIG. 69, and its division is, as shown in FIG. 89, the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 69. Concerning the second special symbol display 1405, it is composed of commands named special figure 2 synchronization effect start, special symbol 2 designation, and special figure 2 synchronization effect end. In these various commands, the status is “B*H” and the mode is “**H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number).
) Is assigned (“*” indicates a specific hexadecimal number, which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The special figure 2 entrainment effect start command is for instructing the special figure entrainment effect start in the effect pattern specified in the mode, and the special symbol 2 specifying command is for deviating, a specific jackpot, and a non-specific jackpot. The special figure 2 entrainment effect end is an instruction to end the special figure 2 entrainment effect.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special figure 2 tuning effect start command is sent at the time of starting the special symbol 2 fluctuation, the special symbol 2 designation command is sent immediately after the start of the special figure 2 tuning effect, and the special figure 2 tuning The production end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 variation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 2 is confirmed). Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-3. Jackpot related]
As shown in FIG. 89, the jackpot-related category includes jackpot opening, jackpot opening 1 Nth display, jackpot opening 1 closed display, jackpot opening 1 count display, jackpot ending, jackpot symbol display, jackpot opening , Small hit open display, small hit count display, and small hit ending command. To these various commands, “C*H” is assigned as the status, and “**H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as the mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). It means that it is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The big hit opening command is for instructing to start the big hit opening, and the big winning opening 1 opening N-th display command starts during the big winning opening 1 opening of the 1st to 16th rounds (starting opening unit 2100 shown in FIG. 8). Is to open or open the Nth round of the special winning opening 2005, and the special winning opening 1 close display command is started during closing of the large winning opening 1 (large opening of the starting opening unit 2100). It is for instructing to close or start closing the winning opening 2005 between rounds, and the special winning opening 1 count display command counts the number of 0 to 10 gaming balls (shown in FIG. 69). The number of gaming balls that entered the special winning opening 2005, which is detected by the count sensor 4005, is transmitted, the big hit ending command is an instruction to start the big hit ending, and the big hit symbol display command is the big hit. This is to instruct display of symbol information.

The small hit opening command is for instructing the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit opening display command is for starting the small hit opening (during the small hit, the big winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100 is open or The small hit count display command is for a small hit medium-large winning opening winning effect (when the game ball that entered the big winning opening 2005 during the small hit is detected by the count sensor 4005). In the small hitting ending command, a small hitting ending start is instructed.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the big hit opening command is sent at the start of the big hit opening, and the special winning opening 1 opening N-th display command is the big winning opening 1 opening of the 1st to 16th rounds (starting opening unit 2100 When the special winning opening 2005 is opened in the Nth round), the special winning opening 1 closing display command is sent when the special winning opening 1 is closed (the big winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100 is closed), The special winning opening 1 count display command is used when the special winning opening 1 is opened and when the count to the special winning opening 1 is changed (when the special winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100 is opened and the special winning opening 2005 is entered) Is detected by the count sensor 4005), the big hit ending command is sent at the start of the big hit ending, and the big hit symbol display command is when the big winning opening is opened (when the big winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100 is opened). ) Is sent to.

The small hit opening command is transmitted at the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit opening display command is transmitted when the small hit is opened (when the special winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100 is opened during the small hit). The small hit count display command is transmitted at the time of winning the small hit medium to large winning opening (when the game ball entering the big winning opening 2005 is detected by the count sensor 4005 during the small hit), and the small hit ending command is , It is sent at the start of the small hit ending. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-4. Power on]
As shown in FIG. 89, the category of power-on is composed of a command at the time of power-on and a command of the main control return destination at power-on. A status of "D*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) are assigned to these various commands ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). It means that it is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The power-on state command is for instructing the RAM clear effect start and the game state. The power-on state command is for the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 at power-on (including power-on and power-recovery when power failure or momentary power failure occurs and power is restored). Information indicating that when the operation switch 954 is operated to clear the RAM, and information at the time of power-on (including power-on, power recovery when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and power is restored) .), information indicating which of the above-mentioned low-probability time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state, low-probability non-time-saving state, and high-probability non-time-saving state (probability and time-saving state) is used for recovery. , And information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. The model code of this pachinko machine is, for example, when creating so-called Max type, Middle type, and Sweet Digi type, which game is the copyright to, and what kind of game specification (for example, probability variation occurs). And, in addition to the game specification that the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs, the game specification that the probability variation occurs in a state where the number of times the special symbol changes is limited (for example, 30 times or 70 times). (A so-called ST machine) or the like).
In other words, the model code information of the pachinko machine is the series code for specifying which type is the max type, the middle type, or the sweet digital type, which indicates the model type, and the copyright of the work. In addition to the copyright code and the game specification (for example, if the probability change occurs, the state continues until the next big hit game state occurs, as well as the probability change in the state where the number of changes of special symbols is limited. It mainly consists of a game specification code for specifying a game specification (ST machine, etc.) in which

The power-on main control return destination command instructs the return destination of the main control board 1310 itself. The power-on main control return destination command is mainly composed of information for instructing the driving state of the starting opening solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. 69 and information for instructing the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. ing.

As the transmission timing of the power-on status command and the power-on main control return destination command, when the main control board power is turned on (when power is restored, power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure) Also included). Specifically, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, when a power failure or momentary power failure is restored, a main control side power-on process described below is executed, and the peripheral control board command of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process is executed. In the transmission process, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command are transmitted.

[13-2-5. Normal figure synchronization production related]
The general figure synchronization effect-related is based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. 69, and its classification is, as shown in FIG. 89, the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 69. Concerning the device 1402, it is composed of commands named general figure synchronization effect start, general figure designation, general figure synchronization effect end, and fluctuation state specification. These various commands are assigned status "E*H" and mode "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). It means that it is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The general figure synchronization effect start command is for instructing the general figure synchronization effect start with the effect pattern specified in the mode, and the universal pattern specification command is for specifying a falling edge, a specific jackpot, or a non-specific jackpot. The figure synchronization effect end command is for instructing the end of the universal figure synchronization effect, and the variation state designation command is for instructing the probability and the time saving state. As described above, the probability and the time saving state include a low probability time saving state indicating a low probability state and a time saving state, and a high probability time saving indicating a high probability state being a time saving state. State, a low-probability non-time saving state that indicates a low-probability state that is not a short-time state, and a high-probability non-time-saving state that indicates a high-probability state that is not a short-time state (normally As a gaming state, a low probability non-time saving state is set).

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the universal figure synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the time of starting the normal symbol 1 variation, the universal symbol specification command is transmitted immediately after the start of the universal figure synchronization effect, and the universal figure synchronization effect end command is , Ordinary symbol variation time elapses (ordinary symbol confirmation time) is transmitted, and the variation state designation command is transmitted immediately after the universal symbol winning/losing information designation. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-6. Normal electric power director related]
The normal electric role effect-related relates to the pair of movable pieces shown in FIG. 8 that are opened and closed by driving the starting opening solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. 69. It consists of a command called hit opening, fuden opening display, and fugo hit ending. These various commands are assigned status "F*H" and mode "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). It means that it is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The universal figure opening command is for instructing to start the universal figure opening, and the universal battery open display command is for starting the universal battery opening (a pair of movable pieces are opened in the left-right direction by driving the starting opening solenoid 2107). The state or the time of expansion) is instructed, and the ending command per universal figure is an instruction to start ending per universal figure.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the opening command for the universal figure is transmitted at the start of the opening for the universal figure, and the opening command for the universal battery opening is issued when the universal battery is opened (a pair of movable pieces are driven by the starter solenoid 2107 to move to the left or right). The ending command per universal figure is transmitted at the start of ending per universal figure. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-7. Notification display]
As shown in FIG. 90, the notification display category is made up of commands such as winning abnormality display, connection abnormality display, disconnection/short circuit abnormality display, magnetic detection switch abnormality display, door opening, and door closing. A status of “6*H” and a mode of “**H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) are assigned to these various commands (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). It means that it is predetermined by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The prize-winning abnormality display command is issued when the game ball enters the special winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100 when the special winning opening is won other than during the big hit (conditional device is operating). Is detected by the count sensor 4005), the start of the prize abnormality notification is instructed, and the connection abnormality display command is, for example, an electrical signal in the path between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. When there is a connection abnormality, the start of connection abnormality notification is instructed, and the disconnection/short-circuit abnormality display command includes, for example, the main control board 1310, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the count sensor. When the disconnection/short circuit of the electrical connection with 4005 etc. occurs, it is an instruction to start the disconnection/short circuit abnormality display, and the magnetic detection switch abnormality display command indicates that the magnetic detection sensor 4024 shown in FIG. 69 is abnormal. When the occurrence of the above occurs, the start of the magnetic detection switch abnormality notification is instructed.

Further, the door opening command is issued by the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal (opening signal) from the door frame opening switch 618 input through the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. When the door frame 3 is in the opened state, it issues a door opening notification, and the door frame closing command is such that the door frame 3 closes the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618. When it is in the opened state, the end of the door opening notification is instructed. On the other hand, the main body frame opening command is issued to the outer frame 2 by the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal (opening signal) from the main body frame opening switch 619 input via the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. In the case where the main body frame 4 is opened, the main body frame closing command is issued, and the main body frame closing command sends the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 619. When it is in a closed state, the end of the body frame opening notification is instructed.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the prize abnormality display command is transmitted when a prize is won in the special winning opening other than during the big hit (condition device is operating), and the connection abnormality display command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951. Is sent when there is no ACK response (ACK signal) from the payout control board 951 when the command is sent to the first start port sensor 4002, the second start port sensor 4004, the count sensor 4005, etc. Any one of them is disconnected or short-circuited, and the magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is transmitted when an abnormality of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is detected. Further, the door opening command is transmitted when the door opening is detected (when the door frame 3 is in the opened state with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618), The frame closing command is transmitted when the door closing is detected (when the door frame 3 is in the closed state with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618). The body frame opening command is transmitted when the body frame opening is detected (when the body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the body frame opening switch 619). The frame closing command is transmitted when the body frame closing is detected (when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the body frame opening switch 619). Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-8. Status display]
As shown in FIG. 90, the status display section is composed of commands named frame status 1 command (corresponding to error occurrence command), error cancel navigation command (corresponding to error cancel command) and frame status 2 command. There is. A status of “7*H” and a mode of “**H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) are assigned to these various commands (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). It means that it is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command are commands each having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) transmitted from the payout control board 951, and a detailed description thereof will be given later. .. When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 951, as shown in FIG. 90, “7*H” is set. The status is set as well as the received command is set as the mode as it is. That is, when the main control MPU 1310a receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 951, it adds the additional information “7*H” to these received commands. Is shaped into a command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

The shaped frame status 1 command is sent when the power is restored, when the frame status is changed, and when the error is cleared, and the error clear navigation command is sent when the error is cleared and the frame status 2 command is created when the power is restored. , And when the frame status changes. The shaped frame state 1 command, error cancel navigation command, and frame state 2 command are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-9. Test related]
As shown in FIG. 90, the test-related section is made up of various commands named test. This test command is assigned a status of "8*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. , Which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The test command instructs various inspections of the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the peripheral control section 1511, the liquid crystal display control section 1512, the lamp drive board 4170, the motor drive board 4180, and the frame decoration shown in FIG. 72). Various boards such as the drive amplifier board 194 are inspected.

As the transmission timing of the test command, the RAM is transmitted when the main control board power is turned on and is transmitted at times other than RAM clear. Specifically, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, when a power failure or momentary power failure is restored, and when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 is operated, the main control side power-on processing described later is performed. The test command is transmitted by the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing that is executed.

[13-2-10. Other]
In the other categories, as shown in FIG. 90, starting mouth winning, fluctuation shortening operation end designation, high probability end designation, special symbol 1 storage, special symbol 2 storage, normal symbol storage, special symbol 1 storage prefetching effect, and It is composed of a command named special symbol 2 memory prefetch effect. A status of "9*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) are assigned to these various commands ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). It means that it is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The start mouth winning command is for instructing the start of the start winning effect, and the start of the effect when the game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002. , The start of the effect when the game ball enters the second start opening 2004 based on the detection signal from the second start opening sensor 4004, and the fluctuation shortening operation end designating command is It is for instructing the state transition from the shortened operating state to the fluctuation shortening non-operating state, and the high probability end designation command is for instructing the state transition from the high probability state to the low probability state, and the special symbol 1 storage command The special symbol 1 hold 0 to 4 (the game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 shown in FIG. 8 and is still used for the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400. The number of balls that have not been held (the number of holds) is to be transmitted, and the special symbol 2 storage command is 0-4 special symbols 2 held (the game ball enters the second starting opening 2004 shown in FIG. 8). The second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 conveys the number of balls not yet used in the variable display of the special symbol (reserved number), and the ordinary symbol memory command is the ordinary symbol 1 hold 0-4. In order to convey the number of balls (the number of balls that have not yet been used for the variable display of the ordinary symbols on the ordinary symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 after the game balls have passed through the gate portion 2003 shown in FIG. 8) Yes, the special symbol 1 storage prefetch effect command, before the special symbol 1 hold is used for the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400, the special symbol 1 is held in advance. Based on the first special symbol display 1403 is to instruct a pre-reading effect start to notify the advance notice of the display result, the special symbol 2 storage pre-reading effect command, the special symbol 2 hold is the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400. Before it is used for the variable display of the special symbol in the device 1405, it pre-reads and instructs the pre-reading effect start to notify the advance notice of the display result by the second special symbol display device 1405 based on the special symbol 2 hold.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the starting mouth winning command is a starting mouth winning command (when the game ball enters the first starting mouth 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting mouth sensor 4002, When a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 based on a detection signal from the starting port sensor 4004), the lower speaker 921 shown in FIG. 5 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. The change-shortening operation end designating command is sent to notify that, and the high-probability end designating command , "High probability N times" is transmitted at the end of the stop period after the fluctuation is confirmed, which has digested the high probability times (after the elapse of the outage stop period), and the special symbol 1 storage command changes the number of special symbol 1 operation holding balls When (the game ball enters the first starting port 2002, the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400 in the state that there is a pending number not yet used for variable display of the special symbol, further first start When a game ball enters the mouth 2002 and the number of holdings increases, or when the number of holdings decreases and the number of holdings decreases by using the first special symbol display device 1403 for variable display of special symbols) , Special symbol 2 storage command, when the special symbol 2 operation holding ball number change (game ball enters the second starting port 2004, the variable display of the special symbol on the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 In the state where there is a reserved number that has not been used yet, when the game ball enters the second starting port 2004 and the reserved number increases, and the special symbol changes on the second special symbol display 1405 from the reserved number. It is sent to when the number of reservations is reduced to be used for display), and the normal symbol storage command is a normal symbol 1 when the number of operating reserve balls changes (normal symbol of the function display unit 1400 when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003). In the state where there is a pending number that is not yet used in the variable display of the normal symbol on the display 1402, when the gaming ball passes through the gate section 2003 and the pending number increases, or from the pending number, the normal symbol display 1402 It is transmitted to when the number of holdings is reduced to be used for the variable display of normal symbols, and the special symbol 1 memory prefetching effect command is when the number of special symbols 1 operation holding balls increases (the game ball in the first starting opening 2002). When the number of balls entered and the number of holdings increased is transmitted, the special symbol 2 memory prefetching effect command is when the number of special symbols 2 operation holding balls increases (the number of gaming balls entering the second starting opening 2004 is the number of holdings). (When increased) will be sent. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

By the way, as described above, the starting opening winning command is, when the starting opening winning (when the game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002, or the second starting opening). When the game ball enters the second starting opening 2004 based on the detection signal from the sensor 4004), the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are mainly transmitted by voice to notify that fact. How the peripheral control board 1510 shown in 72 uses the starting opening winning command may vary depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine. For example, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a specification that the pachinko machine 1 is used not only to notify by voice from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 but also to monitor the presence or absence of fraudulent activity.
On the other hand, in other pachinko machines, there is a specification in which the peripheral control board 1510 simply receives the start opening winning command and does not notify by voice from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

[13-3. Various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board]
Next, various commands from the payout control board 951 received by the main control board 1310 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 91, the classification of various commands from the payout control board 951 is made up of commands named frame state 1, error release navigation, and frame state 2; frame state 1, error release navigation, and The priority is set in the order of the frame state 2.

The frame status 1 command (corresponding to an error occurrence command) has a ball out, full tank, stock of 50 or more, abnormal connection and CR not connected. Bit 0 (B0, "B") when ball is out Represents a bit.), the value 1 is set in the full tank, the value 1 is set in the bit 1 (B1), the value 1 is set in the bit 2 (B2) in 50 or more stocks, and the connection error occurs. The value 1 is set in bit 3 (B3), and the value 1 is set in bit 4 (B4) when CR is not connected. A value 1 is set in B5, a value 0 is set in B6, and a value 0 is set in B7 in bits 5 (B5) to 7 (B7) of the frame state 1 command.

The error clear navigation command (corresponding to the error clear command) has a ball ball, a payout detection sensor error, and a retry error. For the ball ball, a value 1 is set in bit 2 (B2). On error, bit 3 (B3) is set to the value 1, and on retry error, bit 4 (B4) is set to the value 1. Here, the “payout detection sensor error” indicates whether or not the malfunction of the payout detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. 70 has occurred.
The "retry error" indicates that the payout of unsatisfactory game balls is repeatedly performed by the retry operation. The bit (B0), the bit (B1), and the bit 5 (B5) to the bit 7 (B7) of the error canceling navigation command have a value 0 for B0, a value 0 for B1, a value 0 for B5, and a value 1 for B6. The value 0 is set in B7.

The frame state 2 command is prepared for the ball removal, and the value 1 is set to bit 0 (B0) during the ball removal. In bit 1 (B1) to bit 7 (B7) of the frame state 2 command, B1 has a value of 0, B2 has a value of 0, B3 has a value of 0, B4 has a value of 0, B5 has a value of 1, B6 has a value of 1, and The value 0 is set in B7.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the frame state 1 command is transmitted when the power is restored, when the frame state is changed, and at the time of error cancellation navigation, and the error cancellation navigation command is transmitted at the time of error cancellation navigation and the frame status 2 command. Is transmitted when the power is restored and when the frame status changes. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the command transmission process of step S558 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process described later.

[14. Various control processing of main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 to 94. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing an example of the main control side power-on process, FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the main control side power-on process continued, and FIG. 94 is an example of the main control side timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart showing. First, various random numbers used for game control will be described, and subsequently, the operation of the initial value update type counter, the main control side power-on process, and the main control side timer interrupt process will be described.

[14-1. Various random numbers]
As various random numbers used for game control, a big hit determination random number used for determining whether or not to generate a big hit game state, and whether or not to reach when no big hit game state is generated The random number for reach determination to be used for the determination, and the variation used for determining the variation display pattern of the special symbol that is variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 1403 and the second special symbol display device 1405 shown in FIG. 69. Random number for the display pattern, a big hit symbol for use in determining the big hit symbol derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 1403 and the second special symbol display device 1405 when generating the big hit game state, and this big hit Random number for determining the initial value of the big hit symbol for use in determining the initial value of the random number for the symbol, when the small hit game state is generated, it is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 1403 and the second special symbol display device 1405. Random numbers for small hit symbols to be used for determining the small hit symbols, random numbers for determining initial values for the small hit symbols to be used for determining initial values of the random numbers for the small hit symbols, and the like are prepared. In addition to these random numbers, it is used to determine an ordinary symbol per determination random number for use in determining whether to open and close the movable piece shown in FIG. 8, and to determine an initial value of this ordinary symbol per determination random number. For the normal symbol per determination for initial value determination random number, and the normal symbol variable display pattern random number for use in determining the variable display pattern of the normal symbol that is variably displayed on the normal symbol display 1402 shown in FIG. It is prepared.

Among various random numbers used for such game control, the big hit determination random number is updated by hardware, whereas other various random numbers are updated by software.

For example, the big hit determination random number is directly updated by hardware by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an built in the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. As described above, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an first sets the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a as an initial value within a predetermined numerical range. Based on (the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 77), other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed, and all the values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted. When the extraction is completed, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. To do. Such a high-speed lottery is repeatedly performed by the main-control-internal hard random number circuit 1310an, and the main-control MPU 1310a gives a big hit to the value extracted by the main-control internal hard-random number circuit 1310an at the time of obtaining the value from the main-control internal hard-random number circuit 1310an. It is set as a random number for judgment.

On the other hand, the counter for updating the random number for normal symbol determination is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later. Each time the main control side timer interrupt process is performed, the value is incremented by one and the count is incremented. This counter normally counts up from the random number for determining the initial value for determining the symbol per unit toward the maximum value, and then counts from the minimum value to the random number for determining the initial value for per symbol determination. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit determination random number, the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number is updated. Such a counter updating method is called an “initial value updating type counter”. The random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for randomly selecting a value from a fixed numerical range of a counter that updates the random number for hit symbol determination. ..

In the present embodiment, when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is operated when the power is turned on, or when the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. The checksum value (sum value) obtained by regarding the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value and calculating the total is stored in the main control side power-off process (power-off). When clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM such as when the checksum value (sum value) does not match, the random number for determining the initial value for the normal symbol is usually the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. Takes out the ID code from the built-in non-volatile RAM, and usually performs the initial value derivation process to derive the same fixed value from the fixed numerical value range of the counter which updates the random number for symbol determination based on the taken ID code. It is executed and the derived fixed value is set. That is, as for the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol, the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by the execution of the initial value deriving process is always overwritten and updated. As described above, the value set in the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol determination is derived by using the ID code, and the nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a by the manufacturer who manufactured the main control MPU 1310a. The first security measure that the ID code is not rewritten even if an external device is used when the ID code is stored in the ID code, and the initial value derivation process is executed when the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared. The second security measure of deriving the same fixed value based on the above and the two-step security measure of are taken to prevent analysis.

Here, the advantage of using the extracted ID code as the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol determination will be described from the non-volatile RAM incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a. For example, a person who attempts to illegally obtain a game ball paid out as a prize ball obtains the game board 5 by some method and disassembles the ID code stored in advance in a non-volatile RAM incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a. Even if it is possible to grasp the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the random number for normal symbol hit determination and the normal symbol hit determination value are obtained illegally, the ID code is unique for identifying the individual. Since they are provided with reference numerals, they are completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a' included in the other game board 5'. In other words, another game board 5'
In, the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the normal symbol hitting determination random number and the normal symbol hitting determination value match is completely different from that of the game board 5 obtained. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is completely useless in the other game board 5′, that is, the other pachinko machine 1′, and thus is disassembled and analyzed. Even if an instantaneous blackout is generated at each of the obtained predetermined intervals and the game ball is passed through the gate portion 2003 shown in FIG. 8 at each of the predetermined intervals, the movable piece shown in FIG. It is not possible to generate a game state in which a game ball can be received in the starting opening 2004.

[14-2. Main control side power-on processing]
First, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control MPU 1310a is configured so that the stack pointer is set to a predetermined address as a default.
This stack pointer indicates, for example, the address stacked on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the storage element (register) in use, or the return address of this routine when returning from this routine after ending the subroutine. It indicates an address stacked on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked.

Then, the main control program described above performs the main control side power-on process as shown in FIGS. 92 and 93 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. When this main control side power-on process is started, the main control program sets the RAM access permission under the control of the main control MPU 1310a (step S10). By setting this RAM access permission, the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) can be updated.

Subsequent to step S10, the main control program performs initial value setting and start setting of the main control built-in WDT 1310af shown in FIG. 69 (step S12). Here, in order to set an initial value in the main control built-in WDT 1310af that monitors whether the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a is operating normally, a watchdog timer control register (hereinafter, referred to as “ WDT control register") to set a timer setting value to activate the main control built-in WDT 1310af and reset the main control MPU 1310a. When the main control built-in WDT 1310af is activated, the main control built-in WDT 1310af starts timing, and the watchdog timer clear register (built in the main control MPU 1310a (by the timer set value) reaches the time set by the timer set value. Hereinafter, the WDT clear register will be referred to as "WDT clear register".) If the timer clear set value is not set, the main control built-in WDT 1310af forcibly resets the main control MPU 1310a. On the other hand, when the main control built-in WDT 1310af is activated and clocking is started, if the timer clear set value is set in the WDT clear register before the time counted reaches the time set by the timer set value, The time by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared, and the time is restarted. As described above, the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a operates normally by repeating the process of clearing the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af until the time set by the timer setting value is reached and restarting the time measurement. Can be monitored.

Subsequent to step S12, the main control program performs a power failure clearing process (step S14). In the electric power clear processing, first, the output of the power failure clear signal to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e shown in FIG. 78 is started. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e includes a comparator MIC21 which is a voltage comparison circuit and a D-type flip-flop MIC22. The comparator MIC21, which is a voltage comparison circuit, outputs the comparison result by comparing +24V and the reference voltage or comparing +12V and the reference voltage. This comparison result indicates that when no power failure or momentary power failure has occurred, its logic becomes HI and is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, while when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs. The logic becomes LOW and is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

In the power supply clearing process, first, the output of the power failure clear signal to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is started to start the power failure clear signal to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. This power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC, from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a, with its logic set to LOW, through the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. To be done. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can release the latched state of the D type flip-flop MIC22, and until the latched state is set, the logic input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, is applied. The signal can be inverted and output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal, and the signal from the 1Q terminal can be monitored.

Subsequently, in the electric power clearing process, a wait timer process is performed to determine whether or not the power failure notice signal is input. The voltage does not rise immediately after the power is turned on until the voltage reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when there is a power failure or an instantaneous power failure (a phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops, and when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure notification voltage, the power failure monitoring signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure notification. Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage from the time when the power is turned on to the predetermined voltage, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e inputs the power failure warning signal. Therefore, the wait timer process is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and becomes stable after the power is turned on. In the present embodiment, the waiting time (wait timer) is set to 200 milliseconds (ms). Has been done. Whether or not the power failure advance notice signal is input is determined based on the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, as the power failure advance notice signal.

If the power failure warning signal is not input even after waiting for the voltage to be higher than the power failure warning voltage and stabilized after the power is turned on, the main control program sends a power failure clear signal to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22. Stop output. Here, the power failure clear signal is a clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC, which is a clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC, via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, by setting the logic of the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a to HI. Is entered in. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can set the D type flip-flop MIC22 to the latched state. The D type flip-flop MIC22 outputs a power failure notice signal from the output terminal 1Q terminal when the state in which the logic is LOW is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal thereof is latched.

Subsequent to step S14, the main control program sets a state in which a RAM clear process for initializing the main control internal RAM (game storage unit) can be executed for a predetermined time after the power is turned on (when the game side power is turned on). Operation control means). Specifically, the main control program first determines whether or not the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is operated (step S16). In this determination, the main control program inputs an error cancellation navigation command (first error cancellation command) to the main control MPU 1310a based on an operation signal (detection signal) associated with the operation of the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951. It is done depending on whether or not it has been done. Based on the logical value of the operation signal, the main control program determines that it does not instruct to clear the RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is HI, and operates the operation switch 954. On the other hand, when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is LOW, it is determined that the instruction is to clear the RAM and it is determined that the operation switch 954 is operated.

In step S16, the main control program sets the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG when the operation switch 954 is operated (step S18). On the other hand, the main control program sets the value 0 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG when the operation switch 954 is not operated in step S16 (step S20). That is, the main control program can execute a RAM clearing process for initializing the RAM (that is, the main control internal RAM (game storage unit)) built in the main control MPU 1310a for a predetermined time after the power is turned on. State (game control side power-on operation control means). The RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG described above indicates whether or not to erase the game information related to the game such as the probability variation and the unpaid prize balls stored in the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) of the main control MPU 1310a. It is a flag that indicates and is set to a value of 1 when erasing the game information and a value of 0 when the game information is not erased. The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in step S18 and step S20 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

Subsequent to step S18 or step S20, the main control program performs wait time standby processing (step S22). In this wait time standby process, the system for performing the drawing control of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 72 is activated (boot. I'll wait. In this embodiment, 2.5 seconds (s) is set as the waiting time (boot timer) until booting.

Subsequent to step S22, the main control program determines whether or not a power failure advance notice signal is input (step S24). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut down, or when the power is interrupted or momentarily stopped, when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure notification voltage, the power failure notification signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as the power failure notification. The determination in step S24 is made based on this power failure notice signal. When the power outage notice signal is input in the determination in step S24, the main control program returns to the determination in step S24 again and repeats the determination in step S24 as long as the power outage notice signal is continuously input. As a result, the timer clear set value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af activated in step S12, and the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared and the time measurement is restarted. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. After that, the main control program performs this main control side power-on process again under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. A detailed description will be given later of the point that the determination in step S24 is performed subsequent to the wait time waiting process in step S22.

When the power failure notice signal is not input in the determination in step S24, the main control program determines whether or not the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 (step S26). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the game information is erased and a value of 0 when the game information is not erased. When the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 in step S26, that is, when the game information is not erased, a checksum is calculated (step S28). This checksum regards the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value and calculates the total thereof.

Following step S28, the main control program determines that the calculated checksum value (sum value) is the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control-side power-off processing (power-off) described later. It is determined whether they match (step S30). When they match, the main control program determines whether the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S32). This backup flag BK-FLG stores game information, a checksum value (sum value), and game backup information such as the value of the backup flag BK-FLG in the main control built-in RAM in main control side power-off processing to be described later. It is a flag indicating whether or not it has been done, and is set to a value of 1 when the main control-side power-off processing has been normally completed, and a value of 0 when the main-control-side power-off processing has not been normally completed. In the inspection process of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after being manufactured for inspection, the calculation of the checksum in step S28 and the determination in step S30 are performed. , Will be described later in detail.

When the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 in step S32, that is, when the main control-side power-off processing is normally completed, the main control program sets the work area of the main control internal RAM as the power recovery time ( Step S34). In this setting, the power recovery information is read from the ROM built in the main control MPU 1310a (that is, the main control built-in ROM), and the power recovery information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. Thereby, the game information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Note that "power recovery" refers to a state in which the power is turned on from a state in which the power is cut off, a state in which power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure, and fraudulent means (for example, a fraudulent person puts on the hem of an arm). A state in which the main control board 1310 is irradiated with a high frequency from a hidden high frequency output device) to reset the main control MPU 1310a itself and then returned is also included.

Following step S34, the main control program sets the backup flag BK-FLG to the value 0 (step S36). As a result, the game information, the value of the checksum (sum value), etc. are changed by performing various processes thereafter, so that the main control side power-off process, which will be described later, is normally terminated and the backup flag BK- If the value 1 is not set in FLG, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM will be cleared, as will be described later.

On the other hand, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S26, that is, when the game information is erased, or when the checksum value (sum value) does not match in step S30. , Or when the backup flag BK-FLG is not value 1 (value 0) in step S32, that is, when the power-off process on the main control side has not been normally terminated, the main control program executes the entire main control internal RAM. The area is cleared (step S38). That is, the main control program is executing the game control side RAM clear processing triggered by the input of the detection signal accompanying the operation of the operation switch 954 described above (payout control side power-on operation control means). Specifically, the main control program is executed by writing the value 0 to the main control built-in RAM. Alternatively, the main control program may read and set a predetermined value from the ROM with built-in main control as an initial value. Further, the main control MPU 1310a, the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is for instructing the RAM clear, when deleting the game information, when the thumb value does not match, or when the main control side power off processing When not normally completed, the unique ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is taken out, and the fixed numerical value range of the counter for updating the random number per symbol normally based on the taken out ID code. Always perform the initial value derivation process that derives the same fixed value from, and set this fixed value to the random number for determining the initial value for the normal symbol per determination, which is used to determine the initial value of the above random number for the ordinary symbol. To do.

Following step S38, the main control program sets the work area of the main control internal RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is performed by reading the initial information from the ROM with built-in main control and setting this initial information in the work area of the RAM with built-in main control.

Following step S36 or step S40, the main control program carries out interrupt initialization (step S42). This setting sets the interrupt cycle when the main control side timer interrupt process described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

Subsequent to step S42, the main control program performs serial communication initialization (step S44). Here, various serial input/output ports built into the main control MPU 1310a (for example, serial input/output ports (reception channel and transmission channel) for the payout control board 951 and serial input/output ports (reception channel and transmission channel for the peripheral control board 1510). ), the communication serial speed prescaler and the parity presence/absence are set, and the transmission serial port control register is set to initialize the transmission circuit and set transmission permission.

Subsequent to step S44, the main control program performs test signal output port initialization setting (step S46). Here, in a test facility of a gaming machine, a test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various inspection information is initialized (set to OFF data output) when the power is turned on.

Subsequent to step S46, the main control program sets the activation of the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an shown in FIG. 69 (step S48). Here, a hard random number control register built in the main control MPU 1310a for updating the big hit determination random number, which is used for determining whether or not to generate the big hit game state among the various random numbers related to the game, by hardware. In addition to performing settings such as latching and obtaining a random number, the activation of the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an is set in the hard random number setting register. When the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an is activated by these settings, it is predetermined at a high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a (clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 77). Extract other values in the numerical range one after another without duplication, and once all values in the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, again extract one value in the predetermined numerical range, Based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted at high speed one after another without duplication. The main control MPU 1310a outputs a latch signal to the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an when acquiring a random number (random number value) from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an, and the main control when the latch signal is input. The random number (random number value) extracted by the built-in hard random number circuit 1310an is acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a sets the acquired random number value as a big hit determination random number.

Subsequent to step S48, the main control program sets the reservation of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, in order to notify that power has been turned on (power recovery) based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control internal RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control internal RAM in step S34, FIG. The power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command classified into the power-on shown in (4) are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the game information may be read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to the game information may be stored. is there. In such a case, first, after completion of transmission of various commands according to game information, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command are transmitted. These commands are transmitted in the main control side timer interrupt process described later. It should be noted that a detailed description will be given later of the point that the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is performed in step S50.

Subsequent to step S50, the main control program performs interrupt permission setting (step S52). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process described later is repeatedly performed every 4 ms, that is, the interrupt cycle set in step S42.

Subsequent to step S52, the main control program outputs an error release navigation command associated with the operation of the operation switch 954 (operation switch) when a predetermined time has passed since the power was turned on, that is, when the main processing on the main side is started. Execution of the game control side RAM clear processing triggered by the reception will be restricted (normal time operation control means). As described above, the main control program uses the concept of time sharing to detect the detection signal input in accordance with the operation of the operation switch 954, as described above, for the error release navigation command for a predetermined time from the power-on time. RAM clear processing is executed upon input (game control side power-on operation control means), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, execution of the RAM clear processing is restricted even if the error clear navigation command is input ( The game control side normal operation control means) is handled as a release switch for releasing the error notification associated with the error that has occurred. That is, the operation switch 954 (error canceling unit), which was originally supposed to be used for canceling the error that occurred in the payout operation, is used as the game storage unit instead of the power-on for a predetermined time. Of the main control built-in RAM (and a payout control built-in RAM as a payout storage unit described later) is caused to function as an operation unit for executing a RAM clearing process for starting the initialization, or after a lapse of the predetermined time, a game is played. It can be made to function as an operation unit for canceling an error that has occurred in the ball payout operation.

Next, the main control program determines whether or not the power failure notice signal is input (step S54). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut down, or when the power is interrupted or momentarily stopped, when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure notification voltage, the power failure notification signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as the power failure notification. The determination in step S54 is made based on this power failure notice signal.

When no power failure notice signal is input in step S54, the main control program performs a non-winning random number updating process (step S56). In this non-win/win random number updating process, the reach determination random number, the variable display pattern random number, the big hit symbol initial value determining random number, the small hit symbol initial value determining random number, and the like are updated. As described above, in the non-winning random number updating process, the random numbers that are not involved in the winning/judging determination (big hit determination) are updated by software. In addition, the random number per normal symbol, the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol determination, the random number for normal symbol variation display pattern, and the like described above are also updated by this non-winning random number updating process.

Following step S56, the process returns to step S54 again, and the main control program determines whether or not there is an input of the power outage notice signal. Then, step S54 to step S56 are repeated. The process of steps S54 to S56 is referred to as "main control side main process".

On the other hand, when the power failure notice signal is input in step S54, the main control program sets the interrupt prohibition (step S58). By this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process described later is not performed, writing to the main control internal RAM is prevented, and rewriting of game information is protected.

Following step S58, the main control program starts outputting the power failure clear signal (step S60). Here, the same processing as the processing that started outputting the power failure clear signal in the power failure clearing processing in step S14 is performed. Accordingly, the main control program can release the latched state of the D type flip-flop MIC22 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a.

Subsequent to step S60, the main control program is the starting port solenoid 2107, the attacker solenoid 2108, the first special symbol display device 1403, the second special symbol display device 1405, and the first special reserved number display device 1404 shown in FIG. , The second special reserved number display 1406, the normal symbol display 1402, the normal symbol storage display 1188, the status display 1401, the round display 1407 and the like are stopped the drive signal output (step S62).

Subsequent to step S62, the main control program calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum regards the game information in the work area of the main control internal RAM as a numerical value, and excludes the storage area of the above-mentioned checksum value (sum value) and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG, and calculates the total.

Following step S64, the main control program sets the backup flag BK-FLG to the value 1 (step S66). This completes the storage of the game backup information.

Following step S66, the main control program sets the RAM access prohibition (step S68). This RAM access prohibition setting prevents access to the main control built-in RAM (game storage section), so that the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game storage section) can be prevented from being updated.

Following step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af started in step S12, the time count by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared, and the time measurement is restarted. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. After that, the main control program performs this main control side power-on process again under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The process of steps S58 to S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power-off process".

The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a) is reset when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, and the main control side power-on process is performed by subsequent power recovery.

In step S30, it is checked whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal, and in step S32, whether or not the main control side power-off process is normally ended. Are inspecting. In this way, by double checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information is stored by fraud.

Here, description will be given of the point that the determination of the presence or absence of the power failure advance notice signal in step S24 is performed after the wait time standby process in step S22. First, regarding the problem in the case where the presence or absence of the power failure warning signal is not determined in step S24, that is, when the wait time standby process in step S22 is followed by the determination of the value of the RAM clear flag in step S26 and the subsequent process is performed Described below are the problems.

As described above, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 when the power from the pachinko island facility is cut off due to the power failure or the instantaneous power failure. The electric charge is applied as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after a power failure or a momentary blackout occurs. In other words, even when the power from the pachinko island equipment is cut off due to a momentary power failure or power failure, the electric charge charged to the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as +5 V, so that the power from the pachinko island equipment is reduced. The main control-side power-off process can be completed within a period of about 7 ms after the power is cut off. This is because when a player is playing a game, that is, while performing main control side main processing or main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, a power outage or momentary interruption occurs and the pachinko island equipment When the power supply is cut off, the main control side power supply cutoff process can be surely completed.

However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, in the wait time standby process of step S22 at the time of power recovery, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 72 are displayed. Immediately before the waiting time (boot timer: 2.5 seconds is set in the present embodiment) until the system for performing the drawing control of the device 460 is activated (booted), and immediately before the waiting time is reached. Then, if a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, the charge charged in the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 as +5 V is applied to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a as +5 V, but within a period of about 7 ms, step S42 In step S52, the interrupt initial setting is performed, and then, in step S52, the interrupt permission setting is performed, so that the main control side timer interrupt process described later is performed and the main control side RAM is updated even if the content of the main control internal RAM is updated. In some cases, the main control side power-off process in the power-on process cannot be completed. For this reason, the value when the checksum is calculated based on the content of the RAM with built-in main control is not stored, and the main control side power-on process is started again when power is restored.

Then, at the time of power recovery this time, the main control side power-on process is started, the wait time standby process of step S22 is completed without the occurrence of an instantaneous power failure or a power failure, and then, in step S28, the main control built-in RAM When the value calculated as the checksum based on the contents of is compared with the value stored in the RAM with built-in main control immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure, the checksum value should match. Instead, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared in step S38. In other words, when the power is restored, the operation switch 954 is operated by the hall clerk or the like, and the information stored in the main control built-in RAM is forcibly erased (cleared) even if there is no intention of the hall clerk to clear the RAM. There is a problem that it will be done.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process of determining whether or not the power outage notice signal is input is provided as step 24, and when the power outage notice signal is input, Returning to the determination of step S24 again, the determination of step S24 is repeated as long as the power failure advance notice signal continues to be input. As a result, the timer clear set value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af activated in step S12, and the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared and the time measurement is restarted. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. Although the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value in step S18 or step S20 before the wait time standby process of step S22 is performed, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to the main value as described above. Since it is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU 1310a, even if the RAM access permission is set in step S10, the content of the main control internal RAM (game information) is not changed at all.

As described above, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not the power failure notice signal is input is provided as step 24, and when the power failure notice signal is input (that is, the step When the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process of S22 (when determined by the determination of step S24), the process returns to the determination of step S24 again, and as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input, By repeating the determination in step S24, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can be forcibly reset and the main control board 1310 can be restarted, so that the game can proceed. It is not possible to prevent the game information from being updated, and the checksum calculation result does not fluctuate. Accordingly, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, when restarted, determines that the checksum calculation result of step S28 and the checksum calculation and storage value of step S64 match. Therefore, the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure stored and retained in the main control built-in RAM is not initialized. Therefore, at the time of power recovery, it is possible to prevent the game information immediately before the occurrence of a momentary power failure or a power failure from being initialized.

Immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not the power failure notice signal is input is provided as step 24, and when the power failure notice signal is not input (that is, in step S22). When it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is not shut off after waiting in the wait time standby process), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is performing a game while the pachinko machine is in progress. Even if the power supply to 1 is cut off, the power supply by the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 is supplied to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the backup processing for storing the game information according to the progress of this game. Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is capable of completing the main control side power-off process constituted by the steps S58 to S68 and the infinite loop, the main control MPU 1310a main When the control MPU 1310a is restarted, the checksum calculation result in step S28 matches the checksum calculation result in the backup process (that is, the calculated checksum value in step S64). Since the determination is made, the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure stored and held in the main control built-in RAM is not initialized. That is, the main control board 1310 can be activated by being restored to the game information immediately before the occurrence of a momentary power failure or a power failure.

Further, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that the power failure advance notice signal is input, the main control built-in WDT 1310af forcibly resets the main control MPU 1310a to cause the contents of the main control built-in RAM to be reset. While the main control side power-off processing can be restarted without updating at all, on the other hand, immediately after the wait time standby processing of step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that the power failure advance notice signal is not input, As described above, it is possible to surely complete the main control side power-off process within the "power-supply securing period during momentary power failure or power failure" of about 7 ms by hardware. That is, in the present embodiment, when the power supply from the pachinko island facility is cut off due to a momentary power failure or a power failure during the power-on process at the time of main control side power recovery, the main control MPU 1310a The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 is applied to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence of the power failure or the instantaneous blackout. Therefore, in the case where the main control side power-off process cannot be completed within the “instantaneous power interruption or power supply securing period” of about 7 ms by the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, the wait time waiting process of step S22 is performed. Immediately after that, in step 24, it is determined whether or not the power outage notice signal is input. When the power outage notice signal is input, the process returns to the determination in step S24 again, and as long as the power outage notice signal continues to be input, step S24 By repeating the above determination, the timer clear set value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af activated in step S12, and the time count by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared and the time is reset again. Since it becomes impossible to start timing, the main control built-in WDT 1310af can forcibly reset the main control MPU 1310a. Since the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af by such software, a step after step S24 (specifically, interrupt initialization is performed in step S42, and then in step S52). It is possible to prevent the contents (game information) of the main control internal RAM from being updated by blocking the progress to the control flow of setting the interrupt permission and starting the main control side timer interrupt processing described later). Adopted the mechanism. In this way, when the power from the pachinko island equipment is cut off due to a power outage or momentary power failure, the contents covered by the main control internal RAM (game information) are not changed at all by software and the main control side power supply. The content of the main control built-in RAM is configured by dividing it into two parts, that is, the part covered by the hardware so that the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information) are not changed at all by surely completing the disconnection process ( It is possible to reliably prevent the game information) from being changed.

Next, description will be made regarding the fact that the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is performed in step S50. In step S50, as described above, based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control internal RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control internal RAM in step S34, it is indicated that the power is turned on (power recovery). For transmission, the power-on state command and power-on main control return destination command classified into power on shown in FIG. 89 are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM. As described above, the power-on main control return destination command is mainly composed of information indicating the driving state of the starting opening solenoid 2107 and information indicating the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. There is. Here, when the power-on main control return destination command does not include the information indicating the driving state of the starting opening solenoid 2107 and the information indicating the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. 69. The problem in step S50, that is, the problem when the reservation of the command to be transmitted when the power-on main control return destination command is turned on in step S50 is not set will be described.

For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 is controlling the display of the big hit game state screen (for example, the big hit game effect screen) in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 shown in FIG. 8, the main control board 1310 is displayed. When the attacker solenoid 2108 is driven to open the special winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8 by the opening/closing member 2107, a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, and then the power is restored. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in S34, the attacker is restored to the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs. The drive of the solenoid 2108 is started, and the special winning opening 2005 shifts from the state in which it is closed by the opening/closing member 2107 to the state in which it is opened.

However, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and returns when power is restored, so that a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. Then, when power is restored after that, the peripheral control board 1510 can return based on the probability and the shortened state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is generating a big hit game state as a game state, if a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs and then power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 causes the main control board 1310 to be restored. Based on the probability and the time-saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from, even if the screen can be displayed and returned in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the probability and the time-saving state, It is not possible to display at all which round of the big hit game state. That is, for example, a game ball enters the special winning opening 2005 and is detected by the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. 69, and a special winning opening 1 count display command which conveys the number of balls of the game ball entering the special winning opening 2005 is displayed. Even if the main control board 1310 transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 receives the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 is a game ball that has entered the special winning opening 2005 according to the probability and the time saving state. Even if the number can be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, it cannot be displayed at all which round of the big hit game state (that is, what round).

In such a situation, the main control board 1310 stops driving the attacker solenoid 2108 and opens the special winning opening 2005 by the opening/closing member 2107, for example, when finishing four rounds (fourth round) of the big hit game state. From the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control of a special winning opening 1 closing display command for instructing to shift from the closed state to the closed state (that is, closing start of the special winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100). When transmitting to the board 1510 and the main control board 1310 starts the 5th round of the big hit game state (the 5th round), the drive of the attacker solenoid 2108 is started and the special winning opening 2005 is closed by the opening/closing member 2107. From the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, a special winning opening opening fifth display command for instructing to shift from the state to the open state (that is, opening of the fifth round of the special winning opening 2005) is transmitted. To do. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches the screen for starting the 5th round of the big hit game state from the screen corresponding to the above-mentioned probability and time saving state and displays it in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Becomes

In addition, for example, a screen informing that a game state in which a game ball can be received in the second starting opening 2004 is advantageous to the player (for example, a message that the movable piece is expanded) is displayed. The main control board 1310 drives the starting opening solenoid 2107 while the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 so that the pair shown in FIG. When a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs while the movable piece of is being expanded in the left-right direction, and then power is restored, the main control board 1310 causes the main control built-in RAM in step S34 to save the work area. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting, the driving state of the starting opening solenoid 2107 is started by restoring to the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure occurs. The movable piece moves from a state in which the movable piece rises in a substantially vertical state to a state in which the movable piece is expanded in the left-right direction.

However, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and returns when power is restored, so that a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. Then, when power is restored thereafter, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is in the game state and the game ball can be received in the second starting port 2004 and the game state is advantageous to the player, a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs. Then, when power is restored after that, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the screen according to the probability and the time saving state based on the probability and the time saving state instructed by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery. Even if it can be displayed and returned to the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, a game state in which a game ball can be received in the second starting opening 2004 is brought into a game state advantageous to the player. The peripheral control board 1510 cannot display the screen indicating that the game board side effect display device 1600 is displaying at all. For this reason, the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine is surprised that a momentary power failure or a power failure has occurred, and when the power is restored, the game ball is received at the second starting opening 2004 immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure. In some cases, it may be forgotten that it is a possible game state, and in such a case, the game state at the time of power recovery is returned to the game state in which the game ball can be received in the second starting opening 2004. Nevertheless, the screen for instructing the game (that is, the screen for instructing to enter the game ball into the second starting opening 2004) is not displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 when the power is restored. Therefore, there is also a problem that the player does not know what kind of game he or she plays.

As described above, in the above-mentioned two examples, there is a problem that the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure cannot be promptly restored after the power restoration. In other words, a player sitting in front of a pachinko machine mistakenly thinks that the system of the pachinko machine appears to be in a lumped state, a so-called frozen state, and fails when a power failure occurs or a power failure occurs after that. There was a problem.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is turned on (in addition to the case where the power is turned on, it also includes the time when the power is restored and power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure). In order to transmit the power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on state command and power-on main control return destination command classified into the power-on shown in FIG. 89. Are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Then, these commands are transmitted in the main control side timer interrupt process described later.

Thereby, the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310, for example, in the above example, in the four rounds of the big hit game state, When a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs and then power is restored, the drive of the attacker solenoid 2108 is started and the special winning opening 2005 is released from the state closed by the opening/closing member 2107 as the destination of the main control board 1310. Since it is possible to notify the peripheral control board 1510 of the transition to the state in which it is in the state, the peripheral control board 1510 has a screen that specifies that it is four rounds of the big hit game state (that is, a screen showing how many rounds it is). ) Cannot be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, but in the big hit game state, the drive of the attacker solenoid 2108 is started and the special winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening/closing member 2107. A screen that tells that there is something (for example, a screen that tells the player that "It is a big hit. The big winning opening is open. Please play the game ball so that it enters the big winning opening.") It is possible to display the game board side effect display device 1600 in the display area and instruct the player who sits in front of the pachinko machine to play the game ball into the special winning opening 2005 after the power is restored. For example, in the above-described example, in the state in which the game ball can be received in the second starting opening 2004 and the game state is advantageous to the player, a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, and then the game is restored. When the power is turned on, a screen indicating that the drive of the starting opening solenoid 2107 is started and the pair of movable pieces is expanded in the left-right direction as a return destination of the main control board 1310 (for example, " The peripheral control board 1510 displays the message "The game is played so that the game ball enters the lower start opening." is displayed by the peripheral control board 1510 on the game board side effect display device 1600. It is possible to instruct the player, who is seated in front of the pachinko machine, to enter the game ball into the second starting opening 2004 after the power is restored. This allows the main control board 1310 side to finely instruct the return destination of the peripheral control board 1510 when the power is restored after an instantaneous power failure or power failure. Therefore, it is possible to quickly return to the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after the power is restored. In other words, a player sitting in front of a pachinko machine mistakenly thinks that the system of the pachinko machine appears to be in a lumped state, a so-called frozen state, and fails when a power failure occurs or a power failure occurs after that. Can be prevented.

Next, in the main control board inspecting step which is an inspection step of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, the checksum of step S28 is checked. The calculation and the determination in step S30 will be described. In the main control board inspecting process, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, the main control board 1310 is configured by the above-described backup processing of steps S58 to S68 and an infinite loop. Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has never executed the control-side power-off processing, even if the checksum based on the contents of the main control internal RAM is calculated in step S28, In the comparison judgment, the checksum values should not match, and the entire area of the main control internal RAM must be cleared in step S38. As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on is made in step S50, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command classified into the power-on shown in FIG. 89 are created. By storing the transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, only two commands, that is, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command are transmitted information as the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. It will be in the state stored in. In these commands, a power-on state command is transmitted first, and then a power-on main control return destination command is transmitted in a main control timer interrupt process described later. Utilizing this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, the main control board 1310 sends a power-on state command as the first command. It will be transmitted to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process.

By the way, as described above, the power-on state command is shown in FIG. 70 at the time of power-on (in addition to the case of power-on, also at the time of power recovery when power failure or momentary power failure occurs and power is restored). Information indicating that when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in the figure is operated to perform the RAM clear, and when the power is turned on (in addition to the case where the power is turned on, a power failure or an instantaneous power failure occurs and the power is reduced). (Including when power is restored), in any of the above-mentioned low-probability time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state, low-probability non-time-saving state, and high-probability non-time-saving state (probability and time-saving state) It is composed of information instructing whether or not to perform and information indicating a model code of the pachinko machine. Here, there will be described a problem when the power-on state command does not include information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine.

As described above, the model code of the pachinko machine refers to the copyright of which work when the so-called max type, middle type, and sweet digital type are respectively created as the pachinko machine 1 (to be precise, the main control board 1310). What kind of game specifications (for example, if probability changes occur, in addition to the game specifications that the state continues until the next big hit game state occurs, the number of times the special symbol changes is limited (for example, It is possible to specify whether or not the game specification (so-called ST machine) etc.) in which the probability variation occurs after being played 30 times or 70 times).

In the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured, the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of a plurality of types of works may be mixed.
Then, the worker on the production line is the main copyright holder for whichever of the copyrights of the multiple types of works (for example, the copyrights of the works of movie A, movie B, drama C, movie D, comic E, and comic F). It is unclear whether the main control board 1310 is flowing to the manufacturing line to manufacture the control board 1310, or the main control board for one of the copyrights of a plurality of types of works (for example, the copyright of the work called movie D). Even though the main control board 1310 is flowing to the manufacturing line to manufacture 1310, the main control board 1310 is used to manufacture the main control board 1310 for another copyright (for example, the copyright of the work called Manga F). There are also beliefs and misunderstandings that it is flowing to the production line. For this reason, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of a plurality of types of works are mixed, the worker of the manufacturing line is It is not possible to confirm which product copyright the manufactured main control board 1310 belongs to, and even for the copyright of the same product, which model type (max type, middle type, sweet digital type) It is also not possible to confirm whether the game specification is a type or not, and what kind of game specification (a game specification or ST machine in which if a probability change occurs, that state continues until the next big hit game state occurs). Accordingly, when the main control board 1310 is mixed in the production line of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 when the main control board 1310 is manufactured, the main control boards for the copyrights of the plurality of kinds of works are mixed. 1310 is mixed and sent to the game board assembly line for attaching the main control board 1310 to the game board 5. Therefore, the operator of the game board assembly line may attach the main control board 1310, which does not correspond to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work, to the game board 5. As a result, there is a problem that the production efficiency of the game board 5 is reduced.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the model code of the pachinko machine is used when the main control board 1310 is turned on (in addition to the case where the power is turned on, the time when the power is restored and the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure). In order to transmit a power-on state command including information indicating the power-on state to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command classified into the power-on shown in FIG. 89. Are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Then, these commands are transmitted in the main control side timer interrupt process described later.

As a result, the operator of the manufacturing line of the manufacturer who manufactures the pachinko machine 1 turns on the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspection step, which is the inspection step of the manufacturing line, so that the inspection device is controlled by the main control board 1310. Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from, that is, configuring the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, described above, Max type indicating the model type, middle type, And, a series code for specifying which type is the sweet digital type, a copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and a game specification (for example, if probability fluctuation occurs, the next big hit game state In addition to the game specification that the state continues until it occurs, a game specification code for specifying the game specification (ST machine, etc.) in which the probability change occurs in the state where the number of changes of the special symbol is limited, Based on the above, by visually observing the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor, it is possible to determine which work the copyright of the main control board 1310 belongs to, and also to determine the copyright of the same work. What kind of model type (max type, middle type, and sweet digital type), and what kind of game specifications (if probability change occurs, that state will continue until the next big hit game state occurs) It is also possible to determine whether it is a game specification or ST machine). As a result, in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when manufacturing the main control board 1310, even if the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of a plurality of types of works are mixed, the main control board inspecting step of the manufacturing line is performed. By visually checking the inspection monitor, the operator can accurately determine the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specification. Can be sent to the game board assembly line. The operator of the game board assembly line can securely attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board not corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work. It is possible to prevent the production efficiency of the game board 5 from decreasing due to the work of attaching the 1310 to the game board 5. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the production efficiency of the game board 5.

[14-3. Main control timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control side timer interrupt process will be described. This main control side timer interrupt process is repeated every interrupt period (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on process shown in FIGS.

When the main control timer interrupt processing is started, in the main control board 1310, the main control program switches the register bank under the control of the main control MPU 1310a as shown in FIG. 94 (step S100). The general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a has two register banks including a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main process in the main control side power-on process described above, while the first register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt process of this routine. In step S100, the second register bank is used in the main control-side timer interrupt processing, which is the present routine. Therefore, from the first register bank used in the main control main processing in the main control-side power-on processing Switch the register bank to the register tank. In this embodiment, when the main control side timer interrupt process, which is the present routine, is started, it is not necessary to save each register to the stack.

Following step S100, the main control program performs timer subtraction processing (step S102). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time when the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 are turned on in accordance with the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and special electric auditors product control process described later, the ordinary state described later. In addition to the time when the normal symbol display 1402 lights up in accordance with the normal symbol variation display pattern determined by the symbol and the normal electric auditors product control process, various commands transmitted by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) are issued to the payout control board 951. When the payer ACK signal for notifying that the signal has been normally received is input, time management such as the ACK signal input determination time set as the determination condition is performed.
Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interruption period is set to 4 ms, so the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4 ms each time this timer subtraction process is performed. Then, the variation time of the variation display pattern or the normal symbol variation display pattern is accurately measured when the subtraction result becomes the value 0.

In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. The ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms each time this timer subtraction process is performed, and the ACK signal input determination time is accurately measured because the subtraction result becomes the value 0. The various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Subsequent to step S102, the main control program performs a switch input process (step S104). In this switch input processing, various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control internal RAM. Specifically, this main control program is, for example, detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 4020, 4020 shown in FIG. 69 for detecting the game balls that have entered the general winning openings 2001, 201 shown in FIG. The detection signal from the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. 69 that detects the game ball that entered the special winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8 and the game ball that entered the first starting opening 2002 shown in FIG. 8 are detected. The detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69, the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 4004 shown in FIG. 69 which detects the game ball entering the second starting opening 2004 shown in FIG. , A detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. 69 that detects the game ball that has passed through the gate unit 2003 shown in FIG. 8 and a magnetic detection sensor 4024 that detects fraudulent activity using the magnet shown in FIG. 69. The detection signal and the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 951 which informs that the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 69 has normally received the prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control processing which will be described later are read and input information Is stored in the input information storage area. In addition, a detection signal from a first starting port sensor 4002 that detects a game ball that has entered the first starting port 2002, a detection signal from a second starting port sensor 4004 that detects a game ball that has entered the second starting port 2004. When each of the signals is read, the corresponding starting opening winning command shown in FIG. 90 and corresponding thereto is stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information. That is, when there is a detection signal from the first starting mouth sensor 4002, the corresponding starting mouth winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and there is a detection signal from the second starting mouth sensor 4004. Then, the starting mouth winning command corresponding thereto is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area.

In this embodiment, the detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020 that detect the game balls that entered the general winning openings 2001 and 201, and the count sensor 4005 that detects the game balls that entered the large winning openings 2005. Detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002 that detects the game ball that entered the first starting opening 2002, a second starting opening sensor 4004 that detects the game ball that entered the second starting opening 2004 The detection signal from the gate sensor 2003 and the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 that detects the game ball that has passed through the gate unit 2003 are first read as the first time when this switch input process is started, and are read for a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs). 2) After the elapse of time, it is read again as the second time. Then, the result read in the second time is compared with the result read in the first time. It is determined whether or not some of the comparison results have the same result. If the result is not the same, it is read again as the third time, and the result read at the third time is compared with the result read at the second time. It is again determined whether or not some of the comparison results have the same result. If the result is not the same, it is read again as the fourth time, and the result read at the fourth time is compared with the result read at the third time. It is again determined whether or not some of the comparison results have the same result. If the result is not the same, it is treated as if there is no game ball.

As described above, in the switch input processing, the main control program outputs the detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 4020, 4020, the count sensor 4005, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003. Due to the two readings of the first reading to the third reading, and the second reading to the fourth reading, a total of two readings are performed. Since it is possible to avoid erroneous detection, detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 4020, 4020, the count sensor 4005, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003 are detected. The reliability can be increased.

Subsequent to step S104, the main control program performs a winning random number updating process (step S106). In the winning random number updating process, the above-described big hit symbol random number and small hit symbol random number are updated. In addition to these random numbers, the big hit symbol initial value determination random number, which is updated in the non-winning random number updating process of step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. 93, And the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol is also updated. The random numbers for initial value determination for the big hit symbols and the random numbers for initial value determination for the small hit symbols are respectively updated in the main control side main process and the main control side timer interrupt process to further enhance the randomness. .. On the other hand, since the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers involved in the winning determination (big hit determination), each time the counter random number update process is performed, each counter counts up. In addition, the random number for normal symbol hit determination and the random number for initial value determination for normal symbol hit determination described above are also updated by this winning random number update process.

For example, the counter for updating the random number per ordinary symbol is an initial value update type counter as described above, and is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and the minimum value The range from the maximum value to the maximum value is incremented by incrementing the value by one each time the main control timer interrupt processing is performed. The normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number is counted up toward the maximum value, and then the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number is counted up. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol per hit determination random number, the big hit determination initial value determination random number is updated by this winning random number update process. The random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for randomly selecting a value from a fixed numerical range of a counter that updates the random number for hit symbol determination. ..

In the present embodiment, the random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are set in step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. The winning random number updating process and the winning random number updating process of step S106 in the main control side timer interrupt process, which is the present routine, are respectively updated. However, each time the interrupt timer occurs, the processing time of this routine becomes uneven and If the number of executions of the non-winning random number updating process of step S56 becomes random by repeatedly executing the main control side main process within the remaining time until the interrupt timer of occurs, a big hit symbol initial value determining random number , And the small hitting symbol initial value determining random number may be updated only in the non-winning random number updating process of step S56.

Following step S106, the main control program performs prize ball control processing (step S108). In this prize ball control processing, the input information is read out from the above-mentioned input information storage area, the prize ball command shown in FIG. 88 for paying out the game ball based on this input information is created, and the prize ball is paid out. When the planned number of game balls has reached 10 balls, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set in order to notify that fact, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area as the output information. The self-check command shown in FIG. 88 for confirming the connection state between the control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is created. Then, the created prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 951 as main pay serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the special winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8, when a game ball is entered, a prize ball command for paying out 15 balls as a prize ball is created and the number of game balls planned to be paid out as a prize ball. Since the number of balls has reached 10 balls, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set to notify that fact, the output information storage area stores it as output information, and the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 951. Alternatively, when the payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 951 has normally received the prize ball command is not input within a predetermined time, the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is confirmed. For example, a self-check command is created and transmitted to the payout control board 951. As in the case of creating a prize ball command for paying out 15 balls as a prize ball, when the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball exceeds 10, the next number of balls is added to the exceeded number of balls. In the prize ball control processing, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball is added based on the input information, and the added number of game balls is added. When is reached, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set in order to notify that effect and is stored in the output information storage area as output information.

Following step S108, the main control program performs a frame command reception process (step S110). In the payout control board 951, the payout control program has various 1-byte (8-bit) commands divided into the status displays shown in FIG. 91 (for example, frame status 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame status 2 command). To send. On the other hand, as will be described later, the payout control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error release navigation command based on a detection signal of the operation switch 954.
In the frame command reception processing described above, when the main control program normally receives these various commands as payer serial data, the information to the effect is sent to the payout control board 951 and output information is stored in the output RAM of the main control built-in RAM. Store in the area. Further, the main control program shapes the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands classified into the status display of FIG. 90 (frame status 1 command, error cancellation) The navigation command and the frame state 2 command)) are stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information. The frame state 1 command here corresponds to the first error occurrence command, and the error cancellation navigation command corresponds to the first error cancellation command.

Following step S110, the main control program performs fraud detection processing (step S112). In this fraudulent activity detection processing, an abnormal state regarding the prize ball is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read from the input information storage area described above and the detection signal from the count sensor 4005 is input when the jackpot is not in the gaming state (when the game ball enters the special winning opening 2005), etc. The abnormal winning state display command classified into the notification display shown in FIG. 90 is created as an abnormal state, and is stored in the above-described transmission information storage area as transmission information.

Subsequent to step S112, the main control program performs special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing, the latch signal is output to the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an shown in FIG. 69, and the random number extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an when the latch signal is input. The (random number value) is acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a, and the acquired random number value is set as the big hit determination random number. Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit determination random number (that is, the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a) and the big hit determination value stored in the main control built-in ROM in advance match. Whether or not to determine (whether to generate a jackpot gaming state (referred to as "special lottery")), or take out the value of the counter for updating the jackpot symbol random number is stored in advance in the main control ROM Whether or not the probability variation hit determination value matches is determined (determination as to whether or not probability variation occurs). Here, the “probability change” means that the probability of a big hit changes to a high probability (probability change time) set higher than in a normal time (low probability). In the present embodiment, as the range of the above-mentioned big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range), the value 32668 to the value 32767 are set in the low probability, and the value is read from the normal time judgment table, whereas the value 31768 is set in the high probability. A value 32767 is set and is read from the probability change time determination table. In this way, in the special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing in step S114, a big hit determination random number (that is, a random number value obtained from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a) and the main control built-in When determining whether or not the big hit determination value stored in the ROM in advance matches, a big hit determination random number (that is, a random number value obtained from a hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a). It is performed depending on whether or not is included in the jackpot determination range.

When these determination results are based on the first starting opening sensor 4002, various commands related to special figure 1 tuning effect shown in FIG. 89 are created, while the lottery result is based on the second starting opening sensor 4004. In some cases, various commands related to special figure 2 synchronization effect shown in FIG. 89 are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the first special symbol display is performed according to the determined variable display pattern of the special symbol. Set the output of the lighting signal to the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 to light the device 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405, and stored in the output information storage area described above as output information. To do. Further, depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when the big hit game state is reached, various commands classified as the big hit related ones shown in FIG. 89 (big hit opening command, big winning opening 1 open N-th display command, big winning opening 1 A closing display command, a special winning opening 1 count display command, a big hit ending command, and a big hit symbol display command) are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, or the opening/closing member 2107 shown in FIG. 8 is opened/closed. When the output of the drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2108 is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, or when the special winning opening 2005 is changed from the closed state to the opened state twice (round), The output of the lighting signal to the two-round display lamp 1407a is set so as to light the two-round display lamp 1407a of the round display device 1407 shown in FIG. 10, and is stored in the output information storage area as output information, or the round is performed 15 times. At some time, the output of the lighting signal to the 15-round display lamp 1407b is set so as to light the 15-round display lamp 1407b of the round display device 1407 shown in FIG. The output of the lighting signal to the status indicator 1401 is set so as to light the presence/absence of fluctuation in a predetermined color, and is stored in the output information storage area as output information.

Subsequent to step S114, the main control program performs normal symbol and normal electric auditors product control processing (step S116). In this normal symbol and normal electric auditors product control process, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and the gate winning process is performed based on this input information. In this gate winning process, it is determined from the input information whether or not the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 has been input to the input terminal. Based on this determination result, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal, the value of the counter for updating the above-mentioned normal symbol per determination random number is extracted and the gate information is stored in the gate information storage area of the main control internal RAM. Remember.

The gate information storage area is provided with 0th to 3rd partitions (4 partitions), and gate information is stored in the order of 0th partition, 1st partition, 2nd partition, and 3rd partition. It is like this. For example, when the gate information is stored in the 0th section to the 2nd section of the gate information storage, when the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is input to the input terminal, the gate information is stored in the third section of the gate information storage. To do.

The gate information stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is set to the 0th section of the gate information storage, the gate information of the second section of the gate information storage is set to the first section of the gate information storage, and the gate information is set to the first section of the gate information storage. The gate information of the third section of information storage is shifted to the second section of gate information storage, and the third section of gate information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when the gate information is stored in the first partition to the second partition of the gate information storage, the gate information of the first partition of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th partition of the gate information storage, The gate information of the two sections is respectively shifted to the first section of the gate information storage, and the second section of the gate information storage and the third section of the gate information storage become empty areas. Here, when the gate information is stored in the first to third sections of the gate information storage, the above-mentioned gate information is used so that the normal symbol storage display 1188 is turned on with the total number of the stored gate information as the reserved sphere. The output of the lighting signal of the normal pattern storage display 1188 is set based on the above, and is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area as output information.

Subsequent to the gate winning process, the gate information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read out, and the value of the random number for normal symbol determination is taken out from this read gate information and stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. It is determined whether or not the regular symbol hit determination value matches (referred to as "ordinary lottery"). Whether or not the movable piece is opened and closed is determined based on the result of this determination (the result of the ordinary lottery). When the opening/closing operation is performed by this determination, the pair of movable pieces are opened in the left-right direction, and the game ball can be received in the second starting opening 2004, which is advantageous for the player. It becomes a game state. The variable display pattern of the normal symbol corresponding to this determination is determined based on the random number for the normal symbol variable display pattern described above, and various commands classified in relation to the universal symbol synchronization effect shown in FIG. 89 are created and used as transmission information. While storing in the transmission information storage area described above, the output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1402 is set to light the normal symbol display 1402 according to the determined variable display pattern of the ordinary symbol, and the output information is described above. Stored in the output information storage area. Further, for example, when the value of the extracted random number for normal symbol hit determination coincides with the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the main control ROM, various commands related to the normal electric-role effect shown in FIG. 89. Is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and the output of the drive signal to the starting opening solenoid 2107 is set to open and close the movable piece, and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. , When the value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination that has been taken out does not match the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, the normal symbol variation based on the random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern described above. The display pattern is determined, various commands classified as related to the universal figure entrainment effect shown in FIG. 89 are created, and are stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information, and normally according to the determined normal pattern variation display pattern. Normally, the output of the lighting signal to the symbol display 1402 is set so as to turn on the symbol display 1402, and is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area as output information.

Following step S116, the main control program performs a port output process (step S118). In this port output processing, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from the output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1310a, and various signals are output based on this output information. This main control program, for example, outputs a main payment ACK signal from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a based on the output information when the various commands from the payment control board 951 are normally received. Or output a drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2108 that opens/closes the opening/closing member 2107 of the special winning opening 2005 when the game is in the big hit mode, or outputs a drive signal to the starter solenoid 2107 that opens/closes the movable piece. In addition to output, main prize ball number information output signal, 15 round big hit information output signal, 2 round big hit information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, Various information (game information) signals related to the game such as the time saving information output information and the starting mouth winning information output signal are output to the payout control board 951.

Following step S118, the main control program performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120). In the peripheral control board command transmission process, the main control program reads the transmission information from the above-mentioned transmission information storage area and transmits the transmission information to the peripheral control board 1510 as main circumference serial data. In this transmission information, various commands created in the main control side timer interrupt processing of this routine shown in FIG. 89 and classified into special figure 1 tuning effect-related and special figure 2 tuning effect-related Various commands classified into commands and big hits (for example, a big win based on a detection signal from a count sensor 4005 (see FIG. 69) when a game ball that has entered a big winning opening 2005 (see FIG. 8) is detected) 90, which is a special winning opening 1 count display command corresponding to the mouth count command), various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as related to public figure synchronization effect, various commands classified as related to ordinary electric figure effect, FIG. Various commands (door opening command, door frame closing command, body frame opening command, body frame closing command, etc.) classified in the notification display, various commands classified in status display (frame status 1 command, error release) (Navi command and frame state 2 command), various commands classified as test-related, and various commands classified as other are stored. One packet of the main circumference serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main serial data is a status indicating the type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. And a sum value obtained by calculating the sum of the modes as numerical values, and the sum value is created at the time of transmission.

In this peripheral control board command transmission processing, the main control program transmits various commands as main circumference serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. As described above, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 is applied as +5 V to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, as described above. Therefore, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. The data can be transferred to the register 41eaa and the transmission can be completed from the transmission shift register 1310eaa as main-cycle serial data. At the time of power recovery when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and power is recovered, the power recovery is notified in the reservation setting of the command transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the main control-side power-on processing shown in FIG. In addition, since the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command classified into power on shown in FIG. 89 are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM. , A main-cycle serial data, which constitutes a power-on state command, is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then forms a power-on main control return destination command, status, The information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of mode and sum value. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the main control side power-on processing, the game information is read from the game backup information and the game information is responded to. There are also cases where various commands are stored. In such a case, first, after completion of transmission of various commands according to game information, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command are transmitted.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the frame state 1 command (first error occurrence command) from the payout control board 951 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (production control unit Frame status 1 command (second error occurrence command) to () (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the frame state 1 command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control substrate 951 to the peripheral control substrate 1510 as the frame state 1 command in the form shown in FIG. 90.

On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives an error release navigation command (first error release command) from the payout control board 951 through the RXA terminal reception port, the peripheral control board 1510 An error release navigation command (second error release command) is transmitted to (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the error release navigation command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control substrate 951 to the peripheral control substrate 1510 as the error release navigation command in the form shown in FIG. 90.

Furthermore, in this peripheral control board command transmission processing, when the main control program receives the main body frame opening command (first main body frame opening command) from the payout control board 951 through the RXA terminal receiving port, the peripheral control board 1510 is executed. A body frame opening command (second body frame opening command) is transmitted to the (production control unit) (body frame command sending means, second body frame sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the body frame opening command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control substrate 951 to the peripheral control substrate 1510 as the body frame opening command in the form shown in FIG. 90. On the other hand, in the peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the main body frame closing command (first main body frame closing command) from the payout control board 951 through the RXA terminal receiving port, the peripheral control board 1510 ( The main body frame closing command (second main body frame closing command) is transmitted to the effect control unit (main body frame command sending means, second main body frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the body frame closing command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control substrate 951 to the peripheral control substrate 1510 as the body frame closing command in the form shown in FIG. 90.

In the peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the door opening command (first door opening command) from the payout control board 951 through the RXA terminal receiving port, the peripheral control board 1510 (production control) A door opening command (second door frame opening command) to the unit) (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door frame closing command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control substrate 951 to the peripheral control substrate 1510 as the door closing command in the form shown in FIG. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the door closing command (first door closing command) from the payout control board 951 by the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (production control) A door closing command (second door closing command) to the (part) (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door closing command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control substrate 951 to the peripheral control substrate 1510 as the door closing command in the form shown in FIG. 90.

Following step S120, the main control program clears the main control built-in WDT 1310af shown in FIG. 69 (step S122), and ends this routine. The main control built-in WDT 1310af in step S22 is cleared by setting the timer clear set value in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a. This clears the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. Then, the main control built-in WDT 1310af restarts the timing to prevent the main control built-in WDT 1310af from forcibly resetting the main control MPU 1310a.

Note that, as described above, the main control board 1310 backs up the above-mentioned backup for storing the game information based on the progress of the game before the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off while the game is progressing. It can be completed by executing the process, and at the time of power recovery, the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off as the destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 based on the game information for which the backup process is executed. 89, the peripheral control board 1510 sends the power-on main control return destination command of FIG. 89 for instructing the drive state of the starting opening solenoid 2107 and the attacker solenoid 2108 which are the electrical drive sources by the port output processing of step S118 in this routine. It is possible to output to. That is, the main control board 1310 is the main control unit for setting the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the process of reservation setting of the command transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the built-in control RAM, the power-on status command and power-on main command classified into power-on in FIG. A control return destination command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in this routine, the power-on state command as main circumference serial data. , The status, the mode, and the sum value are transmitted in this order to the peripheral control board 1510, and then the peripheral control board 1510 is configured in the order of the status, the mode, and the sum value, which constitutes the main control return destination command at power-on. Send to. Therefore, based on the power-on main control return destination command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 sets the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 when the power is restored to the game board side effect display device 1600. Can be displayed in the display area. As a result, when a player is playing a momentary power failure or power outage, and then recovers power, the game state immediately before the power outage or power failure should be immediately restored after power recovery. In addition to being able to perform, the destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 can be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 to notify, so that the system of the pachinko machine 1 is in a condensed state, so-called freeze. It is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the player is in a broken state and is mistaken. Therefore, by returning to the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure after the power is restored, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the player is out of order.

Further, in the main control board inspecting step which is an inspection step of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after being manufactured for inspection, as shown in FIG. In step S38 in the power-on process on the main control side, the entire area of the main control internal RAM must be cleared. Accordingly, in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the same process, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on is performed, the power-on state command classified into the power-on shown in FIG. 89. And a power-on main control return destination command are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM, so that two commands, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command, are stored. Only the transmission information is stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM with built-in main control, and in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in this routine, the power-on state command is configured as the main circumference serial data. The status, mode, and sum value are sent to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process in order, and then the main control return destination command is configured when the power is turned on. Send to process inspection equipment. The inspection device in the main control board inspection process configures information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, that is, information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, which is included in the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310. , A series code for identifying which of the above-mentioned max type, middle type, and sweet digital type indicating the model type, a copyright code for identifying the copyright of the work, and a game specification (For example, if the probability variation occurs, in addition to the game specification that the state continues until the next big hit game state occurs, the game specification that the probability variation occurs in the state where the number of times the special symbol changes is limited (ST Based on the game specification code for identifying (machine) etc.), detailed model information is displayed on the inspection monitor of the main control board inspection process.

[16-1. Various control processing of peripheral control unit]
[16-1-1. Peripheral controller power-on processing]
First, the peripheral controller power-on process will be described with reference to FIG. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral controller 1511 shown in FIG. 72 performs peripheral controller power-on processing, as shown in FIG. When the peripheral control unit power-on process is started, the effect control program performs an initial setting process under the control of the peripheral control MPU 1511a (step S1000). In this initial setting process, the production control program performs a process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 1511a itself, a hot start/cold start determination process, a process of setting a wait timer after reset, and the like. The peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a process of initializing itself, but the time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 1511a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is initialized in an extremely short time. be able to. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a enters a state in which the interrupt permission is set, and is output from the main control board 1310 in the peripheral control command reception interrupt processing described later, for example, as shown in FIGS. 89 and 90. , It becomes a state in which various commands such as commands relating to control of game effects and commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 can be received.

In the hot start/cold start determination processing, for the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73, effect backup information (1fr) which is the content backed up in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) in the backup first area 1511cb. ) And the production backup information (1 ms) which is the content backed up in Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms) are compared, and Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) in the backup second area 1511cc are compared. The production backup information (1fr) which is the content backed up to is compared with the production backup information (1ms) which is the content backed up to Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms), and the comparison contents 73, the effect backup information (1fr) that is the content stored in Bank1 (1fr) with respect to Bank0 (1fr), which is the storage area normally used in the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73, When the hot backup is performed by copying back the production backup information (1 ms), which is the content stored in Bank1 (1 ms) with respect to Bank0 (1 ms), while the compared contents do not match (that is, , (When they do not match), the value 0 is forcibly written to Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms), which are the storage areas normally used in the peripheral control RAM 1511c, for cold start.

Further, in the hot start/cold start determination processing, also for the peripheral control SRAM 1511d shown in FIG. 73, the effect backup information which is the content backed up in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) in the backup first area 1511db. (SRAM) is compared, and the production backup information (SRAM) in the backup second area 1511dc, which is the content backed up in Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM), is compared. When the compared contents are the same, the effect backup information (SRAM) which is the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) with respect to Bank0 (SRAM) which is the storage region normally used in peripheral control SRAM 1511d shown in FIG. ) Is copied back to perform a hot start, but when the compared contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), a value is set to Bank0 (SRAM) which is a storage area normally used in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Forcibly write 0 to start cold. Following such a hot start or cold start, the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup non-managed target work area 1511cf of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. After performing this initialization setting process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT 1511af shown in FIG. 73 and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e shown in FIG. 72 to reset the peripheral control MPU 1511a. I try not to get it covered.

Following step S1000, the effect control program performs current time information acquisition processing (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, the calendar information for specifying the year/month/day and the time information for specifying the hour/minute/second are acquired from the RTC internal RAM 4165aa of the RTC 41654a of the RTC control unit 4165 shown in FIG. In the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in, the current calendar information is set in the calendar information storage section and the current time information is set in the time information storage section. Further, in the current time information acquisition process, a brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is also performed. In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires the brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 and sets the brightness of the LED included in the acquired brightness setting information so that the game board A process of adjusting the brightness of the backlight of the side effect display device 1600 and turning it on is performed. As described above, the brightness setting information is the brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, in 100% to 70% increments by 5%, and the current setting. The brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 that has been set, is included.

In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, specifically, the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600. When turning on, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and the brightness stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. When the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on when the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 80%, the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information. Adjust the brightness and turn it on. In the brightness setting processing of the liquid crystal display device, the same correction as the above-described brightness correction program for correcting the brightness of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the usage time of the game board side effect display device 1600 is performed. It's not done at all. This is because the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device incorporates a correction program similar to the brightness correction program, so that the brightness of the LED is corrected toward 100% every time the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is executed. This is to prevent being done.

In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires the calendar information and the time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a only once when the power is turned on. Further, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e after performing the current time information acquisition processing so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset.

Following step S1002, the effect control program sets the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1006). The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady process, which will be described later, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, and the peripheral control unit steady process. Is set to 0 when not executed. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed after the V blank signal that indicates that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be accepted is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. The value 1 is set in the V blank signal interrupt process. In this step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. Further, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e after setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset. There is.

Following step S1006, the effect control program determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 (step S1008). When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (value 0), the process returns to step S1008 to repeatedly determine whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 or not.
By repeating such a determination, the state becomes a standby state until the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. Further, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e after determining whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, and resets the peripheral control MPU 1511a. I try not to get it covered.

When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008, that is, when the peripheral controller steady processing is executed, first, the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 (step S1009). The steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control steady processing is being executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control steady processing is completed.

Subsequent to step S1009, the effect control program performs a 1 ms interrupt timer starting process (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer activation process, the 1 ms interrupt timer for executing the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is activated, and the number of times the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is activated The value 1 is set to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN to count the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN. This 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt processing.

Following step S1010, the effect control program performs a lamp data output process (step S1012). In the lamp data output process, the effect control program performs the DMA serial continuous transmission to the lamp drive board 4170 shown in FIG. Here, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is used to perform serial transmission for the lamp drive board serial I/O port. When the serial I/O port continuous transmission for the lamp drive board is started, the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Gaming board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the gaming board 5 is created by a lamp data creation process described later. Has been set.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 specifies the transmission of the lamp drive board serial I/O port as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa is stored. The first 1 byte of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored at the head address is sent to the lamp drive board serial I/O port via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer to the transmit buffer register of and write.
As a result, the serial I/O port for the lamp driving board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and 1 byte of the transmission shift register is synchronized with the game board side light emission clock signal SL-CLK. The data of 1 is started to be transmitted bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac triggers each time a transmission interrupt request of the serial I/O port for the lamp driving board is generated (in the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the lamp driving board is stored). It is triggered when the written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register and the transmission buffer register is emptied of 1-byte data.), and the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa uses the bus. If not, the remaining game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa is byte by byte via the external bus 1511h, peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and peripheral bus 1511ai. By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the lamp driving board, the serial I/O port for the lamp driving board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register and the game. In synchronization with the board side light emission clock signal SL-CLK, 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed by the lamp drive board serial I/O port.

In the lamp data output process, the effect control program performs the DMA serial continuous transmission process to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 shown in FIG. Also in this case, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is utilized to perform continuous transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port. When the serial I/O port continuous transmission for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED is started, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided in the door frame 3 is created in 1511cab by a lamp data creation process described later. Has been set.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU1511a specifies transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area The first 1 byte of the door side light emission data STL-DAT stored in the head address of 1511cab is serialized for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED through the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer and write to the I/O port transmit buffer register. As a result, the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate LED serial I/O port transfers the written data in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register and synchronizes with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK. Transmission of 1-byte data is started bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac uses this as a trigger whenever a transmission interrupt request of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port occurs (in the present embodiment, the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O). The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is triggered when the 1-byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register and the transmission buffer register is emptied of the 1-byte data.). When the bus is not used, the remaining door side light emission data STL-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab is byte by byte, the external bus 1511h, and the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad. Then, the data is transferred to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED via the peripheral bus 1511ai and is written, so that the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED is written to this. The data of the transmission buffer register is transferred to the transmission shift register, and 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit in synchronization with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK. Continuous transmission is performed by the serial I/O port.

Following step S1012, the effect control program performs effect operation unit monitoring processing (step S1014). In this effect operation unit monitoring process, in the effect operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, the operation button 410 is operated based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 400. Based on the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 in which various information obtained is set, the presence or absence of operation of the operation button 410 is monitored, and the operation state of the operation button 410 is game effected. Whether or not to reflect in.

Following step S1014, the effect control program performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, one screen (one frame) of drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a by the display data creation process described later is transferred from the channels CH1 and CH2 shown in FIG. 74 by the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. It outputs to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. As a result, various screens are drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. In the display data output processing, when drawing is performed that exceeds the drawing capability of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is used for the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect. The output to the display device 460 is canceled. This makes it possible to prevent the processing time from being delayed, but although so-called frame drop occurs, the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 due to the lamp data output processing in step S1012. Various effects from a plurality of LEDs and a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and a lower speaker 921 shown in FIG. 5 and an upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. 2 by sound data output processing described later. It is a mechanism that can prioritize the synchronization with the production of music and sound effects that match.

Following step S1016, the effect control program performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output processing, the effect control program outputs to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as serialized audio data of sound data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source built-in VDP 1512a in the sound data creation processing described later, In addition to music and sound effects, the sound data of the notification sound and the notification sound is output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as serialized audio data. When the audio data transmission IC 1512c receives the serialized audio data from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the right audio data is sent to the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194 as serial data of a differential method in which the right signal is a plus signal and a minus signal. At the same time as the transmission, the left audio data is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data that is a plus signal and a minus signal. As a result, the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 perform stereo reproduction of music, sound effects, and the like in accordance with various effects, and also perform stereo reproduction of notification sound and notification sound.

Following step S1018, the effect control program performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, the effect control program updates various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. For example, in the scheduler update process, of the screen data arranged in chronological order that configures the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, the screen data from the first screen data to the VDP 1512a with the built-in sound source. Update the pointer to indicate what to print.

In addition, in the scheduler update process, among the emission data arranged in time series, which constitutes the emission mode generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, the emission data of the various LEDs from the emission data at the beginning is emitted. The pointer is updated in order to indicate whether the mode is set.

In the scheduler update process, the sound data such as music and sound effects, and the sound data such as the notification sound and the notification sound, which are arranged in time series and configure the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, are instructed. Of the sound command data, the pointer is updated in order to instruct which sound command data is output from the head sound command data to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a.

In addition, in the scheduler update processing, from the first drive data among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motors and solenoids arranged in time series that configure the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, The pointer is updated to instruct which drive data is to be output. The drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series, which form the electric drive source schedule data, is the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt, which will be repeatedly executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt described below occurs. It is updated by the motor and solenoid drive processing in the processing. In the motor/solenoid drive processing that is repeatedly executed each time this 1 ms timer interrupt is generated, the electric drive source such as the motor or solenoid is driven according to the drive data designated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is performed. The pointer is updated to the data, and the pointer is updated each time the own processing is executed. In other words, the drive data pointed to by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing is forcibly updated in the scheduler update processing. Even if the other drive data is instructed from the drive data that is supposed to be performed, the scheduler update process is forcibly updated so as to instruct the drive data that should be originally instructed.

Following step S1020, the effect control program performs received command analysis processing (step S1022). In the received command analysis processing, the effect control program is information transmitted from the effect display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and various information transmitted from the main control board 1310. Various commands received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process (command receiving unit), which will be described later, are analyzed (command analyzing unit). The effect control program is based on the information transmitted from the effect display drive board 4450 through the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, and the sound. Generation schedule data, electric drive source schedule data, and the like are extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c in 1511cae. To do. In addition, the production control program, the command from the main control board 1310 received in this peripheral control unit command interrupt process, for example, the start mouth winning command for instructing the start of the start mouth winning effect, the number of holding normal symbols Ordinary symbol storage command for identifying (0 to 4), symbol synchronization effect start command for instructing the start of symbol synchronization effect, symbol memory command output when the number of start pending changes, to special winning opening 2005 The special winning opening 1 count display command (big winning opening count command) output each time the game ball is accepted, or the frame state 1 command (second error occurrence command, which shows the content of full tank shown in FIG. 90. It is analyzed whether or not it is a full tank error occurrence command) (command analysis means), and it is recognized which game state is currently in. In addition, the command received by the peripheral control command reception interrupt processing is the main frame opening command, the main frame closing command, the door opening command or the door frame closing after a predetermined time has passed since the power was turned on. Analyze whether it is a command or not. Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and are stored in the reception command storage area 1511cac of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. The effect control program analyzes various commands stored in the received command storage area 1511cac. Various commands are classified into special command 1 tuning effect related commands, special command 2 tuning effect related commands, jackpot related commands, and power-on shown in FIG. 89. Various commands to be displayed, various commands to be associated with the general figure entraining effect, various commands to be associated with the ordinary electric role effect, various commands to be divided into the notification display shown in FIG. 90, and the door frame opening command described above. , Door frame close command, main frame open command, main frame close command, error release navigation command (corresponding to the second error cancel command), frame status 1 command (corresponding to the second error occurrence command), etc. There are various classified commands, various commands related to tests, and other classified commands.

Following step S1022, the effect control program performs a warning process (step S1024). In this warning process, when the command analyzed by the reception command analysis process of step S1022 as described above includes various commands classified into the notification display shown in FIG. The peripheral control unit 1511 stores the screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, the electric drive source schedule data, etc., which are set in the abnormality display mode for executing the abnormality notification. It is extracted from the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and set to 1511cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. In the warning process, when a plurality of abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed from the order of high priority registered in advance, and the abnormality is automatically resolved and the remaining abnormality notification is automatically made. It is supposed to do. As a result, it is possible to monitor multiple abnormalities at the same time without losing the information that one abnormality has occurred after another abnormality has occurred and before the abnormality is resolved. You can

Furthermore, in this warning process, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, the command analyzed by the effect control program in the above-described received command analysis process (step S1022) is divided into the status displays shown in FIG. 90. In the case of various commands such as an error cancellation navigation command (second error cancellation command), by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 in a mode different from the normal effect mode associated with the effect operation, for example, on the game board side. A performance display device 1600 (production device), a door frame side production display device 460 (production device), a lamp (production device) is used to visually warn the outside, or a speaker is used to auditorily warn the outside ( Error notification means). In this way, when a malicious player operates the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 to input an error release navigation command to the main control board 1310 despite the game state, Since the pachinko machine 1 is configured to issue a warning to the outside, fraudulent acts on the main control board 1310 that may affect the progress of the game can be suppressed.

Next, following step S1024 described above, the effect control program performs RCT acquisition information update processing (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update processing, the effect control program stores it in the calendar information storage unit which is acquired in the current time information acquisition processing in step S1002 and set in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. The calendar information and the time information stored in the time information storage unit are updated. By this RCT acquisition information update processing, the hour, minute, second, which is the time information stored in the time information storage unit, is updated, and the year, month, which is the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit based on the updated time information. The day is updated.

Following step S1026, the effect control program performs prefetch effect control processing (step S1027). The prefetch effect control process executes the process related to the prefetch effect based on the effect command analyzed in the received command analysis process of step S1022. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 30, when the special symbol 1 storage prefetch effect command or the special symbol 2 storage prefetch effect command (hereinafter, "prefetch effect command") is received, the prefetch effect is executed. Make settings. Details of the prefetch effect control processing will be described later.

The prefetch effect command is transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 when a game ball wins the starting openings 2101 and 2102. In the present embodiment, when the peripheral control board 4140 receives the prefetching effect command, the prefetching effect execution flag is set in the received command analysis processing in step S1022. In the pre-reading effect control process, if the pre-reading effect execution flag is set, whether to execute the pre-reading effect is determined based on the content of the pre-reading effect command. That is, in the present embodiment, even when the prefetch effect command is received from the main control board 4100, it is determined whether or not the prefetch effect is actually executed in the peripheral control board 4140.

Then, when the prefetching effect is executed, the mode of the hold display of the starting memory is changed as the prefetching effect (normal prefetching effect). In addition, when the predetermined condition is satisfied after the normal prefetching effect is executed, the continuous prefetching effect is changed to change the mode of the hold display every time the starting memory in which the variable display is executed is exhausted. To do. In the prefetching effect control process, a process for executing the normal prefetching effect is performed, and it is determined whether or not the continuous prefetching effect is executed. The predetermined condition is, for example, even when the number of undigested starting memories is a certain number or more, and when the result of the variable display game based on the starting memories of the prefetch target is highly expected to be a big hit. May be.

The contents of the look-ahead effect are not only the display mode of the starting memory changed, but also the display effect in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 such as the display of the character and the background, the light emission of the lamp, the sound output from the speaker. Alternatively, the effect may be a motion of a movable body.

Following step S1027, the effect control program performs a lamp data creation process (step S1028). In this lamp data creation process, the pointer is instructed by the pointer in the effect control program among the emission data arranged in chronological order constituting the emission mode generation schedule data, in which the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020. Based on the light emission data, the game board side light emission data SL- for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. The DAT is created by extracting it from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and is set in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. In addition, the door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 is stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511. Alternatively, it is created by extracting from the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and set in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG.

Following step S1028, the effect control program performs a display data creation process (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and among the screen data arranged in time series that constitutes the screen generation schedule data, the screen data indicated by the pointer. Is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and is output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. When the screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a extracts the character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data to create the sprite data to generate the game board side effect display device. 1600 and the drawing data for one screen (for one frame) displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 are generated in the built-in VRAM.

Following step S1030, the effect control program performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation processing, the pointer is updated in the effect control program in the scheduler update processing in step S1020, and the pointer indicates the sound command data arranged in time series that constitutes the sound generation schedule data. The sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. When the sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b and controls the built-in sound source to generate a sound command. Sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated according to the track number defined in the data, and the output channel to be used is set according to the output channel number.

In the sound data creation process, each time the sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit steady process is performed), the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak shown in FIG. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotary position of the knob portion of 1510a is converted into a value of 1024 steps from value 0 to value 1023. In the present embodiment, the value of 1024 levels is divided into 7 and managed as board volumes 0 to 6, and the board volume 0 is set to mute and the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume. The volume is set to increase toward the volume 6. Audio data is transmitted as audio data by controlling the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 so that the sound volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6, and the sound data is serialized by the sound data output processing in step S1018 described above. By outputting to the IC 1512c, music and sound effects can be played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

In addition, the notification sound and the notification sound have a structure that does not depend on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion at all, and the sound volume from the mute to the maximum volume is built in the sound source of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 by the program. The VDP 1512a can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program is different from the board volume divided into the above-described seven stages, and it is possible to smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. For example, even when a store clerk in the hall or the like rotates the knob of the volume adjusting volume 1510a to set the volume to a low level, the effect sound such as music or sound effect flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is small. However, when a problem occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is conducting an illegal act, the notification sound set to a large volume (in the present embodiment, the maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk in the hall from becoming difficult to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the cheating of the player due to the notification sound. Also, based on the current board volume that is set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music or the sound effect, while It is advantageous for the player to make the screen unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 in addition to music and sound effects by increasing the volume. It is also possible to announce that there is a high possibility that a game state will be entered.

Following step S1032, the effect control program performs backup processing (step S1034). In this backup process, the effect control program stores the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 in the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc. The contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d attached externally are copied and backed up to the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc, respectively.

Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 1511c is backed up every one frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. Which is included in Bank0 (1fr), the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, the reception command storage area 1511cac, the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, and The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is provided in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb, using the effect information (1fr) stored in the schedule data storage area 1511cae as effect backup information (1fr). The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies at high speed to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc.

The high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) are designated to copy to the backup first area 1511cb to Bank1 (1fr), and the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1fr) are changed to the end address of Bank0 (1fr). The stored contents are all copied in order by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) sequentially from the start address of Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa makes the peripheral control DMA controller. For the request factor of 1511ac, the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) are designated to copy to the backup first area 1511cb to Bank2 (1fr), and the contents stored at the top address of Bank0 (1fr) are changed to Bank0 (1fr). Up to the contents stored in the end address of (1) are successively copied by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) consecutively from the start address of Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb.

Then, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc, and Bank0 (1fr). ) From the content stored in the start address of Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored in the end address of Bank0 (1fr) consecutively by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), the start address of Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. From the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa requesting the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to copy the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to the backup second area 1511cc to Bank4 (1fr). Then, from the content stored at the start address of Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr), a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) are continuously transferred to Bank4 (second) of the second area 1511cc. 1fr) are all copied in order from the start address.

In the backup process, the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is a backup target for each frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 1511da shown in FIG. 73, that is, for each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac operates at high speed in the Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db using the effect information (SRAM) stored in Bank0 (SRAM) as effect backup information (SRAM). Then, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the data to Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc at high speed.

The high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Specify the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank1 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db, and change the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the end address of Bank0 (SRAM). The stored contents are sequentially copied by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) in sequence from the start address of Bank 1 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa makes the peripheral control DMA controller. For the request factor of 1511ac, the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) are designated to copy to the backup first area 1511db to Bank2 (SRAM), and the contents stored at the top address of Bank0 (SRAM) are changed to Bank0 (SRAM). Up to the contents stored in the end address of (1) are successively copied by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) continuously from the top address of Bank 2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db.

Then, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies the copy of the content stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to the Bank3 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the Bank0 (SRAM). ) To the content stored in the end address of Bank0 (SRAM) continuously by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte), the start address of Bank3 (SRAM) of the second area 1511dc. From the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa requesting the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to copy the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc. Then, from the content stored at the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (SRAM), a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) are continuously transferred to Bank4 (second) of the backup second area 1511dc. All are sequentially copied from the top address of the SRAM).

Following step S1034, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1036). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control internal WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset.

Following step S1036, the effect control program sets the value 0 to the in-steady-state processing flag SP-FLG as completion of execution of the peripheral control part regular processing (step S1038), returns to step S1006 again, and returns to the V blank signal detection flag VB. -FLG is initialized by setting the value 0, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1008, the process waits until the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to the value 1, and when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is the value 1, steps S1009 to step S1009 to step S1009. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006 again. In this way, when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, the processes of steps S1009 to S1038 are performed. The processing of steps S1009 to S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit steady processing".

The peripheral control unit steady process starts with the production control program first setting the peripheral control unit steady process in step S1009 as being in progress and setting a value 1 to the steady process in-progress flag SP-FLG, and at step S1010 for 1 ms. .., and then step S1036. Finally, in step S1038, a value 0 is set in the steady processing flag SP-FLG as completion of execution of the peripheral controller steady processing. Set to complete. The peripheral controller steady processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when the V blank signal VDP 1512a which is in the state of being capable of accepting the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. In the present embodiment, since the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above, V The interval at which the blank signal is input is about 33.3 ms (=1000 ms÷30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms.

[16-1-2. Peripheral controller V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, as shown in FIG. 72, a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 can be received is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. The peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing executed with the above will be described. When this peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether or not the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is 0 (step). S1045). As described above, the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control steady processing of steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control power-on processing of FIG. The value is set to 0 when the processing is completed.

When the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S1045, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, this routine is ended as it is. On the other hand, when the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is 0 in step S1045, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 (step S1050). This routine ends. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether to execute the peripheral control unit steady process, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process is executed and the peripheral control is executed. The value is set to 0 when the partial steady process is not executed.

In the present embodiment, in step S1045, it is determined whether or not the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed, and the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed. Sometimes, in step S1050, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1. However, this is because the V blank signal is input and the V blank is input while the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed. When the signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to the value 1, the peripheral control unit steady process currently being executed is assumed to be executed as the peripheral control unit steady process in the determination of step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. Since the peripheral control unit steady process is forcibly canceled on the way and the peripheral control unit steady process is started from the beginning, in order to prevent this, at step S1009 in the peripheral control unit power-on process (peripheral control unit steady process) shown in FIG. Notifying the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed by setting the value 1 in the processing flag SP-FLG, and the peripheral control unit power supply in FIG. In step S1038 of the processing at the time of turning on (peripheral control unit steady processing), the value 0 is set to the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG to indicate that the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed By notifying the signal interrupt process, whether or not the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is 0 in the determination of step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process which is this routine, that is, the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. It is designed to determine whether or not it has been completed. In other words, this is a measure in the case where the peripheral control unit steady processing cannot be completed by the time the V blank signal is input and the next V blank signal is input, so-called processing failure.

As a result, in the peripheral control unit regular processing of this time, if the processing cannot be completed in about 33.3 ms and the processing is dropped, it is determined next time in the determination of step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. The system waits until the V blank signal is input.
In other words, the time required to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing of this time, which has been omitted, is about 66.6 ms. Normally, a peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process described later, which is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by the activation of the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral controller power-on process (peripheral controller steady process) of FIG. Is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady process, but when there is the peripheral control unit steady process of this time that has been dropped as described above, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is not performed 64 times. Instead, it is only executed 32 times. In other words, even if the peripheral control unit steady process is dropped, the consistency between the production progress state by the peripheral control unit steady process and the production progress state by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process which is the timer interrupt control is consistent. It doesn't collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit steady process is missed, the progress state of the effect can be surely matched.

[16-1-3. Peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by the activation of the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral controller steady process of the peripheral controller power-on process of FIG. 95 will be described. .. When the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral controller 1511 shown in FIG. 72 determines whether or not the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 as shown in FIG. Is determined (step S1100). As described above, the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by the 1 ms interrupt timer starting process in the 1 ms interrupt timer starting process of step S1010 in the peripheral controller steady process of the peripheral controller power-on process of FIG. This is a counter that counts the number of times a certain peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. In the present embodiment, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, as described above, so V The interval at which the blank signal is input is about 33.3 ms (=1000 ms÷30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the next peripheral control unit steady process is performed. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed 32 times before the execution of. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the first 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the second,..., And the 32 1 ms timer interrupts sequentially. Will occur.

In step S1100, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than 33 times, that is, when the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process is started, this routine is finished as it is. If the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process has a higher priority than the peripheral control unit V as the priority order of the interrupt processing. Although set higher than the blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal occurrence. In order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. Then, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is newly started by the first generation of the 1 ms timer interrupt. ing.

On the other hand, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 times in step S1100, the value 1 is added to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (increment, step S1102). By adding the value 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated by the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral controller steady process of the peripheral controller power-on process of FIG. This means that the number of times the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is executed is increased by one.

Subsequent to step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 are arranged in time series. Of the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid, according to the drive data designated by the pointer, the electric drive sources of the motor and the solenoid of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 and the motor drive board 4180 shown in FIG. 72. Is driven, the pointer is updated to the next drive data defined in time series, and the pointer is updated each time this motor and solenoid drive processing is executed.

Specifically, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 is performed. Here, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is used to perform continuous transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate motor serial I/O port. When serial transmission for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port is started, first, the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached is set. To output a drive signal to the dial drive motor 414 of the performance operation unit 400 based on the drive data designated by the pointer among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motors and solenoids arranged in time series. Door side motor drive data STM-DAT is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and created, and the frame decoration drive of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 is performed. It is set in the transmission data storage area 1511caf for the amplifier board side motor. Then, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a designates the transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores the transmission data for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor. The first 1 byte of the door side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the head address of the area 1511caf is transferred to the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer to the transmit buffer register of the serial I/O port for writing. As a result, the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate motor serial I/O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and the transmission shift register is synchronized with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK. 1 byte of data is started to be transmitted bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac triggers each time a transmission interrupt request of the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port occurs (in the present embodiment, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O). The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is triggered when the 1-byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register and the transmission buffer register is emptied of the 1-byte data.). Is not using a bus, the remaining door side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf is byte by byte, the external bus 1511h, and the peripheral control bus controller. The frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port is written to the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port by writing the transfer buffer register to the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port via the peripheral bus 1511ai. The data of the transmitted transmission buffer register is transferred to the transmission shift register, and 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit in synchronization with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK. Continuous transmission is performed by the motor serial I/O port.

In the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the motor drive board 4180 is performed. Also in this case, the peripheral I/O port continuous transmission for the motor drive board is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. When the serial I/O port continuous transmission for the motor drive board is started, first, the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached is configured. A motor for moving various movable bodies provided in the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 based on the drive data designated by the pointer among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in series. And the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to the solenoid and the solenoid is extracted from the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and is created. The data is set in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Then, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies the transmission of the motor drive board serial I/O port as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores it in the head address of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. The first 1 byte of the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is transmitted through the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai to the transmission buffer of the motor drive board serial I/O port. Transfer to a register and write. As a result, the motor drive board serial I/O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK to set 1 of the transmission shift register. Transmission of byte data is started bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac triggers each time a transmission interrupt request of the motor drive board serial I/O port is generated (in the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register of the motor drive board serial I/O port is stored). It is triggered when the written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register and the transmission buffer register is emptied of the 1-byte data.), and the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa uses the bus. If not, the remaining game board side motor drive data SM-DAT stored in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag is byte by byte via the external bus 1511h, peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and peripheral bus 1511ai. By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the motor drive board serial I/O port, the motor drive board serial I/O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, In synchronization with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK, 1 byte of data in the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed by the motor drive board serial I/O port.

Following step S1104, movable body information acquisition processing is performed (step S1106). In the movable body information acquisition processing, history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, original position history information) is determined by determining whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 5 are input. , Movable position history information, etc.) is created and set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached shown in FIG. From the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah, it is possible to acquire the original positions and movable positions of the various movable bodies provided on the game board 5.

Following step S1106, effect operation unit information acquisition processing is performed (step S1108). In this effect operation unit information acquisition processing, it is determined whether or not the detection signals from the various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 400 are input, so that the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches (for example, the operation (Operation history information of the button 410, etc.) is created and set in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Whether or not the operation button 410 is operated can be acquired from the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai.

Following step S1108, drawing state information acquisition processing is performed (step S1110).
In this drawing state information acquisition processing, history information of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive substrate 4450 shown in FIG. 87 is created, and the peripheral information shown in FIG. It is set in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak of the peripheral MRAM 1511c externally attached to the control MPU 1511a. As described above, the LOCKN signal is that the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 included in the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. When it is determined, it is a signal that is output to convey that fact. Specifically, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and a door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450. , A signal to be output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (restoring) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. The door frame side effect display device is obtained by acquiring the frequency and the occurrence state of the failure between the connection between the peripheral control board 1510 and the effect display drive board 4450 from the history information of the LOCKN signal set in the drawing status information acquisition storage area 1511cak. The drawing state of 460 can be acquired.

After step S1110, a backup process is performed (step S1112), and this routine ends. In this backup process, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 are copied to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc, respectively, and backed up. At the same time, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control SRAM 1511d are copied and backed up in the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc, respectively.

Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 1511c executes the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, which is this routine, every time the 1ms interrupt timer in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. 73 occurs. Each time the backup is performed, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf, the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, and the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah included in the backup target Bank0 (1 ms) are included. , And the effect information (1 ms) stored in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai as effect backup information (1 ms) around Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms) in the backup first area 1511cb. The control DMA controller 1511ac copies at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies at high speed to Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms) of the backup second area 1511cc.

The high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Specify the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) to Bank1 (1ms) of the backup first area 1511cb, and change the contents stored in the beginning address of Bank0 (1ms) to the end address of Bank0 (1ms). The stored contents are continuously copied by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) in sequence from the start address of Bank 1 (1 ms) of the backup first area 1511cb, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa makes the peripheral control DMA controller. For the request factor of 1511ac, the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) are designated to copy to the backup first area 1511cb to Bank2 (1ms), and the contents stored at the top address of Bank0 (1ms) are changed to Bank0 (1ms). Up to the contents stored in the end address of (1) are successively copied by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) consecutively from the top address of Bank2 (1 ms) of the backup first area 1511cb.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies the copy of the content stored in Bank0 (1 ms) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank3 (1 ms) of the backup second area 1511cc, and Bank0 (1 ms). ) To the content stored in the end address of Bank0 (1 ms) continuously from the content stored in the end address of Bank0 (1 ms) by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), the start address of Bank3 (1 ms) of the backup second area 1511cc. From the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa requesting the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to copy the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) to Bank4 (1ms) of the backup second area 1511cc. Then, from the content stored at the start address of Bank0 (1 ms) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1 ms), a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) are continuously transferred to Bank4 (second) of the backup second area 1511cc. (1 ms), all are copied in order from the start address.

As described above, in the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process, various processes relating to the effects of step S1104 to step S1108 described above as the progress of effects are executed within the period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady process in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 95, various processes related to the effect of step S1012 to step S1032 described above as the progress of the effect are executed within a period of about 33.3 ms. doing. In the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. Since this routine is ended as it is, even if the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal occurrence, the peripheral control unit by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs. After the start of the 1ms timer interrupt process is forcibly canceled, the 1ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the occurrence of the V blank signal, and then the peripheral control is newly generated by the 1ms timer interrupt process. The 1ms timer interrupt process is started. In other words, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady process and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process, which is the timer interrupt control, is maintained. Therefore, the progress state of the effect can be surely matched.

Further, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies somewhat depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the sound source built-in VDP 1512a are different. Even in the manufacturing lot of the mounted peripheral control board 1510, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change to some extent. In the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control is performed. In order to execute the section V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, by forcibly canceling the start of the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt, It is possible to absorb a time lag caused by a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[16-1-4. Peripheral control block command reception interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. When the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 starts transmission of various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, the peripheral control MPU 1511a incorporates main circumference serial data into the peripheral control MPU 1511a. 1-byte (8-bit) information is fetched into the reception buffer by the board serial I/O port, and when this fetching is completed, an interrupt is generated triggered by this, and peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. In the main serial data, one packet is composed of 3 bytes, the status is assigned as the 1st byte, the mode is assigned as the 2nd byte, and the status and the mode are regarded as numerical values as the 3rd byte The calculated sum value is assigned.

When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether or not the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out (step S1200). The 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received in the main-circulation serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310.

If the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, if it is within a period in which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received from the main-circulation serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310, The 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the serial I/O port for the main control board built in the control MPU 1511a is fetched (step S1202), and the value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (increment, step S1204). The reception counter SRXC is a counter indicating the number of times the data is fetched from the reception buffer. When the status, which is the first byte of the main-cycle serial data, is fetched from the reception buffer, the value is 1, and the mode that is the second byte of the main-cycle serial data is set. The value is 2 when taken out from the receive buffer, and the value 3 is taken out when the sum value which is the third byte of the main serial data is taken out from the receive buffer. The reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value 0 when the power is turned on.

Following step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data, has been extracted from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, the status, which is the first byte of the main circumference serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data, are sequentially output from the reception buffer. It is determined whether it has been taken out.

When the reception counter SRXC does not have the value 3 in step S1206, that is, the status which is the first byte of the main cycle serial data is followed by the mode which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data and the third byte of the main cycle serial data. When the sum value is not sequentially fetched from the reception buffer, the 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine is ended. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, the period in which the mode that is the second byte of the main serial data or the sum value that is the third byte of the main serial data can be received is set.

On the other hand, when the reception counter SRXC has the value 3 in step S1206, that is, the status which is the first byte of the main circumference serial data, the mode which is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, and the status of 3 of the main circumference serial data When the byte sum value is sequentially fetched from the reception buffer, an initial value 0 is set in the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). In this calculation, the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data and the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, which has already been fetched from the reception buffer in step S1202, is regarded as a numerical value, and the total (sum value ) Is calculated.

Subsequent to step S1212, it is determined whether the sum value which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 and the sum value calculated in step S1212 match (step S1212). S1214). The sum value which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already fetched from the reception buffer in step S1202 is the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main circumference serial data from the main circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 is supplied with game balls from the pachinko island facility, and when the game balls rub against each other and become charged, electrostatic discharge causes noise, so the pachinko machine 1 is affected by noise. It is in a rasp environment. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1511 considers the status assigned as the first byte of the received main circumference serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main circumference serial data to be numerical values. Then, the sum (sum value) is calculated, and whether the calculated sum value matches the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main circumference serial data in the main circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. It is determined whether or not. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the main circumference serial data between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 is affected by noise and changed to different main circumference serial data. be able to.

In step S1214, when the sum value which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already fetched from the reception buffer in step S1202 and the sum value calculated in step S1212 match, the received main circumference serial data is received. 73 shows the status allocated as the first byte and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main serial data, the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the received command storage area 1511cac of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached. (Step S1216), and this routine ends. The reception command storage area 1511cac is used as a ring buffer, and the status allocated as the first byte of the main circumference serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main circumference serial data are the reception command storage area. It is stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer of 1511cac. The "peripheral control unit reception ring buffer" is a buffer that is used so that the end and the beginning of the buffer are connected. It stores data sequentially from the beginning of the buffer, and returns to the beginning when the end of the buffer is reached. Remember. The peripheral control MPU 1511a allocates the status allocated as the first byte of the main circumference serial data and the second byte of the main circumference serial data received when the peripheral control MPU1511a stores the status in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer in step S1216. The stored mode is stored in association with each other, and the sum value assigned as the third byte is discarded.

On the other hand, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, the period over which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received in the main-circulation serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 is exceeded. If, or, in step S1214, the sum value which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already fetched from the reception buffer in step S1202 does not match the sum value calculated in step S1212, this routine is directly executed. finish.

[16-1-5. Peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit power outage notification signal executed when the power outage notification signal (peripheral power outage notification signal) from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 75 is input from the main control board 1310. The interrupt processing will be described. When this peripheral control unit power outage notice signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 first activates a 2 microsecond timer (step S1320), and the power outage notice signal (peripheral power outage notice). It is determined whether or not the (signal) is input (step S1302). If the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not input in this determination, this routine is finished as it is.

On the other hand, when the power failure advance notice signal is input in step S1302, it is determined whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer started in step S1320 has passed 2 microseconds. When 2 macroseconds have not elapsed in step S1304, the process returns to step S1302, and it is determined whether or not the power failure notice signal is input. When the power failure notice signal is not input, this routine is ended as it is, while the power failure notice is issued. When the signal is input, it is again determined in step S1304 whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination of step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure notification signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure notification signal interrupt processing which is this routine is started.

In step S1304, when the peripheral control unit power outage notice signal interrupt process which is the main routine is started and the power outage notice signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds, the power saving process is performed (step S1306). In this power saving process, the backlights of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are turned off, the motors and solenoids provided on the game board 5 are turned off, and various LEDs are turned off sequentially. Thus, by suppressing the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1, stable operation is ensured for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is a time period in which the peripheral control MPU 1511a can operate even when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

Following step S1306, command reception standby processing is performed (step S1308).
In this command reception waiting process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 1310, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can receive the commands being transmitted at least for a period of 17 milliseconds. It is supposed to wait. When the command is received, the above-mentioned peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is started, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the received command storage area 1511cac (peripheral control unit reception ring buffer) externally attached to the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. ) Stores the received command.

Following step S1308, command backup processing is performed (step S1310). In the backup processing of this command, the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. 73 are changed to Bank1 (1fr) The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies to Bank2 (1fr) at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc at high speed.

The high-speed copy of the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. As a request factor of the control DMA controller 1511ac, the content stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) is designated to be copied to the received command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb. However, from the content stored at the start address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr), a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) in succession, all are sequentially copied from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa requests the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to request the cause. The contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) are designated to be copied to the received command storage area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb, and are stored in Bank0 (1fr). From the content stored at the start address of the received command storage area 1511cac included to the content stored at the end address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr), consecutively by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) Then, all are sequentially copied from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb.

Then, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa includes the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac in Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. Specifies the copy to the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) from the content stored in the start address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the end address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) The contents up to this are all copied in succession by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc, and the peripheral control MPU core is copied. 1511aa stores the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac into the received command storage area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. By specifying copy, the contents stored in the start address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the contents stored in the end address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) are specified. All bytes (for example, 1 byte) are continuously copied sequentially from the head address of the received command storage area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc.

Subsequent to step S1310, it is determined whether or not a power failure notice signal (a peripheral power failure notice signal) is input (step S1312). If the power failure notice signal is input in this determination, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1314). In this WDT clear processing, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT 1511af shown in FIG. 73 and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e shown in FIG. 72 so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset. ..

On the other hand, when the power outage notice signal is not input in step S1312 or following step S1314, the process returns to step S1312 again to determine whether the power outage notice signal is input. That is, whether or not the power failure notice signal (peripheral power failure notice signal) is input is continuously determined. By continuously determining in this way, when the power failure notice signal (peripheral power failure notice signal) is not input in step S1312, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e. However, while the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset, when the power failure notice signal is input in step S1312, the WDT clear process is performed in step S1314, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset.
When the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset, the peripheral controller power-on process shown in FIG. 95 is restarted.

In this way, when the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) continues to be input in the endless loop in the determination in step S1312, the peripheral control is performed immediately before the power failure occurs by executing the WDT clear processing in step S1314. The MPU 1511a is designed not to be reset. On the other hand, when the input of the power failure notice signal is canceled in the infinite loop without being continued in the determination in step S1312, the WDT clear process is not executed, and thus the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e are not connected. The output of the clear signal is interrupted. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit power outage advance signal interrupt processing, which is the main routine, is erroneously started due to noise or the like, and the noise occurs for a period of more than 2 microseconds and the determination in step S1302 is passed, When the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not continuously input in the infinite loop and is canceled in the determination in S1312, the peripheral control MPU1511a is reset because the WDT clear processing in step S1314 is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to deal with such noise by automatically resetting and returning.

[16-1-6. LOCKN signal history creation process]
Next, the LOCKN signal history creation process executed as one process of the drawing state information acquisition process of step S1110 in the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 97 will be described. In this LOCKN signal history creation processing, a history of LOCKN signals output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 included in the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. 87 is created. As described above, the LOCKN signal is the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 included in the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. When it is determined that the data is abnormal, it is a signal that is output to convey that fact. Specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame included in the effect display drive board 4450. This signal is output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (restoring) the connection between the side effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the connection, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

When the LOCKN signal history creation process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 is connected to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak (step S1500). This LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST stores 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bit B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, least significant bit B0, "B" represents a bit). The history of the LOCKN signal which has a capacity and is output from the LOCKN terminal of the receiver frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 is stored in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak as LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST. Remembered

Following step S1500, it is determined whether or not there is a LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive substrate 4450 (step S1502). This determination is that when there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal data. , A request for transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (restoring) the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. While there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is not abnormal data (normal. Predetermined data for confirming (recovering) the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that the pattern (SYNC pattern) is not requested to be transmitted.

When there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, shift processing of LOCKN signal detection history information is performed (step S1504).
In this shift processing of LOCKN signal detection history information, when there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1500 is set to the most significant bit B7←B6←B6← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1, B1 ← least significant bit B0, and so on, shifting one bit at a time from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7.

When the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted in step S1504, the value 1 is set to the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST (step S1506), and this routine is ended.

On the other hand, when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, shift processing of LOCKN signal detection history information is performed (step S1508). In this shift processing of the LOCKN signal detection history information, the same processing as the shift processing of the LOCKN signal detection history information in step S1504 is performed, and when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the LOCKN read in step S1500. The signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is converted into the least significant bit B0 by the most significant bit B7←B6, B6←B5, B5←B4, B4←B3, B3←B2, B2←B1, B1←the least significant bit B0. From the most significant bit B7 is shifted bit by bit.

When the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted in step S1508, the value 0 is set to the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST (step S1510), and this routine ends.

In this way, each time this LOCKN signal history creation processing is executed, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted bit by bit from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7, and then to the least significant bit B0. Since the value 1 or the value 0 is set, the history of the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 can be created.

[16-1-7. Connection failure judgment processing]
Next, the connection failure determination process executed as one process of the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 95 will be described.
In this connection failure determination processing, the door frame side provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

When the connection failure determination process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72, of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. The LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak (step S1520). In the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST, as described above, the history of LOCKN signals output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 is stored. As described above, the LOCKN signal is abnormal data in the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 included in the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510. Is a signal that is output to convey that fact. Specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 included in the effect display drive board 4450. Is a signal output for requesting transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (restoring) the connection between the connection between and, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

Following step S1520, it is determined whether or not there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 (step S1522). This determination determines whether or not the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 matches the connection confirmation determination value. This connection confirmation determination value is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b shown in FIG. 72, and is “000011111B (“B” represents a bit.)” in the present embodiment, and the upper four bits B7 to B4. Has a value of 0, and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 have a value of 1. In the determination of step S1522, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value match.

In step S1522, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value, the peripheral control board 1510 is prepared. It is determined that there is no problem in the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. Then, this routine is finished as it is.

On the other hand, in step S1522, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value, the peripheral control board 1510. The door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the above and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 are in a state where a problem occurs in the connection, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. Then, the communication check counter CC-CNT is incremented by 1 (increment, step S1524). Each time this routine is executed, the communication check counter CC-CNT counts up the number of times it is determined in step S1522 that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in a defective state. (Count the cumulative number). The communication check counter CC-CNT is set to 0 and reset when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, whereas it is not reset due to a momentary power failure or a power failure and the power is restored. It is adapted to be restored to the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT at the moment or immediately before a power failure.

Following step S1524, it is determined whether the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT (step S1526). In this determination, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the cumulative number of times that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is determined to be defective is the cumulative number. While it is determined that the upper limit value CC-LMT has not been reached, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, a problem occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that the cumulative number of times determined to be the current state has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT.

When the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative count upper limit value CC-LMT in step S1526, that is, the cumulative count determined to be in a state in which the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective is the cumulative count. When the upper limit value CC-LMT is not reached, the value 0 is set to the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG (step S1528), and this routine is ended. On the other hand, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT in step S1526, that is, it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective. When the accumulated number of times reaches the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT, the value 1 is set to the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG (step S1530), and this routine is ended. The communication abnormality flag CC-FLG indicates that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT when the cumulative number of times that it has been determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective. Is a flag that indicates whether or not there is a problem with the transmitter. Value is 1 when there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the accumulated number of times determined to be in the state of not reaching the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT is set to the value 0, respectively. The communication error flag CC-FLG is set to 0 and reset when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, whereas it is not reset due to a momentary power failure or a power failure and the power is restored. The communication error flag CC-FLG is restored to the value at the moment or immediately before a power failure.

[16-1-8. Connection recovery processing]
Next, a connection recovery process executed as one process of the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 95 will be described. In this connection recovery processing, which is executed subsequent to the connection failure determination processing shown in FIG. 101, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450. When a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is output to confirm (recover) the connection between and, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is abnormal. Notify that.

When the connection recovery process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72, in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. In the scheduler update process of step S1020, it is determined whether or not the screen generation schedule data is being activated among the various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 (step S1540). In this determination, in the scheduler update process, in order to instruct which number of screen data from the first screen data to output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a among the time-sequentially arranged screen data constituting the screen generation schedule data. First, it is determined whether or not the pointer has been updated. In other words, in the scheduler update process, while the pointer is being updated, since the effect is proceeding according to the screen generation schedule data, it is determined that the screen generation schedule data is starting, while the screen generation schedule data is being activated. When the effect is completed according to the data and all the pointers are updated, it is determined that the screen generation schedule data has not been activated. It should be noted that in this determination, a demonstration is performed by the game board side effect display device 1600 while the startup screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 or in a customer waiting state. It is possible to determine whether or not it is during the period based on the screen generation schedule data, and display the start screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on on the game board side effect display device 1600. During the period in which the pachinko machine 1 is in the waiting state or the game board side effect display device 1600 is demonstrating, the process proceeds to step S1542, which will be described later, while displaying the start screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. During the period displayed on the effect display device 1600, or when the customer is in the waiting state and not demonstrating by the game board side effect display device 1600 (simply in the waiting state for the customer), This routine is finished as it is.

When the production is proceeding according to the screen generation schedule data in step S1540, that is, when the screen generation schedule data is being activated, this routine is ended as it is, while in step S1540 the screen generation schedule data is followed. When the effect is completed and the pointers are all updated, that is, when the screen generation schedule data is not activated, it is determined whether the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0 (step). S1542). As described above, this communication check counter CC-CNT is for the door frame side effect provided in the peripheral control board 1510 in the determination of step S1522 in the process every time the connection failure determination process shown in FIG. 101 is executed. Counts up the number of times it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. Do (count the cumulative number). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the number of times it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has occurred once.

When the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is 0 in step S1542, that is, when it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in a defective state, the number of times is not 1 On the other hand, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0 in step S1542 while the routine is finished, even if the number of times it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in a defective state is once, If so, it is determined whether or not the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0 (step S1544). As described above, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG indicates that the cumulative number of times when it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in a defective state has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT and is the transmitter. This is a flag that indicates whether or not the connection between the receiver and the receiver is definitely defective. When the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is definitely defective, the value is 1, between the transmitter and the receiver. When the accumulated number of times determined to be in a state in which the connection has a problem has not reached the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT, the value is set to 0.

When the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0 in step S1544, that is, the cumulative number of times when it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. If it has not reached, the SYNC pattern output processing is performed (step S1546), and this routine is ended. In this SYNC pattern output processing, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510, thereby producing the door frame side effect provided in the peripheral control board 1510. The transmitter IC 1512d outputs a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450. This predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and is output to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. The connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is restored.

On the other hand, if the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S1544, that is, if the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is definitely defective, the communication error display process is performed. (Step S1548), and this routine is completed. In this communication error display processing, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 included in the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 is provided in order to notify that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is definitely defective. The process of drawing is performed. For example, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, a message "A trouble has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call a clerk." Further, in the communication error display processing, a demonstration is performed by the game board side effect display device 1600 while the startup screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is being displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 or in a customer waiting state. During the period of operation, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 included in the effect display drive board 4450 are connected, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. In order to confirm whether or not a malfunction has occurred in the door frame side effect display device 460, the peripheral control MPU 1511a transmits LOCKN signal output request data as an operation confirmation request, and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 causes LOCKN. As a response signal to the transmission of the signal output request data, a LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and when this LOCKN signal is not input, it is considered that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that a problem has occurred in the door frame side effect display device 460, and a notification image (for example, "a problem has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call the clerk.") is displayed to that effect. While performing the process of displaying in the display area of the board side effect display device 1600, a notification sound (for example, "a problem has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device") is repeated from a speaker or the like provided in the door frame 3. Perform flow processing. At this time, processing for turning on all the LEDs for light emission decoration provided on the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on various decoration boards provided on the game board 5 may be performed.

Next, the timing at which the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs the connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 74 will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

First, a brief description will be given of the decorative symbols that are variably displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 provided in the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8. The peripheral control of the peripheral controller power-on process shown in FIG. The variable display of the decorative pattern is executed by the unit steady process and the like. The main control side of the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 93 by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69. The first special lottery result selected by receiving the game balls into the first starting opening 2002 shown in FIG. 8 by the main process or the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 94, or the second shown in FIG. When the second special lottery result selected by receiving the game balls into the starting opening 2004 is a "big hit", the number of times (round number) of opening/closing operations of the special winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8 is 1 to 15 rounds. Up to a total of 15 rounds, and in each round, within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), game balls enter the special winning opening 2005, and the number of balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls), The round is designed to be exhausted, and a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of game balls are paid out each time one game ball enters the special winning opening 2005.

From the main control board 1310, the first special lottery result drawn by receiving the game balls into the first starting opening 2002 or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game balls into the second starting opening 2004 is obtained. Based on the command, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, so that the left side of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 has a left side decorative design, and the center has a central decorative design. Then, the variable display of the right decorative pattern is started on the right side, and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern is stopped, and the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result. The player can recognize the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol indicator 1403 or the second special symbol indicator 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 66 at this time. The first special lottery result or the second special lottery result can be confirmed also in the symbol or the second special symbol. When the left side decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern are variably displayed, the left side decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern are translucent to the extent that the background image is visible, and the left side decorative pattern is displayed. From the upper left side of the area to the lower left side, the central decorative pattern is from the upper center of the display area to the central lower side, and the right decorative pattern is from the upper right side of the display area to the lower right side. When the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are displayed in a stopped manner while being variably displayed in an imaginary manner, the left displayed decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed. The left side decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern are in an opaque form so that the background image at the position is difficult to visually recognize. In this way, with the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is started and displayed in a variable display on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 66, The left side decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design, which start and stop variable display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, are synchronized.

The peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 has a first special lottery result selected by receiving a game ball into the first starting opening 2002, or a second drawing selected by receiving a game ball into the second starting opening 2004. When a command from the main control board 1310 that conveys the special lottery result is received, by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 based on the received command, as shown in FIG. 103, the game board side shown in FIG. When the variable display of the left side decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right side decorative design is started in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (timing K0), the peripheral control unit steady state processing of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. In the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the process, the first screen among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. Since the pointer is updated in order to instruct which of the screen data to output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a from the data, that is, in the scheduler update process, when the pointer is updated, according to the screen generation schedule data. Because the production is in progress, the screen generation schedule data is being activated, and while the screen generation schedule data is being activated, that is, the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern is started. Until the stop display is performed, even if the connection recovery process shown in FIG. 102 is executed in the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. The routine is forcibly ended as it is in the determination of step S1540 in the connection recovery process.

Thereby, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, until the variable display of the left side decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right side decorative design is started and stopped, the communication check counter CC-CNT is displayed. Even when the value is not 0, that is, between the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 included in the effect display drive board 4450 (that is, with the transmitter). Even if the number of times that it is determined that there is a problem in the connection with the receiver) is once, the SYNC pattern output process of step S1546 in the connection recovery process is not performed, and the transmitter and the receiver are not processed. The process for recovering the connection with the connection is not performed, the communication error display process of step S1548 in the connection recovery process is not performed, and, for example, "upper plate" is displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. The LCD display unit has a problem. Please call the clerk." message is not displayed, so it is reported that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal data. The LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is invalidated, and the door frame side effect display device 460 displays an image based on the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 from the door frame effect transmitter IC1512d. Is displayed.

When the variable display of the left side decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design is started and stopped in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (timing K1), the peripheral controller power supply shown in FIG. 95 is turned on. In the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the time process, the effect is completed according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Since all the updates have been completed, that is, while the screen generation schedule data is not activated and the screen generation schedule data is not activated in the scheduler update process, the peripheral controller power-on shown in FIG. 95 is turned on. When it is determined in step S1540 in the connection restoration process shown in FIG. 102 that is executed as one process of the warning process in step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the time process, the process proceeds to step S1542 in the same process, and the communication check counter CC- When the value of CNT is 0, that is, when the number of times that it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in trouble has not been performed once, the routine is terminated as it is, while the communication check counter is terminated. When the value of CC-CNT is not 0, that is, when the number of times that it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is one, the process proceeds to step S1544 in the same process. When the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0, that is, the cumulative number of times when it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver becomes the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. If not reached, the process proceeds to step S1546 in the same process, the above-mentioned SYNC pattern output process is performed, and the routine is ended, while the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is not 0 (value 1), In other words, when the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is definitely defective, the process proceeds to step S1548 in the same process, the above-mentioned communication error display process is performed, and the routine ends.
In other words, while the left side decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design are stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver are displayed. When the connection between ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in trouble even once, and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in trouble. When the cumulative number of times determined to be present does not reach the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the SYNC pattern output process is performed without fail, during the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. In other words, while the process of recovering the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is performed, the cumulative number of times when it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem reaches the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. When it is (that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is definitely defective), the communication error display process is performed without fail, for example, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. There is a problem with the liquid crystal display device on the upper plate side. Please call the store staff." is displayed, and the drawing data received from the transmitter IC 1512d for the door frame side effect is abnormal. The LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that conveys that the data is valid is enabled.

In the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern is started and stopped, and the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern is again displayed. In the interval period until the start, since the left decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design are stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, as described above, The LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that informs that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal data is enabled, and the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect In the case where the connection between the receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has failed at least once, and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a failure. When the cumulative number of times determined to be equal to has not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, by performing the SYNC pattern output processing without fail, the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is performed. That is, while the process of recovering the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is performed, the cumulative number of times when it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in a defective state becomes the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. When it has reached (that is, there is a certain problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver), the communication error display process is performed without fail, for example, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. The message "A problem has occurred in the liquid crystal display device on the upper plate side. Please call the store clerk." is displayed to notify.

When the variable display of the left side decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern is started again (timing K2), as described above, since the screen generation schedule data is being activated, the left side decorative pattern and the central decorative pattern. , And until the right decorative pattern is stopped and displayed (timing K3), even when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, for the door frame side effect provided in the peripheral control board 1510. The number of times that it is determined that there is a problem between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 (that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver) is 1 Even if it is the number of times, the SYNC pattern output process of step S1546 in the connection recovery process is not performed, and the process of recovering the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is not performed. Without performing the communication error display processing in step S1548, for example, the message "A trouble has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call the clerk." is not displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Therefore, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that informs that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal data is invalidated, and the door frame side effect display device is displayed. Reference numeral 460 displays an image based on the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d.

In this way, the variable display of the left side decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design is started and stopped in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the left decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative are again displayed. In the interval period until the variable display of the symbols is started, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that informs that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal data is activated. On the other hand, until the variable display of the left decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design is started and stopped in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect transmitter is displayed. The LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that informs that the drawing data received from the IC 1512d is abnormal data is invalidated. This is because the combination result of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern that are stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is the information that is of most interest to the player, and is profitable to the player. Since the player can determine whether or not a jackpot gaming state in which is given occurs, the left side decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design are variably displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Then, until the left side decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern are stopped and displayed, the image of the effect drawn in the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 is disturbed due to the influence of noise or the like and is correct. Even if the drawing cannot be performed, the effect is interrupted in the middle of the process, and the processing for recovering the correct drawing is not performed, but the left side decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 are displayed. By stopping the display of the right side decorative pattern, the drawing of the information that the player is most interested in is completed.

In this respect, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 is displaying a start screen at the time of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 on the game board side effect display device 1600, or a customer waiting state. In the period during which the game board side effect display device 1600 is demonstrating, the LOCKN signal output request data is significantly different from the case where it is transmitted to the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510. This LOCKN signal output request data is a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 during a period in which the start screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, or in a customer waiting state. During the period during which the peripheral control MPU 1511a transmits, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 and a door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 included in the effect display drive board 4450. It is transmitted as an operation confirmation request of the door frame side effect display device 460 in order to confirm whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the connections, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

When the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, is differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e included in the peripheral control board 1510, as described above, the differential signal is generated. The two signals differentiated into the plus signal and the minus signal in the digitizing circuit 1512e are input to the forced switching circuit 1512f provided in the peripheral control board 1510. Since the forced switching circuit 1512f is connected to the circuit so as to transmit the two signals when the two signals that are differentiated into the plus signal and the minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e are input, One signal is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. When the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 of the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V provided in the effect display drive board 4450 determines that the two received signals are LOCKN signal output request data, the LOCKN signal output request data is originally, As described above, since the signal format is different from the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, it is determined that the data is abnormal, and the LOCKN signal is output to the periphery of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. It is output to the control MPU 1511a. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a informs the effect display drive board 4450 that there is no problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is input as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data. While it can be determined that no malfunction has occurred, when the LOCKN signal is not input, there is a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and there is a malfunction in the production display drive board 4450. And display a notification image (for example, “There is a problem with the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call the store clerk”) and control the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source to display the game board side effect display device. By outputting to the audio data transmission IC 1512c by controlling the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source while outputting to the 1600, a notification sound (for example, "a problem has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device") that notifies that is output. A notification sound is emitted from a speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3. Thereby, it is possible to perform the notification by the notification image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the notification sound repeatedly played from the speaker or the like provided in the door frame 3. At this time, all the LEDs for light emission decoration included in the door frame 3 and various LEDs mounted on various decoration boards included in the game board 5 may be turned on.

As described above, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 transmits the LOCKN signal output request data that is serial data, the compulsory switching circuit 1512f can receive the LOCKN signal output request data at the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. The circuit is connected so that the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that receives the LOCKN signal output request data outputs the LOCKN signal from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 to the peripheral control MPU1511a as a response signal. Therefore, when the LOCKN signal is input, it can be determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is not in trouble, and it can be determined that the door frame side effect display device 460 is not in trouble. When no signal is input, it can be determined that a problem has occurred in the door frame side effect display device 460 because a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can execute the communication error display process of step S1548 in the connection recovery process of FIG. 102 as the notification process when it is determined that the door frame side effect display device 460 is defective. It has become. In other words, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a finds a defect in the door frame side effect display device 460, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can notify the clerk of the hall or the like by performing the notification process. Before the player plays the game, the store clerk or the like can very easily check whether or not the door frame side effect display device 460 has a problem, and the check does not take much time. ing. Therefore, the trouble of the door frame side effect display device 460 can be found without any trouble.

Further, as described above, the LOCKN signal is abnormal drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 included in the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510. If it is determined that it is a signal that is output to convey that fact, specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver included in the effect display drive board 4450. Since it is a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (restoring) the connection between ICSDIC0 and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, it is for the door frame side effect When the receiver ICSDIC0 cannot normally receive the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d, the receiver ICSDIC0 receives the image due to communication failure between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. The LOCKN signal can be output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 in order to notify that the drawn data becomes abnormal data. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a to which the LOCKN signal is input, sends a connection confirmation signal to the effect that the transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is started. By outputting to the frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d, it is possible to eliminate a communication problem between image communication. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can detect a defect of the door frame side effect display device 460 due to a communication defect during image communication at an early stage, and can work on the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d to eliminate the defect. It is like this. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play a game by finding and eliminating a defect in the door frame side effect display device 460.

Further, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that receives the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and outputs it to the door frame side effect display device 460 displays the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. When it cannot be received normally, the production control microprocessor sends a LOCKN signal, which is a communication failure occurrence signal, which notifies that there is a communication failure between the image communication between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. Since the peripheral control MPU 1511a of a certain peripheral control unit 1511 can output the signal, the peripheral control MPU 1511a to which the LOCKN signal is input controls the VDP 1512a with the built-in sound source of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 to cause a communication failure. It is an image that tells you that "a problem has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call the clerk." The generated image is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. It can be displayed and notified.
In other words, the peripheral control MPU 1511a early discovers a defect of the door frame side effect display device 460 due to a communication defect during image communication, and notifies the player seated on the front of the pachinko machine 1 to that effect, and Since the player can inform the store clerk of the hall or directly notify the store clerk of the hall who happened to pass in front of the pachinko machine 1, the clerk of the hall, etc. may have a problem. It is possible to start work for solving the problem at an early stage. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play a game by early finding and eliminating a defect in the door frame side effect display device 460.

Furthermore, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 has a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 and a door frame included in the effect display drive board 4450 in a period (interval period) of timing K1 to timing K2. The connection between the side effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver are defective even once even if the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has been defective. When the cumulative number of times determined to be in the state of not reaching the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for enabling the LOCKN signal to eliminate the communication failure between the image communication. To the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d, a connection confirmation signal that notifies the start of transmission from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 until the cumulative number reaches the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. , You can continue to output repeatedly. Thereby, the peripheral control MPU1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, the main control MPU1310a of the main control board 1310 fluctuates the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405. The connection confirmation signal can be repeatedly output only during the period in which the game is started and stopped and the game progress is not executed, so that the communication failure can be solved.

Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, during the period (interval period) of timing K1 to timing K2, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510, and the door frame side included in the effect display drive board 4450. Even if the connection between the production receiver ICSDIC0 and the transmitter, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has been in trouble at least once, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in trouble. When the cumulative number of times determined to be in the state of not reaching the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for activating the LOCKN signal to eliminate a communication failure between image communication is set. The door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d transmits a connection confirmation signal for informing that the transmission is started from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 until the cumulative number reaches the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. While continuing to output repeatedly, the main control MPU1310a of the main control board 1310 starts the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 and the game. The output of the connection confirmation signal is stopped when the progress of No. 1 is restarted, and the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d stops when the connection confirmation signal output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a is stopped and the connection confirmation signal is no longer input. It is possible to stop transmitting the data pattern (SYNC pattern) to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 and output the image generated by the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. It is like this. Thereby, the peripheral control MPU1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, the main control MPU1310a of the main control board 1310 changes the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405. By continuing to output the connection confirmation signal, which is the defect resolution signal, only during the period when the game is started and stopped and the game progress is not executed, it is possible to move toward the direction where the communication defect is resolved. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts and stops the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display device 1405 by changing the first special symbol or the second special symbol game. Only while the game is not proceeding, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 while continuously outputting the connection confirmation signal. Even if the first special symbol or the second special symbol game is fluctuated and the progress of the game is started again, the distortion of the effect (image disturbance) that progresses on the display screen of the door frame side effect display device 460 is Each time the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts execution of the game again and finishes it (every time period (interval period) of timing K1 to timing K2), it can be directed in the direction of elimination.

According to the embodiment as described above, the pachinko machine 1 includes the main control board 1310 of FIG. 69 and the payout control board 951 of FIG. 70. The main control board 1310 has a first starting port 2002 and a second starting point, which are starting areas in which the game balls, which are shot by the hitting ball launching device 650 toward the game area 5a defined in the game board 5, are provided in the game area 5a. The main control MPU 1310a of FIG. 69, which is a game control microprocessor that controls the progress of the game based on having entered the mouth 2004, is mounted. The payout control board 951 is a payout control microprocessor for controlling the payout of game balls by the payout device 830 based on the payout command from the main control board 1310 shown in FIGS. 88(a) and 88(b). 70 payout control MPU 952a is mounted.

The main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, includes at least a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a. The main control built-in RAM can store information about a game even after the power is cut off.

The payout control MPU 952a, which is a payout control microprocessor, includes at least a RAM (a payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control built-in RAM can store information about payout even after the power is cut off.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment further includes the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. When the operation switch 954 is operated within the period in which the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 92 is performed after the power is turned on, the information about the game stored in the main control internal RAM is erased. 77 to output the RAM clear signal of the main control MPU1310a which is the game control microprocessor, and when the payout control unit is operated within the period during which the power-on process is performed, the payout control built-in RAM is operated. A RAM clear function of outputting the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 82 to the payout control MPU 952a, which is a payout control microprocessor, as a RAM clear signal for erasing the stored payout related information, and the main control side power supply of FIG. When the operation is performed after the period in which the determination process of step S16 in the closing process is performed (or the period in which the payout control unit power-on process is performed after the power is turned on), the error generated in the dispensing device 830 is canceled. The error canceling function for outputting the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 82 to the main control MPU 1310a which is the game control microprocessor without outputting it to the payout control MPU 952a which is the payout control microprocessor as an error canceling signal for ..

As described above, when the operation switch 954 is operated within the period in which the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 92 is performed after the power is turned on, the game stored in the main control internal RAM is stored. 77 is output to the main control MPU1310a which is the game control microprocessor for erasing the information regarding the The RAM clear function of outputting the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 82 to the payout control MPU 952a, which is the payout control microprocessor, as a RAM clear signal for erasing the information related to the payout stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and FIG. When the operation is performed after the period in which the determination process of step S16 in the main control-side power-on process is performed (or the period in which the payout control unit power-on process is performed from the power-on) has elapsed, As an error cancellation signal for canceling the generated error, an error cancellation function of outputting the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 82 to the payout control MPU 952a which is the payout control microprocessor without outputting it to the main control MPU 1310a which is the game control microprocessor. Since the two functions are combined, the pachinko machine 1 can be provided with two different functions, that is, a RAM clear function and an error clear function, by operating one operation switch 954. Therefore, the RAM clear function and the error canceling function can be provided while contributing to cost reduction.

[Sensor signal input section of panel relay board 4161]
The sensor signal input unit of the panel relay board 4161 is various detection sensors arranged on the game board, for example, a general winning opening sensor 4020, a first starting opening sensor 4002, a second starting opening sensor 4004, a count sensor 4005, a vibration detection sensor. A circuit to which a detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 or the like is input. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signal from each detection sensor is input is the same, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is taken as an example of the detection sensor here, and the circuit to which the detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is input will be described. To do.

In a game machine, a magnet (for example, a permanent magnet or an electromagnet) is brought close to a game ball that has been driven into the game area, and the flow state of the game ball is manipulated as desired to obtain an unreasonable profit. There is no end to illegal gaming activities.

A magnetic detection sensor 4024 capable of detecting magnetism is provided in correspondence with a predetermined position in the game area in order to detect such an illegal game action and suppress the illegal action by a light emitting means or a sound alarm. There is.

[Conventional magnetic sensor input circuit]
FIG. 104 is a circuit diagram showing an example of a conventional magnetic sensor input circuit provided in a gaming machine.
The gaming machine has a main control board 1310 and a panel relay board 4161. As illustrated, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is supplied with the voltage +5V created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g.

The magnetic detection sensor 4024 includes a magnetic sensor MGS and a built-in transistor STR. The magnetic sensor MGS includes, for example, a magnetoresistive effect element, and outputs a predetermined voltage (for example, +5 V) when the magnetism of a predetermined value or more is not detected, and outputs a voltage when the magnetism of a predetermined value or more is detected. It does not work (0V).

The base terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the output terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR is grounded. The collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected via a connector CON1 to one end of a pull-up resistor IR0 provided on the panel relay board 4161, and +12V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR0. As a result, when the transistor STR is in the off state, the collector terminal of the transistor STR is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor IR0 (corresponding to the first voltage).

The transistor STR is turned on by the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS when the magnetic sensor MGS does not detect magnetism, and a current flows from the collector terminal to the ground via the emitter terminal. When the magnetic sensor MGS detects magnetism, the transistor STR is turned off by stopping the output from the magnetic sensor MGS, and the current flow from the collector terminal to the emitter terminal is stopped.

The collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the pull-up resistor IR0 as well as one end of the resistor IR1, and the other end of the resistor IR1 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 is grounded, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR2, and +12V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR2. As a result, when the transistor ITR0 is off, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor IR2.

The collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the pull-up resistor IR2 and also to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 in the subsequent stage. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the connector CON2.

The main control input circuit 1310b includes a pull-up resistor NR1, a resistor NR2, and a transistor NTR1. One end of the pull-up resistor NR1 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 at the previous stage of the panel relay board 4161 via the connector CON2. +12V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor NR1. As a result, when the transistor ITR in the previous stage is in the off state, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor NR1.

The collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the pull-up resistor NR1 as well as one end of the resistor NR2, and the other end of the resistor NR2 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1. The emitter terminal of the transistor NTR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is electrically connected to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

In the figure, the detection sensor unit corresponds to the magnetic detection sensor 4024, and the voltage output unit 4163 corresponds to the pull-up resistor IR0 connected to the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and applied with +12V. Further, the detection circuit portion 4164 is a circuit which is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 and includes a pull-up resistor IR2 to which +12V is applied, and a transistor ITR1 whose base terminal is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0. Is applicable.

Further, in the preceding stage of the detection circuit unit 4164, the sensor signal input unit 4162 is configured by the circuit configured by the connector CON1, the voltage output unit 4163, the resistor IR1 and the transistor ITR0. In this way, the panel relay board 4161 is provided with the sensor signal input unit 4162 and the detection circuit unit 4164.

[Detection operation]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in the non-detection state where it does not detect magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR to turn on the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the connector CON1, the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. Further, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor STR is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). Further, since the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is also reduced to the ground side. This turns off the transistor ITR0.

When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor IR2 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1, so that the transistor ITR1 is turned on. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. The magnetic detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal in which the transistor NTR1 is off is LOW (off) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

When the magnetic sensor MGS is in the detection state in which magnetism is detected, the output of the voltage from the magnetic sensor MGS is stopped and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR disappears, so that the built-in transistor STR is turned off. When the transistor STR is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is raised to the +12V side. Further, since the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is also increased to +12V (corresponding to the first voltage). As a result, the transistor ITR0 turns on.

When the transistor ITR0 turns on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0. When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor NR2 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1, so that the transistor NTR1 is turned on. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, the magnetic detection switch signal whose logic connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is HI (on) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

The operating states of the magnetic sensor MGS, the built-in transistor STR, the transistor ITR0, the transistor ITR1, and the transistor NTR1 described above are shown in the table form in FIG. Even when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is disconnected from the panel relay board 4161, the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the transistor ITR1 is turned off, and the transistor NTR1 is turned on similarly to the operation when the magnetic sensor MGS detects magnetism. ..

By the way, when signal transmission is performed by the connector member, when the connector member is corroded or dust enters the connector connection portion, contact resistance occurs. Depending on the shape of the contact terminal of the connector member, there are pin contact type and bellows contact type connector members. The gap is easier to open than the type. If the gap is opened, dust or the like will easily enter from this portion.

Further, when vibration is applied to the connector member, contact resistance similarly occurs. For example, when playing right-handed, when a number of game balls are continuously concentrated and flow down, vibration from a specific part of the game area is applied to the connector member, causing slight sliding wear. However, this may cause contact resistance.

Here, a conventional magnetic sensor input circuit when such a contact resistance RR occurs in the connector member (connector CON1) electrically connecting the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and the voltage output portion 4163 of the panel relay board 4161. The operation will be described. For example, in FIG. 104, when the contact resistance RR is generated in the connector member, the contact resistance RR is shown by a chain line. The size of the contact resistance RR is 100 to 1000 times that when the contact of the connector is normal.

As described above, the built-in transistor STR is turned on when the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism. When the built-in transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistor RR (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. As a result, although the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is reduced to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage), a current flows through the contact resistance RR, so that the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR is increased. Will be lifted. In FIG. 104, the connection point between the pull-up resistors IR0 and IR1 is illustrated as a black circle as a location where the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR rises.

That is, since a current flows through the contact resistance RR generated due to the contact state of the connector portion, a voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0. .. When the voltage raised by the contact resistance RR reaches the specified voltage between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0, the transistor ITR0 is turned on. Therefore, there is a possibility that the transistor ITR0 may be turned on even though the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detection state. That is, in the conventional sensor signal input unit 4162 provided on the panel relay board 4161, when the contact resistance RR is generated, the sensor signal may be erroneously detected.

[Example 1 of magnetic sensor input circuit]
FIG. 105 is a circuit diagram showing an example (Example 1) of the magnetic sensor input circuit provided in the gaming machine of the embodiment. The magnetic sensor input circuit of the first embodiment in this embodiment is the same as the magnetic detection sensor 4024 of the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit of FIG. The main control input circuit 1310b of 1310 has the same circuit configuration. Therefore, the same reference numerals are used for the same circuit components.

It should be noted that the magnetic detection sensors 4024 are respectively installed at a plurality of places in the game area, for example, in the vicinity of the first start opening 2002, the second start opening 2004, the general winning opening 2001, the special winning opening 2005, the out opening 1126, and the like. become.

The magnetic sensor input circuit of the present embodiment is different from the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit in that when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism between the voltage output unit 4163 and the detection circuit unit 4164, Even if a predetermined voltage higher than the voltage (second voltage) lowering the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR to the ground side and lower than the first voltage is applied, the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164 is exerted. The voltage raising unit 4166 for avoiding the above is provided, and the voltage output unit 4163 and the detection circuit unit 4164 are electrically connected via the voltage raising unit 4166.

In the first embodiment, the voltage raising unit 4166 is an example including a Zener diode ZD0 having a Zener voltage higher than the predetermined voltage. Specifically, the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163, and is connected to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 via the connector CON1 in the preceding stage of the connection portion. It is connected.

The anode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 arranged in the subsequent stage. In addition, +12V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR0. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 is grounded, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR2 of which +12V is applied to the other end in the detection circuit unit 4164, and the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 is connected. It is connected to the base terminal. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the connector CON2. The connector CON1, the voltage output section 4163, and the voltage raising section 4166 constitute a sensor signal input section 4162.

[Detection operation when connector contact is normal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in the non-detection state where it does not detect magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR to turn on the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the connector CON1, the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR.

As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor STR is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). Further, since the collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 via the Zener diode ZD0, the Zener voltage is higher than the second voltage, so the Zener diode ZD0 maintains the non-conduction state. Therefore, no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (0V). This turns off the transistor ITR0.

When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to the +12 V side by the pull-up resistor IR2 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164, so that the transistor ITR1 is turned on. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. The magnetic detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal in which the transistor NTR1 is off is LOW (off) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

When the magnetic sensor MGS portion is in the detection state in which magnetism is detected, the output of the voltage from the magnetic sensor MGS is stopped, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR disappears, so that the built-in transistor STR is turned off. When the transistor STR is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is raised to the +12V side. Further, since the collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 via the Zener diode ZD0, the Zener voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (corresponding to the first voltage). As a result, the transistor ITR0 turns on.

When the transistor ITR0 turns on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0. When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit portion 4164 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1, so that the transistor NTR1 is turned on. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, the magnetic detection switch signal whose logic connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is HI (on) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

Then, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that such an abnormal state is present, in the above example, when the logic of the magnetic detection switch signal is determined to be HI, the main control unit MPU1310a is in the vicinity. Processing such as transmitting an error command to the control unit 1511 and outputting a signal to that effect from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer is performed. In response to the error command, the peripheral control unit 1511 notifies the abnormality by the game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect display device 460, an alarm lamp, voice, or the like.

[Detection operation when connector contact is abnormal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in the non-detection state where it does not detect magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR to turn on the built-in transistor STR.

When the built-in transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistor RR (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. As a result, although the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage), a current flows through the contact resistance RR, so that the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR is increased. Comes up. In FIG. 105, a connection point between the pull-up resistor IR0 and the Zener diode ZD0 is illustrated as a black circle as a portion where the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR rises.

That is, a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is applied to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 by causing a current to flow in the contact resistance generated due to the contact state of the connector section. become. Even if a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage is applied, the Zener diode ZD0 maintains the non-conduction state because the Zener voltage is higher than the predetermined voltage. Therefore, no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (0V). This turns off the transistor ITR0. That is, the voltage raising unit 4166 avoids the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164.

The operation of the detection circuit unit 4164 and the main control input circuit 1310b in the subsequent stage is the same as the detection operation when the contact of the connector is normal.

This does not affect the voltage of the detection circuit unit 4164 (since there is no voltage change), and when contact resistance occurs due to slight sliding wear of the connector member, the signal from the detection sensor due to contact resistance False detection can be prevented.

As in the conventional case, when an abnormality is detected by the magnetic sensor MGS, the main control MPU 1310a sends an error command to the peripheral control unit 1511, and the peripheral control unit 1511 responds to the error command sent by the magnet. Informs that an illegal game action using is performed, or that the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is broken, by means of a game board side effect display device 1600, a door frame side effect display device 460, a warning indicator, voice, etc. To do. Also, an error signal is output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer.

[Example 2 of magnetic sensor input circuit]
FIG. 106 is a circuit diagram showing an example (Example 2) of the magnetic sensor input circuit provided in the gaming machine of the embodiment. The magnetic sensor input circuit of the second embodiment is the main control of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 of the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit of FIG. 104, the connector CON1, the voltage output unit 4163 of the panel relay board 4161, the detection circuit section 4164, and the main control board 1310. The input circuits 1310b have the same circuit configuration. Therefore, the same reference numerals are used for the same circuit components.

In the second embodiment, the voltage raising unit 4166 has a first resistor IR1 having one end connected to the voltage output unit 4163, and one end connected to the other end of the first resistor IR1 and the other end grounded. It is configured to include a second resistor IR3. Comparing the sensor signal input unit 4162 of the second embodiment with the conventional sensor signal input unit 4162 of FIG. 104, one end of the resistor IR3 whose other end is grounded is arranged at the subsequent stage to the other end of the resistor IR1. The difference is that it is connected to the connection point with the base terminal of the transistor ITR0. That is, the second embodiment is an example in which the voltage raising unit 4166 is configured by the resistor IR3 that causes a current to flow to the ground and drops when the predetermined voltage is applied.

Note that one end of the first resistor IR1 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163, and is connected to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 via the connector CON1 in the preceding stage of the connecting portion. ing.

Further, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR1 to which +12V is applied to the other end in the detection circuit unit 4164, and is also connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the connector CON2. The connector CON1, the voltage output section 4163, and the voltage raising section 4166 constitute a sensor signal input section 4162.

[Detection operation when connector contact is normal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in the non-detection state where it does not detect magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR to turn on the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the connector CON1, the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR.

As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor STR is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). Further, since the collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0, the voltage pulled down to the ground side is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0. This turns off the transistor ITR0.

When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor IR2 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1, so that the transistor ITR1 is turned on. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. The magnetic detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal in which the transistor NTR1 is off is LOW (off) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

When the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in the detection state in which magnetism is detected, the output of the voltage from the magnetic sensor MGS is stopped and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR disappears, so that the built-in transistor STR is turned off. When the transistor STR is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is raised to the +12V side.

Further, a voltage of +12V is applied to the series resistance circuit composed of the pull-up resistor IR0, the first resistor IR1 and the second resistor IR3 of the voltage raising unit 4166, and the pull-up resistor IR0 and the voltage raising unit 4166 of the pull-up resistor IR0. A current flows to the ground via the first resistor IR1 and the second resistor IR3. When a current flows through the second resistor IR3, a potential difference generated across the second resistor IR3 is applied between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0, so that the transistor ITR0 is turned on.

When the transistor ITR0 turns on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0. When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit portion 4164 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1, so that the transistor NTR1 is turned on. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, the magnetic detection switch signal whose logic connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is HI (on) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

[Detection operation when connector contact is abnormal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in the non-detection state where it does not detect magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR to turn on the built-in transistor STR.

When the built-in transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistor (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. As a result, although the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage), a current flows through the contact resistance RR, so that the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR is increased. Comes up. In FIG. 106, the connection point between the pull-up resistor IR0 and the first resistor IR1 is illustrated as a black circle as a location where the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR rises.

That is, a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is applied to one end of the first resistor by causing a current to flow in the contact resistance RR generated due to the contact state of the connector portion. It will be. This voltage is sufficiently lower than the voltage applied when the built-in transistor of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is turned off.

When a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage is applied to one end of the first resistor, a current flows through the first resistor IR1, and this current also flows through the second resistor IR3 to ground. That is, since the other end of the second resistor IR3 is grounded, the current due to the predetermined voltage higher than the applied second voltage and lower than the first voltage almost drops to the ground, and the second resistor IR3 is grounded. Almost no current flows into the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the subsequent stage of IR3. Therefore, the transistor ITR0 in the subsequent stage is not turned on. As a result, the transistor ITR0 in the subsequent stage maintains the off state. That is, the voltage raising unit 4166 avoids the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164.

The operation of the detection circuit unit 4164 and the main control input circuit 1310b in the subsequent stage is the same as the detection operation when the contact of the connector is normal.

This does not affect the voltage of the detection circuit unit 4164 (since there is no voltage change), and when contact resistance occurs due to slight sliding wear of the connector member, the signal from the detection sensor due to contact resistance False detection can be prevented.

[Example 3 of magnetic sensor input circuit]
FIG. 107 is a circuit diagram showing an example (Example 3) of the magnetic sensor input circuit provided in the gaming machine of the embodiment. The magnetic sensor input circuit of the third embodiment includes the magnetic detection sensor 4024 of the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit of FIG. 104, a connector, a voltage output unit 4163 of the panel relay board 4161, a detection circuit section 4164, and a main control input of the main control board 1310. The circuits 1310b have the same circuit configuration. Therefore, the same reference numerals are used for the same circuit components.

In the third embodiment, the voltage raising unit 4166 has two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 that form a Darlington circuit set to an operating voltage higher than a predetermined voltage lower than the first voltage and higher than the second voltage. And resistors IR1, IR4, and IR5.
Compared with the above-described second embodiment, in the third embodiment, a resistor IR4 and a resistor IR5 connected in series instead of the resistor IR3 whose other end is grounded are respectively connected in parallel to the two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 forming the Darlington circuit. Connected. That is, in the third embodiment, the voltage raising unit 4166 is an example including the resistors IR4 and IR5 that cause a current to flow to the ground and drop when the predetermined voltage is applied.

More specifically, one end of the resistor IR1 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163, and the other end of the resistor IR1 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the preceding stage of the Darlington circuit. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR2 in the latter stage of the Darlington circuit, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR2 is grounded.

The other end of the resistor IR1 is connected to the base terminal of the preceding-stage transistor ITR0 and is also connected to one end of the resistor IR4, and the other end of the resistor IR4 is connected to the emitter terminal of the preceding-stage transistor ITR0. Further, one end of the resistor IR5 is connected to the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the preceding stage, and the other end of the resistor IR5 is grounded.

That is, the resistor IR4 is connected in parallel between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the front stage, and the resistor IR5 is connected in parallel between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR2 in the rear stage. The collector terminals of the two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 are connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 while being connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR2 to which +12V of the detection circuit section 4164 is applied to the other end.

[Detection operation when connector contact is normal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in the non-detection state where it does not detect magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR to turn on the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the connector CON1, the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. Further, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor STR is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). Since the base terminal of the transistor is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is also reduced to the ground side. As a result, the transistor ITR0 turns off and the transistor ITR2 also turns off.

When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to the +12 V side by the pull-up resistor IR2 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164, so that the transistor ITR1 is turned on. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. The magnetic detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal in which the transistor NTR1 is off is LOW (off) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

When the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in the detection state in which magnetism is detected, the output of the voltage from the magnetic sensor MGS is stopped and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR disappears, so that the built-in transistor STR is turned off. When the transistor STR is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is raised to the +12V side.

In addition, a voltage of +12V is applied to the series resistance circuit composed of the pull-up resistor IR0, the resistor IR1, the resistor IR4, and the resistor IR5 of the voltage raising unit 4166, and the pull-up resistor IR0 and the resistor IR1 of the voltage raising unit 4166, A current flows to the ground via the resistors IR4 and IR5. When a current flows through the resistor IR4, the potential difference generated between both ends of the resistor IR4 is applied between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage. As a result, the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage is turned on.

When the preceding-stage transistor ITR0 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the resistor IR5. When a current flows through the resistor IR5, a potential difference generated across the resistor IR5 is applied between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR2 in the subsequent stage. As a result, the transistor ITR2 in the subsequent stage is turned on.

When the latter transistor ITR2 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the latter transistor ITR2, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR2. When the transistor ITR2 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR2 in the subsequent stage is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1, so that the transistor NTR1 is turned on. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, the magnetic detection switch signal whose logic connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is HI (on) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

[Detection operation when connector contact is abnormal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in the non-detection state where it does not detect magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR to turn on the built-in transistor STR.

When the built-in transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistor RR (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. As a result, although the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage), a current flows through the contact resistance RR, so that the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR is increased. Comes up. In FIG. 107, the connection point between the pull-up resistors IR0 and IR1 is illustrated as a black circle as a location where the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR rises.

That is, a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is applied to one end of the resistor IR1 by the current flowing through the contact resistance generated due to the contact state of the connector portion. .. This voltage is sufficiently lower than the voltage applied when the built-in transistor of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is turned off.

When a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is applied to one end of the resistor IR1, a current flows through the resistor IR1, and this current also flows to the ground through the resistors IR4 and IR5. That is, since the other end of the resistor IR5 is grounded, most of the current due to the applied predetermined voltage drops to the ground, and almost no current flows to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage of the Darlington circuit, which is the subsequent stage of the resistor IR1. Does not flow. Therefore, the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage is not turned on. Also, the transistor ITR2 in the subsequent stage is not turned on.
As a result, the two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 of the Darlington circuit are kept off. That is, the voltage raising unit 4166 avoids the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164.

The operation of the detection circuit unit 4164 and the main control input circuit 1310b in the subsequent stage is the same as the detection operation when the contact of the connector is normal.

This does not affect the voltage of the detection circuit unit 4164 (since there is no voltage change), and when contact resistance occurs due to slight sliding wear of the connector member, the signal from the detection sensor due to contact resistance False detection can be prevented.

Further, as shown in FIG. 109, a plurality of open collector type sensor signal input sections 4162 respectively connected to the plurality of magnetic detection sensors 4024 are connected in parallel to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit section 4164. ing. When any one of these sensor signal input units 4162 detects magnetism and turns on, the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 turns off.

Even if any one of the connections between the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and the sensor signal input unit 4162 is broken, similarly, the detection circuit unit 4164 is turned on by turning on the sensor signal input unit 4162 corresponding to the broken magnetic detection sensor 4024. Transistor ITR1 is turned off. When there are a plurality of sensors, a voltage output unit 4163 is provided for each of the plurality of sensors, and the provided voltage output units 4163 are provided in a transistor array having a plurality of Darlington circuits, for example, “TD62083AP” (commercial item, TOSHIBA Co., Ltd.). Manufactured by the manufacturer).

Although the sensor signal input unit 4162 provided on the panel relay board 4161 of the present embodiment has been described above, the detection sensor applicable to the sensor signal input unit 4162 is not limited to the magnetic detection sensor 4024, and a connector member The sensor signal may be transmitted from the detection sensor by various sensors, for example, various types of sensors, for example, a general winning opening sensor 4020, a first starting opening sensor 4002, a second starting opening sensor 4004, a count sensor 4005, a vibration detection sensor, a contact. It is possible to apply a sensor or the like.

[Application example in which the sensor signal input unit 4162 of the panel relay board 4161 is applicable]
The sensor signal input unit 4162 according to the first to third embodiments described above is described as a device for preventing erroneous detection of a signal from the detection sensor due to contact resistance generated when the contact of the connector is abnormal. By the way, the applicable portion of the sensor signal input unit 4162 of the first to third embodiments is not limited to the contact portion of the connector.

As described above, in the gaming machine, the detection sensor has a situation in which a plurality of locations in the game area are set (for example, they are respectively arranged in the vicinity of a start opening, a winning opening, a special winning opening, an out opening, etc.). .. Therefore, the electrical connection between the detection sensor and the detection circuit unit (for example, the transistor of the panel relay board) that detects the detection signal from the detection sensor is performed by various circuit patterns and wiring (harness) depending on the installation location of the detection sensor. Is appropriately selected. In this regard, various forms will be adopted depending on the model of the game machine.

By the way, the current flowing through the detection sensor changes due to the change of the resistance value due to the secular change of the used electric parts (for example, connector and detection sensor) and the wiring pattern, and the length of the wiring (harness). If the value is different from the value, the circuit may not operate normally. In addition, the resistance value changes when the specifications of the sensor are changed during development, for example, when the design of the type of the detection sensor, the location, and the length of the wiring (harness) is changed. Therefore, the current flowing through the detection sensor changes. Further, depending on the location of the detection sensor, the length of the harness, or the location where the harness is routed, there are cases where noise is easily picked up, and the degree of influence of noise also changes.

If a current flows through the resistance value that changes due to such a situation, the current flowing through the detection sensor may be different from the original designed value. That is, the signal from the detection sensor may be erroneously detected.
Moreover, the circuit may not operate normally due to the influence of noise, and the signal of the detection sensor may be erroneously detected.

The sensor signal input unit 4162 including the voltage raising unit 4166 of the first to third embodiments is used for the electric parts (for example, the connector and the detection sensor) used, the secular change of the wiring pattern, and the wiring (harness). Even if the resistance value changes depending on the length, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a signal from the detection sensor due to secular change or noise, and to generalize the detection circuit. In the conventional example shown in FIG. 104 and the example shown in FIG. 105, the changing resistance value is shown by a box surrounded by a two-dot chain line.

In the following, a case where noise is placed on the harness will be described as an example. Further, FIG. 110(A) shows a signal waveform inputted to the sensor signal input unit 4162 in the conventional example, and FIG. 110(B) shows a signal waveform inputted to the sensor signal input unit 4162 in the embodiment. The left side of FIG. 110A is a signal waveform input when there is no noise, and the right side is a signal waveform input when noise is present.

As shown in FIG. 110(A), in the conventional example, when there is no noise, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is at a low level (0.4 V) when no magnetism is detected, and the transistor ITR0 of FIG. 104 is turned on. It is possible to maintain a level lower than the applied voltage (0.8 V). When the magnetism detection sensor 4024 detects magnetism, the level is high (12V), which is higher than the voltage (0.8V) at which the transistor ITR0 turns on, and the transistor ITR0 turns on.

On the other hand, in the conventional example, when noise is present, even if the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism, the peak of the noise waveform is the voltage (0.8 V) at which the transistor ITR0 turns on, as indicated by the hatched portion. ), the transistor ITR0 is turned on, and the off state cannot be maintained. Therefore, the signal of the sensor is erroneously detected.

In addition to noise, for example, as shown in FIG. 110A, when overshoot occurs, erroneous detection does not occur in a state where magnetism is detected, but when undershoot occurs, the transistor ITR0 is turned on. It is impossible to maintain the off state. Therefore, the signal of the sensor is erroneously detected.

As shown in FIG. 110B, in the embodiment, the voltage raising unit 4166 raises the voltage that can be input to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 of FIG. 105 to 2V as an example of a voltage higher than 0.8V. Has been done. The detection operation is at a low level (0.4 V) when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism in the case of no noise, which is lower than the raised voltage 2 V, so that the voltage at which the transistor ITR0 turns on. A level lower than (0.8V) can be maintained. When the magnetism detection sensor 4024 detects magnetism, it is at a high level (12V) and is higher than the raised voltage 2V. Therefore, the voltage raising unit 4166 turns on and the transistor ITR0 turns on (0. 8V), and the transistor ITR0 turns on.

On the other hand, in the embodiment, when noise is present, the peak of the noise waveform exceeds the voltage (0.8 V) at which the transistor ITR0 is turned on even when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism. Also, since the boosted voltage is lower than 2V, the voltage boosting unit 4166 maintains the off state. Therefore, the transistor ITR0 can be kept off. Therefore, false detection can be prevented.

Next, for example, a case where a voltage rise occurs due to an increase in resistance value due to aging change will be described as an example. Further, FIG. 111(A) shows a signal waveform input to the sensor signal input unit 4162 in the conventional example, and FIG. 111(B) shows a signal waveform input to the sensor signal input unit 4162 in the embodiment. The left side of FIG. 111A is a signal waveform input in a normal case, and the right side is a signal waveform input in a case where a voltage rise occurs due to an increase in resistance value due to secular change.

In the conventional example, when a voltage rise occurs due to an increase in resistance value due to aging, even if the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism, the voltage input as indicated by the hatched portion is a transistor. Since the voltage (0.8 V) at which ITR0 is turned on is exceeded, the transistor ITR0 remains on, and the off state cannot be maintained. Therefore, the signal of the sensor is erroneously detected.

On the other hand, in the embodiment, even when the voltage rises due to the increase in the resistance value due to the secular change, the input voltage causes the transistor ITR0 to turn on when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism. Even if the voltage exceeds the voltage (0.8 V) that is applied, the voltage is less than the boosted voltage of 2 V, so that the voltage raising unit 4166 maintains the off state. Therefore, the transistor ITR0 can be kept off. Therefore, false detection can be prevented.

As described above, since the sensor signal input unit 4162 of the first to third embodiments includes the voltage raising unit 4166, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a signal from the detection sensor due to secular change or noise. Further, since the sensor signal input unit 4162 is provided with the voltage raising unit 4166, noise may be generated when the location of the detection sensor is changed, the length of the harness is extended, or the place where the harness is routed is changed. Even if there is a place where it is easy to pick up, the sensor signal input unit 4162 can prevent the influence of noise. Therefore, the circuit section (sensor signal input section 4162 and detection circuit section 4164) provided on the panel relay board 4161 can be generalized.
Therefore, it becomes possible to have a margin in design change during development.

[Sensor signal input section 4162' of another embodiment]
The magnetic detection sensor 4024 shown in the first to third embodiments described above includes the built-in transistor STR. When the magnetism is not detected, the built-in transistor STR is turned on, while when the magnetism is detected, the built-in transistor STR is turned on. Although the transistor STR is turned off, in other words, the sensor signal input unit 4162 uses a transistor whose input is low when magnetism is not detected and whose input is high when magnetism is detected. Instead of this, a magnetic sensor whose input is high when magnetism is not detected and whose input is low when magnetism is detected, in other words, a magnetic sensor which is turned off when magnetism is not detected and is turned on when magnetism is detected. It is also possible to use.

FIG. 112 is a circuit diagram showing an example of a magnetic sensor input circuit of another embodiment. The magnetic sensor MGS is turned off when it does not detect magnetism above a predetermined value, and is turned on when it detects magnetism above a predetermined value.

The input terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS is connected to one end of a pull-up resistor IR0 provided on the panel relay board 4161 via a connector CON1, and +12V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR0. The output terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS is grounded.

As the voltage raising unit 4166, the one described in the first to third embodiments can be used. In this another embodiment, the voltage raising unit 4166 is an example including a Zener diode ZD0 having a Zener voltage higher than the predetermined voltage. Specifically, the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163, and is connected to the input terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS via the connector CON1 in the preceding stage of the connecting portion.

The anode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 arranged in the subsequent stage. In another embodiment, the detection circuit section 4164' is composed of the transistor ITR0. In addition, +12V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR0. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the connector CON2, and +12V is connected to the pull-up resistor NR applied to one end. There is.
Here, the circuit configuration of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 is the same as in the first to third embodiments. In another embodiment, the voltage output unit 4163 and the voltage raising unit 4166 form a sensor signal winning unit 4162', and the transistor ITR0 forms a detection circuit unit 4164'.

[Detection operation when normal]
In the non-detection state in which the magnetic sensor MGS does not detect magnetism, the magnetic sensor MGS is off. As a result, the voltage pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor IR0 is applied to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 (corresponding to the first voltage). Since this applied voltage is higher than the Zener voltage, the Zener diode ZD0 is turned on, and the transistor ITR0 is turned on by being applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 of the detection circuit unit 4164 via the anode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0.

When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 of the detection circuit unit 4164', and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0.

When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. The magnetic detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal in which the transistor NTR1 is off is LOW (off) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

In the detection state where the magnetic sensor MGS detects magnetism, the magnetic sensor MGS is turned on.
When the magnetic sensor MGS is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0 to which +12V is applied, the connector CON1, the input terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS, and the output terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS.

As a result, the voltage at one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163 is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). Further, since one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 via the Zener diode ZD0, the Zener voltage is higher than the second voltage, so the Zener diode ZD0 maintains the off state. Therefore, no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (0V). This turns off the transistor ITR0.

When the transistor ITR0 turns off, the voltage pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 to turn on the transistor NTR1. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, the magnetic detection switch signal whose logic connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is HI (on) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

[Detection operation in case of abnormality due to change in resistance value]
In the non-detection state in which the magnetic sensor MGS does not detect magnetism, the magnetic sensor MGS is off. As a result, the voltage pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor IR0 is applied to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 (corresponding to the first voltage). Since this applied voltage is higher than the Zener voltage, the Zener diode ZD0 is turned on, and the transistor ITR0 is turned on by being applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 of the detection circuit unit 4164 via the anode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0.

At this time, even if there is noise on the harness from the magnetic sensor MGS, the voltage applied to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 (corresponding to the first voltage) is higher, so the Zener diode ZD0 is higher. There is no influence on the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 via the anode terminal of, and the transistor ITR0 remains turned on. That is, the voltage raising unit 4166 avoids the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164'.

On the other hand, in the detection state in which the magnetic sensor MGS detects magnetism, the magnetic sensor MGS is turned on. When the magnetic sensor MGS is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0 to which +12V is applied, the connector CON1, the input terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS, and the output terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS.

As a result, the voltage at one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163 is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). Further, since one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 via the Zener diode ZD0, the Zener voltage is higher than the second voltage, so the Zener diode ZD0 maintains the off state. Therefore, no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (0V). This turns off the transistor ITR0.

At this time, even if there is noise on the harness from the magnetic sensor MGS, the predetermined voltage due to the noise applied to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 is higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage. This is a predetermined voltage, and this predetermined voltage is applied to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0. Even if a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage is applied, the Zener diode ZD0 maintains the OFF state because the Zener voltage is higher than the predetermined voltage. Therefore, no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (0V). This turns off the transistor ITR0. That is, the voltage raising unit 4166 avoids the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164. The operation of the main control input circuit 1310b is the same as the detection operation in the normal case.

[Example of Arranging Multiple Sensor Signal Input Units 4162 on Panel Relay Board 4161]
Next, FIG. 113 is a diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration of the invention according to claim 1. As shown in FIG. 113, an example is shown in which the same substrate (on the panel relay substrate 4161), the voltage output unit 4163, the voltage raising unit 4166, and the detection circuit unit 4164 are arranged. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and for example, at least one of the voltage raising unit 4166, the voltage output unit 4163, and the detection circuit unit 4166 may be arranged on the same substrate. FIG. 114 shows a circuit configuration in which the voltage raising unit 4166 and the detection circuit unit 4164 are arranged on the same substrate (panel relay substrate 4161) and the voltage output unit 4163 is arranged on another substrate (for example, a sensor substrate). It is a figure which shows an example.

In FIG. 115, the voltage output section 4163 and the voltage raising section 4166 are arranged on the same board (panel relay board 4161), and the detection circuit section 4164 is arranged on another board (for example, the main control board 1310). It is a figure which shows the example of the circuit structure. As described above, the arrangement positions of the voltage output unit 4163 and the detection circuit unit 4164 can be variously changed.

FIG. 114 is a diagram showing another example of the circuit configuration of the invention according to the embodiment of the present invention. The resistance value that changes with time or the wiring length includes the magnetic detection sensor 4024 or the magnetic sensor MGS, the wiring (harness) from these to the panel relay board 4161, and the connector CON1. The detection sensor portion arranged at a predetermined position on the game board 5a is configured by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 of the first to third embodiments in FIG.

The voltage output unit 4163 outputs the first voltage when the detection sensor unit is in the first state, and the second voltage which is lower than the first voltage when the detection sensor unit is in the second state. Output voltage. For example, in the circuit shown in FIG. 113, when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism, a low level voltage (for example, 0.4 V) is output, while the magnetic detection sensor 4024 detects magnetism. At this time, a high level voltage (for example, 12V) is output.

The detection circuit unit 4164 switches ON/OFF of the output of the detection signal according to the first voltage or the second voltage output from the voltage output unit 4163. Since the detection circuit unit 4164 of FIG. 113 uses the detection circuit unit 4164 described in the first to third embodiments, the pull-up resistor IR2 pulled up to +12V is connected to the preceding stage of the base terminal of the transistor ITR1. ing.

Then, with respect to the subsequent stage of the voltage output unit 4163, the first voltage (eg, 12 V in each embodiment) is higher than the second voltage (eg, 0.4 V in each embodiment). Even when a predetermined voltage lower than the above (for example, a voltage of 0.8 V or more and less than 2.0 V is shown in FIG. 111) is applied, the effect of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164 is avoided. A voltage raising unit 4166 is provided.

Further, as shown in FIG. 113, one detection circuit unit 4164, a plurality of voltage output units 4163 and a plurality of voltage raising units 4166 are arranged on the same substrate (on the panel relay substrate 4161). .. In the present example, the sensor signal input unit 4162 is composed of the voltage output unit 4163 and the voltage raising unit 4166 arranged at the subsequent stage of the voltage output unit 4163.
Further, each of the plurality of voltage raising units 4166,... Is electrically connected in parallel to one detection circuit unit 4164.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 113, a plurality of open collector type sensor signal input units 4162 connected to each of the plurality of magnetic detection sensors 4024 or magnetic sensors MGS are connected to the base of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164. Multiple terminals are connected in parallel. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the connector CON2.

In FIG. 113, when any one of these sensor signal input units 4162 detects magnetism and turns on, the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 turns off, which turns on the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b. Is. Therefore, the detection signal can be detected without erroneously detecting any of the plurality of detection sensor units. As described above, when the sensor signal input unit 4162 including the voltage raising unit 4166 is used, it is not necessary to consider the resistance value changing as illustrated. Therefore, a plurality of sensor signal input units 4162 can be integrated on one board (on the panel relay board 4161), and the panel relay board 4161 can be commonly used (generalized) in various types of game machines. Is possible. Therefore, it contributes to the reduction of man-hours related to design changes and manufacturing during development.

FIG. 116 shows an example in which a plurality of magnetic sensors MGS according to another embodiment described in FIG. 112 are provided and the plurality of magnetic sensors MGS are electrically connected to the voltage output unit 4163 in parallel. Further, in FIG. 116, the magnetic sensor MGS of another embodiment is used. In another example of FIG. 116, when the magnetic sensor MGS detects magnetism (the magnetic sensor MGS is on), the voltage output unit 4163 outputs a low level voltage (for example, 0.4 V), while the magnetic sensor When the MGS does not detect magnetism (the magnetic sensor MGS is off), the voltage output unit 4163 outputs a high level voltage (for example, 12V).

On the other hand, in FIG. 116, since the detection circuit unit 4164' described in another embodiment is used, the difference is that there is no pull-up resistor IR2 pulled up to +12V, and +12V is applied to one end of the main control input circuit 1310a. The collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor NR1 to which is applied.

In FIG. 116, when any one of these magnetic sensors MGS detects magnetism and turns on, the transistor ITR0 of the detection circuit portion 4164' is turned off, thereby turning on the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b. Is.

Hereinafter, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the control regarding the game progress and the effect will be summarized.

As described above, the main control board 1310 executes various processes for controlling the entire pachinko machine 1, and outputs various control signals (control commands) according to the process results. In addition, the peripheral control board 1510, based on the control signal (control command) output by the main control board 1310, the display mode of the effect display device 1600 (display images of patterns, various background images, characters, characters, etc.), The display mode and operation mode of various members (production operation unit 400, movable member, etc.) that contribute to production are controlled.

In particular, the main control board 1310 performs a special symbol process process each time an interrupt process is performed. In this special control process, first, the first and second starting mouth winning process is performed. In the first and second starting opening winning process, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won the starting opening, and when it is determined that the winning is achieved, the holding number of the corresponding special symbol is increased by 1. Done.

When the processing flag is 0 when the first/second starting mouth winning process is finished, the variation start process is executed. In this variation start process, on condition that the number of holdings is 1 or more, the big hit determination in the hold state is digested and executed , Update the processing flag to “1”.

On the other hand, when the processing flag is 1 when the first/second starting mouth winning process is finished, the variation pattern setting process is executed. In this variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern of the special symbol (identification symbol) displayed on the first special symbol display device or the second special symbol display device based on the result of the stored big hit determination and the current game state (( After determining and setting the variation time from the start of variable display of the special symbol to the stop display) and the stop symbol (big hit symbol, lost symbol, etc.), the processing flag is updated to "2".

On the other hand, when the processing flag is 2 when the first/second starting mouth winning process is finished, the changing process is executed. In this changing process, the changing time determined and set in the changing pattern setting process is monitored by the timer, and the changing display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display device or the second special symbol display device based on the time-out. To stop. After that, when the result of the big hit determination stored in the variation start process is a big hit, the process selection flag is updated to "3", and when the result of the big hit determination stored in the variation start process is not the big hit (miss). The processing selection flag is updated to "0". That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the process starts again from the fluctuation start process.

On the other hand, when the processing flag is 3 when the first/second starting mouth winning process is finished, the big hit game process is executed. In this big hit game processing, the condition device, which is one of the conditions for executing the big hit game, is activated, and the mode of the big hit game (for example, the number of rounds) determined based on the type of the big hit is set, Based on this, the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing member 2106 is controlled. In addition, when the big hit game ends, the processing of stopping the operation of the condition device is performed, and when the type of the big hit is a special type, it is controlled to an advantageous state such as a time saving state or a probability variation state. After updating the game state flag as shown, the processing flag is updated to "0". That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the process starts again from the fluctuation start process.

A plurality of types of fluctuation patterns are stored as the fluctuation patterns. The variation pattern determines the time from the start to the end of the symbol variation of the special symbol, and the information that is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 causes the production display device 1600 to produce an effect. The type of pattern can be determined. In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of variation patterns can be classified into a jackpot variation variation pattern, an outlier reach variation variation pattern, and an outlier variation variation pattern. The big hit variation is a variation that is performed when the result of the big hit determination is a big hit, and in the effect display device 1600, the variation display of the decorative symbol finally develops so that the big hit symbol is finally stopped and displayed after the reach effect. The effect is performed. The outlying reach variation is a variation that is performed when the result of the big hit determination is lost and it is determined that the reach is performed by the reach determination based on the reach random number, and in the effect display device 1600, the reach effect is used to perform the decoration. Finally, the effect of expanding the variable display of the symbols is displayed so that the symbols are fixedly stopped and displayed. The out-of-bounds variation is a variation that occurs when the result of the jackpot determination is a loss and the reach determination based on the reach random number does not determine that the reach is performed, and the effect display device 1600 does not perform the reach effect. Finally, the effect that the variable display of the decorative design is finally dislocated and the fixed design is stopped and displayed is executed.
Further, the variation pattern is defined so that it can be specified which variation pattern is the first special symbol side or the second special symbol side.

That is, the peripheral control board 1510 acquires game information such as a result of a big hit determination from the main control board 1310 and refers to the game information so that such a variation pattern of the decorative pattern can appear. Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, a variation pattern of a decorative symbol appears in the effect display device 1600 based on the acquired game information, and the effect display (background or hold image) related to the degree of expectation is changed or effected. Controls such as changing the mode (display or movement) of the operation unit 400 and operating a movable member such as the back-bottom rear movable effect unit 3100 are executed.

Further, the peripheral control board 1510 can acquire operation information for the operation button 410 and operation information of the player in the vicinity of the opening window, and can also execute control related to the effect according to the information.

Here, a principle of acquiring operation information in the vicinity of the opening window will be described. FIG. 119 is a schematic diagram for explaining the principle of operation information acquisition in the vicinity of the opening window. In addition to omitting unrelated members for explaining the operation information acquisition principle, related members will also be described. These are shown schematically. 120 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 119.

That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the game board 5 housed in the main body frame 4 and formed with the game area 5a in which the game balls flow down, and the game area 5a are visible. A door frame 3 having an opening window and capable of being opened and closed with respect to the main body frame 4 is provided. As shown in FIGS. 119 and 120, the door frame 3 is provided with a reflective standing wall portion 33 that is erected along the outer periphery of the opening window and is capable of reflecting light at least on its inner surface. Has been. The opening window is a portion of the through hole 111 on the front side (front side) of the glass plate 192.

Here, the reflective standing wall portion 33 is provided as a frame decoration. More specifically, the reflection standing wall portion 33 is formed by a lower reflection standing wall portion 338 formed by the lower plate unit base 323, a left side reflection standing wall portion 538 formed by the left unit base 531 and a right unit base 551. The right reflection standing wall portion 568 is provided, and these members are arranged in a substantially U shape (a mode in which the reflection standing wall portion is not installed above the opening window) along the outer peripheral edge of the opening window. It is configured by Then, in the lower reflection standing wall portion 338, the left side reflection standing wall portion 538, and the right side reflection standing wall portion 568, the inner side surfaces thereof are substantially perpendicular to one specific virtual plane P (FIG. 120). It is provided so as to serve as a light reflecting surface.

According to this structure, none of the lower reflection standing wall portion 338, the left side reflection standing wall portion 538, and the right side reflection standing wall portion 568 of the reflection standing wall portion 33 formed in a substantially U shape is provided. A part (upper side of the opening window) is arranged such that “light from a predetermined light source outside the outer periphery of the opening window travels on the one specific virtual plane P and is taken into the outer periphery of the opening window, and by extension, the reflection standing wall portion. 33 so that the light reflected by the reflective standing wall 33 travels on the one specific virtual plane P and outside the outer periphery of the opening window. It will also act as a second part that allows "to be detected".

Furthermore, in the reflection standing wall portion 33 according to this embodiment, one reflection member is provided across the inner side surfaces of the three separate members (the lower reflection standing wall portion 338, the left side reflection standing wall portion 538, the right side reflection standing wall portion 568). A structure in which a member 36 (for example, a reflection seal) is attached is adopted, and thereby, the reflection performance of the reflection standing wall portion 33 including the joint between three different members is suitably secured.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 119, the left side base 572a (see FIG. 23) provided on the upper left side outside the outer periphery of the opening window of the door frame 3 (see FIG. 23). In the internal space 3435a, a left outer light emitting portion 34a and a left outer light detecting portion 35a are provided. The left side base 572a itself is provided by a member having a very low light transmittance (or 0).

Here, the internal space 3435a is a space including the one specific virtual plane P that intersects with the lower reflective standing wall portion 338, the left reflective standing wall portion 538, and the right reflective standing wall portion 568, and is provided with an opening window. It is provided as a space that is opened only toward the side so that light can travel toward the opening window side and that light from the opening window side can be taken in. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, such an internal space 3435a is provided on the back side of the left upper speaker 573, and in order to suppress fraudulent activity from the back side of the speaker 573, the pachinko machine 1 and the open window are provided. A transmissive member 3436a designed to have an extremely high transmissivity and an extremely low influence on the traveling direction of light is arranged.

Further, the left outer peripheral light emitting section 34a is unitized with the left outer peripheral light detecting section 35a, and emits light toward a wide range on at least the side where the opening window is provided on the one specific virtual plane P. Are provided so that they can proceed.

In addition, the left outer peripheral light detecting section 35a is unitized with the left outer peripheral light emitting section 34a, and it is possible to detect the light from the side where the opening window is provided on at least the one specific virtual plane P. It is provided to be done.

With such a configuration, the light from the left outer peripheral light emitting portion 34a is reflected by the reflective standing wall portion 33 after traveling toward the opening window side, and becomes the reflected light from the reflective standing wall portion 33, and the internal space 3435a. Be incorporated into. In this respect, in the internal space 3435a, since only the light from the opening window side is taken in by the left side base 572a, the disturbance is preferably suppressed, and from the left outer peripheral light emitting portion 34a. The light emitted and reflected by the reflection standing wall portion 33 can be detected by the left outside light detecting portion 35a.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 119, the right side base 572b provided on the upper right side outside the outer periphery of the opening window of the door frame 3 (see FIG. 23). The inner space 3435b includes a right outer light emitting portion 34b and a right outer light detecting portion 35b. The right side base 572b itself is also provided by a member having extremely low light transmittance (or 0).

Here, the internal space 3435b, like the internal space 3435a, is a space including the one specific virtual plane P at a position intersecting with the lower reflective standing wall portion 338, the left reflective standing wall portion 538, and the right reflective standing wall portion 568, respectively. And is provided as a space into which light from the opening window side can be taken in while opening only toward the side where the opening window is provided so that light can travel toward the opening window side. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, such an internal space 3435b is provided on the back side of the right upper speaker 573, and in order to suppress fraudulent activity from the back side of the speaker 573, it is provided between the open window and the open window. A transmissive member 3436b designed to have an extremely high transmittance and an extremely low influence on the traveling direction of light is arranged.

Further, the right outer peripheral light emitting section 34b is unitized with the right outer peripheral light detecting section 35b, and emits light toward a wide range on at least the side where the opening window is provided on the one specific virtual plane P. Are provided so that they can proceed.

Further, the right outer peripheral light detecting section 35b is unitized with the right outer peripheral light emitting section 34b, and can detect the light from the side where the opening window is provided on at least the one specific virtual plane P. It is provided to be done.

According to such a configuration, the light from the right outer peripheral light emitting portion 34b travels toward the opening window side and then is reflected by the reflective standing wall portion 33, and becomes the reflected light from the reflective standing wall portion 33, and the internal space 3435b is obtained. Be incorporated into. In this respect, in the internal space 3435b, since only the light from the opening window side is taken in by the right side base 572b, the disturbance is preferably suppressed, and the right outer peripheral light emitting portion 34b can be controlled. The light emitted and reflected by the reflection standing wall portion 33 can be detected by the right outer peripheral light detection portion 35b.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a region surrounded by the heights of the lower reflection standing wall portion 338, the left reflection standing wall portion 538, and the right reflection standing wall portion 568 from the three directions ( The area marked with dots in FIG. 120) functions as a special operation receiving portion 3333 capable of detecting the operation by the player, and the operation mode of the player for this special operation receiving portion 3333 is determined. Therefore, the effect control according to the determination can be executed.

For example, when the player does not perform an operation on the special operation receiving portion 3333, the light emitted from the left outer peripheral light emitting portion 34a in a wide angle range is not blocked by any physical object, and the reflection standing wall portion 33 is not blocked. The reflected light comes from various angles (various angles on at least one specific imaginary plane P) in and goes to the left outer peripheral light detection section 35a. That is, in the left outer peripheral light detection section 35a, a plurality of light receiving elements (a plurality of light receiving elements arranged on at least one specific virtual plane P) reflect light reflected from various angles using an optical lens or the like. In the special operation receiving section 3333, information indicating that no physical object exists is output to the peripheral control board 1510 based on the separate detection signal.

Further, at this time, the light emitted from the right outer light emitting portion 34b in a wide angle range is not blocked by any physical object, and various angles in the reflective standing wall portion 33 (various angles on at least one specific virtual plane P). The light becomes reflected light from an angle and goes to the right outer peripheral light detection unit 35b. That is, the right outer peripheral light detection unit 35b also uses a plurality of light receiving elements (a plurality of light receiving elements arranged on at least one specific virtual plane P) for reflected light from various angles using an optical lens or the like. In the special operation receiving section 3333, information indicating that no physical object exists is output to the peripheral control board 1510 based on the separate detection signal.

On the other hand, when the player operates the special operation receiving portion 3333 in the manner shown in FIG. 119, a part of the light emitted from the left outer peripheral light emitting portion 34a in a wide angle range is partially touched by the player's finger ( The light is blocked by the physical object), and only the light other than the light directed in the blocked direction (angle range) becomes reflected light on the reflective standing wall portion 33 and goes to the left outer peripheral light detection portion 35a. That is, in this case, in the left outer peripheral light detecting section 35a, the left outer peripheral light emitting section 34a is based on information from the plurality of light receiving elements (a plurality of light receiving elements arranged on at least one specific virtual plane P). By determining the blocked direction (angle) and the size (angle range) of the light emitted from the light source, it is possible to determine the physical size of the light in any direction when viewed from the left outer light emitting portion 34a. Information about whether the object exists is output to the peripheral control board 1510.

Further, at this time, part of the light emitted from the right outer light emitting portion 34b in a wide angle range is also blocked by the player's finger (physical object), and the light directed in the blocked direction (angle range). Only the light other than the above becomes the reflected light on the reflection standing wall portion 33 and goes to the right outer peripheral light detection portion 35b. That is, in this case, in the right outer peripheral light detecting section 35b, based on the information from the plurality of light receiving elements (the plurality of light receiving elements arranged on at least one specific virtual plane P), the right outer peripheral light emitting section 34b. By determining the blocked direction (angle) and the size (angle range) of the light emitted from the light source, the size of the physical quantity in any direction when viewed from the right outer peripheral light emitting portion 34b is determined. Information about whether the object exists is output to the peripheral control board 1510.

The peripheral control board 1510 obtains the information from the left outer peripheral light detection unit 35a and the information from the right outer peripheral light detection unit 35b, respectively, and analyzes the information to allow the special operation receiving unit 3333 to perform the physical operation. In addition to the information indicating whether the object exists (whether the special operation receiving unit 3333 is operated), when the physical object exists in the special operation receiving unit 3333, the coordinate position (x, y) and the size of the physical object exist. You will be able to obtain information related to this. Then, as will be described later, the peripheral control board 1510 according to the present embodiment is configured to periodically acquire such information, which allows movement of the physical object in the special operation receiving unit 3333 and the size of the physical object. It is possible to determine an operation gesture such as a change, and perform effect control according to the determination.

Note that these analysis processes do not necessarily have to be performed on the peripheral control board 1510 side, and may be performed by an external means that acquires information from the left outer peripheral light detection unit 35a and the right outer peripheral light detection unit 35b. The peripheral control board 1510 may acquire the analysis result from the external means, or the external means and the peripheral control board 1510 may share the analysis result.

Further, the light emission from the left outer peripheral light emitting portion 34a and the light emission from the right outer peripheral light emitting portion 34b are set to blink, respectively, and the left outer light emitting portion 34a is in a light emitting state and the right outer light emitting portion 34b is in an off state. A certain period and a period in which the left outer light emitting portion 34a is in the off state and the right outer light emitting portion 34b is in the light emitting state may alternately occur. That is, in this case, the reflected light when the left outer light emitting portion 34a is in the light emitting state is detected by the left outer light detecting portion 35a side, and the reflected light when the right outer light emitting portion 35a is in the light emitting state is detected by the right outer light. If the light is detected on the side of the external light detector 35b and analyzed based on these pieces of information, the light from the left outer light emitting portion 34a and the light from the right outer light emitting portion 34b do not interfere with each other. It is expected that more accurate detection information will be obtained.

Further, the left-side outer peripheral light-emitting portion 34a and the right-side outer peripheral light-emitting portion 34b are made to blink, respectively, and the left-side outer peripheral light-emitting portion 34a is in a light emitting state and the right-side outer peripheral light-emitting portion 34b is in an off state. , The left outer light emitting portion 34a is in the off state and the right outer light emitting portion 34b is in the light emitting state, and the left outer light emitting portion 34a is in the off state and the right outer light emitting portion 34b is also One cycle in which the periods in the off state are sequentially generated may appear repeatedly. That is, in this case, the reflected light when the left outer light emitting portion 34a is in the light emitting state is detected by the left outer light detecting portion 35a side, and the reflected light when the right outer light emitting portion 35a is in the light emitting state is detected by the right outer light. If it is detected on the side of the external light detection unit 35b and the offset amount when the left outer peripheral light emitting unit 34a and the right outer peripheral light emitting unit 35a are in the off state is also detected and analyzed based on these information, The light from the left outer light emitting portion 34a and the light from the right outer light emitting portion 34b do not interfere with each other, and the detected offset amount can be eliminated before making the determination. It is expected to obtain high detection information.

In addition, visible light may be used as the light from the left outer light emitting portion 34a and the right outer light emitting portion 34b. However, in the pachinko machine 1, in view of the fact that light is produced in various places, it is preferable to use invisible light rays such as infrared rays to disturb the effect light and the effect light. It is more desirable to suitably suppress the adverse effect on

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, “light from a predetermined light source outside the outer periphery of the opening window travels on the one specific virtual plane P and is taken into the outer periphery of the opening window. The first portion that enables the light to be reflected by the reflection standing wall portion 33, and "the light reflected by the reflection standing wall portion 33 travels on the one specific virtual plane P and outside the outer periphery of the opening window. The second portion that enables "to be detected" is provided as the same portion of the reflection standing wall portion 33 formed in a substantially U shape. However, a plurality of regions in which light is allowed to travel between the inside and outside of the opening window are provided for the reflection standing wall portion 33, and the outside-peripheral light-emitting portion and the outside-peripheral-light detecting portion are separately provided for these regions. And may be arranged respectively.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the reflection standing wall portion 33 is formed in a substantially U shape having an upper opening. However, in the upper part of the opening window, the internal space 3435a and the internal space 3435b are formed. The reflective standing wall portion 33 may be formed also on the peripheral edge between them. However, it is preferable that the internal space 3435a and the internal space 3435b be provided so that the opening direction is a downward direction in order to prevent direct light from an illumination or the like from being taken in and disturbing. ..

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, by using the left outer peripheral light emitting section 34a and the left outer peripheral light detecting section 35a, the right outer peripheral light emitting section 34b and the right outer peripheral light detecting section 35b, Although the operation of the operation receiving unit 3333 can be detected, the invention is not limited to this. That is, any structure may be used as long as it can detect an operation in the special operation receiving portion 3333. For example, the reflected light from the left outer light emitting portion 34a and the reflected light from the right outer light detecting portion 35b are outside one outer circumference. It may be such that the coordinates (x, y) and the size of the physical object are determined based on the detection result obtained by the light detection unit.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the light from the outer-peripheral-light-emitting portion 34 (the left outer-peripheral-light-emitting portion 34a and the right outer-peripheral-light-emitting portion 34b) provided outside the outer periphery of the opening window is opened by the opening window. As a reflected light from a reflective standing wall portion 33 which is erected along the outer periphery of the opening and is formed so as to be able to reflect light at least on its inner side surface, an outer peripheral light detection portion 35 (left outer periphery) provided outside the outer periphery of the opening window. The vicinity of the opening window is caused to function as the special operation receiving portion 3333 by detecting with the external light detecting portion 35a and the right outer circumference external light detecting portion 35b), and an effect according to the operation mode of the player in the special operation receiving portion 3333 is produced. It is feasible.

The outer-peripheral-light detecting unit 35 is not disposed in the exposed state, but is disposed in the internal space 3435 of the side base 572 that is opened toward the side where the opening window is provided. It has also been described above that when the light is detected by the unit 35, the effect light that may be a disturbance can be preferably excluded.

However, even with such a configuration, the light from the outer peripheral light emitting portion 34 is reflected by the reflective standing wall portion 33 from the portion of the internal space 3435 that is opened toward the side where the opening window is provided. Since the structure is such that effect light in addition to light can be taken in, there is a concern that such effect light may become a disturbance and adversely affect the detection accuracy of the outer peripheral light detector 35.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 120, the frame side light emitting section L1 provided on the right unit base 551 of the main body frame 4 is first placed on the one specific virtual plane P. It is arranged at a position where it is not possible to irradiate the traveling light. More specifically, the frame-side light emitting section L1 is provided at a position on the front side of the special operation receiving section 3333 and has a very low light transmittance (or 0) with respect to the base section BL1. It is attached to the side. Since the base portion BL1 is wider than the frame side light emitting portion L1, it is difficult for the light from the frame side light emitting portion L1 to travel to the rear side (the side where the opening window is provided). Therefore, it is difficult for the light from the frame-side light emitting portion L1 to be taken into the internal space 3435.

Moreover, in the right unit base 551 according to this embodiment, the first right decoration base portion 551a provided by a material that allows the light from the frame side light emitting section L1 to travel with high transmittance, and the frame side The second right decoration base portion 551b is made of a material (for example, metal) having a low transmittance (or a transmittance of 0) that prevents the light from the light emitting portion L1 from traveling. The first right decoration base portion 551a is formed to surround the frame side light emitting portion L1 so that the light from the frame side light emitting portion L1 can contribute as effect light, while the second right side decoration portion 551a is formed. The base portion 551b is formed between the frame side light emitting portion L1 and the opening window so that the light from the frame side light emitting portion L1 does not easily travel toward the side where the opening window is provided. This also makes it difficult for the light from the frame-side light emitting section L1 to be taken into the internal space 3435.

In particular, the second right side decoration base portion 551b according to this embodiment allows the light from the frame side light emitting portion L1 to travel to the player side through the first right side decoration base portion 551a. It is provided so as to extend to a part of the front surface side of the right side decoration base portion 551a, so that the light from the frame side light emitting portion L1 is preferably prevented from traveling to the opening window. ..

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the right unit base 551 is provided with both the base portion BL1 and the second right side decoration base portion 551b, but only one of them is provided. Even in this case, it is possible to make it difficult for the light from the frame-side light emitting section L1 to be taken into the internal space 3435.

On the other hand, the frame side light emitting portion L2 provided on the left unit base 531 of the main body frame 4 is attached to the front side of the base portion BL2 having a very low light transmittance (or 0). It is at a position where the light traveling on the specific virtual plane P can be irradiated. However, as is clear from FIG. 120, since the reflection member 36 is provided between the frame side light emitting section L2 and the opening window, the light from the frame side light emitting section L2 is provided with the opening window. It is difficult to travel to the side, and this makes it difficult for the light from the frame-side light emitting section L2 to be taken into the internal space 3435.

However, since the height width of the reflecting member 36 is low, there is a concern that the light from the frame side light emitting portion L2 is reflected by another member or the like and travels toward the opening window. Therefore, also in the left unit base 531 according to this embodiment, the first left side decoration base portion 531a provided by a material that allows the light from the frame side light emitting section L2 to travel with high transmittance, and the frame side The second left side decoration base portion 531b is made of a material (for example, metal) having a low transmittance (or a transmittance of 0) that prevents the light from the light emitting portion L2 from traveling. The first left side decoration base portion 531a is formed so as to surround the frame side light emitting portion L2 so that the light from the frame side light emitting portion L2 can contribute as effect light, while the second left side decoration base portion 531a is provided. The base portion 531b is formed between the frame-side light emitting portion L2 and the opening window so that light from the frame-side light emitting portion L2 does not easily travel toward the side where the opening window is provided. This also makes it difficult for the light from the frame-side light emitting section L2 to be taken into the internal space 3435.

In particular, the second left side decoration base portion 531b according to this embodiment allows the light from the frame side light emitting portion L2 to travel to the player side through the first left side decoration base portion 531a. It is provided so as to extend to a part of the front surface side of the left side decoration base portion 531a, whereby light from the frame side light emitting portion L2 is suitably suppressed from proceeding to the opening window. ..

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the left unit base 531 is provided with the second left side decoration base portion 531b, and the right unit base 551 is provided with the second right side decoration base portion 551b. It is not always necessary to provide these members, and even in this case, it is difficult to capture the effect light in the internal space 3435 as described above. When the second left side decoration base portion 531b and the second right side decoration base portion 551b are not provided, the reflection member 36 has the first left side decoration base portion 531a and the first right side decoration base portion 551a. If it is not attached to the outer surface (the surface that can be contacted from the outside), but is attached to the inner surface (the surface that cannot be contacted from the outside) of the first left side decoration base portion 531a and the first right side decoration base portion 551a, It is expected to avoid the deterioration of the reflection performance due to the direct physical contact of the. In this case, the light from the outer peripheral light emitting portion 34 (the left outer peripheral light emitting portion 34a, the right outer peripheral light emitting portion 34b) is transmitted through the first left decorative base portion 531a and the first right decorative base portion 551a, and then The light is reflected by the reflecting member 36, passes through the first left side decoration base portion 531a and the first right side decoration base portion 551a again, and then is taken into the internal space 3435.

When the left unit base 531 is provided with the second left side decoration base portion 531b and the right unit base 551 is provided with the second right side decoration base portion 551b, the reflection member 36 is omitted and the second unit is omitted. The left side decoration base portion 531b and the second right side decoration base portion 551b themselves may be made to function also as a reflecting member using a material such as metal. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the effect light from the frame-side light emitting portions L1 and L2 from being a disturbance only by providing the reflecting member (the second left side decoration base portion 531b and the second right side decoration base portion 551b). While being appropriately suppressed, the detection accuracy of the outer-peripheral-light detecting unit 35 can be appropriately ensured by the reflected light from the reflection member (the second left side decoration base portion 531b, the second right side decoration base portion 551b). Become.

The peripheral control board 1510 according to the present embodiment can obtain information such as the coordinates and size of the physical object located near the opening window by using the principle of acquiring operation information near the opening window. By using this, substantially the entire area of the opening window (the almost entire area visible in the front view of the glass plate 192) is used as the special operation receiving portion 3333, and more operability with a high degree of freedom and flexibility It is possible to realize the performance suitable for this.

Hereinafter, the operability and the performance that can be realized by using the special operation receiving unit 3333 will be described. 121 to 127 are schematic diagrams for explaining the operability and the performance that can be realized by using the special operation receiving unit 3333, and are related to each other in describing the operability and the performance. In addition to omitting members that are not included, these are also shown schematically for related members.

FIG. 121 shows a special operation receiving portion 3333 when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, and various effect members AE arranged at positions overlapping the special operation receiving portion 3333 in the front view. Is schematically shown. In addition, the arrow in the figure simply shows the movable range of various movable bodies of the effect members A to E.

As shown in FIG. 121, when the special operation receiving portion 3333 according to this explanatory example is viewed from the front, the rear side with the glass plate 192 sandwiched therein can contribute to the effect according to the result of the big hit determination. As members, movable bodies A1, A2, B, C, a display portion D, and a board surface light emitting portion E provided so as to emit light at a portion where a game ball can flow down and other portions are arranged. .. The arrows in FIG. 121 schematically show the movable ranges of the movable bodies A1, A2, B, and C.

Note that these members are shown as an example for explaining the technology of the present application, and do not necessarily correspond to the embodiments described above with reference to FIG. 60 and the like. Basically, however, the movable bodies A1, A2, B, and C are, for example, "a back lower back movable effect unit 3100, a back upper left movable effect unit 3200, a back left movable effect unit 3300, a back middle movable effect unit 3400, a back. It corresponds to "movable member such as lower front movable effect unit 3500", the display section D corresponds to "effect display device 1600", and the board surface light emitting section E corresponds to "various decorations provided on the game board 5". It corresponds to "various LEDs mounted on a substrate". In addition, the board surface light-emitting part E does not necessarily have to be provided in the game board 5, and may be, for example, a member (a light guide plate or the like) provided in front of the game board 5.

Here, in the peripheral control board 1510, first, the display section D on which the effect display according to the result of the big hit determination is performed is positioned as the target of the operation effect, and the display section D of the special operation receiving section 3333 is viewed in front view. When the player performs an operation on the overlapping coordinate areas and this is detected as a physical object, it is possible to control so that a display change corresponding to the operation appears on the display unit D.

Hereinafter, an example of effect control in the case of causing the effect change on the display section D by the operation on the special operation receiving section 3333 will be described.

[First Operation Control Mode for Display D]
For example, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 121 and 122(a), when the first effect condition is satisfied based on the result of the big hit determination, the special operation receiving unit Of the entire coordinate area of the 3333 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 119), the first coordinate area Z1 facing the first display area of the display unit D is set (controlled) so as to be able to receive effects and is displayed. The specific operation instruction image S1 is displayed in the first display area of the section D. Then, during a predetermined period in which the specific operation instruction image S1 is displayed, an operation (for example, a touch operation on the glass plate 192 (strictly For example, a finger or the like may be provided in the special operation receiving portion 3333, and it is not necessary to touch), and when this is detected as a physical object, the specific operation instruction image S1 is hidden. The effect reception for the first coordinate area Z1 is ended and an effect change is caused on the display section D, and control that can suggest the degree of expectation for the result of the big hit determination can be executed depending on the type of the effect change that has occurred.

At this time, when the effect change is caused based on the operation performed to somewhere within the first coordinate area Z1 of the special operation receiving section 3333, the effect change is at least displayed on the display section D. It is desirable to cause it to occur in the first display area facing the first coordinate area Z1. That is, in this case, when the player has difficulty in visually recognizing the first display area in front view with his/her finger or the like, a production change occurs at least in the first display area. In the first display area, until the first display area is visually recognized (by utilizing the space between the glass plate 192 and the display unit D) from an oblique direction instead of moving the finger, or in a front view. It is possible to make it difficult to recognize the effect change that is appearing. Alternatively, the player may proceed with the game without checking the effect change in the first display area with his/her finger placed on the first coordinate area Z1, or may be located in front of the pachinko machine 1. It becomes possible to select a way of enjoying such as having a non-third person confirm the effect change in the first display area, and it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be improved.

It should be noted that, if no operation by the player is detected during the period from the appearance of the specific operation instruction image S1 to the elapse of a predetermined period (at a specific timing), the specific operation instruction image S1 is not displayed. At the same time, the effect reception for the first coordinate area Z1 is ended. At this time, the effect change that appears when there is an effect reception for the first coordinate area Z1 may be generated, or without the effect change that appears when there is an effect reception for the first coordinate area Z1. The effect reception for the first coordinate area Z1 may be ended.

[Second Operation Control Mode for Display D]
Further, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 121 and 122(b), when the second effect condition is satisfied based on the result of the big hit determination, the special operation receiving unit Of the entire coordinate area when the 3333 is viewed from the front (see FIG. 119), the “second coordinate area Z2 facing the second display area of the display section D” and the “third display of the display section D”. Both the area and the opposing third coordinate area Z3" are set (controlled) so as to be able to receive the effect, and the second operation instruction image S2 is displayed in the second display area of the display section D, and the third display area is displayed. At, the third operation instruction image S3 is displayed. Then, during the predetermined period in which both the second operation instruction image S2 and the third operation instruction image S3 are displayed, the second operation area Z2 or the third coordinate area Z3 of the special operation receiving portion 3333 is displayed. An operation (for example, a touch operation on the glass plate 192 (strictly speaking, a finger in the special operation receiving portion 3333 may be used and does not necessarily have to be touched)) is performed somewhere, and this is a physical object. When it is detected, both the second operation instruction image S2 and the third operation instruction image S3 are hidden and the effect reception of the second coordinate area Z2 and the third coordinate area Z3 is ended, and the display section D is displayed. In particular, a specific effect (effect corresponding to the selected side (coordinate area side in which the physical object is detected)) is generated, and the control that can suggest the degree of expectation for the result of the big hit determination can be executed in the generated specific effect. ..

It should be noted that the operation by the player was not detected until a predetermined period of time has passed (the specific timing has arrived) since both the second operation instruction image S2 and the third operation instruction image S3 appeared. In this case, both the second operation instruction image S2 and the third operation instruction image S3 are hidden, and the effect reception for the second coordinate area Z2 and the third coordinate area Z3 ends. ing. At this time, a specific effect that appears when an effect is received for the second coordinate area Z2 or the third coordinate area Z3 may be generated, or may not be generated. However, in the case of causing a specific effect that appears when the effect is received for the second coordinate area Z2 or the third coordinate area Z3, the operation for the second operation instruction image S2 is accepted before the execution of the specific effect. It is desirable that the display (effect or the like) generated when the operation is performed or the display (effect or the like) generated when the operation on the third operation instruction image S3 is accepted. That is, in this case, it is possible to recognize that the effect-side effect is forcibly executed while the second coordinate area Z2 and the third coordinate area Z3 are not operated. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in amusement of the game without knowing what effect is being executed.

In addition, in the first operation control mode and the second operation control mode for the display unit D, not only the performance reception for the first coordinate area Z1, the second coordinate area Z2, and the third coordinate area Z3 is permitted, but also the same. During the period, the same effect reception may be permitted for other operation means such as the operation button 410.

For example, in the first operation control mode for the display unit D, when the first effect condition is satisfied, both the first coordinate area Z1 and the operation button 410 are allowed to receive effects, and the specific operation instruction image S1 is received. Even when the pressing operation (detection of the button switch) on the operation button 410 is performed instead of the operation (detection of the physical object) on the first coordinate area Z1 in the predetermined period in which is displayed, The operation instruction image S1 is not displayed, the effect reception of the first coordinate area Z1 and the operation button 410 is ended, and an effect change is caused on the display section D, and an expectation for the result of the big hit judgment depending on the type of the effect change that has occurred. Enables control that can be suggested in degrees.

Even when there is an operation (detection of a physical object) on the first coordinate area Z1, the specific operation instruction image S1 is hidden, and the effect reception of the first coordinate area Z1 and the operation button 410 is ended, and It is possible to execute control in which a production change is caused on the display unit D, and the expectation for the result of the big hit determination can be suggested by the type of the produced production change.

Further, in the second operation control mode for the display unit D, when the second effect condition is satisfied, all the second coordinate area Z2 and the third coordinate area Z3 and the operation button 410 can accept effect. To do. Then, during the predetermined period in which the specific operation instruction image S2 and the specific operation instruction image S3 are displayed, the operation is not an operation (detection of a physical object) on either the second coordinate area Z2 or the third coordinate area Z3, but an operation. When the pressing operation on the button 410 (detection of the button switch) is performed, the second selection image indicating that the specific operation instruction image S2 is selected and the specific operation instruction image S3 are selected. The display is switched between the third selected image and the third selected image. Then, in a state where either the second selection image or the third selection image is displayed, when a predetermined period has elapsed after the specific operation instruction image S2 and the specific operation instruction image S3 are displayed, the selected image Is generated, a display (effect or the like) capable of grasping that the operation on the operation instruction images S2, S3 on the side where is displayed is generated, and the second operation instruction image S2 and the third operation instruction image S3 are selected. All of the images (the second selected image and the third selected image) are hidden and the effect reception for the second coordinate area Z2 and the third coordinate area Z3 and the operation button 410 is ended. Then, after that, a specific effect (effect on the selected side) is generated on the display unit D, and control that can suggest the degree of expectation for the result of the big hit determination can be executed in the generated specific effect.

It should be noted that, within the above-mentioned predetermined period, an operation (an operation for accepting any determination) for another operation means can be accepted, and when the operation for the other operation means is performed, the selected image appears. A display (effect) capable of grasping that the operation on the side operation instruction images S2, S3 is accepted is generated, and the second operation instruction image S2, the third operation instruction image S3, and the selection image (second selection) are generated. Both the image and the third selected image may be hidden and the effect reception for the second coordinate area Z2 and the third coordinate area Z3, the operation button 410, and further another operation means may be ended. Then, after that, a specific effect (effect on the selected side) is generated on the display unit D, and control that can suggest the degree of expectation for the result of the big hit determination can be executed in the generated specific effect.

In addition, within the predetermined period until the specific effect appears, the second coordinate area Z2 and the third coordinate area irrespective of whether the second selected image or the third selected image appears. The area Z3 is ready for production reception. Then, when an operation on either the second coordinate area Z2 or the third coordinate area Z3 is detected, regardless of which of the second selected image and the third selected image is appearing, the effect is produced. The display (effect etc.) on the side where the reception is made appears, and the second operation instruction image S2, the third operation instruction image S3, and the selected image (second selected image, third selected image) are not displayed. Then, the effect reception for the second coordinate area Z2 and the third coordinate area Z3, the operation button 410, and further another operation means is ended. At this time, the operation is detected before the second operation instruction image S2, the third operation instruction image S3, and the selected images (the second selected image and the third selected image) are all hidden. The switching display may be performed so that the selected images on the other side (second selected image, third selected image) appear. Then, after that, a specific effect (effect on the selected side) is generated on the display unit D, and control that can suggest the degree of expectation for the result of the big hit determination can be executed in the generated specific effect.

According to such a configuration, not only the performance reception for the first coordinate area Z1, the second coordinate area Z2, and the third coordinate area Z3 is permitted, but also for other operation means such as the operation button 410, The same production reception is possible. In this respect, in the second operation control mode, when the same effect reception is possible, but the operation for the second coordinate area Z2 or the third coordinate area Z3 is performed, the second coordinate area Z2 or the third coordinate area Only one operation (detection of the physical object) is accepted for the area Z3, and it is possible to generate the side effect according to the preference of the player. That is, when another operation means is used, "a side according to the preference of the player until a predetermined period elapses after the specific operation instruction image S2 and the specific operation instruction image S3 are displayed. Is required to be generated” or “to perform an operation at least twice using a plurality of operating means”, whereas when a specific operation receiving portion 3333 is used, Since it is possible to make the display mode according to the preference of the player appear with a small number of operations (one time in this example of performance), more complicated performance can be realized with simple operability. You will be expected.

In addition, while providing such efficient operability, at the same time operability capable of achieving a desired operation by performing at least two or more operations using a plurality of operating means is provided. The player can worry about which one should be selected as the desired operation while performing the operation in the process steps up to the desired operation. That is, in this case, it becomes easier to visualize the production situation after selection while performing the operation in the process stage until reaching the desired operation, and which operation should be performed with a margin within a predetermined period Will be able to. In this way, the player can selectively use operation means that require different numbers of operations depending on whether he/she is ready to make a decision or in a troubled state. Like

As described above, in the peripheral control board 1510, by making the display section D the target of the operation effect using the special operation receiving section 3333, it is possible to realize an interesting effect that has never been achieved. However, as described above, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to the present embodiment, the special operation receiving portion 3333 has a larger operation reception range in front view than the display section D (the coordinate range to be detected is the glass plate 192). By providing such a special relationship, it is possible to realize a more dynamic and highly flexible operability and a performance suitable for this. ..

[Third Operation Control Mode for Display D]
For example, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 121 and 123(a), when the third effect condition is satisfied based on the result of the big hit determination, the special operation receiving unit Of the total coordinate area when 3333 is viewed from the front (see FIG. 119), the fourth coordinate area Z4 that faces the fourth display area of the display unit D is set (controlled) so as to be able to receive effects and is displayed. A specific operation target image S4 is displayed in the fourth display area of the section D, and a specific image prompting that the specific operation target image S4 is operated to move to the movable body B in another display area of the display section D is displayed. indicate.

Then, in a predetermined period after the specific operation target image S4 is displayed, an operation is performed on a part of the special operation receiving portion 3333 within the fourth coordinate area Z4 (for example, a touch operation on the glass plate 192 ( Strictly speaking, it suffices that the special operation receiving portion 3333 has a finger or the like, and it is not necessary to touch it)), and when this is detected as a physical object, as shown in FIG. 123(b). The coordinate area in which the effect can be received is not the limited fourth coordinate area Z4 in the display unit D, but a large fifth coordinate area including at least the coordinate area facing the movable body B provided outside the display unit D. Change the setting to Z5. In addition, the fifth coordinate area Z5 of this description example faces the movable body B provided outside the display unit D from the coordinate area (which does not necessarily match the fourth coordinate area Z) facing the fourth display area. It also includes a coordinate area to be set, and is set so as to straddle the movable body B, the display section D, and the board surface light emitting section E.

At this time, the display mode of the specific operation target image S4 is changed (for example, the color is changed) based on the fact that the operation is performed on the special operation receiving portion 3333 anywhere in the fourth coordinate area Z4. Alternatively, the specific operation target image S4 may be made recognizable by being operated by the player.

That is, in the third operation control mode, with the physical object such as a finger held in the special operation receiving portion 3333, the physical object is moved to the coordinate position facing the movable body B in the fifth coordinate area Z5. When it is moved to, the specific operation target image S4 appearing in the display unit D acts on the movable body B provided outside the display unit D, and the effect on the movable body B is started. It has achieved a dramatic production.

Therefore, when the physical object such as a finger is held in the special operation receiving unit 3333 and the physical object is moved within the fifth coordinate area Z5, the peripheral control board 1510 detects the movement of the physical object and The control for moving the specific operation target image S4 in the display unit D so as to follow the detected movement of the physical object is executable. As a result, the specific operation target image S4 is in the special operation receiving portion 3333 of the physical object from the time when the physical object is in the middle of the movement in which the physical object has not yet moved to the coordinate position facing the movable body B. It moves in the display unit D so as to follow the movement in the front view.

More specifically, with a physical object such as a finger held in the special operation receiving portion 3333, the physical object is moved from the position shown in FIG. 123(b) in the fifth coordinate area Z5 to that shown in FIG. 124(a). When the peripheral control board 1510 is moved to the position indicated by, the specific operation target image S4 is moved in the display unit D so as to follow the movement of the physical object. However, when a physical object such as a finger is located at the position shown in FIG. 124(a) and a specific operation target image S4 is displayed in a display area facing the position, the specific operation target image S4 is displayed. A part of it is out of the display section D, and the entire part cannot be displayed. Therefore, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to the present embodiment, the specific operation target image S4 is displayed only on the displayable portion of the display section D, and the portion protruding from the display section D is present. Is controlled so that the corresponding portion of the board surface light emitting portion E emits light. More specifically, as the physical object approaches the coordinate position facing the edge of the display unit D, the specific operation target image S4 is reduced in the portion displayed on the display unit D, and the board surface light emitting unit E is reduced. The light emitting area is controlled so as to increase the corresponding portion.

According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to express that the specific operation target image S4 on the display section D is about to jump out of the display section D by the operation of the player. This makes it possible to realize more dynamic and more flexible operability that is not contained in this single unit and performance suitable for this.

In particular, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 124(a), a physical object such as a player's finger is located at a coordinate position facing the display unit D in the fifth coordinate area Z5. Despite being placed, the effect control is performed not only on the display section D but also on a member (board surface light emitting section E) different from the display section D. Therefore, even when the physical object is moved in the coordinate area facing the plurality of members of the special operation receiving unit 3333, it is easy to recognize that the effect corresponding to the movement appears. It becomes possible to suitably realize the performance suitable for the dynamic operability.

When a physical object such as the player's finger is moved slightly upward from the position shown in FIG. 124(a) in the fifth coordinate area Z5, the physical object is not the display unit D but the game board 5 (Here, it is in a state of being placed at a coordinate position facing the board surface light emitting section E). However, also in this case, instead of suddenly hiding all of the specific operation target image S4 and causing only the board surface light emitting unit E to emit light, as the physical object moves away from the coordinate position facing the display unit D, a specific operation is performed. The target image S4 is controlled so as to reduce the portion displayed on the display section D and increase the corresponding portion as the light emitting area of the board surface light emitting section E. That is, in this case, when the physical object is separated by a specific distance from the coordinate position facing the display unit D, only the board surface light emitting unit E of the display unit D and the board surface light emitting unit E produces an effect (here, light emission). As a result, it is possible to express an effect as if the specific operation target image S4 moved to the outside of the display unit D.

Then, when the physical object such as the player's finger moves further upward in the fifth coordinate area Z5 and reaches the position shown in FIG. 124(b), the peripheral control board 1510 moves to a position facing the physical object. The control is performed so that both the board surface light-emitting portion E and the movable body B in FIG. That is, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to the present embodiment, the same control as the above-described effect control performed between the display section D and the board surface light emitting section E is performed even between the board surface emitting section E and the movable body B. I'm trying to do it. More specifically, when the physical object in the coordinate area facing the game board 5 (here, the board surface light emitting section E) approaches the coordinate area facing the movable body B by a predetermined distance, the physical object Even though the board itself is in the coordinate area facing the board light emitting section E, not only the board surface light emitting section E but also a member (movable body B) different from the board surface light emitting section E is subjected to effect control. I have to. Therefore, even when the physical object is moved within the coordinate area of the special operation receiving portion 3333 that faces both the board surface light emitting portion E and the movable body B, an effect (display in this case) corresponding to the movement is displayed. It becomes easy to recognize that the specific operation target image S4 that has moved to the outside of the section D has appeared (moved), and thereby it is possible to suitably realize the performance suitable for the dynamic operability. ..

When the physical object such as the player's finger moves further upward in the fifth coordinate area Z5 and reaches the position shown in FIG. 125, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the specific operation target image S4 on the movable body B. It is determined that an operation as if it had been moved to was performed properly, and if the condition in the third operation control mode is satisfied, the effect reception for the fifth coordinate area Z5 is ended. Further, a display capable of recognizing that the condition (moving the specific operation target image S4 to the movable body B) in the third operation control mode is satisfied appears on the display unit D, and the movable body B is used. Execute control to start production. The effect using the movable body B can be realized as, for example, an effect of causing the movable body B to emit light in a predetermined mode, an effect of operating the movable body B in a predetermined mode, or the like, and a big hit determination is made through such an effect. To be able to suggest the degree of expectation for the result of.

In the third operation control mode, when the physical object is out of the fifth coordinate area Z5 while the physical object is moving in the special operation receiving section 3333 (when the finger is moved from the special operation receiving section 3333). It is desirable to start over from the state shown in FIG. 123(a) (including the case of separation). That is, as will be described later, the peripheral control board 1510 basically periodically acquires position information and the like of the physical object irrespective of the execution state of the effect, which allows the physical object to move within the fifth coordinate area Z5. Information indicating that the user is moving, information indicating that the user has moved outside the fifth coordinate area Z5, and the like are obtained.

Although the specific operation target image S4 is moved so as to follow the movement of the physical object, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the specific operation target image S4 is moved so as to follow only the movement of the specific direction component of the physical object. The operation target image S4 may be moved.

The fifth coordinate area Z5 may be the entire coordinate area of the special operation receiving unit 3333. Further, if there is no part on the side that opposes the coordinate position where the physical object is placed and where the effect expression that suggests that the specific operation target image S4 exists, it is close to the coordinate position where the physical object is placed. You may make it perform the production|presentation expression which suggests that the specific operation target image S4 exists in a site|part.

In addition, in this example of explanation, the board surface light emitting section E capable of performing presentation (light emission) is placed between the display section D and the movable body B, but the board surface emitting section E is not always necessary. Good. That is, in this case, from the time when the specific operation target image S4 is not displayed on the display unit D until the physical object is moved to the coordinate position facing the movable body B (or the nearby coordinate position), the player Will continue the operation while holding the image in which the specific operation target image S4 is moving in the head.

Further, on the display unit D, a map capable of grasping the positional relationship between the display unit D and the movable body B is displayed, and in the map the position where the specific operation target image S4 exists according to the movement of the physical object is displayed. The effect display suggested by may be performed.

It should be noted that although the coordinate areas Z1 to Z5 are shown in the drawings of FIGS. 122 to 125, they are not actually visible to the player.

On the other hand, in the peripheral control board 1510, among the various effect members shown in FIG. 121, the movable bodies A1, A2, and C, on which the effect operation according to the result of the big hit determination is performed, are also positioned as the objects of the operation effect, and When the player operates a coordinate area of the operation receiving portion 3333 that overlaps with the movable bodies A1, A2, and C in a front view and this is detected as a physical object, a staging operation corresponding to the operation appears. It is controllable. Therefore, the player can operate in an appropriate mode (speed, movement amount) while selecting any one of the plurality of movable bodies.

[Fourth Operation Control Mode for Movable Body C]
For example, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 121 and 126(a), when the fourth effect condition is satisfied based on the result of the big hit determination, the special operation receiving unit Of all the coordinate areas when 3333 is viewed from the front (see FIG. 119), the sixth coordinate area Z6 facing a part of the movable body C is set (controlled) so as to be able to receive the effect. At this time, in order to allow the player to recognize that the sixth coordinate area Z6 is ready to receive the effect in order to operate the movable body C, a specific display image appears on the display unit D, or the movable body is displayed. It is desirable to cause C to emit light in the first mode (for example, to emit light in a blinking mode) or to vibrate.

Then, during a predetermined period after the sixth coordinate area Z6 is set to be able to receive the effect, an operation is performed on somewhere within the sixth coordinate area Z6 (for example, a touch operation on the glass plate 192 (strictly speaking, a special operation. If a finger or the like may be provided in the operation receiving unit 3333, and it is not necessary to touch it)), and this is detected as a physical object, it is possible to receive an effect as shown in FIG. 126(b). The coordinate area to be set is changed from the sixth coordinate area Z6 to a large seventh coordinate area Z7 including at least the movable range CT of the movable body C. Note that here, the seventh coordinate area Z7 is set as a coordinate area including all the sixth coordinate areas Z6.

That is, in the fourth operation control mode, with a physical object such as a finger held in the special operation receiving portion 3333, the physical object is moved to the end of the movable range CT of the movable body C in the seventh coordinate area Z7. When it is moved to the coordinate position facing the part, the effect that the movable body C can be moved so as to follow the movement of the physical object is realized.

Therefore, in the case of the state shown in FIG. 126B, a physical object such as a finger is detected in the seventh coordinate area Z7, and the movable body C is in a state of being moved by the movement of the physical object. It is desirable to perform control that enables recognition. In the example shown in FIG. 126(b), the movable body C is made to emit light in the second mode (for example, light emission in the normal mode).

However, from the player's side, it is not known what movable range CT is provided in the movable body C, and the physical range such as a finger is detected after the physical object such as a finger is detected in the sixth coordinate area Z6. There is a concern that even if an attempt is made to move the physical object along the movable range CT of the movable body C, this cannot be properly performed. As a result, if the physical object such as the player's finger is out of the seventh coordinate area Z7 despite the intention to perform the operation along the movable range CT of the movable body C (the special operation receiving portion). (Including the case of releasing the finger from 3333), the player may start again from the state shown in FIG. 126(a) against the intention of the player, and the interest in the game may deteriorate.

In this respect, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 126A and 126B, the seventh coordinate area Z7 in the fourth operation control mode is set as the control target. The sixth coordinate area Z6 is set in an expanded range for at least the first distance over all azimuths in the front view, including the direction opposite to the upper side in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends. I have decided.

With such a configuration, even if the player does not know what movable range CT is provided in the movable body C, a direction deviated from the movable range CT of the movable body C When the finger (physical object) is moved to the side, the movable body C does not move even though the effect reception has been made (even though the state shown in FIG. 126A does not start over). Since a phenomenon will occur, it becomes possible to perform an operation by estimating the movable range CT of the movable body C by confirming such a phenomenon.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in the movable range CT set for the movable body C, the movable body C is set at a plurality of predetermined positions (first position (shown in FIG. 126(b)). Original position), a second position shown in FIG. 126(c), a third position shown in FIG. 127(a), and a fourth position (end position) shown in FIG. 127(b)). The control to be executed is made executable. Then, on this, the seventh coordinate area Z7 is a first drive coordinate area Z7-1 including a portion facing the first position (original position), and a second drive coordinate area Z7 including a portion facing the second position. Z7-2, a third drive coordinate area Z7-3 including a portion facing the third position, and a fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4 including a portion facing the fourth position, and driving thereof. By determining to which of the coordinate areas Z7-1 to Z7-4 the physical object detected in the sixth coordinate area Z6 has moved, the movable body C is moved to the drive coordinate area according to the determination. The control is executable.

Here, the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 including the portion facing the first position (original position) within the movable range CT has its control target as shown in FIGS. 126(a) and 126(b). The movable range CT of the movable body C is set as a range that extends from the sixth coordinate area Z6 by at least a first distance in the left, right, and downward directions excluding the upper side.

With such a configuration, after a physical object such as a finger is detected in the sixth coordinate area Z6 (FIG. 126(a)) and the setting is changed to the seventh coordinate area Z7 (FIG. 126(b)), Even if the physical object is moved (moved by less than the first distance) in a direction different from the direction in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends, the physical object is within the single first drive coordinate area Z7-1. Since the movable body C does not move, it continues to stay at the first position (original position) corresponding to the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 in which the physical object is detected. Become. That is, in this case, the phenomenon in which the movable body C does not move occurs even though the player's operation has been performed for acceptance of the effect (even though the state shown in FIG. 126A has not been redone). Therefore, by confirming such a phenomenon, it is possible to estimate the direction in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends and perform the operation.

On the other hand, after the physical object such as a finger is detected in the sixth coordinate area Z6 (FIG. 126(a)) and the setting is changed to the seventh coordinate area Z7 (FIG. 126(b)), the physical object is movable. When the body C is moved in the direction in which the movable range CT extends (moves less than the first distance), the physical object only moves a second distance shorter than the first distance, and FIG. From the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 shown in Fig. 126 to the second drive coordinate area Z7-2 shown in Fig. 126C. That is, in this case, based on the fact that the physical object is detected in the second drive coordinate area Z7-2, the movable body C is moved to the first position corresponding to the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 (see FIG. From (b)) to the second position (FIG. 126(c)) corresponding to the second drive coordinate area Z7-2.

Here, as shown in FIG. 126(c), the second drive coordinate area Z7-2 including the portion facing the second position in the movable range CT also extends in the vertical direction in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends. In the left and right directions orthogonal to, there is a range that extends by the same distance as the first drive coordinate area Z7-1. On the other hand, the vertical direction in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends is set to be shorter than the length in the horizontal direction.

According to such a configuration, when the physical object detected in the second drive coordinate area Z7-2 is moved in a direction different from any of the up and down directions in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends, the physical object is , The movable body C is more likely to be detected within the single second drive coordinate area Z7-2, and the movable body C does not move and corresponds to the second drive coordinate area Z7-2 in which the physical object is detected. Will continue to stay in the second position. That is, in this case, the phenomenon in which the movable body C does not move occurs even though the player's operation has been performed for acceptance of the effect (even though the state shown in FIG. 126A has not been redone). Therefore, by confirming such a phenomenon, it is possible to estimate the direction in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends and perform the operation.

Moreover, the second drive coordinate area Z7-2 is set to be widened to the right and left ranges deviated from the movable range CT of the movable body C in this way, whereby the sixth coordinate area Z6 (FIG. 126(a)). In, the reference that is determined to be appropriate as an operation when moving the physical object such as the finger along the movable range CT of the movable body C after the physical object is detected is relaxed. This makes it possible to ease the difficulty in moving the physical object while estimating the movable range CT provided in the movable body C without knowing the movable range CT. You will be able to maintain your interest.

When the movable body C moves to the second position corresponding to the second drive coordinate area Z7-2, when the movable body C is located at the first position corresponding to the first drive coordinate area Z7-1. The light may be emitted in a mode (for example, green) different from the light emission mode (for example, blue). Further, at this time, when the physical object is detected in the second drive coordinate area Z7-2 before the movable body C has moved to the second position corresponding to the second drive coordinate area Z7-2 (movable). If the light emission mode is changed (for example, from blue to green) when the body C starts moving toward the second drive coordinate area Z7-2), it is possible to confirm that the operation by the player has been properly received. It becomes possible to recognize from an early stage, and it becomes possible to suppress the irritating feeling due to the behavior delay of the movable body which is inevitably caused by a quick operation by the player's finger or the like.

Also, when the physical object moves at a speed exceeding the moving speed of the movable body, the movable body cannot be moved so as to follow the physical object, but in this case, at a predetermined moving speed, Control to move to the latest detection position will be performed.

Then, the physical object in the second drive coordinate area Z7-2 (FIG. 126(c)) moves to the upper side by the operation of the finger or the like by the player, and the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 (FIG. 127( a)), the movable body C corresponds to the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 from the second position (FIG. 126(c)) corresponding to the second drive coordinate area Z7-2. It will move to the third position (FIG. 127(a)).

Here, as shown in FIG. 126(c), the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 including the portion facing the third position in the movable range CT is in the vertical direction in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends. In the left and right directions orthogonal to, there is a range that extends over a longer distance than the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 and the second drive coordinate area Z7-2. On the other hand, the vertical direction in the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends is set to be shorter than the length in the horizontal direction.

That is, as described above, when a movable body that does not have a technique for instructing the operation direction unlike the display means is used as an operation target, this can be done by not knowing what movable range is provided. You have to guess and move the physics object. Therefore, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to the present embodiment, in the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 and the second drive coordinate area Z7-2, the effect reception is performed up to the left and right ranges that are displaced from the movable range CT of the movable body C. It has also been described above that by expanding the range, the standard that is judged to be appropriate as an operation when moving the movable body C along the movable range CT is relaxed.

However, when a physical object such as a finger is detected in the sixth coordinate area Z6 (FIG. 126(a)) and then the physical object is moved along the movable range CT of the movable body C, the sixth coordinate area Z6 is detected. The distance from the movable range CT tends to increase as the distance from the position increases. Therefore, in the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 (FIG. 127(a)), the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 and the second drive coordinate area Z7-1 are formed in the left and right directions orthogonal to the vertical direction in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends. By having a range that extends over a distance longer than the drive coordinate area Z7-2, it is assumed that the movement distance of the physical object from the sixth coordinate area Z6 increases and the deviation from the movable range CT gradually increases. Also, this can be accepted as an appropriate performance operation. This makes it possible to ease the difficulty in moving the physical object over a long distance while estimating the movable range CT of the movable body C without knowing the movable range CT. It will be possible to maintain the entertainment of the game. For example, even when the physical object moves upward in the coordinate range that does not face the movable range CT of the movable body C, the movable body C moves upward.

In addition, when the movable body C moves to the third position corresponding to the third drive coordinate area Z7-3, the light emission mode (for example, blue) and the second position when the movable body C is located at the first position. The light may be emitted in a light emitting mode (for example, red) different from any of the light emitting modes (for example, green) when the vehicle is located at. Further, when the physical object is detected in the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 before the movable body C has finished moving to the third position corresponding to the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 (the movable body C May change the light emission mode (for example, from blue to green) when the vehicle starts moving toward the third drive coordinate area Z7-3.

For the same reason as above, the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4 is further further leftward and rightward than the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 in the left and right directions orthogonal to the vertical direction in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends. It has a range that extends over a long distance. However, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to the present embodiment, the physical object in the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 moves upward by the operation of the finger or the like by the player, and moves to the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-. When detected within 4, the movable body C is moved from the third position (FIG. 127(a)) corresponding to the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 to the fourth position corresponding to the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4. It is not necessarily moved to the position (FIG. 127(b)). Not only that, when the physical object in the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 is moved upward by the operation of the finger or the like by the player and is detected in the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4, it is movable. The body C is moved from the third position (FIG. 127(a)) corresponding to the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 to the first position (FIG. 127(c)) corresponding to the first drive coordinate area Z7-1. It can be moved.

That is, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the movable body C can be moved to the fourth position corresponding to the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4 based on the result of the big hit determination. It has been decided, and among the already decided ones, such an effect using the movable body C is provided to the player. Then, when the physical object detected in the sixth coordinate area Z6 is detected in the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4 by the player's operation of a finger or the like, the movable body C is moved to the fourth position (Fig. 127 ( b)), or whether there is an effect of returning to the first position (Fig. 127(c)) without moving to the fourth position, or an expectation (specific result is obtained). May be shown definitely).

In the peripheral control board 1510, a physical object in the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 moves upward due to an operation of a finger or the like by the player and is detected in the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4. In this case, it is determined that the condition in the fourth operation control mode is satisfied, and the effect reception for the seventh coordinate area Z7 is ended. When it is determined that the movable body C is movable to the fourth position, as shown in FIG. 127(b), the movable body C is set in the area where the effect-acceptable area is not set. Will be controlled to move to the fourth position. On the other hand, when it is determined that the movable body C is not movable to the fourth position, as shown in FIG. 127(c), the movable body C is not set in the area where the effect can be received. Control for moving C to the first position will be performed.

However, at this time, even when it is determined that the movable body C can move to the fourth position, the moving body C temporarily moves downward (the movable body C moves to the fourth position (see FIG. 127). Even if it is determined that the movable body C is not movable to the fourth position, the movable body C is temporarily moved upward. In order to improve the enjoyment of the game, it is desirable to show the moving movement (effect of whether or not the movable body C moves to the fourth position (FIG. 127(b))).

Then, when the movable body C moves to the fourth position corresponding to the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4, the light emission mode (for example, blue) and the second position when the movable body C is located at the first position. The light emission mode (for example, rainbow color) different from the light emission mode when the vehicle is positioned at (for example, green) and the light emission mode when the vehicle is positioned at the third position (for example, red color) is used. However, unlike the case of the first to third positions, the timing is not when the physical object is detected in the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4, but later (movable body C It is desirable to make it appear after (the timing at which it is possible to definitely grasp the movement from the movement to the fourth position). Similarly to this, when the movable body C moves to the first position corresponding to the first drive coordinate area Z7-1, it does not occur when the physical object is detected in the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4, but It is desirable to end the light emission after a later timing (timing at which it is possible to definitely determine that the movable body C does not move to the fourth position from the movement).

After moving the movable body C to the fourth position corresponding to the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4, the peripheral control board 1510 performs control to move the movable body C to the first position (original position) after a predetermined time has elapsed. By carrying out, the fourth operation control mode is ended.

By the way, in the fourth operation control mode, the movable body is movable from the first position (FIG. 126(b)) to the third position (FIG. 127(a)) of the movable range CT regardless of the degree of expectation of a big hit. It is possible to move C freely. For example, when the movable body C is moved to the second position (FIG. 126(c)) and then the physical object is operated to return to the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 side, the peripheral control board 1510 causes the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 to move. Control is performed to move the movable body C from the second position (FIG. 126(c)) to the first position (FIG. 126(b)) based on the detection of the physical object again in the coordinate area Z7-1. .. Further, when the movable object C is moved to the third position (FIG. 127(a)) and then the physical object is operated to return to the second drive coordinate area Z7-2 side, the peripheral control board 1510 causes the second drive to move. Control is performed to move the movable body C from the third position (Fig. 127(a)) to the second position (Fig. 126(c)) based on the detection of the physical object again in the coordinate area Z7-2. It will be.

According to such a configuration, as the effect of whether or not the movable body C moves to the fourth position (FIG. 127(b)), the driving mode for moving the movable body C up and down in small steps is preferred by the player. It will be possible to make it appear according to the player's preference, and it will be possible to perform it only for the time that suits the player's taste, so it will be possible to control the "pause" until the final result appears in the production, improving the enjoyment of the game You will be expected to try. Note that after the physical object is detected in the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4, the effect reception for the fourth operation control mode is ended, and thus the movable body C cannot be manipulated freely.

It should be noted that the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4 is set after the sixth coordinate area Z6 (FIG. 126(a)) is set (controlled) to be able to receive effects until a predetermined period elapses (a specific timing arrives). If the physical object is not properly detected in, the effect reception for the sixth coordinate area Z6 or the seventh coordinate area Z7 is ended. At this time, the behavior of the movable body C that appears when the physical object is properly detected in the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4 may be caused, or the movable body C may be moved without causing such behavior. Alternatively, control may be performed so as to position at a plurality of predetermined positions (first position (original position) shown in FIG. 126(b)).

In addition, in the fourth operation control mode according to this description example, regardless of the degree of expectation of a big hit, the movable range CT from the first position (FIG. 126(b)) to the third position (FIG. 127(a)). Although the movable body C can be freely moved during the interval, instead of this, within the range of the first position (FIG. 126(b)) to the fourth position (FIG. 127(b)) of the movable range CT. The higher the position of the jackpot, the higher the degree of expectation of a suggested big hit may be. That is, in this case, the peripheral control board 1510 selects one of a plurality of effect patterns having different jackpot expectation levels based on the result of the big hit determination, and positions (first position to fourth position) determined by the selected effect pattern. Up to ), the movable body C is controlled to be operable. At this time, when the physical object moves from the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 to the second drive coordinate area Z7-2, or when the physical object moves from the second drive coordinate area Z7-2 to the third drive coordinate area Z7-3. At any time, an effect (moving back and forth) of whether or not the movable body C moves to the next position may appear.

In addition, in the first to third operation control modes for the display unit D, when the images S1 to S4 are made to be able to receive effects, the coordinate areas Z1 to 4 larger than the images S1 to S4 in front view are generated. On the other hand, in the fourth operation control mode for the movable body C, the sixth coordinate area Z6 smaller than the movable body C in front view is generated when the movable body C is ready to receive effects. That is, since the movable body often includes a portion having a relatively large movement amount and a portion having a relatively small movement amount, for example, a portion having a relatively small movement amount is rendered. It is desirable to remove it from the target of the reception in order to suppress the deterioration of the enjoyment of the game. On the other hand, in the display unit, if an attempt is made to set the coordinate area in accordance with the size of the image that can receive the effect, a large image is required in order to maintain the operability appropriately. Since it is feared that the balance with the display image may be unbalanced, it is desirable to independently set the size of the image for which the effect can be received, separately from the setting range of the coordinate area.

However, when performing control to detect the movement of the physical object in a specific coordinate area (here, the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 to the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4) and to make the effect corresponding thereto appear Is, for example, the fourth drive coordinate area without moving through the second drive coordinate area Z7-2 or the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 as the physical object detected in the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 moves. It is also assumed that a situation in which Z7-4 is suddenly detected may occur. Such a situation may occur, for example, when the right hand is set as the detection target in the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 and then the left hand is set as the detection target in the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4 without moving the right hand. Therefore, the physical object should not be determined to have moved, and an effect (movement of the movable body C or the like) according to the movement should not be executed.

In this regard, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to the present embodiment, while executing the peripheral control unit steady process (every 33.3 ms), an interrupt timer process is generated every 4 ms, and this interrupt is processed. In the timer process, the information from the left outer peripheral light detection unit 35a and the information from the right outer peripheral light detection unit 35b are respectively acquired and stored as coordinate information indicating the coordinate position where the physical object is detected. Then, in the above-mentioned peripheral control unit steady process, a specific coordinate area is obtained by analyzing a plurality (8, 9) of coordinate information stored every 4 ms after the previous peripheral control unit steady process is completed. (For example, it is determined whether or not the physical object is properly moving within the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 to the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4), and the control data for the actuator is determined according to the result of the determination. Set. Then, in the interrupt processing for each 1 ms, the control for driving the movable body C is performed based on the control data set in this way, so that the movable body C moves the physical object to the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4. From the moment when the physical object is not yet moved, it follows the movement of the physical object in the sixth coordinate area Z6 in front view. The coordinate information is stored in chronological order in which the coordinate position is acquired.

For example, even when a physical object is detected in the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4 after the physical object is detected in the first drive coordinate area Z7-1, the physical object is detected in the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4. The coordinate information indicating that the physical object is detected in the second drive coordinate area Z7-2 and the physical object in the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 are detected before the physical object is detected in If there is no coordinate information indicating that the physical object is detected, it is determined that the physical object did not move properly, and the movable body C is controlled so as not to move.

That is, in the fourth operation control mode, the movable body C moves from the first position corresponding to the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 to the fourth position corresponding to the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4. When the physical object detected in the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 is in the second drive coordinate area Z7-2, the third drive coordinate area Z7-3, and the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-. 4 is detected in chronological order, for example, if there is no detection in the third drive coordinate area Z7-3, only up to the second position corresponding to the second drive coordinate area Z7-2. The movable body C does not move. As a result, an appropriate effect can be made to appear only when an appropriate operation is performed on the special operation receiving portion 3333.

Further, in the fourth operation control mode, the movable body C is controlled to be moved according to whether a physical object is detected in each of the coordinate areas Z7-1 to Z7-4, but the present invention is not limited to this and, for example, , Within the movable range CT of the movable body C, the control for moving the movable body C is performed according to whether the movement of the physical object having the vector component in the direction toward the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4 is detected. You can That is, in this case, the vector component of the physical object is analyzed based on the coordinate positions stored in the acquired time series order.

Note that, regarding the setting control of the coordinate area, the movement detection of the physical object, and the effect control of the movable body C used in the fourth operation control mode, for example, in the display unit in the third operation control mode described above. It may be applied to the image S4.

In the third operation control mode and the fourth operation control mode, the detection (effect reception) regarding the movement of the physical object after the movement of the physical object is started in the special operation receiving unit 3333 is not completed and is still continued. During this period, the control is performed to move the effect target (display image or movable body) in a mode according to at least the moving direction and the moving amount of the already detected physical object. With such a configuration, since it is possible for the player himself to produce a dramatic effect as if he or she were creating a dramatic effect, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment appeal of the game.

By the way, in the first operation control mode, the second operation control mode, the third operation control mode, and the fourth operation control mode, the effect reception for the special operation receiving portion 3333 is the coordinates set at that time. Limited to the area. However, the detection of the physical object in the special operation receiving unit 3333 is itself always performed (every 4 ms), and the detected coordinate information is stored in association with the acquired time series. Then, the peripheral control board 1510 analyzes the position, movement, and the like of the physical object in the peripheral control unit steady process (every 33.3 ms) based on the coordinate information stored in time series. In this regard, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to the present embodiment, when a physical object is detected in the special operation receiving unit 3333, any of a plurality of analysis processes having different analysis contents can be executed, and the special operation receiving unit Even if the same movement is detected as the movement of the physical object in the unit 3333, different control can be performed according to the analysis result.

FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing a control example of the physical object detection information analysis processing executed in the peripheral control unit regular processing.

That is, in the peripheral control board 1510, first, it is determined whether or not it is in the operation effect reception period that is generated based on the fact that the specific effect condition according to the result of the big hit determination is satisfied (step S3301). Then, as a result, in the operation effect reception period, as described above, the physical object is detected in the coordinate area in which the effect can be received, based on the coordinate information stored in association with the time series. Whether or not there is a physical object is detected in the coordinate area where the effect can be received, and the movement mode and size of the physical object are further analyzed (step S3302). Then, based on the analysis result for such effects, control regarding the coordinate area in which the effect can be accepted (resetting or ending), control for causing effect changes to effect objects such as display images and movable objects, and the current situation The control for maintaining the effect state is performed (step S3303). As a result of performing the process of step S3302, even when the physical object is not detected in the coordinate area in which the effect can be accepted, control regarding the coordinate area in which the effect can be accepted (resetting or (End), or control for returning a display object such as a display image or a movable body to the original position (for example, control for moving the movable body C to the first position shown in FIG. 126A) may be performed.

On the other hand, in the process of step S3301, when it is determined that the coordinate area in which the effect reception is possible for the special operation receiving unit 3333 is not in the operation effect reception period in which the effect reception is set, the analysis content for the effect The analysis is performed with the contents different from (step S3312). That is, the special operation receiving portion 3333 according to this embodiment is provided so as to face the entire game board 5. Therefore, in order to illegally facilitate the winning of the game ball, the act of placing a magnet at the coordinate position of the special operation receiving portion 3333 facing the various winning openings, and the wire from the gap between the door frame 3 and the glass plate 192. It can be assumed that an action such as breaking the speaker that makes an alarm sound when it is fraudulent is performed.

Therefore, in the process of step S3312 described above, based on the coordinate information stored in association with the time series, an analysis is performed as to whether or not there is a possibility that an illegal act has been performed in the special operation receiving unit 3333. I am trying. For example, it is determined whether or not a physical object is detected in the special operation receiving unit 3333, and if a physical object is detected in the special operation receiving unit 3333, the movement mode or size of the physical object, etc. It analyzes whether or not is consistent with the movement mode and size that can appear when fraudulent acts are being performed. Then, when it is determined that there is a possibility that fraudulent acts are being performed as a result of the analysis for countermeasures against fraud, external output indicating that the fraudulent acts are being performed or an alarm sound or warning light is emitted. It is controlled so that fraud countermeasures such as issuance are performed (step S3313), and if it is not determined that there is a possibility that fraudulent acts are performed, control is performed so that such fraud countermeasures are not performed (step S3313). ).

As such an analysis procedure for countermeasures against fraud (step S3312), for example, first, when a physical object is detected in the special operation receiving unit 3333, the detected coordinate position is set as the analysis reference position ( Remember. Next, an analysis coordinate range including the analysis reference position and extending by a predetermined distance from the analysis reference position is set, and the detected physical object is within the analysis coordinate range for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). ) Keeps on staying (physical objects barely move). As a result, if the detected physical object continues to stay within the analysis coordinate range for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), it is possible that some kind of fraudulent activity has been performed within the analysis coordinate range. It is possible to employ a method of determining that there is. At this time, if the size of the physical object is such that it cannot be fraudulently performed (for example, if it has an extremely thin shape), fraudulent activity is performed even if such a movement mode is detected. It may not be determined that there is a possibility of being present. This makes it possible to prevent an erroneous notification from being made when a stain or the like is attached to the glass plate 192.

According to such a configuration, in the operation effect reception period, even if any action is performed, it is not judged as a fraudulent action, and analysis is performed only as a production action and the result of the analysis is performed. In contrast to the case where the effect control according to the above is performed, in the case where it is not within the operation effect reception period, it is determined that all the acts are analyzed for the fraud, and the control for the fraud countermeasure according to the result of the analysis can be performed. become. Therefore, even when one event (for example, an event in which a physical object is detected in a specific coordinate area for 30 seconds) occurs in the special operation receiving unit 3333 and this is detected, depending on the effect situation, There is a possibility that it may be regarded as a staging act and cause a specific staging change, or that it may be regarded as a fraudulent act and fraudulently notified. In this way, one detection information is used for a plurality of different purposes (here, a performance purpose and a fraud prevention purpose) according to the situation of the game or the performance, so that a larger amount of detection information and more purposes can be achieved. Can be achieved, and an efficient control structure can be realized.

In addition, in this description example, when there is no operation effect reception period that occurs when a specific effect condition according to the result of the big hit determination is satisfied, no effect change is caused by an operation on the special operation receiving portion 3333. However, even when the operation effect reception period is not in effect (always), the display image may be changed by the detection of the physical object in the special operation receiving unit 3333, or the movable body may emit or move. Good. However, in this case, when it is not during the operation performance acceptance period, in addition to determining all the acts as the analysis target of the misconduct, it is also determined as the analysis target of the performance action, and controls according to the results of these determinations, respectively. Become. Therefore, when one event occurs in the special operation receiving unit 3333, both the effect change and the injustice notification can appear.

Also, in the middle of monitoring whether the physical object stays within the analysis coordinate range for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), a specific performance condition according to the result of the big hit determination is satisfied. When the operation effect acceptance period occurs based on the above, the monitoring process of whether the physical object continues to stay within the analysis coordinate range for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) is performed without terminating the analysis processing for countermeasures against fraud. It is desirable to continue the operation after the operation effect reception period has occurred. That is, in this case, during the operation effect reception period, in addition to performing the effect analysis processing and control according to the result, whether the physical object continues to stay within the analysis coordinate range for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). Will continue to be monitored and fraudulent notification will be given depending on the result of the monitoring.

By the way, when the special operation receiving unit 3333 is in the first effect period during which the effect reception regarding the first effect event (for example, the effect of moving the movable body) is permitted, the operation means different from the special operation receiving unit 3333 ( For example, control may be performed to further generate a second effect period in which the operation button 410) allows an effect reception regarding a second effect event (for example, an effect for changing a display image).

For example, as shown in FIG. 129(a), at the timing t1, the special operation receiving portion 3333 accepts the effect reception (panel operation reception) regarding the first effect event (for example, the effect of moving the movable body). It is assumed that the first presentation period has occurred. In the first effect period, the movement from the physical object is started in the special operation receiving unit 3333 during the period from the occurrence of the period until the timing t2 when the first reception time elapses. Control for operating the movable body in a manner according to at least the moving direction and the moving amount of the physical object that has already been detected (analyzed) while the detection (analysis) related to the movement is not completed and still continued. (For example, control of moving a specific movable body so as to follow the movement of the physical object) is executable.

In this respect, when the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the specific effect condition is satisfied based on the result of the big hit determination, while the first effect period is generated and this is not ended yet and is continued. In addition, the second effect in which the effect reception (button operation reception) regarding the second effect event (for example, the effect of changing the display image) is permitted in the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) different from the special operation receiving unit 3333. It is possible to execute control for setting a production pattern, a notice production, and the like that are determined to generate a period.

That is, in this case, when the timing t11 arrives while the first effect period is occurring, the effect reception (button operation reception) regarding the second effect event (for example, the effect of changing the display image) on the operation button 410 is allowed. The control for generating the second effect period is performed. Then, when the operation on the operation button 410 is accepted during the period from the occurrence of the second effect period to the arrival of the timing t12 when the second acceptance time has elapsed, the second effect period ends at that time. Let Alternatively, when the operation on the operation button 410 is not accepted before the timing t12 arrives, the second effect period is ended when the timing t12 arrives.

According to such a configuration, the first production period in which the first production part (here, the special operation receiving unit 3333) allows the production reception regarding the first production event, and the production reception regarding the second production event. Both the second effect period allowed by the second operation part (here, the operation button 410) will occur simultaneously (timings t11 to t12 shown in FIG. 129(a)). Moreover, in the above-described configuration, the end timings of the first effect period and the second effect period are different, and the second effect period that occurs later than the first effect period is ended earlier. That is, in this case, if the second effect period occurs after the first effect period, the operation is interrupted and the second operation part is operated even if the first operation part is being operated. Therefore, it is required to operate the first operation part and the second operation part at the same time in different modes, and it is possible to provide the entertaining production operability that has never been provided and to suppress the deterioration of the entertainment of the game. You will be expected.

In addition, in order to suitably realize such an effect operability, as shown in FIG. 129(b), as shown in FIG. 129(b), the effect reception regarding the second effect event (the effect on the side that is completed after a relatively short time has elapsed) Regarding reception, when the second operation part (here, the operation button 410) is detected to perform a predetermined number of times (preferably once) or a predetermined amount of operation (a finite amount of operation), the effect is produced. After the execution condition is satisfied, it is desirable to perform control to generate the second effect event (for example, effect operation for changing the display image) without any operation thereafter. For example, when one pressing operation on the operation button 410 is detected, the second effect period is ended before the timing t12 arrives, no operation is required thereafter, and the effect changes to the display image. The control etc. which cause is applicable to this.

On the other hand, regarding the effect reception regarding the first effect event (the effect reception on the side that is ended after a relatively long time has elapsed), at least until the end of the second effect period, and further thereafter. Regardless of the number of operations or the amount of operation performed on the first operation part, the reception of the effect regarding the first effect event is continued without being terminated, and the operation is performed on the first operation part each time the operation is continued. It is desirable to perform control that reflects the effect change according to the operation. For example, the movement of the physical object detected in the special operation receiving unit 3333 is analyzed, and this is continued without ending the effect reception according to the movement mode (movement amount, etc.) of the physical object. Each time the movement is analyzed periodically (every 33.3 ms), the control to repeatedly execute the process of moving the movable body to the analyzed latest coordinate position corresponds to this.

According to such a configuration, even if the operation on the first operation part is interrupted when the second effect period occurs after the first effect period, the operation opportunity on the first operation part is lost. Since it is possible to suitably guarantee that the game is not lost, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game due to the interruption. In addition, if the second operation part is operated after the operation on the first operation part is interrupted, the second effect period can be ended at a relatively early stage, and thereafter, the operation on the second operation part is completed. Since the effect change (second effect event) corresponding to the operation is generated without requiring the operation, the operation for the first operation part can be restarted at a relatively early stage, and This will also be suitably secured for the operation opportunity for the first operation part.

In this case, in a situation where the operation on the first operation part is restarted, the effect change (second effect event) corresponding to the operation on the second operation part is about to be started, and the first operation It becomes possible to generate a special effect situation such that the second effect event can be enjoyed while the operation opportunity for the part is provided. In this regard, "When an operation is performed on the second operation part, an effect event in which the size of the specific display image changes is generated, and when the operation on the first operation part is performed, the specific display image reaches the specific position. If an effect (changing) on the aspect of the second production event of the second production event is set as the first production event, such as "a moving production event occurs", In a special effect situation, it becomes possible to enjoy the second effect event while changing the aspect of the effect object of the second effect event by the operation on the first operation part, and it becomes more dynamic and more flexible. High operability and performance suitable for this are realized.

Here, as an example of influencing (changing) the aspect of the effect target of the second effect event when an operation is performed on the first operation part, for example, the effect of the second effect event Changing at least one of the moving amount, moving direction, moving speed, light emission mode (color of light, traveling direction, light amount, etc.), size, or shape of an object (display image, movable body, etc.) However, the present invention is not limited to these, and may be any object that can exert some influence on the object (display image, sound effect, movable body, etc.) of the second effect event. That is, while the target of the operation effect for the first operation part and the target of the operation effect for the second operation part are the same effect target, a mode of the effect to be caused in the effect target (for example, the first operation part). The size is changed in the operation effect for (1), and the display position is changed in the operation effect for the second operation part). Moreover, the first effect period is not necessarily set as a finite time, and the operation on the first operation part is accepted even after the second effect period ends, and the second effect period Anything can be used as long as it is possible to operate the first operation part while an event occurs.

In addition, during a period in which both the first effect period and the second effect period are simultaneously occurring, the second effect event related to the effect reception related to the first effect event and the effect reception related to the second effect event is related. Displaying an operation instruction or a display suggesting the maximum remaining time as the second effect period is preferably performed only for the effect reception so that the interruption of the operation for the first operation part is appropriately urged. Desirable above.

In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to the present embodiment, in order to suitably realize the relationship of such effects, there is a case where the control for generating the second effect period after the first effect period is performed. The control is performed so that the first effect period is not generated after the second effect period.

Further, in the above description example, both the first effect period and the second effect period are made to occur at the same time. However, if the second effect period is delayed from the first effect period, the first effect period is changed to the first effect period. The first effect period may be generated again when the second effect period is ended. Even in this case, it is possible to achieve the above-described operability and performance that influence the aspect of the rendering target of the second rendering event when the first manipulation part is manipulated. It is possible.

Further, in the above-described example, each time the operation on the first operation part is performed, the control for reflecting the effect change according to the operation is performed. When there is, control may be performed to reflect the effect change according to the operation.

Then, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, the following various operation reception effects can be realized by appropriately using the control method according to each of the above-described explanation examples.

[Production Example 1 using the special operation receiving unit 3333]
For example, as shown in FIG. 130(a), the effect pattern of effect example 1 (variation pattern of effect example 1) is set based on the result of the big hit determination, and the effect of effect example 1 is displayed on the display section D. It is assumed that the decorative pattern SZ is changed in the pattern. Then, in the peripheral control board 1510, the coordinate area (not shown) facing the movable bodies A1 and A2 of the special operation receiving portion 3333 is set to be able to receive the effect during the period in which the effect pattern of the effect example 1 appears. An operation effect period to be (controlled) is generated.

Here, as the effect pattern of the effect example 1, at least the effect pattern A1 of the effect example 1 that is determined to move the movable body A1 and the effect example 1 that is determined to move the movable body A2. And the production pattern A2. However, while the movable body A1 is provided on the front side of the game board 5 so as to be visible from the player side, the movable body A2 is behind the game board 5 and is difficult to be seen from the player side. And is provided at a position overlapping the movable body A1 in a front view. Therefore, in the peripheral control board 1510, whichever of the effect patterns A1 and A2 is performed as the effect pattern of the effect example 1, in the display section D, a coordinate area (not shown) facing the movable body A1. In, the suggestion image HG1 is displayed to suggest that the operation of sliding the movable body A1 in the moving direction (here, to the left) should be performed. In addition, similarly, regardless of which of the effect patterns A1 and A2 is performed, the movable body A1 is caused to emit light to indicate that the coordinate area (not shown) facing the movable body A1 should be operated. ing.

When such a slide operation is properly received while the effect pattern A1 is being performed, the peripheral control board 1510 causes the player to follow the slide operation as shown in FIG. 130(b). The movable body A1 is controlled to start moving to the left. Even in this situation, in the display unit D, a suggestion image HG1 that suggests that the slide operation should be performed in the movable direction (here, leftward) of the movable body A1 in the coordinate area (not shown) facing the movable body A1. Is displayed, and the movable body A1 is in a light emitting state.

Then, when such a slide operation reaches a specific position while the effect pattern A1 is being performed, the peripheral control board 1510 moves in a manner to follow the slide operation by the player, as shown in FIG. 131(a). After moving the body A1 to a specific effect position, control is performed so as to end the operation effect period in which the effect acceptance for the movable object A1 is permitted. In this situation, in the display unit D, a display appears that indicates that the movable body A1 has been successfully moved to a specific effect position and that the expectation for the jackpot determination is high, and the movable body A1 emits light. It is desirable that an effect such as a change in the form or shape of is performed.

However, even when the slide operation by the player reaches a specific position while the effect pattern A1 is being performed, if the predetermined effect condition is not satisfied, the peripheral control board 1510 is shown in FIG. As shown in b), the operation effect period during which the effect reception for the movable body A1 is permitted so that the follow-up movement of the movable body A1 with respect to the slide operation of the player is interrupted, and the movable body A1 is returned to the original position. Control to move it back. In this case, on the display unit D, a display that indicates that the movable body A1 fails to move to a specific effect position and that the degree of expectation for the jackpot determination is low appears, and the movable body A1 stops emitting light. It will be controlled as described above.

On the other hand, when the player's slide operation is properly accepted while the effect pattern A2 is being performed, the peripheral control board 1510 allows the player to perform a slide operation as shown in FIG. 130(c). It is controlled so as to start moving the movable body A2 to the left in the form of following. Even in this situation, in the display unit D, a suggestion image HG1 that suggests that the slide operation should be performed in the movable direction (here, leftward) of the movable body A1 in the coordinate area (not shown) facing the movable body A1. Is displayed, and the movable body A1 is in a light emitting state. However, in addition to this, the movable body A2 is also controlled to be in a light emitting state.

Then, when such a slide operation reaches a specific location while the effect pattern A2 is being performed, the peripheral control board 1510 moves in a manner to follow the slide operation by the player, as shown in FIG. 131(c). After moving the body A2 to the specific effect position, control is performed so as to end the operation effect period in which the effect acceptance for the movable object A2 is permitted. In this situation, in the display unit D, a display appears that indicates that the movable body A2 has been successfully moved to a specific effect position and that the expectation for the jackpot determination is extremely high. It is desirable to perform an effect such as a change in the light emission mode or shape.

However, even if the slide operation by the player reaches a specific position while the effect pattern A2 is being performed, if the predetermined effect condition is not satisfied, the peripheral control board 1510 is shown in FIG. As shown in b), the operation effect period during which the effect reception for the movable body A2 is permitted so that the follow-up movement of the movable body A2 with respect to the slide operation of the player is interrupted, and the movable body A2 is returned to the original position. Control to move it back. In this case, on the display unit D, a display appears which indicates that the movable body A2 has failed to move to a specific effect position and the degree of expectation for the big hit determination is low, and the movable bodies A1 and A2 emit light. Will be controlled so as to be terminated.

According to the effect example 1 as described above, when the player performs a slide operation in the situation shown in FIG. 130(a) in which the movable body A1 appears to move, the movable body A1 is operated. Instead, since the movable body A2, which was difficult to visually recognize, suddenly appears and moves, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the amusement of the game by the movable production with such a surprise as if the production targets are replaced. Can be done.

Further, although illustration is omitted, according to the example 1 of production as described above, by the slide operation by the player within the period from the appearance of the situation of FIG. 130(a) to the appearance of the situation of FIG. 130(c). Although the movable body A2 has started to move, it is still in a position that is difficult to see (behind the game board 5), and from the player's side, it looks as if no production change has occurred. Will be able to appear. That is, in this case, the movable body A2 is moved to the front side of the display unit D after being discouraged that no production change has occurred despite the slide operation being properly performed by the player. Since it will appear, it is possible to more appropriately suppress the deterioration of the game enjoyment by such a movable production with a surprise.

Further, in the above-described production example 1, as shown in FIGS. 131(a) and 131(c), the movable bodies A1 and A2 are made to advance to a position overlapping with the fluctuating decorative pattern SZ. As a result, it is possible to encourage the player to gaze from the decorative pattern SZ to the movable bodies A1 and A2, and it becomes difficult to overlook which of the movable bodies A1 and A2 has appeared.

Moreover, in the above-described configuration, the manner in which the movable body A1 appears and the case in which the movable body A2 appears are different from each other in the manner in which they overlap the decorative pattern SZ. Therefore, from the decorative pattern SZ to the movable bodies A1, A2 Even if the player fails to shift his gaze, by predicting the size and position of the part where the decorative pattern SZ is difficult to see, it is predicted which of the movable bodies A1 and A2 has appeared. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the entertainment level of the game when the player misses which one of the movable bodies A1 and A2 has appeared.

It should be noted that in the above-described production example 1, the movable body A1 is arranged on the front side of the game board 5 and the movable body A2 is arranged on the rear side of the game board 5, but it is arranged on the front side of the game board 5. Both the movable bodies A1 and A2 may be arranged, or both the movable bodies A1 and A2 may be arranged behind the game board 5.

Here, when the movable bodies A1 and A2 are both arranged on the front side of the game board 5, the movable body A1 is arranged on the front side so that the movable body A2 becomes difficult to be visually recognized. It is desirable to maintain the visibility of the movable body A2 by keeping the movable base portion (the portion that does not move) and the like at the front side of the movable body A2 even when A1 moves.

On the other hand, when the movable bodies A1 and A2 are both arranged behind the game board 5, it is possible to give a pleasure as to which of the movable bodies A1 and A2 appears by the operation of the player. Like In this case, the portion of the game board 5 located on the front side of the movable bodies A1 and A2 is caused to emit light, and the operation to the coordinate area (special operation receiving portion 3333) facing the portion is prompted. Is desirable.

Further, in the above-described production example 1, the movable bodies A1 and A2 are set to have the same moving direction (left direction), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the movable direction of the movable body A1 is set to the left and the movable direction of the movable body A2 is set to the upward, the operation instruction (indication image HG1) suggesting the left direction prompts the player to play to the left. Even if the slide operation is performed by a person, the movable body A2 is moved upward, and thus, such a surprise-like movable effect can more appropriately suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game. Or, even though the operation for the movable body A1 whose moving direction is set to the left is urged, the slide operation by the player is performed in the upward direction by causing the operation instruction suggesting the upward direction to appear. When performed, the movable body A2, which has been difficult to be visually recognized, may move upward and appear.

Further, in the above-described production example 1, when the movable body A2 appears by the operation of the player, the movable body A1 does not operate, but the invention is not limited to this. For example, when the movable body A2 is moved by an operation of the player, the movable body A1 is also moved following the slide operation by the player. Then, even if the movable bodies A1 and A2 are moved by a predetermined distance and then only the movable body A1 is moved back to the original position, it is possible to more appropriately suppress the deterioration of the entertainment of the game due to the movable effect with a surprise. I will get it. Alternatively, when the movable body A2 is moved by the player's operation, first, only the movable body A1 is moved following the slide operation by the player. Then, after the movable body A1 has moved by a predetermined distance, the movable body A1 is moved so as to return to the original position, and the movable body A2 is also moved in accordance with the slide operation by the player. It is possible to more appropriately suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment by a certain movable effect. However, when the operation target by the player is switched between the movable bodies A1 and A2, the operation by the player is allowed to remain at a predetermined location for a predetermined time (a time required for the movable body A2 to move to the predetermined location). It is desirable to execute the performance.

Further, in the above-described production example 1, the movable body A1 and the movable body A2 are made to emit light in the situation where the movable body A2 is moving (see FIGS. 130(c) and 131(c)). In this situation, the movable body A1 does not necessarily emit light. That is, in this case, at the timing when the physical object is detected in the coordinate area (special operation receiving portion 3333) facing the movable body A1, or when the movable body A2 starts to advance to the front side of the display unit D and returns to the original position. The control for ending the light emission of the movable body A1 is performed at a timing (timing at which the movable body A1 is moved to a predetermined position) that is easier to visually recognize than a certain time.

Further, in the above-described production example 1 and other examples thereof, the movable body A2 is arranged on the rear side overlapping with the movable body A1 in a front view, but the board surface light-emitting portion E is arranged instead of the movable body A1. You may do it. That is, in this case, when the movable body A2 is moved (in the situation shown in FIG. 130(a)), the board surface light-emitting portion E located on the front side of the movable body A2 is caused to emit light, so that the movable body is in a state difficult to visually recognize. The operation to the coordinate area (special operation receiving portion 3333) facing A2 is prompted.

In addition, in the display unit D according to the above-described production example 1, in each situation shown in FIGS. 130(a) to (c), regardless of the positions of the movable bodies A1 and A2, one production is performed in the suggestion image HG1. The situation (the initial situation in which none of the movable bodies are operating) is indicated. However, instead of this, the display mode of the suggestion image HG1 is changed according to the position where the movable bodies A1 and A2 are located, and the movement state of the movable bodies A1 and A2 can be recognized only by looking at the suggestion image HG1. You can

[Production example 2 using the special operation receiving unit 3333]
For example, as shown in FIG. 132(a), the effect pattern of effect example 2 (variation pattern of effect example 2) is set based on the result of the big hit determination, and the effect of effect example 2 is displayed on the display section D. It is assumed that the decorative pattern SZ is changed in the pattern. Then, in the peripheral control board 1510, within the period in which the effect pattern of the effect example 2 appears, the coordinate area (not shown) facing the movable body A1 of the special operation receiving portion 3333 is set to be able to accept effect (control). ) Is generated.

Here, as the effect pattern of the effect example 2, at least the effect pattern A1 of the effect example 2 which is determined to move the movable body A1 and the movable body A1 and the movable body B are determined to operate respectively. And the effect pattern AB of the effect example 2 which is performed. Then, in the effect pattern A1 of the effect example 2, as in the case of the effect pattern A1 of the effect example 1 described above, FIGS. 130(a), 130(b), and 131(a) (or FIG. 131(b)). In the mode shown in (1), the opportunity to receive the operation effect for the movable body A1 is provided, and the movable body A1 moves. On the other hand, in the effect pattern AB of the effect example 2, after the operation opportunity reception opportunity for the movable body A1 is provided, the operation effect reception opportunity for the movable body B is provided. Therefore, in the peripheral control board 1510, whichever of the effect patterns A1 and AB is performed as the effect pattern of the effect example 2, in the display section D, the coordinate area (not shown) facing the movable body A1. In, the suggestion image HG1 is displayed to suggest that the operation of sliding the movable body A1 in the moving direction (here, to the left) should be performed. In addition, similarly, regardless of which one of the effect patterns A1 and AB is performed, the movable body A1 is caused to emit light to indicate that the coordinate area (not shown) facing the movable body A1 should be operated. ing.

However, in the effect pattern AB of the effect example 2, when an operation to a coordinate area (not shown) facing the movable body A1 is received (when a physical object is detected), a specific effect event for the movable body A1. First, as shown in FIG. 132(b), the suggestion image HG1 is hidden on the display unit D, and control is performed to interrupt the effect reception in the coordinate area facing the movable body A1. At this time, it is desirable that the decorative pattern SZ in the display section D is displayed in a mode that is visible but difficult to see (translucent display, etc.), and the light emitting state of the movable body A1 is also interrupted. It is desirable to allow it.

Then, as shown in FIG. 132(c), in the display section D in which the suggestion image HG1 is hidden in this way, an operation for an operation means (operation button 410 or the like) different from the special operation receiving section 3333 is performed. The operation instruction image SG for prompting is displayed, and an operation acceptance period of a specific effect using the other operation means (operation button 410 or the like) is generated. When an operation on another operation means (operation button 410 or the like) is received during the operation reception period for the specific effect, the operation instruction image SG on the display unit D is hidden as shown in FIG. 133(a). At the same time, the movable body B, which is different from the movable body A1 that was initially shown as the target for production, is controlled to operate. In addition, in this production example 2, the movable body B is advanced to the front side of the display unit D for a predetermined time.

Then, in the effect pattern AB of the effect example 2, after the movable body B operates in this way, as shown in FIG. 133(b), the movable area B moves in a coordinate area (not shown) facing the movable body A1 in the display unit D. In addition to displaying a suggestion image HG2 that suggests that an operation of sliding the body A1 in the movable direction (here, to the left), a coordinate area (not shown) facing the movable body A1 in the special operation receiving portion 3333 is displayed. The operation effect period for setting (controlling) to accept the effect is generated again. At this time, the opportunity for the production operation of the movable body A1 is given again, but after the situation shown in FIG. 132(a) appears, the movable body A does not operate but the movable body A1 operates. It is desirable to set the effect pattern AB of the effect example 2 in which the movable body A is operated after the movable body B is operated to have a higher expectation than the effect pattern A1 of the effect example 2 described above. In this case, as shown in FIG. 133(b), the display mode of the suggestion image HG2 is made different from that of the suggestion image HG1 shown in FIG. 132(a), which suggests that the production pattern has a high degree of expectation. It is desirable to make the light emitting mode of the movable body A1 different from the light emitting mode of the movable body A1 shown in FIG. 132(a) to suggest that the production pattern has a high degree of expectation. ..

In the effect pattern AB of the effect example 2, after the situation shown in FIG. 133(b) appears, as in the case of the effect pattern A1 of the effect example 1 described above, FIG. 130(b) and FIG. 131( a) (or FIG. 131(b)), the movable body A1 is moved by the opportunity to receive the operation effect for the movable body A1. Further, after the situation shown in FIG. 133(b) appears, as in the case of the effect pattern A2 of the above-described effect example 1, FIG. 130(c) and FIG. 131(c) (or FIG. 131(b)). ), an opportunity to receive an operation effect for the movable body A1 may be provided so that an effect pattern in which the movable body A1 moves appears.

Particularly, in the effect pattern AB of this effect example 2, as shown in FIG. 133(b), the suggestion image HG2 that suggests that the effect pattern has a high degree of expectation appears, or the light emission mode of the movable body A1 is changed. Since they are made to differ, this also serves as a movable effect that appears when the operation of sliding the movable body A1 in the movable direction (here, leftward) is performed in the coordinate area (not shown) facing the movable body A1. It is desirable to perform in a special execution mode different from the case of the effect pattern A1 of effect example 2.

According to the effect pattern AB of the effect example 2 as described above, the first effect opportunity using the first operation part (here, the special operation receiving portion 3333) is first provided (the second operation in this situation. Even if the second effect opportunity is not given to the part (for example, the operation button 410), when the first operation part is operated to receive the effect, the first operation part is different from the first operation part. A second effect opportunity is given to the second operation part (for example, the operation button 410), and the first effect opportunity is once lost. Then, when the second operation part (for example, the operation button 410) is operated to receive the effect in the situation where the first effect opportunity has been temporarily lost, the second effect event corresponding to the effect reception ( Here, the operation of the movable body B) occurs. In other words, in this case, it is possible to generate the performance as to whether or not the second performance opportunity is given to the second operation part when the reception of the effect for the first operation part is performed. Novel operability using the operation part of will be provided.

In order to preferably realize such novel operability using a plurality of operation parts, it is desirable to always provide the second operation part in a manner that is physically difficult to operate. Then, when it is determined that the second effect opportunity is given to the second operation part, it is difficult to physically operate the second operation part based on the fact that the effect acceptance is made for the first operation part. It is desirable to control from the mode to the mode that is easy to operate, and to allow the performance reception for the second operation site when the mode is easy to operate. Here, the “physically difficult operation mode” refers to, for example, a mode in which the second operation site (for example, the operation button 410) is covered with another member and is difficult to operate, or the second operation site. Is a state in which it is located in a state when it has already been operated, and "controlling from a mode that is difficult to physically operate to a mode that is easy to operate" refers to, for example, the second operation part itself. Control to operate to a position that is not covered by another member, control to operate another member that covers the second operation part to a position that does not cover the second operation part, or operate the second operation part It can be realized as a control to operate up to a position different from the state when it is operated. Further, in this case, the trigger for controlling the second operation part from the mode in which it is difficult to physically operate to the mode in which it is easy to operate does not necessarily have to be when the performance reception for the first operation part is made, and It may be when a specific time has passed since the performance pattern was executed. In any case, when the second operation opportunity is given to the second operation part when the effect reception for the first operation part is made, the second operation part itself or members provided in the vicinity thereof are operated. It is desirable to suggest that the operation target is changed from the first operation part to the second operation part and that the expectation is increased due to the change.

In addition, in the effect pattern AB of the above-described effect example 2, after the first effect part using the first operation part (here, the special operation receiving portion 3333) is provided, the first operation part is operated and this is changed. It is decided to grant the second performance opportunity based on the reception of the performance. However, the first operation part (here, the special operation receiving portion 3333) is used to give the first effect opportunity (or, after the suggestion image HG1 is displayed), and then the first operation opportunity is reached. A second effect opportunity for a second operation part different from the operation part (for example, the operation button 410) may be given so that the first effect opportunity is once lost. In this case, the first effect event is generated by the operation on the first operation part until the predetermined time elapses, but the first effect event is ended based on the elapse of the predetermined time. (If the effect target is a movable body, the movable body is controlled to return to the original position). Alternatively, the first operation opportunity using the first operation part is not given, and a second operation part different from the first operation part (for example, the first operation part after a lapse of a predetermined time from displaying the suggestion image HG1) A second presentation opportunity may be given to the operation button 410). That is, in this case, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game when the effect reception is not made by the operation on the first operation portion even though the suggestion image HG1 is displayed.

Further, in the effect pattern AB of the above-described effect example 2, after the suggestion image HG1 is displayed, the suggestion image HG1 is hidden. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, FIG. You may make it further display the operation instruction image SG shown in FIG. With such a configuration, it is possible to depict the manner in which the suggestion image HG1 changes to the suggestion image HG2 having a higher degree of expectation, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game. However, at this time, when the suggestion image HG1 is displayed in a state where the effect reception for the first operation part is not performed, the display mode of the suggestion image HG1 is changed (for example, from color display to black and white display, semi-transparent, etc.). It is desirable that the display mode is relatively hard to see. Furthermore, a timekeeping image showing the remaining display time of the suggestion image HG1 (remaining time for effect reception for the first operation part) is also displayed together, and effect reception for the first operation part is not performed. If the state in which the remaining time does not decrease is shown by the timekeeping image, it is possible to let the player recognize that the remaining period in which the effect reception for the first operation part is performed does not decrease. As a result, it becomes possible to entertain a game using another operation means (for example, the operation button 410) with peace of mind.
In this case, the remaining time during which the effect reception is performed does not decrease after the appearance of the effect reception for the first operation portion is reduced by a predetermined amount even though the effect reception is not performed. By using the above-mentioned clock image, it is possible to provide more interesting performance.

Further, in the effect pattern AB of the above-described effect example 2, after the suggestion image HG1 is displayed, the effect acceptance for the first operation part is not performed based on the effect acceptance for the first operation part being performed. A period is generated, the display mode of the suggestion image HG1 is changed in the predetermined period (for example, a color display is changed to a black-and-white display, a display mode such as translucent is made relatively hard to see), and the time is measured. The image may indicate that the remaining time does not decrease (the display meter does not decrease and becomes stationary). At this time, it is desirable to change the display mode of an image different from the suggestion image HG1 on the display unit D. In this case, when the predetermined period ends after the second effect opportunity is provided, the display mode of the suggestion image HG1 is changed to a mode with higher expectation, and the effect reception for the first operation part is performed again. You may do it.

Further, in the effect pattern of the above-described effect example 2, after displaying the suggestion image HG1 that prompts an operation for the effect object of the movable body A1 (or in a state where the suggestion image HG1 is displayed), the movable body B is operated. However, the movable body B does not have to be operated by the operation of the player, for example, based on the fact that a special result is obtained by determining whether a predetermined operation condition is satisfied. It may be a non-operation movable body that operates. When such a non-operation movable body is adopted, even if it is decided to operate (a special result is obtained), no operation instruction is given to the non-operation movable body, and the operation is accepted. Nor. In this regard, if the determination as to whether or not the predetermined operation condition for the non-operable movable body is satisfied is appropriately generated regardless of the execution state of the effect pattern, it is possible to determine other effect target (movable object or display image). Since it becomes possible to secretly decide to operate the non-operation movable body while the suggestion image HG1 is displayed, an operation instruction regarding another effect target appears and the operation is accepted. While possible, it is possible to have a possibility that a non-operation movable body that is not related to this may suddenly move, or that a special movable body and another effect target may move at the same time. Therefore, it is possible to expect that the game enjoyment will be improved by such an unexpected operation effect.

Further, when the suggestion images HG1 and HG2 and the operation instruction image SG appear in the display unit D, the target operation site (a specific coordinate area of the special operation receiving unit 3333, the operation button 410, etc.). ) Is not allowed to receive the effect, but it is also possible to receive the effect in the coordinate area (special operation receiving portion 3333) facing the suggestion images HG1 and HG2 and the portion in which the operation instruction image SG appears. Good. According to such a configuration, even if the operation portion cannot be recognized, it is only necessary to operate the specific images appearing in the display unit D (the suggestion images HG1 and HG2 and the operation instruction image S). It becomes possible to generate the same effect, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment appeal.

In the above-described embodiment, at least the physical objects that have already been detected are detected while the movement related to the movement of the physical object in the special operation receiving unit 3333 has not been completed and is still being detected. The control for moving the effect target (display image or movable body) in a mode according to the moving direction and the moving amount can be executed, but the moving speed of the physical object is detected when the control for moving the effect target is performed. However, the level of the moving speed may be reflected in the movement of the movable body.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, when realizing the operation effect using the special operation receiving unit 3333, the effect is produced in the coordinate area of the special operation receiving unit 3333 facing the operation target portion. Although the reception is performed, it is not always necessary to perform the reception in the coordinate area facing the site to be operated, and the effect reception may be performed in a specific coordinate area of the special operation receiving unit 3333. Good.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the change in light caused by an operation (physical object such as a finger) on the special operation receiving unit 3333 is detected by the outer peripheral light detection unit 35, and this is detected by the peripheral control board 1510. Although the operation mode (movement information of a physical object such as a finger or the like) for the special operation receiving unit 3333 is determined by analysis, for example, a special operation reception is performed using a touch panel installed on the glass plate 192. You may make it determine the operation mode with respect to the part 3333 (in this case, the mode of the touch operation with respect to the glass plate 192). However, in this case, there is a concern that the visibility of the game area and the display area through the glass plate 192 may be adversely affected.

Next, the game control of the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment will be described in detail. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing (FIG. 94: step S114).

Now, in the main control program, if the special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing (FIG. 94: step S114) is entered, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first sets the above-mentioned first as shown in FIG. The first jackpot determination random number is acquired from the random number counter on the condition that the detection signal from the one start opening sensor 4002 is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the first start opening 2002) (YES in step S5231). The first starting opening passage processing such as storing this in the first special symbol holding storage area of the main control built-in RAM is executed (step S5322). In addition, on condition that the detection signal by the second starting port sensor 4004 is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the second starting port 2004) (YES in step S5233), the second special random number of the second special symbol ( The second big hit determination random number) is acquired from the random number counter and stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area of the main control built-in RAM to execute the second starting opening passage process (step S5234).

Next, it is determined whether or not the big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit game state is controlled (step S5235), and if the big hit execution flag is set, the big hit game state is controlled. The big hit control process (step S5240a) is executed.

In the jackpot control process according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG.
When the result of the determination process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests either "8R probability variation big hit A" and "8R normal big hit", the special winning opening 2005 After opening for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the count sensor 4005 detects that 9 game balls have been won in the special winning opening 2005, the opening/closing pattern (round game) is repeated 8 times. Control to the 8R jackpot gaming state,
-When the result of the determination process for the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests "16R probability variation big hit", the special winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds). After that, or the 16R jackpot game state, which repeats 16 times the open/close pattern (round game) which is closed when the count sensor 4005 detects that 9 game balls have been won in the big winning opening 2005,
-When the result of the determination process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests "8R probability variation big hit B", the special winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds). ) Or after repeating the opening and closing pattern (round game) to be closed 8 times when the count sensor 4005 detects that 9 game balls have been won in the special winning opening 2005, is controlled to the 8R jackpot gaming state,
When the result of the determination process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests "2R normal big hit", the special winning opening 2005 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.6 seconds) After that, the opening/closing pattern (round game) to be closed is repeated twice, and the 2R big hit game state is controlled.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, right-handing is more advantageous to the player than left-handing in the situation where the time-saving control is executed, and is better than right-handing in the situation where the time-saving control is not executed. As described above, left-handedness is advantageous for the player. In this regard, in the left-handed state, even if the big hit is won as a result of the lottery for the first special symbol according to the acceptance of the game ball into the first starting opening 2002, the big hit game of a maximum of 8 rounds is opened for a long time. Only a state (approximately 1000 game balls can be acquired) occurs.

On the other hand, in the right-handed state, when the jackpot is won in the lottery for the second special symbol according to the acceptance of the game ball into the second starting opening 2004, there is a probability of about 50% (allocation ratio of winning species). The expected value of the prize balls that can be won when you win the big hit, such as the 16-round long-time open big hit game state (approximately 2000 game balls can be won). Therefore, when the shift control to the right-handed state is performed, it is possible to expect a larger number of prize balls to be obtained than in the left-handed state.

In the big hit control process, when starting the opening control of the special winning opening 2005, first, a process of starting the operation of the condition device, a process of resetting a variation counter, which will be described later, and the like are performed.

In addition, in the jackpot control process, after performing such a jackpot opening 2005 opening control, as shown in FIG. The flag and the time saving flag are set.

The high-probability flag is a flag that indicates a high-probability state, and is used in a big-hit determination process shown in FIG. 139, which will be described later. Probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit B) which is set when ending the big hit game state based on, when the next big hit first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 144 described later or second special symbol stop processing not shown Is reset with.

The time saving flag is a flag indicating that the time saving control is being executed (low probability time saving state, high probability time saving state), and as shown in FIG. 140, the time saving control after the jackpot gaming state has ended (high probability time saving state). It is set when the jackpot game state based on the jackpot (8R certainty variation big hit A, 16R certainty variation big hit, 8R certainty variation big hit B) is finished, and when it becomes the next big hit, the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 144 described later. Alternatively, it is reset by a second special symbol stop process (not shown). Or, when the special probability (first special symbol, second special symbol) is digested 100 times without winning the big hit after the occurrence of the low probability time saving state, the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 144 which will be described later. Alternatively, it is reset by a second special symbol stop process (not shown).

The variation number counter is a counter that indicates the number of variations of the special symbol after the variation number counter is reset, and is used in a first variation pattern setting process (second variation pattern setting process) shown in FIG. 142 described later. That is, the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is updated (for example, counted up) when a change is made, and at least a specific type of jackpot (16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot B) It is reset when the jackpot gaming state based on is started.

If the big hit execution flag is not set (NO in step S5235), then as the processing of step S5236, whether or not the small hit execution flag indicating that the small hit game state is controlled is set. Determine whether. As a result, if the small hit execution flag is set, the small hit control process (step S5240b) for controlling the small hit game state is executed. In the small hit control process, the special winning opening 2005 is opened for a specific opening time (for example, 1.8 seconds).

Here, in the small hit control process (step S5240b), unlike the case of the big hit control process (step S5240a), the high probability flag, the time saving flag, and the time saving are performed after the opening control of the special winning opening 2005 is performed. Each set process such as the number counter is not performed. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 140(a), the small hit is not won in the big hit determination.

Also, if the small hitting running flag is not set (NO in step S5236), the value of the second special holding number counter indicating the number of second big hit determination random numbers stored in the second special symbol holding storage area is On condition that it is "0" (step S5237), the first special symbol process process including the lottery process according to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (step S5238).

On the other hand, if the value of the second special holding number counter indicating the number of the second big hit determination random number stored in the second special symbol holding storage area is not "0" (step S5237), the second special symbol The second special symbol process process including the lottery process according to the display mode when the variable display is stopped is executed (step S5239). As a result, as long as the game is performed so as not to lose the lottery for the second special symbol that has been held (unless the value of the second special pending number counter is "0"), the first special symbol Regardless of whether the lottery is held or not, only the lottery for the second jackpot determination random number will be continuously performed without interruption (priority execution).

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in the time saving state (high-probability time saving state), the player only needs to keep hitting the game ball to the right side of the center accessory 2500 (right hitting), Only the lottery (determination process) for the two-big hit determination random numbers can be continuously performed without interruption.

It should be noted that the special figure game (symbol variation) using the second special figure (second special symbol) is limited to be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (first special symbol). Alternatively, for example, the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game balls enter (pass) the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 and the starting winning occurs. In this case, a table that stores data that can specify the order in which the start winning is generated is provided, and the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. It only has to be decided.

FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first starting opening passage process (step S5322).

Now, in the process of step S5231, if it is determined that the first starting opening sensor 4002 is in the ON state and the game ball enters the first starting opening 2002, as shown in FIG. 135. In the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, as the process of step S5241, first, each random number on the first special symbol side (random number for jackpot determination, reach determination random number, jackpot symbol random number, variation display pattern random number). ) From the random number counter.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value by the first special reserved number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and the reserved number of the first special symbol is the maximum value based on this counter value. It is determined whether or not it is "4" which is the (upper limit value) (step S5242). In the processing of this step S5242, when it is determined that the number of holding of the first special symbol is not the maximum value, the variable display of the first special symbol (determination process for the first special symbol) is newly held. In order to attain the state of, the following processes of steps S5243 to S5245 are performed.

That is, first, as the process of step S5243, the first special suspension number counter is incremented (added by 1). Next, as the process of step S5244, each random number acquired in step S5241 is a first special symbol reserved storage area corresponding to the counter value of the first special reserved number counter in the storage area of the main control internal RAM. To store.

Then, the first special figure prefetching process for executing the prefetching effect on the first special diagram side is executed, and the process is ended (step S5245). As will be described later, the look-ahead effect on the first special symbol side is an effect that suggests the determination result (or its degree of expectation) of the first special symbol in advance before starting the variable display of the first special symbol. In this first special figure pre-reading process, the information required for determining whether or not the pre-reading effect is executed on the peripheral control board 1510 side and the like (information regarding the win for the pre-reading determination, the symbol type for the pre-reading determination) Information, information regarding a variation pattern number for prefetch determination, etc.) is generated and stored in a corresponding storage area as transmission information for the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the determination result itself of the first special symbol, information about the stop symbol of the special symbol may be included in the command as information suggesting the type of the big hit game. For example, information of the stage before the final determination such as the SP reach group, the normal reach group of the variation patterns, the latent probability hit group, and the small hit group of the symbol types may be transmitted as the prefetch command.

On the other hand, in the process of step S5242, when it is determined that the number of holding the first special symbol is the maximum value, the variable display of the first special symbol is not newly held. That is, by ending the process without executing the processes of steps S5243 to S5245, the variable display of the first special symbol is not newly put on hold.

FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second starting opening passage processing (step S5234).

Now, in the process of step S5233, if it is determined that the second starting opening sensor 4004 is in the ON state and the game ball enters the second starting opening 2004, as shown in FIG. 136. In the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, as the process of step S5251, first, each random number on the second special symbol side (random number for second jackpot determination, second reach determination random number, second jackpot symbol) A random number, a second variation display pattern random number) is acquired from the random number counter.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value by the second special reserved number counter from the main control internal RAM, and the reserved number of the second special symbol is the maximum value based on this counter value. It is determined whether or not it is "4" (step S5252). In the processing of this step S5252, when it is determined that the number of the second special symbol to be held is not the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol (lottery for the second special symbol) is newly held. In order to obtain the state of, the processing of the following steps S5253 to S5255 will be performed.

That is, first, as the process of step S5253, the second special suspension number counter is incremented (added by 1). Then, as a process of step S5254, each random number acquired in step S5251 is a second special symbol reserved storage area corresponding to the counter value of the second special reserved number counter in the storage area of the main control internal RAM. To store.

Then, the second special figure prefetching process for executing the prefetching effect on the second special diagram side is executed, and the process is ended (step S5255). As will be described later, the look-ahead effect on the second special symbol side is an effect that suggests the determination result (or the degree of expectation) of the second special symbol in advance before starting the variable display of the second special symbol. In the second special figure pre-reading process, the peripheral control board 1510 side generates information (winning information, symbol type, variation pattern number, etc.) necessary for determining the presence or absence of the pre-reading effect and the effect contents, It is stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information for the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the determination result of the second special symbol itself, the command may include information regarding the stop symbol of the special symbol as the information suggesting the type of the big hit game. For example, information of the stage before the final determination such as the SP reach group, the normal reach group of the variation patterns, the latent probability hit group, and the small hit group of the symbol types may be transmitted as the prefetch command. Further, in the process of step S5255, a process (FIG. 176) for realizing a later-described one-stage effect may be performed.

On the other hand, in the process of step S5252, when it is determined that the number of holding the second special symbol is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly held. That is, by ending the process without executing the processes of steps S5253 to S5255, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly put on hold.

A command to instruct the reserved number of the first special symbol in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120) when the reserved number of the first special symbol changes based on the game ball entering the first starting opening 2002. (First reservation number designation command 0 to 4) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. In addition, when the number of reserved second special symbols changes based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second starting port 2004, the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120) indicates the number of reserved second special symbols. Command (second holding number designation command 0 to 4) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510.

FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol process process (step S5238). The first special symbol process process executed in step S5238 of the special symbol and special electric auditors product control process and the second special symbol process process executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric auditors product control process are the same. Since it is a program module of, and only the random numbers and tables used for determination are different, only the first special symbol process process executed in step S5238 of the special symbol and special electric auditors product control process will be described here. In the first special symbol process process, one of the following five process processes will be selectively executed according to the first special symbol process flag.

1. The big hit determination random number corresponding to the first special symbol stored in the main control built-in RAM is read out, and the lottery process or the like about the display mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped based on the read big hit determination random number. First special symbol normal processing is performed (step S5280)

2. First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281) is performed based on the result of the determination process for the display mode at the time of variation control stop of the first special symbol )

3. The variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 1403 based on the random number for the variable display pattern, and the effect display device (game board side effect display device) 1600 are executed corresponding to the special symbol. First variation pattern setting processing (step S5282) in which lottery processing or the like for variation modes of effect display is performed

4. First special symbol variation processing to wait until the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 is stopped (step S5283)

5. As the mode at the time of fluctuation control stop of the first special symbol determined based on the result of the determination process about the display mode at the time of fluctuation control stop of the first special symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display 1403. First special symbol stop process for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol (step S5284)

The initial value of the first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S5280) should be performed.

FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol normal process (step S5280).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 138, the main control MPU1310a of the main control board 1310, first, step S5301. As the process, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display of the first special symbol in the hold state based on the counter value by the first special hold number counter. As a result, when it is determined that there is a variable display of the first special symbol in the suspended state, it is stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area of the main control built-in RAM as the process of step S5302. The first memory among the random numbers related to the display mode of the first special symbol (for example, the first jackpot determination random number, the first reach determination random number, the first jackpot symbol random number, the first variation display pattern random number) The random number stored in the area is read from the RAM with built-in main control. Then, as the processing of steps S5303 and S304, while counting down the first special reserved number counter, the first special stored in each storage area of the first special symbol reserved storage area of the main control internal RAM. First-in first-out (first-in first-out) random numbers related to the display mode when the variable display of the symbols is stopped (for example, the first jackpot determination random number, the first reach determination random number, the first jackpot symbol random number, the first variable display pattern random number). The shift operation is performed in the First-Out) mode.

Specifically, the first special symbol holding storage area has four storage areas (first special symbol holding storage area a to first special symbol holding storage area d), of the starting winning prize to the first starting opening 2002. The random numbers extracted according to the occurrence are stored in order from the first (first) area. Then, when a random number is stored in the nth (n=1 to 3) storage area and the start winning occurs, the extracted random number is stored in the (n+1)th (n=1 to 3) storage area. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth storage area (N=2 to 4). Various random numbers are moved to the (N-1)th (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display of the first special symbol occurs can be stored so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the variable display is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that occurred first). .. Similarly, the second special symbol hold storage area has four storage areas (second special symbol hold storage area a to second special symbol hold storage area d), depending on the occurrence of a start prize to the second starting opening 2004. The random numbers thus extracted are stored in order from the first (first) area. Then, when a random number is stored in the nth (n=1 to 3) storage area and the start winning occurs, the extracted random number is stored in the (n+1)th (n=1 to 3) storage area. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth storage area (N=2 to 4). Various random numbers are moved to the (N-1)th (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the variable display of the second special symbol is held is stored so that it can be specified, and the variable display is released from the earliest hold (the earliest hold). ..

Then, after that, as a process of step S5305, a big hit determination process that is a determination process for the winning of the big hit is performed based on the read first big hit determination random number. After that, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281) (step S5306), this process ends.

FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit determination process (step S5305).

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, when the current game state is a high probability state (high probability time saving state, high probability non-time saving state) (step S5311), at the time of high probability shown in FIG. Select the big hit determination table (step S5312), if the current gaming state is a low probability state (step S5311), select the big hit determination table at the time of low probability shown in FIG. 140(A) (step S5313), select The big hit judgment table and the big hit judgment random number read in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal process are compared (step S5314).

As shown in FIG. 140(A), the big hit determination table is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and when the game state has a low probability for each type of special random number (first big hit determination random number, second big hit determination random number). Big chance judgment table at the time of low probability used in the case of (low probability non-time saving state, low probability time saving state), and high used when the game state is high probability (high probability non time saving state, high probability time saving state) And a big hit determination table at the time of probability. And in the big hit judgment table at the time of low probability which is referred to for comparison with the first big hit judgment random number, the 204 kinds of first big hit judgment random numbers coincide with the big hit judgment value indicating that the big hit is won, and 65332 The first big-hit determination random numbers (65536 kinds) are associated with each other so as to match the deviation determination value indicating that the first big-hit determination random numbers of the types are out of alignment (the big-hit probability at low probability; "1/321"). On the other hand, in order to compare with the big hit determination random number (second big hit determination random number) of the second special symbol in the second special symbol process process executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric auditors product control process In the low-probability jackpot determination table referred to, the 204 types of second jackpot determination random numbers coincide with the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won, and the 65332 types of second jackpot determination random numbers are the above-mentioned defects. The second jackpot determination random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the deviation determination value indicating that (the jackpot probability when the probability is low; about “1/321”).

In addition, in the high probability big hit judgment table referred to for comparison with the first big hit judgment random number, 2040 kinds of first big hit judgment random numbers coincide with the big hit judgment value, and 63496 kinds of first big hit judgment random numbers. The first jackpot determination random numbers are associated with each other so that the random numbers match the deviation determination value (the jackpot probability at the time of high probability; about "1/32"). On the other hand, in the jackpot determination table at the time of high probability referred to for comparison with the second jackpot determination random number in the second special symbol process process executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric auditors product control process, , 2040 kinds of second jackpot determination random numbers coincide with the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot is won, and 63496 kinds of second jackpot determination random numbers match the deviation determination value indicating the above-mentioned gap. The second big hit determination random numbers are associated with each other (big hit probability at high probability; about "1/32"). In addition, the big hit judgment value set in the big hit judgment table referred to for comparison with the first big hit judgment random number and the big hit judgment table referred to for comparison with the second big hit judgment random number (the big hit judgment value The number of big hit judgment values may be different with the same number (the big hit probability is the same), or the number of big hit judgment values may be different (the big hit probability is different)) In this case, at least one of the big hit judgment table at the time of low probability and the big hit judgment table at the time of high probability may be made to have different big hit judgment values (both may be made different). ..

The main control MPU1310a of the main control board 1310, as a result of the comparison between the selected big hit judgment table and the big hit judgment random number read in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal process, when it is judged that it is a big hit (step S5315). ), a big hit flag indicating that the variation is a big hit is set (step S5316), and the big hit determination process ends.

If it is determined in step S5315 that the big hit has been lost, the read big hit judgment random number matches the small hit judgment value indicating that the small hit has been won, based on the selected big hit judgment table. It is determined whether or not (step S5317). However, as described above, in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal process (second special symbol process process) of this example, since the big hit determination random number that matches the small hit determination value is not read (small hit probability; (0/65536), it is determined in this step S5317 that a small hit has not been won (a loss determination is made).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5317 that there is a loss, the reach determination table is compared with the reach determination random number read in step S5302 (step S5319).

A reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and is used when the gaming state is in the high probability non-time saving state. In the case of, the reach determination table in the high probability time saving state and the reach determination table in the low probability state used when the game state is the low probability state (low probability non-time saving state) are provided.

Here, in the reach determination table in the high probability time saving state, one type of reach determination random number matches the reach determination value indicating reach, and 71 types of reach determination random numbers indicate that the reach determination value does not reach. The reach determination random numbers are associated with each other so as to match with. However, in the reach determination table in the high probability time saving state, in order to maximize the progress speed of the game in the time saving state, all of the 72 types of reach determination random numbers match the reach determination value indicating that they do not reach. By doing so, the reach determination value indicating the reach may not be matched.

In the reach determination table in the low probability state, five types of reach determination random numbers including the same reach determination random number as the reach determination random number set in the reach determination table in the high probability time saving state are reached. The reach determination random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the reach determination values shown, and the 67 types of reach determination random numbers match the reach determination values indicating that the reach is not reached. As described above, in this embodiment, in the low probability state, the reach determination value indicating that reach is made higher than in the high probability short time state, and is obtained with a predetermined probability.

Further, in the reach determination table in the high probability non-time saving state, five types of reach determinations including the same reach determination random number as the reach determination random numbers set in the reach determination table in the high probability time saving state and the low probability state are performed. The reach determination random numbers are associated with the reach determination random numbers that match the reach determination values, and the 67 types of reach determination random numbers match the reach determination values that do not reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the reach determination value indicating that the reach is made is the same in the high-probability non-time saving state as in the low-probability non-time saving state.

When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected reach determination table with the reach determination random number read in step S5302 (step S5319), and determines that reach reach is lost (YES in step S5120). Then, the reach flag indicating that the fluctuation is reached is set, and the process ends (step S5121).

FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 141, the main control MPU1310a of the main control board 1310, first, The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the jackpot determination process (step S5305) is determined. The determination of the lottery process result is performed by determining whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step S5331).

If the big hit flag is set in step S5331, the main control MPU 1310a selects the symbol determination table shown in FIG. 140(B), and the first big hit symbol random number read in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal process. By comparing the selected symbol determination table with the variable determination control of the first special symbol to determine the jackpot symbol as a mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) (step S5332).

As shown in FIG. 140(B), in the symbol determination table on the side of the first special symbol, a random number for the first jackpot symbol (here, a total of 200) is provided for the determination result (8R probability variation jackpot A, 8R normal jackpot). Random numbers for the first big hit symbol) are stored in such a manner that they are associated with each other. As shown in FIG. 140(C), in the symbol determination table on the second special symbol side, the second jackpot symbol random number for the determination result (16R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit B, 2R normal big hit) ( Here, a total of 200 second jackpot random numbers) are stored in such a manner that they are associated with each other.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines the type of jackpot by specifying the determination result associated with the obtained jackpot symbol random number. In the symbol determination table of this example, the type of jackpot determined based on the first jackpot symbol random number and the type of jackpot determined based on the second jackpot symbol random number are set to be different. .. More specifically, the probability of jackpot change that triggers the transition to the high probability state and the normal jackpot that does not trigger the transition to the high probability state (allocation) are the same, but for the first jackpot symbol The expected value of the game ball that can be obtained by the big hit determined based on the second big hit symbol random number is larger than the expected value of the game ball that can be obtained by the big hit determined based on the random number ing.

The following is a brief summary of the specific game and effect contents for each type of jackpot.

1. After the big hit symbol combination appears on the effect display device 1600, the special winning opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or 9 game balls are won in the special winning opening 2103. By opening and closing pattern (round game) to be closed when it is detected at 8 times, the game ball is controlled to the 8R jackpot game state in which the game ball can enter (easy) the jackpot 2103, and after this 8R jackpot game state Controls to a high-probability time-saving state until the next big-hit gaming state occurs, and performs a battle effect (battle victory effect) in which a specific character wins during the execution period of the 8R big-hit gaming state. Is a relatively advantageous state, which is controlled in the effect mode shown on the effect display device 1600.

2. After the big hit symbol combination appears on the effect display device 1600, the special winning opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or 9 game balls are won in the special winning opening 2103. By opening and closing pattern (round game) to be closed when it is detected at 8 times, the game ball is controlled to the 8R jackpot game state in which the game ball can enter (easy) the jackpot 2103, and after this 8R jackpot game state Is controlled to a low-probability time saving state until the variable display of the special symbol is exhausted 100 times (or a big hit is won within the period until 100 times exhausted), and during the execution period of the 8R big hit game state 8R normal jackpot controlled by the effect mode in which the effect display in which the specific character is defeated (battle defeat effect) is relatively disadvantageous in the low probability time saving state is shown on the effect display device 1600.

3. After the big hit symbol combination appears on the effect display device 1600, the special winning opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or 9 game balls are won in the special winning opening 2103. By opening and closing pattern (round game) to be closed when it is detected at 16 times, the game ball is controlled into a 16R jackpot game state in which it can (easily) enter the jackpot 2103, and after this 16R jackpot game state Is controlled to a high-probability time-saving state until the next big hit game state occurs, and during the execution period of the 16R big hit game state, the production (success production) whether the number of rounds exceeds eight rounds (will be 16 rounds) ) Is performed, and a production mode in which the production display device 1600 indicates that the vehicle is in a relatively advantageous state after a lapse of a predetermined period after the high probability time saving state is controlled. 16R probability variation big hit

4. After the big hit symbol combination appears on the effect display device 1600, the special winning opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or 9 game balls are won in the special winning opening 2103. By opening and closing pattern (round game) to be closed when it is detected at 8 times, the game ball is controlled to the 8R jackpot game state in which the game ball can enter (easy) the jackpot 2103, and after this 8R jackpot game state Is controlled to a high-probability time-saving state until the next big hit game state occurs, and during the execution period of the 8R big hit game state, the production (failure production) as to whether the number of rounds exceeds 8 rounds (16 rounds). ) Is performed, and a production mode in which the production display device 1600 indicates that the vehicle is in a relatively advantageous state after a lapse of a predetermined period after the high probability time saving state is controlled. 8R probability variation big hit B

5. After the big hit symbol combination appears on the effect display device 1600, the special winning opening 2103 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.6 seconds), or nine game balls are won in the special winning opening 2103. By repeating the opening and closing pattern (round game) that is closed when it is detected by 2 times, the game ball is controlled to a 2R jackpot game state in which it is difficult to enter the jackpot 2103, and after this 2R jackpot game state, special Controls to a low probability time saving state until the variable display of the symbol is exhausted 100 times (or a big hit is won within the period until 100 times exhausted), and a specific character during the execution period of the 2R big hit game state. 2R normal jackpot that is controlled in the production mode in which the production display device 1600 shows that the player is in a relatively disadvantageous state in the low-probability time saving state.

In the left-handed state, the game ball does not pass through the gate portion 2003, and the movable piece (not shown) that opens the second starting port 2004 is not driven. Therefore, in the left-handed state, the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 2004 does not occur, only the winning of the gaming ball to the first starting opening 2002 occurs, and there is a reserved ball of the second special symbol. Except the case, only the variable display of the first special symbol is executed on the first special symbol display 1403, and a big hit (8R probability variation big hit A, 8R normal big hit) related to the first special symbol will occur. Similarly, in the right-handed state, no game ball is won in the first starting opening 2002. Therefore, in the right-handed state, only the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 2004 will occur, except for the case where there is a reserved ball of the first special symbol, the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 1186. Only the variable display is executed, and a big hit (16R sure change big hit, 8R sure change big hit B, 2R normal big hit) related to the second special symbol will occur.

In addition, in the big hit related to the first special symbol, the open/close pattern of opening the special winning opening 2103 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) is repeated eight times at most, but only about 1000 game balls are paid out. In the big hit related to the second special symbol, the open/close pattern of opening the big winning opening 2103 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) at maximum can be repeated 16 times, and approximately 2000 game balls can be paid out.

In addition, in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process, when 8R probability variation big hit A is determined, it is determined as an 8R probability variation big hit A symbol as a big hit symbol, and when 8R normal jackpot is determined, as a big hit symbol 8R normal jackpot symbol decide. Also, although not shown, if it is determined to be a 16R certainty variation jackpot in the second special symbol stop symbol setting process, it is determined to be a 16R certainty variation jackpot design as a big hit symbol, and if it is determined to be 8R certainty variation jackpot B, it is a 8R certainty variation jackpot as a big hit symbol. When the B symbol is decided and the 2R normal big hit is decided, the 2R normal big hit symbol is decided as the big hit symbol.

If the big hit flag is not set in step S5331, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines whether or not the small hit flag is set, as the process of step S5333. Then, as a result, if the small hit flag is set in the process corresponding to the step S5333 in the second special symbol process process (step S5239), the small hit symbol as a mode when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is stopped ( After determining the unique symbol stop mode (step S5334), the process proceeds to step S5337.

Furthermore, if the small hit flag is not set in step S5333, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that the special symbol is the lost symbol as the variation stop mode (step S5336), and then shifts to step S5337. To do.

Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this way, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, as the process of step S5337, the lottery result (type of big hit, small hit, out of reach, out of contact) The determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is set so that the instruction (which may indicate the mode of the stop symbol of the first special symbol) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Then, after that, as the processing of step S5338, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting processing (step S5282), this processing ends.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a controls the display of the effect display device 1600 based on the received determination result notification command and the variation pattern command (the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are variably displayed, and the left decorative pattern → the right decorative pattern → Stop display in the order of middle decorative design (In addition, the left, middle, and right decorative designs may be displayed in sync with the same design in a variable manner and stopped at the same time). For example, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines a combination of three left, middle, and right decorative patterns when a big hit is won for any type other than the 2R normal big hit. On the other hand, when the 2R normal jackpot is obtained, it is determined to be a specific symbol combination (a combination in which at least one of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols is not the same as other symbols). In addition, when the reach out is specified, a detached pattern accompanied by a reach (a combination of patterns in which the left and right decorative designs are the same "0" to "9" and different in the middle decorative design; reach loss) In the case of determining), and when the outlier is specified, it is determined to be an outfall pattern without a reach (a combination in which at least the left/right ornamental patterns among the left/middle/right ornamental symbols are different). The stop symbol thus determined is displayed on the effect display device 1600 when the change time specified from the change pattern command elapses (at the end of the game effect).

In any case, when the hit is obtained as a result of the game being advanced, the peripheral control MPU 1511a causes an effect display (special display mode) of the hit to appear before the big hit game is started, and the big hit game. After the start, the effect display during the big hit game is made to appear.

FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first fluctuation pattern setting process (step S5282).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the big hit flag is set, as shown in FIG. 142. If it is done (step S5341), the variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of big hit according to the kind of big hit decided at step S5332 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S5342), and the small hit flag If is set (step S5343), a variation pattern table for small hits (not shown) is selected (step S5344). If the reach flag is set (step S5345), variation pattern table for reach ( (Not shown) is selected (step S5346), and when none of the big hit flag, the small hit flag, and the reach flag is set, that is, when the normal hit (the hit without performing the reach effect), the hit The variation pattern table (not shown) is selected (step S5347).

Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the random number for the variation display pattern read in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S5348), and the determined variation pattern is started. A variation pattern command for notifying the peripheral control board 1510 is set and variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 is started (step S5349). Further, the main control MPU 1310a sets, in the fluctuation timer, the fluctuation time set corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined to determine the fluctuation pattern (step S5350). Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol variation process (step S5283) (step S5355), this process ends. Thereby, the variable display control of the first special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display 1403 only for the variation time thus determined, and the production control is performed on the effect display device 1600 in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. Will be done.

The variation pattern table of this example, the big hit determination random numbers (first big hit determination random number, second big hit determination random number) and big hit symbol random numbers (first big hit symbol random number, second big hit symbol random number) Plural types are provided for each determination result. Further, in the variation pattern set in each variation pattern table, a plurality of variation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for variation display control of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is described above. The random numbers for the first variable display pattern are stored so as to be associated with each other. Then, the main control MPU1310a, in the plurality of types of variation pattern table according to the determination result based on the big hit determination random number and the big hit symbol random number, the selected variation pattern table and the first special symbol normal processing in step S5302 read By comparing the random number for the variable display pattern, and by acquiring the variable time information associated with the read random number for the variable display pattern from this table, the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) The fluctuation pattern of. Thereby, the determination process for the variation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) will be performed. The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the ROM with built-in main control.

However, as described above, since the small hit is not won in this example, the variation pattern table at the time of the small hit is not used. In this example, the small hit is not won, but the small hit may be won.

Further, in the variation pattern table at the time of the reach of this example, it is set to determine the mode type of the reach production to be executed by comparing the determination value indicating which reach production is to be executed with the random number for the variation display pattern. Has been done. For example, in the non-time saving state, 164 types of random numbers for variable display patterns out of 241 types of random numbers for variable display patterns are set as the determination value (0 to 163) indicating that any one of the normal reach effects is executed, and 59 The random numbers for the variable display patterns of types are set as the determination values (164 to 222) indicating that one of the super reach effects with the low jackpot expectations is executed, and the 18 random numbers for the variable display patterns have the high jackpot expectations. It is set as a determination value (223 to 240) indicating that any one of the super reach effects is executed.

It should be noted that the super-reach effect (SP effect) has a higher jackpot expectation than the normal reach effect, and for a player who desires the occurrence of the big-hit game state, the player who is in the big-hit game state when the super-reach effect is executed. Expectations of are increasing. That is, such a super-reach effect has the highest selection rate in the variation pattern table at the time of a big hit, so that even if a loss is finally displayed, the player's expectation level for the big hit game state. Will be able to increase. However, in actuality, in order to sufficiently raise the expectation of the player for the big hit game state, during the period in which the super reach production is being executed, a high-anticipation notice production that is a lottery separate from the fluctuation pattern appears. It is required to do (composite).

In addition, in the variation pattern table at the time of the deviation, which is provided in correspondence with the first jackpot determination random number and the first jackpot symbol random number and is used when determining the variation time of the first special symbol, the non-time saving state and the time saving state The variation time of 12 seconds is set in common with and. On the other hand, in the variation pattern table at the time of deviation, which is provided corresponding to the second jackpot determination random number and the second symbol random number and is used when determining the variation time of the second special symbol, the time saving state is 0.1 seconds to. The fluctuation time of 12 seconds can be set, and the fluctuation time of 12 seconds is set as the non-time saving state. In this way, the variation time of the first special symbol is the same during the time saving state and the non-time saving state, and during the variation of the first special symbol in the time saving state, the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 2004 is achieved. The time is secured for prompting and for the player to win the game ball to the second starting opening 2004.

In addition, if 0.1 seconds is selected from the variation time when the second special symbol is lost, each game ball that is driven into the game area 5a at an interval of 0.6 seconds in a time saving state (such as a high probability time saving state) It is possible to suppress the situation where the lottery process is discharged without being used.

That is, the game ball that has been hit to the right is supplied to the area immediately above the gate portion 2003.
Then, when the game ball is accepted from this area to the gate unit 2003 when in a time saving state (such as a high probability time saving state), a winning as a normal symbol is obtained (for example, the winning probability is 100%), The movable piece involved in opening/closing the second starting port 2004 is maintained in the open state for a long period (5.5 seconds in this example). As a result, in a situation in which the second starting port 2004 can be successively received one after another (substantially all of the game balls that have been driven into the right side of the center accessory 2500 can be received in the second starting port 2004). Even if there is such a game ball each time, the control that the lottery on the second special symbol side can be exhausted one after another with a high jackpot probability (probability in a high probability state) of about "1/32" It will be possible.

In this example, when the player is operating the handle 302, the game balls are shot at intervals of 0.6 seconds. Therefore, in the time saving state (high probability time saving state, etc.), the second Game balls are often received at the start opening 2004 at intervals of 0.6 seconds. In this respect, in the present example, as described above, the variation pattern table when the second special symbol is out based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 2004 is extremely variable as a variation time of the time saving state (such as a high probability time saving state). It can be set to a short time of 0.1 seconds. In other words, in this case, when the loss is obtained, since the symbol fluctuation will be completed only in the time (0.1 seconds) less than the interval between game ball firings (0.6 seconds), 0.6 seconds Even in a situation where the game balls launched at intervals are successively received in the second starting port 2004, it is possible to prevent the game balls from being discharged without being used in the lottery process. ..

FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol variation process (step S5283).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 143, the main control MPU1310a of the main control board 1310, first, step S5371. As the process, the fluctuation timer in which the fluctuation time is set according to the fluctuation pattern determined in the fluctuation pattern lottery process (step S5282) is subtracted by 1. As a result, when it is determined that the variation time timer is 0, that is, the variation time selected by the lottery has elapsed (step S5372), the process proceeds to step S5373. That is, in the process of step S5373, at the time when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop process (step S5284), this process ends.

In addition, even if the fluctuation timer is decremented by 1 (step S5371), if the fluctuation time timer is not 0, until the fluctuation time timer becomes 0 (until the time to definitely stop the symbol), Each time the timer interrupt process is performed, the processes of steps S5371 and S5372 are performed.

FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop processing (step S5284).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 144, the main control MPU1310a of the main control board 1310, first, step S5381. As a process of, while performing the display control for displaying the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display 1403, the first special symbol on the effect display device 1600. The stop display command for instructing the derivation display of the display result of the decorative design according to the stop design is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S5382).

When the jackpot flag is set (YES in step S5386), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a jackpot start command indicating that the jackpot gaming state is started (step S5387), The waiting time until the start of the big hit game state (the time for displaying the start of the big hit game state) is set in the interval timer (step S5388). Then, the big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit game state is being executed is set and the high probability flag is reset if the high probability flag is set, and if the time saving flag is set. The time saving flag is reset (step S5389), the fluctuation counter is further reset, and when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol normal process, which is the initial value (step) (S5394), and this process ends. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the big hit execution flag is set in the process of step S5235, and the big hit game is performed in the big hit control process (step S5240a). The state will be executed.

The jackpot start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually according to the type of jackpot. In step S5387, the big hit start command (8R sure change big hit A command, 8R normal big hit command, 16R sure change big hit A, 8R normal big hit, 16R probability change big hit, 2R normal big hit B Set the big hit command, 8R probability variation big hit B command, 2R normal big hit command). As a result, a big hit game state effect (battle effect or additional challenge effect) according to the type of big hit instructed by the big hit start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, each lamp/LED, each speaker, and the like.

On the other hand, in the process of step S5386, when it is determined that the big hit flag is not set (NO in step S5386), first, it is determined whether or not the low probability time saving state is set (step S5390). Then, when in the low probability time saving state, it is determined whether or not the number of fluctuations of the special symbol that has been digested after being controlled to the low probability time saving state has reached a predetermined upper limit value (here, 100 times) ( Step S5391). That is, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol that has been digested after being controlled to the low-probability time saving state reaches a predetermined upper limit value (100 times), it is assumed that the condition to end the low-probability time saving state is satisfied, and the time saving is achieved. The function is stopped to shift to the normal game state (low probability non-time saving game state) (step S5392).

Then, after the processing relating to the time saving function is performed in this manner, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S5393). As a result, when it is determined that the small hit flag is set (YES in step S5393), a small hit start command indicating starting the small hit game state is set (step S5394), and the small hit game is set. The waiting time until the start of the state (the time for displaying that the small hitting game state is started) is set in the interval timer (step S5395). Then, the small hitting running flag indicating that the small hitting game state is being executed is set (step S5396), and the process shifts to the first special symbol normal processing, which is the initial value of the first special symbol process flag. When it is updated to (step S5394), this processing ends. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the small hit execution flag is set in the process of step S5236, and the small hit control process (step S5240b) is performed. The small hit game state comes to be executed. By the way, unlike the case where the big hit is won, the game state is not changed when the small hit game state is executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set (NO in step S5393), the first special symbol process is performed without performing the processing related to the big hit or the small hit, as a loss. When the flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol normal process which is the initial value (step S5394), this process is ended. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the big hit execution flag and the small hit execution flag are not set (steps S5235, S236), and a new game is made according to the state of suspension. The process related to the progress of (lottery and symbol control) will be performed (steps S5237 to S5239).

FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol and normal electric auditors product control processing (step S116).

Now, in the process of step S5401, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is in the ON state and the game ball has passed through the gate unit 2003, as shown in FIG. As the process of step S5402, the main control MPU 1310a of the control board 1310 first executes a gate portion passing process such as acquiring an ordinary random number of a normal symbol from the random number counter and storing it in the normal symbol holding storage area of the RAM. To do.

Next, in the normal symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag.

1. A normal random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read, and a normal symbol normal process in which a lottery process or the like for the display mode when the variation control of the normal symbol is stopped is performed based on the read normal random number (step S5403).
2. Normal symbol variation time determination process (step S5404) in which lottery processing or the like is performed on the variation mode (variation time) of the ordinary symbol displayed on the above-mentioned ordinary symbol display device 1402 based on the ordinary symbol variation random number.
3. Normal symbol variation processing to wait until the variable display of the above-mentioned normal symbol on the normal symbol display device 1402 is stopped (step S5405)
4. The variation display of the normal symbol is displayed so that the mode of the variation control stop of the ordinary symbol determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display aspect of the variation control of the ordinary symbol is displayed on the ordinary symbol display 1402. Ordinary symbol stop process to stop (step S5406)
5. When the result of the lottery process for the mode when the variation control of the normal symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests "universal pattern hit", the movable piece is opened and the game ball is received in the second starting opening 2004. Normal electric accessory release process (step S5407) that executes a process for controlling

The initial value of the normal symbol process flag is operated so as to indicate that the normal symbol normal process (step S5403) should be performed.

FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gate passage processing (step S5402).

Now, in the process of step S5401, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is in the ON state and the game ball has passed through the gate unit 2003, as shown in FIG. As the process of step S5411, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first obtains the counter value of the normal hold number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the number of normally held symbols is "4", which is the maximum value.

In the processing of this step S5411, when it is determined that the number of holding of the above-mentioned normal symbol is not the maximum value, in order to newly put the variable display control of the above-mentioned symbol to the state of newly holding, the following steps S5412-S5414 Processing will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S5412, the normal hold number counter is incremented (added by 1).
Next, as the processing of step S5413, the ordinary random number and the universal figure fluctuation random number are acquired from the random number counter. Then, as a process of step S5414, each random number thus obtained is stored in the normal symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value by the normal reservation number counter in the storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a.

However, in the processing of the step S5411, when it is determined that the number of holding of the normal symbol is the maximum value, the variable display control of the normal symbol is not newly held. That is, by not performing the processing of steps S5412 to S5414, the variable display control of the normal symbol is not newly put on hold.

FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol normal process (step S5403).

When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 147, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, first, as the process of step S5421, Based on the counter value by the normal hold number counter, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the normal symbol in the hold state. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control of the normal symbol in the suspended state, then, as the process of step S5422, the normal symbol reserved storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is normally stored. The random number stored in the first storage area of the random numbers related to the display mode of the symbol (for example, ordinary random number, universal figure variation random number) is read from the RAM. Then, as steps S 5423 and S 5424, when the ordinary hold number counter is counted down, and when the variable display of the ordinary symbols stored in each storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is stopped, the variable display is stopped. The shift operation is performed in the first-in first-out (first-in first-out) mode for the random numbers (ordinary random numbers, universal figure fluctuation random numbers) relating to the display mode in FIG.

Specifically, the normal symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and the random numbers extracted according to the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2003 are sequentially arranged from the first (first) area. Remember. Then, when a random number is stored in the nth (n=1 to 3) storage area and the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003, the random number extracted to the (n+1)th (n=1 to 3) storage area is stored. The random number stored in the first storage area is read out when the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the first storage area is satisfied, and the Nth storage area (N=2 to 4) is read out. The various random numbers stored in are moved to the (N-1)th (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the normal symbol occurs can be stored so that it can be specified, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest hold (the hold that occurred first). ..

Then, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, if the current game state is a time saving state (high probability time saving state) (step S5426), selects a universal figure hit determination table (not shown) for time saving ( (Step S5426), if the current game state is a non-time saving state (low probability non-time saving state, high probability non-time saving state) (step S5425), the non-time saving universal figure determination table (not shown) is selected ( (Step S5427), the selected per-universal-drawing judgment table and the ordinary random number read out in step S5422 of the ordinary symbol normal processing are compared (step S5428).

In addition, the universal figure hit determination table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 1310a, and the universal figure hit determination table used when the gaming state is time saving (high probability time saving state) and the gaming state is non-time saving. And a non-time saving general-purpose hit judgment table used in the case of time (low probability non-time saving state, high probability non-time saving state). Then, in the time saving general-purpose figure judgment table referred to for comparison with the ordinary random number, all 255 kinds of ordinary random numbers coincide with the general-use figure determination value indicating that each ordinary figure has been won. The ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so that they do not coincide with the deviation determination value indicating the deviation. In this way, in the time saving, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, the game ball is always won, and the movable piece is opened so that the game ball enters the second starting opening 2004. Controlled to allow acceptance. Not all of the 255 types, but a larger number of ordinary random numbers than in the non-time saving state may be matched with the per-universal-drawing determination value indicating that the per-universal-university drawing has been won.

Further, in the non-time saving general-purpose figure determination table referred to for comparison with the ordinary random number, all 255 kinds of ordinary random numbers may match the universal figure determination value indicating that the regular random number has been won. However, the ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with a general-university-drawing determination value indicating that the general-university drawing is out of alignment. As described above, in the non-time saving, even if the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, the movable piece 2106 is in the open state because the player does not win the game. It does not control the acceptance of the game ball in 2004. However, as described above, the normal symbol may be won even in the non-time saving state. In this case, the winning probability is lower than that in the time saving state (for example, 50%), and the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is a win. When the movable piece of the second starting port 2004 is opened for a shorter time than the time saving state, for example, for 2 seconds to allow the game ball to be received in the second starting port 2004, it is advanced again. The game ball may not be received in the second starting port 2004.

The main control MPU1310a of the main control board 1310, as a result of the comparison between the selected ordinary figure hit determination table and the ordinary random number read in step S5422 of the ordinary symbol normal process, when it is determined to be the ordinary figure hit (step S5429). ), after setting the universal symbol hit flag indicating that the variation is won per universal symbol (step S5430), the regular symbol hit as a mode (variable symbol stop symbol) when the variation control of the regular symbol is stopped The symbol is determined (step S5431), on the other hand, as a result of the comparison between the selected universal symbol determination table and the ordinary random number read out in step S5422 of the ordinary symbol normal process, if it is determined that the symbol is out, the variation of the ordinary symbol An out-of-general symbol as a mode at the time of control stop (normal symbol stop symbol) is determined (step S5432). Then, after that, when the above-mentioned normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the normal symbol variation time determination process (step S5404) (step S5433), this process ends.

Then, while the control by the main control MPU 1310a is performed, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires the above-mentioned various commands transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a to perform the peripheral control unit steady process (received command analysis process ( In step S1022)), the game situation at each time is grasped, and an effect according to the game situation can be executed.

More specifically, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines whether or not the start winning has occurred, and when in this situation, performs the control related to the hold display and the prefetch effect according to the start winning. And after this, by updating the process flag based on the grasped game situation, the following variation pattern designation command reception waiting process, production symbol variation start process, production symbol variation process, production symbol variation stop process, big hit display process , One of the big hit game processing, and the big hit end effect processing is executed.

Variation pattern designation command reception waiting process: Until a variation pattern command related to the variation pattern is received from the main control MPU 1310a, the effect (demonstration, etc.) when the symbols are not in the variation state and the control regarding the big hit is not performed While performing the control, when the variation pattern command regarding the variation pattern is received from the main control MPU 1310a, the process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect design variation start processing.

Production symbol variation start processing: While determining various production contents (production pattern, notice production, etc.) in the symbol variation period based on the variation pattern command, etc., the variation of the decorative design is started based on the determined production contents. To control. Then, after this, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the process during effect symbol variation.

Production symbol variation process: various production contents determined in production symbol variation start processing, while performing control such as starting at each timing during the symbol variation period, and when the variation time ends, the value of the process flag is the production symbol Update to a value corresponding to fluctuation stop processing.

Production design fluctuation stop processing: Based on the reception of the command (design determination command) for instructing all designs to stop, the variation of the decorative design is stopped and the display result (stop design) is derived and displayed.
Then, when stopping the decorative design with the big hit design, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit display process, and when stopping the decorative design with the lost design, the value of the process flag is changed pattern waiting command reception processing Update to the value corresponding to.

Big hit display processing: Controls the effect (such as a display effect for notifying the effect display device 1600 of the occurrence of the big hit) in the period from when the decorative pattern is stopped at the big hit pattern until the big hit game is started. Then, after this, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit game process.

Big hit game processing: Performs various effects during the big hit game state. When the big hit game state ends, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit end effect process.

Big hit end production processing: In the production display device 1600, the production in the period from the end of the big hit game state to the fluctuation allowable state (display production for notifying the player that the big hit game state has ended) is controlled. .. Then, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variable pattern designation command reception waiting process.

FIG. 148 is a diagram showing a determination table T1 of the effect pattern (fluctuation effect) which is referred to in the effect symbol fluctuation start process in the normal game state.

As shown in FIG. 148, in the determination table T1, effect patterns (fluctuation effects) are associated with each of the fluctuation numbers 1 to 22 indicated by the fluctuation pattern command. Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, when the variation pattern command is acquired from the main control MPU 1310a, the effect pattern (variation effect) associated with the variation pattern command is determined based on the determination table T1, and the determined effect pattern is determined. The variation of the decorative design is controlled based on (variation effect).

The effect pattern (fluctuation effect) does not necessarily have to correspond one-to-one with the fluctuation number indicated by the fluctuation pattern command. For example, a plurality of effect patterns (fluctuation effects) are associated with one fluctuation number indicated by the fluctuation pattern command, and one of these effect patterns (fluctuation effects) is determined based on effect lottery or game situation. You may do so. As will be described later, also in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, a plurality of effect patterns are associated with some of the variation numbers 1 to 22.

Further, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, after determining the effect pattern (fluctuation effect) in this manner, the notice lottery (decision process of the notice effect) is performed based on the result of the big hit determination, the symbol type, and the variation pattern. , A plurality of effect contents can be obtained by performing a control (effect symbol changing process) in which the notice effect won in the notice lottery appears at a predetermined timing while the above-described effect pattern (variation effect) is performed. As it is possible to combine, the degree of expectation of the jackpot pattern is suggested by their appearance mode.

And conventionally, in such a composite effect, a plurality of appearances may be executed while one effect pattern (variable effect) is being executed even though the same specific notice effect (for example, timer effect) is being executed, It is expected that this will help maintain the entertainment of the game. However, since the notice effect can be combined only when the expectation that the big hit pattern appears is high, the frequency with which a plurality of timer effects are executed naturally decreases while one effect pattern (variable effect) is being executed. However, it was difficult to sufficiently improve the fun of playing games.

As will be described later, the "timer effect" refers to a predetermined effect that appears during execution of the effect pattern (fluctuation effect), and the count display toward the timing at which the predetermined effect is performed is the first predetermined numerical value. (For example, "60 seconds") to a second predetermined numerical value (for example, "0 seconds") is performed as a count effect display, or is performed as a standby display (being prepared, etc.) before starting the count display. Is. That is, in this case, when the count display (for example, countdown) from the first predetermined value is started as the timer effect, it is guaranteed that some effect will be generated when the second predetermined value is reached. Become. Alternatively, an effect (for example, a conversation notice or a cut-in A) that causes one of a performance mode (a performance mode with low expectations) and an advantageous performance mode (a performance mode with high expectations) to appear relatively disadvantageous to the player. , B, etc.) is the target of the timer effect, it is guaranteed that an advantageous effect result will always occur when the second predetermined numerical value is reached. However, in the timer effect (especially, the notice side timer effect executed as a result of the notice lottery), at least at the time when the count display is started, it is kept secret about which effect is the effect target. It is desirable to do so. In addition, the "production target of the timer effect" is an effect that appears when the count display (for example, countdown) from the first predetermined numerical value becomes the second predetermined numerical value (for example, "0 second") as the timer effect. That is, in the timer effect, the count display is performed toward the timing when the effect target is generated.

In the "timer effect" according to the present embodiment, the elapsed time from the start of counting is displayed up to the second decimal place to accurately display the number of seconds and the like. However, it does not necessarily have to be executed as such a timer effect, and as long as it is executed as a count effect in which a count display such as a count-up or a count-down is performed, the time elapsed from the start of counting ( It does not have to accurately indicate the number of seconds).

Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, in addition to the timer effect (announcement side timer effect) as the effect content that appears only when the announcement lottery is won, the above effect pattern (based on the determination table T1) ( It is possible to execute a timer effect (fluctuation side timer effect) that is incorporated in advance as effect contents of (variation effect). That is, in this case, if only the notice side timer effect that executes the count effect display as "the effect content of the notice effect that functions so that the jackpot expectation degree is added to the effect pattern determined based on the variation pattern command" Instead, it is also executed as "the effect content of the effect pattern itself determined based on the variation pattern command", so that the expectation from the jackpot expectation indicated by the effect pattern determined based on the variation pattern command. The count effect display (timer effect) can be made to appear without wastefully accumulating (increasing the degree of expectation by satisfying the condition of “winning in advance notice lottery”). For example, when the big hit expectation degree when a specific effect pattern determined based on the variation pattern command appears is “20%”, if the notice timer effect is further executed, the big hit expectation degree is increased by the function of the compound effect. Then, for example, it becomes “40%” and the appearance frequency must be reduced by that much, whereas a big hit is expected when the variable side timer effect is executed as the effect content of the specific effect pattern itself. It is possible to execute the timer effect with the degree set to “20%” (it can appear only by selecting a specific variation pattern), and the appearance frequency can be appropriately maintained.

The big hit expectation degree when a production pattern (variable production) appears in the determination table T1 differs depending on the variation number (and also the production pattern), and basically, the larger the variation number is, the larger the jackpot expectation is. It has a tendency to become more frequent. For example, in the effect patterns corresponding to the change numbers 5(6), 9(10), and 17(18), the change-side timer effect in which "conversation notice" is the effect target is executed as the effect content, The appearance ratio is variation number 5(6)> variation number 9(10)> variation number 17(18), whereas the jackpot expectation at the time of appearance is variation number 5(6)<variation number 9( 10) <variation number 17 (18). Also, for convenience of explanation, only the determination table referred to in the normal gaming state will be described in detail here, but in the determination table referred to in the low probability time saving state or the high probability time saving state, the effect content of the effect pattern itself As, the effect pattern (count fluctuation pattern) in which the variable timer effect can be executed is included, and it is possible to appear with a different probability from that in the normal gaming state.

Further, in the determination table T1, the variation numbers 3 to 6 are the same in that the same normal reach production is performed, but the variation numbers 5 and 6 can execute the variation side timer production for which the conversation notice is produced. This is different from the fluctuation numbers 3 and 4. Further, the variable numbers 7 to 14 are the same in that the same character reach effect is performed, but the variable numbers 9 and 10 are the variable side timer effects for which the conversation notice is the effect target, and the variable numbers 11 and 10. In 12, the variable side timer effect for the cut-in A is executed, and for the change numbers 13 and 14, the conversation notice and the cut-in A are executed and the variable-side timer effect for those effects is executed. They are different in that they can be done. Further, the variable numbers 15 to 22 are the same in that the same SP reach effect is performed, but the variable numbers 17 and 18 are the variable side timer effects for which the conversation notice is the effect target, and the variable numbers 19 and 18. In No. 20, the variable side timer effect targeting the cut-in B is executed, and in the fluctuation numbers 21 and 22, the conversation notice and the cut-in B are executed and the variable side timer effect targeting them is executed. They are different in that they can be done. In addition, the jackpot expectation is higher in the case where the variable timer effect for which the cut-in A or B is the effect target is executed than for the case where the variable timer effect for which the conversation notice is directed is executed. Is set so that the big hit expectation tends to be higher when the variable timer effect for which both the conversation notice and the cut-ins A and B are effected is executed.

Note that the "conversation notice" is a production that can appear at a relatively early stage after the production pattern (variable production of a decorative pattern) is executed, and that a relatively low expectation is added. On the other hand, the cut-ins A and B are capable of appearing at a relatively late stage after the effect pattern (variable effect of the decorative pattern) is executed, and have a relatively high expectation. It is an effect that often occurs (or an effect in which a relatively high expectation is always added). Therefore, the "conversation notice" is set so that the appearance ratio (execution probability) is higher than that of other effects (cut-ins A and B, which are described later, action A and B, etc.) having higher expectations. It is supposed to be done. Further, the "cut-in" that appears as the content of the fluctuating effect is executed in the character reach so as to correspond to the cut-in A that appears as the content of the effect of the notice effect, whereas in the SP reach, the notice is given. This is executed so as to correspond to the cut-in B, not the cut-in A that appears as the effect contents of the effect.

Moreover, in the determination table T1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 148, the effect contents (effect patterns) for a plurality of fluctuation patterns (fluctuation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22). ) Is assigned as the variable side timer effect. Then, if the variation pattern is “predetermined type (eg, variation numbers 1 to 6 etc.) such as shortened variation or normal reach production with low expectation, etc., the count production display as the notice timer production is displayed. While the expectation level UP when the advance notice timer effect appears so that the effect is not won (increase the premium degree), the change pattern is “a change pattern for executing the change side timer effect ( Variation number 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22, etc.)”, the variation pattern has a predetermined type (for example, variation) as compared to the case where the variation pattern is not such a variation pattern. The numbers corresponding to the numbers 1 to 6) are low.

It should be noted that, here, 14 variation patterns (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22) are prepared as count variation patterns on which the variation side timer effect is executed, but two of them (0 Since only the variation patterns (variation numbers 5 and 6) of "can be set individually" correspond to the above-mentioned predetermined types (variation numbers 1 to 6 etc.), the corresponding ratio is "2/14". On the other hand, eight variation patterns (variation numbers 1 to 4, 7, 8, 15, 16) are prepared as the variation patterns in which the variation timer effect is not executed, and four variation patterns (variation numbers) are prepared. Since the numbers 1 to 4) correspond to the predetermined types (variation numbers 1 to 6, etc.), the corresponding ratio is “4/8”.

In such a configuration, when the effect contents of the variation pattern are those capable of performing the count effect display (variation side timer effect) (count variation pattern), the advance notice is given more than when the variation pattern does not perform the fluctuation side timer effect. As a content of the production of the production, the rate of determining that the count production display (announcement timer production) cannot be executed becomes low. Therefore, it is possible to prompt the appearance of a plurality of count displays in one effect pattern (fluctuation effect) without unnecessarily increasing the expectation and decreasing the appearance frequency.

Further, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the effect pattern (fluctuation effect) determined in the effect symbol fluctuation start processing is the count fluctuation pattern (fluctuation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22). ), the appearance ratio of the notice side timer effect differs depending on which count fluctuation pattern the count fluctuation pattern is. For example, as shown in FIG. 148, when the effect patterns corresponding to the variation numbers 5 and 6 are executed, the notice timer effect does not appear at all, and the effect patterns corresponding to the variation numbers 9 to 14 are executed. When the production pattern corresponding to the variation numbers 17 to 22 is executed, the advance notice timer effect can appear with a high lottery probability. ing.

Even when the effect patterns corresponding to the variation numbers 5 and 6 are executed, the advance notice timer effect may appear with a low probability. In addition, even when one of the effect patterns corresponding to the variation numbers 15 to 22 in which the above-mentioned notice timer effect is allowed to appear with a high lottery probability is executed, in reality, it is a big hit compared to the case of losing. In the production pattern that is won, the advance notice timer production can be made to appear with a higher lottery probability, and the variation number 22 can be made to appear with an even higher lottery probability than the variation number 16. ing.

In such a configuration, depending on whether the variation pattern is the first count variation pattern (e.g., variation number 10) or the second count variation pattern (e.g., variation number 22), the count effect display is a notice effect. The ratio of execution as the content of the effect (preliminary timer effect) becomes different. Therefore, among the count variation patterns (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22) in which the appearance ratio of a plurality of count displays is high in one production pattern (variation production), its type Depending on the situation, it is possible to further increase the rate at which a plurality of count displays appear, so that it is expected to maintain a suitable gaming interest.

In particular, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, even if the effect pattern in which the same reach type effect content appears (for example, character reach, SP reach), the variable timer effect is included as effect content. In the effect pattern (for example, variation numbers 17 to 22) that is performed, the notice timer is set within the execution period of the effect pattern as compared with the effect pattern (for example, variation numbers 15 and 16) in which the variable timer effect is not included as effect content. The appearance ratio (the ratio at which it is determined that the notice timer effect is executed in the notice lottery) is set to be high. That is, in this case, two timer effects (variable timer effect, notice timer effect) appear in one effect pattern only by requiring a big hit expectation degree that one announcement timer effect is won in the notice lottery. As a result, it is possible to realize a double timer production opportunity without wasteful addition of the jackpot expectation.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the effect pattern (fluctuation effect) determined in the effect symbol fluctuation start process is the count fluctuation pattern (fluctuation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22). Even in the case, the variable side timer effect (variation side count effect display) whose target is "conversation notice" and the variable side timer effect (variation side count effect display) which is targeted for "cut-in" In the above, the mode of the count display (the form and color of the count number, etc.) is made different. That is, in this case, even if an effect pattern (for example, change numbers 9 and 11) having the same reach effect as the effect content is executed, the mode of the count display of the variable side timer effect (the variable side count effect display) is confirmed. By doing so, it is possible to recognize the easiness of appearance of the notice timer effect in combination with "the proportion of the notice timer effect that appears depending on which count variation pattern" You can expect it.

In addition, regarding the aspect of the count display that appears in the notice side timer effect (notice side count effect display), the variable side timer effect (change side) regardless of whether or not the effect objects are the same (conversation notice, cut-in). It may be different (or different from at least one) from the mode (conversation notice, cut-in) that appears in the count effect display), or may be the same as the same mode (or at least the same). ..

However, it is relatively expected that the count display executed as the notice timer effect (preliminary count effect display) be executed in a common manner regardless of the type of the effect that is the effect target. This is useful for making the player recognize that the advance notice timer effect, which is set to a high degree, is appearing and to improve the expectation. In this sense, it is more preferable that the notice timer effect is different from any of the count display modes (conversation notice, cut-in) that appear in the variable timer effect (variable count effect display). As for the common mode as the notice timer effect (notice side count effect display), a plurality of modes (for example, blue count, red count, etc.) with different expectations are prepared, and one of them is executed. You may do it.

Further, in order to more appropriately recognize that the notice timer effect is being executed, a count display when the notice timer effect is executed and a count display when the variable timer effect is executed are It is desirable that the counting speeds (for example, the speeds at which the numbers change during counting up or counting down) be made different. With such a configuration, even after the timer effect is started, the count speed of the timer effect is watched even during the period in which the count display is in progress, and the relative timer effect is relatively low with the relatively low expectation. It becomes possible to give an interest in which of the high-anticipation notice timer effect is being executed, and it is possible to preferably maintain the enjoyment of the game during the timer exhaustion period.

Also, at this time, in the variable timer effect, the count display is performed at a speed (or the same speed) relatively close to the count speed of the notification timer effect according to the effect target (conversation notice, cut-in) ( If the count-in is performed by the cut-in) and the mode in which the count is displayed at a speed not relatively close to the count speed of the notice-side timer effect (conversation notice), whether the notice-side timer effect is being executed or not is displayed. It becomes possible to add interest by making the judgment difficult. In the variable timer effect (or the notice timer effect), the count is displayed by repeating appearance and deletion of the count number, whereas in the notice timer effect (or the variable timer effect), the count number is continuously displayed. The count may be displayed by displaying.

With such a configuration, when a situation occurs in which the count display of the fluctuating side timer effect and the count display of the notice side timer effect are simultaneously executed, it is possible to easily grasp whether or not the notice side timer effect is being executed. It is expected that the game will be able to be played and that the enjoyment of the game will be improved.

In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, the count display is performed for the fluctuation patterns (count fluctuation patterns such as fluctuation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22) corresponding to the fluctuation side timer effect. A plurality of effect patterns having different start timings or end timings (total number of counts or time required for all counts to be consumed) are set as selectable effect patterns. When the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation side timer effect is acquired, one of the plurality of effect patterns is determined based on a random number for effect and the count display of the fluctuation side timer effect and the notice side timer. If the ease of simultaneous execution with the production count display (for example, the larger the total count is, the easier it is to overlap) makes it easier to judge whether the notice timer production is being executed or not. I'm trying to add fun

Note that, in this embodiment, a plurality of effect patterns (a timer effect effect object and a reach effect object) having different count display start timings or end timings (total counts or time required for all counts to be consumed) for one variation pattern are provided. Although the content of the effect is the same, a plurality of effect patterns with different start timings or end timings of the count display (total number of counts, or the time required to exhaust all the counts) (however, are subject to the effect of the timer effect) It is also possible to prepare a plurality of different variation patterns for each production pattern and the type of reach production executed as the production content of the variation pattern, and to make a one-to-one correspondence.

Further, even if the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect have different count display numbers (total counts) when they appear, or even if the same specific count display number can be selected, the variable side timer effect and the notice are notified. If the selection rate of the specific count display number is made different from that of the side timer effect, it becomes possible to make it difficult to determine whether or not the advance notice side timer effect is being executed and to add interest. ..

Also, while the notice timer effect is executed in the countdown display, while the variable timer effect is executed in the count up display, it is possible to definitely determine whether the notice timer effect is being executed. It is expected that it will be possible to significantly improve the enjoyment of the game. Further, while the notice side timer effect is executed in the countdown display, the variable side timer effect intended for the specific effect (for example, conversation notice) is executed in the count up display, and an effect different from the specific effect (for example, If the variable side timer effect for (cut-in) is executed in a countdown display, it is interesting to make it difficult to judge whether the notice timer effect is being executed or not depending on the effect target. Can be granted.

Further, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, there may be a case where the same effect is used as the effect target for the variable timer effect and the notice timer effect, and a case where a different effect is effected. To control. Then, when the same effect (for example, conversation notice) is targeted for the same effect in the fluctuating side timer effect and the notice side timer effect, compared to the case where different effect is applied in the fluctuating side timer effect and the notice side timer effect. Even if the setting is made so that the jackpot expectation degree becomes low and that the same effect (for example, conversation notice) is set as the effect target in the variable side timer effect and the notice timer effect, The end timing is different.

That is, in this case, even if the same effect (for example, conversation notice) is set as the effect target in the fluctuating side timer effect and the notice side timer effect, one of the fluctuating side timer effect and the notice side timer effect is the predetermined numerical value first. Since the other count display will continue while it reaches the end, the target effect is different at this point (the timer effect is executed in a relatively high expectation mode). It looks as if Then, after this, the other count display that has been continued reaches the predetermined numerical value in a manner that makes it clear that the same effect (e.g., a conversation notice) is targeted for effect, and is therefore terminated first. Even when it is revealed by the timer effect on the end side that the conversation notice with a relatively low degree of expectation is targeted for rendering, a different rendering that can appear afterwards is targeted for rendering ( It is expected that a sense of expectation that the timer effect is executed in a mode with a relatively high degree of expectation is maintained and that the enjoyment of the game is improved.

In addition, when the same effect (for example, a conversation notice) is targeted in the variable timer effect and the notice timer effect as described above, the timing at which the variable timer effect reaches a predetermined value and the notice timer effect are specified. It is desirable to have separate count end correspondence displays (for example, “count successful!”, “chance UP!”, etc.) appear at the timing of reaching the numerical value.

More specifically, the variable timer effect and the notice timer effect for which "conversation notice", which is executed as an effect on the changing side or the notice side, is produced are made to appear in one effect pattern. In this case, the count display of the fluctuating side timer effect and the count display of the notice side timer effect are simultaneously advanced. However, in the fluctuating side timer effect, as the effect of the fluctuating side in relation to the "conversation notice". While the count display progresses according to the fluctuating side specific effects that occur (such as "Successful counting!" and effects that match the appearance of the conversation notice), the notice timer timer production is related to the "conversation notice". A count display is made in accordance with the notice side specific effect (“Chance UP!” or the timer end display that appears at the start timing of the conversation notice (or a predetermined few seconds before the start of the effect)) that occurs as the notice side effect. By advancing, separate count end correspondence displays will appear at different timings.

By the way, the conversation notice and the cut-in effects are required to be executed without fail when they are targeted for the effect of the changing timer effect (when the count change pattern is determined). In particular, since the conversation notice and the cut-in are effects that can be executed in a plurality of modes with different expectations, when the count display reaches a predetermined numerical value when it is the effect target of the variable timer effect, It is required to make them appear in a manner with high expectations. Therefore, the effect that is the effect target of the fluctuating side timer effect is incorporated in advance as the effect content of the effect pattern (fluctuating effect), and the fluctuating side timer effect and the effect target thereof are only executed by executing the effect pattern. It is desirable that each of the effects (modes with a relatively high degree of expectation) can be made to appear. However, instead of this, when the variable timer effect is executed, it is also possible to perform control so that the effect (relatively high expectation mode) targeted for the effect is always selected in the notice lottery. ..

If the conversation notice and the cut-in effects are not included in the effect of the variable timer effect, whether or not to make them appear as the effect contents of the notice side in the notice lottery described later is of course determined. A determination is made as to which aspect (a mode with a relatively high degree of expectation or a mode with a relatively high degree of expectation) as the effect content on the side, and the appearance control is performed based on the result of the determination. ..

Hereinafter, the effect pattern determination processing using FIG. 148 will be summarized.

That is, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, when the variation pattern command, the symbol type command, or the like is acquired from the main control MPU 1310a, first, based on the variation number indicated by the variation pattern command or the symbol type indicated by the symbol type command, the current game is played. Refer to the judgment table according to the state. For example, if the effect pattern is determined based on the symbol type, it is possible to give a bias (expectation degree) to the probability variation probability when a specific effect pattern appears, the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state, and the like. become.

Then, next, a plurality of effect patterns (such as a plurality of effect patterns with different start timings or end timings of the count display that appear in the variable timer effect) that can be selected are prepared as effect patterns associated with the change numbers. In the case of winning, one of a plurality of effect patterns having different start timings or end timings of the count display is selected based on the success or failure of the big hit determination. At this time, when the big hit determination is won, the effect pattern is set so that the proportion of the start timing or the end timing of the count display being delayed becomes high, and thereby the start timing or the end timing of the count display is set. The slower the number, the more likely it is that a jackpot pattern will appear.

Further, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, the count variation pattern (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22) is acquired when a special effect condition is satisfied. Even in the case, the effect pattern set so that the variable timer effect does not appear is selected from the plurality of effect patterns.

Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, after the effect pattern (effect from the change start of the decorative symbol to the change stop of the decorative symbol) appearing during the symbol change is thus selected, what kind of notice effect is to be given within the execution period of the effect pattern. In this manner, it is decided whether to additionally execute (composite) (preliminary lottery).

FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing an example of a processing procedure of a lottery (preliminary lottery performed in the production symbol variation start process) relating to the notice effect that appears within the execution period (variation time of the symbol) of the effect pattern. The processing procedure of the advance notice lottery described below is merely an example, and the processing procedure of the advance notice lottery is not limited to this as long as the intended purpose as the advance notice effect can be achieved.

As shown in FIG. 149, in advance notice lottery, it is first determined whether or not the variation (waiting to be exhausted) waiting to be started is the target of the timer prefetch effect described later (step S5501). ). As a result, the first timer advance notice lottery is performed when the target is the timer prefetch effect (step S5502), whereas the second timer advance notice lottery is performed when the timer prefetch effect is not the target (step S5502). S5521).

That is, when the timer pre-reading effect is the target (first timer advance notice lottery), the advance notice timer effect is executed as compared with the case where the timer pre-reading effect is not the target (second timer advance notice lottery). It is set to increase the rate at which decisions are made. The ratio may include a ratio determined by 100%. In addition, in both the first timer advance notice lottery and the second timer advance notice lottery, different determination tables are prepared for each game state, whereby a decision to execute the notice timer effect according to the game state can be made. The ratio to be made (for example, in the high-probability time saving game state, it is determined to execute the notice timer effect at a rate lower than the normal game state (including the rate determined by 0%)) It has become.

FIG. 150 is a diagram showing an example of the timer notice determination table T2 that is referred to when the variation (suspended) is not the target of the timer prefetch effect in the normal game state (second timer notice lottery). ..

As shown in FIG. 150, in the second timer advance notice lottery according to the present embodiment, the advance notice timer effect is produced when the predetermined type change pattern command (here, change numbers 1 to 6) is acquired. Does not make a decision to execute. In this respect, the same applies to the first timer advance notice lottery and other gaming states.

Further, as also shown in FIG. 148, in the second timer advance notice lottery, even in the effect pattern in which the effect contents of the same reach type appear (for example, SP reach corresponding to the fluctuation numbers 15 to 22), the fluctuation side Compared to the effect patterns (for example, SP reach corresponding to the change numbers 15 and 16) in which the effect on the changing side is not included in the effect patterns (for example, the variation numbers 17 to 22) that include the timer effect as the effect contents. It is set so that the rate of making a decision to execute the notice timer effect is high. That is, in this case, it is possible to cause two timer effects (changing side timer effect and notice side timer effect) to appear in one effect pattern without winning the double timer effect described later in the notice lottery. As a result, it becomes possible to realize a double timer production opportunity without wasteful addition of the expectation of a big hit (winning a double timer production). In this respect, the same applies to the first timer advance notice lottery and other gaming states.

However, in the first timer advance notice lottery, the rate of making a decision to execute the advance notice timer effect is generally higher than in the timer advance notice determination table T2 referred to in the second timer advance notice lottery. More specifically, in the first timer notice lottery, whichever variation number 7 to 22 is selected, the notice side is compared with the timer notice determination table T2 referred to in the second timer notice lottery. The rate of making a decision to execute the timer effect is high.

Further, as will be described later, in the timer prefetch effect according to the present embodiment, a plurality of modes (low-expectation mode, high-expectation mode, fixed mode) in which the ratio of execution of the notice-side timer effect is different in the variation targeted for the prefetching Mode). In the first timer advance notice lottery, first, it is determined which mode the timer prefetching effect is being executed, and even when the prefetching is being executed in the low expectation mode, the second timer advance notice lottery is performed. It is set so that the proportion of decisions to execute the notice timer effect is higher than that of the timer notice determination table T2 referred to in FIG. When the timer look-ahead effect is executed in the high-expectation mode, the rate at which the notice-side timer effect is determined to be executed is generally higher than when it is executed in the low-expectation mode. When it is executed in the fixed mode, it is set so that a decision to execute the notice timer effect is always made regardless of the fluctuation pattern (variation numbers 1 to 22).

If it is determined as a result of the timer advance notice lottery (first timer advance notice lottery, second timer advance notice lottery) that the advance notice timer effect is to be executed (YES in step S5503), the process of step S5504 is performed. In contrast to the 1-mission effect lottery, when the decision to execute the advance notice timer effect is not made (NO in step S5503), the second-mission effect lottery is performed as the process of step S5551.

That is, as described above, in the timer effect, the larger the count display number (total count) displayed when the count display starts (the longer the time required for the timer to consume), the higher the jackpot expectation tends to be. Is set to have. However, with this, when the count display number (total number of counts) displayed when the count display is started is small, the jackpot expectation tends to be low, so the game is executed despite the timer effect being executed. There was concern about a decline in interest.

Therefore, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, a "specific display related to the first effect" such as "let the first effect appear" is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the specific display is performed. When the first effect occurs (appears) during the display of "," a special display such as "mission success" appears, so that the mission effect that definitely suggests that the jackpot is won can be executed.

In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, an effect type (here, a conversation notice) that appears at a relatively early stage among the effect types targeted for the effect of the timer effect is used as the first effect. It will be adopted. That is, in this case, when the timer effect is executed while the specific display such as "Let's make the conversation notice (first effect) appear" appears (while the mission effect appears), the count display Even if the count display number (total number of counts) displayed when is started is small, the effect subject of the timer notice is "a conversation notice that appears at a relatively early stage" It can be expected that the winning is definitely confirmed), and the count display will continue even after the conversation notice ends because the count display number (total count) displayed when the count display starts is large. Even in the case of being able to expect a big hit expectation, it is possible to stably enhance the enjoyment of the game when the timer effect is executed.

In addition, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, in order to more appropriately exert the synergistic effect produced by the timer effect and the mission effect, a specific display related to the first effect (a conversation notice should appear). ) Is displayed, the notice lottery is performed so that the appearance ratio of the timer effect is higher than that when the specific display related to the first effect (make the conversation notice appear) is not displayed (each process shown in FIG. 149). Are going to do. As a result, it is possible to have a sense of expectation that the timer effect will be executed only by displaying the specific display related to the first effect (make the conversation notice appear), so that it is possible to suitably suppress the deterioration of the entertainment of the game. You will be able to. The first effect that is the target of the mission display does not have to be the “conversation notice”, and may be executed instead of any of the effects shown in FIG. 160, for example.

Note that when the specific display related to the first effect (let the conversation notice appear) is displayed, the appearance ratio of the timer effect is higher than when the specific display related to the first effect (make the conversation notice appear) is not displayed. Although any method may be adopted as a method of increasing the value, for example, it can be realized by adopting one of the following methods.
a. First, it is determined whether to perform the mission effect, and when the mission effect is determined, the timer effect is set so that the appearance rate of the timer effect is higher than when the mission effect is not determined. A method for determining whether to appear b. First, it is determined whether to perform the timer effect, and when it is determined that the timer effect is to be performed, the mission effect is set so that the appearance rate of the mission effect is higher than when the timer effect is not determined. Method to decide whether to appear

In this respect, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment adopts the above method b. Therefore, in the first mission effect lottery (step S5504) when it is determined in the process of step S5503 that the advance notice timer effect is won, it is not determined in the process of step S5503 that the advance notice timer effect is won. In the case where the second mission effect lottery (step S5551) in the case of being set, the determination to display (mission display) a specific display (make a conversation notice appear) related to the first effect becomes higher, It is determined whether or not the mission is displayed within the change (effect pattern).

It should be noted that a specific display related to the first effect (make a conversation notice appear) and a timer prefetch effect (first precedent aspect, second precedent aspect, third precedent) which will be described later suggesting that the notice timer effect is executed. Mode) can be displayed at the same time. Further, under a predetermined condition, a predetermined display (mission suggestion display) may be displayed in which, when it appears, the specific display related to the first effect (make the conversation notice appear) becomes higher.

Further, regarding the specific display related to the first effect (make a conversation notice appear), for example, when the hold information that is the target of the mission effect (hold information that causes the mission effect) is obtained, the hold information is displayed. It may be configured to be displayed over a plurality of variable displays until it is consumed. Further, at this time, when the hold information that is the target of the mission effect (hold information that causes the mission effect) is the hold information that is a big hit, the fluctuation that is executed before the hold information that becomes the big hit is consumed. A special notice (successful mission) may be displayed by displaying a conversation notice in the display. However, when the special display (mission success) is displayed in advance as described above (when the mission success is displayed when the pending information for generating the mission effect has not yet been exhausted), the delay variation display is executed. It is desirable to be limited only when there is. In other words, in this case, even though the special display (mission success) is displayed, the variable display in which the special display appears will show the lost design (missing effect), but the special display (mission success) will be displayed in this way. In this state, the pending information that is the target of the mission effect is digested and the big hit symbol (big hit effect) is displayed in the variable display, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

According to such a configuration, while the mission effect and the timer look-ahead effect are executed over a plurality of fluctuations, even if the mission succeeds before the count display of the timer effect is started, the variation pattern is displayed with a missing pattern. It is possible to realize an effect as if the variable display in which the big hit symbol appears is carried over until the variable display in which the count display of the timer effect is started appears.

151(a) is a diagram showing an example of a first mission effect determination table T3a (first mission effect lottery) that is referred to when the notice timer effect is performed in the normal game state, and FIG. 151(b). FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a second mission effect determination table T3b (second mission effect lottery) that is referred to when the notice timer effect is not performed in the normal gaming state.

As is apparent from FIGS. 151(a) and 151(b), first, in the first mission effect determination table T3a that is referred to when the notice timer effect is performed, when the notice timer effect is not performed, It is set so that the rate of making a decision to display (mission display) a specific display (make a conversation notice appear) related to the first production higher than that of the referred second mission production determination table T3b. There is. Regarding this point, the same applies to each table referred to in the other gaming state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 148 in combination, although the fluctuation numbers 5 and 6 correspond to the fluctuation patterns in which “conversation notice” appears as the fluctuation effect, the fluctuation numbers 5 and 6 are acquired. When it is, a setting is made not to execute a mission effect in which a specific display (make a conversation notice appear) related to the first effect is displayed in both the first mission effect determination table T3a and the second mission effect determination table T3b. Has been done. That is, since the variation numbers 5 and 6 are so-called normal reach effects (reach types with low expectations), both timer effects and mission effects occur in such low-expecting reach effects, and mission success is achieved. In that case, there is a concern that amusement of the game will be deteriorated because the desire such as "I wanted to see such an effect with a type of reach effect having higher expectations" was not satisfied. For this reason, in the variation numbers 5 and 6, although it is the reach production in which the variable timer production is performed with the "conversation notice" as the production target, in either the first mission production determination table T3a or the second mission production determination table T3b. Also, it is desirable to set not to execute the effect in which the specific display (make the conversation notice appear) related to the first effect is displayed. Regarding this point, the same applies to each table referred to in the other gaming state.

Further, as also shown in FIG. 148, the fluctuation numbers 9, 13, 17, and 21 also correspond to the fluctuation patterns in which “conversation notice” appears as the fluctuation effect, but these fluctuation numbers are acquired. Even when the player is present, the mission effect in which the specific display (let the conversation notice appear) related to the first effect is displayed is set not to be executed in both the first mission effect determination table T3a and the second mission effect determination table T3b. Has been done. This is because the fluctuation numbers 9, 13, 17, and 21 are fluctuation patterns when the player loses, and it is not possible to display the fact that the mission is successful (indicating that the jackpot is a big hit). This also applies to each table referred to in the other gaming state.

Further, as also shown in FIG. 148, the variation numbers 10, 14, 18, and 22 correspond to the hit variation patterns that cause the “conversation notice” to appear as the variation effect. If a specific display (make a conversation notice appear) related to the first effect is displayed when 18, 22 are acquired, a message indicating that the mission is successful (confirmation of winning the jackpot) is displayed. The Rukoto. Therefore, in the first mission effect lottery (step S5504) that is referred to when the notice timer effect is performed, a hit variation pattern (variation numbers 10, 14, 18, which causes "conversation notice" to appear as the effect content of the variation effect. 22) is acquired, the execution probability is set (three times) to be significantly higher than that of the second mission effect lottery (step S5551) which is referred to when the notice timer effect is not performed. There is. Through such control, it becomes possible to give the impression that the mission effect is likely to appear when the timer effect appears. This also applies to each table referred to in the other gaming state.

On the other hand, a specific display related to the first effect (make a conversation notice appear) during execution of a hit variation pattern (variation numbers 8, 12, 16, 20) in which "conversation notice" does not appear as the effect content of the variation effect. When is displayed, an unnatural production situation may occur such as "The conversation notice cannot be displayed even if the mission is displayed, and the jackpot pattern is displayed after the mission fails." Absent. Therefore, even in the first mission effect lottery (step S5504) that is referred to when the notice timer effect is performed, a hit variation pattern (variation numbers 8, 12, 20, etc.) in which "conversation notice" does not appear as a variation effect. ) Is acquired, the execution probability is set (doubled) so that the execution probability is not so high compared to the second mission effect lottery (step S5551) that is referred to when the advance notice timer effect is not performed. There is. This also applies to each table referred to in the other gaming state.

However, as will be described later, when a hit variation pattern (variation numbers 8, 12, 20, etc.) that does not cause "conversation notice" to appear as a variation effect is acquired and it is determined that the mission effect is executed, a relatively high probability. Is controlled so that the probability that "conversation notice" is executed as the effect contents of the notice effect is increased (steps S5509 and S5534 described later). In view of the fact that such control is performed, "conversation notice" is used for the variation effect even for a hit variation pattern (variation numbers 8, 12, 20, etc.) that does not cause "conversation notice" to appear as the effect content of the variation effect. The mission effect may be performed with the same execution probability as the hit variation pattern (variation numbers 8, 12, 20, etc.) that appears as the content.

On the other hand, the variation numbers 7, 11, 15, and 19 are reach productions at the time of loss in which "conversation notice" is not displayed as the production content of the variation productions. Since such a reach effect can be executed when the player loses the mission effect without causing the “conversation notice” to appear, refer to it when the notice timer effect is performed. In the first mission effect lottery performed, the execution probability is set (triple) to be significantly higher than that in the second mission effect lottery (step S5551) that is referred to when the notice timer effect is not performed. There is. Through such control, it becomes possible to give the impression that the mission effect is likely to appear when the timer effect appears. This also applies to each table referred to in the other gaming state.

As will be described later, it is determined that the reach effect at the time of losing (variation numbers 7, 11, 15, 19, etc.) that does not cause "conversation notice" to appear as the effect content of the variable effect is acquired and the mission effect is executed. In some cases, the probability that "conversation notice" is executed as the effect content of the notice effect is controlled to be zero. This is because, in the reach production at the time of losing, it is not possible to display the fact that the mission is successful (indicating that the jackpot is a big hit).

According to such a configuration related to the mission effect, the effect target of the timer effect (count effect display) is always (when the mission effect does not appear) the second effect (conversation notice) rather than the first effect (conversation notice). It is more desirable to obtain a sense of expectation because it is a production with a higher degree of expectation (for example, cut-in or a character action described later), and the production target of the timer production (count production display) is the first production. When it is (conversation notice), it is not possible to appropriately obtain the expectation. However, when the timer effect (count effect display) is executed when the specific display (make the conversation announcement appear) related to the first effect (conversation notice) is displayed, the effect target of the timer effect is the first effect. Whether it is the (conversation notice) or the second effect (cut-in), it is possible to obtain an expectation that is at least higher than the expectation obtained in the second effect (cut-in). You will be able to enjoy it at ease.

Moreover, when such a specific display related to the first effect (conversation notice) (display the conversation notice) is displayed, a specific display related to the first effect (conversation notice) (display the conversation notice) in the symbol effect is displayed. Since the appearance ratio of the timer effect (count effect display) is higher than that when is not displayed, only the specific display related to the first effect (conversation notice) (make the conversation notice appear) is displayed. It becomes possible to suitably suppress the decrease in interest. In order to realize such effect control, the fluctuating side timer effect does not necessarily have to be prepared so as to be executable, and may be realized only by the notice timer effect.

Further, in this embodiment, both the conversation announcement and the cut-in (or a character action described later) can be executed within one effect pattern, and the conversation announcement can be cut-in (or a role described later). It is designed to appear at a timing earlier than that of the physical movement). Therefore, if the mission display (let the conversation notice appear) is executed, even if the count display number (total count) displayed when the count display of the timer effect is started is small, the mission may be successful. Being aware makes it possible to suppress the decline in expectations. Further, when the count display number (total number of counts) displayed when the count display of the timer effect is started is large, the sense of expectation can be appropriately maintained only by that. It will be expected to maintain stable.

Also, as will be described later, the timing for displaying a specific display (make a conversation notice appear) related to the first effect (mission display) is a period during which a symbol variation targeted for the specific display is performed. Not only in the middle, but also during the period in which the symbol variation targeted for the specific display is still in the suspended state, it is possible to appear. In addition, in the situation where the specific display related to the first effect (let the conversation notice appear) is displayed during the period in which the symbol variation targeted for the mission effect is still in the suspended state, the first effect is It will be described later that there is a case in which a special display such as "mission successful" appears when it appears (appears).

Then, as shown in FIG. 149, when the first mission effect lottery (step S5504) is performed in this way, the notice timer type lottery is performed to determine the execution mode of the notice timer effect as the process of step S5505. ..

FIG. 152 is a diagram showing an example of the notice timer type determination table T4 referred to in the notice timer type lottery (step S5505).

As shown in FIG. 152, in this notice side timer type determination table T4, it is acquired whether the notice side timer effect is executed in the single timer mode or the notice side timer effect is executed in the double timer mode. Random effect random numbers are allocated in different distributions for each variable number. In this respect, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment refers to the notice timer type determination table T4 based on the variation number indicated by the variation pattern command, and the obtained effect random number value is the single timer mode and the double timer mode. By determining which of the above modes is assigned, the notice side timer type lottery (step S5505) is executed.

The "single timer" that is the determination target in the advance notice timer type lottery corresponds to "a mode in which one advance notice timer effect is executed in one effect pattern" and is a "double timer". The term "corresponds to an aspect in which two notice-side timer effects with different effect targets are executed in one effect pattern". In the notice timer type determination table T4, the effect random numbers are assigned to the respective variation numbers so that the jackpot expectation when the "double timer" appears is higher than that of the "single timer".

Further, as described above, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment can execute the above-described variable-side timer effect depending on the type (variation number) of the variation pattern. Therefore, when it is determined that the notice side timer effect is executed in the form of the single timer while such a count variation pattern is selected, the variation side timer effect and the notice side timer effect appear in one effect pattern. As a result, the timer effect is executed in the double timer (or triple timer) mode. Further, similarly, when it is determined that the notice side timer effect is executed in the double timer mode while the count variation pattern is selected, the variation side timer effect and the notice side timer effect are included in one effect pattern. When it appears, the timer effect is executed in the form of a triple timer (or a quadruple timer).

That is, in this case, if the number of appearances of the notice timer effect (single or double) is determined regardless of whether the count variation pattern is selected, "the appearance of the timer effect that appears in one effect pattern" The larger the number, the higher the jackpot expectation becomes.” This may lead to a collapse of the relationship, which makes it impossible to understand the meaning of the effect when the timer effect is executed (which aspect has the high expectation). There is concern that the interest in playing games will decline.

Therefore, in the advance notice timer type lottery (step S5505) according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. When a variation pattern (variation numbers 7, 8, 15, 16) that does not execute the variation timer effect is selected, the reach type (characteristic reach having relatively low expectations, SP reach having relatively high expectations) Accordingly, the SP reach having a relatively high degree of expectation makes it easier to select the double timer mode.

On the other hand, of the variation patterns (variation numbers 7 to 22) in which the notice-side timer effect can appear, variation patterns (variation numbers 13, 14, 21, 22) that execute two variation-side timer effects with different effect targets. When is selected, the double timer mode is applied only in the case of SP reach with a relatively high expectation according to the reach type (character reach with a relatively low expectation, SP reach with a relatively high expectation). Is selected. That is, in this case, when a quadruple timer mode appears due to the appearance of two variable-side timer effects and two notice-side timer effects having different effect targets in one effect pattern, the type of SP reach with relatively high expectation Thus, it becomes possible to definitely suggest that the effect pattern is executed, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game. However, instead of this, when a mode of a quadruple timer appears by the appearance of two variable side timer effects and two notice side timer effects having different effect objects in one effect pattern, it is definitely that a big hit symbol appears. It may be suggested.

When a variation pattern (variation numbers 13, 14, 21, 22) for executing two variation-side timer effects with different production targets is selected, a single timer mode is selected in the notice-side timer type lottery (step S5505). Even if is selected, the triple timer mode appears by the appearance of two variable-side timer effects having different effect objects and one notice-side timer effect in one effect pattern. In order to maintain the degree of expectation when such a triple timer aspect appears, the above-mentioned timer advance notice lottery (first timer advance notice lottery, second timer advance notice lottery) corresponds to a fluctuation pattern with relatively low expectation. When the variation numbers 13 and 14 to be performed are selected, the determination is made that the notice timer effect is executed only with a relatively low probability compared to the variation numbers 7 to 12 of the same character reach (decision to make a triple timer). (See the distribution mode of variation number 13 in FIG. 150).

On the other hand, of the variation patterns (variation numbers 7 to 22) in which the notice timer effect can appear, one variation pattern (variation numbers 9 to 12, 17 to 20) for executing the variation timer effect is selected. , The selection probability of the double timer mode in the case of the character reach (variation numbers 9 to 12) having relatively low expectations is set to be significantly low, and the SP reach (variation numbers with relatively high expectations is set. 17 to 20) are set so that the selection probability of the double timer mode is significantly higher. That is, in this case, in combination with the distribution mode of the fluctuation number 13 in FIG. 150 described above, the mode of the triple timer (one fluctuation side timer performance and two notice side timer performances, or two fluctuation side timers) is included in one performance pattern. When production and one notice timer production) appear, the ratio of SP reach with a relatively high degree of expectation rather than the character reach with a relatively low degree of expectation increases, so it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game. Will be able to.

In the advance notice timer type lottery (step S5505) according to the present embodiment, only the process of selecting either a single timer or a double timer as the advance notice timer effect type is performed. However, with respect to the notice side timer type lottery (step S5505), the lottery process may be performed so that the notice side timer effect of a triple timer or more can be executed, or the count display mode of the notice side timer effect is set to the expectation level. It may be executed as a lottery process as to which of a plurality of different modes (for example, different colors) is executed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 149, after the notice side timer type lottery (step S5505) is performed in this way, as a result of the notice side timer type lottery (step S5505), a single timer mode and a double timer mode are selected. In which of the above, it was determined that the advance notice timer effect should be performed (step S5506), and further, as a result of the first mission effect lottery (step S5504), it was determined that the mission effect should be performed (steps S5507, S532). Production lottery (steps S5508, S5509, S5523, S5524, S5533, S5534, S5543) targeted at timer target candidate productions (preliminary productions that can be production targets of advance notice timer productions) with contents (tables) according to each result of , S5544) is performed.

More specifically, one of the following processes will be executed.
In the case of the single timer mode (YES in step S5506), and in the first processing state in which it is determined to execute the mission effect (let the conversation notice appear) (YES in step S5507), First, based on the notice number determination table that is referred to in the first processing situation, how many of the above timer target candidate effects appear as the effect contents of the notice effect during execution of one effect pattern. Whether or not is determined (step S5508). Next, a determination process of which type of advance notice effect is to be made to appear as the timer target candidate productions by the number determined in the determination process, and which of the advance notice effects is to be the production target of the timer effect Is performed (step S5509).

In the second processing state in which the mode is the single timer (YES in step S5506), and the determination (NO in step S5507) that the mission effect (let the conversation notice appear) is not executed, First, based on the notice number determination table that is referred to in the second processing state, how many of the above timer target candidate effects appear as the effect contents of the notice effect during execution of one effect pattern. Whether or not is determined (step S5523). Next, a determination process of which type of advance notice effect is to be made to appear as the timer target candidate productions by the number determined in the determination process, and which of the advance notice effects is to be the production target of the timer effect Is performed (step S5524).

In the case of the double timer mode (NO in step S5506), and in the third processing situation in which it is determined to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (YES in step S5532), First, based on the notice number determination table that is referred to in the third processing state, how many of the above timer target candidate effects are made to appear as the effect contents of the notice effect during execution of one effect pattern. Whether or not is determined (step S5533). Next, a determination process of which type of advance notice effect is to be made to appear as the timer target candidate productions by the number determined in the determination process, and which of the advance notice effects is to be the production target of the timer effect Is performed (step S5534).

In the fourth processing state in which the mode is the double timer (NO in step S5506) and the determination (NO in step S5532) that the mission effect (let the conversation notice appear) is not executed, First, based on the notice number determination table that is referred to in the fourth processing situation, how many of the above timer-targeted candidate effects are made to appear as the effect contents of the notice effect during execution of one effect pattern. Whether or not is determined (step S5543). Next, a determination process of which type of advance notice effect is to be made to appear as the timer target candidate productions by the number determined in the determination process, and which of the advance notice effects is to be the production target of the timer effect Is performed (step S5544).

FIG. 153 shows the reach type when the decision is made to execute the mission effect (let the conversation notice appear) and when the decision is not made to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear). It is a figure which compares and shows the upper limit number of appearance of the timer object candidate production defined according to the following, or the processing situation (in addition to the 1st-4th processing situation, the 5th processing situation and the 6th processing situation mentioned later). is there.

As shown in FIG. 153, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, when it is determined that the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear), the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear). ) The control is performed so that the upper limit number of appearances (average number of appearances) of the timer target candidate effects is greater than when the determination to execute () is not made.

That is, whether or not to execute the notice side timer effect, whether or not the notice side timer effect is executed in a single timer mode, whether the reach type is a reach effect with a relatively high degree of expectation, Regardless of the result of determination such as "etc.", when it is decided to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear), the decision to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) The upper limit number of appearances (average number of appearances) of the timer-targeted candidate effects is increased as compared with the case where no action is performed.

In addition, such a process setting is performed at the time of performing the above-mentioned notice-side timer effect production lottery (steps S5508, S5509, S5523, S5524, S5533, S5534, S5543, S5544) and the notice-side timer effect not described later. It is realized through setting of each table referred to in the effect lottery (steps S5553, S5554, S5563, S5564).

According to such a configuration, when the mission effect (make a conversation notice appear) is executed, the appearance ratio of the notice effect increases and the average number of appearances increases, which is expected to improve the enjoyment of the game. Of course, it is possible to give a sense of expectation such as "If there are so many notice productions, there may be conversation notices with relatively low expectations among those notice productions and the mission will succeed". become able to. As described above, the performance to be displayed on the mission is required to be a performance with a relatively low degree of expectation such as a conversation announcement, but it may not necessarily be the one with the lowest expectation. When the types of effects that can be the effect target of the timer effect are classified into two groups according to the degree of expectation, they may be classified into a group having a relatively lower degree of expectation. Or, as compared with a specific effect that has a relatively high degree of expectation that appears after the reach effect is started, it is a notice effect that has a lower expectation than this and appears at a timing before the reach effect is started. Good.

FIG. 154 is a first processing state in which a single timer mode (YES in step S5506) and a determination (YES in step S5507) to execute the mission effect (make the conversation announcement appear) are performed. It is a figure which shows an example of the table T5a referred to in the process of step S5508 in that case.

First, as shown in FIG. 154, since the table T5a is referred to when the notice timer effect or the mission effect is executed, it corresponds to a variation pattern in which the notice timer effect cannot be executed. When the variation numbers 1 to 6 or the variation numbers 9, 13, 17, and 21 corresponding to the loss variation patterns (variation patterns in which the mission cannot succeed) that causes the conversation notice to appear as the production content of the variation production are acquired, the table concerned. No reference is made to T5a.

Further, in the table T5a, since it is referred to when the notice timer effect is executed in the form of the single timer, at least one timer target candidate effect is selected so that an effect random number is assigned for each variation number. Allocated However, with respect to the variation numbers in which the timer target candidate effects (conversation notice or cut-in) appear as the effect contents of the variable effect, the timer target candidate effects may not necessarily be selected as the effect contents of the notice effect.

Further, in the table T5a, among the variation numbers 7, 8, 10 to 12, and 14 corresponding to the character reach production, a maximum of four timer target candidate productions are assigned to the hit production of the variation numbers 7 and 8. On the other hand, a maximum of three timer target candidate effects are allocated to the hit effects of the variable numbers 10 to 12, and only a maximum of two timer target candidate effects are allocated to the variable number 14. Not not. However, in the variation numbers 7 and 8, the timer target candidate production (conversation notice or cut-in A) does not appear as the production content of the variation production, whereas in the variation numbers 10 to 12, the production content of the variation production is displayed. One timer target candidate production (conversation notice or cut-in A) appears, and at the variation number 14, two timer target candidate productions (conversation notice and cut-in A) appear as the production contents of the variation production. It is like this. Therefore, in the variation numbers 10 to 12, it is synonymous with that substantially one more notice effect is allocated, and in the variation number 14, substantially two notice effects are increased. It is synonymous with each being assigned.

Then, for example, in the variation number 14, the effect random number of "400" is substantially allocated to the notice number 3, and the effect random number of "600" is allocated to the notice number 4. Since it is synonymous with, it can be said that among the fluctuation numbers 7, 8, 10 to 12, and 14 corresponding to the character reach effect, the notice effects are most likely to appear.

By the way, the effect pattern (character reach + conversation notice) that appears when the variation number is 10 is set to have a lower jackpot expectation than the effect pattern (character reach + cut-in A) that appears when the variation numbers 11 and 12. That is as described above. However, in the table T5a referred to in the above-mentioned first processing situation, the variation number 10 means "mission success (special display) is displayed, and then as a production pattern to be stopped with the jackpot symbol. In view of the fact that it is "executed", the number and the probability of appearance of the notice effect are set to be higher than those in the case of the fluctuation numbers 11 and 12 (when the mission success (special display) is not displayed). It is designed to improve the enjoyment of the game when the mission success (special display) is displayed.

On the other hand, even in the SP reach (variation numbers 15, 16, 18 to 20, 22), which has a relatively high degree of expectation, the same relation as the relation of each variation number in the character reach is set. .. However, in SP reach, the variation number 18 corresponds to the variation number 10 and the variation numbers 19 and 20 correspond to the variation numbers 11 and 12, but unlike the case of the character reach, the The variation number 20 at the time of hitting has a higher appearance number and the appearance probability of the notice effect than the variation number 18 (the variation number having a higher jackpot expectation degree is more likely to increase). Further, in SP reach, the appearance ratio of the number of notices (average appearance number) is higher than that in character reach.

In addition, as will be described later, in the character reach in the first processing situation, up to five timer target candidate effects (conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, character A operation) can be performed before the symbol variation is stopped. , A special timer) has come to come. However, one of the maximum of five timer target candidate effects is a big hit finalized effect (special timer), and since it will function as a big hit effect due to mission success even when conversation announcement is selected, it is a timer target. When four or more candidate effects appear, a big hit confirmation announcement effect appears. Therefore, in the table T5a, at the variation number 7 which is the character reach at the time of losing, only up to three timer target candidate effects can appear, and the variation number which is the character reach at the time of losing (cut-in A). In No. 11, only a maximum of two timer target candidate effects (substantially a maximum of three) can appear.

On the other hand, in the SP reach when in the first processing situation, a maximum of six timer target candidate effects (conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, accessory A operation, until the symbol variation is stopped, The timing at which cut-in B, character B action) can appear is reached. However, when the conversation notice is selected, it will function as a big hit effect due to mission success, so when six timer target candidate effects appear, a big hit confirmation notice effect will appear. Therefore, in the table T5a, with the variation number 15 which is the SP reach at the time of losing, only up to five timer target candidate effects can appear, and the variation number which is the character reach (cut-in B) at the time of losing. In 19, the maximum number of timer target candidate effects (up to five in reality) is allowed to appear.

An example of each effect prepared as the timer target candidate effect will be described below.
Conversation notice: The dialogue of a predetermined character is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the jackpot expectation may change according to the content of the dialogue. However, when the conversation notice appears, the jackpot expectation is different. It is set lower than the effects (holding change, cut-in A, accessory A operation, cut-in B, accessory B operation).
-Hold change: A display corresponding to the hold display that is the target of the digest display even during the pattern change that is performed according to the hold exhaustion (a display corresponding to the hold display when the hold status is not already in the hold status) Is displayed, the display mode (color, etc.) of the held display that is the target of digestion is changed, and the jackpot expectation degree suggested may change according to the display mode after the change. The jackpot expectation at the time when the hold change appears is set lower than the cut-in A, the accessory A operation, the cut-in B, and the accessory B operation.
-Cut-in A: The specific image A is displayed in the form of being preferentially displayed with respect to the effect being performed while the design is changing, and the jackpot expectation when the cut-in A appears is the character A. It is set lower than the motion, cut-in B, and accessory B motion.
-Auxiliary object A operation: one of the above-mentioned effect movable bodies is operated, and the jackpot expectation when the relevant accessory A operation appears is set lower than that of the accessory B operation.
-Cut-in B: The specific image B is displayed in the form of being preferentially displayed with respect to the effect being performed while the pattern is changing, and the jackpot expectation when the cut-in B appears is the character A. It is set lower than the motion and the character B motion.
-Characteristic B action: one of the above-mentioned production movable bodies is actuated, and the jackpot expectation at the time when the actionable substance B motion appears is another performance (conversation notice, pending change, cut-in A). , The action of the accessory A and the cut-in B) are set higher. The production movable body operated by the accessory B operation may be different from or the same as the production movable body used in the accessory A operation, but when the same production movable body is used, the operation is performed. The mode will be different.

It should be noted that each of these effects can be executed as a timer-targeted effect, as well as before, during, or after the count display is executed, or a varying period in which the timer effect is not executed. Also in the above, it is possible to be executed as an effect that is not a timer target. Further, each of these effects may be executable in any of a plurality of effect modes having different expectations, such as blue cut-in A and red cut-in A. Further, the pending change may include a premium mode (special mode) in which a big hit is confirmed when it appears. However, in this case, if the premium mode (special mode) appears during execution of the count display, the hold change will not be executed as the target of the timer effect when the count display reaches a predetermined value.

FIG. 155 shows the second processing state in which the single timer mode is selected (YES in step S5506), and it is determined that the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is not executed (NO in step S5507). It is a figure which shows an example of the table T5b referred to in the process of step S5523 in that case.

First, as shown in FIG. 155, since the table T5b is referred to when the notice timer effect is executed, the variation number 1 corresponding to the variation pattern in which the notice timer effect cannot be executed is given. The table T5b is not referred to when ~6 is acquired. However, since it is referred to when the mission effect is not executed, variation numbers 9, 13, and 17 corresponding to the loss variation pattern (variation pattern in which the mission cannot succeed) that causes a conversation notice to appear as the effect content of the variation effect. , 21 are also acquired, the table T5b is referred to. Therefore, in the table T5b, the effect random numbers are assigned to the variation numbers 9, 13, 17, and 21 separately for each notice number.

Similarly, since the table T5b is also referred to when the notice timer effect is executed in the single timer mode, at least one timer target candidate effect is selected so that random number for each variation number is selected. Has been allocated. However, with respect to the variation numbers in which the timer target candidate effects (conversation notice or cut-in) appear as the effect contents of the variable effect, the timer target candidate effects may not necessarily be selected as the effect contents of the notice effect.

Also, similarly, in the table T5b, in the variable numbers 7 to 14 corresponding to the character reach effect, maximum 2 timer target candidate effects are assigned to the variable numbers 7 to 12, whereas Only a maximum of one timer target candidate effect is assigned to the variation numbers 13 and 14 having relatively high expectations. However, in the variable numbers 7 and 8, the timer target candidate effect (conversation notice or cut-in) does not appear as the effect content of the variable effect, whereas in the variable numbers 9 to 12, 1 as the effect content of the variable effect. One timer target candidate production (conversation notice or cut-in) appears, and in the case of the variation numbers 13 and 14, two timer target candidate productions (conversation notice and cut-in) appear as the production contents of the variation production. It has become. Therefore, in the variation numbers 9 to 12, it is synonymous with that substantially one notice effect is allocated respectively, and in the variation numbers 13 and 14, substantially two notice effects are increased. It is synonymous with the fact that each production is assigned.

Then, for example, in the variation number 14, it is substantially synonymous with that the production random number of “1000” is assigned to the notice number 3, so that the variation numbers 7 to 7 corresponding to the corresponding character reach production are generated. It can be said that among the fourteen, the most noticeable presentations are allocated so that they are most likely to appear.

Even in the SP reach (variation numbers 15 to 22), which has a relatively high degree of expectation, the same relation as the relation of each variation number in the character reach is set. However, in SP reach, the appearance rate of the number of notices (average number of appearances) is higher than in character reach.

In addition, in the table T5b, the effect random numbers are distributed in substantially the same manner as in the table T5a, but since they are referred to when the mission effect is not executed, the table referred to when the mission effect is not executed. The upper limit number of appearances (average number of appearances) of the timer target candidate effects is smaller than T5a.

FIG. 156 is a third processing state in which the mode of the double timer is set (NO in step S5506), and the determination (YES in step S5532) to execute the mission effect (let the conversation notice appear) is made. It is a figure which shows an example of the table T5c referred to in the process of step S5533 in that case.

First, as shown in FIG. 156, since the table T5c is also referred to when the notice timer effect or the mission effect is executed, it corresponds to a variation pattern in which the notice timer effect cannot be executed. When the variation numbers 1 to 6 or the variation numbers 9, 13, 17, and 21 corresponding to the loss variation patterns (variation patterns in which the mission cannot succeed) that causes the conversation notice to appear as the production content of the variation production are acquired, the table concerned. There is no reference to T5c.

However, in the table T5c, since it is referred to when the notice timer effect is executed in the double timer mode, an effect random number is assigned to each variation number so that at least two timer target candidate effects are selected. Allocated However, for the variation numbers in which the timer target candidate effects (conversation notice or cut-in) appear as the effect contents of the variable effect, it is not always necessary to allocate two timer object candidate effects as the effect contents of the notice effect. Depending on the effect content, one timer target candidate effect (variation numbers 9 and 17) may be allocated as the effect content of the notice effect, or the timer target candidate effect may not be allocated (variation numbers 13 and 21).

Further, in the table T5c, among the variation numbers 7, 8, 10 to 12, and 14 corresponding to the character reach production, a maximum of five timer target candidate productions are allocated to the hit production of the variation numbers 7 and 8. On the other hand, a maximum of four timer target candidate effects are assigned to the hit effects of the variation numbers 10 to 12, and a maximum of three timer target candidate effects are assigned to the variation number 14. Not not. However, in the variable numbers 7 and 8, the timer target candidate effect (conversation notice or cut-in) does not appear as the effect content of the variable effect, whereas in the variable numbers 10 to 12, 1 as the effect content of the variable effect. One timer target candidate production (conversation notice or cut-in) appears, and at the variation number 14, two timer target candidate productions (conversation notice and cut-in) appear as variation production contents. ing. Therefore, in the variation numbers 10 to 12, it is synonymous with that substantially one more notice effect is allocated, and in the variation number 14, substantially two notice effects are increased. It is synonymous with each being assigned.

Then, for example, in the variation number 14, the effect random number "400" is substantially allocated to the notice number 4, and the effect random number "600" is allocated to the notice number 5. Since it is synonymous with, it can be said that among the fluctuation numbers 7, 8, 10 to 12, and 14 corresponding to the character reach effect, the notice effects are most likely to appear.

Also, in the character reach in the third processing situation, up to five timer target candidate effects (conversation notice, pending change, cut-in A, accessory A operation, special timer until the symbol variation is stopped) ) Has come to come. However, one of the maximum five timer target candidate effects is a big hit confirmation effect (special timer), and when the conversation notice is selected, it will function as a big hit effect due to successful mission. When four or more appear, a big hit confirmation announcement effect (mission success or special timer) will appear. Therefore, in the table T5c, only a maximum of three fluctuation numbers at the time of loss (the total of the number of timer target candidate effects on the fluctuation side and the number of timer target candidate effects on the notice side is three) is the timer target candidate effect. Is not allowed to appear.

Moreover, since one of the maximum five timer target candidate effects is a jackpot finalizing effect (special timer), when the number of notices 5 is selected when the variation number is 8, or when the variation numbers 10 and 12 are notified. If the number 4 is selected, or if the number 3 of the notice is selected when the variation number is 14, the execution of the jackpot finalizing effect (special timer) is confirmed. In this way, when the notice side timer effect is executed in the double timer mode, the proportion of the special timer described later is higher than when the notice side timer effect is executed in the single timer mode. In addition to being able to win the big hit, it becomes possible to have a sense of expectation that it will shift to a high-probability time saving state and that the 16-round big hit game will be executed. In particular, when it is a double timer mode and the mission effect is executed, it is possible to have such a feeling of expectation even more, so it is effective to effectively use the mission effect with low expectations in the first place. It will be possible to create a dramatic production situation.

By the way, the effect pattern (character reach + conversation notice) that appears when the variation number is 10 is set to have a lower jackpot expectation degree than the effect pattern (character reach + cut-in) that appears when the variation numbers 11 and 12. This is as described above. However, in the table T5c referred to in the above-mentioned third processing situation, the variation number 10 means "mission success (special display) is displayed, and then as an effect pattern to be stopped with the jackpot symbol. In view of the fact that it is "executed", the number and the probability of appearance of the notice effect are set to be higher than those in the case of the variable numbers 11 and 12 (when the mission success (special display) is not displayed). It is designed to improve the enjoyment of the game when the mission success (special display) is displayed.

On the other hand, even in the SP reach (variation numbers 15, 16, 18 to 20, 22), which has a relatively high degree of expectation, the same relation as the relation of each variation number in the character reach is set. .. However, in SP reach, the variation number 18 corresponds to the variation number 10 and the variation numbers 19 and 20 correspond to the variation numbers 11 and 12, but unlike the case of the character reach, the The variation number 20 at the time of hitting has a higher appearance number and the appearance probability of the notice effect than the variation number 18 (the variation number having a higher jackpot expectation degree is more likely to increase). Further, in SP reach, the appearance ratio of the number of notices (average appearance number) is higher than that in character reach.

In addition, as will be described later, in SP reach when in the third processing situation, a maximum of six timer target candidate effects (conversation notice, pending change, cut-in A, accessory A operation until the symbol fluctuation is stopped). , Cut-in B, and character B action) have come. However, when the conversation notice is selected, it will function as a big hit effect due to mission success, so when six timer target candidate effects appear, a big hit confirmation notice effect will appear. Therefore, in the table T5c, up to 5 variable numbers corresponding to the SP reach at the time of loss (the total of the number of timer target candidate effects on the variable side and the timer target candidate effects on the notice side is up to 5). However, the timer target candidate presentation is not allowed to appear.

FIG. 157 shows a fourth processing state in which a double timer mode is set (NO in step S5506), and it is determined not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5532). It is a figure which shows an example of the table T5d referred to in the process of step S5543 in that case.

First, as shown in FIG. 157, since the table T5d is referred to when the notice timer effect is executed, the variation number 1 corresponding to the variation pattern in which the notice timer effect cannot be executed is given. The table T5d is not referred to when ~6 is acquired. However, since it is referred to when the mission effect is not executed, variation numbers 9, 13, and 17 corresponding to the loss variation pattern (variation pattern in which the mission cannot succeed) that causes a conversation notice to appear as the effect content of the variation effect. , 21 are also acquired, the table T5b is referred to. Therefore, in the table T5d, the effect random numbers are assigned to the variation numbers 9, 13, 17, and 21 for each notice number.

Similarly, since the table T5d is also referred to when the notice timer effect is executed in the double timer mode, at least two timer target candidate effects are selected so that effect random numbers for each variation number are selected. Has been allocated. However, for the variation numbers in which the timer target candidate effects (conversation notice or cut-in) appear as the effect contents of the variable effect, it is not always necessary to allocate two timer object candidate effects as the effect contents of the notice effect. Depending on the effect content, one timer target candidate effect (variation numbers 9 and 17) may be allocated as the effect content of the notice effect, or the timer target candidate effect may not be allocated (variation numbers 13 and 21).

Further, similarly, in the table T5d, among the variation numbers 7 to 14 corresponding to the character reach production, a maximum of four timer target candidate productions are assigned to the hit productions of the variation numbers 7 and 8. On the other hand, a maximum of three timer target candidate effects are assigned to the hit effects of the variation numbers 10 to 12, and a maximum of two timer target candidate effects are achieved for the variation numbers 13 and 14. Only allocated. However, in the variable numbers 7 and 8, the timer target candidate effect (conversation notice or cut-in) does not appear as the effect content of the variable effect, whereas in the variable numbers 9 to 12, 1 as the effect content of the variable effect. One timer target candidate production (conversation notice or cut-in) appears, and in the case of the variation numbers 13 and 14, two timer target candidate productions (conversation notice and cut-in) appear as the production contents of the variation production. It has become. Therefore, in the variation numbers 9 to 12, it is synonymous with that substantially one notice effect is allocated respectively, and in the variation numbers 13 and 14, substantially two notice effects are increased. It is synonymous with the fact that each production is assigned.

Then, for example, the variation number 14 is substantially synonymous with the production random number "1000" being assigned to the number of advance notices 4, so that the variation numbers 7 to 7 corresponding to the relevant character reach production are changed. It can be said that among the fourteen, the most noticeable presentations are assigned so that they are most likely to appear.

Even in the SP reach (variation numbers 15 to 22), which has a relatively high degree of expectation, the same relation as the relation of each variation number in the character reach is set. However, in SP reach, the appearance rate of the number of notices (average number of appearances) is higher than in character reach.

In addition, in the table T5d, the effect random numbers are distributed in substantially the same manner as in the table T5c, but since they are referred to when the mission effect is not executed, the table referred to when the mission effect is not executed. The upper limit number of appearances (average number of appearances) of timer target candidate effects is smaller than T5c.

Then, as shown in FIG. 149, in this way, as a result of the notice side timer type lottery (step S5505), is it determined whether the notice side timer effect is performed in the single timer mode or the double timer mode (step S5505). S5506), and further, as a result of the first mission effect lottery (step S5504), it is determined that the mission effect is to be performed (steps S5507, S5532). After determining the number of appearances (preliminary notice effects that can be the subject of the notice timer timer effect) (steps S5508, S5523, S5533, S5543), only the determined number of notices of any type as the timer target candidate effects A determination process is performed as to whether an effect is to appear, and which of the notice effects is to be an object of the timer effect (steps S5509, S5524, S5534, S5544).

FIG. 158 is a single timer mode (YES in step S5506), and in the first processing situation in which it is determined to execute the mission effect (let the conversation notice appear) (YES in step S5507). It is a figure which shows an example of the table T6a-1 referred to when it is determined that the number of notices is set to 1 as a result of performing the process of step S5508 (step S5509).

For example, as shown in FIG. 158, this table T6a-1 (step S5509: number of notices 1) is referred to when it is decided to execute the notice timer effect in the single timer mode. Therefore, one notice effect decided to be executed as the timer target candidate effect is automatically set as the effect target of the notice side timer effect (in the figure, a circle indicates the notice side timer effect). It indicates that it will be executed as a performance target). On the other hand, although illustration is omitted, when it is required to determine N (two or more) advance notice effects as timer target candidate effects (step S5509: number of advance notices N), N timer candidate candidate effects are selected. The notice effect is determined, and one of them is decided as the effect target of the notice timer effect.

In addition, when it is required to determine N (2 or more) notice effects as timer target candidate effects, N-1 of them (1 in the single mode, 2 in the double mode) are selected. ) When the following number of effects are to be the effects targets of the notice timer effect (steps S5509, S524, S534, S544), even if N effects of the same effect combination are selected as the timer target candidate effects. It is desirable that the jackpot expectation level be different depending on which of the effects is determined as the notice timer effect. For example, a front effect (for example, a conversation notice) that appears at a relatively early timing in one effect pattern, and a post effect that appears at a relatively late timing in one effect pattern (for example, character A When (action) is selected as the timer target candidate effect, the post effect (eg, character A operation) is directed to the notice side than when the preceding effect (for example, conversation notice) is set as the effect target of the notice side effect timer. It is set so that the appearance ratio of the big hit symbol (special display mode) is higher when the timer is used as an effect target (steps S5509, S5524, S5534, S5544).

Further, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, even if a variation number for executing "conversation notice" or "cut-in A, B" is acquired as the effect content of the change effect, the effect of the notice effect is changed. As the effect contents, "conversation notice" and "cut-in A, B" can be decided. However, as a result, when it is determined that the same effect is to appear in both the effect content of the fluctuating effect and the effect content of the notice effect, it is not controlled to appear separately as the effect content of the notice effect, and is changed. A process of setting an effect (conversation notice, cut-in A, B) appearing as the effect content of the effect as the effect target of the notice timer effect (steps S5509, S524, S534, S544) is performed.

For example, in the example of the table T6a-1 (the number of notices is 1), when "conversation notice" is determined as the effect content of the notice production in the variation numbers 10, 14, 18, and 22, or in the variation numbers 11 to 14, "cut" is performed. In the case where "In A" is determined as the effect content of the notice effect, or when "Cut in B" is determined as the effect content of the notice effect in variation numbers 19 to 22, the effect content of the variable effect and the effect of the notice effect are determined. It is decided that the same effect should appear in both the content. However, here, control is not performed to separately appear as the effect content of the notice effect, and the effect (conversation notice, cut-in A or cut-in B) that appears as the effect content of the variable effect is set as the effect target of the notice timer effect. Processing is performed.

In addition, when it is determined that the specific effect (conversation notice, cut-in A or cut-in B) appears in both the effect contents of the fluctuating effect and the effect contents of the notice effect, this is separately determined as the effect contents of the notice effect. It is also possible to perform the control for appearing in step 1 to set the specific effect (the effect content of the notice effect) on the side to be made to appear separately as the effect target of the notice effect on the notice side.

Further, in this table T6a-1 (the number of notices is 1), since it is referred to when it is decided to execute the mission effect (make the notice of conversation appear), it is also shown in FIG. 148. As described above, when the variation numbers 10, 14, 18, and 22 for executing "conversation notice" are acquired as the content of the variation effect, or "conversation notice" is selected as the timer target candidate effect (contents of the notice effect). In the case (PTN1), a special display (mission success) is displayed, and it is definitely suggested that a big hit symbol appears.

In this regard, in the variation numbers 10, 14, 18, and 22 at the time of executing "conversation notice" as the contents of the variation effect, the variation numbers 8, 12, at the time of not performing "conversation notice" as the contents of the variation effect. Compared to 16 and 20, the ratio of determining "conversation notice" as the effect content of the notice effect is set to be lower. That is, as described above, when "conversation notice" is determined as the effect content of the notice effect in the variable numbers 10, 14, 18, and 22, both the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect produce "conversation notice". However, in the case where two timer effects target the same effect in this way, basically, a big hit expectation is obtained as compared with the case where two timer effects differ in the effect target. This is because the degree is set to be low. This makes it possible to relatively reduce the appearance rate of the special display (mission success) when both the fluctuating side timer effect and the notice side timer effect target "conversation notice".

The same applies to the effect contents of the fluctuating effect other than such "conversation notice", for example, the fluctuation number which does not execute "Cut-in B" as the effect contents of the fluctuating effect out of the fluctuating numbers 15 to 22 corresponding to SP reach. Of the numbers 15 and 16, 150 effect random numbers are assigned to the variation number 15 at the time of losing, while as many as 250 effect random numbers are assigned to the variation number 16 at the time of winning. On the other hand, of the variation numbers 19 to 20 that execute "cut-in B" as the production content of the variation production among the variation numbers 15 to 22 corresponding to the SP reach, the variation number 19 at the time of loss has 250 production random numbers. In contrast to the allocation, the variation number 20 at the time of winning is allocated only 200 effect random numbers.

That is, in this case, when the "cut-in B" is targeted for effect only by the variable-side timer effects with the variable numbers 15 and 16, both the variable-side timer effect and the notice-side timer effect appear with the variable numbers 19 and 20. As a result, compared with the case where both of these are targeted for the effect of "cut-in B", the jackpot pattern appears at a higher rate. As a result, in a situation where two timer effects are displayed at the same time, whether or not those timer effects reach a predetermined numerical value for the same effect object will function as an important effect element. It becomes possible to maintain the amusement interest of the game appropriately.

In the variation numbers 8, 10, 12, and 14 at the time of winning among the variation numbers 7 to 14 corresponding to the character reach, until the big hit symbol (special display mode) is stopped in the effect pattern (during symbol variation). In the form of a special timer that targets the effect that appears after the jackpot pattern (special display mode) is stopped in the effect pattern instead of the effect that appears in It can be decided to execute the notice timer effect. Although this special timer will be described later, in this embodiment, even if it is decided to generate the special timer in the process of step S5509, the special timer may not appear, and the execution thereof may be performed. Whether or not the special timer is executed will be determined by the process of step S5514 described later.

Here, the notice side timer effect may have a relatively high jackpot expectation degree (for example, start in the middle of variable display) even if the total number of counts from the start to the end of the count display is small. On the other hand, in the fluctuating timer effect, control is performed so that the expectation degree suggested by the timer effect is always lower than the case where the total number of counts from the start to the end of the count display is small, compared with the case where the total count is large. May be.

As will be described later, such a special timer is a definite suggestion that a jackpot pattern (special display mode) will appear in the effect pattern, and when it appears, a high probability time saving game state or a 16 round jackpot. It can be said that it is more useful to the player in comparison with the timer effect in which another effect is an object, in that the rate at which the game is executed is relatively high. The ratio may include 100%.

In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, when the special display (mission success) appears in the mission effect, the appearance ratio of the special timer becomes higher than when the special display (mission success) does not appear. By the control, the feeling of expectation when the special display (when the mission is successful) appears is made more suitable (steps S5509, S5534). For example, in the table T6a-1 (the number of notices is 1), of the variation numbers 7 to 14 corresponding to the character reach in which the special timer can appear, the variation side timer effect (mission success) for which the conversation announcement is targeted appears. While 100 random numbers of effect random numbers are assigned to the special timers for the change numbers 10 and 14 at the time of hitting, the hitting time when the variable timer effect (mission success) for which the notice of conversation is directed does not appear. In the variation numbers 8 and 12, only 50 effect random numbers are assigned to the special timer.

Furthermore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, even when the special display (mission success) does not appear, when the mission effect (let the conversation notice appear) (steps S5509, S5534), the mission effect (conversation). Expectation when the mission effect (let the conversation notice appear) is controlled by controlling the appearance ratio of the special timer to be higher than when the notice is not displayed) (steps S5524 and S5544). Is played more appropriately.

In addition, when the timer effect is performed in a double manner by the fluctuating side timer effect and the notice side timer effect, the appearance rate of the special timer is higher than that in the case where the timer effect is performed by the double aspect only by the notice side timer effect. It is set to be low. Further, even when the timer effect is performed in a triple mode with one fluctuating side timer effect and two notice side timer effects, one of the notice side timer effects targets the same effect as the fluctuating side timer effect. In this case, the appearance ratio of the special timer is set to be lower than that in the case where the same effect is not set as the effect target in the notice side timer effect and the variable side timer effect.

FIG. 159 shows a single timer mode (YES in step S5506), and in the second processing situation in which it is determined that the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is not executed (NO in step S5507), It is a figure which shows an example of the table T6b-1 referred to when it is determined that the number of notices is set to 1 as a result of performing the process of step S5523 (step S5524).

As shown in FIG. 159, in this table T6b-1 (step S5524: number of notices 1), of the variation numbers 7 to 14 corresponding to the character reach in which the special timer can appear, the variation numbers 10 and 14 are Fifty production random numbers are allocated, and 20 variation random numbers are allocated to the variation numbers 8 and 12. In this way, when the mission effect (make a conversation notice appear) is not performed (table T6b-1), the special timer is compared to when the mission effect (make a conversation notice appear) (table T6b-1) is performed. It is clear that the appearance ratio of is set to be low.

Further, since this table T6b-1 (step S5524: number of notices 1) is referred to when the mission effect (let the conversation notice appear) is not executed, the conversation notice appears as the effect content of the variable effect. Even when the variation numbers 9, 13, 17, and 21 corresponding to the loss variation pattern (variation pattern in which the mission cannot succeed) are acquired, the table T6b-1 (notification number 1) is referred to. Therefore, in the table T6b-1 (step S5524: number of notices 1), effect random numbers are assigned to the variation numbers 9, 13, 17, and 21 separately for each number of notices.

In addition, since the variation numbers 9, 10, 13, 14, 17, 18, 21, and 22 are to produce a variable-side timer effect with "conversation notice" as the effect target as the effect content of the effect effect, the effect effect. When "conversation notice" is selected as the effect content, both the variable timer effect and the notice timer effect are executed with "conversation notice" as the effect target. Therefore, in table T6b-1 (step S5524: number of notices 1), when "conversation notice" is selected in variation numbers 9, 10, 13, 14, 17, 18, 21, and 22, "variable numbers" are set in other variation numbers. Random effect random numbers are distributed so that the expectation of a big hit is lower than when "conversation notice" is selected.

The same applies to the effect contents of the fluctuating effect other than such "conversation notice". For example, for "cut-in B" that can be the object of the effect for both the fluctuating side timer effect and the notice side timer effect in SP reach, Allocation is performed in the same manner as in the case of the above-mentioned table T6a-1 (the number of notices is 1).

Also, similarly, since this table T6b-1 (step S5524: number of notices 1) is also referred to when it is decided to execute the notice timer effect in the single timer mode, One notice production decided to be executed as the timer target candidate production is automatically set as the production target of the notice timer production. On the other hand, although illustration is omitted, when it is required to determine N (2 or more) notice effects as timer target candidate effects (step S5524: number of notices N), N timer effect candidate effects are selected. The same is true of determining the notice effect and also determining one of them as the subject of the notice timer effect.

In contrast to the timer target notice lottery (steps S5509, S5524) when the notice side effect timer is performed in such a single mode, the timer subject notice lottery when the notice side effect timer is performed in the double mode (step S5534, Also in S5544, when both the fluctuating side timer effect and the notice side timer effect are the same effect object, a big hit compared to the case where an effect different from the fluctuating side timer effect and the notice side timer effect is the effect object. Basically, the effect random numbers are distributed in the same manner, such as that the degree of expectation is set to be low.

FIG. 160 shows a double timer mode (NO in step S5506), and in the fourth processing situation in which it is determined not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5532), It is a figure which shows an example of the table T6d-2 referred when the number of notices is decided to be 2 as a result of performing the process of step S5543 (step S5544).

As shown in FIG. 160, this table T6d-2f (step S5544: number of notices 2) is referred to when it is decided to execute the notice timer effect in the double timer mode. Therefore, both of the two announcement effects decided to be executed as the timer target candidate effects are automatically set as the effect objects of the announcement timer effect. On the other hand, although illustration is omitted, when it is required to determine N (3 or more) notice effects as timer target candidate effects (step S5544: number of notices N), N timer effect candidate effects are selected. The notice effect is determined, and two of them are decided as the effect objects of the notice timer effect. Such a process is also executed in the timer target advance notice lottery in other effect situations.

Also, as shown in FIG. 160, also in this table T6d-2f, when both the fluctuating side timer effect and the notice side timer effect are the same effect, the fluctuating side timer effect and the notice side timer effect are produced. It is set so that the jackpot expectation level is lower than that in the case where the effects different from and are targeted.

When one of the two notice effects selected as the notice side effect timer is the same effect target as the fluctuating side effect timer, one of the two notice effects selected as the special notice side effect timers is the changing side. The selection ratio of the special timer is lower than that in the case where it is not the same effect target as the effect timer.

In particular, in the case of the variable numbers 13, 14, 21, and 22, both of the two notice effects selected as the notice effect timers are the same effect targets as the two variable effect timers appearing in one effect pattern. Has a significantly lower expectation of jackpots.

Then, as shown in FIG. 149, as a result of such timer target advance notice lottery (steps S5509, S5524, S5534, S5544), which one of the timer target candidate effects will appear, and the effect of the timer timer effect. When each of the targets is determined, the count display lottery is performed as the process of step 510.

In this count display lottery (step 510), at which timing in each effect pattern (fluctuation pattern) each effect that has been decided to appear as a timer target candidate effect is to appear, and further to the effect target. A determination is made as to from which timing within the one effect pattern (variation pattern) the notice side timer effect to be counted and displayed is executed. In this determination, when the appearance timing of the effect targeted for the notice timer effect is late, compared to when the appearance timing of the effect targeted for the notice timer effect is early, the jackpot symbol (special display mode) ) Is desirable to be performed so that the appearance rate is high.

FIG. 161 shows a single timer mode (YES in step S5506), and in the second processing situation in which it is determined not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5507), It is a time chart for explaining the specific content of the count display lottery (step 510) performed when the variation number corresponding to the character reach is selected.

For example, when the variation numbers 7 to 14 corresponding to the character reach are selected in such a second processing situation, first, as shown in FIG. 161, as the production on the variation production (production pattern) side,
・Normal production period during which normal production is performed,
-Normal reach production period after the decorative pattern has reached the reach mode under the background during normal production,-Character reach production period during which the production progresses by switching to a background different from that during normal production, and It is decided that each period such as the symbol stop period in which the decorative symbol is definitely stopped (big hit symbol, lost symbol) appears in sequence within the fluctuation time of 50 seconds (period in which the symbol fluctuation occurs) as shown in FIG. (See the lines of "Variation time" and "Variation PTN effect" in the figure).

Further, in this processing situation, for example, when the variation number 14 is acquired, as the effect pattern, the variable side timer effect is started in synchronization with the start of the symbol change, and this is displayed for 10 seconds. It is also determined that "the cut-in A" appears after the variable timer effect is restarted after a predetermined time has elapsed and is displayed for 10 seconds.

As described above, the effect pattern is not limited to this even if it is one variation pattern (variation number), and the variation timer effect is started after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the symbol variation, and this is displayed as a count for 5 seconds. It is also possible to select another effect pattern such that a "conversation notice" will appear after that. Although this is also described above, the selection of such an effect pattern has been executed before the lottery (each process shown in FIG. 149) related to the notice effect.

Then, in the count display lottery (step 510), in the fact that each effect period appears in sequence and the effect contents on the variable side are already determined, it is determined in the timer target advance notice lottery (here, step S5524). A determination is made as to the timing at which the effect target of the notice side effect timer that has been displayed and the notice side effect timer that counts and displays toward the effect object respectively appear. In addition, in addition to the timer target candidate productions that are the production targets of the notice production timer in the timer target announcement lottery, when the timer target candidate productions that are not the production target are further determined, the timer target candidate productions that are not the production target are selected. The appearance timing is also determined by the count display lottery (step 510).

For example, when "conversation notice" is determined as the effect content of the notice effect in the timer target notice lottery (here, step S5524), as shown in FIG. In this manner, it is determined whether to execute the conversation announcement and the announcement timer effect respectively. Note that in this embodiment, of the conversation notices 1 to 4 in the figure, the form of the conversation notice 1 has the lowest jackpot expectation, and is selected such that the jackpot expectation increases as the number increases. Probability is set. Therefore, in this count display lottery (step 510), one of the conversation notices 1 to 4 is selected based on the big hit or the variation pattern (variation number 7 to 14) and the like. It is desirable to perform the count display lottery based on different selection tables.

However, at this time, when the change numbers 9, 10, 13, and 14 at which the conversation notice appears are obtained as the effect contents of the change effect, the notice effect of the notice effect is also obtained in the timer target notice lottery (here, step S5524). When "conversation notice" is determined as the effect content, the mode of conversation notice 1 is always selected. In this case, in addition to the conversation notice given as the effect contents of the fluctuating effect, the count notice of the timer effect is displayed toward the notice notice made as the effect contents of the fluctuating effect without causing the conversation notice to appear as the effect contents of the fluctuating effect. The control to be performed is executed (a mode of conversation notice 1 in the figure).

Further, as shown in FIG. 161, when the variation numbers 7 to 14 corresponding to the character reach are acquired, in the timer target advance notice lottery (here, step S5524), the effect content of the advance notice effect is “hold”. If "change" has been determined, it is determined which one of the pending changes 1 to 5 is to execute the pending change and the notice timer effect, and "cut-in A" is decided as the effect content of the notice effect. If so, it is determined which of the cut-ins A1 to 3 is to execute the cut-in A and the advance notice timer effect, and the "feature A operation" is decided as the effect contents of the advance notice effect. If it is, it is determined in which mode of the accessory A operations 1 to 4 the accessory A operation and the notice side timer effect are respectively executed, and the "special timer" is determined as the effect content of the notice effect. In this case, it is determined which of the special timers 1 and 2 is to execute the notice timer effect.

In this embodiment, in any of the production selections of the pending changes 1 to 5, the cut-in A productions 1 to 3 and the accessory A operations 1 to 4 in the figure, the mode with the smallest number is the jackpot expectation degree. , The selection probability is set so that the jackpot expectation degree increases as the number increases. On the other hand, the special timers 1 and 2 are effects that show that the big hit symbol (special display mode) always appears.

Further, as shown in FIG. 161, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, there are three timings at which the notice timer effect can appear while one effect pattern (here, character reach) is performed. Although they are prepared (at the start of fluctuation, slightly before the appearance timing of the notice E2 and slightly before the appearance timing of the notice F), those appearance timings are subject to multiple types of timer target notices (conversation notice, pending change, cut-in). A, character A operation, and special timer) are shared. Then, at such a plurality of appearance timings (at the start of fluctuation, slightly before the appearance timing of the notice E2, slightly before the appearance timing of the notice F), a plurality of count display numbers when the notice timer effect appears are also prepared ( 10 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds, 40 seconds, 50 seconds, 70 seconds, etc.) and, even if any of the count display totals is displayed, predict which production the production target is. The configuration is difficult.

For example, as shown in FIG. 161, when the variation numbers 7 to 14 corresponding to the character reach are acquired, it is 10 seconds at a timing slightly before the appearance timing of the notice E2 among the plurality of appearance timings. , 20 seconds or 30 seconds, a notice timer effect having a total count display count can appear. However, when a notice side timer effect having a total display count of 10 seconds appears, it is difficult to predict which mode of the conversation notice 3 or the hold change 3 is executed even in the effect pattern of the character reach. Even when a notice timer effect having a total display count of 20 seconds appears, any of the hold change 4 and the cut-in A2 is executed only in the effect pattern of the character reach. It's hard to predict what.

In this respect, when the notice timer effect having a total display count of 30 seconds appears at a timing slightly before the appearance timing of the notice E2 among the plurality of appearance timings, only the production pattern of the character reach is displayed. As seen, only the aspect of the accessory A operation 2 can be executed. However, when the production pattern of SP reach (see FIG. 162) described later is viewed, the aspect of the character A operation 2 can be executed at the same timing from the start of the variation, and thus the appearance timing of the notice E2 may be slightly different. Even if a notice timer effect with a total count display of 30 seconds appears at the timing when it arrives before, the notice timer effect is displayed in any manner, including whether it is character reach or SP reach. It is difficult to predict what will be done.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to leave it unclear which effect is to be the effect when the notice timer effect appears (the big hit expectation level differs depending on the type of effect that is the effect target). As a result, it is possible to maintain the amusement of the game appropriately until the count display of the timer effect reaches a specific numerical value (here, 0). In this embodiment, when a notice timer effect with the same total count display appears at the same timing, basically (unless there is a balance with the mission effect, etc.), the effect target is a conversation notice. At this time, the jackpot expectation degree is the lowest, and the jackpot expectation degree is set to gradually increase in the order of the hold change, the cut-in A, the accessory A operation, the cut-in B, and the accessory B operation.

Further, according to the above configuration, when the notice timer effect appears, a plurality of count display total numbers (the big hit expectation degree varies depending on the length of the seconds) are prepared at any appearance timing. , When the notice side timer effect appears, it becomes possible to make an interest in which the total number of count displays is, and it becomes possible to improve the enjoyment of the game when the notice side timer effect appears. ..

In addition, in this embodiment, even if the notice side timer effect that appears at any timing is made difficult to predict the effect object at the time of appearance, one effect object with respect to the total number of count displays. A mode in which the effect target is set to be predictable by associating only (for example, a special timer) may be included. The appearance timing at which the notice timer effect may appear may include the appearance timing at which only one count display total number appears.

Further, in the example (character reach: number of notices 1) shown in FIG. 161, for the sake of convenience of explanation, when the same effect is produced in the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect, in the figure, a change occurs. It is described as if the side timer effect and the notice timer effect are displayed as a count for the same number of seconds or the count display is ended at the same timing. However, as described above, in practice, even when the same effect (for example, conversation notice) is targeted for the variable timer effect and the notice timer effect, the end timing of each count display is made different. While one of the fluctuating side timer effect and the notice side timer effect reaches the specific numerical value (0 in this case) first and is ended, the other count display is continued.

Also, in the example shown in FIG. 161 (character reach: number of notices 1), it is described as if the count display of the timer effect is displayed in seconds, but the unit of the number appearing in the count display is “seconds”. Is not limited to Therefore, for example, the time required to change the numbers on the count display may be different between the fluctuating side timer effect and the notice side timer effect, or the time required to change each number in the count display appearing on the fluctuating side timer effect is constant. You don't have to.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 161 (character reach: number of notices 1), when "special timer" is determined as the effect content of the notice effect, the notice timer effect is selected in either of the special timers 1 and 2. To decide what to do. That is, in this case, after the big hit symbol (special display mode) appears in the effect pattern (character reach), the count display becomes a specific numerical value (here 0) when 20 seconds have passed (during the big hit game execution period). Will be reached. Then, after this, an effect suggesting that it is a type advantageous to the player as a type of big hit (for example, a hit type that shifts to a high probability time saving state, a hit type in which a 16 round big hit game is performed, etc.) is started. However, the aspect of such a special timer is set in step S5514 described later.

In this embodiment, it is decided which of the special timers 1 and 2 is selected in the count display lottery (step S5511). You may make it set in step S5514.

Further, when the count display is started after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display instead of the timing at which the variable display according to the hold information is started, it may be the case where the timer prefetch effect described later is not executed. Also, a mode (for example, under timer preparation) displayed in a timer prefetch effect described below may appear (for example, appear with a predetermined probability) for a predetermined time until the count display is started.

FIG. 162 is a single timer mode (YES in step S5506), and in the second processing situation in which it is determined not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5507), It is a time chart for explaining the specific content of the count display lottery (step 510) performed when the variation number corresponding to SP reach is selected.

For example, when the variation numbers 15 to 22 corresponding to the SP reach are selected in the second processing situation as described above, as shown in FIG. 162, first, as the production on the variation production (production pattern) side,
・Normal production period during which normal production is performed,
-Normal reach production period after the decorative pattern has reached the reach mode under the background during normal production,-Character reach production period during which production progresses by switching to a background different from that during normal production,
-The decorative design is not fixedly stopped within the character reach production period, and the SP reach production period appears in the form of further production progress. Each period, such as the symbol stop period, is in a processing state in which it has been determined that it will appear in sequence within a fluctuation time of 90 seconds (a period during which the symbol fluctuation is performed) (“fluctuation time” in the figure, See the line for "Variable PTN production").

Further, in this processing situation, for example, when the variation number 22 is acquired, as the effect pattern, the variable side timer effect is started in synchronization with the start of the symbol change, and this is displayed for 10 seconds. It is also determined that "Cut-in B" appears after the variable timer effect is restarted after a predetermined time has elapsed and is displayed for 10 seconds.

Note that in this example (SP reach: number of notices 1), as in the case of the example (character reach: number of notices 1) shown in FIG. 161, even if there is one variation pattern (variation number) Is not limited to this, it is possible to select other effect patterns such as starting the variable side timer effect after a predetermined time from the start of the symbol fluctuation, displaying this for 5 seconds and then displaying "conversation notice". ing.

In this example (SP reach: number of notices 1), for example, when “conversation notice” is determined as the effect content of the notice effect in the timer target notice lottery (here, step S5524), the same applies. As shown in FIG. 162, it is determined which mode of the conversation notices 1 to 6 to execute the conversation notice and the notice side timer effect, respectively. Note that in this embodiment, of the conversation notices 1 to 6 in the figure, the form of the conversation notice 1 has the lowest jackpot expectation, and is selected so that the jackpot expectation increases as the number increases. Probability is set. Therefore, in this count display lottery (step 510), one of the conversation notices 1 to 6 is selected based on the big hit or the variation pattern (variation numbers 15 to 22) and the like. It is desirable to perform the count display lottery based on different selection tables.

However, also in this case, when the variation numbers 17, 18, 21, 22 in which the conversation notice appears are obtained as the effect contents of the change effect, the notice is also made in the timer target notice lottery (here, step S5524). When "conversation notice" is determined as the effect content of the effect, the mode of conversation notice 1 is always selected. In this case, in addition to the conversation notice given as the effect contents of the fluctuating effect, the count notice of the timer effect is displayed toward the notice notice made as the effect contents of the fluctuating effect without causing the conversation notice to appear as the effect contents of the fluctuating effect. The control to be performed is executed (a mode of conversation notice 1 in the figure).

Further, as shown in FIG. 162, when the variation numbers 15 to 22 corresponding to the character reach are acquired, in the timer target advance notice lottery (here, step S5524), the effect content of the advance notice effect is “Hold”. When "change" has been determined, it is determined which of the hold changes 1 to 7 is to be executed as the hold change and the notice timer effect, and "cut-in A" is decided as the effect content of the notice effect. If so, it is determined which of the cut-ins A1 to 5 the cut-in A and the notice timer timer effect are to be executed respectively, and the "feature A action" is decided as the effect content of the notice effect. If it is, it is determined in which mode of the accessory A operations 1 to 4 the accessory A operation and the notice side timer effect are respectively executed, and "cut-in B" is determined as the effect content of the notice effect. When the cut-in B 1 to 5 is executed and the advance notice timer effect is executed respectively, the case where the "effect B operation" is decided as the effect contents of the advance notice effect is determined. Determines which of the character product B operations 1 to 4 will execute the character product B motion and the notice timer effect respectively.

In addition, also in this example of SP reach, any of the production selections of pending changes 1 to 7, cut-ins A 1 to 5, character A operations 1 to 4, cut-ins B 1 to 5 and character B operations 1 to 4 in the figure. Also in (1), the mode with the smallest number is the mode with the lowest expected jackpot, and the selection probabilities are set such that the expected degree with the large jackpot increases as the number increases.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 162, six timings at which the notice timer effect can appear in one production pattern (here, SP reach) are prepared (at the start of fluctuation, the notice E2). A little before the appearance timing of, the appearance timing of the notice F, a little before the normal reach production period ends, within the character reach production period, the timing when the SP reach production period starts), and the notice timer Similar to the case of the example shown in FIG. 161, the configuration is such that it is difficult to predict which effect the effect target will have when the effect appears.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 162, a mode in which the effect target is set to be predictable by associating only one effect target with the total number of displayed counts (for example, a cut-in B timer of 40 seconds) or a notice The appearance timing at which the side timer effect may appear includes the appearance timing at which only one count display total number appears (for example, 10 seconds at the timing when the SP reach effect period starts).

In this way, in the count display lottery (step S5510), the appearance time of the advance notice effect or the advance notice timer effect determined in the timer target advance notice lottery is determined. In this respect, when the number of notice productions determined by the timer notice notice lottery is two or more, in addition to the productions to be the production effect of the notice timer production, the appearance timing of the productions not to be the production effect of the notice timer production Etc. are also decided together. Further, when the notice timer effect is executed in the double timer mode, at what timing each of the two notice timer effects and the effects targeted for these effects should appear (two notice timer effects). (Including whether to execute the count display at the overlapping time) will be further determined.

However, in this count display lottery (step S5510), the number of notice effects determined in the timer target notice lottery, whether or not it is a double timer mode, and the mission effect (make a conversation notice appear) are executed. It is desirable that the appearance time of the advance notice effect or the advance notice timer effect determined in the timer target advance notice lottery be determined in a different manner according to the processing situation such as whether or not. For example, in a processing situation in which a mission effect (make a conversation notice appear), if the conversation notice appears at a relatively early stage after the variation starts, the dramatic excitement is lacking. It is desirable to make it easy to select a conversation notice that appears at a later stage. Further, in the double timer mode, two timer effects are executed when a situation in which the count displays are simultaneously advanced appears rather than when the respective count displays are not overlapped in one effect pattern. Since it is possible to give a feeling that the count display progresses at the same time, the selection ratio is higher when the count display progresses at the same time than when the count display progresses at the same time. It is desirable to do. In addition, when the number of notice effects determined in the timer target notice lottery is two or more, the appearance time of the notice effects is determined so that the notice effects do not appear at the same time.

The timing at which the notice timer effect may appear (for example, at the start of fluctuation, slightly before the notice E2 appears, slightly before the notice F appears, slightly before the normal reach production period ends, or the character reach production period) Regarding the timing at which the SP reach production period is started), each notice production (conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, character A operation, cut-in B, character B operation) can be performed within a period in which it can be performed. It is desirable to set. That is, in this case, the notice timer effect is started even if the notice effect does not appear at a specific timing, or the notice effect is performed even if the notice timer effect is not started at a certain timing. It is possible to expect that the decline in the interest in playing games will be suppressed. In addition, a notice situation may appear at a specific timing, and a notice situation in which the notice timer effect is started may occur, so that it is expected to improve the enjoyment of the game. In this case, when the notice effect is being executed (at a specific timing) when the predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the notice effect is not being executed when the predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the change. It is desirable that the setting is made such that the ratio at which the notice timer effect is started is higher than that at the time.

Then, as shown in FIG. 149, when the count display lottery (step S5510) is performed in this way, as a process of step S5511, the aspect of the notice timer effect determined by the count display lottery becomes a special timer. Determine if it is possible.

That is, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 161 and FIG. 162 as well, in addition to the timer target candidate effect (notification effect that can be the effect target of the notice timer effect), non-target The non-target notices E1, E2, E3 and the non-target notice F can be executed as the notice productions (the notice productions that cannot be produced by the notice timer production). Of these, the non-target notice E2 is set so that the jackpot expectation is lower than that of the non-target notice F in a situation where the count display of the notice timer effect is not displayed, whereas the notice target timer effect is set. In the situation where the count display of is displayed, the big hit expectation degree is set to be higher than that of the non-target notice F.

In such a configuration, when the non-target notice E2 (first effect) is executed while the count display is not being performed, the non-target notice F (second effect) is executed while the count display is not being performed. While there is a relationship in which the degree of expectation that a big hit symbol (a specific symbol aspect) appears will be lower than when the hit, a non-target notice E2 (first effect) is counted while the count display is being performed. The notice side timer effect (count effect) is set so that the expectation of the jackpot symbol (specific symbol aspect) is higher than when the non-target notice F (second effect) is executed while the display is being performed. Display) becomes executable. Therefore, the notice side timer effect in which the count display is performed in such a manner that the expectation when the non-target notice E2 (first effect) appears is significantly increased (the non-target notice E2 ( The timer effect) in which the first effect) is started and ended is referred to as a "special timer".

That is, in this case, while the count display is not being performed, the non-target notice E2 (first effect) functions as an effect having a lower expectation than the non-target notice F (second effect), while the count display is While this is being performed, the non-target announcement E2 (first effect) functions as an effect having higher expectations than the non-target announcement F (second effect). Therefore, although it is a non-target notice E2 (first effect) that is not an effect target of the notice-side timer effect (count effect display) and is not originally related, the non-target notice E2 (first effect) is displayed before the count display is consumed. It becomes possible to make people interested in whether or not one effect appears, and by doing so, maintain the entertainment of the game in the period until the count display is exhausted and the predetermined effect (timer target candidate effect) is performed. It is expected to be planned.

In addition, when the count display is started with a small total count of the preview timer effect, the big hit expectation is set to be lower than when the count display is started with a large total count of the preview timer effect. By realizing the control related to such a special timer, even when the count display is started with the total number of counts in which the notice timer effect is small, the non-target notice E2 is executed while the count display is being executed. It becomes possible to make people aware of the possibility that will appear, and it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest in playing games. In this sense, when the non-target notice E2 appears while the count display is being executed, the big hit confirmation is a premier aspect in the production (conversation notice, cut-in, character action, etc.) that is the target of the subsequent timer production. It is desirable to control so that the ratio of occurrence of is high. The ratio may include 100%.

In this embodiment, the non-target notices E1 to E3 are executed as so-called step effects, and the non-target notice E2 (first effect) is a condition that the non-target notice E1 appears. It is supposed to appear in. Further, the non-target notice E3 is allowed to appear on condition that the non-target notices E1 and E2 respectively appear, and in this embodiment, when the non-target notice E3 appears, the big hit symbol always appears. I am trying. With such a configuration, if the non-target notice E1 (specific effect) appears while the notice display of the notice timer effect is being displayed, it is possible to make the person interested in whether the non-target notice E2 appears. As a result, it becomes possible to favorably maintain the interest of the game during the count digestion period.

However, the non-target notices E1 to E3 do not necessarily have to be executed as so-called step effects, and are not necessary for realizing the above-described effect relation between the non-target notice E2 and the non-target notice F. The target notices E1 and E3 may not necessarily be prepared. Further, the order is such that the non-target notice F2 (first effect) appears after the non-target notice E2 (first effect) appears, but the order is not limited to this. The target notice E2 (first effect) may appear. In short, the non-target notice E2 may appear first in all notice productions, or may appear last in all notice productions. May be set appropriately. Further, the non-target notice E2 may be an image related (suggested) to the type of reach effect executed in the variable display.

Further, when the non-target announcement E2 is not realized as a so-called step effect, it is desirable that the non-target announcement E2 is performed in any of a plurality of modes with different jackpot expectations. At this time, when the non-target notice E2 appears in a mode with the highest jackpot expectation, the jackpot expectation may be higher than that of the non-target notice F even if the count display is not performed. .. However, comparing the jackpot expectation (expected degree including all aspects) that can be expected when the non-target notice E2 appears in the situation where the count display is not performed, and the jackpot expectation that can be expected when the non-target notice F appears It is required that the jackpot expectation is higher when the non-target notice F appears.

In this regard, when the non-target notice E2 is made to appear in the situation where the count display is being performed (in the case of a special timer), the non-target notice E2 is made to appear in one of a plurality of modes including a mode in which the big hit expectation is low. It is desirable that the big hit expectation degree is higher than that of the non-target notice F regardless of which mode appears. In other words, in this case, a performance situation in which the big hit expectation level is dramatically increased even though the non-target notice E2 is executed in a mode where the big hit expectation degree is low is created. Even if there is a momentary disappointment due to the appearance, it can be expected to improve the enjoyment of the game as a surprise by confirming that the count display is being executed. In this sense, even in such a special timer situation, the non-target announcement E2 can be executed in a mode with a low jackpot expectation, and the non-target announcement E2 can be executed in any mode including the low mode. Even if is executed (further, regardless of whether or not another notice effect is generated), it is preferable that the expectation degree of the big hit symbol is the same. The expectation level may include 100%. However, even in this case, when the non-target notice E2 is made to appear in the situation where the count display is being performed, it is desirable to set so that a high-expectation mode among a plurality of modes is likely to appear.

Further, when performing the count display across the non-target notice E2, for example, the same number (for example, "10" or "5") is used regardless of whether the count display starts with a different count total number (for example, "10" or "5"). It is desirable to control so that the non-target notice E2 appears when it is "1"). At this time, less than half of the candidates (for example, “5”) having the smallest total count among candidates (for example, “20”, “10”, and “5”) as the total count that appears at the start of count display. It is desirable to control so that the non-target notice E2 appears when it is a number (a number less than 2.5). In this way, by preventing the non-target notice E2 from appearing until the end of the count display being exhausted, it is possible to favorably maintain amusement of interest in the period until the count display is exhausted.

Note that the non-target announcement F may be executed in any of a plurality of modes with different jackpot expectations, but in the situation of the special timer, the non-target announcement F has the highest jackpot expectations. Even if it appears in a mode, it is required to set such that the non-target announcement F does not have a higher jackpot expectation than the non-target announcement E2 (for example, a mode with the lowest jackpot expectation).

Further, the non-target notice E2 may be allowed to appear at any of a plurality of timings from the time when the variable display is started. That is, in this case, even if the count display appears with the same total number of counts at the same timing, there will be a case where the non-target notice E2 is crossed and a case where the non-target notice E2 is not crossed. It will be expected to be maintained.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, regarding the variable timer effect, the non-target notice E2 appears within the execution period of the count display among the candidates selectable as the execution mode (effect pattern). It does not include such an aspect.

Then, as shown in FIG. 149, in the processing of step S5511, when it is determined that the form of the notice timer effect determined in the count display lottery (step S5510) can be a special timer, step S5512. When the first timer non-target notice lottery is performed as the process of No. 1 and it is determined that the aspect of the notice timer effect produced in the count display lottery (step S5510) is not a special timer, the process of step S5525 As a result, the second timer non-target announcement lottery will be performed.

In the case where it is determined that the special timer can be used, for example, in the example shown in FIGS. 161 and 162, a rendering mode indicated by bold and italic letters among a plurality of rendering modes (for example, FIG. 161, the conversation notices 2 and 3, the hold changes 2 to 4, the cut-in A1 and 2, the accessory movements 1 and 2) are selected, and whether or not the performance mode can be a special timer. Are classified in advance.

FIG. 163 is a diagram showing an example of the table T7a referred to in the first timer non-target notice lottery (step S5512), and FIG. 164 is referred to in the second timer non-target notice lottery (step S5525). It is a figure which shows an example of table T7b.

As shown in FIGS. 163 and 164, in the timer non-target notice lottery (steps S5512 and S5525), the notice side timer effect cannot be produced based on the result of the big hit or the variation pattern (variation number). A determination process is performed as to which of the non-target effects E1 to E3, F prepared as effects is to be executed.

Of these, in the table T7a (first timer non-target notice lottery) referred to during the special timer, the notice E2 is compared with the table T7b (second timer non-target notice lottery) referred to when not in the special timer. The big hit expectation degree when the mode to execute (PTN3, 4, 8) is selected is significantly higher. More specifically, when the mode (PTN3, 4, 8) of executing the notification E2 is selected, the jackpot expectation is higher than when the mode (PTN5, 6) of executing the notification F is selected. ing.

On the other hand, in the table T7b (second timer non-target notice lottery) referred to when the timer is not the special timer, the notice F is executed when the mode (PTN3, 4, 8) for executing the notice E2 is selected. The jackpot expectation is lower than when the mode (PTN5, 6) is selected.

In this embodiment, when the table T7a referred to during the special timer is compared with the table T7b referred to during the non-special timer, when the mode (PTN3, 4, 8) for executing the advance notice E2 is selected. Although there is a change in the distribution of effect random numbers and there is a change in the jackpot expectation level, when the mode (PTN5, 6) of executing the notice F is selected, there is no change in the jackpot expectation level and even in the distribution of the effect random numbers. Not the same.

According to such an effect by the special timer, when the count display is executed in a manner of straddling the non-target announcement E2 (special timer), a manner of straddling the non-target announcement F without straddling the non-target announcement E2 ( Compared to the case where the count display is executed in a mode (not a special timer), the proportion of appearance modes with high expectations when the count display reaches a predetermined value, and the jackpot pattern appear when the pattern production is stopped The percentage will be increased.

Further speaking, when both the non-target notice E2 (first effect) and the non-target notice F (second effect) are executed in the one symbol effect in which the count effect is not executed, the one symbol in which the count effect is not executed In the relation, the non-target notice F (second effect) is not executed and the proportion of the big hit symbol appears is higher than when the non-target notice E2 (first effect) is executed. Even if the (second effect) is not executed and the non-target notice E2 (first effect) is executed in the one symbol effect, the count effect is performed in the first mode across the non-target notice E2 (first effect). When is executed, both the non-target notice E2 (first effect) and the non-target notice F (second effect) are respectively executed in one symbol effect and straddle the non-target notice F (second effect). As compared with the case where the count effect is executed in two modes, the proportion of the big hit symbols appearing is increased.

That is, in this case, even if the "non-target notice E2 (first effect)" and the "count effect" are respectively executed, the count effect is "non-target notice E2 (first effect)". Or the "non-target notice E2 (first production)" that is executed not to cross the "non-target notice E2 (first production)". Depending on whether the "non-target notice F (second effect)" is not performed than in the case where "non-target notice F (second effect)" is performed in one symbol effect. Will be higher. Therefore, the productions (counter notice, hold change, cut-in A, action A action, cut-in) which are different from both the production target of the count production (non-target notice E2 (first production) and non-target notice F (second production)). B, character B action, etc.) and the non-target notice E2 (first effect) and the non-target notice F (second effect) that are not originally related to each other, but "the count effect is terminated. Until the non-target notice E2 (first effect) appears, or "even if the non-target notice E2 (first effect) appears after the count effect ends, the non-target notice F (first Second production) will be further executed”, etc., and by this, the count display is digested and the entertainment of the game in the period until the predetermined production (timer target candidate production) is performed It will be expected to be maintained.

In this embodiment, when the count production straddles the non-target notice E2 (first production) that is not executed as the production target of the count production, it is not executed as the production target of the count production. A relationship in which the expectation degree when the non-target notice F (second effect) straddles the counter effect is reversed from the relationship in which the expectation degree when the count effect does not straddle is reversed. However, the non-target notice E2 (first effect) and the non-target notice F (second effect) may be executed as a target object of the count effect. According to such a configuration, when the count effect is executed, the performance regarding whether or not the count effect crosses the non-target notice E2 (first effect) and the non-target notice F (second effect). Will also be added.

Further, one of the non-target notice E2 (first effect) and the non-target notice F (second effect) can be executed as a target object for the count effect, and the other is executed as a target object for the counter effect. It may be one that does not exist.

Further, when the count effect straddles the notice E2 (first effect), the jackpot expectation is higher than when the count effect straddles the notice F (second effect), and it is advantageous to the player. It may be configured such that the rate of transition to a different game state (such as a high-probability time saving game state) is high. At this time, the rate of shifting to a gaming state advantageous to the player (such as a high probability time saving gaming state) may be 100%.

Further, as described above, the count effect is executed in any of a plurality of modes (total number of counts, display mode, timing at which counting is started, etc.). In this regard, regarding the count effect of the specific mode, it is executed so as to stride over the notice E2 (first effect) and not over the notice F (second effect), and between the notice E2 (first effect). It is desirable to execute so that there is at least a case where it is executed over the notice F (second effect). According to such a configuration, for example, even if the counting effect for the same number of seconds is started, it is possible to straddle only the notice E2 (first effect) or only the notice F (second effect). Since it is possible to advance the count effect while it is unclear whether or not it is, it is possible to favorably maintain the interest of the game during the period in which the count effect is being executed.

Furthermore, regarding the count effect of the specific mode, the case where the notification is executed so as to stride over the notice E2 (first effect) and not over the notice F (second effect), and when it is performed over the notice E2 (first effect). In addition to the case where it is executed without straddling the notice F (second effect), there is also a case where it is executed so that neither the notice E2 (first effect) nor the notice F (second effect) is straddled. It is desirable to have it. According to such a configuration, it is possible to give a sense of expectation that the notice E2 (first effect) and the notice F (second effect) will appear over the entire period from the start to the end of the count effect. become able to. In this case, the notice E2 (first effect) and the notice F (second effect) may appear within the same symbol variation in which the count aspect of the specific mode is executed, but within the same symbol variation. May not appear in.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the count effect straddles the notice E2 (first effect), the jackpot pattern appears at a higher rate than when the count effect straddles the notice F (second effect). As configured. However, when the count effect straddles the notice E2 (first effect), it is desirable that the proportion of the big hit symbol does not change, regardless of which mode the count effect is executed. .. According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a completely independent performance that is not affected by the performance such as "which aspect of the count performance appears", and the count performance is executed. It becomes possible to suitably enhance the presentation performance at that time.

On the other hand, when the count effect straddles the notice F (second effect), it is possible to change the proportion of the big hit symbols depending on in which mode the count effect is executed. desirable. According to such a configuration, depending on whether the target of the count effect is the notice E2 (first effect) or the notice F (second effect), the aspect as the count effect becomes the jackpot expectation. Since it is possible to make the effect of influence different from that of the effect, it is expected that the entertainment of the game is appropriately maintained during the period in which the count effect is performed.

However, even if the count effect straddling the notice F (second effect) has the highest expectation of the plurality of aspects, the degree of expectation when the count effect straddles the notice E2 (first effect) is exceeded. It is desirable not to have them, for example, to have the same degree of expectation. The degree of expectation may be 100%.

In addition, in at least a part of the count effects of the plurality of modes, the notification F (second effect) may be crossed but the notification E2 (first effect) may not be crossed. It is desirable to do. In this way, the number of aspects as the count effect that can stride over the notice E2 (first effect) is made smaller than the number of aspects as the count effect that can stride over the notice F (second effect). By doing so, it is possible to suggest the possibility of straddling the notice F (second effect) depending on in which mode the count effect is performed. However, it is desirable to prepare at least two or more modes for the count effect that can cross the notice E2 (first effect).

Further, the notice F (second effect) is executed before the notice E2 (first effect), and the notice E2 (first effect) is issued after the notice F (second effect) is finished. It may be executed as described above. Then, at this time, when the count effect straddling the notice F (second effect) appears when the notice F (second effect) is executed, compared to when the count effect straddling the notice F (second effect) is executed, It is desirable to increase the rate of appearance of the count effect straddling the notice E2 (first effect). According to such a configuration, when the count effect is executed, the notice E2 (first effect) is output even if the count effect is ended not by the notice E2 (first effect) but by the notice F (second effect). It is possible to expect that the straddling count effect will further appear, and it is possible to appropriately maintain the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment executes the effect pattern based on the result of the big hit determination. In this regard, it is desirable that even if the notice pattern F (second effect) does not appear, the notice E2 (first effect) and the count effect that straddles the notice E2 can each appear. According to such a configuration, even if the notice F (second effect) does not appear, it is possible to maintain an expectation for the appearance of the count effect straddling the notice E2 (first effect). Like However, when the notice F (second effect) does not appear, the notice E2 (first effect) is issued compared to when the notice F (second effect) has been executed but the count effect straddling this has not appeared. It is desirable to reduce the rate of appearance of the straddling count effect.

Also, regarding the provision of a plurality of modes as the modes of the count effect (the total number of counts, the display mode, the timing at which the count is started, etc.) that can cross the notice F (second effect), As described above, even when the count effect is executed in any of the plurality of modes, the notice F (second effect) is not necessarily executed within the period in which the count effect is executed. Is desirable. According to such a configuration, even when the count effect is executed in a desired manner, whether or not the notice F (second effect) appears within the period in which the count effect is executed is also determined. As a result, it becomes possible to provide fun, and it is possible to favorably maintain the interest of the game while the count effect is being performed.

In addition, as for the mode of the count effect (the total number of counts, the display mode, the timing to start counting, etc.) capable of straddling the notice E2 (first effect), a plurality of modes are prepared. As described above, when the count effect is executed in any of the plurality of modes, it is desirable that the notice E2 (first effect) is always executed within the period in which the count effect is executed. .. According to such a configuration, when the count effect is executed in a desired mode, it is previously suggested that the count effect is significantly increased over the notice E2 (first effect). Therefore, it becomes possible to suitably improve the interest of the game while the count effect is being performed.

Then, when the timer non-target notice lottery (first timer non-target notice lottery or second timer non-target notice lottery) is performed and it is determined which of the non-target notices is to be executed, next, step S5513. It is determined whether or not it is in a state in which it is determined to execute the above-mentioned special timer as the process of (1).

That is, as described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, in the situation where a specific type of reach effect (character reach) is selected, the notice timer is based on the result of the big hit determination (win or win pattern, etc.). It is possible to perform control to start production (count production display) and continue the count display even after the big hit symbol (special display mode) appears in the production pattern (production display). That is, in this case, even after the production pattern (effect display) according to the result of the big hit determination is finished and hidden, the count display will be continued, and therefore the special symbol from the remaining time of the count display, etc. It becomes difficult to predict the variation time (reach type), and, for example, the production in which the count display started during the design variation is involved in the production during the big hit game state after the symbol is stopped is realized. It will be possible, for example, to make the subsequent production development interesting.

More specifically, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to the present embodiment, first, after the big hit symbol (special display mode) appears (for example, the big hit game start interval period and the big hit game after the symbol is fixedly stopped). In the period), the first special effect that the percentage of winning in the type that shifts to the high-probability time saving game state increases when it appears, and the number of rounds (16 rounds) that has a large expected value that can be won as a prize when it appears It is possible to execute the second special effect in which the ratio of execution is high. Note that these ratios may include 100%. Then, the notice side timer effect intended for the effect that is started after such a big hit pattern (special display mode) appears is started before the big hit pattern (special display mode) appears, and the count is made. The display is controlled to be continuously executed after the big hit symbol (special display mode) appears.

That is, in this case, the count display of the notice side timer effect started before the big hit design (special display mode) does not end when the big hit design (special display mode) appears, and the big hit design (special display mode) When a specific numerical value (here, 0) is reached after continuously appearing after appears, the first special effect or the second special effect comes to appear. Therefore, when such a special timer appears, it is a definite suggestion that a big hit pattern (special display mode) appears in the effect pattern, and when it appears, a high-probability time short game state or a 16 round big hit game. Since the rate at which the game is executed becomes relatively high, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

However, in order to realize such a special timer, first of all, in addition to winning the big hit in the big hit judgment, the big hit is a specific type (a type that causes a high probability short time gaming state, a 16 round big hit game) When it is determined that it is the specific type, it is possible to control the special timer to appear with a higher execution probability than when it is determined that the specific type is not the specific type. Desired.

Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when the execution of the above-mentioned special timer is determined in the processing of step S5513, the execution of whether or not to make the special timer appear as the processing of next step S5514. The execution mode of the special timer including the presence/absence is determined.

For example, in the process of step S5514, first, it is determined whether or not the big hit is a specific type (a type that causes a high-probability time saving game state or a type that causes a 16-round big hit game). As a result, by determining that the special timer does not appear with a predetermined probability when the jackpot is not the specific type, the expectation that the jackpot is the specific type is increased when the special timer appears due to the thinning. Will be able to. The expectation may be 100%. In addition, when it is determined that the special timer does not appear, instead of the special timer, another notice effect (timer target candidate effect, non-target notice) or a notice timer effect may appear.

In this embodiment, in the process of step S5514 after the determination to execute the special timer is once made in the timer target advance notice lottery, the type of jackpot is determined and the special timer is executed based on the result. It was decided to decide again whether or not to do it, but whether the special timer is executed in the process of step S5514 by performing the timer target advance notice lottery based on the type of big hit as well as the big hit It is also possible not to decide again whether or not to decide.

Further, for the first special effect or the second special effect after the appearance of the big hit symbol (special display mode) (for example, the start interval period of the big hit game or the big hit game period after the symbol is fixedly stopped), the big hit is It may be executed in any of a plurality of modes having different expectations as a special type. That is, in this case, when the count display reaches a specific numerical value (here, 0) when the special timer appears, the first special effect or the second special effect is executed in a high-expectation mode among a plurality of modes. It will be.

Further, in this embodiment, for the effects (the first special effect or the second special effect) after the jackpot pattern (special display mode) appears, a predetermined time has elapsed since the jackpot pattern (special display mode) appeared. Although it was decided to appear at the timing (in the example shown in FIG. 161, 20 seconds passed), a plurality of timings after the jackpot pattern (special display mode) appeared (for example, the first when 15 seconds passed). It may be made to appear at the timing and the second timing when 30 seconds have passed). That is, in this case, as the special timer, the first mode that reaches a specific numerical value (here, 0) when 15 seconds have passed (or slightly before) after the big hit symbol (special display mode) appears, and the big hit symbol Either 30 seconds after (special display mode) appears (or a little before that), a second mode that reaches a specific numerical value (here, 0) is selected and made to appear.

At this time, it is set such that the ratio of the special type big hit is higher when the effect appears at the second timing than when the effect appears at the first timing, and the big hit is the specific type. At this time, if it is executed so that the ratio of causing the special timer to appear in the second mode is higher than that in the first mode, how far the count display after the jackpot symbol (special display mode) appears will be continued It will be possible to add fun.
Note that these ratios may include 100%. By the way, when the effect does not appear at both the first timing and the second timing, the proportion of the special type jackpot that is obtained is set lower than when the effect appears at the first timing. ..

Regarding the special timer, in the execution period of the variable display before the big hit symbol (special display mode) appears, for example, it is displayed as "timer preparing" and displayed as "timer preparing". The count display may be started after the big hit symbol (special display mode) appears as it is. That is, during the big hit game, the time required for digesting each round game changes according to the progress of the game, so in the execution period of the variable display before the big hit symbol (special display mode) appears. If the count display is started, it is difficult to set the count display of the special timer to reach a predetermined numerical value during a specific round game, and further to set the production to be the production target. In this regard, if the count display is started after the jackpot design (special display mode) appears, for example, the state of "timer in preparation" is maintained until a specific round game during the jackpot game is started. Then, by starting the count display at the same time that the specific round game is started, the count display reaches a predetermined value during the specific round game, and the effect to be the performance target is executed. Can be set to. At this time, the display of "timer in preparation" or the like may not be performed until the count display is started after the big hit symbol (special display mode) appears.

Further, when the count display is started after the big hit symbol (special display mode) appears in this way, it is different even during the execution period of the variable display before the big hit symbol (special display mode) appears. You may make it start the count display of the notice side timer effect.
As for the other notice side timer effect, an effect to be an effect may be generated after the count display has been consumed before the big hit symbol (special display mode) appears, or a big hit symbol ( The special display mode) may appear, and then the count display may be exhausted and the effect to be the effect target may appear (double special timer).

It should be noted that different effect contents appear in the effect during the variable display and the effect during the big hit game, and an effect at the time of effect switching (for example, an opening effect) that is different from any effect is usually executed between them. It is often done. In this respect, the count display is set so that the count display does not reach a predetermined numerical value for any timer production within the switching period in which the production at the time of such production switching is executed, and the count display is not displayed within the switching period. It is desirable to make the player recognize that the two effects (here, the effect during the variable display and the effect during the big hit game) are not connected to each other. However, in this case, while the count display of the timer effect is hidden, the count display is digested only for the time elapsed, and when the count display is displayed again, It is desirable to control so that the value is smaller than the numerical value of (a large value when counting up, not a counting down).

Then, in this way, the execution mode of the special timer is determined (step S5514), or when the execution of the special timer is not determined (NO in step S5513), the timer target advance notice lottery or counting is performed as the process of step S5515. After setting the notice effect determined by the display lottery or the like in a predetermined storage area, the process related to the notice lottery is ended. As a result, the drawing data or the like corresponding to the effect determined in the advance notice lottery is created, and the control for starting each effect in the effect during the effect symbol fluctuation is performed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the advance notice timer effect has not been won (NO in step S5503), after the second mission effect lottery (step S5551) is performed, various lottery related to the advance notice timer effect (previous side) Without the timer type lottery or single lottery), the timer target candidate production (advance notice) with the contents (table) according to whether the mission production is decided as the result of the second mission production lottery (step S5552) The effect lottery (steps S5553, S5554, S5563, S5564) for the notice effect that can be an effect object of the side timer effect is performed.

More specifically, one of the following processes will be executed.
In the case of the fifth processing state in which it is decided not to execute the notice effect on the notice side (NO in step S5503) and to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (YES in step S5552). First, based on the notice number determination table referred to in the fifth processing situation, how many of the above-mentioned timer target candidate effects are produced as the notice contents of the notice effect during execution of one effect pattern. A determination process as to whether to make it appear is performed (step S5553). Next, a determination process is performed as to which type of notice effect is to appear as the timer target candidate effect in the number determined in the determination process (step S5554).

In the sixth processing situation in which it is determined not to execute the notice timer effect (NO in step S5503) and not execute the mission effect (make a conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5552). First, based on the notice number determination table referred to in the sixth processing situation, how many of the above-mentioned timer target candidate effects are set as the effect contents of the notice effect during execution of one effect pattern. A determination process as to whether to make it appear is performed (step S5563). Next, a determination process is performed as to which type of notice effect is to be made to appear as the timer target candidate effect by the number determined in the determination process (step S5564).

Then, as described above with reference to FIG. 153, even in the fifth and sixth processing situations in which the notice timer effect is not executed (NO in step S5503), the mission effect (let the conversation notice appear) is executed. When the determination is made, the upper limit number of appearances (average number of appearances) of the timer target candidate productions is increased as compared to when the determination is not made to execute the mission production (let the conversation notice appear). I'm trying to control.

FIG. 165 shows a fifth processing situation in which it is decided not to execute the advance notice timer effect (NO in step S5503) and to execute the mission effect (make a conversation advance notice appear) (YES in step S5552). FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a table T5e referred to in the processing of step S5553 in the case of. In addition, in FIG. 166, the sixth determination is made that the notice timer effect is not executed (NO in step S5503) and the mission effect (let the conversation notice appear) is not executed (NO in step S5552). It is a figure which shows an example of the table T5f referred to in the process of step S5563 when it is in a process condition.

First, as shown in FIG. 165, since the table T5e is referred to when the mission effect is executed, the variation variation pattern (mission cannot succeed) in which the conversation notice appears as the effect content of the variation effect. When the fluctuation numbers 9, 13, 17, and 21 corresponding to the fluctuation pattern) are acquired, the table T5e is not referred to. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 166, in the table T5f, the table is referred to when the mission effect is not executed. The table T5f is also referred to when the variation numbers 9, 13, 17, and 21 corresponding to the non-variation pattern) are acquired. Therefore, in the table T5f, the effect random numbers are assigned to the variation numbers 9, 13, 17, and 21 separately for each notice number.

Further, both the table T5e and the table T5f are referred to in the fifth and sixth processing situations where the notice timer effect is not executed, and in these processing situations, the notice timer effect is produced. It is not essential to select one of the timer target candidate effects that can be the target. Therefore, in both the table T5e and the table T5f, an effect random number is allocated for each variation number so that the timer target candidate effect does not necessarily have to be selected (the number of notices is 0).

In addition, even among the same reach production contents (character reach and SP reach) in the table T5e and the table T5f, a variation number in which the timer target candidate production (conversation notice or cut-in A) does not appear as the production content of the variation production is changed. As the content of the production of the effect, the ratio of selecting a large number of candidate productions for the timer is higher than the variation number in which the candidate production for the timer (conversation notice or cut-in A) does not appear. In the variation number 7 which is the reach, up to three timer target candidate effects can appear, and in the variation number 15 which is the SP reach at the time of loss, the timer target candidate effects can only appear in a maximum of five. The points that are not performed are the same as the above-mentioned table T5a and the like.

Then, as shown in FIG. 149, in the fifth and sixth processing situations where the notice timer effect is not executed in this way, how many of the above timer target candidate effects are to appear as effect contents of the notice effect. After the determination process (steps S5553, S5563) is performed, a determination process (steps S5554, S5564) is performed as to which type of advance notice effect appears as the timer target candidate effect by the determined number. .. However, when it is determined as a result of the notice number determination process (steps S5553, S5563) that none of the timer target candidate effects are to appear (the notice number is 0), in the timer target notice lottery (steps S5554, S5564), One processing result that does not select any of the timer target candidate effects regardless of the variation number must be selected.

FIG. 167 is a fifth processing situation in which it is decided not to execute the notice timer effect (NO in step S5503) and to execute the mission effect (make a conversation notice appear) (YES in step S5552). 9 is a diagram showing an example of a table T6e-1 referred to in the case where it is determined that the number of advance notices is set to 1 as a result of executing the process of step S5553 (step S5554). FIG. In addition, in FIG. 168, the decision is made that the advance notice timer effect is not executed (NO in step S5503), and the mission effect (make a conversation advance notice appear) is executed (YES in step S5552). FIG. 19 is a diagram showing an example of a table T6e-2 referred to when the number of notices is determined to be 2 as a result of executing the process of step S5553 in the processing situation (step S5554).

In addition, in FIG. 169, a sixth determination is made that the notice side timer effect is not executed (NO in step S5503) and the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is not executed (NO in step S5552). In a processing situation, it is a figure which shows an example of the table T6f-1 referred to when it is determined to set the number of notices to 1 as a result of performing the process of step S5563 (step S5564). In addition, in FIG. 170, a sixth determination is made that the notice timer effect is not executed (NO in step S5503) and the mission effect (make a conversation notice appear) is not executed (NO in step S5552). FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an example of a table T6f-2 referred to when the number of notices is determined to be 2 as a result of executing the process of step S5563 in the processing situation (step S5564).

For example, as shown in FIGS. 167 to 170, the tables T6e and T6f that are referred to in the fifth and sixth processing situations are when it is decided not to execute the notice timer effect. Since they are referred to, none of the N advance notice effects decided to be executed as the timer target candidate production are set as the production targets of the notice timer production, and all of them are normal. It will be executed as the form of the notice effect (in the figure, the mark x indicates that it is executed as the form of the usual notice effect).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 167 to 170, in the tables T6e and T6f which are referred to in the fifth and sixth processing situations, the same effect is produced by the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect. Since it is not a target, it is executed when the variation numbers 9, 10, 13, 14, 17, 18, 21, 22 corresponding to the variation pattern that causes the conversation notice to appear are obtained as the effect contents of the variable effect. Random effect random numbers are assigned to the respective variable numbers so that conversation announcement is not selected as the announcement effect to be performed. Further, similarly, in the tables T6e and T6f, variation numbers 11 to 14 and 19 to corresponding to the loss variation patterns (variation patterns in which the mission cannot succeed) that cause the cut-ins A and B to appear as the effect contents of the variation effects. When 22 is acquired, the effect random numbers are assigned to the respective variation numbers so that the cut-ins A and B are not selected as the notice effect to be executed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 167 to 170, the tables T6e and T6f that are referred to in the fifth and sixth processing situations are referred to when the notice timer effect is not executed. Therefore, the announcement (here, a special timer) premised on performing the announcement timer production is not included in the announcement productions to be selected.

In addition, in the table T6e that is referred to in the fifth processing state, it is referred to when it is determined to execute the mission effect (let the conversation notice appear). As also shown, when the variation numbers 10, 14, 18, and 22 for executing "conversation notice" are acquired as the content of the variation effect, or when "conversation notice" is selected as the timer target candidate effect (contents of the notice effect). Is selected (PTN1), the special display (mission success) is displayed, and it is the same as the case of the above-described table 6a in that the jackpot symbol is definitely suggested.

Further, in the table T6f that is referred to in the sixth processing situation, since it is referred to when the mission effect (let the conversation notice appear), the conversation notice appears as the effect content of the variable effect. For the variation numbers 9, 13, 17, and 21 corresponding to the lost variation pattern (variation pattern in which the mission cannot succeed), the effect random numbers are separately assigned for each notice number. Is the same as in.

Then, as shown in FIG. 149, even when it is determined in the process of step S5503 that the notice timer effect is not executed, after the timer target notice lottery (steps S5554, S5564) is performed in this way, Regarding which of the non-target effects E1 to E3, F which are prepared as effects that cannot be the effect target of the notice timer effect on the basis of the winning result of the jackpot or the variation pattern (variation number) The determination process (third timer non-target advance notice lottery: step S5555) is performed.

Although the table referred to in step S5555 is omitted, it basically has the same mode as the table T7b (second timer non-target notice lottery) referred to when the timer is not a special timer. When the mode of executing E2 (PTN3, 4, 8) is selected, the jackpot expectation degree is lower than when the mode of executing advance notice F (PTN5, 6) is selected.

After the third timer non-target notice lottery (step S5555) is performed in this way, the timer target notice lottery (steps S5554, S5564) and the third timer non-target notice lottery (step S5515) are performed next. After setting the notice production determined in step S5555 or the like in a predetermined storage area, the process related to the notice lottery is finished. As a result, the drawing data or the like corresponding to the effect determined in the advance notice lottery is created, and the control for starting each effect in the effect during the effect symbol fluctuation is performed.

In the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, when it is determined not to execute the notice timer effect in the process of step S5503, the timer target notice lottery and the third timer non-target notice lottery are different processes. I decided to do as. However, if it is determined in the process of step S5503 that the notice timer effect is not executed, it is not necessary to determine the execution mode of the non-target effects E1 to E3, F in relation to the notice timer effect. The timer target advance notice lottery and the third timer non-target advance notice lottery may be executed in one lottery process.

In addition, the above-described special timer mode (the non-target notice E2 is set so that the jackpot expectation degree is lower than that of the non-target notice F in a situation where the count display of the notice timer effect is not displayed. , In the situation where the count display of the notice side timer effect is displayed, it is set so that the big hit expectation degree is higher than that of the non-target notice F). Since it is not necessary to determine the execution mode of the non-target effects E1 to E3, F, the timer target advance notice lottery and the third timer non-target advance notice lottery may be executed in one lottery process.

Further, in this embodiment, after determining whether or not to execute the advance notice timer effect, the determination process as to which effect as the advance effect is executed and in which mode is performed is performed. It is also possible to determine whether or not to execute the notice side timer effect and determine the execution mode after determining in what mode the effect of (1) is executed.

By the way, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, as described above, when a winning (accepting a game ball) to the starting opening 2002 or 2004 occurs, a pre-reading effect on the hold information according to the winning is performed. A determination process as to whether or not it is performed is performed (steps S5245, S5255). In this regard, in this determination process, the hold mode that changes the display mode (color, form, etc.) of the hold display that is the target of the look-ahead effect is based on the information on the big hit determination or the variation pattern included in the hold information. Lottery for change effects (lottery for execution or not, display mode), lottery for look-ahead zone effects across multiple fluctuations (lottery for presence or absence, execution mode (color, number of consecutive executions, etc.)), etc. In addition to the above, a lottery is performed regarding whether or not the variable display according to the hold information is to be the target of the "timer prefetch effect".

Here, the timer prefetch effect is an effect in which, when the variable display (variable display of the effect target) that is in a hold state when it appears is in execution, the ratio of the notice timer effect that appears within the variable time is high. That is, for example, in the effect display device 1600 or the like, a predetermined image (for example, “timer is being prepared) is started at the start timing of the variable display of the special symbol that is started after the winning timing (the timing when the timer prefetching effect is won). , Etc.) is displayed. The reason why the predetermined image (for example, “timer preparation” etc.) does not appear at the timing of winning the prize (timing of winning the timer prefetching effect) is to determine which hold information corresponds to the timer prefetching effect. This is because it is difficult to recognize.

According to such a timer look-ahead effect, it is possible to suggest that the notice timer side effect appears at a high rate over a plurality of variable displays while it remains unspecified which hold display is supported. Since it becomes possible, it is expected that amusement of the game will be maintained over a plurality of variable displays. However, of the preceding effects (pre-reading effects), including such timer pre-reading effects, it is possible to continuously (or continue) over a plurality of variable displays without specifying which hold display is supported. When performing an effect (advance period effect), if the same type of effect (advance period effect) and its execution period may overlap, the effect becomes too complicated and the target/objective is set. There is a concern that it may not be possible to understand whether it is a production and the interest in the game will decline.

Therefore, when determining whether or not to execute such a preceding period effect (pre-reading determination at the time of winning), the preceding period effect corresponding to the other winning information that has been won is not executed and is waiting for execution. Make a judgment as to whether or not it is in the state of. Then, the preceding period effect such as the timer prefetch effect is newly provided, at least on condition that the preceding period effect corresponding to the other winning information that has been won is not executed and is not in the waiting state. Therefore, it is possible to make a decision as to whether or not it occurs. As a result, it is possible to prevent the two preceding period effects from being executed in an overlapping manner, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

As the preceding period effect, for example, in addition to the timer look-ahead effect, the same-mode continuous look-ahead effect in which at least a part of the stop symbol appears in the same manner (such as the color of numbers) over a plurality of variations, and a background image over a plurality of variations It is possible to adopt a look-ahead zone effect or the like that changes the character into a special mode. Then, in the above process (pre-reading determination at the time of winning), the preceding period effects of the same type among these preceding period effects do not appear to overlap, and even in the case of different preceding period effects, these execution periods Will be controlled so that they do not overlap. Of the look-ahead effects, which of the pending displays is specified, the execution status of these preceding period effects is specified for the type of effects (for example, pending change effects) that are performed over a plurality of variable displays. It is desirable to be able to appear regardless of the situation, but if a new prize is generated when the preceding period effect is in execution or in the state of execution waiting, a new prize occurs when it is not in that situation. It is desirable to perform the pre-reading determination at the time of winning so that the appearance ratio of the type of effect (for example, hold change effect) as the pre-reading effect corresponding to the winning becomes lower than that in the case of doing.

In this way, while a preceding period effect such as a timer look-ahead effect (an effect of continuously (or continuing) over multiple variable displays without specifying which hold display is supported) is being executed. Even if a winning of a game ball newly occurs, the prohibition control is performed so that this does not occur for the preceding period effect corresponding to this, so that the game due to the interference of the two preceding period effects The decline in interest can be suppressed. However, if such prohibition control is performed, the frequency of performing the preceding period effect as the preceding effect becomes low as much as the preceding period effect is targeted for the prohibition control, and there is a concern that amusement of the game may be deteriorated. It

Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to the present embodiment, when the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the hold information is not yet started, when the preceding period effect corresponding to the hold information is executed, first, the specific effect is generated. Information indicating that the status is restricted is set. Then, if the hold information is newly stored when the information is set by the previously stored hold information, the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the previously stored hold information is at least ended. Until then, the preceding period effect corresponding to the newly stored hold information is not executed, while the newly stored after the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the previously stored hold information is finished. The control is performed so that the preceding period effect corresponding to the pending information can be executed.

That is, in this case, even if it is once determined that execution of the preceding period effect corresponding to the hold information is not permitted at the time when the hold information is newly stored, then the game is advanced and stored earlier. When it comes to a game situation where there is no concern that production interference will occur with the preceding period effect corresponding to the hold information, the execution of the preceding period effect is once permitted once it is determined that the execution is not permitted. As a result, it is possible to maintain the frequency at which the preceding period effect is performed appropriately while performing the prohibition control for the preceding period effect, thereby suppressing a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

More specifically, in the first special map pre-reading process (FIG. 135: step S5245) and the second special map pre-reading process (FIG. 136: step S5255) when a new winning occurs, first, the first special holding is performed. Based on the counter value of the number counter or the second special holding number counter, etc., it is determined what the holding order (digest order) of the new winning is. For example, in the case of the first special symbol look-ahead process, first, the pending information corresponding to the new winning is stored in any of the first special symbol reserved storage area a ~ the first special symbol reserved storage area d. Determine if you are in a state. Then, after this, in the pending information that is stored before the new winning and the variable display is being executed and the pending information that the variable display is not being executed, the execution target of the preceding period effect is performed. To see if there are any. As a result, even if there is specific holding information for which the preceding period effect is to be executed, execution of the preceding period effect corresponding to a new winning is not completely prohibited, In the period after the variable display according to the suspension information is finished, the execution of the preceding period effect corresponding to the new winning is allowed.

Hereinafter, a method for realizing such control will be described by taking a more detailed game situation as an example.

FIG. 171(a) stores the pending information in which the variable display is in execution (the first special symbol) and the three pending information in which the variable display is in the non-execution state (all are the first special symbols). It is a diagram showing an example of a table T7a referred to in the first special figure prefetching process when a new winning (first special symbol) occurs in the state. In addition, FIG. 171(b) shows that the pending information in which the variable display is in execution (the first special symbol) and the two pending information in which the variable display is in the unexecuted state (both are the first special symbols) It is a diagram showing an example of a table T7b referred to in the first special diagram prefetching process when a new winning (first special symbol) occurs in the stored state.

As shown in FIG. 171(a), in this table T7a, the suspension information (first special symbol) in which the variable display is being executed and the three suspension information in which the variable display is not being executed (whichever According to whether any of the (1st special symbol) is the target of the preceding period effect, or neither is the target of the preceding period effect, a new winning (the first special symbol) It is possible to determine from which timing the corresponding pending information can be targeted for the preceding period effect (the number of pre-readable fluctuations).

For example, in the table T7a, both of the pending information in which the variable display is in execution (the first special symbol) and the three pending information in which the variable display is in the non-execution state (all are the first special symbols) If is not the subject of the preceding period effect, the variable display according to the hold 1 (first hold information stored in the first special symbol hold storage area a), and hold 2 (first special symbol hold storage The variable display according to the second hold information stored in the area b), and the variable display according to the hold 3 (third hold information stored in the first special symbol hold storage area b), Targeting the new prize over four variable display periods with a variable display according to a hold 4 according to a new prize (fourth hold information stored in the first special symbol hold storage area d) It is determined that the preceding period effect can be executed (determination that the pre-reading variable number is 4). That is, in this case, the variable display corresponding to the new winning award is displayed at a timing after the variable display in the state of being executed ends and the variable display according to the first hold information is started. Execution of the preceding period effect targeted for is permitted.

Further, in the table T7a, when the hold information in the state where the variable display is being executed is the target of the preceding period effect, the variable display according to the hold 2 and the variable display according to the hold 3 are displayed. It is determined that the preceding period effect targeting the new winning can be executed over the three variable display periods including the variable display according to the pending 4 according to the winning. Is determined). That is, in this case, the timing after the variable display in the state of being executed ends, the variable display according to the first hold information further ends, and the variable display according to the second hold information starts Then, the execution of the preceding period effect for the variable display according to the hold 4 according to the new winning is allowed.

Here, even when the hold information in which the variable display is being executed is the target of the preceding period effect, the variable display according to the hold 1, the variable display according to the hold 2, and the hold 3 It is determined that the preceding period effect for the new prize can be executed over four variable display periods of a variable display corresponding to the new prize and a variable display corresponding to the hold 4 corresponding to the new prize. It is also possible to make a determination that the pre-reading variable number is four). However, in this case, the preceding period effect that has appeared in the variable display in the running state and the new preceding period effect that is started in the variable display according to the hold 1 are continuously executed. Is the preceding period effect the same effect (whether the previous preceding period effect is continuing), or is another preceding period effect newly started (is the previous preceding period effect finished?) Since it becomes difficult to distinguish the preceding period effect, a method of setting this as a prohibited period so that the preceding period effect is not newly generated in the first variable display after the preceding period effect is finished (method adopted in table T7a) It is more desirable to adopt. Note that such a method is adopted not only in the table T7a but also in another table T7 (in addition to the table T7b, a table not shown).

Further, in the table T7a, when the hold 1 is the target of the preceding period effect, there are two change displays, that is, the change display corresponding to the hold 3 and the change display corresponding to the hold 4 corresponding to the new winning. It is determined that the preceding period effect targeting the new winning can be executed over the period (determination that the prefetch variable number is 2). That is, in this case, the variable display that was in the running state ends, the variable display corresponding to the first hold information ends, the variable display corresponding to the second hold information further ends, and the third At a timing after the variable display according to the hold information is started, execution of the preceding period effect for the variable display according to the hold 4 according to the new winning is allowed.

Further, in the table T7a, when the hold 2 is the target of the preceding period effect, only the period of the variable display corresponding to the hold 4 corresponding to the new winning is only the preceding period for the new winning. It is determined that the effect can be executed (determination that the pre-reading variable number is 1). That is, in this case, the variable display that is in the running state ends, the variable display corresponding to the first hold information ends, the variable display corresponding to the second hold information ends, and the third hold information ends. The variable display corresponding to the 4th hold information is further ended, and the variable display corresponding to the 4th hold information is started. Execution of the performance will be permitted.

In addition, in the table T7a, when the hold 3 is the target of the preceding period effect, it is determined that the preceding period effect targeting the new winning is not executable (the number of prefetch variable is 0). Is determined). That is, in this case, the execution of the preceding period effect for the variable display according to the hold 4 according to the new winning is not permitted.

On the other hand, in the table T7b, the hold 3 is not included as a determination target of whether it is the target of the preceding period effect, and the number of pre-readable fluctuations obtained as the determination result is smaller than that of the table T7a. However, since it is basically the same as the table T7a, the description will be omitted. Also, tables similar to these are prepared for the hold 2 prize and the hold 1 prize, but the description thereof will be omitted.

By the way, it is assumed that there are two pieces of the hold information that is the target of the preceding period effect at the time of the winning of the hold 4, etc. It is decided whether or not to change the number of pre-readable changes. For example, at the time of the winning of the hold 4, when the variable hold and the hold 2 are targets of different preceding period effects in the table T7a, the hold 2 on the side of the later hold order is the target of the preceding period effect. In this case, the “prefetchable variation number=1” is determined.

In addition, as described above, the control related to the prohibition period of the preceding period effect is a type of effect that is continuously (or continuously) performed over a plurality of variable displays without specifying which hold display is supported. The purpose is to set a prohibited period for the type of effect based on the execution status. Therefore, the prohibition period of the preceding period effect does not occur depending on the execution state of the type of effect (holding change effect) that specifies which hold display is supported, and the execution state of the preceding period effect (prefetch Even if the number of possible fluctuations=0, the type of effect (holding change effect) that specifies which hold display is supported is not prohibited.

Further, even in the prohibition period of the preceding period effect, among the timer pre-reading effects, the notice side timer effect is made to appear for the timer pre-reading effect performed in the first preceding aspect or the second preceding aspect described later. This may appear because certainty is not required.

In addition, as the prohibition control of the preceding period effect, when the hold information on the second special symbol side is included in the hold information in a state in which the variable display is not executed, the hold information on the second special symbol side precedes. Even if it is not the target of the period effect, it may be controlled not to start a new preceding period effect until the variable display according to the hold information on the second special symbol side is ended. Good. Further, at this time, it is not necessary to set the period of the next variable display in which the variable display corresponding to the hold information on the second special symbol side is ended as the prohibited period, and a new preceding period from the time when the next variable display is executed. It is desirable to allow the production to start.

In addition, with respect to the processing of checking the situation of the prefetch effect set for the hold and determining the prefetch variable number according to the result in this way, a new prize is generated each time the hold is exhausted. It is desirable to do it each time.

Then, in the first special diagram prefetch process (FIG. 135: step S5245) and the second special diagram prefetch process (FIG. 136: step S5255), when the prefetchable variation number is thus determined, the determined period (prefetchable) A determination process is performed as to what type of preceding period effect is to be executed (including the presence/absence of execution) based on the number of fluctuations.

For example, first, it is determined which type of preceding period effect is to be executed for the pending information corresponding to the new winning. As described above, as the types of preceding period effects, there are a plurality of pre-reading zone effects that display related background images across a plurality of fluctuations, and a plurality of specific preceding displays that suggest that the notice timer timer effect is likely to be executed. It is possible to prepare a timer look-ahead effect or the like that is displayed over variations as selection candidates. As a result, when the type of the preceding period effect is determined, the determination process as to how the preceding period effect of the determined type is executed is performed.

FIGS. 172(a) and 172(b) are diagrams showing an example of the table T8a-1 and the table T8a-2 that are referred to when determining the execution mode of the timer prefetch effect in the situation where the prefetch variable number is 4. Is. FIGS. 173(a) and 173(b) are views showing an example of the table T8b-1 and the table T8b-2 that are referred to when determining the execution mode of the timer prefetching effect in the situation where the prefetch variable number is 3. Is.

As described above, the timer look-ahead effect is an effect in which the appearance of the notice timer effect increases when the hold information that is the target of the look-ahead is consumed when it appears, and the peripheral according to this embodiment In the control MPU 1511a, the timer prefetching effect is executed in the first preceding aspect, the second preceding aspect, the third preceding aspect, etc. in which the appearance rate of the notice timer effect is different.

Here, the first preceding aspect is, for example, that the first aspect such as "premonition of timer occurrence" is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and when the timer prefetching effect is executed in the first preceding aspect. The probability that the notice timer effect is executed is set to approximately 20% (step S5502).

The second preceding aspect is, for example, that a second aspect such as "timer occurrence chance" is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and when the timer prefetching effect is executed in the second preceding aspect, the notice side is displayed. The probability that the timer effect will be executed is set to approximately 80% (step S5502).

Further, the third preceding aspect is, for example, that a third aspect such as "timer preparing" is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and when the timer prefetching effect is executed in the third preceding aspect, the notice timer is executed. The effect is always executed (not necessarily 100%, but may have a higher probability than the second preceding aspect) (step S5502).

Then, based on the information on the big hit for the pre-reading determination, the information on the variation pattern number for the pre-reading determination, etc., it is determined which execution mode is to be executed as the timer pre-reading effect. For example, in a situation where the prefetch variable number is 4, referring to the tables T8a-1 and T8a-2 shown in FIGS. 172(a) and 172(b), the prefetch corresponding to the variation numbers 1 to 22 is performed. In a situation in which one of the aspects is selected based on the information and the effect random number allocated to the information, and the prefetch variable number is 3, the tables T8b-1 and T8b- shown in FIG. 2, one of the modes is selected based on the pre-reading information corresponding to the variation numbers 1 to 22 and the effect random number assigned to the information.

As shown in FIG. 172(a), in the table T8a-1, in the state where the first preceding aspect finally appears, the variable display of the pending information that is the target of the timer prefetching effect is started. The following three modes are prepared as modes.
When the variable display of the hold information that is the target of the timer prefetching effect is in the hold 3 and hold 2 states, the timer prefetching effect does not appear in any form, and is the target of the timer prefetching effect. Mode in which the timer pre-reading effect is displayed in the first preceding mode (premonition of timer occurrence) when the variable display of the pending information is in the hold 1 state In the state of 3, the timer prefetch effect is not made to appear in any form, and when the variable display of the hold information that is the target of the timer prefetch effect is in the hold 2 state, the timer prefetch effect is first precedent. A mode (premonition of occurrence of timer) and a mode in which this is continued even in the hold 1 state-When the variable display of the hold information that is the target of the timer prefetch effect is the hold 3 state, the timer prefetch effect Is displayed in the first preceding mode (premonition of timer generation) and is continued even in the states of hold 2 and hold 1.

Further, in the table T8a-1, the following six modes are available as modes in which the variable display of the hold information that is the target of the timer prefetch effect is finally started in the state where the second preceding mode appears. It is prepared.
When the variable display of the hold information that is the target of the timer prefetching effect is in the hold 3 and hold 2 states, the timer prefetching effect does not appear in any form and is the target of the timer prefetching effect. Mode in which the timer prefetch effect is displayed in the second preceding mode (timer occurrence chance) when the variable display of the pending information is in the pending 1 state • The variable display of the pending information that is the target of the timer prefetch effect is pending 3 In this state, the timer prefetch effect is not made to appear in any mode, and when the variable display of the hold information that is the target of the timer prefetch effect is in the hold 2 state, the timer prefetch effect is set to the second preceding mode. (Timer Occurrence Opportunity) and continue this even in the hold 1 state ・When the variable display of the hold information that is the target of the timer read-ahead effect is in the hold 3 state, the timer read-ahead effect is displayed. 2 A mode in which the preceding mode (timer occurrence chance) is displayed and this is continued even in the states of hold 2 and hold 1 ・When the variable display of the hold information that is the target of the timer prefetching effect is in the state of hold 3 The timer prefetch effect is not made to appear in any of the modes, and the timer prefetch effect is the first preceding mode (prediction of timer occurrence) when the variable display of the hold information that is the target of the timer prefetch effect is in the hold 2 state. ) And the timer pre-reading effect from the first preceding aspect (premonition of timer occurrence) to the second preceding aspect (when the timer pre-reading effect is displayed on the variable display of the pending information in the hold 1 state). (Timer Occurrence Opportunity) to display the timer pre-reading effect when the variable display of the hold information that is the target of the timer pre-reading effect is in the hold 3 state (first feeling of timer occurrence) Is displayed and is continued even in the hold 2 state, but when the variable display of the hold information that is the target of the timer look-ahead effect is in the hold 1 state, the timer look-ahead effect is the first preceding aspect (timer). Aspect of changing from the (premonition of occurrence) to the second preceding aspect (timer occurrence chance) and displaying the timer prefetch effect when the variable display of the hold information which is the target of the timer prefetch effect is in the hold 3 state. While displaying in the first preceding mode (premonition of timer generation), the timer prefetching effect is displayed in the first preceding mode (timer generation) when the variable display of the hold information that is the target of the timer prefetching effect is in the hold 2 state. From the second feeling (timer generation check). Change and display it, and continue this even in the state of hold 1.

It should be noted that the timer prefetching effects of the first preceding aspect and the second preceding aspect are displayed in the state of the hold 1 and then continuously displayed even after the hold information is consumed and the variable display is started. It is desirable to do so. Further, the mode may be further changed in the variable display started after the holding information is consumed. Further, when the notice side timer effect is started in the variable display, the timer look-ahead effects of the first preceding aspect and the second precedent aspect may be hidden, but when the notice side timer effect is started. Even if the notice side timer effect is started, the display is continued even after the notice side timer effect is started, or the aspect in which the first preceding aspect and the second precedent aspect are hidden before the notice side timer effect is started. Then, if the image is hidden at a predetermined timing thereafter, it becomes possible to add interest. In addition, when the notice side timer effect is not executed in spite of executing the timer prefetching effect in either the first preceding aspect or the second preceding aspect, the non-notification is made when a predetermined time has elapsed since the symbol variation was started. Will be displayed. Further, it is more preferable that the timing of non-display is the same as the timing of non-display when the notice timer effect is executed (such as the predetermined timing).

In the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, the first preceding aspect (premonition of timer occurrence) or the second preceding aspect despite the timer prefetching effect in which the execution ratio of the notice timer effect increases when any of them appears. The timer pre-reading effect of (timer occurrence chance) and the timer pre-reading effect of the third preceding mode (timer preparation) are caused to appear as different effects from each other. Therefore, as is clear from the contents of the table T8a-1, the timer prefetch effect is changed from these preceding modes to the third preceding mode in the state where the first preceding mode and the second preceding mode are displayed. The display mode is not adopted. Further, in a situation where the timer prefetching effect of the third preceding aspect (during timer preparation) appears, the timer prefetching effect of the first preceding aspect (premonition of timer occurrence) or the second preceding aspect (timer occurrence chance) appears. Alternatively, the timer prefetching effect of the third preceding aspect (under timer preparation) appears in a situation where the timer prefetching effect of the first preceding aspect (prediction of timer occurrence) or the second preceding aspect (timer occurrence chance) appears. Can occur.

Therefore, in a situation in which the variable number of pre-reading is 4, referring to the table T8a-1 shown in FIG. 172(a), the first preceding aspect (prediction of timer occurrence) or the second preceding aspect (timer occurrence chance) In addition to determining the execution mode related to the timer prefetching effect, the execution mode related to the timer prefetching effect of the third preceding mode (timer preparing) is further determined with reference to the table T8a-2 shown in FIG. 172(b). It will be.

Here, as shown in FIG. 172(b), in the table T8a according to the present embodiment, the hold information that is the target of the timer prefetching effect is finally displayed with the third preceding aspect appearing. Only one of the following modes is prepared as the mode in which the variable display is started.
When the variable display of the hold information that is the target of the timer prefetching effect is in the hold 3 state, the timer prefetching effect is displayed in the third preceding mode (timer is preparing), and this is held 2 or 1 Mode to continue even in the state

However, also in the case of the third preceding aspect, not limited to the above-described one aspect, as in the case of the above-described first preceding aspect, when in the hold 3 or hold 2 state, no timer prefetch effect appears, and It is also possible to select a mode in which the third preceding mode is displayed.

According to such a configuration, when the timer prefetch effect of the first preceding aspect (prediction of timer occurrence) or the second preceding aspect (timer occurrence chance) is executed, and the timer of the third preceding aspect (timer occurrence chance) Both when the prefetching effect is executed, the timer prefetching effect of the first preceding aspect (premonition of timer generation) or the second preceding aspect (timer occurrence chance) and the timer prefetching effect of the third preceding aspect (timer preparation) When and when it is executed respectively, and comes to appear.
When both the timer pre-reading effect of the first preceding aspect (premonition of timer generation) or the second preceding aspect (timer occurrence chance) and the timer pre-reading effect of the third preceding aspect (timer preparation) are executed, respectively, Since there is a situation in which it is definitively suggested that the notice timer effect will be executed, enjoy the effect such as changing from the first preceding aspect to the second preceding aspect with a margin and a sense of security. Will be able to.

Moreover, you may control so that the timer pre-reading effect of a 1st prior aspect, the timer pre-reading effect of a 2nd prior aspect, and the timer pre-reading effect of a 3rd prior aspect can appear simultaneously.

It is desirable that the timer prefetch effect of the third preceding aspect (during timer preparation) is also continuously displayed after the target hold information is consumed and the variable display is started. In this case, after the target hold information is consumed and the variable display is started, the third preceding mode (timer preparation) is hidden when the notice timer effect is started.

Further, in this embodiment, the third preceding mode of the timer prefetching effect is adopted as a mode of displaying "timer preparing" on the effect display device 1600. You may make it employ|adopt as a mode which starts the count display toward the effect (effect which appears in the unexecuted variable display) made into the effect of timer effect. That is, in this case, for example, the remaining time in which the state of the hold 1 is continued (the remaining change time of the special symbol in the state of the variable display when the state of the hold 1) and the hold 1 are exhausted and the variation display is displayed. The count display will be performed over a time that is the sum of the time from the start to the time when the effect targeted for the effect of the notice-side timer effect is started, and the timer prefetch effect (third preceding mode) and the notice-side timer The effect is executed as one count display in which two variable displays are connected.

In this respect, when the third preceding aspect is realized as one count display linked to such a notice side timer effect, the count display is not executed in the hold 3 and the hold 2, and the count display is performed in the hold 1 state. It is desirable to do. That is, if the count display is started when the hold 3 or the hold 2 is set, "the effect that is the target of the notice timer effect ( By changing the "remaining time until the effect in the variable display that has not been executed) is started, it is possible to properly execute the count display for the same effect (the count display until reaching the predetermined number). This is because there is a concern that it will disappear.

Note that the table T8b-1 shown in FIG. 173(a) and the table T8b-2 shown in FIG. 173(b) are shown in the table T8a-1 shown in FIG. 172(a) and the table T8b-2 shown in FIG. 172(b). Since it has basically the same relationship with the table T8a-2 shown in FIG.

Further, as described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, determination of the pending change effect in the first special figure prefetch process (FIG. 135: step S5245) and the second special figure prefetch process (FIG. 136: step S5255). It also processes. This hold change effect is to change the hold display mode corresponding to the hold information acquired according to a prize to any of a plurality of modes different from the normal hold mode, so that the hold display is performed in any mode. It is intended to suggest the jackpot expectation when the pending display is consumed depending on whether it is displayed.

More specifically, as the hold display according to this embodiment, in addition to the normal hold mode when the hold change effect is not performed, a white blinking mode, a blue mode, and a green mode It is possible to display in any of the following modes: red, red, and rainbow. Basically, the jackpot expectation level when held and displayed in the white blinking mode. Is low, and the big hit expectation gradually increases in the order of blue, green, and red, and when it is held and displayed in a rainbow-colored manner, the probability that a big hit design will appear when held is exhausted is 100. It is set so that the relationship becomes %. It should be noted that the jackpot expectation is naturally set for the normal hold mode as well, but the jackpot expectation when the normal hold is displayed should be lower than that for the white blinking mode. Alternatively, it may be the same as or higher than the display mode of white blinking.

Therefore, normally, when a mode of displaying in white blinking or blue appears, for example, the first effect situation having a lower jackpot expectation than in the case of displaying in green or red is provided. However, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, when a mode of displaying white blinking or blue instead of green or red under predetermined conditions appears, a second performance situation in which the jackpot expectation is high can be provided. Is feasible.

FIG. 174 shows when there is no big hit symbol appearing in the pending information in which the variable display is being executed and the pending information in which the variable display is not being executed (for example, holding 1 to holding 3). It is a figure which shows the normal time holding change table T9a referred. In addition, FIG. 175 includes one in which the jackpot symbol appears in the pending information in which the variable display is being executed and the pending information in which the variable display is not being executed (for example, hold 1 to hold 3). It is a figure which shows the special time reservation change table T9b which is sometimes referred.

In the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when a new winning (accepting a game ball) to the starting openings 2002 and 2004 occurs, the first special map prefetching process (FIG. 135: step S5245) and the second special map. In the prefetch process (FIG. 136: step S5255), the pending information that is stored before the new winning and the variable display is being executed and the pending information that the variable display is not being executed (for example, the pending information). It is determined whether or not there is a big hit symbol among the 1 to the reserved 3) (a big hit judgment or a judgment to win the big hit as a result of the pre-reading judgment). As a result, when it is determined that there is no big hit symbol, the normal table T9a (which is set in a relationship in which the big hit expectation gradually increases in the order of white blinking, blue, green, red, and rainbow color ( By executing the hold change effect with reference to FIG. 174), normally, when a mode of blinking white or blue appears, for example, the first effect situation with a lower jackpot expectation than when displaying in red I am trying to be provided.

However, it is judged that there is a big hit symbol appearing in the pending information that is stored before the new winning and the variable display is in the execution state and the pending information in which the variable display is in the non-execution state. When it does (when a rare event occurs), the special effect holding change table T9b (FIG. 175) is executed to execute the holding change effect, thereby providing the second effect situation.

That is, as shown in FIG. 175, in the special time pending change table T9b, first, for the red and rainbow colors related to the mode of the pending display, “the big hit prize is acquired as pending information corresponding to a new winning. Random effect random numbers are assigned so that the pre-reading information and the pre-reading information regarding the variation pattern will not be selected regardless of their contents.

In addition, regarding the green color regarding the mode of the hold display, even when the variation pattern (variation numbers 7 to 14) is arranged such that the effect random numbers are distributed so as to be selectable in the normal time hold change table T9a, the special time hold change is performed. In the table T9b, the effect random numbers are distributed so that they are not selected. In this regard, when the prefetch information about the variation pattern corresponds to SP reach (variation numbers 15 to 22), green can be selected in the special time suspension change table T9b as well, but the normal suspension is possible. Random effect random numbers are distributed so that the probability of appearance of green is lower when the jackpot is won and when the jackpot is lost as compared to the change table T9a.

On the other hand, regarding white blinking and blue regarding the mode of the hold display, in the special time hold change table T9b, the appearance probabilities thereof are higher than in the normal time hold change table T9a both when the big hit is won and when the big win is lost. Random numbers are distributed to the production. Further, regarding the blinking white and the blue regarding the mode of the hold display, even the fluctuation numbers 1 and 2 which are not selected in the normal time hold change table T9a are selectable in the special time hold change table T9b. The random numbers are distributed like this.

According to such a configuration, for example, an effect with a high expectation that a big hit symbol appears (for example, an effect in which a notice timer effect for the character B action appears in the SP reach variation pattern) is executed. If a new prize is generated while the game is in progress (when it is under a predetermined condition), when a green or red mode appears as a hold display according to the new prize, a big hit symbol appears in the high-expectation production being executed. While it is difficult to have expectations for, the second production situation where it becomes relatively easy to have the expectation that a big hit pattern will appear in the high-expectation production that is being executed when a white blinking or blue aspect appears. Will be able to provide.

In particular, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, as described above, as the third preceding aspect of the timer prefetching effect, the remaining time during which the state of the hold 1 is continued (the state of the variable display when the state of the hold 1 is displayed). The remaining variable time of the special symbol) and the time from the start of the variable display after the hold 1 is exhausted to the time when the effect that is the target of the notice timer effect is started, The count display of can be executed. That is, in this case, even if the count display appears on the effect display device 1600, there is a possibility that the variable display ends and the next variable display starts before the count display reaches the predetermined numerical value. Therefore, it is expected that the game enjoyment will be improved together with the control using the special time holding change table T9b.

For example, suppose that the count display of the notice timer effect (or the timer being prepared) appears during execution of the variable display (for example, SP reach) in a situation where white blinking or blue hold display appears as the hold 1. , It becomes possible to have a sense of expectation that a big hit symbol will appear in the second game progress than in the following first game progress.
-The advance notice timer effect is directed to the effect in the hold 1 that shows only a low expectation (blinking white or blue), and is held after the running variable display (for example, SP reach) ends in a lost manner. The first game progress/notification side timer effect in which the variable display according to the hold information of 1 is started is not the effect in the hold 1 that shows only a low expectation (blinking white or blue), but the change in execution A second game progress in which the effect in the display (for example, SP reach) is the effect target

That is, despite the fact that the notice side timer effect with a high jackpot expectation degree (for example, a big hit pattern appears with a probability of 10% or more when it appears) is executed, the notice side timer effect has a low expectation degree (eg, appears). Even if there is a possibility that the big hit symbol will appear only with a probability of about several percent, the effect in the hold 1 of white flashing or blue) will be significantly reduced, and the possibility of the big hit symbol will be greatly reduced. Although it becomes such a production situation, according to the second game progress, it is special because the chance increase by avoiding the occurrence of such production situation and the variable display being executed are big hits. The chance increase due to being able to expect that the hold display of the hold 1 is white blinking (high occurrence probability) or blue in reference to the hour hold change table T9b (FIG. 175) (high jackpot expectation is high). The advance notice timer production also targets "the production in the variable display being executed" as a production target, and it also functions as if "the variable display being executed is a big hit" is supported. As a result, the interest in playing games can be improved.

It should be noted that the third preceding aspect of the timer prefetching effect may be executed as "timer preparing" instead of the count display. That is, in this case, it is possible to recognize that the notice-side timer effect for which the effect in the variable display is the effect target is executed at the time when the state in which "timer is being prepared" is displayed is switched to the count display. Therefore, when there is a white blinking or blue pending display at the time when the count display appears, it is possible to expect that the big hit symbol appears in the variable display.

On the other hand, when the timer display is hidden and the count display is started in the situation where the green or red (especially red) hold display is displayed, the notice side timer effect may be given. Without making it difficult to have a sense of expectation that a big hit symbol will appear in the variable display, the timer on the notice side will further increase the expectation for the green or red (especially red) hold display. The production cannot work. Therefore, when "Timer is preparing" is displayed in the situation where the green or red (especially red) hold display is displayed, until the green or red (especially red) hold display is exhausted. It is hoped that the count display will not be started, and it is expected that the entertainment of the game will be maintained within the period until the count display (preliminary timer effect) is started.

Further, according to such a configuration, when an effect with a high jackpot expectation appears in the variable display during execution, a new winning is generated and a pending display of any mode such as white blinking, blue, green, red, etc. By confirming whether or not appears, it is possible to predict with a predetermined probability whether or not the big hit symbol appears in the variable display during execution, so that it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the gaming enjoyment.

Further, although the holding change effect using the special time holding change table T9b is executed for the holding display according to the new winning, the effect target is actually "new "Will the big hit symbol appear in the variable display of the hold information (hold information that has been changed) depending on the winning a prize?", not "Hold information stored before the new winning (hold not subject to a pending change Information)) is displayed in a variable display. Therefore, even when no pending change is executed when a new winning is generated or the above-mentioned preceding period effect is prohibited, the special pending change table T9b is set according to the pending information after that. When the hold change effect using is executed, the look-ahead effect can function as if the look-ahead effect occurred afterwards for the hold information for which no look-ahead effect was executed. It is expected that this will reduce the interest in playing games.

In the special time holding change table T9b, the green mode can be selected in some reach types, but like the red mode, any variation pattern may not be selected. .. In short, if the rate of appearance of a mode with high expectation that can appear as a hold display is lower than that in the normal hold change table T9a (including 0), white appears at the time when the count display appears. It becomes possible to improve the enjoyment of the game when there is a flashing or blue hold display.

Further, the pending change can be generated at the time of winning, at the start of fluctuation, at a predetermined timing during the fluctuation, and the number of times of change may be generated plural times. In other words, in this case, there is a possibility that white blinking or blue will change to green or red even if the count display of the notice timer effect is started in the variable display corresponding to the white blinking or blue hold display. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decline in the entertainment appeal. In this embodiment, the display corresponding to the hold display that is the target of the digestion even during the symbol variation performed in accordance with the hold exhaustion (not already in the hold state, but in the hold display when in the hold state The corresponding display) is displayed, and the display mode corresponding to the hold display is further changed (hold change) as described above.

However, when the pending change effect using the special time pending change table T9b as described above is realized, a new prize is generated while the high-specific expectation effect is being executed during the execution of the variable display, and the prize is won. If the hold display corresponding to the red display occurs in red, a big hit symbol is displayed in a variable display in which a high-specification effect (for example, a timer effect that targets the character B action is performed) is being executed. There is a possibility that it will definitely indicate that it will not appear, and there is concern that the interest in gaming will decline.

Therefore, a new winning is generated during a period during which a specific timer effect, which is an effect target of at least the accessory B action, is being executed (during a high-expectation specific effect). Even if it does, it is desirable to control so that the hold display according to the winning does not appear on the effect display device 1600 and the mode of the hold change is hidden. Further, it is desirable to maintain the non-display state with respect to the hold display even after the count display has reached a predetermined numerical value and has been exhausted.

However, in this case, instead of continuously hiding the hidden display that has been hidden until the variable display is ended, for example, within the period of the variable display, a winning effect or a loss ( It is desirable that a hold display that has been hidden after the timing at which a lost effect that suggests a big hit) appears appears to display the mode of the hold change. According to such a configuration, even if the pending display corresponding to the new winning is red, it is already suggested that the game is lost, so that the interest of the game is not deteriorated, and the pending display is also provided. The red color makes it possible to improve the enjoyment of the game due to the fact that the hold information contains hold information with a high expectation for a big hit.

Note that such control related to non-display of the hold display does not target all of the timer effects (preliminary effects), but rather a comparatively big hit, such as one in which the accessory B operation is an object of the timer effects. It is desirable to execute it only for a specific timer effect with high expectation (high-expectation notice effect).

Further, as described above, when the hold change effect using the special time hold change table T9b is realized, for example, the timer prefetch effect is executed in the third preceding mode (timer preparation, etc.) while the blue hold display appears. When it is done, the count progress (timer effect) is started in the variable display before the blue reserved display is consumed, and the game progress in which the big hit symbol appears is desired. In this respect, even in the game situation where such a game progress is performed, whether the count display (timer effect) is started during the change, or whether it is not started and the change according to the blue hold display In order to give a feeling of excitement as to whether the count display is started in the display, the count display (timer effect) is started before the blue hold display is exhausted and the big hit symbol appears in the variable display. , A count display (timer effect) when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display rather than the ratio (including 0%) at which the count display (timer effect) is started in synchronization with the start timing of the variable display It is desirable to control so that the rate at which is started is higher. The ratio may include 100%. Alternatively, it is desirable to control so that the count display (timer effect) is started at a higher rate when a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable display was started, as compared with the case where the red hold display is displayed. .. The ratio may include 100%.

The count effect (holding change effect using the special time holding change table T9b) in which the chance is increased by such double is, in essence, "the holding information displayed in the second mode of the plurality of modes (for example, In the variable display of the identification information started by digesting the red look-ahead hold), the hold information (for example, blue look-ahead hold) displayed in the first aspect of the plurality of aspects is digested. The proportion of the jackpot pattern (specific display result) that is derived and displayed is made higher than that of the started variable display of identification information”, but “at least a specific count effect is executed within the period in which the variable display of identification information is executed. Hold information that is later in the order of extinction than the variable display in the execution state (when the specific count effect is executed within the execution period of the variable display, the look-ahead hold for the variable display that is not yet executed) ) Is displayed in the second mode (for example, red read-ahead hold), it is in the execution state more than when the hold information is displayed in the first mode (blue read-ahead hold). The ratio of the specific display result being derived and displayed in a certain variable display is reduced.”

According to such a configuration, when the red pending display (second mode) is displayed for the variable display that has been exhausted slowly and has not been executed yet, the specific count is displayed in the variable display that is already in the execution state. If the count display of the effect reaches a predetermined value (“0” in this case) and is ended, the blue hold display (first mode) is displayed for the variable display whose digestion order is late and has not been executed yet. At this time, a production mode with a lower degree of expectation appears as the production target than when the count display of the specific count production reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”) in the variable display that is already in the execution state and is terminated. The ratio becomes high. That is, in this case, during the period in which the specific count effect is being executed, whether or not the red hold display (second mode) appears for the variable display that has not been executed serves as an important effect element. Through such a special effect relationship between the count effect and the look-ahead effect, it is possible to appropriately maintain the gaming interest for a long period from the start to the end of the specific count effect. You will be expected. In this sense, during the period when the specific count effect is being executed, it is still executed at the time of a new winning or a pending change effect (for example, an effect of upgrading the blue hold display to a red hold display). It is important that the pending display for the variable display that is not displayed can appear in any of a plurality of modes such as a blue pending display (first mode) and a red pending display (second mode). It can be said that there is.

According to such a special effect relationship between the count effect and the look-ahead effect, when the red hold display (second mode) appears for the variable display that has not been executed yet, it is being executed. If the count effect is not ended in the variable display of and the continuation is continued until the variable display of the next time onward, the ratio of the appearance mode with high expectation appears when the count effect ends, so the specific count effect ends. You will expect not to be. On the other hand, when a blue hold display (first aspect) appears for a variable display that has not been executed yet, it is better to end the count effect with the variable display that is being executed, which has a lower expectation of blue hold. The specific count effect is expected to be ended earlier because the proportion of appearance modes having higher expectations when the count effect is ended is higher than when the count effect is ended within the variable display.

However, the count effect does not necessarily have to span a plurality of variable displays, and may be ended within one variable display in which the count effect is started. Even with such a configuration, when a new winning occurs while the count effect is being executed, a blue hold display (first mode) and a red hold are displayed for the variable display that has not been executed yet. Since there is no difference in which of the displays (second mode) appears, it can function as an important performance indicator for the count effect, and thus a special effect between the count effect and the look-ahead effect. Through the relationship, it is possible to favorably maintain the gaming interest for a long period from the start to the end of the specific count effect.

At the time of starting the specific count effect, a plurality of hold displays are displayed, but none of them are in a specific mode (for example, read-ahead hold such as green or red) (for example, a state where the read-ahead hold is not changed). Even if appears, the process of causing the specific aspect to appear (for example, the process of changing from the normal hold to the red hold) during the period in which the specific count effect is executed may be executable. According to such a configuration, at the time of starting the specific count effect, it is possible that a plurality of hold displays are displayed, but none of them is in a specific mode (for example, a situation where prefetch hold is not changed). In addition, there is a possibility that the count display in the specific count effect may change to a hold display having a specific mode (read-ahead hold such as green or red) until the count display reaches a predetermined value (specific display result in variable display in execution state). Is likely to be changed from a state in which the ratio of derivation and display is high to a state in which the ratio is low). Therefore, the amusement interest from the start to the end of the specific count effect is appropriately maintained. You will be expected to do so.

However, at this time, if a plurality of display modes are prepared as the count display according to the specific count effect, and the count display is in the state where the count display is being exhausted while the count display is being displayed in the first mode, the second mode is used. Processing for causing a specific aspect to appear in the hold display until the count display in the specific count effect reaches a predetermined value, compared to the case where the k count is exhausted while being displayed (for example, normal hold) It is desirable to reduce the rate at which the process of changing from (1) to red hold) is executed. According to such a configuration, by confirming the count display by the specific count effect, the display mode can be changed to a hold display having “a specific mode (prefetching reservation such as green or red) during the counting period”. It is possible to recognize the "high possibility" and predict the "high possibility that the specific count effect will continue until the next symbol variation starts" from the remaining count value. As a result, it becomes possible to provide fun by comparing the results of the recognition and prediction.

On the other hand, on the contrary, at the time of starting the specific count effect, when a plurality of hold displays are displayed, but none of them are in the specific mode (for example, a state where the read-ahead hold is not changed), During the execution period of the specific count effect, the process of causing the specific mode to appear (for example, the process of changing from the normal hold to the red hold) may not be executable during the period in which the specific count effect is being executed. With such a configuration, it is possible that the count display in the specific count effect can be changed to a hold display having a specific mode (read-ahead hold such as green or red) before the count display reaches a predetermined value (in the execution state). In the variable display, there is no possibility that the specific display result will be transitioned from a state where the ratio of the derived display is high to a state where the ratio is low). Therefore, from the start to the end of the specific count effect. You will be able to provide a sense of security.

In addition, a plurality of pending displays may be sequentially consumed until the predetermined time required for the specific count effect elapses, and the plurality of symbol variations may be sequentially exhausted. According to such a configuration, even when the third hold display is red hold in the situation where the specific count effect is started, the symbol variation corresponding to the third hold display is started. Since it is possible that the specific count effect reaches a predetermined value during the execution period, it is possible to preferably maintain amusement of the game until the specific count effect is ended.

Further, during the period in which the specific count effect is being executed, after making the symbol fluctuation into a stopped state (temporary stop), it may be possible to execute the process of changing the symbol fluctuation into the variable state again. According to such a configuration, for example, when the pattern change is stopped (temporary stop) while the read-ahead suspension appears for the variable display that is not yet executed, the identification of the execution state is performed. Since it will function as an effect as if the next symbol variation is started while the count effect is continued, it is possible to appropriately maintain the gaming interest until the specific count effect is ended. Become.

In addition, in the example of the production related to the "double chance increase" (holding change production using the special time holding change table T9b), the holding display is displayed smaller than the count display in the count production, or on the front side of the holding display. It is possible to change the hold display by moving the movable decoration or displaying another display image so as to cover the hold display so that even if there is a change in the hold display, it is difficult to notice this. It is desirable to prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game when it occurs.

Further, as the "specific count effect", "first mode requiring relatively long time" and "second mode requiring relatively short time" are prepared, and as "effect pattern (variation time of symbol)" A plurality of effects based on the result of the jackpot determination, "a specific effect pattern that is shorter than the relatively long time (first aspect) but longer than the relatively shorter time (second aspect)" You may make it select and execute from a pattern. According to such a configuration, when a specific effect pattern appears, the specific count effect is continued until the next change depending on which mode (first mode, second mode) the specific count effect is executed. Or, because it will not be continued, it is expected that the interest of the game will be maintained appropriately.

Further, in the above-described example of the production related to “double chance increase” (holding change production using the special time holding change table T9b), “holding information displayed in the second mode of the plurality of modes (for example, red color In the variable display of the identification information started by digesting the pre-reading hold), the holding information displayed in the first mode among the plurality of modes (for example, blue pre-reading hold) is started. The ratio of the jackpot pattern (specific display result) that is derived and displayed is made higher than that of the displayed variable display of the identification information.", "At least the specific count effect is executed within the period in which the variable display of the identification information is executed. Occasionally, hold information that is in a later sequence than the variable display in the execution state (prefetching hold for the variable display that is not yet executed when the specific count effect is executed within the execution period of the variable display) Is displayed in the second mode (for example, red read-ahead hold), the holding information is in the execution state more than when the hold information is displayed in the first mode (blue read-ahead hold). In the variable display, the ratio of derivation display of the specific display result is reduced.” In the case of executing the symbol variation in a time shorter than the predetermined time required for the specific count effect, and the predetermined time required for the specific count effect. It was designed so that there are cases where symbol fluctuations are executed in a time longer than the time elapsed. However, in this case, regarding the above-mentioned “specific count effect”, “reproduction time that suggests the remaining time regarding the specific effect (remaining time until a specific effect change occurs regarding the specific effect) by updating the count value over time. It is not necessary to be performed as ".", for example, it may be performed as "an effect that suggests the remaining time regarding the specific effect by an image change or the like according to the passage of time." In short, if it is possible to suggest the remaining time, it is possible to provide an interesting point as to whether the pattern change will be completed before the remaining time is exhausted, which reduces the enjoyment of the game. Can be suppressed.

It should be noted that the "specific count effect" is not "an effect that suggests the remaining time for the specific effect by updating the count value according to the passage of time", but "an image change according to the passage of time for the remaining time regarding the specific effect, etc." About realization by other depictions such as "production suggested by", a production example (counting change production using the special time suspension change table T9b) different from the production example related to the above "double chance up" You may make it apply to production.

In addition, regarding the "specific count effect," the effect change related to the specific effect is terminated in the middle stage before the suggested "remaining time until a specific effect change occurs with respect to the specific effect" is exhausted. May occur. At this time, an effect change that may not appear when the “remaining time until a specific effect change occurs with respect to the specific effect” is exhausted without being terminated in the middle stage may be allowed. These modified examples are also applied to a production example (count production) different from the production example (holding change production using the special time holding change table T9b) related to the above-mentioned “double chance up”. Good.

Furthermore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, a new winning is awarded during the period in which the timer prefetch effect (table T8a-1, table T8b-1) of the first preceding aspect or the second preceding aspect is being executed. When the pending information corresponding to this is newly obtained, the variable display targeted for the timer prefetch effect is started, and when this is being executed, the proportion of the notice timer effect being executed is above. It is supposed that the control capable of executing the timer look-ahead effect (control related to the one-time effect) is performed so as to be different depending on the newly acquired hold information (new winning).

FIG. 176 is a diagram showing an example of a processing procedure of processing performed to realize such a one-dimensional effect. It should be noted that this process is performed by winning a prize at a specific starting opening (accepting a game ball during a period in which the timer prefetch effect (table T8a-1, table T8b-1) of the first preceding aspect or the second preceding aspect is being executed. ) Occurs, or within a period before the pending information (pending information that erases and resets the information about the effect) that is held prior to the winning is exhausted. May be performed at a predetermined timing.

As shown in FIG. 176, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, as the processing of step S5601, it is determined whether or not the hold information corresponding to the new winning is specific game information. It should be noted that the specific game information may be, for example, "game information that causes a highly anticipated specific variation pattern such as SP reach to appear when the new pending information is consumed", or "the new game information. It may be “game information that wins a jackpot when the hold information is exhausted”. Here, for the sake of convenience of explanation, "game information that wins a big hit when the new hold information is consumed" will be described as the specific game information.

As a result, if it is determined that the pending information corresponding to the new winning information indicates the specific game information, as the processing of step S5602, the information is stored before the pending information corresponding to the new winning information. For the hold information targeted for the timer prefetching effect (first preceding aspect or second preceding aspect) of the held information that is being performed, at least a part of the information regarding the effect is deleted and the one-time effect is performed. Reset to content.

For example, when the first preceding aspect (premonition of timer occurrence) is set as the timer prefetch effect, when the hold information targeted for the timer prefetch effect is exhausted, the notice timer effect is generated with a probability of approximately 20%. When the second preceding mode (timer occurrence chance) is set as the timer prefetching effect, the probability of approximately 80% when the holding information targeted for the timer prefetching effect is exhausted As described above, the advance notice timer effect is executed. However, in the process of step S5602, all (or at least a part) of the information regarding the timer prefetch effect is deleted, or a table referred to when determining the effect pattern (SP reach, etc.) or the advance notice lottery is selected. Settings (change flag setting, etc.) for changing to a value different from the normal time are made. Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, by performing control (FIG. 149) concerning the effect based on the effect information thus modified (deleted/set), as the timer prefetch effect, the first preceding aspect (premonition of occurrence of the timer) and the first effect. Regardless of which of the two preceding modes (timer occurrence chance) is set, the advance notice timer effect is executed with a probability of approximately 50% in the process of step S5502 (FIG. 149). Also, when determining the contents of the effect pattern and the notice effect, for example, based on the fact that the change flag is set, a table (not shown) at the time of change effect is referred to, and various effects are performed in a manner different from the normal time. Will be executed.

Then, after the modification process (step S5602) for the pending effect information that is the target of the timer prefetch effect is performed in this way, as the process of step S5603, the background image is changed to the background image when the effect is performed. Perform processing to change to. At this time, it is desirable that the display (first preceding aspect, second preceding aspect) appearing as the timer prefetching effect is also hidden. That is, in this case, when a new prize is generated (or from the time when the prize is generated until the hold information which is the target of the timer look-ahead effect is consumed), the background image is a background when the effect is changed. When the image is suddenly changed to the image, the first preceding aspect or the second preceding aspect that has been appearing until then is hidden, but the background image itself at the time of the one-stage effect functions as one aspect of the timer prefetching effect. I will get it. In this way, in the period in which the background image of the one-time production is appearing, whether or not the notice timer production appears when the hold information that is the target of the timer look-ahead production is consumed It becomes possible to have a great interest, and thereby it becomes possible to maintain amusement of interest during the period when the timer prefetching effect is being performed.

On the other hand, in the process of step S5601, when it is determined that the hold information corresponding to the new winning does not indicate the specific game information, next, as a process of step S5611, whether or not to execute the one-change gose effect Whether or not is determined. In the process of step S5603, the background image is changed to a background image at the time of performing the one-stage production, although the above-mentioned modification process (step S5602) for the suspension information is not performed. That is.

In addition, in the process of the said step S5611, when it is judged that the monotonous change gase effect is not performed, in order to continue the present timer prefetch effect (1st prior aspect, 2nd prior aspect) and the determination aspect of various effects. The process (FIG. 176) is ended without performing any process related to the one-time production.

In such a configuration, if a new winning occurs during the period in which the timer prefetch effect (table T8a-1, table T8b-1) of the first preceding aspect or the second preceding aspect is being executed (in the specific starting area When the game ball is accepted and the corresponding game information is newly obtained) When the variable display that is the target of the timer prefetching effect is started and this is in execution, the notice timer effect is displayed. The notice side timer effect can be executed so that the ratio of execution differs depending on the newly acquired game information (hold information). That is, in this case, when the hold information is newly acquired during the period in which the timer look-ahead effect of the first preceding aspect or the second precedent aspect is being executed, the new hold information is not the hold information that is the target of the timer look-ahead effect. The acquired hold information is specific game information (information indicating a specific variation pattern such as SP reach, information indicating a big hit, or information indicating that the type of big hit is to shift to a short probability gaming state at high probability, etc.) ), the rate at which the notice timer effect is executed changes during the execution of the variable display that is the target of the timer look-ahead effect, so it is a target of the timer look-ahead effect. It is possible to have expectations for other effects before the variable display is executed, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game during the period.

Further, in the above-described configuration, when the hold information is newly acquired during the period in which the timer prefetching effect of the first preceding aspect or the second preceding aspect is being executed, the pending information which is the target of the timer prefetching effect is not Depending on whether the newly acquired hold information is specific game information, the modification processing (step S5602) is performed, and before the hold information that is the target of the timer prefetch effect is consumed. In addition, the background image is changed to the background image at the time of one-time production, and the display related to the timer prefetching effect is hidden. That is, in this case, until the one-time production is started, the subject of the production is the timer pre-reading production, and a production situation is provided in which the hold information that is the target of the timer pre-production is expected to have an expectation. On the other hand, after the change effect is started, the subject of the effect is changed to the change effect, so that the newly acquired hold information is expected to have an expectation including the timer prefetch effect. It means that it will be shifted to a production situation in which various productions are performed. Therefore, it becomes possible to flexibly change the subject of the effect when a hold with a higher expectation than the hold information that is the target of the timer look-ahead effect is acquired, and it is already set. It is possible to avoid that the presentation time for the pending information having a high expectation is lost due to the presentation.

It should be noted that such a one-of-a-kind effect may be executed even if the hold information that is the target of the timer look-ahead effect indicates that the big hit is won. In other words, in this case, even if the subject of the effect shifts to the newly-pending hold information, the big hit effect appears in the hold that is digested before that, so a surprise effect is realized. As a result, it becomes possible to prevent the deterioration of the entertainment of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the hold information is newly acquired during the period in which the timer prefetching effect of the first preceding aspect or the second preceding aspect is being executed, the processing (FIG. 176) related to the above-mentioned one-stage effect is executed. However, the processing (FIG. 176) relating to the above-described one-stage effect may be executed even when the hold information is newly acquired during the period in which the timer prefetch effect of the third preceding aspect is being executed. ..

Further, the background image at the time of the one-stage effect may be continued even after the variable display according to the hold information which is the target of the timer look-ahead effect is completed. That is, in this case, with respect to the hold information that is consumed after the variable display corresponding to the hold information that is the target of the timer look-ahead effect is completed, the hold information functions as a one-time change gaff effect.

Further, such a transformation effect may be executed on condition that the new winning is generated and a specific condition is satisfied even when the timer look-ahead effect is not executed. In this case, for example, the table that is referred to when determining the production pattern (SP reach, etc.) or the advance notice lottery for all the pending information stored before the new winning is changed to one different from the normal time. The setting for this is made (for example, the setting of the change flag), so that the appearance probabilities of various effects are changed unless the effect is the change effect.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the rate at which the notice timer effect is executed is changed at the time of the one-time change effect. You may make it change the ratio by which an effect is performed. Thereby, even if the variation number does not cause the variation timer effect to appear when the one-time production is not executed, the variation timer effect appears when the one-time production is executed, or the variation timer effect appears when the one-time production is not executed. Even with a number, it is possible to control so that the changing timer effect does not appear when the one-time effect is executed.

In the case of performing such a one-time production, even if the timer effect is made to appear when the one-time production is not executed, it is possible that the variable-side timer effect is not made to appear when the one-time production is executed. There is a concern that the interest in the game will decline, so when executing the one-of-a-kind production, a special lottery related to a special notice production that does not appear during normal operation (when the one-time production is not executed) is drawn to win the special notice. You may control so that an effect can appear.

In addition, the rate at which the notice timer effect is executed in the variable display that has been the target of the timer prefetch effect does not necessarily have to be constant (here, 50%). It may be controlled differently depending on whether or not the big hit symbol appears in the variable display which has been set.

Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 177 and FIG. 178, the effect contents of the above-described timer effect example will be described in detail. Here, the processing example related to each effect described above is merely an example, and for example, an effect other than the type described above may be executed as the content of the notice effect, and the appearance timing of each notice effect or Appearance conditions and the like may be appropriately changed as long as they are within the scope of the same technical idea. Therefore, in the production example described below, it is possible to include things that are not in tune with the processing content of each of the above-mentioned productions, but within the scope of the same technical idea and within a range that can be implemented by those skilled in the art. There is no problem because the processing contents are simply changed appropriately. Further, the following "timer effect" basically means that the count display is executed in the advance notice timer effect or the variable timer effect, but in addition to the effect during the count display, It may have a meaning including a timer prefetch effect. Also, as the mode of "count display", "seconds" is counted in the following, but it is not limited to this.

FIG. 177(A) shows the effect situation in which the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed on the effect display device 1600 in the state of the number of holdings being 0 in the normal game state. FIG. 177(B) shows that two winnings are generated during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 177(A), and holding information corresponding to those winnings is stored, and the first winning is held 1 shows the production situation in which the hold display corresponding to 1 is a normal hold mode, and the hold display corresponding to the second winning hold 2 is displayed in a red mode. 177(C), after the decorative symbol SZ that was in the variable display state in the effect situation shown in FIG. 177(B) is stopped and displayed as a lost symbol, the hold information is first-in first-out (First-In First-Out). ), the effect information in which the hold information stored as the hold 1 by the shift operation is consumed and changed to the fluctuating state is shown. In addition, in this effect example, as is clear from the figure, even when the pending information of the pending 1 is consumed and the variable display state (the state of the pending 0) is reached, it is shown at the time of the pending 1. The display control is performed so that the player can recognize the mode of the hold display (hold display of hold 0). In addition, as described above, the hold display of the hold 0 can be further changed in the hold changing mode (white blinking, blue, green, red, rainbow color) even in such a variable display state. On the street.

Here, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 177(C), according to the fact that the hold information in the hold 1 state in FIGS. 177(A) and (B) is consumed and the variable display is started. Or the hold prefetching effect is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display. As the mode of the hold prefetching effect, any of the above-described first preceding aspect, second preceding aspect, and third preceding aspect may be executed, but in the effect situation shown in FIG. 177(C), the hold prefetching is performed. The appearance of the effect means that the hold information of hold 0 (in the variable display state) or the hold information of hold 1 is the target of the hold prefetching effect (example here). Then, the hold information of hold 1 is set as the target of the hold prefetching effect).

FIG. 177(D) is a normal hold as a hold display corresponding to hold 2 because one winning occurs during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 177(C) The production situation displayed in this mode is shown. However, assuming that the hold display corresponding to the hold 2 indicates specific game information (here, big hit information) and satisfies the execution condition of the above-described one-stage effect, it is shown in FIG. 177(E). As described above, the control related to the one-stage effect is executed based on the hold information (game information) corresponding to the hold 2.

Note that, as described above, the one-stage effect is modified by modifying the content of the hold information (here, hold 1) which is stored and held before the hold information (here, hold 2) that causes the one-way effect. It digests. On the other hand, the above-mentioned one-change gasse effect occurs when, for example, the hold display corresponding to the hold 2 does not indicate specific game information (here, jackpot information) The contents of the hold information (here, hold 1) stored and held before the information (here, hold 2) are digested without being changed. That is, in this case, the ease with which various effects are generated varies when the hold 1 is exhausted depending on whether the one-time production or the one-time production is performed. It is possible for the player to guess whether or not the hold indicating the game information is included (whether the one-time production or the one-game production is being performed), so that a decrease in the interest of the game can be suppressed. In both of the one-time production and the one-game production, it is desirable to control the hold display (here, hold 2) corresponding to those effects so that the hold change does not occur regardless of the result of the big hit determination.

Therefore, with regard to the timing at which the control related to the one-stage effect is executed based on the hold information (game information) corresponding to the hold 2 as described above, it is after the variable display of the hold 0 that is not the target of the change of the hold information is completed. It is preferable that the variable display of the hold 1 which is the target of modification of the hold information is started. In this regard, in this embodiment, by executing the control related to the one-stage effect, after the lost symbol is stopped by the variable display of the hold 0, but the hold display of the hold 1 is not yet shift-displayed. , As well as modifying the hold information of hold 1 (in particular, information relating to the effect), as shown in FIG. 177(E), the timer look-ahead effect that has been displayed until then and the mode of the change in the hold (red) are changed. It is supposed that the background image is hidden (normally displayed in a hold mode) and that the background image is changed to the background image when the dramatic effect is performed. Further, at this time, a predetermined display image (here, “one change”) is displayed for a predetermined time.

Further, in such an effect situation (FIG. 177(E)), the timer prefetch effect, which has been appearing until then until the variable display of the hold 0 is completed, continues the display without starting the count display. Therefore, it is possible to recognize that the target of the timer prefetching effect is the hold 1.

In FIG. 177(F), after the appearance of the one-stage effect background shown in FIG. 177(E), the pending information stored as the pending 1 is digested by the shift operation of the pending information, respectively, and is changed. The production situation is shown.

Here, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 177(F), the hold information in the hold 1 state at the time of FIG. 177(E) is exhausted and the variable display is started, or the same. The count display of the timer effect is started after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display. Similarly to this, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 177(F), a specific display (here, "make conversation notice appear") related to the first effect (here, "conversation notice") is displayed. Has been done. The timing at which the specific display (let the conversation notice appear) appears before the timing at which the timer effect (count display) appears, or after the timing at which the timer effect (count display) appears. However, it is possible to appear at an appropriate timing.

Note that the timer effect is displayed with priority over other notice effects and decorative designs, including the case of the timer look-ahead effect (FIG. 177(D)). Part of the display range (left part) of the notice effect that displays "Let's make a conversation notice appear" in a so-called ticker mode (slide image) is hidden by the timer effect that is displayed with priority over this. ing.

Further, in this effect situation (FIG. 177 (F)), since the timer effect starts the count display with a relatively small count number such as “10 seconds”, if only this is seen, the effect of low expectation is concerned. There is a high possibility that it will be targeted for timer production, and there is concern that the interest in playing games will decline. However, in this effect situation (FIG. 177 (F)), a specific display (conversation notice) that the effect type (conversation notice) that appears at a relatively early stage among the effect types targeted for the timer effect appears. Is expected, and it is expected that the production target of the timer effect is a “conversation notice that appears at a relatively early stage”, and that the success of the mission is confirmed to win the jackpot. As a result, the decline in the enjoyment of the game will be suppressed.

Moreover, when the one-time effect is being executed, the timer effect appears with a probability different from that in the normal time, as described above. For example, when the timer look-ahead effect displayed in FIG. 177(D) is displayed in the first preceding mode (prediction of timer occurrence), the timer effect appears only at a probability of about 20% in normal time. On the other hand, when the one-time production is being executed, the timer production appears with a probability of approximately 50%. Therefore, when the timer effect appears in the appearance of such a one-time production effect, the one-time production that changes the appearance probability of the timer effect (roughly 20%) does not change the appearance probability of the timer effect. The expectation that about 50%) is being executed, and eventually the expectation for winning the jackpot (because it is confirmed that the holding information for the jackpot is included when performing the one-stage production), is increased. However, at this time, when the timer effect does not appear in the appearance of such a change effect background, the appearance probability of the timer effect does not change instead of the change effect (approximately 50%) in which the appearance probability of the timer effect changes. As a result, there is a high degree of concern that the one-off gasse production (approximately 20%) is being executed.

When the timer look-ahead effect displayed in FIG. 177(D) is displayed in the third preceding mode (timer preparation), the timer effect appears with a probability of 100% in normal time. When the one-time effect is being executed, the timer effect appears only with a probability of approximately 50%. Therefore, when the timer effect does not appear in the appearance of such a changeable effect background, the changeover of the appearance probability of the timer effect is not a changeable effect (approx. 100%) in which the appearance probability of the timer effect does not change. It becomes possible to positively suggest that the production (approximately 50%) is being executed, and by extension, that the holding information for winning the big hit is included. However, at this time, when the timer effect appears in the appearance of such a change effect background, not the change effect (approx. 50%) in which the appearance probability of the timer effect changes, but the change effect in which the appearance probability of the timer effect does not change. As a result, the degree of concern that the effect (generally 100%) is being executed is increased.

178(G) is related to the timer indicating that the count display of the timer effect executed in FIG. 177(F) has reached a predetermined value (here 0) and has reached the predetermined value (here 0). The display (in this case, "Yukuzo") shows the production status. Note that the timer-related display (here, “Yukuzo”) that indicates that the predetermined numerical value (here, 0) has been reached may appear after the count display of the timer effect is hidden.

In the effect situation shown in FIG. 178(G), since the count display has reached the predetermined value while the mission display (make the conversation notice appear) is still displayed, some effect as the effect object of the timer effect. It is a situation in which it is definitely suggested that it is about to appear, and it can be said that it is a situation where great attention is paid to whether or not a conversation notice appears as the effect.

In FIG. 178(H), after the timer effect that has reached the predetermined numerical value in FIG. 178(G) and the timer-related display are hidden, the conversation notice (here, as an effect to be the effect target of the timer effect). "Maybe it's a chance") has appeared. Immediately after this, a special display showing that the mission was successful appears in the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear).

In the effect situation shown in FIG. 178(H), the success of the mission is shown in the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear), so it is definitely suggested to win the jackpot.

178(I) shows that after the mission succeeds in FIG. 178(H), the special display (here, “mission successful!”) appears, but the variable display is stopped with a missing symbol. Shows the production situation.

That is, as described above, in this embodiment, with respect to the specific display (here, "make a conversation notice appear") related to the first effect (here, "conversation notice"), the hold information to be the effect target. (While in the situation shown in FIG. 178(I), it is possible to appear within the period of the variable display corresponding to the hold 1), and under predetermined conditions, the hold information before the variable display (FIG. 178(I) In the situation shown in (), it is possible to appear earlier even within the period of the variable display according to the hold 0). Moreover, the timing itself at which the first effect (here, "conversation notice") is displayed and the special display (here, "mission success!") appears is also the hold information (big hit) targeted for the effect. It becomes possible to appear within the variable display period according to the pending information) and under the predetermined condition, within the variable display period according to the pending information (held information that is not a big hit) prior to the variable display. It is possible to appear earlier in.

According to such a configuration, the special display (here, “mission success!”) appears in the mission effect, and it is definitely suggested that it will be a big hit, but the variable display ends with a missing symbol. Since the player will be (stopped), an unexpected situation will occur for the player. However, after this, when the next variable display is started, the variable display will be ended (stopped) with a big hit symbol, so that a sense of happiness will be given after being dropped into the despair state. .. As a result, it is possible to add dramatic intonation even after it is definitely suggested that a big hit will be achieved, and it is possible to maintain the entertainment of the game until the big hit pattern is stopped. become.

However, when the special display is made to appear in advance as described above, there is a concern that a complaint on the player side with respect to the hole side may occur at the time when the variable display is ended (stopped) with a lost symbol. Therefore, in the case of the variation of the variation in which the special display appears first, the special display does not appear in the ratio of the prefetch effect that extends to the next variation display (variation display that becomes a big hit) within the execution period of the variation display. It is desirable to set it higher than when. In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 178(I), after the mission is achieved in FIG. 178(H), a timer is displayed within a period until the variable display ends with a lost design (stop). A pre-reading effect is newly generated. According to such a configuration, even if the mission succeeds before the count display of the timer effect is started, the variable display is displayed in the variable display, and the variable display in which the count display of the timer effect is started appears. It is possible to realize an effect as if the variable display in which the big hit pattern appears is carried over. As a result, it is possible to suppress the player's complaint with respect to the hall side at the time when the variable display is ended (stopped) with a lost symbol.

However, the look-ahead effect that spans a plurality of such variable displays (up to the variable display that results in a big hit) does not necessarily have to be executed, and in this sense, as shown in FIG. 178(J), the pending information in which the big hit symbol appears. It is desirable to continue to display the special display (here, “mission successful!”) that appears within the execution period of the variable display in which the lost symbol appears even after the is displayed and the variable display is started. In this respect, such a special display (here, "mission success!") is continuously displayed until the big hit symbol appears in the variable display in which the big hit symbol appears, and it is produced until the big hit symbol is stopped. Since there is a concern that amusement of the game will be deteriorated without intentional intonation, as shown in FIG. 178(K), a production image that is definitely suggested to win the jackpot as a production in the production pattern. It is desirable to hide the special display (here, "mission successful!") before the appears. As a result, after the special display (here, “mission successful!”) is hidden, the effect image shown in FIG. 178 (K) is definitely decided to win the big hit as the effect content in the effect pattern. Until the appearance of the suggested effect image, the sense of anxiety about the appearance of the jackpot pattern increases to some extent, and the effect situation shown in FIG. 178(L) (the effect situation in which the jackpot pattern is stopped). ), it is expected to maintain a good interest in playing games.

Note that in FIG. 178(J), the count display of the 30-second timer effect is started, and after the effect situation shown in FIG. 178(J) appears, the effect situation shown in FIG. 178(K) changes. By the time it appears, the count display of the 30-second timer effect is finished, the timer-related display (here, "Yukuzo") is displayed, and the effect to be the effect is occurring. Needless to say.

Next, a timer effect example different from the timer effect examples shown in FIGS. 177 and 178 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 179 and 180.

FIG. 179(A) shows the effect situation in which the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed on the effect display device 1600 in the state of the number of holdings being 0 in the normal game state. FIG. 179(B) shows that three winnings are generated during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 179(A), and the hold information corresponding to those winnings is stored, and the first winning is held. The effect that the hold display corresponding to 1 is the normal hold mode, the hold display corresponding to the second-winning hold 2 is the red mode, and the hold display corresponding to the third-winning hold 3 is the blue mode It shows the situation. FIG. 179(C) shows that after the decorative symbol SZ that was in the variable display state in the effect situation shown in FIG. 179(B) is stopped and displayed as a lost symbol, the pending information is first-in first-out (First-In First-Out). ) Shows the effect situation in which the hold information stored as the hold 1 by the shift operation is consumed and changed to the fluctuating state. Note that, also in this effect example, as is clear from the figure, even when the pending information of the pending 1 is consumed and the variable display state (the pending 0 state) is reached, it is shown at the pending 1 time. The display control is performed so that the player can recognize the mode of the hold display (hold display of hold 0). In addition, as described above, the hold display of the hold 0 can be further changed in the hold changing mode (white blinking, blue, green, red, rainbow color) even in such a variable display state. On the street. Further, in FIGS. 179 and 180, the movable body KT for performance, which has been omitted in FIGS. 177 and 178, is illustrated in the drawings for convenience of description.
In addition, the movable body KT is, for example, “a back lower back movable effect unit 3100, a back upper left movable effect unit 3200, a back left movable effect unit 3300, a back middle movable effect unit 3400, a back lower front movable effect unit 3500, and the like. "Movable member"

Here, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 179(C), when the hold information in the hold 1 state in FIGS. 179(A) and (B) is consumed and variable display is started. Or the hold prefetching effect is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display. The hold prefetching effect may be executed in any of the above-described first preceding aspect, second preceding aspect, and third preceding aspect, but in the effectual situation shown in FIG. 179(C), the hold prefetching is performed. The appearance of the effect means that one of the hold information of hold 0 (in the variable display state), the hold information of hold 1, and the hold information of hold 2 is set as a target of the hold prefetching effect. (In this example, the hold information of hold 1 is set as the target of the hold prefetching effect).

Here, as a mode of the hold prefetching effect, the count display may be executed from the time when the corresponding hold display (here, hold information of hold 1) is still in the hold state. That is, in this case, the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, "0"), and the event that the variable display of the decorative pattern SZ ends may occur, and the count display also reaches the predetermined value (here, "0"). Since the phenomenon in which the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ ends may occur before the time reaches, the target of the timer effect targets any of the holding information even when the count display is being executed. It becomes possible to make it difficult to grasp.

However, in this effect example, any one of the first preceding aspect (prediction of timer occurrence), the second preceding aspect (timer occurrence chance), and the third preceding aspect (timer occurrence chance) is displayed as the mode of the hold prefetching effect. Can be done.

In this respect, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 179(C), of the hold information 0, 1, and 2, the hold information 1 is in a red mode, which is the hold display mode with the highest jackpot expectation. In view of this, from the player's side, it is desirable that the timer prefetch effect is for the hold information 1 and that a combined effect with the red hold display is generated. In other words, in this case, the combined effect indicates that the pending information 1 indicates that the expectation of a big hit is even higher. It is possible to increase the expectation that the jackpot pattern appears in any of the hold information 0 to 2 as compared with the case where the jackpot expectation is dispersed as the target of the effect. Also, if the blue hold 2 with low expectations is targeted for the timer look-ahead effect, there is a concern that the enjoyment of the game will deteriorate. It is also important to progress the production so that it is not the target of the prefetch production.

Moreover, as described above, in the present embodiment, when a new winning occurs while the hold information (big hit hold) in which the big hit symbol appears is stored, the big hit hold time is set instead of the normal time table T9a (FIG. 174). The holding change effect is executed with reference to a dedicated table (FIG. 175: Special time holding change table T9b). In the hold change effect using the special time hold change table T9b, when the big hit hold is already included (when the hold 1 of the red form is the big hit), red and green are unlikely to appear as the hold 2 form. And the mode of blinking blue or white is relatively likely to appear. Therefore, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 179(C), when the timer prefetch effect targets the hold information 1 and functions to increase the jackpot expectation level, the timer for the blue hold 2 with a low expectation degree is used. The chance increase due to avoiding the deterioration of the game interest due to the target and the fact that the hold information of the hold 1 in the red form is a big hit is referred to the special time hold change table T9b (FIG. 175) and is the blue form. Increase the chances by expecting that the hold display of hold 2 is blue (high probability of occurrence) in the production situation (the notice timer production with high expectation of big hit is "production in variable display during execution") Since it also acts as if it is supporting the fact that the variable display during execution is a big hit), chances will increase by double, so it is aimed to improve the enjoyment of the game Will be able to.

Therefore, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 179(B) or (C), whether a pending display of blinking blue or white is newly generated when a new winning is generated, or a pending display of green or red is displayed. By confirming whether or not a new jackpot is generated, it is possible to recognize whether or not the big hit hold is included, and it can be said that there is a production situation in which a new winning is promoted.

FIG. 179(D) shows that the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ that was being executed is a missing symbol while the timer prefetch effect mode shown in FIG. 179(C) is maintained (without counting is started). After the end (stop), the holding information stored as the holding 1 is digested by the shift operation of the holding information, respectively, to show the effect state in which the holding information is changed.

In the effect situation shown in FIG. 179(D), the player is subject to the timer prefetch effect, which is the hold information of hold 0 (in the variable display state), which is a red mode, and the blue mode. It becomes possible to recognize any of the hold information of the hold 1 and hope that the count display is executed within the execution period of the variable display according to the hold information of the hold 0 which is a red form.

Note that, also in this effect example, the timer effect is displayed with priority over other notice effects and decorative patterns, including the case of the timer prefetch effect (FIG. 179(D)). Therefore, here, a partial range (left part) of the dialogue portion of the female character in the conversation notice is hidden by the timer effect that is displayed with priority over this.

FIG. 179(E) shows an effect situation in which the timer pre-reading effect ends and the count display of the timer effect is in execution while the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 179(D) is being executed. ..

However, as described above, whether or not the count display is started during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ according to the consumption of the red reserved information (whether the timer prefetch is for the red reserved information). ) Is an item of great interest to the player. Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, in order to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize that the count display is in the execution state, the count display in the execution state is displayed. It is possible to control the moving movable body KT to the front so as to position it for a predetermined time. According to such a configuration, the timer effect (timer look-ahead effect, count display) is being executed, and it is possible to confirm whether the timer effect count display is being executed while giving the player a thrilling feeling. By making it difficult, it becomes possible to further increase the attention to the timer effect and increase the excitement.

In order to suitably realize such an effect, in a situation where the timer effect is being executed but the count display is not yet executed (such as during execution of the timer prefetching effect), the movable body KT for the effect is produced. It is desirable to control so as not to move (move). That is, in this case, when the player does not care about the existence of the effectable movable body KT, the effectable movable body KT suddenly moves and the count display becomes difficult to see. With such a surprise-like effect that occurs at the worst timing, it becomes possible to further increase the attention to the timer effect and increase the excitement.

Further, the action effect by the movable body KT for the effect may be made to function only as an effect of making the timer look-ahead effect easily visible and making the count display difficult to visually recognize in the timer effect. You may make it function as a target notice E2 (first effect). That is, in this case, although it is the non-target announcement E2 (first effect) that is not originally related to the effect of the timer effect and is not originally related, the non-target announcement E2 (first effect) is executed during the count display. By (Fig. 179(E)), for example, a higher jackpot expectation degree than that of the cut-in effect shown in the next effect situation (Fig. 179(F)) is shown, and the interest of the game is improved. Will be able to.

As described above, it is desirable to execute the non-target notice E2 (here, the motion effect by the movable object KT for effect) in any of a plurality of modes with different expectations, for example, counting. In the non-execution state, it is desirable that the jackpot expectation degree be indicated depending on which of the light emission modes (blue, green, red) when the movable body for production KT is operated appears. At this time, when the movable object KT for production operates in the red light emission mode, a jackpot expectation degree higher than that of the cut-in production shown in the next production situation (FIG. 179(F)) may be displayed. The expected value of the jackpot expectation degree when the action effect by the movable body KT for effect is lower than the expected value of the jackpot expectation degree of the cut-in effect shown in the next effect situation (FIG. 179(F)). Is required. However, as also described above, when performing the action effect by the movable object KT for effect during the execution of the count display, even if any of blue, green, and red appears as the light emission mode, the movable object for the effect is performed. It is desirable to control so that the jackpot expectation degree indicated by the action effect by the body KT is the same (for example, 70%). According to such a configuration, during execution of the count display, attention should be paid not to what kind of aspect appears in the motion effect by the effect movable body KT, but whether the motion effect itself by the effect movable body KT occurs. It becomes possible to avoid a decrease in amusement of the game depending on the mode when the action effect by the movable body KT for effect is generated.

By the way, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 179(E), the fact that the target of the timer prefetch effect is not the hold 2 in the blue mode but the hold 1 in red has succeeded in increasing the above-mentioned double chance. In addition, the chance is increased because the non-target notice E2 (here, the motion effect by the movable body KT for effect) is executed during the execution of the count display. Therefore, if it is suggested that there is a high possibility that the jackpot will not be won in the variation display even in such a high-performance production situation, the interest in the game will be enhanced. It is inevitable that the interest of the game will be significantly reduced in the supposed variable display. In this regard, in the special time hold change table T9b (FIG. 175) referred to when the big hit hold (including the hold 0) is included, when a new winning is generated, the hold of the green or red form is held. Since it is difficult for the information to appear, if the hold 2 corresponding to the occurrence of a new winning in the effect situation shown in FIG. Not doing so may expose the player to the situation.

Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, among the timer effects, a new prize is won during the period in which the count display of the specific timer effect, which is a mode with high expectation, is executed or in the period thereafter. Even if occurs, the mode (white blinking, blue, green, red, rainbow color) becomes difficult to recognize, and even if the hold display that has already been displayed is further changed to hold, control that makes it difficult to recognize the mode I'm going to do it. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 179(E), although the holdings 1 and 2 are hidden and displayed by the shadows thereof, it is difficult to recognize the mode of the holding display, but the holding display itself in the effect display device 1600. May be hidden. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the enjoyment of the game is deteriorated by displaying a green or red pending display when a new winning occurs even though the count display with high expectation is being executed. become.

179(F) shows that after the count display of the timer effect shown in FIG. 179(E) reaches a predetermined numerical value (here "0") and the timer related display (here "Yukuzo") is displayed, The production situation (the cut-in production by the teammate character) that is the production target of the timer production is shown. As shown in FIG. 179(F), even in the situation where the effect (cut-in effect by the teammate character) that is the effect target of the timer effect is being executed, the holdings 1 and 2 remain hidden and are shaded. It is difficult to recognize the mode of the hold display.

In FIG. 180(G), after the effect (cut-in effect by the teammate character) that is the target of the timer effect is executed in FIG. 180(F), the variable display is displayed when the teammate character wins over the enemy character. It shows the production situation which is shown to be definitely stopped with the big hit symbol.

In the effect situation shown in FIG. 180(G), since it is definitely suggested that a big hit will occur, whichever mode of holding 1 or 2 appears, the enjoyment of the game is reduced. There is no such thing. Therefore, with respect to the holds 1 and 2 that are difficult to recognize, it is possible to recognize which mode has appeared after the effect indicating whether or not to be a big hit is displayed in such a manner that it can be recognized. It is desirable to be done. That is, in this case, even if it is shown that the variation display is definitely stopped due to the defeat of the enemy character by the enemy character, at that time, the modes of holding 1 and 2 become recognizable, and as a result, holding becomes possible. In some cases, it may be recognized that any one of 1 and 2 is in the form of red or rainbow, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of games.

Further, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 180(G), a new timer effect is generated and the count display is started. This count display remains in the remaining count number (the count number displayed at the start of the count display) even in the effect situation shown in FIG. 180(H) in which the jackpot pattern is fixedly stopped and the variable display is ended. Of these, the number of counts remaining is greater than the smallest count (10 seconds), and no effect that is the target of the timer effect is generated, and continues even after the variable display ends. It is executed as the special timer effect described above.

However, after that, the count display of the timer effect is hidden during the period in which the opening effect is executed in the effect situation shown in FIG. 180(I). Thereby, the variable display (symbol effect) ended in the effect situation shown in FIG. 180(H) and the effect during the big hit game (big hit game effect) started in the effect situation shown in FIG. 180(J). It becomes possible to recognize that the effects are not connected to each other, and the player can enjoy the newly started effects with a fresh feeling.

In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, the count display is secretly executed in accordance with the passage of time even during the period in which the count display of the timer effect is hidden (the execution effect execution period). When the count display of the timer effect is re-displayed in the effect during the big hit game (big hit game effect) started in the effect situation shown in FIG. 180(J), the numerical value of the count display is advanced by that amount. I am trying to
As a result, the production situation will be created as if the remaining time until the count display of the timer production reaches the predetermined value is drastically reduced, so it counts when the player's feelings are not ready. The display can be made to reach a predetermined numerical value, and it is possible to preferably prevent the timer effect continued from the state of variable display being rut.

In the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, the timer effect continued from the variable display state is controlled so that the count display reaches a predetermined numerical value within the execution period of the big hit game. Note that, at this time, the point that a timer-related display (here, “Yukuzo”) that indicates that a predetermined numerical value (here, 0) has been made to appear is the same as the timer effect performed within the period of the variable display.

In FIG. 180(K), after the count display of the timer effect shown in FIG. 180(J) reaches a predetermined numerical value (here, “0”) and the timer-related display (here, “Yukuzo”) is displayed, It shows an effect situation in which a specific effect (corresponding to the above-mentioned first special effect and second special effect, “CHANCE” is displayed in the figure) which is an effect target of the timer effect is being executed.

As shown in FIG. 180(K), in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, a specific effect (display of "CHANCE") can be executed within the execution period of the big hit game, and the specific effect (" When the "CHANCE" display is executed, the jackpot type in which the winning jackpot is advantageous to the player (for example, a type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 16 rounds, or a high probability short time gaming state after the jackpot game is finished) It is shown that there is a high degree of expectation that is the type) in which The ratio may be 100%. In this way, when the special timer effect described above in which the count display is continued after the jackpot game is started is executed, the jackpot selected is a jackpot type that is advantageous to the player as well as the jackpot is confirmed. Since the degree of expectation also increases, it becomes possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Then, after this, an effect in which the teammate character fights against the enemy character is performed in a specific round game or the like, and as a result, when the teammate character wins (FIG. 180(L)), the jackpot type that wins the jackpot is advantageous to the player. Will be shown. In addition, when the teammate character is defeated in the production, it is indicated that the jackpot won is not a jackpot type advantageous to the player.

In this way, when the result of the effect during the big hit game appears, the game is advanced with the content according to the result. For example, when the result that the teammate character wins is obtained, the big hit game is executed up to 16 rounds. Or, after the jackpot game is over, it is controlled to a high probability time saving state. On the other hand, when the result that the ally character is defeated is obtained, the big hit game is finished in eight rounds, or a game state having a lower advantage degree than the high probability time saving state after the big hit game is finished (for example, low probability). It becomes to be controlled in a time saving state.

Here, the effect contents of the specific effect (display of “CANCE”) shown in FIG. 180(K) may be related to the effect of the ally character fighting the enemy character in the specific round game. For example, it is possible to set an effect content for a teammate character to acquire a weapon in the specific effect shown in FIG. 180(K), and execute an effect to fight an enemy character using the weapon acquired in a specific round game. For example, in the specific effect shown in FIG. 180(K), it is possible to make the ally character more likely to win the subsequent battle.

Next, various aspects of the timer effect itself that may appear when executing such a timer effect, and various effects performed in association with the timer effect will be described. It should be noted that the respective effects described below can be appropriately combined and executed among the effects, and can also be appropriately combined and executed with the respective effects described above. Further, in each of the following performance examples, the case where it is executed as the notice timer effect is described, but it may be executed as the variable timer effect instead of the notice timer effect. That is, in this case, the effect contents of each of the following effect examples are predetermined as the effect contents of the variation pattern.

[Timer exclusion production]
As described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, a plurality of performance modes (for example, conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, character A operation, special timer, cut-in B, character B operation, etc., are used as the timer-targeted effect candidates. ) Is prepared, and any one of these effect modes is set as a timer target (count target) (timer target notice lottery), and a timer display is performed in which count display is performed toward the timing when the effect mode targeted for the timer appears. To execute. In this respect, in the timer effect according to this embodiment, a plurality of effect modes (conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, character A action (character A notice), special timer, cut-in B, character B action. (Preliminary notice B)) is performed while it is unclear which one is the timer target, and in such an effect situation, an effect mode (timer object notice) It is possible to perform a display that suggests which one of the performance modes that has not been determined as the timer target in the lottery (timer target exclusion performance).

That is, in this case, at the stage where the remaining count in the timer effect is consumed, it is possible to provide the estimation material as to which effect mode is the timer target.
For example, when a low-expecting production mode (for example, a conversation notice) is suggested as a production mode that is not a timer target, the possibility of a low-expectation production mode appearing as a timer target is excluded at that point. Therefore, even though the remaining count in the timer effect is being consumed, the expectation for the appearance of a highly expected effect (for example, character B action) to appear as the timer target is amusement of the game. Will be expected to improve. Further, when a high-expecting production mode (for example, a character B operation) is suggested as a production mode that is not a timer target, at that point, the timer production is not expected to have other expectations. It becomes possible to focus on the effect, and it is expected to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game when the count display reaches a predetermined value. With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately change the sense of expectation for the timer effect without changing the mode of the count display itself while the remaining count is consumed.

FIG. 181(a) shows a mode of a single timer (YES in step S5506), and a second process in which it is determined not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5507). In a situation, it is a time chart for explaining the concrete contents of the timer object exclusion effect performed when the variation numbers 7 and 8 (see FIG. 148) corresponding to “no-timer character reach” are selected. FIG. 181(b) shows a mode of a single timer (YES in step S5506), and a second process in which it is determined not to execute the mission effect (let the conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5507). It is a time chart for demonstrating the specific content of the timer object exclusion production performed when the variation numbers 15 and 16 (refer to FIG. 148) corresponding to "SP reach without timer" are selected in the situation.

In the example shown in FIG. 181(a), as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), a specific timer type (one of "holding change 5", "feature A operation 3", and "special timer 1"). Is selected (see FIG. 161), the timer target exclusion effect is executed. Even in the example shown in FIG. 181(b), a specific timer type (as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510)) When any one of "holding change 5", "characteristics A operation 3", and "characteristics B operation 1" is selected (see FIG. 161), the timer target exclusion effect is executed.

However, the timer target exclusion effect is not performed when a specific timer type is determined as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510). For example, the timer type is not related and the variation pattern type Alternatively, it may be performed based on the fact that a special result is obtained in a predetermined effect lottery based on the result of the jackpot judgment or the like. Further, as will be described later, the timer target exclusion effect may be made to appear in a variation pattern in which it is determined that the timer effect is not executed, or may be made to appear at a timing before the timer effect is executed. Good. According to such a configuration, if it is assumed that the count display of the timer effect is executed ex post (for the timer object advance effect) (whether it is executed or not), the effect that does not appear as the timer object It becomes possible to indicate in advance which type the mode is. In addition, when the timer target exclusion effect appears in a state where the timer effect has not been executed yet (a state in which even the display of the timer prefetch effect does not appear), the timer effect does not appear after that when the timer target exclusion effect does not appear. It is desirable that the execution rate be set to be high so that it is also executed as an effect that suggests in advance that the timer effect will be executed.

First, in the example shown in FIG. 181(a), in the example in which the timer effect is executed in the mode of "holding change 5" or "characteristics A operation 3", 20 seconds have elapsed since the symbol variation started. At around the timing, a count display having a count number of 20 seconds is started, and after the count display becomes "0", a production mode ("holding change 5" or "characteristics A operation" 3”) appears.

Also, in the example shown in FIG. 181(b), in the example in which the timer effect is executed in the mode of "holding change 5" or "characteristics A operation 3", similarly, 20 seconds after the symbol variation is started. At a timing around the elapsed time, the count display having the count number of 20 seconds is started, and after the count display becomes “0”, the production mode (“holding change 5” or “characteristic object”) A movement 3") appears.

In this respect, in the case of these examples, the timer effect is in an unexecuted state (a state in which even the display of the timer prefetch effect does not appear) at the timing when 10 seconds have elapsed since the symbol variation started. Instead, the first timer target exclusion effect may occur. In the first timer target exclusion effect, for example, it is indicated that "conversation notice" is not a candidate for the timer object, so that when the timer effect occurs within the fluctuation, the candidate for the timer object is displayed. It becomes possible for the player to understand that the number of items has been reduced to any of the pending change, the cut-in A, the accessory A operation, the special timer, the cut-in B, and the accessory B operation. That is, in this case, the low-expecting production mode out of the plurality of presentation modes (conversation notice, pending change, cut-in A, accessory A operation, special timer, cut-in B, accessory B operation) is excluded from the candidates for the timer. Since it becomes possible to recognize the fact that the high-expected rendering mode is expected to be a candidate for the timer target, the player hopes that the timer rendering will occur within the fluctuation. Therefore, it is expected to improve the enjoyment of the game when the timer effect (count display) is in a non-executed state.

In the period in which the count display is in an unexecuted state (in this example, a period from the start of the symbol variation until 20 seconds elapse), the above timer prefetch effect (first preceding aspect, second period) The preceding mode and the third preceding mode) may be displayed.

Next, at the timing when 20 seconds have passed since the symbol variation was started, the second timer target exclusion effect may occur in synchronization with the start of the count display in the timer effect.
In the second timer target exclusion effect, effects other than the effects (conversation notice) that have already been excluded in the first timer target exclusion effect are excluded. For example, in the second timer target exclusion effect, when it is indicated that the "special timer" is not a timer target candidate, the timer target candidate is changed to hold, cut-in A, character A operation, cut-in B. The player can recognize that the action B has been narrowed down. In this case, among the plurality of effect modes (conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, character A operation, special timer, cut-in B, character B operation), the effect mode that is a big hit is selected from the timer target candidates. Since it becomes possible to recognize that it is out of the way, it is possible to fuel a sense of anxiety as to whether or not a highly anticipated production will appear as a timer target after the first timer target exclusion production is executed. Become.

Then, next, the timer target exclusion effect for the third time may occur at the timing when 30 seconds have elapsed since the symbol variation was started. In the third timer target exclusion effect, effects other than the effects (conversation notice, special timer) that have already been excluded in the first and second timer target exclusion effects are further excluded. For example, when it is indicated that "cut-in B" is not a candidate for timer, the candidate for timer is narrowed down to any of pending change, cut-in A, character A operation, and character B operation. It becomes possible for the player to understand that.

Then, at the timing when 40 seconds have elapsed from the start of the symbol variation, the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, 0), and the production mode ("holding change 5 In the case of ", a holding change occurs, and in the case of "characteristics A operation 3", the characteristics A operation occurs") is executed as an effect for the timer.

By the way, in the timer effect of "holding change 5" and "characteristics A operation 3" shown in FIGS. 181(a) and (b), the timer target is set when 40 seconds have elapsed since the symbol variation was started. Although the effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 161 and FIG. 162 together, in the timer effect of such a mode (the timer effect in which the effect of the timer target is executed when 40 seconds elapse) It can be seen that there are only three preparations for the timer effect, that is, conversation announcement, hold change, and accessory action. That is, in this case, the experienced player confirms that the timer effect of the mode in which the count display reaches the predetermined value occurs at the timing of 40 seconds after the symbol variation starts, and the timer target is the conversation notice. , Hold change, cut-in A, role A action, special timer, cut-in B, role B action, not one of the three, conversation notice, hold change, role A action It is supposed to see through. Then, at this time, if there are cases where two effects among the conversation notice, the pending change, and the character A operation are excluded by the timer target exclusion effect, which effect is generated when the count display reaches a predetermined value. Since it appears or is exposed, it is desirable to execute the timer target exclusion effect so that at least two or more effects are left as candidates for the timer effect.

According to such a timer target exclusion effect, when the timer effect (count display) is in an unexecuted state or when the count display is being executed, the feeling of anxiety and anxiety is suppressed (which effect is excluded from the timer target). It becomes possible to maintain the amusement of amusement until the count display reaches a predetermined value.

Moreover, in the example shown in FIGS. 181(a) and 181(b), the timing for generating the timer target exclusion effect is the timing at which the count display in the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, 0) (or the timer object effect). Is set as a candidate for (appearing timing) when any of a plurality of timings (10 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds, 40 seconds, etc. from the start of fluctuation) arrives.

For example, looking at the time charts shown in FIG. 161 and FIG. 162, at the time when 45 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation, even if the count display becomes 0 after that, the “characteristics A operation” is displayed as the timer target effect. It can be seen that there is no possibility of appearance. As described above, in the timer effect, each timing normally prepared as a candidate for the timing at which the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, 0) (in this example, 10 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds, 40 seconds from the start of fluctuation) Etc.), the types of effects that can appear as timer targets are also narrowed down. In this regard, since the timer target exclusion effect is performed, even for a beginner, each timing prepared as a candidate for the timing at which the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, 0) (in this example, start of fluctuation) 10 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds, 40 seconds, etc.), it becomes possible to highly enjoy the timer effect by recognizing that the types of effects that can appear as timer targets are narrowed down. ..

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 181(a), an example in which the timer effect is executed in the form of "special timer 1" (a count display having a count number of 70 seconds in accordance with the start of the character variation of the character reach is displayed. In the example) performed, each time 10 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds, and 40 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation, the first timer target exclusion effect, the second timer target exclusion effect, the third timer target exclusion effect, 4 The second timer object exclusion effect will be executed respectively. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 181(b), an example in which the timer effect is executed in the form of "characteristics B operation 1" (a count having a count of 70 seconds in accordance with the start of the symbol variation of SP reach) In the example in which the display is performed, every time 10 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds, 40 seconds, and 50 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation, the first timer target exclusion effect, the second timer target exclusion effect, the third timer The target exclusion effect, the fourth timer target exclusion effect, and the fifth timer target exclusion effect are executed, respectively.

In the timer target exclusion effect according to this embodiment, each time a plurality of predetermined timings after the symbol variation is started, suggests one effect mode which is not a timer object in the count effect. I did it. However, the timer target exclusion effect does not always have to be executed each time a plurality of predetermined timings arrive, and a predetermined probability is generated each time those timings arrive based on the type of the variation pattern or the result of the jackpot determination. The timer target exclusion effect may appear, or the timing for executing the timer target exclusion effect may be selected from those timings. Further, at this time, the execution probability of the timer target exclusion effect may be different for each of a plurality of predetermined timings. For example, at a relatively early timing after the symbol variation starts (for example, the timing at which the first timer target exclusion effect shown in FIG. 181(a) may occur), relatively after the symbol variation starts. If the execution ratio of the timer target exclusion effect is set to be higher than the later timing (for example, the timing at which the fourth timer target exclusion effect shown in FIG. 181(a) may occur), one effect is achieved. It becomes possible to consume the count display for a relatively long time in a state where it is suggested that the aspect is not the timer target. However, in this case, when the timer target exclusion effect is executed at the timing when the first timer target exclusion effect may occur and when the timer target exclusion effect is executed at the timing when the fourth timer object exclusion effect may occur. With (or whatever timing the timer target exclusion effect is executed), it is desirable that the jackpot symbols appear at the same proportion (expectation level). In this case, the degree of expectation may include 100%. According to such a configuration, the timer target exclusion effect appears at an early timing (after the rate at which the timer target exclusion effect is executed is high) after the count display is started (after the symbol starts changing). Since it becomes conscious of doing, it is expected to improve the enjoyment of the game even from the beginning of the production.

In the case of realizing such an effect, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first sets the timer target based on the result of the big hit determination, the type of the variation pattern, or the mode of the timer effect (for example, "hold change 5" of the character reach). Determination of whether to generate an exclusion effect, and at which timing (in the example of FIG. 181(a), up to three timings (10 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds)) of the timer object exclusion effect are generated. Perform processing. Next, at each timing when it is determined that the timer target exclusion effect is to be generated, a determination process is performed as to which effect mode is suggested as the effect mode that is not the timer target. Note that these determination processes are performed, for example, after the processes shown in FIG. 149 are performed, or after step S5510 is performed and before the step S5511 is performed, and before the determination. It can be performed based on the result information of the processing.

Alternatively, a timer target exclusion effect may be performed that is exclusive (conversation notification only) that suggests that a particular effect mode (e.g., conversation notification) is not a timer target. That is, in this case, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, based on the result of the big hit determination, the type of the variation pattern, or the mode of the timer effect (for example, "holding change 5" of character reach, etc.), a dedicated timer object exclusion effect is created. A determination process is performed as to whether or not to generate the timer target exclusion effect for exclusive use.

In any case, when the performance mode suggested as a performance mode that is not a timer target is a performance mode of relatively low expectation, the suggested performance mode is a performance mode of relatively high expectation. It is desirable that the proportion of the high-anticipated presentation mode appearing as the timer-targeted presentation is higher than that in the case of. With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game when a dedicated timer target exclusion effect for excluding low-expected effect modes (conversation notice) appears.

In addition, at least at a specific timing of the plurality of timings, only a specific performance mode (for example, "conversation notice" which is a low-expected performance mode) is suggested as a performance mode that is not a timer target. May be set as follows. That is, in this case, at the time when the timer target exclusion effect is generated at a specific timing, it is understood that the specific effect mode (for example, "conversation notice", which is an expected low effect effect mode) is not the timer target. Since it becomes possible, it is possible to maintain the amusement of the game by giving a sense of expectation that the production of the timer target is in the highly anticipated production mode.

Further, in the timer target exclusion effect according to this embodiment, one effect mode is suggested as an effect that is not a timer object, but under a predetermined condition, two or more effects are not an timer object. May be suggested. For example, if two low expected effects are suggested, it is possible to greatly enhance the interest of the game even though the remaining count in the timer effect is being consumed.

In addition, regarding the “display that suggests which production mode is not the timer target”, within the period from the start of the count display until the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, 0) (or, It is desirable to make it appear within the period until the production which is the target of the timer is executed) and maintain the display during the same period. Furthermore, as for the “display indicating which effect mode is not the timer target”, if the display is maintained even after the timer target effect is executed, the timer effect is displayed. Can be used as a material for remembering in which presentation mode the target was.

Further, when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, “display indicating which effect mode is not a timer target” is displayed while the remaining count of the count display is being consumed (for example, a specific timer). When the type of timer effect is executed, it is hidden at a predetermined timing (when the count value reaches a specific count value before the count display reaches a specific value), and is hidden. It is also possible to execute the effect targeted for the timer when the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”) while the value is maintained. That is, in this case, the remaining count of the count display will be exhausted while it is not known when the “display that suggests which production mode is not the timer target” is hidden, It is expected that the tension will be maintained during the same period (a period in which rut is likely to become a rut). In addition, in order to obtain such an action and effect, regarding the hidden “display that suggests which production mode is not a timer target”, the count display reaches a predetermined value and becomes a timer target. It is desirable to maintain the non-display state even after the appearance mode that appears has appeared. However, even if the “display suggesting which effect mode is not the timer target” is hidden, the effect once suggested as the effect mode not being the timer target is the timer target effect. It is important to control so that the timer does not appear, and it is possible to enjoy the timer effect with peace of mind unless the memory of the hidden effect mode is forgotten. In addition, regarding the “display that suggests which production mode is not the timer target” that has been hidden, even after the production mode in which the count display reaches a predetermined value and is the timer target appears. After maintaining the non-display state (for example, after a lapse of a predetermined time), the symbol is displayed again before the fixed stop, and it is confirmed whether the player's memory is correct. It is desirable to be able to do so.

In addition, when the "display that suggests which production mode is not the timer target" appears when the timer production (count display) is in the unexecuted state, the predetermined production condition is When satisfied, the timer effect (count display) may be hidden while the timer effect is not being executed. That is, in this case, it is possible to give a feeling of tension regarding the timer effect before the count display is started, and it is possible to provide a sharp effect.

Note that, as will be described later, as for the “display indicating which effect mode is not the timer target”, it is as shown in FIGS. 198(C) to (K) and FIGS. 200(B) to (J). In addition, it is only necessary to be able to grasp that the effect mode does not occur when the count display becomes 0. Other methods include, for example, a method of displaying the name of the effect mode on the effect display device 1600 and adding an X mark to the effect mode, or a conversation announcement or cut-in at a timing before the count display reaches 0. The method of suggesting that conversation notice or cut-in cannot be executed by showing that the female character or male character used when performing the game is performed, or the hold display is monochrome before and after the count display reaches 0. Show the method of making the color change impossible by displaying with, and show that the accessory A and B have failed and become inoperable at the timing before the count display reaches 0. It is also possible to adopt a method or the like that suggests that the action A and B cannot be performed. In short, a special mode is prepared in which the count display does not appear before the count display reaches 0 when it is selected as an effect for the timer, and this special timing is set before the count display reaches 0. By executing an effect that is not a timer target, such as a conversation announcement or a hold change, in a special mode, it is possible to realize “a display that indicates which effect mode is not a timer target”. ..

In addition, when the timer target exclusion effect is generated, the high-expectation effect mode is more likely to appear as the timer target when the count display reaches a predetermined value, as compared with the case where the timer target exclusion effect is not generated. If the control is performed as described above, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game when the count display is exhausting the remaining count is more appropriately improved.

By the way, if it is suggested in the timer target exclusion effect that the effect mode (special timer) of the hit confirmation is not the timer object, any other effect mode appears when the count display reaches a predetermined value. Even in this case, there is a concern that it will be compared with the effect mode (special timer) of winning confirmation, and the interest in the game will be reduced. Therefore, if it is shown that the effect mode (special timer) of hit confirmation is not the timer target, even if any other effect mode appears when the count display reaches a predetermined value, the symbol concerned The variation may be stopped without fail with a jackpot pattern.

Alternatively, when the timer target exclusion effect is generated, the big hit symbol appears even if any effect mode appears as the timer object when the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”). The proportions (expectations) may be the same. In this case, the degree of expectation may include 100%. That is, in this case, since it is not necessary to pay attention to which effect mode appears as the timer target when the count display reaches a predetermined value, the timer target exclusion effect substantially appears at the time (the remaining count). It becomes possible to end the timer effect early when the time is being consumed). As a result, it becomes possible to focus attention on other effects even though the remaining count of the count display is being consumed, so it is possible to design an effect that increases the types of effects that appear per unit time. You will be able to urge.

Further, when two or more count displays (timer effects) appear within one symbol variation period, and after a timer object exclusion effect is executed, an effect situation in which they reach a predetermined value occurs at different timings, the timer It is desirable to control the effect mode suggested by the target exclusion effect not to be the timer object so that it will not appear as the timer object in any timer effect (count display).

Also, regarding the effect mode suggested by the timer object exclusion effect that it is not a timer object, even if it is a timing different from the timing when the count display reaches a predetermined value, it will not appear afterwards. It is desirable to control (control not to appear as an effect that is not a timer target).

Further, when the timer target exclusion effect is executed, a preceding effect of whether or not to suggest that it is not a timer object may be performed. That is, in this case, the timer target exclusion effect is not executed when the predetermined mode does not appear in the preceding effect, and the timer target exclusion effect is executed after the predetermined mode appears in the preceding effect.

Further, in this embodiment, the timer target exclusion effect is executed in accordance with any of a plurality of timings prepared as candidates for the timing when the count display in the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, 0). However, it is only necessary to execute the timer target exclusion effect in accordance with any of a plurality of predetermined timings, and it is not always necessary to perform in accordance with these timings. However, even within the period in which the count display is being executed, it is desirable not to execute the timer target exclusion effect during a specific effect period such as a period in which the remaining count is low.

Further, among the timer types determined in the count display lottery (step S5510), among the timer types in which execution of the timer target exclusion effect is not permitted over the entire period in which the count display is executed, and in the period in which the count display is executed, There may be a case where execution of the timer target exclusion effect is not allowed in a part of the period. By preparing such a special timer type, when the timer type appears, it becomes possible to concentrate on how the count display is consumed, and the original timer effect can be enjoyed. Like
Note that, in order to obtain such an action effect, during a special period in which the timer target exclusion effect cannot occur, an effect mode different from that when the timer target exclusion effect does not occur is made to appear in the special period. It can be said that it is important for the player to be able to recognize this. On the other hand, even if the timer type is such that execution of the timer target exclusion effect is not permitted over the entire period in which the count display is executed, in the period before the count display is started, concentration on the timer effect is concentrated. Since there is no concern that the game will be killed, it is desirable to allow execution of the timer target exclusion effect.

It should be noted that the period in which the above-mentioned "display suggesting which effect mode is not the timer target is hidden" is hidden is controlled to be the same period as the period in which execution of the timer target exclusion effect is not permitted. Good.

In addition, when the count display in the timer effect is performed in any of a plurality of modes including at least the first mode and the second mode, and the count display is performed in the second mode, Control may be performed such that the ratio at which the timer target exclusion effect is executed is higher than that in the case where the count display is performed in the mode. In this case, the ratio may include 100%. That is, in this case, it is possible to suggest that the timer target exclusion effect is performed by the mode of the count display, and the effect during the count display can be paid attention to by the mode of the count display.

The timer target exclusion effect is not performed when a specific timer type is determined as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510). For example, regardless of the timer type, the variation pattern type or the big hit. It may be performed based on the fact that a special result is obtained in a predetermined effect lottery based on the result of the determination. Further, as will be described later, the timer target exclusion effect may be made to appear in a variation pattern in which it is determined that the timer effect is not executed, or may be made to appear at a timing before the timer effect is executed. Good.

Further, as described above, when the timer target exclusion effect appears in a state where the timer effect is not yet executed (a state in which even the display of the timer prefetch effect does not appear), as compared with the case where the timer target exclusion effect does not appear. After that, it is desirable that the rate at which the timer effect is executed be increased so that the timer effect is also executed as an effect that suggests in advance. In this sense, the timer target exclusion effect may be executed as the first preceding aspect or the second preceding aspect of the timer prefetching effect. That is, in this case, when the symbol variation in which the timer effect is executed is not started and it is still in the hold state, it is possible to suggest a specific effect mode that is not targeted by the timer in the timer effect. With the speculation that the timer effect appears due to the symbol change inside, the timer effect appears due to the symbol change that is in the hold state, or the timer effect does not appear, the specific effect mode is not targeted for the timer It is expected that the entertainment of the game will be maintained until the timer effect is generated.

[Advance production for timer]
As described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the predetermined effect (characteristic B operation) using the specific decorative member (characteristic B) is set as the counting target, and the count display toward the timing when the predetermined effect appears. It is executed up to a predetermined value within the period when the symbol effect is being performed. In this respect, in the timer effect according to the present embodiment, within the period during which the symbol effect is performed, within a period before the timing when the count display becomes the predetermined value and the predetermined effect appears, the identification is performed. By causing an effect using a decorative member to appear, it can be suggested that a predetermined effect is a counting target (timer target advance effect).

That is, in this case, by paying attention to what kind of effect appears when the remaining count in the count display is being consumed, the type of effect that appears when the count display reaches a predetermined value Since it becomes possible to predict, it is expected that amusement of interest in the game from the time when the count display is started until the time when the count display becomes a predetermined value is appropriately maintained.

FIG. 182 shows a single timer mode (YES in step S5506), and in the second processing situation in which it is determined not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5507), It is a time chart for explaining the specific content of the timer-targeted first-out effect performed when the variation numbers 15 and 16 (see FIG. 148) corresponding to “SP reach without timer” are selected.

Note that in the example shown in FIG. 182, for the sake of convenience of explanation, when any of the specific timer types (first-out timers 1 to 6) not illustrated in FIG. 162 is selected as the result of the count display lottery (step S5510). A timer target advance effect is executed. In addition, in the advance timers 4 to 6 of the advance timers 1 to 6, as effects of the timer target, the accessory A used in the “effect A operation” and the accessory B used in the “effect B operation” are used. An effect such as "feature A&B operation" for operating both is performed.

However, the timer target advance effect is not performed when a specific timer type (first advance timers 1 to 6) is determined as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), and is exemplified in FIG. 162, for example. If any one of the timer types selected is selected, the timer target advance effect may be performed, and regardless of the timer type, a special effect lottery based on the type of the variation pattern or the result of the jackpot determination is special. It may be performed based on the result obtained. Further, as will be described later, the timer target advance effect may be made to appear in a variation pattern in which it is determined that the timer effect is not executed, or may be made to appear at a timing before the timer effect is executed. Good. According to such a configuration, if it is assumed that the timer effect count display is executed ex post (for the timer target advance effect) (whether it is executed or not), the timer effect count display is performed. It becomes possible to indicate in advance which type the effect mode that appears when is a predetermined value. In this case, when the timer target advance effect appears in a state where the timer effect has not been executed yet (a state where the timer prefetch effect is not even displayed), the timer target advance effect appears after that when compared with the case where the timer target advance effect does not appear. It is desirable to increase the rate at which the timer effect is executed so that it is also executed as an effect that suggests in advance that the timer effect will be executed.

In the example shown in FIG. 182, first, in the example in which the timer effect is executed in the form of the first-out timers 1 and 4, the count number of 50 seconds is set at the timing when 20 seconds have elapsed since the symbol variation was started. After the count display is started and the count display becomes “0”, the effect mode (“feature B action” or “feature A&B action”) that is the timer target appears. On the other hand, in the example in which the timer effect is executed in the form of the first-out timers 2 and 5, the count display having the count number of 70 seconds is started in synchronization with the start timing of the symbol variation, and the count display is "0". After that, the effect mode (“feature B action” or “feature A&B action”) that is the timer target appears. On the other hand, in the example in which the timer effect is executed in the form of the advance timers 3 and 6, the display of the timer look-ahead effect (the first preceding mode, the second preceding mode, or the third preceding mode) is performed in synchronization with the start timing of the symbol variation. While the display of the timer pre-reading effect is appearing, the timer pre-reading effect is hidden at a timing when 50 seconds have passed and the count display having the count number of 20 seconds is started, and the count is started. After the display becomes "0", the effect mode ("feature B action" or "feature A&B action") that is the timer target appears.

In this respect, in the case of the advance timers 1 and 4, at the timing when the timing Ta1 (for example, 7 seconds) has elapsed since the symbol variation was started, the timer effect has not been executed yet (even the display of the timer look-ahead effect appears. The first timer-targeted first-out effect may occur despite the fact that it is set to (no state). In the first-time timer target advance effect, for example, the accessory B used in the "effect B operation" or the "effect A&B operation", which is the timer object effect of the advance timers 1 and 4, is placed at or near the first position. At, the effect of rattling (feature B rattle) is performed.

That is, the "characteristic B action", which is the target effect of the advance timer 1, is "the effect of displacing the character B from the first position to the second position", and is the target effect of the first timer 4. The "feature A & B action" is an effect in which the feature B is displaced from the first position to the second position and the feature A is displaced from the third position to the fourth position", while the first action is performed. The timer target advance effects are common in that the character B used in the effects is used, but an effect (character B rattling) different from any of these effects is performed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suggest the possibility that the timer effect will be performed after the timer effect is executed, even though it is in a stage before the timer effect is executed. This makes it possible to suggest which production mode it is (indicating that the production is using the accessory B). Further, in the first timer target advance effect, by using the accessory B, an effect (character object B rattling) different from the timer target effect (character object B operation, character object A&B operation) is performed. While suggesting that the target effect in the timer effect is an effect using the accessory B, it is concealed as to how the accessory B operates when the count display reaches a predetermined value. Therefore, it is possible to preferably maintain amusement of the game until the count display reaches a predetermined value and the effect of the timer target is performed.

Further, in the case of the first-out timers 1 and 4, at the timing when the timing Ta2 (for example, 27 seconds) elapses after the symbol variation is started, the second timer target is displayed while the timer effect count display is being performed. Advance production can occur. In the second timer target advance effect, for example, the accessory B used in the "effect B operation" or the "effect A&B operation", which is the effect of the timers 1 and 4 for the timer, is moved from the "first position". The effect of moving to a "first midway position between the first position and the second position" (halfway movement of the accessory B (small)) is performed.

That is, the second timer target advance effect is also common in that it uses the accessory B used in the "characteristic B operation" and the "characteristic A&B operation", but is different from any of the effects (characteristics). It is supposed to perform B middle operation (small). According to such a configuration, when the count display reaches a specific count value before reaching a predetermined value (when the remaining count is consumed), which production mode the target production is is It becomes possible to make a suggestion (indicate that it is an effect using the accessory B). Further, even in the second timer target advance effect, the character object B is used to perform an effect (character object B intermediate operation (small)) different from the timer object effect (character object B operation, character object A&B operation). As a result, while suggesting which effect mode the target effect in the timer effect is, regarding how the accessory B operates when the count display reaches a predetermined value, It becomes possible to conceal the game, and it is possible to preferably maintain amusement of the game until the count display reaches a predetermined value and the effect for the timer is performed.

Moreover, in the second timer target advance effect, the range of effects using the accessory B (rather than rattling in the vicinity of the “first position”) in the first timer target advance effect (from the “first position” to the “first position”) is used. The displacement (up to the midway position) is large, and the range of effects (displacement from the "first position" to the "second position") that appears when the "feature B action" or the "feature A&B action" is performed. ). Therefore, by comparing the first timer-targeted advance effect with the second timer-targeted advance effect, the effect B is generated in the timer-targeted effect (“effect B operation” or “effect A&B operation”). It will be possible to provide inferences about how to operate.

Further, in the case of the first-out timers 1 and 4, at the timing when the timing Ta3 (for example, 57 seconds) has elapsed since the symbol variation was started, the timer effect count display is being performed for the third timer target. Advance production can occur. In the third timer target advance effect, for example, the accessory B used in the "effect B operation" or the "effect A&B operation", which is the timer object effect of the advance timers 1 and 4, is changed from the first position to the "first position." The effect of moving to the second midway position between the midway position of 1 and the second position (halfway movement of character B (large)) is performed.

That is, although the third timer target advance effect is also common in that it uses the accessory B used in the "characteristic B operation" or the "characteristic A&B operation", an effect different from any of the effects (characteristics). B midway operation (large) is to be performed. According to such a configuration, when the count display reaches a specific count value before reaching a predetermined value (when the remaining count is consumed), which production mode the target production is is It becomes possible to make a suggestion (indicate that it is an effect using the accessory B). Further, even in the third timer target advance effect, an effect different from the timer object effect (effect object B operation, effect object A&B operation) (effect object B intermediate operation (large)) is performed using the effect object B. As a result, while suggesting which effect mode the target effect in the timer effect is, regarding how the accessory B operates when the count display reaches a predetermined value, It becomes possible to conceal the game, and it is possible to preferably maintain amusement of the game until the count display reaches a predetermined value and the effect for the timer is performed.

Moreover, in the third timer target advance effect, the range of the effect using the accessory B (displacement from the “first position” to the “second midway position”) is larger than in the first and second timer target advance effects. It becomes larger, and it becomes a mode that gets closer to the range of the effect (displacement from the “first position” to the “second position”) that appears when the “character B operation” or the “character A&B operation” is performed. There is. Therefore, by comparing the first to third timer target advance effects with the timer target effects (“character B operation” or “character A&B operation”), the character B operates in any manner. Will be able to provide more speculation about what to do.

On the other hand, also in the case of the advance timers 2 and 5, at the timing Ta1 (for example, 7 seconds), the timing Ta2 (for example, 27 seconds), and the timing Ta3 (for example, 57 seconds), "role B rattling", Each effect such as "Partial character B mid-movement (small)" and "Partial character B mid-movement (large)" is performed as the first to third timer target advance effects. However, as shown in FIG. 182, in the case of the first-advance timers 2 and 5, at any timing of timings Ta1 to Ta3, the timer-targeted first-out effect is achieved in a situation where the count display is exhausting the remaining count. Will be done.

On the other hand, also in the case of the advance timers 3 and 6, at the timing Ta1 (for example, 7 seconds), the timing Ta2 (for example, 27 seconds), and the timing Ta3 (for example, 57 seconds), the "role B rattle" and the "role" Each effect such as "Partial B action (small) B" and "Part B intermediate action (large)" is performed as the first to third timer target advance effects. However, as shown in FIG. 182, in the case of the advance timers 3 and 6, the count display is in a non-executed state and the timer prefetch effect is displayed at each timing of timings Ta1 and Ta2. Originally, the first and second timer target advance effects will be performed. According to such a configuration, in the case of the first advance timers 1 and 4 in which the timer target advance effect is to be executed when the count display is in an unexecuted state, but even the timer prefetch effect is not displayed. Compared with, the rate of occurrence of events such as "the timer effect itself was not executed even though the timer target advance effect was executed" is reduced, so that the player has a higher expectation. You will be able to enjoy the timer-first advance effect.

In each example shown in FIG. 182, the count display reaches a predetermined value after the first to third timer target advance effects are executed in this way. Then, after this, the effect of the timer is executed, and then the symbol variation is stopped.

In the timer target advance effect according to this embodiment, each time a predetermined plurality of timings ta1 to ta3 arrives after the symbol variation is started, the "characteristic B operation" or the "characteristic A&B operation" is performed. It was decided to perform an effect using the accessory B used in. However, it is not always necessary to execute the timer target advance effect every time a plurality of predetermined timings ta1 to ta3 arrive, and the timings ta1 to ta3 are determined based on the type of the variation pattern and the result of the big hit determination. Each time it arrives, the timer target advance effect may appear with a predetermined probability, or the timing for executing the timer target advance effect may be selected from those timings. At this time, the execution probability of the timer target advance effect and the selection ratio of the effect content may be different for each of a plurality of predetermined timings ta1 to ta3.

In the case of realizing such an effect, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines the timer target based on the result of the big hit determination, the type of the variation pattern, or the mode of the timer effect (for example, "first-out timer 1" of SP reach). A determination process (see FIG. 183) as to whether to generate the first-out effect and at which timing the timer-targeted first-effect is generated is performed. Next, a determination process (see FIGS. 184 and 185) as to which production mode is to be executed as the timer target advance production is performed at each timing when it is determined to generate the timer target advance production. Note that these determination processes are performed, for example, after the processes shown in FIG. 149 are performed, or after step S5510 is performed and before the step S5511 is performed, and before the determination. It can be performed based on the result information of the processing.

FIG. 183 is a diagram illustrating an example of the content of the determination process (table T10) as to whether to generate the timer-targeted advance effect, and at which timing the timer-targeted advance effect is generated.

As described above, the timer target advance effect is a timer target within a period during which the count display becomes a predetermined value and the timer target effect appears in the period in which the symbol effect is performed. The effect using the specific decorative member used in the effect is to suggest that the effect using the specific decorative member is targeted for the timer, and the peripheral control according to the present embodiment In the MPU 1511a, three timings Ta1 to Ta3 are prepared as timings at which such a timer target advance effect can appear.

Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, referring to the table T10 shown in FIG. 183, the winning information, the information on the type of the variation pattern, the information on the timer type, and the effect random numbers assigned to these information are displayed. Based on the above, which of the timings Ta1 to Ta3 the timer target advance effect is to be executed (or whether the timer target advance effect is not executed at any of the timings Ta1 to Ta3) is selected.

As shown in FIG. 183, in the table T10, as a selection candidate for execution of the timer target advance effect, “do not execute the timer target advance effect at any of the timings Ta1 to Ta3 (“none” in the figure)”, "Perform timer target advance effect only at timing Ta1 of timings Ta1 to Ta3 ("Ta1" in the drawing)", "Perform timer target advance effect only at timing Ta2 of timings Ta1 to Ta3 (Fig. "Ta2")", "the timer target advance effect is executed only at timing Ta3 of timings Ta1 to Ta3 ("Ta3" in the figure)", and at timings Ta1 and Ta2 of timings Ta1 to Ta3. Execute timer target advance effect (“Ta1 & 2” in the figure)”, “Execute timer target advance effect at timings Ta1 and Ta3 of timings Ta1 to Ta3 (“Ta1 & 3” in the figure)”, “Timing Ta1” ~Perform the timer target advance effect at timings Ta2 and Ta3 of Ta3 ("Ta2 & 3" in the figure)", "Execute the timer target advance effect at all of timings Ta1 to Ta3 ("Ta1 & 2 & 3" in the figure). Selection candidates are prepared.

In the example of the table T10, when the count display is in the unexecuted state and the timer prefetch effect is not displayed, the effect random numbers are distributed so that the timer target advance effect is not performed. Therefore, in the example of the table T10, in the case of the timer types of the special timers 1 and 4, the timer target advance effect is not performed at the timing T1, the timing T1&T2, the timing T1&T3, and the timing T1&T2&T3.
However, as described above, the timer target advance effect may be performed at these timings.

In addition, in the example of the table T10, when the variation pattern in which the big hit symbol appears is selected, the rate at which the timer target advance effect is executed is higher than that in which the variation pattern in which the big hit symbol does not appear is selected. In addition to the above setting, the number of times the timer target advance effect is executed tends to increase.

In addition, in the example of the table T10, when the specific decorative member used in the effect targeted for the timer is "accommodation A&B", compared to the case where the specific decorative member used in the effect targeted for the timer is "accompaniment B". The timer target advance effect is set to be executed at a higher rate, and the timer target advance effect is set to be executed more frequently.

When the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs the determination process based on the table T10 in this way, and at least one of the timings Ta1 to Ta3 determines that the timer target advance effect is performed, when the timer target advance effect is to appear. The determination process for the effect type is further performed.

FIG. 184 shows an example of the content of the determination process (table T11) regarding which type of effect mode is generated at the timing when the timer target advance effect is performed at any one of the timings Ta1 to Ta3. FIG.

That is, when it is determined that the timer target advance effect is performed at any one of the timings Ta1 to Ta3, the peripheral control MPU 1511a refers to the table T11 shown in FIG. 184. Then, based on the winning information, the information on the type of the variation pattern, the information on the timer type, and the effect random numbers assigned to these information, which type of effect mode (“characteristic B rattling”, It is determined whether or not to cause the "characteristics B mid-movement (small)" and the "characteristics B mid-movement (large)" to appear at the one timing determined as above.

FIG. 185 shows an example of the content of the determination process (table T12) for determining which type of effect mode to be generated at those timings when the timer target advance effect is performed at any two timings of timings Ta1 to Ta3. FIG.

That is, when it is determined that the timer target advance effect is performed at any two timings of timings Ta1 to Ta3, the peripheral control MPU 1511a refers to the table T12 shown in FIG. 185. Then, based on the winning information, the information about the type of the fluctuation pattern, the information about the timer type, and the effect random numbers assigned to these information, which type of effect mode (“characteristic B rattle → character "Product B rattle", "Character B rattle→Bag mid action (Small)", "Character B mid action (Small)→Character B mid action (Small)", "Character B rattle→Battery B "Midway operation (large)", "Matterwork B halfway motion (small)→Matterwork B halfway motion (large)", "Matterwork B halfway motion (large)→Matterwork B halfway motion (large)") It is determined whether or not to appear at two timings that have already been determined.

For example, when it is determined based on the table T12 that the "characteristic B rattle→the character B rattle" appears, the "characteristic B rattle" is set at any of the two timings determined as above. It is to be executed as a timer target advance effect, and when it is determined based on the table T12 that "characteristic B rattle → character B intermediate movement (small)" appears, it is determined that the above two determinations have been completed. At a timing earlier than the timing, "characteristic B rattle" is executed as a timer target advance effect, and at a timing later than the above-mentioned two determined timings, "characteristic B intermediate movement (small)". Will be executed as a timer target advance effect.

FIG. 186 shows an example of the content of the determination process (table T13) as to which type the effect mode to be generated at those timings when the timer target advance effect is performed at all timings Ta1 to Ta3. It is a figure.

That is, when it is determined that the timer target advance effect is performed at all timings Ta1 to Ta3, the peripheral control MPU 1511a refers to the table T13 shown in FIG. 186. Then, based on the winning information, the information about the type of the fluctuation pattern, the information about the timer type, and the effect random numbers assigned to these information, which type of effect mode (“characteristic B rattle → character Object B rattling → character B rattling "," character B rattling → character B rattling → character B half-way operation (small), "character B rattling → character B half-way operation (small) → character B halfway "Movement (Small)", "Movement B midway movement (Small) → Matter B midway movement (Small) → Matter B midway movement (Small)", "Matter B rattle → Matter B rattle → Matter B halfway "Movement (Large)", "Rubber B Battering → Matter B Intermediate Movement (Small) → Matter B Intermediate Movement (Large)", "Matter B Intermediate Movement (Small) → Matter B Intermediate Movement (Small) → Feature B midway action (large), “feature B midway action (small)→feature B midway action (large)→feature B midway action (large), “feature B midway action (large)→win It is determined whether or not to cause the intermediate movement of the object B (large)→the intermediate movement of the accessory B (large)” to appear at each of the three timings that have already been determined.

For example, when it is determined based on the table T13 that “characteristic B rattle→characteristic B rattle→characteristic B rattle” appears, the “character” is determined at any of the three timings determined as above. "Battery rattling" will be executed as a timer target advance effect, and it is determined based on table T13 that "servant B rattling→servant B intermediate movement (small)→role B intermediate movement (large)" appears. Is performed, the "characteristic B rattle" is executed as the timer target advance effect at the first timing of the three timings determined as above, and among the three timings determined as above. At the second timing, the "characteristics B mid-movement (small)" is executed as the timer target advance effect, and at the third timing among the three timings determined as above, the "characteristics B mid-movement (small)" is performed. Large)” will be executed as the timer target advance effect.

In the examples of the tables T11 and T12, the determination process is performed in the same manner (selection ratio) regardless of which of the timings Ta1 to Ta3 is determined to cause the timer target advance effect to appear. The determination process may be performed in another mode (selection ratio) depending on which of the timings Ta1 to Ta3 it is determined that the timer target advance effect is to appear. For example, if the determination process is performed in such a manner that the rate at which the production mode having a large production range is selected becomes higher as the timing at which it is determined that the timer target advance production is made to appear is later, It becomes possible to estimate how much time is left until the target effect is performed, based on the size of the range of the effect that appears in the timer target advance effect. Then, in this case, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 199(G), by operating the specific decorative member (here, the accessory B) in a mode overlapping with the count display of the timer effect in front view, the timer target is displayed. In order to suitably obtain such action and effect, it is preferable to make the count display difficult to visually recognize during execution of the first-out effect (half-way movement of character product B (small), “half-way movement of character material B (large)). As a result, if the timer target advance effect is executed without paying much attention to the count display, even if the timer target advance effect is executed at the same timing, the timer target may be changed depending on the type of the effect that appears at that time. Prepared to be produced soon (when the production range was large), or felt that there was time left before the production for the timer was performed (when the production range was small) ), and it is expected that there will be a gap with the time when the accurate remaining count is grasped after that, so that it will be interesting. The count display may be hidden during execution, and the count display may be redisplayed when the timer target advance effect is completed.

However, if the specific decorative member (here, character B) is operated in a manner overlapping with the count display of the timer effect in a front view so that the count display is hard to be visually recognized during execution of the timer target advance effect (( Or, if the count display is hidden), it is falsely recognized that the count display reaches a predetermined value and the timer target effect is being executed even though the timer target advance effect is being executed. There is a concern that it will happen. Therefore, it is desirable to make it difficult to visually recognize the count display during execution of the timer target advance effect, and to continuously execute the count sound generated in association with the execution of the count display. That is, the output of such a count sound is terminated when the count display reaches a predetermined value, and is not output when the performance of the timer target is performed. By continuously outputting the count sound during execution of the effect, it is expected to prevent erroneous recognition that the effect targeted for the timer is being executed.

In addition, in the example of the tables T11 to T13, when the variation pattern in which the big hit symbol appears, the variation with a large effect range in the timer target advance effect is selected as compared with the variation pattern in which the big hit symbol does not appear. The mode is set so that the selection rate is high.

In addition, in the examples of the tables T11 to T13, when the specific decorative member used in the effect targeted for the timer is "Affiliate A&B", when the specific decorative member used in the effect targeted for the timer is "Affective B". In comparison, in the timer target advance effect, the ratio of selecting the effect mode having a large effect range is set to be high.

In addition, in the examples of the tables T12 and T13, when the timing of the timings Ta1 to Ta3 is late, as compared with the timing of the timings Ta1 to Ta3 being early, a production mode in which the production range in the timer target advance production is large. Is set so that the selection rate is high. Therefore, it is possible to estimate whether or not there is not much time left until the timer target effect is performed, based on the size of the range of the effect that appears in the timer target advance effect.

In addition, in the examples of the tables T12 and T13, basically, as time passes, the range of the effect in the timer target advance effect (characteristic B rattle→characteristic B intermediate operation (small)→characteristic B intermediate operation (large) ) Is spreading, and even if the current state is maintained (character B rattle → character B rattle, etc.), the opposite (a mode in which the production range narrows) does not occur. That is, in this case, as the time elapses, the range of the effect that appears when the "target B action" or the "target A&B action" of the timer is performed is approached. By confirming the effect, it becomes possible to recognize that the remaining time until the "object B operation" or the "object A&B operation" targeted by the timer is performed is short.

Further, in the timer target advance effect according to the present embodiment, the specific decorative member (accessory B) used at the time of the timer target effect (for example, the accessory B operation) is always used, but the timer target effect ( For example, the timer target advance effect may be performed using a decorative member (for example, accessory A) different from the specific decorative member (accessory B) used during the accessory B operation. That is, in this case, the timer target advance effect functions as an effect that indicates with a predetermined accuracy the type of effect that appears when the count display reaches a predetermined value. Then, in the case of realizing such a timer target advance effect, the type of the effect to appear as the timer target advance effect (characteristic B rattle, character B intermediate operation (small), character B intermediate operation (large)). Alternatively, it is desirable to change the ratio (accuracy) of the suggested effect type when the count display reaches a predetermined value, depending on the number of executions. For example, when a type of effect with a large effect range (middle action of character B (large)) appears, compared to when a type of effect with a small effect range (character B rattling) appears, the timer target first advance. The proportion (effect B operation, accessory A & B operation) using the specific decorative member (accessory B) used in the effect may be increased when the count display reaches a predetermined value, or the When the number of executions of the timer target advance effect within the fluctuation is large, compared to when the number of executions is small, an effect using the specific decorative member (characteristics B) used in the timer target advancement effect (characteristics B It is also possible to increase the ratio of the action, the accessory A&B action) that appears when the count display reaches a predetermined value.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the count display reaches a predetermined value, a plurality of effect modes including "characteristics B operation" and "characteristics A&B operation"("characteristics B operation", "characteristics A&B"). Other than the "action", performing an effect using a specific decorative member (accessory B) as the timer target advance effect, assuming that any of the effect modes in which the accessory B is not used can appear. And
However, on the premise that only one of the "characteristic B operation" and the "characteristic A&B operation" is prepared as the effect mode using the character B, a specific decorative member (character You may make it perform the production using B).

For example, as an effect mode using the accessory B, only "accompaniment A&B motion" can appear as an effect for the timer target, and the specific decorative member (characteristic B) is selected as the timer target advance effect. When the effect used is performed, only a part (effect B) of the decorative member used in the effect targeted for the timer (actuator A&B operation) is used in the timer targeted advance effect. That is, in this case, while suggesting that the "effect using the accessory B" will appear when the count display reaches the predetermined value by the timer target advance effect, the "effect using the accessory B" It becomes more difficult to predict the whole picture (using the character A as well as the character B), and this can be kept secret. Therefore, the effect of the accessory B when the count display reaches a predetermined value by a plurality of timer-targeted advance effects (characteristic B rattle -> accessory B mid-operation (small) -> accessory B mid-operation (large)). Even if the effect close to the range is executed and its prediction is possible, since the effect range of the accessory A as well as its existence is kept secret, the timer when the count display reaches a predetermined value. It becomes possible to preferably maintain the content of the target presentation (feature A&B operation) in a secret state. At this time, the operation mode of the accessory B when the accessory A&B operation is performed may be performed as the timer target advance effect.

According to such a configuration, the timer target advance effect is performed by using only a part of the role objects A and B (feature B) used in the "target character A&B operation" which is the target effect of the timer. Of course, in the timer target advance production, the production range of the character B in the "character A&B operation" is used by using only a part (character B) of the characters A and B used in the "character A&B operation". The effect (partial movement of character B (small), middle movement of character B (large)) appears in only a part of. Then, after such a small effect range is gradually expanded by a plurality of timer target advance effects, by performing the "object A & B action" which is the timer effect, only the effect product B in a larger effect range. However, since the effect using the accessory A will appear, the novelty when the timer target effect is performed is lost by performing the timer target advance effect while the remaining count is being consumed. There is no such situation, and it is expected that the entertainment of the game will be maintained appropriately.

Further, in this embodiment, the specific decorative member used in the timer target advance effect and the specific decorative member used in the timer target effect (effect when the count display reaches a predetermined value) are completely matched. However, these do not necessarily have to be completely the same, and it is sufficient that the timer target advance effect can suggest which effect mode appears as the timer effect. For example, as a fan-shaped accessory, a “relatively small fan-shaped accessory” and a “relatively large fan-shaped accessory” are arranged in a superposed manner in a front view. This is the case when the specific decorative member used in Step 2 is set to be a "relatively small fan-shaped accessory" and the specific decorative member used in the timer target production is set to be a "relatively large fan-shaped accessory." However, the fan-shaped accessory is used as the timer target advance effect at a stage (while the count display is being executed) before the effect using the fan-shaped accessory is performed as the timer target effect. It is possible to direct.

Further, in this embodiment, the accessory is used as the specific decoration member, but instead of this, the display means may be used as the specific decoration member. When the display means is used as the specific decorative member, the same effect as the effect using the accessory is realized by increasing the range in which the display appears (range of effect) or changing the display content. It is possible.

By the way, it is desirable that the “effect using the specific decorative member” performed as the timer target advance effect is ended after a predetermined time has elapsed. If the specific decorative member is a accessory, after a predetermined time has elapsed, while performing control to return the specific decorative member to the original position, if the specific decorative member is the display means, after the predetermined time has elapsed, The control for hiding the display as the timer target advance effect is performed. At this time, the predetermined time required for the timer target advance effect is preferably shorter than the time required for the effect (timer object effect) that appears when the count display reaches a predetermined value. In this way, by realizing different effect modes depending on the length of time, in the timer object advance effect, the specific decorative member used in the timer object effect can be held in a choi appearance that is not very satisfactory. As a result, it becomes possible to keep the entertainment of the game favorably by waiting for the count display to reach the predetermined value.

[Resurrection timer production]
As described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, when the count display is hidden, a plurality of presentation modes (for example, conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, character A operation, special timer, cut-in B, character B). It is possible to execute a count effect in which at least one of (motion etc.) appears. In this respect, in the timer effect according to the present embodiment, when the count effect reaches a predetermined value and is hidden, the first effect mode (for example, a conversation notice) of a plurality of effect modes appears. Even after that, the count display is re-displayed after this and the timer effect is further continued. Then, after a lapse of a predetermined time after the count display is re-displayed, the count display is hidden again, and a second effect mode (for example, character product A operation (characteristics A notice)) appears among a plurality of effect modes. (Resurrection timer production).

That is, in this case, after the appearance as if the first effect mode was the timer target (count object), the count display is re-displayed to further continue the timer effect, and the second effect mode different from the first effect mode. Even if the count display reaches a predetermined value and is hidden at the timing when a relatively low-expecting appearance appears, it is indicated that the effect mode of is a timer target. After that, it becomes possible to be aware of the possibility that the timer target will be changed after that, and it is expected that the interest of the game will be maintained appropriately.

FIG. 187(a) is a single timer mode (YES in step S5506), and the second process in which it is determined not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5507) In the situation, it is determined that the number of notices is two (step S5523), and it is determined that "conversation notice" is performed at the earlier timing and "characteristics A action 1" is performed at the later timing. , A time chart for explaining the specific content of the revival timer effect performed when the variable numbers 7 and 8 (see FIG. 148) corresponding to "no timer character reach" are selected.

Note that, in the example shown in FIG. 187(a), for the sake of convenience of description, when a specific timer type (not only the accessory A action 1 but also a plurality of types) may be selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510). (See FIG. 161), the following processing relating to the revival timer effect is executed. However, when a specific timer type is determined as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), the following process relating to the revival timer effect is not performed, but the revival timer effect is irrespective of which timer type is determined. The following processing regarding may be executed.

As shown in FIG. 187(a), if the timer type of "feature A operation 1" is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes the following process as the next process. The selected "feature A action 1" is displayed in a plurality of rendering modes including "revival timer effect" ("feature A action 1-1", "feature A action 1-2", "feature A action 1". -3" or "feature A operation 1-4") is executed. In addition, it is desirable that the determination process be performed based on the result of the jackpot determination or the result of the predetermined lottery.

Of the example shown in FIG. 187(a), in the mode of "feature A operation 1-1", 20 seconds are started after the count display having the count number of 40 seconds is started in accordance with the start of the symbol variation. "Conversation notice" that is not a timer target is executed when it has elapsed, and it is a timer target while the count display is hidden when it reaches a predetermined value when 40 seconds have elapsed. The "feature A action (preliminary notice of feature A)" is executed.

On the other hand, in the mode of "feature A operation 1-2", after the count display having the count number of 20 seconds is started in accordance with the start of the pattern variation, the predetermined value is set when 20 seconds have passed. While the count display is reached and the count display is hidden, the "conversation notice" (first effect mode) which is not the timer target is executed, but when the "conversation notice" is finished, the count display is changed. It will be re-displayed and the timer effect will continue, and the count display will be hidden again after a predetermined time has elapsed (40 seconds have elapsed since the count display having the count number of 20 seconds was started). The "characteristics A operation (characteristics A notice)" (second effect mode) which is the timer target is executed.

On the other hand, in the mode of "feature A operation 1-3", after the count display having the count number of 12 seconds is started in accordance with the start of the pattern variation, the predetermined value is reached when 12 seconds have passed. Although the count display is hidden, the notice E2 (first effect mode) as the non-target notice that cannot be the effect for the timer is executed, but the notice E2 (non-target notice) ends. Then, the count display will be redisplayed and the timer effect will continue, and the count display will be displayed after the elapse of a predetermined time (40 seconds after the count display having the count number of 12 seconds is started). Is hidden again, and the "characteristics A operation (characteristics A notice)" (second effect mode) which is the timer target is executed.

On the other hand, in the mode of "characteristics A operation 1-4", a predetermined value is reached when 8 seconds elapse after the count display having the count number of 8 seconds is started in accordance with the start of the symbol variation. Although the count display is hidden, the notice E1 (first effect mode) as the non-target notice that cannot be the effect of the timer target is executed, but the notice E1 (non-target notice) is executed. When it is finished, the count display will be re-displayed and the timer effect will continue, counting after the lapse of a predetermined time (40 seconds after the count display having the count number of 8 seconds has started). The display is hidden again, and the "characteristics A operation (characteristics A notice)" (second effect mode) which is the timer target is executed.

That is, among a plurality of effect modes prepared corresponding to "feature A action 1", "feature A action 1-2", "feature A action 1-3", and "feature A action" The mode of "1-4" corresponds to the revival timer effect. In these revival timer effects, the count display is temporarily hidden from the time when the count display is started to the time when the timer-targeted effect (feature A operation) is performed and the timer-targeted effect ( Since the conversation notice, the notice E2, or the notice E1) appears, it is possible to make the user feel as if the timer effect is finished when the effect appears.

In this respect, in the mode of "feature A action 1-2", a plurality of effect modes that can be adopted as timer targets (for example, conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, role A action, special timer, cut-in B). , Character B action, etc.), the revival timer effect is targeted at the effect (conversation notice) having a lower jackpot expectation than the effect (actuator A operation) targeted for the timer. I am going to do it. That is, in this case, after the effect (conversation notice) with a low jackpot expectation appears as an effect for the timer, it is shown that the effect (conversation notice) is not the effect for the timer (count display). Re-display), and the effect (actuation of the accessory A) having a higher jackpot expectation than the effect (conversation notice) appears as the timer-targeted effect (second effect mode) (the count display is not displayed again). Display), it is expected to improve the enjoyment of the game through such reversible production.

In addition, in the modes of “feature A action 1-3” and “feature A action 1-4”, a plurality of effect modes that cannot be adopted as timer targets (for example, notice E1, notice E2, notice E3, notice F). Or the like) as the target (first effect mode), the revival timer effect is performed. In such a configuration, the timer effect is not ended at this timing when the effect mode (here, the notice E2 or the notice E1) that cannot be adopted as the timer target appears as if it is the timer target effect. Will be suggested to be continued. That is, in this case, in particular, the notice E1 that appears when the mode of the "characteristics A operation 1-4" is executed has low expectation, but the timer effect is not ended at this timing and continues. By functioning as a production that suggests, it becomes possible to contribute to the improvement of the enjoyment of the game. It should be noted that a plurality of effect modes that cannot be adopted as timer targets (for example, the notice E1, the notice E2, the notice E3, the notice F, etc.) can appear even when the timer effect is not performed.

In addition, in each of the "characteristics A operation 1-2", "characteristics A operation 1-3", and "characters A operation 1-4" according to the present embodiment, they appear when the count display is started. Although the numerical value is displayed as a numerical value different from 40 seconds (20 seconds, 12 seconds, 8 seconds, etc.), the peripheral control MPU 1511a secretly sets a production timer of 40 seconds for control and counts. Even if the display is once hidden, by internally performing the process of continuously updating the effect timer, when 40 seconds have elapsed from the start of the count display, the effect of the timer target ( Character A action) is made to appear. According to such a configuration, any one of the "feature A action 1-1", the "feature A action 1-2", the "feature A action 1-3", and the "feature A action 1-4". Even when the character product A operation 1 is executed in the mode, it is possible to make the count display again non-display at the same timing from the start of the change and to make the timer target effect (character product A operation) appear.

And in such a revival timer effect, "count display that appeared before being hidden" and "count display that was hidden and re-displayed" are different. It is important to make it possible to recognize that the same count is being exhausted rather than being done, in order to suggest that the timer production is not finished halfway and is continuing. ..

For example, as shown in FIG. 187(a), in the mode of "feature A operation 1-2", when the count display having the count number of 20 seconds becomes "0 second", the count display is hidden. "Conversation notice" will be executed, but after the "Conversation notice" is finished, the count display is changed to a negative notation and redisplayed, so that "0 seconds" when it is hidden I try to express how the count digestion is not over and this is continuing.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 187(a), in the mode of the "characteristics A operation 1-2", the count digestion is secretly continued while the count display is hidden. The count display is redisplayed from the state in which the count was consumed for the time that was hidden. More specifically, in the mode of "feature A operation 1-2", the count display is hidden at "0 seconds", and the count display is displayed again after the non-display state is maintained for 2 seconds. However, when the count display is re-displayed, the minus count is used for 18 seconds from "-2 seconds".

Then, in each example shown in FIG. 187(a), the symbol variation is stopped after the effect for the timer is executed in this manner.

In the case of realizing such a revival timer effect, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first, based on the result of the big hit determination, the type of the variation pattern, or the mode of the timer effect (for example, "character A action 1" of the character reach). Then, a determination process (see FIG. 187(b)) as to whether to generate the revival timer effect or in which mode the revival timer effect is generated is performed. It should be noted that this determination process may be performed, for example, at a timing after step S5510 shown in FIG. 149 is performed and before step S5511 is performed, based on the result information of each process before that. It is possible.

In FIG. 187(b), when the timer type of "feature A action 1" is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), the "feature A action 1" is included in the aspect of the resurrection timer effect. It is a figure showing an example about the contents (table T14) of the judgment processing about which of a plurality of presentation modes to perform.

As described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, when the "characteristics A motion 1" of the character reach is selected, the "characters A motion 1" is changed to the "characters A motion 1-1". , "Feature A action 1-2", "feature A action 1-3", and "feature A action 1-4".

Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, referring to the table T14 shown in FIG. 187(b), the winning information, the information on the variation pattern type, the information on the timer type, and the information are allocated. Based on the rendering random number, any mode of "feature A action 1-1", "feature A action 1-2", "feature A action 1-3", and "feature A action 1-4" Will select whether to execute the timer effect.

Then, as a result, when it is determined that the timer effect is executed in one of the "characteristics A operation 1-3" and the "characteristics A operation 1-4", in the processing of steps S5512 and S5525. The type of the non-target notice will be determined based on the determined type. For example, when it is determined that the timer effect is to be executed in the form of “feature A action 1-3”, it is determined in the processing of steps S5512 and S5525 that at least the notice E2 is executed as the non-target notice. If it is determined that the timer effect is to be executed in the form of "feature A operation 1-4", at least the notice E1 is executed as the non-target notice in the processes of steps S5512 and S5525. A decision will be made.

Note that in the example of the table T14, when the revival timer effect for the effect mode (conversation notice) that can be adopted as the timer target is executed, the effect modes (notices E1, E2) that cannot be adopted as the timer target are executed. It is set so that the jackpot expectation is higher than when the targeted revival timer effect is executed. In addition, when the revival timer effect is performed for the effect mode with high expectation among the effect modes (notices E1 and E2) that cannot be adopted as the timer target, the effect mode (notice that cannot be adopted as the timer target) Of the E1 and E2), the jackpot expectation is set to be higher than that in the case where the revival timer effect for the effect mode having a low expectation is performed. Further, in the example of the table T14, when the variation pattern in which the big hit symbol appears is selected, the proportion of the revival timer effect executed is higher than that in the variation pattern in which the big hit symbol does not appear. Is set to.

According to such a revival timer effect, due to the non-display of the count display, the effect mode with low expectation (first effect mode) temporarily appears, which temporarily gives the player a disappointment, but then counts. The display is re-displayed and continued, and after the predetermined time, the continued count display is hidden again so that a production mode (second production mode) with high expectation appears. As a result, it is possible to give the player who was paying attention to the count display a temporary disappointment, but also to give surprises and surprises due to the continuation of the count and the reversing effect, which makes the game less interesting than before. Can be suppressed.

In this sense, the production mode having a high expectation (second production mode) is executed as the production using two different decorative members, and the production mode having a low expectation (first production mode) is executed. It is desirable to execute the effect using only one of the two different decorative members (or the decorative member related thereto) in order to express the reversibility by the revival timer effect. At this time, one of the two different decorative members may not be completely the same when used in the second effect mode and when used in the first effect mode. For example, as a fan-shaped character, a “relatively small fan-shaped character” and a “relatively large fan-shaped character” are overlapped in a front view, and the first effect is produced. This is a case where the decorative member used in the embodiment is set to be a “relatively small fan-shaped accessory” and the decorative member used in the second effect mode is set to be a “relatively large fan-shaped accessory”. However, it is possible to clearly show that the effect performed as the first effect mode has a lower expectation.

Also, in such a revival timer effect, "count display that appeared before being hidden" and "count display redisplayed after being hidden once" are different counts. In order to make it possible to recognize that the same count is being digested instead of being digested, the count sound is displayed once while the count display is hidden. It is desirable to continuously execute the “count display that appeared before the display” and the “count display that was once hidden and then redisplayed”.

Further, in this embodiment, the revival timer effect is performed only once within the period in which one symbol variation is performed, but regarding the revival timer effect, a plurality of times are performed within the period in which one symbol variation is performed. It may be executed over. At this time, the same effect mode may be repeatedly displayed each time the count display is hidden. Then, as the number of times the revival timer effect is executed within a period in which one symbol variation is performed, an effect mode with high expectations as an effect for the timer target (effect type and effect contents (cut-in mode, etc.)) It is desirable to increase the appearance ratio of.

In the revival timer effect, the time from when the count display is hidden until the first effect mode (conversation notice, notice E1, E2, etc.) appears and the redisplayed count display is hidden again. In order to make it possible to recognize whether or not the timer target effect is in the appearance state, by making the length from the time until the second effect mode (feature A operation) appears to be different. It is desirable to do.

In addition, in order to improve the enjoyment of the game as a timer effect, when a revival timer effect that is targeted for an effect mode (conversation notice) that can be adopted as a timer target is executed, an effect mode that cannot be adopted as a timer target Compared to the case where a revival timer effect for (notices E1, E2) is executed, an effect mode (effect type or effect content (cut-in mode, etc.)) with a higher expectation appears as an effect for the timer. It is desirable to control so that the ratio becomes high.
In addition, when the revival timer effect is performed for the effect mode with high expectation among the effect modes (notices E1 and E2) that cannot be adopted as the timer target, the effect mode (notice that cannot be adopted as the timer target) E1 and E2), as compared with the case where the revival timer effect for the effect mode with low expectations is executed, the effect mode (effect type and effect contents (cut-in It is desirable to control such that the appearance ratio)) becomes high.

Further, in the revival timer effect according to the present embodiment, the count effect reaches the predetermined value (here, “0”) and is hidden, and then the first effect mode appears, and the first effect also appears. When the mode is finished, the count display is re-displayed, the count is negatively counted, and the second display mode is made to appear after the count reaches a specific negative value and this is hidden. If the first effect aspect and the second effect aspect are made to appear under the non-display state, the count display is made non-display when making the first effect aspect and the second effect aspect appear. Each count value at the time of resetting may be set appropriately.

[Timer target suppression control]
That is, the effect to be the target of the timer effect (counting object) can often be executed even when the timer effect is not performed. For example, the specification executed at a predetermined timing based on the variation pattern. Effects (for example, conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, character A operation, cut-in B, character B operation, etc.), a predetermined effect executed at the time of winning (eg, hold change, etc.) Be prepared. However, among these, when the "specific effect executed at a predetermined timing based on the variation pattern" is targeted for timer effect (counting object) and the count display reaches a predetermined value, a new prize is won. If a certain effect (for example, a hold change, etc.) occurs due to the occurrence of a certain number of times, the certain effect is generated in relation to the count display reaching a certain value as the target of the timer effect. Or, it is possible to have a situation (confusing situation) in which it is difficult to know whether a predetermined presentation has occurred due to the occurrence of a new prize as an effect unrelated to the timer effect, and as a result, the target of the timer effect (count target) ), the specific effects (for example, conversation notice, change in hold, cut-in A, character A operation, cut-in B, character B operation, etc.) may be missed.

In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, when a specific type of timer effect in which a specific effect is a timer target is executed, the remaining time until the count display in the specific type of timer effect reaches a predetermined value When there is a relatively large number of times in the first period, the display of the predetermined effect that is not the timer target is permitted when a new winning occurs, but the first period ends and the count display in the timer effect of the specific type has the predetermined value. When the second period in which the remaining time until reaching is relatively short is reached, even if a new winning occurs, the display of the predetermined effect that is not the timer target is not allowed (timer target suppression control). As a result, in a situation where a specific type of count effect in which the specific effect is a timer target is executed, the count display as the target of the timer effect is allowed while allowing the occurrence of a predetermined effect that is not the timer target due to the occurrence of a new winning. It is difficult to understand whether the predetermined effect has occurred in connection with reaching the predetermined value, or whether the predetermined effect has occurred due to the occurrence of a new winning as an effect unrelated to the timer effect (confused. It becomes possible to preferably avoid such a thing.

FIG. 188(a) is a mode of a single timer (YES in step S5506), and a second process in which it is determined not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5507). 6 is a time chart for explaining specific contents of timer target suppression control performed when a specific variation number is selected in a situation.

As shown in FIG. 188(a), in a specific timer type, first, a count having a count number of 20 seconds at a timing when a predetermined timing (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed since the symbol variation was started. The display will start. Then, after the count display becomes "0", the specific effect targeted for the timer appears. In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, a period from when the symbol variation is started until the count display reaches a specific count value (for example, "5 seconds") before reaching a predetermined value (here, "0 seconds"). In the (first period), the display of the predetermined effect that is not the timer target is permitted when a new winning occurs (permissible period), but after the count display reaches a specific count value (for example, "5 seconds") In the predetermined period (second period), the timer target suppression control that does not allow the display of the predetermined effect that is not the timer target even if a new winning occurs is performed (the suppression period).

Moreover, as shown in FIG. 188(a), in the timer-targeted suppression control according to this embodiment, the suppression period (second period) in which the display of the predetermined effect is not allowed is defined as "the count display is the specific count value ( For example, not only the period from “5 seconds” until the count display reaches a predetermined value (for example, “0 seconds”) and the specific effect which is the timer target is executed (finished), It is supposed to continue until "the period after the end of the specific effect". That is, in this case, after the count display reaches a predetermined value (for example, “0 seconds”) and the specific effect that is the timer object occurs, the effect occurrence itself is suppressed, and thus the timer object is applied. The specific effect comes to function as a valuable opportunity to generate an effect, the degree of attention to the specific effect is improved, and the interest of the game when the count display reaches a predetermined value (for example, "0 second") is appropriately maintained. Will be expected.

However, as shown in FIG. 188(a), in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, a predetermined time ((for example, "5 seconds") has elapsed after the specific effect which is the timer target is ended. At this time, the suppression period (second period) that does not allow the display of the predetermined effect that is not the timer target is ended.According to such timer-targeted suppression control, the pattern variation stops after the suppression period ends in this way. In the period up to, the display of the predetermined effect which is not the timer target is permitted again when a new winning occurs.

By the way, as described above, during the suppression period, the display of the predetermined effect which is not the timer target is not permitted even if a new winning is generated. However, in this case, there is a concern that the player may play a game without generating a new prize during the suppression period in which the display of the predetermined effect is not allowed even if a new prize is generated, and as a result, the speed of progress of the game per unit time. May decrease and disadvantages may occur on the side of the hall.

Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, even if a new winning occurs during the suppression period, the display of the predetermined effect due to this is not permitted, but the display of the predetermined effect that is not permitted is not permitted. Does not discard the display itself of the predetermined effect, but delays (carry-overs) the time when the display is performed until the suppression period ends. According to such a configuration, even if a new winning occurs during the suppression period, the display of the predetermined effect due to this is not permitted, but the display of the predetermined effect is preferably executed. Since it becomes possible to play, it is possible to suppress playing a game that does not generate a new winning during the suppression period.

When a new prize is generated within the permissible period and a predetermined effect is displayed, sound output is performed in accordance with the display of the predetermined effect, whereas a new prize is generated within the suppression period and a predetermined result is displayed. When delaying (carrying over) the display of the effect until the end of the suppression period, it is desirable not to perform sound output according to the display when the display of the predetermined effect is performed. As a result, the display of the predetermined effect can be secretly performed at a timing different from the normal time (at the time of winning a prize), and the surprise effect can be provided when the predetermined effect displayed while the player is not aware of it. It is expected to be given to improve the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, regarding the suppression period that occurs from the timing (specific count value) before the execution period of the effect that is the timer target starts to the timing after the execution period ends, the timer target It is desirable to control so that it does not always occur when a certain effect is performed.

For example, when a timer effect is performed, such a suppression period is generated with a predetermined probability, and when a big hit is determined by a big hit determination, it is compared to when a big hit is lost. By increasing the rate of occurrence of such a suppression period, when a prize is generated aiming at the timing before and after the timer target effect is performed, a predetermined effect caused by the prize is generated. It will be prompted to check whether or not (whether there is a suppression period and there is a high probability that you have won the jackpot), and a new prize will be generated during the suppression period It is possible to prevent the game from being played.

Further, the rate of occurrence of the suppression period varies depending on the type of effect mode (for example, conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, character A operation, cut-in B, character B operation, etc.) that appears as the timer target effect. By doing so, when a prize is generated within a period before the timer-targeted effect is performed, whether or not a predetermined effect caused by the prize is generated (a suppression period is generated and a specific type of effect is generated). Will be urged to check whether there is a high possibility that it will be executed as a timer target), and it is possible to prevent games that do not generate new prizes during the suppression period Will be done.

FIG. 188(b) is a diagram showing an example of a table (table T15) that is referred to in the timer target suppression control when the rate of occurrence of the suppression period varies depending on the type of effect mode that appears as the effect of the timer object. ..

As described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, character A operation, cut-in B, character B operation, etc. are prepared as effects for the timer. ..

In this regard, in the table T15 shown in FIG. 188(b), basically, the lower the big hit expectation degree is, the lower the ratio of generating the suppression period before and after the execution of the effect targeted by the timer is, and the big hit expectation is expected. The higher the effect mode, the higher the ratio of generating the suppression period before and after the execution of the timer target effect is set.

More specifically, the suppression period is not necessarily generated when the timer target effect is "conversation notice", and the suppression period is 20% when the timer target effect is "cut in A". When the effect for the timer is "cut in B", the suppression period is generated at a rate of 40%, and the effect for the timer is "effect A action". At a certain time, the suppression period is generated at a rate of 60%, and when the production of the timer target is "characteristic B action", the suppression period is generated at a rate of 80%. When the effect of is a "special timer", the suppression period is always generated.

According to such a configuration, the higher the expectation of a big hit, the higher the ratio of generating the suppression period before and after the execution of the timer-targeted effect is, and thus the predetermined effect is generated by a new winning. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking an effect mode with high jackpot expectation. Conversely, the lower the jackpot expectation, the more likely it is to miss it, so when the count display reaches the specified value, the jackpot expectation will appear. It becomes possible to proceed with the production while keeping what has been kept secret, and it is expected that the amusement interest of the game is appropriately maintained until the symbol is stopped.

In addition, in the table T15 shown in FIG. 188(b), regardless of whether or not the jackpot is won, the rate of occurrence of the suppression period is determined according to the type of effect mode that appears as the effect of the timer target. There is. Therefore, regardless of whether the jackpot is won or lost, if the type of the effect mode that appears as the effect of the timer target is the same, the suppression period can be generated at the same rate. ..

By the way, in the table T15 shown in FIG. 188(b), when the effect targeted for the timer is "holding change", the suppression period is always generated despite the effect mode in which the jackpot expectation is relatively low. I am trying. That is, the "holding change" according to this embodiment can be displayed not only as a specific effect that is a timer target but also as a predetermined effect that is not a timer target when a new winning occurs. Therefore, when such a "holding change" may occur when the suppression period does not occur, when the count display reaches a predetermined value, the "holding change (changing pattern There is a possibility that confusion may occur because there is a possibility that "the change in the hold display corresponding to "and the change in the hold display due to the new winning (change in the hold display corresponding to the symbols on hold)" may occur at the same time. is there. Therefore, it is desirable to always generate the suppression period when the effect targeted for the timer is "hold change". However, as described above, with regard to the "holding change" as well as the "conversation notice", there is a high possibility that it will be overlooked, and when the count display reaches a predetermined value, a performance mode with low jackpot expectation If the aim is to allow the production to proceed while keeping the appearance secret, the control may be performed so that the suppression period does not occur even when the production for the timer is the "hold change".

In addition, in the example of the table T15 shown in FIG. 188(b), the ratio of occurrence of the suppression period is made different depending on the type of the effect mode that appears as the effect for the timer, but in addition to this, effects of the same type Even in the aspect, the rate of occurrence of the suppression period may be further changed depending on the timer type determined in the count display lottery (FIG. 149: Step S5510).

For example, even when "conversation notice" is selected as the effect for the timer, the "conversation notice" is "conversation notices 1 to 4" shown in FIG. 161 and further shown in FIG. It is desirable to change the occurrence ratio of the suppression period according to which one of the “conversation notices 1 to 6” is applicable. In this case, the generation rate may include 100% or 0%.

In addition, the production of the timer is any one of "conversation notice", "hold change", "cut-in A", "special timer", "feature A action", "cut-in B", and "feature B action". At this time, the suppression period may be generated at a predetermined rate not only for a predetermined period before and after the execution of the timer target production but also for the entire period from the start to the stop of the symbol variation. In particular, when the target production of the timer is the "special timer" with the highest jackpot expectation, the above suppression period is always generated over the entire period from the start to the stop of the symbol variation, and the "special timer" It may be possible to increase the sense of expectation that "" will be performed.

Further, in this embodiment, even if a new winning occurs during the suppression period, the display of the predetermined effect caused by this is not discarded, and the time when the display is performed is when the suppression period ends. Although the control for delaying (carrying over) is performed, the display of the predetermined effect itself may be discarded and not performed.

[Timer production targeting the new timer]
As described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, while performing the count display within the period during which the symbol effect is being performed, a plurality of effect modes (for example, conversation notice, pending change) prepared as candidates for counting. , A cut-in A, a character A operation, a cut-in B, a character B operation, and the like), a timer effect can be executed that hides the count display at the timing at which at least one of them appears. In this regard, in the timer effect according to the present embodiment, a "specific effect mode" is prepared as one of the plurality of effect modes that appears when the count display reaches a predetermined value, and then the "specific effect" is set. When the "mode" appears, a count display (second count display) different from the count display (first count display) up to that point is newly started.

That is, in this case, since the count display as the timer effect is executed in the form of being divided into the first count display and the second count display, even if the entire time required as the timer effect is the same. , The time required to consume one count display (first count display or second count display) itself can be shortened, eliminating monotony while the count display is consumed, and entertaining It is expected that the reduction of

FIG. 189(a) is a single timer mode (YES in step S5506), and the second processing in which it is determined not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5507) In the situation, the time for explaining the specific contents of the timer effect for which the new timer that is performed when the variable numbers 7 and 8 (see FIG. 148) corresponding to “timer-less character reach” are selected are described. It is a chart.
FIG. 189(b) shows a mode of a single timer (YES in step S5506), and a second process in which it is determined not to execute the mission effect (let the conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5507). In the situation, the time for explaining the specific contents of the timer effect for which the new timer that is performed when the variation numbers 15 and 16 (see FIG. 148) corresponding to “SP reach without timer” are selected are described. It is a chart.

Note that, in the example shown in FIGS. 189(a) and 189(b), for the sake of convenience of explanation, only one pattern is prepared as the type of "timer effect with new timer as effect object" for each variation pattern. , A plurality of types (new timer 1, new timer 2, etc.) having different occurrence times of the first count display (for example, a pattern in which the first count display is started in the middle of symbol fluctuation) and end times are prepared. Alternatively, they may be selected by lottery (FIG. 149: Step S5510).

In the "timer effect targeting a new timer" shown in FIG. 189(a), first, the first count display having a count number of 30 seconds is started in accordance with the start of the symbol variation. Then, after the first count display becomes a predetermined value and is hidden, the "specific effect mode" that is the timer target appears. In this way, after the "specific production mode" appears, a new count display (second count display having a count number of 40 seconds) different from the first count display (non-display) that has been displayed until then is newly displayed. It is supposed to start this (new timer).
In the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, when the "particular effect mode" appears, a count display (second count display) different from the first count display (non-display) that has been displayed until then is displayed. ) Is newly displayed to start this. However, even if the first count display has reached the predetermined value in this way, it is only necessary to newly start another count display (second count display). You may feel as if you were entrusted with it, and there is concern that the interest in playing games will decline.

Therefore, in the "timer effect targeting a new timer" according to the present embodiment, first, as a "specific effect mode" that appears when the first count display reaches a predetermined value and is hidden. A "failure production" that does not show any expectations is to appear. That is, in this case, when the first count display reaches a predetermined value, a performance with an expectation level as a performance for the timer (for example, a conversation notice, a pending change, a cut-in A, a character A operation, a cut-in B, a combination). The unfortunate effect situation is generated as if it failed to generate the object B action, etc.), but in the effect situation, the second count display is newly started, so the game As a person, he/she will feel as if he/she can challenge the failed timer production again, and it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be improved by suppressing such feelings.

However, in the "timer effect targeting a new timer" shown in FIG. 189(a), the second count display started after the "failure effect" is not ended within the period of the symbol variation, and the remaining count is set. The design is stopped (big hit design or lost design) in a state where the digestion is not completed. With such a configuration, even if the player is looking forward to what kind of expectation the production will appear when the second count display reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”), the count is exhausted. Before the symbol stop (big hit) is displayed, it becomes possible to completely lose interest in the big hit expectation level, so without causing any deterioration in the entertainment level of the game The timer effect can be ended. In the design stop that appears before the second count display is completely consumed, in addition to the lost design, the big hit design can also appear, so especially when the big hit design appears, there is no interest in the game. There is no such thing as a drop.

In other words, in the "timer effect targeting a new timer" shown in FIG. 189(a), almost the entire period (at least half of the symbol fluctuation) is generated although no effect having an expectation level appears as a timer target. Count display (first count, second count) will be performed over the above period),
-In addition to performing an effect (effect in which the first count reaches a predetermined value) to be aware of the possibility that an effect with some degree of expectation may appear in the middle stage,
-By providing a configuration in which the newly started second count display is stopped with the number of counts remaining, the expectation that the production of the timer target will be generated almost all of the symbol fluctuations Will be able to last for a period of time. Further, it has been described above that the mechanism for appropriately suppressing the deterioration of the amusement of the game due to the fact that the effect with the degree of expectation is not generated in both the first count display and the second count display. On the street.

On the other hand, in the "timer effect targeting a new timer" shown in FIG. 189(b) as well, as in the example shown in FIG. 189(a), the number of counts of 30 seconds in accordance with the start of the symbol variation. The first count display with is started. Then, after the first count display becomes a predetermined value and is hidden, the "specific performance mode (failure performance)" that is the timer target appears. In this way, after the "specific production mode (failure production)" appears, a count display (a second count display having a count number of 40 seconds) different from the first count display (non-display) that has been displayed until then is displayed. The point of newly displaying and starting this is the same as in the example shown in FIG. 189(a).

However, in the example shown in FIG. 189(b), the symbol stop occurs after the second count display started after the “failure effect” reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”) within the period of the symbol fluctuation. It is supposed to do. In this respect, the "timer effect targeting a new timer" means, as described above, the expectation that the timer target effect will be generated soon without any effect with the expectation level appearing as the timer target. Since it has a technical feature in sustaining it, even if the second count display reaches a predetermined value (“0” in this case) within the period of symbol fluctuation, it is necessary to make the production have an expectation. I don't. On the other hand, when the second count display reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”) within the period of the symbol fluctuation, the process of not simply causing the production with the expectation to appear is performed by the timer target. I can't sustain the expectation that the production will occur soon.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 189(b), when the second count display started after the “failure effect” reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”) within the period of the symbol variation, the second count display is performed. The count display is not hidden and is maintained at a display reaching a predetermined value (here, “0”), and the symbols are stopped in the state where the display is maintained. In the state where the second count display has reached the predetermined value and is maintained, from the player's side, when the effect (counting effect) that appears in response to the second count display reaching the predetermined value appears. Since it seems to be in a strange state, it is possible to favorably maintain the expectation that the effect targeted for the timer will be generated soon until the symbol is stopped. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to completely lose interest in the jackpot expectation at the time when the symbol stop (big hit) is displayed before the second count display is hidden. As a result, it is possible to end the timer effect without causing any effect to appear without deteriorating the enjoyment of the game.

By the way, in the example shown in FIGS. 189(a) and 189(b), for the player who has confirmed the "timer effect for which the new timer is an effect target", what happens at the time when the failure effect or the second count display occurs. There is a concern that it will be overlooked that the production of will not occur. Therefore, only when the jackpot pattern is stopped while the second count display is exhausting the remaining count (including the period in which the display in the state where the second count display has reached the predetermined value is maintained), A special effect may be generated as an effect corresponding to the 2-count display. Alternatively, the rate at which a special effect is generated may be increased. According to such a configuration, the second count display has a different counting purpose from the first count display, and the big hit symbol is stopped within the period in which the second count display consumes the remaining count. It becomes possible to add the fun of whether or not. In this sense, the display modes (form, position, size, etc.) of the first count display and the second count display may be different from each other.

It should be noted that the special effect may be generated when the second count display has the remaining count and this is in the running state. However, considering that a special effect is generated as an effect corresponding to the second count display, after the second count display is hidden when the big hit symbol is stopped (the second count display leaves the remaining count). Even if it is in a state, it is desirable to execute a special effect after hiding it).
And about the special effect executed in this way, it is desirable to continuously display this including the execution period of the big hit game and the subsequent game period. That is, in this case, the special effect is ended when a predetermined condition is satisfied in a process different from the process related to the "timer effect for which the new timer is an effect target".

The special effect may be generated within the period of symbol fluctuation. In this case, it is desirable to make a big hit symbol appear (for example, displayed in a state of temporary stop) within the period of symbol fluctuation and to hide the second count display, and then execute a special effect. However, the big hit symbol may appear (for example, displayed in a temporary stop state) within the period of the symbol fluctuation, and the second count display may be hidden after the special effect is executed.

Then, when the big hit symbol is stopped while the second count display is exhausting the remaining count, if the special production occurrence rate (including 100%) is increased, the symbol stop is performed. When the second count display reaches a predetermined value before being displayed, it may be hidden and the symbols may be stopped in the hidden state. Even in such a case, it becomes possible to maintain amusement of the game while the second count display is being performed. However, even if the big hit symbol appears due to the symbol stop after the second count display reaches the predetermined value and is hidden, the proportion at which the special effect is generated remains relatively low. In this case, the percentage may include 0%.

In order to realize such a "timer effect targeting a new timer", in particular, a "failure effect" that does not show any expectation when the first count display reaches a predetermined value is to appear. In that case, different from the above-mentioned timer effect that causes other effect modes (for example, conversation notice, pending change, cut-in A, character A operation, cut-in B, character B operation, etc.) to appear. (A separate lottery from), and the effect that the "timer effect targeting a new timer" will be performed based on the satisfaction of a predetermined effect condition that has nothing to do with the result of the jackpot judgment or the type of the variation pattern. It is desirable to make the judgment of. That is, in this case, in the situation where both the big hit and the loss can be stopped when the symbol fluctuation is stopped (a situation in which the big hit symbol may appear according to the probability of the big hit lottery), It is possible to generate a "timer effect which is an effect target", and thereby, it is possible to cause a failure effect having no expectation when the first count display reaches a predetermined value. As a result, it is possible to maintain the sense of expectation that the production of the timer target will soon occur without causing any production having the expectation degree to appear as the timer target over the period in which the symbol variation is performed.

However, if it is not required to achieve such an effect, the "specific performance mode" that appears when the first count display reaches a predetermined value is not a failure performance that does not have any expectation. Alternatively, it may be executed as another effect mode (for example, a conversation notice, a pending change, a cut-in A, an accessory A operation, a cut-in B, an accessory B operation, etc.). In this case, through the same processing as in the case of performing the above-described timer effect that causes other effect modes (for example, conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, character A operation, cut-in B, character B operation, etc.) to appear. The "timer effect targeting a new timer" will be executed.

In FIG. 189(a), in the example in which the first variation pattern (characteristic without timer) is selected, the symbol is displayed before the second count display started after the “failure effect” reaches a predetermined value. The variation is stopped, and in FIG. 189(b), in the example in which the second variation pattern (SP reach without timer) is selected, the symbol variation is stopped after the second count display reaches a predetermined value. I did it. However, in the example in which the first variation pattern (characteristic without timer) is selected, a pattern in which the symbol variation stops after the second count display reaches a predetermined value may appear, or the second variation display may occur. In the example in which the variation pattern (SP reach without timer) is selected, the symbol variation may be stopped before the second count display started after the “failure effect” reaches a predetermined value. Further, when a variation pattern different from these variation patterns is selected, the "timer effect with the new timer as the effect target" may be performed.

Also, with regard to the first count display, it may be possible to perform as a timer target production soon, so that it is executed as a count display having a shorter count number than the second count display that can be stopped in the middle of execution of the count display. It is desirable in order to sustain the expectation of doing.

In this embodiment, in the count display generated after the "failure effect" is performed, if the symbol is stopped before the count display is completely consumed, either the big hit symbol or the lost symbol may appear. However, in the normal count display that occurs regardless of the "failure effect", it is desirable that the big hit symbol always appears when the design is stopped before the count display is completely consumed.

The first count display may have a plurality of modes (for example, 10 seconds, 20 seconds, and 30 seconds) as the number of counts, and may be executed in any of them, but regarding the second count display, The first count display and the second count display may be set as different count displays so that they are executed only in one mode (for example, 40 seconds) regardless of the number of counts executed in the first count display. It is desirable to be able to recognize that it is executed.

Further, considering that the first count display and the second count display are executed as different count displays, when the first count display is performed and when the second count display is performed It is possible to perform a process of changing the display mode (including color difference and effect) of the background image and the like when (including a period in which the display reaches a predetermined value and is maintained). desirable. In such a process, even when the reach effect is generated and the background image for the reach effect is generated within the period in which the first count display is performed, when the second count display is subsequently executed, Therefore, even if the reach effect is generated within the period in which the second count display is performed and the background image for the reach effect is displayed, the second count display is executed. The appearance of a display different from the one that has appeared until then is maintained even during the reach production period, and is maintained until the second count display is hidden.

It should be noted that, in the "timer effect targeting a new timer" according to this embodiment, as a "specific effect mode" that appears when the first count display reaches a predetermined value and is hidden, Although it was decided to make a "failure production" that does not show the degree of expectation, instead of this, another count start suggestion that a count display different from the count display that was being executed up to now is newly started is suggested. You may make an effect appear. In this case, the degree of expectation may be indicated by the different count start suggestive effect, or the degree of expectation may not be indicated.

[Timer mode performance]
As described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, within the period in which the symbol effect is being performed, a plurality of effect modes (for example, conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, character product A operation) prepared as count target candidates. , Cut-in B, character B action, etc.), a timer effect can be executed in which the count display is performed up to a predetermined value toward the timing at which at least one of them appears. In this regard, in the timer effect according to the present embodiment, when the predetermined effect condition is satisfied, the count display has the predetermined value within a period before the count display has the predetermined value (here, “0”). Hell timer mode (first timer mode display) in which the proportion of appearance modes (production type and effect contents (cut-in mode, etc.)) with high expectations as timer effects is relatively low, When the count display reaches a predetermined value, one of the heaven timer mode (second timer mode display) in which the proportion of the appearance mode having a high expectation appears relatively as the effect for the timer is displayed. (Timer mode production).

That is, in this case, when the remaining time of the count display is consumed, any one of the timer mode displays having different degrees of advantage with respect to the timer effect is displayed. Therefore, this is a predetermined value after the count display is started. It is expected that the interest in the game will be maintained until it reaches (0 in this case).

FIG. 190 shows a single timer mode (YES in step S5506), and in the second processing situation in which it is determined not to execute the mission effect (let the conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5507), Timer mode effects performed when the variable numbers 15 and 16 (see FIG. 148) corresponding to “SP reach without timer” are selected and it is determined to perform “cut-in B1” as the timer-targeted effect. 3 is a time chart for explaining specific contents of FIG.

Note that, in the example shown in FIG. 190, when a specific timer type (actually, not only the cut-in B1 but also a plurality of types) is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), for convenience of description (see FIG. 161). The following processing regarding the timer mode effect is executed. However, when a specific timer type is determined as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), the following process relating to the timer mode effect is not performed, and no matter which timer type is determined, the timer mode effect is determined. The following processing regarding may be executed.

As shown in FIG. 190, if the timer type "cut-in B1" is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs the selected "cut-in" as the next process. B1” in a plurality of effect modes including the mode of timer mode effect (“cut-in B1-1”, “cut-in B1-2”, “cut-in B1-3”, “cut-in B1-4”). A determination process as to which is to be executed is performed. In addition, it is desirable that the determination process be performed based on the result of the jackpot determination or the result of the predetermined lottery.

In the example of "Cut-in B1-1" in the example shown in FIG. 190, when 50 seconds have elapsed after the count display having the count number of "50" was started in accordance with the start of the symbol variation, The "cut-in B (cut-B notice)", which is the timer target, is executed under the condition that the predetermined value (here "0") is reached and the count display is hidden.

On the other hand, in the "cut-in B1-2" mode, after 20 seconds have elapsed since the count display having the count number of "50" was started in synchronization with the start of the symbol variation, this was the first identification. When the count value (here, "30") is reached, the hell timer mode (first timer mode display) is displayed while the count is being consumed, and 50 seconds after the count display is started. When it reaches a predetermined value (“0” in this case), the “Cut-in B”, which is the target of the timer, is executed while it is hidden, but the hell timer mode (first timer mode The display of "display" is not hidden and is maintained even after "cut-in B" is hidden.

On the other hand, in the "cut-in B1-3" mode, after the count display having the count number of "50" is started in accordance with the start of the pattern variation, 18 seconds have passed and this is the first specific count value. When the second specific count value (here, “32”) before that is reached, a heaven challenge production is performed to determine whether or not the heaven timer mode is displayed while the count exhaustion is in progress. When the hell timer mode (first timer mode display) is displayed as a result of the failure to produce the heavenly challenge, and 50 seconds have elapsed after the count display was started and a predetermined value (here, “0”) is reached. The "cut-in B", which is the timer target, is executed while the count display is hidden, but this is hidden for the display of the hell timer mode (first timer mode display). Without the "cut-in B" being hidden, the display is maintained.

On the other hand, in the "cut-in B1-4" mode, after the count display having the count number of "50" is started in synchronization with the start of the symbol variation, 18 seconds have passed and this is the first specific count. When the second specific count value ("32" in this case) before the value is reached, the heaven challenge mode of whether or not the heaven timer mode is displayed while the count exhaustion is in progress is performed. Heaven timer mode (second timer mode display) is displayed as a result of successful production of the heaven challenge, and a predetermined value (here, “0”) is reached 50 seconds after the count display is started. Then, "Cut-in B", which is the timer target, is executed while the count display is hidden, but this is hidden for the display in heaven timer mode (second timer mode display). The display is maintained even after the "cut-in B" is hidden without being displayed.

That is, among the plurality of effect modes prepared for the "cut-in B1", the "cut-in B1-2", "cut-in B1-3", and "cut-in B1-4" modes are timers. It corresponds to the mode production. Then, in these timer mode effects, the heaven timer mode or the hell timer mode occurs while the count exhaustion is in progress, and the timer target effect is executed while one of the timer mode displays appears. Will be done. Therefore, even when the count display is exhausting the remaining count, it is possible to impart the effect to the timer effect by the timer mode effect associated with the timer effect.

More specifically, when the heaven timer mode appears as the type of the timer mode effect, the ratio of appearance types with higher expectations as the effect targeted for the timer appears higher than when the hell timer mode appears. Or, since the ratio of appearances with high expectations as the appearance of the cut-in B (production content) that is the production for the timer becomes high, it is long to wait for the timing when the count display reaches a predetermined value. As a result, it becomes possible to pay more attention to the timer effect. On the other hand, when the hell timer mode appears as the type of the timer mode effect, the effect itself cannot be expected as compared with the case where the heaven timer mode appears, so an effect different from the timer effect It becomes possible to turn the gaze toward, and thereby, even if a low-expecting production mode appears when the count display reaches a predetermined value, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest.

In order to make the heaven timer mode and the hell timer mode function more effectively, the same effect as the timer target effect is displayed when the heaven timer mode is displayed and when the hell timer mode is displayed. Even when the mode appears, it is desirable to control so that the proportion of the big hit symbol appears at the time of the subsequent symbol stop when the effect mode appears when the heaven timer mode is displayed.

Further, in the timer mode effect according to this embodiment (in the example shown in FIG. 190, the forms of “cut-in B1-2”, “cut-in B1-3”, and “cut-in B1-4”), the timer is used. Even after the target effect is executed and is hidden, the display regarding the type of the timer mode (heaven timer mode, hell timer mode) is maintained. Therefore, even after the timer effect is finished, it is possible to proceed with the effect while the timer-related effect is displayed, and the effect situation in which the timer effect is executed in either the heaven timer mode or the hell timer mode. The symbols will be stopped while letting the player recognize whether or not there is. Regarding the display of the heaven timer mode and the hell timer mode, rather than hiding or displaying the symbol stop before the count display reaches a predetermined value (before the timer target effect occurs). It may be hidden at a previous timing, or may be kept displayed even when the symbol stop is displayed and may be hidden when the symbol stop is completed.

Further, the display of the heaven timer mode or the hell timer mode, or the heaven challenge effect may be generated before the count display is executed (for example, during execution of the timer prefetch effect). In addition, when the heaven timer mode or the hell timer mode is displayed or the heaven challenge effect is performed in the state where the count display is not executed, the timer effect is always generated between the time when the effect is executed and the design is stopped. You may not allow it. However, when performing the heaven timer mode or the hell timer mode display or the heaven challenge effect in the state where the count display is not executed, compared to the case where those effects are not executed in the state where the count display is not executed, It is desirable that the rate at which the timer effect is executed is increased until the symbol is stopped, and that it is also executed as an effect that suggests in advance that the timer effect will be executed.

Moreover, in the aspect of "cut-in B1-3" and "cut-in B1-4", when the count display reaches the second specific count value, the heaven challenge effect is performed, and then the count display is the first. While the heaven timer mode or the hell timer mode is displayed as a result of the heaven challenge production when the specific count value is reached, in the aspect of "cut-in B1-2", the count display is the second specific count value. Heaven challenge mode is not performed when the hell time is set, and then the hell timer mode is displayed when the count display reaches the first specific count value.

According to such a configuration, after the count display is started, first, it becomes possible to pay attention to whether or not the heaven challenge production appears when the second specific count value is reached. As a result, if the heaven challenge effect does not appear when the second specific count value is reached, the possibility that the heaven timer mode will occur is lost. That is, in this case, the hell timer mode is generated when the count display reaches the first specific count value, or the timer mode effect itself is not generated, so the count display is the first specific count value. When it becomes, it will be possible to further pay attention to whether or not the hell timer mode occurs.

In addition, when the timer mode effect itself does not occur, it is desirable that the ratio of the appearance mode with high expectation to appear as the effect of the timer target is higher than that when the hell timer mode occurs. However, if the timer mode effect itself does not occur and the hell timer mode occurs, the ratio of the appearance mode with high expectation as the timer target effect will be different, and vice versa. Even if the relationship is adopted, it is possible to further pay attention to whether or not the hell timer mode occurs when the count display reaches the first specific count value.

On the other hand, when the heaven challenge effect appears when the second specific count value is reached, when the count display is the first specific count value, the heaven timer mode and the hell timer mode are used as timer mode effects. Since any of the above is executed, it becomes possible to further pay attention to the type of the timer mode effect that appears when the count display reaches the first specific count value.

According to such a timer mode effect, not only when the count display reaches a predetermined value, but also some specific count values (first specific count value, second specific count value) different from the predetermined value. When the timer display (count value) and the related productions are made interesting and can be watched, it is possible to enjoy the game during the period when the count display is being executed. Can be preferably maintained.

Then, in each example shown in FIG. 190, the count display of the timer effect sequentially reaches the second specific count value and the first specific count value in this way, and when the predetermined value is further reached, the timer-targeted effect is executed, and thereafter. The symbol fluctuation will be stopped.

In this embodiment, when a specific timer type (actually, not only the cut-in B1 but also a plurality of types) is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510) (see FIG. 161, the specific timer type is selected). Which mode (cut-in B1-1, cut-in B1-2, cut-in B1-3, cut-in B1-4) is executed as the timer type (cut-in B1 in the example shown in FIG. 190) is determined. However, instead of cut-in B1, cut-in B1-1, cut-in B1-2, cut-in B1-3, cut-in B1-4 are prepared as selection candidates for the count display lottery (step S5510). Then, the timer type may be determined from these candidates. This processing method can be similarly adopted in the processing related to the execution of other effects (for example, a revival timer effect).

In the example shown in FIG. 190, when the timer-targeted effect is performed when the heaven timer mode is displayed, compared to the case where the hell timer mode is displayed, as a specific type of effect (cut-in B). Increased the proportion of content with high expectations (such as cut-in B performed with colors with high expectations). However, instead of this, when the production of the timer target is performed when the heaven timer mode is displayed, compared with the case where the hell timer mode is displayed, a plurality of production types (for example, conversation notice, pending change). , Cut-in A, special timer, character A operation, cut-in B, character B operation, etc.), the proportion of appearance types with high expectations may be increased. Alternatively, in the heaven timer mode, as an effect for the timer, a high-expectation effect type may appear at a higher rate, and a high-expectancy content may be increased at a higher rate.

In addition, a specific effect type selected from a plurality of effect types (for example, conversation notice, pending change, cut-in A, special timer, character A operation, cut-in B, character B operation, etc.) is selected as the timer target effect. If a specific timer type is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), make sure that either the heaven timer mode or the hell timer mode occurs during the count display execution period. Good. At this time, it is desirable that a pattern in which the hell timer mode is generated can also appear without the heaven challenge production being performed.

Moreover, you may make it perform the effect which shows that any of the heaven timer mode and the hell timer mode will certainly generate|occur|produce within the period before reaching the 2nd specific count value with which the heaven challenge effect is performed.

In addition, when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, the ratio of success in the heaven challenge effect (the ratio displayed in the heaven timer mode) increases when the heaven challenge effect occurs, compared to the normal time. You may make it shift to. That is, in this case, in the heaven high probability mode, the occurrence probability of the heaven challenge effect itself when the heaven timer mode is not displayed is set low (probability of generating the hell timer mode without generating the heaven challenge effect, or the timer The probability of not generating the mode effect is increased) or the expectation of the timer target effect itself generated in the heaven timer mode is set lower than that in the normal time, thereby realizing the heaven high probability mode.

Further, in the heaven challenge production, a period during which the player can perform the operation reception is set, and the success or failure of the heaven challenge production based on the operation performed by the player within the period (heaven timer mode, Which of the hell timer modes occurs) may be displayed.

In addition, when the heaven challenge effect is generated when the number of executed counts in the count display is relatively small, such as when the heaven challenge effect is generated at the same time when the timer effect count display is started, the count in the count display is counted. It is desirable that the rate of success in the heaven challenge effect (the rate displayed in the heaven timer mode) is higher than that in the case where the heaven challenge effect is generated when the number of executed games is relatively large. .. That is, in this case, it is possible to maintain the gaming interest by the expectation that the effect will be generated in the near future, and the effect that is the target of the timer effect will appear. When it takes a long time (count number) to play, it is expected that the entertainment of the game will be maintained due to the expectation that the heaven challenge production will occur. In this case, the heaven challenge effect may be generated after the timer target effect is executed. In this case, the success rate of the heaven challenge effect is set to the lowest, and the already-executed timer object effect is performed. On the other hand, the heaven timer mode or the hell timer mode will occur in the form of follow-up.

Alternatively, a heaven challenge effect may be generated as one of the target effects of the timer effect. When the heaven challenge effect is executed as the target effect of the timer effect, the success rate in the heaven challenge effect (the rate displayed in the heaven timer mode) is set to 100%, and after the heaven timer mode is displayed. In the symbol fluctuation period, although not a timer target, the ratio of appearance of a high-expectation effect (for example, character B operation) among the effects prepared as one of the timer target candidates is the effect. Should be higher than if it did not appear.

[Count output stop control]
As described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, while performing the count display within the period during which the symbol effect is being performed, a plurality of effect modes (for example, conversation notice, pending change) prepared as candidates for counting. , A cut-in A, a character A operation, a cut-in B, a character B operation, and the like), a timer effect can be executed that hides the count display at the timing at which at least one of them appears. In this respect, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, there is a predetermined effect different from the timer effect during execution of the count display (desired effect having a predetermined expectation degree is preferable, but not limited thereto). When it is executed, the effect mode in which the output related to the count display of the timer effect is continued until it reaches a predetermined value, and the output related to the count display is not performed until the value reaches a predetermined value, and this is performed at an intermediate stage during the execution of the predetermined effect. Any one of the production modes for stopping the output is selectively made to appear (count output stop control).

With such a configuration, even if the output related to the count display is performed in the timer effect, the count display is not necessarily performed until the predetermined value is reached, and the output is stopped in the middle of the output and the output related to the predetermined effect is performed. Since the output related to the count display of the timer effect is performed and the output reaches the predetermined value (the count exhaustion period), it is expected that the entertainment of the game is maintained.

191(a) to (c) show a single timer mode (YES in step S5506), and it is determined that the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is not executed (NO in step S5507). 9 is a time chart for explaining specific contents of count output suspension control performed when a specific variation number is selected in the second processing situation.

As shown in FIG. 191(a), in a specific timer type, first, a count having a count number of 20 seconds at a timing when a predetermined timing (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the symbol variation was started. The display starts. Then, after the count display becomes "0", the effect of the timer target, which is the timer target, appears.

In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, as shown in FIG. 191(b), when the predetermined effect is executed while the count display of the timer effect is being executed, the effect at the time of causing the predetermined effect to appear. It is determined whether or not the situation is in a predetermined specific presentation situation. As a result, when it is in the specific effect situation, the output related to the count display of the timer effect is stopped and the control for executing the predetermined effect is performed. The “predetermined specific effect situation” that is used to determine whether or not to stop the output related to the timer effect count display on the way is, for example, a timer effect count display. This is an effect situation in which a competition occurs in the effect output between the timer effect and the predetermined effect, such as when a predetermined effect is executed using an area.

Further, as shown in FIG. 191(b), when the output related to the count display of the timer effect is stopped and the predetermined effect is executed, the timer effect does not continue even after the output related to the predetermined effect ends. The count display is not re-output. On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, even after the output related to the count display is stopped, internally, the time from the start of the count display (or the time from the start of fluctuation) is secretly timed. When this reaches a predetermined value (a value when 20 seconds have elapsed since the count display was started), it is assumed that the timing when the output stopped count display reaches the predetermined value (here, “0”) The target effect is made to appear.

According to such a configuration, after the predetermined effect is executed, the output of the count display is maintained in the stopped state, but if the output of the count display is not stopped, the predetermined value (here, “0”) is set. When the timing that should have been reached has arrived, the effect for the timer will appear. In other words, in this case, it is expected to improve the enjoyment of the game when the timer target effect appears due to the surprise effect that the timer effect that seemed to be terminated halfway through the execution of the predetermined effect was secretly continued. Will be done.

However, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 191(c), even if the predetermined effect is executed while the count display of the timer effect is being executed, the predetermined effect is executed. When the effect situation at the time of producing the effect is not in the predetermined specific effect situation, the output related to the count display of the timer effect is continued until it reaches a predetermined value without being stopped, and the count display is digested. In the meantime, the predetermined effect will be executed.

More specifically, the predetermined effect is "effect of causing an enemy character to appear in a specific area", "effect of attacking toward a specific area", or "display at the time of effect failure in a specific area". Or a performance for outputting music, if such a predetermined performance is executed while the count display is being executed in a specific area, the player can display a timer display (count display). On the other hand, there is a possibility that there may be some adverse effect on the performance (for example, the expectation as the timer performance may be lowered). Therefore, when there is a production situation in which such concern may occur, by stopping the output related to the count display of the timer production and executing the predetermined production, some adverse effect on the timer production is produced. The predetermined effect can be executed without producing an image that seems to affect (the effect mode of FIG. 191(b)). Moreover, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, since the timer target effect is made to appear in a surprise manner while maintaining the output stopped state related to the count display, such a predetermined effect is used. As a result, it can be expected that the interest of the game will be improved on the contrary (the production mode of FIG. 191(b)).

However, if the output related to the count display of the timer effect is stopped each time such a predetermined effect is executed, the effect image of the predetermined effect itself may be deteriorated, and there is concern that amusement of the game may be deteriorated. Will be done. Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, when executing the predetermined effect, there is a vacant area (area in which no effect is output) in an area different from the specific area in which the count display of the timer effect is output. In some cases, the output related to the count display of the timer effect is maintained without being stopped, and the predetermined effect is output not in the specific area but in an empty area (FIG. 191(c). ) Production mode). As a result, it is made clear that the predetermined effect is not an effect that causes the execution of the count display of the timer effect to be stopped in the middle of the execution, and when the predetermined effect is executed, the interest in the game is reduced. Will be avoided.

Then, in each example shown in FIG. 191, the symbol variation is stopped after the effect targeted for the timer is executed in this manner.

FIG. 192 is a flowchart showing an example of a processing procedure for realizing such count output suspension control.

As shown in FIG. 192, if it is determined that the predetermined effect is executed based on the result of the big hit determination and the type of the variation pattern, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment First, when the timing to generate a predetermined effect comes within the execution period of the symbol variation, it is determined whether or not a specific effect situation is present before starting the output related to the predetermined effect. (Step S5701).

Here, the "particular effect situation" means that when a predetermined effect is newly output, the area necessary for newly outputting the predetermined effect is other various effects (here, count display of timer effect, etc.). As described above, it is a situation in which all of them have been used and there is no room for newly outputting the predetermined effect. For example, in the examples shown in FIGS. 201(G) and (H), which will be described later, the “bullet firing effect” by the cannon corresponds to the predetermined effect. Then, in the bullet firing effect, an empty (unused) area among the upper left area, the upper right area, the left area, the right area, and the lower area in the display area is selectively used as the bullet firing destination. It is possible to use the above, and normally, the effect of bullet firing is performed using the unused area. However, in the situation shown in FIG. 201 (G) described later, the area necessary for newly outputting such a bullet firing effect is other various effects (count display (upper left area), symbol fluctuation (upper right). Area), timer mode effect (left area), timer target exclusion effect (right area), hold display (lower area)), and there is no space for newly outputting the predetermined effect. This is equivalent to the above-mentioned “specific production situation”. And if you suppose that you fire a bullet while it is in such a particular production situation, the production that is already in the output state at the projectile destination (for example, count display) will be broken or destroyed by the shot bullet There is a possibility that there will be concerns such as the possibility that the big hit expectation will be lowered as a result (a competition for the effect output between the timer effect and the predetermined effect will occur). Also mentioned above.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 192, when it is determined that the specific effect situation is present before starting the output related to the predetermined effect (YES in step S5701), it is different from the predetermined effect. The output (here, the count display) in the output state is stopped to be output (step S5702), and the processing for outputting the predetermined effect is performed using the empty area created by this (step S5703).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the particular effect situation is not reached before starting the output related to the predetermined effect (NO in step S5701), another effect is included in the area required for effect output. Since there is an unused area that is not used, it is possible to perform a process related to the output of the predetermined effect using the unused area without stopping the output of the effect different from the predetermined effect. (Step S5713).

Here, in the case where the predetermined effect is executed through the process of step S5703, as compared with the case where the predetermined effect is executed through the process of step S5713, an effect mode that is advantageous to the player after the predetermined effect is executed. It is desirable to increase the rate of occurrence of.
For example, in the case of the examples of FIGS. 191(b) and 191(c), when the effect mode of FIG. 191(b) in which the effect for the timer is suddenly executed while the output related to the count display is stopped, It is desirable to perform control so that the proportion of appearance modes (effect types and effect contents) with a high degree of expectation as effects for the timer is higher than when the effect mode of FIG. 191(c) appears.

The processes of steps S5702 and S5703 may be executed as one process. For example, if the output data of the predetermined effect is overwritten in the processing area in which the output data of the count display is stored, the output related to the count display is automatically stopped, and the output is canceled in this state. It becomes possible to perform output related to the predetermined effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, when it is in a specific effect situation, the output related to the count display is stopped and the predetermined effect is executed, but the effect targeted for output stop is not limited to this, and other You may make it cancel the output concerning the production of.

In the process of step S5702, an effect type to be output is selected from a plurality of effects (in an output state) using an area required to output a predetermined effect, and the output of the selected effect is stopped. Alternatively, a predetermined effect may be output. In this case, it is preferable that a priority order be set in advance for a plurality of effects that are candidates for selection of output cancellation, and that the effect type to be output is selected based on the priority order. It is desirable that the priority order be set in advance on the program based on whether or not the effect is more important to the player. As a result of determining the priority order, if all of the other effects in the output state have higher priority orders than the predetermined effect, the output related to the other effect is maintained and the predetermined effect is not output. ..

Then, the effect type that is to be output is executed as a plurality of effects that are related to and are connected to the effect contents (for example, a timer effect that is connected by the count display and the timer target effect). The output is stopped during an effect that appears first in the effects (for example, while the count display is being executed), and the predetermined effect is generated before an effect that appears later (for example, a timer target effect) is started. When is finished, it is desirable to execute the effect that appears later without stopping the output.

Further, regarding the effect or the predetermined effect to be stopped when the predetermined effect is executed, in addition to the effect by the image display, the effect by the action of the accessory, the effect by the music, the effect by the board lamp, etc. Good. Further, the effect or the predetermined effect to be output stopped when the predetermined effect is executed is a combination of at least two or more of each effect element such as image display, accessory operation, music, and board lamp. When it is to be executed as a composite effect, at least one of the combined effect elements may be stopped. For example, in the case where the predetermined effect is the “bullet firing effect” shown in FIG. 201(G) described later and the effect for which output is to be stopped is “composite effect of image display and board lamp”, compound effect Even if only the output related to the image display is stopped and the output related to the board lamp is maintained, the adverse effect on the board lamp in the display area where the bullet as the image display does not reach It can be said that there is no concern that (competition due to production) will occur.

[Timer plus effect]
As described above, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first counts at least one of a plurality of effect modes (for example, conversation announcement, pending change, cut-in A, character A operation, cut-in B, character B operation, etc.). It is possible to display the count display within the period in which the symbol effect is performed, and display the count display for a predetermined time and then hide this count display to make the effect to be counted appear in the non-display state. The production can be executed. In this respect, in the count effect, not only is the count display that has reached the specific count value (for example, "0") hidden, but then one of the above-described multiple effect modes appears, or the specific count value (for example, "0"). )), it is possible to execute the effect of continuing the counting effect by re-displaying the above count display in the form of having a larger count value (timer plus effect).

That is, in this case, even if the count display becomes a specific count value (for example, “0”) and it is hidden and one of the plurality of effect modes appears, the count display is still displayed. There is a possibility that the count display will be redisplayed with a count value larger than the specific count value and the count effect will continue (possibly a more highly expected effect mode will appear). It is expected that the game will be maintained after the game is hidden.

FIG. 193(a) is a single timer mode (YES in step S5506), and the second process in which it is determined not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5507). In a situation, it is a time chart for explaining the concrete contents of the timer plus effect performed when a specific change number (SP reach without timer) is selected.

Note that, in the example shown in FIG. 193(a), for convenience of explanation, when a specific timer type (not only the cut-in B2 but also a plurality of types) may be selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510) (FIG. (See 162), the following processing relating to the timer plus effect is executed. However, when a specific timer type is determined as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), the following process relating to the timer plus effect is not performed, and the timer plus effect is determined regardless of which timer type is determined. The following processing regarding may be executed.

As shown in FIG. 193(a), assuming that the timer type of "cut-in B2" is selected as the result of the count display lottery (step S5510), the peripheral control MPU 1511a selects it as the next process. A determination process is performed as to which of a plurality of effect modes (“cut-in B2-1” and “cut-in B2-2”) including the timer-plus effect mode, the “cut-in B2” is executed. In addition, it is desirable that the determination process be performed based on the result of the jackpot determination or the result of the predetermined lottery.

In the example of “Cut-in B2-1” in the example shown in FIG. 193(a), 40 seconds are displayed after the count display having the count value of “40” is displayed after the elapse of a predetermined time from the symbol variation. When a predetermined value (here, “0”) is reached and the count display is hidden when the time has elapsed, the “cut-in B (cut B notice)” that is the timer target is executed.

On the other hand, in the "cut-in B2-2" mode, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the symbol variation, the count display in which the number of counts is significantly reduced as compared with the "cut-in B2-1" mode is displayed. There is. In general, in such a timer effect, no effect is often performed during the period from the count display being executed until the count display reaches a predetermined value, so there is a concern that amusement of the game during the period may be deteriorated. It Therefore, in the timer-plus effect (aspect of "cut-in B2-2") shown in FIG. 193(a), first, a relatively small first count value (here, "4") after a predetermined time has elapsed since the symbol variation. After displaying the count display with, and this is hidden, in the hidden state, the first double-corresponding effect is displayed for a time longer than the time when the count display was displayed (here, 4 seconds) ( It is supposed to be executed for 9 seconds, for example.

Here, in the first double-corresponding effect, first, the effect of the cut-in B as the effect (first timer target effect) corresponding to the count display having the first count value (here, “4”). To execute. However, in the first timer target effect, a mode with a relatively low degree of expectation (a character wearing a blue aura) is made to appear as the mode of cut-in B. Then, after that, an effect (second timer target effect) as to whether or not to re-display the above-mentioned count display in the form of having a count value larger than the first count value is executed. As an effect regarding whether or not to redisplay the count display, for example, whether a specific display image (count-up image) appears or whether a specific movable accessory (count-up accessory) operates It can be realized as an effect such as whether or not.

In addition, in the effect (count-up effect) regarding whether or not the count display is re-displayed, each time the count display in the non-display state is re-displayed, it is executed prior to that, but the specific display The effect mode (color, light emission mode, etc.) when appearing as an effect using an image (count-up image) or a specific movable accessory (count-up effect) is changed according to the number of times of re-display. It is desirable to do so. Further, when a specific movable accessory (count-up accessory) is adopted as an accessory indicating that the count display is to be re-displayed, the count-up effect for the specific movable accessory (count-up accessory) Not only that, it is desirable to be used for other effects such as a big hit confirmation. However, in this case, in addition to changing the operation mode of the specific movable accessory (count up character), in addition to the specific movable accessory (count up character), the movable character different from this is further operated. It is desirable to let the user know that the count-up effect is not being executed by performing the movable effect in cooperation with them.

According to such a configuration, two different effects (first timer target effect (cut-in B) in which the degree of expectation is indicated) as the target of the count “4” and the second effect regarding whether the count display is re-displayed. Since the timer target effect (count up effect) will be performed, if the relatively short time count display (count "4") is executed, the timer target effect for a longer time can be enjoyed. become able to. Therefore, it is expected to reduce the time required for the count display to be executed while maintaining the total time as the timer effect, and to suppress the deterioration of the entertainment level in the period until the count display reaches the predetermined value. Become so.

In this respect, in the "cut-in B2-2" mode, an effect result that succeeds in re-displaying the count display in the first double-compatible effect appears, and when the effect result appears, the first result is displayed. The timer display is continued by re-displaying the count display in the form of having a second count value (here, “5”) larger than the count value of. However, in the first double-corresponding effect, an effect pattern in which an effect result in which the count display fails to be displayed again is also prepared, and when the effect pattern appears, the count display is not displayed again. It is desirable that the timer effect be ended at this point.

After that, when the count display having the second count value (here, "5") is hidden after a predetermined time, the second double-corresponding effect is displayed in the count state in the non-display state. Is executed for a longer time (for example, 9 seconds) than the displayed time (here, 5 seconds).

Also in this second double-compatible effect, first, the effect of the cut-in B is used as the effect (the third timer target effect) corresponding to the count display having the second count value (here, “5”). Execute. However, in the third timer target effect, a mode having a higher degree of expectation than the first timer target effect (a character wearing a green aura) appears as the cut-in B mode. Then, after that, an effect (fourth timer target effect) as to whether or not the count display is to be displayed again in the form of having a count value larger than the second count value is executed.

With such a configuration, the count display of the second count value (here, “5”) that requires a longer time than the first count value (here, “4”) is executed. However, in exchange for this, the effect of the cut-in B is executed in a mode with a higher degree of expectation than the first timer target effect. Therefore, while prolonging the time required for the count consumption to maintain the total time as the timer effect, it is expected to suppress the deterioration of the entertainment level in the period until the count display reaches the predetermined value. Become.

In this respect, in the "cut-in B2-2" mode, an effect result that succeeds in re-displaying the count display in the second double-corresponding effect appears, and when the effect result appears, the second result is displayed. The timer effect is continued by redisplaying the count display in the form of having a third count value (here, “7”) larger than the count value of. However, even in the second double-corresponding effect, an effect pattern in which an effect result that fails to redisplay the count display appears is prepared, and when the effect pattern appears, the count display is not displayed again. It is desirable to end the timer effect at the time.

After that, when the count display having the third count value (here, “7”) is hidden, the count display of the third double-corresponding effect is displayed in the hidden state. It is supposed to be executed for a longer time (for example, 9 seconds) than the existing time (here, 7 seconds).

Here, even in the third double-corresponding effect, first, the cut-in is performed as the effect (fifth timer target effect) corresponding to the count display having the third count value (here, “7”). The effect of B is executed. However, in the third target effect for the timer, a mode (a character wearing a red aura) having a higher degree of expectation than the first and second target effects is caused to appear as the cut-in B mode. Then, after that, an effect (sixth timer target effect) as to whether or not the count display is re-displayed in the form of having a count value larger than the third count value is executed.

According to such a configuration, the count display of the third count value (here, “7”) that requires a longer time than the first and second count values (here, “4” and “5”) However, in exchange for this, since the effect of the cut-in B will be executed in a mode with a higher expectation than the first and second timer target effects, the count display will be performed. It is expected that a decrease in the interest of the game in the period until reaching the predetermined value will be suppressed.

In this respect, in the aspect of "cut-in B2-2", an effect result of failing to redisplay the count display in the third double-compatible effect appears, and at this point the timer effect ends. Will be done. That is, in this case, in the timer effect, the cut-in B by the character wearing the red aura is finally executed as the effect for the timer, but before the cut-in B according to the aspect appears. Since the count display for a relatively short time is displayed multiple times and the effects corresponding to those count displays are executed multiple times, the time from when the timer effect is started until it is ended It is expected that amusement of entertainment will be maintained appropriately.

Moreover, each time the count display is redisplayed, the count value is increased to increase the scale of the entire production, but the total time the count display is displayed is more than the total time the count display is hidden. Each time the count display is hidden, the timer target effect is executed in a mode with higher expectations, so the timer effect is executed for a long time while maintaining the amusement of the game. You will be able to.

In addition, in the aspect of "cut-in B2-2", the expectation is gradually increased by changing the aspect (color) for the same effect (cut-in B) every time the count display is hidden. Since it is possible to express the state of going, it becomes possible to execute the count display of a plurality of times as one timer effect for "Cut-in B", and the finally displayed effect (red It becomes possible to recognize that the cut-in B) by the character wearing the aura is the target of the timer effect.

In the third double-corresponding effect, an effect pattern in which an effect result that succeeds in re-displaying the count display appears is prepared, and when the effect pattern appears, the count display is re-displayed and the timer effect is produced. It is desirable to continue. However, when the maximum number of times the count display is re-displayed is reached, it is not the production of the cut-in B that has been executed until then, and the production is different from this (the expectation is higher than that of any aspect of the cut-in B. Yes, it is desirable to be able to recognize that the maximum number of times has been reached by executing a special effect which is not prepared as a candidate for the timer. In this case, the effect regarding whether or not to re-display the count display is not displayed after the special effect is executed, but regarding the time required for the special effect, the double-corresponding effect (two The effect subject to timer execution is executed for a longer time than the effect to be executed, suggesting that it has a higher expectation than the effect that has appeared so far (cut-in B by a character wearing a red aura). It is desirable to do so in order to improve the enjoyment of the game. In this case, the degree of expectation may be 100%.

FIG. 193(b) is a time chart for explaining a modified example of the timer plus effect.

The timer plus effect may be performed in the mode shown in FIG. 193(b). That is, in the mode shown in FIG. 193(b), when the count display having the first count value (here, “4”) is started after the lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, the first count value ( Here, a count corresponding to "4" corresponding to "4" (4 seconds timer effect) is executed.

Here, in the production corresponding to the count “4” (production at the time of 4 seconds timer), the production period corresponding to the time required for the first count value (“4” in this case) to be consumed is set. A timer-targeted effect such as cut-in B is executed in a predetermined mode (a character wearing a blue aura, etc.) within the effect period.

According to such a configuration, since it is possible to execute the effect targeted for the timer in the situation where the count display is being executed, it is possible to favorably maintain the amusement of the game while the count is being consumed. ..

Moreover, when such a production corresponding to the count "4" (production at the time of the 4-second timer) is finished, the count display of the count "4" will reach the predetermined value (here, "0"). It is possible to easily recognize that the count display has reached a predetermined value (here, "0") simply by checking the effect corresponding to the count "4" (4 second timer effect) without checking the effect count display. You will be able to.

The first count value (after the count display of the count "4" reaches a predetermined value) after the timing for ending the count "4" corresponding effect (4 second timer effect) Here, the effect (first count-up effect) as to whether or not to re-display the count display is performed by giving a count value larger than "4"). This first count-up effect is executed as the same effect as the "effect regarding whether or not to re-display the count display" in the example of FIG. 193(a), and the above-described count display is performed as the effect result. When an effect pattern that fails to be displayed again appears, the timer effect is ended at this point without the count display being displayed again.

However, when a production pattern that succeeds in re-displaying the count display appears as a result of the first count-up production, a second count value (here, "4") larger than the first count value (here, "4") is displayed. Here, the timer display is continued by redisplaying the count display in the form of having "5"). In this regard, in this modification, when the count display is re-displayed in the form of having the second count value (here, “5”), the count corresponding to the second count value (here, “5”) The production corresponding to "5" (5 seconds timer production) is executed.

Here, in the production corresponding to the count “5” (5-second timer production), the production period is set for the time required for the second count value (“5” in this case) to be consumed. The timer target effects such as cut-in B appear within the effect period in a mode with a higher degree of expectation (such as a character with a green aura) than in the case of the effect corresponding to the count "4" (effect at the time of 4 seconds timer). Will be made.

Then, after the time when the production corresponding to the count "5" (production at the time of 5 second timer) is finished (after the count display of the count "5" reaches a predetermined value), the second count value (here Then, an effect (second count-up effect) as to whether or not to re-display the count display is performed in the form of giving a count value larger than "5"). This second count-up effect is also executed as the same effect as the “effect regarding whether or not to re-display the count display” in the example of FIG. 193(a), and the above-mentioned count display is performed as the effect result. When an effect pattern that fails to be displayed again appears, the timer effect is ended at this point without the count display being displayed again.

However, when, as a result of the second count-up effect, an effect pattern that succeeds in re-displaying the count display appears, the third count value (here, “5”) larger than the second count value (“5”) is displayed. Here, the timer display is continued by re-displaying the count display in the form of "7"). In this regard, in this modified example, when the count display is re-displayed in the form of having the third count value (here, “7”), the count corresponding to the third count value (here, “7”) The production corresponding to “7” (7-second timer production) is executed.

Here, in the production corresponding to the count “7” (7-second timer production), the production period corresponding to the time required for the third count value (here, “7”) to be consumed is set. The timer-targeted effects such as cut-in B appear within the effect period in a mode with a higher degree of expectation (such as a character wearing a red aura) than in the case of the effect corresponding to the count “5” (5 second timer effect). Will be made.

Then, after the time when the production corresponding to the count "7" (7-second timer production) is finished (after the count display of the count "7" reaches a predetermined value), the third count value (here Then, an effect (third count-up effect) as to whether or not to redisplay the count display may be executed in the form of giving a count value larger than “7”).
This third count-up effect is also executed as the same effect as the "effect regarding whether or not to re-display the count display" in the example of FIG. 193(a), and as a result of the effect, the count display is performed. When an effect pattern that fails to re-display appears, the timer effect is ended at this point without re-displaying the count display.

In this regard, in this modified example, after the timing when the production corresponding to the count “7” (7-second timer production) is finished (after the count display of the count “7” reaches the predetermined value), the count is further increased. This shows an example in which the count-up effect itself, which suggests the possibility of, did not appear. In this way, even when the count-up effect itself does not appear, as in the case where the effect pattern in which the count display fails to be displayed again in the count-up effect appears, the count display is not displayed again. At that time, the timer effect will be finished.

According to the count-up effect according to such a modified example, when the count display having the predetermined number of count values is displayed, the count value is displayed and immediately determined corresponding to the count value. Since the count corresponding effect (cut-in B, etc.) having the effect contents for the time being started is started, it becomes possible to favorably maintain the interest of the game during the execution of the count display. Further, when such a count corresponding effect is finished (when the count display reaches a predetermined value), an effect as to whether or not the count display has a larger count value and is to be displayed again is performed, and these two effects are alternately performed. By appearing, the timer effect will be executed and continued, so that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the count display is continuously performed and no effect is performed in the timer effect, which is suitable for amusement of games. Will be able to maintain.

In this modification, a count-corresponding effect (for example, count "4") having effect contents for a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds) corresponding to the displayed count value (for example, "4"). During the execution of the (corresponding effect), the display of the count is also exhausted (countdown of 4→3→2→1→0). However, as described above, the count corresponding effect (for example, the count “4” corresponding effect) according to this modification is finished at the timing when the displayed count value (for example, “4”) is completely consumed. Since the count display is performed, only the count value at the time of its appearance (for example, “4”) is displayed for a predetermined time, and the count display during count digestion (4→3→2→1) is performed. It is more desirable not to necessarily perform this for the (countdown of 0)) in order to prompt attention to the count corresponding effect (for example, the count “4” corresponding effect).

Then, in each example shown in FIGS. 193(a) and 193(b), after the timer effect is executed in this manner, the symbol variation is stopped.

Of the above timer plus effects, in the effect regarding whether or not to re-display the count display, an effect acceptance period of a predetermined time is set, and counting is performed based on the operation by the player within the period. An effect (success effect) that suggests that the display is redisplayed or an effect (failure effect) that suggests that the count display is not redisplayed may appear. That is, in this case, after the successful effect appears, the count display is re-displayed as the count number increases and the timer effect is continued, and when the failed effect appears, the count display is re-displayed thereafter. Absent. When such an effect is adopted, even if the player does not perform an operation during the effect acceptance period, the effect result (success effect or failure effect) that is predetermined at a predetermined timing after the lapse of the period is given. It will be displayed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the times required for the first to third double correspondence effects are set to the same time, but each count display (“4”, “5”, “7”) is supported. You may make it set to mutually different time as the production time to perform. For example, each time the count display is re-displayed, the count value of each count display gradually increases, so that the time required for the double correspondence effect corresponding to each count value also gradually increases. If set to, the total time required for the count display itself can be kept relatively short and the scale of the entire production can be appropriately expanded while maintaining the enjoyment of the game.

Further, in the production of whether or not to re-display the count display, when displaying the production result, there are a plurality of production modes with different count display re-display ratios (expectations) in the form that the count number increases. Either may be displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, each time the count display is re-displayed, the count display having a count value larger than the count value when the previous count display was displayed was made to appear. It is not necessary to redisplay the count display that has a count value that is necessarily larger than the count value when the count display is displayed. That is, even when the count display reaches a predetermined value and the timer target effect is executed, the count display is only re-displayed when a predetermined effect image appears thereafter, which improves the enjoyment of the game. It can be expected to be achieved. However, despite the fact that the count display with a count value smaller than the count value when the previous count display was displayed is displayed again, it is possible to create a timer with a higher expectation than the previous count display. If the appearance ratio (may be 100%) is set to be high, the sense of speed from the display of the count display to the appearance of the timer target appearance is increased, and the interest of the game is further improved. Will be able to. Then, when the redisplay in the count display having such a small count value is repeatedly executed, the appearance timing of the timer target effect becomes gradually shorter from the time when the count display is first displayed. As a result, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by such an accelerated timer effect.

[Timer stagnation effect]
As described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, any one of a plurality of effect modes (for example, conversation announcement, hold change, cut-in A, accessory A operation, special timer, cut-in B, accessory B operation, etc.) is performed. It is set as a count target, the count display is executed within the period in which the symbol effect is performed, and when the count display reaches a predetermined value, the effect mode to be counted among the plurality of effect modes is made to appear. In this respect, in the timer effect according to the present embodiment, it is possible to hide the count display from the time when the count display is started until the count value reaches the predetermined value, and the count display is In some cases, the display may be hidden for the first time period and may be hidden for the second time period that is longer than the first time period (timer stall effect).

That is, in this case, when the count display reaches the predetermined value, any one of a plurality of effect modes appears as the count target, and the count display is the first time or the time until the count value reaches the predetermined value. Since it may be hidden for a longer second time, it is difficult to grasp the remaining time until any one of a plurality of effect modes occurs, and a feeling of tension until the effect to be counted is executed. Will be able to continue.

FIG. 194(a) is a single timer mode (YES in step S5506), and the second process in which it is determined not to execute the mission effect (let the conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5507) In a situation, it is a time chart for explaining the concrete contents of the timer stagnation effect performed when the variation numbers 7 and 8 (see FIG. 148) corresponding to “no timer timer reach” are selected.

Note that, in the example shown in FIG. 194(a), for the sake of convenience of description, when a specific timer type (not only the accessory A action 2 but also a plurality of types) may be selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510). (See FIG. 161) The following processing relating to the timer stagnant effect is executed. However, when a specific timer type is determined as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), the following process relating to the timer stagnation effect is not performed, and regardless of which timer type is determined, the timer stagnation effect is determined. The following processing regarding may be executed.

As shown in FIG. 194(a), assuming that the timer type of "feature A operation 2" is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes the following processing as the next processing. Regarding the selected "feature A action 2", a plurality of effect modes including the aspect of the revival timer effect ("whether "feature A operation 2-1" or "feature A operation 2-2" is executed" It is desirable that the determination process is performed based on the result of the big hit determination or the result of a predetermined lottery.

Of the example shown in FIG. 194(a), in the mode of "characteristics A operation 2-1", after the count display having the count value of "30" is started after a predetermined time from the start of the symbol variation, 30 When the number of seconds has elapsed, the specified value (here, “0”) is reached and the count display is hidden, and the “target character A action (preferred part A notice)” is executed. To be done.

On the other hand, in the mode of "characteristics A operation 2-2", after 5 seconds have elapsed since the count display having the count value of "10" was started after a predetermined time from the start of the symbol variation, the count When the value becomes "5", it is hidden, and when the hidden state is maintained for 6 seconds, the count display is re-displayed with the count value of "4". Then, after 2 seconds, when the count value becomes "2", it is hidden again, and when the non-display state is maintained for 16 seconds, the count display is re-displayed with the count value of "1". After displaying, and 1 second later, after reaching "0", the "characteristics A operation (characteristics A notice)" targeted for the timer is executed while the count display is hidden. It has become.

According to the aspect of the "feature A operation 2-2", as shown in FIG. 194(a), the count display having the count value of "10" is started after a predetermined time from the start of the symbol variation. However, even if the count display having the count value of "30" is started, a predetermined value (here, " 0”) is reached and the effect for the timer is executed. In other words, in this case, even if a count display having a relatively small count value appears, if the effect of hiding it for a predetermined time (timer stagnant effect) occurs while the count display is being consumed, The progress speed of will become stagnant for that amount of time, and it will be expected to be executed as a timer effect that takes the same time as when a count display with a relatively large count value appears. .. As described above, in the timer effect, the longer the time required for this is, the higher the ratio of the appearance mode of the timer target with high expectation appears. Since the stagnant effect can be generated, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game when a count display having a relatively small count value appears. Further, since the time for the timer effect as a whole is extended by adding the time for which the count display is hidden, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the amusement of the game while the count display is executed. ..

In addition, in the mode of the "feature A operation 2-2", as shown in FIG. 194(a), the first time period (6) is reached until the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, "0"). Hide the count display for a period of time (seconds) that is longer than the first time (16 seconds). The period (the period between the count value “2” and “1”) can appear, but the count display is “non-long” regardless of the length of the time (first time, second time). When returning from the “display state” to the “display state”, the count value is allowed to progress (change) by a specific number (here, “1”) which is the minimum unit. That is, in this case, the longer the count display is maintained in the “non-display state”, the longer the count progressing speed becomes, and as a result, the proportion of appearance modes with high expectations is high. Since it is expected to become, it becomes possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, in the mode of the "feature A operation 2-2", as the count value in the timer effect progresses, when the count display is hidden, the time during which the count display is maintained in the "non-display state" becomes longer. It is supposed to be set to. In other words, in this case, even when the count display with a relatively small count value is being executed and the count exhaustion is likely to end (a situation where the predetermined value will be reached soon), If a timer stagnation effect appears, the time required for the timer effect will be greatly increased, and the degree of expectation will be greatly improved, so the amusement interest of the game is preferably maintained over the period until the count display reaches a predetermined value. You will be able to.

Further, in the mode of "feature A operation 2-2", after the count display is hidden, the count display is re-displayed and after reaching a predetermined value, the timer target effect is executed. However, after the count display is hidden, the count display is not necessarily re-displayed so that a production pattern in which the timer production is terminated at this point without executing the timer target production may appear. May be. When this effect pattern appears, the rate at which the symbol variation is stopped in the jackpot pattern is lower than when the predetermined value is reached and the timer target effect is executed, but by providing such an effect pattern, the timer effect It is possible to increase the frequency of occurrence of this itself. Moreover, after the count display is hidden (after the timer effect is terminated halfway), while waiting for the count display to be displayed again, there may be a case where the symbol fluctuation is stopped by the big hit symbol. Since it is possible to realize such a surprise-like production, it is expected to improve the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, in the mode of "feature A operation 2-2", the total time (22 seconds) in which the count display is hidden becomes longer than the total time (10 seconds) in which the count display is displayed. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game while the count display is being executed.

FIG. 194(b) shows an example of the relationship between the time until the count display is re-displayed (the time when the non-display state is maintained) and the risk degree that the count display is not re-displayed. 9 is a table H1 showing different count values when displayed. That is, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, based on the result of the jackpot determination, the type of the variation pattern, and the like, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines the type of the timer effect including the mode of the timer stagnation effect and the execution mode thereof. It is desirable to perform processing.

According to such a mode shown in Table H1, as the count value progresses (as it approaches the predetermined value), there is a tendency that the maintenance time at the time of non-display becomes longer, whereas that of non-display becomes longer. There is a tendency that the risk that the timer effect is terminated without the count display being re-displayed as it is is gradually increased. In other words, in this case, if the count value is hidden when it has not progressed so much, the total time as a timer effect can be extended steadily while the end risk is small, but the count value is large. If it is hidden at the advanced stage, there is a large risk of ending, but since the total time as a timer effect can be greatly extended, the performance as a timer stagnant effect gradually changes as the count value progresses. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game while the count display is executed.

In Table H1, one non-display time is made to correspond to each count value, but a plurality of non-display times are made to correspond to each count value, and the timer stagnation occurs at any of those non-display times. You may make it produce an effect.

In addition, at which timing (count value) the count display is hidden while the count display is being executed, and the number of times the count display is hidden, the result of the big hit judgment and the type of the variation pattern are determined. It is desirable to make a decision at the start of the symbol variation based on this.

Further, in such a timer stagnation effect, an effect corresponding to this may be performed while the count display is hidden. For example, when the count value “6” is hidden for 6 seconds, the non-display effect corresponding to the count value “6” is performed for 6 seconds, and the count value “2” is hidden for 16 seconds. In this case, if the non-display effect corresponding to the count value “2” (the effect different from the non-display effect corresponding to the count value “6”) is performed for 16 seconds, It becomes possible to preferably maintain the interest of the game when the count display is in the non-display state. At this time, an effect of whether or not the count display is re-displayed in the non-display effect may appear, and the count display may be re-displayed or the timer effect may be ended according to the effect result. ..

More preferably, during the period from when the count display is started to when it reaches a predetermined value, when the count display is in the display state, an effect (an effect different from the timer effect) that suggests the jackpot expectation degree is newly added. If you do not start it and you can start a new effect (an effect other than the timer effect) that suggests a big hit expectation when the count display is in the non-display state, be careful about the remaining count. Instead, you will be able to enjoy a different effect from the timer effect. Also, in addition to the increase in the degree of expectation due to the occurrence of the timer stagnation effect, it is possible to enjoy the increase in the degree of expectation due to the effect different from the timer effect, and the expectation for the timer stagnation effect is increased. It will be possible to make it even higher.

Then, another effect that appears when the count display is in the non-display state may include a new timer effect different from the timer effect. However, in this case, the count is advanced at a speed faster than the progress rate of the count in the hidden state, and a new timer is displayed before the time when the count display in the hidden state is redisplayed. It is desirable that the count display of the effect reaches a predetermined value and the target effect appears. As a new target effect of the timer effect, an effect of redisplaying the non-displayed count display may be performed.

[Progressive production leading to timer production]
As described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, count display up to a predetermined value is executed within the period in which the symbol effect is performed, and at least one of a plurality of effect modes prepared as candidates for effect corresponding to the count display. It is possible to execute a timer effect that makes one appear as an effect for a timer. In this respect, in the timer effect according to the present application, a series of effects including the above timer-targeted effects (for example, conversation announcement, hold change, cut-in A, accessory A operation, special timer, cut-in B, accessory B operation, etc.) The timer-corresponding effect can be started before the count display reaches the predetermined value, and can be ended after the count display reaches the predetermined value (progress effect leading to the timer target effect).

That is, in this case, since a series of timer-corresponding effects corresponding to the timer effect are executed before the count display reaches the predetermined value, it is preferable for the game to be enjoyed until the count display reaches the predetermined value. Will be able to maintain.

FIG. 195 is a time chart for explaining the specific content of the progress effect that leads to the timer target effect.

As shown in FIG. 195, the timer effect is being executed with a specific timer type within the variation period of the symbol, and the count value of the count display is up to the first specific value (here, count “6”). In the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, a progress effect (a series of timer correspondences) that leads to the effect content of the timer target effect that appears after the count value of the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, the count “0”). Production) is started.

Here, in this explanatory example, as shown in FIG. 195, the cut-in by the teammate character is the timer target effect that appears after the count value of the count display reaches the predetermined value (here, the count “0”). The display image SEG3-1 to be performed is displayed. In this regard, in the timer effect according to this example, the ally character performs the cut-in during the period during which the count is being consumed before the count value of the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is “0”). It is arranged to display the process leading up to the situation of being shown as an effect image (progress effect that leads to effect contents of the timer target effect).

For example, in this example of explanation, the count value of the count display before the count value of the count display reaches the predetermined value (here, the count "0") is the first specific value (here, the count "6"). When it becomes, as a corresponding effect, a display image SEG1 depicting a person who asks the teammate character for help is displayed.

Next, when the count value of the count display reaches the second specific value (here, the count "3") before the count value of the count display reaches the predetermined value (here, the count "0") As an effect corresponding to this, a display image SEG2 is displayed that depicts a situation in which a teammate character confronts an enemy character by accepting a request from a person seeking help.

That is, while the count display progresses toward the predetermined value, such display images SEG1 and SEG2 are sequentially made to appear, and when the count display further progresses and reaches the predetermined value, a cut-in by the teammate character (here, , It becomes possible to expect that the display image SEG3-1 in which the ally character wears the aura to defeat the enemy character is displayed), which allows the player to enjoy the game while the count display is being executed. Can be suppressed.

However, in the explanation example shown in FIG. 195, even if the display image SEG2 corresponding to the second specific value (here, the count “3”) appears, the cut by the ally character is performed when the count display reaches the predetermined value. An effect pattern is also provided in which a display image SEG3-2, which depicts a situation in which a teammate character escapes in front of an enemy, is displayed instead of the display image SEG3-1 in which the in is performed. According to such a configuration, while it is possible to give a star of which effect appears as the target of the timer effect in the period before the count display reaches the predetermined value, the count display has the predetermined value. Since it will not be possible to specify the effect mode that appears when the value reaches, it is possible to favorably maintain the gaming interest after the count display reaches the predetermined value. The display image SEG3-2 does not necessarily have to be prepared, and the display image SEG3-1 may always appear when the count display reaches a predetermined value.

In this regard, in this description example, after the display image SEG1 corresponding to the first specific value (here, the count “6”) appears, the display corresponding to the second specific value (here, the count “3”). After the image SEG2 appears, an effect pattern is prepared in which the count display does not progress any more and is terminated halfway before reaching a predetermined value. According to such a configuration, while such effect progress that appears before reaching the predetermined value is performed, the progress of the count display is carried out with the risk that the timer effect ends prematurely without the timer target effect appearing. You will be able to enjoy. It should be noted that it is not always necessary to prepare an effect pattern in which the timer effect is terminated midway, and the effect for the timer may appear so that the count display always reaches a predetermined value.

Further, in the explanation example shown in FIG. 195, the display image SEG1 corresponding to the first specific value (here, the count “6”) is the display image SEG3-1 in which the cut-in is performed by the teammate character, Although illustration is omitted, it is adapted to be displayed as an effect image connected to a different display image (for example, cut-in by a different character) prepared as a timer target effect. For example, in the example shown in FIGS. 204(C) to (F) and FIGS. 205(G) to (I), which will be described later, one of the three teammate characters shown in FIG. 204(D) seeks help. The request from the person is accepted, and the accepted ally character faces the enemy character to perform the cut-in effect.

Therefore, in the explanation example shown in FIG. 195, after the display image SEG1 corresponding to the first specific value (here, the count “6”) is displayed, the second specific value (here, the count “3” is displayed. )), a display image different from the display image SEG2 may be displayed as the display image corresponding to the display image SEG2. When the other display image is displayed, the display image is displayed when the predetermined value is reached. The production progress is performed so as to connect to a display image different from SEG3-1 (for example, cut-in by a different character). The display image SEG1 may be executed as an effect that is always connected to the display image SEG3-1 in which the cut-in by the teammate character is performed.

It should be noted that it is desirable to determine which route the effect progresses while the count display is being executed, based on the result of the big hit determination, the type of the variation pattern, and the like when the symbol changes. When a production pattern in which the production of the timer target is not executed appears, the rate at which the symbol variation is stopped in the jackpot pattern is lower than when the predetermined value is reached and the production of the timer target is executed, but such a production pattern is used. By preparing, it becomes possible to increase the frequency of occurrence of the timer effect itself.

In addition, after the display image SEG1 corresponding to the first specific value (here, the count “6”) appears, the count is displayed until the count display reaches the second specific value (here, the count “3”). The display may be hidden. For example, in the explanation example shown in FIG. 195, when the count “6” is displayed, the display image SEG1 corresponding to the count “6” is displayed for the time period during which the counts “5” to “4” are consumed. And the count display is hidden while the display image SEG1 is displayed. Then, after that, the count display is displayed in accordance with the timing when the count number becomes “3”, and the display image SEG2 corresponding to the count “3” is displayed for the time when the counts “2” to “1” are consumed. And the count display is hidden while the display image SEG2 is displayed. Then, after that, the count display is displayed at the timing when the count number becomes “0”, and the display image SEG3-1 (timer target effect) corresponding to the count “0” is executed. You can enjoy the production progress corresponding to the count number without worrying about the count exhaustion toward the value.

The display image SEG1, the display image SEG2, and the display image SEG3-1 may be displayed as a still image or may be displayed as a moving image that requires a predetermined time. When displaying as still images, a plurality of still images may be sequentially displayed within a predetermined time corresponding to a specific count value (first specific value or second specific value).

Further, the display time SEG1 corresponding to the first specific value, the display time SEG2 corresponding to the second specific value, and the display image SEG3-1 corresponding to the predetermined value are displayed. Regarding time, it is desirable that they are set as different times.

In addition, in this embodiment, as the progress effect that is connected to the timer target effect, a plurality of types of progress effects that are connected to any of the plurality of types of timer target effects are prepared, but a specific timer target effect appears. Only occasionally, it is possible to make it possible to execute the progress effect leading to the specific timer target effect before the count display reaches the predetermined value.

Further, in the example illustrated in FIG. 195, the progress effect that leads to the timer target effect is executed from when the count number is “6”, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the remaining specific count is the first specific count number (eg, “3”) that is relatively small and when the secondary specific count number that the remaining count is relatively large (eg, “6”). When the progress effect connected to the timer target effect is set to be executable, and the progress effect connected to the timer target effect is executed when the remaining specific count is the second specific count number (for example, “6”). If the jackpot expectation is relatively high, the production will be more advanced as the number of continued counts increases as if the jackpot expectation is high. Will be able to maintain.

[Timer operation effect]
As described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, the count display up to the predetermined value can be executed within the period in which the symbol effect is performed, and the count target effect that is the target of the count display can be executed. In this respect, in the timer effect according to the present application, it is possible to set a period during which the operation of the operation device (for example, the operation button 410) can be received during execution of the count display, and the operation device (for example, the operation button) can be set within the period. When an operation is performed on 410), whichever of a plurality of operating effect modes in which the ratio of appearance with a high expected degree (for example, cut-in B) appears as the count target effect when the count display reaches a predetermined value Cause Further, as a period in which the production can be accepted, a first period from the time when the count display is the first count value to the time when the count display is the second count value, and the third count value that is counted after the second count value is displayed on the count display. The second period from the time of to the time of the fourth count value is prepared as at least a settable period. Then, on this, from the time when the count display is the first count value, during the symbol effect period during which it is determined that a high-expected effect mode (for example, cut-in B) appears as the count target effect When the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is operated during the first period up to the count value and the effect is received, and when the count display is the third count value, the fourth count is displayed. When the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is operated during the second period up to the count value and the effect is received, a specific operation effect as a result of the effect reception. A mode (for example, a mode that suggests that a specific effect with high expectation appears as a timer target effect at a high rate) is generated at different rates (in-timer operation effect).

That is, in this case, even if it is determined that a high-anticipation effect (for example, cut-in B) will appear as the count-compatible effect, from the time when the count display is the first count value to the time when the count display is the second count value. The operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is operated, and the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is operated between when the count display is the third count value and when the count display is the fourth count value. Since the easiness of occurrence of the effect mode during operation differs, whether the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) should be operated from the time when the count display is the first count value to the time when the count display is the second count value, the count display Whether the operating means (for example, the operating button 410) should be operated from the time when the third count value is reached to the fourth counting value, or whether the operating means (for example, the operating button 410) should be operated by both of them. It will be possible to add interest to the game strategy such as.

For example, when the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is operated within a period in which the specific operation-time production mode is likely to occur, it is possible to suppress the production risk that the specific operation-time production mode does not appear. However, even if the specific operation effect mode is more likely to occur, it is difficult to have a sense of expectation that a high-impact effect (for example, cut-in B) will appear as the count target effect. On the other hand, when the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is operated within a period in which the specific operation-time effect mode is unlikely to occur, the effect risk that the specific operation-time effect mode does not appear increases. When the specific operation effect mode is less likely to occur, when it appears, it becomes easier to have a sense of expectation that a high-impact effect (for example, cut-in B) will appear as the count-compatible effect.

Then, until the count display reaches the predetermined value in such two different periods (from the first count value to the second count value and from the third count value to the fourth count value) Since it can appear during the period, it is possible to maintain the amusement of the game during the count digestion by making the operation means (for example, cut-in B) interesting for how to operate the operation means for these two periods. Will be expected.

FIG. 196(a) is a single timer mode (YES in step S5506), and the second process in which it is determined not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5507) It is a time chart for demonstrating the concrete content of the operation production in a timer performed when a specific change number (SP reach without a timer) is selected in a situation.

Note that, in the example shown in FIG. 196(a), for the sake of convenience of explanation, the following processing regarding the in-timer operation effect is performed when a specific timer type is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510) (see FIG. 162). Ready to run. However, considering that the in-timer operation effect functions as “an effect that suggests the degree of expectation that the specific effect appears as the timer target effect”, the specific timer type is determined as the result of the count display lottery (step S5510). The following process related to the in-timer operation effect is not performed when the timer type is performed, but the following process related to the in-timer operation effect is determined even when the timer type in which another effect mode appears instead of the cut-in B as the timer target effect is determined. Execute. In addition, when the timer type in which an effect having a lower expectation than the cut-in B appears as the timer target effect is determined, compared with the case in which the timer type in which the cut-in B appears as the timer target effect is determined. When the reception is made, the ratio of occurrence of the specific operation effect mode is reduced.

As shown in FIG. 196(a), assuming that the timer type of "cut-in B2" is selected as the result of the count display lottery (step S5510), the peripheral control MPU 1511a selects it as the next process. A determination process is performed as to which of a plurality of effect modes (“cut-in B2-11” and “cut-in B2-12”) including the mode of the in-timer operation effect, the “cut-in B2” is executed. In addition, it is desirable that the determination process be performed based on the result of the jackpot determination or the result of the predetermined lottery.

In the example of “Cut-in B2-11” in the example shown in FIG. 196(a), 40 seconds are displayed after the count display having the count value of “40” is displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the symbol variation. When a predetermined value (here, “0”) is reached when the time has elapsed and the count display is hidden, the “cut-in B (cut B notice)” that is the timer target is executed.

On the other hand, in the case of "Cut-in B2-12", after the count display having the count value of "40" is displayed after the lapse of the predetermined time from the symbol variation, the predetermined value is displayed when 40 seconds have passed ( Here, “Cut-in B (cut B notice)” which is the timer target is executed under the condition that “0”) is reached and the count display is hidden. However, in the "cut-in B2-12" mode, the first period from when the count value of the count display is "35 (first count value)" to "25 (second count value)" is the same as the first period. Regarding the in-timer operation effect when the operation button 410) is operated in the second period from when the count value is “15 (third count value)” to when it is “5 (fourth count value)” The production reception is performed, and a display indicating that the production reception is allowed is displayed. In addition, as a display that suggests that the production acceptance is allowed, in addition to the method of displaying a specific display image, from "35 (first count value)" to "25 (second count value)" By changing the display mode (size, shape, color, etc.) of the count value from “15 (third count value)” to “5 (fourth count value)” Is also feasible.

That is, in the "cut-in B2-12" mode, one of the first period (the count value is "35" to "25") and the second period (the count value is "15" to "5"). When the operation button 410 is operated within the period, the effect reception as the in-timer operation effect is performed, and based on the effect reception, the ratio of appearance of the specific effect having high expectation as the count target effect is different. Any one of a plurality of operation-time performance modes is generated. It should be noted that, regarding the plurality of operation effect modes, for example, it is possible to adopt a mode in which a predetermined lamp is lit in blue or red (a specific operation effect mode), and a mode in which it is lit in blue is adopted. Proportion of specific effects with high expectations as count target effects appearing when appearing, ratio of specific effects with high expectations as count target effects appearing when a mode that lights up in red (effect mode during specific operation) appears Can be set to be the highest.

FIG. 196(b) decides which one of the effect modes to appear as the in-operation effect mode depending on whether the effect is received during the first period and when the effect is received during the second period. It is a figure which shows the example about the table (table T16) referred when performing.

As described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, a mode in which a predetermined lamp is turned on in either blue or red (specific operation mode) is prepared as the operation mode.

In this respect, in the table T16 shown in FIG. 196(b), in the effect pattern (cut-in B2-12) in which "cut-in B" appears as the timer target effect, if the effect is accepted during the first period. Blue (low expected mode) is selected at a ratio of 30/100", and red (high expected mode) is selected at a ratio of "70/100", and the effect is received during the second period. Then, blue (low expected mode) is selected at a ratio of "70/100", and red (high expected mode) is selected at a ratio of "30/100". Therefore, when the operation button 410 is operated in the first period, it is possible to suppress the production risk that a red color (high-expectation mode) does not appear, but the red color (high-expectation mode) is likely to occur. Even if this appears for a minute, it is difficult to have a sense of expectation that a production having a high degree of expectation (for example, cut-in B) will appear as a production to be counted. On the other hand, when the operation button 410 is operated in the second period, the production risk that the red color (high-expectation mode) does not appear increases, but the red color (high-expectation mode) hardly occurs. However, when this appears, it becomes easier to have a sense of expectation that a production with a high degree of expectation (for example, cut-in B) will appear as the production to be counted.

That is, although illustration is omitted, in a production pattern in which a production mode having a lower degree of expectation than "cut-in B" appears as a timer-targeted production, for example, when production is received during the first period, "50/100" The blue color (low expectation mode) is selected at the ratio of “”, and the red color (high expectation mode) is selected at the ratio of “50/100”. Blue (low expected mode) is selected at a ratio of 90/100", and red (high expected mode) is selected at a ratio of "10/100". Therefore, when a red color (high-expectation mode) appears in the second period, the effect pattern (cut-in B2-12) in which “cut-in B” appears as the timer-targeted effect can be expected to be selected. become.

In this embodiment, when the specific timer type is determined, the two periods of the first period and the second period are generated within the variation time, but the result of the jackpot determination and the variation At least one of the first period and the second period may be generated based on the type of pattern, the type of timer, or the like. For example, when only the first period is generated, the risk that the red color (high-expecting aspect) does not appear when the effect reception is made is suppressed, but the expectation level when the red color (high-expecting aspect) appears is also low. The operation opportunity is given only under the single condition that it does not increase, and when only the second period occurs, there is a high risk that the red color (high-expected mode) will not appear when the performance reception is made. However, the operation opportunity is given only under a single condition that the degree of expectation when the red color (highly expected mode) appears is high. In other words, in this case, depending on the preference of the player, even if the player wants to operate on the side of the first period, the operation opportunity is given only on the side of the second period, or even if he/she wants to operate on the side of the second period. Since the operation opportunity will be given only to the one side, the count display will be executed by causing a conflict as to whether or not the operation is performed on the side not preferred while the count is exhausted. While the game is being played, it becomes possible to maintain the interest of the game.

In addition, in the first period and the second period, it is not always necessary to perform the display indicating that the production reception is permitted. That is, in this case, it is counted in a state in which it is unclear whether the production reception is permitted in the first period or the second period, or whether the production reception is permitted in the first period or the second period. Since the display is advanced, it becomes possible to make the timer effect more interesting, and it is possible to appropriately maintain the interest of the game while the count display is executed.

Moreover, regarding the first period and the second period, it is desirable to set the time lengths during which the production reception is allowed to be the same. According to such a configuration, the performance reception is allowed for the same amount of time in both the first period and the second period, so that the count value is the specific number (here, “10”). ) Can be provided as a "thinking time for performing an operation", and by adding such effect elements, it is possible to maintain amusement of the game during the period in which the count display is executed. Like

Further, in the first period and the second period, it is possible to accept the operation by the player for a plurality of times, and the effect mode is changed (for example, blue→green→red) through the multiple times of effect reception. It is also possible to increase the proportion of appearances with a high degree of expectation (for example, cut-in B) that appear as count target effects. However, in this case, even if the effect reception is performed a plurality of times, the easiness of appearance of the final appearance mode is set to be different between the first period and the second period.

[Timer concealment production]
As described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, the count display up to the predetermined value is executed within the period in which the symbol effect is performed, and the timer target effect corresponding to the count display can be executed. In this respect, according to the present invention, during execution of the count display, the count front effect by the ornament can be executed on the front side of the count display.

That is, in this case, in the situation where the count target effect is executed when the count display reaches the predetermined value, the count by the decorative body makes it difficult to visually recognize the count display until the count display reaches the predetermined value. Since the front effect will be performed, the count value displayed by the count display can be grasped only in a scattered manner, and the remaining time until the count target effect is executed is only for a while (during the count front effect by the decorative body). It becomes difficult to grasp and it becomes possible to increase interest in the count display.

Also, instead of making it difficult to visually recognize the count display, by increasing the expectation for the big hit pattern to appear through the counting forward effect by the decorative body, it is difficult to visually recognize the count display Will be expected to suppress this.

197(a) to (c) are aspects of the single timer (YES in step S5506), and it is determined that the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is not executed (NO in step S5507). It is a time chart for demonstrating the concrete content of the timer concealment production performed when a specific change number is selected in the 2nd processing situation.

In the timer effect example shown in FIG. 197(a), first, a count display having a count number of "30" is started at a timing when a predetermined timing (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the symbol variation was started. The timer target effect that is the timer target appears after the count display becomes “0”. However, in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 197(a), the count front effect by the ornament can be performed on the front side of the count display at a predetermined timing during the execution of the count display.

Here, as the count forward effect by such a decorative body, for example, in an example of FIGS. 206(B) and (C) described later, the movable body KT for effect is moved to the front of the count display for a predetermined time. This can be realized as a count number erosion effect, etc. that positions this over. The decorative body does not necessarily have to be provided as a movable body, and may be any one that makes the count display relatively difficult to visually recognize during rendering than during non-producing.

In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 197(a), the count forward effect by the ornament is executed as an effect state (a state in which the count display is hard to be visually recognized) until the count value becomes "10". In the effect state, the easiness of appearance of a specific effect having a high degree of expectation as a timer target effect is suggested by an operation mode or a light emitting mode by the ornament.

Then, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 197(a), when the count forward effect by the ornament is finished, the count value is changed from "10" to "0" under the condition that the count display is easily visible. As a result, one of a plurality of effect modes appears as the timer target effect.

On the other hand, also in the timer effect example shown in FIG. 197(b), first, a count having a count number of "30" at a timing when a predetermined timing (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the symbol variation was started. After the display is started and the count display becomes "0", the timer target effect which is the timer target appears. In addition, the point that the count front effect by the ornament is performed on the front side of the count display during the execution of the count display is the same as in the case of the timer effect example shown in FIG. 197(a).

However, in the timer effect example shown in FIG. 197(b), the counting front effect by the ornament is finished in a relatively short time, and when the counting front effect by the ornament is ended. Under the condition that the count display is easily visible, the count value progresses from “15” to “0”, and then one of a plurality of effect modes appears as the timer target effect.

On the other hand, in the timer effect example shown in FIG. 197(c), first, a count display having a count number of "25" is displayed at a timing when a predetermined timing (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the symbol variation was started. After the count display is started and the count display becomes "0", the timer target effect which is the timer target appears. The point that the count front effect by the ornament is performed on the front side of the count display during the execution of the count display is the same as the case of the timer effect example shown in FIGS. 197(a) and 197(b).

However, in the timer effect example shown in FIG. 197(c), the counting front effect by the ornament is designed to occur and end at a relatively early stage, and when the counting front effect by the ornament is ended. Under the condition that the count display is easily visible, the count value progresses from “20” to “0”, and then any one of a plurality of effect modes appears as the timer target effect.

By the way, as described above, in the timer effect, the larger the count value when the count display is started, the higher the rate of appearance of the effect object having high expectation as the timer object effect becomes. In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, when the count front effect by the ornament occurs, the count front effect is not used as a reference and is visually recognized instead of using the count value when the count display is started. The larger the count value when it is made easier, the higher the proportion of appearance targets with high expectations as timer target effects will appear. The ratio may include 100%.

For example, in the above-described effect examples of FIGS. 197(a) and 197(b), the count value when the count display is started is the same as "30" in any effect pattern, but FIG. In the example of production, the count value when the count front production is finished and made easy to see is “10”, whereas in the example of FIG. 197(b), when the count front production is finished and made easy to see. Since the count value of “1” is “15”, the ratio of appearances with a high expectation as a timer target effect is higher in the effect example of FIG. 197(b).

According to such a configuration, when the count front effect is generated during the execution of the count display, the effect value as the size of the count number that has appeared at the start of the count is damaged, and the count number when the count front effect ends. Since the size of “1” will be re-focused, it becomes possible to maintain the amusement interest during the execution of the count display.

For example, in the effect example of FIG. 197(c) described above, a relatively small count value “25” is displayed at the start of counting, but when the count front effect is completed, it is relatively large at the end of the effect. The count value "20" is displayed, and the proportion of appearances with a high degree of expectation as the timer target presentation appears higher than in the example productions of FIGS. 197(a) and 197(b). There is.

That is, in this case, if the count-front effect is generated, there is a possibility that the ratio of the effect having a high degree of expectation as the timer-targeted effect will be higher than that in the case where a relatively large count value is displayed at the start of counting. Therefore, it is expected to suppress the deterioration of the entertainment of the game when a relatively small count value is displayed at the start of counting.

However, when a relatively large count value is displayed at the start of counting, compared to a case where a relatively small count value is displayed at the start of counting, when a count front effect occurs after that, a relatively large count value is also displayed at the end. It is desirable to set the value so that the value appears at a high rate.

In addition, in the above-described effect examples of FIGS. 197(a) and 197(b), since a plurality of times are prepared as the time from the start of count display to the occurrence of count forward effect, count display is executed. It becomes possible to keep amusement of the game by making the player aware of the possibility that the counting front effect may occur over a long period of time.

Further, in the above-described effect examples of FIGS. 197(a) and (197), since a plurality of times are prepared as the time from the start of the count front effect to the end thereof, the count front effect is started. At this point, it becomes difficult to predict the count value at the end, and it is possible to maintain a preferable gaming interest until the count front effect is ended.

Regarding the count forward effect, in addition to the execution of the count display, it appears during the period prior to the execution of the count display, for example, during the execution of the timer look-ahead effect in which the appearance ratio of the timer effect increases when it appears. You may However, in view of the configuration according to the present application that makes it difficult to visually recognize the count progress by making the count forward effect appear during execution of the count display and aims for fun as an effect, it is more than before the count display is started. It is desirable that the count forward effect is executed at a higher rate after the count display is counted. Further, when the count forward effect is executed while the timer prefetch effect is being executed in the period within one symbol variation, the count display is not yet started when the count front effect is finished and the timer prefetch effect is performed. When the display is being executed, the proportion of the production with high expectation as the timer target production is higher than when the count display is being executed when the count front production is finished. It is desirable to set

Further, when the count forward effect is executed while the timer prefetching effect is being executed, the timer prefetching effect is displayed after the display portions of the timer prefetching effect and the count display are displayed at different positions. During the execution of, the count forward effect by the ornament is executed on the front side of the display position of the timer look-ahead effect, and while the count display is being performed, the count front effect by the ornament on the front side of the display position of the timer look-ahead effect. It is desirable to do. That is, in this case, the ornamental body moves to a different position depending on whether the timer prefetching effect is being performed or the count display is being performed. When the timer look-ahead effect is finished while the player is positioned, the count display is started at a position different from the timer look-ahead effect which has been difficult to visually recognize until now. According to such a configuration, when the count front effect is generated in the state where the timer prefetch effect is being executed, the count display is started at a stage where the count front effect is still in execution and is not finished. Even if it does, since it becomes possible to make the count value of the count display easier to see from the start, there is a possibility that the production value as the size of the count number at the start of the count will be damaged. You will be able to enjoy the count forward production while being excluded.

Also, regarding the count front effect, when the time is at a relatively late stage after some time has elapsed since the count display was started, rather than at a relatively early stage when the time has not elapsed much since the count display was started. It is desirable that the rate of execution of the count front effect is higher.

Also, if the count front effect is executed in a situation where the remaining count (remaining time) until the timer target effect is executed is relatively small, it is not possible to expect the size of the count value that appears when the count front effect is ended. In addition, because there is a concern that it may be confused with the timer target production, the count front production is ended before the situation where the remaining count number is less than the predetermined number and the remaining count number is less than the predetermined number. In, it is desirable that the count forward effect is not newly executed.

In addition, the count-front effect may be performed while a plurality of count displays are being performed, with the decorative body positioned on the front side across the count displays.

In the timer effect, a timer of a type that causes a predetermined effect image (for example, timer target exclusion effect, timer mode effect, etc.) or a predetermined effect movable body (timer target advance effect) to appear when a specific count value is reached. When the effect is executed, the current count value can be substantially exposed by the related effects even while the count forward effect by the ornament is being executed, and the count display can be visually confirmed. You will be able to predict how much counting progress has been made since it was made difficult. However, instead of performing the count forward effect with the ornament only on the front side of the count value, a predetermined effect image (for example, timer target exclusion effect, timer mode effect, etc.) is reached when the specific count value is reached. Or a predetermined effect movable body (timer target advance effect) is strung up to a position where the decorative object is positioned in front of the movable object, so that the count display is made difficult to be visually recognized. It may be possible to make it difficult to predict how much counting progress is being made.

The number of decorative objects that perform on the front side of the count display is not limited to one, and the count front effect may be performed such that all of the plurality of decorative bodies are positioned on the front side of the count display. In this case, in addition to a mode in which all of the plurality of ornaments are positioned on the front side of the count display, any of a plurality of modes such as a mode in which only one of the plurality of ornaments is positioned on the front side of the count display The count front effect may be selectively executed by.

Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 198 to 207, the details of various aspects of the above-described timer effect itself and various effects performed in association with the timer effect will be described in detail. Here, the processing example relating to each effect described above is merely an example, and for example, an effect other than the type described above may be executed as the content of the effect, the appearance timing of each effect, and the appearance condition. The above may be appropriately changed within the scope of the same technical idea. Therefore, in the example productions described below, it may include things that do not fit in with the content of the productions described above, but are within the scope of the same technical idea and within the range that can be implemented by those skilled in the art. There is no problem because the processing contents are simply changed appropriately. Further, the following "timer effect" basically means that the count display is executed in the advance notice timer effect or the variable timer effect, but in addition to the effect during the count display, It may have a meaning including a timer prefetch effect. Also, as the mode of "count display", "seconds" is counted in the following, but it is not limited to this.

FIG. 198(A) shows the production status in which the display variation of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) (for example, SP reach) is performed on the production display device 1600 in the normal gaming state with the number of holdings being 0. ing. Note that, in FIGS. 198 and 199, for the sake of convenience of description, the illustration-specific illustration specific decorative member SDY is shown. Note that the specific decorative member SDY is, for example, “a back lower back movable effect unit 3100, a back upper left movable effect unit 3200, a back left movable effect unit 3300, a back middle movable effect unit 3400, a back lower front movable effect unit 3500, and the like. "Movable member", etc.

In FIG. 198(B), the timer effect is displayed with a count number of “70” during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 198(A), and the count display (here, countdown) is displayed. The production situation to be started is shown.

Here, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 198(B), when the timer effect (the number of counts) is displayed, the target of the timer effect when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value. The candidates of the effect type that can appear as are displayed, and while it is unclear which of these candidates will appear as the effect of the timer target while the count display is being executed, one of those candidates is the target of the timer target. It is possible to recognize that it will appear as a production. In addition, "conversation" in the figure corresponds to conversation notice, "hold" in the figure corresponds to hold change, and "cut A" in the figure corresponds to cut-in A. The “role A” in the inside corresponds to the action of the role A, “secret” in the figure corresponds to a special timer, “cut B” in the figure corresponds to cut-in B, "Wind part B" in the figure corresponds to the part B operation.

FIG. 198(C) shows an effect situation in which the timer object exclusion effect is executed when the count number shown in FIG. 198(B) reaches “60”.

As described above, the timer target exclusion effect is an effect mode that has not been selected as a timer target while it is unclear which effect mode the timer target effect is. It is possible to perform a display suggesting at least one (may suggest two or more) of the rendering modes not determined as.

Here, although this is also described above, in the timer effect, each timing prepared as a candidate for the timing at which the count display normally reaches a predetermined value (here, 0) and the effect targeted for the timer appears (in this example, 10 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds, 40 seconds, 50 seconds, etc.) from the start of fluctuation, the types of effects that can appear as timer targets are also narrowed down. Therefore, in the example of the effect in FIG. 198(C), the timing for generating the timer target exclusion effect is set to a plurality of timings (10 seconds, 20 seconds from the start of fluctuation) prepared as candidates for the timing at which the timer object effect may appear. , 30 seconds, 40 seconds, etc.) will be set accordingly.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 198(B), an effect pattern in which the timer effect is displayed with a count number of "70" is described. However, at this timing, the timer effect does not have the count number of “70” but has another count number such as “10”, “20”, “30”, “40”, or “50”. A performance pattern to be displayed can be generated. If it is assumed that a timer effect having a count of "10" appears at the timing shown in FIG. 198(B), the count display of the timer effect is shown in FIG. 198(C). The predetermined value (here, “0”) is reached at such a timing, and, for example, “conversation notice” is caused to appear as the effect for the timer. On the other hand, when a timer effect having a count number other than “10” appears at the timing shown in FIG. 198(B), it is assumed that “conversation notice” will not appear as an effect for the timer. At the point in time when the count number remains at the timing shown in FIG. 198(C), when the count value passes, "conversation notice" is substantially excluded from the type of production that can appear as the timer target. It can be said that the candidates that can appear as a production have been narrowed down. In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 198(C), since the count display is being executed with the count number of “60” remaining, the timing is substantially set from the timer-targeted production candidates at this timing. It is desirable to perform an effect (timer target excluded effect) that suggests which effect type (conversation notice) is excluded from (1). As a result, it becomes possible to properly represent the production situation in which the player is placed.

However, in the first timer target exclusion effect shown in FIG. 198(C), at this timing, not the “conversation notice” but the “special timer” is not selected as the timer target effect. There is. According to such a timer target exclusion effect, it is made clear during the digestion of the count that "an effect indicating that a big hit is confirmed when it appears" is not selected as a timer target effect. It becomes possible to fuel anxiety about whether a highly anticipated production will appear as a timer target.

Note that in the timer target exclusion effect shown in FIGS. 198 and 199, the display image (secret) corresponding to the “special timer” is locked from the display images displaying the candidates for the target effect of the timer effect. By displaying the padlocks in the state in an overlapping manner and displaying "Lock!!", it is possible to indicate that the "special timer" is not selected as an effect for the timer.

FIG. 198(D) shows an effect situation in which the timer mode effect is executed when the count display reaches a specific count value after the appearance of the first timer target exclusion effect shown in FIG. 198(C). There is.

In addition, as described above, the timer mode effect is an expectation level as an effect targeted for the timer when the count display reaches a predetermined value within a period before the count display becomes a predetermined value (here, “0”). Hell timer mode (first timer mode display) in which the appearance ratio of high production mode (production type or production content (cut-in mode, etc.)) is relatively low, and when the count display reaches a predetermined value, the timer target The heaven timer mode (second timer mode display) in which the proportion of the appearance mode having a high expectation appears as the effect is displayed.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 198(D), first, the heaven challenge production of whether or not the heaven timer mode is displayed while the count exhaustion is in progress is performed, and the heaven challenge production appears. At that point, it will be shown that either the hell timer mode or the heaven timer mode will always occur.

In addition, in the heaven challenge production, the production of whether there is a high possibility of shifting to the hell timer mode or the possibility of shifting to the heaven timer mode (for example, the devil and the angel are pushing each other, which is in the prevailing situation) Or the like) may be performed, and in this case, it is suggested which of the hell timer mode and the heaven timer mode will occur after such an effect.

By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 198(D), since the heaven challenge effect is executed under the effect type excluded in the timer target exclusion effect, which effect type is selected in the timer object exclusion effect. Depending on whether it is excluded (whether the performance type with low expectations is excluded or the performance type with high expectations is excluded), is it in a situation where the hell timer mode is likely to occur, or heaven? It can be said that there is an effect situation in which it is possible to predict with a certain degree of accuracy whether the timer mode is likely to occur.

FIG. 198(E) shows the display of the heaven timer mode (second timer mode display) as a result of succeeding in the heaven challenge production shown in FIG. 198(D) (for example, a result of the angel winning the push against the devil). It shows the performance status that is being performed.

In this effect situation, when the count display reaches a predetermined value, it is shown that the mode has shifted to the heaven timer mode (second timer mode display) in which the appearance ratio of the effect mode having a high expectation appears as a timer effect. Be done. Therefore, when the timer target exclusion effect is performed in the heaven timer mode (second timer mode display), a result advantageous to the player (here, a low-expected effect of the plurality of effect types is a timer object effect). It is possible to increase the expectation when the timer target exclusion effect is generated.

On the other hand, although illustration is omitted, the timer target exclusion effect is executed while the hell timer mode (first timer mode display) appears as a result of failure in the heaven challenge effect shown in FIG. 198(D). If it is, the ratio of suggesting an unfavorable result for the player (here, the high-expectation effect is not selected as the effect for the timer out of the plurality of effect types) is high, so the timer object is excluded. You will be able to fuel the anxiety when production occurs.

Note that, in the example of FIG. 198(E), the transition to the heaven timer mode (or the hell timer mode) is not expressed as the mode of the count display, but the mode of the changing decorative pattern SZ or the related mode. By doing so, it is possible to recognize that the transition to the heaven timer mode (or the hell timer mode) is made without missing any other effects while the remaining count is being consumed. Further, in this case, it is possible to easily confirm the current timer mode even when the timer target exclusion effect occurs.

FIG. 198(F) is the second to fourth times under the display of the heaven timer mode generated in FIG. 198(E) after the appearance of the first timer object exclusion effect shown in FIG. 198(C). The timer target exclusion effect is executed and the fifth timer exclusion effect is executed when the count display reaches “20”.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 198(F), a state in which 5 kinds of effects among the 7 kinds of effects prepared as the effect candidates for the timer target are locked and displayed by the timer target exclusion effect (5 types of effects) Is in a state in which it is indicated that is not a timer target), when the count display reaches a predetermined value, one of the remaining two types of effects (holding change, character B operation) occurs. It can be said that doing is in a recognizable state. However, in the example shown in FIG. 198(F), since the heaven timer mode is displayed, the remaining two types of effect candidates (holding change, compared to the case where the heaven timer mode is not displayed) are displayed. The proportion of the effects on the side with a high degree of expectation in the action B) is high, and the expectation until the count display reaches the predetermined value can be favorably maintained.

At this time, the display of the heaven timer mode may be hidden after the appearance of the timer target exclusion effect shown in FIG. 198(F) and before the appearance of the timer target effect. According to such a configuration, if it is not remembered that the heaven timer mode was displayed, it becomes unclear which of the remaining production candidates has a high occurrence rate, and as a compensation for not being concentrated on production, It becomes possible to give a sense of tension until the display reaches a predetermined value.

In FIG. 199(G), after the appearance of the fifth timer object exclusion effect shown in FIG. 198(F), before the timing when the count display becomes a predetermined value and the timer object effect appears. During the period, the effect using the specific decorative member (here, the specific decorative member SDY as the accessory B) is made to appear, so that the effect using the specific decorative member SDY (the accessory B) is targeted for the timer. It shows the effect situation in which the timer target advance effect that indicates that the effect is being executed.

That is, in this case, since the timer target advance effect is executed while the display related to the timer target exclusion effect is displayed, any of the effect candidates narrowed down by the timer target exclusion effect may appear as the timer target effect. Will be able to provide more information on whether the price is high.

In this example, since the "characteristics B mid-operation (small)" is being executed as the timer target advance effect, it is specified from among the performance candidates (holding change, character B operation) narrowed down by the timer target exclusion effect. It is possible to recognize that there is a high possibility (100% is possible) that the "feature B action", which is an effect using the decorative member SDY (feature B), will be executed as an effect for the timer target. Like Note that, as described above, the "characteristics B mid-motion (small)" means that the "characteristics B operation", which is the effect of the timer, is the "specific decorative member SDY (characteristics B) from the first position to the second position. When it is "displaced", it means "the effect that the specific decorative member SDY (feature B) is displaced from the first position to a predetermined position between the first position and the second position".

However, in this description example, as the content of the effect related to the “character B action”, the first effect with a relatively low degree of expectation of displacing the specific decorative member SDY (character B) from the first position to the second position. In addition to the contents, in addition to displacing the specific decorative member SDY (characteristics B) from the first position to the second position, the characteristic material A is also displaced from the third position to the fourth position. The effect contents are prepared, and the effect related to the "feature B action" is executed by any of the effect contents.

In this respect, in the heaven timer mode according to this description example, compared to the case where the hell timer mode appears, when the "characteristic B action" is selected as the timer target effect, the effect content has a relatively high degree of expectation. The high second effect content appears at a high rate, and even if the effect type that appears as a timer target effect is completely narrowed down by the timer target advance effect, the heaven timer mode concerned. As a result, a useful function for the player is played.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 199(G), when the timer target advance effect using the specific decorative member (here, the specific decorative member SDY (characteristics B)) is executed, the specific decorative member is being counted. It is provided for the timer target advance production in such a manner that it overlaps with the count display, and thereby makes it difficult to visually recognize the count display. That is, in this case, when such a timer target advance effect is executed while not paying much attention to the count display, the specific decoration member SDY (characteristics B) used in the timer target effect is in a state of effect execution. Combined with the fact that there is a production situation where it is easy to misunderstand that the timer target production is being executed after the count display reaches the predetermined value and this is hidden, not the timer target advance production during the count exhaustion. Will be created. Therefore, when it is recognized that the effect shown in FIG. 199(G) is not the timer target effect but the timer target advance effect, the specific decorative member SDY (feature B) is used as the timer target advance effect. Can be strongly impressed, and thereafter, even if no display regarding the timer target advance effect is performed until the count display reaches a predetermined value, the specific decoration member SDY (feature product) is used as the timer target advance effect. It is expected that the timer target effect is generated under the recognition that B) is used. It should be noted that when the timer target advance effect is executed, the count display is not made difficult to be visually recognized, and may be hidden until the timer target advance effect is finished.

FIG. 199(H) shows a specific count value (here, “0”) before the predetermined count value (here, “0”) is displayed after the timer target advance effect shown in FIG. 199(G) is executed. 3”), a new prize is generated, and a timer for suppressing the effect according to the winning is generated in a situation in which it is decided to execute (hold change) the effect according to the winning. The production situation in which the target suppression control is executed is shown.

That is, as described above, particularly in the example shown in FIG. 199(H), it is extremely unlikely that the "hold change" is selected as the timer target effect by the timer mode effect or the timer target advance effect. However, since the "holding change" is still left as a production candidate for the timer, a holding change corresponding to a new winning may occur near the timing when the count display reaches a predetermined value. Then, the hold change may be mistakenly recognized as a timer target effect, and as a result, a situation may occur in which the timer target effect itself is overlooked. When "holding change" is executed as the timer target effect, "hold 0" in the figure is executed as a target, so it is relatively easy to distinguish whether or not the timer target effect. However, it is highly possible that these pending changes may be mistakenly recognized in a situation where the remaining counts are small and the situation seems to be stale.

Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, when the timer effect is executed, the first period (here, the number of counts is set to a relatively long time until the count display in the timer effect reaches a predetermined value). When the remaining time is "3"), the pending change according to the occurrence of a new winning is allowed, but the remaining time until the count display reaches a predetermined value after the first period ends. When the second period is relatively small (here, the period after the count reaches "3"), even if a new winning occurs, the pending change corresponding to this will not be allowed. Thus, the above-mentioned concern is resolved (timer target suppression control).

FIG. 199(I) shows that the timer effect count display reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”) in the effect situation where the timer target suppression control shown in FIG. After the display (here, "Yukuzo") is displayed, the effect situation in which the effect (effect B operation) to be the effect target of the timer effect is being executed is shown.

In the example shown in FIG. 199(I), while it is shown that the game is in the heaven timer mode, the performance of the accessory B, which is an effect targeted for the timer, is not a comparatively low expectation content, but a comparison. It shows that it is being executed as the second effect content with a high degree of expectation. However, here, it is clear from the fact that the accessory B corresponds to the specific decoration member SDY and the accessory A corresponds to the specific decoration member TGY. The specified decorative member TGY is a position that is on the back side in front view with respect to the specific decorative member SDY that is provided for both the first effect content and the second effect content, and most of it (at least The area is more than half the area).

According to such a configuration, which of the first effect content having a relatively low expectation and the second effect content having a relatively high expectation is being executed (whether the specific decorative member TGY is in the effect state or not). ), it is possible to make it difficult to make a determination, so that it is possible to encourage the timer target to concentrate on the effect. In addition, in order to obtain such an operation effect, the second effect content may be any effect that can be effected on the specific decorative member SDY (characteristics B) and on the back side of the specific decorative member SDY. Instead of a composite effect of the member SDY (feature B) and the specific decorative member TGY (feature A), the specific display effect in the effect display device 1600 is used instead of the specific decorative member TGY (effect A), and the specific display is performed. It may be executed as a composite effect of the effect and the specific decoration member SDY (characteristics B).

Note that, also in the example shown in FIG. 199(I), the timer target suppression control shown in FIG. 199(H) is continuously executed, and even if a new winning occurs, a pending change corresponding to this occurs. It does not occur, and the hold display for winning in FIG. 199(H) is also kept unchanged.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 199(I), of the "holding change" and the "characteristics B operation" left as the effects candidates for the timer, the "characteristics B operation" is executed as the timer-targeted effect. A display that allows the user to recognize that "the winning hand B" in the figure is blinking is displayed, and a display that can be recognized that the "holding change" is not the effect for the timer (" A display marked with an “X” is displayed for “Hold”.

FIG. 199(J) shows an effect situation when the timer object suppression control is not executed when a predetermined time has elapsed after the timer object effect was executed in FIG. 199(I).

In other words, even if the "hold change" is executed when a predetermined time has elapsed since the timer-targeted effect was executed, there is no concern that this is erroneously recognized as the timer-targeted effect. Therefore, in the example of FIG. 199(J), the pending display in which the execution has been carried over although the pending change has been decided according to the winning at the timing shown in FIG. This is held and changed at the timing shown in (J). As a result, even when a new winning that is a target of the hold change occurs near the timing at which the timer target effect is executed, the hold change is properly performed while clearly indicating that it is not the timer target effect. You will be able to run.

Note that, in the example shown in FIG. 199(J), at the timing shown in FIG. 199(J), a pending display different from the pending display (holding 0) that is changing is set as a target and is changed to blue. However, in view of the special time hold change table T9b (FIG. 175) referred to when the big hit hold (including hold 0) is included, such a blue hold display has appeared. Since it is clearly shown that the jackpot symbol appears more frequently in the fluctuation than in the case where the red reserved display appears, it is expected that the amusement of the game will be favorably maintained.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 199(J), which effect type is excluded by the timer target exclusion effect even though the timer target effect has been executed for a predetermined period of time? In addition, a display indicating which of the effects targeted for the timer was performed is continuously executed. In addition, the display indicating that it is in the heaven timer mode is continuously executed.
However, the display that suggests that the heaven timer mode is set is a mode in which the decorative pattern SZ is also reduced in size in accordance with the reach display in a reduced mode.

In this explanation example, the respective displays that are continuously executed in the situation shown in FIG. 199(J) are also continuously executed even in the situation where the decorative symbol SZ is stopped (FIG. 199(( K)). According to such a configuration, for example, even in the state where the symbol is stopped (the state where the big hit symbol appears), the timer effect has been executed in the effect process until then, or the effect targeted by the timer effect. It was possible to recognize that was the "role B action".

Next, various modes of the timer effect itself shown in FIGS. 198 and 199 and effect examples different from various effects performed in connection with the timer effect will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 200 and 201. ..

FIG. 200(A) shows the production status in which the display variation of the decorative design SZ (special design) (for example, SP reach) is performed on the production display device 1600 in the normal game state with the number of holdings being 4. ing.

FIG. 200(B) is an effect in which the timer target exclusion effect is executed even though the timer effect is not being executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 200(A). It shows the situation.

In this timer target exclusion effect, it is indicated that the "feature B operation" is not a candidate for the timer object, so that when the timer effect occurs within the fluctuation, the candidate for the timer object talks. It becomes possible for the player to know that the notice has been narrowed down to any of the advance notice, the pending change, the cut-in A, the accessory A operation, the special timer, and the cut-in B. That is, in this case, among the plurality of effect modes (conversation notice, pending change, cut-in A, character A operation, special timer, cut-in B, character B operation), the effect mode having a relatively high expectation is the timer target. Since it becomes possible to recognize that the player is out of the candidates, the player comes to hope that the timer effect does not occur within the fluctuation, and the timer effect (count display) is in a non-executed state. You will be able to stimulate the interest of playing games when you are there.

Note that, in the examples shown in FIGS. 200 and 201, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 198 and 199, when performing the timer target exclusion effect, a display suggesting various effects prepared as effect candidates for the timer object. Is not executed, and at least a display indicating that at least the “feature B action” is not selected as a timer target effect appears. Therefore, in the timer target exclusion effect according to this example, it is possible to understand that the "feature B action" is not the timer target effect, but it is unclear what other effect types there are as timer target effect candidates. The Rukoto.

In FIG. 200(C), after the timer target exclusion effect is executed in FIG. 200(B), the timer effect is displayed with a count number of “15”, and the count display (here, countdown) is started. It shows the production situation.

Here, in the timer target exclusion effect in this description example, after displaying that at least the "characteristic B action" is not selected as the timer target effect (FIG. 200(B)), the display is changed to the timer effect ( This is continuously displayed without being hidden until the count display) is executed, and the timer effect (count display) is started while the display is appearing. With such a configuration, how much expectation is this from the time when the count display is started (here, the timer effect in which the relatively high-expectation "role B action" is not executed). You will be able to recognize.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 200(B) and (C), at least when the display that indicates that at least the "characteristic B action" is not selected as the effect for the timer appears, and this is continuously displayed. Although the display modes are different from time to time, they may not necessarily be different and may be the same.

FIG. 200(D) shows that after the count display of the timer effect shown in FIG. 200(C) reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”), the timer effect is displayed while the count display is hidden. The production situation in which "conversation notice (first presentation mode)" prepared as a production candidate is being executed is shown.

That is, in this case, from the player's side, it is recognized that an effect such as "may be a chance" as "conversation notice (first effect mode)" is being executed as an effect target of the timer effect. Become. However, the "conversation notice" shown in FIG. 200(D) is not executed as the effect mode of the timer effect, and as is clear from the next effect situation (FIG. 200(E)), the conversation notice is changed. When finished, the count display of the timer effect shown in FIG. 200(C) is re-displayed and further continued (revival timer effect).

That is, in this case, after the "conversation notice (first effect mode)" is displayed as if it was a timer target (count target), the count display is re-displayed to further continue the timer effect, and the first effect. Since the second effect mode different from the mode is indicated to be the timer target, the count display reaches a predetermined value at the timing when the effect having a relatively low expectation appears, and this is hidden. Even in such a case, it becomes possible to become aware of the possibility that the timer target will be changed after that, and it is expected that the entertainment of the game will be maintained appropriately.

In FIG. 200(E), after the “conversation notice” executed under the condition that the count display is hidden in FIG. 200(D), the hidden count display is redisplayed. Shows the production status to continue this (revival timer production).

Here, in such a revival timer effect, the count exhaustion is secretly continued even while the count display is hidden (FIG. 200(D)). In the example of FIG. 200(E), , The count display is redisplayed from the state in which the count has been exhausted for the hidden time (here, 2 seconds). That is, in this case, after the “conversation notice” is finished, the count display is changed to a negative notation (here, “−2”) and is displayed again, but “0” when it is hidden by this. Now, it is possible to express that the count digestion has not ended and this is being executed continuously, and by extension, the "conversation notice" that appeared in FIG. 200(D) was not the production for the timer. You will be able to recognize.

In addition, in such a revival timer effect, "count display that appeared before being hidden" and "count display redisplayed after once hidden" are different counts. In order to make it possible to more reliably recognize that the same count is being digested rather than being digested, the count sound is displayed once while the count display is hidden. It is desirable to continuously execute the “count display that appeared before the non-display” and the “count display that was once hidden and then re-displayed”.

Also, when the count display is executed with a negative notation (here, "-2"), a display that allows recognition of how many counts remain (for example, "-2 (remaining 18)") is displayed. It is desirable to do so. In this case, when the count display reaches “−20 (remaining 0)” as the predetermined value (when a negative count is made for 18 seconds from “−2”), the count display is hidden and the timer target effect is executed. Become so.

FIG. 200(F) shows an effect situation in which a heaven challenge effect (not shown) occurs while the count display shown in FIG. 200(E) continues, and as a result, the heaven timer mode is entered. ..

With the appearance of such timer mode effects (heaven challenge effect, heaven timer mode), it is more clear that the timer effect has not ended and is still continuing (the status of the count display being executed). Will be able to recognize. In the examples shown in FIGS. 200 and 201, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 198 and 199, the display indicating that it is in the heaven timer mode is not associated with the decorative symbol SZ, but in the display area. It is displayed on the left side as a stamp notation mode.

In FIG. 201(G), after the display indicating that the state is in the heaven timer mode is displayed in FIG. 200(F), while the count exhaustion is being executed, another effect unrelated to the timer effect ( As the (predetermined effect), an effect situation in which a "cannon chance effect" has occurred is shown.

That is, in the "cannon chance effect", an effect mode in which the output related to the timer effect count display is continued until a predetermined value (here, -20) and the output related to the count display are maintained at a predetermined value (here, -20). ) Is not performed, and any one of the production modes in which the output is stopped in the middle of the execution of the "cannon chance production" is selectively made (count output suspension control).

More specifically, in the "cannon chance effect", after displaying the cannon image near the center in the display area, from the cannon image, the upper left area, the upper right area, the left area, and the right area in the display area are displayed. The area and the area below which is vacant (unused) are selectively used as the projectiles of the bullet to fire the bullets (the bullet firing effect (predetermined effect) shown in FIG. 201(H)) Is to be done. However, in the situation shown in FIG. 201(G), the area necessary for newly outputting such a bullet firing effect (FIG. 201(H)) is other various effects (count display (upper left area), Reach variation (upper right area), timer mode effect (left area), timer target exclusion effect (right area), hold display (lower area)) are all used, and the bullet firing effect (Fig. 201 (Fig. H) is no longer available for a new output (specific performance situation), and if the bullet is fired in such a specific performance situation, the bullet will be fired at the target. Therefore, the production that is already in the output state (for example, the count display) may be broken or destroyed by the fired bullet (a conflict regarding the production output between the timer production and the predetermined production may occur. However, there is a concern that the expectation for jackpots will decline as a result.

Therefore, in this explanation example, when the bullet firing effect (predetermined effect) is executed, when there is a specific effect situation (the situation shown in FIG. 201(G)) where there is no space for the output, Of the areas (upper left area, upper right area, left area, right area, lower area) that can be used as the projectiles of bullets, the output for counting display using the upper left area is set to a predetermined value ( Here, the output is stopped until it reaches -20) (interruption control of count output).

FIG. 201(H) shows an effect situation in which the bullet firing effect is executed while the output related to the count display does not occur until the output reaches a predetermined value (-20 in this case) and the output is stopped midway.

In this way, when the output related to the count display of the timer effect is stopped and the bullet firing effect (predetermined effect) is executed, the output related to the bullet firing effect is different from the case of the above-mentioned resurrection timer effect. The count display of the timer effect is not output again after the end.
On the other hand, even after the output related to the count display is stopped, internally, the time from the start of the count display (or the time from the start of the fluctuation) is secretly measured, and this is a predetermined value (Fig. When the value (−20) when 35 seconds have elapsed since the count display was started at 200 (C) is reached, it is considered that the timing when the output stopped count display reaches the predetermined value has arrived and the timer target I am trying to make the production appear.

In FIG. 201(I), after the timing at which the count display whose output has been stopped is supposed to have reached the predetermined value if the output has not been stopped has arrived, cut-in A (cut-in effect by the teammate character) is performed as the timer target effect. Shows a performance situation in which is executed. Note that, in relation to the above-mentioned revival timer effect, the cut-in A is executed as the "second effect mode".

According to such production progress, after the bullet firing production (predetermined production) is executed, the predetermined value is reached if the output of the count display is not stopped while the output of the count display is stopped. When the expected timing comes, the timer target effect will appear. In other words, in this case, the timer effect, which seemed to be terminated halfway through the execution of the bullet firing effect (predetermined effect), was secretly continued. You will be expected to

Note that, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 201(G), for example, when the display regarding the timer mode effect is not performed and there is a space in the left area, the count display of the timer effect (the upper left area) The output is maintained as it is, and the bullet firing effect (predetermined effect) is output using the empty space (left area). That is, in this case, the timer effect count display and the bullet firing effect (predetermined effect) are executed simultaneously, and the timer effect count display is performed even after the bullet firing effect (predetermined effect) ends. , And will be continuously executed until a predetermined value (here, −20) is reached.

As described above, the bullet firing effect (predetermined effect) is output using any one of a plurality of areas. However, even when the bullet is fired toward any of those areas, the bullet is not output. The big hit expectation degree indicated by the launch effect (predetermined effect) remains unchanged.

Also in this description example, the display indicating which type of effect is excluded in the timer target exclusion effect executed in FIG. 200(B) and the heaven timer mode displayed in FIG. 200(F) are also included. Regarding the display, the decorative pattern SZ is stopped while they are continuously executed (FIG. 201(J)).

Next, various modes of the timer effect itself shown in FIGS. 198 to 201, and effect examples different from various effects performed in connection with the timer effect will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 202 and 203. ..

FIG. 202(A) shows an effect situation in which the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed on the effect display device 1600 in the state of the number of holdings being 0 in the normal game state.

In FIG. 202(B), the timer effect is displayed with a count number of “3” during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 202(A), and the count display (here, countdown) is displayed. The production situation to be started is shown.

In FIG. 202(C), after the count display of the timer effect shown in FIG. 202(B) reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”) and the timer-related display (here, “Yukuzo”) is displayed, The production situation (cut-in B) which is the production target of the timer production is shown.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 202(C), “cut-in B” as the timer target effect is executed in a mode (blue aura) with a relatively low degree of expectation. At this time, since the count display is also in the non-display state, the timer effect is ended by the appearance of the "cut-in B" which is a mode (blue aura) of relatively low expectation for the player. To recognize that However, in this effect example, after the "cut-in B" as the timer target effect (first timer target effect) is executed in a mode (blue aura) with a relatively low degree of expectation, the count display is displayed again. An effect regarding whether or not (second timer target effect) is further made to appear.

In FIG. 202(D), whether or not the count display is to be re-displayed while the “cut-in B” is displayed as the timer target effect (first timer target effect) shown in FIG. 202(C). Shows the effect situation in which the effect (second timer target effect) is being executed.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 202(D), as an effect (second timer target effect) as to whether or not the count display is to be displayed again, an operation type effect in which the operation by the player is allowed for a predetermined time When the player performs an operation within the predetermined time, a first effect result (not shown) indicating that the count display is redisplayed, or a second effect indicating that the count display is not redisplayed A production result (not shown) is made to appear. Further, as an operation system effect in which the operation by the player is allowed for a predetermined time, in addition to displaying the operation instruction image SSG that prompts the user to operate the operation button 410, the first operation when the operation button 410 is operated The expected operation image SKG that indicates the easiness (ratio) of appearance of the effect result is displayed. The ratio may include 100%.

Note that, in the example shown in FIG. 202(D), among the plurality of effect modes prepared as the operation expected image SKG, the effect mode in which the first effect result is most likely to appear (a good friend's ally) Character) has appeared. Therefore, although the "cut-in B" as the timer target effect (first timer target effect) is already executed in a mode (blue aura) with a relatively low degree of expectation, the count display is re-displayed. It can be said that there is a situation in which the player can be strongly aware of the continuation of the timer effect. Moreover, in the timer plus effect according to the present embodiment, a count value larger than the count value displayed in the first count display (here, the count value "3" shown in FIG. 202(B)) is given. Since the count display is re-displayed in a form, it is expected that a production mode with a higher degree of expectation will further appear as a timer-targeted production.

In the example shown in FIG. 202(D), the "cut-in B (blue aura)" is displayed as the timer target effect (first timer target effect) shown in FIG. 202(C). Although it is decided to execute the effect (second timer target effect) as to whether or not to redisplay the count display (without hiding the display), the timer target effect (second value) shown in FIG. After the "cut-in B (blue aura)" as the timer target effect 1) is not displayed, the effect (second timer target effect) as to whether or not to redisplay the count display is executed. Good. However, in this case, the effect is switched from the timer target effect (first timer target effect) shown in FIG. 202(C) to the effect (second timer target effect) as to whether or not to redisplay the count display. It is desirable to let the player recognize that the timer effect is not finished and is continued (or may be continued).

In FIG. 202(E), after the first effect result (not shown) indicating that the count display is to be displayed again in the operation system effect shown in FIG. 202(D) appears, the timer effect counts “5”. Is displayed again and the second count display (here, countdown) is displayed. In addition, in the operation system effect, the same effect result as when the operation by the player is not accepted within a predetermined time, and also when the operation by the player is not accepted within the predetermined time (first The effect result, the second effect result) appears after the end of the predetermined time.

In FIG. 202(F), after the second count display shown in FIG. 202(E) reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”) and the timer-related display (here, “Yukuzo”) is displayed, The production situation (cut-in B) which is the production target of the timer production is shown.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 202(F), “cut-in B” as the timer target effect is executed in a mode (red aura) with a relatively high degree of expectation. That is, in this production example, the target productions of the first time and the redisplayed second count display are performed as the same type of production, and the second target production is the first target production. It is executed in the form of changing (promoting) to a production mode with higher expectations. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that the same type of effect is executed as the timer target effect and that the first count display and the second count display are connected as one timer effect. As the number of times that the count display is re-displayed increases, the effect mode as the timer target effect is changed (promoted) to a mode with higher expectation, and the timer target effect is generated. It becomes possible to improve the enjoyment of the game from the time when the count display is re-displayed instead of the time.

In FIG. 203(G), while “Cut in B (red aura)” as the timer target effect shown in FIG. 202(F) is being displayed, the effect as to whether or not the count display is to be displayed again is displayed. It shows the performance status being executed.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 203(G), among the plurality of effect modes prepared as the operation expected image SKG, the first effect result is more likely to appear than in the example shown in FIG. 202(D). A production mode (a friendly ally character of the middle age) has appeared. Therefore, in a situation where "cut-in B" as the timer target effect has been executed in a mode (red aura) with a relatively high degree of expectation, the count display may not be displayed again. It can be said that there is a situation to raise awareness. In this way, after the count display reaches the predetermined value, as the timer target effect, on the other hand, the effect (cut-in B) having a mode (red aura) relatively advantageous to the player is executed, On the other hand, an effect (operation expectation image SKG) having a mode relatively unfavorable for the player (a friendly ally character) is executed. Moreover, in such a timer plus effect, as the number of times the “cut-in B” is changed to an advantageous mode for the player is increased on one side, the count re-display is repeated, and on the other side, relative to the player. The expected operation image SKG having a disadvantageous aspect is more likely to appear, and the rate of re-display is reduced. Therefore, whenever the count is re-displayed, the enjoyment of the game is enhanced and the sense of tension is increased. It becomes possible to suitably impart both of maintaining the above.

Then, as a result of such an effect, when the count display is not displayed again, the timer effect ends at that point, and then the decorative symbol SZ is stopped (FIG. 203(H)).

Next, various modes of the timer effect itself shown in FIGS. 198 to 203, and effect examples different from various effects performed in connection with the timer effect will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 204 and 205. ..

FIG. 204(A) shows the effect situation in which the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed on the effect display device 1600 with the number of holdings being 0 in the normal game state.

In FIG. 204(B), the timer effect is displayed with a count number of “10” during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 204(A), and the count display (here, countdown) is displayed. The production situation to be started is shown.

Here, in the timer effect, in general, the longer the time required for the count to be consumed is, the higher the appearance rate of the effect having a high expectation as the timer target effect is. When the count display having only “10”) is displayed, there is concern that the interest in the game may be reduced. Therefore, in this effect example, while executing the count display, an effect is generated in which the count value is hidden for a predetermined time, and the progress speed of the count is stagnated for that time, so that the count is consumed. It is possible to execute a stagnant timer effect that prolongs the time required and maintains a sense of expectation.

204(C) and (D), when the count display of the timer effect shown in FIG. 204(B) reaches the first specific value (here, "5"), and when it is hidden. The production situation is shown.

That is, in this example of performance, when the count display becomes the first specific value (here, "5"), when the count display becomes the predetermined value (here, "0"), any production type ( Along with starting a production (progress production leading to a timer target production) that suggests whether conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, accessory A operation, special timer, cut-in B, accessory B operation) will appear, While the effect is being executed, the count display is hidden. The progress effect that is connected to the timer target effect may be started after the count display reaches the first specific value and is hidden.

In this effect example, a display image SEG11 that depicts a person who asks for assistance to a teammate character and a display image SEG12 that accepts a request from a person who asks for assistance are sequentially displayed as a progress effect that leads to a timer target effect. It has become so. Here, at the time when the display image SEG11 or the display image SEG12 is displayed, it is possible to narrow down to a certain extent what type of effect appears as the timer target effect, but specify which type of effect appears. It is desirable not to be able to. For example, the display image SEG12 shows that three ally characters accept a request from a person who asks for help, but it is predicted that one of the three ally characters will face the enemy character. Although it is possible, it is desirable to make it clear which one of the three friendly characters is facing the enemy character (for example, which one of the cut-ins A and B is the one).

In FIG. 204(E), the count display is re-displayed with the count value of “4” after the “progress production (first time) leading to the timer target production” shown in FIGS. 204(C) and (D) is finished. Shows the production situation.

According to such a configuration, while the count value is "10" to "5", the count value is also incremented by "1" every time one second elapses, while the count value is changed from "5" to "5". When progressing to "4", until the "progress production (first time) leading to the timer target production" that appears when the count value reaches "5" (here, 6 seconds), The count value will not be advanced and can be stagnated. In addition, in order to stagnate the progress of the count value, the count display may not necessarily be hidden, and the display may be maintained with the same count value (here, “5”).

In FIGS. 204(F) and 205(G), when the count display redisplayed in FIG. 204(E) progresses to reach the second specific value (here, “2”) and when it is hidden. Shows the performance situation when the display is turned on.

That is, in this effect example, the count display is hidden multiple times until the count display reaches the predetermined value, and thus, each time the count display is hidden, the timer target effect is displayed. Progressive production that is connected to is executed. The progress effect that is connected to the timer target effect may be started after the count display reaches the second specific value and is hidden.

In this production example, as a progress production that is connected to the timer target production, a display image SEG13 showing the intention of a friendly ally character of the three ally characters depicted in FIG. 204D to confront the enemy character, and a graceful year. The display image SEG14 depicting the appearance of the teammate character facing each other with the enemy character is sequentially displayed. Here, at the time when the display image SEG13 or the display image SEG14 is displayed, it can be understood that a specific type of effect (cut-in B) appears as the timer target effect, but any effect content (blue aura) It is not possible to specify whether or not) appears or whether a red aura is worn.

FIG. 205(H) shows a count value of “1” on the count display after the “progress effect (second time) leading to the timer target effect” shown in FIGS. 204(F) and 205(G) is finished. The rendition status is displayed again.

According to such a configuration, when the count value progresses from “2” to “1”, the “progressive performance that leads to the timer target production (second time production that appears when the count value becomes “2”) )” is completed (here, 14 seconds), the count value is not advanced and can be stagnated.

In FIG. 205(I), the count display redisplayed in FIG. 205(H) has progressed to reach a predetermined value (here, “0”), and a timer-related display (here, “Yukuzo”) has been displayed. After that, an effect situation in which an effect (cut-in B) that is an effect target of the timer effect is being executed is shown.

According to such a configuration, since the effect that is connected to the timer target effect is executed before the count display reaches the predetermined value, it is preferable that the game is interesting until the count display reaches the predetermined value. Will be able to maintain. Further, while the effect connected to the timer target effect is executed, the count display is hidden and the progress of the count value becomes stagnant, so that the time required for the count consumption can be lengthened accordingly. As a result, it becomes possible to maintain the entertainment of the game.

Then, after such a timer target effect is performed, the decorative symbol SZ is stopped (FIG. 205(J)).

Next, various modes of the timer effect itself shown in FIGS. 198 to 205 and effect examples different from various effects performed in connection with the timer effect will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 206 and 207. .. Note that, in FIGS. 206 and 207, for convenience of description, the movable body KT for effect, which is omitted in other drawings, is shown in the drawings. In addition, the movable body KT is, for example, “a back lower back movable effect unit 3100, a back upper left movable effect unit 3200, a back left movable effect unit 3300, a back middle movable effect unit 3400, a back lower front movable effect unit 3500, and the like. "Movable member"

FIG. 206(A) shows the effect situation in which the effect display device 1600 displays the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) in the state where the number of holdings is 0 in the normal game state.

In FIG. 206(B), the timer effect is displayed with a count number of “40” during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 206(A), and the count display (here, countdown) is displayed. The production situation to be started is shown.

Here, in the timer effect, in general, the longer the time required for count exhaustion is, the higher the appearance rate of the effect with high expectation as the timer target effect is. Therefore, such a large count number (here, When the count display with "40") is displayed, there is a concern that it may not be possible to appropriately maintain the feeling of tension while the count number is consumed. Therefore, in this effect example, while performing the count display, the count front effect is generated by the decorative body in a way that makes it difficult to visually recognize the count display, and the count front effect is ended and the count display is ended. The larger the count value when it is made easier to visually recognize again, the easier it is for a production having a high degree of expectation to appear as a timer target production.

In FIG. 206(C), while the count display is being executed by the timer effect shown in FIG. 206(B), the movable body KT as the decorative body is displaced to the front side of the count display for a predetermined time. The production situation (counting front production by the decorative body) that continues to be shown is shown. Also, FIG. 206(D) shows an effect situation in which the count front effect by the movable body KT (decorative body) shown in FIG. 206(C) is finished and the count display is returned to a state where it is easy to visually recognize.

With such a configuration, even if a large count value is once displayed, it is eroded by the movable body KT (decorative body), and the count display with a smaller count value is performed again. Since it becomes possible to provide the drama, there is a concern that it may not be possible to appropriately maintain the feeling of tension while the count number is consumed.

Further, in such a count-front effect with the movable body KT (decorative body), the longer the time required for the effect is, the smaller the count value that is easily visually recognized when the effect is finished becomes. It is feared that the attraction of games will be reduced by making it difficult for high quality productions to appear. Therefore, in the count front effect by the movable body KT (decoration body), even on the movable body KT (decoration body) side, a plurality of production modes having different expectations in a lottery different from the lottery for determining the production mode of the timer effect ( For example, it is desirable to make either the operation mode of the movable body KT, the light emission mode, or the like) appear. According to such a configuration, even if it is difficult to produce an effect with high expectation as the timer target effect, it is shown that the jackpot expectation is high due to the effect mode on the movable body KT (decorative body) side which is another lottery. If this is done, it becomes possible to maintain the interest of the game.

In this respect, in this effect example, since the count value is returned to an easily visible state while maintaining a relatively large count value such as “35”, the expectation for the timer effect is maintained thereafter. It is possible to expect that the count display will be continued in the state of being.

FIG. 206(E) displays the operation instruction image SSG when the count display reaches the first count value (here, “30”) in the timer effect shown in FIG. 206(D), and operates for the player. FIG. 206(F) shows a production situation in which an opportunity is given, and FIG. 206(F) shows a production situation in which an operation by the player is received at the operation opportunity shown in FIG. 206(E) and the production result appears. ing.

That is, in this effect example, there is an effect that the player operates in the first period during which the count display changes from the first count value (here, "30") to the second count value (here, "20"). Acceptance of acceptance, and as a result of the acceptance of the effect, a plurality of operating effect modes with different ratios of effects with high expectations appearing as timer target effects (from the highest appearance ratio, for example, Daikichi, Kichi, Kyou, etc.) ) Either of them is made to appear.

In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 206(F), the operation is performed by the player when the count value becomes “23”, and the effect result at the time of operation is the most advantageous to the player as a result of the operation ( Since Daikichi) has appeared, it is expected that the entertainment of the game will be maintained until the count display reaches a predetermined value. In the first period from when the count display changes from the first count value (here “30”) to the second count value (here “20”), when the player's operation is not accepted, The count display will be advanced without any production result appearing.

FIG. 207(G) displays the operation instruction image SSG to the player when the count display reaches the third count value (here, “15”) after the effect result shown in FIG. 206(F) appears. 207(H) shows the effect situation in which the operation opportunity is given again, and in FIG. 207(H), the operation by the player is accepted in the operation opportunity shown in FIG. 207(G) and the effect result appears. It shows the production situation.

That is, in this production example, the production is performed by the player even during the second period from when the count display changes from the third count value (here "15") to the fourth count value (here "5"). Acceptance of acceptance, and as a result of the acceptance of the effect, a plurality of operating effect modes with different ratios of effects with high expectations appearing as timer target effects (from the highest appearance ratio, for example, Daikichi, Kichi, Kyou, etc.) ) Either of them is made to appear.

In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 207(G), the player performs an operation when the count value reaches “8”, and as a result of the effect, a special operation effect that is most advantageous to the player. Since the mode (Daikichi) appears, it is expected that the entertainment of the game is maintained until the count display reaches a predetermined value. In the second period from when the count display changes from the third count value (here, “15”) to the fourth count value (here, “5”), when the player's operation is not accepted, The count display will be advanced without any production result appearing.

However, in this effect example, when the count display is in the first period from the first count value (here, "30") to the second count value (here, "20"), the operation means ( For example, when the operation button 410) is operated and the effect is received, and when the count display is the third count value (here "15") to the fourth count value (here "5"). When the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is operated during the second period up to and the performance is received, the special operation time performance mode (Daikichi) as a result of the performance reception. The rate of occurrence is different.

More specifically, when the production is received during the first period, the occurrence rate of the special operation production mode (Daikichi) is relatively high, and the production is received during the second period. And the occurrence rate of the special operation presentation mode (Daikichi) is relatively low. Therefore, when the operation button 410 is operated in the first period, it is possible to suppress the production risk that the special operation effect mode (Daiyoshi) does not appear, but the special operation effect mode (Daiyoshi) is Even if this appears as much as it is more likely to occur, it is difficult to have a sense of expectation that an effect with high expectations will appear as a timer target effect. On the other hand, when the operation button 410 is operated in the second period, there is a high production risk that the special operation presentation mode (Daiyoshi) does not appear, but a special operation production mode (Daiyoshi) occurs. When this appears because it is difficult to play, it is easy to have a sense of expectation that a production with a high degree of expectation will appear as a timer target production.

According to such a configuration, depending on the player's preference and the effect status such as the degree of expectation shown in other effects, the count display is changed from the first count value (here, “30”) to the first count value. Whether the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) should be firmly operated in the first period with a low production risk until the time of the 2 count value (here, “20”), or the count display shows the third count value (here, “15”). )) to the fourth count value (here, “5”), the operating means (for example, the operating button 410) should be operated strongly in the second period with a high production risk, or both of them. It becomes possible to make the game strategy interesting such as whether to operate the operation button 410.

In FIG. 207(I), after the effect result shown in FIG. 207(H) appears, the count display is further advanced to reach a predetermined value (here, “0”), and the timer-related display (here, “Yukuzo”). ) Is displayed, the effect status (cut-in B) that is the effect target of the timer effect is being executed. Then, after such a timer target effect is performed, the decorative symbol SZ is stopped (FIG. 207(J)).

In each count effect described above, the count target effect is not immediately executed when the count value reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”), and the count target effect is executed after a while. I am trying to do it. In this regard, a display mode that suggests which effect is to be executed as the count target effect within the period from when the count value reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”) to when the count target effect is executed. May appear. According to such a configuration, even when a situation in which a plurality of effects are performed in parallel appears when the count value reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”), which one of the effects is the count effect target. You will be able to enjoy it without misidentifying what is running as.

In this regard, in the period from when the count value reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”) to when the count target effect is executed, instead of the above-described display mode, “there is no one-to-one correspondence with the count target effect It is desirable that "a specific display mode commonly used in different count target effects" appears. In this case, when a specific display mode appears, it is not suggested which of the commonly used count target effects will appear, but when the display mode that should originally appear as the count target effect is performed It is more desirable to increase the proportion of big hit symbols appearing. According to such a configuration, although there is a risk of erroneously recognizing which effect is being executed as the count effect target, it is guaranteed that the proportion of the big hit symbols will increase, and which effect is Since it becomes possible to have an interest in finding out whether the game is being executed as a count effect target, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be improved.

However, when the number of types of effects that can be executed as the count target effect is N, within the period from when the count value reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”) until the count target effect is executed. Even when a specific display mode appears in, the number of objects to be produced is counted to the extent that "any one of M (number of 2 or more) less than N productions is executed as a target of production". It is desirable to be able to narrow down which effect is executed, in order to have an interest in finding out which effect is being executed as the count effect target.

[12. Sound control by automatic channel method]
By the way, in the already-described sound data creation processing (step S1032 in FIG. 95), a description of automatic channel sound control, which is a part thereof, will be described later. Therefore, the automatic channel sound control according to this embodiment will be described next. First, the background will be briefly described.

In a general pachinko machine, various sounds are output from a speaker in each scene in accordance with the progress of a game, so as to realize an effect that attracts a player's interest. For example, even for reach that should improve the expectations of the player, some reach outputs various sounds depending on the type, and some do not. In such a general pachinko machine, each channel is pre-assigned to each sound to be output in each scene, including each such reach, and each such sound is associated with a corresponding predetermined default. It is reproduced using a channel (see Japanese Patent No. 5627044). However, in a general pachinko machine, even if there is an empty channel, the sound to be played may not be assigned to the empty channel due to channel allocation, and the sound to be played is played. However, there was a problem that it was difficult to achieve various sound effects.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control board 1510 causes the pair of upper speakers 573 (sound) to be used for the purpose of effectively utilizing the vacant channels to realize a variety of sound effects and enhancing the interest of the player. Output means) and each sound to be output from the pair of lower speakers 921 (sound output means) is dynamically assigned to each channel for management, while the number of combinations of sounds to be output corresponds to each channel. When the maximum number of channels (16 channels are exemplified in this embodiment) is exceeded, each channel is dynamically assigned to the combination of sounds to be output within the range of the maximum number of channels according to a predetermined priority order. (Channel control means). Further, the peripheral control MPU 1511a simultaneously reproduces the combination of sounds to be output via each channel dynamically assigned within the maximum number of channels according to the predetermined priority order (sound output control means). .. The details will be described below.

[12-1. Sound control by fixed channel method]
208(A) and 208(B) each show an example of sound control by the fixed channel method as a comparison target with respect to this embodiment. FIG. 208A shows an example of a sound reproduction channel. In the sound control by the fixed channel system, for example, all 16 channels of the reproduction channel 00 to the reproduction channel 15 are used, as in the sound control by the automatic channel system according to the present embodiment described later. The "reproduction channel" shown in the figure is a reproduction channel omitted.

On the other hand, FIG. 208(B) shows an example of allocation of reproduction channels to each sound. In the sound control by the fixed channel system, as shown in the figure, each sound is pre-assigned to each reproduction channel to be used. Here, regarding the basic sound reproduction rule, one sound requires two channels when outputting in stereo, and one channel when outputting in monaural.

The "notification sound 1" to "button pressing sound" shown in the figure shall not be muted in the middle of the reproduction start sound until the reproduction end. As a channel allocation method, a reproduction channel and a sound are exclusively allocated as a pair so that the sound is not overwritten. On the other hand, in the illustrated "normal BGM" to "holding winning sound", there is no problem even if the sound started to be reproduced is overwritten with another sound during the reproduction and the sound is muted. As a channel allocation method, the same channel is allocated so that the reproduction timing is not incurred as much as possible.

In sound control by the fixed channel method, when a new sound is output to the same channel being output, the sound being output is muted and a new sound is output. With regard to sounds that are disturbed when overwritten, independent channels are assigned, or sounds whose playback timings do not overlap are assigned to the same channel.

FIG. 209 shows an example of a sound definition table for realizing sound control by the fixed channel method. In this sound definition table, the definition of playback channel number, left/right pan initial value, top/bottom pan initial value, volume initial value, sound number, playback type setting, and output type setting is managed for each sound category and sound name. There is. Since the reproduction channel number has been described above, its explanation is omitted.

The left and right pan initial values represent the sound image localization initial positions of the left and right speakers which are a combination of the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L, and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R. By dynamically changing the set values of the left and right pans during sound reproduction, a difference occurs in the volume output individually from the left and right speakers, and a sound image can be localized in an arbitrary space between the left and right speakers. For example, when "0x00" is set, it indicates that only the left speaker (upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L) outputs. When, for example, "0x80" is set, the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker are set. The volume difference output individually from the left and right speakers, which is a combination of the 921L, the upper right speaker 573R, and the lower right speaker 921R, becomes 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the left and right speakers. For example, when set to "0xFF", it indicates that only the right speaker (upper right speaker 573R and lower right speaker 921R) outputs.

The upper and lower pan initial values are, for example, sound image localization of sounds by upper and lower speakers such as a pair of upper speakers 573 (upper left speaker 573L and upper right speaker 573R) and a pair of lower speakers 921 (lower left speaker 921L and lower right speaker 921R). It represents the initial position. By dynamically changing the setting value of the upper and lower pans during sound reproduction, a difference occurs in the volume output individually from the upper and lower speakers, and a sound image can be localized in an arbitrary space between the upper and lower speakers. .. For example, when set to “0x00”, it indicates that the sound is output from only the pair of upper speakers 573, and when set to “0x80”, for example, the volume difference output individually from the upper and lower speakers made of these combinations. Becomes 0, and the sound image is localized at the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, if it is set to “0xFF”, it indicates that only the pair of lower speakers 921 outputs.

The volume initial value represents a volume setting at the start of reproduction, and can be set in a setting range of “0x00” to “0xFF”, for example. The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing each sound described above. The reproduction type setting is loop reproduction (corresponding to “LOOP” in the figure) that repeatedly reproduces the target sound, or 1SHOT reproduction (corresponding to “1SHOT” in the figure) that reproduces the target sound once. Is displayed. The output type setting indicates whether the target sound is reproduced in monaural or stereo.

FIG. 210 shows the relationship between the game state, the reproduced sound and the reproduced channel. The time axis which is the horizontal axis shows the game state, and as the game state, for example, "first half of change", "second half of change", "left symbol stop", "right symbol stop", "middle symbol stop" and "big hit medium" Can be mentioned. On the other hand, the vertical axis represents the (reproduction) priority order, and the (reproduction) priority order increases from bottom to top.

FIG. 211(A) shows an example of an effect time chart, FIG. 211(B) shows an example of a channel reproduction time chart, and FIG. 211(C) says that each sound cannot be reproduced. An example of the problem is shown. In these FIGS. 211(A) to 211(C), the horizontal axis is a common time axis.

In FIG. 211(A), "first half of fluctuation", "second half of fluctuation", "left symbol stop", "right symbol stop", "middle symbol stop" and "big hit" in order as a game state along the time axis which is the horizontal axis. It can be mentioned that the game is controlled to be "medium".

In the "first half of change" shown in FIG. 211(A), for example, as shown in Problem 1 of FIG. 211(C), during the reproduction time of "first half notice A" as a new sound, the start mouth winning (shown as "hold" If there is a "winning prize"), as shown in FIG. 208(B), the "reserved winning sound" is pre-assigned to the same reproduction channel 14, 15 as the "first half notice A". The reproduced sound of “” is overwritten with the reserved winning sound, and the output of the “first half notice A” sound is stopped (in the case of sound control by a fixed channel).

In the “second half of fluctuation” shown in FIG. 211(A), for example, as shown in Problem 2 in FIG. 211(C), during the reproduction time of “Full screen notice” as a new sound, the start mouth prize (“Hold in the figure” is shown. If there is a "winning prize"), as shown in FIG. 208(B), the "reserved winning sound" is pre-assigned to the same playback channels 14 and 15 as the "full screen announcement". The playback sound of "is overwritten with the pending winning sound, and the output of the "full screen notice" sound is stopped (in the case of sound control by a fixed channel).

[12-2. Sound control by automatic channel method]
Next, an example of sound control by the automatic channel system according to the present embodiment will be described. 212(A) and 212(B) respectively show an example of sound control by the automatic channel system according to the present embodiment.

FIG. 212(A) shows an example of a sound reproduction channel. In the sound control by the fixed channel described above, the channel division as an attribute of the reproduction channel is an automatic channel (corresponding to “AUTOch” in the figure). Is different. Here, the channel classification being an automatic channel means that each reproduction channel for each sound is not fixed but variable and is controlled so as to be automatically allocated according to a rule described later (above-mentioned). "Equivalent to "sound control by automatic channel method").

In the sound control by the automatic channel system according to the present embodiment, for example, all 16 channels of the reproduction channel 00 to the reproduction channel 15 are used as in the sound control by the fixed channel system described above. The "reproduction channel" shown in the figure omits the reproduction channel.

On the other hand, FIG. 212(B) shows an example of allocation of reproduction channels to each sound. In the sound control by the automatic channel system, as shown in the figure, each sound is individually assigned a priority order. Here, as for the basic sound reproduction rule, as described above, one sound requires two channels when outputting in stereo, while one channel requires one channel when outputting in monaural. Become.

The "notification sound 1" to "button pressing sound" shown in the figure must not be muted in the middle of the sound that has started the reproduction, no matter what happens until the end of the reproduction. On the other hand, in the illustrated "normal BGM" to "holding winning sound", there is no problem even if the sound started to be reproduced is overwritten with another sound during the reproduction and the sound is muted.

In the sound control by the automatic channel system, each reproduction channel is defined as an AUTO group channel (hereinafter abbreviated as “AUTO group”). While multiple AUTO groups can be defined, multiple playback channels can be defined within an AUTO group. Each AUTO group is used to reproduce the sound for the AUTO group.
When assigning a sound to an AUTO group, an identifier and a priority (priority) for designating a specific AUTO group can be designated in each AUTO group.
When a new sound is reproduced, if the sound is defined in the AUTO group, and if an empty channel (unused channel) exists in the specified AUTO group, it is immediately reproduced.

If there is no free channel in the above case, the effect control program searches all the channels currently being reproduced in the AUTO group based on the priority order of the sound to be newly reproduced. If there is a channel whose priority is lower than or the same as that of the sound being reproduced, the effect control program ends the use of the AUTO channel and reproduces a new sound. On the other hand, the effect control program does not reproduce the new sound if there is no empty channel in the AUTO group that has a lower priority or is not the same as the sound itself being reproduced.

FIG. 213 shows an example of a sound definition table for realizing sound control by the automatic channel system. In the sound definition table in this automatic channel system, for each sound category and sound name, a reproduction channel number such as sound control by the fixed channel already described, left/right pan initial value, upper/lower pan initial value, volume initial value, Instead of sound number, playback type setting, and output type setting, an identifier for specifying an AUTO group and priority (also called "playback priority"), left/right pan initial value, top/bottom pan initial value, volume initial value, sound It manages the definitions of numbers, seek points, playback type settings and output type settings.

First, the identifier for designating each specific AUTO group indicates in which AUTO group among a plurality of AUTO groups each sound is reproduced. The priority order is an index indicating which sound should be preferentially reproduced when the sounds are simultaneously reproduced. This priority order indicates that a sound having a higher numerical value should be preferentially reproduced, while a smaller value represents a sound that should be reproduced without being prioritized. In the present embodiment, as the order of the types of sounds to be preferentially reproduced, for example, the notification sounds whose priority is “25” (“notification sound 1”, “notification sound 2”, and “notification sound 3”). , A sound effect having a priority of “20” (“big hit confirmation sound” and “button pressing sound”), a BGM having a priority of “15” (“normal BGM”, etc.), and a priority of “10”. Sound effects (such as "full-screen notice sound effect"), sound effects with a priority of "05" ("first-half notice sound effect" to "second-half notice sound effect"), pending winning sound with a priority of "01" I am trying. As a result, when there is no empty channel, for example, when trying to reproduce the notification sound, it is not necessary to reproduce using the predetermined reproduction channel, and the sound with the lower priority (for example, the reserved winning sound) ), the notification sound is preferentially reproduced using the channel that is reproducing.

As described above, the left/right pan initial value represents the sound image localization initial position of the left and right speakers, which is a combination of the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L, and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R. By dynamically changing the set values of the left and right pans during sound reproduction, a difference occurs in the volume output individually from the left and right speakers, and a sound image can be localized in an arbitrary space between the left and right speakers. The left and right pan initial values are managed as pan information. For example, if "0x00" is set, it indicates that only the left speaker (upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L) outputs, and if "0x80" is set, the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L are output. And the volume difference output individually from the left and right speakers, which is a combination of the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R, becomes 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the left and right speakers. For example, when set to "0xFF", it indicates that only the right speaker (upper right speaker 573R and lower right speaker 921R) outputs.

Further, as already described, the upper and lower pan initial values are set to the upper and lower sides of, for example, the pair of upper speakers 573 (upper left speaker 573L and upper right speaker 573R) and the pair of lower speakers 921 (lower left speaker 921L and lower right speaker 921R). Represents the initial position of the sound image localization of the sound from the speaker. By dynamically changing the left and right pan settings during sound reproduction, a difference occurs in the volume output individually from the upper and lower speakers, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the upper and lower speakers. .. The upper and lower pan initial values are managed as pan information. For example, when set to “0x00”, it indicates that the sound is output from only the pair of upper speakers 573, and when set to “0x80”, for example, the volume difference output individually from the upper and lower speakers made of these combinations. Becomes 0, and the sound image is localized at the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, if it is set to “0xFF”, it indicates that only the pair of lower speakers 921 outputs.

Similarly, the volume initial value represents the volume setting at the start of reproduction, and can be set in the setting range of, for example, "0x00" to "0xFF". In addition, "1" at the 3rd byte (0x1FF for 0xFF ) Is set, it is not affected by the volume change caused by operating one or more volume adjustment devices equipped in the gaming machine, and it is always played at the volume set by the initial value. It represents. The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing each sound described above.

The seek point represents the reproduction start position number in the same phrase in the sound data corresponding to each sound. In the present embodiment, as the seek point, for example, “0” is set for each of “upper right speaker confirmation sound” to “first half notice A sound effect”, while “second half notice A sound effect” and “second half notice B effect” are set. "1" is set for each "sound". With such seek points, it is possible to register the number of sounds exceeding the maximum number of sounds that can be registered in the sound source.

The reproduction type setting is loop reproduction (corresponding to “LOOP” in the figure) that repeatedly reproduces the target sound, or 1SHOT reproduction (corresponding to “1SHOT” in the figure) that reproduces the target sound once. Is displayed. The output type setting indicates whether the target sound is reproduced in monaural or stereo.

FIG. 214 shows the relationship between the game state, the reproduced sound and the priority order. The time axis which is the horizontal axis shows the game state, and as the game state, for example, "first half of change", "second half of change", "left symbol stop", "right symbol stop", "middle symbol stop" and "big hit medium" Can be mentioned. On the other hand, the vertical axis represents the (reproduction) priority order, and the (reproduction) priority order increases from bottom to top.

215(A) shows an example of an effect time chart, and FIG. 215(B) shows an example of an AUTO channel reproduction time chart. In these FIGS. 215(A) and 215(B), the horizontal axis is a common time axis. In FIG. 215(A), as a game state along the time axis which is the horizontal axis, in order, "first half of change", "second half of change", "left symbol stop", "right symbol stop", "middle symbol stop" and " It can be mentioned that the game is controlled so as to be "big hit".

In the "first half of variation" shown in FIG. 215(A), as shown in FIG. 215(B), as a part thereof, for example, the sound of "normal BGM reproduction" is reproduced from reproduction channel 00 to 01 all the time ( Equivalent to range A). Here, when the starting winning award (corresponding to the "reserved winning a prize" shown in the figure) is attempted to be reproduced as a new sound, a reproduction channel 12 to 13 exists as an empty channel at the start timing. Since this reserved winning sound can be reproduced using the reproduction channels 12 to 13, any sound being reproduced is not overwritten by the reserved winning sound (corresponding to "reservation sound reproduction" in the drawing), and other Output of all types of sounds continues.

In the "second half of fluctuation" shown in FIG. 215(A), as shown in FIG. 215(B), as a part thereof, for example, the sound of "reach BGM reproduction" is reproduced from reproduction channels 00 to 01 ( Equivalent to range B). Here, for example, when the player tries to reproduce the reserved winning sound as a new sound because there is a start winning (corresponding to the "reserved winning" shown in the figure), the reproduction channels 02 to 03 exist as empty channels at the start timing. , The sound being reproduced is not overwritten by the reserved winning sound (corresponding to “reproduction of reserved sound” in the figure), and the output of all other types of sound continues.

In the “second half of fluctuation” shown in FIG. 215(A), a notification sound (corresponding to “notification 2 occurrence” shown in the figure) is generated after that, so that a notification sound with the highest priority level of “25” is generated as a new sound ( When an attempt is made to reproduce "Notification 2" in the figure), as a result of searching for an empty channel, it is found that there is no empty channel at the start timing as shown in FIG. 215(B). Therefore, the sound having the lowest priority among the sounds being reproduced at the start timing is searched, and the reproduction channels 04 to 05 are found as the channels reproducing the reserved winning sound having the lowest priority of “01”. In these reproduction channels 04 to 05, the reserved winning sound is reproduced as described above, but the priority (25) of the notification sound to be reproduced next (corresponding to “notification sound 2” in the figure) is Since the priority is higher than the priority (01) of the reserved winning sound, the pending winning sound being reproduced in these reproduction channels 04 to 05 is overwritten with the notification sound.

FIG. 216 shows an example of the automatic channel control work information stored in the AUTO group channel control work area provided in the peripheral control RAM. This work information for automatic channel control is, as work names, set reservation flags, requested sound numbers, playing sound numbers, automatic allocation groups, priority during automatic allocation, elapsed time from registration, volume control for each channel. It includes a work for work and a work for pan control, and has respective information corresponding to these.

If the setting reservation flag is a value other than "0", it indicates that the setting reservation is made. The requested sound number represents a sound data index number as an identifier for identifying a sound to be reproduced when "-1" is stopped and is other than "-1". The playing sound number represents a sound data index number as an identifier for identifying a sound being played, if "-1" is stopped and is other than "-1".

In the automatic allocation group, when the channel is "0", the channel is fixedly allocated, while when the channel is "1", the channel is automatically allocated ("Sound control by automatic channel method" described later). Equivalent to). Here, the automatic allocation group indicates, for example, "1" indicates the AUTO group 1, and "2" indicates the AUTO group 2. On the other hand, the priority at the time of automatic allocation represents the priority in the case of performing sound control by the automatic channel system described later.

The elapsed time from registration represents the elapsed time from the time of registration, with "0" at the time of registration of the desired reproduced sound. It should be noted that the elapsed time from the registration is the number of the sounds currently being reproduced when a new sound is reproduced in a situation where a plurality of sounds having the same priority at the time of automatic allocation are being reproduced. Used to determine which sounds should be overwritten and erased. For example, a sound that has been reproduced for a longer period of time is calculated, and this sound is overwritten with the new sound and erased.

The volume control work stores the volume value (volume value) of the sound to be reproduced. The pan control work stores pan information including the above-described left and right pan and upper and lower pan setting values.

FIG. 217 shows an example of empty channel search processing when performing sound control when only one AUTO group is defined in the automatic channel system. In FIG. 217, the channel is also abbreviated as “ch”.

When the production control program makes a request to reproduce a new sound (step S1100A), the production control program confirms the automatic allocation group related to the new sound (step S1102A), and if the automatic allocation group is “0”, the fixed allocation is performed. Then, the reproduction of a new sound is started on the designated channel.

On the other hand, if the automatic allocation group is other than "0", the effect control program determines that the automatic allocation is automatic allocation and determines whether the new sound corresponds to the monaural channel (step S1106A). ..

When the new sound is monaural, the effect control program determines whether or not there is a vacant (monaural) channel (1 channel) (step S1108A), and if so, the vacant (monaural) channel. ) While the reproduction of the new sound is started on the channel (step S1109A), if it does not exist, the reproduction sound of the same priority as or lower than the priority of the new sound is reproduced in the (monaural) channel being reproduced. It is determined whether a channel exists (step S1110A).

The production control program ends the process when there is no channel of a reproduced sound that is the same as or lower than the priority order of the new sound in such a (monaural) channel that is being reproduced. Determines whether or not there are a plurality of corresponding channels (step S1112A).

When there are a plurality of relevant channels, the production control program is playing a sound with the longest playback time from registration among the relevant channels based on the elapsed time from the above-mentioned registration. The reproduction of the new sound is started on the (monaural) channel (step S1114A). On the other hand, when the corresponding channels do not exist and there is one, the effect control program starts the reproduction of the new sound on the (monaural) channel that satisfies the desired condition (step S1116A).

On the other hand, in step S1106A described above, when the effect control program determines that the new sound is not monaural, it is determined whether or not there is a vacant (stereo) channel (two channels) (step). S1120A). When the effect control program determines that an empty channel exists, it selects a (stereo) channel that satisfies the desired condition and starts reproduction of the new sound (step S1122A).

On the other hand, when the effect control program determines that there is no empty channel, it determines whether or not there is a priority equal to or lower than the priority of the new sound in the (stereo) channel of the sound being reproduced (step (S1124A), since the processing is ended if there is no sound, the sound being reproduced is not overwritten with the new sound to be reproduced. On the other hand, the effect control program, if present, determines whether or not there are a plurality of corresponding channels (step S1126A).

The production control program starts the output of the above new sound on the (stereo) channel that satisfies the desired condition when there are not a plurality of corresponding channels, and the above-mentioned case when there are a plurality of corresponding channels. Based on the elapsed time from the registration, the reproduction of the new sound is started in the channel (reproduction time) having the longest reproduction time from the registration (step S1130A).

As described above, the effect control program searches for an empty channel in order to reproduce a new sound. Such empty channel search processing will be described in a more visually understandable manner.

218(A) and FIG. 218(B) to FIG. 221(A) and FIG. 221(B) respectively show an example of the specific contents of the empty channel search process. As shown in FIG. 218(A), the production control program searches for an empty channel when the reproduction request of the normal BGM whose priority is 15 is generated, and the reproduction channels 00 to 01 are free. Therefore, normal BGM reproduction is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

As shown in FIG. 218(B), the production control program searches for an empty channel when a request for reproducing the sound effect of the first-half notice _A having the priority order 05 is generated, and reproduces channels 02 to 03. Since there is a vacant space, the reproduction of the sound effect of the first-half notice _A is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 02 to 03.

Next, as shown in FIG. 219(A), the effect control program searches for an empty channel when a playback request for a button press sound with a priority of 20 is issued, and assigns it to playback channels 04 to 05. Since there is a space, the reproduction of the button pressing sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 04 to 05.

Next, as shown in FIG. 219(B), the effect control program searches for an empty channel, triggered by the request to reproduce the sound effect of the first-half notice_B whose priority is 05, and then reproduces channel 06. Since there is a space in ~07, the reproduction of the sound effect of the first-half notice_B is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 06-07.

Next, as shown in FIG. 220(A), the effect control program searches for an empty channel upon the occurrence of a request to reproduce the big hit confirmation sound having a priority of 20, and then reproduces the reproduced channels 08 to 09. Since there is a vacancy, the reproduction of the big hit confirmation sound is started in stereo by using these reproduction channels 08 to 09.

Next, as shown in FIG. 220(B), the effect control program searches for an empty channel, triggered by the request to reproduce the sound effect of the first-half notice_C whose priority is 05, and reproduces channel 10. Since there is a vacancy in ~11, the reproduction of the sound effect of the first-half notice_C is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 10-11.

Next, as shown in FIG. 221(A), the effect control program searches for an empty channel upon the occurrence of a request to reproduce the reserved winning sound having the priority of 01, and then searches the reproduction channels 12 to 13. Since there is a space, the reproduction of the reserved winning sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 12 to 13.

Next, as shown in FIG. 221(B), the effect control program searches for an empty channel, triggered by the request for reproduction of the notification sound 3 having the priority order of 25, and then selects the reproduction channels 14 to 15. Since there is a space, the reproduction of the notification sound 3 is started in stereo by using these reproduction channels 14 to 15.

222(A) and FIG. 222(B) to FIG. 225(A) and FIG. 225(B) respectively show an example of the specific contents of the empty channel search process. As shown in FIG. 222(A), the production control program searches for an empty channel, triggered by the reproduction request of the reach BGM having the priority of 15, and the reproduction channels 00 to 01 are free. Therefore, the reproduction of the reach BGM is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

As shown in FIG. 222(B), the production control program searches for an empty channel when the reproduction request of the notification sound 1 having the priority order of 25 is generated, and the reproduction channels 02 to 03 are empty. Since they exist, the reproduction of the notification sound 1 is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 02 to 03.

After repeating the above-described processing, the effect control program next, as shown in FIG. 223(A), triggers the reproduction request of the full-screen warning sound having the priority of 10 to occur, and the empty channel is triggered. Is performed and there is a vacancy in the reproduction channels 10 to 11, the reproduction of the full-screen notice sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 10 to 11.

Next, as shown in FIG. 223(B), the effect control program searches for an empty channel, triggered by the request for reproduction of the notification sound 1 having the priority of 25, and then displays in FIG. 223(A). As shown, since there is a vacancy in the reproduction channels 02 to 03 (corresponding to “non-reproduction (empty)” in the figure), reproduction of the sound effect of the notification sound 1 is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 02 to 03. ..

Next, as shown in FIG. 224(A), the effect control program searches for an empty channel, triggered by the request to reproduce the notification sound 3 having the priority of 25, and reproduces channels 04 to 05 ( Since there is an empty space (corresponding to “non-reproduction (empty)” in the figure), reproduction of the notification sound 3 is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 04 to 05.

Next, as shown in FIG. 224(B), the effect control program searches for an empty channel when the reproduction request of the accessory notice sound having the priority order 10 is generated, and reproduces channels 12 to 13. Since there is a vacant space, the reproduction of the accessory notice sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 12 to 13.

Next, as shown in FIG. 225(A), the effect control program searches for an empty channel, triggered by the request to reproduce the reserved winning sound having a priority of 01, and reproduces channels 14 to 15 ( Since there is a vacancy in the "non-reproduction (vacancy)" shown in the figure, the reproduction of the reserved winning sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 14 to 15.

Next, as shown in FIG. 225(B), the effect control program searches for an empty channel when the reproduction request of the notification sound 2 having the priority of 25 is generated, but there is no empty channel. Therefore, the use of the reproduction channels 14 to 15 which is reproducing the "preferred winning sound" having the lowest priority in each channel corresponding to the sound being reproduced is stopped, and the reproduction channels 14 to 15 are used to perform stereo reproduction. The reproduction of the notification sound 2 which is the desired sound is started.

By doing this, each sound to be output is not fixedly assigned to a specific channel in advance, and a playback channel with a lower priority is searched according to the priority of the sound, and the output with a higher priority is output. Each sound will be played on the playback channel found by the search.
Therefore, according to the present embodiment, not only the empty channels can be effectively utilized as described above, but also each sound including the empty channels is used to output as many sounds as planned to be output as much as possible. Since it becomes possible to reproduce, various sound effects can be realized and the interest of the player can be enhanced.

226(A) and 226(B) to 227(A) and 227(B) respectively show an example of specific contents of the empty channel search process. As shown in FIG. 226(A), the production control program searches for an empty channel when the reproduction request of the left symbol stop sound whose priority is 15 is generated, and the reproduction channels 00 to 01 are free. Therefore, the reproduction of the left symbol stop sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

As shown in FIG. 226(B), the production control program searches for an empty channel upon the occurrence of a request to reproduce the right symbol stop sound whose priority is 15 and creates an empty channel in the reproduction channels 00-01. Therefore, the reproduction of the right symbol stop sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

Next, as shown in FIG. 227(A), the effect control program searches for an empty channel, triggered by the request to reproduce the medium symbol stop sound whose priority is 15, and reproduces channels 00 to 01. Since there is a vacant space, the reproduction of the middle symbol stop sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

Next, as shown in FIG. 227(B), the production control program searches for an empty channel when a reproduction request for the big hit BGM whose priority is 15 is generated, and makes an empty channel in the reproduction channel 00-01. Therefore, the reproduction of the big hit BGM in stereo is started using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

Note that, when the reproduction replacement of the sound according to the priority order is generated using a certain reproduction channel, the effect control program restores the previous sound reproduced before the replacement in the reproduction channel after the completion of the reproduction. It goes without saying that you can do so.

[12-3. Variation of sound control]
In the above embodiments, the description has been made by way of example in which the sound control by the automatic channel system is performed by using all the reproduction channels for the maximum number of channels, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sound control by the fixed channel described above is used. The sound control may be performed as follows according to a combination or the like.

228(A) to 228(F) are diagrams showing variations of channel assignment in sound control by the above-described two types of channel systems or a combination thereof.

FIG. 228A shows an example of channel allocation in sound control by the maximum number of channels (16 channels) fixed channel method described so far as a comparative example with the above-described embodiment, and FIG. 228(B) shows this. It corresponds to the embodiment of the present invention described above, and shows an example of channel allocation in the case of performing sound control by the automatic channel method for the maximum number of channels. The sound control by assigning these two channels has already been described, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 228(C) shows an embodiment in which a plurality of automatic channel groups are used and channel allocation is performed for the maximum number of reproduction channels to perform sound control by the automatic channel system (corresponding to “PTN2” in the figure). .. FIG. 228(D) shows an embodiment in which one automatic channel group is used to allocate channels for the maximum number of reproduction channels and perform sound control by the fixed channel method for some reproduction channels. (Corresponding to “PTN3” in the figure).

FIG. 228(E) shows an embodiment in which a plurality of automatic channel groups are used to perform channel assignment for the maximum number of reproduction channels and some of the reproduction channels are subjected to sound control by the fixed channel method described above. (Corresponding to “PTN4” in the figure). Note that a specific example of the channel system shown in FIG. 228E will be described later in detail with reference to the drawings after FIG. 229.

FIG. 228(F) shows that, using one automatic channel group, the maximum number of reproduction channels is assigned to channels to perform sound control by the automatic channel system, and some of the reproduction channels are reproduced by the fixed channel system. The control is performed, but differs from the above example in that the number of channels is ensured so that the number of each reproduction channel is variable. Note that a specific example of the channel system shown in FIG. 228(F) will be described later in detail with reference to the drawings after FIG. 235.

As shown in the present embodiment, by adopting the automatic channel system in which all channels are grouped into one group, the vacant channels are allocated or the channels being output are replaced based on a pre-designated standard. Sound can be output only by determining the priority order of. Therefore, unlike conventional control methods that specify a channel and output sound, channel management is not required, so control related to sound output can be simplified and development efficiency can be improved. Becomes

Further, by adopting the automatic channel system, it is possible to minimize the number of channels, and for example, it is possible to adopt a low-priced sound source IC with a small number of channels, which reduces the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine. be able to.

[15. Another form of sound control by automatic channel system]
Next, details of another mode of the sound control method described above will be described. In the sound control method described above, by dynamically changing the sound allocation to each channel as the automatic channel method, it was possible to effectively utilize the empty channels to reproduce many sounds. In recent diversified game machines, hundreds or thousands of sounds are selected and output, which may complicate management of sound sources.

In addition, by outputting a plurality of sounds in an overlapping manner, the notice effect can be duplicated and various sound effects can be achieved with a small number of sound sources. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 228(C), the sound is divided into a plurality of groups, and the plurality of sounds and the reproduction channels are dynamically assigned to each group, so that the sounds are reliably output in a duplicated manner. can do. Moreover, there is an advantage that the management becomes easy by dividing the sound into types.

Further, the sound includes a sound that should be output prior to the effect sound, such as an informative sound, and a sound that is continuously output, such as BGM. For these sounds, it is more convenient to fix the output channel than to dynamically assign the channel. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 228(D), the sound that is preferentially output or the sound that is always output is output by the fixed channel method, and the sound that changes according to the result of the start winning or the variable display is output. Output by the automatic channel method.

With the above-described configuration, it is possible to effectively utilize the unused channels by the automatic channel system and prevent unnecessary channel switching control from occurring by the fixed channel system. In addition, since it is possible to classify by the type of sound such as BGM, effect sound, and notification sound, effect data management becomes easy.

The sound control method shown in FIG. 228(E) is a combination of the sound control methods shown in FIG. 228(C) and FIG. 228(D), and has the advantages of each method. The sound control method shown in FIG. 228(E) will be specifically described below.

[15-1. Sound control with fixed channel system and multiple automatic channel systems mixed]
In the present embodiment, unlike the example described above, the number of channels in sound source control is 32 channels (ch), and includes a channel for reproducing sound by the fixed channel system and a channel for reproducing sound by the automatic channel system. .. The channels that reproduce sounds by the automatic channel system are divided into two groups. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given with reference to FIG.

[15-1-1. Play channel configuration]
FIG. 229 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration table of reproduction channels in the sound source control in the present embodiment. As described above, in the sound source control of this embodiment, 32 channels are used and each channel is assigned a unique identifier (channel number).

The channel configuration table includes “automatic allocation” indicating whether or not automatic allocation is performed for channel numbers, “classification” indicating a group to which each channel belongs, and “purpose of use” of each channel. It should be noted that a "note" is added as a supplement to the configuration table shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 229, the configuration of each channel of this embodiment is such that channel numbers 0 to 7 are fixed channel systems, 8 to 19 are automatic channel systems, 20 to 23 are fixed channel systems, and 24 to 29. Is an automatic channel system, and 30 and 31 are fixed channel systems.

The channels of the automatic channel system with the channel numbers 8 to 19 are "AUTO group 1", and the channels of the automatic channel system with the channel numbers 24 to 29 are "AUTO group 2".

The game machine according to the present embodiment can output sound in stereo, and in the case of stereo output, one pair (two) channels are used. On the other hand, for monaural output, one channel is used.

The channel with the channel number 0 (hereinafter, referred to as “channel 0” and each channel is represented by “channel”+“channel number”) is a channel used for the system. For example, it is a channel for outputting a sound commonly used by manufacturers regardless of a specific model. Specifically, it is a sound or the like that is output while displaying the manufacturer's logo when the game machine is started. Channel 1 is a channel that pairs with channel 0 when a sound is output in stereo.

Channel 2 is a channel used for outputting BGM during a game or in a customer waiting state. Channel 3 is a channel that pairs with channel 2 when BGM is output in stereo. Similarly, channels 4 and 6 are channels used to output BGM, and channels 5 and 7 are channels paired with channels 4 and 6 when BGM is output in stereo. is there.

Further, in the present embodiment, not only the stereo output is performed, but also a plurality of sounds are simultaneously output to improve the sound quality of BGM. Therefore, a plurality of (pair) channels can be used to output BGM, and BGM1 to BGM3 can be simultaneously output. Further, as will be described later, since it is possible to output BGM on channel 20 (and channel 21) as well, it is possible to simultaneously output four BGMs using a maximum of 8 channels (4 pairs). Is becoming

While the game machine is operating normally, BGM is continuously output and a predetermined sound source is repeatedly reproduced. Therefore, the channel for reproducing the BGM is continuously occupied, and it is more efficient to fix the channel in advance than to dynamically allocate the channel. Therefore, in the sound source control in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the channel for reproducing the BGM is the fixed channel system and only the BGM is output. As a result, it is possible to simplify the control as compared with the case where the sound is reproduced only by the automatic channel system, while preventing the generation of an empty channel.

Channels 8 to 19 are channels for reproducing the sound output when the notice effect is executed. In the notice production, the sound selected by the lottery is output each time according to the result of the variable display, the degree of expectation, the progress of the game, and the like. As described above, for the sound output each time based on the predetermined condition, the channel can be effectively used by applying the automatic channel method.

In the present embodiment, unlike the example described above, channels to which the automatic channel system is applied are grouped. The group of channels that output the sound at the time of the notice production is AUTO group 1.

When outputting a sound at the time of executing the notice effect, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first searches for an empty channel among the channels assigned to the AUTO group 1. In the case of stereo, empty channels for two channels are searched and, in principle, continuous channels are set as output channels. At this time, if there is a free channel, the designated sound is set to be output from the free channel. On the other hand, when there is no empty channel, the channel in use is released and a new sound is output, or the output of the designated sound is stopped, based on a predetermined condition. The detailed procedure for channel selection will be described later with reference to FIG. 230.

The channels 20 and 21 are channels to which the fixed channel system is applied. The channel 21 is a channel that forms a pair with the channel 20 at the time of stereo output. Channels 20 and 21 are channels for outputting BGM output or effect sound. It is used when BGM is output by superimposing four sounds or when a specific effect sound is output. The specific effect sound is, for example, a sound output by an effect other than the notice effect output by the automatic channel method.

Like the channels 20 and 21, the channels 22 and 23 are channels to which the fixed channel system is applied. The channel 23 is a channel paired with the channel 22 at the time of stereo output. Channels 22 and 23 are channels to which the holding sound is output. The on-hold sound output on the channels 22 and 23 may be, for example, a sound output regardless of the lottery result at the time of winning the start prize, or a sound to be preferentially output at the time of the big hit confirmation. It should be noted that sounds and the like based on the lottery result at the time of winning the start prize are output from channels 24 to 29 as described later.

Channels 24 to 29 are channels to which the automatic channel system is applied. On channels 24 to 29, a sound output based on the degree of expectation according to the lottery result at the time of starting winning and a sound output when the hold display changes at the start of fluctuation are reproduced. By outputting the channels 22 and 23 in the fixed channel system, the sound when the big hit is confirmed can be surely output even when there is no empty channel in the channels 24 to 29, and the attention of the player is obtained. You can

The channels 30 and 31 are channels to which the fixed channel system is applied. Channels 30 and 31 are the channels used for the system. The channel 30 outputs a change sound when the volume is changed and a notification sound when the game medium is paid out. Further, the channel 31 outputs a notification sound when an abnormality occurs in the gaming machine. As described above, the fixed channel system in which the output destination is secured in advance is applied so that the notification sound related to the operation of the gaming machine and the notification sound when an abnormality occurs are reliably transmitted to the outside.

As described above, in the present embodiment, a fixed channel type channel is allocated when the output is constantly continued as in the case of BGM or when it is necessary to reliably output the abnormal alarm sound. On the other hand, by applying the automatic channel method to the sound output flexibly according to the game state, etc., it is prevented that the sound is not output even if there are empty channels, and a finite number of channels are set. It can be effectively utilized.

[15-1-2. Free channel search processing]
Next, a procedure for searching for a vacant channel for sound source control according to this embodiment will be described. FIG. 230 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a free channel search process when the control for outputting the sound of this embodiment is executed. Although FIG. 217 describes the case where there is one AUTO group, the difference is that FIG. 230 has a plurality of AUTO groups. The description of the common processing will be omitted.

In the empty channel search processing shown in FIG. 230, in the processing of steps S1108B and S1120B, when the new sound is the automatic channel method, it is determined whether or not there is an empty channel in the channels of the same group. That is, if channels of different groups are vacant but there is no vacancy in the group of the same channel, the results of step S1108B and step S1120B are “No”.

Further, in the free channel search process shown in FIG. 230, when there is no free channel, the reproduction of the sound output from the channel selected based on the predetermined condition is stopped, and a new sound is output from the channel (step). S1118B, step S1132B). Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 231, the selection condition of the channel for stopping the reproduction of the sound will be described.
It should be noted that the production in which the sound output is stopped is continuously executed without stopping the image display and the operation of the accessory.

FIG. 231 is a diagram showing an example of a condition for selecting a channel for replacing the output of sound (stopping reproduction of sound, opening) when a channel is not available at the time of outputting a new sound in the present embodiment. .. As a concrete selection condition, the attributes of the sound being reproduced and the new sound are compared, and the sound of higher importance is prioritized. As will be described later, the attributes include reproduction time, whether the output is stereo or monaural, the size of the volume, the amount of change in the sound being reproduced, etc., and the reproduction time of the sound at the time of channel selection, It also includes the remaining playback time. Hereinafter, each condition will be specifically described.

Condition 1 selects a channel based on the reproduction time (elapsed time) from the start of reproduction. For example, as shown in steps S1114A and S1130A of FIG. 217, a channel having a long reproduction time is selected. By selecting a channel whose elapsed time is long after the reproduction is started, the output of the effect sound that has been sufficiently executed ends, and it becomes easier for the player to recognize that a new effect has been executed.

The condition 2 selects a channel based on the reproduction time of the entire effect. For example, since an effect having a longer reproduction time may have a higher expectation, an effect having a shorter reproduction time is selected. On the other hand, the effect on the subsequently executed effects may be minimized by stopping the effect having a long reproduction time. In this case, the determination is made based on the preset total reproduction time, not on the reproduction time from the start of reproduction.

The condition 1 and the condition 2 are conditions relating to the reproduction time, but in addition to this, for example, the sound output of the effect having a short (or long) remaining effect time may be stopped. Further, the channel may be selected according to the elapsed time from the start of reproduction with respect to the time of the entire effect, that is, the progress rate of the effect. By setting the conditions in this way, it is possible to stop the sound output at the initial stage or the final stage of the effect.

Condition 3 selects a channel based on the volume of the sound being reproduced. For example, since an effect in which a sound with a high volume is output can be an effect with a higher degree of importance, a channel with a low volume in the output sound is preferentially selected. On the contrary, it is possible to preferentially select a channel in which the volume of the sound being output is large and to let the player recognize that a new effect will be executed.

Condition 4 selects a channel based on the change in the volume of the sound being reproduced. For example, it is assumed that the effect in which the sound that is faded in or faded out is output can be a more important effect, and a channel with a small volume change amount is preferentially selected. On the contrary, the sound control load may be reduced by preferentially selecting a channel having a large volume change.

Condition 5 selects a channel based on a dynamic change in the sound image localization position (panpot). For example, a channel that produces less stereoscopic sound effects by changing the left and right sound outputs of stereo speakers can be a more important one. Select with priority. On the other hand, it is possible to preferentially select a channel in which the dynamic sound image localization position is largely changed to reduce the sound control load.

Condition 6 selects a channel based on a note number (index). For example, a large (small) tone number is selected. At this time, the priority may be associated with the sound number.

Condition 7 selects a channel depending on whether the sound is monaural or stereo. For example, a channel that outputs a monaural sound is selected, assuming that the production of a stereo sound with good sound quality has a higher expectation. On the other hand, since only one channel of monaural sound is used, if the number of empty channels is insufficient even if the channels that output monaural sound are opened, select channels that output stereo sound to increase the number of empty channels. You can

Condition 8 selects a channel depending on whether or not the volume adjustment is permitted.
For example, an effect set to be unable to adjust the volume may be more important, or an effect set to be able to adjust the volume may be more important.

In addition to the conditions shown above, for example, in the case of the same priority, a new sound reproduction request may be discarded without switching channels. Further, by assigning a unique priority order to all sounds, the effect data may be set so as not to have the same priority order.

In the table shown in FIG. 231, the conditions 1 to 8 are shown as an example, but these conditions may be applied independently or a plurality of conditions may be applied in combination. For example, a threshold may be set for each condition and a channel that satisfies more conditions may be selected, or a priority may be set for each condition and the conditions may be applied sequentially.

[15-1-3. Volume control]
Next, an example in which control for channel allocation is performed based on the priority order assigned to sounds to be newly output will be described. Here, an example in which three types of advance notices (first-half notices A to C) are executed in the first half of the change will be described. FIG. 232 is a timing chart showing an example of effects for explaining the sound control of the present embodiment. ing. FIG. 233 is a diagram showing an example of the priority order of the sound effects in the effect example of the present embodiment.

In the effect example shown in FIG. 232, the first half notice_A is generated when a predetermined time has elapsed after the variable display was started. At this time, an instruction to operate the effect button is displayed on the display screen, and when the player operates the effect button, the first half notice_B is generated. Further, the first-half notice C occurs while the first-half notice_A and the first-half notice_B are being executed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 233, the first half notice_A has a priority of 03, the first half notice_B has a priority of 05, and the first half notice_C has a priority of 20. Further, since the volume suppression flag is set in the first half notice_B and the first half notice_C, when the notice productions of lower priority are duplicated in the same group, the volume is changed based on the suppression volume value. Will be reduced.

To explain the contents of each notice, the first notice_A is, for example, an effect in which a character appears, and a sound effect is output in stereo from channels 08 and 09 while the character appears on the display screen.

The first half notice_B is an effect that is executed by operating the effect button, and the button pressing sound is reproduced when the button is operated (channels 18 and 19), and the first half notice_B is started, and the effect is made in stereo from channels 10 and 11. Sound is output.

The first half notice_C is output of the sound effect (channels 12 and 13), the screen display is stopped for a predetermined time, and the sound having a lower priority than the first half notice_C, specifically other notice effects and BGM are temporarily. Is muted (blackout effect). After that, when the effect screen is displayed, the output of the sound effects other than the first half notice_C is restarted.

Here, the volume change of the sound effect of each notice effect will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. 234. FIG. 234 is a timing chart showing an example of the volume change of the effect sound in the first half variation of the present embodiment, (A) shows the output timing of the effect sound effect, and (B) shows the volume change of each effect sound. The horizontal axis represents the time axis, and the vertical axis in (B) represents the volume.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the variable display is started from time t0, and the first half notice_A is started at time t1. At this time, the effect sound of the first half notice_A is output with the preset volume V_A.

Then, the operation instruction of the effect button is displayed on the effect screen, and the first half notice_B is executed by pressing the effect button (time t2). At this time, the button pressing sound of the effect button is reproduced with the volume V_T, and the effect sound effect of the first half notice _B is output with the volume V_B. Since the priority of the first-half notice_B is higher than that of the first-half notice_A, the volume of the sound effect of the first-half notice_A is suppressed to 50%.

It should be noted that if the priority of the notice effect executed later is lower than or the same as the priority of the notice effect being executed, the volume does not have to be lowered, and even if there are few sound effects being output at the same time. You don't have to turn down the volume. Further, the volume may be lowered only in the case of a combination of specific notice effects.

Further, when the first-half notice C is executed at time t3, the screen goes dark until time t5, and the sound effects other than the first-half notice_C are muted. At this time, the sound effect of the first half notice_C is output with the volume V_C.

Further, the output of the effect sound effects of the first-half notice _A and the first-half notice _B that have been muted at time t3 is restarted at time t5. Originally, the button pressing sound is output until time t4, but since t5>t4, the reproduction ends at time t3.

After that, in the first half notice_A and the first half notice_B, the effect is continued until the preset end time (time t6, t7). Further, at time t8, the first half notice_C ends, and the first half of the change ends.

While the effect sound effect is muted, the effect sound effect may be continuously output with the volume set to 0, or the effect sound effect may be stopped. When setting the volume to 0, the volume (sub-volume) for each channel may be set to 0, or the main volume that controls the volume of the entire effect sound effect may be set to 0 to output the sound effect of the first half notice_C. May be bypassed and output so as not to be influenced by the control by the main volume. Further, even in the state where the output of the other sound effects is suppressed by the first-half notice _C, the sound effect, the warning sound, and the notification sound having higher priorities are output.

As described above, when outputting a new sound and lowering the volume of the sound being played, the volume of the sound being played on all channels is not lowered, instead of lowering the volume of the sound specified by the volume suppression flag etc. The volume of the sound being reproduced on the same channel may be lowered, or the volume of the sound being reproduced on the same channel may be lowered. Also, the volume of the sound being reproduced on the channels in the same group (AUTO group) may be lowered.

[15-1-4. effect]
With the above configuration, in the present embodiment, it is possible to preferentially output the sound with a high priority. The sound with high priority is, for example, a sound such as a notification sound or a warning sound for sure transmission to the player or an employee in the game hall, or the expectation that the result of the variable display is a big hit is high. Sound effect for enhancing the sense of expectation, or a sound effect having a high staging effect and capable of improving the interest of the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to easily manage the effect data regarding the effect sound by classifying each channel used in the sound source control into a plurality of groups.
As a result, it is possible to improve development efficiency such as suppressing bug occurrence due to systematic test execution. In addition, the interest of the game can be improved by making the stable game possible.

In particular, in this embodiment, the channels of the automatic channel system are classified into a plurality of groups. Specifically, there are a group that outputs the sound effect of the notice effect (AUTO group 1) and a group that outputs the hold-related sound effect (AUTO group 2). The number of sound effects of the notice effect is huge compared to the number of channels, and a plurality of effect sound effects can be simultaneously reproduced in duplicate. Particularly, in the first half of the fluctuation, output of the effect sound effect exceeding the number of allocated channels may be required by, for example, executing the preview of the pending fluctuation together with the notification of the fluctuation. In such a case, in the channel assigned to the AUTO group 1, the effect sound having a lower priority is output while the effect sound having a higher priority is replaced and output, thereby maximizing the interest of the game. ..

Furthermore, it is desirable that the effect of notifying the degree of expectation by changing the hold display of the variable display and the effect sound effect accompanying the change can greatly enhance the player's expectation and is surely executed. .. In the present embodiment, by outputting the effect sound effect relating to such a hold display (hold sound) from the channel belonging to the AUTO group 2, it is possible to reproduce more reliably independently of the notice effect related to the variable display. it can. Also, unlike the case of the notice effect in the variable display, the number of effect sound effects that are output at the same time does not greatly exceed the number of channels assigned to the AUTO group 2, so output of effect effect sound is stopped. It is less likely to be done. Further, even in the case of being stopped, the output of the effect sound effect having a lower priority is only stopped. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game by surely executing the production that is highly effective in increasing the player's expectation.

Further, in this embodiment, the channels to which the automatic channel system is applied and the channels to which the fixed channel system is applied are mixed. As described above, in the automatic channel method, a finite number of channels are effectively used by searching for empty channels, and priority effects are output by setting the priority order and sounds with high importance are output. Is possible. On the other hand, the fixed channel method is applied to the case where the sound is continuously output like BGM, or the case where the sound is preferentially output to notify of a failure or fraudulent activity of the gaming machine. In this way, by applying a channel system suitable for the characteristics and application of the sound, each channel can be effectively used, and moreover, appropriate control can be performed according to the output condition of the sound. For example, in the control of outputting BGM, the sound may be output to a pre-allocated channel regardless of the game state, and in the control of outputting the alarm sound, the designated channel is searched without searching for an empty channel. You can output the sound directly to. On the other hand, in the automatic channel system, as described above, it is possible to maximize the use of the vacant channels and preferentially output the sound having a high effect of effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, by controlling the volume for each effect sound effect (channel), it is possible to emphasize and execute an effect having a high priority. Also, the effect being executed can be continued while lowering the volume without interruption. At this time, the volume can be returned to the original volume as long as the effect with the lower priority executed earlier is still continuing after the effect with the higher priority is completed. Further, as described in the embodiment, by stopping the other effects and executing the specific effect alone, the effect of the specific effect can be emphasized. In this way, in the present embodiment, it is possible to increase the variation of production and improve the interest of the game.

[15-2. Modified example of sound control in which fixed channel method and automatic channel method are mixed] In the sound control method described above, the number of channels for which the automatic channel method is set and the number of channels for which the fixed channel method is set are preset. However, in this modification, a modification in which the number of channels for which the automatic channel system is set and the number of channels for which the fixed channel system is set are variable will be described.

[15-2-1. Performance example]
When the number of channels is made variable, for example, there may be a case where it is desired to temporarily output more sounds than the number of channels to which the same type of sound can be assigned. For example, in the case of a game machine capable of executing an effect including a plurality of scenes, the screen is divided into a plurality of areas (for example, 9 divisions), and different scenes are displayed on each of the divided screens. At that time, it is possible to output BGM corresponding to each scene. FIG. 235 is a diagram showing a screen configuration example of the effect in the modification of the present embodiment. The effect example shown in FIG. 235 is a notice effect in the latter half of the fluctuation after the reach occurs.

In this modification, the display screen is divided into nine parts, and an effect of displaying different scenes on each screen (multi-screen effect) is executed. Then, one of the scenes is selected, and the effect corresponding to the selected scene is executed. At this time, BGM (9 types) of each scene is simultaneously output.
The scene may be selected by lottery or may be selected by the player.

The gaming machine of this modification uses 32 channels in sound source control, as in the above-described embodiment. The default channel allocation is the same as the arrangement shown in FIG. 229. Therefore, it is possible to simultaneously output four types (8 channels) of BGM at the same time. However, in the multi-screen production in this modification, it is necessary to output 9 types of BGM at the same time. Therefore, in the present modification, channels for outputting BGM are reassigned and the channel arrangement is reorganized.

[15-2-2. Channel layout]
FIG. 236 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration table of reproduction channels in the sound source control in the modification of the present embodiment, (A) shows a default configuration, and (B) shows a configuration when executing a multi-screen effect. The default configuration of FIG. 236(A) is the same as the arrangement shown in FIG. 229, as described above.

In this modification, when the multi-screen effect is started, the arrangement of the channels shown in FIG. 236(A) is changed to the arrangement shown in FIG. 236(B). Specifically, a fixed channel type channel for outputting BGM is added (channels 8 to 17), and the number of channels assigned to the AUTO group 1 and employing the automatic channel method is reduced. This is because it is difficult for the player to recognize even if a different notice effect is executed during execution of the multi-screen effect.

After the start of the multi-screen effect, all BGMs corresponding to each scene are reproduced while all the scenes are displayed. At this time, if all the BGMs are output with the normal volume, the volume becomes too loud, and therefore the volume is output with a lower volume than usual. Then, when a scene is selected, a notice effect (second notice) based on the selected scene is executed, the BGM volume of the selected scene is set to a normal volume, and the reproduction of the other BGM is ended. .. In addition, when the player selects a scene, for example, a BGM of the selected scene is changed until another scene is selected by selecting a screen divided by the operation unit provided in the gaming machine. The volume may be made larger than the BGM of the scene, or the BGM of the other scene may be made smaller.

[15-2-3. Volume control]
FIG. 237 is a timing chart showing an example of the volume change of the sound effect in the latter half of the variation of the modification of the present embodiment, (A) is the output timing of the effect sound effect, and (B) is the volume change of each effect sound effect. Indicates.

In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 237, at the timing when execution of the multi-screen effect is determined (for example, at the start of fluctuation), the channel arrangement is changed from the default state (FIG. 236(A)) to the arrangement for multi-screen effect (FIG. 236(B). )) is changed. After the first half change ends (time t11), reach occurs and the second half change is started. After the change in the second half is started, the multi-screen effect is started (time t12). At this time, as shown in FIG. 235, the display screen is divided, different scenes are displayed in the divided display areas, and BGM corresponding to each scene is output.

When the multi-screen effect is started, the BGM corresponding to the changed purpose of use of each channel is output to the arrangement for multi-screen effect (FIG. 236(B)). At this time, the volume V_2 smaller than the normal volume V_1 is output.

After that, when a scene for which the effect is to be continued is selected (time t13), the volume of the BGM corresponding to the selected scene is set to the normal volume V_1, and the output of other BGM is stopped. In the effect example shown in FIG. 237, scene 5 is selected and the volume of BGM_0-5 is set to the normal volume V_1. At this time, the display area corresponding to the scene 5 is displayed on the entire display screen, and the second half notice_5 corresponding to the scene 5 is executed.

After the end of the multi-screen effect, the channels outputting BGM_0-5 may be changed from channels 10 and 11 to channels 2 and 3, and the channel arrangement may be returned to the default. When the BGM output from the channels 10 and 11 is continued as in this modification, the channels may be returned to the default arrangement at the start of the next fluctuation.

Further, the channel arrangement may be changed at a timing required. For example, in this modification, the channel arrangement may be changed immediately before the execution of the multi-screen effect is started, or may be changed at the start of the second half change.

Furthermore, instead of changing the arrangement of the channels according to the contents of the effect, it may be changed when the game state (for example, an effect mode such as a big hit state, a time saving state, or a background change) changes.

[15-2-4. effect]
With the above configuration, the number of fixed channels (corresponding to “variable fixed ch” in FIG. 228(F)) for performing sound control by the fixed channel method and the automatic channel for performing sound control by the automatic channel method (see FIG. The number of “variable AUTOch” of 228 (F)) can be flexibly changed according to the type and number of sounds to be reproduced. As a result, more information sounds, BGMs or sound effects can be made reproducible depending on the situation, and more kinds of information sounds can be output, for example, when the game is not being played. The number of reproducible notification sounds can be reduced, and the number of BGMs and sound effects to be reproduced for effect can be increased.

[16. Control for sound output on other channels]
In the embodiment described above, an example has been described in which channels are grouped and the sounds to be output are managed by being associated with each group. Also, when the number of sounds that can be assigned simultaneously in the same group is exceeded, the output of the sound being sounded is stopped and a new sound is output based on a predetermined condition, or the output of a new sound is stopped. Then, the control for the sound being output belonging to the same group has been described. Here, a case will be described in which when a sound is newly assigned to a channel to be output, control such as changing the volume of a sound being output on another channel is performed.

After the start of the variation of the special symbol, in the state before the reach occurs (during the first half variation), the output of the predetermined effect sound and the output of the sound of the BGM being reproduced and other effects are regulated (silenced) for a predetermined time. As a typical effect for performing such control, there is a blackout effect in which the output of a sound effect is regulated and the screen is darkened. In the blackout effect, after a predetermined time has elapsed after the output of the sound effect was regulated, the darkening of the screen is released, and the output of the sound by the BGM or other effects is restarted, so that the newly output sound (the sound It is possible to increase the player's expectation for the fluctuation by making the effect including the output of (1) prominent to draw the player's attention.

In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which, instead of deallocating the channel from which the sound effect is output and newly allocating the sound, a new sound is allocated and output to an empty channel. In this case, in order to return the output of BGM or the like to the state before the regulation, the volume (volume) may be returned without considering the processing such as reassigning the sound to the channel. Hereinafter, specific embodiments will be described.

[16-1. Control when sounds of different groups are being output]
In this embodiment, channels are grouped and a priority is set for each group. Then, a case where a sound is output to a channel that belongs to a group having a lower priority level and a sound is output to a channel that belongs to a group that has a higher priority level will be described.

[16-1-1. Volume control table by channel group]
FIG. 238 is a diagram showing an example of a channel group-based volume control table showing the priority order of volume (volume) control for each group in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, each channel is a fixed channel (fixed channel) 1, a fixed channel (fixed channel) 2, an automatic channel group (AUTO group) 1, an automatic channel group (AUTO group) 2, an automatic channel group (AUTO group). It is divided into 5 groups of 3.

A group volume priority and a suppression volume value are set for each group.
The group volume priority indicates the priority among the groups, and the smaller the numerical value, the higher the priority. In this embodiment, a numerical value of 1 or more is set, and “1” has the highest priority.

The suppression volume value is a numerical value indicating a mode in which the volume of another sound being reproduced is changed when the sound is reproduced on a channel belonging to a group having a low priority. Specifically, when "-1" is set, the sound reproduction is continued as it is without changing other sounds being reproduced. When "0" is set, control is performed so that other sounds being reproduced are silenced. When a numerical value other than “0” is set, for example, when “50” is set, the volume of another sound being reproduced is suppressed to 50%. That is, when a numerical value from 1 to 100 is set, the volume is changed with the unit being %. It should be noted that a numerical value of 100 or more may be set to control the volume to be larger than usual.

Furthermore, each setting value will be described with reference to FIG. 238. In the present embodiment as well, as in the above-described embodiment, channels of the fixed channel system and the automatic channel system coexist. In the fixed channel, a sound that is preferentially output such as a notification sound or BGM or that is always output is assigned. In the automatic channel, grouped effect sound effects are assigned according to the type and importance of the effect.

In fixed ch1, the group volume priority is set to "1", which is the highest. Further, since the suppression volume value is set to "0", when a sound is reproduced on the fixed ch1, all other sounds being reproduced are muted. The sound reproduced by the fixed ch1 is a notification sound for notifying the outside such as a player or an employee of a game hall as shown as a reference reproduction sound. It may be an alarm sound for notifying that a failure has occurred in the gaming machine, or an alarm sound such as a ball clogging. That is, when the sound is output from the fixed ch1, the output of the effect sound effect is stopped and only the notification sound is output, because the occurrence of a fraudulent act or a failure is a factor. Further, while the notification sound is being output from the fixed channel 1 having the highest priority, the output of other sounds having a relatively low priority is restricted.

In the fixed ch2, the group volume priority is set to "4", which is the lowest in FIG. 238. Further, since the suppression volume value is set to "-1", even if the reproduction of a sound on the fixed ch2 is started, it does not affect other sounds being reproduced. The sound played on the fixed ch2 is mainly the BGM in the game, and in the normal game, the effect sound that draws the player's attention in response to the execution of the variable display of the special symbol while the BGM is being output, etc. Is output.

In AUTO group 1, the group volume priority is set to "2". Further, since the suppression volume value is set to "0", when the sound is reproduced in the AUTO group 1, all the reproduced sounds other than the notification sound output from the fixed ch1 are muted.
That is, the sound output in the AUTO group 1 is output with the highest priority in the effect, and the other sounds are muted and output alone.

Specific sounds output in the AUTO group 1 include a big hit confirmation sound, a blackout effect sound, a V winning sound, etc., as shown in the reference playback sound. The big hit confirmation sound is a sound that informs that the result of the variable display is a big hit at a predetermined timing such as at the time of winning a start, and is a production effect sound that maximizes the player's expectation. The V winning sound is a sound that informs that a game ball has won in the V zone and is determined to shift to, for example, a high-probability state. Like the jackpot sound, the player's expectation is greatly improved. Can be made.

The blackout sound effect is a sound effect that is output in a silent state by suppressing the output of other effect sound effects when the blackout effect is executed. At this time, the display of the effect screen is also darkened. At this time, an effect of emitting a flash on the screen may be executed together with the output of the blackout sound effect. The jackpot confirmation sound and the V winning sound are the output of the sound that is suppressed in a short time after the output of the sound in order to suppress the output of other sounds so that the player does not miss the output of these sounds. Is restarted. On the other hand, with regard to the blackout effect sound, the attention of the player is focused on the blackout effect by keeping the effect sound of other effects not output for a predetermined time even after the blackout effect sound is output. In addition, after the blackout effect is executed, the effect linked to the blackout effect may be executed in the variation, for example, the blackout effect is executed in the first half variation and the corresponding effect is executed in the second half variation. You may

In AUTO group 2, the group volume priority is set to "3". Further, since the suppression volume value is set to "50", when the sound is reproduced in the AUTO group 2, all the reproduced sounds in the groups whose priority is "4" or less (50% of 50%) are reproduced. Output is suppressed). For example, since the BGM output from the fixed ch2 has the group volume priority of "4" as described above, the volume is halved, and the sound of the AUTO group 2 is output at the normal volume. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect that attracts the player's attention while continuing the flow of the game without completely muting the BGM. The specific sound output in the AUTO group 2 is, for example, the first-half warning sound effect or the second-half warning sound effect.

In AUTO group 3, the group volume priority is set to "2". Further, as in the case of AUTO group 2, since the suppression volume value is set to "50", when a sound is reproduced in AUTO group 3, a group whose priority is "3" or less is being reproduced. All the sounds of are halved. For example, when the notice sound effect is output from the AUTO group 2, the volume of the notice sound effect is reduced by half. At this time, if the volume of the BGM output from the fixed ch2 is already halved, the volume may be continued without being changed, or the volume may be halved (a quarter of the original volume). May be.

Specific sounds output in the AUTO group 3 include, for example, a hold winning sound at the time of winning a start prize, a hold change sound indicating that the hold display has changed, and a button pressing sound notifying that the effect button has been pressed. is there. In the present embodiment, when the group volume priorities are the same, the sound is output as is with the normal volume. Therefore, even if the blackout effect of the AUTO group 2 is executed and the output of BGM or the like is restricted, the sounds belonging to the AUTO group 3 are output. For example, when the game ball enters the starting winning opening, the pending winning sound is output even during the blackout effect execution.

[16-1-2. Group volume control processing]
Next, the procedure of volume control in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 239 is a flowchart showing a procedure of a group volume control process for performing sound control corresponding to the group to which the output sound of this embodiment belongs. The group volume control process is executed in the sound data creation process (step S1032) in the peripheral control unit steady process (FIG. 95) of the peripheral control unit power-on process. The group volume control process will be described below.

When the group volume control process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines whether or not there is a request for reproducing a new sound (step S1401). If there is no request to reproduce a new sound (the result of step S1401 is “No”), the processes of step S1420 and subsequent steps are executed.

On the other hand, when there is a new sound reproduction request (result of step S1401 is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a identifies the channel group from the sound number of the reproduction requested sound, and sets the volume control table for each channel group. From FIG. 238, the suppression volume value and group volume priority order corresponding to the channel group are acquired (step S1402).

Next, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the acquired suppression volume value is "-1" (no suppression control) (step S1403). When the acquired suppression volume value is "-1" (result of step S1403 is "Yes"), that is, when the sound being reproduced is not controlled, the processes of step S1406 and thereafter are executed.

When the acquired suppression volume value is not “−1” (result of step S1403 is “No”), that is, when performing control for the sound being reproduced, the peripheral control MPU 1511a further sets the reproduction requested sound. It is determined whether the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the group volume priority have been registered in the work area (step S1404). When the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the group volume priority order have been registered (the result of step S1404 is "Yes"), the processing of step S1406 and thereafter is executed.

When the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the group volume priority order are not registered (the result of step S1404 is “No”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the group volume priority of the sound requested to be reproduced. The ranking is held in the work area (step S1405). In this work area, parameters of the currently reproduced sound having the highest priority (sound number, suppression volume value, and group volume priority) are recorded.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not there is a sound that is already being reproduced (step S1406). If there is no sound being reproduced (result of step S1406 is “No”), a predetermined volume value is set to the volume of the sound for which a new reproduction request is made (step S1407). On the other hand, if there is a sound that is already being reproduced (the result of step S1406 is “Yes”), sound control is performed based on the parameters stored in the work area and the parameters of the new sound in the processing of step S1410 and subsequent steps.

Explaining the control on the sound being reproduced, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines whether or not a sound parameter for suppressing the output of the sound being reproduced has been registered in the work area (step S1410). When the sound parameter for suppressing the output of the sound being reproduced is not registered (the result of step S1410 is “No”), the output of the sound for which a new reproduction is requested is set (step S1407).

To describe the sound control executed in and after step S1410, when the sound that suppresses the output of the sound being reproduced is already registered (the result of step S1410 is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that a new reproduction request has been issued. The group volume priority order of the existing sound is compared with the group volume priority order already held in the work area (step S1411).

When the group volume priority order of the sound for which a new playback request is made is lower than the group volume priority order already held in the work area (the result of step S1411 is “<”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a notifies the new playback request. The volume of the affected sound is reduced based on the suppression volume value of the work area (step S1414).

If the group volume priority order of the sound for which a new playback request is made is higher than the group volume priority order stored in the work area (the result of step S1411 is “>”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that the new playback The sound number of the requested sound, the suppression volume value, and the group volume priority are overwritten in the work area (step S1412), and the volume of the newly requested sound is set to a predetermined volume value (step S1413). ).

Further, when the group volume priority of the sound for which a new reproduction request is made is equal to the group volume priority held in the work area (result of step S1411 is “=”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a While maintaining the content, the volume of the sound for which a new reproduction request is made is set to a predetermined volume value (step S1413).

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the group volume priority order of the sound that is already being reproduced is lower than the group volume priority order recorded in the work area (step S1415). If the group volume priority of the sound being reproduced is lower than the group volume priority recorded in the work area (the result of step S1415 is "Yes"), the volume of the sound being reproduced was recorded in the work area. The volume is reduced based on the suppression volume value (step S1416).

When the processes of step S1415 and step S1416 are executed for all the sounds being reproduced (step S1417), or after the process of step S1407 ends, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that the suppression volume value and the group volume priority order are the work. It is determined whether or not the area is already registered (step S1420). If the suppression volume value and the group volume priority have not been registered in the work area (result of step S1420 is “No”), this processing ends.

If the suppression volume value and the group volume priority have been registered in the work area (result of step S1420 is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a plays back the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area. It is determined whether or not the process is completed (step S1421). When the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area has not been completed (the result of step S1421 is “No”), this processing ends.

When the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area is completed (the result of step S1421 is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a sets the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the group volume priority to the work area. To erase (step S1422). Finally, with respect to all the sounds being reproduced, the original volume value set in advance is restored (steps S1423 and S1424), and this processing ends.

The above is the processing for controlling the volume of the sound being reproduced when the reproduction of a new sound is requested in the present embodiment. Next, sound volume control will be described in chronological order.
FIG. 240 is a timing chart for explaining the procedure of controlling the volume in the present embodiment in chronological order, (A) shows the execution timing of the effect, and (B) shows the volume of each effect. In FIG. 240, an example of executing the notice effect and the blackout effect will be described.

When the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the game is started and the normal BGM is output on the fixed channel (fixed ch2). As shown in FIG. 238, the fixed ch2 has the group volume priority order of “4” and the suppression volume value of “−1”. Since the normal BGM has a suppression volume value of “−1”, the sound number, the group volume priority order, and the suppression volume value of the normal BGM are not recorded in the work area and the sound is reproduced.

When the game ball wins the starting winning opening (here, the sound output at the time of holding winning is omitted), the variable display (dynamic display) of the special symbol is started, and the first half notice A is started (time t21). The effect sound effect of the first half notice A is output on the channel belonging to the AUTO group 2, and the group volume priority is “3” and the suppression volume value is “50” (the results of step S1402 and step S1403 are “No”). .. Since no parameters were recorded in the work area at the start of the first-half notice (the result of step S1404 is "No"), the parameters of the effect sound effects of the first-half notice are recorded in the work area (step S1405).

At the start of the first-half notice A, the normal BGM is output (the result of step S1406 is "Yes"), and the sound number of the effect sound of the first-half notice A is registered in the work area (the result of step S1410 is "Yes"). At this time, since the group priority of the sound for which the new reproduction request is made is the same as the group priority of the work area (the result of step S1411 is “=”), the volume of the sound for which the new reproduction request is made is previously set. The determined volume value is set (step S1413).

At this time, since the normal BGM is being reproduced and the group volume priority is lower than the effect sound effect of the first half fluctuation (the result of step S1415 is “Yes”), the sound effect based on the parameter of the effect sound effect of the first-half notice A is used. Output is suppressed (step S1416). Specifically, the volume of the normal BGM is reduced (suppressed) to 50% output.

Then, the blackout effect is executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied (time t22). The sound effect of the blackout effect is output on the channel belonging to the AUTO group 1, and the group volume priority is “2” and the suppression volume value is “0” (step S1402). At this time, although the parameters of the first half notice A are recorded in the work area, since the blackout effect has a higher group volume priority (result of step S1411 is “>”), the content of the work area is blacked out. Parameter is updated (step S1412), and a predetermined volume value is set to the volume of the sound for which a new reproduction request is made (step S1413).

Furthermore, since the group priority order of the effect sound effects of the normal BGM and the first-half notice A that are being reproduced is lower than the blackout effect of the sound effect of the blackout effect (the result of step S1415 is “Yes”), these The volume of the sound effect of is reduced (step S1416). In the blackout effect, the suppression volume value is 0, so the sound is muted.

Further, the second notice B is started during the blackout effect execution (time t23). At this time, since the group volume priority of the second notice B is lower than the group volume priority of the blackout effect (the result of step S1411 is "<"), the second notice B is started in a muted state and the blackout effect is produced. Continues until the end.

After that, when the game ball wins the starting winning opening, the reserved winning sound is output (time t24).
The reserved winning sound is output on the channels belonging to the AUTO group 3, and the group volume priority is “2” and the suppression volume value is “50”. In the present embodiment, when the group volume priorities are the same (result of step S1411 is “=”), the parameters recorded in the work area are maintained while outputting with a predetermined volume. Therefore, even when the blackout effect is being executed, the reserved winning sound is output as usual.

When the blackout effect is completed (time t26), the blackout effect parameters recorded in the work area are erased (step S1422), and the regulated volume is returned to the predetermined volume (step S1423). .. Specifically, the volumes of the normal BGM, the first half notice A and the second half notice B are returned to the predetermined volumes. After that, the output of the sounds of the first half notice A and the second half notice B ends (time t27, t28).

As described above, in the present embodiment, while a sound effect having a high group priority is being output, by suppressing the output of a sound effect having a low group priority, a particular effect can be emphasized. Furthermore, by controlling the volume with the suppression volume value, it is possible to let the player recognize that multiple effects are progressing at the same time, and the effect sound that greatly enhances the player's expectation, such as a big hit confirmation sound, can be grouped. By setting the priority to be high, it is possible to execute the effect without impairing the effect.

In addition, when a high priority sound is newly output and the output of the effect sound effect being reproduced is suppressed, in the above-described embodiment, the volume of the effect sound effect being reproduced is immediately output based on the suppression volume value. However, the volume of the other effect sound effects is gradually lowered to the target value (volume based on the suppression volume value) and faded out from the timing when the high priority sound is output. Good. In this case, the start value (volume currently being reproduced), the time to reach the target value, and the amount of change may be defined, or the target value may be set based on the effect contents such as the length of the reproduction time of the effect sound. The time to reach and the amount of change may be set. For example, if the output of the new effect sound effect is short, the time to reach the target value may be set to be short so as to make the effect sound effect stand out, or if the output of the new effect sound effect is relatively long, the target The time to reach the value may be set to be long to reduce a feeling of strangeness that may occur when the effect sound effects are switched.

For example, if the newly output sound effect is a short-time output such as a big hit confirmation sound or a V winning sound, by fading out the output of the effect sound being reproduced such as BGM in a relatively short time, The effect sound that is newly output can be made more prominent without breaking the tempo of the game.

Furthermore, when the output of the new effect sound effect is finished and the output of the other effect sound effect is restarted, the volume of the other effect sound effect is immediately returned to the target value (predetermined volume value). Instead of this, the start value (volume under regulation) and the time to reach the target value and the amount of change may be regulated to control the fade-in. For example, the output of the normal BGM is suppressed to 50% during the sound effect reproduction of the first-half notice A, but when the output of the normal BGM is restarted, the normal volume is set as the target value, and the start value (volume currently being reproduced. Then, the volume is controlled to 50%), and the fade-in is controlled based on the amount of change for a specified time. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the player's discomfort while making the switching of the effect sound effects prominent, and to enhance the interest of the game.

Further, although the present embodiment has been described by taking the effect sound effect as an example, it can be similarly applied to the case of an alarm sound or a notification sound. As an example, when outputting a notification sound with a high degree of importance (priority) (for example, an alarm sound due to cheating), a notification sound with a relatively low degree of priority (priority) (in addition to a staging effect sound) is output. For example, the output of a ball clogging notification sound) may be restricted. On the other hand, when a fraudulent activity is performed while the notification sound of low importance (priority) is being output, the output of the notification sound is interrupted and the notification sound (alarm) of high importance (priority) is issued. Sound) may be preferentially output.

It should be noted that the warning sound and the notification sound do not have the sound output time set like the effect sound, but the sound output is continued until the cause of the warning or the notification is eliminated. Therefore, in the case where a plurality of types of alarm sounds and notification sounds are output, the sound with the highest priority is output, and after the cause of outputting the sound is eliminated, another notification sound is output. .. At this time, the sound with the next highest priority may be output and the output of the remaining sounds may be restricted, or all the remaining sounds may be output at the same time.

[16-2. Volume control by sound output time (length)
The control of the sounds output in duplicate according to the priority order among the groups has been described above. Next, a control example of controlling the sound volume based on the sound output time (long or short) will be described.

[16-2-1. Volume control table for each sound effect]
FIG. 241 is a diagram showing an example of a sound effect volume control table showing volume (volume) control for each total reproduction time (output time) of sound in the present embodiment. A used reproduction channel (ch), a total reproduction time, and a suppression volume value are set for each sound effect.

Similar to the example shown in FIG. 238, the used reproduction channels are each divided into five groups of fixed ch1, fixed ch2, AUTO group 1, AUTO group 2, and AUTO group 3.

The total reproduction time is the time from the start to the stop of the output of the sound effect. When the total reproduction time is set to -1, the effect sound is output with a preset volume without being affected by the suppression control by the effect sound to be output to the other. At this time, the volume of the sound effect is controlled so that it cannot be suppressed.

When the total reproduction time is set to 0, the loop reproduction is repeatedly output, and the output is continued until another sound effect is assigned to the same channel. If the numerical value set for the total reproduction time is any other number (positive number), it is the reproduction time of the sound effect. The unit of the total reproduction time is millisecond (ms).

As in the example shown in FIG. 238, the suppression volume value is a numerical value indicating a mode in which the volumes of other sound effects that are simultaneously output are changed. Specifically, in the case of "-1", the reproduction of the sound is continued as it is without changing the sound being reproduced, and in the case of "0", the sound effect being reproduced (in the total reproduction time is- The output of sound effects other than those for which 1 is set is suppressed (silenced). In the case of a numerical value other than “0”, for example, when “50” is set, the volume of the sound being reproduced is suppressed to 50%.

Next, each sound effect will be described with reference to FIG. 241. In the present embodiment as well, similarly to the above-described embodiment, the fixed channel type and the automatic channel type channels are mixed, and the assigned sound effects are also the same. Is. In the example shown in FIG. 241, the suppression volume value is set for each channel group, but it may be set for each sound effect.

Since the total reproduction time is set to “−1” and the suppression volume value is set to “0” for the sound effect assigned to the fixed ch1, when these sound effects are reproduced, the other sound being reproduced is not reproduced. All sounds are muted. The sound reproduced by the fixed ch1 is a notification sound for notifying the outside such as a player or an employee of a game hall, and is caused by a fraudulent activity or a failure. Cannot be suppressed, and the output of other sound effects during playback is forcibly suppressed (stopped, muted).

Since the total reproduction time is set to “0” and the suppression volume value is set to “−1” for the sound effect assigned to the fixed ch2, the sound effect is repeatedly output from the start of the output. These sound effects do not affect other sounds being played. The sound effect assigned to the fixed ch2 is mainly BGM in the game.

In the sound effect assigned to the AUTO group 1, since the total reproduction time is set to a value (reproduction time) set for each sound effect and the suppression volume value is set to “0”, the notification sound output from the fixed ch1 All other sounds being played are muted. That is, the sound output in the AUTO group 1 is output with the highest priority in the effect, and the other sounds are muted and output alone. As shown in FIG. 238, concrete sounds output in the AUTO group 1 include a jackpot sound, a blackout sound effect, a V winning sound, and the like.

In the sound effects assigned to the AUTO group 2 and the AUTO group 3, the total reproduction time is set to a value (reproduction time) set for each sound effect, and the suppression volume value is set to “50”. When a sound is reproduced, the outputs of other sounds being reproduced are all halved (suppressed to 50% output). Thereby, for example, as a specific sound output in the AUTO group 2 that can reduce the output of the BGM by half and emphasize the effect while continuing the flow of the game, for example, the first-half warning sound effect and the second-half warning effect Sounds and the like, and specific sounds output by the AUTO group 3 include, for example, a hold winning sound at the time of winning a start prize, a hold changing sound indicating that a hold display has changed, and a pressing of an effect button. For example, a button press sound for notification.

[16-2-2. Volume control processing]
In the present embodiment, the output of the sound effect that is duplicately reproduced is controlled according to the reproduction time of the sound effect. 242A and 242B are flowcharts showing the procedure of the volume control processing for performing sound control based on the parameters set for each sound effect of this embodiment. Hereinafter, the procedure for controlling the output of the sound effect in this embodiment will be described.

When the volume control process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines whether or not there is a request for reproducing a new sound (step S1501A). If there is no request for reproduction of a new sound (the result of step S1501A is “No”), the processing of step S1530A and thereafter is executed.

On the other hand, when there is a playback request for a new sound (the result of step S1501A is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a identifies the sound effect name based on the sound number of the sound for which the playback request is made, and sets the sound effect volume. The suppression volume value and the total reproduction time are acquired from the control table (FIG. 241) (step S1502A).

Next, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the acquired suppression volume value is "-1" (no suppression control) (step S1503A). When the acquired suppression volume value is "-1" (result of step S1503A is "Yes"), that is, when the control of the sound being reproduced is not performed, the processing of step S1506A and thereafter is executed.

When the acquired suppression volume value is not “−1” (result of step S1503A is “No”), that is, when performing control for the sound being reproduced, the peripheral control MPU 1511a further determines the reproduction requested sound. It is determined whether the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time have been registered in the work area (step S1504A). If the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time have been registered in the work area (result of step S1504A is "Yes"), the processes of step S1506A and thereafter are executed.

If the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the group volume priority order are not registered (the result of step S1504A is “No”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines the sound number of the sound requested to be reproduced, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time. Is held in the work area (step S1505A).

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not there is a sound that is already being reproduced (step S1506A). If there is no sound being reproduced (the result of step S1506A is “No”), a predetermined volume value is set to the volume of the sound for which a new reproduction request is made (step S1507A). On the other hand, if there is a sound that is already being reproduced (the result of step S1506A is "Yes"), sound control is performed based on the parameters stored in the work area and the parameters of the new sound in the processing of step S1510A and subsequent steps.

The sound control based on the parameter stored in the work area and the parameter of the new sound will be described. The peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines whether or not the total reproduction time of the sound for which the new reproduction request is made is “−1”. Yes (step S1510A). When the total reproduction time of the sound for which a new reproduction request is made is “−1” (the result of step S1510A is “Yes”), as described above, the alarm sound at the time of occurrence of an abnormality is output, and the new sound is output. Prohibits the suppression of the volume of the playback sound, and forcibly suppresses the output of other sound effects during playback.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a sets a predetermined volume value to the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made (step S1511A). Further, the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time for which a new reproduction request has been made are overwritten in the work area (step S1512A).

Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a suppresses the volume of the sound effect being reproduced based on the suppression volume value of the sound for which a new reproduction request is made (step S1513A). When the volume of all the sound effects being reproduced is suppressed, the processing from step S1530A is executed (step S1514A).

On the other hand, if the total reproduction time of the sound for which a new reproduction request is made is not “−1” (result of step S1510A is “No”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines the total reproduction time of the sound held in the work area. It is determined whether or not a tone number is set to "-1" or the work area (step S1520A). When the total reproduction time of the sound held in the work area is "-1" or when the sound number is not set in the work area (result of step S1520A is "Yes"), the processing of step S1530A and thereafter is executed.

When the total reproduction time of the sound held in the work area is not “−1” and the sound number is set in the work area (result of step S1520A is “No”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a It is determined whether or not the suppression volume value of the sound for which a new reproduction request is made is smaller than the suppression volume value held in the work area (step S1521A).

When the suppression volume value of the sound for which a new reproduction request is made is smaller than the suppression volume value held in the work area (the result of step S1521A is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines the sound for which the new reproduction request is made. The number, the suppression volume value and the total reproduction time are overwritten in the work area (step S1522A).

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether the total reproduction time of the sound for which a new reproduction request is made is shorter than the total reproduction time held in the work area (step S1523A). When the total reproduction time of the sound for which a new reproduction request is made is shorter than or equal to the total reproduction time held in the work area (the result of step S1521A is “Yes”), the volume of the sound for which a new reproduction request is made is set. A predetermined volume value is set (step S1524A). On the other hand, if the total reproduction time of the sound for which the new reproduction request is made is longer than the total reproduction time held in the work area (the result of step S1521A is “No”), the volume of the sound for which the new reproduction request is made. Is set to the volume value reduced based on the suppression volume value of the work area (step S1525A).

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the suppression volume value is smaller than or the same as the suppression volume value recorded in the work area for all the sounds being reproduced (step S1526A). Then, when the suppression volume value of the sound being reproduced is larger than the suppression volume value recorded in the work area (the result of step S1526A is “No”), the volume of the sound being reproduced is recorded in the work area. It is reduced based on the suppression volume value (step S1527A).

When the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs the processes of steps S1526A and S1527A for all the sounds being reproduced, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes the processes of step S1530A and subsequent steps (step S1528A).

When the volume control for the sound for which a new reproduction is requested and the sound being reproduced is completed (step S1507A, step S1514A, step S1524A, step S1525A, step S1528A), the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time. Is registered in the work area (step S1530A). If the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time have not been registered in the work area (result of step S1530A is “No”), this processing ends.

When the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time are already registered in the work area (the result of step S1530A is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a reproduces the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area. It is determined whether or not is completed (step S1531A). If the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area has not ended (result of step S1531A is “No”), this processing ends.

When the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area is completed (the result of step S1531A is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time from the work area. It is erased (step S1532A). Finally, with respect to all the sounds being reproduced, the predetermined original volume value is returned (step S1533A, step S1534A), and this processing ends.

The above is the process of controlling the volume of the sound based on the total reproduction time of the sound effect in the present embodiment. Next, the sound volume control will be specifically described in chronological order. FIG. 243 is a timing chart for explaining the procedure for controlling the volume in the present embodiment in chronological order, (A) shows the execution timing of the effect, and (B) shows the volume of each effect. In FIG. 243, an example of executing the first-half notice effect and the blackout effect will be described.

When the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the game is started and the normal BGM is output. The normal BGM is output with the fixed ch2, and the suppression volume value is set to “−1” as shown in FIG. The normal BGM is a loop reproduction in which the reproduction is repeated until the BGM is switched, and 0 is set in the total reproduction time. Since the suppression volume value is “−1” (the result of step S1503A is “Yes”), the normal BGM parameter is not registered in the work area. Then, the preset volume value is set, and the normal BGM is output (step S1507A).

After that, when the game ball wins the starting winning opening and the variable display (dynamic display) of the special symbol is started, the output of the sound effect of the first-half notice A is newly requested to execute the first-half notice A. (Time t31). The sound effect of the first-half notice A is output on the channels belonging to the AUTO group 2, the total reproduction time is set to 15000 ms, and the suppression volume value is set to 50 (the result of step S1503A is “No”).

Further, at this point in time, since the parameter is not registered in the work area (the result of step S1504A is “No”), the sound number of the sound effect of the first-half notice A, the total reproduction time, and the suppression volume value are held in the work area ( Step S1505A).

Further, at the start timing of the first half notice A, the normal BGM is being reproduced (the result of step S1506A is “Yes”), the total reproduction time of the first half notice A is 15000 ms (the result of step S1510A is “No”), and new. The parameter of the sound effect of the first half notice A for which the reproduction request has been made is already registered in the work area (the result of step S1520A is “No”, the result of step S1521A is “No”, and the result of step S1523A is “Yes”). ). Therefore, the volume of the sound effect of the first half notice A for which a new reproduction request is made is set to a predetermined volume value (step S1524A).

Subsequently, since the normal BGM is being played back at this point and the volume has not been suppressed yet, the suppression volume value is "100", which is larger than the suppression volume value "50" of the first half notice A recorded in the work area. (The result of step S1526A is “No”), and the volume of normal BGM is reduced to 50% based on the suppression volume value “50” of the first-half notice A (step S1527A).

Subsequently, the parameter of the sound effect of the first-half notice A is already registered in the work area (the result of step S1530A is “Yes”), and the first-half notice A is continued (the result of step S1531A is “No”). , This process ends.

After that, the blackout effect is executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and a new sound reproduction request of the blackout effect sound effect is received (time t32). The blackout effect sound effect is output on the channel belonging to the AUTO group 1, and the total reproduction time is “8000” and the suppression volume value is “0” (the result of step S1503A is “No”). At this time, the parameter of the sound effect of the first-half notice A is already registered in the work area (the result of step S1504A is “Yes”), and the normal BGM and the sound effect of the first-half notice A are being output (step S1506A). The result is "Yes").

Further, the total reproduction time of the blackout effect sound effect for which a new reproduction request has been made is "8000" (result of step S1510A is "No"), and the total reproduction time of the first-half notice sound effect held in the work area. Is “15000” (the result of step S1520A is “No”).

Next, the suppression volume value of the sound effect of the first-half notice A held in the work area is "50", and the suppression volume value of the blackout effect sound effect for which a new reproduction request is made is "0" (step The result of S1521A is "Yes"), the sound number of the blackout effect sound effect for which a new reproduction request has been made, the suppression volume value "0", and the total reproduction time "8000" are overwritten in the work area (step S1522A).

Since the total reproduction time (8000 ms; a1) of the blackout notice effect sound effect is shorter than the total reproduction time (15000 ms) of the first-half notice A sound effect (the result of step S1523A is "Yes"), the blackout A predetermined volume value is set to the volume of the notice effect sound effect (step S1524A).

Next, the suppression volume value of the sound being reproduced is normally 50 for BGM, the sound effect for the first-half notice A is 100, and the suppression volume value for the blackout notice effect sound already recorded in the work area is "0". (The result of step S1526A is “No”), the volume of the sound effect of the normal BGM and the first-half notice A is set to “0” (step S1527A).

After that, when the game ball wins the starting winning opening during execution of the blackout effect, a new sound reproduction request of the reserved winning sound is received (time t33). The reserved winning sound is output on the channels belonging to the AUTO group 3, and the total reproduction time is "2000" and the suppression volume value is "50" (the result of step S1503A is "No"). At this time, the parameter of the blackout effect sound effect is already registered in the work area (the result of step S1504A is “Yes”), and the blackout effect sound effect, the normal BGM and the sound effect of the first half notice A are being output. Yes (the result of step S1506A is “Yes”). At this time, the output of the normal BGM and the sound effect of the first-half notice A is suppressed.

Further, the total playing time of the pending winning sound for which a new reproduction request is made is “2000” (the result of step S1510A is “No”), and the total playing time of the blackout effect sound effect held in the work area is “8000”. "(The result of step S1520A is "No").

Next, since the suppression volume value of the blackout effect sound effect held in the work area is "0" and the suppression volume value of the pending winning sound for which a new reproduction request is made is "50" (the result of step S1521A is “No”), the work area is not overwritten, but the total playing time (2000 ms; a2) of the reserved winning sound is shorter than the total playing time (8000 ms; a1) of the blackout effect sound effect (the result of step S1523A is “Yes”), and a predetermined volume value is set to the volume of the reserved winning sound (step S1524A). Further, since the work area is not updated, the suppression volume value of the sound being reproduced is the same as the suppression volume value recorded in the work area (the result of step S1526A is “Yes”). Even after the output of the reserved winning sound is completed (time t34), the blackout effect sound effect parameter is recorded in the work area, and thus the blackout effect sound effect is continuously output.

After that, when the blackout effect ends (time t35), since the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area ends (the result of step S1531A is “Yes”), the blackout stored in the work area The parameter of the effect sound effect is erased (step S1532A). Then, the volume of the sound effect of the normal BGM in which the reproduction of the sound is suppressed (the volume is reduced) and the sound effect of the first-half notice A is returned to a predetermined volume value (step S1533A). At this time, the normal BGM is suppressed during the sound effect reproduction of the first half notice A, but the normal volume is restored.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the volume of the sound effect that is being reproduced is muted to enable a particular effect (for example, a blackout effect) to be emphasized, while the effect sound effect is changed during the mute period. Even if the output ends, it is possible to provide the player with a production opportunity. Specifically, when the output of the sound effect is completed during the mute period, the sound effect is output even while the specific effect is executed and the output of the sound effect of the other effect is suppressed. While informing the player, if the output of the sound effect is continued until after the end of the muffling period, by suppressing the output of the sound effect of the effect during the muffling period, the execution of the specific effect is emphasized. be able to.

By the way, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 in which the number of channels is finite, a new sound is generated when the channels to which the sound data is to be allocated are not empty (the number of empty channels is 0). When the data allocation condition is satisfied, one of the sound outputs must be discarded, and there is a concern that amusement of the game may be deteriorated due to the appearance of an unintended sound output in the production design.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, when the condition for allocating new sound data is satisfied when there is no available channel (the number of available channels is 0), it is preset. By controlling so that the less important sound output is selectively discarded based on the priority order, it is possible to avoid the appearance of an unintended sound output in the production design and to reduce the amusement of the game. Proposed to be suppressed. However, it can be said that it is important to devise a technical measure in terms of how it is difficult for the situation itself to appear when there are no available channels (the number of available channels is 0).

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, various types of output are not provided as long as a proper game is performed so that more channel resources can be assigned to the effect sound (effect sound). With regard to the notification sound, it is possible to adopt a channel-saving type control structure that can appropriately notify the abnormality content and the like with only a single channel. Hereinafter, an example of a case where a channel-saving control structure is adopted for outputting various notification sounds will be described.

FIG. 244 shows a specific channel (hereinafter, referred to as channel X) out of a limited number of channels prepared as sound control by the fixed channel system for various notification sounds (payout notification sound and abnormality notification sound) excluding the effect sound. 2 shows an example of the sound definition table in the case of realizing the processing of outputting only in (). In this sound definition table, the definition of the priority order for playback, left/right pan initial value, top/bottom pan initial value, volume initial value, sound number, seek point, playback type setting and output type setting is managed for each sound name. doing. Here, for convenience of description, only the definitions of the notification sounds 1 to 7 are shown, and the definitions of other notification sounds and effect sounds are omitted. Note that the effect sound is defined by the fixed channel method illustrated in FIG. 209 and by the automatic channel method illustrated in FIG. 213 for each channel other than the channel X to which the notification sound is assigned. It is also possible to use it.

The priority order is a parameter used to determine which of the notification sounds should be assigned to the channel X and output when the plurality of notification sounds satisfy the output conditions. The high notification sound is assigned to the channel X and output, regardless of the allocation state of the notification sound having a low priority value to the channel X. As will be described later, if the priorities are the same, the notification sound previously assigned to the channel X is prioritized, and after the output of the notification sound is finished, the notification sound is assigned and output. Will be done.

The left and right pan initial values represent the sound image localization initial positions of the left and right speakers which are a combination of the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L, and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R. By dynamically changing the set values of the left and right pans during sound reproduction, a difference occurs in the volume output individually from the left and right speakers, and a sound image can be localized in an arbitrary space between the left and right speakers. For example, when "0x00" is set, it indicates that only the left speaker (upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L) outputs. When, for example, "0x80" is set, the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker are set. The volume difference output individually from the left and right speakers, which is a combination of the 921L, the upper right speaker 573R, and the lower right speaker 921R, becomes 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the left and right speakers. For example, when set to "0xFF", it indicates that only the right speaker (upper right speaker 573R and lower right speaker 921R) outputs.

The upper and lower pan initial values are, for example, sound image localization of sounds by upper and lower speakers such as a pair of upper speakers 573 (upper left speaker 573L and upper right speaker 573R) and a pair of lower speakers 921 (lower left speaker 921L and lower right speaker 921R). It represents the initial position. By dynamically changing the setting value of the upper and lower pans during sound reproduction, a difference occurs in the volume output individually from the upper and lower speakers, and a sound image can be localized in an arbitrary space between the upper and lower speakers. .. For example, when set to “0x00”, it indicates that the sound is output from only the pair of upper speakers 573, and when set to “0x80”, for example, the volume difference output individually from the upper and lower speakers made of these combinations. Becomes 0, and the sound image is localized at the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, if it is set to “0xFF”, it indicates that only the pair of lower speakers 921 outputs.

The volume initial value represents a volume setting at the start of reproduction, and can be set in a setting range of “0x00” to “0xFF”, for example. The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing each sound described above. The reproduction type setting is loop reproduction (corresponding to “LOOP” in the figure) that repeatedly reproduces the target sound, or 1SHOT reproduction (corresponding to “1SHOT” in the figure) that reproduces the target sound once. Is displayed. The output type setting indicates whether the target sound is reproduced in monaural or stereo.

FIG. 245 is a table showing, for each notification sound illustrated in FIG. 244, the notification content, the notification mode, the notification time, and the condition (cancellation condition) at which the notification ends, for each notification sound type.
In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a finite notification time is set for any notification sound, but this is set as much as possible in order to effectively utilize the single channel X. This is a measure to maintain the state and to refrain from outputting the notification sound after that.

As shown in FIG. 245, the alarm sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is in a state in which magnetism is detected by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 (state in which there is a high possibility that a fraudulent act using a magnet is performed). It is to notify that there is. Then, as the notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "a magnetism is detected" and a display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, "a magnetism is detected"). ) And lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, respectively. The notification time is 60 seconds (equivalent to repeating the notification sound for 6 times) from the time when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 detects the loop processing that repeatedly outputs the notification sound such as “Boo Boo magnetism is detected”. On the other hand, regarding the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the lighting by various lamps, the execution is continued until the release condition “power-on” is satisfied. Has become.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the alarm sound 1 (magnetic abnormality), a state in which vibration is detected by the vibration sensor 2405 (it is highly possible that a fraudulent act due to a pounding act is performed). State 2) notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality), and the count sensor 4005 (first big winning hole sensor or second big hole) even though it is not in the big hit game state (large winning hole open state) Notification sound that informs that it is in a state where it is detected by the winning hole sensor (a state in which there is a high possibility that a fraudulent act of forcibly opening the closed large winning hole and winning a game ball is being performed) 3 (major prize winning) is regarded as belonging to the first notification group when there is a high possibility that some cheating has been performed, and regarding the notification sounds that belong to the first notification group, The notification mode, notification time, and cancellation condition are all set to be common.

For example, in the notification sound 2 (abnormal vibration), as the notification mode, a loop process of repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “a boom vibration is detected” and a display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, , "Vibration is detected") and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are respectively performed, and detection by the vibration sensor 2405 is performed as notification time. While the loop process of repeatedly outputting the notification sound is completed within 60 seconds (corresponding to the repetition of the notification sound for six times) from the time when there is, the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and various lamps With respect to the lighting by, the execution is continued until the power-on again, which is the release condition, is satisfied. Further, in the notification sound 3 (large prize winning abnormality), as a notification mode, a loop process of repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "A big prize winning abnormality is detected" and a display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 are displayed. Display (for example, "A big prize abnormality has been detected") and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are executed, respectively, and as the notification time, While the loop process of repeatedly outputting the notification sound is completed within 60 seconds (corresponding to the repetition of the notification sound for six times) from the time when the detection by the count sensor 4005 is performed, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. The display and the lighting by the various lamps will be continuously executed until the release condition “power-on” is satisfied.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, regarding the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, different display modes are adopted for the notification sounds 1 to 3 belonging to the first notification group. Regarding the lighting by the various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the frame 3 and the game board 5, the same lighting mode (all the various lamps are necessarily turned on) with the notification sounds 1 to 3 belonging to the first notification group. It does not have to be a mode). In addition, regarding the notification sound to be subjected to the loop processing, the notification sound 1 such as “Boo Boo” that plays a role of notifying that the notification sound belongs to the first notification group (state in which fraudulent activity is likely to be performed) The combination of an alarm sound used in any one of 3 to 3 and a message sound (unique sound) which plays a role of notifying individual identification as to what the notification content is, is adopted. The alarm sound consists of a monotonous sound to give a warning meaning in a tense situation, and the message sound is composed of various sounds to clarify the distinction from other notification sounds. It is desirable to be done.

That is, in the case of notifying what belongs to the first notification group (state in which there is a high possibility that fraudulent acts have been performed), it is better to respond to the fraudulent activity by the hall side rather than specifying which notification type it is. It is important to speed up the initial movement of. In this regard, according to the above configuration, only the notification sound of “boo-boo” and the lighting mode unique to the first notification group by the various lamps (light-emitting devices) are output and those belonging to the first notification group (i.e. Since it is possible to recognize that it is a state in which it is highly likely that it has been performed), it is expected that the initial action of the hall side response to a fraudulent act will be speeded up. Furthermore, a message sound for informing which notification type is to be output following the notification sound of "Boo Boo" is output, and display is performed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Therefore, it is expected that the measures for the hall side after the initial movement will be performed smoothly.

On the other hand, the alarm sound 4 (door open) is in a state in which the door frame open switch 618 detects that the door frame 3 is open with respect to the main body frame 4 (possibly a fraudulent act by opening the door. However, it is a notification that there is a possibility that the door may have been opened due to the abnormality handling measures by the hall side). Then, as the notification mode, loop processing for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "door is ping pong ping pong" and display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, "door is open )) and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, respectively. In addition, as the notification time, the loop processing for repeatedly outputting the notification sound such as “the door is open ping-pong ping-pong” is 30 seconds from the time when the door frame opening switch 618 detects it (equivalent to repeating the notification sound for three times. ), the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and lighting by various lamps are the release conditions “door closing detection (the door frame opening switch 618 causes the main body frame 4 to On the other hand, the execution is continued until "the detection that the door frame 3 is closed" is satisfied.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the notification sound 4 (door open), it is detected that the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 by the main body frame opening switch 619 ( Although there is a possibility that fraudulent acts due to opening the main body frame, but there is a possibility that the main body frame has been opened due to abnormal response measures by the hall side) , It is regarded as belonging to the second notification group when there is a possibility that some kind of misconduct has been performed and it cannot be denied, and the notification sounds belonging to the second notification group are notified of those sounds. The mode, the notification time, and the cancellation condition are set to be common.

For example, in the notification sound 5 (open frame), as the notification mode, a loop process of repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "a frame is open ping pong ping pong" and a display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 ( For example, "the frame is open") and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are executed, respectively, and the main frame opening switch is set as the notification time. While the loop processing for repeatedly outputting the notification sound is completed within 30 seconds (corresponding to the repetition of the notification sound for three times) from the time when the detection by 619 is performed, the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, The lighting by the various lamps is continuously executed until the release condition "frame closing detection (detection that the body frame 4 is closed from the outer frame 2 by the body frame opening switch 619)" is satisfied. It will be.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, regarding the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, different display modes are adopted for the notification sounds 4 and 5 belonging to the second notification group. Regarding the lighting by the various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the frame 3 and the game board 5, the same lighting mode (all the various lamps are necessarily turned on) by the notification sounds 4 and 5 belonging to the second notification group. It does not have to be a mode). However, the lighting mode by the lamp (light emitting device) when belonging to the second notification group is different from the lighting mode by the lamp (light emitting device) when belonging to the first notification group. Further, regarding the notification sound to be subjected to the loop processing, a message sound (unique sound) that plays a role of notifying individual identification as to what the notification content is, and a sound that belongs to the second notification group (misconduct) It is possible to adopt a combination of sequential output with an alarm sound used for any of the notification sounds 4 and 5 such as "ping-pong ping-pong" which plays a role of notifying that it is a state where there is a possibility that There is.

That is, when notifying members belonging to the second notification group (state in which there is a possibility that a fraudulent act has been performed), it is possible to prevent the person who is playing the appropriate game from feeling aversion. It is important to be able to take measures to deal with abnormalities on the hall side to some extent quickly. In this respect, according to the above configuration, as the notification sound, first, as in the case of belonging to the third notification group described later, a message sound for informing which of the notification types is output. Therefore, it is expected that the person who is playing the appropriate game will not easily feel disgust. On the other hand, an alarm sound such as "ping-pong ping-pong" follows the message sound, although it is an alarm sound different from that of the case of belonging to the first notification group in order to make it difficult for a person who is playing an appropriate game to feel aversion. Output in the case of belonging to the third notification group although it is a lighting mode different from that of the case of belonging to the first notification group in order to make the person playing the appropriate game feel less dislike By notifying by turning on various lamps that are not performed, it is expected that the countermeasures for the abnormality on the hall side will be speeded up to some extent.

On the other hand, the notification sound 6 (left-handed guide) causes the game ball to move the gate portion 2003 provided in the area on the right side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a, even though the game ball is in the non-time saving state. It is in a state in which the passage is detected by the gate sensor 4003 (a state in which a game is being played in a manner that is disadvantageous to the player, and the game should be corrected in an appropriate manner (left-handed)). It is to inform that. Then, as the notification mode, loop processing for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "Please return to left-handed" and display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, "Please return to left-handed" ]) and are executed respectively. In addition, as the notification time, both of the loop processing of repeatedly outputting the notification sound such as “Please return to the left” and the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 are in the non-time saving state. The detection is completed in 20 seconds (corresponding to the repetition of the notification sound for two times) after the detection by the gate sensor 4003.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the notification sound 6 (left-handed guide), the lower tank 322 is detected by the tank detection sensor 279 as being full of game balls (lower plate). A notification sound 7 (ball-drop guide) for notifying that the game ball in 322 is in a ball-cutting state is provided, and game guidance is provided to allow the game to proceed properly although the possibility of cheating is low. It is regarded that the notification sound belongs to the third notification group when in the power state, and the notification sound, the notification time, and the cancellation condition are set to be common for the notification sounds that belong to the third notification group. I am trying.

For example, in the notification sound 7 (ball-drop guide), as a notification mode, a loop process of repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "Please pull out the ball of the lower plate" and a display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 Display (for example, "Please pull out the ball of the lower plate") is executed respectively, and as a notification time, loop processing that repeatedly outputs a notification sound such as "Please pull out the ball of the lower plate", and the game board All of the display in the display area of the side effect display device 1600 is completed within 20 seconds (corresponding to the repetition of the two notification sounds) from the time when the full tank detection sensor 279 detects it. ..

However, regarding the notification sound 6 (left-handed guide) and the notification sound 7 (ball-drop guide), these sensors 2401, when the detection is completed in 20 seconds after the detection by the gate sensor 4003 or the full tank detection sensor 279. When 279 is still in the detected state, the notification process (the notification sound 6 (left-handed guide) and the notification sound 7 (ball-slot guide)) is executed again from the beginning.

In the third notification group according to this embodiment, only the message sound is output as the notification sounds 6 and 7, but more strictly, for example, there is no sound for 5 seconds after the output of the message sound for 5 seconds. The data is assigned to the channel X and a sound corresponding to the data is output (silent output), and a loop process for repeating the notification sound for 10 seconds in which the message sound and the silent data are set is performed. It has become. Then, since the notification sounds 6 and 7 are configured to output the silent data for the same amount of time, they function as a unique notification mode different from the first notification group and the second notification group, Even on the hall side, it is possible to properly recognize that the notification belongs to the third notification group only by confirming the silent data portion instead of the message sound portion that is difficult to hear in a noisy hall. It is desirable that the silent data is prepared in advance as one sound data (sound data for 10 seconds) including the message sound, and the loop processing is performed while the data is allocated to the channel X.

By the way, a silent part may exist in the notification sound used between the first notification group and the second notification group (between the alarm sound and the message sound, etc.), but these are very short to have a "between". It is obvious that it is fundamentally different from the above-described relatively long time silent part (third broadcast group) having a group identification function.

According to such a configuration, the warning sound such as "boo-boo" or "ping-pong-ping-pong" is not output, and only the message sound is repeatedly output with a predetermined silence period. It becomes possible to give a notification regarding the game guidance without making the user feel aversion.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 244 and 245, the notification sounds that belong to the same notification group have the same priority, but the notification sounds that belong to the same notification group have different priorities. You may do it. Further, as the reproduction type setting, the loop reproduction in which the target sound is repeatedly reproduced is adopted, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the 1SHOT reproduction in which the target sound is reproduced once may be adopted. .. In addition, “Boo Boo”, which is commonly used for the notification sounds belonging to the first notification group, and “Ping-Pong-Ping-Pong”, which is commonly used for the notification sounds belonging to the second notification group, are linked to the message sound. It may be possible to separately prepare each notification sound as the sound data of, or prepare as separate sound data from the message sound and create sound data in which the message sound and the warning sound are combined at the time of output. It may be assigned to the channel later.

FIG. 246(a) shows processing performed when the output condition (abnormality detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced. An example thereof is shown.

As shown in FIG. 246(a), assuming that there is magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 in the process of step S112 (FIG. 94) at the timing tα1 when no notification sound is output, The control MPU 1310a first updates the state of the notification flag so as to indicate that the magnetic detection has been performed. Then, information indicating that magnetic detection has been made is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, in the process of step S118 (FIG. 94), the information indicating that the magnetic detection is performed is externally output based on the state of the updated notification flag and is managed in the hall computer. In the process of S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (magnetic detection) is provided for the notification related process in the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, at the timing tα1 (or immediately after) at which no alarm sound is output, the command is analyzed by the received command analysis processing of step S1022 (FIG. 95), and the result of the magnetic detection information is detected. If it is understood that the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) shown in FIG. 245 is assigned (set) to the channel X in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95), the notification mode (Here, the loop of "Boo Boo magnetism detected" loop) is started, and a timer (60 seconds) is set to measure the alarm time of alarm sound 1 (magnetic abnormality).

When the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is assigned to the channel X, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection is extracted from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the peripheral control is performed. It is set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the RAM 1511c. Then, by assigning the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) to the channel X, the notification sound such as “boo oo magnetism detected” is reproduced in a predetermined processing mode (loop). become.

At this time, the peripheral control MPU 1511a extracts screen generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection and light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection from various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c. By setting it in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the above-mentioned display in the liquid crystal and lighting of the lamp are also executed. The display in the liquid crystal and the lighting of the lamp are continuously executed until the power is turned on again, which is a condition for canceling the magnetic abnormality.

Through such a process, a notification sound such as "Boo Boo magnetism is detected" is repeatedly executed for 60 seconds from the timing tα1, and a display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, "Magnet is detected") is performed. ”) and lighting by various lamps arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 (lighting mode of the first notification group), respectively.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 246(a), 60 seconds after the timing tα1 has not elapsed, and the notification sound such as “BooBoo magnetism is detected” is in the loop reproduction state at the timing tα2, the step S112 ( It is assumed that the vibration sensor 2405 detects vibration in the process of FIG. 94). In this respect, the main control MPU 1310a first updates the state of the notification flag so as to indicate that the vibration is detected, as in the case of the timing tα1 when the magnetic detection is performed. Then, information indicating that vibration has been detected is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, in the process of step S118 (FIG. 94), the information indicating that the vibration is detected is output to the outside and managed in the hall computer based on the state of the updated notification flag. In the process of S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (vibration detection) is provided for the notification related process in the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the command is analyzed by the received command analysis process of step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tα2 (or immediately after) when the alarm sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is in the output state (reproduction state). As a result, even if it is understood that the vibration detection information is included, the alarm sound 2 (vibration abnormality) shown in FIG. 245 is assigned to the channel X in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95). I don't do that. That is, since the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) having the same priority is already assigned to the channel X, the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is not newly assigned to the channel X. As a result, the reproduction of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) on the side already in the allocation state is preferentially executed and continued.

In addition, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment does not set the sound generation schedule data itself according to the vibration detection at the timing tα2. Therefore, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the notification sound 2 (abnormal vibration) is not processed in a state where it is not assigned to the channel X.

However, on the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, at the timing tα2 (or immediately after that), a timer (60 seconds for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) that has not been set yet (60 seconds). ) Is set, and when the timer (60 seconds) has not timed out at the end of the output state (reproduction state) of the alarm sound 1 (magnetic abnormality), the sound corresponding to the vibration detection is generated. The generation schedule data is set, and the alarm sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is assigned to the channel X for the remaining time and the alarm sound in the alarm mode (here, the loop of "Boo Boo vibration is detected") It is supposed to perform playback.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, at the timing tα2 (or immediately after that), although the sound generation schedule data according to the vibration detection is not set, the screen generation schedule data according to the vibration detection and the vibration detection. The light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the above is extracted from various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. Regarding lighting, these are executed.

In the liquid crystal display, a display corresponding to the vibration abnormality appears separately at a position different from the position where the display corresponding to the magnetic abnormality is displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. There is. When the lamp is turned on, although the emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the vibration detection is set, the emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection is already set and its priority is the same, The lighting mode of the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection that is already in the set state is reflected by each of the various lamps, and various lighting modes of the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the vibration detection are reflected. The light emitted from the lamp is not reflected respectively. Similarly to the sound generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the vibration detection may not be set at the timing tα2 (or immediately after).

However, as described above, in this embodiment, since the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection and the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the vibration detection have the same data content, either of them is used. Even if it is reflected, the lamp lighting does not change.

After that, at the timing tα3, which is 60 seconds after the timing tα1, the notification sound such as “Boo Boo magnetism was detected” is repeated based on the timer (60 seconds) of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) having timed up. The loop processing to be executed is ended. In addition, since the time required to play back the notification sound such as "Boo Boo magnetism was detected" is set to 10 seconds, the timer (60 seconds) of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is set to the time. At the timing tα3 when it is up, the loop processing is finished at a good timing when the notification sound such as “Boo Boo magnetism has been detected” has been reproduced 6 times.

Further, at this time, since the timer (60 seconds) of the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is not up, the peripheral control MPU 1511a sets the sound generation schedule data according to the vibration detection, and the rest thereof. By assigning the notification sound 2 (abnormal vibration) to the channel X by the time (the time (α) from the timing tα2 to the timing tα3 subtracted from 60 seconds), the notification mode (here, “boob vibration Has been detected” loop).

That is, the timer for the alarm sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is set at the timing tα2, while the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the vibration detection is not set and is set at the timing tα3. Therefore, at the timing tα3, it is possible to play the notification sound of “booboo vibration detected” from the head, and when the timer of the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) times out, “booboo vibration is detected. It is possible to urge the loop processing to be ended and not to be reproduced at a halfway timing (for example, a timing such as “boob shaking”) of the notification sound such as “Yes”.

According to such a configuration, when the output condition (abnormality detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced (Fig. 246(a)), the 6th alarm sound (here, “Boo Boo”) and the 6th message sound (here, “Magnetism detected”) have finished playing, and the 7th alarm sound (here) Then, it becomes possible to realize smooth notification sound switching as if "Boo Boo") was played. As a result, "Boo Boo magnetism is detected" and "Boo Boo vibration were detected" are connected at a strange place, making it impossible to recognize unauthorized notifications in a tense situation (for example, If the notification sound 1 ends with "Boo Boo magnetism" and the notification sound 2 starts with "Motion detected", a meaningless notification such as "Boo Boo magnetism detected" Content, which may confuse the site) can be suitably suppressed.

Further, according to the above configuration, at the timing tα3, the remaining time of the timer corresponding to the vibration detection is shortened, and the notification sound 2 is timed up and ended at the warning sound of “Boo Boo”, and the message sound is generated. Even if it is not reproduced, it is possible to recognize that some abnormality detection is occurring at the same time because the loop processing is terminated at a halfway timing and the reproduction is stopped (only for magnetic abnormality). If it is a notification, the notification sound will be ended at a good time). As a result, when the notification sound is cut off at a halfway timing, it is urged to check the display in the liquid crystal, and "in the liquid crystal display" "magnetism detected" and "vibration detected" respectively By being displayed, it becomes possible to properly recognize that the magnetic detection and the vibration detection are performed.

FIG. 246( b) shows a process when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced. An example thereof is shown.

Here, the process when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced is shown in FIG. ) With reference to the above) (processing when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced) ) Is similar to.

For example, as shown in FIG. 246(b), at the timing tβ1 at which no alarm sound is output, the frame opening detection by the main frame opening switch 619 is performed in the process of step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94). If so, the main control MPU 1310a first updates the state of the notification flag so as to indicate that the frame open detection has been made. Next, information indicating that the frame opening has been detected is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, in the process of step S118 (FIG. 94), information indicating that the frame opening has been detected is externally output based on the state of the updated notification flag and is managed in the hall computer. In the process of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (frame open detection) is used for the process related to the notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, at the timing tβ1 (or immediately after) at which no notification sound is output, the command is analyzed by the received command analysis processing in step S1022 (FIG. 95), and as a result, the frame open detection is detected. If it is grasped that the information is included, in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95), the notification sound 5 (frame opening) shown in FIG. 245 is assigned (set) to the channel X and the notification is given. Start playing the notification sound in the mode (here, the frame is "ping open ping pong ping pong" loop) and set the timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 5 (open frame). ..

When the notification sound 5 (open frame) is assigned to the channel X, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the open frame detection is extracted from various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c. It is set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the control RAM 1511c. Then, by allocating the notification sound 5 (open frame) to the channel X, the notification sound such as “open frame ping pong ping pong” is reproduced in a predetermined processing mode (loop). Like

At this time, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the frame opening detection and the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the frame opening detection are transferred from various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c. By extracting and setting in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the above-mentioned display in the liquid crystal and lighting of the lamp are also executed. The display in the liquid crystal and the lighting of the lamp are continuously executed until the frame closing detection, which is a condition for canceling the frame opening detection, is performed.

Through such processing, a notification sound such as "a frame is open ping pong ping pong" is repeatedly executed from timing tβ1 for 30 seconds, and a display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, "frame Open”) and lighting by various lamps arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 (lighting mode of the second notification group), respectively.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 246(b), 30 seconds have not passed from the timing tβ1 and the notification sound such as “the frame is open ping-pong ping-pong” is in the loop reproduction state at the timing tβ2, the step S110 is performed. Alternatively, it is assumed that the door frame opening switch 618 detects the door opening in the process of S112 (FIG. 94). In this respect, the main control MPU 1310a first updates the state of the notification flag so as to indicate that the door opening has been detected, as in the case of the timing tβ1 when the frame opening has been detected. Then, information indicating that the door opening has been detected is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, in the process of step S118 (FIG. 94), information indicating that the door has been opened is externally output based on the state of the updated notification flag and is managed in the hall computer. In the process of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (door open detection) is provided for the process related to the notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the command is analyzed by the received command analysis process of step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tβ2 (or immediately after) when the notification sound 5 (frame open) is in the output state (playback state). As a result, even if it is ascertained that the information of the door opening detection is included, the alarm sound 4 (door opening) shown in FIG. 245 is given to the channel X in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95). Do not assign. That is, since the notification sound 5 (frame opening) having the same priority is already assigned to the channel X, the notification sound 4 (door opening) is not newly allocated to the channel X. As a result, the reproduction of the notification sound 5 (opening of the frame) on the side already in the allocation state is preferentially executed and continued.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the sound generation schedule data itself according to the door open detection is not set at the timing tβ2. Therefore, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the notification sound 4 (door open) is not processed in a state where it is not allocated to the channel X.

However, on the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, at the timing tβ2 (or immediately after that), a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door open) not set yet. ) Is set, and when the timer (30 seconds) has not timed out at the end of the output state (playback state) of the notification sound 5 (frame opening), the door open detection is responded. Set the sound generation schedule data, assign the alarm sound 4 (door open) to channel X for the remaining time, and in that notification mode (here, the "door is open ping pong ping pong" loop) The notification sound is reproduced.

In the peripheral control MPU 1511a, at timing tβ2 (or immediately thereafter), the sound generation schedule data according to the door opening detection is not set, but the screen generation schedule data according to the door opening detection, and By extracting the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection from various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and setting it in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, The display and the lighting of the lamp are performed.

Incidentally, in the liquid crystal display, a display corresponding to the opening of the door appears at a position different from the position where the display corresponding to the opening of the frame is displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. There is. When the lamp is turned on, the emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection is set, but the emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the frame opening detection is already set and the priority is the same. Therefore, the lighting mode of the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the frame opening detection which is already in the set state is reflected by each lamp light emission, and the light emission mode generation schedule data lighting according to the door opening detection is turned on. The mode is not reflected in each type of lamp emission. The light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection may not be set at the timing tβ2 (or immediately after) similarly to the sound generation schedule data.

However, as described above, in this embodiment, since the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the frame opening detection and the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the door opening detection have the same data content, Regardless of which is reflected, the lamp lighting does not change.

After that, at timing tβ3, which is 30 seconds after the timing tβ1, the notification sound such as "Ping-pong ping-pong" is opened based on the timer (30 seconds) of the notification sound 5 (frame opening) being up. The loop processing to be repeatedly executed is ended. In addition, here, since the time required to play one notification sound such as "open frame ping pong ping pong" is set to 10 seconds, the timer (30 seconds) of notification sound 5 (open frame) is set. At the timing tβ3 when the time is up, the loop processing is finished at a good timing when the notification sound such as “the frame is open ping pong ping pong” has been reproduced three times.

Further, at this time, since the timer (30 seconds) of the notification sound 4 (door open) is not up, the peripheral control MPU 1511a sets the sound generation schedule data according to the door open detection, and By assigning the notification sound 4 (door open) to the channel X for the remaining time (the time (β) from the timing tβ2 to the timing tβ3 is subtracted from 30 seconds), the notification mode (here, “door The ping-pong "ping-pong" loop) will play the notification sound.

That is, the timer for the notification sound 4 (door open) is set at the timing tβ2, while the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the door open detection is not set and is set at the timing tβ3. Therefore, at the timing tβ3, the notification sound of "door is open ping pong ping pong" can be reproduced from the head, and when the timer of the notification sound 4 (door open) is up, "door open" It becomes possible to urge the loop processing to be ended and not to be played back at a halfway timing (for example, the timing when "the door is open") in the notification sound such as "M. Ping Pong".

With such a configuration, even when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced (FIG. 246(b)) The third message sound (here, “the frame is open”) and the third alarm sound (here, “ping pong ping pong”) have finished playing, and the fourth message sound ( Here, it becomes possible to realize a smooth notification sound switching as if "the door is open") is played. As a result, "Ping Pong Ping Pong Open" and "Open Door Ping Pong Ping Pong" are connected at a strange place, and it becomes impossible to recognize the content of the notification in a tense situation. It becomes possible to preferably suppress the occurrence.

Further, according to the above configuration, at the timing tβ3, the remaining time of the timer corresponding to the door open detection becomes short, and even if the notification sound 4 is interrupted halfway, the message sound is reproduced first. Therefore, it becomes possible to surely grasp that the door is open.

FIG. 246(c) shows a process when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced. An example thereof is shown.

As shown in FIG. 246(c), at the timing tγ1 at which no notification sound is output, the game is played in spite of the non-time saving state in the processing of step S112 or S116 (FIG. 94). If it is detected by the gate sensor 4003 that the game ball has passed through the gate portion 2003 provided in the area on the right side of the center role object 2500 in the area 5a (right hit detection in the non-time saving state), the main The control MPU 1310a sets information indicating that the right-handed hit detection has been made in the non-time saving state as a command to the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, in the process of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (right-hand hit detection in the time saving state) is provided to the process related to the notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Like Regarding the processing of the third notification group, the notification flag is not updated in the main control MPU 1310a, and the information is not externally output to the hall computer.

On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, as a result of analyzing the command by the received command analysis processing of step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tγ1 (or immediately after) at which no notification sound is output, the non-time saving state is obtained. If it is grasped that the information of the right-hand hit detection is included, the alarm sound 6 (left-hand guide) shown in FIG. 245 is assigned to the channel X in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95) ( A timer for starting the notification sound reproduction in that notification mode (here, "Please return to left-handing" loop) and measuring the notification time of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) ( 20 seconds).

Regarding the right hit detection in the non-time saving state, in this embodiment, the information indicating that is output from the main control MPU 1310a as a command, but instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a plays the gate unit 2003 as a game. Only the information indicating that the passage of the ball is detected by the gate sensor 4003 is output as a command, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a side determines whether or not the detection by the gate sensor 4003 is performed in an untimely state. May be performed, and the processing relating to the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) may be performed based on the detection by the gate sensor 4003 in the non-time saving state.

When the notification sound 6 (left-handed guide) is assigned to the channel X, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state is copied as various control data in the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c. It is extracted from the area and set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. Then, by assigning the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) to the channel X, the notification sound such as "please return to left-handing" is reproduced in a predetermined processing mode (loop). Like

Further, at this time, the peripheral control MPU 1511a extracts the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the right hit detection in the non-time saving state from the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c to extract the schedule data of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. By setting in the storage area 1511cae, the above-mentioned liquid crystal display is also executed. The execution of the display in the liquid crystal becomes the notification end (a timer (20 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guide) is a time-up) which is a condition for canceling the notification sound 6 (left-handed guide). Will continue to be executed. Regarding the processing of the third notification group, which is less likely to be fraudulent, it is important to avoid obstruction of the progress of the performance, and the schedule data for light emission mode generation according to the right hit detection in the non-time saving state is set. It will not be done.

Through such processing, a notification sound such as "Please return to the left" is repeatedly executed from timing tγ1 for 20 seconds, and the display on the game board side effect display device 1600 is displayed until the notification sound ends. The display in the area (for example, "Please return to the left-hand side") is executed.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 246(c), at the timing tγ2 at which the notification sound such as “please return to the left-hand side” is in the loop playback state since 20 seconds have not elapsed from the timing tγ1, step S110 or It is assumed that the lower plate full tank is detected by the full tank detection sensor 279 in the process of S112 (FIG. 94). In this respect, the main control MPU 1310a sets information indicating that the lower plate full tank has been detected as a command to the peripheral control board 1510, as in the case of the timing tγ1 when the right hit detection is made in the non-time saving state.
As a result, in the process of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (lower plate full tank detection) is used for the process related to the notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Become.

On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, at the timing tγ2 (or immediately after) when the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is in the output state (playback state), the command is executed in the received command analysis process of step S1022 (FIG. 95). As a result of the analysis, even if it is understood that the lower plate full tank detection information is included, in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95), the notification sound 7 (ball-out guide) shown in FIG. It is not assigned to X. That is, since the notification sound 6 (left-handed guide) having the same priority is already assigned to the channel X, the notification sound 7 (ball-out guide) should not be newly allocated to the channel X. By doing so, the reproduction of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guide) on the side already in the allocation state is preferentially executed and continued.

In addition, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment does not set the sound generation schedule data itself according to the detection of the lower pan full at timing tγ2. Therefore, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the notification sound 7 (ball-out guide) is not processed in a state where it is not assigned to the channel X.

However, on the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, at the timing tγ2 (or immediately thereafter), the timer (20 for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 7 (bulb removal guidance) that has not been set yet (20). Second) is set, and when the timer (20 seconds) has not timed out when the output state (playback state) of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is finished, the lower plate is full. Set the sound generation schedule data according to the detection, assign the notification sound 7 (ball removal guide) to the channel X for the remaining time, and the notification mode (here, "Please remove the ball of the lower plate Loop) of the notification sound is executed.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, at timing tγ2 (or immediately after that), the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the detection of the lower tray full is not set, but for the screen generation according to the lower tray full detection. The schedule data is extracted from various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c so that the above-mentioned display in the liquid crystal is executed. There is.

In addition, in the liquid crystal display, a display corresponding to the ball-exiting guide appears separately at a position different from the position where the display corresponding to the left-handed guide is performed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Has become.

Then, after this, at timing tγ3, which is 20 seconds after the timing tγ1, a notification sound such as "Please return to left-handing" is issued based on the timer (20 seconds) of the notification sound 6 (left-handing guidance) being timed up. The loop processing to be repeatedly executed is ended.
Note that the timer (30 seconds) for the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is set here because the time required to play once the notification sound such as "Please return to the left" is set to 10 seconds. At the timing tγ3 when the time is up, the loop processing is finished at a good timing when the notification sound such as “Please return to left-handing” has been reproduced twice.

Further, at this time, since the timer (20 seconds) of the notification sound 7 (ball removal guide) is not up, the peripheral control MPU 1511a sets the sound generation schedule data according to the detection of the lower pan. However, by assigning the notification sound 7 (bulb removal guidance) to the channel X for the remaining time (the time (γ) from the timing tγ2 to the timing tγ3 subtracted from 20 seconds), the notification mode (here Then, the notification sound reproduction in the "please pull out the lower bowl" loop) will be executed.

That is, the timer for the notification sound 7 (bulb removal guide) is set at the timing tγ2, while the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the detection of the lower tray full is not set but set at the timing tγ3. Therefore, at the timing tγ3, the notification sound of “Please pull out the ball of the lower plate” can be reproduced from the head, and when the timer of the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) is up. , Stop the loop processing and stop playing at a halfway timing (for example, "Please pull out the ball of the lower plate") of the notification sound such as "Please pull out the ball of the lower plate". You will be able to urge.

With such a configuration, even when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced (FIG. 246(c)) When the second message sound (here, "Please return to the left") has finished playing, the third message sound (here, "Please remove the ball in the lower plate") It becomes possible to realize the smooth switching of the notification sound as if it was reproduced. As a result, it is possible to prevent the situation in which "Please return to the left" and "Please pull out the ball in the lower plate" are connected at a strange place and you cannot recognize the content of the notification. Will be able to.

Further, in the third notification group according to this embodiment, as described above, after outputting the message sound, the silence data for 5 seconds is assigned to the channel X and the sound corresponding thereto is outputted (silence output). It is like this. Therefore, when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced, 5 seconds of silent data is inserted. Since the message sound of another notification sound is reproduced by, the occurrence of a situation in which two different message sounds are connected due to the absence of the alarm sound and the notification content cannot be recognized is preferable. You will be able to avoid it.

FIG. 247(a) shows an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while the one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced. It is shown.

As shown in FIG. 247(a), if there is magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 within the process of step S112 (FIG. 94) at the timing t-1 at which no alarm sound is output, Regarding the processing (magnetic abnormality processing) according to the magnetic detection, the same processing as that described with reference to FIG. 246(a) is performed. Therefore, at the timing t-1, the loop processing for repeatedly executing the notification sound such as "Boo Boo magnetism was detected" is started, and the timing at which the timer (60 seconds) of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) has timed up. At t-3, the loop processing is ended at a good timing when the notification sound such as “Boo Boo magnetism has been detected” has been reproduced 6 times. Further, the display in the liquid crystal and the lighting of the lamp are continuously executed until the power is turned on again, which is the condition for canceling the magnetic abnormality.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 247(a), 60 seconds after the timing t-1 has not elapsed, and a notification sound such as "Boo Boo magnetism has been detected" is in the state of loop reproduction at timing t-2. In the above, it is assumed that the door frame opening switch 618 detects the door opening in the processing of step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94). In this respect, the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) according to the magnetic detection has a higher priority than the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) according to the door opening detection (see FIG. 244). ), even if the door opening detection occurs, the processing of the alarm sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is continuously performed.

Then, normally, with respect to the processing on the lower priority side, similar to the case where the processing with the same priority described with reference to FIGS. 246(a) to (c) overlaps, the notification sound of the lower priority side is transmitted. A process is performed in which only the timer is set and the sound generation schedule data itself is not set.

However, the situation where the door is opened immediately after a magnetic anomaly occurs is different from the case where only the door is opened, and there is a high possibility that some kind of fraudulent activity is being performed, and it is no longer possible to say `` It can be said that it is difficult to say that the notification belongs to the "second notification group having a medium possibility of fraud." Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 247(a), at timing t-2, neither the timer of the notification sound 4 (door opening) corresponding to the door opening detection nor the sound generation schedule data is set. , Only sets the flag according to the door open detection. Then, at the timing t-3, based on the flag being set, the timer of the notification sound 4 (door opening) according to the door opening detection and the sound generation schedule data according to the door opening detection are respectively provided. At the same time as setting, the notification sound 4 (door open) is assigned to the channel X and the notification sound reproduction in that notification mode (here, the "door is open ping pong ping pong" loop) is started. .. The display in the liquid crystal and the lighting of the lamp in response to the door opening detection are started at timing t-2.

According to such a configuration, even if the door sound is detected by the door frame opening switch 618 during the loop playback of the alarm sound such as "Boo Boo magnetism detected", "Boo Boo magnetism is detected". From the timing t-3 when the loop playback of the notification sound such as “” is ended, the notification sound 4 (door open) corresponding to the door opening detection is played all over for 30 seconds, and “the door is open ping pong” The loop processing is ended at a good timing when the notification sound has been reproduced three times. As described above, since the notification sound 4 (door opening) according to the door opening detection is reproduced in a more careful notification mode different from the processing based on the normal priority order, the notifications belonging to the second notification group are generated. Although it is the content (here, the door is open, the ping-pong ping-pong loop), it will be expected to raise awareness of the fact that there is a high possibility of fraud.

In addition, after the notification sound such as “Boo Boo magnetism was detected”, the notification content starts from the message sound (the door is open), so that the first notification group in the most tense situation can be reached. It becomes possible to recognize at an early stage that the notification of belonging has been completed. On the other hand, the alarm sound of "ping pong ping pong" is reproduced after the message sound, so that it is possible to easily recognize that the notification is not a notification belonging to the third notification group.

FIG. 247(b) shows an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while the one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced. It is shown.

As shown in FIG. 247(b), at the timing tδ1 at which no alarm sound is output, it is assumed that the door frame opening switch 618 detects the door opening in the processing of step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94). Regarding the processing according to the door opening detection (door opening processing), the same processing as the “processing according to frame opening detection (frame opening processing)” described with reference to FIG. 246(b) is performed. Be seen. Therefore, at the timing tδ1, the loop process for repeatedly executing the notification sound such as “The door is open ping pong ping pong” is started, and the timing tδ3 when the timer (30 seconds) of the notification sound 4 (door open) is up. Then, the loop processing is ended at a good timing when the notification sound such as "the door is open ping pong" has been played three times. Further, the display in the liquid crystal and the lighting of the lamp are continuously executed until the door closing, which is a condition for releasing the door opening, is detected.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 247(b), 30 seconds have not passed from the timing tδ1 and the notification sound such as “the door is open ping-pong ping-pong” is in the loop playback state at the timing tδ2. It is assumed that the gate sensor 4003 detects the right-handed stroke in the non-time saving state in the processing of S112 or S116 (FIG. 94). In this regard, the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) according to the door opening detection has a higher priority than the processing of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) according to the right hit detection in the non-time saving state. Therefore (see FIG. 244), even if the right-hand hit detection in the non-time saving state occurs, the process of the alarm sound 4 (door open) is continuously performed.

That is, as described above, regarding the processing on the lower priority side, the notification sound on the lower priority side is the same as in the case where the processing of the same priority described with reference to FIGS. 246(a) to (c) overlaps. Is set so that the sound generation schedule data itself is not set.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 247(b), at the timing tδ2, the timer (20 seconds) of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is set, while the sound is generated in response to the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state. Schedule data is not set. Then, at timing tδ3, when the timer (20 seconds) of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) has not timed up, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state is set, and the remaining time is set. The notification sound 6 (left-handed guide) is allocated to the channel X for only minutes, and the notification sound is reproduced in the notification mode (here, the loop of "return to left-handing").

With this configuration, the alarm sound such as "The door is open Ping Pong" has been played three times, and the alarm sound such as "Please return to the left" is not included at a good timing. Is reproduced, it is possible to easily recognize that the possibility of fraud has decreased while continuing the notification state. Further, in the third notification group according to this embodiment, as described above, after outputting the message sound, the silence data for 5 seconds is assigned to the channel X and the sound corresponding thereto is outputted (silence output). It is like this. Therefore, even with such silence data, it is possible to easily recognize that the notification sound of the type that has been reproduced up to that point has ended, and that the notification sound belonging to the third notification group has been reproduced. Like

FIG. 247(c) illustrates an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied while the one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced. It is shown.

As shown in FIG. 247(c), at timing tε1 at which no alarm sound is output, it is assumed that the door frame opening switch 618 detects the door opening in the process of step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94). Regarding the processing according to the door opening detection (door opening processing), the same processing as the “processing according to frame opening detection (frame opening processing)” described with reference to FIG. 246(b) is performed. Be seen. Therefore, at the timing tε1, the loop processing for repeatedly executing the notification sound such as “the door is open ping-pong ping-pong” is started, and the timing tε3 at which the timer (30 seconds) of the notification sound 4 (door open) times up. Then, the loop processing will be ended at a good timing when the notification sound such as "the door is open ping pong" has been played three times. Further, the display in the liquid crystal and the lighting of the lamp are continuously executed until the door closing, which is a condition for releasing the door opening, is detected.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 247(c), 30 seconds have not passed from the timing tε1 and the notification sound such as “The door is open ping pong ping pong” is in the loop reproduction state at the timing tε2, at step S112. It is assumed that there is magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 in the processing of FIG. 94. In this respect, the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) according to the door opening detection has a lower priority than the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) according to the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024. (Refer to FIG. 244), the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) according to the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is prioritized, and the processing of the notification sound 4 (door open) is performed in both sound and lamp lighting. The output content will not be reflected as the operation of each actuator. Note that the display in the liquid crystal is displayed at different positions in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 for each notification, so that priority is given during execution of notification having a low priority. Even if a notification with a high priority is generated, the display in the liquid crystal on the low priority side is maintained.

Here, regarding the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening), as a method of preventing the output content from being reflected as the operation of each actuator regardless of whether the sound or the lamp is turned on, it has been set until the timing tε2. A process of canceling the sound generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door open detection from the set state may be performed.

In this regard, in this embodiment, at the timing tε2, not only the screen generation schedule data according to the door opening detection but also the sound generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the door opening detection. Is maintained in the set state, and the priority is higher than the respective data. The sound generation schedule data, the screen generation schedule data, and the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection are set respectively. Put in a state. Then, the assignment of the channel X and various lamp operations is performed based on the content based on the sound generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the door opening detection, and the sound generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation according to the magnetic detection. By switching to the content based on the schedule data for use, the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) according to the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is output in any of sound, liquid crystal display, and lamp lighting. The contents are reflected as the operation of each actuator.

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 247(c), at the timing tε2, no operation is performed for the process (the door opening process) having the lower priority in the execution state, It is possible to change the notification content based on the priority order between two different processes (door opening process and magnetic abnormality process).

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 247(c), at the timing tδ2, the loop process for repeatedly executing the notification sound such as “Boo magnetism is detected” is started, and the timer of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is started. The loop processing will be ended at a good timing when the notification sound such as “Boo Boo magnetism has been detected” has been reproduced 6 times in time with (60 seconds). Further, the display in the liquid crystal and the lighting of the lamp are continuously executed until the power is turned on again, which is the condition for canceling the magnetic abnormality.

With such a configuration, immediately after the magnetic detection that is likely to be fraudulent is performed, the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is performed in any of sound, liquid crystal display, and lamp lighting. Also, the output content is reflected as the operation of each actuator. Moreover, as the alarm sound, first, an alarm sound such as “Boo Boo” is reproduced, so that the alarms belonging to the first alarm group are being transmitted, and the fact that the situation has changed to the tense state is promptly transmitted to the hall side. Will be expected.

FIG. 247(d) shows an example of the processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while the one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced. It is shown.

As shown in FIG. 247(d), at timing tζ1 at which no alarm sound is output, right-hand hit detection in the non-time saving state by the gate sensor 4003 is performed in the process of step S112 or S116 (FIG. 94). If there is, the processing corresponding to the right stroke detection in the non-time saving state (left stroke guide processing) is the same as that described with reference to FIG. 246(c). Therefore, at the timing tζ1, the loop processing for repeatedly executing the notification sound such as “Please return to left-handed” is started, and the timing tζ3 at which the timer (20 seconds) of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) has timed up. Then, the loop processing is ended at a timing when the notification sound such as "Please return to the left-hand side" has been reproduced twice, and at a good timing. In addition, the display in the liquid crystal and the lighting of the lamp are continuously executed until the timer of the notification sound, which is a condition for canceling the left-handed guide, is up.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 247(d), at 20 seconds after the timing tζ1 has elapsed, a notification sound such as “Please return to the left” is being played at the timing tζ2 at the time of step S110 or It is assumed that the door open switch 618 detects the door open during the process of S112 (FIG. 94). In this regard, the processing of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) in response to the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state has a lower priority than the processing of the notification sound 4 (door-opened) in response to the door opening detection. Therefore (see FIG. 244), the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) according to the door opening detection is prioritized, and the output content of the processing of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is reflected as the operation of the actuator. Will not be done. Note that the display in the liquid crystal is displayed at different positions in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 for each notification, so that priority is given during execution of notification having a low priority. Even if a notification with a high priority is generated, the display in the liquid crystal on the low priority side is maintained.

Here, regarding the processing of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guide), as a method of preventing the output content from being reflected as the operation of the actuator, at the timing tζ2, the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state that has been set until then is detected. It is also possible to perform processing for canceling the sound generation schedule data according to the above condition from the set state.

In this regard, in this embodiment, at the timing t ζ2, not only the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the right hit detection in the non-time saving state but also the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the right hit detection in the non-time saving state. In addition to keeping them in the set state, priority is higher than this, not only the sound generation schedule data according to the door opening detection, but also the screen generation schedule data and the light emission mode according to the door opening detection. Set the generation schedule data respectively. Then, the allocation to the channel X is switched from the content based on the sound generation schedule data according to the right hit detection in the non-time saving state to the content based on the sound generation schedule data according to the door opening detection. Then, the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) according to the door opening detection is reflected in the operation of each actuator in any of the sound, the display in the liquid crystal, and the lighting of the lamp.

With such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 247(d), at the timing tζ2, no operation is performed for the process (left-handed guide process) on the lower priority side in the execution state, It is possible to change the notification content based on the priority order between two different processes (left-handing guide process and door opening process).

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 247(d), at timing tζ2, the loop process for repeatedly executing the notification sound such as “door is open ping pong ping pong” is started, and the notification sound 4 (door open) is generated. When the timer (30 seconds) is up, the loop sound will be ended at a good timing when the notification sound such as "The door is open Ping Pong" has been played three times. Further, the display in the liquid crystal and the lighting of the lamp are continuously executed until the door closing detection, which is a condition for releasing the door opening, is performed.

According to such a configuration, as soon as the door opening detection in which the possibility of a fraudulent activity is moderate occurs, the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) is performed by sound, display in the liquid crystal, and lamp lighting. In either case, the output content is reflected as the operation of each actuator. Moreover, as the notification sound, first, the message sound (the door is open) is played back, so that it does not make the person who is playing the game feel aversion, but after that, The notification sound belonging to the second notification group is given by the warning sound by "ping-pong", and it is expected that the hall side will be notified as soon as possible that the situation has changed to the possibility of fraud. ..

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when a plurality of notification sounds shown in FIG. 244 should be output, various processes can be performed by performing the processes described above according to the priority order. Although only a single channel (channel X) is used for the notification sound, it is possible to properly notify the content of the abnormality, the game guide, etc. (channel-saving control structure). However, as described above, even if the notification sound belongs to the second notification group having a medium possibility of fraud, the possibility of fraud may become higher than medium depending on other detection situations. It is difficult to say that the current state of the gaming machine is properly notified only by the control based on the priority order.

The alarm sound is output not only when an abnormality is detected that is likely to have been fraudulent, but also when an abnormality is detected that is unlikely to be fraudulent. is there. That is, in the case of anomaly detection that is likely to have been fraudulent, it is required to output a notification sound as long as the detection state continues, but with anomaly detection that is unlikely to have been fraudulent If so, there is a possibility that such a detection state is maintained due to the convenience of the hall side (recovery of various errors, etc.). Therefore, even if the detection state is continued, the alarm sound is not always output. It is important to be able to execute a more flexible notification process according to the situation of the pachinko machine 1 such as not being required to continue.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in each situation illustrated in FIGS. 248 to 253, in addition to the control based on the above-described priority, the special condition is also added to improve the state of the gaming machine. It is supposed that the notification is realized in such a manner that it can be appropriately expressed. The special notification process will be described below for each situation with reference to FIGS. 248 to 253.

In the example shown in FIG. 248, door opening detection by the door frame opening switch 618 occurs at the timing tα11 when no notification sound is output. Then, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection is set and the notification sound is assigned to the channel X, and the screen generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection are also transmitted. It is set. Then, at this time, a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door opening) is set, so that the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection is set to 30 until the timing tα12 arrives. It will be played for a second.

On the other hand, regarding the display in the liquid crystal in response to the door opening detection, the display is maintained until the timing tα16 when the door frame opening switch 618 does not detect the door opening.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 248, at the timing tα13 when the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the door open detection is completed and the channel X is in the idle state, the priority of the notification is relatively high. Magnetic detection occurs by the sensor 4024. Therefore, regarding the lamp light emission in response to the door opening detection started at the timing tα11, the light emission mode generation schedule data is maintained in the set state until the timing tα16 comes, but regarding the allocation to various lamp operations, At timing tα13, the mode is switched to the mode of lamp light emission according to the magnetic detection.

That is, at the timing tα13, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection is set, the notification sound is assigned to the channel X, and the screen generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection are also set. They are set. Then, at this time, a timer (60 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is set, so that the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is 60 seconds before the timing tα14 arrives. Will be played over.

On the other hand, regarding the display in the liquid crystal and the light emission of the lamp according to the magnetic detection, the display and the light emission are maintained respectively unless the power is turned off.

By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 248, when the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the door opening detection is completed and the door opening detection by the door frame opening switch 618 is still continuing, the magnetic detection sensor. Magnetic detection by 4024 is occurring. In such a situation, a person who intends to perform some illegal operation opens the door frame 3 and puts it in the open state, and then waits until the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the door open detection ends, and then spills out. It is assumed that a magnet may be momentarily in the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 when an unauthorized magnet is secretly placed inside the door frame 3 in a cold state, which is extremely malicious. Therefore, it is feared that merely performing the alarm sound processing according to the magnetic detection is not sufficient as a countermeasure. On the other hand, since the state of magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is already off, even if some measure is taken, magnetic detection cannot be used as a trigger.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, at the timing tα14 at which the notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection is ended, it is utilized that the door opening detection by the door frame opening switch 618 is still continued. Based on this, the "sound generation schedule data according to the door open detection" in the state where the notification sound reproduction has already notified for the notification time (30 seconds) is set again and the notification sound is transmitted to the channel X. It is supposed to perform a special process that is reassigned to. Also in this case, the timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door opening) is set, so that the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection is provided for 30 seconds until the timing tα15 arrives. Is played.

With such a configuration, since the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection which has already been in the finished state is reproduced in a manner connected to the “reproduction of the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection”, a large discomfort is felt in the hall. It is expected that it will be brought to the attention of everyone. In addition, even as a person who commits fraud, "although the magnetic notification ends, all the notification sound reproduction has ended, and it is possible to finally make it difficult to notice the fraudulent activity," already By playing a notification sound according to the detection of the door that should have ended, an unexpected notification situation will occur, and it is expected that further fraudulent acts will be recognized as too risky. Like

As will be described later, in this embodiment, during the period in which the notification process belonging to the first notification group is being performed and the period in which the notification process belonging to the second notification group is being performed, the other channels are selected. It is supposed that the process of suppressing the volume of the assigned effect sound during changing the design and the game sound other than that (process of decreasing the volume to a specific value) is performed. The specific value may be zero volume. During the period when the notification process belonging to the third notification group is being performed, the volume of the effect sound and the game sound other than that, which are being assigned to the other channels, are changing during the symbols are not suppressed.

Here, the period during which the notification process is performed (the period during which the volume is suppressed) means whether any of the sensors used in the first notification group or the second notification group is in a specific detection state (abnormality). State), or whether the notification sound belonging to the first notification group or the second notification group is being reproduced (whether the notification sound is being reproduced). Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 248, in the period of the timing tα11 to tα13 and the period of the timing tα14 to tα16, it is based on the fact that the notification process by the first notification group is being performed, and the symbol variation. A process of suppressing the volume of the inside effect sound and other game sounds (a process of lowering the volume to a specific value) is performed, and during the period from timing tα13 to tα14, the notification by the first notification group and the second notification group is performed. Based on the fact that the process is being performed, the process of suppressing the volume of the effect sound during the change of the symbol and the game sound other than that (process of reducing the volume to a specific value) will be performed.

In this embodiment, both the notification process by the first notification group and the notification process by the second notification group are performed during the period when only the notification process is performed by the first notification group (timing tα11 to tα13, tα14 to tα16). During the period during which it is decided to reduce the sound volume of the effect sound during the pattern change and the other game sound to the same value, both the notification processing by the first notification group and the second notification group are performed. During the period, a process of lowering the value to a value lower than that during the period in which only the notification process by the first notification group is performed may be performed. That is, in this case, it is possible to recognize that there are a plurality of notification states by merely confirming the effect sound other than the notification sound, and it is expected that the initial action on the hall side can be made faster.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 248, at the timing tα16 when the door opening detection is ended, the process of suppressing the volume of the effect sound during the pattern change and the other game sounds is ended. However, if the notification sound according to the door open detection that was already in the finished state is reproduced in a manner that is connected to the “reproduction of notification sound according to the magnetic detection”, it is possible that an extremely malicious act was performed. In view of this, even at the timing tα16 when the door opening detection is ended, the volume of the effect sound during the symbol change and the game sound other than that may not be suppressed, and this may be continued.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 248, as is apparent from the processing according to the door opening detection, during the period when the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection is reproduced, the liquid crystal display according to the door opening detection is displayed. Although the start time is the same during the period in which the lamp is emitted and the period in which the lamp emits light in a manner corresponding to the door open detection, the end times are all different. As described above, since the alarm sound, the liquid crystal display, and the lamp light emission are operated so as to have different roles, only a single channel (channel X) is used for various alarm sounds. In spite of this, it becomes possible to appropriately notify the content of the abnormality, the game guidance, and the like.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 249, after the notification sound (timing tα21 to tα22) corresponding to the door opening detection ends, at the timing tα23, the right hit detection in the non-time saving state by the gate sensor 4003 occurs. The case is assumed. However, in this example, unlike the case of the example shown in FIG. 248, since it is unlikely that an extremely malicious act is performed, the notification sound reproduction in response to the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state is ended. At the timing tα24, the notification sound according to the door opening detection which has already been completed is not reproduced again. Further, in the period from the timing tα22 to the timing tα23, the suppression mode of the volume of the effect sound during the symbol change and the other game sound is not changed. By the way, after the notification sound (timing tα21 to tα22) according to the door opening detection ends, even if the frame opening detection occurs instead of the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state by the gate sensor 4003, it is extremely bad. Since it is unlikely that such an action is being performed, the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection that has already been completed will not be reproduced again when the notification sound corresponding to this is completed.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 250, FIG. 248 shows that magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs at timing tα33 after the notification sound (timing tα31 to tα32) according to the door opening detection ends. Same as the example. However, in the example shown in FIG. 250, it is assumed that the door frame 3 is closed and the door open detection is ended at the timing tα34 which is within the period in which the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is being reproduced. There is.

In the example shown in FIG. 250, at the timing tα35 at which the reproduction of the notification sound according to the magnetic detection is ended, the notification sound according to the door opening detection which has already been in the finished state is “playing the notification sound according to the magnetic detection”. It is never played back in a connected fashion. That is, also in the example shown in FIG. 250, as in the case of the example shown in FIG. 248, after a person who intends to perform some unauthorized work opens the door frame 3 and puts it in the open state, the door open detection is performed. When the attempt is made to secretly place the magnet for an unauthorized purpose inside the door frame 3 in a state where the hot air is cold, the magnet is momentarily within the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 after waiting for the reproduction of the corresponding notification sound. It is possible that you are in a situation where you have entered. However, after the timing tα34, considering that the door frame 3 is closed and the magnetism is not detected in the non-illegal state, the magnetic detection is performed even in the non-illegitimate state. It is considered that the information sound is sufficiently played as the notification sound processing only by continuously reproducing the notification sound until the timing tα35 arrives, and the channel X is vacant in case the further notification sound processing is required. It can be said that it is more beneficial to keep it in a state. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 250, although only a single channel (channel X) is used for various notification sounds, it is possible to appropriately notify the content of the abnormality or the game guidance.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 251, the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs at the timing tα43 after the notification sound (timing tα41 to tα42) according to the door opening detection ends, and therefore, the point shown in FIG. 248. It is the same as the example. However, in the example shown in FIG. 251, it is assumed that the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs again at the timing tα44 which is within the period during which the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is being reproduced.

In other words, in the example shown in FIG. 251, it is attempted to secretly arrange the magnet for an unauthorized purpose inside the door frame 3 in a state where the hot air is cooled after the notification sound reproduction in response to the door opening detection is completed. At this time, although the magnet momentarily enters the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and the notification sound of the magnetic abnormality is reproduced in response to the situation, the magnet detection sensor 4024 is within the detection range without being overwhelmed by such a situation. It is assumed that the magnet is being placed again, and there is a possibility that more malicious misconduct is being performed. Therefore, in this example, when the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs again at the timing tα44, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection is kept in the set state while the notification sound 1 The process of resetting the timer (60 seconds) for measuring the notification time of (magnetic abnormality) is performed.

According to such a configuration, the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is provided for a longer time from when the first magnetic detection is performed to when 60 seconds from the timing tα44 when the second magnetic detection is performed as a base point. Will be able to be continuously played. Further, in this case, the notification sound such as "Boo Boo magnetism has been detected" is continuously reproduced without interruption over the period from the timing tα43 to the timing tα45. And finally, the loop processing is not terminated at a good timing with a notification sound such as “Boo Boo magnetism detected”, and the loop processing ends at a halfway timing such as “Boo Boo magnetism detected”. It will be expected that it will cause a big discomfort in the hall and attract everyone's attention.

Furthermore, at the timing tα44 when 60 seconds have elapsed from the timing tα44 at which the second magnetic detection was performed as a base point, the notification sound reproduction is already informed for the notification time (30 seconds), that is, “door open”. The special process for reallocating the notification sound to the channel X is performed by resetting the "sound generation schedule data according to the detection". Also in this case, the timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door opening) is set, so that the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection is provided for 30 seconds until the timing tα15 arrives. Is played.

With such a configuration, the notification sound according to the door opening detection that has already been completed is played in a form connected to the “playing the notification sound according to the magnetic detection”, and also in the middle of the “boo boom magnetic detection”. It is reproduced in a form that is connected to the "reproduction of the notification sound according to the magnetic detection", the loop processing of which is ended at an odd timing. Therefore, the priority state of the notification sound according to the door opening detection which has already been in the end state becomes high, and the notification mode appears as if the notification sound of the magnetic detection was reproduced in the middle, and it appears in the hall. It is expected that it will cause even greater discomfort and attract everyone's attention.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 252, the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs at the timing tα53 after the notification sound (timing tα51 to tα52) according to the door opening detection ends, and therefore, the point shown in FIG. 248. It is the same as the example. However, in the example shown in FIG. 252, it is assumed that the vibration sensor 2405 detects the vibration at the timing tα54 which is within the period in which the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is being reproduced.

Also in the example shown in FIG. 252, when an attempt is made to secretly place a magnet for an unauthorized purpose inside the door frame 3 in a state where the hot air is cold after waiting for the notification sound reproduction according to the door opening detection to end. Although the magnet momentarily enters the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024, and the alarm sound of the magnetic abnormality is reproduced in response to this, the pachinko machine 1 is in a situation where the pachinko machine 1 is greatly shaken without being overwhelmed by such a situation. It is assumed that more malicious fraudulent acts are being performed.
Therefore, in this example, at the timing tα55 at which the notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection is ended, after the notification sound according to the vibration detection is reproduced in a manner connected to the “reproduction of the notification sound according to the magnetic detection”, At a timing tα56 at which the notification sound reproduction according to the vibration detection is ended, the notification sound according to the door opening detection which has already been in the finished state is reproduced in a form further connected to the “information sound reproduction according to the vibration detection”. ing.

Moreover, at the timing tα54 when the vibration detection by the vibration sensor 2405 occurs, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the vibration detection is not set, and the timer (60 for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 2 (abnormal vibration) is set. Second) is set, and at the timing tα55 at which the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the magnetic detection is ended, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the vibration detection is set and the notification sound is assigned to the channel X. ..

According to such a configuration, the notification sound such as “Boo Boo vibration detected” is not terminated at the timing when the loop is good, and the loop processing is stopped at a halfway timing such as “Boo Boo vibration detected”. Since the processing will be completed, it is expected that a large amount of discomfort will be generated in the hall to attract everyone's attention.

Furthermore, at the timing tα56 at which the notification sound reproduction according to the vibration detection is ended, the notification sound reproduction is already informed for the notification time (30 seconds). Special processing is performed by resetting "schedule data" and reassigning the alarm sound to channel X. Also in this case, the timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door opening) is set, so that the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection is provided for 30 seconds until the timing tα15 arrives. Is played.

In such a configuration, the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection that has already been in the finished state is further connected to the “playing the notification sound according to the vibration detection” connected to the “playing the notification sound according to the magnetic detection”. Not only is it played back in, but it is also played back in a form that is linked to "playback of an alarm sound according to vibration detection", whose loop processing has been completed at a semi-finished timing such as "booboo vibration detection". Therefore, the priority state of the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection that has already been in the higher state becomes higher, and the notification mode appears as if the notification sound of the vibration detection was stopped in the middle and reproduced. It is expected that it will cause even greater discomfort and attract everyone's attention.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 253, a case where the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs at timing tα63 after the notification sound (timing tα61 to tα62) according to the frame opening detection ends, not the door opening detection. I'm assuming.

Even in the example shown in FIG. 253, it can be said that the situation in which the magnetic detection further occurs immediately after the frame opening detection is a situation in which there is a high possibility that some fraudulent act is performed. On the other hand, on the other hand, if a magnet is used for the purpose of cheating, the door frame 3 should be opened, and even if the main body frame 4 is opened, arranging the magnet would be useful. Therefore, it can be said that there is a possibility that the hall side may erroneously cause the magnetic detection sensor 4024 to erroneously detect when the magnet is used for eliminating the ball clogging in the ball tank, the payout passage, or the like.

Therefore, also in the example shown in FIG. 253, at the timing tα64 at which the notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection is ended, the notification sound according to the frame opening detection that has already been in the end state is “the notification sound according to the magnetic detection. By playing in a manner that is connected to “play” (timing tα64 to tα65), it is expected that a large sense of discomfort will be generated in the hall and everyone's attention will be gathered. However, after that, at the timing tα66 when the frame 4 is closed and the frame opening detection is ended, not only each notification process (notification sound, liquid crystal display, lamp) according to the frame opening detection but also the magnetic detection is performed. Special processing for terminating each notification process (notification sound, liquid crystal display, lamp) is also performed.

According to such a configuration, while suitably performing the function against fraudulent activity, in the case of an erroneous detection on the hole side, the main body frame 4 is simply closed, and the notification processing according to the frame open detection and the magnetic detection ( It is expected that it will be possible to expedite the response on the hall side to erroneous detection and maintain the atmosphere in the hall in a suitable manner, since all of the notification sound, the display in the liquid crystal, and the lamp) can be ended. Become.

Note that, in the example shown in FIG. 253, even when the body frame 4 is closed and the frame opening detection is ended while the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is being reproduced, the frame opening detection is also performed. At the end timing, not only each notification process (notification sound, LCD display, lamp) according to the frame open detection, but also each notification process (notification sound, LCD display, lamp) according to the magnetic detection You may make it perform the special process which terminates.

By the way, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is equipped with the player-side volume adjusting function.

For example, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, in the process of step S1108 (see FIG. 217), it is monitored whether the production selection left button 331 or the production selection right button 332 has been operated, and the production selection left button 331 is operated. If it is determined that the speaker volume has been set by the player (the player's set value), a process for lowering the player's set value is performed. If it is determined that the production selection right button 332 has been operated, the speaker volume is set by the player. A process of increasing the value (player setting value) is performed. In addition, when the player set value is lowered and the lowered volume is actually output from the speaker, a volume adjustment completion sound (for example, “pi!”) is output at the lowered volume value. On the other hand, when the player set value is increased and the volume that is actually increased is output from the speaker, the volume adjustment completion sound (for example, “pipi!”) is output at the increased volume value. , It is made possible to grasp how much the volume has changed after the volume adjustment is completed. As for the volume adjustment completion sound, the same sound may be output when the volume value is decreased and when it is increased.
By the way, the volume adjustment completion sound has a relatively high priority level referred to above when there are no available channels (for example, “20” which is the same as the button pressing sound), and the output volume of the effect sound ( The change in the audible volume) can be transmitted more reliably.

In the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, such a volume adjustment process is performed before the game is started because the symbol variation according to the big hit determination has not yet been performed (a demo display or the like is displayed. Not only (period that can be performed), but also during the period when the game is started and the symbol variation according to the jackpot determination is being executed, acceptance by the player is allowed, and a more important effect has appeared. At times, it is possible to maintain amusement of the game by making it possible to change the volume value flexibly.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as described above, in the situation in which channels of various effect sounds are assigned in accordance with the progress of the display effect during the execution period of the symbol variation, the pachinko machine 1 concerned. When it is detected that 1 is in a specific state such as a magnetic abnormality or door opening, a process of assigning a specific notification sound corresponding to the detected content among a plurality of types of notification sounds to a channel and outputting the same is performed. Further, at this time, the channel allocation of various effect sounds according to the progress of the display effect is not stopped itself, but the effect effect notification process for decreasing the output sound volume to a specific value can be executed. That is, in this case, even if a specific notification sound of a plurality of kinds of notification sounds is assigned to a channel and output, the channel allocation of various effect sounds according to the progress of the display effect itself is not canceled. Therefore, as long as the channel assignment of the specific notification sound or the abnormal state ends, the output can be appropriately restored to the output volume of the effect sound according to the progress of the effect display, and the effect can be enjoyed again.

However, in the above-described production progress notification process, since the channel allocation of various effect sounds corresponding to the progress of the display effect is not stopped, the normal notification is performed only by the amount of the specific notification sound assigned to the channel ( This means that more channels will be used than in the unreported state), and there will be no free channels to which sound data has not been assigned before the end of the channel assignment (reported state) of a specific announcement sound. Risk tends to be high. Then, if there is a case where there is no empty channel to which sound data is not allocated before the end of the channel allocation (notification state) of a specific notification sound, one of the sound data is Since there is no choice but to discard one channel assignment, even if the channel assignment (announcement state) of a specific notification sound is terminated after that, it is possible to reproduce the sound data that cannot be allocated to a channel and is discarded. It is not possible to do so, and there is a concern that the interest in gaming will decline.

Regarding the concern about empty channels related to such effect sound, if the fixed channel system is adopted for the channel allocation of the notification sound, no direct adverse effect occurs, but the fixed channel system is adopted for the channel allocation of the notification sound. Whether or not to adopt the automatic channel method should be decided from the viewpoint of the design of the game and the effect. It is important to prepare a processing structure capable of adopting a common processing program in order to secure cost reduction and reliability improvement in the development of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, in the example described below, both the fixed channel system and the automatic channel system may be adopted for both the notification sound and the effect sound.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, even when the production selection left button 331 or the production selection right button 332 is operated while the production progress lower notification process is executed, it is lowered to a specific value. The output volume of the produced sound is not made variable and is maintained. That is, in this case, it is not necessary to generate the above-mentioned volume adjustment completion sound (“pi!” or “pipi!”) even if there is an operation by the player while the production progress lower notification process is being executed. Therefore, it is expected that the channel will be given a margin and the risk of the empty channel running out will be reduced.

However, even though the pachinko machine 1 is capable of flexibly changing the setting of the sound volume value when a more important effect appears, the output sound volume setting is performed while the effect progress lowering notification process is executed. If the change cannot be made, when the production progress lower notification process is executed due to the false detection or the notification due to the convenience of the hall (such as opening the door), the sound volume appropriate value according to the content of the production progress is appropriately set. It is unavoidable that amusement of entertainment is deteriorated because the setting cannot be changed. Also, as a result of the progress of the production during the period during which the production progress lower notification process is being performed, if a large deviation occurs between the proper volume value and the actual set value according to the production content, the output volume (acceptable) After the change in the (listening sound volume) setting is allowed, it is necessary to accept the operation multiple times in order to change the volume to an appropriate value, but this will occupy the channel with the above-mentioned volume adjustment completion sound. Therefore, although the production progress lowering notification process is finally completed, there is a concern that the entertainment sound will be deteriorated due to the lack of available channels and the inability to appropriately output the production sound.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, first, when the production selection left button 331 or the production selection right button 332 is operated while the production progress lower notification process is executed, the value is lowered to a specific value. The output volume of the effect sound (audible volume) is not changed and is maintained, while the change value of the set value by the player (player set value) itself is accepted. When the production progress notification process (process of lowering the output volume to a specific value) is completed, the output volume (audible volume) is collectively changed to reflect all the operations up to that point.

According to such a configuration, if the player accepts the change of the set value (player set value) in accordance with the production progress while the production progress lower notification process is being executed, a new operation can be performed. Without performing the above process, it is possible to collectively change the output volume (audible volume) in which all the operations up to that point are reflected when the production progress lower notification process is completed. In this way, by allowing the player to accept the change of the set value (player set value) even during the period in which the production progress lower notification process is executed, the production progress lower notification process ends. It is expected that the decline in the interest in playing games will be suppressed. In addition, immediately after the production progress notification process ends, the volume value (audible sound volume) is changed in multiple stages, and the volume adjustment completion sound at each time causes a shortage of empty channels. Will be preferably avoided.

According to the above configuration, when performing the batch change of the output volume to the player set value when the production progress lowering notification process is finished, the game during the period when the production progress lowering notification process is executed. Regardless of the number of times the player's set value is changed or the number of operations by the player, the volume adjustment completion sound is played once at the volume after the batch change. You may make it output by the sound of a special aspect different from (for example, "Bee!").

Furthermore, in order to more appropriately eliminate the shortage of empty channels when the production progress lowering notification process ends, depending on the number of changes of the player set value during the period in which the production progress lowering notification process is being executed and the player. Regardless of the number of operations, it is desirable not to play the volume adjustment completion sound itself when collectively changing the output volume (audible volume) with the completion of the production progress notification process. .. According to such a configuration, in particular, although the production progress lowering notification process caused by the notification due to the false detection or the convenience of the hall side (such as opening the door) is finally completed, the proper production is performed due to the shortage of empty channels. It is possible to preferably suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the user cannot enjoy the game.

Hereinafter, an example of the process from the execution of the production progress notification process to the batch change of the output volume (audible volume) will be described.

FIG. 254 is a diagram for explaining the content of the production progress notification process for each of the notification states of the pachinko machine 1.

First, with reference to FIG. 254, prior to explaining the processing from the execution of the production progress notification process to the batch change of the output volume (audible sound volume), referring to FIG. Will be briefly described. Here, for convenience of description, only the notification sounds 1 to 7 illustrated in FIG. 244 are shown, and the description of the other notification sounds is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 254, in this explanatory example, first, two types of suppression modes (first volume suppression mode and second volume suppression mode) are prepared as the volume suppression modes of the effect sound, For example, in the first volume suppressing mode, when the player changes the set value (player set value) regarding the sound volume, the output sound volume (audible sound volume) of the effect sound in the range of “20” to “50” can be changed. Among the possible settings, the output sound volume of the effect sound (audible sound volume) is set to "10". On the other hand, in the second volume suppression mode, the output volume of the effect sound (audible volume) is set to "0". Therefore, the degree of suppression of the second volume suppression mode is larger than that of the first volume suppression mode. In particular, in this description example, the process related to the output itself is performed but the effect sound is silenced. It is illustrated as a thing to make into.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, of the notification sounds 1 to 7, the notification sounds 1 to 3 (magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, big winning abnormality) belonging to the first notification group with high possibility of fraud are detected. When any of the notification processes is executed, a process of suppressing the output sound volume of the effect sound (audible sound sound volume) is performed in the second sound volume suppression mode on the higher suppression side. Moreover, when the notification process relating to any of the notification sounds 1 to 3 (magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, big winning abnormality) belonging to the first notification group is executed, even when abnormality detection is turned off, Until a predetermined time (here, 60 seconds) elapses after the abnormality is detected, the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound is increased in the second volume suppression mode, which is the higher suppression level). ) Is not terminated but the processing is continued.

In this example, when the notification process related to any of the notification sounds 1 to 3 (magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, big winning abnormality) belonging to the first notification group is executed, the output volume of the effect sound (audible sound) The period during which the processing to suppress the sound volume) is continued is the same as the period from when the notification sound (magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, big prize abnormality) is played according to the abnormality detection until it ends. Is set to.

On the other hand, if the notification process related to any of the notification sounds 4 and 5 (door open, frame open) belonging to the second notification group having a medium possibility of fraud among the notification sounds 1 to 7, the degree of suppression is determined. In the first volume control mode, which is the lower side, the process of suppressing the output volume of the effect sound (audible volume) is performed. However, when the notification process related to any of the notification sounds 4 and 5 (door open, frame open) belonging to the second notification group is executed, if the abnormality detection is turned off immediately after the abnormality detection occurs, the time Then, the process of suppressing the output sound volume of the effect sound (audible sound sound volume) in the first sound volume suppression mode, which is the side on which the suppression degree is low, is ended.

On the other hand, among the notification sounds 1 to 7, when the notification processing relating to any of the notification sounds 6 and 7 (left-handed guide, ball-out guide) belonging to the third notification group related to the game guide is executed, Is emphasized, and no processing for suppressing the output sound volume of the effect sound (audible sound volume) is executed.

In this example, the suppression mode is set to be different depending on whether the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed or the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed. Is not necessarily different, and the output volume of the effect sound is controlled in one suppression mode depending on whether the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed or the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed. You may make it perform the process which suppresses (the volume of an audible sound). However, with respect to the termination condition of the processing to be suppressed, the case where the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed is stricter than the case where the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed. It is important to be able to do so.

FIG. 255 shows the contents of the process relating to the sound volume adjustment when the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is operated, while the abnormality detection has not occurred and the process related to the notification sound has not been executed. It is a figure explaining.

In this example of the explanation, the player set value is made variable by "1" in the range of "1" to "5" by the operation with the production selection left button 331 or the production selection right button 332. The smaller the value is, the smaller the volume of the effect sound is set. Further, the output volume of the effect sound (audible sound volume) is set by the player in a state where the above-described suppression mode (first volume suppression mode, second volume suppression mode) is not set for the effect sound. It is set as a numerical value 20 times the value. Therefore, in this explanation example, the output volume of the effect sound (audible volume) is variable in the range of "20" to "100" by the operation by the player.

Now, as shown in FIG. 255(A), the player setting value for the volume of the effect sound is "3" of "1" to "5", and no notification flag is set. It is assumed that the output volume of the effect sound (audible volume) is set to "60", which is 20 times the output volume. If the decorative symbol SZ is in a stopped state and the jackpot determination is not performed and the player is waiting for the start winning, the effect selection left button 331 is imitated in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. The displayed image 331a and the display image 332a simulating the effect selection right button 332 are displayed, and the volume adjustment guide display OAH indicating that the volume can be adjusted through these operations is performed. In addition, at this time, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the first volume value display OH1 that enables recognition of which of the current player set values is “1” to “5” is also executed. It The volume adjustment guide display OAH and the first volume value display OH1 may be always displayed, or during a specific period such as a super reach effect which is a reach effect executed with a background image changed. When it is present, it may be hidden and at least one of the first volume value display OH1 and a second volume value display OH2 described later may appear when the player operates. Further, regarding the volume adjustment guidance display OAH and the first volume value display OH1, it is not always necessary to display both of them, and one of them may be omitted and only the other may be displayed.

In such a situation as shown in FIG. 255(A), when the operation with the production selection left button 331 or the production selection right button 332 is performed, the player setting value is incremented by "1" each time the operation is performed. The output sound volume of the effect sound (the sound volume of the audible sound) is changed by "20" accordingly. Also, each time the output volume of the effect sound (audible volume) changes, the volume adjustment completion sound (for example, “pi!”) is reproduced at the changed volume.

At this time, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, a second gauge display indicates which of the player setting values is “1” to “5”, which is the current setting value. The volume value display OH2 (see FIG. 255(C)) is executed instead of the volume adjustment guide display OAH, which will be described later.

In addition, when the production selection left button 331 is operated when the player setting value is "1", neither the player setting value nor the output volume (audible volume) of the production sound is lowered, and the game is played. The user setting value remains "1" (the output sound volume of the effect sound (audible sound volume) remains "20"). Therefore, even if the production selection left button 331 is operated when the player setting value is "1", the volume adjustment completion sound is not assigned to the channel itself, or even if it is assigned to the channel, the volume is set to "1". It is desirable that the audio output is not made audible by setting it to "0". This is the same when the production selection right button 332 is operated when the player setting value is "5".

On the other hand, when the start winning occurs and the big hit determination is performed, as shown in FIG. 255(B), the decorative pattern SZ changes in a predetermined effect pattern based on the result of the big hit determination and the type of the change pattern. Is displayed. Further, while the decorative symbol SZ is variably displayed, the predetermined effect is developed and the effect sound that matches the progress of the predetermined effect is output.

In this respect, in the volume adjusting process according to the present embodiment, not only the period shown in FIG. 255(A) (the period during which the demo display can be performed), but also the variation of the symbols depending on the jackpot determination when the game is started. Reception by the player is allowed even during the period in which the volume value is being executed. For example, when a more important effect such as the reach effect shown in FIG. 255(C) appears, the volume value is flexible. As described above, the configuration is such that the setting can be changed.

That is, FIG. 255(C) shows the state after the player has operated the production selection right button 332 twice with the reach production performed in the state shown in FIG. 255(B). In the first operation, the player setting value is changed from “3” to “4”, and the output sound volume of the effect sound (audible sound volume) is 20 times those, “60” → While the setting is changed to "80", the volume adjustment completion sound is assigned to a predetermined channel and reproduced at the changed volume "80", and the player setting is performed by the second operation. The value is changed from "4" to "5", and the output volume of the effect sound (audible volume) is set to "80" → "100", which is 20 times those, The volume adjustment completion sound is assigned to a predetermined channel and reproduced at the changed volume "100".

Further, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to this embodiment, when the player set value is changed by such an operation, the player set value is in the range of “1” to “5”. Then, the second volume value display OH2 indicating which of the current set values is displayed by the gauge display is executed instead of the volume adjustment guide display OAH. This is to clarify which of the current setting values is "1" to "5", which is the range of the player setting values, even in a tense situation in which a more important effect appears. The purpose is to prevent an operation error such as repeated operation of the effect selection right button 332 even if the player setting value is the maximum value "5". In the gauge display, the numerical value range of "1" to "5" is constantly displayed as blocks, and the number of filled blocks is increased/decreased according to the change of the player setting value. The present value set by the player is displayed by performing the display.

Note that, as shown in FIG. 255(D), the second volume value display OH2 is displayed from the time when the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is operated in the state shown in FIG. 255(C). After a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), it is hidden and the volume adjustment guide display OAH is executed again. Therefore, even if the operation is performed in a mode in which the player setting value does not change (the operation for the production selection right button 332 when the player setting value is the maximum value “5”), the production selection left button 331. Alternatively, as long as the operation on the effect selection right button 332 is repeated, the display of the second volume value display OH2 is maintained. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, an operation in a mode in which the player setting value does not change (operation on the production selection right button 332 when the player setting value is the maximum value "5") When the operation is performed, the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output each time the operation is performed, but the timer value for measuring the time until the second volume value display OH2 is hidden is reset. As a result, it is possible to more appropriately encourage the user not to make an operation error such as repeatedly performing the operation for the effect selection right button 332 even if the player setting value is the maximum value "5". become.

On the other hand, in FIG. 256, the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is operated while the door opening detection occurs during the execution period of the symbol variation and the processing related to the notification sound is executed. It is a figure explaining the content about the process regarding volume control accompanying a thing.

The situation shown in FIG. 256(A) is a situation before the symbol variation is started, and is the same as the situation described with reference to FIG. 255(A). When the start winning occurs and the big hit determination is made in such a situation, as shown in FIG. 256(B), as in the situation described with reference to FIG. The decorative pattern SZ is variably displayed in a predetermined effect pattern based on the pattern type. Further, while the decorative symbol SZ is variably displayed, the predetermined effect is developed and the effect sound that matches the progress of the predetermined effect is output.

However, in the situation shown in FIG. 256(B), door opening detection that belongs to the second notification group occurs during the symbol variation execution period, and processing related to the notification sound 4 (door opening) is executed. More specifically, a loop process (30 seconds) of repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "the door is open ping pong ping pong" and the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (here, " The door is being opened") and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 is performed.

Further, as described above, when the door opening detection belonging to the second notification group is generated and the processing related to the notification sound 4 (door opening) is executed during the variation period of the symbols, in the first volume suppressing mode. The production progress lower notification processing for suppressing the output volume of the production sound (audible volume) is performed. Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 256(B), although the player setting value is maintained at “3” as in the situation in FIG. 256(A), the effect is produced. The sound output volume (audible volume) is set to a predetermined first specific value (here, “10”) lower than the original numerical value (20 times the player set value), and The production contents will be developed based on the volume value.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the production selection left button 331 or the production selection right button 332 is operated while such production progress lower notification processing is executed, the first specification is performed. The output sound volume (audible sound volume) of the effect sound that has been lowered to the value (here, “10”) is not changed and is maintained, while the set value by the player regarding the sound volume (player set value) When the change notification of itself is accepted, the output volume (audible volume) that reflects all the operations up to that point when the above-noted production progress notification process (process for reducing the output volume to a specific value) is completed As described above, the changes are collectively made.

That is, FIG. 256(C) shows the state after the player has operated the production selection right button 332 twice with the reach production performed in the state shown in FIG. 256(B). Even though the player setting value is changed from “3” to “5” by the operation of the effect selection right button 332, the output sound volume of the effect sound (audible sound volume) is the original value (game). It can be seen that the predetermined first specific value (here, “10”) lower than the user set value (20 times) is maintained. Therefore, even if the player operates the production selection right button 332 twice, the volume of the production sound remains until the production progress lower notification processing (processing for decreasing the output volume to a specific value) is completed. Is not changed, and the effect contents are advanced with the volume of the first specific value maintained.

At this time, of the operations by the player, in the first operation, the player setting value is changed from “3” to “4”, but the output volume of the effect sound (volume of the audible sound) is the first specific value. Since the value (here, "10") is maintained as it is, the volume adjustment completion sound is not output audibly, and the player setting value is changed from "4" to "5" even in the second operation. However, since the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is maintained at the first specific value (here, “10”), the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output.

However, in the first operation, the player set value itself has changed from “3” to “4”, and since the player operation for volume adjustment is accepted, the game board side effect display In the display area of the device 1600, a second volume value display OH2 indicating by gauge display that the current setting value is "4" in the range of "1" to "5" of the player setting value, This is executed in place of the volume adjustment guide display OAH, and the numerical value is also changed and displayed in the first volume value display OH1 from "3" to "4".

Also, in the second operation, the player set value itself has changed from “4” to “5”, and the player operation for volume adjustment is accepted, so the second volume value The display OH2 shows that the current set value has changed from "4" to "5" in the range of "1" to "5" of the player set value, and the first volume value is displayed. Also in the display OH1, the numerical value is changed from "4" to "5" and displayed.

Then, after that, the door frame 3 is closed while the volume adjustment guide display OAH is returned to the state of being executed again, and the process related to the notification sound 4 (door open) and the production progress notification process (output volume up to a specific value). 256D, the output volume (audible volume) reflects all the operations up to that point, as shown in FIG. 256(D). Change all at once. That is, in this case, the player setting value is gradually changed from "3" to "4" in response to the first operation and "5" in response to the second operation during the execution progress notification process. Since it has changed, the output volume (audible volume) should normally be "80" or the second operation from the first specific value ("10" here) in response to the first operation. Although it should be changed stepwise to “100” according to, the first specific value (here, “10”) is collectively changed to “100” in which all the operations up to that point are reflected.

In this way, by allowing the player to accept the change of the set value (player set value) even during the period in which the production progress lower notification process is executed, the production progress lower notification process ends. It is expected that the decline in the interest in playing games will be suppressed. In addition, the volume value (the volume of the audible sound) is changed in multiple steps immediately after the production progress notification process ends, and the volume adjustment completion sound at each time causes a shortage or lack of space in empty channels. The occurrence of such a situation can be preferably avoided.

Moreover, in this example, when the output volume (audible volume) is collectively changed (“10”→“100”) with the completion of the production progress notification process, the output volume changes. Despite that, I try not to do the channel assignment of the volume adjustment completion sound itself. According to such a configuration, in particular, although the production progress lowering notification process caused by the notification due to the false detection or the convenience of the hall side (such as opening the door) is finally completed, the proper production is performed due to the shortage of empty channels. It is possible to preferably suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the user cannot enjoy the game.

On the other hand, in FIG. 257, when the state detection occurring in FIG. 256 is not the door opening but the magnetic abnormality, the process related to the notification sound is executed, and the production selection left button 331 or the production selection is performed. It is a figure explaining the content about the process regarding the sound volume adjustment accompanying operation of the right button 332.

The situation shown in FIG. 257(A) is a situation before the symbol variation is started, and is the same as the situation described with reference to FIG. 256(A). When the start winning occurs and the big hit determination is performed in such a situation, as shown in FIG. 257(B), as in the situation described with reference to FIG. The decorative pattern SZ is variably displayed in a predetermined effect pattern based on the pattern type. Further, while the decorative symbol SZ is variably displayed, the predetermined effect is developed and the effect sound that matches the progress of the predetermined effect is output.

In the situation shown in FIG. 257(B), the magnetic detection belonging to the first notification group occurs during the execution period of the symbol variation, and the processing related to the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is executed, Specifically, a loop process (60 seconds) that repeatedly outputs a notification sound such as “Boo Boo magnetism detected” and display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (here, “magnetic detection”) And lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, respectively.

Further, as described above, during the fluctuation period of the symbol, when the magnetic detection belonging to the first notification group occurs and the process related to the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is executed, the effect is produced in the second volume suppression mode. The production progress lowering notification processing for suppressing the sound output volume (audible sound volume) is performed. Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 257(B), although the player setting value is maintained at "3" as in the situation in FIG. 257(A), the effect is produced. The output volume of the sound (audible volume) is set to a predetermined second specific value (here, “0”) lower than the original numerical value (20 times the player set value). The effect contents will be developed based on the volume value (here, mute).

In this respect, also when the production progress lowering notification processing according to such a magnetic abnormality is executed, when the production selection left button 331 or the production selection right button 332 is operated, the second specific value (here, “0 The output volume of the effect sound (audible volume (mute here)) that has been reduced to ") is maintained without being made variable, while the set value by the player regarding the volume (player set value) itself Change acceptance is allowed, and when the above-mentioned production progress notification process (process for lowering the output volume to a specific value) is completed, the output volume (audible volume) reflects all the operations up to that point. As described above, the batch change is performed.

That is, FIG. 257(C) shows a state after the player has operated the production selection right button 332 twice with the reach production performed in the state shown in FIG. 257(B). Even though the player setting value is changed from “3” to “5” by the operation of the effect selection right button 332, the output sound volume of the effect sound (audible sound volume) is the original value (game). It can be seen that the predetermined second specific value (here, “0 (silence)”) lower than the user set value (20 times) is maintained. Therefore, even if the player operates the production selection right button 332 twice, the volume of the production sound remains until the production progress lowering notification processing (processing for decreasing the output volume to a specific value) is completed. Is not changed, and the effect contents can be advanced with the volume of the second specific value maintained.

At this time, of the operations by the player, in the first operation, the player set value is changed from “3” to “4”, but the output volume of the effect sound (audible volume) is the second specific value. Since the value (here, “0”) is maintained as it is, the volume adjustment completion sound is not output audibly, and the player setting value is changed from “4” to “5” even in the second operation. However, since the output volume of the effect sound (volume of the audible sound) is maintained at the second specific value (here, “0”), the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output.

However, in the first operation, the player set value itself has changed from “3” to “4”, and since the player operation for volume adjustment is accepted, the game board side effect display In the display area of the device 1600, a second volume value display OH2 indicating by gauge display that the current setting value is "4" in the range of "1" to "5" of the player setting value, This is executed in place of the volume adjustment guide display OAH, and the numerical value is also changed and displayed in the first volume value display OH1 from "3" to "4".

Also, in the second operation, the player set value itself has changed from “4” to “5”, and the player operation for volume adjustment is accepted, so the second volume value The display OH2 shows that the current set value has changed from "4" to "5" in the range of "1" to "5" of the player set value, and the first volume value is displayed. Also in the display OH1, the numerical value is changed from "4" to "5" and displayed.

By the way, in this explanation example, in the situation shown in FIG. 257(C), the magnetic detection itself is already in the non-detection state. However, unlike the case of door detection, the output sound volume (audible sound volume) of the effect sound in the second sound volume suppression mode until the predetermined time (here, 60 seconds) elapses after the magnetic detection. The production progress lowering notification process for suppressing the above is continuously executed.

Then, after a predetermined time (here, 60 seconds) has elapsed after the magnetic detection while the volume adjustment guide display OAH has returned to the state of being executed again, the production progress lower notification process (specification of output volume) is performed. (Processing to reduce the value), as shown in FIG. 257(D), as shown in FIG. 257(D), the output volume (audible volume) reflects all the operations up to that point. Change all at once. That is, in this case, the player setting value is gradually changed from "3" to "4" according to the first operation and "5" according to the second operation during the execution progress notification process. Since the output volume has changed, the output volume (audible volume) should normally be “80” or the second operation according to the first operation from the second specific value (“0” in this case). Although it should be changed stepwise to “100” according to the above, the second specific value (“0” in this case) is changed to “100” which reflects all the operations up to that point.

Note that, when the notification process according to the magnetic abnormality is executed, unlike the case where the notification process according to the door opening is executed, even in the situation shown in FIG. 257(D), the game board side effect display device is provided. The display in the display area of 1600 (here, "magnetic detection") and the lighting by the various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are still executed. There is. That is, in the notification process according to the magnetic abnormality, when the notification sound is terminated, the effect sound is removed from the suppression target while the notification by the liquid crystal display and the notification by the lamp are continued, and according to the player set value. The output sound is reflected in the notification processing corresponding to the opening of the door, but even if the notification sound is ended, the effect sound remains suppressed even if the notification by the LCD display and the notification by the lamp are continued. It is supposed to be.

In this way, even when a magnetic abnormality occurs, it is possible to allow the player to accept a change in the set value (player set value) even during the period during which the production progress lowering notification process is being executed. It is expected that a decrease in amusement of the game until the end of the production progress notification process is suppressed. In addition, the volume value (the volume of the audible sound) is changed in multiple steps immediately after the production progress notification process ends, and the volume adjustment completion sound at each time causes a shortage or lack of space in empty channels. The occurrence of such a situation can be preferably avoided.

Moreover, in this description example, even when the output volume (audible volume) is collectively changed (“0”→“100”) with the end of the production progress lowering notification process associated with the magnetic abnormality, the output The channel assignment of the volume adjustment completion sound is not performed even though the volume changes. According to such a configuration, in particular, even though the production progress lowering notification process due to the notification due to the false detection is finally finished, it is not possible to enjoy the proper production due to the lack of free channels It is possible to preferably suppress the occurrence of.

As for the notification sound according to the opening of the door such as “Ping Pong Ping Pong is open” and the notification sound according to the magnetic abnormality such as “Boo Boo magnetism is detected”, as shown in FIG. Since "1" (0x1FF) is set in the 3rd byte of the value, it is always reproduced at the volume set by the initial value regardless of the player set value.

Also, when the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) or the notification sound 7 (ball-out guidance) is executed, the production progress lowering notification processing is not executed. Therefore, during the execution of those notifications, the player setting Both the value and the output volume of the effect sound (audible volume) can be appropriately changed. However, for these notification sounds 6 and 7, as shown in FIG. 244, since "1" (0x1FF) is set at the 3rd byte of the volume initial value, regardless of the player setting value. It will always be played back at the volume set by the initial value.

Of the notification sounds 1 to 7, for the notification sound 6 (left-handed guide) and the notification sound 7 (ball-out guide) belonging to the third notification group, “1” is not set in the 3rd byte of the volume initial value, You may make it included in the object of volume adjustment by a player.

Further, regarding each processing described in FIG. 256 and FIG. 257, the state is detected not only during the execution period of the symbol variation, but also before the symbol variation is started, or in the form of the start and end timing of the symbol variation. Even when the notification processing according to is executed, the notification processing may be executed in the same manner.

Further, in each of the processes described in FIGS. 256 and 257, after the production progress lowering notification process is finished, as in the case before the production progress lowering notification process is started, the production selection left button 331 or the production selection right button. When the player set value is changed by the operation of 332, the output volume of the effect sound (audible volume) is changed accordingly. Then, every time the output volume of the effect sound (audible volume) changes, the volume adjustment completion sound (for example, "pi!") is reproduced at the changed volume.

In addition, although the process described in FIG. 256 and the process described in FIG. 257 are configured to have different effect sound suppression modes during the period during which the production progress lower notification process is performed, the suppression mode is not always required. It is not necessary to make them different, and the output volume of the effect sound (audible sound) is controlled in one suppression mode depending on whether the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed or the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed. As described above, the processing for suppressing the (volume of) can be performed.

Further, in the production progress notification process, the output volume of various game sounds (audible volume) is suppressed, but among these game sounds, the game ball is in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. Some game sounds, such as a sound (winning sound) that is played in response to winning a prize, may be played at the volume set to the initial value without being affected by the volume suppression. That is, in this case, it becomes possible for the hall side to easily understand whether or not the game is being continued despite the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 1. In this sense, a part of the sound (winning sound) that is played in response to the game ball winning the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 when the production progress lower notification process is being executed, etc. It is desirable to reproduce the game sound as a special sound that cannot be output when the production progress lowering notification process is not executed.

As described above, in FIG. 244 to FIG. 257, the channel-saving type control structure that can appropriately notify the abnormality content and the like with only a single channel regarding various notification sounds is used, so that there is no available channel. (Situation in which the number of free channels is 0) It was proposed that the device be technically devised in terms of how difficult it is to appear. However, even when such a control structure is adopted, there is a situation where there is no vacancy in the channel to which the effect sound effect (effect sound) is assigned (the number of vacant channels is 0), and the effect design is performed. There is still concern about the appearance of the above-mentioned unintended sound output mode.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, there are various technical points regarding the channel assignment of the effect sound before the situation in which there is no vacant channel (the number of vacant channels is 0). I try to devise. Hereinafter, various technical devices provided for output of the effect sound will be sequentially described. When adopting these technical ideas as the pachinko machine 1, it is not always necessary to adopt the above-mentioned channel-saving type control structure capable of appropriately notifying an abnormal content etc. with only a single channel regarding various notification sounds. You don't have to. Further, in each of the examples described below, both the fixed channel system and the automatic channel system may be adopted for both the notification sound and the effect sound. Further, when the automatic channel system is adopted, the control based on the above-mentioned priority does not necessarily have to be adopted, and a process of discarding a new sound may be performed when all the channels are in use. Good. In addition, the examples described below can be implemented in an appropriate combination.

[Channel reservation processing]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is finite, even if a special result is obtained by the determination means according to the winning, the channel to which the sound data is to be assigned is not full. In (the situation where the number of vacant channels is 0), the special sound corresponding to the special result being obtained cannot be assigned to the channel, and there is a concern that the enjoyment of the game may be deteriorated because the special sound cannot be output.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not a specific act such as "an act of praying by holding the hand over the pachinko machine 1" or a "button operation" is performed. It can be detected by the detection means. When it is detected that such a specific action is performed, for example, a sound (output sound with a volume of 0) corresponding to silence data composed of only silence sound, which does not show any expectation, is given. By executing a process of assigning a sound to a channel for a predetermined time (channel reservation process), the channel is maintained so as not to be used by another sound. On the other hand, while the channel reservation process is being performed in this way, even if a special performance condition such as a jackpot confirmation effect or prefetch effect is established as a result of the game ball being received in the specific winning opening, At this time, no special sound corresponding to the effect is assigned to the channel. Then, after the completion of the channel reservation process, the special sound is assigned to the channel and the effect of reproducing the special sound can be executed (post-notification effect).

That is, in this case, at least one of the channels to which the special sound can be assigned is preliminarily secured (channel reservation) by a predetermined sound that does not show any expectation degree due to a specific action by the player. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the situation in which the special sound cannot be output due to the lack of channels even though the special result is obtained by the determination according to the winning.

Regarding the special sound, for example, in addition to the jackpot confirmation sound that is executed only when the jackpot is determined by the jackpot determination according to the winning prize, a high-expected rendering mode (e.g., a jackpot determination sound based on the jackpot determination according to the winning prize) , A high-anticipation notice sound that is performed while the reach effect is being executed) is selected, or the pre-reading is performed when a predetermined judgment result is obtained by the pre-reading judgment according to the winning. It is possible to exemplify a pre-reading notification sound executed as an effect, but the point is that it is assigned to a channel and output when a special judgment result is obtained by the judgment by the predetermined judging means according to the winning. Anything can be used.

258, prior to outputting a special sound (for example, a cuin) that matches the so-called look-ahead effect as a "special sound" when a game ball wins the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, The channel to which the special sound can be assigned is in a state in which the special sound has not been output (more accurately, a state in which the determination to output the special sound (determination to perform the prefetching effect) has not yet been made). It is a time chart which shows an example about the channel reservation process which is secured beforehand from time.

First, before describing an example of the channel reservation process, first, a general prefetching effect which is a well-known technique will be briefly described.

That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when a win is generated in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out based on the winning. The first/second starting mouth winning process (steps S5231 to S5234) shown in FIG. 134 is performed. In this first/second starting mouth winning process (FIG. 134: steps S5231 to S5234), it is determined whether or not a game ball has won in the starting mouth (first starting mouth 2002 or second starting mouth 2004). As described above, when it is determined that a prize has been won, a process of increasing the number of holdings of the corresponding special symbol by 1 is performed.

Further, as also described above, in the first/second starting mouth winning process (FIG. 134: steps S5231 to S5234), the prefetching process for executing the prefetching effect on the winning opening side is also executed (FIG. 135: step S5245, FIG. 136: step S5255).

Here, the look-ahead effect on the first special symbol side is, as described above, an effect that suggests the determination result (or the degree of expectation) of the first special symbol in advance before starting the variable display of the first special symbol. is there. In this first special figure pre-reading process, the information required for determining whether or not the pre-reading effect is executed on the peripheral control board 1510 side and the like (information regarding the win for the pre-reading determination, the symbol type for the pre-reading determination) Information, information regarding a variation pattern number for prefetch determination, etc.) is generated and stored in a corresponding storage area as transmission information for the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the determination result itself of the first special symbol, information about the stop symbol of the special symbol may be included in the command as information suggesting the type of the big hit game. For example, information of the stage before the final determination such as the SP reach group, the normal reach group of the variation patterns, the latent probability hit group, and the small hit group of the symbol types may be transmitted as the prefetch command.

On the other hand, the look-ahead effect on the side of the second special symbol is, as described above, also suggests the determination result (or its degree of expectation) of the second special symbol before starting the variable display of the second special symbol. It is a production to do. In the second special figure pre-reading process, the peripheral control board 1510 side generates information (winning information, symbol type, variation pattern number, etc.) necessary for determining the presence or absence of the pre-reading effect and the effect contents, It is stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information for the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the determination result of the second special symbol itself, the command may include information regarding the stop symbol of the special symbol as the information suggesting the type of the big hit game. For example, information of the stage before the final determination such as the SP reach group, the normal reach group of the variation patterns, the latent probability hit group, and the small hit group of the symbol types may be transmitted as the prefetch command.

That is, in the peripheral control board 1510, the information obtained from the prefetch command when the determination process as to whether or not the jackpot is won and the variation in the symbol have not been digested, and those are put on hold ( Expectation as to whether or not the jackpot judgment that is put on hold gives a special result based on the information related to the prefetch effect on the first special map side and the information related to the prefetch effect on the second special figure side) A look-ahead effect that suggests the degree in advance can be executed.

More specifically, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines whether or not the start winning has occurred, and when in this situation, performs the control related to the hold display and the prefetch effect according to the start winning. Then, after this, by updating the processing flag of the special symbol based on the grasped game situation, the above-described variation start processing, variation pattern setting processing, variation processing, large jackpot gaming processing, and small hit establishment shown in FIG. 256. Do any of the processing. Among these, in the control related to the look-ahead effect, for example, in any of a plurality of modes (for example, blue with relatively low expectation and red with relatively high expectation), a new hold display corresponding to the start winning is performed. Whether or not to perform a specific look-ahead effect that indicates the expectation of look-ahead depending on whether to display it is determined, and a mode according to the result of the determination (for example, when it is determined that the look-ahead effect is not blue, red, or In this case, the process of performing the hold display will be performed in the normal display mode (1). As a result, until the big hit determination corresponding to the hold display is exhausted, the look-ahead effect in which the big hit expectation degree is suggested in advance by the display mode is executed.

By the way, in such a look-ahead effect, when a hold display (including a hold display for confirming a big hit) appears in a mode with a high degree of expectation, a special sound (for example, a cuin) may be output in accordance with the execution of the read-ahead. Many. However, such a special sound (pre-reading effect) is reproduced at a game ball winning timing that occurs irregularly, so a game ball winning occurs at a timing when there is no vacancy in the channel and the pre-reading determination is made. If there is a chance to win, the player can recognize that the special sound is not played even if the look-ahead judgment is won and the hold display appears in a mode with high expectation (blue or red). It is feared that the interest in the game will decline without it.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 258, as described above, the special sound is output before the game ball is won in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 to output the special sound (prefetch effect). Channels that can be assigned are in advance from the time when the special sound is not output (more accurately, the determination that the special sound is output (the determination that the pre-reading effect is performed) has not been made). It is possible to execute the channel reservation process that is reserved in.

For example, at the timing tY10 shown in FIG. 258, the number of jackpot determinations currently held (the number of holdings) is 0, and the normal background display appears in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Assuming that the variable display of the decorative pattern is being performed under normal circumstances, the player normally wins the game ball at the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 in order to increase the number of holdings. Perform a game (handle operation) as described. As a result, when a game ball is won in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, a maximum of four jackpot determinations are put on hold in accordance with those winnings, and the jackpot determinations are performed. Each time the game is put on hold, processing relating to hold display and prefetching effect according to winning is performed.

Here, as the prefetch effect when the channel reservation process is not executed, for example, in the order of winning the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, the first winning (first hold) and the second winning ( If the second winning), the third winning (third holding), and the fourth winning (fourth holding) occur, the prefetch effect process is performed at each timing when the holding occurs.
Then, when the pre-reading determination is won and the pre-reading effect is performed, a special sound (for example, a cuin) is output at the timing when the corresponding holding occurs (each timing when the winning is performed and the pre-reading determination is performed), and the specific aspect A hold display with "" appears.

On the other hand, the look-ahead effect when the channel reservation process is executed is, for example, in the order of winning the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004, the first winning (first hold), the second winning ( If the second winning), the third winning (third holding), and the fourth winning (fourth holding) occur, the prefetch effect process is performed at each timing when the holding occurs. However, when the pre-reading judgment is won and the pre-reading effect is performed, a special sound (for example, a cuin) is not output at the timing when the corresponding hold occurs (the winning timing), but is kept in the execution waiting state. Then, the special sound (for example, cuin) is output after waiting for the channel targeted for the channel reservation processing to become empty. Note that the hold display having a specific mode may appear at the timing of outputting a special sound (for example, a cueine), or may appear at the timing when the hold selected in the prefetch determination occurs. Good. However, when a hold display having a specific mode is made to appear at the timing when the hold selected in the prefetch determination occurs, the prefetch effect when the channel reservation process is executed and the preread effect when the channel reservation process is not executed It is desirable that only one aspect (for example, only red color) can appear as the specific aspect in any of the look-ahead effects.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when a hand is placed over the front of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, a non-contact type sensor (not shown) such as an ultrasonic sensor or an infrared sensor is displayed. Detects this as an object, and the channel reservation process is started when this is detected.

For example, at a timing tY11 shown in FIG. 258, the player is holding the hand around the front of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and this is the state detected as an object. Then, the peripheral control board 1510 generates a prayer effect mode based on the detection. In this prayer effect mode, first, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, a "shrine torii" is displayed as a background image, and a prayer mode background display is performed, and a "countdown countdown" is displayed for a predetermined time (30 seconds). A process of allocating "voice" to a predetermined channel and reproducing it is performed. It should be noted that the countdown voice starts, for example, from "30" and is counted down every one second, and is terminated when it reaches "0". In addition, even during the period in which the prayer mode background display is displayed in this way, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, effects in which decorative symbols are variably displayed in a predetermined effect pattern are continuously executed.

However, with regard to "shrine torii (background display of prayer mode)" in such a display area and "countdown voice" in a predetermined channel, the player holds his hand around the front of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. This can be triggered by this (triggered by the detection by the sensor), and is not related to the performance contents (performance that suggests the degree of expectation) that is being developed within the pattern change that is being executed. It does not depend on the result of the jackpot judgment at all. Therefore, the display and sound generated when the player holds his hand may be changed to other contents as appropriate, but by performing such a process, a predetermined time (30 seconds) is maintained. It becomes possible to maintain the channel in the use state (here, the use state by the "countdown voice" which does not show any expectation), and until the predetermined time (30 seconds) elapses, It is possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation in which another sound, which is not known when it will end, is assigned to a predetermined channel (channel reservation processing).

Then, until the predetermined time (30 seconds) during which the channel reservation process is executed in this way, the player plays the game ball so that the game ball is won in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004. (Handle operation) will be performed. As a result, as shown in FIG. 258, the first prize (first hold), the second prize (second hold), the third prize (third hold), and the fourth prize (fourth hold) occur. Then, the processing relating to the look-ahead effect is performed at each timing when the hold is generated. However, as described above, while the "countdown sound" is being played (while the channel reservation process is being executed), the result of the determination according to the winning is that the determination result (prefetch winning) indicates that the prefetch effect is performed. Even if it is obtained, the special sound (for example, cuin) is not assigned to the channel at the time of winning, and this is stored as the execution waiting state. In this way, the special sound (for example, cuin) in the waiting state is output as a post notification sound output after the winning a prize at a timing tY12 when a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed from the timing tY11. Become.

On the other hand, the player holds the hand and starts the reproduction of the "countdown sound" (channel reservation processing) by his/her will until the end thereof (timing tY11 to tY12), and a prize is generated. If there is no winning, or if a special judgment result is not obtained (the prefetch effect was not won), even if the timing tY12 at which the reproduction of the “countdown sound” ends is reached, it is special. No sound is played.

According to such a configuration, the player holds his/her hand and starts the reproduction of the “countdown sound” (channel reservation processing) by his/her own intention until the end thereof (timing tY11 to tY12). If a special prize is generated and a special judgment result (look-ahead winning) is obtained in the judgment according to the prize, the special sound (cuin) is not output at that time and the “countdown sound” is output. It will be executed as a post-notification effect that is output aiming at the timing when the channel is finished and a channel becomes available. Therefore, it is possible to preferably avoid the occurrence of a situation in which the special sound cannot be output due to the absence of an empty channel even though the special determination result (prefetch win) is obtained. Further, even if a special determination result (prefetch win) is obtained at any timing between the timings tY11 to tY12, a special sound (cuin) corresponding to the special determination result is generated at at least one channel. Since it is intended to reproduce at tY12, if it is only confirmed whether or not the special sound (cuein) is generated at the timing tY12, the special determination result (pre-reading) can be performed within a relatively long time from the timing tY11 to tY12. You will be able to easily recognize whether or not you have won.

When the special sound (cuin) is output as such a post notification sound, it may be assigned to any of the channels in the idle state at the timing tY12 and reproduced. However, if the special sound (cuin) is selectively assigned to the predetermined channel to which the "countdown voice" has been assigned, the channel reservation processing and the post notification effect corresponding thereto can be performed with only one channel. It can be said that it can be realized, and it can be said that it is useful in that it is possible to broaden the range of production in the limited number of channels.

In addition, in this embodiment, regarding the prayer mode background display in which the "Torii of the shrine" is displayed as the background image, the timing tY12 at which the reproduction of the "countdown sound" is ended, and the reproduction of the special sound (cuine) is performed. The display is continued even after the end timing comes. This is based on the fact that a person who requests the execution of such a channel reservation process tends to hold his/her hand so that the channel reservation process is generated again each time the number of holdings decreases. Considering that it seems that there is a benefit when you hold your hand up when "Torii of Shinto shrine" is displayed as a background image (the probability that a special sound will be played at the timing of the later notification becomes higher). Therefore, the prayer mode background display is continuously performed until a specific condition unrelated to the channel reservation process is satisfied (for example, a button release operation). However, in reality, even if the "Torii of the shrine" is displayed as the background image or the "Torii of the shrine" is not displayed as the background image, the player holds his hand up. When this is detected, only the process of maintaining the predetermined channel in the assigned state for the predetermined time by the predetermined sound (countdown sound) is performed, so the timing tY12 at which the reproduction of the "countdown sound" is ended. Alternatively, the display may be returned to the normal background display at the timing when the reproduction of the special sound (cuine) as the post notification sound is finished.

Further, when the player holds his hand again and is detected during the period of timings tY11 to tY12, the reproduction time of the "countdown sound" is reached until a predetermined time (here, 30 seconds) elapses from the detection again. May be extended so that when the timing comes, a special sound corresponding to the look-ahead winning is output.

In addition, such prayer effect mode is executed based on the fact that the player's specific action is detected even when the symbol fluctuation is not changing, and when the symbol fluctuation is not changing. You may do so. Further, the specific action may be an action to be detected by a non-contact type sensor or an action to be detected by a contact type sensor such as a predetermined button operation.

However, when the special sound (cuin) is output as such a post notification sound, the first winning (first hold) and the second winning ( Preliminary winning because it is difficult to know which of the 3rd winning (3rd pending) and 4th winning (4th pending) holds the special judgment result (prefetching winning) It is feared that the enjoyment of the game will be deteriorated as the holding is exhausted without recognizing that the holding is done. On the other hand, the content reproduced as a special sound is not a uniform sound (here, "kyun"), but the first prize (first hold), the second prize (second hold), and the third prize (second It is also possible to make it different depending on which of the four preliminary winnings (third hold) and the fourth prize (fourth hold). However, in this case, the content changed from the sound (here, "kyuin") played in the look-ahead effect when the channel reservation process is not executed, so it is possible to grasp the fact that the pre-read was won. There is concern that it will disappear.

Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, a special determination result is obtained at any timing between the timings tY11 and tY12 (first hold, second hold, third hold, fourth hold). Depending on whether or not (prefetch win) is obtained, processing for varying the reproduction time of the special sound (here, “cuein”) started at timing tY12 is performed.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 258, it is assumed that a special determination result (prefetch win) is obtained in the first prize (first hold) that is won at an extremely early timing among timings tY11 to tY12. However, in this case, the special sound (here, "cuein") is reproduced for 3 seconds from the timing tY12.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 259, in the case where the special determination result (prefetch win) is obtained in the second winning (second hold) that is won at a relatively early timing among the timings tY11 to tY12. Assuming that, in this case, the special sound is reproduced for 6 seconds from the timing tY12. It should be noted that here, the time required to play "Quine" once is 3 seconds, and when the special sound (here, "Quine") is played for 6 seconds, "Quine" is played twice. Then, a sound in a form such as "Cue in Quin" is output.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 260, it is assumed that a special determination result (prefetch win) is obtained in the third winning (third hold) that is won at a relatively late timing among timings tY11 to tY12. However, in this case, the special sound is reproduced for 9 seconds from the timing tY12. It should be noted that, here, since the time required to reproduce the "quine" once is 3 seconds, when the special sound (here, "quine") is reproduced for 9 seconds, the "quine" is 3 times. It is played back batchwise, and a sound in the form of "cuein cuin" is output.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 261, it is assumed that a special determination result (prefetch win) is obtained in the fourth winning (fourth hold) that is won at an extremely late timing from timing tY11 to tY12. However, in this case, the special sound is reproduced for 12 seconds from the timing tY12. Note that, here, since the time required to play the "Quine" once is 3 seconds, when the special sound (here, "Quine") is played for 12 seconds, the "Quine" is 4 times. It is played back in batches, and sounds in the form of "cue in cuin cuin cuin" are output.

According to such a configuration, when the special sound is output at the timing tY12, it is possible to understand that the special determination result (prefetch win) has been obtained between the timings tY11 to tY12, and it is possible to grasp the timing. It is possible to predict at which timing between tY11 and tY12 a special determination result (prefetch win) has been obtained with the winning. In this example, as the reproduction time of the special sound from the timing tY12 is shorter, it is suggested that the special determination result (look-ahead winning) is obtained by the winning that occurs at an earlier timing among the timings tY11 to tY12. Therefore, the longer the reproduction time of the special sound from the timing tY12 is, the more it indicates that the special determination result (prefetch win) is obtained by the winning that occurs at the later timing of the timings tY11 to tY12. ..

In this example, it may be assumed that only the first prize is generated between the timings tY11 and tY12 and a special determination result is obtained according to the prize, but in this case also, depending on the timing when the prize is generated. Thus, the length of the reproduction time of the special sound from the timing tY12 is made variable as described above. However, instead of this, considering that the number of holdings is limited to a maximum of four, if a special judgment result is obtained in the first winning, the special sound is “quen” 1 regardless of the winning timing. If the special playout time is set for the 2nd prize and the special judgment result is obtained for the 2nd prize, the special sound is set for the 2 play time for "QUIN" regardless of the winning timing, and the special judgment is made for the 3rd prize. If a result is obtained, the special sound is set to the reproduction time for three times of "Cuein" regardless of the winning timing, and if a special judgment result is obtained at the fourth winning, the special sound is generated regardless of the winning timing. May be set to the reproduction time for four "cuines".

In addition, in this embodiment, when the prefetching win is obtained, “cuin” is played as the special sound. However, the prefetching determination when the prize is won is the first determination result (for example, a relatively high degree of expectation). The reproduction content as the special sound may be changed depending on which of the low prefetch win) and the second determination result (for example, the prefetch win having a relatively high degree of expectation) is obtained. For example, when the first judgment result (for example, the pre-reading winning with a relatively low degree of expectation) is obtained in the pre-reading judgment when the prize is won, the “cuin” is played as a special sound, while the pre-reading when the prize is won When the second judgment result (prefetching winning with a relatively high degree of expectation) is obtained in the judgment, if "Dokan" is reproduced as a special sound, it occurs at any timing between timings tY11 and tY12. In addition to the prediction as to whether or not the pre-reading win was obtained by winning, the first judgment result (pre-reading win with relatively low expectation) and the second judgment result (pre-reading win with relatively high expectation) It will also be possible to make predictions about which one was obtained. In this case, it is desirable to reproduce “cuin” or “dokan” as a special sound according to the determination result even in the prefetching effect when the channel reservation process is not executed.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 262, the first judgment result (preliminary winning with a relatively low degree of expectation) is determined by the pre-reading judgment in the first winning (first hold) which is won at an extremely early timing among timings tY11 to tY12. ) Has been obtained, and the second judgment result (preliminary winning with a relatively high degree of expectation) is obtained in the pre-reading judgment in the fourth winning (fourth hold) when the prize is won at an extremely late timing. However, in this case, after the timing tY12, the special sound is reproduced in the “cuin” mode for 3 seconds, and then the special sound is reproduced in the “dokan” mode for 9 seconds.

According to such a configuration, by confirming that the reproduction time of the special sound in the “cuin” mode is 3 seconds, the first winning prize that is won at an extremely early timing among the timings tY11 to tY12 ( It becomes possible to predict that the first determination result (prefetch winning with a relatively low degree of expectation) is obtained by the prefetch determination in the (first hold). In addition, by confirming that the reproduction time of the special sound itself was performed for 12 seconds (3+9 seconds), it was possible to pre-fetch the winning in the pre-reading judgment in the fourth winning (fourth hold) that was won at an extremely late timing. It is possible to grasp. Further, in response to the fact that the first judgment result (preliminary winning with a relatively low degree of expectation) is obtained by the pre-reading judgment in the first winning (first hold) which is won at an extremely early timing among the timings tY11 to tY12. By confirming that the special sound is being played in the “dokan” mode after the end of the “cuin” for the first time, the second look-ahead judgment in the fourth winning (fourth hold) It becomes possible to predict that the determination result (prefetch winning with relatively low expectation) is obtained.

Alternatively, when the first determination result (prefetch winning on the first special map side) is obtained by the prefetch determination according to the winning in the first starting opening 2002, “cuin” is reproduced as a special sound. , "Dokan" may be played as a special sound when the second judgment result (pre-reading winning on the second special map side) is obtained by the pre-reading judgment according to the winning in the second starting opening 2004. .. In this case, even in the pre-reading effect when the channel reservation process is not executed, either the pre-reading determination according to the winning of the first starting opening 2002 or the pre-reading determination according to the winning of the second starting opening 2004 is performed. Depending on whether there is any, it is desirable to play "Quine" or "Dokan" as a special sound.

According to such a configuration, for example, when the situation shown in FIG. 262 occurs, by confirming that the reproduction time of the special sound in the “cuin” mode is 3 seconds, the timings tY11 to tY12 are changed. The first prize (first hold) that is won at an extremely early timing in the interval is the prize for the first starting opening 2002 side, and the first judgment result (the first special map side of the first special map side) is made by the pre-reading judgment corresponding to this. It becomes possible to predict that the prefetched winning) has been obtained. In addition, by confirming that the reproduction time of the special sound itself is performed for 12 seconds (3+9 seconds), the pre-reading determination is made even in the pre-reading judgment in the fourth winning (fourth hold) when the prize is won at an extremely late timing. It can be grasped. Further, depending on that the first determination result (prefetching winning on the side of the first special map) is obtained in the prefetching determination in the first winning (first suspension) that is won at an extremely early timing among the timings tY11 to tY12. By confirming that the special sound is being played in the “dokan” mode after the end of the “cuin” for the first time, the fourth win (fourth hold) is on the second starting opening 2004 side. It is possible to predict that a second determination result (prefetch winning on the second special map side) has been obtained by the prefetch determination corresponding to the winning.

As described above, in this embodiment, as an example of the channel control in the case where a special determination result is obtained based on the fact that the game ball is received in the specific winning opening while executing the channel reservation process. The case where the prefetching win in the prefetching effect is obtained is illustrated. However, the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 258 to FIG. 262 is, in essence, a gaming machine in which a determination process is performed when a game ball is received in a specific winning opening, and the determination process is special. Channel control (channel reservation processing, etc.) that has the technical characteristics of itself that can prevent the output of a special sound when a judgment result is obtained from causing a lack of channels and becoming unable to output Therefore, it is obvious that the application example is not necessarily limited to the prefetch winning in the prefetch effect.

[Channel usage restriction]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is finite, even if a special result is obtained by the determination means according to the winning, the channel to which the sound data is to be assigned is not full. In (the situation where the number of vacant channels is 0), the special sound corresponding to the special result being obtained cannot be assigned to the channel, and there is a concern that the enjoyment of the game may be deteriorated because the special sound cannot be output.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the number of free channels is monitored as the game progresses, and when the number becomes less than the predetermined number, at least a part of the various game sounds is played. The rate of limiting the execution of processing related to output is increased (channel usage limitation). That is, in this case, at least a part of the game sound is restricted from being executed before the number of empty channels becomes 0, and is executed as the number of empty channels approaches 0. Since the rate of limitation becomes high, it becomes difficult to reduce the number of empty channels to zero.

More specifically, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, each time the pattern variation according to the big hit determination that is in the suspended state is exhausted (every time when the start condition is satisfied), the exhausted symbol variation Determine the availability of channels during the execution period. As a result, when there is a margin in the availability of the channel, the rate at which the channel is restricted (channel restriction level) is lowered until the symbol fluctuation targeted for determination is at least ended, and the availability of the channel is reduced. When there is no margin in the situation, increase the ratio (channel limit level) where channel usage is restricted until the symbol fluctuation targeted for determination is at least ended, and channel restriction with such symbol fluctuation as one unit. By executing it, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the number of free channels becomes 0 during the execution period of the symbol fluctuation that is the determination target. As will be described later, a plurality of level values are prepared as the channel limit level, and the higher the level value, the higher the rate of limiting the execution of the process related to the output of the game sound.

FIG. 263 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure for the processing relating to the setting of such a channel restriction level.

Now, it is assumed that it is determined that the pattern command (variation pattern) is received from the main control board 1310 in the process of step S1022 (FIG. 95). Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, as shown in FIG. 263, first, as the processing of step S3101, the value of the channel limit level set last time is reset. The reset process (step S3101) may be performed when the symbol variation ends.

Then, as the process of step S3102, based on the type of the effect pattern in the first half of the variation corresponding to the received variation pattern, the period in the first half of the variation (for example, the period from the start of the pattern variation to the start of the reach effect, the symbol Specify "X" which is the number of empty channels (minimum empty channel number) based on the timing when the channel becomes the most empty within the period from the start of fluctuation to the stop of the design without starting the reach effect) To do. Further, as the process of step S3103, based on the type of the effect pattern in the latter half of the fluctuation corresponding to the received fluctuation pattern, the channel within the latter half of the fluctuation (for example, the period from the start of the reach effect to the stop of the symbol fluctuation) “Y”, which is the number of free channels (minimum free channel number) based on the timing when the most free space is reached, is specified.

However, when the production pattern in which the symbol production is stopped without starting the reach production from the symbol variation start is selected, the symbol variation corresponding to the “second half of variation” is not performed. In this case, the next step processing is performed without performing the processing itself of step S3103, or the maximum numerical value that can be set as the number of free channels “Y” in the processing of step S3103 (a numerical value not subject to channel restriction) Will be set.

Then, as the process of step S3104, the “X” specified in the process of step S3102 is compared with the “Y” specified in the process of step S3103, and among these “X” and “Y”. On the basis of the value of the side where the minimum number of free channels is small (the side where there is no margin in the number of free channels), the channel restriction level is set until at least the symbol fluctuation targeted for determination is ended. As a result, during the period from the start to the end of the symbol fluctuation that is the determination target, the execution of the process related to the output of the game sound can be restricted based on the set channel restriction level. Therefore, it becomes difficult to reduce the number of empty channels to 0, and it is expected to suppress the deterioration of the amusement of the game due to the appearance of an unintended effect.

In this embodiment, when setting the channel restriction level, the "minimum number of free channels" used for the determination is divided into the first half of the fluctuation (step S3102) and the second half of the fluctuation (step S3103), and each is specified. I have decided. This is because the production contents in the first half of the change (such as the period from the start of the pattern change to the start of the reach effect) are shared by multiple effect patterns (for example, long reach, super reach A, super reach B, etc.). This is because it is possible to reduce the amount of data required to specify the minimum number of free channels by specifying the minimum number of free channels in the first half of the fluctuation. ..

However, the minimum number of free channels used for determining the channel limit level does not necessarily have to be specified separately in the first half of the fluctuation and the second half of the fluctuation, and the effect from the start of the symbol fluctuation to the stop The number of empty channels (minimum empty channel number) may be specified with the pattern as one unit based on the timing when there is no empty channel in the period in which the effect pattern is executed.

In addition, the "minimum number of free channels" here is a sound automatically generated when the production pattern (production content) to be determined progresses (for BGM-related and symbol stop-related according to big hit determination, big hit determination It shows how many channels are left as empty when they are assigned to each channel. Therefore, a button pressing sound (such as a sound generated by a button operation), a volume adjustment completion sound, various notification sounds, a block winning sound (a sound accompanying a winning in a general winning opening), a holding winning sound (first The production pattern (production content) to be determined, such as a sound associated with winning the start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004) and a general electric production sound (a sound associated with the production according to the determination of a normal symbol), is developed. It does not include various sounds that are not always executed by simply making a judgment.

FIG. 264 is a diagram showing the value of the channel limit level set separately for the “minimum number of free channels” identified in the process of step S3104, and showing an example of the content of the limit set separately for the channel limit level. ..

As shown in FIG. 264, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, first, among the various game sounds, a block winning sound (general winning opening is selected as a sound to be restricted for channel use). Accompanying sound), award winning sound (sound accompanying winning at the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004), normal electric effect sound (sound accompanying the effect according to the judgment of the normal symbol), volume adjustment completion sound Is illustrated. Therefore, during the execution period of the symbol fluctuation that there is no room in the free channel, at least these game sounds (block winning sound, holding winning sound, general electric effect sound, volume adjustment completion sound) among various game sounds Channel usage restrictions may occur.

More specifically, when the “minimum number of free channels” identified in the process of step S3103 is 12 or more, the channel limit level is set in the process of step S3104 based on the correspondence shown in FIG. Set to "0". That is, in this case, it is assumed that there is a situation in which a symbol variation with an empty channel is being executed, and the sound (block winning sound, holding winning sound, general electric effect sound, volume adjustment completion sound) that is the target of channel use restriction None of them are limited, and if there is a winning in the general winning opening during the execution of the symbol variation, a block winning sound is assigned to a predetermined empty channel and reproduced, and the first starting opening 2002 or during the execution of the symbol variation. If there is a winning in the second starting opening 2004, the reserved winning sound is assigned to a predetermined vacant channel and reproduced, and when the effect corresponding to the determination of the normal symbol is performed during the execution of the symbol variation, the normal prize corresponding to the effect is given. The electric effect sound is assigned to a predetermined empty channel and reproduced, and when the volume adjustment is performed during execution of the symbol variation, the volume adjustment completion sound corresponding to this is assigned to the predetermined empty channel and reproduced.

On the other hand, when the “minimum number of free channels” specified in the process of step S3103 is any of 6 to 11, the process of step S3104 is performed based on the association shown in FIG. Set the level to "1". In other words, in this case, it is assumed that there is a slight variation in the free channels in the symbol fluctuation, and the four sounds (block winning sound, holding winning sound, ordinary sound effect, volume adjustment completion) that are subject to channel usage restrictions Of the sounds), the channel use restriction (25% restriction) is generated for the block winning sound. That is, in this case, when there is a winning in the general winning opening during the execution of the symbol variation and this is detected, the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning is paid out, but this is predetermined for the block winning sound. It will be processed so that it is not assigned to an empty channel. At this time, it is desirable not to set the sound generation schedule data according to the winning in the general winning opening and not to reproduce the block winning sound itself.

On the other hand, if the “minimum free channel number” specified in the process of step S3103 is any of 2 to 5, the channel limit level is set based on the correspondence shown in FIG. 264 in the process of step S3104. Set to "2". That is, in this case, it is assumed that there is a relatively small margin in the empty channel in which the symbol variation is executed, and four sounds (block winning sound, holding winning sound, ordinary electric effect sound, volume adjustment) that are subject to channel use restriction are set. Of the completion sound), a channel use restriction (50% restriction) is generated for two sounds, a block winning sound and a holding winning sound. That is, in this case, in addition to the above-described restriction on the block winning sound, when there is a winning in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 during the execution of the symbol variation, when this is detected, the quantity corresponding to the winning Although the payout of the prize balls for the minutes and the above-mentioned first and second starting mouth winning processes are carried out, the reserved winning sounds are processed so as not to be allocated to a predetermined empty channel. At this time, it is desirable not to set the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the winning in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, and not to play the reserved winning sound itself.

On the other hand, if the “minimum number of free channels” identified in the process of step S3103 is either 0 or 1, in the process of step S3104, the channel limit level is determined based on the correspondence shown in FIG. Is set to "3". That is, in this case, it is assumed that there is a situation in which a symbol variation with no margin in the empty channel is executed, and four sounds (block winning sound, pending winning sound, ordinary electric sound, volume adjustment completion The channel use limit (100% limit) is generated for all sounds. That is, in this case, in addition to the above-described restriction on the block winning sound, and the restriction on the pending winning sound, even if the effect according to the determination of the normal symbol is performed during the execution of the symbol variation Will not be assigned to a predetermined free channel. Also, when a volume adjustment operation is performed by the player during execution of the symbol variation, the volume adjustment corresponding to the volume adjustment itself is performed, but the volume adjustment completion sound is processed so as not to be assigned to a predetermined empty channel. It will be. At this time, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the general electric effect sound and the volume adjustment completion sound should not be set, and the reproduction of the general electric effect sound and the volume adjustment completion sound should not be performed. Is desirable.

According to such a configuration, as the game progresses, when the symbol variation in which the number of empty channels in the state where no sound is assigned is less than the predetermined number is executed, the number of the empty channels is set to the predetermined number. Compared to the case where a symbol variation that is not less than a number is executed, the rate of limiting the execution of the process related to the output of at least a part of the game sounds of various game sounds is increased. That is, in this case, some of the game sounds (block winning sound, holding winning sound, general electric effect sound, volume adjustment completion sound) are output from the stage before the number of vacant channels actually becomes zero. Since the execution of the related process is restricted, and the rate of execution restriction increases as the number of free channels decreases, the number of free channels becomes 0 during the execution of the symbol fluctuation. It is expected that the occurrence of such a situation will be suppressed appropriately.

Further, in the above-described configuration, among the various game sounds, the sound that is the target of channel use restriction is not the "playing sound related to the jackpot determination" that is the most important in the pachinko machine 1, but other "sounds associated with winning". ", "Sound related to normal judgment", and "Sound related to volume adjustment". That is, even if the channel use restriction is generated during the execution of the symbol change, the effect as to whether or not the big hit symbol appears in the symbol change is not limited, and it is suitably executed, so during the execution of the symbol change It is possible to suppress the deterioration in the entertainment appeal when the use of the channel is restricted.

In the above configuration, a plurality of types are prepared as types of sounds that are candidates for restriction of channel use among various game sounds (block winning sound, pending winning sound, general electric effect sound, volume adjustment completion sound). , As the channel restriction level becomes higher (the smaller the number of free channels is, the smaller the symbol variation is), the number of types of sounds to be restricted in channel use is increased. However, a method of limiting the execution of the processing related to the output from the stage before the number of empty channels actually becomes 0 and increasing the execution restriction ratio as the number of empty channels decreases. However, the method described below with reference to FIG. 265 may be adopted, for example.

FIG. 265 is a diagram showing another example of the content of restrictions separately set for the channel restriction levels.

As shown in FIG. 265, in this another example, the channel is not used depending on the “minimum number of empty channels” specified in the process of step S3103 and the channel restriction level specified in the process of step S3104. A limited lottery will be conducted regarding whether or not to apply restrictions. However, here, when a plurality of sounds that are candidates for restriction of channel use are not prepared and a judgment result indicating that a restriction is applied is obtained in the restriction lottery, one game sound (for example, a volume adjustment completion sound) For example), the limit processing for channel use is performed only for ().

For example, in this another example, when the channel restriction level is 0 (the minimum number of free channels is 12 or more), the probability that the determination result indicating that the restriction will be applied is obtained is 0/100, and the channel usage The restriction process related to the use of the channel is not executed for the specific game sound to be restricted (for example, the volume adjustment completion sound).

However, when the channel limit level becomes 1 or more, the probability that the determination result indicating that the limit is drawn will be obtained becomes higher as the value becomes larger, and the channel limit level becomes 1 (minimum available channel If the number is 6 to 11), the probability is 25/100, and if the channel restriction level is 2 (the minimum number of empty channels is 2 to 5), the probability is 50/100. Is 3 (the minimum number of free channels is 0, 1), the probability is 100/100. Then, in this another example, when the determination result indicating that the restriction is applied is obtained in the restriction lottery, the restriction processing for the channel use is executed with the same content regardless of the channel restriction level.

Even with such a configuration, as the game progresses, the number of empty channels in the state where no sound is assigned is less than a predetermined number, and when the symbol variation is executed, the number of empty channels is reduced. Compared to the case where a symbol variation that does not fall below a predetermined number is executed, the rate of limiting the execution of the process related to the output of at least a part of the game sounds of various game sounds is increased. That is, in this case, with regard to a part of the game sounds (volume adjustment completion sound), there is a limit to the execution of the process related to the output from the stage before the number of empty channels actually becomes zero. Since the rate of execution limitation increases as the number of free channels is reduced and the number of free channels decreases, the occurrence of a situation in which the number of free channels becomes 0 during the execution of symbol fluctuation is preferable. It will be expected to be suppressed.

Further, according to the above configuration, by confirming whether or not the specific sound (volume adjustment completion sound) is played during the execution period of the symbol variation, the minimum empty channel during the execution period of the symbol variation. It becomes possible to estimate the possibility that the number will be exhausted, and it becomes possible to promote the progress of the game (prize or button operation, etc.) commensurate with the estimation.

In the configuration illustrated in FIG. 264 or FIG. 265, after performing the determination process related to various notice effects based on the effect pattern, the minimum number of empty channels is specified from the occurrence state of those notice effects, and the specified minimum vacancy is specified. Although the channel limit level is set based on the number of channels, it is not limited to this. For example, since it is possible to predict in advance for each effect pattern how many sounds will be assigned to channels at the same time during the symbol variation period, the likelihood of channel shortage is classified in advance for each effect pattern. I'll do it. Then, when the effect pattern is determined, the higher the likelihood of shortage of channels into which the effect pattern is pre-classified, the higher the rate of channel restriction. In other words, in this case, when a specific type of production pattern that tends to use many channels at the same time is executed, many buttons are not actually used and various winnings do not occur, so many channels are not used and empty channels are used. Even if there is a margin in the number of symbols, the situation in which the execution of the process related to the output of the game sound may be restricted during the execution of the symbol fluctuation, but the empty channel only by performing the simple process. It is extremely useful in that it becomes possible to prevent the number of symbols from becoming 0, and even when such a process is executed, "the number of empty channels during symbol change is relatively large. When the number is small, the rate of limiting the execution of the process related to the output of the game sound is high, and when the number of free channels during the symbol change is relatively large, the percentage of the execution of the process related to the output of the game sound is limited. However, since it is a phenomenon that does not cause any discomfort even from the player's side, it is expected that the interest of the game will be favorably maintained. Further, in this case, by confirming whether or not the sound is limited, it is possible to estimate the possibility that the effect pattern is likely to cause a shortage of channels.

In addition, in the configurations illustrated in FIG. 264 and FIG. 265 and in other examples thereof, the channel limitation is executed with the symbol variation as one unit, but the channel is provided while the effect contents are advanced within one symbol variation. It is also possible to change the restriction level and execute the channel restriction according to the channel restriction level each time. Or, when a specific effect mode is executed over a plurality of symbol variations, when a predetermined restriction condition is satisfied, the channel limit level is kept unchanged at a specific value over a plurality of symbol variations, and the channel limit level is set. Channel restriction may be executed accordingly.

By the way, in the configurations illustrated in FIG. 264 and FIG. 265 and other examples thereof, as the sound to be restricted in channel use, the sound that is not the most important “effect sound involved in jackpot determination” in the pachinko machine 1 is used. Only "sounds associated with winning prizes," "sounds related to ordinary judgments" and "sounds related to volume adjustment" will be adopted. However, since these sounds include those that occur less frequently than the effect sounds, in order to realize the restriction processing that can more effectively secure the empty channel, “the big hit determination is involved. It is desirable to adopt "effect sound" as a restriction target. However, on the other hand, if the above-mentioned restriction processing is executed for "effect sound related to jackpot determination", there is a concern that the effect sound may not be reproduced, resulting in a lack of excitement. If the big hit symbol is stopped in some cases, the interest in the game may decline.

In this regard, in the configurations illustrated in FIG. 264 and FIG. 265 and other examples thereof, of the “sound effects related to the jackpot determination”, only the “sound effects in the pending state and related to pattern fluctuations that will be consumed in the future” If the use of sound channels is restricted (for example, if it is adopted as a specific game sound to be restricted in FIG. 265 or another example thereof), the effect related to the result of the symbol change being executed is performed. As a result, it is possible to adopt a production sound that has a high frequency of occurrence as a restriction target without applying any restriction.

For example, during the period when the symbol variation is being executed, when a prize is given to the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 and the jackpot determination corresponding to this is put on hold, the holding is usually held. Judgment processing is performed as to whether or not the look-ahead effect is performed with respect to the jackpot judgment in the state. As a result, when a special result is obtained, a pre-reading effect (effect display, effect sound) that suggests beforehand the degree of expectation as to whether or not the jackpot determination in the holding state is to win the jackpot is performed. Become.

However, the number of channels used becomes large and there is a concern that there will be vacancy (such as a state where a symbol variation with the minimum number of vacant channels is 0 or 1 is being executed). Yes, the effect sound corresponding to the effect on the design variation that will be consumed in the future" is targeted, and the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004 is won, and the jackpot judgment corresponding to this is suspended. Even if the state is set, the determination process for the prefetch effect itself is not executed for the jackpot determination that is held, and both the prefetch effect and the effect sound corresponding thereto are not performed.

With such a configuration, when the number of channels used becomes large and anxiety arises in the vacancy, the channel portion that is applied to the effect relating to the future symbol change that is not the symbol change being executed is being executed. Since it becomes possible to supply to the effect sound related to the fluctuation of the effect, it does not have any adverse effect on the effect related to the result of the pattern change being executed, the effect sound with a high frequency of occurrence is limited. You will be able to. Also, the production to be restricted is only the "production related to future symbol changes in the unexecuted state", and even if the symbol fluctuations are subject to restriction, if this is held in the future, it will be subject to restriction. Since the effect during symbol fluctuation (effect content according to effect pattern) that is not set is always executed, it is possible to suitably suppress the deterioration of the game enjoyment due to the effect being restricted.

In addition, when "effect sound related to jackpot determination" is the target of restriction, if only the effect sound of effects (effect display, effect sound) is subject to restriction (no sound output), the effect lacks excitement. However, in the above configuration, when the number of used channels becomes large and there is anxiety about the vacancy, the jackpot is put on hold and the jackpot determination is put on hold. Sometimes the pre-reading effect determination process itself is not executed and neither the production display nor the effect sound related to the pre-reading effect is performed. Therefore, a special result (pre-reading win) cannot be obtained in the pre-reading determination. It is only the same effect situation as that when the pre-reading effect is not executed (the hold display when the prefetching effect is not executed), and it is possible to preferably avoid the deterioration of the game enjoyment due to the execution of the effect lacking excitement.

In addition, when the "effect sound related to the big hit determination" is a target for restriction, the judgment process for the prefetching effect itself is not executed when the prize is hit and the big hit determination is put on hold, and the effect display and the effect regarding the prefetching effect are provided. It is not limited to this, but it is not limited to this. For example, when "effect sound related to jackpot determination" is restricted, determination processing for prefetching effect is performed when a prize is won, but even if a special result is obtained, until a specific timing during pattern change arrives. Does not execute both the effect display and the effect sound related to the look-ahead effect, and restricts them, and when the specific timing during the pattern change arrives, only the effect display of the effect display and the effect sound is limited. May be canceled and this may be performed. That is, in this case, a special effect (timing) different from the case where the “effect sound related to the jackpot determination” is not the target of restriction (normal time), the effect display regarding the prefetch effect is performed, and the special effect is displayed. Since the pre-reading effect will be executed after it is displayed as if the result (pre-reading win) was not obtained, the pre-reading effect can be achieved while suppressing the deterioration of the amusement of the game caused by not outputting the effect sound according to the pre-reading effect. It becomes possible to perform it suitably.

In addition, as a process related to future effects under conditions where channel usage is restricted:-When a prize is won, the judgment process for pre-reading effects is performed, but even if a special result is obtained, the specific timing during symbol change comes. Until it is done, both the effect display and the effect sound related to the look-ahead effect are not executed and these are restricted, and when the specific timing during the symbol change comes, the effect display of the effect display and the effect sound is changed. A configuration in which only the restriction is released and this is performed is the first restricted process,
When the prize is won, the determination process for the prefetch effect is not executed and neither the effect display regarding the prefetch effect nor the effect sound is performed, and the game is advanced when the second restricted process is adopted. Among them, when the symbol fluctuation in which the number of empty channels in which the sound is not assigned is less than the predetermined number is executed, compared to the case where the symbol fluctuation in which the number of empty channels is not less than the predetermined number is executed As a result, the rate at which either the first restricted process or the second restricted process is executed is increased, and within the symbol fluctuation that was in the execution state when the first restricted process was performed. The expected value of the number of channels used in "A", and the expected value of the number of channels used within the symbol fluctuation that was in the execution state when the second restricted process is performed is "B". At this time, it is more desirable that either the first restricted process or the second restricted process be executed so that the relationship becomes “A<B”. That is, in this case, as the number of channels used increases and more anxiety arises due to vacancy, not only the first restricted process in which only the effect sound is restricted, but both effect display and effect sound are restricted. Since the rate of channel restriction is increased by the second restricted process described above, it is expected that the anxiety when the number of used channels is increased can be suppressed more appropriately.

[Channel special opening process]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is finite, even if a special result is obtained by the determination means according to the winning, the channel to which the sound data is to be assigned is not full. In (the situation where the number of vacant channels is 0), the special sound corresponding to the special result being obtained cannot be assigned to the channel, and there is a concern that the enjoyment of the game may be deteriorated because the special sound cannot be output.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when a plurality of game sounds are assigned to different channels and are in an output state, the volume of at least some of the game sounds is lowered, A process of terminating the allocation of the specific game sound to the channel can be performed in a state where the volume is reduced (a suppressed state). Then, after the allocation of the specific game sound to the channel is completed in this way, it is possible to execute a process of increasing the volume of another game sound that is continuously allocated to the channel (channel special opening process).

According to such a configuration, it is difficult to recognize that a change has occurred in the channel allocation mode of the game sound (a state where the volume of the game sound is reduced (a suppressed state)), and a usage state is aimed at. To reduce the number of channels in (increase the number of free channels). Therefore, for example, even if the number of channels in use is reduced prior to this in order to more reliably output the important game sound, the number of channels in use is reduced. It becomes difficult to notice what has been done, and it is possible to suppress deterioration of the entertainment level of the game due to the fact that a specific game sound is no longer output.

FIG. 266 is a time chart showing an example of the allocation status of each channel when such a channel special opening process is performed.

As shown in FIG. 266, during a period in which the symbol variation according to the result of the big hit determination is being executed, at timing tk11, a predetermined effect pattern that is effected by the game board side effect display device 1600. The sound of "normal BGM reproduction" according to is allocated to the reproduction channels 02 and 03 and reproduced (here, stereo reproduction), and corresponds to the effect A displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. The sound of "reproduction A reproduction" is assigned to the reproduction channels 08 and 09 and reproduced (here, stereo reproduction).

In this respect, as shown in FIG. 266(a), among the sounds in the reproduction state (normal BGM reproduction, effect A reproduction), the sound of “effect A reproduction” is a stage where a predetermined effect pattern is in the middle of effect. At a timing tk13 (during the execution of the symbol variation), the reproduction channels 08 and 09 are removed and the reproduction is terminated. In this way, even if the predetermined effect pattern is in the midst of the effect, the effect content of the predetermined effect pattern can be changed by terminating the effect sound allocation from the channel and quickly changing it to an empty channel. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which it becomes impossible to allocate and play a new sound due to a shortage of available channels when progressing.

However, as described above, when the predetermined effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination is in the stage of the effect (during the execution of the symbol variation) and the effect sound is removed from the channel and is changed to an empty channel, The number of effect sounds in the reproduction state decreases, and there is a concern that the decrease in the degree of expectation that a big hit symbol will appear in the effect pattern will result in a decrease.

Therefore, in this explanatory example, as shown in FIG. 266(a), first, before the timing tk13 for terminating the reproduction by removing the sound of "reproduction A reproduction" from the reproduction channels 08 and 09 arrives. During the period from "timing tk12" to the arrival of "timing tk14" that is later than the above timing tk13, the sound of "reproduction B reproduction" corresponding to the production B displayed on the game board side production display device 1600 is produced. It is assigned to the reproduction channels 08 and 09 to be in a reproduction (here, stereo reproduction) state. Then, as shown in FIG. 266(b), in the period (timing tk12 to tk14) during which the sound of "production B reproduction" is put into a reproduction state in this way, timing tk13 at which reproduction of "production A reproduction" is finished. When a plurality of effect sounds including the sound of “effect B reproduction” are assigned to the channels, the volume of each of the effect sounds is reduced (volume suppression processing).

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 266(c), the sound of "production B reproduction" in this description example is output as a production sound corresponding to the step production in which the production content can be developed up to four times. After the effect contents have been successively developed three times (step 1, step 2, step 3), the effect of further developing to the effect contents according to step 4 is executed. Then, a process (volume suppressing process) is performed to reduce the volume of each of the plurality of effect sounds including the sound of "reproduction B reproduction" according to the step effect, while being kept assigned to the channels. If a high-expectation production mode that further develops the production content according to step 4 appears when the volume suppression processing is ended and the volume is returned to the normal volume (production with relatively high expectations), While the specific effect sound according to the effect content of step 4 is output as the sound of “effect B reproduction”, the effect content according to step 3 does not develop into the effect content according to step 4 When the low-expectation production mode in which the production is finished appears (production with relatively low expectation), a production sound different from the specific production sound is output as the sound of “production B reproduction”.

According to such a configuration, the effect design is made to arrive at the timing tk13 aiming at the time when the volume suppression processing is performed for a plurality of effect sounds. Since the sound of "play" is removed from the playback channels 08 and 09 and the playback is ended, the number of channels in use is reduced (the sound of "playback A playback" becomes non-playback). You will be able to make it difficult to notice what was done).

In particular, in the example shown in FIGS. 266(a) to 266(c), the production content having a relatively high degree of expectation (the production content that develops to step 4) and the production content having a relatively low degree of expectation (steps) In the period (the period in which it is unclear whether or not it develops) that the production content (the production of whether or not to develop to step 4) that is connected to any of the above (the production content that does not develop to 4) appears. The sound volume suppressing process is executed to remove the sound of "reproduction A reproduction" from the reproduction channels 08 and 09 and terminate the reproduction. According to such a configuration, not only is the sound volume of the effect sound being lowered, but the player's interest itself is strongly attracted to the effect B (the sound of “effect B reproduction”). Since the effect A (sound of "reproduction A reproduction") will be ended, after that, the volume of the effect sound that was the target of volume suppression including the sound of "reproduction B reproduction" was returned. At this time, even if the sound of "reproduction A reproduction" is not reproduced, the content of the production having a relatively high degree of expectation (the content of the production that develops to step 4) and the content of the production having a relatively low degree of expectation ( It becomes possible to draw an interest in which one of the contents (effect contents that do not progress to Step 4) has appeared, and make it difficult to notice that the sound of “reproduction A reproduction” is not reproduced.

Moreover, in the sound volume suppression processing according to this explanation example, although the sound volume is lowered while a plurality of sound effects including the sound of "reproduction B reproduction" are assigned to the channels, the volume of all the sound effects is reduced. The volume is not decreased, and the specific effect sound (here, the sound of "normal BGM reproduction") is continuously reproduced at the normal volume.
That is, in this case, for some effect sounds (sounds of "normal BGM reproduction"), the volume of a plurality of effect sounds is lowered while being reproduced as usual without the volume being suppressed, and thus the sound can be discriminated in this way. Since the reproduction of the sound of "production A reproduction" is ended while the sound of "production A reproduction" is made more difficult, it is possible to make it more difficult to notice because the sound of "production A reproduction" is no longer reproduced. Like

Furthermore, in this illustrative example, the sound volume “reproduction A reproduction” is not terminated immediately after the sound volume suppression processing is performed on a plurality of sound effects, and a predetermined time has elapsed after the sound volume suppression processing was started. The reproduction of the sound of "reproduction A reproduction" is ended after waiting for the lapsed timing tk13. That is, immediately after the volume suppression processing is started, there is a possibility that the player may be interested in the effect sounds A and B that have undergone the change of “volume reduction”, but the volume decreases to a specific value. It is assumed that such interest has already diminished when a state in which the specific value does not change is maintained for a predetermined time. Therefore, the sound of "reproduction A reproduction" is aimed at such timing. By terminating the reproduction of, the sound of "reproduction A reproduction" is no longer reproduced, which makes it more difficult to notice.

In particular, in this example, the volume of the effect sound that is the target of the volume suppression processing is gradually decreased, and the reproduction of the sound “reproduction A reproduction” is ended after the volume becomes 0 (silence). As a result, the sound of "reproduction A reproduction" is no longer reproduced, which makes it more difficult to notice.

Note that in the example shown in FIG. 266, the reproduction of the “production B reproduction” is started while the reproduction of the “production A reproduction” is being reproduced, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the state where the sound of "production B reproduction" is being reproduced, the sound of "production A reproduction" is started to be reproduced, and the sound of "production B reproduction" is reproduced in the suppressed state. The reproduction of the sound “” may be terminated.

Further, the effects A and B do not necessarily have to be effects accompanied by effect display on the game board side effect display device 1600, and may be executed as only sound effects, for example.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 266, the timing tk12 for reproducing the sound of “production B reproduction” is set to come by the progress of the variation pattern (production pattern) according to the jackpot determination. Not limited. For example, the sound of "reproduction B reproduction" is started based on an operation on a predetermined operation means (operation button 410 or the like), and the sound of "reproduction A reproduction" is reproduced while the sound of "reproduction B reproduction" is reproduced. The reproduction of may be ended in the above-described mode.

In addition, it is not always necessary to gradually reduce the volume of the effect sound that is the target of the volume suppression processing. On the contrary, the volume of the effect sound may be returned stepwise as the processing for returning the volume. Also, the volume does not necessarily have to be set to 0 (silence), and if the volume is controlled to be lower than the normal level, it is difficult to notice that the reproduction of the "production A reproduction" sound has ended. Is possible.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 266, a specific effect sound corresponding to the effect pattern (here, a sound of “normal BGM reproduction”) is excluded from the sound volume suppression processing, and the sound volume at the normal time is kept. Although the sound is continuously reproduced, the sound volume of all the effect sounds may be decreased when the sound volume suppression processing is performed. On the contrary, for the sound of “reproduction A”, the volume may be maintained without being reduced when the volume suppressing process is performed, and even in such a case, the volume is reduced. The reproduction of the "production A reproduction" sound is terminated while the player is attracting the interest of the "production B reproduction" sound in the state where the "production B reproduction" sound is included. Even if the sound of "reproduction A reproduction" is not reproduced when the volumes of the plurality of effect sounds that have been targeted for volume suppression are returned, the effect content having a relatively high degree of expectation (step 4 The production of “production A” or the production of content with relatively low expectations (production content that does not develop to step 4) attracts interest, and the sound of “production A reproduction” is reproduced. You will be able to make it harder to notice that you are no longer being done.

In addition, at least during the volume suppressing process in the period in which the effect pattern for reproducing the sounds of "production A reproduction" and "production B reproduction" is performed (after the volume of "production B reproduction" is decreased from the normal value). Until the value is returned to the normal value), even if a winning is generated in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 in order to more favorably maintain the interest in the sound of “production B reproduction”, It is desirable not to play the corresponding pending winning sound. In addition, even if a special result (prefetch win) is obtained in the prefetch determination when a winning is generated in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, the effect sound according to the prefetch effect is not reproduced. Is desirable.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 266, the sound reproduction of “reproduction A reproduction” is ended within the period in which the volume of the effect sound is reduced, and when the period ends, the sound is reduced and assigned to the channel. It was decided to raise the volume of the effect sound that was used (return to the original volume value), but in addition to this, a special effect sound that was not assigned to the channel at the end of the period was added to the channel. It may be newly assigned and reproduced (reproduced at the normal volume). With such a configuration, it becomes more and more noticeable whether a special effect sound is reproduced when the volume is returned, and it is further noticed that the sound of "reproduction A reproduction" is not reproduced. You will be able to make it difficult. Moreover, if the number of channels used after the volume is restored is lower than that before the volume is lowered, there is a concern that the expectation that a big hit symbol will appear due to the symbol fluctuation has decreased, but there is a special effect sound. Is newly assigned to a channel to be played back (played at the normal volume), so that it is the same before the volume is lowered and after the volume is returned, or more than that (two or more effect sounds are applied to the channel). It will be possible to put the channels in use (when newly allocated), so that it is preferable that the player remembers the feeling as if the expectations were lowered. It will be avoided. In this case, there may be a case where the special effect sound is reproduced when the volume is returned, and a case where the special effect sound is not reproduced, suggesting that the expectation is relatively high when the special effect sound is reproduced. It is desirable to do.

When a special effect sound that has not been assigned to a channel when the volume is returned is newly assigned to the channel to be played back, the channel that is vacant due to the removal of the sound effect of "reproduction A reproduction" It is desirable to assign a special effect sound to. With such a configuration, it is possible to realize a wide range of effects with a small number of channel resources.

In addition, such a special channel special opening process does not necessarily have to be performed when it is determined to execute a specific effect pattern, and for example, a target of restriction within the process described with reference to FIGS. 264 and 265. As "effect A" is adopted, the smaller the number of minimum free channels is, the smaller the symbol variation is (when the minimum number of free channels in the symbol variation is less than a predetermined number, compared to when the number is not less than the predetermined number), the channel special opening is performed. The rate at which the processing is performed may be increased. According to such a configuration, in a situation where the number of free channels is large enough to prevent the user from feeling anxious about running out of channels, "effect A" can be continuously output without being terminated halfway. become.

[Suppressed operation sound output processing]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is finite, even if a special result is obtained by the determination means according to the winning, the channel to which the sound data is to be assigned is not full. In (the situation where the number of vacant channels is 0), the special sound corresponding to the special result being obtained cannot be assigned to the channel, and there is a concern that the enjoyment of the game may be deteriorated because the special sound cannot be output.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when it is determined that a specific effect pattern is executed as the symbol variation according to the result of the big hit determination, from the start to the end of the symbol variation. During the period, the game board side effect display device 1600 performs a process of advancing the display effect according to a specific effect pattern, and also assigns a sound of “BGM reproduction” according to the specific effect pattern to a predetermined channel and reproduces the sound. Perform processing to Then, when the display effect on the game board side effect display device 1600 progresses to the predetermined timing within the symbol variation period, the sound of "BGM reproduction" is left assigned to the predetermined channel and is output in a suppressed manner or in a silent state ( When the volume of "BGM playback" is reduced to a specific value and is output), and an operation to a predetermined operation means (operation button 410 or the like) is detected in this state, a big hit symbol (corresponding to the symbol variation) The special effect sound that indicates the degree of expectation that a special display mode) appears in the effect pattern is to be output in a non-suppressed mode (suppressed operation sound output process). The degree of expectation suggested by the special effect may be 100%.

That is, in this case, when outputting the special effect sound in response to the operation detection, the sound of "BGM reproduction" is still assigned to the predetermined channel, but is output in a suppressed manner or in a silent state. Therefore, it becomes possible to provide an atmosphere in which the channel usage situation is likely to be marginal. Therefore, it is necessary to provide the player with an operation opportunity to output the special effect sound while eliminating the anxiety that "the channel may not be available and the special effect sound may not be output". As a result, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the entertainment of the game.

By the way, when a sound (sound of "BGM reproduction") corresponding to a specific effect pattern is left assigned to a channel and is to be output in a suppression mode or in silence, it is generally assigned to the channel. It is assumed that the process of suppressing the volume of the sound (the sound of “BGM reproduction”) (the process of reducing the volume to a specific value) is performed. In fact, if such a volume suppressing process is performed prior to giving an operation opportunity to the player (generating the effective period of effect reception), a sound corresponding to a specific effect pattern (“ It is possible to give an operation opportunity to the player (generate a valid period for effect reception) after the "BGM reproduction" sound is output in a suppressed manner or in a silent state.

However, as is well known, when the operation opportunity is given to the player, the effective period of the effect reception is generated for a predetermined time, but the operation (effect reception) is performed at any timing within this effective period. It is indefinite (depending on the player) and cannot be predicted in advance. Therefore, even if it is possible to end the volume suppression processing and return the volume to the initial value when the operation (reception of performance) is performed within the effective period, it is possible to return the volume in this way. It is impossible to store the sound of "BGM reproduction" in advance so as to start the reproduction of the sound matched to this at an indefinite timing.

In addition to the process of returning the volume when the player operates, the sound data of "BGM reproduction" is switched to the sound data of "BGM reproduction exclusively for reproduction of special effect sound" and this is changed. It may be possible to perform a process of reproducing. However, the sound of "BGM reproduction" is reproduced in accordance with the content of various productions until the specific production pattern is stopped by the design, the timing of the stop of the design, etc. When it is uncertain (depending on the player) at which timing the operation (effect reception) is performed, if the operation (effect reception) is used as a trigger, the sound of "BGM play" is newly reproduced. However, there is a concern that a so-called sound shift may occur between the various effects after that and the timing of stopping the symbols, and the interest in the game may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when a specific effect pattern is executed, first, a plurality of sound data stored as the sound of “BGM reproduction” corresponding to the specific effect pattern ( For example, the sound data during normal fluctuation, the sound data during the first half of the super reach performance, the sound data during the second half of the super reach performance, etc. Performs processing for sequentially assigning to channels. Then, of the plurality of sound data stored as the sound of “BGM reproduction” corresponding to such a specific effect pattern, specific sound data (one sound material) is defined by the sound generation schedule data. If it is assigned to a predetermined channel according to the time series being performed, it is assigned to the predetermined channel from the timing before the effective period of the effect reception in the particular effect pattern occurs, and reproduction is started, and the effective period ends. After that, the allocation state for the predetermined channel is maintained and reproduced for a long period until the timing.

In this respect, in a partial section (special period) when the above-mentioned specific sound data (one sound material) is viewed in time series, a suppression mode or a process of outputting sound in silence compared to other sections. When the specific sound data is assigned to a predetermined channel in a time series specified by the sound generation schedule data, a partial section (special (Period)), there is a time-series relationship in which the effective period of performance reception occurs. In addition to this, even if an operation is performed by the player at any timing within the effective period of the effect reception that occurs within the special period (partial section), the special period (partial section) is changed to the special period. The sound of "BGM reproduction" is generated as a special effect sound corresponding to the effect reception over two sections in the specific sound data with a period after the (partial section) ends (another section). The reproduction is performed in a non-suppressed mode on a channel different from the assigned predetermined channel.

According to such a configuration, a plurality of sound data (for example, sound data at the time of normal fluctuation, sound data at the first half of super reach effect, super sound, and the like stored as the sound of “BGM reproduction” corresponding to a specific effect pattern, Sound data in the latter half of the reach effect, etc.) is sequentially allocated to the predetermined channels in a time series specified by the sound generation schedule data corresponding to them, without adjusting the volume from the initial value. In both cases, it becomes possible to create a “suppression mode or a state in which sound is output silently (special period)”. In addition, when the player's operation is received in the thus-created “suppressed mode or in a state in which there is no sound output (special period)”, the special operation is performed in a non-suppressed mode by the process with high immediacy. While the effect sound is started to be reproduced, the sound of "BGM reproduction" which is in the reproduction state on the predetermined channel is irrelevant to the effect reception, "the state of being output in the suppression mode or the silence (special period). Is maintained for a predetermined time. Then, after that, a part of the specific sound data (one sound material) (the suppression mode or the silent sound output) is finished while the special effect sound is being mixed with the special effect sound. Since the data content of the other section (non-suppressed sound output) is reproduced, it becomes possible to secretly return the sound of "BGM reproduction" to the output in the non-suppressed mode. It is possible to provide a production sound that does not cause a feeling of strangeness. That is, in this case, when the operation by the player is received in the suppression mode or in the state where the sound of "BGM reproduction" is output silently, the special effect sound is not suppressed by the process of high immediacy triggered by this. It is possible to preferably avoid the occurrence of a sound shift between the various effects and the timing of the stop of symbols after that, while the reproduction is started.

FIG. 267 is a time chart showing an example of the allocation status of each channel when such a controlled operation sound output process is performed. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 267, a specific example of executing such a controlled operation sound output process will be described.

As shown in FIG. 267(a), during the period in which the symbol variation according to the result of the big hit determination is being executed, at the timing ts11, the production progress on the game board side production display device 1600 is specified. The sound of "BGM reproduction" according to the effect pattern of is allocated to the reproduction channels 02 and 03 and already reproduced (here, stereo reproduction). The sound of this "BGM reproduction" is, for example, one sound data (one sound data over the entire period of the symbol change from the start to the end of the symbol change when it is determined that a specific effect pattern is executed). (Sound material) may be played based on the sound generation schedule data, or the entire period of the symbol fluctuation is divided into a plurality of periods, and each different sound data prepared for each period is May be sequentially reproduced based on the sound generation schedule data corresponding to. In the example shown in FIG. 267, one sound data (one sound material) as the sound of “BGM reproduction” over the entire period (part of the symbol variation period) in the figure including the timing ts11. Are assigned to channels 02 and 03 and are in a reproduction state.

In this regard, as shown in FIGS. 267(a) and 267(b), one sound data (sound of "BGM reproduction") assigned to channels 02 and 03 and in a reproduction state is special. At the timing ts12, which is before the timing ts13 when the operation valid period (the valid period of reception of the effect) where the operation opportunity that triggers the production of the production sound is generated is generated, the silent data content is set. It is designed to be played in some sections. As a result, without adjusting the volume of the "BGM playback" sound from the initial value, the sound can be output in a silent state while being assigned to the predetermined channel.

With such a configuration, at the timing ts13, the sound of "BGM reproduction" is in a reproduction state within a part of the section set as the silent data content, and there seems to be a margin in the channel usage situation. While the atmosphere is provided, it becomes possible to generate an operation effective period (effective period of effect reception) in which an operation opportunity is given to the player. This provides the player with an operation opportunity to output the special effect sound while eliminating the anxiety that "there may be no channels available and the special effect sound may not be output." As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in amusement of the game.

Moreover, the operation valid period according to this description example is the timing ts16 at which the partial section in which the silent data content is set as the sound of "BGM reproduction" is ended even when the player does not perform any operation. At a timing ts15, which is before the arrival of, the period is ended so that the player does not receive the effect. Therefore, even if the operation by the player is accepted at any timing within the operation valid period, the sound of "BGM reproduction" is in a reproduction state within a partial section set as silent data content. While the atmosphere in which the usage situation of the bookmark channel is likely to be afforded is provided, it becomes possible to generate the special effect sound according to the operation by the player. The operation valid period is ended when the timing ts15 arrives without any operation by the player and also when an operation is accepted by the player. When the timing ts15 arrives without the player's operation, the special effect sound may be generated as in the case of the player's operation at that timing.

Then, in this description example, it is assumed that the operation by the player is received at the timing ts14, and based on the reception of the effect, the channel 02 to which the sound of "BGM reproduction" is assigned. , 03, which is different from channels 03 and 03, special effect sounds are assigned and reproduced.

In this regard, in this example, the maximum time from the start to the end of the operation valid period (the time from the timing ts13 to the timing ts15) is set to "SY", and the operation valid period ends at this maximum time. When the time (time from timing ts15 to timing ts16) from the beginning to the end of the partial section in which the silent data content is set as the sound of “BGM playback” is set to “BF”, it is within the operation valid period. Even if the operation by the player is accepted at any timing, the special effect sound is assigned to the channels 08 and 09 and reproduced for a certain period of "SY+α (>BF)".

With such a configuration, even if the operation by the player is accepted at any timing within the operation valid period, the timing ts16 always comes when the special effect sound is in the reproduction state. The sound of "BGM reproduction" can be output as a non-suppressed form by being mixed with the special effect sound. That is, in this case, the time from when the reproduction of the special effect sound is started to when the sound of "BGM reproduction" is output as a non-suppressed mode is variable in accordance with the timing at which the operation by the player is accepted. , A buffer period for returning the output period of the special effect sound in a non-suppressed manner to the sound of "BGM reproduction" (the sound of "BGM reproduction" is returned in a non-suppressed manner by being mixed in with the special effect sound. By making it function as a period during which it is hard to notice), when the operation by the player is accepted, the sound of “BGM playback” is not restored as a non-suppressed mode, but the sense of incongruity is caused by returning after a predetermined time. You will be able to make it difficult to remember.

Then, after the sound "BGM reproduction" is restored as the data content (non-suppression mode) of the BGM reproduction effect sound, when the timing ts17 arrives, the sound "BGM reproduction" is reproduced in the non-suppression mode. The reproduction of the special effect sound will be ended in the state.

In the above description example, the "timing at which the reproduction of the special effect sound is started" and the "timing at which the reproduction of the special effect sound is ended" are performed by the player as shown in FIG. 267(b). It will be variable within the range indicated by the dotted arrow depending on the timing to be accepted, but no matter which timing they correspond to, the timing ts16 arrives when the special effect sound is in the reproduction state. , It is clear that the normal section in which the data content (non-suppression mode) of the BGM reproduction effect sound is set as the "BGM reproduction" sound is started.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 267, “a feeling of strangeness caused by not returning the sound of “BGM playback” when the operation by the player is accepted as a non-suppressed mode and returning it after a predetermined time” is further remembered. In order to make it difficult, it is desirable to set the volume initial value of the special effect sound larger than the initial value of BGM reproduction in the normal section.
With such a configuration, while attention is being paid to the special effect sound having a large volume initial value, the sound of BGM reproduction can be secretly transitioned to the reproduction state in the normal section.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 267, when the player's operation is received as an effect, a special effect sound is generated based on the effect reception, but a specific effect according to the variation pattern or the result of the jackpot determination. The special effect sound may be generated based on the reception of the effect only when the condition is satisfied. Even when the specific effect condition is not satisfied, the operation valid period is generated at the timing ts14, and when the operation by the player is accepted within the operation valid period, the effect is accepted. Based on this, a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.) is reproduced. Even if the operation is performed at any timing within the operation valid period, the sound of the BGM reproduction is secretly switched to the reproduction state in the normal section while the predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.) is in the reproduction state. It is desirable that the point to be changed to is similar to the case of the example shown in FIG.

However, instead of this, when reproducing a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.), the reproduction time is set shorter than when the special effect sound is put into the reproduction state, and the predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound) is reproduced. The sound of the BGM reproduction may be returned to the reproduction state in the normal section after the reproduction of the sound) is finished. In this case, even if the operation is performed at any timing within the operation valid period, the timing at which the BGM reproduction sound is returned to the reproduction state in the normal section is the reproduction of a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.). Will be set to arrive after the end. According to such a configuration, a silent period (depending on the operation timing) between the end of the predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.) and the return of the BGM reproduction sound to the reproduction state in the normal section. (A period in which the length is variable) can be generated as a buffer period. Further, if it is set so that a resurrection effect with a high expectation level (may be 100%) can be generated during this silent period, it is expected to maintain amusement of the game.

Alternatively, when reproducing a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.), the sound of BGM reproduction is not returned to the reproduction state in the normal section, and the symbol variation is stopped in a lost manner. Good. In this case, at timing ts12, the allocation of the BGM reproduction sound to the channels 02 and 03 may be terminated, and this may be set as an empty channel.

Further, in the case of generating a special effect sound, it is also possible to perform a movable effect of operating a predetermined movable body based on the effect reception so as to reduce the degree of attention to the sound of BGM reproduction. This is desirable for secretly shifting the sound of reproduction to the reproduction state in the normal section.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 267, the sound of “BGM reproduction” is output silently in a part of the section, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a mode in which the sound of “BGM reproduction” is suppressed in other sections is suppressed. Anything can be output. Here, the suppressed mode may be, for example, a mode in which the volume is relatively lowered, or a mode in which the vibration frequency of the speaker cone per unit time is reduced.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 267, the sound data of “BGM reproduction” assigned to a predetermined channel is set to a suppression mode or a time-series period in which no sound is generated. It is possible to create a state in which the sound is suppressed or output silently (special period) simply by reproducing the sound without adjusting the volume. However, it is not always necessary to set a suppression mode or a time-series period in which the sound data of "BGM reproduction" assigned to a predetermined channel is suppressed. For example, at the timing ts12, the sound of "BGM reproduction" Volume adjustment may be performed to reduce the volume to a specific value (may be muted). That is, in this case, even if the player's operation is accepted at timing ts14, the process of increasing the sound volume of the "BGM reproduction" sound from the specific value (the process of returning to the volume initial value) is performed by the effect acceptance. Try not to. Then, when the specific effect condition is satisfied, the volume of the sound of "BGM reproduction" is increased from the specific value while the special effect sound is being reproduced when the predetermined timing ts16 arrives. Processing (processing for returning to the initial volume value) is performed. On the other hand, when the specific effect condition is not satisfied, the volume of the "BGM reproduction" sound is specified while the predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.) is being reproduced, as in the above-described another example. A process of increasing the value (a process of returning to the volume initial value) may be performed, or the sound volume of the "BGM reproduction" sound may be set to a specific value when reproduction of a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.) is completed. May be performed (process to return to the volume initial value), or the design variation may be ended without raising a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound or the like) from a specific value. Good.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 267, at least the period from the predetermined timing prior to the arrival of the timing ts12 to the timing ts16 is subjected to the restriction processing that makes it difficult to generate new sound allocation to the empty channel. Is desirable.
It should be noted that, as such a limiting process, for example, there is nothing to do with the result of whether or not the jackpot pattern appears due to the pattern change being executed, such as a block winning sound, a pending winning sound, a general electric effect sound, and an adjusting sound. It is desirable that a specific game sound is set as a restriction target, and that the specific game sound that is set as the restriction target is not newly assigned to a channel so that the reproduction is not performed.

Further, when it is determined that a specific effect pattern is to be executed as a symbol variation according to the result of the big hit determination, a specific effect sound (BGM) is generated on a channel different from channels 02 and 03 before the timing ts12 arrives. It is desirable that the effect sound such as a sound effect or a serif is used instead of the music so that it does not overlap with the sound), and the timing ts12 arrives while the specific effect sound is being reproduced, and BGM reproduction is performed. It is desirable that the sound of is output in a suppressed manner or in silence. That is, in this case, since the sound of BGM reproduction is mixed in with the specific effect sound, it is possible to make it difficult to notice that the sound of BGM reproduction is in the suppression mode or in the silent state. Regarding the specific effect sound, the reproduction state should be ended before the timing ts14 (timing ts14 or before the timing ts14) when the special effect sound (or the predetermined effect sound) is output. Is desirable for alleviating the anxiety that the special effect sound is not output.

Further, when it is determined that a specific effect pattern is to be executed as a symbol variation according to the result of the big hit determination, the sound of BGM reproduction is output from the timing ts14 when the special effect sound (or the predetermined effect sound) is output. It is desirable to output the effect sound on a plurality of channels before the timing ts16 at which the suppression mode or the state of silence is ended. That is, in this case, since a plurality of effect sounds including the special effect sound are output, it becomes possible to easily mix the BGM reproduction sound with the effect sounds, and the BGM reproduction sound is normally reproduced. It becomes possible to secretly shift to the reproduction state in the mode.

Further, such a controlled operation sound output process does not necessarily have to be performed when it is determined to execute a specific effect pattern, and for example, in the process described with reference to FIGS. 264 and 265. "BGM reproduction sound" is adopted as a restriction target, and the smaller the minimum free channel number is, the smaller the symbol variation is (when the minimum variable channel number in the symbol variation is less than a predetermined number, compared to when it is not less than the predetermined number). The rate at which the suppressed operation sound output process is performed may be increased. According to such a configuration, in a situation in which there is a sufficient number of empty channels so as to prevent anxiety that the special effect sound is not output due to lack of channels, the sound of BGM reproduction is output without being suppressed or silenced. Will be able to.

[Channel allocation cancellation operation]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is finite, even if a special result is obtained by the determination means according to the winning, the channel to which the sound data is to be assigned is not full. In (the situation where the number of vacant channels is 0), the special sound corresponding to the special result being obtained cannot be assigned to the channel, and there is a concern that the enjoyment of the game may be deteriorated because the special sound cannot be output.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the detection means detects the process of changing at least one of the channels to which the sound data is assigned to an empty channel to which the sound data is not assigned. Executable (channel allocation cancellation operation). That is, in this case, since an empty channel will be created upon the operation of the player, the empty channel will be created by the operation of the player at a timing immediately before the effect sound or the special sound that the player likes is generated. By securing in advance, it becomes possible to reliably output the player's favorite effect sound and special sound through the thus-acquired free channel.

Note that the operation (channel assignment canceling operation) in this description example is not limited to the “button operation”, and an action such as praying by holding the hand over the pachinko machine 1 is exemplified with reference to FIGS. 258 to 262. It is also possible to use a contact-type or non-contact-type predetermined sensor that can detect any state change that occurs when such a specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) to be detected is performed. It suffices to perform processing for removing the sound in the state assigned to the channel from the channel and ending the reproduction upon the detection.

FIG. 268 is a time chart showing an example of the allocation status of each channel when the processing related to such a channel allocation cancellation operation is performed.

As shown in FIG. 268, during the period in which the symbol variation according to the result of the big hit determination is being executed, at timing tw11, a predetermined effect pattern that is effected by the game board side effect display device 1600. The sound of "BGM1 reproduction" (for example, effect sound effect reproduced during execution of the super reach effect) is assigned to the reproduction channels 00 and 01 and reproduced (here, stereo reproduction), and The sound of "BGM2 playback" according to the effect mode (for example, one music piece that is continuously played over a plurality of fluctuations in a time-saving game state or the like) is assigned to the playback channels 02 and 03 and played (here, stereo playback). ) Is in the situation.

In this regard, as shown in FIGS. 268(a) and 268(b), of the sounds in the reproduction state (BGM1 reproduction, BGM2 reproduction), the sound of "BGM2 reproduction" is a specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation). The channel allocation is forcibly terminated when is detected, and during the period in which the symbol variation is being executed, at timing tw12, the effect reception of the specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) is accepted. The allowable reception period can be generated until timing tw13. In the reception period from timing tw12 to timing tw13, a specific action to be detected (channel allocation canceling operation) such as "Operate a button and secure an empty channel" in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. An operation instruction image prompting the user to perform is displayed.

Here, FIG. 268(a) shows the allocation status of each channel when the specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) is not performed within the acceptance period of timing tw12 to timing tw13 and the detection by the predetermined detection means is not performed. Showing.

As shown in FIG. 268(a), when the detection by the predetermined detection means is not made by the time the timing tw13 arrives, the sound of "BGM2 reproduction" is removed from the reproduction channels 02 and 03. However, this is continuously reproduced even after the timing tw13 arrives. Further, at the timing tw13 when the reception period ends, the operation instruction image (operate the button and secure a free channel) displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is hidden.

In addition, at timing tw13, a process of allocating a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit confirmation sound) to the empty channels (reproduction channels 10 and 11) and reproducing the sound is performed. In this example of explanation, even if the reproduction channels 02 and 03 are not changed to empty channels by the detection by the predetermined detection means, the other channels (reproduction channels 10 and 11) have already been vacant, so that the vacant channels are already reserved. It is possible to assign a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit confirmation sound) to a channel and reproduce it. However, if no vacancy is secured in advance in another channel, there is no vacant channel to which a predetermined effect sound (here, the jackpot confirmation sound) can be assigned, and this cannot be reproduced and output. Concerns will arise.

FIG. 268(b) shows the allocation status of each channel when a specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) is performed at timing tw12a in the reception period from timing tw12 to timing tw13 and detection is performed by a predetermined detection unit. Shows.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 268(b), when the detection by the predetermined detection means is performed before the timing tw13 arrives, the reproduction channels 02, 03 are generated at the timing tw12a at which the detection is performed. The sound of "BGM2 playback" is removed from. As a result, it becomes possible to secure in advance an empty channel (reproduction channel 02, 03) that can function as an allocation target of a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit confirmation sound) before the timing tw13 arrives. , The concern that it will not be possible to reproduce and output a predetermined effect sound (here, the jackpot confirmation sound) will be eliminated. Further, the reproduction state of the sound of "BGM2 reproduction" is forcibly terminated at the time when the detection is made by the predetermined detection means, and in this case, the music or the dialogue as the sound of "BGM2 reproduction" is completed (or , To the point where the cut is good), the playback will end at a halfway point without being played, so I feel that the free channel has been secured in advance by the player's specific action (channel assignment cancellation operation). As a result, it becomes possible to easily wait for the timing at which the predetermined effect sound (here, the big hit confirmation sound) is reproduced.

At the timing tw12a when the detection by the predetermined detection means is performed, the reproduction state of the sound of "BGM2 reproduction" is forcibly terminated, and the operation instruction image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is displayed. (Operate the button and secure a free channel) is hidden, and the acceptance period during which the performance acceptance of the specific action (channel assignment canceling operation) is permitted is ended.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 268(b), at the timing tw13, not the reproduction channels 02 and 03 secured beforehand as empty channels, but other channels (reproduction channel 10, 11), a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit confirmation sound) is assigned and reproduced. However, if there is no vacancy in another channel at the timing tw13, a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit confirmation sound) is assigned to the previously secured reproduction channels 02 and 03 and reproduced.

Alternatively, when the specific sound (channel allocation canceling operation) is performed at the timing tw12a and the effect sound is removed from the specific channel based on the detection by the predetermined detection means, there is a vacancy in the other channel. Alternatively, a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit confirmation sound) may be assigned to the specific channel and reproduced.
That is, in this case, when a predetermined effect sound (here, the jackpot confirmation sound) is assigned to the specific channel and is reproduced, a different effect sound (here, the effect sound different from the predetermined effect sound is assigned to the specific channel). , BGM2) is assigned, since the assigned state is canceled at that point by the detection of a specific action such as a button operation (channel allocation cancellation operation), one channel (specific channel) is canceled. The sound of "BGM2 reproduction" and a predetermined effect sound (here, the big hit confirmation sound) can be reproduced only by using, and the reproduction channel which is a limited resource can be effectively used. ..

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 268(b), a predetermined effect sound (here, the big hit confirmation sound) is played at the timing tw13 when the reception period ends, but the timing after the timing tw13. It is also possible to reproduce a predetermined effect sound (here, a jackpot confirmation sound).

Further, the predetermined effect sound may be a big hit confirmation sound, an effect sound indicating the degree of expectation that a big hit pattern appears, an effect sound indicating that a big hit has been lost. It is desirable that these effect sounds are selectively output based on the type of effect pattern that appears in the symbol variation. Alternatively, in the case of suggesting that the big hit is lost, even if the timing tw13 arrives, no effect sound is output and the vacant channel may not necessarily be used.

On the other hand, the sound that terminates the channel assignment at the time when the specific action (the channel assignment canceling operation) is detected is not the sound that is output in any one of the plurality of aspects but is the one that is output in only one aspect. It is desirable to execute it as a specific sound. That is, in this case, even if the user misses the content of the specific sound when the playback state is forcibly terminated, the content can be easily predicted and no trouble occurs. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment appeal when the state is forced to end.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 268(b), when the predetermined timing within the symbol variation arrives, the acceptance period during which the performance acceptance of the specific action (channel assignment cancellation operation) is allowed is generated, but this Not limited to For example, at least during a period when the specific sound to be removed from the channel assignment is in the reproduction state, acceptance of the specific action (channel assignment cancellation operation) is permitted, and the channel assignment of the specific sound is performed based on the acceptance. May be eliminated. Note that in this case, for example, a predetermined timing when a predetermined time has passed after the specific sound is put into the reproduction state is maintained, the state of the previously reserved empty channel is maintained for a predetermined time, and then another sound is transmitted to the empty channel. It is desirable to be assigned and played.

Further, as a method of canceling the channel assignment of the specific sound targeted for forced termination, a method of making the channel to which the specific sound has been assigned an empty channel at that time, or a predetermined sound (for example, 0. It is also possible to cancel the channel allocation of the specific sound by overwriting the same channel with an extremely short allocation cancellation reception sound such as 1 second). Even with such a configuration, it is possible to cancel the channel assignment of the specific sound at an earlier stage when the specific action is accepted and forcedly terminated than when the specific action is not forcedly terminated.

In addition, at least during the period from the acceptance of the effect reception of the specific action (channel assignment cancellation operation) to the end of the reproduction of the predetermined effect sound using the empty channel created by the effect reception, a new sound is generated. In order to prevent the channel from being used wastefully, a specific game sound that is not related to the effect of whether or not a big hit symbol appears within the symbol fluctuation (for example, a winning sound, a pending change sound, or a volume adjustment sound) , Prefetch effect sound, etc.) is preferably not output.

Further, the specific sound (sound of "BGM2 reproduction") to be forcibly ended is reproduced as a non-loop effect sound such as a music piece or a dialogue that is reproduced only for a predetermined time without looping. It is desirable to make it easier to remember the feeling that a free channel has been secured in advance by a player's specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) by making the playback end at a halfway point without being played to the end. ..

[Abnormality notification while production according to production pattern is being performed]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is finite, even if a special result is obtained by the determination means according to the winning, the channel to which the sound data is to be assigned is not full. In (the situation where the number of vacant channels is 0), the special sound corresponding to the special result being obtained cannot be assigned to the channel, and there is a concern that the enjoyment of the game may be deteriorated because the special sound cannot be output.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, even when a specific abnormal state occurs, a specific notification sound corresponding to this is not necessarily assigned to a channel and output, and the specific abnormal state is not output. A specific notification sound is assigned to a channel and output on the condition that is generated in a specific situation. That is, in this case, when a specific abnormal state occurs, a specific notification sound corresponding to the abnormal state is not always output, and thus, it is possible to increase the number of channels and reduce the risk of empty channels disappearing. Will be expected.

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the predetermined movable decorative body is not at the specific position (origin position) even though it is at a timing that should be at the specific position (origin position). Is detected by a predetermined sensor (movable body abnormality), it is determined that a predetermined movable decorative body has an abnormality (movable body abnormality). Then, when such a moving body abnormality occurs, as a notification process by the pachinko machine 1, an output of a notification sound corresponding to the moving body abnormality (for example, "a moving body abnormality has occurred") and a game. It is possible to respectively perform an abnormal time display (for example, “an abnormality has occurred in the back inside movable effect unit 3200”) in the display area of the board side effect display device 1600. It should be noted that the abnormal display in the display area is preferably performed so that it is possible to identify which of the plurality of movable ornaments has an abnormality. It may be a mode in which it is specified which of the groups the movable decorative body has an abnormality. For example, as a plurality of movable decorations, a plurality of frame-side movable decorations (not shown) provided on the door frame 3 side and a plurality of board-side movable decorations provided on the game board 5 side (for example, the back front decoration unit 3100 and , Rear inside movable effect unit 3200, back left movable effect unit 3300, back right movable effect unit 3400, upper back movable effect unit 3500, lower back movable effect unit 3700, etc. The abnormal state display in the display area is performed in such a manner that it can be specified which side of the decorative body and the board-side movable decorative body has the abnormality. It should be noted that the plurality of movable decorative bodies are movable decorative bodies which have different drive sources and are provided separately.

However, such an abnormality of the movable body is basically caused by a failure of the movable decorative body, and there is a high possibility that the player will not have made any mistakes. Since there is no such thing, if there is a case where the notification process is executed in the open while various games (symbol fluctuation, big hit game, etc.) according to the big hit judgment are being executed, On the other hand, it will be adversely affected and will be a nuisance for the player. Not only that, because the number of available channels is exhausted by the output of the notification sound according to the abnormality of the movable body, it may give the player anxiety that a new sound cannot be output. , There is concern that the interest in playing games may decline.

On the other hand, however, the failure of the movable decorative body usually occurs when the movable decorative body operates, and it is difficult to assume a situation where the movable decorative body suddenly fails when the movable decorative body does not operate at all. In this case, if the movable body is abnormal when the movable body is not operating, it means that the movable body is removed from the specific position (origin position) due to a misbehavior or a misconduct such as wire entry. There is a possibility that it is in a detected situation, and if you do not output a notification sound corresponding to a moving body abnormality despite such a situation, it may promote fraud and It is feared that such players will lose interest in games.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, such a movable body abnormality occurs during a period in which various games (symbol variation, big hit game, etc.) according to the big hit determination are executed, and this is detected. Even in the case, the pachinko machine 1 can execute the notification process (output of a notification sound, abnormal state display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, abnormal state lighting by various lamps, etc.). However, during the period in which various games (symbol fluctuation, big hit game, etc.) according to the big hit determination are being executed, at least processing for moving the movable decorative body by effect control by the peripheral control board 1510 (variation pattern (effect pattern)) When a movable body abnormality is detected while the movable body drive processing for operating the movable decorative body based on the effect pattern during the big hit game or the like is being performed, the notification processing by the pachinko machine 1 (output of the notification sound) , Abnormal display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, abnormal lamp lighting by various lamps, etc.) is not performed. It should be noted that the external output of information indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body (hall-side notification) is not performed in an open manner and does not adversely affect the production, and thus may be performed regardless of the situation.

According to such a configuration, even if the various games (symbol variation, big hit game, etc.) according to the big hit determination are being executed, the movable decorative body is unlikely to fail (by the peripheral control board 1510). Abnormality of the movable body in the process of operating the movable decorative body by the production control (the situation in which the movable body driving process of operating the movable decorative body based on the variation pattern (production pattern) or the production pattern during the big hit game) is not performed) If the pachinko machine 1 performs a notification process such as an abnormal notification sound when a problem occurs, the movable body abnormality is detected at least under the condition that the movable decorative body is likely to malfunction (during the performance operation of the movable body). When it occurs, the pachinko machine 1 does not perform the notification process such as the abnormal alarm sound, so that the person who commits the misconduct is prevented from performing the misconduct, but the legitimate game is played. It is expected that the person will be prevented from having an adverse effect on the performance being executed.

For example, even if the movable body abnormality is detected in the process of operating the movable decorative body by the effect control by the peripheral control board 1510, the display control in the game board side effect display device 1600, the effect sound allocation control for the channel, and the error occurrence. Since the light emission control of the light emitting unit including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body is executed in the same manner as when the movable body abnormality is not detected, there is no adverse effect on the effect being executed. The influence will be suppressed. However, even if the effect timing for moving the movable decorative body again comes after the abnormality of the movable decorative body is detected, the movable decorative body can be moved while the movable decorative body has not been recovered from the abnormal state. The production is not executed.

That is, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to the present embodiment, when a movable body abnormality is detected, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 1 performs a notification process such as an abnormality notification sound according to the movable body abnormality. Regardless, it is possible to execute a restoration process that causes the movable ornament to perform a predetermined restoration operation (movement to a specific position (origin position)) in order to restore the movable ornament from the abnormal state. This restoration process may be executed with different contents depending on the type of the movable decorative body in which the abnormality has occurred. According to such a configuration, the specific movable effect is started even if the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state during the execution period of the symbol fluctuation in which the specific movable effect for operating the specific movable decorative body is performed. When the specific movable decorative body is recovered from the abnormal state at a stage earlier than that, the specific movable effect for operating the specific movable decorative body can be executed.

Note that, even though the restoration process for performing the predetermined restoration operation (movement to the specific position (origin position)) on the corresponding movable ornament is executed, the movable ornament is identified within the predetermined time. If it does not return to the position (origin position), it is considered that the recovery has failed, and the game and the production are advanced while maintaining the abnormal state.

FIG. 269 shows the allocation status of each channel when the movable body abnormality is detected in the process of operating the movable decorative body in accordance with the variation pattern (effect pattern) according to the big hit determination in the period in which the symbol variation is performed. 7 is a time chart showing an example of the situation on the side of the movable decoration body.

As shown in FIG. 269(a), during the period when the symbol variation (specific effect pattern) according to the result of the big hit determination is being executed, at timing ti11, the game board side effect display device 1600 is used. The sound of "BGM reproduction" according to the specific effect pattern that is being effected is assigned to the reproduction channels 02 and 03 and is already reproduced (stereo reproduction in this case).

In this symbol variation (specific effect pattern), at the timing ti12, the operation effective period (effective period of effect reception) in which an operation opportunity is given to the player may occur over a period up to the timing ti14. Then, when an operation (for example, the operation button 410) by the player is detected within this period (the period from timing ti12 to timing ti14), the operation effective period (effective period of effect reception) is ended with this being a trigger. The effect control for operating a specific movable decorative body is executed. In addition, when the operation (for example, the operation button 410) by the player is not detected within the operation effective period (effective period of effect reception), effect control for operating a specific movable decorative body is executed after timing ti14. Alternatively, the effect control itself for operating a specific movable ornament may not be executed.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 269, it is assumed that the operation by the player is received at the timing ti13. Therefore, at the timing ti13, the movable body drive processing is executed based on the reception of the operation by the player, and the movable production for producing the specific movable decorative body is performed (see FIG. 269(b)). ), the effect sound according to the movable effect is assigned to the channels 08 and 09 and reproduced (see FIG. 269(a)).

Here, as the movable body driving process, for example, when operating a specific movable decorative body, first, it is determined whether or not the abnormality history is stored. As a result, when the abnormality history is stored, since the restoration processing has failed and restoration cannot be expected, the movable body driving processing is ended without performing any driving. On the other hand, when the abnormality history is not stored, the information from the predetermined sensor is acquired, and it is determined whether or not the specific movable decorative body is at the specific position (original position) based on the information. As a result, if the specific movable decorative body is located at the specific position (original position), the specific movable decorative body is operated in a mode defined by the effect pattern. In such an operation, the specific movable decorative body is finally returned to the specific position (original position), and when the drive for the specific movable decorative body is completed, the information from the predetermined sensor is acquired, When it is determined based on the information that the movable body has been returned to the specific position (original position), the movable body drive processing ends. However, if it is determined in the movable body drive process that the specific movable ornament is not at the specific position (original position), the restoration process that causes the specific movable ornament to perform a predetermined restoration operation is executed. After that, the movable body drive processing is ended.
At this time, if the restoration process fails, the abnormality history is stored in a predetermined storage area.

By such a movable body driving process, the specific movable decorative body performs the rendering operation from the timing ti13. It is assumed that an abnormality occurs and it cannot operate. Note that, in FIG. 269(b), the dotted range indicates the period during which the specific movable decorative body is in the abnormal state. Therefore, at timing ti17 after the drive (drive for the production operation) for the specific movable decorative body is finished, it is determined that the specific movable decorative body is not returned to the specific position (original position) (movable body). When it is determined that there is an abnormality, a restoration process that causes the specific movable ornament to perform a predetermined restoration operation is performed based on the determination.

However, as described above, a situation in which an abnormality (movable body abnormality) has occurred in a specific movable decorative body while the specific movable decorative body is operating based on the effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination Since it can be said that there is a high possibility that the failure has occurred in the decorative body, in this example of the explanation, the abnormality notification sound corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body is not assigned to the channel and reproduced. That is, in this case, regarding the display control in the game board side effect display device 1600, the allocation control of the effect sound to the channels, and the light emission control of the light emitting unit including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body in which the abnormality has occurred, the movable body abnormality is detected. Since it is executed as it is in the same manner as when it is not detected, it is possible to suppress the adverse effect on the effect being executed.

At the timing ti18, the restoration process for performing the predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable decorative body ends, but at this time, it is detected that the movable decorative body has returned to the specific position (origin position). In the case (when it is determined that the movable body abnormality has been eliminated), the memory of the abnormality history is erased, and thereafter, it becomes possible to execute the movable effect as usual. On the other hand, as in the example shown in FIG. 269(b), the restoration of the movable decorative body to the specific position (origin position) is not detected (determination that the abnormality of the movable body is eliminated), and the restoration fails. In that case, after that, as long as the RAM is not cleared and the power supply is continued, the predetermined restoration operation is not performed and the game and the effect are advanced while maintaining the abnormal state. That is, in this case, within the same symbol variation, or within the next and subsequent symbol variations, even if the timing at which the movable effect using the specific movable decorative element is executed based on the effect pattern comes, the specific movable decorative element The production effect is not performed, the display effect when the movable effect is performed is executed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and the operation effect sound when the movable effect is performed is assigned to the channel and reproduced. The various light emitting units including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body in which the abnormality has occurred are emitted only in the light emitting mode when the movable effect is performed. However, in particular, even when the movable decorative body itself does not operate, the actuator (lamp) mounted on the movable decorative body is operated (emits light) in a mode in which the movable decorative body is not operated. It is expected that the interest in playing games will be suppressed.

As described above, during the period in which the symbol variation is performed, at least when the movable body abnormality is detected in the process of operating the movable decorative body based on the variation pattern (effect pattern) according to the big hit determination, the movable body is detected. By not assigning the abnormality notification sound corresponding to the abnormality to the channel and not reproducing it, it is possible to suppress the adverse effect on the effect being executed.

On the other hand, even when an abnormality occurs in the same movable decorative body (specific movable decorative body) in the same variation pattern (specific effect pattern) as the example shown in FIG. 269, this movable body abnormality causes When the effect control (effect pattern) occurs at a timing different from when a specific movable decorative body is operated, an abnormality notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality is assigned to a channel and reproduced.

In FIG. 270, during the period in which the symbol variation is performed, the movable body abnormality is detected not in the process of operating the movable decorative body in accordance with the variation pattern (effect pattern) according to the big hit determination, but in the process different from this. It is a time chart which shows an example of the allocation situation of each channel when detected, and the situation on the side of a movable decoration body.

As shown in FIG. 270(a), during the period in which the symbol variation (specific effect pattern) according to the result of the big hit determination is being executed, at timing ti11, as described above, the game board side effect. The sound of "BGM reproduction" corresponding to the specific effect pattern being effected on the display device 1600 is assigned to the reproduction channels 02 and 03 and already reproduced (stereo reproduction in this case).

Then, as described above, in this symbol variation (specific effect pattern), at the timing ti12, the operation valid period (effective period of effect reception) at which an operation opportunity is given to the player is the maximum at the timing ti14. Can occur over a period of up to. Then, when an operation (for example, the operation button 410) by the player is detected within this period (the period from timing ti12 to timing ti14), the operation effective period (effective period of effect reception) is ended with this being a trigger. The effect control for operating a specific movable decorative body is executed.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 270, the specific movable decorative body moves due to some external force at a timing ti11a prior to the timing ti12 at which such a specific movable decorative body can perform a production operation (moves without being based on the production pattern). It is assumed that the specific movable decorative body is not detected at the specific position (original position) at the timing ti11b that should be at the specific position (original position) (movable body abnormality). Note that, also in FIG. 270(b), the range with dots indicates the period during which the specific movable decorative body is in the abnormal state. Therefore, at the timing ti11b, the restoration process for performing the predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable decorative body is executed based on the determination that the movable body abnormality has occurred.

At timing ti13a, the restoration process for performing the predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable decorative body is ended, but at this time, it is detected that the movable decorative body has returned to the specific position (origin position). If it is determined that the abnormality has been resolved), the memory of the abnormality history will be erased, and after that, it is possible to execute the normal movable effect without any abnormality notification. Become so. In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 270, the operation valid period (timing ti12 to timing ti14) occurs so as to cross such timing ti13a. Therefore, when the operation by the player is accepted within the period from the timing ti12 to the timing ti13a in the operation valid period, the specific movable ornament is still in an abnormal state, so that the effect operation of the specific movable ornament is Not performed, the display effect when the movable effect is performed is executed in the game board side effect display device 1600, and the operation effect sound when the movable effect is performed is assigned to the channel and reproduced, and an abnormality occurs. The various light emitting parts including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body are emitted only in the light emitting mode when the movable effect is performed. On the other hand, in the operation valid period (timing ti12 to timing ti14), when the operation by the player is accepted within the period of timing ti13a to timing ti14, the abnormal state of the specific movable ornament is caused by the restoration process. If it has been resolved, the usual production control (movable body, display production, production sound, light emission) including the production operation of the specific movable decoration body will be executed. It should be noted that this example of the description is based on the assumption that a movable body abnormality has occurred only in a specific movable decorative body (one movable decorative body) and restoration processing is being executed in response to the abnormality. .. That is, when a plurality of movable decorative bodies including a specific movable decorative body are performing the restoration process, even if the operation by the player is accepted within the period from timing ti13a to timing ti14, The production operation of the movable ornament is not necessarily performed, but this will be described later with reference to FIGS. 271 and 272.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 270, it is assumed that the restoration of the movable decorative body to the specific position (origin position) is not detected (determination that the movable body abnormality has been eliminated) at timing ti13a and the restoration fails. doing. Therefore, after the timing ti13a, as long as the RAM is not cleared and the power supply is continued, the predetermined restoration operation is not performed and the game and the effect are advanced while maintaining the abnormal state.

In addition, as described above, a situation in which an abnormality (movable body abnormality) has occurred in the specific movable decorative body even though it is not the timing at which the specific movable decorative body is operated based on the effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination It can be said that there is a possibility that an abnormality is detected due to the fact that the specific movable decorative body is removed from the specific position (origin position) due to a fraudulent act such as a dogfighting action or a wire entry. Moreover, the timing ti13a is a situation in which the movable body abnormality has not been eliminated by some external force even by the restoration processing for performing the predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable decorative body, and there is a possibility that cheating was performed. It can be said that it is increasing more and more.

Therefore, at this timing ti13a, although the symbol variation (specific effect pattern) is being executed, the notification process according to the abnormality of the movable body is executed. That is, in this case, in the channel, various effect sounds according to a specific effect pattern are assigned and reproduced in accordance with the progress of the effect contents, and the abnormality notification sound is reproduced for a predetermined time in the reproduction channels 00, 01. To be played back. In addition, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, in addition to the display effect corresponding to the specific effect pattern being developed and executed as it is, the abnormal time display corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body (for example, “ "Abnormality occurs in the back inside movable effect unit 3200" and the like) are executed. In addition, in various light emitting units, as a form corresponding to the abnormal state of the movable body, a part of the light emitting units is made to emit light in an abnormal state, and the other light emitting units are made in a normal form in accordance with the progress of the effect contents. It will emit light.

According to the examples of FIG. 269 and FIG. 270, even when the same movable body abnormality occurs during one symbol variation, at least the period during which the control relating to the effect operation of the movable decorative body based on the variation pattern is executed. When the abnormality of the movable body occurs in the middle, there is a low possibility that a fraudulent act is being performed and there is a possibility of a failure during the performance operation. Therefore, the performance is output with priority over the abnormality notification. .. On the other hand, if the movable body abnormality suddenly occurs when the control related to the rendering operation of the movable decorative body based on the variation pattern is not executed, there is a high possibility that fraudulent acts are being performed, and it is more abnormal than the rendering. It has a characteristic configuration assuming that it may be more important to output the notification.

In the example illustrated in FIG. 270, the notification process according to the movable body abnormality is not performed at the timing ti11b, and the notification process according to the movable body abnormality is performed at the timing ti13a at which the restoration process is executed but the movable body abnormality is not eliminated. Decided to do. However, at the timing ti11b, the movable body abnormality is detected even though the specific movable decorative body cannot operate based on the effect pattern, and even by this alone, a fraudulent act such as a pounding action or a wire entry may occur. Since it can be said that there is a high possibility that the alarm has occurred, the notification sound corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body may be output at this timing ti11b. In addition, at this time, it is also possible to make a notification by a display or a lamp.

In short, regarding the notification processing according to the abnormality of the movable body, within the period in which the symbol fluctuation is performed, “the specific movable decoration body is not performing the production operation based on the production pattern, "Abnormality has occurred in", and "abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decorative body while the specific movable decorative body is performing the production operation based on the production pattern". It is important to prevent the illegal execution from being performed as a sufficient condition, so that the person who commits the wrongdoing is restrained from performing the wrongdoing, but is executed to the legitimate player. It is expected to avoid adversely affecting the production of. In addition, as a condition for performing the notification process according to the abnormality of the movable body within the period in which the symbol variation is performed, “the specific movable decoration is not performing the production operation based on the production pattern. After having adopted at least "the abnormality has occurred in the body", for example, "the restoration process performed according to the abnormality has failed" or "the abnormality has occurred under a specific condition". Etc. can be adopted as further conditions.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 269 and 270, it is determined whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decorative body in the process of operating the specific movable decorative body according to the effect pattern.
However, if an abnormality occurs when the specific movable ornament is operated according to the effect pattern, the notification process according to the abnormality of the movable body is not triggered by this, and therefore the specific movable It is also possible not to determine whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the specific movable ornament in the process of operating the ornament according to the effect pattern. In this case, it is desirable that the determination as to whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body is performed at a predetermined timing or at a predetermined time when the movable decorative body regularly visits.

Further, the method of detecting a movable body abnormality is not limited to the position detection of the movable decorative body to be detected, and for example, when an actuator such as a motor that operates the movable decorative body is overloaded, the movable body abnormality is detected. Other methods such as detection may be adopted. That is, in this case, in the example of FIG. 269, an actuator such as a motor that operates the movable decorative body is overloaded at the timing ti17, whereby the movable body abnormality is detected. Further, in the example of FIG. 270, an actuator such as a motor that operates the movable decorative body is overloaded at timing ti11b, which causes the abnormality of the movable body to be detected.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 269 and FIG. 270, the specific movable decorative body is illustrated as being operated at the timing of the operation by the player, but the specific movable decorative body is performed at the specific timing determined by the production pattern. May be performed.

Further, among the notifications according to the abnormality of the movable body, the abnormality notification sound is assigned to the channel and reproduced for a predetermined time. During the reproduction period, the volume of the effect sound is set to the specific value (0). You may make it perform the process which reduces.

In addition, when the abnormality notification is not executed sufficiently under the condition that "the abnormality occurs in the specific movable decorative body while performing the production operation of the specific movable decorative body based on the production pattern", after that, Even if the abnormal state is not eliminated and remains, it is desirable that the abnormality notification is not performed at least as long as the RAM is not cleared and the power supply is continued. In addition, it is desirable that the game and the production be advanced while maintaining the abnormal state without performing a predetermined restoration operation.

[Restoring of multiple movable ornaments]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is finite, even if a special result is obtained by the determination means according to the winning, the channel to which the sound data is to be assigned is not full. In (the situation where the number of vacant channels is 0), the special sound corresponding to the special result being obtained cannot be assigned to the channel, and there is a concern that the enjoyment of the game may be deteriorated because the special sound cannot be output. Therefore, conventionally, even when a movable body abnormality occurs in any of a plurality of movable decoration bodies (movable decoration bodies in which the driving sources are different and provided separately), common abnormal sound data (one abnormal sound data) is generated. By assigning (sound data) to a channel and reproducing the same, it is possible to prevent the number of used channels from being unnecessarily increased even in a situation where a movable body abnormality occurs simultaneously with respect to a plurality of movable decorative bodies. It was The movable body abnormality is a state in which the movable body cannot operate properly, and is the same as the one illustrated in "Abnormality notification during performance according to effect pattern". is there.

However, in recent years, the number of movable ornaments mounted on a game machine has been increasing, and it is possible to associate common abnormal sound data (one abnormal sound data) with all the movable ornaments, thereby making the game concerned. It is becoming difficult to properly notify the state of the aircraft. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, first, a plurality of movable decorative bodies are divided into two or more groups, and a different abnormality notification sound is sent to a channel depending on which of the groups the movable decorative body has an abnormality. By allocating and reproducing the pachinko machine 1, the state of the pachinko machine 1 can be appropriately notified even when the number of movable ornaments mounted on the pachinko machine 1 is increasing.

In this example as well, when a movable body abnormality occurs, as described in the above-described example of "abnormality notification while effect according to effect pattern is being performed" (see FIG. 269 and FIG. 270). Is processed. Therefore, in this example as well, even if various types of games (symbol fluctuations, big hit games, etc.) occur during the period that they are being executed and this is detected, notification processing by the pachinko machine 1 (output of notification sound) , Abnormal time display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, abnormal lighting by various lamps, etc.) can be executed. Also, similarly, during the period in which various games (symbol variation, big hit game, etc.) according to the big hit determination are being executed, at least processing for operating the movable decorative body by effect control by the peripheral control board 1510 (variation pattern). If a movable body abnormality is detected while the movable body drive processing for operating the movable decorative body based on the (production pattern) and the production pattern during the big hit game is being performed, the notification processing by the pachinko machine 1 ( The output of the notification sound, the abnormal time display within the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the abnormal lighting by various lamps, etc.) are not performed.

However, in this example, further, when a movable body abnormality occurs in a plurality of movable decorative bodies at the same time, the abnormal sound data assigned to the channel and put in the reproduction state is set to only one of the above groups. On the other hand, the processing for causing the restoration operation to be performed on all of the plurality of movable decorative bodies in which the abnormality has occurred is executed. According to such a configuration, it is expected that even when a movable body abnormality occurs in a plurality of movable decorative bodies, a channel is provided with a margin to reduce a risk of empty channels disappearing. In addition to the above, it becomes possible to quickly recover from each movable ornament, and it is expected that the channel usage time will be reduced by improving the efficiency of the processing itself when an abnormality occurs. .. Note that the content of the restoration process and each process at the time of success or failure thereof are examples of the above-mentioned “abnormality notification while the production according to the production pattern is being performed” (see FIG. 269 and FIG. 270). ) Is the same as the case.

Here, the mode in which the plurality of movable decorative bodies are divided into two or more groups is required to be a mode suitable for informing the state as the pachinko machine 1, and is provided on the door frame 3 side, for example. A plurality of frame-side movable decorations (not shown) and a plurality of board-side movable decorations provided on the game board 5 side (for example, a back front decoration unit 3100, a back middle movable rendering unit 3200, a back left movable rendering unit 3300, a back) Right movable effect unit 3400, upper back movable effect unit 3500, lower back movable effect unit 3700, etc.), the frame-side movable ornament that can be contacted without opening the door frame 3 is abnormal. It is possible to convey to the hall side by the type of the abnormality notification sound whether or not the abnormality has occurred, or whether there is an abnormality in the board-side movable decorative body that is difficult to contact unless the door frame 3 is opened. become. In other words, it can be said that when an abnormality occurs in the board-side movable decorative body, there is a high possibility that fraudulent acts are performed as much as it is difficult to contact the case when an abnormality occurs in the frame-side movable decorative body. Therefore, by outputting the alarm sound based on such grouping, the alarm sound according to the abnormality of the movable body is not noticed by the player depending on the type (the unpleasant feeling is felt). It becomes possible to secretly inform the hall side that the pachinko machine 1 is in a state of a high degree of possibility of fraud, without causing the pachinko machine 1 to do so.

Also, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when a movable body abnormality occurs, the pachinko machine 1 performs an alarm process in addition to the output of the notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality and the game board side effect display. As described above, the abnormal display can be executed in the display area of the device 1600. In this regard, in this description example, even in the notification mode according to the display on the game board side effect display device 1600 in the notification processing according to the abnormality of the movable body, the plurality of movable decorative bodies are divided into two or more groups, and any of these groups is used. It is desirable to perform different notification displays depending on whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body belonging to. However, the "display notification" is inferior to the "sound notification" in the diffusion function for the occurrence of an abnormality, but is superior in the information transmission function for notifying the details of the abnormality in detail. It has the characteristic that Therefore, in the "notification by display", the grouping is performed in a manner different from the case of performing the "notification by sound" by utilizing the difference in the nature thereof, in a manner in which the information transmission function is more exerted. Therefore, it is desirable to display differently depending on which one of the groups individually divided in this way has an abnormality in the movable decorative body.

That is, in this case, for example, when the movable decorative body A has a movable body abnormality and when the movable decorative body B has a movable body abnormality, the movable decorative bodies A and B are divided into groups. Depending on whether there is an abnormality, the content of the notification is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, even though the abnormality notification sound to be reproduced is the same regardless of which abnormality occurs in the movable body. Is a first notification mode in which different displays are performed", and "a second notification mode in which the abnormality notification sound to be reproduced is displayed and the notification content displayed is the same regardless of which movable body abnormality occurs" And "a third notification mode in which the reproduced alarm notification sound and the displayed notification content are different from each other regardless of which movable body abnormality occurs". Therefore, it is possible to provide a more detailed notification mode by the notification using the two different contents of the sound and the display.

FIG. 271 shows an example of the allocation status of each channel and the status on the side of the movable decorative body when the movable body abnormalities simultaneously occur in a plurality of movable decorative bodies at a specific timing during the period in which the symbol variation occurs. It is a time chart.

As shown in FIG. 271(a), during the period in which the symbol variation (specific effect pattern) according to the result of the big hit determination is being executed, at the timing tj11, the game board side effect display device 1600 is used. The sound of "BGM reproduction" corresponding to the specific effect pattern that is being effected is assigned to the reproduction channels 02 and 03 and has already been reproduced (stereo reproduction in this case).

In this symbol variation (specific effect pattern), at the timing tj13, the operation effective period (effective period of effect reception) in which an operation opportunity is given to the player can occur over a period up to the timing tj15. Then, when an operation by the player (for example, the operation button 410) is detected within this period (the period from timing tj13 to timing tj15), the operation effective period (effective period of effect reception) is ended with this being a trigger. The effect control for operating a specific movable decorative body is executed. In addition, when the operation (for example, the operation button 410) by the player is not detected within the operation effective period (effective period of effect reception), effect control for operating a specific movable decorative body is executed after timing tj15. Alternatively, the effect control itself for operating a specific movable ornament may not be executed.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 271, it is assumed that the operation by the player is received at the timing tj14. Therefore, at the timing tj14, originally, the movable body drive process is executed based on the reception of the operation by the player, and the movable production for producing the specific movable decorative body is performed, and the channel is generated. 08 and 09, the effect sound according to the movable effect is assigned and reproduced.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 271, at timing tj11, a plurality of movable decorative bodies move due to some external force (the movement is not based on the effect pattern), and the specific movable decorative body can perform the effect operation rather than timing tj13. It is assumed that the movable body abnormality is detected at the previous timing tj12. Note that in FIG. 271(b) and FIG. 272(b) described later, the dotted range indicates the period during which each movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. Therefore, at the timing tj12, based on the determination that the movable body abnormality has occurred, the above-described restoration processing for performing the predetermined restoration operation on each movable decorative body in which the movable body abnormality has occurred is executed. Therefore, in relation to this restoration process, even if the player's operation is accepted at the timing tj14, the specific movable ornament is not necessarily operated. In the example shown in FIG. 271, the board-side movable decoration A provided on the game board 5 side, the board-side movable decoration B provided on the game board 5 side, and the board-side movable decoration C provided on the game board 5 side , A frame-side movable decorative body D provided on the door frame 3 side, a frame-side movable decorative body E provided on the door frame 3 side, and a frame-side movable decorative body F provided on the door frame 3 side have a movable body abnormality. Each situation is assumed.

More specifically, in the restoration process according to the example shown in FIG. 271, first, the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C provided on the game board 5 side and the frame-side movable decorative body provided on the door frame 3 side. The processing modes are different between D, E and F. For example, with regard to the board-side movable decorations A, B, and C provided on the game board 5 side, a plurality of movable decorations are arranged in a relatively narrow space, and when they are simultaneously operated, interference due to contact with each other may occur. Therefore, after the timing tj12, the restoration process is performed based on a predetermined order so that the operation periods do not overlap each other. On the other hand, the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, F provided on the door frame 3 side operate using the space outside the pachinko machine 1, and the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, C are used. Since there is no concern that the movements interfere with each other, including the relationship with the above, the restoration processing is performed at the timing tj12 at the same time to enable quick abnormal restoration of each movable decorative body.

In such a configuration, while the restoration processing of the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, C provided on the game board 5 side is performed for a long time from the timing tj12 to the timing tj18, the door frame 3 side In the frame-side movable ornaments D, E, and F provided in, the restoration processing can be completed in a relatively short time from timing tj12 to timing tj16.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 271, the board-side movable decorative body provided on the game board 5 side until the end of the operation effective period (effective period of effect reception) in which the player is given an operation opportunity. It is assumed that neither the restoration processing of A, B, C nor the restoration processing of the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, F provided on the door frame 3 side is completed. Therefore, when the specific movable decoration body corresponds to any of the board side movable decoration bodies A, B, and C, it corresponds to any of the board side movable decoration bodies A, B, and C, and the operation is effective. Even if the production is accepted at any timing within the period (effective period of the production reception), the production operation triggered by this is not performed when the production is received.

That is, in this case, if the production reception occurs within the period during which the restoration process for the specific movable ornament is being executed, it is obvious that the production operation of the specific movable ornament cannot be triggered by this. However, even if the performance reception occurs after the restoration processing for the specific movable decorative body is completed, it is possible to perform the mutual movement with other board-side movable decorative bodies that are still performing the restoration processing. There is a fear of interference. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 271, when the specific movable decorative body corresponds to any of the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, any one of the operation effective period (timing tj13 to timing tj15). Even if the operation by the player is accepted at the timing of, the effect operation of the specific movable decorative body is not performed, and the display effect when the movable effect is performed is executed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and the channel effect is displayed on the channel. On the other hand, the effect sound (operation effect sound) when the movable effect is performed is assigned and reproduced, and various light emitting parts including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body in which the abnormality has occurred perform the movable effect. The light emission is limited to the light emission mode at the time. In short, when a specific movable decoration body corresponds to any of the board-side movable decoration bodies A, B, and C, after the restoration processing of all of them is completed (all restoration processing is completed successfully), Only when the timing of performing the effect operation of the specific movable decorative body arrives, execution of the effect operation is permitted.

On the other hand, when the specific movable decorative body corresponds to any of the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, F, it corresponds to any of the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, F, and Depending on at which timing within the operation effective period (effective period of effect reception) the effect is received, it is processed so that when the effect is received, whether or not to perform the effect operation triggered by this is received. Becomes

That is, in this case, first, if the specific movable decorative body is the frame-side movable decorative body E, the timing tj13 to tj15 at which the specific movable decorative body can perform an effect operation after the restoration processing is completed (the restoration processing is successful). Will always arrive, and there is no concern that other movable decorative bodies A to C, D, and F will interfere with them even if the restoration processing is being executed. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 271, when the specific movable decorative body corresponds to the frame-side movable decorative body E, the operation by the player is accepted in any of the operation valid periods (timing tj13 to timing tj15). Even if it is turned on, the effect operation of the specific movable decorative body is performed, the display effect when the movable effect is performed is executed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and the movable effect is performed for the channel. The effect sound (operation effect sound) when performing is assigned and reproduced, and various light emitting units including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body in which the abnormality has occurred are in the light emission mode when the movable effect is performed. It will emit light.

On the other hand, if the specific movable decorative body is the frame-side movable decorative body D, the operation valid period (timing tj13 to timing tj15) occurs so as to cross the timing at which the restoration processing is ended. Therefore, when the operation by the player is accepted within the period before the restoration process is ended in the operation valid period, the specific movable decoration is still in an abnormal state, so the specific movable decoration is still in an abnormal state. The production effect of the body is not performed, the display effect when the movable effect is performed is executed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and the effect sound when the movable effect is performed is assigned to the channel and reproduced. The various light emitting parts including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body in which the abnormality has occurred emit light only in the light emitting mode when the movable effect is performed. On the other hand, when the operation by the player is accepted within the operation valid period after the end of the restoration process (successful restoration process), the other movable ornaments A to C and F are restored. Since there is no concern of interfering with them even during execution of, the effect control as usual (movable object, display effect, effect sound, light emission), including the effect operation of a specific movable ornament. Will be executed.

On the other hand, if the specific movable ornament is the frame-side movable ornament F, the operation valid period (timing tj13 to timing tj15) will not come after the restoration process is completed (restoration process is successful). .. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 271, therefore, when the specific movable decorative body corresponds to the board-side movable decorative body F, the operation by the player is accepted within the operation effective period (timing tj13 to timing tj15). Even if it is performed, the effect operation of the specific movable ornament is not performed, the display effect when the movable effect is performed is executed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and the movable effect is performed for the channel. The effect sound (operation effect sound) at that time is assigned and reproduced, and various light emitting units including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body in which the abnormality has occurred emit light in the light emission mode when the movable effect is performed. Will remain.

Here, the notification processing according to the example shown in FIG. 271 will be described. In this example, when the notification sound according to the abnormality of the movable body is notified, a plurality of board-side movable decorative bodies A and B provided on the game board 5 side are provided. , C and a plurality of frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, F provided on the door frame 3 side are grouped into two groups, and the movable decorative body in which abnormality has occurred belongs to any of these groups. Different notification sounds are output depending on whether there is one.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 271, it is assumed that the movable body abnormality simultaneously occurs in the board-side movable decoration body and the frame-side movable decoration body. However, this kind of situation usually cannot occur while proper games are in progress, and it cannot occur as a result of fraudulent activity. It is highly likely that you are in a special situation where you have manually tampered with all the movable ornaments. In any case, in such a special situation, the notification process itself may be troublesome, and it is required to end the notification state early.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 271, it is detected that the movable body abnormalities have occurred in the board-side movable decoration bodies A, B, C and the frame-side movable decoration bodies D, E, F, respectively. At the timing tj12, the restoration processing on the board side movable decorative body side and the restoration processing on the frame side movable decorative body side are started at the same time as described above. The abnormality notification sound common to the frame side corresponding to the decorative bodies D, E, F side is not assigned to the channel, but the abnormality notification sound common to the board side corresponding to the board side movable decorative bodies A, B, C side is assigned to the channel. I'm trying to keep it output.

That is, the time for which the abnormality notification sound corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body is reproduced is the time until the abnormality of the movable decorative body to be notified is eliminated, or a predetermined predetermined time after the abnormality notification sound is output. It is set as the time until the time (for example, 30 seconds common to the board side and the frame side) elapses. Therefore, of the board-side movable decorations A, B, and C and the frame-side movable decorations D, E, and F, which has a longer time required to complete the restoration process, the "board-side movable decorations A, B, C". By assigning only the "board side common abnormality notification sound corresponding to the B and C sides" to the channel, the "board side common abnormality notification sound corresponding to the board side movable decorative bodies A, B and C sides" is generated. It becomes possible to finish the restoration processing of the frame-side movable decorations D, E, F while being reproduced, and "a board-side common decoration corresponding to the board-side movable decorations A, B, C side is notified. After the output of the "sound" is completed, it is possible to avoid the requirement for the output request of the "common abnormality notification sound on the frame side corresponding to the frame-side movable ornaments D, E, F sides", The notification process can be ended in a simpler manner.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 271, while the restoration processing is performed on the board-side movable decorations A, B, and C and the frame-side movable decorations D, E, and F, the board-side movable decorations A, B, and C are restored. A "board-side common abnormality notification sound corresponding to the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C" is assigned to a channel and played over a period until the timing tj18 at which all the restoration processing of B and C is completed. Therefore, the "common alarm notification sound on the frame side corresponding to the frame-side movable decorations D, E, F" is not reproduced. At this time, the effect sound allocation control for the channels is performed as usual, as described above.

On the other hand, in the notification mode based on the display on the game board side effect display device 1600 in the notification processing according to the abnormality of the movable body, the above-mentioned “sound notification” is performed by utilizing the difference in nature from the notification sound described above. Differently from the above, the above grouping is performed in a mode in which the information transmission function is more exerted, and different display is performed depending on which one of the groups individually divided in this way has an abnormality in the movable decorative body. ing. That is, in this case, for example, assuming that the frame-side movable decorative body E is grouped with the frame-side movable decorative body F, even if the restoration process of the frame-side movable decorative body E is completed, it is responded to. The "notification by display" remains maintained, and the "notification by display" is ended at the timing when the restoration process of the frame-side movable decorative body F is completed. Further, similarly to this, for example, if the board-side movable decoration A is grouped with the frame-side movable decoration D, even if the restoration processing of the frame-side movable decoration A is completed, The corresponding "notification by display" remains maintained, and the "notification by display" is ended at the timing when the restoration process of the frame-side movable decorative body D is completed. Therefore, even if the restoration process of the specific movable ornament is completed first, depending on the execution situation of the restoration process of the movable ornament that is grouped with the specific movable ornament, the restoration process of the specific movable ornament may not be performed. It is possible that the “notification by display” corresponding to the movable decorative body for which the restoration process is finished may be finished first.

According to the example of FIG. 271, as the notification sound corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body, a plurality of notification sounds corresponding to the type of the movable decorative body in which the abnormality of the movable body has occurred are prepared. Then, when a movable body abnormality simultaneously occurs in a plurality of movable decorative bodies corresponding to each of the notification sounds, only one of the plurality of notification sounds can be reproduced. Is not limited to the movable decorative body corresponding to the notification sound, and a movable decorative body not corresponding to the notification sound is also executed during the reproduction period. Moreover, as a movable decorative body corresponding to the notification sound in the reproduction state, when a plurality of movable decorative bodies are in an abnormal state, it is possible to individually perform restoration processing on these movable decorative bodies according to a predetermined order. On the other hand, as a movable decorative body that does not respond to the notification sound in the reproduction state, when a plurality of movable decorative bodies are in an abnormal state, the restoration processing for these movable decorative bodies is executed at the same time. This makes it possible to shorten the total time required for the restoration process for the movable decorative body that does not correspond to the notification sound in the reproduction state, as compared with the movable decorative body that corresponds to the notification sound in the reproduction state. It becomes possible to return all the movable decorations from the abnormal state to the normal state while one of the notification sounds is being reproduced, and the second notification sound is output. It becomes possible to avoid it.

That is, in this embodiment, the plurality of movable decorative bodies are divided into the board-side movable decorative body and the frame-side movable decorative body, and the restoration processing corresponding to each group is simultaneously performed. Not limited to The point is that a plurality of movable decorative bodies (A to F in the above example) can be operated in two or more groups (in the above example, the board side in the above example, which can be operated without being affected by the operating conditions of the movable decorative bodies belonging to other groups). For the plurality of movable decorative bodies (D to F) that are classified into the frame side) and can perform the restoration processing independently for each group, and that belong to at least one group (frame side in the above example) among them. 27A and 27B, if any of them can be restored at the same time by selecting them as movable ornaments that can be operated without being influenced by the operation status of each other, refer to FIGS. 271 and 272. It is possible to configure so that the effects described above can be obtained.

Note that, in the example shown in FIG. 271, it is desirable to determine whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body, at a predetermined timing or at a predetermined time when the movable decorative body is regularly visited. Further, the method of detecting a movable body abnormality is not limited to the position detection of the movable decorative body to be detected, and for example, when an actuator such as a motor that operates the movable decorative body is overloaded, the movable body abnormality is detected. Other methods such as detection may be adopted.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 271, the specific movable decorative body is illustrated as an effect operation at the timing when the player operates, but the specific movable decorative object is effected at the specific timing determined by the effect pattern. It may be allowed to.

Further, among the notifications according to the abnormality of the movable body, the abnormality notification sound is assigned to the channel and reproduced for a predetermined time. During the reproduction period, the volume of the effect sound is set to the specific value (0). You may make it perform the process which reduces.

In the example shown in FIG. 271, movable body abnormalities have occurred in the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, C and the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, F, respectively, during the period in which the symbol variation is being executed. Although it has been described that the situation is assumed, the symbol variation may not necessarily be executed. That is, during the execution of the big hit game, or when the game of the special symbol is in the state of waiting for progress (for example, during the demo screen), the board side movable decorations A, B, C and the frame side movable decorations D, Even when the movable body abnormality occurs in each of E and F, each process according to the movable body abnormality is performed in the same manner as the example described with reference to FIG. 271.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 271, all the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, C provided on the game board 5 side are restored based on a predetermined order so that the operation periods do not overlap each other. And However, when a plurality of movable decorative bodies that do not interfere with each other even if they are simultaneously operated are included in the movable side decorative board, the movable decorative body side based on a predetermined order is used. During the restoration process, the restoration process may be performed simultaneously on only some of the movable decorative bodies that do not interfere with each other due to contact with each other.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 271, the timing at which it is determined whether or not a movable body abnormality has occurred in the board-side movable decoration bodies A, B, and C, and the movable body abnormality in the frame-side movable decoration bodies D, E, F are detected. It is assumed that the timing at which it is determined whether or not the occurrence has occurred is the same, but these timings may be different. For example, as shown in FIG. 272, after it is determined that the movable body abnormality has occurred in the board-side movable decoration bodies A, B, C, the movable body abnormality has occurred in the frame-side movable decoration bodies D, E, F. Even if the determination is made, the restoration processing of the frame-side movable decorations D, E, F is finished at a timing earlier than the restoration processing of the board-side movable decorations A, B, C is finished. As long as there is a relationship, after the output of the “board side common decorative alarm corresponding to the board side movable decorative bodies A, B, C side” is finished, “the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, F side It can be avoided that the output request of the "common abnormality notification sound on the frame side" is required.

On the contrary, in the example shown in FIG. 271, after it is determined that the movable body abnormality has occurred in the frame-side movable decoration bodies D, E, F, the movable body abnormality has occurred in the board-side movable decoration bodies A, B, C. The processing structure may be such that it is determined that it has been done. However, in this case, when it is determined that a movable body abnormality has occurred in the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, F, notification processing according to the movable body abnormality and restoration processing of the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, F are performed. By not performing each of the above, and waiting until it is determined that a movable body abnormality has occurred in the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, C, the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, C are dealt with. It is desirable to perform the restoration processing of the board-side movable decorations A, B, C and the restoration processing of the frame-side movable decorations D, E, F, respectively, during the notification processing. In addition, as a result of waiting for the processing for determining whether or not a movable body abnormality has occurred in the board-side movable decorations A, B, and C, no movable body abnormality has occurred in the board-side movable decorations A, B, and C. In this case, the restoration processing of the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, F is performed while the notification processing corresponding to the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, F is performed.

[Automatic multiple operation function (automatic continuous stroke function)]
By the way, in the pachinko machine 1, there are cases in which a plurality of operation operations (such as repeatedly hitting the operation button 410) on a predetermined operation unit are prompted to perform a plurality of operation effects corresponding to each operation.
However, in recent years, during a predetermined effective period in which an operation opportunity for such a plurality of operations (such as continuous hits) is given, the predetermined operation means (operation button 410) can be operated without operating the predetermined operation means a plurality of times. The automatic multiple-time operation function (automatic multiple-time operation function that allows the effect mode to appear when multiple operations are performed by simply performing an operation in a long mode (so-called long press, etc.) It has become more and more popular to be equipped with a continuous hit function.

In such an automatic multiple-time operation function (automatic continuous hitting function), when an operation in a long mode such as a so-called long press is performed, a single-shot operation (a single operation in a short time) is performed. ) Is performed repeatedly (such as a feeling that a fast repeated stroke is performed) so that the player can remember it. It can be said that it is important for suppressing a decrease in the interest of the player (such as a player) and encouraging various players to use the function. However, in the operation state, if a production change (for example, an operation sound) when the production reception is made is simply generated every time a relatively short time elapses, the same as a player. Even if you intend to operate with a single press, the short operation time (the time when the operation state is slightly maintained by a single press) is slightly lengthened or shortened, resulting in multiple receptions of effects. Occurrence occurs (multiple operation sounds are generated), or performance reception occurs only once (one operation sound is generated), and the number of performance receptions for one single operation is stable. There is a concern that the interest in playing games may deteriorate due to a sense of incongruity.

In this regard, in the conventional automatic continuous hitting function, when a so-called long press operation is performed, first, as in the case where a single press operation is performed, the effect change (for example, operation sound) accompanying the effect acceptance is made. Etc.) occurs only once. After the first effect change (for example, operation sound) is generated, a new effect reception (operation sound) is not generated until a predetermined interval time longer than a predetermined short time elapses. After the elapse of the predetermined interval time, the effect change (operation sound) when the effect reception is made is repeatedly generated every time the predetermined short time elapses. That is, in this case, since a time margin can be provided between the time when the first effect reception (operation sound) is generated and the time when the second effect reception (operation sound) is generated, a single press is performed. Whether or not the operation is repeatedly performed within a relatively short time by only performing the operation by so-called long press while avoiding the discomfort caused by the unstable number of performance receptions when the operation is performed. It will be possible to realize a production that looks like this.

However, from the player's point of view, it is necessary to allow a time between the first reception of the effect (operation sound) and the second generation of the operation reception (operation sound). This is a waste of operation production, and the number of production receptions (operation sounds) per unit time is reduced by the amount of such wasted time. I feel that the speed is slow), and there is concern that the interest in playing games may deteriorate.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if the operation on the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is performed only once in the single-shot operation mode, the operation on the operation means is long. Similar to the case where the operation is performed in the form of operation (long pressing, etc.), the specific sound accompanying the operation on the operation means can be intermittently output. That is, in this case, when an operation is performed on the operation means, regardless of the operation mode, it is as if a single-shot operation (one operation in a short time) is repeatedly performed within a relatively short time. It becomes possible to let the player remember (such as feeling as if a rapid continuous hit is being performed). As a result, all operation modes can be adopted while stabilizing the responsiveness of the effect (whether it is one effect change or multiple effect changes) when the operation is performed by single-shot pressing. Even if there is, it is possible to preferably maintain the number of times the production change (for example, operation sound) is generated per unit time.

FIG. 273 is a time chart showing an example of the control contents for realizing such an automatic multiple-time operation function (automatic continuous hitting function). Note that, here, the operation button 410 will be described as an operation unit. Also in other drawings including FIG. 273, the white specific sound output in the drawings indicates the specific sound generated based on the reception of the effect in response to the operation on the button 410. The black-out specific sound output in the figure indicates a specific sound generated following the white-out specific sound output in the figure in the absence of the effect reception when the operation button 410 is not operated. Is. It is desirable that these specific sounds have the same volume and timbre without any difference.

First, in the example shown in FIG. 273(a), the operation state is maintained only for a short time at the timing tx11 in the predetermined effective period in which the operation opportunity of the operation of multiple times (such as continuous hits) is given (single-shot operation). It is assumed that one operation is performed in. Therefore, at the timing tx11, detection (determination) that the operation button 410 is operated is performed, and based on the detection (determination), the output of the specific sound accompanying the operation on the operation button 410 Processing for starting output of a display (display pattern at the time of operation) associated with the operation is performed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, after the specific sound (for example, “picone”) accompanying the operation on the operation button 410 is output at the timing tx11, the player's hand is separated from the operation button 410. Even if no operation is performed (a period from timing tx12 to tx13 in the figure), a specific sound (for example, "picone") accompanying the operation on the operation button 410 is intermittently operated in the situation. It can be output automatically.

For example, it is assumed that the operation state (detection state) from the timing tx11 is ended at the timing tx12. Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the grace time TY1 having a predetermined time length is set based on the end of the operation state (detection state). Even if no operation by the player is detected until the grace period TY1 elapses, a specific sound (for example, "picone )) is output, it is possible to intermittently output a specific sound (for example, “picone”) accompanying the operation on the operation button 410.

Here, in the grace time TY1 and the automation time TY2 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 273(a), five times (N times) from the start of the grace time TY1 to the elapse thereof. The time length is set so that a specific sound of minutes (for example, "picone") can be output. As a result, even if the operation is performed in a single-shot operation mode within a predetermined effective period in which an operation opportunity for multiple operations (continuous hits, etc.) is given, a specific sound (a sound corresponding to effect reception) accompanying the operation. Is at least five times (N times) (one specific sound output at the timing of operation detection, and four times thereafter (N-) each time the automation time TY2 elapses even in the absence of operation. It is output intermittently over the total number of one specific sound).

In particular, in this embodiment, the grace period TY1 is ended during the output of the specific sound (for example, "picone") (in the example shown in FIG. 273(a), the grace time is output during the output of the fifth specific sound). Even when the timing tx13 at which the time TY1 ends is reached, processing (output interruption processing, other processing, etc.) that cuts off the specific sound being output at that timing tx13 ((e.g., "pico")) Is not performed, and even after the timing tx13 arrives, the specific sound that has been output until that time (in the example shown in FIG. 273(a), the first to fourth specific sounds) is output. The output (sound waveform) in the same manner is made to appear. That is, if a specific sound accompanying an operation is interrupted in the middle, it becomes unclear whether the operation has been received multiple times or not, and in the end, the operation feeling as if the operation was performed multiple times. It is feared that it will be difficult for the player to remember (it makes me think that it is a specific sound that is artificially generated in the non-operation state). It is expected to be solved appropriately.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, even when the predetermined effective period ends during the period from the start of the grace time TY1 to the elapse of the grace period TY1 and the new operation is not accepted, Until the grace period TY1 ends, a specific sound (for example, "picone") is output every time the automation time TY2 arrives. That is, in this case, since the specific sound can be intermittently output even after the expiration of the predetermined effective period, it is possible to avoid that the number of performance receptions is not stable when the operation is performed by a single press. Of course, it becomes possible for the player to feel as if he/she performed the operation within a period exceeding the predetermined effective period, and it is expected that the interest of the game will be improved. In this sense, a display (such as a remaining time display for which the valid period is continued) is made to be able to be recognized by the player as to whether the predetermined valid period is continued or is finished. It can be said that it is more desirable to output the specific sound for the remaining number of times (1 to 4 times) under the condition that it is possible to recognize that it is in the finished state.

It should be noted that, with regard to "specific sound output accompanying operation" in the figure, rather than a signal waveform associated with the specific sound output, a volume waveform of a specific sound output every time the automation time TY2 elapses (other sound output is Waveforms removed) are conceptually shown. As is clear from the figure, in this embodiment, the automation time TY2 is consumed before the time required for the specific sound output last time to finish being output to the end, and the specific sound output last time is changed. On the other hand, the sound data of a new specific sound is output in the form of being overwritten on a specific channel, which makes it possible to output the specific sound continuously and intermittently, as if performing a rapid tapping operation. It is expected that the player will be able to learn such a feeling.

By the way, as the reproduction type of the specific sound, in addition to a mode in which 1SHOT reproduction (corresponding to “1SHOT” in the figure) that reproduces the target sound once is executed every time the automation time TY2 has passed, It may be loop reproduction (corresponding to “LOOP” in the figure) which is repeatedly reproduced each time the automation time TY2 elapses. Alternatively, a plurality of specific sounds that are output continuously and intermittently may be reproduced as one sound data. In the case of a mode in which a plurality of specific sounds are reproduced as one sound data, it is not always necessary to output all the specific sounds as the same single sound, but they are sequentially output as a plurality of different single sounds. It may be.

On the other hand, regarding the display output in the game board side effect display device 1600 in the example shown in FIG. 273(a), after the operation time display pattern associated with the operation on the operation button 410 is displayed at the timing tx11, the operation button 410 is displayed. Even if a situation in which the player's hand is separated from that and no operation is performed (the period from timing tx12 to tx13 in the figure), the display content of the operation display pattern is advanced multiple times in that situation. It can be done.

For example, it is assumed that the operation state (detection state) from the timing tx11 is ended at the timing tx12. Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, as described above, the grace time TY1 having a predetermined time length is set based on the end of the operation state (detection state). Is. In this regard, in this embodiment, a process of sequentially outputting a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) in accordance with a predetermined time and order over the time from the timing tx11 until the set grace time TY1 is timed up. By executing the above, the display contents of the display pattern during operation can be advanced.

The contents of the display scenes 1 to 5 can be set, for example, in the manner shown in FIG. 274. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 274, "display scene 1" is a moving image showing a ally character holding a sword and trying to pull out the sword, and "display scene 2" is an ally. The display scene 3 is a video depicting the character pulling out the sword and cutting off the match. The "display scene 3" is a video depicting the ally character fighting with the enemy character using the sword in the first mode. , "Display scene 4" is a moving image depicting a teammate character fighting with an enemy character with a sword in the second mode, and "Display scene 5" is a teammate character's enemy character and a third scene. It is a moving image depicting a state of having a sword fight in a mode.

At the timing tx11, after displaying the operation-time display pattern associated with the operation of the operation button 410, the display scenes 1 to 5 are sequentially displayed while the specific sound is output intermittently. This makes it possible for the player to feel as if the contents of the production for fighting the character were developed in response to a plurality of operations. Note that each of the display scenes 1 to 5 need not necessarily be a moving image, and may be a still image. Further, in the game board side effect display device 1600, in addition to displaying the operation time display pattern, various effect displays (holding display, operation instruction image, etc.) may be displayed. As one of the effect displays, an image that changes effect (color change, etc.) each time effect acceptance is generated by an operation by the player may be included, but recognizes whether effect acceptance is occurring. In order to make it difficult to display, it is important to display as an image smaller than the display pattern during operation.

Here, in the operation-time display pattern (each display scene) and the grace time TY1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. The time length is set so that at least 5 (M) display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) can be sequentially displayed. As a result, even if an operation is performed in a single-shot operation mode within a predetermined effective period in which an operation opportunity for multiple operations (such as continuous hits) is given, at least five display contents of the operation display pattern (M pieces are displayed). ) Minutes (one display scene 1 displayed at the timing of operation detection, and four (M-1) display scenes 2 to 5 sequentially displayed (developed) thereafter even without operation) And the total number of) will be displayed.

Particularly, in this embodiment, the timing when the grace time TY1 ends during the output of the display scene (in the example shown in FIG. 273(a), the timing tx13 when the grace time TY1 ends during the output of the display scene 5). Unlike the case of the specific sound, the display pattern during operation is terminated by interrupting the display scene 5 by cutting it at that point without displaying it until the end. That is, for the operation-time display pattern with the progressive contents, unlike the case of the specific sound without the progressive contents, by intentionally interrupting it in the middle of the display scene, the display contents can be displayed if the operation is continued. It is expected that the player will be given the impression that he may have been able to make further progress, and that this will encourage further operations by the player. In this sense, regarding the relationship between the display pattern at the time of operation (each display scene) and the grace time TY1, all display scenes 1 to 5 should not be displayed between the start and the end of the grace time TY1. It can be said that setting to is more desirable in order to encourage further operation by the player. In order to encourage further operations by the player, it is necessary to display only some display scenes of all display scenes 1 to 5 between the start and end of the grace time TY1. Is more desirable.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, if the predetermined valid period ends during the period from the start of the grace time TY1 to the elapse of the grace period TY1 and a situation in which a new operation is not accepted, the predetermined valid period is reached. At the end of the period (when the remaining time of the grace time TY1 remains), the display scene in the output state is interrupted and the display as the result of the operation display pattern is displayed. This will be described later.

In addition, after the display scene 1 is displayed, the display scenes 2 to 5 are sequentially displayed and progressed according to a predetermined schedule regardless of the operation mode. May be preset according to the time (automation time TY2) from the output of the specific sound to the re-output, or it may be set regardless of the time (automation time TY2). It may be one. In this sense, a display change such as switching to another display or generation of a new display in the contents of each display scene itself (in the example of FIG. 274, the display scene 1 includes “from a state in which a sword is held, There is a display change due to "video rendering with the sword removed", and there is a display change due to "effect generation when a teammate character fights an enemy character" in display scene 3). It is more desirable. If a display scene having such a display change is used, it is possible to give the impression that the display change in each display scene is caused by the reception of the effect. Therefore, the output timing of the specific sound and the switching timing of the display scene It is expected that the sense of incongruity will be eliminated even if and are not strictly matched. Further, it is not always necessary to prepare a plurality of display scenes as the operation-time display pattern, and the same display scene may be repeatedly displayed.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 273(b), the operation button 410 is operated for a relatively long time at the timing tx21 in the predetermined effective period in which the operation opportunity of multiple operations (continuous hits, etc.) is given. It is assumed that the operation is performed in the long mode to be maintained at. Therefore, also at the timing tx21, similarly to the case at the timing tx11, detection (determination) that the operation button 410 is operated is performed, and the operation button 410 is operated based on the detection (determination). Processing for starting the output of the accompanying specific sound and the output of the display (display pattern during operation) associated with the same operation are performed.

Further, even in the operation maintaining period in which the operation state from the timing tx21 to the timing tx22 is maintained, it is specified every time the automation time TY2 elapses, as in the case of the non-operation period (the period of timing tx12 to tx13). A sound (for example, "picone") is output so that it can be output intermittently, and a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) are sequentially output in accordance with a predetermined time and order for operation. The display contents of the hour display pattern can be advanced in the same manner as the example shown in FIG. 273(a).

That is, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, during the operation maintaining period (the period from timing tx21 to tx22), first, it is determined whether or not the operation on the operation button 410 is continued (operation state). It periodically monitors (determines whether or not the operation state (operation detection state) has ended (for example, detecting a falling edge in the detection signal)). Then, as long as the operation state is continued, the grace time TY1 having a predetermined time length is not set, and during regular monitoring, “each time the automation time TY2 elapses, The processing of outputting a specific sound (for example, "picone") and the processing of sequentially outputting a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) in accordance with a predetermined time and order" are performed. In other words, in the operation maintaining period (the period from the timing tx21 to the timing tx22), “each time the automation time TY2 elapses, it is determined whether or not the operation is detected, and it is determined that the operation is detected. Based on a specific sound (for example, "picone") is output, or "operation detection state is determined every time the automation time TY2 elapses, and the operation detection state is detected. A process such as "advance display content based on determination" is not performed, and "regular monitoring (determination) as to whether or not the operation on the operation button 410 is being continued (operation state)". "Processing for outputting a specific sound (for example, "picone" each time the automation time TY2 elapses)" and "Several display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) are sequentially output according to a predetermined time and order. The process of causing" is performed. The “regular monitoring (judgment) of whether or not the operation on the operation button 410 is being continued (operation state)” is executed as a process executed a plurality of times while the automation time TY2 elapses. Is done.

Then, after that, as a result of the "regular monitoring (determination) as to whether or not the operation button 410 is continuously operated (operation state)", the operation button 410 is continuously operated ( When the timing tx22 at which it is determined that the (operation state) has been completed comes, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment first sets a predetermined time length based on the result of the determination. Set the grace time TY1 you have. However, at this time, "a process of outputting a specific sound (for example, "picone" each time the automation time TY2 elapses")" and "a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents)" according to a predetermined time and order. The "sequentially outputting process" is continuously executed for a period up to the timing tx23 until the grace time TY1 ends even after the timing tx22 at which the operation state ends is reached. That is, in this case, from the situation in which the operation on the operation button 410 is continued (timing tx21 to x22) to the situation in which the player's hand is separated from the operation button 410 and no operation is performed (timing tx22 to x23). It becomes possible to intermittently output the specific sound in a specific processing period (timing tx21 to x23) that spans the timings of transitions to and after the automation time TY2 elapses. Further, it becomes possible to continuously output the operation-time display pattern in a single processing mode in which a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) are sequentially output in accordance with a predetermined time and order.

According to such a configuration, in producing the specific sound output mode during the single-shot operation shown in FIG. 273(a) and the specific sound output mode during the long-press operation shown in FIG. 273(b), respectively. The processing mode (program) relating to the output of the specific sound can be shared between them. Similarly to this, the output mode of the operation display pattern during the single-shot operation shown in FIG. 273(a) and the output mode of the operation display pattern during the long press operation shown in FIG. 273(b) are respectively set. In producing, it becomes possible to make the processing mode (program) relating to the output of the operation-time display pattern common between them. That is, in this case, in the example of FIG. 273(a), at timing tx12, as a result of “regular monitoring (determination) as to whether or not the operation on the operation button 410 is being continued (operation state)” It is determined that the operation state (operation detection state) has ended. In addition, the state in which the operation on the operation button 410 is continued (timing tx11 to x12) is changed to the state in which the player's hand is separated from the operation button 410 and no operation is performed (timing tx12 to x13). During the specific period (timing tx11 to x13) that crosses the timing, the specific sound is intermittently output in a single processing mode that is output again each time the automation time TY2 elapses, and a plurality of display scenes are displayed. The display pattern during operation is continuously output in one processing mode in which 1 to 5 (display contents) are sequentially output in accordance with a predetermined time and order.

Accordingly, even when the operation button 410 is operated only once in the single-press mode, the operation button 410 can be operated in the same mode as when the operation button 410 is operated in the so-called long-press mode. The specific sound associated with the operation on the operation button 410 is intermittently output. That is, in this case, when the operation button 410 is operated, regardless of the operation mode (single press, long press), the single press is repeated within a relatively short time (one operation in a short time). The player can be made to feel as if it is being performed (such as feeling that a rapid continuous hit is being performed). As a result, while stabilizing the reactivity of the effect (whether the effect is changed once or the effect is changed a plurality of times) when the operation is performed by single-shot pressing, any operation mode (single-shot press, Even if the “long press” is adopted, it is possible to preferably maintain the number of times the effect change (specific sound) is generated per operation per unit time.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 273, the operation button 410 is operated only once in the single-push mode (FIG. 273(a)) and in the so-called long-press mode (FIG. 273). Although the same effect change as in (b)) is generated, in the example shown in FIG. 273(a), in reality, one effect reception is made at the timing tx11, and the white outline in the drawing is specified accordingly. While the sound output is performed only once, in the example shown in FIG. 273(b), four times of effect reception is performed every time the automation time TY2 elapses from the timing tx11, and white in the drawing corresponding to them is performed. The output of the specific sound without a key is performed four times. Therefore, in order to make a specific effect result appear within a predetermined effective period, at least a certain number of effect receptions are required, or an effect lottery is performed every time an effect reception is performed and a specific effect is selected according to the result. When the type of effect that causes the effect result to appear is performed, in the example shown in FIG. 273(a), since only one effect reception is actually generated, a specific effect result is caused to appear. That's not what you can expect. However, with the pachinko machine 1 according to the embodiment, by actually performing the output of the specific sound with the black outline in the figure even when the effect reception is not generated, the effect reception is actually generated so much. Even if it is not possible to expect a specific performance result to appear, it is possible to operate multiple times by creating a performance situation as if many performance receptions are occurring. Even if the player who is not good at (such as the continuous hit speed is slow) makes a single-shot operation, it is possible to preferably suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

In this embodiment, it is difficult to recognize how much effect reception is occurring just by confirming the specific sound output once, but from the start of the operation until the end of the operation. By confirming how many specific sounds are output, it is possible to add a star degree of how much effect reception has occurred.

In the operation display pattern according to this embodiment, after the display scene 1 to the display scene 5 are sequentially output, the display scene 3 is output again, and after that, the grace time TY1 is timed up, By displaying the display scenes 3 to 5 repeatedly until the predetermined effective period ends or the effect conditions are satisfied within the predetermined effective period and a specific effect result appears, the ally character and the sword A depiction of a single meeting is made to appear. Therefore, it is desirable that the specific effect result represents a situation in which the teammate character wins over the enemy character as a result of such a sword fighting, and the specific effect result within a predetermined effective period. When the character does not appear, it is desirable to display the effect result at the time of failure in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character as a result of such a sword fight.

As described above, when the operation button 410 is operated only once in the single-press mode (FIG. 273(a)), and when the operation button 410 is operated in the long-press mode (FIG. 273(a)). 273(b)), the specific sound associated with the operation is intermittently output multiple times, and the operation display pattern associated with the operation is sequentially displayed according to a predetermined schedule to progress. By doing so, even a player who is not good at operating a plurality of times will be encouraged to operate with peace of mind. However, in actuality, in the above-mentioned predetermined effective period, the operation button 410 is often operated as a multiple-stroke operation in a single-push mode, and when such a continuous-stroke operation is performed, 1 In order to improve the enjoyment of the game, it is important to make the player remember the operational feeling that the reception of the effects is generated by one operation. However, if the operation feeling that the reception of the effect is generated by one operation is completely reflected as the effect, the player who is good at operating multiple times is more advantageous than the player who is not good at operating multiple times. Since the performance becomes as if it were present, it is required to achieve both the performance elements (operation feeling, performance fairness) having such a trade-off relationship.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, in order to secure a feeling of operation that the effect reception is generated by one operation at a time, the operation "improved" Note that "whether a sound is generated (or changed) when operated" is a more important parameter than "when the display is generated (or changed)," Each time the operation on 410 is performed in a single-press mode, a specific sound corresponding to the effect reception is output at the operation timing.

For example, as shown in FIG. 275(a), now, during the period from timing tx31 to tx32 in the predetermined effective period, the operation button 410 is operated as a multiple-stroke operation in a single-shot mode. Suppose Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, each time an operation on the operation button 410 is detected, a new specific sound is output for the specific sound of the previous output (specific sound in the output state) triggered by the detection. A new specific sound is output by overwriting the sound data on the specific channel. As described above, even when the operation button 410 is operated only once in a single-press mode, the specific sound is intermittently output a plurality of times, but such an output is performed. When the operation button 410 is operated again while the user is operating, a new specific sound is output in such a manner that the specific sound in the output state is intentionally cut off (interrupted) during the operation, so that the operation by the player It becomes possible to explicitly indicate that the specific sound is newly output and the effect has been received at the timing when is performed.

In addition, in this embodiment, even when the operation button 410 is operated only once in the mode of a single press or when the operation is performed by long pressing, the specific sound output last time is output to the end. The automation time TY2 is consumed before the time required for is passed, and the sound data of the new specific sound is overwritten on the specific channel with respect to the specific sound of the previous output. This is as described above. However, in this case, the specific sound is output at an accurate rhythm at each fixed time (automation time TY2), whereas the operation button 410 is operated as a multiple-stroke operation in a single-shot mode. In such a case, the specific sound in the output state is chopped and a new specific sound is output every time the operation timing by the player arrives irregularly. It becomes possible for the player to suitably remember the operational feeling that the production reception is occurring.

By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 275(a) as well, during a predetermined effective period, every time the operation button 410 is operated, it is periodically determined whether or not the operation is continued (operation state). Processing (determining whether or not the operation state (operation detection state) has ended) is performed. In this regard, during the period from timing tx31 to tx32 when the operation button 410 is operated as a multiple-stroke operation in a single-shot mode, the operation is continued every time the operation button 410 is operated. As a result of the regular monitoring of whether or not it is in the (operational state), it is immediately determined that the continuation of the operation state has been completed, and accordingly, a predetermined time length is provided. The grace time TY1 is set (not shown).

In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, when the operation button 410 is newly operated before the grace time TY1 is ended (timed up), the setting of the grace time TY1 is canceled. The operation button 410 is then returned to the state in which the process of periodically monitoring whether or not the operation on the operation button 410 is continued (operation state) is performed. Therefore, during the period of timings tx31 to tx32, it is assumed that the process of periodically monitoring whether or not the operation button 410 is in the operation state is performed every time the operation button 410 is in the operation state or the non-operation state. The state transition is swiftly performed between the grace time TY1 (not shown) having a predetermined time length and the set state.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 275(a), after six consecutive hitting operations have been performed between timings tx31 and tx32, the user is tired of multiple hitting operations, and thereafter, in repeated operations. It is assumed that the time required will be significantly longer. For a player who is not good at such a plurality of operations, after the timing tx32, it is impossible to successfully perform a plurality of continuous hitting operations, so that the number of performance acceptances is greater than that of a player who is good at a plurality of operations. There is concern that the interest in games will decline due to the reduction. However, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, even if the operation by the player is not detected until the grace time TY1 elapses after the operation state is ended, a specific sound is generated every time the automation time TY2 elapses. The output processing is performed as described above. Therefore, according to the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, at least after the timing tx32, even if the time required for the repeated operation becomes significantly long, at least the grace time TY1 from the end of the previous operation state. If you can perform repeated operations within a shorter time, it is possible to continuously output the specific sound accompanying the operation continuously and make the player feel as if a fast continuous hit operation is being performed. Like

For example, if it is determined at timing tx33 that the continuation of the operating state has ended as a result of periodical monitoring as to whether or not the operating state has continued from the timing tx32, based on the determination. The grace time TY1 having a predetermined time length is set. After that, although the time required for the repeated operation becomes significantly long, a specific sound is output every time the automation time TY2 elapses in the situation where the operation is not performed by the player. By performing the processing, the specific sound associated with the operation is continuously and intermittently output. However, these specific sounds are output as the black specific sounds (7th to 9th specific sounds) in the figure under the situation where the effect reception is not generated.

In this respect, the black-colored specific sounds (7th to 9th specific sounds) can occur only until the grace time TY1 elapses after the last operation state is completed. However, in the example shown in FIG. 275(a), regarding the grace time TY1 set at the timing tx33, the operation button 410 is operated again at the timing tx34 before the grace time TY1 elapses. The setting is canceled (the time is not up) based on the operation. Along with this, at timing tx34, the white specific sound (the 10th specific sound) in the figure is output when the effect reception is generated by cutting off (interrupting) the specific sound in the output state. At the same time, it is returned to the state in which the process of periodically monitoring whether or not the operation state is continued is performed.

However, such an operation state is also terminated at the timing tx35, and a determination to that effect is made as a result of the monitoring, and the grace time TY1 having a predetermined time length is determined based on the determination. It will be set again. Then, each time the automation time TY2 elapses in the situation where the player is not operating, the black specific sound (11th to 14th specific sounds) is output again, and the grace period is increased. When the player finally operates at timing tx36 before the time TY1 is up, the black specific sound (14th specific sound) in the output state is cut off (interrupted). In the figure, the white specific sound (15th specific sound) in the figure is output.

As described above, even after the timing tx32, even when the time required for the repeated operation is significantly long, the repeated operation is performed at least within a time shorter than the grace time TY1 after the last operation state is completed. As long as it can be performed, the white specific sound in the figure at the timing when the player operates, and the black specific sound in the figure that is regular in the situation where the player is not operating By outputting each of the above, it is possible to continuously output the specific sound accompanying the operation continuously, and to make the player feel as if a rapid continuous hitting operation is being performed. Therefore, according to the aspect related to the output of such a specific sound, it is possible to secure the operational feeling that the effect reception is generated by one operation at a time, and it is possible for a player who is not good at operating a plurality of times. Even if there is, the specific sound output in black in the figure in the non-operation state allows the specific sound accompanying the operation to be output continuously and intermittently. , Production fairness) is expected to be achieved at the same time.

However, even when the specific sound is output in such a manner, a plurality of times is displayed in the operation display pattern that plays a role of notifying the effect result based on the operation within the predetermined effective period. If a player who is not good at operating and a player who is not good at operating multiple times are made to have a significantly different mode for the progress of the display content, eventually, a player who is not good at operating multiple times is better than There is a concern that a player who is good at operating a plurality of times may be advantageous, and the interest in the game may be reduced. Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, regarding the display pattern at the time of operation, the display content is not advanced stepwise in accordance with the generation timing of the specific sound accompanying the operation, but the grace time TY1 is increased. Until the end timing (specific end timing) arrives, the display content can be advanced by a predetermined dynamic display output regardless of the operation mode.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 275(a), as described above, it is assumed that the time required for the repeated operation is significantly long after the timing tx32 of the predetermined effective period. However, by the time the set margin time TY1 expires, the operation button 410 is operated again to cancel the setting of the margin time TY1. Therefore, the grace time TY1 does not time up within the predetermined valid period and the timing (specific end timing) is not reached.

When the operation is performed in such a mode as shown in FIG. 275(a), the display of the operation-time display pattern (game board side effect display device 1600) is started based on the operation by the player at the timing tx31. After that, the display scenes 1 to 5 shown in FIG. 274 are predetermined as the operation-time display patterns regardless of the operating conditions even though the speed of the repeated hitting operation is significantly changed as described above. It is only displayed sequentially according to the scheduled schedule and progresses, thereby making it appear that fairness is maintained between the player who is not good at operating multiple times and the player who is good at operating multiple times. Will be able to.

However, even if the manner in which the display content as the display pattern during operation is advanced is the same, the number of times that the performance reception associated with the operation actually occurs is the number of times that the player who is not good at operating multiple times and the number of times when operating multiple times It is unavoidable that we differ from our favorite players. Therefore, in order to make a specific effect result appear within a predetermined effective period, at least a certain number of effect receptions are required, or an effect lottery is performed every time an effect reception is performed and a specific effect is selected according to the result. When the type of effect that causes the effect result to appear, after all, a player who is good at operating multiple times is more likely to cause a specific effect result to appear, which makes it possible to perform the operation multiple times. The significance will be retained. In other words, while maintaining the significance of such production, the production fairness is maintained between the player who is not good at operating multiple times and the player who is good at operating multiple times in terms of production such as sound and display. It can be said that there is a technical feature in that it is possible to prevent the player's interest in playing a game that is difficult to operate a plurality of times from being reduced by making it appear as if it is being played.

Further, according to such a configuration, even if the continuous hitting operation is performed earlier than the interval (automated time TY2) at which the effect is received when the operation by long pressing is performed, the mode in which the operation-time display pattern progresses is Since they are the same, it is expected to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the button deterioration is accelerated due to an excessively rapid hitting operation.

By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 275(b), it is assumed that the operation button 410 is not operated in time before the grace time TY1 set at the timing tx33 elapses. That is, in this case, the timing tx37 (specific end timing) at which the grace time TY1 is timed up and ends comes within the predetermined valid period, and the timing tx37 (specific end timing) starts from the timing tx31. The dynamic display output (processing for sequentially displaying and advancing the display scenes 1 to 5 according to a predetermined schedule) will be interrupted and ended at that point.

In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, with respect to the output of the specific sound (for example, "picone"), the timing tx37 (specific end timing) at which the grace time TY1 ends in the output state comes. Even if it does, the process of cutting off the specific sound in the output state ((for example, "pico")) at the timing tx37 (output interruption process, process of interrupting by overwriting with another sound, etc.) As described above, even after the timing tx37 arrives, the output (sound waveform) in the same manner as that of the specific sound that has been output until then appears. Therefore, regarding the output of the specific sound, even after the timing tx37 (specific end timing) at which the grace period TY1 ends, the last specific sound (the tenth specific sound in the drawing) is output. If the operation button 410 is operated before the sound is muted, the player can feel that a specific sound accompanying the operation can be output continuously and intermittently, and that a rapid tapping operation is performed. It is possible to let it do so.

In fact, in the example shown in FIG. 275(b), before the black specific sound (10th specific sound) output across the timing tx37 (specific end timing) is silenced, After the tenth specific sound output is interrupted, the white specific sound in the figure occurs twice, and then the black specific sound in the figure is intermittently output again, so that the specific sound accompanying the operation is generated. It can be seen that is output continuously and intermittently. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 275(b), the specific sound is continuously output in this way, whereas in the display pattern during operation, the progress of the display content is once ended at the timing tx37. .. Then, after that, it is clear that the display content is redone from the first display scene (display scene 1) at the timing tx38 when the white specific sound in the figure is output again.

FIG. 276 shows a predetermined valid period in which an operation opportunity for multiple operations (continuous hits, etc.) is given in the pachinko machine 1 equipped with the automatic multiple-stroke operation function (automatic continuous hit function) described in FIGS. 273 to 275. It is a time chart which shows the example of an effect which appears when an operation is performed within the predetermined effective period (timing tx41 to tx48) when a specific effect pattern for generating is generated.

As shown in FIG. 276, at a timing tx41, a predetermined valid period in which an operation opportunity for a plurality of operations (continuous hits, etc.) is given occurs, and the player determines at a timing tx42 within the predetermined valid period. If the operation is started, in this example of performance as well, based on the detection of the operation, the output of the specific sound associated with the operation on the operation button 410 and the output of the display associated with the operation (display pattern during operation) are respectively performed. The process to start it will be performed.

However, in this effect example, when the operation on the operation button 410 is received within a predetermined effective period, a specific sound output outlined in the figure is generated, and a special sound different from the specific sound is generated with a predetermined probability. It is possible to execute the process of outputting.

That is, as described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, a specific sound output without a dot in the figure is generated even in a situation in which the operation button 410 is not operated and no effect reception is generated. In this figure, the black specific sound output is difficult to distinguish from the white specific sound output generated at the timing when the effect reception is generated (in this example, the same mode is used). ) Is to be output. Further, as described above, even when the operation display pattern appears on the game board side effect display device 1600, the display content is developed according to a predetermined schedule regardless of the operation mode. Therefore, from the player's side, even if an operation in a mode of long-pressing or an operation is performed multiple times within a predetermined effective period, it is possible to recognize how much effect reception is generated by these operations. It can be said that the situation is difficult. Therefore, in this example of performance, when an operation on the operation button 410 is received within a predetermined effective period, a specific sound output outlined in the figure is generated, and a special sound different from the specific sound has a predetermined probability ( For example, it is possible to predict to some extent how much production reception has occurred through the output situation of such a special sound by performing a process of outputting at 50% or the like).

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 276, during a relatively early period (timing tx41 to tx45) after the start of the predetermined effective period, two consecutive hitting operations at timings tx42 and tx43 and timing tx44. By performing each of the long-pressing operations, the effect reception for a total of 9 times occurs, and the white specific sound output corresponding to these is continuously generated for 9 times (1st to 9th in the figure). The white specific sound), and the number of times the performance reception occurs per unit time is relatively large. On the other hand, in the relatively late period (timing tx45 to tx48) after the start of the predetermined effective period, the timing tx46 requires a long time such that the operation in the single-shot operation mode cannot be said to be continuous hits. , Tx47 is performed twice, the reception of the effects is performed twice, and the white specific sound output corresponding to these is generated twice with an interval (the tenth in the figure). , 11th white specific sound), the number of times the effect reception occurs per unit time is relatively small.

However, when confirming the output status of the specific sound and the output status of the operation display pattern, the specific sound is compared after the predetermined effective period is started by the output of the black specific sound described above. It is continuously output in both the early period (timing tx41 to tx45) and the relatively late period (timing tx45 to tx48), and the operation display pattern is also compared after the predetermined effective period is started. In both the relatively early period (timing tx41 to tx45) and the relatively late period (timing tx45 to tx48), the display scenes are switched according to a predetermined schedule, and therefore, these progresses. It can be seen that it is difficult to determine whether the number of times the performance reception is generated per unit time is large or small by only checking the output status.

In this respect, when checking the output situation of the special sound that is output with a predetermined probability when the white specific sound output in the figure occurs, a relatively early period (timing In tx41 to tx45), the number of occurrences per unit time is larger than in the comparatively late period (timing tx45 to tx48) after the start of the predetermined effective period, and thus such a special sound is generated. It becomes possible to predict to a certain extent how many production receptions have occurred through the output status of. Further, according to such a special sound output mode, it is possible to conceal to a certain extent which of the white specific sound output and the black specific sound output in the drawing is generated. Therefore, it is expected that the player's interest in playing the game, which is difficult to operate a plurality of times, will be maintained appropriately. In this sense, the special sound may be generated when the specific sound output is generated, but is output based on that the output condition different from the generation of the specific sound output is satisfied. Therefore, even if the specific sound is output, it is required to output the special sound in a manner that does not necessarily generate the special sound.

Further, the predetermined probability of whether or not to generate the special sound when the performance reception is generated may be changed according to the number of performance receptions that have occurred within a predetermined effective period. That is, in this case, it is possible to make it more difficult to predict which of the white specific sound output and the black specific sound output in the drawing is occurring.

Further, considering that the output frequency of the special sound is lower than that of the specific sound, it has a time value longer than the time from the output of the specific sound to the muffling, and the automation time TY2. It is desirable to be set as a thing. In this example, the time value is set to be twice the “automation time TY2”. Further, when outputting a new special sound while the previous special sound is being output, it is desirable that the previous special sound is cut off (interrupted) and the new special sound is output.

However, in such a pachinko machine 1, since it is possible to enjoy the same effect as when a plurality of operations are performed simply by performing an operation by long pressing, the number of players who perform a plurality of operations is reduced. However, there is concern that the significance of the effect that requires multiple operations will be abolished. Therefore, in the effect example shown in FIG. 276, the operation by the player is assumed to be a long press during at least the period after the operation by the player is started at timing tx42 in the predetermined effective period (timing tx41 to tx48). The state of being performed as a mode of single-shot operation, between the state of being continuously performed (timing tx44 to tx45) and being in the state of performing single-shot operation (timing tx42 to tx44, tx45 to tx48). The display of the specific image (specific display) is allowed only when the specific display condition is satisfied.

That is, in this case, in order to confirm the specific image, it is required to perform the operation as a mode of a single-shot operation rather than an operation by long-pressing. It becomes possible to give a meaning to the production by performing a repeated operation (such as continuous hits), and it is expected that the entertainment of the game is maintained appropriately.

In addition, in this effect example, in order to confirm the specific image, only the operation as the mode of the single shot operation is not required, and the specific image is not necessarily displayed unless the specific display condition is satisfied. That is, in this case, since it becomes more difficult for the specific image itself to appear, each time a predetermined effective period occurs, the automatic continuous hitting (automatic multiple times operation) function is not used and a plurality of operations (such as continuous hits) are performed. ), it seems that you are trying to display a specific image that is highly difficult to appear, and you dare to operate multiple times without using the automatic continuous hit (automatic multiple times operation) function. You will be expected to encourage others to understand what you are doing.

In the example production shown in FIG. 276, a specific non-operation time (here, twice the “automation time TY2”) elapses from the timing when the last production reception occurred without a new production reception occurring. In addition, the production of a specific image within a predetermined effective period is defined as the above-mentioned "specific display condition" that the production hit is obtained in a predetermined production lottery performed when the specific non-operation time has elapsed ( Specific display) is to appear. In this regard, in the predetermined effect lottery, when a big hit is won in the big hit determination (or, a success situation in which a success display can appear depending on an operation mode within a predetermined effective period (the big hit expectation is high. In the case of (production situation)), the production hit is obtained with a probability of 70%, while when the jackpot is judged to be a big hit in the jackpot judgment (or operation is performed within a predetermined effective period). No matter how many times it is done, in a production situation in which a success indication cannot appear (in a production situation in which the expectation of a big hit is low), a production hit can only be obtained with a probability of 30%. Therefore, when the display of the specific image (specific display) appears within a predetermined effective period, it is suggested that the expectation that the big hit symbol will appear is high, and the interest in the game can be maintained appropriately. The “specific display condition” is not limited to this, and “a specific non-operation time (here, “automation time TY2” without a new performance reception from the timing when the last performance reception occurs). 2 times the time) has been passed" and "the effect win has been obtained in a predetermined effect lottery" is adopted as the "specific display condition", and when this is satisfied, The display of the specific image (specific display) may appear, or another condition may be adopted as the “specific display condition”.

In addition to the above-described types as the predetermined production lottery mode, for example, there is a production situation in which a success display can appear depending on the operation state within a predetermined effective period (production situation with low jackpot expectation). At times, there is a 0% chance of winning the production (or not performing the production lottery itself), however, no matter how many operations are performed within the predetermined effective period, a success display cannot appear. It may be a mode in which the effect hit is obtained with a probability of 60% in the case of (the effect situation where the jackpot expectation degree is low). According to such an aspect, it is possible to definitely show that the success display does not appear when the specific display appears, so that it is not necessary to perform a barren operation for causing the specific display to appear. Can be recognized within a predetermined effective period. In this case, it is desirable to use, as the specific display, the same display content as the failure display that appears when the predetermined valid period ends without the success display.

Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 276, when a new effect reception is generated while the specific image is being displayed (specific display) (timing tx46), the specification is performed at that time. The display is hidden, and the output is continued under the condition that the operation by the player is not being performed (the state where no new effect reception is occurring). There is.

Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 276, in order to cause a specific effect result (success display) to appear within a predetermined effective period (timing tx41 to tx48), it is required that at least a certain number of effect receptions occur. The appearance condition is satisfied at the timing tx47 at which the eleventh production reception (the eleventh white specific sound output) occurs, and the display scene 3 in the display state at that time is cut off ( In the form of (interruption), a process for causing a success display to appear as a display pattern during operation is performed. The contents of this success display include the effect contents of the repeated portion (display scenes 3 to 5) in the display pattern during operation, such as destroying the enemy character who was striking with the sword in display scenes 3 to 5. It should be related. Further, when the success indication appears, it is desirable that the big hit determination suggests that the expectation of winning the big hit is high.

Further, when the appearance condition is satisfied at the timing tx47 at which the eleventh production reception (the eleventh white specific sound output) occurs, the predetermined effective period is terminated at that time and a new production reception is performed. It will be prevented from occurring. Therefore, at a timing after the timing tx47, a white specific sound or special sound in the drawing is not newly generated, or a specific display is not newly displayed.

FIG. 277 is executed under the same processing conditions as the effect example shown in FIG. 276, but the continuous operation of the player in the mode of the single shot operation is shorter than the grace time TY1. It is a time chart showing an example of an effect that appears when repeated for a long time that cannot be said.

As shown in FIG. 277, even when the player repeats the operation in the single-shot operation mode for a long time, as long as those operations are repeated at intervals shorter than the grace time TY1, After the timing tx52 when the operation is started within the predetermined effective period (timing tx51 to tx56), the specific sound is output continuously and intermittently, and the display pattern during operation is displayed according to a predetermined schedule. Will be advanced. According to such an effect mode, even when the operation is performed only four times within the predetermined effective period, it is possible to create an effect situation as if the continuous hit operation is performed about 20 times. become able to. However, in this case, even a person who seriously performs the continuous hitting operation cannot understand the meaning of performing the continuous hitting operation, and there is a concern that the enjoyment of the game may deteriorate.

Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the length of the predetermined effective period is "Tx1", the length of the grace time TY1 is "Tx2", and a specific effect result (success display) within the predetermined effective period. When the minimum number of effect receptions required for the appearance is “EU”, these numerical values are set so that the relation [“Tx1/Tx2”<EU] is established. According to such a configuration, even if the operation is repeated at the last minute when the grace time TY1 elapses and a specific sound and an operation-time display pattern are continuously output, respectively, even if these operations are performed, these operations can be performed. The number of effect receptions that occur is less than the minimum number of effect receptions (EU) that is required in order to cause a specific effect result (success display) to appear within a predetermined effective period. That is, in this case, when the operation is performed in such a malicious manner, it is possible to prevent the specific effect result (success display) from appearing. It is expected that those who enjoy playing games will be able to maintain a good sense of entertainment. In addition, in order to obtain such an effect more reliably, regarding the minimum number of performance receptions (EU) required for causing a specific performance result (success display) to appear within a predetermined effective period, Strictly speaking, it is necessary to set the numerical value calculated by "Tx1/Tx2" as a numerical value larger than the integer value when the integer value is obtained by rounding up.

In this respect, in this example of performance, the minimum number of times (EU) of reception of performance required for causing a specific performance result (success display) to appear within a predetermined effective period is calculated by "Tx1/Tx2". Since it is "11 times", which is twice or more the integer value when the numerical value is rounded up to an integer, a failure display is displayed at the timing tx56 when the predetermined valid period ends. Become. That is, in this case, a failure display appears due to the shortage of the number of operations, which leads to a production situation in which it cannot be recognized whether the big hit expectation degree is low or high.

Furthermore, as described above, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment allows the display of the specific image to appear only when the single control operation is performed and the specific display condition is satisfied. Is. In this respect, in this effect example, when the above-mentioned "specific non-operation time" required for displaying the specific image is "Tx3", the relationship "[Tx1/Tx3"<EU] is established. It is supposed to set each of these numerical values so that. With such a configuration, if an attempt is made to cause the specific display to appear each time it is operated once within the predetermined effective period, the number of effect receptions that occur within the predetermined effective period will be within the predetermined effective period. In, the number becomes less than the minimum number of performance receptions (EU) required for causing a specific performance result (success display) to appear. That is to say, in this case, a stylistic selection function of whether or not an attempt is made to make the specific display appear until there is a risk that the specific display result (success display) will not appear, and the specific display is displayed. By not being able to easily make many attempts to make it appear, it is expected that the playability of the attempt will be improved, so it is expected to improve the enjoyment of the game. Like

Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 277, when the timing tx55a at which the predetermined effective period ends without the success display appearing, the display scene 4 in the display state at that time is cut off ( In the form of (interruption), processing for causing a failure display to appear as a display pattern during operation is performed. The content of this failure display is that the player character is defeated by the enemy character who was fighting with the sword in the display scenes 3 to 5, and the production content of the repeated portion (display scenes 3 to 5) in the operation display pattern. It should be related. Further, when a failure display appears, it is desirable that the jackpot determination suggests that the expectation of winning the jackpot is low.

On the other hand, in this effect example, as shown in FIGS. 276 and 277, the specific sound that is in the output state when the predetermined effective period ends regardless of whether the success display or the failure display appears. It is designed not to be cut off (interrupted), but this is as described above. However, even if these specific sounds are output intermittently thereafter, those specific sounds will be muted while the success indication or the failure indication is displayed, and then the success indication or the failure indication will be displayed. The relationship is set to be hidden.

In this embodiment, a grace time TY1 is set after the operation state by the player is finished, and until the grace time TY1 elapses, a specific sound output in the black state in the non-operation state is output. Although it has been decided to perform the operation at least four times or more, the number of “specific sound output without black in the figure” that occurs when in the non-operation state is not limited to this. For example, if the grace time TY1 is set as a time having a length that is at least twice as long as the automation time TY2, the black specific sound output in the non-operating state is output at least twice or more. Since it is generated, it is possible to make the user feel as if the continuous hitting operation (a plurality of operations) was continued even in the non-operation state.

Further, in this embodiment, after the display scenes 1 to 5 are sequentially output as the operation display pattern, the display scenes 3 to 5 are repeatedly output so that the display scenes 1 and 2 are not displayed. Then, a depiction in which an ally character simply strikes a sword with an enemy character appears. Then, you may make it perform the specific display which shows a jackpot expectation degree in at least one of the display scenes 1 and 2. With such a configuration, if the specific display is overlooked, it becomes impossible to reconfirm unless the non-operation state is continued until the grace time TY1 elapses. It is possible to provide the dramatization of which one is to be selected, which is the disadvantage that is wastefully consumed by that amount and the disadvantage that the specific display cannot be confirmed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the continuous hitting operation is allowed in such a manner that the effect reception occurs at an interval shorter than the interval (automation time TY2) at which the effect reception occurs when an operation by long pressing is performed. With this, it is possible to realize a player's flexibility during operation (see FIG. 275). However, on the other hand, even when such a high-speed continuous tapping operation is performed, the development mode of the display scene in the operation display pattern is set to be the same as when the operation is performed by long pressing. Therefore, it becomes possible to make the high-speed repeated hitting operation less attractive, and it is expected that this suppresses the excessive operation of the operation button 410 and reduces the risk of damage or the like. Will be done.

In addition, in order to make a specific effect result appear within a predetermined effective period, when performing an effect of a type that requires at least a certain number of effect receptions, a long press operation is performed only within the predetermined effective period. It is desirable to set the value of the specific number of times so that the effect reception is performed the specific number of times or more. More preferably, it is desirable to set the value of the specific number of times so that the effect reception of the specific number of times or more occurs only by performing an operation by long pressing for a period of half the predetermined effective period.

Further, as shown in FIG. 276 and FIG. 277, a time (specific non-operation time) twice as long as the “automation time TY2” has passed without a new effect reception from the timing when the last effect reception occurred. Although the display of the specific image (specific display) is made to appear at the time of performing, the specific non-operation time is not limited to this. For example, as the specific non-operation time, if any time value that is at least twice the “automation time TY2” and within the range where the grace time TY1 is the upper limit value (less than or equal to the grace time TY1) is used. While in the non-operation state, the black specific sound is output twice or more in the figure (a state in which the continuous hitting operation is performed in the non-operation state), It is not possible to produce an effect as if the display of a specific image (specific display) appears based on the number of pseudo operations in the non-operation state (the number of output of a black specific sound in the figure) reaching a predetermined value. It is possible.

[Game machine equipped with multiple effect operation units]
By the way, in the above description, the game machine is described, in which the dish unit 320 is provided with the effect operation unit 400 that can be pressed by the player and can present the effect image to the player. With reference to 278 to 329, a gaming machine capable of further increasing the player's motivation for operation will be described. The peripheral control board 1510 performs the effect control of the effect operation unit described below.

FIG. 278 is a front view of a gaming machine provided with the sword effect operation unit 5000. FIG. 279 is a right side view of the gaming machine provided with the sword effect operation unit 5000. Here, the sword effect operation unit 5000 arranged in the door frame 3 of the above-mentioned gaming machine 1 will be described. The same components as those described above will be designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be appropriately omitted.

The sword effect operation unit 5000 is provided on the front surface of the door frame 3 on the right side in front view. The sword production operation unit 5000 accommodates a sword part 5011 having a sword part 5011, a handle part 5012, and a collar part 5013 sandwiched between the sword part 5011 and the handle part 5012, and the sword part 5011 of the sword part 5010. A sword decoration body 5001 including a sheath 5020 capable of forming a sword is formed.

The sword decoration body 5001 is provided on the door frame 3 such that the sheath portion 5020 is movable in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. Further, the sword portion 5010 is provided so as to be movable in the sword extracting direction and the sword storing direction. The sword part 5010 is usually in a sword state in which the sword part 5011 is stored in the sheath part 5020, and in the sword removal effect, the sword part 5011 is in a sword extraction state in which the player can visually recognize it. Then, the sword part 5010 in the sword removal state can function as an operation means that receives a sword storage operation by the player and returns to the sword storage state.

Here, with reference to FIG. 280, an opportunity to execute a sword production that involves moving the sword production operation unit 5000 (sword decoration 5001) will be described. FIG. 280 is a diagram showing an example of a selection table of effect patterns in an effect mode capable of executing a cutting effect, and (A) an example of a selection table for selecting the presence/absence of cutting preparation preparation effect according to the type of variation pattern. 9B shows an example of a selection table for selecting the presence/absence of the removed sword book effect.

The production patterns described here include a pattern in which the cutting blade preparation effect is performed after execution of the cutting blade preparation transition production, a pattern in which the cutting blade preparation production is performed without performing the cutting blade preparation transition production in advance, and a cutting blade preparation transition production in advance. Despite the fact that there is a pattern in which the sword cutting production is not performed, a pattern in which the sword preparation preparation production is not performed and the sword production is not performed, the form of the sword decoration 5001 in the sword production is Two patterns are provided, one with an aura member and one without an aura member.

As shown in FIG. 280(A), whether or not to execute the extraction preparation transition effect is randomly selected in accordance with the type of the variation pattern determined by the main control board 1310 and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Here, a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns are classified into a big hit fluctuation fluctuation pattern at the time of a big hit, a small hit fluctuation fluctuation pattern at the time of a small hit, and a deviation fluctuation fluctuation pattern at the time of a deviation, and fluctuations that are advantageous for the player. The higher the pattern, the higher the probability that the extraction preparation transition effect will be executed. Specifically, the extraction preparation transition effect is executed with a probability of 50% in the case of a variation pattern for big hit variation, with a probability of 30% in a variation pattern for small hit variation, and in a variation pattern for out-of-range variation. It is executed with a probability of 20%.
The variation pattern at the time of out-of-shift variation may be changed depending on whether or not reach production is performed so that the probability that the extraction preparation transition production is executed is higher when the reach production is performed than when it is not performed. ..

Next, as shown in FIG. 280(B), the presence/absence of execution of the main sword extraction is randomly selected according to the type of variation pattern and the presence/absence of the extraction preparation transition effect. Even when the types of variation patterns are the same, when the cutting-out preparation transition effect is executed, the probability that the cutting-out main effect is executed is set to be higher than when the cutting-out preparation transition effect is not executed. Further, it is set such that the probability that the sword cutting main production is executed becomes higher as the variation pattern has a more advantageous result for the player. Here, even if the variation pattern has a low advantage, it is set so that the probability of executing the main cutting blade preparation is higher when the main cutting blade preparation effect is executed. Specifically, in the case where the cutting-out preparation transition effect is executed with the variation pattern for out-of-range variation, the probability that the cutting-out main effect is executed is higher than in the case where the cutting-out preparation transition effect is not executed in the variation pattern for small hit variation. Incidentally, in the case of the variation pattern for big hit variation, the extraction of the sword is always executed regardless of the presence or absence of the sword preparation preparation effect.

Further, when the cutting blade main effect is executed, the cutting blade preparation transition effect is executed in advance, and the more the variation pattern has the advantageous result for the player, the higher the probability that the cutting blade main effect with the aura member is executed. Is set. Here, in the case of the variation pattern for variation of small hits, the sword cutting effect with the aura member is not selected.

(State transition and movement of aura member due to sword removal of sword decoration)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 281 to 284, the sword removal operation of the sword decoration body 5001 in the sword removal effect (excision preparation transition effect and extraction effect) will be described. Further, in the case where the aura member 5030 is provided on the sword part 5010 (sword blade part 5011) itself capable of accepting the sword operation by the player, and the sword part 5010 is deformed by its constituent member (aura member 5030) (FIG. 281, 282) and an aura member 5035 is provided on the sheath portion 5020 of the door frame 3 that houses the sword portion 5010 (sword portion 5011), and the sword portion 5010 is combined with the member on the door frame 3 side (aura member 5035). The operation of the aura members 5030 and 5035 in the case of an integrated ornament (FIGS. 283 and 284) will be described.

FIG. 281 is a state transition diagram for explaining the sword removing operation of the sword decoration body 5001 when the aura member 5030 is provided on the sword portion 5010 (sword blade portion 5011) itself. The sword removal state and (C) the second sword removal state are shown. FIG. 282 is a vertical sectional view for explaining the operation of the aura member 5030. Note that FIG. 282 is a vertical cross-sectional view in a state where the blade portion 5011 is extracted from the sheath portion 5020 in order to make it easier to understand the operation of the aura member 5030.

As shown in FIG. 281(A), the sword decoration body 5001 in the normal state is in a sword storage state in which the sword blade portion 5011 is housed in the sheath portion 5020. As shown in FIG. 281(B), the sword decoration 5001 after the sword removal operation in the sword removal preparation transition production is visible only to the player by pulling out only the portion of the Habaki 5011a fitted to the blade 5011 from the sheath 5020. It becomes the first sword removal state. In the sword decoration body 5001 after the sword removal operation in the sword removal main production, as shown in FIG. 281(C), the sword blade 5011 is further removed from the sheath 5020, and most of it is visible to the player. It becomes a state. Here, the sword decoration 5001 in the second unsheathed state can function as an operation means capable of accepting a sword operation by the player.

The aura member 5030 provided on the blade portion 5011 is configured to be independently operable in addition to the sword removing operation of the blade portion 5011. In the case where the sword decoration 5001 is in the form with an aura member, the aura member 5030 is a sheath when the blade portion 5011 is in the first sword cutting state (FIG. 281(B)) from the sword storage state (FIG. 281(A)). Inside the portion 5020, the movable range is moved as much as possible (maximum movement) from the closed state (FIG. 282(A)) to the open state (FIG. 282(B)), and the blade portion 5011 is deformed. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the aura member 5030 even in the changing process of the blade portion 5011 deformed by the aura member 5030 from the first extracted blade state to the second extracted blade state (FIG. 281C). As will be described later, since the aura member 5030 is provided so as to be located below the Habaki 5011a of the blade portion 5011 even when the aura member 5030 is maximally operated, the player cannot visually recognize the aura member 5030 in the first sword removing state.

The aura member 5030 in the normal state (closed state) is contained in the blade portion 5011 as shown in FIG. 282(A). The aura member 5030 is provided below the Habaki 5011a of the blade portion 5011 and meshes with the right aura member 5031, the left aura member 5032, the rack 5031a provided on the right aura member 5031, and the rack 5032a provided on the left aura member 5032. And a pinion 5033. In the aura member 5030, when the pinion 5033 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front by a driving unit (not shown), the rotational force is converted into a linear movement in the right direction of the rack 5031a and a left direction of the rack 5032a, and FIG. As shown in (B), the right aura member 5031 and the left aura member 5032 each stop at a position (open state) protruding outward from the outer shape of the blade portion 5011.

Further, below the Habakaki 5011a of the blade portion 5011, an LED substrate 5011c having a plurality of LEDs is included in the blade shaft 5011b. By emitting light from these LEDs, the blade portion 50011 (aura member 5030) can be illuminated and decorated.

Here, regarding the operation timing of the aura member 5030, when the sword decoration body 5001 (sword portion 5010) changes from the sword storage state to the first sword cutting state, it changes from the closed state to the open state, and the operation of the aura member 5030 causes the blade portion 5011 to move. Although an example in which the sword decoration 5001 changes from the first sword cutting state to the second sword cutting state after the above is deformed, the present invention is not limited to this. The aura member 5030 may start the operation (deformation) after the sword decoration 5001 is in the second extracted sword state. The final mode based on the effect pattern set until the sword decoration 5001 in the second extracted sword state functions as the operation means (including not only the maximum operation but also the operation stopped halfway ).

FIG. 283 is a state transition diagram for explaining the sword removing operation of the sword decoration body 5001 when the aura member 5035 is provided on the sheath portion 5020. The second sword removal state is shown. FIG. 284 is a vertical cross-sectional view for explaining the operation of the aura member 5035. Note that FIG. 284 is a vertical cross-sectional view in a state where the blade portion 5011 is extracted from the sheath portion 5020 in order to make it easier to understand the operation of the aura member 5035. Here, the same configurations as those in FIGS. 282 and 283 described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be appropriately omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 283(A) to (C), the aura member 5035 provided on the sheath portion 5020 of the door frame 3 that houses the sword portion 5010 (sword blade portion 5011) is the above-mentioned sword portion 5010 (sword blade portion 5011). The aura member 5030 provided on itself is movable in the horizontal direction, whereas it is movable in the vertical direction. The aura member 5035 is provided so as to surround the outer periphery of the blade portion 5011. When the sword decoration 5001 is in the form with an aura member, the aura member 5035 maintains the relative positional relationship between the blade portion 5011 and the aura member 5035 in the sword storage state, and changes the state of the blade portion 5011 (the sword storage state. Operates according to (⇔ first sword cutting state ⇔ second sword cutting state). This allows the sword portion 5010 (blade portion 5011) to be united with the member (aura member 5035) on the frame side to be viewed as an integral decorative body.

The aura member 5035 in the normal state (completely housed state) is housed in the sheath 5020 as shown in FIG. 284(A). The aura member 5035 is provided such that the upper end thereof is below the Habaki 5011a of the blade portion 5011 in the completely accommodated state, and the hollow cylindrical enclosure aura member 5036 provided so as to surround the outer periphery of the blade portion 5011 and the surrounding aura member 5036. And a right rack 5036a and a left rack 5036b, and a right pinion 5037a and a left pinion 5037b that mesh with the right rack 5036a and the left rack 5036b, respectively. In the enclosure aura member 5036, the right pinion 5037a is rotated counterclockwise in front view and the left pinion 5037b is rotated clockwise in front view by a driving means (not shown), and both pinions are meshed with each other, so that the rotational force is right in the rack. The rack 5036a and the left rack 5036b are converted into an upward linear motion, and as shown in FIG. 284(B), the surrounding aura member 5036 is brought together with the blade portion 5011 and stopped at a position where the second extracted blade state is formed. At this time, the aura member 5035 is in a completely appearing state in which the surrounding aura member 5036 is movable (maximum operation) up to the upper limit of the movable range.

Although not shown, the blade portion 5011 includes an LED substrate having a plurality of LEDs, so that the blade portion 5011 and the aura member 5035 can be illuminated and decorated.

Here, regarding the operation timing of the aura member 5035, the blade portion while maintaining the relative positional relationship according to the state change of the sword decoration 5001 (sword portion 5010) (storing state ⇔ first sword cutting state ⇔ second sword cutting state). Although an example of combining with 5011 is shown, the invention is not limited to this. The aura member 5035 may start the operation (coalescence) after the sword decoration body 5001 is in the second extracted sword state. The final aspect based on the effect pattern set until the sword decoration 5001 in the second extracted sword state functions as an operating means (not limited to the full appearance state in which the maximum operation is performed, but an intermediate appearance in which the operation is stopped halfway) (Including the form with the aura member in the state). Further, the aura member 5035 may be combined with the blade portion 5011 so as not to be visually recognized by the player from the sword storage state to the first sword removal state.

(Example of sword production using a sword decoration)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 285 to 290, the sword removal effect using the sword effect operation unit 5000 (sword decoration body 5001) will be described. In the following, in the reach effect, when the extraction preparation transition effect is executed ((X1) to (X5) in the figure), the extraction pattern is not executed ((X6) and (X7) in the figure). The screen transition of the effect display device 1600 and the operation transition of the sword ornament 5001 will be described with respect to the effect patterns ((A1) to (D2) in the figure) in which the unsheathed book effect is executed. 285 to 289 are effect transition diagrams of the extraction effect. FIG. 290 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the state change timing of the sword ornament 5001 and the operation effective period of the operating means.

In the reach effect, first, the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern that have been variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are stopped and displayed with the same symbol (here, "7"), and only the central decorative symbol is variably displayed. It starts by forming a reach state (FIG. 285 (X1)). Subsequently, the reachable decorative pattern is reduced and displayed in the upper right part of the display area, and in the central display area, an effect image suggesting execution of the sword removal effect (movement of the sword decoration 5001) is displayed. Specifically, an image (Fig. 285 (X2)) of two samurai facing each other and starting to show Iai is displayed, and then one samurai holds the sword in its sheath while holding its handle (Fig. 285 (X3)) is displayed.
Here, the image in the display area of the effect display device 1600 produces an effect that suggests that the sword ornament 5001 is movable. During this time, the sword decoration body 5001 of the sword effect operation unit 5000 maintains the sword storage state (FIG. 281(A)).

Next, when the extraction preparation transition effect is executed by the lottery based on the type of the variation pattern transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, the extraction preparation transition effect is displayed as shown in FIGS. 286 (X4) and (X5). When started, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the face of the samurai holding a sword with the eyes closed is displayed in the above-described image, and the eyes are enlarged and displayed over time. At this time, the sword decoration preparation transition effect is performed by changing the sword decoration body 5001 from the sword cutting state to the first sword cutting state. In addition, when the extraction preparation transition effect is performed, the extraction main effect is likely to be performed thereafter as compared with the case where it is not performed. Therefore, the sword removal preparation transition effect can be said to be an expectation effect in which the sword decoration 5001 is movable to indicate the degree of expectation that the sword main effect will be executed. In the sword removal preparation transition production, by swinging the sword decoration 5001 in the first extraction state up and down, the player is expected to further change the sword decoration 5001 to the second extraction state. Good. The vertical swing of the sword decoration 5001 in the first sword removal state is performed to the extent that the player cannot visually recognize the aura member 5030 (5035) when the sword decoration body 5001 is in the form with the aura member. On the other hand, if the extraction preparation transition effect is not executed, the sword decoration 5001 may be kept in the sword storage state, and the image shown in FIG. 285 (X3) may be displayed continuously.

Here, when the sword decoration 5001 in the subsequent sword cutting main production is in a form with an aura member, the aura member 5030 is closed inside the sheath portion 5020 at the timing of this sword removal preparation transition production (FIG. 282 (A )) to the open state (FIG. 282 (B)), the movable range is moved as much as possible (maximum operation) to deform the blade portion 5011. At this time, the sword decoration 5011 in the first removed sword state is visible from the player from the hand of the blade portion 5011 to the portion of the blade 5011a, but as described above, the aura member 5030 of the blade 5011a of the blade 5011 Since it is provided on the lower side, even if the aura member 5030 is maximally operated, there is no fear that the aura member 5030 is visually recognized by the player. Furthermore, the aura member 5030 is configured to be visible to the player at substantially the same timing as the timing at which the sword decoration 5001 changes from the first sword cutting state to the second sword cutting state. Therefore, the sword decoration body 5001 in the second sword removal state functions as an operation means capable of accepting the sword operation by the player, and at the same time, the expectation is set according to the form of the operation unit (sword part 5010) operated by the player. It is possible to suggest.

Then, after the cutting-out preparation transition production is completed, if the extraction-based book production is not executed by a lottery based on the type of variation pattern and the presence or absence of the extraction-preparation transition production, the eyes are enlarged and displayed in the display area of the production display device 1600. Sweat bleeds on the forehead of the samurai (Fig. 286 (X6)), and the central decoration pattern is left-sided in the center of the screen together with an image that the samurai abandon when the displayed central decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. And, it is stopped and displayed in a stop mode different from the right decorative pattern, that is, in a disengagement mode (here, “6”) (FIG. 286 (X7)). At this time, the sword decoration 5001 is returned from the first sword cutting state to the sword storage state at the time of FIG. 286 (X6), and maintains the sword storage state. That is, the reach effect is finished without the sword ornament 5001 functioning as an operating unit.

On the other hand, when the sword removal main effect is executed, after the sword removal preparation transition effect is finished, an image for slashing Iaido is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the sword decoration 5001 is used as the second extraction sword. It becomes a state. Here, in the form of the sword decoration body 5001 in the second extracted sword state, an aura member-attached form that can be seen in a form in which the blade portion 5011 is deformed by the aura member 5030 and an aura member 5030 that is not visible There is provided an aura member-less form in which the undeformed blade portion 5011 can be visually recognized.

First, with reference to FIGS. 287 and 288, a case will be described in which the sword decoration 5001 in the second removed sword state is in the form without an aura member. When the punching book production is started, in the display area of the production display device 1600, an image in which the eyes of the samurai are opened and the eyes are sharp is displayed from the enlarged image of the eyes of the samurai with closed eyes in FIG. 286 (X5) (FIG. 287 (A1)), an image is displayed in which the sword that has been set is removed and the opponent samurai is cut off (FIG. 287 (A2)). At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the first sword cutting state to the second sword cutting state at the time of FIG. 287(A1), and the blade portion 5011 becomes visible to the player.

Next, when the sword decoration 5001 is in the second extraction state for a predetermined period of time, the sword decoration 5001 is operated by the player to store the sword, that is, the handle 5012 of the sword 5010 that the player jumps out of the sheath 5020. In order to function as an operation means capable of accepting the operation of gripping the sword blade portion 5011 and pushing the blade portion 5011 downward so as to fit in the sheath portion 5020, an operation valid period for effectively detecting the sword storage operation of the sword decoration 5001 occurs. At this time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect that prompts the sword operation of the sword decoration 5001 is performed. Specifically, a sword in the same shape as the second sword removal state of the sword decoration 5001 is displayed, and an image indicating the operation direction and the operation valid period is displayed together with the message "Please put the sword!" (Fig. 287 ( A3)). In the sword decoration body 5001, the LED of the internal LED board 5011c blinks to indicate that the operation is valid. Further, it is preferable that the image in the operation promotion effect is an image related to a series of Iai, and the operation effect image is displayed in the front so as to be superimposed on the immediately preceding Iai cut scene image (FIG. 287 (A2)). (See FIG. 293 (G2) described later).

Then, when the player holds the handle 5012 of the sword decoration 5001 and puts the blade 5011 in the sheath 5020 during the operation valid period, the player performs a sword storage operation. The post-operation effect is performed according to the expected degree of advantageous result, and the effect is ended together with the winning notification of the symbol type (FIG. 288). Specifically, when the symbol type is a big hit, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the sharply cut effect image is flashingly displayed (FIG. 288 (C1)), and the variably displayed central decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. At the timing when the opponent's samurai is defeated and the image of Iai's decision is made, the central decoration pattern at the center of the screen is the same stop mode as the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern, that is, the big hit mode (here "7"). It is displayed (FIG. 288 (C2)). On the other hand, when the symbol type is off, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the cut effect image is displayed more plainly than in the case of a big hit (FIG. 288 (D1)), and the centrally-decorated symbols that are variably displayed are displayed. The stop mode where the central decorative pattern is different from the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern in the center of the screen together with the image that the opponent's samurai can not be defeated at the timing of stop display and Iai cannot be settled, that is, the detached mode (here "6") Is stopped and displayed (FIG. 288 (D2)).

Next, with reference to FIG. 289, a case will be described in which the sword decoration 5001 in the second sword removal state is in the form with an aura member. When the punching book production is started, in the display area of the production display device 1600, an image in which the samurai opens his eyes and sharp eyes are displayed from the enlarged image of the eyes of the samurai with closed eyes in FIG. 286 (X5) (FIG. 289 (B1)), an image is displayed in which the sword that has been set is removed and the opponent samurai is cut off (FIG. 289 (B2)). At this time, the sword decoration 5001 changes from the first sword cutting state to the second sword cutting state at the time of FIG. 289 (B1) and is deformed by the aura member 5030 (the right aura member 5031 and the left aura member 5032). Will be visible to the player. Here, the blade portion 5011 is already deformed by the aura member 5030 at the time when the state changes from the first sword cutting state to the second sword cutting state, but the present invention is not limited to this. First, even if only the blade portion 5011 is in the second unsheathed state so that it can be visually recognized by the player, the aura member 5030 is changed from the closed state to the open state to deform the blade portion 5011 to form the aura member attached form. It is sufficient that the sword decoration 5001 is in the form with the aura member in the second extracted sword state before the operation effective period starts. However, since the sword decoration 5001 is already in the second sword removal state in which the player can operate the sword, it is possible to surely recognize the change in the degree of expectation by the appearance of the aura member 5030, while the aura member 5030 If the operation takes time, there is a concern that the player may make an erroneous operation. Therefore, when the aura member 5030 is made recognizable to the player while a series of movements from the first sword cutting state to the second sword cutting state are performed as in this example, and the sword decoration 5001 is in the second sword cutting state. It is preferable to promptly start the operation effective period.

Also, the images in FIGS. 289(B1) and (B2) are the same as the images in FIGS. 287(A1) and (A2) described above, and the player only looks at the images to determine whether the sword decoration 5001 has an aura member. I am trying not to judge whether or not. By actually looking at the sword decoration 5001, the player can grasp which of the form with the aura member and the form without the aura member. As a result, the sword decoration 5001 can be paid attention before the sword decoration 5001 functions as an operation unit, and the player can easily recognize the sword decoration 5001 as the operation unit and enjoy the operation effect without confusion. You can Note that the images displayed on the effect display device 1600 at this time do not have to be the same as described above, and may be similar images to the extent that the player can be made to look at the sword decoration 5001. .. For example, there may be some differences in samurai images (differences in eye color and effect effects).

Then, when the operation of the sword ornament 5001 by the player is in an effective operation valid period, the image of the sword in the operation promotion effect performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 has the same aura member-attached form as the sword ornament 5001. It will be displayed (FIG. 289 (B3)). The subsequent effect is the same as that of FIG. 288 described above, and thus the description thereof is omitted. In the case of the form with an aura member, the effect images in the above-mentioned FIGS. 288 (C1) and (D1) may be displayed more flashy than in the form without an aura member.

Next, with reference to FIG. 290, the relationship between the state change timing of the sword decoration 5001 and the operation effective period in the sword removal preparation effect in which the sword removal preparation transition effect and the sword removal main effect are performed will be described.
As shown in FIG. 290, when the reach effect is started (time t0), the iai effect is started in the display area of the effect display device 1600. The state changes to the sword removal state (time t1). At this time, when the effect pattern with the aura member attached form is set, the aura member 5030 is in the open state from the closed state, but even when the aura member 5030 is in the open state, the aura member 5030 is played in the first cutting blade state. It is provided so that it cannot be seen by a person. Therefore, in the stage of the first sword cutting state, the player grasps whether the sword decoration body 5001 further changes to the second sword cutting state, and if it changes, whether the sword decoration body 5001 has an aura member attached form. I can't. However, when the sword removal preparation transition effect is executed, the sword extraction effect is executed, and the possibility of the form with the aura member is further increased, so that the player's expectation can be increased. Even if the sword removal main effect is not executed, the sword movement suggestion effect (FIG. 285 (X3)) is executed on the effect display device 1600 before the start of the sword removal preparation effect, so that the player can move the sword. As a movable body production corresponding to the suggestive production, a state change (movable) of the sword decoration body 5001 from the sword storage state to the first sword extraction state can be captured.

Then, when the blade preparation preparation transition finishes, the blade main production is subsequently started, and the sword decoration 5001 changes from the first blade extraction state to the second blade extraction state (time t2). After that, the operation valid period is started after the lapse of a predetermined period, and the sword decoration 5001 functions as an operation unit (time t3). When the operation valid period is reached, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect using a sword related to a series of Iaido effects is performed. Then, when the sword cutting operation by the player is detected during the operation valid period (time tx), post-operation performance is performed. At this time, the sword decoration 5001 is returned from the second unsheathed state to the swordsed state by the player's operation of storing the sword. Then, when the preset operation valid period ends and the reach state ends (time t4), the symbol type is notified in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the series of Iaido effects ends ( Time t5). Note that the operation valid period may be ended by the detection of the operation by the player, as indicated by the one-dot chain line in the figure. When no operation is detected during the operation valid period, the sword decoration 5001 is automatically returned from the second sword cutting state to the sword storage state when the operation valid period ends.

Here, during a predetermined period (time t3 to t2) from the time when the sword decoration 5001 is in the second sword extraction state until the operation effective period starts (time t3 to t2), the player operates the sword decoration 5001 in the second sword extraction state (aura member). A period longer than the operation valid period (time t4 to t3) is ensured as a mode confirmation period in which it is possible to confirm whether it is the attached mode or not, the light emission mode, and the like. That is, even if the operation section (sword section 5010) that can be operated by the player reaches the operation position (second sword extraction state) that functions as the operation means, the operation acceptance is started immediately (the operation effective period is generated). Instead, the player is allowed to operate after confirming the final aspect of the operation section at the operation position. As a result, the player confirms the final state before operating the sword ornament 5001 and expands the expectation in the subsequent development (for example, the expectation is increased in the case of the aura member-equipped form), and prepares for the mind. Since it is possible to do so, as soon as the second sword state is reached, the effective period of operation starts and there is a concern that the interest of the game will be reduced by rushing to operation production without being able to confirm the mode of the operating means. Can be wiped off.

Further, the sword removal effect of the sword decoration body 5001 is performed in a series of Iaido effects performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and a movable effect (time t0 to t3) as a movable body of the sword decoration object 5001. The effect related to the operation effect (time t3 to t4) as the operation means is set. As a result, it is possible to impress the player with the unexpectedness and variety of effects in switching the functions of the sword ornament 5001, and thus to suppress the deterioration of the entertainment of the game caused by the conventional uniform operation. You can

In the above-described production example, the aura member 5030 is provided on the sword portion 5010 (the blade portion 5011) itself, and the aura member 5030 deforms the blade portion 5011. However, the aura member 5035 is the sheath portion of the door frame 3. The same applies to the case where the sword portion 5010 provided on the frame 5020 is integrated with the member (aura member 5035) on the frame side to form an integral decorative body.

As described above, the sword decoration body 5001 of the present example constitutes an operation means capable of changing (deforming or combining) the aspects of members (sword portion 5010 and aura member 5030) of the same system as the decorative movable body whose appearance is general. doing. And, the aspect of the sword decoration body 5001 (storing state, first sword extracting state, second sword extracting state, aura member-less form and aura member-containing form) is one of the starting balls 2002 or the second starting port 2004 of the game ball. It is determined based on the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result that is drawn by acceptance (see FIG. 280). Therefore, the sword decoration 5001 can suggest the degree of expectation that the variable display will give an advantageous result for the player due to the change of the aspect of the sword decoration 5001, and increase the player's interest in the operating means (sword decoration 5001 ). As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, before the sword decoration body 5001 becomes the second sword removal state (operation position) that can be operated by the player, the expectation degree is suggested by changing the state of the sword decoration body 5001 from the sword storage state to the first sword removal state. doing. Further, the expectation level is suggested by making the aura members 5030 and 5035 appear in the state change from the first sword cutting state to the second sword cutting state. As described above, the sword decoration body 5001 of this example changes to the expected suggestion mode (the first sword cutting state and the appearance of the aura member) in the process of changing from the sword cutting state to the second sword cutting state (operation position). The player has a strong interest in the operating means until the operating means becomes operable. Further, when the state change of the operation means and the expectation suggestion are performed separately, specifically, when the action to the operation position is performed after the expectation suggestion is performed in advance, the expectation is high. In the mode, when the player grasps the operation means, there is a concern that the player may operate the operation means even though the operation means is not in the operable position, but the sword ornament 5001 of this example is operated. Since the state change to the position and the suggestion of the degree of expectation proceed at the same time, the above-mentioned erroneous operation can be prevented.

In the first sword removal state described above, only the Habakaki 5011a portion of the blade portion 5011 is pulled out from the sheath portion 5012 so that the player cannot visually recognize the aura member 5030 (5035). A part of the aura member 5030 (5035) may be made visible in the single-blade state. At this time, the sword removal amount in the first sword removal state is set to be less than the maximum sword removal amount in the second sword removal state (operation position). Here, the aura member 5030 (5035) is in the fully-appearing state when it is in the second cutting blade state. Since the player can visually recognize a part of the aura member 5030 (5035) indicating that the expectation is high from the first sword cutting state, the player can have a higher expectation at the time of the first sword cutting state, You can increase your interest in the changes that follow.

Further, in the case where the player can visually recognize a part of the aura member 5030 (5035) in the first sword removal state, it is necessary to have the aura member at the stage of the sword removal preparation transition effect (high expectations). Since the player can grasp it and holds high expectations, the disappointment when the sword-story production is not executed is greatly increased in the subsequent development. Therefore, when the sword removal preparation transition effect is performed, the player's emotions are greatly affected by the presence or absence of the sword removal main effect, and it is possible to provide a highly entertaining effect for the game.

(Modification 1-Extracting a sword using operation buttons)
In the following, with reference to FIGS. 291 to 294, in the case where the sword cutting effect is executed in the reach effect, the sword cutting operation of the sword decoration 5001 in the sword cutting effect is triggered by the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player. The case will be described. 291 to 293 are examples of an effect transition diagram of the extraction effect of the modified example 1. FIG. 294 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the state change timing of the sword ornament 5001 of Modification 1 and the operation timing of the operation means.
Note that the description similar to that of the above-mentioned sword removal effect (FIG. 285 to FIG. 290) is appropriately omitted.

Here, a production pattern ((Y1) to (Y3)→(E1) and (E2) in the drawing) in which neither the extraction preparation transition production is performed nor the extraction main production is performed, and after the extraction preparation transition production is executed. Regarding the effect pattern ((Y1) to (Y3)→(F1) to (F3)→(G1) to (G4) in the figure in which the unsheathed book effect is performed, the screen transition of the effect display device 1600 and the state of the operation button 410 The transition and the operation transition of the sword ornament 5001 will be described.

When the reach effect is started, the Iai effect is started in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 291 (Y1)), and the effect indicating the operation of the operation button 410 is suggested by displaying the operation button image. Is performed (FIG. 291 (Y2)). Then, when the operation valid period of the operation button 410 is started, an image of the operation button to be operated and a gauge display of the operation valid period are displayed, and an operation promotion effect that prompts the player to perform an operation is performed (Fig. 291 ( Y3) At this time, the operation button 410 to be operated is emitting light, and the operation button for image display is also displayed in the same light emission mode, so that the player can easily perform the operation effect of the operation button 410. The light emission of the operation button 410 is ended when the operation by the player is detected.

In the case where the cutting sword preparation transition effect and the sword cutting main effect are not performed and the result is out, when the player presses the operation button 410, the reach effect is finished in the display area of the effect display device 1600. An image for notifying the disengagement result (“767”) is displayed ((E1) and (E2) in FIG. 292), and the effect is finished. At this time, there is no change in the sword decoration 5001 and the operation button 410.

Further, in the case where the main sword cutting effect is performed after execution of the sword removal preparation transition effect, when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the sword decoration 5001 changes from the sword cutting state to the first sword extraction state. A sword removal preparation transition effect is performed (FIG. 292 (F1) and (F2)). At this time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the white character “Tenchu” is displayed on the blackout screen (FIG. 292 (F1)), and the image in which the samurai of the teammate is trying to put his hand on the sword is displayed. (FIG. 292 (F2)). Next, the main sword cutting effect in which the sword decoration 5001 changes from the first sword cutting state to the second sword cutting state (form with aura member) is started (FIG. 292 (F3), FIG. 293 (G2) and (G2)). At this time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, when the sword decoration 5001 is changed from the first sword extraction state to the second sword extraction state (the form with the aura member) by the sword extraction main effect, immediately before and after FIG. 292 (F2). Unlike the image of the samurai Iai in Fig. 293 (G1), the image of the lightning bolt is interrupted and displayed on the blackout screen as shown in Fig. 292 (F3), and the form of the sword ornament 5001 (whether the aura member is attached or not) is displayed. The degree of expectation of winning (hit) Iai by the strength of lightning.

The subsequent effect is the same as in the above-mentioned FIG. 287 (A2), (A3) and FIG. 288. When the sword decoration 5001 is in the second sword removal state for a predetermined period of time, the sword decoration 5001 is changed to the player. In order to function as the operation means capable of effectively accepting the operation of, the operation effective period for effectively detecting the sword operation of the sword decoration 5001 occurs. Then, the player is urged to operate the sword within the effective period of operation (FIG. 293 (G2)), and the sword operation by the player notifies the symbol type (hit, out) (FIG. 293 (G3) or (G3)). G4)).

Next, with reference to the timing chart shown in FIG. 294, the operation of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 by the player and the state change of the sword decoration 5001 will be described. The modification 1 is characterized in that the operation of the operation button 410 by the player starts the state change of the sword decoration 5001. When the reach effect is started (time t0), the operation valid period of the operation button 410 occurs at an early stage, and the operation promotion effect that prompts the player to operate the operation button 410 is performed (time t1). Then, when the player operates (time ty) within the valid operation period of the operation button 410 (time t1 to t2), the sword decoration body 5001 starts to change the state, and first, the sword state is changed to the first sword state. Here, in the first sword removal state, the player cannot determine whether or not the aura member 5030 appears (whether or not the blade portion 5011 is deformed by the aura member 5030). Thereafter, the sword decoration 5001 changes from the first sword extraction state to the second sword extraction state (time t2), and after a predetermined time has passed, this time the sword decoration 5001 is operated so as to function as the operation means. When the effective period occurs, an operation promotion effect that prompts the player to operate the sword decoration 5001 is performed (time t3), and when the player operates within the operation effective period of the sword decoration 5001 (time t3 to t4) ( (Time tx), the decorative pattern in the reach state is stopped, the result is notified, and the effect is ended (time t5). In addition, when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is not detected within the preset operation effective period of the operation button 410 (time t1 to t2), the sword ornament 5001 is in the final form when the operation effective period ends (first time). It may be configured such that the shape and the aura member in the two-sword sword state are transformed at once and the state is changed. Further, the state change timing from the first sword cutting state to the second sword cutting state is changed according to the operation of the operation button 410 by the player, that is, the first sword cutting state is changed to the second sword cutting state after a certain time has elapsed. You may Further, when the operation of the sword decoration 5001 by the player is not detected within the preset operation effective period of the sword decoration 5001 (time t3 to t4), the sword decoration 5001 is set to the second state when the operation effective period ends. It is returned from the sword removal state to the sword removal state.

In the modification 1, the state change timing of the sword decoration 5001 is determined by the operation of the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 by the player. The start timing of the sword operation of the sword decoration 5001 is determined by the operation of the operation button 410 (time ty), and the start timing of the sword operation of the sword decoration 5001 is determined by the operation of the sword decoration 5001 (time tx). In this way, the sword decoration 5001 is moved in reverse (sword-extracting operation and sword-cutting operation) depending on which operation means, the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001, is to be operated. The periods (time t1 to t2 and time t3 to t4) are provided so as not to overlap. Therefore, even if the other operating means is operated during the operation valid period of the one operating means, it becomes invalid.

Thus, in the first modification, the state change of the sword decoration 5001 is started based on the operation of the operation button 410 by the player. Therefore, by the operation of the operation button 410 by the player, the form (final form) when the sword decoration body 5001 functions as the operating means is determined (for example, the sword decoration body 5001 is deformed and the state is changed to a form with an aura member). The second sword state) can be displayed. Thereby, the operation value of the operation button 410 can be further increased, and the player's motivation for operation can be increased.

In addition, based on the operation of the operation button 410 by the player, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, effect images (FIG. 292 (F1) to (F3)→FIG. 293) corresponding to the deformation and state change of the sword decoration 5001 are displayed. Since (G1) and (G2) are displayed, it is possible to further enhance the operation value of the operation button 410 and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

(Modified example 2-stage aura extraction using operation buttons)
In the following, referring to FIGS. 295 to 299, based on the modification 1, the appearance degree of the aura member 5035 in the form with the aura member of the sword decoration body 5001, specifically, the aura member 5035 combined with the blade portion 5011. A case will be described in which the degree (aura level) is changed according to the number of times the player operates the operation button 410. 295 to 299 are examples of effect transition diagrams of the blade extraction effect of the second modification. It should be noted that description of effects similar to those described above will be appropriately omitted.

The aura level provided here has 0 to 3 stages. The aura level 0 indicates the completely accommodated state (FIG. 284(A)) in which the aura member 5035 is not visually recognized by the player. In the aura level 3, the aura member 5035 is united with the blade portion 5011 in the second sword cutting state while maintaining the relative positional relationship in the sword storage state, so that the player can fully see the state (Fig. 284(B)). The aura level 1 indicates a 1/3 appearance state in which the aura member 5035 appears in a manner visible to the player by 1/3 of the complete appearance state. The aura level 2 indicates the 2/3 appearance state in which the aura member 5035 appears so that it can be visually recognized by the player by 2/3 of the full appearance state.

In this case, there are no production patterns for preparation for transition to preparation for excision and neither production effects for production for preparation for excision of sword ((Z1) to (Z3)→(H1) and (H2) in the figure) and no preparation for transition to preparation for excision. In the case where the sword main production is performed, the sword decoration 5001 becomes the final form (the form with the aura member in the fully-appearing state (aura level 3)) by one operation of the operation button 410 (in the figure). (Z1) to (Z3)→(I1) and (I2)→(G1) to (G4)), the operation button 410 is required to be operated a plurality of times, and the aura level of the sword ornament 5001 changes stepwise. The effect pattern ((Z1) to (Z3)→(J1) to (I2)→(G1) to (G4) in the figure) to be displayed, the screen transition of the effect display device 1600, the state transition of the operation button 410, and the sword ornament. The operation transition of 5001 will be described.

In Modification 1 described above, the final form (form at the time of operation) of the sword decoration 5001 is found by operating the operation button 410 once, but in Modification 2, operation of the operation button 410 is performed stepwise by a plurality of operations. It is characterized in that the aura member 5035 is combined with the blade portion 5011 to perform a step operation effect of changing the aura level of the sword decoration body 5001.

First, in the production pattern in which neither the sword preparation preparation transition production is performed nor the sword main production is performed, that is, the sword decoration 5001 does not change its state even when the operation button 410 is operated, the modification pattern shown in FIG. (Y1) to (Y3)→follow the same effect transition as in FIG. 292(E1)(E2) (FIG. 295(Z1) to (Z3)→FIG. 296(H1) and (H2)).

In addition, when there is no sword preparation preparation effect, but the sword main effect is performed, the sword decoration 5001 is in the final form (a complete appearance state (aura level 3) with aura member) by one operation of the operation button 410. ), the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected after the same effects as those in the above-described modified example 1 of FIGS. 291 (Y1) to (Y3) (FIGS. 295 (Z1) to (Z3)). Then, the state of the sword decoration 5001 changes from the sword state to the second sword state. At this time, the aura member 5035 of the sword decoration body 5001 is united with the sword body portion 5011 while maintaining the relative positional relationship with the sword body portion 5011 in the sword storage state, and when the sword decoration body 5001 is in the second sword cutting state, it completely appears. The state (aura level 3) is reached (Fig. 296 (I1)). The sword decoration 5001 of Modification 1 described above is different in that the aura member-attached form is composed of an aura member 5030 and Modification 2 is composed of an aura member 5035, but other effects are the same as those of Modification 1 described above. 292(F1)(F2)→The same effect transition as in FIG. 293 is followed (FIG. 296(I1)(I2)→FIG. 293(G1) to (G4)).

Further, in the case where there is no sword preparation preparation effect, but the sword main effect is performed, the operation button 410 is required to be operated a plurality of times and the aura level of the sword ornament 5001 changes stepwise. The same effect transition as before is followed up to the operation of the operation button 410 for the first time (FIGS. 295 (Z1) to (Z3)), but the sword decoration 5001 after the first operation is changed from the sword state to the second sword state. However, the aura member 5035 is in a completely accommodated state (aura level 0) invisible to the player. The image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at this time is the same image as FIG. 296 (I1) described above (FIG. 297 (J1)).

Then, the operation effect of the operation button 410 for the second time is started. When the operation valid period of the operation button 410 starts, an operation promotion image prompting the player to operate the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the operation promotion effect in which the operation button 410 to be operated is illuminated and decorated. Is performed (FIG. 297 (J2)). Then, when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the following effect is performed according to preset aura levels 0 to 3.

First, when the aura level to be set is “0” (that is, in the case of no aura member form), the aura member 5035 maintains the completely housed state even if the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, and the effect is produced. In the display area of the display device 1600, the step operation effect is terminated (after that, there is no operation request for the operation button 410), and the fact that the sword effect corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 in the second sword state (Iaido effect) is returned is notified. An image (here, the white letters of "Iza" on the blackout screen) is displayed (Fig. 297 (J3)). Thereafter, the sword decoration 5001 is in a form without an aura member, and follows the same production transition as in FIG. 292 (F2) → FIG. 293 of the above-described modification 1 in the production mode (color, sound, etc.) according to the aura level 0. (FIG. 297 (J4)→FIG. 293 (G1) to (G4)).

On the other hand, when the set aura level is any of "1" to "3", when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the aura member 5035 changes from the completely accommodated state to the 1/3 appearance state. Become. Then, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the image showing the aura level 1 is displayed (FIG. 297 (J5)). At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 is light-emitting decorated with green indicating aura level 1.

Then, the operation effect of the operation button 410 for the third time is started. When the operation valid period of the operation button 410 starts, an operation promotion image prompting the player to operate the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the operation promotion effect in which the operation button 410 to be operated is illuminated and decorated. Is done. At this time, an image showing the aura level 1 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 298 (K1)). The emission color of the operation button 410 at this time may be green indicating aura level 1. Then, when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the following effect is performed according to the preset aura level.

When the aura level is “1”, the aura member 5035 maintains the 1/3 appearance state even when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, and the stage operation effect is ended in the display area of the effect display device 1600 ( After this, the operation button 410 is not requested to be operated), and an image notifying that the sword effect (Iai effect) corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 in the second sword state will be returned (here, "black" is displayed on the blackout screen). A white character) is displayed, and an image showing aura level 1 is displayed (FIG. 298 (K2)). After that, the sword decoration 5001 is in a form with an aura member in a 1/3 appearance state, and in the rendering mode (color, sound, etc.) according to the aura level 1, FIG. 292 (F2) of FIG. The same effect transition is followed (FIG. 298 (K3)→FIG. 293 (G1) to (G4)). At this time, the image showing the aura level 1 is always displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

When the aura level is "2" or "3", when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the aura member 5035 changes from the 1/3 appearance state to the 2/3 appearance state. Then, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the image showing the aura level 2 is displayed (FIG. 298 (K4)). At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 is light-emitted and decorated in red indicating aura level 2.

Next, the operation effect of the operation button 410 for the fourth time is started. When the operation valid period of the operation button 410 starts, an operation promotion image that prompts the player to operate the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 together with the image indicating the aura level 2, and the operation button 410 to be operated is displayed. An operation promotion effect that is illuminated is performed (FIG. 298 (K5)). The emission color of the operation button 410 at this time may be red indicating aura level 2. Then, when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the following effect is performed according to the preset aura level.

When the aura level is “2”, the aura member 5035 maintains the 2/3 appearance state even when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, and the stage operation effect is ended in the display area of the effect display device 1600. (No further operation request for the operation button 410 is made), and an image notifying that the sword decoration (Iai production) corresponding to the sword decorative body 5001 in the second sword state is returned (here, “Iza” is displayed on the blackout screen). The white character) is displayed, and an image showing the aura level is displayed (FIG. 299 (M1)). After that, the sword ornament 5001 is in the form with the aura member in the 2/3 appearance state, and in the rendering mode (color, sound, etc.) according to the aura level 2, FIG. 292 (F2) of FIG. The same effect transition is followed (FIG. 299 (M1)→FIG. 293 (G1) to (G4)). At this time, an image showing the aura level 2 is always displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

When the aura level is "3" and the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the aura member 5035 changes from the 2/3 appearance state to the complete appearance state. Then, in the display area of effect display device 1600, an image showing aura level 3 (MAX) is displayed (FIG. 299 (L1)). At this time, the sword decoration 5001 is illuminated and decorated in a rainbow color indicating aura level 3. Then, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the step operation effect is ended (from then on, there is no operation request for the operation button 410), and the sword effect corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 in the second sword removal state (Iaido effect) is obtained. An image notifying that the user is returning (here, the white character “Iza” is displayed on the blackout screen) is displayed, and an image indicating the aura level 3 is displayed (FIG. 299 (L2)). After that, the sword decoration 5001 is in a form with an aura member in a fully-appearing state, and in the effect mode (color, sound, etc.) according to the aura level 3, the same as in FIG. 292 (F2)→FIG. Follow the production transition (FIG. 299 (L3)→FIG. 293 (G1) to (G4)). At this time, an image showing the aura level 3 is always displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

In the above description, the degree of uniting the aura member 5035 with the blade portion 5011 is changed at each operation timing when the aura level is increased to expand the range visually recognized by the player (increasing the appearance degree). Not limited to Even if the aura level rises, the aura that has been confirmed when the aura level is confirmed (specifically, when the white character of "Iza" is displayed on the blackout screen) without increasing the appearance degree of the aura member 5035. Stock type coalescence may be performed in which the aura member 5035 is merged with the blade portion 5011 at a stretch so that the appearance degree according to the level is achieved. Further, the target for gradually increasing the appearance degree is not limited to the aura member 5035, but may be the sword portion 5010 (sword blade portion 5011). For example, the sword part 5010 (sword part 5011) may be changed in stages from the first sword extraction state to the second sword extraction state.

As described above, in Modification 2, since the sword ornament 5001 functioning as the operating means is in the movable state, the player is requested to operate the other non-movable operation button 410, which is a surprising novelty. It is possible to provide various operation effects, and it is possible to further enhance the interest of the game as compared with the first modification. Further, since the player is given a plurality of operation opportunities to gradually develop the production, it is possible to impress the player with a great involvement in the production and prevent the interest in the production from being interrupted. be able to. Further, the confirmed aura level is notified so that it can be recognized even in the subsequent production, so that the player can feel the afterglow of the operational production.

(Another effect pattern 1 using the sword ornament 5001)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 300 to 302, another reach effect using the above-described sword ornament 5001 will be described. 300 to 302 are diagrams for explaining screen transitions of the effect display device 1600 and operation transitions of the sword ornament 5001 in the princess reach effect. Here, the following points are mainly different from the above-mentioned sword ornament 5001. First, the sword decoration body 5001 in the sword-storing state functions as an operation means, and detects the sword removal operation by the player. Secondly, the sheath 5020 provided in the door frame 3 is configured to be movable in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and the sword decoration 5001 in the second sword cutting state is the same as that of the effect display device 1600. It can operate up to the center of the front.

When the changing pattern forms the reach state, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the variable display of the three decorative patterns becomes the reach state (FIG. 300 (A1)), and the start image of the princess reach is displayed (FIG. 300 (A2)). Here, above the display area of the effect display device 1600, a specific decorative member SDY (lens accessory) that can be moved in the vertical direction is provided.
In a normal state, the specific decoration member SDY does not overlap with the display area of the effect display device 1600 in a front view, and a part of the blind is stationary above the display area in a state (initial state) visible to the player. There is. Further, at this time, the sword decoration 5001 is in a sword storage state.

In the princess reach production, after the image in which the princess is heading behind the blind is displayed (FIG. 300 (A3)), the operation production suggestion image suggesting the operation production is displayed (FIG. 300 (B1)). Then, the operation effect of the sword ornament 5001 is started, and the operation valid period for accepting the operation of the sword ornament 5001 starts, and the player is urged to perform the sword operation of the sword ornament 5001 in the display area of the effect display device 1600. An operation promotion image and a gauge indicating the effective operation period are displayed (FIG. 301(B2)). At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 and the specific decoration member SDY can be moved in small increments in the vertical direction from the time when the operation effect suggestion image is displayed until the time when the operation promotion image and the gauge indicating the operation effective period are displayed. Good. Then, when the player's sword removal operation is detected, an effect is produced according to a preset development pattern or end pattern.

The sword removal operation performed by the player refers to an operation of pulling out the blade portion 5011 from the sheath portion 5020 by the player holding the handle portion 5012 of the sword decoration body 5001 in a stored state and lifting the sword portion 5010 upward. When the sword decoration 5001 is changed from the sword storage state to the second sword removal state, the sword removal operation by the player is detected, and a detection notification operation is performed to notify the player of the detection. The detection notification operation may be an operation such as movement or vibration of the sword portion 5010 (or the handle portion 5012) that moves up and down, a motion different from the sword pulling operation of the player through the handle portion 5012 grasped by the player. Good. Further, the detection notification operation is performed for a certain period of time after the operation is detected, and the operation can be visually recognized even if the player releases the handle 5012. For this reason, the player can visually confirm the operation detection, so that unnecessary contact with the sword decoration 5001 (re-grasping for confirmation of detection, etc.) can be reduced to prevent the movable body from being damaged or damaged. You can

The aura member 5030 (5035) does not appear in the sword removal operation performed by the player here, but the aura member 5030 (5035) appears visibly from the player when the player performs the sword removal operation, depending on the degree of expectation. You may do it.

In the case where the end pattern is performed, when the sword removal operation by the player is detected, the specific decoration member SDY does not overlap the display area of the effect display device 1600 and is stationary above the display area (initial state). The state) is maintained, and a screen indicating the end of the operation effect by the sword decoration 5001 is displayed (FIG. 301 (C1)). Then, the decorative design is stopped and displayed in the disengagement mode “767” (FIG. 301 (C2)). At this time, the sword decoration 5001 is returned to the sword storage state at the timing of notifying the stop result of FIG. 301(C2), but is not limited to this, and is returned to the sword storage state at the timing of ending the detection notification operation. You may do it.

On the other hand, in the case where the development pattern is performed, when the sword removal operation by the player is detected, the specific decoration member SDY (shadow product) is located in the center of the front surface (below the display area) overlapping the display area of the effect display device 1600. The suspended display area can be dropped and moved so that it can be visually recognized (all fall state) (FIG. 301 (D1)), and then the shadow of the princess is projected on the display area of the effect display device 1600. Reference numeral 5001 maintains the second sword removal state (FIG. 301 (D2)) At this time, a plurality of patterns of the shadow of the princess displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 may be provided, for example, By changing the shadow color, the size of the shadow, and the comment that is displayed after that, it is possible to suggest the expectation level of the lottery result by Hime Reach (the expectation level of winning, the gaming profit at the time of winning, etc.). ..

Then, after the sword decoration 5001 is brought into the second sword removal state by the player's sword removal operation, that is, when a predetermined period has elapsed since the shadow of the princess was projected on the display area of the effect display device 1600, the second sword removal state The sword decoration 5001 moves to the center in the front left-right direction of the display area of the effect display device 1600 when the sheath 5020 provided on the door frame 3 is moved (FIG. 301 (D3)). Then, when the sword decoration 5001 reaches the center position on the front surface of the display area of the effect display device 1600, the specific decoration member SDY returns from the completely dropped state to the initial state, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 in which the visibility is good is displayed. An image of a surprised princess is displayed after the screen is removed (Fig. 302 (D4)). After that, the sword decoration 5001 returns to the position where the original sword removal operation was performed again, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, when the result of the variable display this time is a hit, the sword decoration is notified together with the smiling princess. An image is displayed (FIGS. 302 (E1) and (E2)), and an image for notifying the princess is displayed together with the sad princess (FIGS. 302 (F1) and (F2)).

It should be noted that when the player's removal of the sword is detected, the detection notification operation is performed as described above. However, the movable effect in which the sword decoration 5001 moves to the center in the front left and right direction of the display area of the effect display device 1600. When the player is unable to move because he is grasping the game, an announcement or display such as "Please release the sword" is displayed. Although the production itself proceeds even if the player does not stop gripping the sword decoration 5001, the sword decoration 5001 can be operated by the player at the left-right movable production timing of the sword decoration 5001 (FIG. 301 (D3)). If it is held at the position where it was performed, it will cause a delay in the left-right movable effect. However, regardless of whether or not the left-right movable effect of the sword decoration body 5001 is executed, the effect executed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and the drop movable effect of the specific decorative member SDY (lens accessory) are advanced. Since it is configured to do so, the game progress will not be stagnant. It should be noted that the sword decoration 5001 may be configured to immediately perform a movable effect in the left-right direction when the player releases the holding of the sword decoration 5001 or not to perform a movable effect. May be.

In this way, in the princess reach production, the player removes the sword decoration 5001 (vertical movement) to drop and move the specific decorative member SDY that suggests the operation production (operation effective) of the sword decoration 5001. At the same time, the sword decoration 5001 itself operated outside the display area of the effect display device 1600 moves the sheath 5020 provided on the door frame 3 in the forward direction (to the operation position). It can be moved to the left). That is, based on the sword removal operation by the player, the sword decoration 5001 itself can be moved to an operation position different from the operation position where the sword removal operation is performed, which increases the operation value of the player and the operation motivation of the player. Can be suppressed. In addition, one operation means is configured to be operable in a stepwise different manner (up and down directions during operation, left and right directions after operation) by an operation by the player, thus providing an effect using a plurality of movable modes. Therefore, the operation value of the operating means can be increased as compared with the conventional operating means having only one movable mode. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, the left and right movable effects of the sword decoration body 5001 are effected for the purpose of effecting an integrated effect with the effect image performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and the specific decorative member SDY (lens accessory). Although the operation position outside the display area of the device 1600 is displaced to the operation position in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after the sword decoration 5001 is positioned in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600, the sword decoration operation is performed, and then the sword decoration 5001 is moved so as to be positioned outside the display area of the effect display device 1600. In addition, a left-right movable effect may be performed by displacing to the left (the left end of the frame). Further, since the player's operation of the sword decoration 5001 of this example is an up-down operation (a sword extraction operation of pulling up the sword portion 5011 from below), the sword decoration 5001 performed after the operation based on the operation. In the movable effect, it is desirable that the sword decoration 5001 operates in a direction (horizontal direction or the like as in this example) different from the operation direction (here, the vertical direction) when the player operates.

In addition, when a player's sword removal operation is detected, a detection notification operation is performed to notify the player of the detection via the operation section (sword section 5010) operated by the player, so that the player can accurately determine the operation end timing. Can be judged. Further, the detection notification operation is performed for a certain period of time so that the player can visually check it, so that it is possible to suppress unnecessary contact such as touching the operation portion again for detection confirmation. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from continuing the operation, delaying the subsequent moving effect of the sword decoration body 5001, and damaging the movable body due to unnecessary contact. Furthermore, if the movable effect cannot be executed due to the contact with the sword ornament 5001 even after the detection notification operation, a warning such as an announcement is given to the player to release the hand, and the operation is required during the operation effective period. Even after the detection of the detection notification operation, the operation means is prohibited from touching, so that the operation value of the operation means can be enhanced.

(Another effect pattern 2 using the sword ornament 5001)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 303 to 305, another reach effect using the above-described sword ornament 5001 will be described. 303 to 305 are diagrams for explaining screen transitions of the effect display device 1600, reach transitions of the operation buttons 410, and operation transitions of the sword ornament 5001 in the reach effect including the operation effects of the operation buttons 410 used for multiple purposes. is there. Here, as an operation effect of the operation button 410, a pattern ((A) (B)→N in the figure) in which an expectation suggesting effect that suggests the degree of expectation that a variation in execution is a big hit is performed, and the operation of the operation button 410. A pattern ((A) (B)→M in the figure) in which the suggestion and development of the operation effect of the sword decoration 5001 is performed will be described as the effect.

In the reach effect here, when the variable display of the three decorative symbols is in the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 303(A)), first, the operation valid period for accepting the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is. The operation promotion effect that is started and urges the player to press the operation button 410 is performed (FIG. 303(B)). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, the image of the operation means (operation button 410) to be operated and the operation valid period are displayed, and the operation button 410 to be operated is illuminated and decorated. At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 maintains the sword storage state. Then, when a pressing operation on the operation button 410 by the player is detected, an effect is produced according to an effect pattern set in advance.

First, in the pattern in which the expectation suggestion effect is performed by the pressing operation of the operation button 410, when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, an effect image is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. After that (FIG. 303 (N1)), an image suggesting the jackpot expectation degree is displayed (FIG. 304 (N2)). After that, the result of the current variation display (big hit, out) is reported (FIG. 304 (N3) or (N4)). Note that the look-ahead effect may be performed instead of the expectation suggesting effect for the variable display being executed, and, for example, it is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 instead of the image showing the expectation (FIG. 304 (N2)). You may make a character which changes the pending display displayed appear.

Further, in a pattern in which the operation effect of the sword ornament 5001 is suggested and developed by the pressing operation of the operation button 410, when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed. (M1) in FIG. 303, in which an effect image indicating that an operation effect that requires a sword operation of the sword decoration 5001 is performed is displayed. Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a start image of the operation effect of the sword ornament 5001 (here, the message of the title "extraction chance" and the operation explanation "please give me a sword") is displayed. At the same time, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword state to the second sword state. The sword decoration body 5001 at this time is in a form with an aura member in which the blade portion 5011 is deformed by the maximum operation of the aura member 5030 (FIG. 305 (M2)). Then, when a predetermined period elapses in the second sword cutting state and the operation effective period of the sword decoration body 5001 starts, the specific decoration member SDY (lens accessory) is moved in small increments in the vertical direction in the initial state to produce the effect. In the display area of the display device 1600, an operation promotion image that prompts the player to put a sword on the sword decoration 5001 and a gauge that indicates the operation valid period are displayed (FIG. 305 (M3)). Then, when the player's operation of putting a sword is detected, an effect based on the result of the variable display this time is performed.

When the result of the variable display this time is a big hit, when the player's sword operation is detected, the specific decoration member SDY (lens accessory) is dropped and moved so as to be in a full fall state from the initial state ( FIG. 305 (M4)). Next, when the specific decoration member SDY (shelter material) is returned to the initial state again, a big hit is notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600, in which the overlap with the specific decoration member SDY (shelter material) has been canceled. An image (decorative pattern stop mode “777”, “superb message”) is displayed (FIG. 305 (M5)). On the other hand, when the result of the variable display this time is out of alignment, when the player's operation of putting a sword is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (braid accessory) is only stopped in small increments in the initial state. In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image (stopping pattern “767” of the decorative pattern) for notifying the deviation is displayed (FIG. 305 (M6)).

In this way, by pressing the operation button 410, various effects such as suggesting the degree of expectation and developing the operation effect of other operation means (sword decoration 5001) are possible, and the player can operate the operation button 410. It is not possible to specify the subsequent development at the time of operating. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the operation of the operation button 410, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the willingness to operate and a decrease in the interest in the game, which may be caused by the monotonous effect after the operation.

Further, in a series of reach effects, different operation modes (pressing operation and sword operation) between the first operation (pressing operation button 410) and the second operation (storing operation of sword decoration 5001) are the first operation. The player is requested based on the operation (pressing operation button 410). Therefore, the player's interest in participating in the operation can be increased, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game, which may be caused by a monotonous operation that does not look good.

In this example, the operation button 410 is used as an effective operation means as the first operation opportunity, and the second operation opportunity (the sword operation of the sword ornament 5001) is given based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410. However, it is not limited to this. The sword operation of the sword decoration 5001 may be an effective operation as the first operation opportunity. In this case, the operating means that is effective for the second operation opportunity is targeted at the sword decoration body 5001 rather than at the operation button 410 having a relatively lower degree of expectation than the first-time sword decoration body 5001. Is desirable.

(Another effect pattern 3 using the sword ornament 5001)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 306 to 310, another reach effect using the sword decoration body 5001 described above will be described. 306 to 310 are diagrams for explaining screen transitions of the effect display device 1600 in the reach effect, state transitions of the operation buttons 410, and operation transitions of the sword ornament 5001. Here, a pattern ((A) (B1) (B2)→O in the drawing) that becomes a big hit when the specific decorative member SDY (braid accessory) is moved based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, and the operation button 410. Even if the specific decoration member SDY (shadow curtain) is not moved based on the pressing operation of the item and is displayed in the detached state, the symbol display of the detached state is changed again and the player is given an operation opportunity again. The pattern ((A) (B1) (B2) in the figure → (P1) to (P4) → Q when the operation opportunity of the sword decoration 5001 is given/R when the operation opportunity of the operation button 410 is given) Will be described.

In the reach effect here, when the variable display of the three decorative symbols is in the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 306(A)), first, the start image of the operation effect of the operation button 410 (here, the start image). , "A message that the movable body cannot be moved with a single blow of the button" is displayed (FIG. 306(B)), and then the operation valid period for accepting the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is started, and the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is started. A prompting operation production is performed (FIG. 306(C)). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, the image of the operation means (operation button 410) to be operated, the number of operations and the operation valid period are displayed, and the operation button 410 to be operated is illuminated and decorated. At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 maintains the sword storage state. Then, when a pressing operation on the operation button 410 by the player is detected, an effect is produced according to an effect pattern set in advance. The operation of pressing the operation button 410 is not limited to one shot (one shot), and may be repeated hits (a plurality of shots). Further, in order that the player can easily grasp the object (movable body) that is moved by the operation, the specific decorative member SDY (lens accessory) is vertically moved in small increments in the initial state during the effective operation period of the operation button 410. You may do it. Further, when the sword decoration 5001 is to be operated later, the sword decoration 5001 may be changed from the sword storage state to the second sword removal state at this point.

In a pattern in which the specific decoration member SDY (shadow product) moves and becomes a big hit, when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the specific decoration member SDY (shadow product) is completely dropped from the initial state. It is dropped and moved so as to become (Fig. 307 (O1)). Next, when the specific decoration member SDY is returned to the initial state again, an image for notifying the big hit (a decorative pattern The stop mode “777” and “superb message” are displayed (FIG. 307 (O2)). At this time, the operation button 410 may be vibrated.

In a pattern in which the specific decorative member SDY (serving part) does not move, when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (serving part) is only stopped in small steps and can be dropped. Not done. Then, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a decorative pattern in a shift mode (“767”) is displayed in a swinging manner in the center of the screen (FIG. 308 (P1). The decorative pattern is expanded and displayed in a pattern (FIG. 308 (P2)) stopped and displayed in the detached state (“767”), or a revival pattern in which the reach state is restored again.

In the revival pattern, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, from the swing display of the decorative pattern in the outlying manner of FIG. (Samurai image) is inserted (FIG. 308 (P3)), the decorative pattern is again in the reach state and is reduced and displayed in the upper right of the screen, and at the center of the screen, either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 is operated. An operation validity suggestion image (a face with the eyes of the samurai of the teammate closed) is displayed (FIG. 308 (P4)). Then, with the lapse of time, the displayed samurai's eyes are enlarged and displayed, and the specific decoration member SDY (lens accessory) is moved in small increments in the vertical direction in the initial state (FIG. 308 (P5)). As a result, the player increases his/her expectation that an effect using the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) will be performed. Further, at this time, the operation button 410 may be lighted and decorated in a high-speed blinking mode, or the sword decoration body 5001 may be moved up and down by changing from the sword storage state to the first sword removal state. Then, the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 functions as an effective operation means according to the effect pattern to be set, and the specific decoration member SDY based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the sword operation of the sword decoration 5001. The production of (sills) is performed. The pattern in which the operation button 410 is the operation target is set to have a lower degree of expectation than the pattern in which the sword decoration 5001 is the operation target.

When the operation button 410 is used as the operation means, an image of sweat perspiration on the forehead of the samurai (operation button confirmation image) of the operation effective suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed, and the operation button is displayed. 410 is illuminated and decorated (FIG. 309 (R1)). Then, while the specific decorative member SDY (sliding material) continues to move in small steps, and the operation button 410 is illuminated and decorated, the operation valid period of the operation button 410 is started, and the operation of pressing the operation button 410 is prompted. A promotion effect is performed (FIG. 309 (R2)). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image of the operation means (operation button 410) to be operated, the number of operations, and the operation valid period are displayed. Here, when the operation button 410 is operated a necessary number of times, it is not illuminated and decorated.

Then, when the result of the variable display is a big hit, when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (shelter material) is dropped and movable from the initial state to the all-drop state. (FIG. 309 (R3)). At this time, the decorative pattern displayed in the upper right of the screen of the display area of the effect display device 1600 is stopped and displayed in the lower right of the screen so that the player can visually recognize it. Note that, similarly to the above (FIG. 305 (M4)), it may be difficult for the player to grasp the aspect of the decorative symbol at this point. Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the screen is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 in which the specific decoration member SDY (shadow product) is returned from the completely dropped state to the initial state again and the overlap with the specific decoration member SDY (shadow product) is released. An image (a message of a decorative pattern stop mode "777", "superb") informing the big hit is displayed in the center (Fig. 309 (R4)).

On the other hand, when the result of the variable display is out of order, when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the small-sized movability of the specific decorative member SDY (lens accessory) is stopped, and the effect display device 1600. In the display area, a decorative pattern in a shift mode (“767”) is stopped and displayed in the center of the screen (FIG. 309 (R5)).

When the sword ornament 5001 is used as the operation means, an image in which the samurai who closed the eyes of the operation effective suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 opens his eyes and the eye light becomes sharp (sword ornament (Confirmed image) is displayed, and the sword decoration 5001 is changed from the sword storage state to the second sword removal state with the aura member attached (FIG. 310 (Q1)). At this time, the sword decoration 5001 may be light-emitted. The player can understand from the image in the display area that the sword decoration 5001 is operable, not the operation button 410. At this point, the sword decoration 5001 has an aura member or not. Can be grasped by actually looking at the sword ornament 5001. Next, when the specific decorative member SDY (sliding material) is moved in small steps, a predetermined period elapses in the second sword cutting state, and when the operation effective period of the sword decoration 5001 starts, the display of the effect display device 1600 is displayed. In the area, an operation promotion image prompting the player to operate the sword decoration 5001 and a gauge indicating the operation valid period are displayed (FIG. 310 (Q2)).

Then, when the result of the variable display this time is a big hit, when the player's sword operation is detected, the same effect transition as in the above-described FIG. 309 (R3) and (R4) is followed (FIG. 310 (FIG. 310 ( Q3) and (Q4)). On the other hand, in the case where the variable display result is out of alignment, when the player's sword operation is detected, the same effect transition as in FIG. 309 (R5) described above is followed (FIG. 310 (Q5)).

In this way, the degree of expectation is suggested in accordance with the state of fall of the specific decorative member SDY (shadow material) executed based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, and thus the degree of expectation that is more powerful than the degree of expectation indicated by the image. A suggestion can be provided, and a decrease in the enjoyment of the game can be suppressed. Further, even when the specific decorative member SDY (sliding material) is not dropped and movable based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, the player is given an opportunity to operate either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 again. To be done. Since the degree of expectation can also be suggested by the operation means to which the operation opportunity is given, it is possible to suppress a decrease in amusement of the game, which may be caused by a monotonous operation effect which does not look good.

It should be noted that, although FIG. 300 to FIG. 310 described above exemplify three example production patterns for reach production using the sword decoration 5001, various production modes may be combined. As a result, it is possible to provide a wide variety of effects and further enhance the enjoyment of the game.

(Pseudo continuous production using a sword decoration)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 311 to 325, a pseudo continuous effect using the sword decoration body 5001 in which the form is changed step by step according to the number of times of the pseudo continuous change (re-change) will be described. The pseudo-relational effect is an effect of temporarily stopping the variable display of the decorative pattern and re-changing, and is a character that is performed corresponding to the pseudo-repetitive fluctuation together with the pseudo-repetitive fluctuation in which the temporary stop and the re-variation are repeated once or a plurality of times. And the like. Here, the above-mentioned temporary stop indicates a state in which the fluctuation display appears as if it has stopped, but in actuality it slightly fluctuates and continues the fluctuation. In the present example, when the main control board 1310 selects a variation pattern for performing pseudo continuous variation (re-variation), the pseudo continuous production of the production pattern that can be selected by lottery of the production content by the peripheral control board 1510 will be described below. Explained.

(Form of sword decoration)
First, the form of the sword decoration 5001 of this example will be described with reference to FIG. The sword decoration body 5001 described above is provided in two types, an aura member-attached form and an aura member-less form, but here, the sword part 5010 is deformed by the handle 5012 being further operated. There are two types.

FIG. 311 is a diagram illustrating a form of a sword decoration 5001 used for the pseudo-relational effect. The sword ornament 5001 here is provided so that the shape can be changed in two stages by the deformation of the handle 5012, and is provided inside the sheath 5020 of the door frame 3 from the left and right sides of the sheath 5020 to the player. It is characterized by having an aura member 5040 that appears to be visible. The aura member 5040 is provided inside the sheath 5020 of the door frame 3 similarly to the aura member 5035 described above, but its operation mode is movable in the left-right direction like the aura member 5030 described above. 311(A)-(D) is a figure which shows the kind (form change) of the form of the sword decoration 5001 in a sword storage state, and shows a stage 0 form-stage 3 form in order. The sword decoration 5001 is in any one of the stage 0 form to the stage 3 form depending on the effect.

As shown in FIG. 311(A), the stage 0 form is a form in the normal state similar to the above-mentioned FIG. 281(A) and FIG. The morphology is shown. As shown in FIG. 311B, the stage 1 form shows a form in which the aura member 5040 appears outside the side surface of the sheath portion 5012 by the operation of the aura member 5040 from the stage 0 form. As shown in FIG. 311(C), the stage 2 form is a form in which the handle portion 5012 is spread and moved so as to be divided into two parts from the center to the left and right, and the first decoration part 5012a appears from the inside. Show. As shown in FIG. 311(D), in the stage 3 form, the second decorative portion 5012b is moved upward from the inside of the handle 5012 in the stage 2 form to form an integral decoration with the first decorative portion 5012a. The morphology is shown. The stage 1 form to the stage 3 form here enable the form change without making the sword decoration body 5001 into the second extracted sword state. Furthermore, since the sword portion 5010 that can accept an operation by the player as the operation portion of the operation means and the inactive sheath portion 5020 work together to form an integrated ornament, a more powerful operation means is provided. You can

(Pseudo continuous production example)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 312 to 325, an example of the effect transition of the effect pattern for performing the pseudo continuous effect will be described. First, the types of effect patterns will be described with reference to FIG. 320. FIG. 320 is a diagram illustrating the types of effect patterns that can be selected based on the variation patterns.

As shown in FIG. 320A, the main control board 1310 causes the sword LV1 weak variation pattern, the sword LV1 strong variation pattern, the sword LV2 weak variation pattern, the sword LV2 strong variation pattern, the sword LV3 weak variation pattern, and the sword LV3 strong variation pattern. When any one of the six types of variation patterns is selected, the pseudo continuous effect is performed. The production pattern for performing the pseudo continuous production is a basic production pattern (sword LV1 weak production pattern, sword LV1 strong production pattern, sword LV2 weak production pattern, sword LV2 strong production pattern, sword LV3 weak corresponding to each of six types of variation patterns. In addition to the effect pattern and sword LV3 strong effect pattern), specific effect patterns (pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern, pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern, and pseudo revival sword LV1 effect pattern) are provided. When the variation pattern is the sword LV1 weak variation pattern (sword LV1 strong variation pattern), the sword LV1 weak effect pattern or the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern (sword LV1 strong effect pattern or pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern) is selected, When the variation pattern is the sword LV2 weak variation pattern (sword LV2 strong variation pattern), the sword LV2 weak production pattern (sword LV2 strong production pattern) is selected, and the variation pattern is the sword LV3 weak variation pattern (sword LV3 strong variation pattern). ), one of the sword LV3 weak effect pattern, the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern and the pseudo revival sword LV1 effect pattern (sword LV3 strong effect pattern, pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern and pseudo revival sword LV1 effect pattern). Selected.

In the effect pattern, the number of times (1 to 3 times) the pseudo-continuous change (re-change) is continued, whether or not the sword ornament 5001 is given an operation opportunity according to the number of times, and the operation opportunity is given. The mode of the specific decoration member SDY (shadow product) is set (see FIG. 320(B)). The effect pattern names “LV1” to “LV3” correspond to the number of times 1 to 3 times of continuous pseudo-variation (re-variation). In addition, “weak” and “strong” correspond to the drop position (semi-drop, full drop) in the drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (blend material). Further, the "pseudo sword LV1" is given a chance to select the sword ornament 5001 for the first time in a pseudo-speech variation (re-variation), and the player chooses not to operate it so that the pseudo-series variation (re-fluctuation) continues. It is a production that can acquire. In addition, the "pseudo resurrection sword LV1" follows the same production transition as the sword LV1 weak production pattern of the basic production pattern that gives the opportunity to operate the sword decoration 5001 at the first pseudo-speech variation (re-variation). It is an effect that the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-fluctuation) is performed again after the end of the effect of dropping the special decoration member SDY (blind accessory) based on the first operation opportunity of fluctuation. Details of the effect contents of each effect pattern will be described later.

Here, the basic effect pattern is set to have a higher expectation as the number of times of continuous pseudo-variation (re-variation) continues, that is, as the morphological change of the sword decoration 5001 progresses, and further, the specific decoration member SDY (braid part). The lower the drop position of the object), the higher the degree of expectation is set. However, when the drop position of the specific decoration member SDY (shadow material) is half-fall, and the number of continuous pseudo-variation (re-variation) is 1 It is set so as to have the same degree of expectation as in the case where the falling position of the specific decorative member SDY (blend accessory) is the total fall in the effect pattern with less number of turns. Specifically, the number of continuation times of pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) and the half-fall sword is LV1. The expectation of the LV1 strong effect pattern is 40%, the number of continuation times of the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-fluctuation) is two times, and the expectation of the LV2 weak effect pattern of the half-fall is 40%, the number of continuation times of the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-fluctuation) is two. The expectation of the sword LV2 strong effect pattern of 1 time and full fall is 50%, the number of continuation times of the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-fluctuation) is 3 times, and the expectation of the LV3 weak effect pattern of half drop is 50%, the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-change). (Variation) is repeated 3 times and the expectation of the sword LV3 strong effect pattern for all drops is set to 65%. Further, the specific effect pattern is set such that the degree of expectation is different depending on the selected variation pattern even with the same effect pattern, and the higher the degree of expectation is, the higher the degree of expectation is set. The degree of expectation of the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern that gives the player a selection operation opportunity is 38% and 53% when the selected fluctuation pattern is the sword LV1 weak fluctuation pattern and when it is the sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern, respectively. Becomes
Further, the degree of expectation of the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern is 47% and 74% when the selected variation pattern is the sword LV1 strong variation pattern and the sword LV3 strong variation pattern, respectively. Moreover, after following the same effect transition as the sword LV1 weak effect pattern, the expectation degree of the pseudo revived sword LV1 effect pattern in which the pseudo continuous change (re-change) is restored is set to 100% regardless of the change pattern.

In the following, the pseudo continuous effect of each effect pattern shown in FIG. 320(B) will be described with reference to the effect transition examples shown in FIGS. 312 to 319 and the effect execution timing charts shown in FIGS. 321 to 325. FIG. 312 is a diagram showing an example of the effect transition of the pseudo continuous effect common to all the effect patterns. 313 to 315 are diagrams showing a transition example of the effect of whether or not the operation opportunity of the sword decoration 5001 is given while the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) is performed. In addition, FIG. 316 is a diagram showing a transition example of post-operation production (falling production of the specific decorative member SDY (shadow cast)) of the sword decoration 5001 during pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) common to all production patterns. is there. In addition, FIG. 317 and FIG. 318 are diagrams showing an example of the effect transition that is a feature of the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern and the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern. In addition, FIG. 319 is a diagram showing an example of an effect transition that is a characteristic of the pseudo sword LV1 effect pattern. 321 to 325 are operation execution timing charts of the sword decoration 5001 and the specific decoration member SDY (blind accessory) in the pseudo continuous production, and FIG. 321 shows the sword LV1 weak production pattern (sword LV1 strong production pattern). 322 is a sword LV2 weak effect pattern (sword LV2 strong effect pattern), FIG. 323 is a sword LV3 weak effect pattern (sword LV3 strong effect pattern), and FIG. 324 is a pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern). 325 shows a pseudo revival sword LV1 effect pattern. In the following, a description will be given along with an example of an effect transition in the case where the pseudo continuous effect is executed in the effect before the variable display is started and the reach state is reached.

(Common to all production patterns)
As shown in FIG. 312(A), when the variable display is started, three decorative symbols are variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. At this time, the specific decorative member SDY (lens accessory) does not overlap the display area of the effect display device 1600 in a front view, and a part of the blind is visible to the player above the display area (initial state). ) Is stationary. Further, at this time, the sword decoration 5001 is in a stage 0 form (initial form) in a sword storage state.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 312 (B) and (C), in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a start image indicating the start of the pseudo continuous effect (effect content notification “A big chance if you can defeat 100 bodies” message, samurai). The image that collects the aura) is displayed, suggesting to the player that the pseudo-relational effect will be started. At this time, there is no change in the specific decorative member SDY (lens accessory) and the sword decoration 5001.

Next, as shown in FIG. 312(D), the three decorative symbols that have been variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a pseudo continuous manner, and the player re-varies the decorative symbols. Notify that. Here, among the three decorative designs, the central decorative design is a pseudo-sword design that is not prepared for the left and right decorative designs, specifically, the form of the sword ornament 5001 and the production level (number of pseudo-series variations). By displaying with the pseudo continuous sword pattern of the aspect, the player can easily recognize the re-change of the decorative pattern (start of the pseudo continuous change). At this time, although there is no change in the specific decorative member SDY (sliding material) and the sword ornament 5001, the pseudo-sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is the first pseudo-sequential variation (re-variation). ), a sword image indicating the form (stage 1 form) of the sword decoration 5001 in advance is displayed. In this way, at the time of temporary stop display immediately before the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) starts, the form and effect level (the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations) of the sword ornament 5001 in the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) are notified, so that the player Can grasp the stage of pseudo-link fluctuation (re-fluctuation).

Then, when the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is started, as shown in FIG. 312(E), it is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at the time of the aforementioned FIG. 312(D). The pseudo continuous sword design is enlarged and displayed, and the effect display is moved and displayed toward the sword decoration 5001 so as to act on the sword decoration 5001, and the re-variation of the decoration pattern is displayed. Then, the sword decoration 5001 changes form from the stage 0 form (initial form) to the stage 1 form in which the aura member 5040 becomes visible. The morphological change of the sword decoration 5001 at this time is the timing at which the player's line of sight shifts to the sword decoration 5001 from the effect display in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-change) is started and the sword decoration 5001 is moved and displayed. That is, that is, after the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-change) is started. The shape change timing of the sword decoration 5001 may be before the start of the pseudo continuous change (re-change), for example, at the time of the above-mentioned FIG. The pseudo continuous change (re-change) may be started.

Then, as shown in FIG. 312(F), while the sword image of the pseudo continuous sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is enlarged and displayed, the sword cutting state is changed to the second sword cutting state. The state of the sword decoration 5001 changes from the sword state to the second sword state.

Then, as shown in FIG. 312(G), in the display area of the effect display device 1600, is the sword decoration body 5001 in the second unsheathed state in which the player can store the swords made effective as the operation means? An operation opportunity suggesting image (a samurai image with closed eyes) indicating whether or not the operation opportunity is given to the player is displayed. Subsequent productions include a pattern in which the sword decoration body 5001 is operationally valid (a production pattern with “LV1” attached to the name) and a pattern in which the sword decoration body 5001 is not operationally valid (name). To an effect pattern with "LV2" or "LV3"). In the following, an example of the effect transition will be described in order for 9 kinds of effect patterns.

(Sword LV1 weak production pattern/Sword LV1 strong production pattern)
First, with reference to FIGS. 313 and 316, a sword LV1 weak effect pattern or a sword LV1 strong effect pattern that sets the sword decoration 5001 as an operating means in the first pseudo-continuous change (re-change) is set. An example of the effect transition in that case will be described. When these production patterns are set and the operation opportunity of the sword decoration 5001 is given in the first pseudo continuous variation (re-variation), the display area of the production display device 1600 is displayed in FIG. The operation confirmation image (the image in which the samurai's eyes are open) indicating that the operation opportunity is given is displayed from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in) (FIG. 313 (T1)). Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image (“good opportunity!!” message) indicating that the player is given an operation opportunity for positive operation (FIG. 313 (T2)). .. Then, while the operation effective period of the sword decoration 5001 is generated, an operation promotion effect for promoting the sword operation of the sword decoration 5001 is performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Specifically, the sword image in the second extracted sword state (stage 1 form) same as the sword decoration 5001 is displayed, and an image showing the operation direction and the operation effective period is displayed together with the message "Please put the sword!" (FIG. 313 (T3)). Then, when the player's operation of putting the sword is detected, the expectation notification production is performed by the drop production of the specific decorative member SDY (lens accessory) according to the set production pattern.

Here, in the case where the set effect pattern is the “strong” effect pattern, when the player's sword operation is detected, as shown in FIG. 316 (U1), the specific decorative member SDY (shadow product) ) Is movable from the initial state to the full fall state. Then, the sword decoration body 5001 is returned from the second extraction state to the sword storage state by the player's sword storage operation and is returned to the stage 0 form (initial form). After that, as shown in FIG. 316 (U2), the specific decoration member SDY (shadow curtain) is returned from the completely dropped state to the initial state, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, as shown in FIG. An expectation notification image (“100 killed!”) for notifying the expectation of the variable display result is displayed in a manner corresponding to the start image of the simulated continuous effect shown. Here, the degree of expectation shown by the full drop state is set to be higher than the degree of expectation shown by the half drop state described later. At this time, there is no change in the sword ornament 5001. Here, the expectation notification image is displayed so that the player can recognize the end of the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation).

Further, when the set effect pattern is the “weak” effect pattern, when the player's operation of putting a sword is detected, as shown in FIG. 316 (U3), the specific decorative member SDY (shadow product). Is dropped and moved from the initial state to a half-fall state. The semi-dropped state is a state in which the specific decorative member SDY (braid accessory) is dropped and movable to an intermediate position between the initial state and the full-dropped state, and overlaps with the upper half area of the display area of the effect display device 1600 in a front view. .. Then, the sword decoration body 5001 is returned from the second extraction state to the sword storage state by the player's sword storage operation and is returned to the stage 0 form (initial form). After that, as shown in FIG. 316 (U4), the specific decoration member SDY (shadow curtain) is returned from the half-dropped state to the initial state, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, as shown in FIG. An expected degree notification image (“50 bodies destroyed!”) for notifying the expected degree of the variable display result is displayed in a manner corresponding to the start image of the pseudo continuous effect shown. At this time, there is no change in the sword ornament 5001. Then, similarly to the "strong" effect pattern, the player can recognize the end of the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) by displaying the expectation notification image at this time.

If the player's sword operation is not detected within the valid operation period of the sword ornament 5001, regardless of whether the set effect pattern is the “strong” effect pattern or the “weak” effect pattern. In the display area of the effect display device 1600, the escape image (“enemy, escape!”) indicating that the pseudo-repeated fluctuation (re-fluctuation) has ended without the drop effect of the specific decoration member SDY (blend material) being performed. Is displayed (see FIG. 318 (W2)). In other words, the player is prevented from grasping the degree of expectation of the fluctuation display result when the player's sword cutting operation is not detected within the operation valid period. At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 is returned to the initial state of the sword decoration state when the operation valid period ends. Here, the escape image is displayed so that the player can recognize the end of the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation).

Then, when the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) ends, as shown in FIG. 316 (U5), a reach state is formed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 with the decorative pattern in the normal mode, and the reach effect is started. It Regarding the reach effect at this time, the reach effect having the same effect content is executed in the “weak” effect pattern and the “strong” effect pattern. In this way, by operating the sword decoration body 5001 when the sword operation is requested, the player grasps the degree of expectation by the falling position of the specific decoration member SDY (lens accessory) and then performs the reach effect. You can meet. Therefore, even if the subsequent reach production is the same, different expectations can be held each time, so that the player's motivation for operation is suppressed, and further, the decline in game enjoyment for uniform production is suppressed. can do.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 320(B) and 321, the operation of the sword decoration 5001 and the specific decoration member SDY (blend product) when the sword LV1 weak effect pattern or the sword LV1 strong effect pattern is set. The execution timing will be described.

As shown in FIG. 320(B), in the sword LV1 weak effect pattern and the sword LV1 strong effect pattern, the sword ornament 5001 in the stage 1 form is operated in the period T1 in which the first pseudo-continuous change (re-change) is performed. It enables it as a means and gives the player an opportunity to operate. When the sword LV1 weak effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation degree notification effect) in which the specific decoration member SDY (lens accessory) is half-dropped by the player's operation is performed. Further, when the sword LV1 strong effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation degree notification effect) in which all of the specific decorative member SDY (lens accessory) is dropped by the operation of the player is performed. If there is no operation by the player, the drop effect (expectation degree notification effect) is not performed for either effect pattern.

As shown in FIG. 321, when the sword LV1 weak effect pattern is set, the sword decoration 5001 changes form from the initial form to the stage 1 form at the same time when the first pseudo-continuous change (re-change) is started ( See FIG. 312(E)). Then, the state of the sword decoration 5001 changes from the sword state to the second sword state (see FIG. 312F), and whether the operation is effective by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Whether or not the player's excitement is enhanced and the player is made to fully recognize the sword decoration 5001 in the operable state (second sword extraction state) (FIG. 312(G)→FIG. 313(T1)→(T2 )), the operation valid period for effectively accepting the operation of the player is started (see FIG. 313 (T3)).

Then, when the player performs a sword operation during the operation valid period, the sword decoration 5001 changes its state from the second sword extraction state to the sword extraction state, and also changes its form from the stage 1 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the "weak" effect pattern, the specific decoration member SDY (braid accessory) changes from the initial state to the half-fall state (see FIG. 316 (U3)). Then, at the end of the first pseudo-continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, the specific decoration member SDY (shadow curtain) returns to the initial state, and corresponds to a half-fall in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Since the expectation notification image of the expectation is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T1.
Further, in the case of the "strong" effect pattern, the specific decoration member SDY (braid accessory) changes from the initial state to the all-drop state (see FIG. 316 (U1)), and the expectation degree notification of the all-fall expectation level is notified. The difference is that the image is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U2)).

On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword operation during the operation valid period, the sword decoration 5001 changes from the second sword removal state to the sword storage state at the end of the operation effective period, and changes from the stage 1 form to the initial form. The shape changes. Then, at the end of the first pseudo-continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, a runaway image indicating that the expectation degree is not notified is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (see FIG. 318 ( (See W2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T1.

(Sword LV2 weak production pattern/Sword LV2 strong production pattern)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 313 and 314, a sword LV2 weak effect pattern or a sword LV2 strong effect pattern that makes the sword decoration 5001 effective as the operating means is set in the second pseudo-continuous change (re-change). An example of the effect transition in the case of being present will be described. The description of the effect transition similar to the effect pattern described above will be appropriately omitted.

When the set effect pattern is the sword LV2 weak effect pattern or the sword LV2 strong effect pattern, the operation opportunity of the sword ornament 5001 is not granted at the operation timing application timing of the first pseudo continuous variation (re-change). After the effect transitions shown in FIGS. 312(A) to (G) are traced, no operation opportunity is given to the display area of the effect display device 1600 from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in FIG. 312(G). A continuous image (image of the samurai's eyes closed) indicating that is displayed, and the sword decoration body 5001 that was in the second sword cutting state is returned to the sword cutting state while maintaining the form in the stage 1 form (Fig. 313 (S1)).

Next, the three decorative symbols that have been variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a pseudo continuous manner, and the player is informed that the decorative symbols will be re-varied (FIG. 313 (S2)). ). Here, among the three decorative designs, the central decorative design is a pseudo-sword design that is not prepared for the left and right decorative designs, specifically, the form of the sword ornament 5001 and the production level (number of pseudo-series variations). By displaying with the pseudo continuous sword pattern of the aspect, the player can easily recognize the re-change of the decorative pattern (start of the pseudo continuous change). Then, a sword image that shows in advance the form (stage 2 form) of the sword decoration 5001 in the second pseudo-continuous change (re-change) is displayed on the pseudo-sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. To be done. At this time, there is no change in the specific decorative member SDY (lens accessory) and the sword decoration 5001. Further, the sword decoration body 5001 maintains the stage 1 form. In this way, at the time of the temporary stop display immediately before the second pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) starts, the form and effect level (the number of pseudo-continuous variation) of the sword ornament 5001 in the second pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) are displayed. Since the notification is given, the player can grasp the stage of the pseudo continuous change (re-change) and face it.

Then, when the second pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) is started, the pseudo continuous sword pattern displayed at the time of FIG. 313 (S2) described above is enlarged and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. At the same time, the effect display is moved and displayed toward the sword decoration 5001 so as to act on the sword decoration 5001, and the re-variation of the decorative pattern is displayed. Then, the sword decoration 5001 changes its form from the stage 1 form to the stage 2 form in which the handle 5012 is split left and right and the first decorative part 5012a is visible (FIG. 313 (S3)). Subsequently, the sword image of the pseudo continuous sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is changed from the sword state to the second sword state, and the sword decoration body 5001 is actually changed from the sword state to the second sword state. The state changes to (FIG. 313 (S4)). The timing for changing the form of the sword ornament 5001 from the stage 1 form to the stage 2 form and the state changing timing for changing the state from the sword state to the second sword state may be set at the same time. The effect display displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is performed so as to act on the sword decoration 5001, and the sword decoration 5001 changes all at once when the player's line of sight is directed to the sword decoration 5001. It is possible to impress a powerful action and attract the player's interest.

After that, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, whether or not the sword decoration body 5001 in the second extracted sword state (stage 2 form) in which the player can store the sword is enabled as the operation means, that is, the game. An operation opportunity suggestion image (a samurai image with closed eyes) showing the result of determining whether or not to give an operation opportunity to the person is displayed (FIG. 314 (V1)).

Here, when the set production pattern is the sword LV2 weak production pattern or the sword LV2 strong production pattern, the operation opportunity of the sword decoration 5001 is given by the second pseudo continuous variation (re-variation). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation confirmation image (an image with the samurai's eyes open) indicating that the operation opportunity is given from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in FIG. 314 (V1) is displayed ( FIG. 314 (V2)). Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image (“good opportunity!” message) indicating that the player is given an operation opportunity for positive operation (FIG. 314 (V3)). .. Then, while the operation effective period of the sword decoration 5001 is generated, an operation promotion effect for promoting the sword operation of the sword decoration 5001 is performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Specifically, the sword image in the second extracted sword state (stage 2 form), which is the same as the sword decoration 5001, is displayed, and an image indicating the operation direction and the effective operation period is displayed together with the message "Please put the sword!" (FIG. 314 (V4)). Then, when the player's operation of putting a sword is detected, as shown in FIG. 316 described above, the expected degree notification effect is performed by the drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (lens accessory) according to the set effect pattern. That is, the player can recognize that the pseudo continuous change (re-change) has ended. Further, when the player's sword operation is not detected during the operation valid period, regardless of whether the set effect pattern is the "strong" effect pattern or the "weak" effect pattern, the effect display device 1600 In the display area, a runaway image (“enemy, runaway!”) indicating that the pseudo continuous variation (re-fluctuation) has ended without the drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) being displayed (FIG. 318 (W2)). In other words, the player is prevented from grasping the degree of expectation of the fluctuation display result when the player's sword cutting operation is not detected within the operation valid period. At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 is returned to the initial state of the sword decoration state when the operation valid period ends. Here, the escape image is displayed so that the player can recognize the end of the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation).

Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 320(B) and 322, the operation of the sword decoration 5001 and the specific decoration member SDY (blend product) when the sword LV2 weak effect pattern or the sword LV2 strong effect pattern is set. The execution timing will be described.

As shown in FIG. 320(B), in the sword LV2 weak effect pattern and the sword LV2 strong effect pattern, the operation opportunity of the sword ornament 5001 is not given in the period T1 in which the first pseudo-continuous change (re-change) is performed. In the period T2 in which the second pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is performed, the sword decoration body 5001 in the stage 2 form is made effective as the operation means, and the operation opportunity is given to the player. Then, when the sword LV2 weak effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation degree notification effect) in which the specific decoration member SDY (lens accessory) is half-dropped by the operation of the player is performed. Further, when the sword LV2 strong effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation degree notification effect) in which all of the specific decorative member SDY (lens accessory) is dropped by the operation of the player is performed. If the player's operation is not detected, the drop effect (expectation degree notification effect) is not performed in any of the effect patterns.

As shown in FIG. 322, when the sword LV2 weak effect pattern is set, the sword decoration 5001 changes its form from the initial form to the stage 1 form at the same time as the start of the first pseudo-continuous change (re-change) ( See FIG. 312(E)). Then, the state of the sword decoration 5001 changes from the sword state to the second sword state (see FIG. 312F), and whether the operation is effective by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Whether or not the player's excitement is enhanced (see FIG. 312(G)), the sword decoration 5001 in the operable state (second sword cutting state) is generated without generating the operation effective period in which the operation of the player is effectively received. Is returned to the sword storage state (see FIG. 313 (S1)). Then, the sword decoration body undergoes the second pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) while maintaining the stage 1 form (see FIG. 313 (S2)).

Then, the sword decoration 5001 changes its form from the stage 1 form to the stage 2 form simultaneously with the start of the second pseudo-continuous change (re-change) (see FIG. 313 (S3)). Then, the state of the sword decoration 5001 changes from the sword state to the second sword state (see FIG. 313 (S4)), and whether the operation is effective by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Whether or not the player's excitement is enhanced, and the player is sufficiently aware of the sword ornament 5001 that is in the operable state (second sword removal state) (see (V1)→(V2)→(V3) in FIG. 314) ), the operation valid period for effectively accepting the operation of the player is started (see FIG. 314 (V4)).

Then, when the player performs a sword operation during the operation effective period, the sword decoration 5001 changes its state from the second sword extraction state to the sword extraction state, and also changes from the stage 2 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the "weak" effect pattern, the specific decoration member SDY (braid accessory) changes from the initial state to the half-fall state (see FIG. 316 (U3)). Then, at the end of the second pseudo-repeated change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T2, the specific decoration member SDY (lens accessory) returns to the initial state, and corresponds to a half drop in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T2.
Further, in the case of the "strong" effect pattern, the specific decoration member SDY (braid accessory) changes from the initial state to the all-drop state (see FIG. 316 (U1)), and the expectation degree notification of the all-fall expectation level is notified. The difference is that the image is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U2)).

On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword operation during the operation valid period, the sword decoration 5001 changes from the second sword removal state to the sword storage state at the end of the operation valid period, and changes from the stage 2 form to the initial form. The shape changes. Then, at the end of the second pseudo-continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T2, a runaway image indicating that the expectation degree is not notified is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (see FIG. 318 ( W2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T2.

(Sword LV3 weak effect pattern/Sword LV3 strong effect pattern)
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 314 and 315, a sword LV3 weak effect pattern or a sword LV3 strong effect pattern that makes the sword ornament 5001 effective as the operating means is set in the third pseudo continuous change (re-change). An example of the effect transition in the case of being present will be described. The description of the effect transition similar to the effect pattern described above will be appropriately omitted.

When the set effect pattern is the sword LV3 weak effect pattern or the sword LV3 strong effect pattern, the sword ornament is set at the second pseudo-continuous change (re-change) operation opportunity giving timing shown in FIG. 314 (V1). Since the operation opportunity of 5001 is not given, after the effect transition shown in FIGS. 312(A) to (G)→FIG. 313(S1) to (S4)→FIG. 314(V1) is followed, the effect display device 1600 is operated. In the display area, a continuous image (image with the samurai's eyes closed) indicating that the operation opportunity is not given from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in FIG. The sword decoration body 5001 is returned to the sword storage state while maintaining the form in the stage 2 form (FIG. 314 (V5)).

Next, the three decorative symbols that have been variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a pseudo continuous manner, and the player is notified that the decorative symbols will be re-varied (FIG. 314 (V6)). ). Here, among the three decorative designs, the central decorative design is a pseudo-sword design that is not prepared for the left and right decorative designs, specifically, the form of the sword ornament 5001 and the production level (number of pseudo-series variations). By displaying with the pseudo continuous sword pattern of the aspect, the player can easily recognize the re-change of the decorative pattern (start of the pseudo continuous change). Then, the pseudo-sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 displays a sword image that shows in advance the form (stage 3 form) of the sword ornament 5001 in the third pseudo-continuous change (re-change). To be done. At this time, there is no change in the specific decorative member SDY (lens accessory) and the sword decoration 5001. Also, the sword decoration 5001 maintains the stage 2 form. In this way, at the time of temporary stop display immediately before the third pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) starts, the form and effect level (number of pseudo-continuous variation) of the sword ornament 5001 in the third pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) are displayed. Since the notification is given, the player can grasp the stage of the pseudo continuous change (re-change) and face it.

Then, when the pseudo-continuous change (re-change) for the third time is started, the pseudo-continuous sword pattern displayed at the time of the above-described FIG. 314 (V6) is enlarged and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. At the same time, the effect display is moved and displayed toward the sword decoration 5001 so as to act on the sword decoration 5001, and the re-variation of the decorative pattern is displayed. Then, the sword ornament 5001 changes its form from the stage 2 form to the stage 3 form in which the second ornament part 5012b projects above the first ornament part 5012a and both ornament parts are visible as an integral ornament ( FIG. 314 (V7)). Subsequently, the sword image of the pseudo continuous sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is changed from the sword state to the second sword state, and the sword decoration body 5001 is actually changed from the sword state to the second sword state. The state changes to (Fig. 314 (V8)). The morphological change timing of the sword ornament 5001 from the stage 2 configuration to the stage 3 configuration and the state change timing from the sword storage state to the second sword removal state may be set at the same time. Further, the form of the sword decoration 5001 may not be changed each time according to the number of times of pseudo-continuous variation, and may be collectively changed for a plurality of stages when the final stage is reached. The effect display displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is performed so as to act on the sword decoration 5001, and the sword decoration 5001 changes all at once when the player's line of sight is directed to the sword decoration 5001. It is possible to impress a powerful action and attract the player's interest.

After that, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, whether or not the sword decoration 5001 in the second extracted sword state (stage 3 form) in which the player can store the sword is enabled as the operation means, that is, the game. An operation opportunity suggestion image (a samurai image with closed eyes) showing the result of the determination as to whether or not to give an operation opportunity to the person is displayed (FIG. 315 (X1)).

Here, when the set production patterns are the sword LV3 weak production pattern and the sword LV3 strong production pattern, the operation opportunity of the sword decoration 5001 is given in the third pseudo continuous variation (re-variation). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation confirmation image (an image with the samurai's eyes opened) indicating that the operation opportunity is given from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in FIG. 315 (X1) is displayed ( FIG. 315 (X2)). Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image (“good opportunity!” message) indicating that the player is given an operation opportunity for aggressive operation (FIG. 315 (X3)). .. Then, while the operation effective period of the sword decoration 5001 is generated, an operation promotion effect for promoting the sword operation of the sword decoration 5001 is performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Specifically, the sword image in the second extracted sword state (stage 3 form) same as the sword decoration 5001 is displayed, and an image showing the operation direction and the operation effective period is displayed together with the message “Please put the sword!”. (FIG. 315 (X4)). Then, when the player's operation of putting a sword is detected, as shown in FIG. 316 described above, the expected degree notification effect is performed by the drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (lens accessory) according to the set effect pattern. That is, the player can recognize that the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-change) has ended. If the player's sword operation is not detected during the operation valid period, the effect display device 1600 regardless of whether the set effect pattern is the “strong” effect pattern or the “weak” effect pattern. In the display area of, the escape image (“enemy, escape!”) indicating that the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) has ended without the drop effect of the specific decoration member SDY (shadow curtain) is displayed ( See FIG. 318 (W2).
That is, when the player's sword cutting operation is not detected within the operation valid period, the player is prevented from grasping the degree of expectation of the variation display result. At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 is returned to the initial form of the sword housing state when the operation valid period ends. Here, the escape image is displayed so that the player can recognize the end of the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation).

Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 320(B) and 323, the operation of the sword decoration 5001 and the specific decoration member SDY (blend material) when the sword LV3 weak effect pattern or the sword LV3 strong effect pattern is set. The execution timing will be described.

As shown in FIG. 320(B), in the sword LV3 weak effect pattern and the sword LV3 strong effect pattern, the period T1 in which the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is performed and the second pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) occur. In the period T2 that is performed, the sword ornament 5001 is not given an operation opportunity, and in the period T3 in which the third pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is performed, the sword ornament 5001 in the stage 3 form is made effective as the operation means, and the game is played. Opportunity is given to a person. When the sword LV3 weak effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation degree notification effect) in which the specific decoration member SDY (lens accessory) is half-dropped by the player's operation is performed. Further, when the sword LV3 strong effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation degree notification effect) in which all of the specific decorative member SDY (lens accessory) is dropped by the operation of the player is performed. If the player's operation is not detected, the drop effect (expectation degree notification effect) is not performed in any of the effect patterns.

As shown in FIG. 323, when the sword LV3 weak effect pattern is set, the sword decoration 5001 changes form from the initial form to the stage 1 form at the same time when the first pseudo-continuous change (re-change) is started ( See FIG. 312(E)). Then, the state of the sword decoration 5001 changes from the sword state to the second sword state (see FIG. 312F), and whether the operation is effective by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Whether or not the player's excitement is enhanced (see FIG. 312(G)), the sword decoration 5001 in the operable state (second sword cutting state) is generated without generating the operation effective period in which the operation of the player is effectively received. Is returned to the sword storage state (see FIG. 313 (S1)). Then, the sword decoration body undergoes the second pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) while maintaining the stage 1 form (see FIG. 313 (S2)).

Then, the sword decoration 5001 changes its form from the stage 1 form to the stage 2 form simultaneously with the start of the second pseudo-continuous change (re-change) (see FIG. 313 (S3)). Then, the state of the sword decoration 5001 changes from the sword state to the second sword state (see FIG. 313 (S4)), and whether the operation is effective by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Whether or not the player's excitement is enhanced (see FIG. 314 (V1)), the sword decoration 5001 in an operable state (second sword cutting state) is generated without generating an operation effective period in which the operation of the player is effectively received. Is returned to the sword storage state (see FIG. 314 (V5)). Then, the sword decoration body undergoes the third pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) while maintaining the stage 2 form (see FIG. 314 (V6)).

Then, the sword decoration 5001 changes its form from the stage 2 form to the stage 3 form at the same time when the third pseudo continuous change (re-change) is started (see FIG. 314 (V7)). Then, the state of the sword decoration 5001 changes from the sword state to the second sword state (see FIG. 314 (V8)), and whether the operation is effective according to the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Whether or not the player's excitement is enhanced and the player is sufficiently aware of the sword decoration 5001 in the operable state (second sword cutting state) (see (X1)→(X2)→(X3) in FIG. 315) ), the operation valid period for effectively accepting the operation of the player is started (see FIG. 315 (X4)).

Then, when the player performs a sword operation during the operation valid period, the sword decoration 5001 changes its state from the second sword extraction state to the sword insertion state, and also changes its form from the stage 3 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the "weak" effect pattern, the specific decoration member SDY (braid accessory) changes from the initial state to the half-fall state (see FIG. 316 (U3)). Then, at the end of the third pseudo-variation (re-fluctuation), that is, at the end timing of the period T3, the specific decoration member SDY (sliding material) returns to the initial state, and corresponds to a half drop in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Since the expectation notification image of the expectation is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T3.
Further, in the case of the "strong" effect pattern, the specific decoration member SDY (braid accessory) changes from the initial state to the all-drop state (see FIG. 316 (U1)), and the expectation degree notification of the all-fall expectation level is notified. The difference is that the image is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U2)).

On the other hand, if the player does not perform the sword operation during the operation valid period, the sword decoration 5001 changes from the second extraction state to the sword storage state at the end of the operation effective period, and changes from the stage 3 form to the initial form. The shape changes. Then, at the end of the third pseudo-continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T3, a runaway image indicating that the expectation degree is not notified is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (see FIG. 318 ( The player recognizes the end of the period T3.

(Pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern/pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern)
Subsequently, referring to FIG. 317 and FIG. 318, the sword ornament 5001 is made effective as the operating means in the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation), but the pseudo-continuous variation is made by the player selecting not to operate. An example of the effect transition in the case where the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern or the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern capable of acquiring the continuation of (re-changing) (level up effect) is set will be described. The description of the effect transition similar to the effect pattern described above will be appropriately omitted.

When the set effect pattern is the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern or the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern, the operation opportunity of the sword ornament 5001 is given at the operation opportunity giving timing of the first pseudo continuous variation (re-change). .. However, the operation opportunity at this time is not the above-described operation opportunity for requesting the player to actively perform an operation, but a selection operation opportunity for the player to select whether or not to operate. Therefore, after the effect transition shown in FIGS. 312(A) to (G)→FIG. 313(T1) is followed, the operation opportunity of FIG. 313(T1) described above is given to the display area of the effect display device 1600. An operation selection image (a message "Is it a good opportunity?") indicating that it is a selection operation opportunity for the player to select whether or not to operate from the operation confirmation image indicating that the operation confirmation image is displayed (FIG. 317 (Z1). )). Then, while the effective operation period of the sword decoration 5001 is generated, an operation selection promotion effect that prompts the user to select the sword operation of the sword decoration 5001 is performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Specifically, the sword image in the second extracted sword state (stage 1 form) same as the sword decoration 5001 is displayed, and the operation direction and the operation valid period are displayed together with the message "Please choose whether to put the sword". The image is displayed (FIG. 317 (Z2)).

Here, the set pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern) is a fluctuation of either the sword LV1 weak fluctuation pattern or the sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern (sword LV1 strong fluctuation pattern or sword LV3 strong fluctuation pattern). Subsequent production transitions greatly differ depending on whether the production pattern is set based on the pattern.

In the case of the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern) set based on the sword LV1 weak change pattern (sword LV1 strong change pattern), the player's sword operation is performed during the operation valid period. When detected, the same effect transition (FIG. 316) as the basic effect pattern sword LV1 weak effect pattern (sword LV1 strong effect pattern) is followed.

On the other hand, when the player's sword operation is not detected during the operation valid period, the operation selection promotion effect shown in FIG. 317 (Z2) described above regardless of the set effect pattern (“weak” or “strong”). When the operation effective period in which the operation is performed ends, the sword decoration body 5001 is returned from the second extraction state of the stage 1 form to the initial state of storing the sword state, and the selection operation opportunity of this time is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. An image (“Is it a good opportunity...”) indicating that it was an opportunity to operate is displayed (FIG. 318 (W1)). At this time, there is no change in the specific decorative member SDY (blind material).
Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the escape image (“enemy, escape!”) indicating that the pseudo continuous variation (re-fluctuation) has ended without the drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (shadow cast) being performed. ) Is displayed (FIG. 318 (W2)). Then, when the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) ends, the reach state is formed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 by the decorative pattern in the normal mode, and the reach effect is started (FIG. 318 (W3)).

In the case of the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern) set based on the sword LV3 weak change pattern (sword LV3 strong change pattern), the player's sword operation is performed during the operation valid period. When detected, in the same manner as when an operation is detected in the operation opportunity in the basic effect pattern sword LV3 weak effect pattern (sword LV3 strong effect pattern), FIG. 316(U3)→(U4) (FIG. 316(U1)→ (U2)) After tracing the production transition, during the remaining production period (the total period of the periods T2 and T3), the variable display with the decorative pattern in the normal mode is performed (not shown). Then, the reach state is formed by the decorative pattern of the normal mode at the same timing as the predetermined timing in the sword LV3 weak variation pattern (sword LV3 strong variation pattern), and then the reach effect is started (FIG. 316 (U5)). reference).

On the other hand, when the player's sword operation is not detected during the operation valid period, the operation selection promotion effect shown in FIG. 317 (Z2) described above regardless of the set effect pattern (“weak” or “strong”). When the operation valid period in which the operation is performed ends, the operation pseudo continuous variation (re-fluctuation) is continued by the acquisition of the level-up effect. The effect transition at this time is from the above-described FIG. 317 (Z2) to the continuation image (FIG. 313 (S1)) indicating that the operation opportunity is not given at the first operation giving timing, that is, the continuation of the pseudo continuous variation. After that, similarly to the basic effect pattern sword LV3 weak effect pattern (sword LV3 strong effect pattern), FIG. 313 (S2) to (S4) → FIG. 314 (V1) → FIG. 314 (V5) to (V8). )→FIG. 315(X1) to (X4)→FIG. 316(U1)→(U2) or (U3)→(U4)→FIG. 316(U5).

As described above, the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern) greatly differs in effect development after the selection operation opportunity is given according to the variation pattern selected on the main control board 1310. When the selected variation pattern is a sword LV1 weak variation pattern (sword LV1 strong variation pattern), the player should select to operate at the selection operation opportunity, and if the operation is performed at the selection operation opportunity, it becomes a basic effect pattern. Similarly, it is possible to grasp the degree of expectation and face the reach production. On the other hand, if you choose not to operate, not only will you not be able to obtain the level-up effect described below, but you will also reach the reach effect without being able to grasp the degree of expectation that you could have learned if you originally operated it. .. When the selected variation pattern is the sword LV3 weak variation pattern (sword LV3 strong variation pattern), the player should select not to operate at the selection operation opportunity. If no operation is performed at the selection operation opportunity, it is possible to enjoy the effect by continuing the pseudo continuous change (re-change) as in the basic effect pattern. On the other hand, if the sword decoration 5001 is operated, the effect (continuation change of the sword decoration 5001 due to the level-up effect) due to the continuation of the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-change) that could be obtained without the operation is overlooked and the shape of the sword decoration 5001 is initialized. It will be returned to the form. In the operation in the selection operation opportunity, the operation effect obtained according to the variation pattern selected by the main control board 1310 which is not known to the player is exactly opposite, and the operation is performed in the operation effective period in which the operation is effectively accepted. It provides a novel effect that brings a disadvantageous operation result to the user. In addition, the operation in the selection operation opportunity of the specific effect pattern has a greater influence on the subsequent effect development than the operation in the operation opportunity of the basic effect pattern. Therefore, the player faces the operation in the selection operation opportunity with a feeling of tension and expectation. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to operate, and to suppress a decrease in amusement of the game caused by a uniform operation effect.

In particular, when the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern) is set based on the sword LV3 weak change pattern (sword LV3 strong change pattern), in the first pseudo-continuous change (re-change). When the player operates the sword decoration 5001 in the selection operation opportunity, the stage 3 form is leveled down from the stage 1 form at the selection operation opportunity to the stage 0 form (initial form). On the other hand, if the player does not operate the sword ornament 5001, the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) is continuously performed twice, the level is increased to the stage 3 form, and the operation opportunity is given again. Conventionally, a preset number of operations are required in the production pattern, but in this example, two (LV1 and L3) operation opportunities can be given in advance, but the player operates one operation once. It is possible to end the grant at an opportunity and provide a novel effect that more reflects the player's intention. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to operate for an operation effect that does not appear as a substitute, and to suppress a decrease in the entertainment appeal.

In other words, even if an effect pattern in which the sword ornament 5001 can be changed from the initial form to the stage 3 form is set according to the variation pattern selected by the main control board 1310, depending on the player's operation, the initial form to the stage 1 form can be used. You can see only the changes up to and reach the reach production. Since the player can make an operation selection without being caught by the selected variation pattern (set effect pattern), it is possible to give the player a more sense that his or her own operation selection determines the effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to operate and a decrease in the interest of the game.

Further, when the sword decoration 5001 is operated in the selection operation opportunity, the shape of the sword decoration 5001 returns to the initial shape, but the degree of expectation can be grasped by the falling effect of the specific decoration member SDY (lens accessory). .. If the sword ornament 5001 is not operated without grasping the degree of expectation, and the form further changes in stages (levels up), and is operated in the operation opportunity given after the form becomes stage 3. Therefore, there is a case where the expectation level can be grasped by the drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (blend material). In this way, the operation selection in the selection operation opportunity produces the same normal operation effect as the basic effect pattern, and the selection not operated produces a lower effect than the normal operation effect or a higher effect than the normal operation effect. Therefore, it is preferable to set so that the degree of expectation is higher when the effect is high than when the effect is low.
In FIG. 320(A), the degree of expectation in the same effect pattern (the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern, the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern) is changed according to the variation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the expectation of the same effect pattern may be constant regardless of the variation pattern. In order to provide an appropriate effect more suited to the player's feeling of selection, it is preferable to change the degree of expectation in the same effect pattern according to the variation pattern and the effect. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to operate and a decrease in the interest of the game.

Subsequently, referring to FIG. 320(B) and FIG. 324, the sword decoration 5001 and the specific decoration member SDY (slave cast) when the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern or the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern is set. The operation execution timing of will be described.

As shown in FIG. 320(B), in the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern and the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern, in the period T1 in which the first pseudo-continuous change (re-change) is performed, the sword ornament 5001 in the stage 1 form. Is enabled as an operation means, and an operation opportunity is given to the player. Then, when the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation degree notification effect) in which the specific decoration member SDY (lens accessory) is half-dropped by the operation of the player is performed. Further, when the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation degree notification effect) in which the specific decorative member SDY (lens accessory) is completely dropped by the operation of the player is performed. Further, when the variation pattern selected at this time is the sword LV3 weak variation pattern or the sword LV3 strong variation pattern, since the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) is originally provided three times, it is possible to execute the specific decoration. After the drop effect of the member SDY, the symbol variation in the normal mode is performed in the remaining effect period (time period T2+time period T3).

If the player's operation is not detected, the drop effect (expectation degree notification effect) is not performed in any of the effect patterns. Then, when the variation pattern selected at this time is the sword LV3 weak variation pattern or the sword LV3 strong variation pattern, the second and third pseudo-continuous variations (re-variations) are continued, and the second pseudo-continuous variation is continued. In the period T2 in which (re-changing) is performed, an operation opportunity of the sword decoration 5001 is not given, and in the period T3 in which the third pseudo-continuous variation (re-changing) is performed, the sword ornament 5001 in the stage 3 form is operated. As a result, the operation opportunity is given to the player. Then, when the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation degree notification effect) in which the specific decoration member SDY (lens accessory) is half-dropped by the player's operation is performed. Further, when the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation degree notification effect) in which the specific decorative member SDY (lens accessory) is completely dropped by the operation of the player is performed. If the player's operation is not detected, the drop effect (expectation degree notification effect) is not performed in any of the effect patterns.

As shown in FIG. 324, when the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern is set, the sword decoration 5001 changes form from the initial form to the stage 1 form at the same time as the start of the first pseudo continuous change (re-change). (See FIG. 312(E)). Then, the state of the sword decoration 5001 changes from the sword state to the second sword state (see FIG. 312F), and whether the operation is effective by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Whether or not the player's feeling of excitement is enhanced and the player is sufficiently aware of the sword decoration 5001 in the operable state (second sword extraction state) (FIG. 312(G)→FIG. 313(T1)→FIG. 317 (See (Z1)), and the operation valid period for effectively accepting the operation by the player is started (see FIG. 317 (Z2)).

Then, when the player performs a sword operation during the operation valid period, the sword decoration 5001 changes its state from the second sword extraction state to the sword extraction state, and also changes its form from the stage 1 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the "weak" effect pattern, the specific decoration member SDY (braid accessory) changes from the initial state to the half-fall state (see FIG. 316 (U3)). Then, at the end of the first pseudo-continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, the specific decoration member SDY (shadow curtain) returns to the initial state, and corresponds to a half-fall in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Since the expectation notification image of the expectation is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T1.
Although illustration is omitted, in the case of the “strong” effect pattern, the specific decoration member SDY (shadow curtain) changes from the initial state to the all-falling state (see FIG. 316 (U1)), which corresponds to the all-falling. The difference is that the expectation notification image of the expectation is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U2)).

On the other hand, if the player does not perform the sword operation during the operation valid period and the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) continues (when set based on the sword LV3 weak variation pattern or the sword LV3 strong variation pattern), The ornament 5001 changes its state from the second sword cutting state to the sword cutting state with the end of the effective operation period, but maintains the stage 1 form (see FIG. 313 (S1)).

Then, the sword decoration 5001 changes its form from the stage 1 form to the stage 2 form simultaneously with the start of the second pseudo-continuous change (re-change) (see FIG. 313 (S3)). Then, the state of the sword decoration 5001 changes from the sword state to the second sword state (see FIG. 313 (S4)), and whether the operation is effective by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Whether or not the player's excitement is enhanced (see FIG. 314 (V1)), the sword decoration 5001 in an operable state (second sword cutting state) is generated without generating an operation effective period in which the operation of the player is effectively received. Is returned to the sword storage state (see FIG. 314 (V5)). Then, the sword decoration body undergoes the third pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) while maintaining the stage 2 form (see FIG. 314 (V6)).

Then, the sword decoration 5001 changes its form from the stage 2 form to the stage 3 form at the same time when the third pseudo continuous change (re-change) is started (see FIG. 314 (V7)). Then, the state of the sword decoration 5001 changes from the sword state to the second sword state (see FIG. 314 (V8)), and whether the operation is effective according to the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Whether or not the player's excitement is enhanced and the player is sufficiently aware of the sword decoration 5001 in the operable state (second sword cutting state) (see (X1)→(X2)→(X3) in FIG. 315) ), the operation valid period for effectively accepting the operation of the player is started (see FIG. 315 (X4)).

Then, when the player performs a sword operation during the operation valid period, the sword decoration 5001 changes its state from the second sword extraction state to the sword insertion state, and also changes its form from the stage 3 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the "weak" effect pattern, the specific decoration member SDY (braid accessory) changes from the initial state to the half-fall state (see FIG. 316 (U3)). Then, at the end of the third pseudo-variation (re-fluctuation), that is, at the end timing of the period T3, the specific decoration member SDY (sliding material) returns to the initial state, and corresponds to a half drop in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Since the expectation notification image of the expectation is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T3.
Although illustration is omitted, in the case of the “strong” effect pattern, the specific decoration member SDY (shadow curtain) changes from the initial state to the all-falling state (see FIG. 316 (U1)), which corresponds to the all-falling. The difference is that the expectation notification image of the expectation is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U2)).

On the other hand, if the player does not perform the sword operation during the operation valid period, the sword decoration 5001 changes from the second extraction state to the sword storage state at the end of the operation effective period, and changes from the stage 3 form to the initial form. The shape changes. Then, at the end of the third pseudo-continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T3, a runaway image indicating that the expectation degree is not notified is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (see FIG. 318 ( The player recognizes the end of the period T3.

In addition, when the player does not perform a sword operation during the effective operation period and the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) is not continued (when set based on the sword LV1 weak variation pattern or the sword LV1 strong variation pattern), The ornament 5001 changes its state from the second sword cutting state to the sword cutting state with the end of the effective operation period, and changes its form from the stage 1 form to the initial form. Then, at the end of the first pseudo-continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, a runaway image indicating that the expectation degree is not notified is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (see FIG. 318 ( (See W2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T1.

(Pseudo resurrection LV1 production pattern)
Subsequently, referring to FIG. 319, after the same production transition as the sword LV1 weak production pattern described above is followed and it is shown as if it directly enters the reach production, the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) is restored. An example of effect transition when the sword LV1 effect pattern is set will be described. The description of the effect transition similar to the effect pattern described above will be appropriately omitted.

The pseudo revival sword LV1 effect pattern is an effect pattern that can be set by the peripheral control board 1510 when the sword LV3 weak variation pattern or the sword LV3 strong variation pattern is selected by the main control board 1310.

When the set effect pattern is the pseudo-revival sword LV1 effect pattern, similar to the aforementioned sword LV1 weak effect pattern, the above-described FIG. 312(A) to (G)→FIG. 313(T1) to (T3) Follow the production transition. Then, when the player's operation is detected in the first operation opportunity, regardless of the type of the variation pattern, the same effect as in FIG. 316 (U3), (U4), and (U5) described above is used. After tracing the effect transition of (UA1)→(UA2)→(UA3), the pseudo continuous variation by the pseudo continuous sword pattern is restarted again. In addition, when the operation by the player is not detected in the first operation opportunity, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its state to the initial form of the sword-cutting state with the end of the operation valid period, as in the other effect patterns. Instead of the above-described FIG. 319 (UA1)→(UA2), in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the pseudo decorative variation (re-variation) ends without the drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (lens accessory) being performed. An escape image (“enemy, escape!”) indicating that the action has been taken is displayed (see FIG. 318 (W2)).

Resume resumption of the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) is the center of the three decorative symbols in the reach state (“7↓7”) displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 shown in FIG. 319 (UA3). The decoration pattern is not prepared for the left and right decoration patterns, and more specifically, a pseudo-continuous sword pattern of a mode showing the form and the production level (the number of times of pseudo continuous fluctuations) of the sword decoration 5001 is temporarily stopped and displayed. The player is informed by this (FIG. 319 (UA4)). At this time, the sword image and the effect level 3 of the sword decoration body 5001 in the stage 3 form are displayed in the pseudo continuous sword design. At this time, there is no change in the sword decoration body 5001 and the initial form (the sword state) is maintained. In this way, in the pseudo-revival sword LV1 effect pattern, when the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) is restored, the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) corresponding to the stage 1 form and stage 2 form sword ornament 5001 is not performed, Pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) corresponding to the stage 3 form sword decoration 5001 is performed. Then, at the time of the temporary stop display (FIG. 319 (UA4)) immediately before the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) in the stage 3 form, the form and effect level of the sword ornament 5001 in the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) are notified. As a result, the player can grasp the stage of the pseudo continuous change (re-change) and face it.

Then, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the pseudo continuous sword pattern displayed at the time of FIG. 319 (UA4) is enlarged and displayed, and the effect display acts on the sword decoration body 5001. The display is moved toward 5001 and the re-change of the decorative pattern is displayed.
Then, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its form from the initial form to a stage 3 form in which the aura member 5040, the first decoration part 5012a, and the second decoration part 5012b operate so that both decoration parts can be visually recognized as an integral decoration body. (FIG. 319 (UA5)). Subsequently, the sword image of the pseudo continuous sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is changed from the sword state to the second sword state, and the sword decoration body 5001 is actually changed from the sword state to the second sword state. The state changes to (FIG. 319 (UA6)). Here, since the sword decoration 5001 collectively changes its form from the initial form to the stage 3 form for a plurality of stages, it is possible to impress a powerful action and attract the interest of the player.

After that, the sword decoration 5001 in the second extracted sword state (stage 3 form) in which the player can operate the sword is enabled as the operation means, and an operation opportunity is given. The above-described FIGS. 315 (X1) to (X5) When the operation by the player is detected after following the production transition of, although not shown, the specific decoration member SDY( depending on whether or not the operation is detected at the first operation opportunity regardless of the type of the variation pattern. The type of fall effect of the curtain is determined. When the operation is detected in the first operation opportunity, the specific decorative member SDY (shadow curtain) is once in a half-dropped state, so the level is upgraded to the above-mentioned FIG. 316 (U1)→(U2). → The expectation notification production is performed by the full fall production of the same specific decorative member SDY (blend accessory) as (U5), and the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) ends. On the other hand, when the operation is not detected in the first operation opportunity, the degree of expectation by the half-fall effect of the same specific decorative member SDY (blend product) as in the above-described FIG. 316 (U3)→(U4)→(U5). The notification effect is performed, and the pseudo continuous change (re-change) ends.

In addition, when the operation by the player is not detected in the operation opportunity to enable the sword decoration body 5001 in the second extracted sword state (stage 3 form) as the operation means, the operation effective period ends like other effect patterns. At the same time, the sword decoration 5001 changes to the initial form of the sword-storing state, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the pseudo decoration change (re-change) is performed without the drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (silver accessory) being performed. A runaway image (“enemy, runaway!”) indicating that is finished is displayed (see FIG. 318 (W2)), and the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) is finished.

In this way, in the pseudo revival sword LV1 effect pattern, when the same effect transition as in the sword LV1 weak effect pattern described above is followed and the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-fluctuation) is restored again, the level of the step 2 mode is skipped and the step 3 mode is achieved. Since the same development as the production at the level (the production of the third pseudo-variation (re-variation) in the basic production pattern) is performed, the player is surprised and reaches with a stronger expectation than other production patterns. Can face. In addition, the player is not discouraged even if an operation opportunity is given in the first pseudo-continuous change (re-change) or the subsequent drop effect of the specific decoration member SDY (lens accessory) is half-fall. You can enjoy the game in anticipation of the revival of simulated fluctuations (re-changes).

Next, with reference to FIG. 320(B) and FIG. 325, the operation execution timings of the sword decoration 5001 and the specific decoration member SDY (blend product) when the pseudo revived sword LV1 effect pattern is set will be described. ..

As shown in FIG. 320(B), in the pseudo revived sword LV1 effect pattern, the sword decoration body 5001 in the stage 1 form is enabled as the operation means in the period T1 in which the first pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) is performed, Give the player an opportunity to operate. At this time, regardless of the selected variation pattern (sword LV3 weak variation pattern or sword LV3 strong variation pattern), the drop effect (expectation degree notification) in which the specific decoration member SDY (lens accessory) is half-dropped by the player's operation. Production) is performed.
In addition, if there is no operation by the player, the drop effect (expectation degree notification effect) is not performed.

Then, after the first pseudo-repeated fluctuation (re-fluctuation) is finished and once the normal pattern fluctuation display is restored, the third pseudo-reciprocal fluctuation (re-fluctuation) in another effect pattern is performed. Pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) is performed using the sword ornament 5001 corresponding to T3, that is, the morphology changes to the stage 3 form. Then, the sword decoration body 5001 of the stage 3 form is made effective as the operation means, and the operation opportunity is given to the player. At this time, if the drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (shelter material) is performed in the period T1, a drop effect (expectation degree notification) in which all of the specific decorative member SDY (shelter material) is dropped by the player's operation. Production) is performed. Further, in the period T1, when the drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (shelter material) is not performed in the period T1, the specific decorative member SDY (shelter material) is half-dropped by the player's operation. Performance (expectation degree notification performance) is performed. In addition, if there is no operation by the player, the drop effect (expectation degree notification effect) is not performed.

As shown in FIG. 325, when the pseudo revival sword LV1 effect pattern is set, the sword decoration 5001 changes form from the initial form to the stage 1 form at the same time as the start of the first pseudo continuous change (re-change). (See FIG. 312(E)). Then, the state of the sword decoration 5001 changes from the sword state to the second sword state (see FIG. 312F), and whether the operation is effective by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Whether or not the player's excitement is enhanced and the player is made to fully recognize the sword decoration 5001 in the operable state (second sword extraction state) (FIG. 312(G)→FIG. 313(T1)→(T2 )), the operation valid period for effectively accepting the operation of the player is started (see FIG. 313 (T3)).

Then, when the player performs a sword operation during the operation valid period, the sword decoration 5001 changes its state from the second sword extraction state to the sword extraction state, and also changes its form from the stage 1 form to the initial form. Then, the specific decorative member SDY (shadow curtain) changes from the initial state to the semi-dropped state (see FIG. 319 (UA1)). Then, at the end of the first pseudo-continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, the specific decoration member SDY (shadow curtain) returns to the initial state, and corresponds to a half drop in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 319 (UA2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T1.

On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword operation during the operation valid period, the sword decoration 5001 changes from the second sword removal state to the sword storage state at the end of the operation effective period, and changes from the stage 1 form to the initial form. The shape changes. Then, at the end of the first pseudo-continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, a runaway image indicating that the expectation degree is not notified is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (see FIG. 318 ( (See W2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T1.

After that, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the reach state is once formed by the decorative pattern in the normal mode (see FIG. 319 (UA3)), but the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) is restored (FIG. 319 (UA4). )reference).

Simultaneously with the resumption of the pseudo-continuous change (re-change), the sword decoration 5001 changes its form from the initial form (stage 0 form) to the form 3 (see FIG. 319 (UA5)). After that, the state of the sword ornament 5001 changes from the sword state to the second sword state (see FIG. 319 (UA6)), and whether the operation is effective by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Whether or not the player's excitement is enhanced and the player is sufficiently aware of the sword decoration 5001 in the operable state (second sword cutting state) (see (X1)→(X2)→(X3) in FIG. 315) ), the operation valid period for effectively accepting the operation of the player is started (see FIG. 315 (X4)).

Then, when the player performs a sword operation during the operation valid period, the sword decoration 5001 changes its state from the second sword extraction state to the sword insertion state, and also changes its form from the stage 3 form to the initial form. At this time, if the drop effect of the specific decoration member SDY (shadow-casting object) is performed in the first pseudo-continuous change (re-change), the specific decoration member SDY (shadow-casting object) is changed from the initial state to the all-falling state. A changing drop effect is performed (see FIG. 316 (U1)). Then, at the end of the quasi-continuous change (re-change) of the revival, that is, at the end timing of the period T3, the specific decoration member SDY (lens accessory) returns to the initial state, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 corresponds to all the fall. Since the expectation notification image of the expectation is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T3.
Further, although not shown, in the case where the falling effect of the specific decorative member SDY (shadow changing object) is not performed in the first pseudo-continuous change (re-change), the specific decorative member SDY (shadow changing object) is changed from the initial state. The difference is that the state changes to a half-fall state (see FIG. 316 (U3)), and an expectation notification image of the expectation corresponding to the half-fall is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U4)).

On the other hand, if the player does not perform the sword operation during the operation valid period, the sword decoration 5001 changes from the second extraction state to the sword storage state at the end of the operation effective period, and changes from the stage 3 form to the initial form. The shape changes. Then, at the end of the pseudo-repeated change (re-change) of the revival, that is, at the end timing of the period T3, a runaway image indicating that the degree of expectation is not notified is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 318 (W2 )), the player recognizes the end of the period T3.

As described above, in the pseudo continuous production using the sword ornament 5001, the pseudo continuous variation times are two and three times in the sword LV2 production pattern and the sword LV3 production pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) is performed a plurality of times. When it is less than, the sword decoration 5001 is changed from the sword storage state to the second sword removal state for each pseudo-continuous change (re-change) to make it operable by the player, but an operation effective period is provided. It is characterized by returning to the sword state without any (without giving the player an opportunity to operate). For this reason, the player will have a sense of expectation as to whether or not the operation will be effective even when the sword decoration 5001 is in an operable state, so that the sword decoration 5001 as an operating means can be interested. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in willingness to operate and a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) is characterized in that the sword ornament 5001 returns to the initial form when the player operates the sword ornament 5001 whose form has changed from the initial form. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a novel impression, which is different from the conventional uniform operation effect of providing a beneficial effect for the player by the operation of the player. Have the player carefully select the operation. Therefore, it is possible to make the operation of the sword ornament 5001 interested, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the motivation for the operation and a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

Further, the sword ornament 5001 can change its form in stages until an operation opportunity is given (until the operation effective period is generated), so that the expectation and interest of the player can be increased step by step, and the game can be improved. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest. It should be noted that during the period from when the sword decoration 5001 is in the operating form and in the second unsheathed state (operating position) until the operation valid period is generated, the player operates in the operating position (form, light emission, movable). It is desirable to provide a period during which it is possible to sufficiently confirm As a result, the player can confirm the operation mode before operating the sword decoration 5001, and thus the operation effective period is generated as soon as the second sword state is reached, and the mode of the operation means cannot be confirmed. It is possible to eliminate the concern that amusement of the game will be deteriorated by shifting to the operation effect in a hurry.

It should be noted that although the step change of the sword decoration 5001 described above is shown in the form, it is not limited to this. You may make it possible to change each production mode such as a change in the light emission mode and the operation mode of the sword decoration 5001 in stages in correspondence with the number of times of continuous pseudo-variation (re-variation).

(Application to look-ahead production)
In addition, although the sword removal effect in the pseudo continuous reach effect has been described above, it may be executed as a prefetch effect. The case of applying to the prefetching effect will be described below. In the following, a case will be described as an example in which the third hold is the prefetch effect target and the sword LV3 strong effect pattern is set as the prefetch effect pattern.

When the hold as the prefetch effect occurs as the third hold 3, the same effects as those in FIGS. 312B to 312F described above are performed in the variable display executed at the time of occurrence. The sword decoration 5001 is different in that the sword decoration 5001 is in the second sword removal state only when an operation opportunity is given (when the operation effective period is generated). Then, in the next variable display (that is, the variable display of the hold 1 when the hold 3 occurs), the same effect as in the above-described FIG. 312(G)→FIG. 313(S1) to (S4) is performed. Further, in the next variable display (that is, the variable display of the hold 2 when the hold 3 occurs), the same effect as in the above-described FIG. 314 (V1)→(V5)→(V8)→FIG. 315(X1) to (X3) is performed. Be seen. As described above, in the prefetching effect, the sword decoration 5001 changes from the sword-putting state to the second sword-cutting state only at the generation timing of the operation valid period. Here, the operation valid period is generated at the timing when the variable display of the hold 3 which is the prefetch effect is started, and the operation promotion effect and the state change of the sword ornament 5001 shown in FIG. The second sword removal state) is performed. Thereafter, the same effect transition as in FIG. 316 (U1)→(U2)→(U5) is followed, and the prefetching effect is ended.

Although the state change of the sword ornament 5001 from the sword state to the second sword extraction state is limited to the generation timing of the operation effective period, even if the gradual morphological change is performed at the end of the variable display, the next variable display is displayed. It may be performed at the start. The look-ahead effect also has the same effect as the pseudo-reach effect.

(Pre-operation suggestive effect using the specific decorative member SDY)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 326 to 329, the pre-operation suggestion effect executed before the operation effective period in which the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 becomes operation effective in the reach effect will be described. In the pre-operation suggestion effect, it is possible to indicate whether the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 is operationally effective among the plurality of operation means according to the operation of the specific decoration member SDY (shadow curtain). .. Specifically, as the suggestion pattern by the pre-operation suggestion effect using the specific decoration member SDY (sphenoid material), the operation effective period is generated in a state where the specific decoration member SDY (sphenoid material) is positioned at the initial position. There are a first suggestion pattern and a second suggestion pattern for generating an operation effective period in a state in which the specific decoration member SDY (braid accessory) is moved from the initial position to the suggestion position, and the sword ornament 5001 (from the operation button 410). If the hit expectation degree is high and the operation is effective, the second suggestion pattern is executed at a higher rate than the first suggestion pattern. Specifically, the pre-operation suggestion effect of the first suggestion pattern (FIG. 326(B)) that causes the operation effective period in the state where the specific decorative member SDY (shadow harness) is positioned at the initial position even during the operation effective period. If the operation is performed, the sword decoration 5001 becomes operable with a probability of 30%, and the operation button 410 becomes effective with a probability of 70%. On the other hand, in the case where the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern (FIG. 328 (AA1)) in which the operation effective period is generated in the state where the specific decoration member SDY (braid accessory) is moved to the suggestion position is performed. , The sword decoration 5001 becomes operable with a probability of 70% (including step-up pattern), and the operation button 410 becomes effective with a probability of 30%. Below, the example of the effect transition according to the operation of the specific decoration member SDY (shadow product) in the first suggestive pattern and the second suggestive pattern of the pre-operation suggestive effect will be described.

(First suggestion pattern)
326 and 327 show either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 during the reach effect by the lottery by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the change effect (reach effect) of the change pattern selected by the main control board 1310. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition of the reach production|presentation in which the pre-operation suggestion production of a 1st suggestion pattern is performed, when it is determined that operation is effective. In this reach effect, when the three decorative symbols are in the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 326(A)), the operation button which is determined in advance to be operation-enabled by the lottery of the peripheral control board 1510. The pre-operation suggestion effect of the first suggestion pattern is executed before the operation valid period for one of the operation means of 410 or the sword ornament 5001 is generated.
As a concrete effect content of the first suggestion pattern, an operation effect suggestion image (aura rotation) that suggests that the operation means is operation enabled in the display area of the effect display device 1600 before the operation effective period is generated. It is displayed (FIG. 326(B)), and at this time, the specific decoration member SDY (braid accessory) maintains the initial position. Further, there is no change in the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001.

Then, the operation effective period for the operation means (the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001) which is determined in advance to be operation effective is generated in the state where the specific decoration member SDY (braid accessory) is maintained at the initial position. Let In this example, when the operation button 5001 is enabled, the first suggestive pattern is set to be executed as a pre-operation suggestive effect at a higher rate than the second suggestive pattern (described later). In other words, when the operation effective period occurs in the state where the specific decorative member SDY (sliding material) is in the initial position, the operation button 410 is operated at a higher ratio than the sword ornament 5001. It can be suggested to the player.

When the operation button 410 becomes effective, as shown in FIG. 326(C), an operation effective period for the operation button 410 is generated in a state in which the specific decoration member SDY (braid accessory) maintains the initial position. Let At the same time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect is displayed in which an operation promotion image that prompts the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge that indicates the operation valid period are displayed. Further, at this time, the operation button 410 is decorated with light emission so that the player can easily recognize the operation target. Even when the sword ornament 5001 is enabled for operation, the pre-operation suggestion effect may be executed in the first suggestion pattern, although at a lower rate than the operation button 410. At that time, as shown in FIG. 326(D), the operation effective period for the sword ornament 5001 is generated in a state where the specific decoration member SDY (braid accessory) maintains the initial position. At the same time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect is displayed in which an operation promotion image that prompts the player to operate the sword decoration 5001 to store a sword and a gauge that indicates the operation valid period are displayed. Further, at this time, the sword decoration 5001 is changed from the sword storage state to the second sword removal state (the form with the aura member), and the sword operation can be performed by the player.

When the operation of the operation means (the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001) that is operationally effective is detected in FIG. 326(C) or (D) described above, if the result of the variable display this time is a big hit, The specific decoration member SDY (blend material) is dropped and moved from the initial state to the fully dropped state (FIG. 327 (CC1)). Next, when the specific decoration member SDY (shelter material) is returned to the initial state again, a big hit is notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600, in which the overlap with the specific decoration member SDY (shelter material) has been canceled. An image (decorative pattern stop mode “777”, “superb message” message) is displayed (FIG. 327 (CC2)). On the other hand, if the result of the variable display this time is out of alignment, the specific decoration member SDY (shadow product) remains in the initial state and is not movable, and the outflow is notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600. The image (decorative pattern stop mode “767”) is displayed (FIG. 327 (CC3)).

(Second suggestion pattern)
FIG. 328 shows the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern when it is determined that the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 is activated during the reach effect as in the case of the first suggestion pattern described above. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition of the reach production performed. In FIG. 329, although the second suggestion pattern is performed as the pre-operation suggestive effect, the sword decoration 5001 is not enabled for operation but the operation button 410 is once enabled for operation, and then the sword decoration is performed. It is a figure which shows the pre-operation suggestion production of the step-up pattern in which the operation of the body 5001 becomes effective.

As shown in FIG. 328 (AA1), the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern is either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 which has been previously determined to be operation valid by the lottery of the peripheral control board 1510. The operation is executed before the operation valid period for the operation means is generated. As a concrete effect content of the second suggestion pattern, an operation effect suggestion image (aura rotation) that suggests that the operation means is operation enabled in the display area of the effect display device 1600 before the operation effective period is generated. Is displayed. The operation effect suggestion image displayed at this time is the same as the image displayed in the first suggestion pattern, but in the second suggestion pattern, the operation effect suggestion image is displayed, and the specific decorative member SDY (blend product) is displayed. From the initial position, when viewed from the front, it operates in a small drop state (indication position) overlapping the upper portion of the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the specific decoration member SDY (shadow product) moves up and down between the initial position and the suggestion position. It can be moved in small directions. At this time, there is no change in the operation button 410 and the sword decoration.

Then, the operation effective period for the operation means (the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001) which is determined in advance to be operation-enabled while the specific decorative member SDY (sillary material) is moved to the suggestion position. generate. In this example, when the sword ornament 5001 is enabled for operation, the second suggestion pattern is set to be executed at a higher rate than the first suggestion pattern as the pre-operation suggestion effect. That is, when the operation effective period occurs in the state where the specific decorative member SDY (sliding material) is in the suggestion position, the sword decoration 5001 is set to be operation effective at a higher ratio than the operation button 410. It can be suggested to the player.

When the sword decoration 5001 is valid for operation, as shown in FIG. 328 (AA3), the operation valid period for the sword decoration 5001 in the state where the specific decoration member SDY (lens accessory) is operating at the suggested position. Generate. At the same time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect is displayed in which an operation promotion image that prompts the player to operate the sword decoration 5001 to store a sword and a gauge that indicates the operation valid period are displayed. At this time, the state of the sword decoration 5001 is changed from the sword-storing state to the second sword-slicing state (form with aura), so that the player can operate the sword-storing operation. Even when the operation button 410 is enabled, the pre-operation suggestion effect may be executed in the second suggestion pattern, although at a low rate. At that time, as shown in FIG. 328 (AA2), the operation effective period for the operation button 410 is generated in a state where the specific decoration member SDY (braid accessory) is operating at the suggestion position, and along with that, the effect display device 1600. In the display area, an operation promotion effect is displayed in which an operation promotion image that prompts the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge that indicates the operation valid period are displayed. In the second suggestion pattern, when the player's operation is detected in the operation promoting effect, the specific decoration member SDY (sill-shaped object) is moved from the state in which it is operating in the suggestion position to the initial state. In addition, the specific decorative member SDY (serving material) may be moved to the fully dropped state or the initial state from the state in which it is operating at the suggestion position without being returned to the initial state.

Then, when an operation to the operation means (operation button 410 or sword decoration 5001) which is operationally effective is detected in the above-mentioned FIG. 328 (AA2) or (AA3), the above-mentioned FIG. 326 (C) or (D) is displayed. Similarly, when the result of the variable display this time is a big hit, the specific decoration member SDY (braid accessory) is dropped and moved from the initial state to the full fall state (FIG. 327 (CC1)). Next, when the specific decoration member SDY (shelter material) is returned to the initial state again, a big hit is notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600, in which the overlap with the specific decoration member SDY (shelter material) has been canceled. An image (decorative pattern stop mode “777”, “superb message” message) is displayed (FIG. 327 (CC2)). On the other hand, if the result of the variable display this time is out of alignment, the specific decoration member SDY (shadow product) remains in the initial state and is not movable, and the outflow is notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600. The image (decorative pattern stop mode “767”) is displayed (FIG. 327 (CC3)). The effect transition after the operation promotion effect is the same as the effect transition after the operation promotion effect in the first suggestion pattern.

It should be noted that the operation pattern of the specific decorative member SDY (braid accessory) in the second suggestion pattern is not limited to the pattern operated at the suggestion position, and a plurality of operation patterns may be provided. For example, when a plurality of types of motion patterns are provided so that the ratio at which the sword ornament 5001 becomes effective is different, the player's interest in the motion can be increased, so that the specific decorative member SDY (blend product) is selected. It is possible to enhance the interest of the pre-operation suggestion effect and the operation promotion effect that are used.

(Step-up pattern)
In the case where the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern in which the operation effective period is generated in the state where the specific decorative member SDY (shadow curtain) is moved to the suggestion position is performed and the sword ornament 5001 becomes operation effective, In addition to the basic pattern of following the above-mentioned production transition of (AA1)→(AA3) in FIG. 328 until the sword decoration 5001 becomes valid, the operation button 410 becomes temporarily valid and then the sword decoration 5001 becomes A step-up pattern is provided to enable operation.

As shown in FIGS. 329 (BB1) to (BB4), the pre-operation suggestion effect of the step-up pattern is the operation effective period for the sword ornament 5001 which is previously determined to be operation effective by the lottery of the peripheral control board 1510. Is generated, that is, before the operation promotion effect of the sword decoration 5001 shown in FIG. 328 (AA3) described above is performed.

In the step-up pattern, first, the same operation effect suggestion image (aura rotation) as in FIG. 328 (AA1) is displayed, and the specific decorative member SDY (braid accessory) is moved in small steps (FIG. 329 (BB1)). ). Then, the operation effective period for the operation button 410 is generated in a state in which the specific decorative member SDY (braid accessory) is moved to the suggestion position. Along with that, the operation button 410 is decorated with light emission, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect is displayed in which an operation promotion image that prompts the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge that indicates the operation valid period are displayed. (FIG. 329 (BB2)). Here, even if the player's pressing operation of the operation button 410 is detected during the operation valid period of the operation button 410, the result notification as shown in FIG. 327 is not performed, and the switching suggesting the switching of the operation effective operation means is performed. A suggestion image (most blackout image) is displayed (FIG. 329 (BB3)). The switching suggestion image is displayed when the player presses the operation button 410 or when the operation valid period of the operation button 410 ends. After that, the sword decoration 5001 changes from the sword-putting state to the second sword-cutting state (form with aura), and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, operation means that become operationally effective is changed from the operation button 410 to the sword decoration 5001. A switch notification image (messages of "extraction chance" and "please check the sword") is displayed (Fig. 329 (BB4)). During this time, the specific decorative member SDY (shadow curtain) is in the state of being moved to the suggested position. Then, when the operation valid period of the sword decoration 5001 is generated, the operation promotion effect of the sword decoration 5001 shown in FIG. 328 (AA3) is performed. The effect transition after the operation promotion effect is the same as the effect transition (FIG. 327) after the operation promotion effect in the above-described second suggestive pattern.

Note that only the image display of the button operation 410 may be performed without enabling the button operation 410 (no operation promotion effect) in the case of FIG. 329 (BB2) described above.
It suffices if the sword decoration 5001 can be operated after the player's interest is once directed to the button operation 410. Further, the step-up pattern may be selectable not only when it becomes the second suggestive pattern but also when it becomes the first suggestive pattern.

As described above, in the pre-operation suggestion effect of this example, before the operation effective period of the operation means in which one of the plurality of operation means is set to be operation-effective is generated, the specific decorative member SDY (spare material). ), the position of () can be changed, and the operation means that the position is effective is suggested. Specifically, in the first suggestion pattern (FIG. 326(B)) in which the operation effective period is generated in the state where the specific decorative member SDY (sillary material) is located at the initial position, the operation button 410 is operated effectively. The second suggestion pattern (the sword ornament 5001 in FIG. 328 (AA1) is generated when the specific ornamental member SDY (braid accessory) is located at the suggestion position and the operation effective period is generated. Therefore, there is a high degree of expectation that the operation will be effective.Therefore, the player pays attention to the state of the specific decorative member SDY (silver accessory) in order to understand which operation means is effective, and therefore the pre-operation suggestion The interest of the production can be enhanced.

Further, in the second suggestion pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (blend accessory) is vertically moved in small increments in the pre-operation suggestion effect. Then, since the motion effect (falling effect) of the specific decorative member SDY (lens accessory) is also used for the result notification (FIG. 327) after the operation of the operation means, a series of drop effects are started from the pre-operation suggestion effect in small small steps. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of amusement of the game. In the above description, the state of the specific decorative member SDY (blind material), that is, the degree of expectation that the operation means that is operationally effective by the movable body is operationally effective, is not limited to this. You may display and suggest an expectation degree. Further, when the operation means to be operated is determined, not only the operation button 410 is turned on or the sword decoration body 5001 is changed to the second extraction state, but the operation means to be operated is moved by vibration or the like. You may.

Further, in the second suggestion pattern, after the operation button 410 is once activated (or when it appears that the operation is activated) in a state in which the specific decoration member SDY (braid accessory) is located at the suggestion position. (2) A step-up pattern is provided so that the sword ornament 5001 can be operated effectively. As a result, the player is interested in both operating means. Moreover, even if the operation button 410 becomes effective immediately after the pre-operation suggestion effect, it is possible to expect that the sword ornament 5001 may become effective after that. Therefore, the motivation for operation is reduced and the enjoyment of the game is reduced. Can be suppressed.

In the first suggestion pattern of the pre-operation suggestion effect, the operation effect suggestion image before the operation effective period in which any one of the plurality of operation means (the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001) is operation enabled is displayed. At the timing (FIG. 326(B)), similarly to the second suggestion pattern (FIG. 328(AA1)), the specific decorative member SDY (lens accessory) is displayed from the initial position in the display area of the effect display device 1600 in a front view. It is also possible to operate in a small drop state (indication position) that overlaps with the upper portion, and to make small vertical movements between the initial position and the suggestion position. It should be noted that when the operation valid period is subsequently generated, the specific decorative member SDY (sliding member) is returned to the initial position (stationary). As a result, the operation of the specific decorative member SDY (shadow product) in the first suggestive pattern is partly the same as the operation in the second suggestive pattern at the same timing, so that the player is instructed to produce an operation according to the first suggestive pattern. Even when the image is displayed, it is possible to make the user think that the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern is being executed. Therefore, even when the pre-operation suggestion effect based on the first suggestion pattern is being executed, it is possible to expect the player to operate the sword decoration 5001 effectively. Then, the player strongly desires that the operation effective period occurs in a state in which the specific decorative member SDY (shadow product) which is operated at the display timing of the operation effect suggestion image is operated, so that the pre-operation suggestion is suggested. The interest of the production can be improved.

[Specific operation related performance]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, when a specific result is obtained by the effect determination according to the result of the jackpot determination, the specific effect is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. Perform production with patterns. In the production period in which the specific production pattern is executed, a specific production reception period (effective period) in which a specific production execution condition is satisfied can be generated by an operation by the player, and the operation is performed within the specific production reception period. In addition, it is possible to execute a specific operation effect (an effect in which the degree of expectation regarding privilege grant is suggested) based on the establishment of a specific effect execution condition. The degree of expectation related to the grant of a privilege suggested as a result of the specific operation effect may be 100% or 0%.

In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the operation means is used as an operation means provided for such an operation effect (an effect that suggests the degree of expectation for privilege granting when operated). In addition to the button 410, it is possible to further include operation means (sword decoration 5001 and the like) other than this. In this regard, in the specific effect pattern, when the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 based on the result of the effect determination (when the specific effect execution condition is satisfied when the operation button 410 is operated), There is a case where an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (such as the sword ornament 5001) (when a specific effect execution condition is satisfied when the other operation means is operated). Then, when an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (such as the sword decoration 5001), even if the operation opportunity is not performed, the pre-operation effect that the operation opportunity is given is generated. It is made possible for the player to recognize that the degree of expectation (a big hit expectation degree) for granting the privilege is higher than that when the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410. The degree of expectation of privilege provision suggested when an operation opportunity is provided to another operation means (such as the sword decoration 5001) may be 100% or 0%.

According to such a configuration, when an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (sword decoration body 5001 or the like), an operation corresponding to the operation to the other operation means (sword decoration body 5001 or the like) is performed. It is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game when the player is in the stage where the effect has not yet been performed and the operation is about to be performed. That is, in this case, a desired effect result (an effect result which suggests that the degree of expectation for privilege award is high, etc.) does not appear in the operation effect corresponding to the operation on another operation means (sword ornament 5001 or the like). Even if it is not possible to operate the operation means within the specific effect reception period (effective period), it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game through such operation-related effects. Become.

In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, an operation opportunity is given to any of a plurality of operation means (operation buttons 410, sword ornament 5001 and the like) having such a rendering property. In such a case, a common operation-related effect can be executed when the operation opportunities are given.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, at least as an effect mode for generating an effective period (effect reception period) in which an operation on the operation button 410 is activated (allows effect reception),
When the operation on the sword ornament 5001 is activated (reception acceptance possible), the operation on the operation button 410 is activated (reception acceptance enabled) after the "specific operation-related demonstration" that can appear. ) A first effect mode in which an effective period (effect reception period) is generated, and the operation for the operation button 410 is enabled (the effect can be accepted) without the "specific operation-related effect" being started. A plurality of effect modes such as a second effect mode for generating an effective period (effect acceptance period) that is generated are prepared, and an operation on the operation button 410 is activated (effect by effecting one of these effect modes). An effective period (reception acceptance period) during which the reception is possible is generated.

According to such a configuration, there is a case where there is a period during which the operation of the specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) of the plurality of operation means (the operation button 410, the sword ornament 5001, etc.) can be received. Regardless of whether or not there is a period during which the operation means other than the specific operation means (for example, the sword decoration 5001) can receive the effect, the common operation (specification ), the operation-related effect can be executed, so that it becomes possible to have an interest as to which of the specific operation means and another operation means can accept the effect. By causing the operation to be performed while the game is being performed, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

Note that in such a common (specific) operation-related effect, any one of a plurality of operation means (for example, the operation button 410, the sword ornament 5001) is responded to when a predetermined time elapses after the effect is started. An effect reception period will be generated, but at least at the time when the effect is started, which of the operation means (for example, the operation button 410, the sword ornament 5001) the effect reception period occurs It is desirable to keep it confidential.

Hereinafter, some effect modes that can be adopted when performing such a common (specific) operation-related effect will be sequentially described. In each of the following description examples and the other examples thereof, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are used as a plurality of operation means that are targets of common (specific) operation-related effects. The types of operating means are not limited to these, and three or more operating means may be prepared as a plurality of operating means targeted for a common (specific) operation-related effect. Further, in the following performance examples and other examples thereof, mainly, the content of the performance in the case where any performance reception period occurs after the common (specific) operation-related performance is executed is shown. In the case where one of the effect reception periods occurs without the operation-related effect being performed), the effect content may be omitted. However, the content of the effect when any effect reception period occurs without the common (specific) operation-related effect being executed is as shown in, for example, FIGS. 206(E) and (G). .. That is, in this case, an operation instruction image prompting an operation on the operation button 410 appears or an operation instruction image prompting an operation on the sword ornament 5001 appears without a specific operation-related effect being executed. Furthermore, in each of the following performance examples and other examples thereof, a common (specific) operation-related performance is performed when the reach state is not formed, but the reach state is formed and the reach performance is performed. It is also possible to generate a common (specific) operation-related effect as an image different from the effect image displayed as the reach effect during the period when is executed, or common during the execution period of the jackpot game. A (specific) operation-related effect may be generated.

In addition, each of the effects described below can be appropriately combined with the effects of other examples to be described later, and can also be appropriately combined with the above-described effects. It is possible. Each effect described below can be combined by substituting a part of it with each other example effect described later, and when the first effect pattern is executed, each effect described below is performed. Then, when the second effect pattern is executed, it is also possible to perform the effect of each of different examples described later. The same thing can be said during the production of each of the other examples described later.

[First production mode]
In FIGS. 330 and 331, at least one of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 can receive an effect during the period in which the specific operation-related effect is being executed after the specific operation-related effect is started. It is the figure which shows the production example (the 1st production aspect) which is done.

In FIG. 330(a), in the normal game state, the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed on the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot judgment in a state where the number of holdings is 0. Shows the production situation.

FIG. 330( b) shows an effect situation in which a specific operation-related effect is started during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 330( a ).

Here, in the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 330(b), the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 are displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. A display for moving each inside is displayed. In this way, a plurality of types of operation-related images (here, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG) corresponding to different types of operation means are simultaneously displayed in the display area, so that the operation button 410 and the sword are displayed. It is suggested that an operation on any of those operating means (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001) will soon be able to receive the effect, while it remains unclear which of the ornaments 5001 is allowed to receive the effect. You will be able to.

In FIG. 330(c), the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 330(b) is advanced, and both the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 are displayed. An instruction display (in this case, a character display such as “operate”) and a performance reception that prompts the user to operate any of the operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001) in a state where the display is stopped in each area. A bar display indicating the remaining time of the possible period) is displayed to show the production situation.

According to such an effect mode, although the operation on at least one of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 can be accepted as an effect, those operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001). It becomes possible to make it unclear which one of them is allowed to receive the performance. This is the same effect mode (FIG. 330(c)) in both the situation in which the operation on the operation button 410 can accept the effect and the situation in which the operation on the sword ornament 5001 can accept the effect. Because it is displayed, it is none other than that. That is, in this effect example (first effect mode), a plurality of operation means are operated before the operation on at least one of the plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001) can be accepted. Common (specific) operation relations as shown in FIGS. 330(b) and 330(c) over a period until after the operation for at least one of the (operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001) is ready to receive an effect. I'm trying to perform the performance.

Therefore, not only this effect example but also each effect example described below and other examples thereof, the effect content of the specific operation-related effect is limited to the content shown in FIGS. 330(b) and (c). Absent. In short, when the specific operation-related effect is executed, at least one of the effect reception period for the operation button 410 and the effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 is thereafter (here, the execution period of the specific operation-related effect). It only has to occur in the middle).
With such a configuration, it is unclear which one of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 can receive the effect, and at least one of those operation means (the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001). It is possible to suggest that the operation for one is acceptable for the performance. For example, it is not necessary to simultaneously display a plurality of types of operation-related images (here, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG) corresponding to different types of operating means, and the button image BTG and the sword decoration are not necessarily displayed at the same time. It is also possible to cause none of the images SYG to appear and to cause a different effect image to appear as a specific operation-related effect.

However, in order to more securely conceal which one of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 can receive the effect, a case where an effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs and an effect for the sword decoration 5001 are generated. It is more desirable to set the time required from the execution of the specific operation-related effect (start of effect) to the occurrence of the effect acceptance period to be the same as when the acceptance period occurs.

In addition, although it is unclear which of the operation means should be operated as the operation instruction displayed while the specific operation-related effect is being performed, a display prompting an operation for any of the operation means (“ Etc.), and always operate a specific operation means of the plurality of operation means, regardless of how the plurality of operation means can accept the effect. The display may be such that it prompts the user. In short, as the operation instruction, the same effect mode is made to appear in both the situation in which the operation on the operation button 410 can accept the effect and the situation in which the operation on the sword ornament 5001 can accept the effect. By doing so, it becomes possible to give an operation opportunity while keeping it secret which of the plurality of operation means is allowed to receive the effect.

Further, in the example of the effect (first effect mode) shown in FIG. 330(c), it is concealed which operation of the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 can accept the effect. , Whether the operation on the sword decoration 5001 can accept the performance, or the operation on the sword decoration 5001 cannot accept the performance (in any of the first to third situations described below). However, only the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 is in a light emitting state to prompt the operation of the operation button 410. However, instead of this, both the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 may be in a non-light emitting state, or a light emitting means may be provided on the side of the sword decoration 5001 to connect the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001. Both may be made to emit light.

Here, in this effect example (first effect mode), the effect state in which the image shown in FIG. 330(c) appears is that only the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 is operated. It is in the first situation in which the production can be received, in the second situation in which only the operation on the sword decoration 5001 can be received, or the operation on the operation button 410 and the operation on the sword decoration 5001. Both are set to be in one of the third situations in which the production can be received. If a second situation (a situation in which an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001) occurs among these plural situations, the first situation (an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410). The situation is such that the degree of expectation for awarding is higher than when the situation) occurs. Therefore, the ratio of occurrence of the second situation (the situation in which the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001) within the pattern variation according to the result of the jackpot determination is the first situation (the operation opportunity for the operation button 410). It is desirable that the rate is set lower than the rate at which the situation) is generated.

Then, in this effect example (first effect mode), the operation button 410 is operated when in any of the first condition (operation button 410) and the third condition (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001). Is performed (whether the “FF” in the figure is advanced), or in any of the second situation (sword decoration 5001) and the third situation (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001). When an operation is performed on the sword ornament 5001 (when "GG" in the figure is progressed), an effect reception is made and an operation time effect corresponding to the operation (FIGS. 331(d) and 331(f)). Is to be done.

In the on-operation production, in any of the situations shown in FIGS. 331 (d) and (f), the specific decoration member SDY is displaced to the front of the display area, and a predetermined display production is performed on the production display device 1600. ("Chance!") is executed. Note that, as the predetermined display effects, for example, “chance !!” that indicates a relatively low degree of expectation and “intense heat!!” that indicates a relatively high degree of expectation. It is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for granting a privilege by preparing a plurality of effect modes such as the above and displaying one of these effect modes in accordance with effect acceptance. With respect to the operation of the specific decoration member SDY as well, similarly to this, for example, by providing an effect mode in which an operation of displacing to the front of the display area is not performed and one of these effect modes appears in response to effect reception. Alternatively, the degree of expectation for granting a privilege may be suggested. The degree of expectation may be “100%” or “0%”.

Moreover, in the operation-time effect according to this effect example (first effect mode), effect reception is performed by an operation by the player in any of the situations shown in FIGS. 331 (d) and (f). Then, it is possible to execute the control to bring the operating means into the operating state (a state different from the non-operating state before the operation) based on the operation.

More specifically, first, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 331(d), although the operation button 410 is operated by the player, the operation is performed in response to the effect acceptance. The control for reciprocating the sword decoration 5001 on the side not performed between the first position and the second position can be executed. According to such a configuration, although the effect reception is generated as a result of the operation of the operation button 410 by the player and the operation-time effect on the operation button 410 side is executed, Even if the sword decoration 5001 on the higher expectation side is operated without operating the button 410, the effect reception may have occurred and the operation effect on the sword decoration 5001 side may have been executed. It is possible to appeal the possibility to the player.

On the other hand, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 331(f), as a result of the player performing the sword removal operation on the sword decoration body 5001, the sword decoration body 5001 is placed at the sword position according to the reception of the effect. It is possible to execute control to maintain the sword at the sword removal position (sword removal state) instead of returning to the (sword sword removal state). As a result, the sword decoration body 5001 is moved from the sword sword position (the sword sword state) to the sword extraction position (the sword extraction state) based on the operation by the player, and is in the state of being maintained in such a sword extraction state. Occasionally, an operation effect will be performed. Therefore, even if the same effect (specific decoration member SDY, a predetermined display effect, etc.) is executed in the operation effect on the operation button 410 side and the operation effect on the sword decoration body 5001 side, the sword decoration body at that time is executed. By confirming the operation state of 5001, it becomes possible to give a feeling that the operation effect caused by the operation on the side of the sword decoration 5001 is being executed.

Then, after the effect at the time of operation (FIGS. 331(d) and (f)) is performed in this way, as shown in FIG. 331(e), the reach state can be formed and the reach effect can be performed. However, since there is a possibility that the effect using the sword ornament 5001 is executed during the reach effect execution period, either the operation effect on the operation button 410 side or the operation effect on the sword ornament 5001 side is executed. Even when it is executed, when the predetermined time has passed (before the reach effect is started), the sword decoration body 5001 is in the non-operated state (the sword position (the sword state)). Control to return to will be performed. However, in order to suitably obtain the above-described effects, the sword decoration 5001 has at least half the period from the movement of the specific decoration member SDY to the display area side to the return to the initial position (non-driving position). It is desirable that the operation state (reciprocating operation, or maintaining in a sword cutting state) be continued for a period of. Further, with respect to the sword decoration body 5001, it is necessary to end the operation state of the specific decoration member SDY at an earlier stage than to return it to the initial position (non-driving position) so that the driving force is not applied. More desirable in relation to the amount (movable load).

According to the effect example (first effect mode) shown in FIGS. 330 and 331, a specific operation means (for example, a sword decoration) among a plurality of operation means (operation button 410 and sword decoration 5001). 5001) whether the production can be received or not, the common (specific) operation-related production is started, and the common (specific) of which the production is started is started. While the operation-related effect is being executed, a specific operation means (for example, sword decoration body 5001) can accept the effect, and the specific operation means (for example, sword decoration object 5001) cannot accept the effect. Since the operation button 410 is allowed to receive the effect, the specific operation means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) and another operation means (for example, the operation button 410) can receive the effect. It becomes possible to give an operation opportunity in the state where it is kept secret.

In this effect example (first effect mode), in particular, a specific operation means (for example, a sword decoration body 5001) can accept an effect, or the specific operation means (for example, a sword decoration body 5001) is an effect. Regardless of whether or not the operation button 410 can accept the effect without being accepted, when the operation opportunity is given while such a common (specific) operation-related effect is being performed, the operation button 410 and Due to the fact that only the operation button 410 of the sword decoration body 5001 emits light, even if the sword decoration body 5001 can accept the effect, the sword decoration body 5001 can accept the effect. You will be able to mislead as if you were not there. That is, in this case, when the effect is received, it is possible to prompt the operation of the operation button 410 on the lower side, rather than the sword ornament 5001 which is the side on which the rate of relatively high expected effect is performed. It becomes possible to expect that the operation means should be operated when a common (specific) operation-related effect is performed.

When such a common (specific) operation-related effect is being performed, when the operation means on the side that is not ready to receive the effect (the side on which the effect reception period has not occurred) is operated, No reaction will occur. However, it is possible to enjoy the demerit that the effect reception period is consumed by the amount of such an erroneous operation and the remaining time is reduced.

However, when the operation means on the side that is not ready to receive the effect (the side for which the effect reception period has not occurred) is operated while the common (specific) operation-related effect is performed, Although the effect reception required for execution of the effect (specific decorative member SDY, predetermined display effect, etc.) is not established, the detection of the operation itself is performed, and the operation on the side that can accept the effect based on the detection. You may make it perform control which ends the production|generation reception period with respect to a means at that time. According to such a configuration, there is a risk that the operation opportunity is lost. Therefore, it is possible to encourage careful operation by carefully considering which of the plurality of operation means is capable of receiving the performance. become able to.

Further, in the above-described effect example (first effect mode), the same effect (specific decorative member SDY, predetermined display effect, etc.) is obtained in the operation effect on the operation button 410 side and the operation effect on the sword decoration body 5001 side. Although it is configured to be executed, these operation-time effects may have different effect contents.
For example, in the operation effect on the sword ornament 5001 side, in addition to the effect mode performed by the operation effect on the operation button 410 side, another effect mode (for example, a light emitting unit different from the effect display device 1600 emits light, etc.). , An original effect sound is generated), it is possible to more appropriately improve the enjoyment of the game when the operation on the sword ornament 5001 is accepted as an effect.

Further, when preparing another effect mode that can be executed only when the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001) is operated, it is involved in the occurrence of the other effect mode. When the effect reception period is set for the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001), the effect reception period relating to the generation of the different effect mode is not set. The performance acceptance period for the second operation means (for example, if the first operation means is the operation button 410, it is the sword decoration body 5001, and if the first operation means is the sword decoration body 5001, the operation button 410). Regardless of whether the operation is performed or not, when the first operation means is operated in the situation shown in FIG. 330(c), the operation effect may be performed. That is, in this case, when a common (specific) operation-related effect is being performed and an operation for the first operation means is performed while an effect reception period relating to the occurrence of the other effect mode is set, While another effect mode is executed as the operation effect, when a common (specific) operation-related effect is being performed and an effect acceptance period relating to the occurrence of the other effect mode is not set (( (When the effect reception period for the second operation means is set), when there is an operation for the first operation means, another effect mode is not executed as the operation effect, but when the operation button 410 is operated. The same operation effect will be performed. In short, when the effect reception period related to the generation of another effect mode is not set for the first operation means, the effect reception period related to the generation of the operation effect on the second operation means side is set to the second operation time. Settings are made for both the operating means and the first operating means. In addition, when another effect mode is made to appear as the operation time effect, the second operation mode is not made to appear in addition to the effect mode performed by the operation time effect on the second operation means side. The operation-time effect may be performed as effect contents different from the operation-time effect on the means side.

In the example of the above-mentioned effect (first effect mode), the situation in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears while the common (specific) operation-related effect is performed is the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001. A first situation in which only the operation on the operation button 410 can accept the performance, a second situation in which only the operation on the sword decoration 5001 can accept the performance, and an operation on the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001. Both the operation and the operation are set to correspond to any of the third situations in which the production can be received. In addition, in this case, in the first situation and the second situation, the same operation effect is made to appear when the effect reception is made, whereas in the third situation, an operation effect different from both the first situation and the second situation is made. It is desirable that an effect or another effect mode (different from the operation effect in the first situation and the second situation) appears. However, in the above-mentioned production example, the third situation is not necessarily required.

Further, although the operation button 410 according to the above-described example of performance is not provided as the operation means to which the driving force is applied under the control of the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the operation button 410 is provided as the operable operation means. In the above-described effect example (first effect mode), in the effect situation shown in FIG. 331(f), no operation is performed by the player as in the effect situation shown in FIG. 331(d). The control for operating the operation button 410 on the other side may be made executable. In such control, it is important to operate at least the operation means on the side not operated by the player. At this time, the operation means on the side operated by the player is also operated. Whether or not it may be designed appropriately. However, regarding the control for operating the operation means on the side not operated by the player, at a stage earlier than the time when the specific decorative member SDY provided on the game board 5 side returns to the initial position (non-driving position). It is desirable to end the operation state and allow the gaze by the player to be naturally returned to the game board 5 side.

Further, when the operation button 410 is provided as an operable operation means, the drive source for applying the drive force to the operation button 410 and the drive source for applying the drive force to the sword decoration 5001 are different drive sources. The same drive source may be used.

[Second production mode]
332 to 335 are to be executed as an effect that shows the progress of the effect until the specific operation-related effect appears either the first effect result or the second effect result. When the first effect result appears, the effect reception period for the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means is suggested, and when the second effect result appears as the result of the effect, the plurality of operation means are generated. It is a diagram showing an example of an effect (second effect mode) in which it is suggested that an effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 will occur.

332 (a), in the normal game state, the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed on the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit judgment in the state where the number of holdings is 0. Shows the production situation.

FIG. 332(b) shows an effect situation in which a specific operation-related effect is started during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 332(a).

Here, in the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 332(b), the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 are displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. The images are simultaneously displayed in the figure, and the state that the lightning bolt image IZ is acting on the images BTG and SYG is depicted. In this way, a plurality of types of operation-related images (here, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG) corresponding to different types of operation means are simultaneously displayed in the display area, so that the operation button 410 and the sword are displayed. It is suggested that an operation on any of those operating means (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001) will soon be able to receive the effect, while it remains unclear which of the ornaments 5001 is allowed to receive the effect. You will be able to.

In FIG. 332(c), the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 332(b) has progressed, and the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 are displayed as effects. An effect of pushing each other out of the display area of the device 1600 by pushing each other is performed.

That is, the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 332 (b) and (c)) related to this effect example (second effect mode) is “the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG are pressed against each other, Which of BTG and SYG is left in the display area?” is executed as an effect, and when the effect result (first effect result) in which the button image BTG is left appears, effect reception for the operation button 410 is performed. When a period occurs and a production result (second production result) in which the sword decoration image SYG is left appears, a production reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 is generated. Therefore, in this effect example (second effect mode), the effect shown in FIGS. 332 (b) and (c) is “any of the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 and the effect acceptance period for the sword ornament 5001. Even if occurs, it corresponds to "a specific operation-related effect that can appear prior to the occurrence of those periods".

Note that the left side of FIG. 332(c) depicts a state in which the button image BTG remains dominant in the display area, and the right side of the figure shows the sword decoration image SYG. It depicts a situation in which it remains in a dominant position to remain in the area. In a specific operation-related effect, such a situation of inferiority/dominance changes momentarily with time.

FIG. 333(d) shows that the sword decoration image SYG is completely pushed out of the display area and the button image BTG is left in the display area as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 332(c). (1st effect result) is performed. When progressing to this effect content, the effect acceptance period for the sword ornament 5001 does not occur, and only the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs.

That is, a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 332(b) and (c)) that suggests that an operation opportunity will be given soon while keeping it secret which of the plurality of operation means can accept the effect is executed. As a result, the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 is not displayed in the display area, and the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area (FIG. 333(d)). By executing the above, it becomes possible to recognize that the operation on the operation button 410 of the plurality of operation means can be accepted for reception (the effect reception period for the operation button 410 is generated).

In addition, at this time, in addition to the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410, an instruction display (a character display such as “press” and a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) that prompts the operation is displayed, and thus a plurality of images are displayed. It becomes possible to recognize that the operation of the operation button 410 of the operation means is in a state in which an effect can be received (that is, during an effect reception period for the operation button 410). In particular, in this effect example, even if only the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 is set to the light emitting state, the operation of the operation button 410 is prompted.

Note that the effect shown in FIG. 333(d) is not limited to the case where the effect is advanced through a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 332(b), (c), etc.) or without the specific operation-related effect. In some cases, production progress (for example, production progress from the production state shown in FIG. 332(a)) is performed. However, even if the same effect shown in FIG. 333(d) is performed, if the effect is performed through a specific operation-related effect, or if the effect is performed without the specific operation-related effect. It is desirable that the degree of expectation for granting the privilege is higher than that.

Also, regarding the length of the effect reception period, when the effect (FIG. 333(d)) in which the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 is performed through the specific operation-related effect, the specific operation-related effect is performed. Proportion in which the length of the effect reception period generated for the operation button 410 is shorter than that in the case where the effect (FIG. 333(d)) in which the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 is performed without passing through It is desirable to have a high value. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game due to a later-described dramatic extension when a specific operation-related effect is passed.

In FIG. 333(e), as a result of the operation shown in FIG. 333(d) being performed on the operation button 410 among the plurality of operating means, the effect reception is performed and the operation is responded to. This is a depiction of how a performance during operation is performed.

The operation effect shown in FIG. 333(e) is the same as that in FIG. 331(d). That is, in the operation effect shown in FIG. 333(e), the specific decoration member SDY is displaced to the front side of the display area, and a predetermined display effect (“chance !!”) is executed on the effect display device 1600. It has become. At this time, even though the player has operated the operation button 410, the sword ornament 5001 on the side where the operation has not been performed is set to the first position and the second position in response to the reception of the effect. It is also the same that the control of reciprocating between the position and the position (control of making the operating state) is executable. Note that, as the predetermined display effects, for example, “chance !!” that indicates a relatively low degree of expectation and “intense heat!!” that indicates a relatively high degree of expectation. It is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for granting a privilege by preparing a plurality of effect modes such as the above and displaying one of these effect modes in accordance with effect acceptance. Similarly to the operation of the specific decorative member SDY, for example, an effect mode in which an operation of displacing to the front side of the display area is not performed is provided, and one of these effect modes is caused to appear according to the effect reception. Therefore, the degree of expectation for granting the privilege may be suggested. The degree of expectation may be “100%” or “0%”.

Then, after such an operation effect (FIG. 333(e)) is performed, as shown in FIG. 333(f), the reach state is formed and the reach effect can be performed. However, since the effect using the sword decoration 5001 may be executed during the reach effect execution period, when a predetermined time has elapsed after the operation effect was executed (the reach effect is started. The control to return the sword decoration 5001 to the non-operated state (the sword storage state) will be performed (at a stage before that). However, in order to suitably obtain the above-described effects, the sword decoration 5001 has at least half the period from the movement of the specific decoration member SDY to the display area side to the return to the initial position (non-driving position). It is desirable that the operation state (reciprocating operation, or maintaining in a sword cutting state) be continued for a period of. Further, with respect to the sword decoration body 5001, it is necessary to end the operation state of the specific decoration member SDY at an earlier stage than to return it to the initial position (non-driving position) so that the driving force is not applied. More desirable in relation to the amount (movable load).

On the other hand, in FIG. 334(g), as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 332(c), the button image BTG is completely pushed out of the display area, and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the display area. An effect that depicts the remaining state is being performed (second effect result). When progressing to this effect content, the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 does not occur, but only the effect acceptance period for the sword ornament 5001 occurs.

That is, a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 332(b) and (c)) that suggests that an operation opportunity will be given soon while keeping it secret which of the plurality of operation means can accept the effect is executed. As a result, the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is not displayed in the display area, and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 is displayed in the display area (FIG. 334(g)). Is performed, it becomes possible to recognize that the operation on the sword decoration 5001 of the plurality of operation means can be performed (the production reception period for the sword decoration 5001 is generated). ..

At this time, in addition to the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001, an instruction display for prompting an operation (character display such as "pull out sword" or bar display showing remaining time of performance reception period) is displayed. Then, it becomes possible to recognize that the operation on the sword decoration 5001 among the plurality of operation means is ready to receive the effect (during the effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001). In particular, in this example of performance, only the operation unit including the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 including the sword decoration 5001 (the sword decoration 5001 itself may be set to the light emitting state) is turned on. By doing so, the operation on the sword decoration 5001 is prompted.

The effect shown in FIG. 334(g) is not limited to the case where the effect is advanced through a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 332(b), (c), etc.), or without the specific operation-related effect. In some cases, production progress (for example, production progress from the production state shown in FIG. 332(a)) is performed. However, even if the same effect shown in FIG. 334(g) is performed, if the effect is performed through a specific operation-related effect, or if the effect is performed without the specific operation-related effect. It is desirable that the degree of expectation for granting the privilege is higher than that. Furthermore, to be more specific, when the effect shown in FIG. 333(d) is performed after the specific operation-related effect, the effect shown in FIG. 334(g) is performed without the specific operation-related effect. It is possible to make the expectation degree for the privilege grant higher than that for the case, and to lower the expectation degree for the privilege grant as compared with the case where the effect shown in FIG. 334(g) is performed through a specific operation-related effect. desirable.

FIG. 334(h) shows that, as a result of the operation shown in FIG. 334(g) being performed on the sword ornament 5001 among the plurality of operating means, the effect reception is performed and the operation is accepted. It is a depiction of a situation in which a performance during operation is being performed.

In the operation effect shown in FIG. 334(h), basically, similar to the operation effect shown in FIG. 333(e), the specific decoration member SDY is displaced to the front side of the display area, and the effect display device is provided. At 1600, a predetermined display effect is executed. In addition, here, a production mode such as “intense heat!!”, which is suggested to have a relatively high degree of expectation, is displayed according to the production reception, but it is suggested that the degree of expectation is relatively low. In some cases, “chance!!” will be displayed. As for the operation of the specific decoration member SDY, similarly, as in this case, for example, an effect mode in which the operation of displacing to the front side of the display area is not performed is provided, and one of these effect modes appears in response to the effect reception. By doing so, the degree of expectation for granting the privilege may be suggested. The degree of expectation may be “100%” or “0%”.

However, in the operation effect shown in FIG. 334(h), the effect mode of the sword decoration body 5001 itself changes to one of the plurality of modes described above based on the operation on the sword decoration body 5001 ( It is possible to change from the stage 0 form shown in FIG. 311 to any one of the stage 1 form to the stage 3 form. Depending on which of these forms appears, the degree of expectation for granting a bonus such as a jackpot can be increased. Height has come to be suggested.

Moreover, as shown in FIG. 334(i), even if the operation effect (FIG. 334(h)) is ended and the specific decoration member SDY is returned to the initial position (non-driving position), The sword decoration body 5001 is not returned to the sword state but is kept in the sword state. That is, in this effect example, although not shown, the sword decoration body 5001 is kept in the extracted state, and thereafter (while the reach effect is performed, etc.), the sword decoration body 5001 is put in the sword state. An operation opportunity for operation is further provided, and in that case, an operation time effect corresponding to the operation to the sword storage state can be further executed.

According to such a configuration, an operation opportunity is given to one operation means (sword decoration body 5001) in two steps, and the first step operation (operation to the sword extraction state) and the second step operation. Since the effect at the time of operation is performed in response to each operation (operation to the sword state), not only when the operation means (sword decoration 5001) is being operated, but also at the first stage. It is expected that amusement with respect to the operation will be favorably maintained even during the non-operation period from the time when the operation (operation to the sword cutting state) is performed until the operation at the second stage (operation to the sword cutting state) is performed. Become so. It is desirable that the first-step operation and the second-step operation are different operation modes (here, operations in opposite directions). In addition, it is preferable that the operation-time effect corresponding to the first-step operation and the operation-time effect corresponding to the second-step operation have different effect contents.

Further, when the operation effect (FIG. 334(h)) corresponding to the operation of the first stage is performed, the sword decoration body 5001 is not always maintained in the extracted state, and is not maintained in the extracted state. In this case, it is desirable not to give the operation opportunity of the second stage. Whether the sword decoration body 5001 is maintained at a position (extracting blade state) where the operation opportunity of the second stage (operation opportunity from the sword cutting state to the sword cutting state) can be given in the operation time production corresponding to the operation of the first step It may be executed as an effect that indicates the degree of expectation. That is, when the sword decoration 5001 is returned to the sword cutting state without being maintained in the sword cutting state, it is practically impossible to give a second stage operation opportunity (operation opportunity from the sword cutting state to the sword cutting state). It is obvious that The degree of expectation may be “100%” or “0%”.

As a result of performing the operation effect (FIG. 334(h)) corresponding to the operation of the first stage, when the sword decoration 5001 is not maintained in the extracted state, when a predetermined time has elapsed (reach effect The control is performed to return the sword decoration 5001 to the non-driving state (the sword storage state) before the start of (1). However, in this case, with respect to the sword decoration 5001, the operating state (reciprocating) of at least half of the period from the movement of the specific decoration member SDY toward the display area side to the return to the initial position (non-driving position). It is desirable to continue the operation or the maintenance of the sword removal state. Further, with respect to the sword decoration body 5001, it is necessary to end the operation state of the specific decoration member SDY at an earlier stage than to return it to the initial position (non-driving position) so that the driving force is not applied. More desirable in relation to the amount (movable load).

On the other hand, in FIG. 335(j), as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 332(c), as in the case of FIG. 333(d), the sword decoration image SYG is completely pushed out of the display area. Then, an effect is depicted in which the button image BTG is left in the display area. That is, in this effect example (second effect mode), when a predetermined time has elapsed after the effect shown in FIG. 332(c) was performed, the effect shown in FIG. 333(d) or the effect shown in FIG. 334(g). Either the effect shown in Fig. 335 or the effect shown in Fig. 335(j) appears. It should be noted that which effect content appears will be determined in advance in the effect pattern determination process according to the result of the big hit determination.

However, in the effect shown in FIG. 335(j), different from the case of the effect shown in FIG. 333(d), the effect that was performed in the specific operation-related effect (FIG. 332(b), (c)). (Here, the lightning bolt image IZ) continues, and it is suggested that such a lightning bolt image IZ may cause some change in the button image BTG.

In addition, in the effect shown in FIG. 335(j), an instruction display for prompting an operation (a character display such as “press” and a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) is not displayed. ) Is different from the case of the production shown in. As a result, although the sword decoration image SYG is completely pushed out of the display area and the button image BTG is left in the display area, the effect reception period for the button image BTG has not yet occurred. It becomes possible to recognize that there is something.

In FIG. 335(k), as a result of the progress of the effect shown in FIG. 335(j), the lightning bolt image IZ acts on the button image BTG, the button image BTG is wrapped in haze MY, and even its outline drawing is lost. The production is being broken.

In other words, in the effect shown in FIG. 335(k), all effect elements (button image BTG) that have suggested that the operation on the operation button 410 can accept the effect will be removed. Therefore, although there is a situation once suggested by the effect shown in FIG. 335(j) that the operation on the operation button 410 can be accepted, the effect shown in FIG. 335(k) appears. As a result, it is possible to have a suspicion that the effect reception period for the operation button 410 will be generated.

Note that, also in the effect shown in FIG. 335(k), the effect display (here, the lightning bolt image IZ) performed in the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 332(b) and (c)) is continued. .. However, here, the mode of the lightning bolt image IZ is changing (disappearing), and the remaining time until it is definitively shown to which of the plurality of operating means the performance acceptance period will occur becomes small. Suggesting that

In FIG. 335(i), as a result of the development shown in FIG. 335(k), the outer shape of the haze MY approaches the sword decoration body 5001 (sword decoration image SYG) rather than the operation button 410 (button image BTG). A production that depicts the state of being brought is being performed.

According to such a configuration, although the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed yet, it is suggested that a performance reception period may occur for the sword decoration body 5001 instead of the operation button 410 due to the outer shape of the haze MY. You will be able to.

Also, in the effect shown in FIG. 335(i), the effect display (here, the lightning bolt image IZ) that has been performed in the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 332(b) and (c)) is continued. .. However, here, the aspect of the lightning bolt image IZ is further changed (immediately before disappearing) as compared with the case of FIG. 335(k), and until it is definitely shown to which of the plurality of operating means the performance acceptance period occurs. Suggests that the remaining time of the is less than expected.

Then, in this effect example (second effect mode), when the effect shown in FIG. 335(i) further progresses and the haze MY is hidden, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed and FIG. The effect shown in (g) is performed.

With such a configuration, as a result of performing the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 332 (b) and (c)), the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the button image BTG is displayed. Even if it is done (FIG. 333(d), FIG. 335(j)), there is still a possibility that a performance reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 will occur, so that the entertainment of the game is maintained. Will be able to.

In particular, in this effect example (second effect mode), the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed and the button image BTG is displayed on the effect display device 1600 (FIGS. 333(d) and 335(j)). , The production for the sword decoration 5001 by confirming whether or not the production display by the lightning image IZ that has appeared in the specific operation-related production (FIGS. 332 (b) and (c)) is still continued. It is possible to know whether there is a possibility that the reception period will occur, and this also makes it possible to maintain the entertainment of the game.

In this effect example (second effect mode), when the effect shown in FIG. 335(j) appears, the button image BTG is hidden by the haze MY (FIG. 335(k)), and When the production is advanced, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed and the production shown in FIG. 334(g) is always generated. In this sense, the effect shown in FIG. 335(j) does not display the sword decoration image SYG on the effect display device 1600 and also displays the button image BTG. It can be said that this is an effect that suggests that an effect reception period for the body 5001 will occur.

However, instead of this, when the effect shown in FIG. 335(k) progresses, the outer shape of the haze MY does not necessarily come close to the sword decoration body 5001 (sword decoration image SYG), and the operation button 410 (button image BTG). It is also possible to set such that an effect pattern approaching the outline of) can also appear, and when the effect pattern appears, then the button image BTG is displayed again and the effect shown in FIG. 333(d) is performed. When such an effect pattern is allowed to be performed, the effects shown in FIGS. 335(j) and (k) also conceal which of the plurality of operating means can accept the effect. It will be executed as a specific operation-related effect.

In addition, the operation button 410 is provided as an operable operation means, and in the effect state shown in FIG. 334(h) in the effect example (second effect mode), FIG. 333(e) Similar to the effect situation shown in, the control for operating the operation button 410 on the side not operated by the player may be made executable. In such control, it is important to operate at least the operation means on the side not operated by the player. At this time, the operation means on the side operated by the player is also operated. Whether or not it may be designed appropriately.

Further, when the operation button 410 is provided as an operable operation means, the drive source for applying the drive force to the operation button 410 and the drive source for applying the drive force to the sword decoration 5001 are different drive sources. The same drive source may be used.

[Third production mode]
FIGS. 336 to 339 are basically the same as the second effect mode with respect to the specific operation-related effect, but are diagrams showing an effect example (third effect mode) different from the second effect mode. Is.

FIG. 336(a) shows that in the normal game state, the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed on the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit judgment in the state where the number of holdings is 0. Shows the production situation.

FIG. 336(b) shows an effect state in which a specific operation-related effect is started during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 336(a). However, as shown in FIG. 336(b), in the specific operation-related effect according to this effect example (third effect mode), first, a predetermined movable member different from the effect display device 1600 is operated. By this, it is suggested that either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 will soon be ready for production reception.

In particular, in this production example (third production mode), the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are adopted as such predetermined movable members, and the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are respectively operated. Thus, it is easy for either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 to be ready to receive an effect even when the effect display related to the operation is not yet performed on the effect display device 1600 side. I try to make it recognizable. In addition, here, control is performed to move the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 from the initial position to the operation position, but when compared with the case where they are operated to the operation position when the operation opportunity is given, And operate each at a slow speed.

According to such a configuration, even if the operation means in which time remains before the production reception period occurs, or the production reception period does not occur in the first place until the symbol variation ends Regardless, these operating means (the operating button 410 and the sword decoration 5001) are operated respectively. Therefore, from the time when there is still time left before the production acceptance period occurs, or the situation where the production acceptance period does not occur until the symbol fluctuation ends, amusement of the game for those operations is provided. It becomes possible to maintain it suitably.

Then, in this effect example (third effect mode), not the effect display on the effect display device 1600 but the specific operation-related effect by the operation of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 (FIG. 336(b)). After the start, basically the same effect development as in the second effect mode is performed.

For example, of the effects shown in FIG. 336(c), first, in the effect display on the effect display device 1600, except that the button image BTG is displayed as one corresponding to the “movable operation button 410”. The effect contents are as described with reference to FIG. 332(b).

However, in the effect shown in FIG. 336(c), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 332(b), the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are in a state of operating from the initial position (position when not driven), respectively. It has become. The effect shown in FIG. 336(c) suggests that either of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 can accept the effect even with such a movable effect.

Further, in the effect shown in FIG. 336(c), the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 are located at positions different from the initial positions (positions when not driven) after the specific operation-related effect is started. In addition, the operating position (the state in which the driving force is applied) is set at a position different from the operation position when the operation opportunity is applied.

That is, when such an operation-related effect is performed, the operation-related effect is postponed as compared with the case where the operation opportunity is immediately given without the operation-related effect, but the operation of the movable type is performed. When the operation means is adopted, even if such an operation-related effect is finally completed, it is necessary to move the operation means on the side that can accept the effect to at least the operation position. Therefore, an operation-related effect is further delayed by an amount of time required for such an operation, and there is a concern that such a delay may deteriorate the enjoyment of the game.

Therefore, in this effect example (third effect mode), the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are set to both the initial position (non-driving position) and the operation position during a period in which a specific operation-related effect is performed. The position is set as an operating state (a state in which a driving force is applied) at a different position (for example, an intermediate position). As a result, when the specific operation-related effect is finished and the effect reception period occurs, the operation means on the side where the effect reception period occurs is moved to the operation position in a shorter time, or the effect reception period does not occur. It is possible to operate the operating means on the raised side to the initial position in a shorter time, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in amusement of the game due to the extension of the operation-related effect. In addition, until the production reception period occurs, the operating means on the side to be operated is placed in the operating state at a position different from the operating position, so that the production reception period is in the operating state. It becomes possible to easily recognize that this has not yet occurred.

Then, when the effect shown in FIG. 336(c) progresses and the effect shown in FIG. 336(d) comes to be performed, the effect display on the effect display device 1600 indicates that the button image BTG is “movable operation button. 410”, the effect contents are as described with reference to FIG. 332(c). However, also in the effect shown in FIG. 336(d), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 332(c), the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are respectively set to the initial position (position when not driven) and the operation position. It is arranged so as to be in an operating state (state in which a driving force is applied) at a position different from any of the above.

Note that, in the effects shown in FIGS. 336(b) and 336(c), the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG in the effect display device 1600 are in the initial position (non-driving position). While the display is imitated, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are in the operating state at a position different from the initial position (non-driving position). In this way, the mode of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG in the effect display device 1600 and the mode of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 are intentionally made different from each other, so that they can be matched in the near future. It is possible to suggest that the effect to be achieved (whether the mode of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG changes or whether the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 operate) occurs.

When the effect shown in FIG. 337(e) comes to be performed as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 336(d), the effect display on the effect display device 1600 indicates that the button image BTG is “at the operation position”. The effect contents are as described with reference to FIG. 333(d), except that it is displayed as a button corresponding to the movable operation button 410 at a certain time.

However, in the effect shown in FIG. 337(e), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 333(d), the operation button 410 is in the operated position, and the sword ornament 5001 is in the initial position. Both the (non-driving position) and the operating position are in different positions. That is, in this case, since the operation button 410 has moved from the position closer to the operation position than the initial position (position when not driven) toward the operation position, the extension of the operation-related effect is preferably suppressed. Become so.

As the effect shown in FIG. 337(e), first, "display effect in which the button image BTG is displayed (preferably displayed in a state where the button image is moved to the operation position) and the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed" is first. After performing the display effect, the operation button 410 is operated to the operation position, and an instruction display (a character display such as "press" or an effect, which causes an operation acceptance period for the operation button 410 to prompt an operation, A bar display indicating the remaining time of the reception period) may be displayed. According to such a configuration, the button image BTG that appears as a result of the execution of the specific operation-related effect is displayed in the “movement mode to the operation position”, whereas the operation button at the time of the display is displayed. 410 is a mode different from the “mode in which the operation position is moved”. In this way, by causing the button image BTG that appears as a result of the execution of the specific operation-related effect to be displayed as a mode different from the mode of the operation button 410 at that time, the shift between those modes will soon be filled up. (Here, the operation button 410 moves to the operation position) can be suggested in advance.

Then, when the effect shown in FIG. 337(f) comes to be performed as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 337(e), the effect display device 1600 has been described with reference to FIG. 333(e). The street contents will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 337(f), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 333(e), the operation button 410 is in a state of being returned from the operation position to the initial position (non-driving position). Moreover, the sword decoration 5001 is in a state of operating at a position different from both the initial position (position when not driven) and the operation position.

After such an operation effect (FIG. 337(f)) is performed, as shown in FIG. 337(g), the reach state is formed and the reach effect can be performed. This is also as described with reference to FIG. 333(f).

On the other hand, when the effect shown in FIG. 336(d) is performed as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 336(d), the effect display on the effect display device 1600 is the operation of the sword ornament 5001. Except that the instruction content regarding “to push in” is displayed and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the “movement mode to the operation position”, the production as described with reference to FIG. 334(g) It is the content.

However, in the effect shown in FIG. 338(h), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 334(g), the operation button 410 is at a position different from both the initial position (non-driving position) and the operation position. The sword decoration 5001 is in the operating state and in the operating position. That is, in this case, since the sword decoration 5001 has moved from the position closer to the operation position to the operation position than the initial position (position when not driven), the extension of the operation-related effect is preferably suppressed. Will be done.

Note that, as the effect shown in FIG. 338(h), "a display effect in which the button image BTG is not displayed and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed (it is desirable that the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in a mode in which it has moved to the operation position)". First, after performing the display effect, the sword decoration 5001 is moved to the operation position, and an instruction display (characters such as "pushing in") that prompts the operation by generating an effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001 is performed. A display or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) may be displayed. According to such a configuration, the sword decoration image SYG that appears as a result of the execution of the specific operation-related effect is displayed in the “movement mode to the operation position”, whereas the sword at the time of the display is displayed. The decoration image SYG will be in a mode different from the “mode in which the decoration image SYG has moved to the operation position”. In this way, by displaying the sword decoration image SYG that appears as a result of the execution of the specific operation-related effect as a mode that is intentionally different from the mode of the sword decoration body 5001 at that time, there is a difference between those modes. It will soon be possible to indicate in advance that the sword decoration 5001 will move to the operating position.

Then, when the effect shown in FIG. 338(i) is performed as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 338(h), the effect display device 1600 has been described with reference to FIG. 334(h). The street contents will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 338(i), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 334(h), the operation button 410 operates at a position different from both the initial position (non-driving position) and the operation position. The sword decoration 5001 is returned from the operating position to the initial position (non-driving position).

After such an operation effect (FIG. 338(i)) is performed, as shown in FIG. 338(j), the reach state is formed and the reach effect can be performed. Is as described with reference to FIG. 333(f).

On the other hand, when the effect shown in FIG. 336(d) is performed as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 336(d), the effect display on the effect display device 1600 shows that the button image BTG is “at the operation position”. The effect contents are as described with reference to FIG. 335(j), except that it is displayed as a button corresponding to the movable operation button 410 at a certain time.

However, in the effect shown in FIG. 339(k), differently from the effect shown in FIG. 335(j) and the effect shown in FIG. It is in a state of operating at a position different from both the non-driving position) and the operating position. Even in such an operating condition, it is suggested that the effect reception period for the operation button 410 has not yet occurred, and that the effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 may still occur. Will be able to.

Then, as a result of performing the effect shown in FIG. 339(k), when the effect shown in FIG. 339(l) comes to be performed, the effect display device 1600 has been described with reference to FIG. 335(k). The street contents will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 339(l), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 335(k), the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 respectively have an initial position (position when not driven) and an operation position. Both are operating in different positions.

Then, as a result of performing the effect shown in FIG. 339(l), when the effect shown in FIG. 339(m) comes to be performed, the effect display device 1600 has been described with reference to FIG. 335(l). The street contents will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 339(l), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 335(k), the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 respectively have an initial position (position when not driven) and an operation position. Both are operating in different positions. In the effect shown in FIG. 339(m), it is more preferable that the outer shape of the haze MY should be closer to the sword decoration 5001 in the operation position, not the sword decoration 5001 in the initial position.

When the effect shown in FIG. 339(m) is further advanced, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed and the effect shown in FIG. 338(h) is always generated. In this sense, the effect shown in FIG. 339(k) does not display the sword decoration image SYG on the effect display device 1600 and displays the button image BTG. It can be said that this is an effect that suggests that an effect reception period for the body 5001 will occur.

However, instead of this, when the effect shown in FIG. 339(l) progresses, the outer shape of the haze MY does not necessarily come close to the sword decoration body 5001 (sword decoration image SYG), and the operation button 410 (button image BTG). It is also possible to set such that an effect pattern approaching the outline of) can also appear, and when the effect pattern appears, after that, the button image BTG is displayed again and the effect shown in FIG. 337(e) is performed. When such an effect pattern can be performed, the effects shown in FIGS. 339(k) and (l) also conceal which of the plurality of operating means can accept the effect. It will be executed as a specific operation-related effect.

In addition, in this effect example (third effect mode), the drive source that applies the drive force to the operation button 410 and the drive source that applies the drive force to the sword ornament 5001 are different drive sources. The same drive source may be used.

In each of the above-described effect modes and their examples, when "a button image BTG (first display mode) imitating the operation button 410" appears as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect, it is basically The operation opportunity is given only to the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001, and when the operation on the operation button 410 is accepted, the operation effect on the button side is performed. Become. When a "sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) imitating the sword decoration 5001" appears as a result of the specific operation-related effect, basically, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration are displayed. When the operation opportunity is given only to the sword decoration body 5001 among the body 5001, and the operation on the sword decoration body 5001 is received as an effect, the operation time effect on the sword actor side is performed. In this respect, in the button-side operation effect, there is a success effect (the specific decoration member SDY is operated) and a failure effect (the specific decoration member SDY is not operated) based on the result of the effect lottery according to the big hit determination. In contrast to the appearance of either one, even in the production on the side of the sword acting side, production on success (operating the specific decoration member SDY) and production on failure based on the result of the production lottery according to the big hit determination. Either (the specific decorative member SDY is not operated) is made to appear, and their effect contents are the same. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game when the operation opportunity is given to the operation means on the side different from the side desired by the player among the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001.

It should be noted that the button-side operation effect and the sword-feature-side operation effect have the same effect as the display effect performed by the effect display device 1600, in addition to the effect as to whether or not the specific decorative member SDY operates. You may make it a content.

Further, in each of the effect examples described above with respect to the specific operation-related effect, it is assumed that an effect is given to which of the plurality of operation means the operation opportunity is given, and the operation means on the side corresponding to the result is to be performed. Opportunity was given to the operation. However, there is a case where a specific operation-related effect is performed with the effect contents that an operation opportunity is given to the specific operation means, such as by performing pressing between the specific operation means, regardless of which effect result appears. There may be.

For example, in any mode with respect to one operation means (for example, an operation in a mode in which the sword decoration body 5001 in a sword-storing state is in a sword cutting state, a mode in which the sword decoration body 5001 in a sword-storing state is in a sword-storing state) It is also possible to perform the effect as to whether or not the operation opportunity is given by (operation of) and to give the operation opportunity to the operation means in a mode on the side according to the result. In this case, the sword decoration 5001 is operated in a state different from both the sword storage state and the sword extraction state while the specific operation-related effect is performed, and the operation is performed in any mode in the specific operation-related effect. It is desirable that the sword decoration body 5001 is operated in the sword storage state or the sword removal state when the effect result indicating whether or not to perform is displayed.

Also, when the symbol variation in the suspended state is exhausted, a specific operation-related effect is performed within the execution period of the symbol variation, when the symbol variation is in the suspended state (digested before this. The effect suggested from within the execution period of the symbol variation) may be performed. According to such a configuration, although the operation opportunity is given to only one of the plurality of operation means, the operation means provided with the operation opportunity and the operation means provided with the operation opportunity are not provided. It becomes possible to maintain the gaming interest related to the operation for a longer period for both. As such an effect, when the symbol variation in which a specific operation-related effect is performed is in a suspended state (within the execution period of the symbol variation consumed before this), the operation in the specific operation-related effect is performed. It is desirable to operate each of the provided operation means.

In the above-described second and third effect modes, and their other examples, as specific operation-related effects, a plurality of images (button images BTG, button images BTG, which correspond to a plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001)). The sword decoration image SYG) is displayed, but these images do not necessarily have to be displayed. In short, when the specific operation-related effect is executed, either the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 or the effect acceptance period for the sword ornament 5001 may occur thereafter. With such a configuration, while suggesting that the performance acceptance period will occur for either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001, those operations are performed until the performance acceptance period occurs. It becomes possible to conceal which of the means the performance acceptance period occurs for. Therefore, it is not always necessary to simultaneously display a plurality of types of operation-related images (here, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG) corresponding to different types of operating means, and the button image BTG and the sword decoration are not necessarily displayed at the same time. It is also possible to cause none of the images SYG to appear and allow a different effect image to appear as a specific operation-related effect.

However, even when adopting an effect mode in which the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG are not simultaneously displayed while the specific operation-related effect is being executed, when the specific operation-related effect is ended, the button image is finished. Either the BTG (image corresponding to the operation button 410) or the sword decoration image SYG (image corresponding to the sword decoration 5001) is displayed to indicate which of these operating means the performance acceptance period occurs. It will be. In this case, the button image BTG (image corresponding to the operation button 410) or the sword decoration image SYG (image corresponding to the sword decoration 5001) displayed in this way is displayed during the execution period of the specific operation-related effect. The specific image (for example, the lightning bolt image IZ, etc.) that has been displayed is executed as the content of the effect, and which of the plurality of operating means the effect acceptance period occurs for the specific operation-related effect. It can be said that it is important to make it function as a suggestive production. For example, a specific operation-related effect is executed as an effect of dropping lightning toward one of the two rocks, and when lightning falls on one of the rocks, a button image BTG appears from the rock, and the other When the lightning strikes the rock on the side, the sword decoration image SYG is made to appear from the rock, so that it is possible to develop the effect as shown in FIGS. 333(d) and 334(g). ..
Alternatively, a specific operation-related effect is executed as an effect of dropping lightning on one rock, and when lightning falls on the rock, one of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG appears from the rock. It is also possible to make the production progress to the production shown in FIG. 333(d) or 334(g). In short, it is desirable to make the production progress as the production content such that the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG is displayed as the production result of the specific operation-related production.

Further, in the above-described second and third effect modes, and their different examples, a specific case is specified when the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs and when the effect acceptance period for the sword ornament 5001 occurs. It is more desirable to set the same time required from the execution of the operation-related effect (start of effect) to the occurrence of those effect acceptance periods. In addition, it is desirable to set such that the effect reception period is generated for the same time regardless of which operation means is given an operation opportunity after the specific operation-related effect is performed.

In addition, a plurality of effect modes are prepared as specific operation-related effects, and the effect reception period in which the specific effect (operation effect) can be generated depending on which of these effect modes the effect is performed. The ratio set for the specific operation means of the plurality of operation means may be different. The ratio may be 100% or 0%.

Further, in the above-described second and third effect modes and the other examples thereof, the operation is not performed based on the operation on the operation means on the side indicated by the specific operation-related effect. When operating the operating means on the side (FIG. 333(e), etc.), control is performed to return the operating means on the non-operated side to the initial position after a lapse of a predetermined time with reference to the time when the operation is performed. You can However, the operation is not based on the time when the operation is performed, and the operation means on the non-operated side is operated until the operation is ended depending on the timing of the operation during the production acceptance period. It is desirable to have different time lengths.

That is, when the operating means on the side indicated by the specific operation-related effect is operated, the operating means on the side indicated by the specific operation-related effect should be operated as the remaining time of the effect reception period is short. It can be said that there is a high possibility that the player has a conflict as to whether or not the operating means on the side not shown in the specific operation-related effect should be operated. Therefore, depending on which timing of the production acceptance period the operation is performed (depending on the possibility of conflict), the operation means on the side not operated is operated and then the operation is ended. Time to (possible such as "Isn't the performance reception performed and the performance during operation performed even if the operating means on the side indicated by the specific operation-related performance is operated?" By making the time length of appealing to the player different), it becomes possible to maintain a favorable interest in the game.

In addition, after a specific operation-related effect is performed, if none of the operation means provided for the effect is operated, the operation means provided for the effect when the effect acceptance period ends. May all be operated.

Further, from the start of the specific operation-related effect to the time when the effect result (button image BTG, sword decoration image SYG, etc.) is displayed, the side with high expectation as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect. You may make it perform the predetermined effect which suggests the ratio of the effect image (sword decoration image SYG) displayed. The movable body effect may be performed as the predetermined effect, but in this case, the specific movable object that operates based on the effect reception within the effect reception period after the specific operation-related effect is performed (here, , The specific decorative member SDY) is operated so that the specific movable body can be operated more reliably based on the production reception within the production reception period after the specific operation-related production is performed. It is desirable to enable it.

In addition, it corresponds to any one of the images that can appear in the effect result between the start of the specific operation-related effect and the display of the effect result (button image BTG, sword decoration image SYG, etc.). An operation opportunity may be given to a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410). According to such a configuration, for example, a specific operation as to which of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 is used to generate an effect reception period regarding a specific effect (an effect such as operating the specific decoration member SDY) While the related effect is being performed, the effect acceptance period is generated only for one side (for example, the operation button 410) of those operating means. As a result, it is possible to produce a special effect mode as if the effect was shown and the effect was finished even though it was in the middle of the specific operation-related effect. It becomes possible to maintain the interest of the game while playing. In addition, when an operation on one side (for example, the operation button 410) of the operation means is received while a specific operation-related effect is being performed, a predetermined effect is performed based on the effect reception. Therefore, it is desirable to suggest the proportion of the effect image (sword decoration image SYG) on the side of high expectation displayed as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect.

Here, as the above-mentioned specific operation means to which an operation opportunity is given during the execution of a specific operation-related effect, among the plurality of operation means (for example, operation button 410, sword ornament 5001), the degree of expectation is relatively high. It is desirable to use the operation means on the lower side (for example, the operation button 410) in order to improve the enjoyment of the game when the player recognizes that it was in the middle of a specific operation-related effect. ..

Further, in the middle of the above-mentioned specific operation-related effect relating to a plurality of operation means, if the effect acceptance period is generated only for the operation button 410 of those operation means, within the effect acceptance period When the operation button 410 is operated in, the special operation effect is executed when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, and when the special operation effect is executed, a plurality of operation means (for example, Regardless of which of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001) appears as the effect result, the degree of expectation for granting the privilege may be the same. The degree of expectation may be 100%. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to lose the performance as the specific operation-related effect from the start of the effect of the specific operation-related effect until the effect result is displayed. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game when an operation opportunity is given to the operation means having a relatively low expectation. However, when the special operation effect is executed, the special operation effect is not executed, and the privilege is given more than when the operation opportunity is given to the operation means on the higher expectation side of the plurality of operation means. It is desirable to increase such expectations.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned effect reception periods, when an operation is performed by the player, an effect is usually generated based on the operation, but the effect reception period elapses even if such an operation is not performed. It may be possible to set an automatic button effect state, which will be described later, in which control is performed to start the same effect as when the operation was performed earlier. According to such an automatic button effect state, since the effect at the time of operation is generated even if the operation is not performed every time the effect acceptance period occurs, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the entertainment of the game due to forgetting the operation. Become. Then, in the case where the specific operation-related effect is performed while the automatic button effect state is set as described above, in the case where the effect acceptance period for any of the plurality of operation means occurs as a result of the effect. Even if there is, the same operating effect as when the operating means is operated will be executed even if the operating means on the corresponding side is not operated within those effect acceptance periods.

However, even when the automatic button effect state described later is set, the effect acceptance period is only applied to the operation button 410 of those operation means in the middle of the specific operation-related effect being performed. When the action is generated, it is preferable that the special operation effect is not executed (the automatic button function does not function) unless the operation button 410 is operated within the effect reception period. After that, even if the effect reception period for any of the plurality of operation means occurs as a result of the specific operation-related effect, the corresponding operation means is operated within the effect reception period. It is desirable that the same operation effect as when the operation means is operated is executed (the automatic button function is operated) even if the operation means is not operated. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to grasp whether or not the player is in the middle of performing a specific operation-related effect depending on whether or not the automatic button function works. It is expected to suppress the decrease of

It should be noted that the setting change related to ON/OFF of the automatic button effect state can be performed not only during the period in which the symbol variation is not performed by operating the operation button 410, but also during the period in which the symbol variation is performed. It is desirable that For example, when the operation button 410 is operated when the effect reception period for the operation button 410 does not occur when the automatic button effect state is off, the automatic button effect state can be changed from the off state to the on state. When the effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs when the effect state is on and the operation button 410 is operated within the effect acceptance period, the on-operation effect corresponding to the operation is performed and the automatic button effect state is changed. It is possible to change the setting from the on state to the off state. However, since it is considered that there may be a case where it is desired to generate an on-operation effect by an operation by the player while maintaining the on state of the automatic button effect state, for example, the automatic button effect state is set to the on state. During the performance acceptance period for the operation button 410 at this time, when the operation button 410 is operated and the operation means other than the operation button 410 is also enabled and the operation is performed on the other operation means, Unlike the case where the operation button 410 is operated, it is desirable to change the effect being executed while the automatic button effect state is maintained in the ON state. At this time, it is more desirable to generate the same operation effect as when the operation button 410 is operated.

The operation mode may be different when the automatic button effect state is changed from the off state to the on state and when it is changed from the on state to the off state.

Further, in the above-described second and third effect modes, and other examples thereof, a button image BTG that imitates the operation button 410 or a sword ornament 5001 is imitated as an effect result in which a specific operation-related effect is performed. Although it was decided that the operation opportunities corresponding to the sword decoration images SYG displayed are given, the present invention is not limited to this. That is, two different display modes (first display mode and second display mode) are prepared, and when the first display mode of these display modes is displayed, an operation opportunity (effect reception) is displayed on the operation button 410. If the operation opportunity (effect reception period) is given to the sword ornament 5001 when the second display mode is displayed, the first display mode and the second display mode Any display content may be adopted as.

For example, in the above-described second and third effect modes, instead of the effect images shown in FIGS. 333(d) and 337(e), the effect image CG shown in FIG. 340(a) (first Display mode), and instead of the effect images shown in FIGS. 334(g) and 338(h), the effect image TG (second display mode) shown in FIG. 340(b) is displayed. Good. According to such a configuration, while the specific operation-related effect is being performed, the effect part and the other background image (the part that was displayed before the specific operation-related effect was started) Both of them are suddenly replaced with the effect image CG (first display mode) or the effect image TG (second display mode) as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect (substantially the entire effect in the display area is 333 (d), 334 (g), 337 (e), and 338 (h), the partial display mode (button image BTG, sword) Unlike the case where the decoration image SYG) appears, the effect display related to the addition of the operation opportunity is displayed by using almost the entire display area (until other effect images such as the background part where the degree of expectation can be suggested are hidden). By doing so, it is expected that the interest of the game for the operation will be improved.

In the effect image CG (first display mode) shown in FIG. 340(a), the first image holding the shield (the button image BTG simulating the operation button 410) in which the operation button 410 is incorporated into the design. A character is displayed, and in the effect image TG (second display mode) shown in FIG. 340(b), a sword (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the sword decoration body 5001 is held. The second character is displayed so as to implicitly indicate which operation means (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001) should be operated. As described above, it is not necessary to prepare the effect image CG (first display mode) and the effect image TG (second display mode) as effect images simulating the operation buttons 410 or the sword decoration 5001 itself. It is desirable to display as an effect image that incorporates at least a part of the shape and the design of the operating means.

Further, regarding the effect image CG (first display mode) and the effect image TG (second display mode) using the entire display area in this way, the effect image CG (first display mode) and effect image TG. You may make it perform also as an effect which suggests different expectation depending on which of the (second display modes) is displayed. For example, when the effect image TG (second display mode) appears, it is suggested that the degree of expectation for privilege grant is higher than when the effect image CG (first display mode) appears. In addition, a plurality of effect modes (color differences, etc.) are prepared as effect images CG (first display mode) and effect images TG (second display mode), and depending on which of these effect modes they are displayed. You may make it suggest the degree of expectation. In this case, even when the effect image CG (first display mode) appears, when it is displayed in a specific display mode, the expectation level is higher than when the effect image TG (second display mode) appears. You can

Further, regarding the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG, when a specific operation-related effect is executed and displayed as the effect result (it is desirable that the effect situation is relatively high in the expectation), When the operation-related effects are displayed without being executed (for example, after a precursor effect described later, which is not a specific operation-related effect is executed), it is desirable that the effect situation is relatively low in expectation. There may be. In this case, for example, when a specific operation-related effect is executed and the button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed as the effect result, only the operation button 410 of the plurality of operation means is effected. While the reception period is generated, the button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed without executing the specific operation-related effect (for example, after executing the below-described predictive effect that is not the specific operation-related effect). When displayed, in addition to the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG, a performance acceptance period is also applied to another operation means not corresponding to the button image BTG (for example, the sword ornament 5001). May be generated. According to such a configuration, even when the button image BTG appears in the effect situation where the specific operation-related effect is not executed and the expectation is relatively low, the specific operation-related effect is executed. Therefore, it becomes possible to provide the operation with a fun different from that in the case where the button image BTG appears in the production situation with a relatively high degree of expectation, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game. The different operating means may be an operating means different from the sword decoration 5001.

Further, when the button image BTG appears in a relatively low-expectation production state in which a specific operation-related production is not executed, an operation is performed on another operation means that does not correspond to the button image BTG within the production reception period. When the effect is received, the special operation effect is executed when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, and when the special operation effect is executed, “a specific operation-related effect is executed and relatively. It is desirable to suggest that the production situation has a higher expectation than in the production situation in which the sword decoration image SYG appears in the production situation with high expectations. The degree of expectation may be 100%.

Here, when the button image BTG appears in a production situation where a specific operation-related production is not executed and the expectation is relatively low, the operation means (operation button) corresponding to the button image BTG within the production reception period. 410) is operated, the effect reception period for another operation means which is occurring at the same time is also ended so that the special operation effect is not executed, and the operation means (operation button 410) is operated. It is desirable that the performance at the time of operation is executed.

On the other hand, when the button image BTG appears in the production situation where the specific operation-related production is not executed and the degree of expectation is relatively low, what is the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG within the production reception period? When another operation means is operated, the effect reception period for the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG is also ended so that the special operation effect is executed when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied. desirable. In this case, when the predetermined effect condition is not satisfied, the special operation effect is not executed, and instead, the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG is not operated and the operation is performed. Despite the operation of the operation means other than the operation means, the operation effect may be executed when the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG is operated.

When a specific operation-related effect is executed while the automatic button effect state is set, the side corresponding to either the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG as a result of the effect. Even when the effect reception period occurs for the operation means, the same operation effect as when the operation means is operated is executed within the effect reception period without operating the corresponding operation means. It is desirable to do so (to make the automatic button function work). However, when the button image BTG appears without executing a specific operation-related effect when the above-described automatic button effect state is set, the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG is displayed. Even when the effect reception period is generated for both of the operation means and the operation means other than the operation means, the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG is operated even if no operation is performed. It is desirable that only the same operation effect as when it is operated is executed, and the special operation effect that can appear only when another operation means that does not correspond to the button image BTG is operated is not executed.

However, within the effect reception period, before the specific timing at which the operation effect (effect when the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG is operated) appears by the above-mentioned automatic button function, another When the operation means is operated, and when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, the special operation effect is performed according to the effect reception, and it is determined that the specific timing has come. Also, it is desirable that the effect at the time of operation (effect when the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG is operated) does not appear. In this case, the above-mentioned automatic button function does not substantially function during the production reception period, but the automatic button production state is continued in the ON state even after the production reception period ends. Is desirable.

Further, in the above-described effect example, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG may be reversed, and then the above-described effects (operation effect, automatic button function, etc.) may be respectively applied. That is, in this case, in the case where the button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed without executing the specific operation-related effect (for example, after executing a precursor effect described below that is not the specific operation-related effect). If the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is displayed without executing the specific operation-related effect (for example, after executing a precursor effect described below that is not the specific operation-related effect), In addition to the operation means (sword decoration body 5001) corresponding to the sword decoration image SYG, the performance acceptance period is generated for another operation means (for example, the operation button 410) not corresponding to the sword decoration image SYG. Becomes

In addition, as described above, in each of the above-described effect modes and the other examples thereof, “a button image BTG simulating the operation button 410 (first display mode)” as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect, or When any of the “sword decoration images SYG (second display mode) imitating the sword decoration body 5001” is displayed, and when the effect reception is made by the operating means on the displayed side, relative To the first operation effect (for example, an effect mode in which the specific decoration member SDY operates) that is the effect content that suggests that the expectation degree is high, and the effect content that suggests that the expectation degree is relatively low. It is possible to cause one of the second operation-time productions (for example, a production mode in which the specific decoration member SDY does not operate) to appear. That is, in this case, when the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is displayed, the expectation is relatively high at a higher rate than when the button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed. The first operation effect, which is the effect content that suggests, is executed. However, when the first operation-time effect is executed based on the effect reception within the effect reception period that occurs after a specific operation-related effect, the first operation-time effect is the button image BTG (first Display mode) is displayed on the operation button 410 when the operation button 410 is displayed, and when the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is displayed. It is desirable to suggest the same degree of expectation when executed based on. The degree of expectation may be 0% or 100%. According to such a configuration, a case where an effect image (button image BTG (first display mode)) on the side with a relatively low degree of expectation is displayed as an effect result of performing a specific operation-related effect. However, as long as the first operation effect is executed based on the reception of the effect, the effect image on the side with a relatively high degree of expectation as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect (sword decoration) Compared to the case where the image SYG (second display mode)) is displayed, no demerit is produced in terms of the effect result, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in amusement of the game.

In addition, in the above-described timer effect (FIGS. 148 to 207), “giving an operation opportunity to the operation means” can be set as the effect target (one of the plurality of effect modes that are timer targets). is there. That is, in the timer effect for which “giving an operation opportunity to the operation means” is the effect target, when the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”), the operation opportunity is soon applied to the operation means. As a result, it becomes possible to enjoy the effect at the time of operation. In this case, in the "operation opportunity for the operation means" prepared as a candidate for the effect object of the timer effect, when the operation means is operated, an advantageous effect result for the player is obtained according to the result of the predetermined effect lottery. Make sure that any of the unfavorable performance results can appear. However, when the "operation opportunity for the operating means" is given as the effect target of the timer effect, the ratio of the effect result that is advantageous to the player is higher than when the timer effect is not applied. Is more desirable. The percentage may be 100%.

In this regard, when an effect pattern in which a timer effect is executed, in which "giving an operation opportunity to the operation means (for example, the sword ornament 5001)" is executed, the "operation opportunity of the operation means" to be the effect object is displayed. A specific operation-related effect using “grant” may be further performed. That is, in this case, when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”), the sword decoration image SYG appears and an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001. Before the sword decoration image SYG appears, a specific operation-related effect regarding which of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG appears will be executed.

According to such a configuration, the timer effect and the specific operation-related effect are executed for the same effect, so that an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (for example, the sword ornament 5001). It becomes possible to improve the enjoyment of the game when played.

However, in this case, two different effects (timer effect, specific operation-related effect) may be simultaneously developed for one effect target (giving an operation opportunity to the sword decoration 5001) until immediately before that. , It is not possible to understand which production should be watched, and the attention is distracted, which may adversely affect the enjoyment of the game.

Therefore, when a specific timer effect and a specific operation-related effect are respectively executed for one effect target (giving an operation opportunity to the sword decoration 5001), as described below with reference to FIG. 341. , Until a count value of a specific timer effect is executed and the count value reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is “0”), the “specific operation-related effect” is in an unexecuted state, and the count value is It is desirable that the "specific operation-related effect" be started after the value reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is "0").

FIG. 341 is a diagram for explaining an example of effects when a specific timer effect and a specific operation-related effect are executed for one effect target (giving an operation opportunity to the sword decoration 5001). Note that the following timer effect corresponds to the above-mentioned notice timer effect, and is executed as a result of various processing corresponding thereto.

FIG. 341(a), in the normal game state, the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed on the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination in the state where the number of holdings is 0. Shows the production situation.

FIG. 341(b) shows an effect that the timer effect is started with a specific numerical value (here, "3") (countdown display here) during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 341(a). It shows the situation. Note that in the effect situation shown in FIG. 341(b), the "specific operation-related effect" has not yet been executed, and it is unclear which effect the timer effect is intended for. There is.

That is, in the timer effect according to this effect example, first of all, the count value is set to the predetermined value (while it remains unknown which effect of the plurality of timer target effect candidates prepared is being executed). Here, the count "0") is reached and is displayed. Then, after "0 (predetermined value)" is displayed as the count value in this way, as shown in FIG. 341(d), the "specific operation-related effect" is started to be effected. At the time when the "specific operation-related effect" is started, the count value is not even "0" and is hidden.

According to such a timer effect, after the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, the count “0”), the button image BTG (first display mode) and the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) are displayed. A specific operation-related effect regarding which is displayed is executed.
That is, in this case, although two different effects (timer effect, specific operation-related effect) are executed for one effect object (giving an operation opportunity to the sword decoration 5001), those effects are time-dependent. Since it is possible to avoid overlapping in series, it is possible to enjoy different effects.

However, if the count display of the timer effect reaches the predetermined value (here, the count “0”) when the specific operation-related effect is not executed, the timer effect targets which effect. It is not possible to recognize whether or not the game was played as a game, and there is a concern that the interest in the game will decline. Therefore, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 341(c), between the count display reaching a predetermined value (here, the count “0”) and the start of a specific operation-related effect, An effect that suggests an effect type (giving an operation opportunity to the sword decoration 5001) that is the effect target of the timer effect is performed.

In the example shown in FIG. 341(c), when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count "0"), the effect display device 1600 first displays "sword". Therefore, it is suggested that this is the timer effect for which the effect of "giving an operation opportunity to the sword ornament 5001 (operation opportunity by the "sword")" was the effect target.

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 341(d), the effect image (sword decoration image SYG (second display mode)) corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 is displayed ("Sword sword" It is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game because the "specific operation-related effect" is started in the effect situation in which the player has recognized that "the operation opportunity by" is given). become. In addition, when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count “0”), the count display (count “0”) is displayed when the effect display device 1600 displays “Nato”. May be continuously displayed.

Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 341(c), when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, count "0"), the sword decoration 5001 performs a predetermined operation (here, It is configured to perform a reciprocating motion in the up-and-down direction, and this also means that "giving an operation opportunity (operation opportunity by "sword"") to the sword decoration 5001 is a target object of the timer effect. I try to suggest.

Note that the predetermined operation by the sword decoration 5001 is not only displayed when the timer effect is "giving an operation opportunity to the sword decoration 5001" as an effect target, but also when the other effect is an effect target. It may be performed when is zero. That is, in this case, the predetermined operation by the sword ornament 5001 does not function as an effect that suggests the type of effect that the timer effect is targeting, but as an effect that suggests that the count display has become 0. Becomes In this sense, the predetermined operation by the sword ornament 5001 is after the count display becomes 0, before the effect targeted for the effect is started, and the timer effect is the effect target. It is executed at the same timing as the timing at which the effect suggesting the effect type that is present is started or before this, and during the execution state, the effect that suggests the effect type targeted by the timer effect is also being executed. It can be said that it is important to be done.

FIG. 341(d) shows an effect situation in which the effect of "specific operation-related effect" is started.

In this effect situation, as described above, not only is the count value already hidden, but also the effect suggesting the effect type targeted for effect by the timer effect is also hidden.
In addition, the predetermined operation by the sword decoration 5001 is also completed. However, it is important to execute the effect that suggests the effect type that the timer effect is the effect target and the predetermined operation by the sword ornament 5001 before the specific operation-related effect is started, and The execution state may be continued after the operation-related effect is started.

After the "specific operation-related effect" is started in this way, the effect is advanced in the order of FIGS. 341(e) to 341(h). ), FIG. 334(g) to (i), or FIG. 336(d) and FIG. 338(h) to (j), the details are omitted because they are substantially the same as the contents described with reference to FIG.

As the timer effect performed in association with the specific operation-related effect, one of the timer effect shown in FIG. 341 and a timer effect different from the timer effect is based on the result of the predetermined effect lottery. It may be made executable. That is, in another timer effect, the point that the specific operation-related effect is started after the timer effect is started is the same as the timer effect shown in FIG. 341, but the specific operation-related effect is effected. The count value does not reach a predetermined value (here, “0”) at the start timing (strictly, slightly before this), so that the specific operation-related effect continues even after the effect is started. It has become. Then, in this case, regardless of whether the button image BTG (first display mode) or the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is displayed as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect, the privilege granting ( The expectation for big hits is becoming the same. The degree of expectation may be 100%.

According to such another timer effect, the specific operation-related effect and the timer effect are simultaneously effected, but at the time when the effect situation in which the effect effect is simultaneously developed appears, the specific operation-related effect is changed. Whether the button image BTG (first display mode) or the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is shown as the effect result, the effect values thereof are the same (the degree of expectation for privilege grant (big hit) is the same). Same). That is, in this case, since the performance of the specific operation-related effect itself can be substantially lost, even if the specific operation-related effect and the timer effect are simultaneously effected, any effect You will not be able to understand what you should pay attention to, and it will be possible to avoid situations where distractions occur. However, in order to improve the enjoyment of the game, when the effect pattern in which the specific operation-related effect and the timer effect are simultaneously effected appears, the privilege is granted more than when the effect pattern shown in FIG. 341 appears. It is desirable to increase such expectations.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 341(c), when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count "0"), first, a display indicating the type of the effect target on the effect display device 1600 ( However, the display suggesting such an effect target may be performed even when another effect mode is used as the timer effect. However, among a plurality of effects that can be targeted for a timer, when a specific effect is targeted for a timer, it is possible not to perform a display that suggests which effect the timer effect is targeted for.

In addition, in each of the above-described effect modes and other examples thereof, prior to the operation opportunity being given to either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001, the operation opportunity is given to any of those operation means. It was decided to perform a specific operation-related effect as to whether or not it is given. However, before the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 (before the effect reception period occurs), the first precursor effect that does not appear when the operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001. Does not appear, or does not appear when the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 before the operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001 (before the performance reception period occurs). You may make it possible for an effect pattern to appear such as performing a second aura effect. In the case of performing these aura effects (first aura effect, second aura effect), the time required for the effect (aura effect) is set shorter than when a specific operation-related effect is performed, and It is desirable to lower the degree of expectation of the privilege grant when the effect appears, in order to enhance the enjoyment of the game when the specific operation-related effect is performed.

Here, as the indication effect, for example, fog, for example, before the effect image (for example, the button image BTG) imitating the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) on the side to which the operation opportunity is given appears. A specific image is displayed to express the state of being crowded in. Next, while the specific image is being displayed, the button image BTG is displayed at a position that is difficult to be visually recognized by overlapping with the specific image (a position on the layer, which is a position behind the specific image). After that, the button image BTG is gradually changed by gradually changing the specific image to non-display (increasing the transmittance, decreasing the area in which the specific image is displayed, etc.). It is possible to execute it as an effect to be exposed. It should be noted that an example of a specific depiction mode relating to such a sign presentation will be described later.

Then, at this time, if the button image BTG is displayed in any of a plurality of display modes (for example, a blue button image BTG, a red button image BTG, etc.) with different expectations regarding bonus grant (big hit), It is possible to have an interest as to which display mode the button image BTG appears as the precursor effect in which the button image BTG is gradually exposed.

The first omen effect that appears when an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 and an operation opportunity is not given to the sword decoration body 500, and an operation opportunity is not given to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration is shown. A second aura effect that appears when an operation opportunity is given to the body 5001, and the specific operation-related effect that appears when an operation opportunity is given to either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001. It is important that and are executed as different effect contents. Further, it is desirable that not only the contents of the effect but also the time required for the effect be different.

Such a precursor effect means the above-mentioned "specific operation-related effect" in the sense that "when an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means, it is performed as an effect related to the giving of the operation opportunity". It can be said that it is a higher-level concept including. As for the aura effect including the "specific operation-related effect", as described below with reference to FIG. 342, a plurality of effect modes are prepared and the aura effect is performed in any of these effect modes. It is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game when the aforesaid effect is performed by suggesting how long the effect reception period that occurs corresponding to the aforesaid effect is, depending on whether the aforesaid effect is performed. It is more desirable for the purpose.

FIG. 342 is a time chart illustrating an example of effect contents for each type of effect when a plurality of types (predictive effects A, B1, B2, C) are prepared as the predictive effect.

First, in the example (symptom effect A) shown in FIG. 342(a), when the first predetermined time has elapsed since the symbol variation was started, the indication effect A is started. This aura effect A is executed as the above-mentioned “specific operation-related effect” regarding which of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 the operation opportunity is given, and the aforesaid effect A When A is executed, an effect acceptance period (effective period) T1 is generated for the specific operation means on the side indicated as the effect result. That is, in the example (precursor effect A) shown in FIG. 342(a), when the predictor effect A is performed, the same time length is set regardless of which operation means is given an operation opportunity. The owned reception period (effective period) T1 will be generated.

In the production reception period (effective period) T1, an instruction display (a character display such as "press") for prompting an operation to the specific operation means on the side shown as the result of the precursor production A, or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period ) Is displayed. Then, when the effect reception is performed by the operation on the specific operation means within the effect reception period (effective period) T1, the above-described operation time effect (for example, FIG. 331(d), (f) or , The effect described with reference to FIG. 333(e), FIG. 334(h), FIG. 337(f), FIG. 338(i), etc. is executed, and the process of terminating the period T1 at that time is performed. It is supposed to be done.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 342(b) (symptom effect B1), not when the first predetermined time has elapsed since the symbol variation was started, but when the second predetermined time has elapsed, The indication effect B1 is to be started. This precursor effect B1 is not "a specific operation-related effect", but is executed prior to the operation opportunity when a specific operation means (for example, operation button 410) is given (a specific operation). It is not executed when an operation opportunity is given to the means), and when the precursor effect B1 is executed, an effect reception period (effective period) T2 for a specific operation means (for example, operation button 410) Is to occur.

In the production reception period (effective period) T2, an instruction display (a character display such as "press" or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) that prompts the specific operation means corresponding to the precursor production B1 to operate is displayed. To be done. Then, when the effect reception is performed by an operation on a specific operation means within the effect reception period (effective period) T2, a predetermined operation time effect different from the above-described operation time effect is executed based on the effect reception. At the same time, processing for ending the period T2 at that time is performed.

In this respect, in this effect example, the effect reception period (effective period) T2 corresponding to the indication effect B1 is, as shown in FIGS. 342(a) and 342(b), the effect reception period corresponding to the indication effect A. (Effective period) T1 is generated as a period having a different time length (here, a shorter time length). This suggests how long the effect reception period generated corresponding to the aforesaid effect is, depending on which mode (aura effect A, aura effect B1) is used. As a result, it becomes possible to favorably maintain the interest of the game when the precursor effect is performed.

On the other hand, in the example (symptom effect B2) shown in FIG. 342(c), the indication effect B2 is started when the second predetermined time has elapsed since the symbol variation was started. Like the precursor effect B1, the precursor effect B2 is not a “specific operation-related effect” but is executed prior to the operation opportunity when a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is given an operation opportunity. (Not executed when an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means). However, when the indication effect B2 is executed, the effect reception period (specific operation means (for example, operation button 410)) having a time length different from the effect reception period (effective period) T2 corresponding to the indication effect B1. Performance reception period) T3 is generated.

In the production reception period (effective period) T3 as well, an instruction display (a character display such as "press") for prompting an operation to the specific operation means corresponding to the precursor production B2 or a bar indicating the remaining time of the production reception period is displayed. Display) is displayed. Further, when the effect reception is performed by an operation on a specific operation means within the effect reception period (effective period) T3, an operation time effect that is different from the case where the precursor effects A and B1 are executed based on the effect reception. Is executed, and processing for ending the period T3 at that time is performed.

In this respect, in this effect example, the effect reception period (effective period) T3 corresponding to the indication effect B2 is, as shown in FIGS. 342(a) and 342(c), the effect reception period corresponding to the indication effect A. (Valid period) It occurs as a period having the same time length as T1. That is, in this case, the same time as when a specific operation-related effect with a relatively high degree of expectation is executed, although the predictive effect B2 with a relatively low degree of expectation related to the privilege grant (big hit) is executed. Since it is suggested that a production reception period (effective period) T3 having a length is generated, a production situation as if a specific operation-related production was performed is produced, and the precursor production B2 is It becomes possible to appropriately maintain the interest of the game when it is played. In this case, it is desirable that the degree of expectation for award is different when the production reception period (effective period) T2 occurs and when the production reception period (effective period) T3 occurs.

In addition, regarding the indication effects B1 and B2, the same effect form appears from the start of the effect to a timing in the middle thereof, and a different effect mode appears after the timing elapses. The operation means may be provided with a performance property regarding which of the performance reception period (effective period) T2 and the performance reception period (effective period) T3. However, such performance may not necessarily be provided, and even when the precursor effects B1 and B2 are started, the effect is started when a different time has elapsed since the symbol variation was started. Alternatively, the precursor effects B1 and B2 may have different time lengths.

On the other hand, in the example (symptom effect C) shown in FIG. 342 (d), the indication effect C is started when the third predetermined time has elapsed since the symbol variation was started. The precursor effect C is executed as the above-described “specific operation-related effect” that indicates which of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 the operation opportunity is given. When C is executed, an effect acceptance period (effective period) T4 is generated for the specific operation means on the side indicated as the effect result. That is, in the example (precursor effect C) shown in FIG. 342(d), when the predictive effect C is performed, the same time length is set regardless of which operation means is given an operation opportunity. The owned reception period (effective period) T4 will occur.

Even during the production reception period (effective period) T4, an instruction display (a character display such as "press") for prompting an operation to the specific operation means on the side shown as the result of the precursor production C or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period ) Is displayed. Then, when the effect reception is performed by the operation on the specific operation means within the effect reception period (effective period) T4, based on the effect reception, the above-described operation time effect (for example, FIGS. 331(d) and (f) or , 333(e), 334(h), 337(f), 338(i), and the like) are executed, and a process of terminating the period T4 at that time is performed. It is supposed to be done.

In this respect, in this effect example, the effect reception period (effective period) T4 corresponding to the indication effect C is, as shown in FIGS. 342 (a) and (d), the effect reception period corresponding to the indication effect A. (Valid period) It is designed to occur as a period having the same time length as T1. That is, in this case, even if the length of time required for the indication effect C itself is shorter than that of the indication effect A, as long as the indication effect is executed as the "specific operation-related effect" described above. Since it is suggested that an effect reception period (effective period) T4 having the same time length as in the case of the indication effect A will be generated, the amusement interest when the indication effect C is performed is preferably maintained. You will be able to.

In the production example shown in FIG. 342, the production reception period is obtained by associating the types of the precursor productions A, B1, B2, and C with the length of the production reception period (effective period) in a one-to-one relationship. The length of (effective period) is suggested. However, the effect reception period (effective period) is set so that the ratio of occurrence of a specific effect reception period having a predetermined length of time (for example, the effect reception period T2) is different for each type of aura effect. ) May be suggested.

Further, in each of the above-described effect modes and their different examples, after a specific operation-related effect is performed, the specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) on the side suggested as the result of the effect is performed. When the effect reception period (effective period) occurs, an effect image (for example, button image BTG) imitating the specific operation means is displayed. At this time, the effect image (for example, the button image BTG) is displayed so as to imitate the same state as the state of the specific operation means at that time. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 337(e), the operation button 410 is in a state of being operated at the operation position, but the button image BTG is also displayed as a state of being operated at the operation position in accordance with this, and FIG. In the example shown in (h), the sword decoration 5001 is in a state of operating at the operating position (extracting state), but the sword decoration image SYG is also displayed as a state of operating at the operating position (extracting state) accordingly. Has been done.

However, a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) to which an operation opportunity is given after a specific operation-related effect is performed is displayed as an effect image (for example, a button image BTG) imitating the appearance. If this happens, even if a specific operation-related effect with a relatively high degree of expectation is being performed, the range of the effect will be significantly narrowed when displaying the result of the effect, and the enjoyment of the game will decline. I'm worried.

Therefore, when a specific operation-related effect is performed, an effect image (for example, a button image) imitating a specific operation means (for example, an operation button 410) is described as described below with reference to FIGS. 343 and 344. Regarding BTG), it is desirable that the state of the specific operating means at that time is not necessarily expressed as it is, but is displayed as a state different from the state of the specific operating means at that time.

FIG. 343 is a diagram showing effect examples of effect contents when a precursor effect that is not a specific operation-related effect is performed and effect contents when a predictive effect is performed as a specific operation-related effect.

First, FIGS. 343(a) to 343(c) show the effect contents when a precursor effect that is not a specific operation-related effect is performed. For example, now, in the normal game state, the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit judgment in the state where the number of holdings is 0. Suppose you are in a situation. Then, in the effect situation, as shown in FIG. 343(a), the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 only correspond to the sword ornament 5001 side, not the "specific operation-related effect". If the precursor effect is executed, it becomes possible to recognize that an operation opportunity will soon be given to the sword ornament 5001. In the indication effect (similarly to the indication effect in another example), if a predetermined display corresponding to the operation means on the side to which the operation opportunity is soon given is given, an effect image simulating the operation means. Need not always be displayed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that an operation opportunity will soon be given to the sword decoration body 5001 even when the sword decoration image SYG displayed during the production acceptance period is not yet displayed. Will come to be.

Note that in the precursor effect shown in FIG. 343(a), a sword decoration image SYGa wearing a blue aura with relatively low expectations and a sword decoration image SYGb wearing red aura with relatively high expectations. And are displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the effect contents as to which of them is finally left in the display area appear. Therefore, in this presentation situation, although it can be recognized that an operation opportunity will soon be given to the sword decoration body 5001, it is either the sword decoration image SYGa with a low expectation as the sword decoration image SYG or the expectation level. It is kept secret which of the high sword decoration images SYGb is displayed.

FIG. 343(b) shows an effect result in which the sword decoration image SYGb wearing a red aura is finally left. As a result, the sword decoration body 5001 is in a relatively high expectation situation. It will be suggested that a performance acceptance period will occur. In the display shown in FIG. 343(b), the final effect indicating that the sword decoration image SYGb wearing a red aura is not changed to another effect image (sword decoration image SYGa or the like) is displayed. ..

FIG. 343(c) shows an example of an effect when the effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001 occurs, and when the effect reception period occurs, an instruction display (“press it Or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) is displayed. Further, when the production acceptance period for the sword decoration 5001 occurs, the sword decoration 5001 changes its state from the sword state to the sword removal state, and the sword decoration image SYGb is also removed from the sword state from this state. I am trying to change the state. When the production reception is made within the production reception period, the predetermined operation production is performed based on the production reception, the sword decoration image SYG is hidden, and the sword decoration body 5001 is in the sword storage state. Maintained. In addition, processing for ending the production reception period at that point is performed.

According to such a configuration, when the indication effect corresponding to only one of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 is performed, when the effect reception period occurs, the operation means on the operation target side (here, the operation means). , The effect image (here, the sword decoration image SYGb) imitating the sword decoration body 5001) is displayed in the same state (extracting state) as the operation means on the operation target side (here, the sword decoration body 5001). Become so. In particular, in the effect reception period according to this effect example, the effect image (here, sword decoration image SYGb) imitating the operation means on the operation target side and the operation means on the operation target side (here, sword decoration body 5001) Are both stopped at a predetermined position.

On the other hand, FIGS. 343(d) to 343(g) show the effect contents when a specific operation-related effect is performed as the precursor effect. For example, now, in the normal game state, the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit judgment in the state where the number of holdings is 0. Suppose you are in a situation. Then, in the effect situation, as shown in FIG. 343(d), if the indication effect as the "specific operation-related effect" is started, which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is started? It becomes possible to recognize that an operation opportunity will soon be given to something.

FIG. 343(e) shows an effect situation in which the precursor effect as the "specific operation-related effect" progresses and the effect result appears. In this presentation situation, the button image BTG is not displayed and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed to suggest that an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001 as a result of the "specific operation-related effect". Has been done. In the display shown in FIG. 343(e), the final effect indicating that the sword decoration image SYG is not changed to another effect image (button image BTG or the like) is displayed.

FIG. 343(f) shows an example of an effect when the effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001 occurs, and when the effect reception period occurs, an instruction display for prompting an operation to the sword decoration 5001 (“push in”). A character display such as ", or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) is displayed. Further, when the production acceptance period for the sword decoration 5001 occurs, the state of the sword decoration 5001 changes from the sword storage state to the sword extraction state, and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the sword extraction state.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIGS. 343(f) and 343(g), the sword decoration image SYG is maintained as the display content when the sword decoration 5001 is in the sword extraction state (sword decoration image SYG) in the effect reception period. While the sword decoration body 5001 is gradually and upwardly displaced for a period until the effect reception period ends, the sword ornament body 5001 is in a different state. I am trying to do it.

In the production reception period, no matter where the sword ornament 5001 is located, the production reception is performed when the operation target accessory 141 is operated in the sword storage state. A predetermined operation-time effect is performed based on the reception, the sword decoration image SYG is hidden, and the sword decoration body 5001 is maintained in the sword storage state. In addition, processing for ending the production reception period at that point is performed.

With such a configuration, when the effect reception period occurs after a specific operation-related effect, one side of the sword decoration 5001 and the sword decoration image SYG continues to be used for the effect. On the other hand, the other side does not operate and can play a role of accurately transmitting the current situation. In the example of FIGS. 343(f) and 343(g), the sword decoration image SYG is stopped and the sword decoration 5001 is continuously operated during the effect reception period, but the invention is not limited to this. The decoration image SYG may be continuously operated and the sword decoration 5001 may be stopped.

As described above, in the effect example shown in FIG. 343, both the sword decoration 5001 and the sword decoration image SYG are displayed in the effect reception period (FIG. 343(c)) that occurs without passing through a specific operation-related effect. In contrast to the stop state, in the effect reception period (FIG. 343(f)) that occurs after a specific operation-related effect, one of the sword decoration 5001 and the sword decoration image SYG is stopped. On the other side, this is kept in a dynamic state so that it can be used for performance. Therefore, when the effect reception period occurs after a specific operation-related effect, the range of the effect can be widened, and the interest of the game can be favorably maintained.

In particular, even if the operation button 410 itself is not the operation means to which the driving force is applied by the control of the peripheral control MPU 1511a, when the effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs through the specific operation-related effect, the operation button 410 is operated. While the button 410 itself is in a stopped state, if the button image BTG simulating the operation button 410 is set in a dynamic state and the description is continued, a specific operation-related effect is performed. It is expected to greatly improve the width of the effect when the effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs.

It should be noted that either a sword decoration image SYGa wearing a blue aura with a relatively low expectation or a sword decoration image SYGb wearing a red aura with a relatively high expectation is displayed as a sword decoration image SYG. The method may be adopted not only when a predictive effect that is not a specific operation-related effect is performed, but also when a specific operation-related effect as a predictive effect is performed. That is, in this case, in the specific operation-related effect, either one of the button image BTG simulating the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG simulating the sword decoration body 5001 appears, and either When the effect image (for example, the button image BTG) appears, whether the effect image (button image BTG) is displayed with a relatively high expectation display mode or a relatively low expectation display mode It will be possible to provide more directivity. This method may be appropriately adopted not only in the effect example of FIG. 343 but also in each of the above-described effect modes and other examples thereof.

Then, in order to give such two performances to a specific operation-related effect, first, as a result of the specific operation-related effect, which one of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG is to be displayed. It is in a state where it can be seen or recognized, and it is unclear whether or not the display mode of the effect image on the appearing side has a high degree of expectation (for example, the effect image simulating the operation means is outlined and only the outline is displayed). Recognizable display state, etc.) will appear as the production progresses.
Then, after this, a state in which it is possible to recognize whether or not the display mode of the effect image on the side that appears as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect has a high degree of expectation (for example, the whiteout of the effect image simulating the operation means). It is desirable that the states be released and the colors be confirmed) be sequentially displayed by further development progress. In addition, when the button image BTG is displayed through such production progress, under a predetermined condition, it is possible to recognize whether or not the display mode has high expectation (for example, operating means After canceling the white state of the simulated effect image), the button image BTG is further hidden, and it is possible to recognize that the sword decoration image SYG appears as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect. Yes, and it is unclear whether or not the display mode of the sword decoration image SYG has a high degree of expectation (for example, the sword decoration image SYG is outlined so that only the outline can be recognized). Therefore, a production pattern for further producing the production may be generated. After this, a state in which it is possible to recognize whether or not the display mode of the sword decoration image SYG that appears as a result of the specific operation-related effect has a high degree of expectation (for example, a white state of the sword decoration image SYG). To make it possible to check the color). In this case, when the display mode when the button image BTG is displayed is the display mode on the side with high expectation (for example, red), the display mode on the side with low expectation (for example, blue) is more than Also, it is desirable to increase the rate at which such further production progress occurs.

FIGS. 344(a) to 344(e) are diagrams showing another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 343(d) to 343(d) as effect contents when a specific operation-related effect is performed as the predictive effect. That is, in FIG. 344(a), the indication effect as the "specific operation-related effect" is started, but in the indication effect, a shield (button image BTG) imitating the operation button 410 is held. The first character (the effect image corresponding to the operation button 410) and the second character (the effect image corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001) holding the sword (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the sword decoration body 5001. And are facing each other, which suggests which operation button 410 or sword decoration 5001 is given an operation opportunity depending on which of these characters is left in the display area. I am trying.

FIG. 344(b) shows an effect situation in which the effect result of the precursor effect as the “specific operation-related effect” appears. In this effect situation, the first character (effect image corresponding to the operation button 410) is not displayed and the second character (sword decoration) is suggested in order to suggest that an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001. An effect image corresponding to the body 5001 is displayed. The display image shown in FIG. 344(b) is almost the same as the display image TG shown in FIG. 340(b) (the instruction display prompting the sword ornament 5001 to operate is hidden), and While the operation-related effect is being performed, both the effect portion (face-to-face character) and the other background image (the portion displayed before the start of the specific operation-related effect) are concerned. The effect image (the display image shown in FIG. 344(b)) as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect is suddenly replaced (substantially the entire effect in the display area is replaced).

344(c) to (e) show an example of an effect when the effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 occurs, and when the effect reception period occurs, first, as shown in FIG. 344(c). An instruction display (a character display such as "pushing in" or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) for prompting an operation to the sword decoration 5001 is displayed on the screen.

Here, in this production example, as shown in FIG. 344(c), the sword decoration body 5001 starts to move from the sword storage state to the sword removal state when the production reception period occurs. As shown in FIG. 344(d), the sword decoration 5001 completes the operation (movement) from the sword cutting state to the sword extraction state only after a relatively short time has elapsed since the production reception period was started. It is supposed to do. Then, thereafter, as shown in FIG. 344(e), the sword decoration 5001 is kept in the extracted sword state until at least the effect reception period ends, unless the player operates the sword decoration body 5001. The operation (from the sword cutting state to the sword cutting state) will be awaited.

On the other hand, in the effect display device 1600, as shown in FIGS. 344(c) to (e), a movement (swing in the rotation direction) that is completely different from the movement (the movement in the linear direction) of the sword ornament 5001 is performed. The sword decoration image SYG continues to be displayed even after the sword decoration body 5001 is maintained in the extracted state by the second character swinging down the sword decoration image SYG. It is designed to work. The sword decoration image SYG according to this effect example is a loop of a series of displays from the start (FIG. 344(c)) to the end (FIG. 344(e)) of the swing-down operation within the effect reception period. The process is repeated.

However, even if this loop processing is performed, the bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period is not affected and the display change progresses by the amount corresponding to the elapsed time. In addition, the sword decoration 5001 is also in the sword removal state while a series of displays from the start (FIG. 344(c)) to the end (FIG. 344(e)) of the swing-down operation are being performed. However, even if the loop processing is performed, it will not be affected by the loop processing and will be maintained in the unsheathed state. In addition, when the operation target accessory 141 is operated in the sword storage state within the production reception period, the production reception is performed, and a predetermined operation production is performed based on the production reception, and The loop processing is ended, the sword decoration image SYG is hidden, and the sword decoration body 5001 is maintained in the sword-storing state. In addition, processing for ending the production reception period at that point is performed.

According to such a configuration, when the precursor effect as a specific operation-related effect is performed, both the sword decoration body 5001 and the sword decoration image SYG will operate within the effect reception period. The operation mode (the operation that plays a role of accurately transmitting the current situation (the operation until moving to the operation position), the loop operation provided for the production) is different from each other, and the operation of the sword ornament 5001 ends. After that, the sword decoration image SYG continues its operation without ending.
Accordingly, when the effect reception period (FIGS. 344(c) to (e)) that occurs after the specific operation-related effect occurs, the effect content of the specific operation-related effect continues until after the effect reception period occurs ( It becomes possible to broaden the range of the effect, such as allowing the background to be continued) to be executed, and it is possible to appropriately maintain the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIG. 344, the effect contents (display in which characters face each other) that have appeared when the precursor effect as the specific operation-related effect (FIG. 344(a)) is being performed. The effect (FIGS. 344(c) to (e)) when the effect reception period occurs is changed by changing both the background image and the background image. In particular, during the production acceptance period according to this production example, the special image (sword decoration image SYG) and the character (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the operating means are specified under the display of the dedicated background (full moon). Since the display is performed during the reception period by dynamically displaying both the image and the image), it is possible to improve the production performance during the production reception period. In this sense, also in the indication effect, performing the effect using at least one of the effect image (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the operation means and the character is different from the indication effect and the effect in the effect reception period. It can be said that it is more desirable in order to have a dramatic connection between them and to further improve the performance.
Further, the dedicated background (full moon) may have a plurality of display modes with different expectations regarding privilege grant, and may be displayed in any of these display modes.

It should be noted that in the signage effect as a specific operation-related effect and in the effect during the effect acceptance period, a plurality of effect modes are prepared as those effects, and the effect acceptance is performed depending on which of these effect modes appears. It may be possible to make a suggestion as to whether or not a mode with a high degree of expectation appears as an operation-time effect when the effect reception is made during the period. The degree of expectation for the privilege grant may be suggested using the background image that appears when the aura presentation is performed.

Further, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 344, when the aura effect as a specific operation-related effect is being performed, effect reception is performed by changing both the effect content and the background image that have appeared in the aura effect. Although it was decided to execute the effect within the period, when the above-mentioned precursor effect which is not a specific operation-related effect is being performed, a form that changes both the effect content and the background image appearing in the predictive effect The effect when the effect acceptance period occurs may be executed.

In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 344, the operation of the sword decoration 5001 is started after the effect reception period has occurred, but the operation of the sword decoration 5001 is started before the effect reception period occurs. Alternatively, the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 which is started before the performance reception period is completed is completed before the performance reception period is generated (a role of accurately transmitting the current situation is provided. The performed operation may be completed before the production acceptance period occurs, and thereafter the stopped state may be maintained.

Further, even when an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means (for example, the sword ornament 5001), a background image is changed to be displayed when the production acceptance period occurs, and the background image is changed. The display may not be performed in some cases. In this case, when the display for changing the background image is performed when the effect reception period occurs, the degree of expectation for privilege granting is higher than that when the display for changing the background image is not performed when the effect reception period occurs. Is desirable.

In addition, in each of the above-described effect modes and their different examples, after a specific operation-related effect is performed, an operation on a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) on the side suggested as a result of the effect is performed. When the effect reception is made, the specific decoration member SDY (movable body provided on the game board 5 side) is operated as an operation effect based on the effect reception. At this time, for example, in the effect examples shown in FIG. 331(d), FIG. 333(e), and FIG. 334(h), the sword decoration 5001 (or operation button) is used as the movable body provided on the door frame 3 side. 410) is also operated to improve the performance of the operation effect when a specific operation-related effect is passed. In this way, in order to improve the performance of the operation-time effect when the specific operation-related effect is passed, the operation-time effect when the specific operation-related effect is passed depends on the result of the effect. Then, both the movable body provided on the game board 5 side and the movable body provided on the door frame 3 side (the game machine main body side) are activated, or a successful production situation appears, or the movable body provided on the game board 5 side is moved. While the production situation at the time of failure in which both the body and the movable body provided on the side of the door frame 3 do not operate is made to appear, the production at the time of operation (e.g., at a specific operation related production that is not performed) In the operation-time production after the precursor production that is not the operation-related production), either the movable body provided on the game board 5 side or the movable body provided on the door frame 3 side, depending on the result of the production. It is possible to display the performance situation at the time of success when only the operation is performed, or the performance situation at the time of failure in which both the movable body provided on the game board 5 side and the movable body provided on the door frame 3 side do not operate. desirable.

Further, in the above-described effect modes and the specific operation-related effects according to their different examples, when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed as the result of the effect, when the button image BTG is displayed as the result of the effect. The expectation for granting the privilege is higher than that. In this regard, when the button image BTG is displayed as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 345(a), the button is displayed in a mode in which the princess character is added (specific mode). The image BTG may be displayed in some cases, and when the button image BTG is displayed in this mode, the degree of expectation of privilege granting is higher than when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect. By increasing the value, it becomes possible to favorably maintain the gaming interest when the button image BTG is displayed as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect.

In addition, the mode in which the princess character is displayed (specific effect mode) may be applied to the sword decoration image SYG as shown in FIG. 345(b). In this case, when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in a specific presentation mode, it is desirable that the degree of expectation for granting the privilege is higher than that in the normal mode.

In addition, as a production pattern that may appear as a result of the specific operation-related production being performed, the first production pattern (the figure in which the button image BTG is displayed in a specific production mode (a mode in which the princess character is displayed)) 345(a)) and a second effect pattern in which the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in a specific effect mode (mode in which a princess character is displayed) as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect (FIG. 345(b). )) and may be prepared respectively. Then, in this case, the expectation level for privilege grant is set to be the same when the first effect pattern appears as a result of the specific operation-related effect and when the second effect pattern appears. It is desirable to do. According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide the fun as to which of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG appears as a result of the specific operation-related effect being performed, as well as the button image BTG and the sword. It is possible to provide completely different fun regardless of which of the decorative images SYG appears, but whether or not a particular effect mode (mode in which the princess character is displayed) appears. The degree of expectation may be 0% or 100%.

Further, in the case where such a specific effect mode (mode in which the princess character is displayed) can appear as a result of the specific operation-related effect, when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, As shown in FIG. 345(c), when the effect result of the specific operation-related effect (whether the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG appears) in the specific effect mode is not yet appearing. From (for example, when a particular operation-related effect is in the middle of the effect), this may be displayed in advance. According to such a configuration, although a specific operation-related effect regarding which of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG appears, a specific effect mode (the princess character is displayed By the appearance of the mode), the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG have the same effect value (the same degree of expectation). That is, in this case, since the performance of the specific operation-related effect itself is lost, it is said that "a symptom effect by the princess character" even though the specific operation-related effect is being performed. It will be possible to provide directing with a completely different purpose.

Further, in the sword decorations 5001 according to the above-described effect modes and their different examples, the sword part (handle portion 5012, blade portion 5011) of the sword decoration body 5001 can be operated in the vertical direction. In addition to the first operation mode (first operation mode), as shown in FIG. 301, the second operation in which the sheath portion (sheath portion 5020) of the sword decoration 5001 can be operated laterally. It is provided so as to have both modes (second operation modes). Therefore, in each of the above-described effect modes, and in another example thereof, which of the first operation mode and the second operation mode the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001 provided as one operation unit. The above-mentioned specific operation-related effect may be performed as the effect. The sword portion (handle portion 5012, blade portion 5011) and the sheath portion (sheath portion 5020) are all operably (operably) supported by one main body supporting portion (not shown) provided in the door frame 3. Even if one side of the sword portion (handle 5012, blade portion 5011) and the sheath portion (sheath portion 5020) is in an operated (operated) state, the other side is operable (operable). Has been formed.

However, when a specific operation-related effect is performed in such a mode, the operation mode is different regardless of which effect result appears, and it is not possible to perform an operation on the sword ornament 5001. Since there is no change, there is a concern that an operation error may occur on the player side. In particular, regardless of whether the operation opportunity is given to either the first operation mode or the second operation mode, for example, the effect image simulating the sword part of the sword decoration 5001 (and its If the instruction display for prompting the operation) is displayed, it may be more and more likely that the player will make an operation error between the first operation mode and the second operation mode. Become. That is, in this case, while the remaining time of the production acceptance period is gradually decreasing, let the player first perform an operation to correct the operation error, and then further perform the operation in the originally correct manner. It is difficult to say that, even if a specific operation-related effect with a relatively high degree of expectation is performed, if the effect reception period ends before the effect reception is made. , There is a concern that the interest in playing games may deteriorate.

Further, the sword decoration 5001 has a mode of "moving in the vertical direction" by the sword part and a mode of "moving in the lateral direction" by the sheath part, and a plurality of complicated operations that do not have such a reverse relationship. In the operation unit that can provide the mode, if the wrong side is operated when the operation opportunity is given, it takes time to perform the proper side operation, and the performance reception period ends. Therefore, it can be said that the risk of losing the operation opportunity is increased.

Therefore, when performing the specific operation-related effect as an effect as to which of the first operation mode and the second operation mode the operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001 provided as one operation unit, As will be described below with reference to FIGS. 346 and 347, an operation error between the first operation mode and the second operation mode occurs on the player side and the state of the operation error is corrected. Even if the originally correct operation is not performed, it is desirable that the effect reception is properly performed and the operation effect corresponding to the effect reception is executed.

FIG. 346 and FIG. 347 show an example of effects in the case where an operation error between the first operation mode and the second operation mode occurs on the player side in the effect pattern in which a specific operation-related effect is performed. It is a figure.

FIG. 346(a) shows that in the normal game state, the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed on the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot judgment in the state where the number of holdings is 0. Shows the production situation.

346(b) shows an effect situation in which a specific operation-related effect is started during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 346(a).

Here, in the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 346(b), a first effect imitating a first operation mode in which the sword portion of the sword decoration 5001 is operated from the sword extraction state to the sword storage state. In the display area of the effect display device 1600, the image OX and the second effect image TX imitating the second operation mode in which the sheath portion of the sword ornament 5001 is operated to move in the lateral direction are displayed. It is displayed at the same time to indicate that the operation opportunity by any of those operation modes will soon be ready for production reception. In this regard, in the first effect image OX, although the image portion of the sword decoration 5001 imitating the sword portion is displayed larger than the second effect image TX, the first effect image OX and the first effect image OX are not displayed. In each of the second effect image TX, the sword part is displayed as an image, which may cause an operation error between the first operation mode and the second operation mode.

In FIG. 346(c), the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 346(b) has progressed, and the first effect image OX corresponding to the first operation mode and the second operation image OX corresponding to the second operation mode. The effect image TX of is pressed against each other in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the effect of pushing out the other party from the display area is performed. When the effect result (first effect result) in which the first effect image OX is left appears, an effect acceptance period for the first operation mode occurs, and the effect result in which the second effect image TX is left (second effect). When the result) appears, a performance acceptance period for the second operation mode is generated.

In addition, in the specific operation-related effect according to this effect example, as shown in FIG. 346(c), when the first effect image OX is left in a predominant state, a display such as “push” can be visually recognized. When the situation is dominant in which the second effect image TX is left, the display such as “slide” can be visually confirmed. The details of the operation contents are made easier to recognize depending on the situation of the production. However, these displays may not be necessarily performed because there is a concern that it may be erroneously recognized as urging the operation at the timing when the effect reception period has not yet occurred.

346(d), as a result of performing the effect shown in FIG. 346(c), the second effect image TX is completely pushed out of the display area, and the first effect image OX is in the display area. An effect that depicts the state left behind is being performed (first effect result). When the content of this effect is advanced, even if the operation in the second operation mode is performed, the specific operation effect (movable effect by the specific decoration member SDY, etc.) does not occur, and the operation in the first operation mode is performed. When an operation is performed, an effect reception is made, and a specific operation effect (such as a movable effect by the specific decoration member SDY) corresponding to the effect reception is generated.

That is, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 346(d), the effect acceptance period relating to the specific operation effect is generated only for the first operation mode side of the first operation mode and the second operation mode. In the effect reception period, in addition to the first effect image OX corresponding to the first operation mode, an instruction display for prompting an operation (character display such as “pushing in” or the remaining time of the effect reception period is shown. Bar display) will be displayed. Further, at this time, the sword decoration 5001 operates from the sword storage state to the sword removal state so that the operation according to the first operation mode can be performed.

In FIG. 347(e), although the first effect image OX corresponding to the first operation mode is displayed, the operation (erroneous operation) is not performed in the first operation mode but in the second operation mode. The production situation when it is done by the player is shown.

That is, in this effect example, even when the effect reception period related to the specific operation effect is generated only for the first operation mode side of the first operation mode and the second operation mode, The operation detection of the second operation mode itself is enabled. Then, when an operation in the second operation mode is detected in the effect reception period, it is determined that there is an operation error by the player, and a specific notification that cannot appear when the operation in the first operation mode is received (Here, "it is good as it is").

In addition, as shown in FIG. 347(f), the content of such a specific notification is changed (here, “calmly push in”) so that the player can regain his composure. It is like this. According to such a configuration, even if the content to be notified is complicated, it is possible to sequentially notify in short words, so that it is suitable even if the player side is in a panic state. It will be expected to be suppressed. As a result, even if the sword ornament 5001 in the second operation mode is operated as it is in the first operation mode, it is properly accepted to the player side. You will be able to recognize.

FIG. 347(g) shows that an appropriate operation (first operation mode) is performed in the production state (production reception period when in an erroneous operation state) of FIGS. 347(e) and 347(f). As a result, the appearance reception is performed and the above-described operation-time effect corresponding to the operation is performed. However, at this time, when the player's hand is separated from the sword decoration 5001 (when the operation is finished), the sword decoration 5001 is changed from the second operation mode to the non-operation state (normal state). ) Will be returned to.

According to such a configuration, an operation error between the first operation mode and the second operation mode occurs on the player side, the state of the operation error is not corrected, and the originally correct operation is left unchanged. Even if the operation is performed from the state (operation error state), since the performance reception is properly performed, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the entertainment appeal when the operation error occurs.

In the above example of performance, when the player makes an erroneous operation, it is notified that the operation should be directly performed without correcting the operation error. However, the content (the operation is performed as it is without correcting the operation error) It is not always necessary to provide detailed notification for the purpose of That is, as described above, since there is a possibility that the player is panicking in a situation where an erroneous operation is performed, notifying complicated contents may be counterproductive. Therefore, when there is an operation error by the player during the effect reception period, as a specific notification that cannot appear when an operation in an appropriate mode is received as an operation, not a message display but an effect or sound only notification. It is desirable to make a simple notification such as. In this case, the player may not recognize that an operation error has been made, but a special situation is confirmed in which a specific notification is given based on the operation being made and no effect is produced during operation. Therefore, it can be said that it is possible to sufficiently expect to switch the operation to the operation on the proper side.

On the other hand, depending on the player (especially, an aged player or the like), a situation may occur in which an operation is accidentally performed before a performance reception period occurs in a specific operation-related performance. For example, when the second operation unit (for example, lateral movement of the sheath portion) is being operated even though the operation instruction regarding the second operation unit (for example, the sheath portion) is not given, It is assumed that a performance reception period related to a specific operation performance may occur only for the operation unit (for example, the sword part) side, and in this case also, how should the player operate? There is a concern that I may not be able to recognize it.

Therefore, when a specific operation-related effect regarding which of the first operation unit (sword region) and the second operation unit (sheath region) the operation opportunity is given is being performed, Despite the situation where the operation instruction (bar display of the remaining time) to the operation unit side of No. 2 is not made (for example, the situation shown in FIGS. 346 (b) and (c)), the second operation unit Even when the operation is performed, it is desirable to be able to perform the specific notification that cannot appear when the operation in the proper mode is received. The specific notification may be "a message display that the operation unit on the proper side to which an operation opportunity is soon given is operated while maintaining the operation state", or the message display Instead, it may be a simple notification such as an effect or a notification only by sound. In any case, even if an operation is performed, by confirming a special situation in which the specific notification is made based on the operation and the effect is not made during the operation, the operation can be performed on the proper side after that. It can be said that it is possible to fully expect that it will be a reason to go.

In this case, for example, the first operation unit (for example, the sword decoration 5001 is moved to the left) while the operation for the second operation unit (for example, the sheath portion) is being performed. , The sword part) side, even when the effect reception period related to the specific operation effect occurs, the state in which the operation on the second operation part (for example, the sheath part) is being performed (sword ornament) When the first operation unit (for example, the sword part) side is operated while maintaining the state where 5001 is moved to the left), the effect reception is performed and the above-described operation effect corresponding to the operation is performed. Becomes

According to such a configuration, an operation error occurs between the first operation mode and the second operation mode before the effect reception period occurs, and the effect reception occurs while the operation error is maintained. Even if the operation error state is not corrected within the period and the original correct operation is performed from the state as it is, the production reception will be properly performed, so an operation error will occur before the production reception period occurs. When the occurrence of the game occurs, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest in the game.

However, in the period during which a specific operation-related effect is performed for which of the first operation unit and the second operation unit the operation opportunity is given, the effect result is shown and the effect reception period If the above specific notification is made in the period immediately before the occurrence of, the information will be mixed with the content (instruction display, etc.) that will be notified during the production reception period, further confusing the player. There is a concern that it will happen. Therefore, in the specific operation-related effect that is finally displayed, the effect result suggesting that the operation opportunity is given to the first operation unit, and in the period until the effect result is displayed. The first notification is executed when the operation in the second operation mode is performed despite the situation in which the operation instruction regarding the second operation unit (for example, the sheath portion) is not displayed. There is a period and a second period in which the specific notification is not executed even if the operation in the second operation mode is performed in the situation, and the first period and the second period are sequentially passed before the first period It is desirable to generate a performance acceptance period for one operation unit.

In the example of the above-mentioned presentation, the degree of expectation for granting the privilege may be suggested when the specific notification is given. The degree of expectation may be 0% or 100%.

Further, in the above-described production modes and the sword decoration body 5001 according to the other examples thereof, the production mode of the sword decoration body 5001 itself changes to any one of the plurality of modes described above (for example, FIG. 311 ). It is possible to change from the stage 0 form shown in 1) to any one of the stage 1 form to the stage 3 form). In this regard, after the specific operation-related effect is performed, the sword decoration 5001 is changed to any one of the plurality of modes described above, and the effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001 is generated in the changed state. It may be allowed to. Alternatively, the sword decoration 5001 may be changed to any one of the plurality of modes described above when the effect reception period occurs after the specific operation-related effect is performed.

In this case, in the effect display device 1600 during the effect reception period, an instruction display (a character display such as "pushing in" or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) for prompting an operation on the sword decoration 5001 and a sword decoration 5001 The sword decoration image SYG imitating the sword is displayed, but the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the same mode as the sword decoration body 5001 at that time (stage 0 form to stage 3 form shown in FIG. 311). It will be.

However, when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed on the effect display device 1600, if it is always displayed in the same manner as the sword decoration body 5001, it is possible to have some fun in confirming the sword decoration image SYG. However, the performance is poor during the performance reception period. Therefore, when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed on the effect display device 1600, when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, the sword decoration image SYG may be displayed in a different mode from the sword decoration body 5001 at that time. It is desirable to ensure the performance during the performance reception period.

At this time, it is preferable that the aspect represented by the sword decoration image SYG has a higher degree of expectation than the aspect of the sword decoration body 5001 in order to further enhance the production performance during the production reception period. It is desirable in order to secure it appropriately. For example, in the case where the sword decoration 5001 is in the stage 1 form and the predetermined effect condition is satisfied, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the stage 2 form or the stage 3 form instead of the stage 1 form. To be displayed. According to such a configuration, even if the sword decoration body 5001 is in the stage 1 form, it is possible to grasp that the sword decoration image SYG has a higher degree of expectation by checking the form of the sword decoration image SYG. Therefore, the interest in the game during the production acceptance period can be favorably maintained.

In order to obtain such an effect, it is sufficient that the number of effect modes on the sword decoration image SYG side is larger than the number of effect modes on the sword decoration body 5001 side. The number of presentation modes on the side of the sword ornament 5001 may be one. In addition, when a plurality of effect modes are prepared as the sword decoration 5001, the effect modes do not necessarily change.

However, if the mode of the sword decoration body 5001 and the mode of the sword decoration image SYG are simply made different in this way, some players may feel uncomfortable because of false display. There is concern that this may reduce the fun of playing games. Therefore, more preferably, the aspect of the sword decoration image SYG is different from any of the aspects (here, stage 0 form to stage 3 form shown in FIG. 311) prepared as the form of the sword ornament 5001. When the predetermined effect condition is satisfied, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in a special mode instead of the mode of the sword decoration body 5001 at that time. It is desirable to make the aspect of the decoration image SYG different from each other. The special mode may be a mode in which the outer shape is changed by further deforming and combining the sword decoration image SYG, or the sword decoration body 5001 operates in a mode that does not appear, or the sword decoration body 5001 operates. It may emit light in a manner that does not appear.

According to such a configuration, the sword decoration image SYG makes it possible to achieve a presentation effect that is difficult due to the structure of the sword decoration body 5001, so that it is possible to suppress the possibility of causing discomfort due to false display. In addition to being able to do so, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be improved by providing the playability beyond the imagination of the player when looking at the structure of the sword decoration 5001.

Even in the case where the sword decoration image SYG has a special aspect as described above, the sword decoration image SYG is provided with each aspect prepared as the aspect of the sword ornament 5001 (here, shown in FIG. 311). It is desirable to be able to perform the display in the stage 0 form to the stage 3 form). That is, in this case, basically, while the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the same manner as the sword decoration body 5001, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed only when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied. It will be displayed in a special manner. It should be noted that it is desirable to suggest that the sword decoration image SYG is displayed with a higher degree of expectation for granting a privilege than when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in a special mode. The degree of expectation may be 100%.

In addition, regarding the method of allowing the sword decoration image SYG to be displayed in a special mode, in addition to the case where a specific operation-related effect is performed, other effects (for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 312 to 319) You may make it apply.

For example, if it is now in the effect situation shown in FIG. 315(X1), as the next effect development destination, in addition to the effect situation shown in FIG. 315(X2), the effect situation shown in FIG. A production pattern for production progress will be prepared. When the production is advanced to the production pattern, first, as shown in FIG. 348(a), in the display area of the production display device 1600, the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in FIG. 315(X1) is operated. A continuous image (image with the eyes of the samurai closed) showing that no opportunity is given is displayed, and the sword decoration 5001 that was in the second sword state is in the sword state while maintaining the form in stage 3 form. Will be returned.

Next, the three decorative symbols that have been variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a pseudo continuous manner, and the player is informed that the decorative symbols will be changed again (FIG. 348(b)). ). Here, among the three decorative designs, the central decorative design is a pseudo-sword design that is not prepared for the left and right decorative designs, specifically, the form of the sword ornament 5001 and the production level (number of pseudo-series variations). By displaying with the pseudo continuous sword pattern of the aspect, the player can easily recognize the re-change of the decorative pattern (start of the pseudo continuous change).

However, here, as shown in FIG. 348(c), the form of the sword ornament 5001 in the fourth pseudo-continuous change (re-change) is included in the pseudo-sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Although a sword image showing (special mode) is displayed, this special mode can appear only in the sword image (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the sword decoration body 5001 in the display area. The body 5001 itself is immutable. The special aspect according to this example of presentation is an aspect in which the sheath portion is divided into two. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 348(c), even if the sword image (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the sword decoration 5001 in the display area changes to a special mode, the sword decoration 5001 has the stage 3 form. While maintaining the above, the sword state will change to the second sword state.

Then, after this, the operation effective period of the sword decoration 5001 is generated, and at the same time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the operation promotion effect for urging the sword operation of the sword decoration 5001 is performed. Specifically, while the sword decoration 5001 is in the second extracted sword state (stage 3 form), a sword image (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the sword decoration 5001 in a special mode is displayed. An image (bar display) showing the operation direction and the operation effective period is displayed together with the message "Please put the sword!" (Fig. 348 (d)). Then, as shown in FIG. 348(e), when the player's sword cutting operation is detected during the operation valid period, the drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (blend product) is performed according to the set effect pattern. The sword decoration 5001 changes its form from the stage 3 form to the initial form while the expectation notification production is performed. As a result, the player can recognize that the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) has ended.

Further, in each of the above-described effect modes and their different examples, for example, when the design variation is performed in the first effect pattern based on the result of the big hit determination, the operation button 410 is operated within the symbol variation. The first omen effect that appears when the operation opportunity is given and the operation opportunity is not given to the sword decoration 5001 can be executed. Further, when the design variation is performed in the second effect pattern based on the result of the big hit determination, the operation opportunity is not given to the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 is operated within the design variation. The second omen effect that appears when an opportunity is given is executable. Further, when the design variation is performed in the third effect pattern based on the result of the big hit determination, the third aura that appears when an operation opportunity is given to either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001. It is possible to execute effects (specific operation-related effects).

In this respect, these precursor effects are executed as mutually different effect contents, but as the effect contents, for example,
-Before the effect image simulating the operation means on the side to which the operation opportunity is given appears in the display area, the specific image is displayed so as to cover at least the area portion in which the effect image appears,
After that, at the position where it is difficult to visually recognize by the specific image, an effect image simulating the operation means on the side to which the operation opportunity is given is displayed,
・After that, it is common in that the specific image gradually changes from the display area to the non-display area (such as increasing the transmittance of the specific image itself or decreasing the area where the specific image is displayed). You may make it change. For example, in the first omen effect, a display effect using a "cloud effect" is performed as a specific image (a display effect that makes it easier to visually recognize an effect image simulating an operating means), and in the second omen effect, a specific image is "flame. Display effect by "effect" (display effect that makes it easier to visually recognize the effect image imitating the operation means is performed, and in the third precursor effect, display effect by "water effect" as the specific image (effect image imitating the operation means It is possible to make the precursor effects different from each other by making the types of the specific images different, for example, by making the display effects gradually visible. When the display effect is performed, it is possible to recognize that the first sign effect is being performed before the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410, and the display effect by the “flame effect” is performed. In this case, it is possible to recognize that the second aura effect is performed before the operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001, and when the display effect by the “water effect” is performed, the operation is performed. It becomes possible to recognize that the third aura effect (specific operation-related effect) regarding which of the button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 the operation opportunity is given is being performed.

Then, in the case of performing the indication effect (at least one of the first indication effect, the second indication effect, and the third indication effect) with such effect contents, an effect image imitating the operation means by the specific image is displayed. It is desirable to generate an effect acceptance period for the operation means during a period in which it is difficult to visually recognize. When such a configuration is applied to one of the first omen effect and the second omen effect, the effect image simulating the operation means has a display mode with a high expectation (for example, red) and a low expectation. Since the operation opportunity is given to the operation means from a stage when it is not sure which of the display mode (for example, blue) is displayed, the effect during the effect acceptance period It becomes possible to improve the sex. Further, even when such a configuration is applied to the third aura effect (specific operation-related effect), it is certain whether the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001. Since the operation opportunity is given to the operation means from a stage where the player cannot hold the performance, it is possible to improve the performance during the performance reception period.

FIG. 349 is a diagram showing an example of an effect when the first omen effect is performed with such effect contents, and FIG. 350 is an example of an effect when the first omen effect is performed with the same content. It is a time chart shown. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 349 and FIG. 350, an example of an effect when the first amenity effect is performed will be described. However, with respect to this effect example, the second amenity effect and the third amenity effect are not the first amenity effect. It is also possible to apply it to a precursor effect.

FIG. 349(a), in the normal game state, the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed on the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination in the state where the number of holdings is 0. Shows the production situation.

FIG. 349(b) shows an effect situation in which the first amenity effect has been effected during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 349(a).

Here, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 349(b), the display effect by the “cloud effect” is performed in a large range within the display area of the effect display device 1600. The display effect by such a “cloud effect” gradually changes from the display area to the non-display after the effect is started at the timing t1 shown in FIG. 350 (the transmittance of the specific image itself is increased. Or, the area in which the specific image is displayed is reduced).

Then, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 350, the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 is changed at a timing t2 when the display effect by the “cloud effect” is gradually changing to non-display. Along with the occurrence, a button image BTG simulating the operation button 410 and an instruction display (a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) for prompting an operation on the operation button 410 are respectively displayed ( FIG. 349(c)).

In this effect example, the button image BTG can be displayed in any of a plurality of modes, and when the button image BTG is displayed in the first display mode (for example, red), the second display mode (for example, , Blue) when the button image BTG is displayed, the proportion at which the effect during operation is performed in a mode with a high degree of expectation is higher. In this respect, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 349(c), it is not possible to be sure whether the button image BTG is displayed in the first display mode or the second display mode by the “cloud effect”. However, when the operation button 410 is operated, the effect reception is performed and the operation-time effect corresponding to the effect reception is executed. That is, in this case, in the display area of the effect display device 1600 as well, the on-operation effect is executed in such a manner that the effect content is switched from such a precursor effect, so that the button image BTG is different from the first display mode. The effect can be advanced without being sure of which of the two display modes is displayed.

In the effect situation shown in FIG. 349(c), it is not possible to be sure whether the button image BTG is displayed in the first display mode or the second display mode by the "cloud effect". However, the instruction display prompting the user to operate the operation button 410 continues to change the length of the bar display so as to suggest that the remaining time of the effect reception period is gradually decreasing.

On the other hand, at the timing t3 when a predetermined time has elapsed after the effect situation shown in FIG. 349(c) occurs, the "cloud effect" is generated while the effect acceptance period generated at the timing t2 continues. Is completely hidden (FIG. 349(d)). In such a situation, it is possible to easily recognize whether the button image BTG is displayed in the first display mode or the second display mode, and the operation button 410 can be operated. become able to. That is, in this case, the operation-time effect is executed in such a manner that the effect contents are switched from the effect shown in FIG. 349(d).

According to such a configuration, in the effect reception period (timing t2 to t4), the period (timing t2 to t3) from when the button image BTG is displayed until the “cloud effect” is completely hidden. In (), it is possible to provide a rendering effect by making the button image BTG relatively difficult to visually recognize.

It should be noted that in order to enhance the effect of production during the production acceptance period (timing t2 to t4) during the entire period, the period in which the "cloud effect" is completely hidden (timing t3 to t4). It is desirable to perform the effect display that is not performed in the period of the above timings t2 to t3. In this example of performance, when the "cloud effect" is completely hidden (timing t3 to t4), a message such as "press" is displayed. However, for example, at timing t2 to t3. If the button image BTG displayed in the stopped mode in the period is dynamically displayed in the period of timings t3 to t4, the performance in the period (timing t3 to t4) can be more suitably enhanced. Will be able to.

In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 349, the instruction display for prompting the operation of the operation button 410 and the button image BTG simulating the operation button 410 are displayed at the same time (when the effect reception period occurs). The button image BTG simulating the operation button 410 may be displayed before the production acceptance period occurs. That is, in this case, after the effect display by the “cloud effect” is performed, the effect situation in which the button image BTG is difficult to be visible first appears, and after a predetermined time after that situation, the effect condition is difficult to be visually recognized. Until then, the effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs, and the instruction display prompting the operation of the operation button 410 appears.

At this time, when the button image BTG is in a production situation in which it is difficult to visually recognize the button image BTG before the production acceptance period occurs, the production mode in which the display mode of the button image BTG changes to a mode with a higher degree of expectation (third sign) In the case of an effect, an effect pattern that changes from the button image BTG to the sword decoration image SYG) may appear. According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide the fun that makes the button image BTG more worth watching, as the button image BTG is in a rendering situation in which it is difficult to visually recognize the button image BTG. It becomes possible to maintain it suitably.

Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 349, the button image BTG is made difficult to be visually recognized by the “cloud effect”, but the instruction display prompting the operation button 410 is affected by the “cloud effect”. It was decided not to receive it and to display it so that its visibility would be maintained. As a result, it becomes possible to enjoy with peace of mind that the visibility of the button image BTG is changing while grasping the remaining time of the effect reception period.

However, the instruction display for prompting the operation of the operation button 410 may be affected by the “cloud effect” so that it is difficult to see until the timing t3. That is, in this case, it is possible to give the player a conflict as to whether to operate the operation button 410 without being sure of the display mode, while the remaining time of the effect reception period cannot be grasped well. It will be possible to provide an unprecedented new directivity.

In addition, in any of the first omen effect, the second omen effect, and the third omen effect, when such an effect is applied, the effect image imitating the operation means is clear after the omen effects are started. Even if the length of time until they are visually recognized (the time until the specific image is hidden) is different from each other, the effect image that imitates the operation means is displayed and then the effect image is clear. It is desirable to set the same time until they are made visible (the time until the specific image is hidden). Moreover, when applying such a rendering property to any one of the first omen effect, the second omen effect, and the third omen effect, the effect imitating the operation means after the omen effect is started. Regarding the length of time until the image is clearly visible (the time until the specific image is hidden), prepare multiple of these so that multiple performances with different expectations can be provided. However, the time from when the effect image imitating the operation means is displayed until the effect image is clearly visible (the time until the specific image is hidden) is the same. It is desirable to set the time.

Further, as a method of making it difficult to visually recognize the effect image simulating the operation means, it is not always necessary to use another image (specific image). For example, by changing the setting of the transmittance of the effect image simulating the operation means itself, the effect image simulating the operation means appears in a display mode (timing t2) that is relatively difficult to visually recognize, and then the relative The display mode (timing t3) that is easily visually recognized may be gradually changed. However, the timing in which the effect image simulating the operation means appears in the display mode in which it is relatively difficult to visually recognize may be a timing before the timing t2, and in this case, the appearance in such a display mode itself. May be performed as a precursor effect, or a display different from this may be performed as a predictive effect so that an effect image simulating the operation means appears in a display mode that is relatively difficult to visually recognize. Good.

Further, when a specific effect pattern corresponding to the result of the big hit determination is executed, the specific operation-related effects described with reference to FIGS. ) May be executed only when (1) occurs. That is, at the time when a specific operation-related effect is started, it is kept secret which of the plurality of operating means can accept the effect, and as a result of the effect being advanced, a plurality of Since the production acceptance period corresponding to only one of the operation means will occur, if it is delayed in determining which of the plurality of operation means should be operated, it may be delayed rather than being operated by the player. The production reception period may end before all the remaining time is consumed. In this regard, if the specific operation-related effect can be executed only when a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) described later is generated, effect after the specific operation-related effect is performed In the reception period, even if an image corresponding to any operation means appears as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect, the player operates the operation means on the operation target side and the automatic effect function. Since the production reception is performed by any of the above and the post-operation production is always executed, it is possible to favorably maintain the entertainment of the game when the specific operation-related production is performed.

[Automatic button performance state]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, control to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) can be executed, and the automatic button effect state is controlled. When the effect reception period for the operation button 410 (more accurately, a predetermined effect pattern in which the effect reception period for the operation button 410 is set) occurs based on the result of the jackpot determination, during the effect reception period Even if the operation by the player is not received in the effect, it is possible to execute a process (automatic effect function) that causes the same change in the effect as when the operation by the player is received in the effect reception period. There is. According to such an automatic button performance state, since the post-operation performance when the operation is performed is generated without performing the operation each time the performance reception period occurs, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment level of the game due to forgetting the operation. You will be able to. Regarding the automatic effect function, when the function is activated, the same effect reception as that when the operation is actually performed may be generated so that the process corresponding to the effect reception may be performed. The same process as when the production is received may be performed without performing the process.

In the embodiment relating to the "automatic effect function" described below, the above-mentioned techniques, effects, and settings related to the operation may be appropriately combined or used after being replaced.

Here, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, the automatic button is operated by operating the operation means a plurality of times during the period when the demo screen in which the symbol variation is not executed is displayed. It is set so that the production state can be set. More specifically, after the menu screen is displayed by the first operation on the operation button 410, the menu screen is displayed by the second operation on the operation button 410 (or an operation means different from the operation button 410). The "various settings" screen is displayed so that the "various settings" screen is displayed, and the "various settings" screen is displayed by the third operation on the operation button 410 (or an operation means different from the operation button 410). When the "setting of automatic button effect state" displayed therein is selected, the setting to the automatic button effect state is performed. It should be noted that only the operation button 410 may be operated a plurality of times, or the operation on the operation button 410 and an operation on a different operation means may be performed a plurality of times.

On the other hand, during the period when the symbol variation is in the execution state, the operation button 410 can be set to the automatic button effect state only by operating once, and by the simplification of such operation, The automatic button production state can be set while keeping a close watch on the production progress while the symbols are changing. However, some players want to actively operate the operation button 410 regardless of whether or not the effective period has occurred. From such a person, the operation button 410 If there is a case where the automatic button performance state is set just by operating it, the interest in the game may be deteriorated. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in order to set the automatic button effect state during the period when the symbol variation is in the execution state, the operation state of the operation button 410 is set to a predetermined time ( Here, it is required to operate this once for a mode in which it is maintained for 2 seconds (a so-called “long press mode”). As a result, during the period when the symbol variation is in the execution state, even if the operation button 410 is positively operated regardless of whether or not the effective period is generated, the automatic button performance state is set. And it becomes possible to make it difficult to be accidentally set. In addition, it is desirable not to set the automatic button production state even if the operation is performed in a long press mode at least during the production reception period during the period when the symbol variation is in the execution state. ..

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, even if the automatic button effect state is set, even if the method is canceled, the demo screen in which the symbol variation is not executed is displayed. Different operation modes are required during the displayed period and during the period when the symbol variation is in the execution state.

That is, during the period in which the demo screen in which the symbol variation is not executed is displayed, the setting of the automatic button effect state can be canceled by operating the operation means a plurality of times. More specifically, after the menu screen is displayed by the first operation on the operation button 410, the menu screen is displayed by the second operation on the operation button 410 (or an operation means different from the operation button 410). The "various settings" screen is displayed so that the "various settings" screen is displayed, and the "various settings" screen is displayed by the third operation on the operation button 410 (or an operation means different from the operation button 410). When "cancel the automatic button effect state" displayed inside is selected, the setting of the automatic button effect state is canceled.

On the other hand, during the period when the symbol variation is in the execution state, the setting of the automatic button effect state can be canceled by only operating the operation button 410 once. By simplifying such operation, The automatic button performance state can be canceled while maintaining the attention to the performance development during the change of the design. However, unlike the case where the operation button 410 is set to the automatic button effect state, the operation button 410 is moved to the operation state without maintaining the operation state of the operation button 410 for a predetermined time (even if the operation mode is not long-pressed). The setting of the automatic button presentation state is canceled only by detecting that the action has been performed (by operating in a single-shot operation mode). That is, it can be said that some operation is performed on the operation button 410, which means that there is a desire to perform the operation on the operation button 410. Therefore, when the operation is performed, the automatic button rendering is performed. By canceling the setting of the state and returning to the normal effect state at an early stage, it is expected that the entertainment of the game is maintained appropriately.

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment includes a plurality of operation means including the operation button 410. In this respect, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment is different from the operation button 410 based on the result of the big hit determination when in the automatic button effect state set by the operation on the operation button 410. A performance reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means (for example, a sword decoration 5001) (more precisely, a predetermined performance pattern in which a performance reception period for the sword decoration 5001 or the like is set) Occurs, and even if the player does not receive the operation (the operation on the sword decoration 5001) during the effect reception period, the operation (the operation on the sword decoration 5001) by the player does not occur during the effect reception period. It is possible to execute a process (automatic production function) that causes the same change as when the production is received. With such a configuration, whether a period during which the operation of the operation button 410 of the plurality of operation means (the operation button 410, the sword ornament 5001 and the like) can be received by the effect occurs, or another operation means (for example, If the above-described effect (specific operation-related effect (see FIG. 330 to FIG. 350)) regarding whether a period during which the operation on the sword ornament 5001) can accept the effect occurs, the effect result Since it is not necessary to worry about forgetting to operate regardless of whether the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 can accept the effect, it is possible to enjoy such a specific operation-related effect with peace of mind. ..

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment,
When a first side effect reception period in which the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) of the plurality of operation means is set as the operation target while being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) , When the first operation means is not operated within the first-side effect reception period, it is possible to execute an automatic process that causes the same change as the operation when the first operation means is operated. Yes (first automatic production means),
The second side effect reception period in which the second operation means (for example, the sword decoration 5001) among the plurality of operation means is set as the operation target when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). When it occurs, when the operation for the second operation means is not performed within the second-side effect reception period, an automatic process for causing the same change as when the operation for the second operation means is performed for the effect is executed. Possible (second automatic production means)
Even if either the first side effect reception period or the second side effect reception period occurs, it is possible to change the first time when the same specific time elapses after the period occurs. The automatic processing by the one automatic rendering means or the automatic processing by the second automatic rendering means can be executed.

According to such a configuration, when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the first side effect acceptance period in which the first operation means is set as the operation target and the second operation means are the operation object. Even if any of the second side effect reception period set as is generated within the execution period of the symbol variation, the automatic effect function can function when the same specific time has elapsed from the occurrence of those periods. Therefore, you will be able to enjoy the performance with peace of mind.

However, when a first side effect reception period in which the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is set as an operation target occurs, when a specific time has elapsed since the first side effect reception period occurred. When the automatic process by the first automatic effect means is executed, and when the time different from the specific time elapses after the first side effect acceptance period occurs, the automatic process by the first automatic effect means is executed. As in some cases, production progress may be performed within the symbol variation.
According to such a configuration, when it is assumed that the automatic process by the first automatic effect means is executed when the specific time has elapsed after the first side effect reception period has occurred, the timing different from this Since the production reception is made and the post-operation production is automatically generated, it is possible to function as a surprise production.

When controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), an operation opportunity is given to the operation means within the symbol variation period than when not controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). It is also possible to increase the ratio of occurrence of the effect reception period. That is, in this case, it can be assumed that the frequency of occurrence of the effect reception period increases, and thus the frequency of forgetting to operate within the effect reception period also increases. Since the post-operation performance is executed due to the functioning of the function, it is possible to generate the performance reception period at a higher frequency while suppressing a decrease in the enjoyment of the game due to frequent forgetting operations. By the way, when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), it is desirable to increase the ratio of occurrence of both the effect acceptance period for the first operation means and the effect acceptance period for the second operation means. However, it is more desirable that the degree of increase in the occurrence rate be different between the effect reception period for the first operation means and the effect reception period for the second operation means.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment,
If the performance reception condition is satisfied within the performance reception period, post-operation performance can be executed (post-operation performance execution means),
・Processing for satisfying the production reception condition based on the player's operation being performed within the production reception period (player operation reception means),
When an operation is not performed by the player within the production reception period, it is possible to execute a process for satisfying the production reception condition without being operated by the player at a specific timing within the production reception period (automatic production reception means )
However, the specific timing within the production reception period is set so that it does not arrive until at least half of the time set as the production reception period has elapsed since the production reception period was started. I am going to do it. As a result, it becomes possible to give a sufficient margin for the player to operate by himself until the automatic effect function works, and the option to cause the effect acceptance by the operation by the player also remains. , It becomes possible to maintain the interest of the game.

In this case, the automatic processing by the first automatic performance means is executed when the specific time has elapsed after the first side effect reception period has occurred, and the specific time after the first side effect reception period has occurred. When performing the production progress within the symbol variation so that the automatic processing by the first automatic production means may be executed when a different time from the above, the "specific time" or the "specific time" Any of the "time different from" is set as a time value longer than at least half of the time set as the first side effect reception period.

Here, when the effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs during the execution period of the symbol variation when being controlled to the automatic button effect state, and when the operation for the operation button 410 is effected during the effect reception period, The process for generating post-operation effects according to the effect reception is executed. However, at this time, in addition to the process of generating the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception, the process of canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state may be performed together.

In addition, similarly, during the execution period of the symbol variation when being controlled to the automatic button effect state, an effect acceptance period for the operation means (such as the sword ornament 5001) different from the operation button 410 occurs, and the effect acceptance Even when an operation on the sword ornament 5001 is received during the period, a process for generating a post-operation effect according to the effect reception and a process for canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state should be executed. Is desirable. Also in this case, as for the "post-operation effect according to effect reception", an effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001 occurs during a period in which the automatic button effect state is not controlled, and the sword decoration is performed within the effect reception period. It will be executed as the same effect as the post-operation effect that is executed when the operation on the body 5001 is received.

That is, after being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the desire to return to the effect state (normal effect mode) in which the effect can be advanced depending on the player's own operation (specific effect) The desire to end the condition) may arise. Such a desire often occurs when a performance reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to a player occurs, but a limited time from the start of the performance reception period to the end thereof. It is difficult to perform both the operation for ending a specific staging state and the operation for receiving the operation, and as a result, the operation opportunity may be lost. If so, the interest in playing games could be reduced. In this respect, in the above configuration, when the effect reception period relating to the specific effect occurs while the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is being controlled, the operation button to which the operation opportunity is given within the effect acceptance period. The process of ending the automatic button performance state (specific performance state) and the process that can cause a change in performance by only performing one operation on 410 or the sword decoration 5001 (by operating in a single operation mode). Since (post-operation performance processing) is performed respectively, the desire to end the automatic button performance state (specific performance state) and progress the performance depending on the player's own operation Even if it occurs within the period, it becomes possible to smoothly switch the effect state.

However, regarding the setting change related to the automatic button production state (the setting change to the automatic button production state, the cancellation of the setting of the automatic button production state) during the period when the demo screen is displayed (the state where the symbol variation is not executed) The setting of the sword ornament 5001 can be changed without requiring any operation. That is, the sword ornament 5001 is less frequently given an operation opportunity than the operation button 410 during the period of execution of the pattern change, and when the operation opportunity is provided by that much, a big hit expectation is obtained than the operation button 410. The degree is raised. Therefore, the operation on the sword decoration body 5001 is prevented from being permitted only for the purpose of changing the setting related to the automatic button performance state (specific performance state), and thus the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001. It can be said that it is more desirable to enhance the sense of premium when playing and maintain amusement of the game. In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during the period in which the demo screen in which the symbol variation is not executed is displayed, the operation means (operation buttons other than the sword ornament 5001 among the plurality of operation means is operated. 410 or another operation means other than this) can be operated a plurality of times to set or cancel the automatic button effect state.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, even during the execution period of the symbol variation when it is not controlled to the automatic button effect state, the operation to the automatic button effect state is performed without the need to operate the sword ornament 5001. The settings can be changed. That is, as described above, if the operation button 410 is operated once in the "long press mode", the automatic button effect state is controlled, but only the setting change to the automatic button effect state is performed. For the purpose of, the operation on the sword decoration 5001 is not allowed.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the setting related to the automatic button effect state may be changed by the operation on the sword decoration 5001, the design when the automatic button effect state is controlled It is limited to the case where an effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001 occurs during the execution period of the variation, and an operation for the sword decoration 5001 is received during the effect reception period and a post-operation effect corresponding to the operation is displayed. .. According to such a configuration, the setting change to the automatic button effect state can be performed by the operation on the sword decoration 5001 without impairing the premium feeling when the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001. Like

In addition, as a plurality of operation means included in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, when the automatic button production state is set, “automatic operation-based production is performed even if no operation is performed within the production reception period. In addition to the operating means (operation buttons 410, sword decoration 5001) that can be the target of the "drafting function", special operating means that is not the target of the "automatic staging function that generates the on-manipulation performance without any operation within the performance acceptance period" May be further included. That is, in this case, when the symbol variation is in the execution state, an effect reception period in which an operation opportunity for the special operation means is given occurs, and when an operation for the special operation means is received during the effect reception period, The expectation for a big hit will be suggested by the post-operation production according to the production reception. However, even if the operation is controlled to the automatic button effect state, if the operation for the special operation means is not accepted during the effect acceptance period, the same post-operation effect as when the effect is accepted will appear. There is no. However, in this case, the same post-operation effect as when the effect is received does not appear, but may be made to appear if the effect is different from when the effect is accepted.

Further, regarding the setting to the automatic button effect state using the operation button 410 (operation in a long-press mode), the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs during the period in which the symbol variation is in the execution state. Not only the time, but also an effect reception period for an operation means other than the operation button 410 (an effect reception time period when the sword decoration 5001 is operated is expected to be expected, and an expectation degree is suggested when the special operation means is operated. It is desirable not to allow this even when the performance reception period) occurs. That is, if the automatic button performance state is generated by operating the operation button 410 (operation in a long-press mode) during the performance reception period for the operation means different from the operation button 410. In the middle of the production reception period, the "automatic production function for generating an on-operation production even if the operation is not performed within the production reception period" is activated, so that the original production reception (operation means different from the operation button 410 is operated. If the player who is not knowledgeable about such an automatic button effect state has generated the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410, or the operation button 410. This is because it may be confusing whether a performance acceptance period for an operating means different from that has occurred, and there is concern that this may reduce the enjoyment of the game.

Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment is capable of executing the precursor effect prior to the occurrence of the effect reception period, but is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). A precursor effect that appears before the occurrence of the effect reception period when not performed, and a precursor effect that appears before the occurrence of the effect reception period when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) The display mode may be different from the above. That is, in this case, it is possible to previously recognize whether or not the automatic effect function is in a possible effect state within the specific effect reception period, and it is possible to enjoy the effect with peace of mind.

Further, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment displays a specific image indicating the remaining time (for example, “bar display” indicating the remaining time) in the effect reception period. However, when the performance acceptance period occurs, the specific image is displayed so that the specific image is displayed at least until the specific image (for example, “bar display” indicating the remaining time) is displayed. An effect image different from the specific image (for example, an image of lightning falling toward the specific area) may be displayed outside the area (a sign effect). In other words, in this case, when the effect reception period occurs, by checking the movement of the effect image that is different from the specific image, the "specific image that suggests the remaining time" in the hidden state is watched at the point where it will appear. Since it becomes possible to prompt the player, it is possible to preferably prevent the situation in which the specific effect reception period ends because the operation by the player is not in time, and further, Even if the operation by the player is not in time, the post-operation effect is executed by the function of the automatic effect function, so that it is expected that the entertainment of the game is appropriately maintained.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, it is possible to perform the state setting and the setting cancellation relating to the automatic button effect state by the operation of the player, but the results of the jackpot determination are also included in each of the following description examples. The state may be set to the automatic button effect state or the setting cancellation of the automatic button effect state may be performed according to the progress of the game or the effect based on it. As an example in which the state setting and the setting cancellation can be performed in accordance with the progress of the game and the production, for example, “While the game is controlled to the normal game state, it is controlled as the automatic button production state, but the big hit game state. Or a control mode such as "the automatic button production state is canceled when the state is shifted to a high probability time saving state" or "the automatic button production state is generated within the execution period of the symbol variation, and the symbol variation in the execution state ends. Prior to being performed, a control mode such as "generating a production pattern for canceling the setting when a predetermined time has elapsed from the generation" or "generating an automatic button production state over a period in which a plurality of symbol variations are executed" It is possible to adopt such a control mode as described above and the like. Further, the pachinko machine 1 may be always controlled in the automatic button effect state, and in this case, the setting of the automatic button effect state is not released.

Further, the timing at which the above-mentioned automatic effect function operates may be when the remaining time of the effect reception period is exhausted or at a predetermined timing thereafter, or the remaining time of the effect reception period is left. It may be an intermediate timing (specific timing). When the remaining time of the production reception period is exhausted or when the above-mentioned automatic production function works at a predetermined timing after that, the post-operation production is performed as if the production reception was made after the production reception period ended. Will be executed. On the other hand, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function works at a timing (specific timing) during which the remaining time of the effect reception period is left, the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions as in the case where an actual operation is performed. At the point of time (specific timing), the effect reception period ends and the post-operation effect is executed.

However, in order to secure a sense of security that the post-operation performance will occur even if the automatic button performance state is not controlled, the time until the performance reception period ends (performance reception) It is important to activate the above-mentioned automatic effect function at a specific timing within a period) to start the post-operation effect corresponding thereto. That is, in this case, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function despite the arrival of the specific timing within the effect reception period, the post-operation effect is generated by the player's own operation after the arrival of the specific timing. It is also possible to make it possible to cause anxiety when controlled to the automatic button performance state (for example, “it is wrong to control the automatic button performance state even though it is not controlled to the automatic button performance state. Recognize that you may not be able to check the post-operation performance”, “You may not be able to check the post-operation performance because the automatic performance function does not work due to some trouble,” etc. You will be able to.

The pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment has a characteristic technique related to such an automatic button effect state. Hereinafter, the characteristic techniques related to the automatic button effect state will be sequentially described, but these characteristic techniques may be applied to the above-described effect examples, and the following characteristic techniques may be applied. You may make it use it combining suitably.

In describing each of the following characteristic techniques, as a premise, in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), when not normally controlled to the specific effect state (automatic button effect state). When an effect reception period that can occur also occurs, the same post-operation effect as when the operation is performed is generated even if the operation is not performed within the effect reception period. However, instead of this, a specific display effect (display effect that can be selected based on the result of the big hit determination) that can be executed only when being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) is prepared, When a specific effective period related to this occurs while the specific display effect is being performed, the same post-operation effect as when the operation is performed is generated even if no operation is performed within the specific effective period. You may With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the performance when being controlled to a specific performance state (automatic button performance state) (improvement of performance by allowing generation of a specific display performance). Of course, even if a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) has occurred, the automatic effect function may not be able to function in another effect reception period that is set when a specific display effect is not being performed. On the other hand, during a specific effective period when a specific display effect is being performed, the VIP effect can be enjoyed due to the fact that the operation effect can be saved by operating the automatic effect function. Therefore, it is expected that the interest of the game will be enhanced. In addition, it is not necessary to prevent the automatic production function from functioning in all of the different production reception periods set when a specific display production is not performed, and the automatic production is performed at least in some production reception periods. If the function cannot be operated, the above-described operation effect when the specific effective period occurs when the specific display effect is performed (when the effect reception period in which the automatic effect function always works) occurs It is possible to expect In addition, even when such a specific effective period occurs, if there is no operation by the player before the specific timing within the specific effective period arrives, the automatic effect function described above is caused to function at the specific timing. It is desirable that the post-operation performance corresponding to this be started.

In addition, as specific display effects that can be executed based on the result of the jackpot determination, at least a first specific display effect, a second specific display effect, and a third specific display effect are prepared.
When the first specific effective period occurs while the first specific display effect is being executed, the above-described automatic effect is generated at the timing when the first predetermined time has elapsed from the occurrence of the first specific effective period. While the function works and ends the first specific effective period and generates the post-operation effect corresponding to this,
-When the second specific effective period occurs while the second specific display effect is being executed, a second predetermined time period that is longer than the first predetermined time period after the second specific effective period occurs. The above-mentioned automatic effect function operates at the timing when has elapsed, ends the second specific effective period, and generates a post-operation effect corresponding thereto, and
When the third specific effective period occurs while the third specific display effect is being executed, the third specific effective period is controlled despite being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). If there is no operation before the end of, each process such that the same post-operation effect as when the operation is performed may not appear may be performed in a specific effect state. According to such a configuration, even if the effect reception period (specific effective period) occurs while being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), it is possible to perform the first time from when the effect acceptance period occurs. Of the above, the above-mentioned automatic effect function works, or the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function unless a second predetermined time longer than the first predetermined time has elapsed, Even if the production reception period ends, the automatic production function described above may not function in the first place. Therefore, even when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), it is possible to confirm which type of specific display effect was being performed when the effect acceptance period (specific effective period) occurred. For example, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function despite the elapse of the first predetermined time, the above-mentioned operation is performed when the second predetermined time elapses. It is possible to make the production progress with a sense of tension such as whether the automatic production function of (1) works or whether the above-mentioned automatic production function does not work in the first place. It should be noted that the first specific effective period, the second specific effective period, and the third specific effective period are all when the operating means (for example, the operation button 410) to be operated is in an operating state (so-called. When a single-shot operation is performed), an effect is received and a post-operation effect is generated.

Note that the first specific display effect, the second specific display effect, and the third specific display effect can be executed only when being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). It may be. In this way, when the display mode is controlled to the specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the display mode that cannot appear when not controlled to the specific effect state (automatic button effect state) is displayed. In this case, it is possible to preferably maintain the entertainment of the game when the player is in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). In addition, the first specific display effect (first specific effective period) and the second specific display effect (second specific effective period) are prepared, and regarding the third specific display effect (third specific effective period) Does not necessarily have to be prepared. Moreover, the post-operation effects that occur when the effects are received in the first specific effective period, the second specific effective period, and the third specific effective period may have different effect contents.

Further, when the after-operation effect is generated by the function of the above-mentioned automatic effect function, at which timing within the effect acceptance period the automatic effect function is activated (which is the effect acceptance period when the effect is accepted). Automatic display function worked for the bar display (image change (area change here) with the passage of time) that shows the remaining time of the effect reception period so that it can be recognized that The post-operation effect may be generated in a state in which it is not hidden at this point but is displayed. According to such a configuration, for example, by confirming the remaining time indicated by the "bar display" that is continuously displayed when the automatic effect function operates, the effect reception period is the first specific effective period ( A relatively early stage after the performance reception period occurs, a period during which the automatic performance function operates when a first predetermined time elapses, and a second specific effective period (a relatively long time after the performance reception period occurs. It becomes possible to recognize which is the later stage, which is the period during which the automatic effect function works when the second predetermined time elapses.

In this sense, when the first specific effective period (the period during which the automatic effect function operates when the first predetermined time has elapsed after the effect reception period has occurred) and the second specific effective period ( The jackpot expectation level is different when the effect reception period occurs and when the second predetermined time elapses and the automatic effect function operates) (for example, the second specific effective period is more advantageous). It is desirable to do so. Further, in this case, the first specific display effect and the second specific display effect may not necessarily be executed. However, when the first specific display effect and the second specific display effect are executed, a big hit is expected depending on when the first specific display effect appears and when the second specific display effect appears. The functions are performed so that the degrees are different (for example, the second specific display effect is more advantageous). Further, when the after-operation effect is generated by the operation by the player within the effect reception period, the "bar display" may be hidden in the state in which the after-operation effect has been generated, or the above-described automatic effect function. Similarly to the case where the above-mentioned function is performed, the post-operation effect may be generated in a state where the "bar display" is not hidden and is displayed. The post-operation effect does not have to be executed as a display change in the effect display device 1600, and is executed as, for example, light emission by a lamp provided on the game board 5 or an operation by a movable ornament. Good.

In addition, when the after-operation effect is generated by the function of the automatic effect function described above, after the operation is performed without any involvement of the player with respect to the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) that is the operation target. Since the effect is automatically generated, the player may not be able to grasp which operation means corresponds to the automatically generated after-operation effect. Therefore, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function is made to function to generate an after-operation effect, first, an operation target suggestion image (for example, an operation target operation that suggests an operation means to be an operation target during the effect reception period). (Such as an image display imitating means) is displayed, and even if the above-mentioned automatic effect function works, the post-operation effect is generated in the state in which the operation target suggestion image is not displayed but is displayed. Is desirable. In this case, the display mode (for example, color, transmittance, etc.) of the operation target suggestion image does not necessarily have to be the same before and after the post-operation performance, and the operation means that is the operation target. It suffices to be able to recognize which one was in the state where the post-operation effect has occurred. On the other hand, when the post-operation effect is generated by the operation by the player during the effect reception period, the operation target suggestion image may be hidden in the state in which the post-operation effect is generated, or the above-described automatic operation is performed. Similar to the case where the effect function works, the post-operation effect may be generated in a state in which the operation target suggestion image is not hidden and is displayed. When the automatic effect function described above functions, such as when the automatic effect function functions within the first specific effective period described above, or when the automatic effect function functions within the second specific effective period described above. The post-operation effect may be generated in a state in which the operation target suggestion image is displayed instead of being hidden.

Further, at this time, if the post-operation effect is generated in a state in which the operation target suggestion image is displayed in one of a plurality of modes with different jackpot expectations, both the mode of the operation target suggestion image and the mode of the post-operation effect Will be able to be confirmed at the same time, it will be possible to improve the enjoyment of the game. In addition, the post-operation effect may not be executed as a display change in the effect display device 1600, and may be executed as light emission by a lamp provided on the game board 5 or an operation by a movable ornament, for example. It may be.

Further, when an effect that causes an effect acceptance period in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (any of the plurality of operation means) is referred to as an “operation-type effect”, the operation-type effect is related to this. There may be a case where it is executed in parallel with another specific effect (for example, a movable object effect, a count effect, etc.) that does not have any. However, in this case, when the "operational production" is executed but the "other specific production unrelated to this" is not executed, the "operational production" and the "non-related distinction" are executed. It is desirable that the ratio at which the above-mentioned automatic effect function works is higher than that in the effect situation in which "specific effect" is performed in parallel. That is, when the "operation system effect" and "another specific effect unrelated to this" are in the effect state in parallel, it is assumed that the effect reception is not performed in "the operation effect" and the post-operation effect is not executed. Also, since "another special effect that is not related to this" is in the execution state, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game pleasure, while "operation system effect" is executed, but "another special effect that is not related to this" is executed. In the production situation where "specific production" is not executed, if the production reception is not performed in "Operation system production" and the post-operation production is not executed, no production will be executed. Therefore, it is inevitable that the interest in playing games will decline. Therefore, when the "operational performance" is executed but the "other specific performance unrelated to this" is not executed, the "operational performance" and "other specific performance unrelated to this" are performed. By making the ratio of the above-mentioned automatic effect function to be higher than in the case where the "production" is performed in parallel, it is possible to appropriately maintain the gaming interest when the operation-based production occurs. become. The ratio may be 100%. By the way, a precursor effect that is performed before the effect reception period occurs and an effect that the operation means to be operated operates are executed as an "operation system effect" or an effect related thereto. It can be said that it is a thing. In addition, for example, if it is assumed that the "other specific effect" is generated before the start of the effect reception period (preferably, the indication effect), it is suggested in advance that the ratio at which the above-mentioned automatic effect function works increases. You will be able to.
In this case, it is desirable to execute as an effect that is ended after the end of the effect reception period (preferably, the post-operation effect). On the other hand, if "another specific effect" is to be executed as an effect that occurs after the start of the effect reception period (preferably, the indication effect) and is ended before the end of the effect reception period, for example, It becomes possible only to recognize immediately before whether the above-mentioned automatic effect function is in a high functioning state, and it is possible to provide an effect with a sense of tension. In this regard, as "another specific effect", when it is to be generated before the start of the effect reception period (preferably, a precursor effect), the "another specific effect" is repeated a plurality of times within one symbol variation. If it is done, it will be executed even when the effect reception period does not occur, so if the ratio of the automatic effect function to work when "another specific effect" is executed is high With this, it becomes possible to give a sense of tension as to whether a performance reception period will occur.

Further, when in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the variation in loss according to the result of the big hit determination is sequentially digested, and the number of executions thereof is a specific value (for example, variation in loss is continuously executed 999 times, Until the 1000th loss variation), a performance reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (any of the plurality of operation means) can be generated with a predetermined probability based on the result of the big hit determination. In addition, even if the effect reception period occurs, when there is no operation by the player, there are cases where the above-mentioned automatic effect function is activated and cases where the above-mentioned automatic effect function is not activated. On the other hand, when the player is in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the variation in loss according to the result of the big hit determination is sequentially exhausted and the number of executions thereof is a specific value (for example, the variation in loss is continuously performed 999 times). When the 1000th loss variation) is reached, in the symbol variation (rendering pattern) that reaches the specific value, an operation opportunity for the operation means (any of the plurality of operation means) regardless of the result of the big hit determination. Is always generated, and even if there is no operation by the player within the effect reception period, the automatic effect function described above is operated and the operation is performed by the player within the effect reception period. You may make it perform the process which generate|occur|produces the same post-operation production as the time. According to such a configuration, when the number of continuous executions of the loss variation reaches a specific value, “the operation should be performed for the player every time the performance acceptance period occurs while the loss variation is continuously executed. Even though I urged him to do so, I could not achieve any results." As if I felt the responsibility so far, even if there is no operation by the player, the pachinko machine 1 itself must function automatically. Since it is realized as an effect to be performed, it becomes possible to appropriately maintain the interest of the game. At this time, in the performance acceptance period that occurs when the variation in loss is sequentially digested and the number of executions reaches a specific value (for example, the 1000th variation in loss), the variation in loss is sequentially digested and executed. A special display image (for example, a display image different from the display image (for example, "operation margin" or the like)) that appears during the production acceptance period until the number of times reaches a specific value (for example, the variation of the loss up to 999 times) "If it is troublesome, I will operate on your behalf"). Further, even after the symbol variation (effect pattern) that has reached a specific value is digested, each time the symbol variation is digested until a specific condition (for example, occurrence of a big hit game state) is satisfied, the symbol variation. Within the (effect pattern), an effect acceptance period in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (any of the plurality of operation means) is always generated regardless of the result of the jackpot determination, and a special display image (for example, " If it's troublesome, I will operate on your behalf" etc.), and even if there is no operation by the player within the performance reception period, the above automatic performance function will function and respond to the performance reception It is desirable to execute a process that always causes post-operation performance.

In the specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the variation in loss according to the result of the big hit determination is sequentially digested, and the number of executions thereof is a specific value (for example, variation in loss is continuously executed 999 times, It is also possible to display the number of remaining fluctuations up to the 1000th fluctuation in loss.

In addition, until the number of executions reaches a specific value when the variation in the loss according to the result of the big hit determination is sequentially digested in the specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the first operation during the symbol change. Both the production reception period for the means and the production reception period for the second operation means are allowed to occur, but in the variation of the symbols when the variation in the loss is sequentially digested and the number of executions reaches a specific value. The production may be advanced such that only one of the production reception period for the first operation means and the production reception period for the second operation means always occurs, and the other side cannot occur. According to such a configuration, since the operation opportunity is always given to the same operation means, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the production reception period and the expectation of itself. I will get it. However, even though this performance example urges the player to operate every time the performance reception period occurs while the variation of loss is continuously executed, there are no results. It was not.” As if I felt the responsibility so far, even if there is no operation by the player, considering that the pachinko machine 1 itself is realized as a production that always causes the automatic production function to function, it is a transition. In order not to have any further expectations, a performance acceptance period is generated for the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) on the side where the degree of expectation at the time of occurrence is relatively low, and the second operation means (for example, It is desirable not to generate a performance acceptance period for the sword ornament 5001).

In addition, in the first effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) of the plurality of operation means, it is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). It can occur both when it is not operated and when it is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), but it is the second operation means of the plurality of operation means (for example, the sword ornament 5001). The second effect reception period in which the operation opportunity is given cannot occur when not controlled to the specific effect state (automatic button effect state), and is controlled to the specific effect state (automatic button effect state). It may be allowed to occur while being performed. With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the performance when being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), and when the effect is in the specific effect state (automatic button effect state). It becomes possible to maintain the amusement interest of the game.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the performance acceptance period is generated based on the result of the big hit determination,
・Displaying a model image simulating the operation means (operation target suggestion image suggesting the operation means to be operated) (model image display means),
After the production reception period has occurred, if an operation is performed by the player while the mood image is displayed, post-operation production can be executed based on the operation (player operation reception means),
-After the production reception period occurs, if the specific timing arrives without any operation being performed by the player while the mood image is being displayed, post-operation production can be executed without being operated by the player ( Automatic performance reception means)
However, regarding the mood image, it is displayed in one of a plurality of modes in which the ratio (expectation level) in which the post-operation performance is executed in “a mode advantageous to the player” when the performance reception is made is different. It is desirable to be able to be done. With such a configuration, the degree of expectation can be recognized regardless of whether the after-operation effect is generated by the player operation reception means or the after-operation effect is generated by the automatic effect reception means. It is possible to generate a post-operation performance while being said that.

In addition, when the after-operation effect is generated by the function of the automatic effect function described above, after the operation is performed without any involvement of the player with respect to the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) that is the operation target. Since the effect is automatically generated, the player may not be able to grasp which operation means corresponds to the automatically generated after-operation effect. Therefore, when generating the post-operation effect by causing the above-mentioned automatic effect function to function, first, while displaying the mood image (the operation target suggestion image that suggests the operation means to be the operation target) during the effect reception period, Even when the above-mentioned automatic effect function works, it is desirable to generate the post-operation effect in a state in which the mood image is not displayed and is displayed. In this case, the display mode (for example, color, transmittance, etc.) of the operation target suggestion image does not necessarily have to be the same before and after the post-operation performance, and the operation means that is the operation target. It suffices to be able to recognize which one was in the state where the post-operation effect has occurred. On the other hand, when the post-operation effect is generated by the operation by the player during the effect reception period, the operation target suggestion image may be hidden in the state in which the post-operation effect is generated, or the above-described automatic operation is performed. Similar to the case where the effect function works, the post-operation effect may be generated in a state in which the operation target suggestion image is not hidden and is displayed. The post-operation effect may be executed using at least an area of the effect display device 1600 that is different from the area in which the mock image is displayed. May be executed as the operation by.

At this time, when the mood image is displayed in any one of a plurality of modes with different expectations, even in the state where the post-operation performance has occurred, the expected degree (the mood image) suggested during the performance reception period It becomes possible to confirm the display mode).

In this way, the display image continues to be displayed after the post-operation effect has been generated. However, the case where the automatic processing by the first automatic performance means is executed when the specific time has elapsed after the first side effect reception period has occurred, and the specific time after the first side effect reception period has occurred The time from when the post-operation performance is executed to when the mood image is hidden is different from the case where the automatic processing by the first automatic performance means is executed when a different time has elapsed. Is desirable. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize whether the post-operation performance has been generated by the automatic processing when the specific time has elapsed, or whether the post-operation performance has been generated by the automatic processing when the time different from the specific time has elapsed. Even if it does not exist, it is possible to recognize at what time the post-operation effect has occurred by checking the time from the execution of the post-operation effect to the hiding of the mood image. ..

In addition, when the post-operation performance is generated by the automatic processing when the specific time has elapsed, and when the post-operation performance is generated by the automatic processing when a time different from the specific time has elapsed, the big hit is determined by the big hit determination. The degree of expectation that is obtained may be different.

Further, when a production reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the player is generated when the player is controlled to a specific production state (automatic button production state), two displays are displayed during the production reception period. One of the modes (for example, a low-expectation display mode with a relatively low jackpot expectation and a high-expectation display mode with a relatively high jackpot expectation) is allowed to appear, and a high-expectation display mode (for example, a red operation image). ) Appears, even if the operation is not performed within the performance reception period, the performance reception is always performed (the automatic performance function is always functioned) and the post-operation performance according to the performance reception is executed, but the low expectation display When a mode (for example, a blue operation image) appears, when no operation is performed within the effect reception period, effect reception (automatic effect function) is performed and post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception is executed. In some cases, the production may be advanced such that there is a case where the production is not received (the automatic production function is not operated) and the post-operation production is not executed. That is, if the user forgets to operate the display when a high-expectation display mode (for example, a red operation image) appears, it is unavoidable that the entertainment of the game is deteriorated due to the inability to confirm the post-operation performance, but the low expectation. When a display mode (for example, a blue operation image) appears, it is assumed that even if a user forgets to operate the game, it is assumed that the interest in the game does not deteriorate so much, so a high-expectation display mode (for example, a red operation image) appears. When the user forgets to operate, the automatic performance function is always activated during the performance reception period to avoid a decrease in the entertainment level of the game due to forgetting the operation, but a low-expected display mode (for example, blue operation) If you forget to operate it when (image) appears, make sure that you do not forget to operate it by not necessarily operating the automatic production function within the production reception period so that you have a sense of playing It is expected that the player's awareness of participation will increase. In addition, when not controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), a low-expectation display mode (for example, a blue operation image) appears, but a high-expectation display mode (for example, a red operation image) is displayed. It may not appear. Also, any one of three or more display modes may be allowed to appear during the production acceptance period.

Then, in each of the characteristic techniques described below, these other examples of the automatic button effect state may be appropriately applied and implemented.

[Expectation suggestion by automatic production function]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state, even if the player does not perform an operation within the effect acceptance period (when the above-mentioned another example is applied, the first specified effective period or the second specified effective period), A process (automatic performance function) that causes the same change as when an operation is performed may be executable. In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, in the automatic button production state, when the operation by the player is not received during the production reception period, the same change as when the production is received. The effect pattern in which the process (automatic effect function) that causes the effect is not executed can be generated. And at this time, in the automatic button production state, when the automatic production function does not function when the operation by the player is not received during the production reception period, the symbol variation is higher than when the automatic production function operates. In, it is possible to execute a process in which the production is advanced within the symbol variation so that the degree of expectation (rate) at which the big hit symbol appears is low. At this time, the degree of expectation (rate) at which the big hit symbol appears may be 0%.

According to such a configuration, when the effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs in the automatic button effect state, the automatic effect function is provided when the operation button 410 is intentionally not operated within the effect acceptance period. By confirming whether or not it works, it is possible to grasp the degree of expectation as to whether or not the big hit symbol will appear due to the symbol variation in the execution state. That is, in this case, in the automatic button production state, it is impossible to confirm the post-operation production itself, which should have been confirmed if the production reception (operation on the operation button 410) was performed during the production reception period. With the risk that a production demerit may occur, a novel production performance in which the player exercises a production selection such as "Dare not to operate the operation button 410 within the production reception period". Therefore, it is expected that the entertainment of the game will be maintained appropriately.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the operation on the operation button 410 of the plurality of operation means (the operation button 410, the sword ornament 5001 and the like) can be received as an effect. The above-mentioned effect (specific operation-related effect (FIG. 330 to FIG. 350) regarding whether a period occurs or a period in which an operation for another operation means (for example, the sword decoration 5001) can accept an effect occurs). See))) is possible. In this respect, in the automatic button effect state, in the effect reception period that occurs corresponding to such a specific operation-related effect, compared to the effect reception period that occurs when the specific operation-related effect is not executed, those effects When there is no operation (reception of production) within the reception period, it is possible to execute a process in which the production within the symbol variation is advanced so that the ratio at which the above-mentioned automatic production function functions increases. At this time, the rate at which the automatic effect function works may be 100%.

According to such a configuration, the fact that the specific operation-related effect is executed before the effect acceptance period occurs also functions as an effect that suggests that the above-mentioned automatic effect function has a high functioning rate. As a result, it is possible to more appropriately improve the game enjoyment when a specific operation-related effect is executed.

Although this is also described above, in the specific operation-related effect, the operation opportunity for the sword ornament 5001 is greater than that in the case where it is shown that the operation button 410 is provided as the operation result. When it is shown that it is given, it is set so that the degree of expectation that the big hit symbol will appear due to the symbol fluctuation in the execution state becomes higher. However, in the automatic button production state, regarding the proportion of the above-mentioned automatic production function that operates when there is no operation (production reception) within the production reception period that occurs corresponding to a specific operation-related production, It is more desirable to set the ratio to be the same in the case where it is shown that the operation opportunity is given to the case and when it is shown that the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001.

According to such a configuration, there is a case where a relatively low degree of expectation (a suggestion that an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410) appears as a result of a specific operation-related effect. Also, since the ratio at which the above-mentioned automatic effect function works does not change due to this (the effect result of the specific operation-related effect), this can be expected regarding the above-mentioned automatic effect function. It becomes possible to maintain it suitably. In this way, two different effects (specific operation-related effects and expectations suggested by the automatic effect function) that are not influenced by each other's effect results are put in parallel, which makes it possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Hereinafter, a specific example of an effect in which the degree of expectation is suggested by such an automatic effect function will be described with reference to FIGS. 351 to 353.

FIG. 351(a) shows the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination in which the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is in the state where the number of holdings is 3 in the automatic button effect state. Shows the performance situation that is being performed. As shown in the figure, during the period in which the automatic button effect state is controlled, a display indicating that the automatic button effect state is controlled in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (here, "auto button effect"). Setting in progress)) appears continuously.

351(b) shows an effect situation in which a specific effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 has occurred during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 351(a). As shown in the figure, during a specific effect reception period, a button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area, and an instruction display prompting an operation on the operation button 410 (here, “press And a bar display indicating the remaining time of the specific effect reception period). At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is given is in a light emitting state, which also prompts the operation on the operation button 410.

Here, if the operation on the operation button 410 is received within the specific effect reception period shown in FIG. 351(b), a specific decorative member SDY (shadow product) is provided as an after-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception. Etc.) and different expectations in the display area (for example, “chance!” with a relatively low expectation or “exciting heat!” with a relatively high expectation). Either will be displayed. Further, at this time, the automatic button effect state is canceled and returned to the normal effect state, and the specific effect reception period is ended when the effect reception is performed without consuming the remaining time.

On the other hand, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 351(b), when the operation button 410 is not operated within the specific effect acceptance period (when the effect acceptance is not generated), the ratio is 60%. Therefore, the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not work, and the above-mentioned automatic effect function works at a rate of 40%.

That is, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function at a rate of 60%, as shown in FIG. 351(c), the operation on the operation button 410 is not accepted within the specific effect acceptance period. As a result, the post-operation effect, which should have occurred if the effect reception is performed, is not executed. Then, after this, the production is advanced in such a manner that the reach state is formed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the occurrence of the specific production reception period.

On the other hand, when the above-described automatic effect function functions at a rate of 40%, as shown in FIG. 351(d), although the operation button 410 is not operated within the specific effect reception period. The post-operation effect having the same content as that when the operation is performed and the effect is accepted within the specific effect acceptance period is executed. That is, as described above, in the post-operation effect that is generated by the effect reception within the specific effect reception period, the specific decoration member SDY (a curtain) is operated, and the degree of expectation is different in the display area. Any of a plurality of modes (for example, "Chance!" and "Intense heat!", etc.) is displayed, but after-operation performance occurs in response to being operated within a specific performance reception period. In both cases, the mode displayed in the display area is the same as the case where the post-operation effect is generated due to the function of the automatic effect function. Then, after this, as shown in FIG. 351(e), the production is advanced in such a manner that the reach state is formed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the occurrence of the specific production reception period.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, a specific performance reception period is generated as a "performance reception period during which the above-described automatic performance function functions", or "the above-mentioned automatic performance function". Is generated as a "non-functioning production reception period", it is decided (selected) based on the result of the big hit judgment when executing the symbol variation, and as a result, 60% in a specific production reception period. The above-mentioned automatic effect function does not work at a rate of, and the above-mentioned automatic effect function works at a rate of 40%. For example, when a big hit is won as a result of the big hit determination, the selection table for the time of winning is referred to, and based on the distribution ratio in the selection table for the corresponding time of selection, "the above-mentioned automatic effect function works Period" or "effect reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not work" is generated, and when the result of the big hit judgment is a big hit, the selection table for the big hit is referred to, and the selection table for the big hit is used. Based on the distribution ratio in the selection table, "the effect reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function works" or "the effect reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not operate" is generated. As a result, the above-described automatic effect function does not function at a rate of 60% and the automatic effect function functions at a rate of 40% in the specific effect reception period.

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, when the specific performance reception period is generated as the "performance reception period during which the above-described automatic performance function works", " Of which period so that the jackpot pattern appears at a higher rate when the symbol fluctuation is stopped, than when it is generated as "the stage reception period in which the automatic production function does not work". Is determined (selected) on the basis of the result of the jackpot determination.

With such a configuration, the automatic production function is activated when a production reception period occurs in which it is determined that a mode with a high degree of expectation as the post-operation production will appear when the production is received (such as "heat!"). In contrast to the relatively high proportion, the automatic production is performed when a production reception period occurs in which it is determined that a mode with low expectation (such as “chance!”) will appear as post-operation production when production is received. The rate at which the function works becomes relatively low. Therefore, when the effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs in the automatic button effect state, whether or not the automatic effect function works when the operation button 410 is intentionally not operated within the effect acceptance period. By performing the confirmation, it is possible to grasp the degree of expectation as to whether or not the big hit symbol appears due to the symbol fluctuation in the execution state. That is, in this case, in the automatic button production state, it is impossible to confirm the post-operation production itself, which should have been confirmed if the production reception (operation on the operation button 410) was performed during the production reception period. With the risk that a production demerit may occur, a novel production performance in which the player exercises a production selection such as "Dare not to operate the operation button 410 within the production reception period". Therefore, it is expected that the entertainment of the game will be maintained appropriately.

However, as shown in FIG. 351(d), even if the automatic effect function works when the operation button 410 is intentionally not operated within the effect reception period, it is expected as an after-operation effect. Even if a mode with a low degree of chance (such as “chance!”) can appear, even if it is suggested that the automatic production function has a relatively high expectation level, By suggesting that the expectation level continues to be raised (implication by the function of the automatic production function, suggestion by the mode of post-operation production), it will be possible to realize a dazzling performance, and to maintain a favorable gaming interest. You will be expected.

Further, as shown in FIG. 351(c), even if the automatic effect function does not function when the operation button 410 is intentionally not operated within the effect reception period, even the effect reception is performed. Since there is a possibility that a mode with a high degree of expectation has appeared in the post-operation production that should have appeared, it is expected that amusement of the game will be maintained appropriately.
However, when the production situation (the situation in which the automatic production function does not function and the post-operation production does not appear) shown in FIG. 351(c) appears, the production situation (automatic production function shown in FIG. 351(d) Functioned, but it is desirable that the degree of expectation be lower than when a situation in which a mode with a low degree of expectation appeared as a post-operation effect).

FIGS. 352 and 353 show effects that the automatic effect function suggests when the effect reception period corresponding to a specific operation-related effect (see FIGS. 330 to 350) occurs in the automatic button effect state. A specific example is shown.

FIG. 352(a) shows that in the automatic button effect state, the number of holdings is 3 and the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination. Shows the performance situation that is being performed. Also in this example, as shown in the figure, during the period in which the automatic button effect state is controlled, a display indicating that the automatic button effect state is controlled in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (here, , "Auto button setting") appears continuously.

FIG. 352(b) shows a performance situation in which the specific operation-related performance illustrated in FIGS. 332 to 335 is started during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 352(a). ..
That is, as described above, in the specific operation-related effects illustrated in FIGS. 332 to 335, an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 and an operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001. , The common display effect is performed. While the common display effect is performed, it is kept secret which of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 is given the operation opportunity. .. However, when a predetermined time elapses after the specific operation-related effect is started, an effect state indicating that the operation button 410 should be operated appears as a first effect result having a relatively low expectation, or As a second effect result having a relatively high expectation, an effect situation indicating that the sword ornament 5001 should be operated appears, so that the operation button 410 having a relatively low expectation and the relatively expectation degree are displayed. Which of the high sword ornaments 5001 is given an operation opportunity is shown.

352(c) shows that the operation button 410 is in a state of being operated as a first effect result having a relatively low degree of expectation as a result of the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 352(b) being performed. Is displayed, and a production acceptance period for the operation button 410 is generated. In this effect situation, as shown in the figure, a button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area, and an instruction display for prompting an operation on the operation button 410 (here, “press”, etc.) is displayed. A character display and a bar display indicating the remaining time of the specific performance reception period) are displayed. At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is given is in a light emitting state, which also prompts the operation on the operation button 410.

Here, if the operation on the operation button 410 is received as an effect during the effect reception period shown in FIG. 352(c), the specific decorative member SDY (such as a curtain) is used as a post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception. In addition to performing the rendering operation, one of a plurality of modes with different expectations in the display area (for example, “chance!” with relatively low expectations or “heat!” with relatively high expectations). Will be displayed. Further, at this time, the automatic button effect state is canceled and returned to the normal effect state, and the specific effect reception period is ended when the effect reception is performed without consuming the remaining time.

On the other hand, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 352(c), when the operation button 410 is not operated within the effect reception period (when the effect reception does not occur), the ratio is 20% as described above. The automatic effect function does not work, and the above-mentioned automatic effect function works at a rate of 80%.

That is, in the specific operation-related effect (specific display effect), the player is confused as to which of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 is activated, and as a result, it is appropriate during the effect reception period. A situation may occur in which operations cannot be performed. Therefore, in the automatic button effect state, when an effect acceptance period corresponding to such a specific operation-related effect occurs (see FIG. 352(c)), an effect that occurs without executing the specific operation-related effect. Compared to the reception period (see FIG. 351(b)), the production within the symbol variation so that the ratio of the above-mentioned automatic production function to function when there is no operation (production reception) within the production reception period is increased. Is being executed. According to such a configuration, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration are suppressed while suppressing the anxiety such as "the proper operation cannot be performed within the production reception period and the production corresponding to the operation may not appear". It is possible to provide the fun of which one of the bodies 5001 is activated through the specific operation-related effect. In order to obtain such an effect, it is not always necessary to provide a configuration that suggests the degree of expectation depending on whether or not the automatic effect function has worked.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during the period in which the automatic button effect state is controlled, the effect reception period corresponding to the specific operation-related effect (specific display effect) is executed. Until the end, as shown in the figure, the display (in this case, "Auto button high accuracy middle") indicating that the automatic production function is in a high ratio of operating functions continues. Is becoming apparent.

When the above-described automatic effect function does not function at a rate of 20%, as shown in FIG. 352(d), it is assumed that the operation on the operation button 410 is not accepted during the effect acceptance period. The post-operation effect, which should have occurred, will not be executed as long as the effect reception is performed. Then, after this, the production is advanced in such a manner that the reach state is formed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the occurrence of the specific production reception period. However, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 352(c), when the operation button 410 is not operated within the effect reception period (when the effect reception does not occur), the above-described automatic effect function does not function. In the case of the effect, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 351(b), when the operation button 410 is not operated within the effect reception period (when the effect reception does not occur), the automatic effect function described above functions. It is desirable to have higher expectations than if not.

Further, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at a rate of 80%, as shown in FIG. 352(e), the effect is produced even though the operation button 410 is not operated within the effect acceptance period. The post-operation effect having the same content as that when the operation is performed and the effect is accepted within the acceptance period will be executed. That is, as described above, in the post-operation effect that is generated by the effect reception within the specific effect reception period, the specific decoration member SDY (a curtain) is operated, and the degree of expectation is different in the display area. Any of a plurality of modes (for example, "Chance!" and "Intense heat!", etc.) is displayed, but after-operation performance occurs in response to being operated within a specific performance reception period. In both cases, the mode displayed in the display area is the same as the case where the post-operation effect is generated due to the function of the automatic effect function. Then, after this, as shown in FIG. 352(f), the production progresses in such a manner that the reach state is formed after a predetermined time elapses from the occurrence of the specific production reception period.

On the other hand, FIG. 353(g) shows a state in which the sword ornament 5001 should be operated as the second effect result with a relatively high degree of expectation as a result of the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 352(b) being performed. In the drawing, a production situation indicating that there is is appears, and a production reception period for the sword decoration 5001 has occurred. In this effect situation, as shown in the figure, a sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 is displayed in the display area, and an instruction display for prompting an operation on the sword decoration 5001 (here, " A character display such as "Deliver the sword" and a bar display showing the remaining time of the specific performance reception period) will appear. At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is given is in the operating state, and this also prompts the operation of the operating button 410, and moves the operating state of the sword ornament 5001 from the operating state to the original position. The operation of is allowed.

Here, if the operation on the sword ornament 5001 is received in the effect reception period shown in FIG. 353(g), the operation on the operation button 410 is received in the effect reception period shown in FIG. 352(c). The same post-operation effect as when it is performed will be executed. However, when the operation on the sword ornament 5001 is received within the effect reception period shown in FIG. 352(g), the operation on the operation button 410 is received within the effect reception period shown in FIG. 352(c). Of multiple modes with different expectations (for example, “Chance!” with relatively low expectations, “Gekijou!” with relatively high expectations, etc.) The appearance ratio in the display area is high. This percentage may be 100%. Further, when an operation on the sword ornament 5001 is received during the effect reception period, the automatic button effect state is canceled and returned to the normal effect state, and the remaining time is consumed in the specific effect reception period. The point that the production is ended when the production is received is the same as in the production reception period shown in FIG. 352(c).

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 353(g), when the sword ornament 5001 is not operated within the effect acceptance period (effect reception does not occur. In the case), the effect reception is generated in the effect situation shown in FIG. 352(c) even though the effect situation has a higher expectation than when the effect situation shown in FIG. 352(c) occurs. As in the case where the automatic production function is not performed, the automatic production function described above does not function at a rate of 20%, and the automatic production function described above operates at a rate of 80%.

With such a configuration, as a result of the specific operation-related effect being performed, the effect state indicating that the operation button 410 is in a state in which the operation button 410 should be operated as a first effect result having a relatively low expectation (FIG. 352). Even if ((c)) appears, the ratio at which the above-mentioned automatic effect function works is not changed by this (effect result of a specific operation-related effect). It becomes possible to appropriately maintain the expectation that the function will function. As described above, two different effects (specific operation-related effects, suggestion of the degree of expectation by the automatic effect function) that are not influenced by the effect of each other are performed in parallel, so that the adverse effect result appears in the effect on one side. It becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the entertainment of the game.
However, in this case, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 352(c), when the operation button 410 is not operated within the effect acceptance period (when effect acceptance does not occur), the above-described automatic effect function functions. In this case, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 353(g), when the operation on the sword decoration 5001 is not performed within the effect acceptance period (when effect acceptance does not occur), the above-described automatic effect function is performed. Expectations will be lower than if they worked.

If the above-described automatic effect function does not work at a rate of 20%, as shown in FIG. 353(h), it is assumed that the operation on the sword ornament 5001 has not been accepted during the effect acceptance period. The post-operation effect, which should have occurred if the effect reception has been performed, will not be executed. Then, after this, the production is advanced in such a manner that the reach state is formed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the occurrence of the specific production reception period. However, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 353(g), when the operation on the sword decoration 5001 is not performed within the effect acceptance period (when the effect acceptance does not occur), the above-described automatic effect function operates. Even when there is not, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 351(b), when the operation button 410 is not operated within the effect acceptance period (when effect acceptance does not occur), the above-described automatic effect function is provided. Expectations should be higher than if they did not work.

Further, when the above-described automatic effect function works at a rate of 80%, as shown in FIG. 353(i), although the sword ornament 5001 is not operated within the effect acceptance period, The post-operation performance having the same content as when the operation is performed and the performance reception is performed within the performance reception period is executed. That is, as described above, in the post-operation effect that is generated by the effect reception within the specific effect reception period, the specific decoration member SDY (a shade character etc.) is operated and the degree of expectation is different in the display area. When one of a plurality of modes (for example, "Chance!" or "Intense heat!") is displayed, but after-operation performance occurs in response to being operated within the performance reception period In either case, the mode displayed in the display area is the same as the case where the post-operation effect is generated due to the function of the automatic effect function. Then, after this, as shown in FIG. 353(j), the production progresses in such a manner that a reach state is formed after a predetermined time elapses from the production reception period corresponding to the specific operation-related production.

It should be noted that the effect reception period (see FIGS. 352(c) and 353(g)) corresponding to the specific operation-related effect is generated as the “effect reception period in which the above-described automatic effect function works”, or “the above-mentioned. As for the effect reception period (see FIG. 351(b)) in which a specific operation-related effect is not executed, whether or not it is generated as “the effect reception period in which the automatic effect function does not function” At the time of execution, it is decided (selected) based on the result of the big hit judgment, and as a result, the above-mentioned automatic effect function is operated at a rate of 20% in the effect reception period corresponding to the specific operation-related effect. Instead, the above-mentioned automatic effect function works at a rate of 80%. For example, when a big hit is won as a result of the big hit determination, the selection table for the time of winning is referred to, and based on the distribution ratio in the selection table for the corresponding time of selection, "the above-mentioned automatic effect function works Period" or "effect reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not work" is generated, and when the result of the big hit judgment is a big hit, the selection table for the big hit is referred to, and the selection table for the big hit is used. Based on the distribution ratio in the selection table, "the effect reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function works" or "the effect reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not operate" is generated. As a result, the above-described automatic effect function does not function at a rate of 20% during the effect acceptance period (see FIGS. 352(c) and 353(g)) corresponding to the specific operation-related effect, and 80%. The above-mentioned automatic effect function works at a rate of.

Similarly, the effect reception period (see FIGS. 352(c) and 353(g)) corresponding to the specific operation-related effect is also generated as the “effect reception period in which the above-described automatic effect function works”. In that case, the proportion of the big hit symbols appearing when the symbol fluctuation is stopped is higher than that in the case where the above-mentioned automatic production function does not function as a production reception period. Then, which of those periods is to be generated is determined (selected) based on the result of the jackpot determination.

It should be noted that the post-operation effect occurs in the case of the effect reception period (see FIGS. 352(c) and 353(g)) corresponding to the specific operation-related effect, and without the specific operation-related effect being executed. It may be executed as an effect different from that during the effect reception period (see FIG. 351(b)). However, it is desirable that any of a plurality of modes having different expectations can appear in the post-operation effect even when executed as different effects. The degree of expectation may be 0% or 100%.

Further, the sword decoration 5001 used in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 351 to 353 may be the sword decoration 5001 of the type shown in FIG. 311. In addition, in FIGS. 352 and 353, the explanation is given as an example in which the “effect using the automatic effect function” is applied to the specific operation-related effects shown in FIGS. 332 to 335. The “effect using function” may be applied to any specific operation-related effect in FIGS. 330 to 350.

In the example productions shown in FIGS. 352 and 353, when a specific operation-related production is executed in a state where the automatic button production state is not controlled, an effect reception period corresponding to the specific operation-related production Not only the setting operation to the automatic button performance state is not accepted in the inside, but the state "the setting operation to the automatic button performance state is not accepted" is set before the performance reception period occurs. It is desirable to generate at least from the time of the effect situation (the effect situation in which the specific operation-related effect has started) shown in FIG. 352(b) so that this is continued until the effect acceptance period. According to such a configuration, even if an attempt is made to perform the setting operation to the automatic button effect state after confirming that the specific operation-related effect has started, this will not be accepted. It will be possible to provide "production using the automatic production function" only for those who continue playing while maintaining the game, and continue playing games while maintaining the automatic button production state. You will be able to provide dramatic value for what you do.

Also, an effect reception period (see FIG. 351(b)) that occurs when a specific operation-related effect is not executed, or an effect reception period corresponding to a specific operation-related effect (FIG. 352(c), FIG. 353(g). )), a first display mode (for example, a blue button image BTG or a blue sword decoration image SYG) and a second display mode (for example, a green button image BTG or a green sword decoration). (Image SYG) is allowed to appear, and when the second display mode appears, the “performance reception period during which the above-described automatic effect function works” occurs compared to when the first display mode appears. It is desirable to have a higher ratio in.

Also, an effect reception period (see FIG. 351(b)) that occurs when a specific operation-related effect is not executed, or an effect reception period corresponding to a specific operation-related effect (FIG. 352(c), FIG. 353(g). )), a third display mode (for example, a red button image BTG or a red sword decoration image SYG) is allowed to appear, and when the third display mode appears, "the above-mentioned automatic effect It may be configured such that the "performance reception period in which the function works" is always occurring.

According to these configurations, in the automatic button performance state, it is not possible to check the post-operation performance itself which should have been confirmed if "reception of production (operation on the operation button 410) is performed within the production reception period. While there is a risk that a production demerit such as "may occur, it is necessary to provide a judgment material as to whether or not a production selection such as "Do not intentionally operate the operation button 410 within the production reception period" should be exercised. It becomes possible to expect that it will be possible to maintain a favorable interest in games.

In addition, regardless of whether or not the "effect using the automatic effect function" is applied, an effect reception period corresponding to each "specific operation-related effect" illustrated in Figs. 330 to 350 and Figs. 352 and 353. With regard to the above, it is desirable to generate as a period having a time longer than the effect reception period (eg, FIG. 351(b)) that occurs without the specific operation-related effect being executed. That is, in the specific operation-related effect (specific display effect), the player is confused as to which of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 is activated, and as a result, it is appropriate during the effect reception period. Although it may happen that operations cannot be performed, it is possible to prevent such situations from occurring by allowing a long time for the production reception period corresponding to "specific operation-related production". Will be expected.

In particular, in the examples of FIGS. 352 and 353, it is considered that the ratio of the automatic effect function to be set is relatively high in the effect reception period corresponding to “specific operation related effect”. For example, whether or not the automatic performance function works by setting the performance reception period to have a longer time than the performance reception period that occurs when "specific operation-related performance" is not executed It can be said that it is desirable in order to improve the enjoyment of the game by making the performance of the game last longer. In this case, regarding the timing at which the automatic effect function works, in the effect reception period that occurs when the "specific operation-related effect" is not executed, it comes when the first time elapses after the period occurs. On the other hand, in the effect reception period corresponding to the “specific operation related effect”, the automatic effect function is to be set to arrive when the second time longer than the first time has elapsed from the occurrence of the period. Is important in sustaining the drama of whether or not it works for a longer time.

In addition, the time from the start to the end of the effect reception period in which the "specific operation-related effect" occurs without being executed and the effect reception period corresponding to the "specific operation-related effect" Even when differently set, the bar display showing the remaining time of the effect reception period is displayed in the same manner (bar display of the same length), and the gauge remaining amount is reduced. It is desirable to only make the speeds different. That is, in this case, even when the effect reception period corresponding to the "specific operation-related effect" occurs, the period is continued for the same time as the effect reception period that occurs without the "specific operation-related effect" being executed. It is possible to make it seem like it is possible, and in combination with the “twistedness” by continuing for a period longer than expected, it is possible to maintain the directivity of whether the automatic performance function works or not. You will be able to.

According to the examples shown in FIGS. 351 to 353, the first effect reception period (effect reception period for the specific operation means (operation button 410)) when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). Occurs, and even if the specific operation means (the operation button 410) is not operated within the first effect reception period, the processing by the first automatic effect means (the automatic effect function for the operation button 410) is not always performed. Although not necessarily executed, in the effect reception period that occurs when a predetermined time elapses after the specific display effect (specific operation-related effect) is executed, the specific display effect occurs without being executed. When the operation for the specific operation means (operation button 410) is not performed within the first effect reception period than the first effect reception period (effect reception period for the specific operation means (operation button 410)), The rate at which the processing by the automatic effect means (the automatic effect function for the operation button 410) is executed is increased.

In this respect, in such an automatic button effect state, the proportions ("60%-40%", "20%-80%") of the automatic effect function functioning differ depending on the type of effect acceptance period, as described above. When the set automatic button effect state is the "first automatic button effect state", the proportion of the automatic effect function that functions depending on the type of the effect reception period is another distribution rate ("50%-50%", "10"). %-90%") is set differently, and the automatic production function is set to always function when the production reception period occurs, regardless of the type as the period. It is also possible to further prepare a third automatic button effect state to be performed so that it can be set to any of these effect states, including a normal effect state in which the automatic effect function does not function. In addition, the normal production state in which the automatic production function does not work is not prepared, and the game is always in the automatic button production state (first automatic button production state, second automatic button production state, third automatic button production state). Alternatively, an effect may be executed.

In addition, the example effects shown in FIGS. 351 to 353 may be modified and implemented as follows. That is, when the automatic effect function operates in the first effect reception period shown in FIG. 351(b), the timing when the first predetermined time elapses after the first effect reception period occurs (first (The timing within the effect reception period), the above-described automatic effect function functions to end the first effect reception period and generate a post-operation effect corresponding thereto. However, if the automatic effect function does not function within the first effect reception period shown in FIG. 351(b), the timing (first time) when the first predetermined time has elapsed since the first effect reception period occurred The above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function at the timing within the one effect reception period), and then the first effect reception period ends without the post-operation effect being executed (even after that, the post-operation effect is not executed). ). On the other hand, when the automatic effect function works in the second effect reception period shown in FIG. 352(c) or the third effect reception period shown in FIG. 353(g), the second effect reception period or The automatic performance function described above operates at the timing when the second predetermined time, which is longer than the first predetermined time, has elapsed since the third performance reception period occurred, and the second performance reception period or the third performance reception period. The production reception period is ended and at the same time, a post-operation production corresponding thereto is generated. However, if the automatic effect function does not function within the second effect reception period shown in FIG. 352(c) or the third effect reception period shown in FIG. 353(g), the second effect reception period or The above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function at the timing when the second predetermined time has elapsed after the third effect reception period has occurred, and thereafter, the second effect reception period or the third effect reception period without the post-operation effect being executed. The effect reception period of is ended (after that, the effect after operation is not executed).

According to such a configuration, in the first effect reception period on the side where the ratio of the automatic effect function is low, the automatic effect function can operate at a relatively early stage. Even if it does not function, the player will have a sufficient time to receive the production by the operation of the player himself until the end of the first production reception period. You will be able to play games with all your heart. On the other hand, in the second effect reception period or the third effect reception period on the side where the ratio of the automatic effect function is high, the automatic effect function can function only at a relatively late stage, and the automatic effect function is Since there is not much time left for the player to operate when it does not function, it is possible to provide a game with a sense of tension although the ratio of the automatic production function is high. Will be able to.

Regarding the above-described modified example, in the first effect reception period, when the above-described automatic effect function works and when it does not function at the timing when the first predetermined time has elapsed (the timing within the first effect reception period). However, in the second effect reception period and the third effect reception period, the above-described automatic effect function always functions at the timing when the second predetermined time has elapsed (the timing within the second effect reception period). You may do it. Even with such a configuration, if the automatic effect function could only work at a relatively late stage, and if the automatic effect function did not work (due to some trouble), the time required for the player's own operation Since it is considered that the player delusions that there is not much room left, the same effect can be expected.

In addition to the effect examples described above with reference to FIGS. 351 to 353, in other effect examples, control to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is not necessarily performed by the player's operation. Alternatively, for example, it may be controlled based on the result of the big hit determination, or may be always controlled as the automatic button effect state (specific effect state). Further, the setting itself to the automatic button effect state is not performed, and the automatic effect function may always be provided as a gaming machine that can function at a predetermined ratio.

[Unified operation control in the automatic button performance state]
As described above, in the automatic button production state (specific production state), operation by the player within the production reception period (the first specific effective period or the second specific effective period when the above-mentioned another example is applied) Even if is not performed, the process (automatic effect function) that causes the same change as when the operation is performed may be executable. However, after being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the desire to return to the normal effect mode in which the effect can be advanced depending on the player's own operation (desired to end the automatic button effect state Aspirations) may arise. Such a desire often occurs when an effect reception period during which an operation opportunity is given to the player occurs, but the limited time from the start of the effect reception period to the end thereof. It is difficult to perform both the operation to end the automatic button performance state and the operation to accept the operation, and as a result, the operation opportunity may be lost. If so, the interest in playing games could be reduced.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, when the effect reception period related to the specific effect occurs while being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the effect reception is performed. After the operation according to the process of terminating the automatic button production state and the production reception by performing only one operation on the operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001, etc.) to which the operation opportunity is given within the period. The effect (processing that can cause a change in effect) is performed respectively (operation unified control in the automatic button effect state). As a result, even if a desire to end the automatic button production state and develop the production depending on the player's own operation occurs within the production reception period, the loss of the operation opportunity is avoided and the production mode is switched. Will be able to be done smoothly.

As described above, when setting to the automatic button effect state when the symbol variation is in the execution state, the setting operation is allowed only for the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001. ..

On the other hand, as described above, when the automatic button effect state is released when the symbol variation is in the execution state, the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 are operated in a state where the effect acceptance period has not occurred. The operation for canceling the setting is allowed only for the button 410. On the other hand, in the state where the effect reception period has occurred, if the operation means (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001 or the like) to which the operation opportunity is given is operated during the effect reception period. , A process of ending the automatic button effect state and a post-operation effect (a process that can cause a change in effect) according to effect acceptance are performed (operation unification control). Therefore, even if the operation button 410 is operated in the state where the effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 is occurring, the operation is not accepted and the process of ending the automatic button effect state is not executed.

However, some players play games with a selfish game technique such as "manufacturing by performing an operation by themselves while maintaining the automatic button production state (without switching the production mode) when they like". It can be envisaged that some may wish to. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the door frame 3 is further provided with a special operation means (automatic mode continuation button) different from both the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001. When the operation button 410 (or the sword decoration 5001) is operated within the effect reception period related to the specific effect while being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the automatic button effect is generated. Although a process for ending the state (specific performance state) and a process for causing a change in performance are respectively performed (operation unified control in the automatic button performance state), control to the automatic button performance state (specific performance state) When the special operation means is operated during the performance reception period for the specific performance while being performed, the process of terminating the automatic button performance state (specific performance state) is not performed and the performance changes according to the operation. The processing that can cause the above is performed.

According to such a configuration, when it is desired to end the automatic button effect state and actively perform the operation game thereafter, the operation button 410 (or the sword ornament 5001) is operated within the effect acceptance period. However, if you want to rarely perform an operation while maintaining the automatic button production state (without switching the production mode), perform the operation on the special operation means within the production reception period. The game desired by the player can be realized only by properly using the operating means.

The operation unification control in the automatic button effect state will be described below with reference to FIGS. 354 to 356.

FIG. 354(a) shows that, in the automatic button effect state, the number of holdings is 1 and the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination. The figure shows a state in which an effect reception period for accepting the pressing operation of the operation button 410 has occurred in the reach state that is being performed. As shown in the figure, during the period in which the automatic button effect state is controlled, a display indicating that the automatic button effect state is controlled in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (here, "auto button effect"). Setting in progress)) appears continuously.

Further, as shown in the figure, also in this effect reception period, the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area, and an instruction display for prompting the operation of the operation button 410 (here, A direction arrow display and a bar display indicating the remaining time of the performance reception period) are displayed. At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is given is in a light emitting state, which also prompts the operation on the operation button 410. However, in actuality, not only the operation button 410 in the light emitting state but also the operation of the special operation means (the button described as “PUSH” in the figure) 1410 that has not changed at all is permitted.

354(b) to (d) show that the operation button 410 is not operated within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 354(a), but the automatic effect function described above causes the effect reception period. It shows that the post-operation effect having the same content as that when the operation is performed inside and the effect reception is performed. Note that the effect reception period generated in FIG. 354(a) is ended when the above-described automatic effect function is activated, and the operation opportunity for the operation button 410 and the special operation means (indicated as “PUSH” in the drawing). Any operation opportunity for the pressed button) 1410 will be lost.

That is, in the post-operation production according to this production example, staged production progress appears, and any production result of a plurality of modes (FIGS. 354(c) and 354(d)) with different expectations is displayed. Even if the final appearance is determined at the start of the symbol variation (determined based on the result of the big hit determination), first, as shown in FIG. 354(b), a specific effect image (here, an explosion) Smoke image) is displayed. After that, when the production progresses to a production result with a relatively low degree of expectation, as shown in FIG. 354(c), the specific production image (here, explosion) shown in FIG. 354(b) is generated. (Smoke image due to) gradually disappears, a production image (here, “Kichi” fortune) that suggests that the production result is relatively low in expectations is displayed. When the production progresses to a high production result, as shown in FIG. 354(d), the specific production image (here, a smoke image caused by an explosion) shown in FIG. 354(b) gradually disappears. In the process, an effect image (here, “Nakichi's fortune”) indicating that the effect result has a relatively high expectation is displayed.

Then, the flow of the effect shown in FIGS. 354(a) to 354(d) as described above appears as a basic effect development when the effect acceptance period occurs in the automatic button effect state, and thus the automatic effect function described above. Even after the post-operation effect (FIG. 354(b) to FIG. 354(d)) is executed by the operation, the automatic button effect state is maintained without being terminated unless the player performs an operation. ..

However, as described above, after being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the desire to return to the normal effect mode in which the effect can be advanced depending on the player's own operation (the automatic button effect state is The desire to end) may arise. Such a desire often occurs when a performance reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to a player occurs, but a limited time from the start of the performance reception period to the end thereof. It is difficult to perform both the operation for ending the automatic button performance state and the operation for accepting the operation, and as a result, the operation opportunity may be lost. If so, the interest in playing games could be reduced.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the operation button 410 is operated within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 354(a), it is detected that the operation is performed. Based on the detection of the fact that the operation button 410 is located at the operation position, the process of ending the automatic button effect state and the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect acceptance are performed (automatically). Unified operation control in button production state).
It should be noted that the effect reception period generated in FIG. 354(a) is ended when the operation on the operation button 410 is received, and the above-described automatic effect function is disabled and the special operation means ( The operation opportunity for the button 1410 described as “PUSH” in the figure is also lost.

Even when the operation button 410 is operated within the effect reception period that has occurred in FIG. 354(a), as shown in FIG. 355(e), the operation is performed within the effect reception period and effect reception is performed. As a post-operation effect corresponding to that, first, a specific effect image (here, a smoke image due to an explosion) is displayed. After that, when the production progresses to a production result with a relatively low degree of expectation, as shown in FIG. 355(f), the specific production image shown in FIG. 355(e) (here, an explosion). Smoke image due to) gradually disappears, a production image (here, “Kichi” fortune) that suggests that the production result is relatively low in expectation is displayed. When the production progresses to a high production result, the specific production image (here, the smoke image due to the explosion) shown in FIG. 355(e) gradually disappears as shown in FIG. 355(g). In the process, an effect image (here, “Nakichi's fortune”) that suggests that the effect result has a relatively high expectation is displayed.

However, when the operation button 410 is operated within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 354(a), a process of ending the automatic button effect state based on the operation is also performed. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 355(e) to (g), after the operation on the operation button 410 is received, the fact that the automatic button effect state is controlled in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed. The display (here, "auto button is being set") is not displayed. In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the operation button 410 is operated within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 354(a), the process of ending the automatic button effect state is executed. A suggestion display (here, “auto button release”) appears (see FIG. 355(e)).

Further, as described above, during the effect reception period generated in FIG. 354(a), not only the operation button 410 in the light emitting state, but also a special operation means that does not change at all (described as "PUSH" in the drawing). Button 1410 is also permitted to be operated. Then, this special operation means (button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 "operates only when desired while keeping the automatic button effect state (without causing effect mode switching). As mentioned above, it is prepared in order to enable a selfish game technique such as "progress the production."

Therefore, even when the special operation means (button described as "PUSH" in the drawing) 1410 is operated within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 354(a), as shown in FIG. 356(h). First, a specific effect image (here, a smoke image caused by an explosion) comes to be displayed as a post-operation effect corresponding to the fact that an operation is performed within the effect reception period and the effect reception is performed. After that, when the production progresses to a production result with a relatively low degree of expectation, as shown in FIG. 356(i), the specific production image (here, explosion) shown in FIG. 356(h) is generated. (Smoke image due to) gradually disappears, a production image (here, “Kichi” fortune) that suggests that the production result is relatively low in expectations is displayed. When the production progresses to a high production result, the specific production image (here, the smoke image caused by the explosion) shown in FIG. 356(h) gradually disappears as shown in FIG. 356(j). In the process, an effect image (here, “Nakichi's fortune”) indicating that the effect result has a relatively high expectation is displayed. In addition, at the time when the operation for the special operation means (the button described as "PUSH" in the drawing) 1410 is received, the effect reception period generated in FIG. 354(a) is ended, and the above-described automatic effect is generated. The function is disabled and the operation opportunity for the operation button 410 is lost.

However, if an operation is performed on the special operation means (button described as “PUSH” in the figure) 1410 within the effect reception period that has occurred in FIG. 354(a), the automatic button effect state based on the operation. There is no simultaneous processing for terminating. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 356(h) to (j), it is indicated that the automatic button effect state is controlled in the display area of the effect display device 1600 even after the effect on the operation button 410 is received. The display (here, "auto button setting is in progress") is continuously displayed.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, the special operation means (button described as "PUSH" in the drawing) 1410 within the effect reception period generated in FIG. A special operation that cannot appear when an operation is performed, when the above-described automatic effect function works (FIG. 354(b)), or when the operation button 410 is operated (FIG. 355(e)). I am trying to make the production appear. Although such a special effect may be an effect using a movable body or a lamp, in the effect example shown in FIG. 356(j), the above-described automatic effect function is performed in the effect display device 1600. In addition to the effect image (post-operation effect) that appears in the case (FIG. 354(b)) or when the operation button 410 is operated (FIG. 355(e)), a glittering effect display is additionally displayed. I am trying to do it. Instead of the glittering effect display, an effect using a movable body or a lamp may be additionally implemented.

According to such a configuration, the change content of the effect caused when the operation button 410 is operated within the effect reception period related to the omikuji effect when the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is being controlled. When the automatic button production state (specific production state) is being controlled, the special operation means (button described as “PUSH” in the figure) 1410 is operated during the production reception period for the fortune-telling production. In this case, the contents of the change in the effect that will be caused will be different from each other. In this case, when the above-mentioned special effect (here, a glittering effect display) appears, "the operation means is operated and the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect acceptance is displayed, but the automatic button effect state is It is possible to recognize while in the "state where the setting is not canceled and this is continued" while enjoying the post-operation performance. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 356(i), even when the effect image (here, "Kichi" fortune) indicating that the effect result is relatively low in expectation is displayed, the special image is displayed. The production (here, the glittering effect display) can be displayed.

Further, such a special effect (here, a glittering and shining effect display) is made to appear in addition to the above-described post-operation effect at a predetermined ratio based on the result of the big hit determination. When the effect is additionally displayed, it is desirable that the proportion of the big hit symbol to appear due to the symbol variation is higher than that when the special effect does not appear. However, in this case, it becomes useful for the player to operate not the operation button 410 but the special operation means (button described as “PUSH” in the drawing) 1410, and the operation button 410 There is a concern that the operation will not be performed. Therefore, when the special operation means (button described as "PUSH" in the drawing) 1410 is operated within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 354(a), the special effect (here, glittering) is obtained. If the effect display) does not appear, any effect result appears by operating the operation button 410 within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 354(a) or by operating the above-described automatic effect function. It is desirable that the proportion of the big hit symbols appearing due to the symbol variation be lower than that in the case.

According to such a configuration, the "operation on the operation means is performed by the operation on the "special operation means (button described as "PUSH"" in the drawing) 1410", but the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception appears. In order to create a state in which the automatic button production state is not canceled and is maintained”, there is a production demerit such as “It can be suggested that the proportion of the big hit symbol that appears in the pattern variation is extremely low”. Therefore, it is expected that the player will be able to maintain a favorable interest in the game by exercising such a dramatic selection.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 356(i), even though the same effect mode as in the example shown in FIG. 355(f) appears, the above-described effect of the demerit has occurred. Therefore, it is possible to recognize that the proportion of the big hit symbols appearing due to the symbol variation is lower than that in the example shown in FIGS. 354(c) and 355(f). However, in the example shown in FIG. 356(i), while making it possible to recognize that the degree of expectation is low, the effect mode is shown in FIGS. 354(c) and 355(f). By making the same as each other, it is possible that a third party who does not operate the special operation means (the button described as “PUSH” in the drawing) 1410 is in a production situation in which the production selection has failed. It is difficult to understand, and it is expected that this will prevent a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, no matter which production selection is made within the production reception period generated in FIG. 354(a), FIG. 354(b) or FIG. 355( e), as shown in FIG. 356(h) and the like, a specific effect image (here, a smoke image caused by an explosion) is displayed, but the specific effect image is relatively post-operation effect. It may be displayed in any of a plurality of modes in which the appearance mode with a high degree of expectation (here, “Nakichi”'s fortune) appears, or the appearance ratio of the special effect is different.

In addition, regardless of which staging selection is made within the staging acceptance period that has occurred in FIG. 354(a), the staging mode is omitted without displaying a particular staging image, and a staging mode with different expectations. Either one of (Okiji, "Kichi" or "Nakichi" in this case) may be directly displayed as the post-operation effect. However, in order to make it difficult for a third party to understand that there is a rendering situation (FIG. 356(i)) in which the rendering selection has failed, a rendering mode with different expectations ( Here, when either “Kichi” or “Nakichi” fortune) appears as a post-operation effect, it is desirable to first display a specific effect image (here, a smoke image due to an explosion).

In addition, it is possible to perform an effect in which the degree of expectation is suggested even within the effect reception period that has occurred in FIG. May be.

Further, the special operation means (button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 is not necessarily prepared as a dedicated operation means for continuing the state when in the automatic button effect state. Alternatively, the other operating means already prepared may be used.

In the effect reception period generated in FIG. 354(a), is there a period during which the operation of the operation button 410 of the plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001, etc.) can be received? Or, the above-described effect (specific operation-related effect (see FIG. 330 to FIG. 350)) is executed regarding whether a period during which an operation for another operation means (for example, sword decoration 5001) can be accepted for effect occurs. It may be generated as a result.

Further, during the effect reception period in which the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410, the first effect in which the operation opportunity to the special operation means (the button described as “PUSH” in the drawing) 1410 is also given. Even if the reception period (see FIG. 354(a)) and the second effect reception period in which the operation opportunity for the special operation means (button described as "PUSH" in the drawing) 1410 is not given are included. Good. In this case, when the first effect reception period (see FIG. 354(a)) occurs, the specific operation-related effect described above (see FIG. 330 to FIG. 350) than when the second effect reception period occurs. It is desirable to increase the rate of occurrence of (see) until the symbol fluctuation is stopped. According to such a configuration, the proportion of the above-described specific operation-related effect (see FIGS. 330 to 350) that appears depending on whether the first effect reception period or the second effect reception period has occurred. It will function as a suggested performance.

[Stable automatic performance processing]
As described above, in the automatic button production state (specific production state), operation by the player within the production reception period (the first specific effective period or the second specific effective period when the above-mentioned another example is applied) Even if is not performed, the process (automatic effect function) that causes the same change as when the operation is performed may be executable. However, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a special effect such as "a plurality of operating means is capable of accepting effects and different effects are executed depending on which operating means is operated". The production reception period can be generated. Therefore, such a special effect reception period occurs when in the state of being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), and for any operation means within the special effect acceptance period. If there is no operation, which of the plurality of operating means the automatic performance function is to be activated (which of the plurality of operating means causes the same change to the performance as when the performance is received) Is a problem.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a special effect such as "a plurality of operating means is capable of receiving effects, and different effects are executed depending on which operating means is operated" When the production acceptance period of "occurs," "whether there is a possibility that a production result with a higher degree of expectation may appear", rather than "whether there is a possibility that a production result with a lower expectation may appear". Based on the above, the process of activating the automatic performance function for the operation means different from the "operation means on the side that can generate the performance that may have a lower expected performance result" (stable-side automatic performance) Process) is executable.

According to such a configuration, the production mode having the lowest expectation among the plurality of production modes that can occur when the production reception is performed for any one of the plurality of operation means within the special production reception period, Since it will not be possible to appear when the automatic production function works, there is a situation such as "When the operation is forgotten, the automatic production function causes the production mode with the lowest expectation to appear". It can be avoided appropriately.

Hereinafter, the stable-side automatic effect process in the automatic button effect state will be described with reference to FIGS. 357 to 359.

First, a description will be given of an example of an effect when a special effect reception period occurs in the normal effect state without being controlled to the automatic button effect state. In FIG. 357(a), in the normal effect state, the number of holdings is 3 and the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination. It is possible to allow the player to select either the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the sword operation of the sword decoration body 5001 under the reach state in the effect situation that is being performed. The production situation in which the production display suggesting that the special production reception period is started is shown. It should be noted that in this effect situation, although neither the effect acceptance for the operation button 410 nor the effect acceptance for the sword decoration 5001 has been activated yet, the operation button 410 and the sword have been activated since that time. The operation button 410 is in a light emitting state and the sword decoration 5001 is in a state of being moved to the sword extraction position in order to prompt a determination as to which of the decorations 5001 should be operated. Further, on the effect display device 1600, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG are displayed, respectively.

FIG. 357(b) shows the player a special effect reception period suggested by the effect display shown in FIG. 357(a), either the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the sword operation of the sword ornament 5001. The production situation in which a production reception period which can be selected by the side) has occurred is shown. In this effect situation, at least a part (here, the button image BTG, the sword decoration image SYG) of the effect display on the effect display device 1600 that has appeared from the time of the effect state shown in FIG. While the state of 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is maintained, the instruction display prompting the user to operate either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 (here, the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG is displayed. Correspondingly displayed downward arrows, a bar display indicating the remaining time of the special effect reception period, and the like) are displayed.

Here, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 357(b), a character image such as "stable" is displayed corresponding to the button image BTG, and a character image such as "disturbance" is displayed corresponding to the sword decoration image SYG. Has been done. However, instead of this, the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG may not be displayed, and a dedicated mark may be displayed when both of the two operating means are ready to receive the effect.

That is, in this effect example, when the effect reception for the operation button 410 is performed within the special effect reception period shown in FIG. 357(b), first, the effect reception for the operation button 410 is performed as the button-side post-operation effect. After the display of what has been done (FIG. 357(c)), it is suggested that the lesser the number destroyed, the lower the degree of expectation, and the larger the number destroyed, the higher the degree of expectation is "50 destroyed". And an effect (FIG. 357(d), FIG. 357(e)) that causes one of "and 100 defeats" to appear based on the result of the big hit determination is executed. For example, in the button-side post-operation effect when the jackpot is won, the effect mode shown in FIG. 357(d) appears at a rate of “40%” and at the rate of “60%” in FIG. 357(e). In the post-button-side effect when the big hit is lost, the effect mode shown in FIG. 357(d) appears at the rate of “60%” and the ratio of “40%”. It is possible to cause the effect mode shown in FIG. 357(e) to appear.

On the other hand, when the production reception for the sword decoration body 5001 is performed within the special production reception period, as a post-sword operation production, it is first displayed that the production reception for the sword decoration body 5001 has been performed ( 358(f)), the production results suggest that the smaller the number destroyed, the lower the degree of expectation, and the larger the number destroyed, the higher the degree of expectation is "1 body destroyed", "100 body destroyed", and " The effect (FIGS. 358(g) to 358(i)) of causing any of "777 bodies destroyed" to appear based on the result of the jackpot determination is executed. For example, in the post-sword side operation effect when the jackpot is won, the effect mode shown in FIG. 358(g) appears at a rate of “10%”, and at the rate of “50%” in FIG. 358(h). The effect mode shown appears, and the effect mode shown in FIG. 358(i) appears at a rate of "40%". In the effect after the sword side operation when the jackpot is lost, the rate of "40%". The effect mode shown in FIG. 358(g) appears, the effect mode shown in FIG. 358(h) appears at a rate of “50%”, and the effect mode shown in FIG. 358(i) at a rate of “0%”. Aspects can be made to appear.

In the example productions shown in FIGS. 357 to 359, regardless of whether the button-side post-operation production or the sword-side post-production production appears as a result, the number of defeats is small. Has a lower expectation than the production mode in which the number of defeats is large. In the case where the number of defeats is the same as the effect mode (for example, the effect mode shown in FIG. 357(e), the effect mode shown in FIG. 358(h), and the effect mode shown in FIG. 359(e) described later) , Expectations may be different, but it is desirable that they be the same.

In such a configuration, a special performance acceptance period is generated that allows performance reception for both the operation button 410 (first operation means) and the sword ornament 5001 (second operation means), and the special performance reception period is generated. Since it is made possible to generate different operation effects (button-side operation effect, sword-side operation effect) depending on the type of operation means on the side operated within the effect reception period, one operation means is operated. It is possible to improve the monotonous performance of playing, and to improve the enjoyment of the game.

In particular, the same degree of expectation is not shown by operating either the operation button 410 (first operating means) or the sword decoration 5001 (second operating means), but rather the sword decoration 5001 (first operation means). Only when the operation means 2) is operated, a particular effect mode (here, shown in FIG. 358(g)) that suggests that the big hit symbol is difficult to appear due to the symbol variation (symbol variation in the execution state). Since the production mode of "destroy one body" can be made to appear, it is desired to see the production (production after the sword side operation) on the side of the sword decoration body 5001 (second operation means) even at such a risk. You will be expected to maintain the enjoyment of the game by inducing conflicts and stimuli.

Then, in this case, the button-side post-operation effect is "a specific effect mode having the lowest expectation among the effect modes that appear when either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 is operated within the special effect acceptance period. In this sense, the appearance risk of "(one-body-defeating effect mode shown in FIG. 358(g)") is eliminated, which means that the post-operation effect is relatively stable. In addition, the sword-side post-operation effect is "a specific effect mode with the lowest expectation (here Then, in the sense that there is an appearance risk of "the effect mode of "defeating one body" shown in FIG. 358(g)", it will function as a post-operation effect that relatively includes disturbance.

Furthermore, in this example of performance, from the appearance of the effect situation shown in FIG. 357(a) to the appearance of the effect situation shown in FIG. 357(b) (here, within the special effect acceptance period), 357 (a-b) can be made to appear based on the result of the jackpot determination, when the effect mode appears, than when the effect mode does not appear. When the operation on the sword decoration 5001 is performed, the appearance rate of the “specific effect mode with the lowest expectation (here, the effect mode of “defeat one body” shown in FIG. 358(g))” is low. It is possible to make progress in the form. This percentage may be 0%.

According to such a configuration, the risk that "a specific effect mode with the lowest degree of expectation (here, the effect mode of "defeat one body" shown in FIG. 358(g))" may appear is taken. Since it becomes possible to use the effect result indicating whether or not the effect mode shown in FIG. 357(a-b) appears as a material for determining whether to operate the sword ornament 5001 instead of the operation button 410. As a result, it is expected that the game enjoyment when the special effect reception period shown in FIG. 357(b) occurs can be suitably improved.

In the normal production state, when the special production reception period shown in FIG. 357(b) occurs, but no production reception is made within the special production reception period, the automatic production described above is performed. The function does not function, and the production is advanced without executing either the button-side post-operation production or the sword-side post-production production.

In contrast, FIGS. 359(a) to 359(e) show an example of an effect when such a special effect reception period occurs when the automatic button effect state is controlled.

As shown in FIG. 359(a), FIG. 359(a-b), and FIG. 359(b), even when the automatic button effect state is controlled, the automatic button effect state is controlled. Except that the display (here, "auto button setting is in progress") indicating the effect is continuously displayed on the effect display device 1600, an effect display indicating that a special effect reception period is started appears. From the time until the special effect reception period ends to the same effect as in the above-described normal effect state (FIG. 357(a), FIG. 357(a-b), and FIG. 357(b)). To be advanced.

However, as described above, when neither the operation button 410 nor the sword ornament 5001 is operated within the special effect reception period shown in FIG. 359(b), “a result with a lower degree of expectation (here, The automatic production function is enabled for the operation button 410 different from the sword decoration body 5001 on the side that can generate the production in which the production mode of "defeat one body" shown in 358(g) may appear. It is possible to execute processing (stable side automatic effect processing).

That is, in this case, even though neither the operation button 410 nor the sword decoration 5001 has been operated within the special effect reception period shown in FIG. 359(b), the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is activated. By doing so, the same change as in the case where the operation on the operation button 410 is received in the special effect reception period is caused in the effect. Therefore, as the button-side post-operation effect, first, after the fact that the effect reception for the operation button 410 has been received is displayed (FIG. 359(c)), the smaller the number of defeats, the lower the degree of expectation and the greater the number of defeats. As an effect result that suggests that the degree of expectation is higher, either "50 kills" or "100 kills" appears based on the result of the jackpot determination (FIGS. 359(d) and 359(e)). ) Will be executed.

According to such a configuration, the lowest expectation among the plurality of effect modes that can occur when the operation reception is performed for either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 within the special effect reception period. The effect mode (here, the effect mode of "defeat one body" shown in FIG. 358(g)) cannot appear when the automatic effect function works. It is possible to preferably avoid the occurrence of a situation such as "the effect mode with the lowest expectation appears by the automatic effect function."

Here, due to the convenience of the automatic effect function, it is feared that the player will not operate either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 in order to maintain the automatic button effect state.
However, as described above, during the special effect reception period, the effect mode shown in FIG. 359(a-b) can appear based on the result of the jackpot determination, and when the effect mode appears. , With the appearance ratio of the “specific effect mode with the lowest expectation (here, the effect mode of “defeat one body” shown in FIG. 358 (g))” becoming low, Since the opportunity to enjoy the game will be provided, it is expected that the sword ornament 5001 can be suitably operated.

Note that in the example productions shown in FIGS. 357 to 359, the period during which the operation for the operation button 410 is received and the period during which the operation for the sword ornament 5001 is received are generated at the same time and are ended simultaneously. Although the control is performed as the production reception period, these periods may not necessarily be generated at the same time. For example, if the period in which the operation on the operation button 410 is received and the period in which the operation on the sword decoration 5001 is received overlap in part of these periods, these periods are separated. You may make it generate|occur|produce at a timing.

When a specific effect pattern is selected from among a plurality of effect patterns based on the result of the jackpot determination, "a plurality of operation means are capable of accepting effects, and different effect methods are operated depending on which operation means is operated. The above special effect reception period such as "is executed" may be generated. That is, in this case, at a relatively early stage from when the symbol variation starts with a particular effect pattern, "Which of the plurality of operating means should be operated within the special effect acceptance period, or a special effect acceptance period occurs? You should be able to think about a production strategy that assumes that a special production reception period will occur, such as ``Should I perform the setting operation to the automatic button production state before doing it?'' .. For example, it is possible to confirm "how much advance notice production was performed in what production mode (expectation level)" before the special production reception period occurs, so these confirmations can be made. It becomes possible to use the result as a judgment material for "which of the plurality of operating means should be operated within the special effect reception period", and a game until the special effect reception period occurs. As for interest, this can be maintained appropriately.

However, even when a specific effect pattern is selected, when the operation button 410 is operated or the sword ornament 5001 is operated within the special effect reception period, the automatic effect function is further used. Which production mode is to appear when is activated is determined by lottery (judgment) based on the result of the jackpot judgment at the start of symbol variation or when the reception of production (or when the automatic production function is functioning). It is desirable to do so.

In addition, even in a production situation in which the special production reception period has not yet occurred, "the player can be made to select either the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the sword operation of the sword decoration 5001. When the production display is in the production display (FIG. 357(a), FIG. 359(a)) that suggests that the special production reception period is started, the setting to the automatic button production state is allowed. It is desirable to control this as a prohibited period so that it will not occur. According to such a configuration, it is suggested that "a special effect reception period in which the player can select either the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the sword operation of the sword decoration 5001 is started. Even if you try to perform the setting operation to the automatic button production state after confirming that "production display" has started, this will not be accepted, so you can continue playing games while maintaining the automatic button production state It becomes possible to provide "stable side automatic production processing when in the automatic button production state" only for those who are, and production for continuously playing games while maintaining the automatic button production state Will be able to provide specific value.

Further, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 357 to 359, the “lowest expectation specific effect mode (FIG. 358 (g)”) that may appear when the sword-side operation effect is performed is operated on the button side. Although it is decided to execute as a unique effect mode different from any effect mode that can appear when the after effect is performed, regarding the "specific effect mode with the lowest expectation", the button-side operation effect is It may be executed as the same mode as the effect mode that can appear when performed (for example, (“50 bodies destroyed” shown in FIG. 357(d)). In other words, in this case, after-sword-side operation effect) Even if the "specific performance mode with the lowest degree of expectation" appears as a result of performing, the appearance mode is the same as the mode that can appear when the post-button-side performance is performed. Therefore, it may be difficult for a third party who does not know which one of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 is operated to recognize that the expectation is extremely low. As a result, it is expected that a decrease in the enjoyment of the game will be suppressed, that is, in this case, in the effect display device 1600, "a specific effect mode is displayed based on effect reception". Despite the fact that the effect situation is only appearing, depending on whether the effect situation is caused by the operation on the operation button 410 or the operation on the sword ornament 5001, the symbol variation. Since the degree of expectation that a big hit symbol will appear in (variation of symbols in the execution state) will be different, it will be possible to further enhance the fun as an effect using a plurality of operating means.

However, this is a case where the "specific performance mode with the lowest degree of expectation" in the post-sword operation performance is executed as the same mode as the performance mode that can appear even when the button-side post-operation performance is performed. However, with regard to the “special effect mode with the highest degree of expectation” in the sword-side post-operation effect, a unique effect mode different from any of the effect modes that can appear when the button-side post-operation effect is performed (for example, It is desirable to execute this as "(defeating 777 bodies" shown in FIG. 358(i)." According to such a configuration, "a specific production mode with the lowest degree of expectation" in the post-sword operation production. Appears, it may be difficult to recognize that the third party who does not know which one of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 has been operated has a significantly low expectation. On the other hand, when the “special effect mode with the highest expectation” appears in the post-operation operation on the sword side, even a third party who does not know which of the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 is operated As a result, the player can easily recognize that the production situation is in a state where the expectation is extremely high. It becomes possible to enjoy the effect (effect after the sword-side operation) on the side of the sword ornament 5001 (second operation means). Anything that can be recognized may be used, and, for example, by performing a movable body operation or a lamp light emission, uniqueness with other effect modes may be ensured.

Further, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 357 to 359, as a result of the effect after the sword side operation (FIG. 358(f) to FIG. 358(i)) being performed, the effect mode of “777 bodies destroyed” (FIG. 358( i)) can appear, and when the production mode of “defeating 777 bodies” (FIG. 358(i)) appears, any other production mode (FIG. 357(d), FIG. 357(e)). , FIG. 358(g), FIG. 358(h)), the proportion of the big hit symbol that appears in the symbol fluctuation (symbol fluctuation in the execution state) becomes higher than when it appears. This percentage may be 100%.
However, it is not always necessary to cause the production mode of "destroying 777 bodies" (FIG. 358(i)) to appear, and in this case, the production mode shown in FIG. The appearance ratio of the effect mode shown in FIG. 358(h) is made higher than the appearance ratio of the effect mode shown in FIG. 357(e) by the amount of lowering the degree of expectation of the effect mode shown in (g). Becomes

In addition, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 357 to 359, the effect after the button side operation (FIG. 357(c) to FIG. 357(e)) and the effect after the sword side operation (FIG. 358(f) to FIG. 358(i)). ), the common effect mode (here, the effect mode of "defeat 100 bodies") can be made to appear, but the common effect mode is not made to appear. Good. Further, in the button-side post-operation effect, only the display change appears, whereas in the sword-side operation effect, not only the display change, but also the movable body operation and the lamp light emission may be executable. In addition, the button-side post-operation effect and the sword-side post-operation effect may not be shared as effect contents regarding the number of defeats, and the effect contents themselves may be executed as mutually different effects.

In the example productions shown in FIGS. 357 to 359, when the production reception occurs, including when the production is received by the function of the automatic production function, first of all, the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 is displayed. The display (FIG. 357(c), FIG. 358(f), and FIG. 359(c)) that suggests whether or not the effect reception has been made appears here. However, the expectation level is suggested without making the display appear. You may make it perform the production which makes the production result which appears.

Further, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 357 to 359, as a result of the effect after the sword side operation (FIG. 358(f) to FIG. 358(i)) being performed, the effect mode of “777 bodies destroyed” (FIG. 358( i)) appears, the above-mentioned specific operation relation is more than that when any other effect mode (FIG. 357(d), FIG. 357(e), FIG. 358(g), FIG. 358(h)) appears. Proportion of appearance (see FIGS. 330 to 350) appearing until the symbol variation is stopped, and further, when the specific operation-related effect appears, operation means (sword ornament) with higher expectation. It is desirable to increase the ratio of operation opportunities given to 5001). According to such a configuration, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 357 to 359, it is possible to suitably encourage the sword ornament 5001 on the side with a higher effect risk to be operated.

[Production reception processing according to display type]
As described above, in the automatic button production state (specific production state), operation by the player within the production reception period (the first specific effective period or the second specific effective period when the above-mentioned another example is applied) Even if is not performed, the process (automatic effect function) that causes the same change as when the operation is performed may be executable. However, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment,
The first display effect can be displayed within the effect reception period in which the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410 is permitted, and the operation button 410 is operated while the first display effect is displayed. And a process for generating a first expected performance (post-operation performance in which the degree of expectation is suggested) based on the reception of the performance by the operation, and a performance reception that allows performance reception (operation) for the operation button 410. The second display effect can be displayed within the period, and when the operation button 410 is operated while the second display effect is being displayed, the above-mentioned first effect is received based on the fact that the operation is accepted by the operation. It is possible to execute a process related to a plurality of different operation effects such as a process of generating a second expected effect (a post-operation effect in which the degree of expectation is suggested) different from the first expected effect.

In such a configuration, the effect type as the expected effect (post-operation effect) that appears at the time of operation may differ according to the display effect (first display effect, second display effect) displayed during the effect acceptance period. Therefore, it becomes possible not only to enhance the interest in the game when operated, but also to favorably increase the interest in the game from the occurrence of the effect reception period to the operation.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, at least when the automatic button performance state (specific performance state) is controlled, within the performance reception period during which the performance reception (operation) for the operation button 410 is permitted. When a production situation in which the first display production is displayed or a production situation in which the second display production is displayed within the production reception period that allows production reception (operation) for the operation button 410, the production reception A process of generating the same expected effect (here, the first expected effect or the second expected effect) as when the operation button 410 is operated even if the operation button 410 is not operated within the period. Is feasible.

According to such a configuration, when the automatic button production state (specific production state) is being controlled, when the production situation in which the first display production is displayed appears within the production reception period, the operation button 410 is operated. The first display effect is executed regardless of whether or not the operation button 410 has been operated when an effect situation in which the second display effect is displayed appears within the effect acceptance period. Regardless, the second display effect will be executed. Therefore, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), regardless of whether the first display effect or the second display effect is displayed during the effect acceptance period, there is a concern that the user may forget to operate. You will be able to enjoy the production without any.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the first display effect can be displayed only when the effect reception period for generating the post-operation effect occurs. However, the second display effect can be displayed even when the effect reception period for generating the post-operation effect does not occur. And
A production situation in which the production is controlled to the automatic button production state (specific production state), the production reception period during which the production reception (operation) for the operation button 410 is allowed has occurred, and the first display production is displayed. When the operation button 410 is operated in, the process of generating the first expected effect (post-operation effect) and the process of ending the automatic button effect state are respectively performed (effect shown in FIG. 360 described later). See progress),
A production situation in which the production is controlled to the automatic button production state (specific production state), a production reception period for allowing production reception (operation) to the operation button 410 has occurred, and the second display production is displayed. When the operation button 410 is operated in, the process of generating the second expected effect (post-operation effect) is performed, but the process of ending the automatic button effect state is not performed (see FIG. 361 described later). Refer to production progress),
An effect that is controlled to an automatic button effect state (a specific effect state) and that an effect reception period that allows effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410 has not occurred and the second display effect is displayed. When the operation button 410 is operated in the situation, neither the process of generating the first expected effect (after-operation effect) nor the process of generating the second expected effect (after-operation effect) is performed, and the automatic button Processing for ending the effect state is also not performed (see effect progress shown in FIG. 362 described later),
The first display effect and the second display effect that are controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) and that the effect acceptance period for allowing effect acceptance (operation) for the operation button 410 has not occurred. When the operation button 410 is operated in an effect situation in which none of the above is displayed, a process of generating a first expected effect (after-operation effect) and a process of generating a second expected effect (after-operation effect). None of the above is performed, and each process such as a process of ending the automatic button effect state is executed according to each effect situation (effect reception process according to the display type).

According to such a configuration, when the operation button 410 is operated when the first display effect appears and the second display effect does not appear, and when the first display effect appears. If the operation is not performed and the operation button 410 is operated while the second display effect is appearing, a type (first operation) as an expected effect (post-operation effect) according to the operation (effect reception). The expected effect 1 and the second expected effect are made different, and even if the operation is performed only when the second display effect appears, the expected effect (post-operation effect) itself does not appear. There is a possibility that there is a possibility that processing for ending the automatic button effect state will not be performed. Therefore, diversity as an effect using the operation button 410 is ensured, and it is possible to preferably improve the enjoyment of the game when the effect using the operation button 410 is performed.

Hereinafter, the effect reception processing according to the display type in the automatic button effect state will be described with reference to FIGS. 360 to 364.

In FIG. 360, while being controlled to the automatic button effect state, the period of timing tb11 to tb13 (see FIG. 360(a)) in the execution period of the symbol variation is referred to as “effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410”. The example of production when the first production pattern that can be set as the "production acceptance period for which is allowed" is executed is shown.

In the first effect pattern, when the timing tb11 for generating the "effect reception period that allows the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410" is generated, as shown in FIG. 360(b), in the effect display device 1600. , A button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed, and an instruction display for prompting an operation on the operation button 410 (here, a downward arrow display and a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) appears. (First display effect).

Then, at the timing tb12 prior to the timing tb13, if the operation on the operation button 410 is accepted as an effect, as shown in FIG. 360(c), the symbol variation (in the execution state) based on the effect acceptance. The first post-operation effect (in the figure, "Nakichi"'s fortune) indicating the degree of expectation that a big hit symbol will appear in the pattern variation) is executed (first expected effect). At this time, the automatic button effect state is canceled based on the effect acceptance and returned to the normal effect state, and the effect acceptance period generated from the timing tb11 is accepted without consuming the remaining time. Will be terminated at the point of time. Therefore, at the timing tb12 when the effect is received, the display indicating that the "automatic button effect state" that has been displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed (here, "auto button setting is in progress"). )” will also be hidden.

However, in this case, no matter which of the timings tb11 to tb13 the performance reception is performed, at the timing tb13, as shown in FIG. 360(d), the first post-operation performance generated by the performance reception ( The first expected effect) is not finished yet and is in a state of being executed so that the interest of the game is preferably maintained over the period of timings tb11 to tb13 regardless of the timing when the effect is received. It is desirable to do.

361, during the control of the automatic button effect state, during the period of the symbol variation execution period of timing tb21 to tb23 (see FIG. 361 (a)), "effect reception (operation) to the operation button 410. The example of production when the second production pattern that can be set as the "production reception period for which is allowed" is executed is shown.

In the second effect pattern, when the timing tb21 at which the "effect acceptance period for allowing effect acceptance (operation) for the operation button 410 is generated" comes, as shown in FIG. 361(b), in the effect display device 1600. , "Haunted OBK with present box" appears (second display effect).

Here, in the case where "Haunted OBK with present box" is displayed, unlike the case where the button image BTG is displayed, an effect in which the degree of expectation is suggested when the operation button 410 is operated is always generated. Therefore, the instruction display for prompting the operation of the operation button 410 (the downward arrow display or the bar display showing the remaining time of the effect reception period) does not appear.

In this respect, in the effect example shown in FIG. 361, the haunted OBK with the present box can be displayed within the period of timings tb21 to tb23, and the period before the timing tb23 is displayed during the period in which the haunted OBK is displayed. When the operation button 410 is operated at the timing tb22, the effect is accepted, and as shown in FIG. 361(c), the big hit symbol is the symbol variation (the symbol variation in the execution state) based on the effect acceptance. The second post-operation effect (in the figure, the character display of "heat" is shown) that indicates the degree of expectation that appears (second expected effect).

However, at this time, the effect reception period generated from the timing tb21 is ended at the time when the effect reception is performed without exhausting the remaining time, whereas the automatic button effect state is not canceled. I try to maintain this. Therefore, at the timing tb22, the "display indicating that the automatic button effect state is controlled (here, "auto button setting is in progress")" that has appeared in the display area of the effect display device 1600 continues to be displayed. Will be done.

It should be noted that, regardless of which of the timings tb21 to tb23 the effect reception is performed, at the timing tb23, as shown in FIG. 361(d), the second post-operation effect (second operation effect) generated by the effect reception is generated. In order to maintain a preferable gaming interest over the period of timings tb21 to tb23 regardless of the timing when the production is received, so that the expected production) is not finished yet. Is desirable.

362, in order to generate the second post-operation effect during the period from timing tb31 to tb33 (see FIG. 362(a)) in the execution period of the symbol variation while being controlled to the automatic button effect state. The effect example when the third effect pattern for displaying "Haunted OBK with a present box" is executed even though the effect reception period of No. has not occurred.

In the third effect pattern, when the timing tb31 arrives, as shown in FIG. 362(b), in the effect display device 1600, a haunted OBK with a present box appears (second display effect).

However, as described above, in the presentation situation in which the haunted OBK with the present box is displayed, unlike the case where the button image BTG is displayed, the post-operation presentation in which the expectation level is suggested even if the operation button 410 is operated is performed. Since it is not always generated, an instruction display for prompting the operation of the operation button 410 (a downward arrow display or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) does not appear.

In this respect, in the effect example shown in FIG. 362, the haunted OBK with the present box can be displayed within the period of timings tb31 to tb33, but as shown in FIG. 362(a), the haunted OBK is displayed. The "production reception period during which the production reception (operation) for the operation button 410 is permitted" does not occur during the period. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 361(a) and 361(c), even if the operation button 410 is operated while the haunted OBK with the present box is displayed, after the operation corresponding to the operation is performed. The effects (first after-operation effect, second after-operation effect) do not appear, and the haunted OBK with the present box is displayed over the period of timings tb31 to tb33.

However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, the operation button 410 is operated in the automatic button effect state when the effect acceptance period related to the post-operation effect does not occur. In this case, basically, the process of terminating (setting cancellation) the automatic button effect state is performed, but even if the effect acceptance period regarding effect after operation is not generated, it is shown in FIG. 362. When the operation button 410 is operated in such a production situation (a production situation in which a haunted OBK with a present box is displayed), the process for generating post-operation production and the automatic button production state are performed. The production is to be advanced so that none of the processing to be ended is performed.

Therefore, when the mode (ghost OBK with a present box) shown in FIG. 362(b), which is the same mode as FIG. 361(b), is displayed, the second operation shown in FIG. 361(c) is performed. Even if the operation button 410 is operated in the expectation that a post production (second expected production) will occur, no production change occurs, but the automatic button production state is not released. You will be able to continue this. At this time, as a method of not canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state,
Even if the production reception period regarding the post-operation performance has not occurred, only the detection of whether or not the operation button 410 has been operated is enabled, and when the production reception period regarding the post-operation performance does not occur, If it is detected, it is determined whether or not the timing of the detection is “within the period of timing tb31 to tb33 at which the haunted OBK with the present box is displayed” and the “hold the present box”. When the timing of displaying the haunted OBK is within the period of tb31 to tb33", the processing for canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state is not performed, and "the timing when the haunted OBK with the present box is displayed When it is not within the period of tb21 to tb23", a method of performing a process of canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state (the period of timings tb31 to tb33 is set as a prohibition period for canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state). Method)
-Use a method such as a method of not detecting whether or not there is an operation on the operation button 410 within the period of timing tb21 to tb23 when the haunted OBK with the present box is displayed, and the like. Is possible, and any realization method may be used.

In FIG. 363, during the automatic button effect state, the period of timing tb11 to tb13 (see FIG. 363(a)) in the symbol variation execution period is set to “effect acceptance (operation) for the operation button 410”. The above-described first effect pattern that can be set as the "allowable effect reception period" is executed, but an example of effect when the operation button 410 is not operated within the period of the timings tb11 to tb13 is shown.

As described above, in the first effect pattern, when the timing tb11 at which the "effect acceptance period for allowing effect acceptance (operation) for the operation button 410" is generated, as shown in FIG. 363(b), effect display is performed. In the device 1600, a button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed, and an instruction display prompting an operation on the operation button 410 (here, a downward arrow display and a bar indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period). (Display) appears (first display effect).

In this regard, in the effect example shown in FIG. 363, the operation button 410 is not operated within the period of timings tb11 to tb13, but when the timing tb12′ prior to the timing tb13 arrives, the above-described automatic effect function is performed. Is designed to function, and thereby, the same change as that when the operation button 410 is operated is produced in the effect. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 363(c), at the timing tb12′, the degree of expectation that the big hit symbol appears due to the symbol variation (the symbol variation in the execution state) based on the fact that the above-described automatic effect function has worked. The suggested first post-operation effect (in the figure, "Nakichi's fortune") is executed (first expected effect). However, at this time, the effect reception period that has occurred from the timing tb11 ends when the automatic effect function operates without exhausting the remaining time, but the automatic button effect state is not canceled and continues. Become.
Therefore, at the timing tb12', the "display indicating that the automatic button effect state is being controlled (here, "auto button setting is in progress")" that has appeared in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is also continued. Will be displayed.

Further, even when the above-described automatic effect function operates at the timing tb12′, at timing tb13, as shown in FIG. 363(d), the first post-operation effect (first operation) generated by the above-described automatic effect function is generated. It is desirable that the expected effect) is not finished yet and is in the middle of execution in order to maintain the amusement of interest in a preferable manner over the period of timings tb11 to tb13.

364, while being controlled to the automatic button effect state, the period of timing tb21 to tb23 (see FIG. 364(a)) in the execution period of the symbol variation is "effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410." Although the above-mentioned second effect pattern that can be set as the "allowable effect reception period" is executed, an example of effect when the operation button 410 is not operated within the period of the timings tb21 to tb23 is shown.

As described above, in the second effect pattern, when the timing tb21 for generating the “effect accepting period for allowing effect accepting (operation) for the operation button 410” comes, as shown in FIG. 364(b), effect display is performed. In the device 1600, a “ghost OBK with a present box” appears (second display effect).

Here, as described above, when the “ghost OBK with a present box” is displayed, the expectation level is suggested when the operation button 410 is operated, unlike when the button image BTG is displayed. Since it is not always necessary to generate the effect, an instruction display prompting the operation of the operation button 410 (a downward arrow display or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) appears. There is no.

In this regard, in the effect example shown in FIG. 364, the operation button 410 is not operated within the period of the timings tb21 to tb23, but when the timing tb22′ before the timing tb23 arrives, the automatic effect function described above is provided. Is designed to function, and thereby, the same change as that when the operation button 410 is operated is produced in the effect. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 364(c), at the timing tb22′, the expectation degree at which the big hit symbol appears due to the symbol variation (the symbol variation in the execution state) based on the fact that the above-described automatic effect function has worked. The suggested second post-operation effect (in the figure, the character display of "hot heat") is executed (second expected effect). However, also at this time, the effect reception period that has occurred from the timing tb21 is ended when the automatic effect function operates without exhausting the remaining time, but the automatic button effect state is continued without being released. Becomes Therefore, at the timing tb22′, the “display indicating that the automatic button effect state is being controlled (here, “auto button setting”)” that has appeared in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is also continued. Will be displayed.

Further, even when the above-described automatic effect function operates at the timing tb22′, at the timing tb23, as shown in FIG. 364(d), the second post-operation effect (second operation effect) generated by the above-described automatic effect function is generated. It is desirable that the expected effect) is not finished yet and is in the middle of execution in order to maintain the amusement of interest in a preferable manner over the period of timings tb21 to tb23.

By the way, although illustration is omitted, although the above-described third effect pattern (see FIG. 362) is executed while being controlled to the automatic button effect state, the operation button 410 is operated within the period of the timing tb31 to tb33. When the operation is not performed, the effect reception period for generating the second post-operation effect does not occur in the first place, so the above-described automatic effect function cannot function and the automatic button effect state is also released. It goes without saying that it will continue (that is, nothing will change).

In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 360 to 364, effects which are different from each other are executed in the first display effect shown in FIG. 360 and the second display effect shown in FIGS. 361 and 362. , A type as a post-operation effect when the operation is performed depending on whether the operation button 410 is operated while the first display effect or the second display effect is displayed (first The expected effect (the second expected effect) is made different, and the expected effect (post-operation effect) itself may not appear even if the operation is performed only when the second display effect appears. Therefore, the processing for ending the automatic button effect state is not performed. Therefore, diversity as an effect using the operation button 410 is ensured, and it is possible to preferably improve the enjoyment of the game when the effect using the operation button 410 is performed.

It should be noted that the first display effect may have a plurality of effect modes with different expectations and may be executed in any of these effect modes. Also, with regard to the second display effect, there may be a plurality of effect modes with different expectations, and the second display effect may be executed in any of these effect modes. However, it is important that the first display effect and the second display effect be executed as display contents having contents that are not related to each other. In the example effects shown in FIGS. 360 to 364, in the first display effect, an instruction display prompting the user to operate the button image BTG or the operation button 410 is displayed, whereas in the second display effect, the button image is displayed. Neither the image BTG nor the instruction display for prompting the operation of the operation button 410 is displayed, and a specific background image (ghost with a present box) that is not displayed when the first display effect is performed is displayed. Is becoming

In addition, as for the first expected effect, there may be a plurality of effect modes having different expectations, and the first expected effect may be executed in any of these effect modes. Also, regarding the second expected effect, there may be a plurality of effect modes with different expectations, and the second expected effect may be executed in any of these effect modes. However, it is important that the first expected effect and the second expected effect be executed as effect contents having contents that are not related to each other. In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 360 to 364, the omikuji image is displayed in the first expected effect, whereas the omikuji image is not displayed in the second expected effect, and the degree of expectation by character display is shown. Is being suggested. By executing either the first expected effect or the second expected effect as a movable effect or an effect by a lamp display, the contents may have no relation to each other.

Further, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 360 to 364, as an effect pattern for causing the second display effect to appear within the execution period of the symbol variation, when the second display effect appears, “effect for the operation button 410” is displayed. A second effect pattern and a second effect that have been determined in advance (for example, in a determination process performed at the start of the symbol variation) that a "reception acceptance period that allows acceptance (operation)" will occur. And a third effect pattern that is determined in advance (for example, in the determination process that is performed at the start of the symbol variation) that the "effect accepting period for allowing effect acceptance (operation) for the operation button 410" does not occur when Decided to prepare. However, after preparing the second effect pattern in which it is determined in advance that the "effect accepting period for allowing effect acceptance (operation) for the operation button 410" occurs when the second display effect appears, Based on that the production reception is performed within the "production reception period in which the production reception (operation) for the operation button 410 is permitted", it is determined (lottery) as to whether or not to generate the second expected production. The second expected effect is generated when the specific result is obtained in the determination, and the second expected effect is not generated when the specific result is not obtained in the determination. ~ You may make it implement|achieve the example of an effect shown in FIG. In addition to the second effect pattern according to such another example, there may be no "effect reception period for allowing effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410" when the second display effect appears. It is also possible to further prepare the above-described third effect pattern that is determined in advance (for example, in the determination process performed at the start of the symbol variation).

When the second expected effect occurs as a result of the effect reception (operation) being performed on the operation button 410 while the second display effect is being performed, the first display effect is being performed. It is possible to make the proportion of the big hit symbols appear higher in the symbol fluctuation (symbol fluctuation in the execution state) than when the first expected effect is generated as a result of the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410. desirable.

Further, when the second display effect is performed, the specific operation-related effect (see FIG. 330 to FIG. 350) described above is stopped until the symbol variation is stopped, compared with the case where the first display effect is performed. It is desirable to increase the rate of appearance during. According to such a configuration, even if the second expected effect does not occur as a result of the effect reception (operation) being performed on the operation button 410 while the second display effect is being performed, the specific operation is performed. It becomes possible to have a feeling of expectation that the related effect (see FIGS. 330 to 350) is performed, and it is possible to appropriately suppress the interest of the game.

Further, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 360 to 364, when the first display effect (see FIG. 360(b)) is displayed and when the second display effect (FIG. 361(b), FIG. 362). The above-mentioned automatic effect function is made to function at any time when (see (b)) is displayed. However, even if the operation is performed, the second expected effect does not always occur, and the above-described automatic operation is performed when the second display effect (see FIGS. 361(b) and 362(b)) is displayed. If the effect function is made to work, when the second display effect (see FIG. 361(b) and FIG. 362(b)) is being displayed, the operation is performed by letting the automatic effect function described above. There is concern that it will disappear. Therefore, while the first display effect (see FIG. 360(b)) is displayed, the above-described automatic effect function works, but the second display effect (FIG. 361(b), FIG. 362(b)) is displayed. (See) is displayed, the automatic effect function described above is disabled, and when the second display effect is displayed, it is not known whether the second expected effect will occur even if it is operated, but at least the operation must be performed. For example, the second expected effect may not occur.

Further, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 360 to 364, when the haunted OBK is displayed, “an effect acceptance period in which the effect acceptance (operation) for the operation means is allowed” is generated while the haunted OBK is displayed. You may do it. Further, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 360 to 364, when the haunted OBK is displayed, the automatic effect function functions within the “effect accepting period during which effect accepting (operation) is allowed for the operating means” or by the player. Even if the operation is performed, the haunted OBK may not be hidden, and the effect of displaying the haunted OBK may be continued at the timing tb23 and the timing tb33.

[Automatic continuous stroke function in automatic button production state]
As described above, in the automatic button production state (specific production state), operation by the player within the production reception period (the first specific effective period or the second specific effective period when the above-mentioned another example is applied) Even if is not performed, the process (automatic effect function) that causes the same change as when the operation is performed may be executable. However, in the pachinko machine 1, a plurality of operations (such as repeatedly hitting the operation button 410) on a predetermined operation means are prompted to generate an effect reception each time there is such an operation, and an operation effect corresponding to this is performed. There are times when you are told. Therefore, in the automatic button effect state, how to operate the above-mentioned automatic effect function becomes a problem when the specific effect acceptance period in which such operation effect is performed occurs.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a predetermined operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is operated during a specific effect reception period in which an operation opportunity for multiple operations (such as continuous hits) is given. Even if the user does not operate multiple times, the effect when the operation is performed multiple times only by performing an operation in a long mode for maintaining the predetermined operation means in the operating state for a relatively long time (so-called long press etc.) It is equipped with an automatic multiple-stroke operation function (auto consecutive hitting function) that allows the mode to appear, and the automatic multiple-time operation function (automatic consecutive hit function) functions by performing an operation on a predetermined operation means in a long-operation mode. In this case, the effect reception is performed every time a predetermined time elapses while the operation state is maintained, and the process for generating the post-operation effect corresponding to these is performed a plurality of times.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, an operation opportunity for multiple operations (continuous hits, etc.) is given when the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) is controlled in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state). When the specific effect reception period occurs, even if the operation means is not operated during the specific effect reception period, the operation means is automatically operated in the long operation mode during the specific effect reception period. Similar to the case where the operation function (automatic continuous hitting function) functions a plurality of times, a process for generating an effect corresponding to the effect reception is executed every time a predetermined time elapses (automatic effect function).

According to such a configuration, there is a pachinko machine 1 in which the automatic continuous hitting function is activated when an operation by so-called long pressing is performed within a specific effect reception period in which an operation opportunity of multiple operations (such as continuous hits) is given. Thus, at least when the automatic button effect state is controlled, the same effect mode as when the automatic continuous hitting function is activated appears even if the operation by long pressing is not performed within the specific effect acceptance period. Therefore, even when the automatic effect function is activated when the specific effect reception period in which the operation reception is required for multiple times occurs in the automatic button effect state, the specific effect (operation reception) within the specific effect reception period The player can enjoy the production without being dissatisfied with the occurrence frequency.

365 (a), when not controlled to the automatic button effect state, during the period of timing tc11 to tc13 of the execution period of the symbol variation "operation opportunity of multiple operations (continuous hits etc.) on the operation button 410". The specific effect pattern that can be set as the "specific effect reception period to which is given" is executed, and the operation button 410 is operated a plurality of times in a single-shot operation mode in which the operation state is maintained for a relatively short time within the specific effect reception period. The example of production when it was performed over is shown.

As shown in FIG. 365( a ), in this effect example, every time the operation button 410 is operated in the single-effect operation mode within the specific effect reception period (timings tc<b>11 to tc<b>13) (the operation button 410 is the original Every time it is detected that the position is changed to the operation state (here, each time the rising is detected), the effect reception corresponding to the operation is performed, and the specific effect (post-operation effect) is executed according to the effect reception. .. When a specific performance condition is satisfied, such as the number of times operation detection (reception of performance) is performed on the operation button 410 reaches a specific number, or a specific result is obtained by a lottery when the production is received. , A production mode in which the degree of expectation is suggested in accordance with the satisfaction of the specific production condition is made to appear, and the specific production reception period is ended at that point without consuming the remaining time. ..

Here, although omitted in the figure, within the specific effect reception period (timing tc11 to tc13), a specific time from the start to the end of the specific effect (post-operation effect) according to the effect reception. There is a case where a new effect reception (operation detection) is made. In such a case, the specific effect (post-operation effect) that is in the middle of execution at the time when the effect is accepted is interrupted, and a specific effect (after-operation effect) corresponding to the effect acceptance is newly generated. Therefore, it is desirable to appropriately maintain the operational feeling (production responsiveness) when the player operates it. It should be noted that the newly generated specific effect (post-operation effect) is to be ended when a specific time has elapsed from the start unless a new effect reception occurs again during execution of the specific effect. Become.

365 (b), when not controlled to the automatic button effect state, the period of timing tc11 to tc13 of the execution period of the symbol variation "operation opportunity of multiple operations (such as continuous hits) on the operation button 410". A specific effect pattern that can be set as a "specific effect reception period to which is given" is executed, and an operation is performed in a long mode (so-called long press) in which the operation state is maintained for a relatively long time within the specific effect reception period. An example of the effect when the button 410 is operated is shown.

As shown in FIG. 365(b), during the specific effect reception period (timing tc11 to tc13), while the operation state of the operation button 410 is maintained in the long-press mode, the operation button 410 is in the operation state. Processing for generating a new specific effect (post-operation effect) every time a predetermined time t1 has elapsed since the first specific effect (post-operation effect) was generated based on operation detection (effect reception) when Auto continuous hit function) is to be executed.
As this processing (automatic continuous hitting function), for example, "operation detection (effect reception) is performed under the condition that the operation button 410 is in the operation state every time a predetermined time t1 elapses, and the operation detection (effect) is performed. It is possible to perform such processing as "generation of a new specific effect (post-operation effect) based on (reception)". When a specific performance condition is satisfied, such as the number of times operation detection (reception of performance) is performed on the operation button 410 reaches a specific number, or a specific result is obtained by a lottery when the production is received. , A production mode in which the degree of expectation is suggested in accordance with the satisfaction of the specific production condition is made to appear, and the specific production reception period is ended at that point without consuming the remaining time. ..

FIG. 366(a) shows an operation opportunity of a plurality of operations (such as continuous hits) on the operation button 410 during the period from timing tc11 to tc13 in the symbol variation execution period when controlled to the automatic button effect state. Shows a production example when a specific production pattern that can be set as the "specific production reception period to which is given" is executed and no operation is performed within the specific production reception period.

First, if no operation is performed during the specific effect reception period (timing tc11 to tc13) when the automatic button effect state is not controlled, the specific effect is not executed even once, and the timing tc13 is reached. When it reaches, the specific effect reception period ends.

On the other hand, if no operation is performed during the specific effect reception period (timing tc11 to tc13) while the automatic button effect state is being controlled, as shown in FIG. At the timing tc12 when a predetermined time elapses after the effect reception period occurs, the automatic effect function described above functions. That is, in this case, after the first specific effect is generated at the timing t12, the automatic effect function creates a new specific effect every time the predetermined time t1 elapses, as in the case where the above-described automatic continuous hit function functions. A process for generating (post-operation effect) will be executed.

As this processing (automatic effect function), for example, "operation detection (effect reception) is performed every time a predetermined time t1 elapses, and a new specific effect (operation reception) is performed based on the operation detection (effect reception). It is possible to execute such a process as "generation of post-operation effect)". Further, when the above-described automatic effect function operates at the timing tc12, the automatic continuous hit function is caused to be used to "use the operation detection (effect acceptance) every time the predetermined time t1 elapses, and detect the operation. A new specific effect (post-operation effect) is generated based on (effect reception). When a specific performance condition is satisfied, such as the number of times operation detection (reception of performance) is performed on the operation button 410 reaches a specific number, or a specific result is obtained by a lottery when the production is received. , A production mode in which the degree of expectation is suggested in accordance with the satisfaction of the specific production condition is made to appear, and the specific production reception period is ended at that point without consuming the remaining time. ..

FIG. 366(b) shows the operation opportunity of a plurality of operations (continuous hits, etc.) on the operation button 410 during the period from timing tc11 to tc13 in the symbol variation execution period when controlled to the automatic button effect state. A specific effect pattern that can be set as the “specific effect reception period to which is given” is executed, and the operation button 410 is operated in a long press state while the automatic effect function is functioning during the specific effect reception period. The example of production in the case of being performed is shown.

In the effect example shown in FIG. 366(b), similar to the effect example shown in FIG. 366(a), the automatic effect function described above functions at the timing tc12, whereby the first specific effect at the timing tc12. After the occurrence of, a new specific effect (post-operation effect) is generated every time the predetermined time t1 elapses, as in the case where the above-described automatic continuous hitting function functions (or by causing the automatic continuous hitting function to function). The processing that causes it is executed.

However, in this effect example, it is assumed that the operation button 410 is operated in a long-press mode at the timing tc12a when the process by the automatic effect function is being executed. Therefore, at the timing tc12a, when the operation on the operation button 410 is detected in the automatic button effect state, the setting of the automatic button effect state is canceled (finished). However, in this example of effect, the effect is not accepted even though the operation by the player is detected at the timing tc12a. Then, in this way, the specific effect (post-operation effect) according to the effect acceptance is prevented from occurring at the timing tc12a, and the process (predetermined time t1) that is executed before the setting of the automatic button effect state is canceled. The process of generating a new specific effect (post-operation effect) each time is elapsed is continued without being terminated.

According to such a configuration, in the automatic button effect state, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function is functioning within the specific effect acceptance period, operation by long pressing at any timing in the state Even if is started, the operation does not cause a delay in the progress of the production due to a change in the rhythm or tempo involved in the production of the specific production (post-production production), and it is already in the execution state. The process (the process of generating a new specific effect (post-operation effect) each time a predetermined time t1 elapses) is executed in a form that is continued after the operation mode by long pressing is started. Therefore, in the automatic button effect state, even if the automatic effect function described above is functioning within the specific effect reception period, the player does not have to worry about adversely affecting the effect in the execution state. It becomes possible to perform the operation, and thereby the operation by the player is suitably prompted. That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 366(b), although the player is in a different effect state from the effect example shown in FIG. 366(a) in that the long press operation by the player is started at the timing tc12a. The same aspect appears as the aspect of the specific effect that appears during the specific effect reception period.

It should be noted that the processing already in the execution state (processing for generating a new specific effect (post-operation effect) each time the predetermined time t1 elapses) is continued until after the operation mode by long pressing is started. It is possible to execute in the form of an automatic continuous hit function that works when a long press operation is performed during the specific performance reception period, and a function when no operation is performed within the specific performance reception period. The same process (a process of generating a new specific effect (post-operation effect) every time a predetermined time t1 elapses) is executed regardless of which of the automatic effect functions to perform. It is nothing but a blank.

However, after the long press operation by the player is started at the timing tc12a, it is determined whether or not the operation button 410 is in the operation state every time the predetermined time t1 is exhausted, and it is in the operation state. On the condition that the determination is made, the processing that has been executed from the time when the automatic button performance state is present (processing for generating a new specific performance (post-operation performance) each time a predetermined time t1 elapses) is continued. It will be. Therefore, if the operation button 410 is not in the operating state at the time when the predetermined time t1 based on the previously executed specific effect is consumed, a new specific effect (post-operation effect) is generated at that time. Instead, the processing that has been executed from the time of the automatic button effect state (the process of generating a new specific effect (post-operation effect) each time the predetermined time t1 has elapsed) is ended.

In the example of the effect using the automatic continuous hitting function shown in FIG. 365(b) and the automatic effect function shown in FIGS. 366(a) and 366, a predetermined time t1 is set based on the timing when the specific effect ends. Although the process (the first mode as the automatic continuous hitting function and the automatic effect function) for generating a new specific effect (post-operation effect) is executed after the elapse, instead of this, the timing when the specific effect is started is used as a reference. As a result, a process (a second mode as an automatic continuous hitting function or an automatic effect function) for generating a new specific effect (post-operation effect) may be executed after the elapse of the predetermined time t2. In this case, the predetermined time t2 may be set longer than the specific time required from the start to the end of the specific effect, but preferably from the start to the end of the specific effect. Set to be shorter than the specific time required for. According to such a configuration, when the specific effect is in the state of being executed, the new specific effect is executed by interrupting it, so that only the operation by long pressing is performed, or It becomes possible to give a feeling as if a single-shot operation is repeatedly performed at high speed even though no operation is performed, and it is expected that amusement of the game is maintained appropriately.

In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 366(b), when the operation button 410 is operated before the timing tc12 when the automatic effect function operates (within the period of the timings tc11 to tc12), at that time. The automatic button effect state will be canceled (finished). Further, at this time, the first specific effect is generated in response to the operation on the operation button 410, and thereafter, if the operation is a long press mode, every time the predetermined time t1 (or the predetermined time t2) elapses. A process (automatic hitting function) for generating a new specific effect (post-operation effect) is executed, and if the operation is a single-press mode, it is detected that the operation button 410 is in the operation state. A new specific effect (post-operation effect) will be generated each time.

Further, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 365 and 366, when the effect reception is performed while the specific effect is in the mid-execution state, the effect reception is performed by interrupting the specific effect in the mid-execution state. Although the new specific effect described above is generated, the new specific effect corresponding to the effect reception may be generated in parallel with the specific effect that is in the middle of execution without ending.

As described above, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 365 and 366, when a new single-shot operation is performed and the effect is received when the previous specific effect generated by the single-shot operation is in the state of being executed, While a new specific effect (post-operation effect) is generated according to the effect reception, when the previous specific effect generated by the function of the automatic effect function (or the automatic continuous hitting function) is in the process of being executed. Even if it is detected that the operation button 410 has changed from the original position to the operation state by a single-shot operation or a long-press operation, a new specific effect (post-operation effect) is not generated at the time of the detection, and the operation state is already in the execution state. The process (the process of generating a specific effect each time a predetermined time elapses) is continued. Then, even after that, when the operation state is maintained when the predetermined time based on the previous specific effect has elapsed (in the case of long-pressing operation), the process that is already in the execution state (specific effect for the predetermined time Since the processing to be generated each time the time elapses) is further continued, the automatic button performance state is ended while the operation system performance in the execution state is favorably continued from the time when the automatic button performance state is in effect. It becomes possible to shift to a state in which an operation system effect is performed by the operation by, and thereby, it is expected that the player's consciousness of participation will be increased.

[Setting process for automatic button production state according to production pattern type]
As described above, in the automatic button production state (specific production state), operation by the player within the production reception period (the first specific effective period or the second specific effective period when the above-mentioned another example is applied) Even if is not performed, the process (automatic effect function) that causes the same change as when the operation is performed may be executable. Also, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, even when the symbol variation is being executed, by operating a predetermined operating means (for example, the operating button 410). It is possible to set or release the automatic button production state, and by simplifying such operations, you can set or release the automatic button production state while keeping a close watch on the production progress during symbol changes. I am able to do it.

However, if the setting or cancellation related to the automatic button effect state is made during the execution period of the symbol variation, the processing load increases due to the setting change that was not supposed at the start of the symbol variation, and at the start of the symbol variation. There is concern that it may adversely affect the decided performance development. In this regard, as the types of the "effect pattern to be executed based on the result of the big hit determination", at least "the first effect pattern in which the specific effect acceptance period in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears can be set" and "the operation The second effect pattern in which the specific effect acceptance period in which the prompting instruction appears appears cannot be set. Therefore, depending on the type of effect pattern, the setting or cancellation of the automatic button effect state is not always executed promptly. In some cases, no problem may occur. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, depending on which of the first effect pattern and the second effect pattern is in the execution state, when the symbol variation is in the execution period. By making the setting related to the automatic button effect state and the processing mode related to the release different, it is possible to suppress an increase in the processing load during the execution period of the symbol variation.

FIG. 367 is a pattern variation in “first effect pattern in which a specific effect acceptance period in which an instruction display prompting an operation appears can be set” when the automatic button effect state is controlled and the number of holdings is three. Is a time chart showing a processing example when an operation for releasing the automatic button effect state (release operation) or an operation for setting (setting operation) is performed within the execution period of the symbol variation. .. It should be noted that the first effect pattern may be either a hit variation or a loss variation.

As shown in FIG. 367, when the automatic button production state is being controlled and the number of holdings is three in the production situation, “a specific production reception period in which an instruction display prompting an operation appears can be set. It is assumed that the pattern variation is started in the "production pattern". Then, although it is during the execution period of the symbol variation, the production progress as the first production pattern is performed in the state where the automatic button production state can be released (the state where the release operation is allowed). ..

Then, in this effect example, it is assumed that the release operation by the player is detected at the timing td11 shown in the figure, and the setting of the automatic button effect state is released based on the detection of the release operation. It will be (finished). As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the setting cancellation of the automatic button effect state during the pattern change is executed based on the fact that the operation button 410 is detected to be in the operation state. To be done.

Further, in this effect example, after the setting of the automatic button effect state is canceled in this way, at the timing td12 within the specific effect acceptance period shown in the drawing, the operation on the operation button 410 (the operation button 410 is in the operation state). ) Is detected. When the operation on the operation button 410 is detected within the specific effect reception period, the effect reception is performed, the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception is executed, and the specific effect reception period ends without exhausting the remaining time. Will be done. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in the specific effect reception period when the automatic button effect state is not set, effect reception is performed when the operation button 410 is operated, It is not accepted as a setting operation for the automatic button rendering state. On the other hand, during the specific effect reception period when the automatic button effect state is set, when the operation button 410 is operated, the effect acceptance is performed and the post-operation effect is executed, and the automatic button effect state is released. It is also accepted as an operation, and the setting of the automatic button effect state is canceled (finished).

Furthermore, in this effect example, it is assumed that a setting operation by the player is detected at timing td13 shown in the figure after the specific effect reception period is ended in this way, although the symbols are changing. The automatic button effect state is set based on the detection of the setting operation. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the setting of the automatic button effect state during the change of the symbol is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) in the operation state of the operation button 410. When it is detected, it will be executed. However, instead of this, the setting of the automatic button effect state during the change of the symbol may also be executed based on the fact that the operation button 410 has been detected to be in the operation state.

Then, in this effect example, when the symbol variation is stopped after the automatic button effect state is set, the hold state is set after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) after the symbol variation is stopped. The next pattern change is being digested (start of change). Then, in the period in which the next symbol variation is being executed, the production progress is made in the state set in the automatic button production state unless the player performs the release operation.

As described above, in the effect example shown in FIG. 367, in the state where the automatic button effect state is not controlled and the first effect pattern is being executed, the specific effect during the period in which the first effect pattern is executed When the operation button 410 is operated when the acceptance period is not set, the control to the automatic button effect state can be executed while the first effect pattern is in the executing state. According to such a configuration, it is assumed that the symbol variation has started in the "first effect pattern in which the specific effect acceptance period in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears can be set" under the control of the automatic button effect state. Also, by performing the release operation before the specific effect reception period occurs, it is possible to cause the specific effect reception period to be generated in the state where the automatic button effect state is released, and the player operates it himself. It becomes possible to favorably maintain the interest of the game when the desire to do so arises. In the example production shown in FIG. 367, it is assumed that the release operation is received before the specific production reception period starts, but the release operation is performed after the specific production reception period ends. It is also possible to end the automatic button effect state within the period of one effect pattern.

Further, according to the above configuration, during the period in which the symbol variation is being executed in the “first effect pattern in which the specific effect acceptance period in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears can be set”, the setting operation to the automatic button effect state Is also allowed. In the effect example shown in FIG. 367, it is assumed that the setting operation is accepted after the specific effect acceptance period ends, but the setting operation by the player within a period before the specific effect acceptance period starts. Even when the setting is performed, the setting operation is accepted. Therefore, when the design variation is started in the "first effect pattern in which the instruction display for prompting the operation to appear can be set in the first effect pattern in which the instruction display that prompts the operation is set" in the state where the automatic button effect state is not controlled, the specific effect acceptance period occurs. By performing an operation on the operation button 410 so that the setting operation to the automatic button effect state is detected in a period earlier than that, the specific effect acceptance period is generated in the state set to the automatic button effect state. This is also possible, and it becomes possible to appropriately maintain the interest of the game when the user wants to enjoy the post-operation performance by the automatic performance function.

In addition, in order to obtain such an effect, when the first effect pattern is selected at the start of the symbol variation, any effect determination result regarding the effect (lottery) on the effect content in the first effect pattern Even when the above is obtained, it is desirable to always generate this during the specific effect reception period. Further, the specific effect display is allowed to appear within the period of the symbol change, and when the specific effect display appears, the specific effect acceptance period is always generated until the symbol change in the execution state is ended. It is desirable to make the production progress. According to these configurations, by confirming the effect contents that appear within the execution period of the symbol variation, it becomes possible to recognize that the specific effect reception period occurs, and until the specific effect reception period occurs. It becomes possible to select whether to release or set the automatic button performance state.

Further, at this time, with respect to the specific effect display, it is possible to make a suggestion as to whether or not the post-operation effect is likely to be performed in a mode with high expectation when the effect is received within the specific effect reception period. If it is carried out by any one of a plurality of modes, it is expected that it will be used for the judgment regarding the selection as to whether to cancel or set the automatic button effect state.

Furthermore, regarding the specific effect display, at least a first specific effect display and a second specific effect display are provided, and when the first specific effect display appears, the first specific effect display appears. Although it is permissible to set (or cancel) the automatic button effect state by the operation of the player from the beginning to the occurrence of the specific effect acceptance period, when the second specific effect display appears, If the setting (or cancellation) to the automatic button effect state by the operation of the player is not allowed between the appearance of the second specific effect display and the occurrence of the specific effect acceptance period, the specific effect It becomes possible to preferably maintain the interest of the game from the appearance of the display to the occurrence of the specific effect reception period.

FIG. 368 shows that when the automatic button production state is controlled and the number of holdings is three, the second production pattern (deformation variation in which the specific production reception period in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears cannot be set is displayed. )”, the symbol variation is started, and an example of processing when an operation for releasing the automatic button effect state (release operation) or an operation for setting (setting operation) is performed within the execution period of the symbol variation It is a time chart shown.

As shown in FIG. 368, when the automatic button production state is being controlled and the number of holdings is three in the production situation, “a specific production reception period in which an instruction display prompting an operation appears cannot be set. It is assumed that the pattern variation is started in the "2 production pattern". Then, also in this effect example, as in the case shown in FIG. 367, although the symbol variation is in the execution period, the automatic button effect state can be released (the release operation is allowed). The production progress as the second production pattern is performed.

Then, in this effect example, it is assumed that the release operation by the player is detected at the timing td21 shown in the figure, and the setting of the automatic button effect state is released based on the detection of the release operation. It will be (finished). As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the setting cancellation of the automatic button effect state during the pattern change is executed based on the fact that the operation button 410 is detected to be in the operation state. To be done.

That is, it seems that there is little merit to end the automatic button production state when the second production pattern in which the specific production reception period is not set is in the execution state. When it appears, usually, when the symbol variation in the reserved state is exhausted, there is a high possibility that the "first effect pattern in which the specific effect acceptance period is set" appears. At this time, there may be a desire to return to the normal effect mode in which the effect can be advanced depending on the player's own operation (a desire to end a specific effect state).

In this respect, according to the above configuration, not only during the period in which the first effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period is set is being executed but also in the period in which the second effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period is not set is being executed. Also, the automatic button effect state can be ended by an operation by the player. Therefore, when the "first effect pattern for which the specific effect acceptance period is set" is still in the hold state, the automatic button effect state can be ended in advance, whereby "in the first effect pattern" The situation in which the automatic button effect state is terminated immediately before the specific effect reception period is set, and the operation means (operation button 410) must be operated without hesitation” can be avoided.

Furthermore, in the effect example shown in FIG. 368, it is assumed that the player performs the setting operation at the timing td23 shown in the figure after the automatic button effect state is released from the setting. However, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, when the second effect pattern is not being controlled to the automatic button effect state and the specific effect acceptance period is not set, it is during the period Even if an operation is performed by the player (even if the operation button 410 is changed from the original position to the operation state and the operation state is maintained for a predetermined time (here, 2 seconds)), at least the second effect pattern. The setting operation by the player is not accepted (the setting to the automatic button effect state is not performed) within the period in which is executed. Note that, instead of this, even when the setting to the automatic button effect state during the change of the symbol is executed based on the fact that the operation button 410 is detected to be in the operation state, The setting operation by the player is not accepted during the period in which the second effect pattern is being executed.

That is, even if the "setting from the normal effect state to the automatic button effect state" is performed immediately before the specific effect reception period occurs, no operation needs to be performed within the specific effect reception period. In addition, even if the operation is performed, the effect reception is performed and the post-operation effect is executed. In view of such a fact, during the period when the second effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period is not set is being executed, it is not necessary to promptly set the automatic button effect state even if the setting operation is performed. However, it is considered that no problem will occur if the setting for the automatic button effect state is made by the time the specific effect acceptance period that may occur after the next symbol variation is exhausted is started.

In this regard, in the effect example shown in FIG. 368, during the period in which the second effect pattern (miss variation) in which the specific effect reception period is not set is being executed, the setting operation is performed by the player within the period. Even so, until the period ends (while the symbol variation is being executed), the automatic button effect state is not set, and the symbol variation according to the second effect pattern is terminated and the symbol is stopped (loose). When the symbol is stopped (timing td24 in the figure), the automatic button effect state is set based on the setting operation. Thus, within the period in which the symbol variation of the second effect pattern is being executed, the setting to the automatic button effect state is not permitted even if the player performs an operation, and the timing of the setting is changed to the symbol. Since it is carried over after it is stopped, the processing load increases due to the setting change related to the effect state that was not decided at the start of the fluctuation of the symbol (due to the operation by the player) during the execution of the symbol fluctuation. Such a situation can be suitably suppressed.

Then, in the effect example shown in FIG. 368, when a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses after the symbol variation is stopped, the automatic button effect state is set and the hold state is set. The next pattern change that was there is to be digested (change start). Then, in the period in which the next symbol variation is being executed, the production progress is made in the state set in the automatic button production state unless the player performs the release operation.

As described above, in the effect example shown in FIG. 368, in a state where the second effect pattern is not being controlled in the automatic button effect state and the second effect pattern is being executed, Regardless of which timing the operation button 410 is operated, control to the automatic button effect state is not executed while the second effect pattern is in the execution state, and the second effect pattern ends. After that, the control to the automatic button presentation state can be executed. As a result, it is possible to preferably prevent the processing load from increasing due to a change in the setting related to the effect state that has not been determined at the start of the symbol variation (due to the operation by the player) during the symbol variation. Like

In the effect example shown in FIG. 368, it is assumed that after the symbol variation of the second effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period is not set is stopped, the next symbol variation in the hold state is started. However, when the symbol variation of the second effect pattern is stopped (missing symbol stop), even if the next symbol variation is not in the hold state, the automatic button is in the state of symbol stop (missing symbol stop). It will be set to the rendering state.

In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 368, when the player performs the setting operation within the period in which the second effect pattern (displacement variation) in which the specific effect acceptance period is not set is executed, the second effect pattern is generated. Although the setting to the automatic button effect state is made when the symbol variation is stopped, the present invention is not limited to this, and the point is that the automatic button within the period in which the second effect pattern is executed. It does not allow the setting to the effect state, and the timing to be set may be carried over after the symbol is stopped. For example, it is desirable that the automatic button performance state is set when the symbol is stopped (missing symbol is stopped) or within the period when the next symbol variation is being executed. That is, at the time when the next symbol variation is started, if the production situation is such that "the setting change related to the production state is determined to be made within the symbol variation", the production is performed according to the determined schedule. Since it is sufficient to make progress, it is possible to preferably avoid that the processing load increases due to an unintended state change during the execution of the symbol variation.

In this case, even when the next symbol change is executed as the second effect pattern (the same effect pattern as the last time), when the symbol is stopped (missing symbol stop), or the next symbol change is executed. It is desirable that the automatic button performance state is set within the period of time. According to such a configuration, when the player performs the setting operation within the period in which the symbol variation is executed in the second effect pattern, it is determined which of the effect patterns the next symbol fluctuation is executed in. Without carrying out, it is possible to carry over the timing of setting to the automatic button effect state after the symbol is stopped.

Further, when the operation button 410 is in the operating state within the period in which the second effect pattern is being executed to set the automatic button effect state, at least a predetermined time has elapsed since the second effect pattern was ended. The automatic button presentation state may be set only after that. That is, in this case, when the second effect pattern is finished while the next symbol variation is in the hold state, the automatic symbol effect state is set within the execution period of the next symbol variation, but the next symbol variation is performed. When the second effect pattern is finished in the state where is not in the hold state, the automatic button effect state can be set when the symbol is stopped (missing symbol stop).

In addition to the "second effect pattern (miss variation) in which the specific effect acceptance period in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears cannot be set", "the specific effect acceptance period in which the instruction display instructing the operation appears cannot be set" 3 effect pattern (winning variation)" is further prepared, and when the player performs the setting operation within the period in which the symbol variation is being executed in the third effect pattern, the state of the symbol stop or the execution period of the big hit game You may make it set to the automatic button production state in the inside.

[Prohibition period for setting the automatic button performance state]
As described above, in the automatic button production state (specific production state), operation by the player within the production reception period (the first specific effective period or the second specific effective period when the above-mentioned another example is applied) Even if is not performed, the process (automatic effect function) that causes the same change as when the operation is performed may be executable. Also, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, even when the symbol variation is being executed, by operating a predetermined operating means (for example, the operating button 410). Settings related to the automatic button performance state can be made, and by simplifying such operations, it is possible to perform settings related to the automatic button performance state while keeping a close watch on the development progress during symbol changes. ing.

However, including the setting process to such an automatic button effect state, if the specific process related to the effect such as effect setting is allowed by the operation of the player at any time during the execution period of the symbol variation, the feeling of tension will be increased. There is a possibility that the fun of playing games may be deteriorated due to the lack of performance. Therefore, in the period in which the symbol variation according to the result of the big hit determination is executed, at least when the specific effect reception period does not occur, the specific process related to the effect such as effect setting by the operation by the player is performed. In the permissible gaming machine, it is desirable that a prohibition period in which the specific process related to the above-mentioned production is not permitted can be started between the start of the symbol variation and the generation of the specific production reception period. That is, in this case, there is a concern that a prohibition period will occur, so that even in a state in which a specific effect reception period has not occurred, the operating means (operation button 410, etc.) is generated while the prohibition period has not occurred. ), it becomes necessary to maintain the player's consciousness of participation in the game and the effect.

Hereinafter, a description will be given in detail of an example of an effect in which the "setting process to the automatic button effect state" is adopted as the "specific process related to the effect", but the "specific process related to the effect" is not limited to this and, for example, an effect mode ( It may be applied as another process such as a process of changing the effect mode in which the first character is the main character) to another effect mode (effect mode in which the second character is the main character).

In FIG. 369, when the automatic button production state is not controlled, the symbol variation is started in the “third production pattern in which a specific production reception period (specific effective period) in which an instruction display prompting an operation appears can be set”, and the symbol is changed. FIG. 370 is a time chart showing a processing example when an operation for setting to the automatic button effect state is performed within the variation execution period, and FIG. 370 is an effect example when effect production is advanced in the third effect pattern. FIG. It should be noted that the third effect pattern may be either a hit variation or a loss variation, and may be the same as the above-described first effect pattern.

As shown in FIG. 369 and FIG. 370(a), when the production state is not controlled to the automatic button production state, “a specific production reception period in which an instruction display prompting an operation appears can be set. It is assumed that the pattern variation is started in the "pattern". Then, during the execution period of the symbol variation, the production progress as the third production pattern is performed in the state where the automatic button production state can be set (the state where the setting operation is allowed). ..

However, in this production example, when the symbol variation is performed in the “third production pattern in which the specific production reception period in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears can be set”, the timing te11 (before the specific production reception period occurs) In FIG. 369), the operation reception itself for setting to the automatic button effect state or the prohibited period in which the setting process to the automatic button effect state is not permitted is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 370(b), in this prohibition period, a specific effect (prohibited image) that can appear only when the prohibition period occurs is displayed. Note that in the specific effect (prohibited image) shown in FIG. 370(b), an image in which a chain is attached to a padlock is displayed and a character such as "auto setting disabled" is displayed as a button lock effect. Has been done.

The prohibition period thus generated is ended when the timing te12 after the first specific time (for example, 25 seconds) has passed from the timing te11. However, no matter how many operations (operations on the operation button 410) are performed before the timing te12 arrives, as shown in FIGS. 370(c) and 370(d), the specific effect (prohibited image) ), so that no change will occur.

When the prohibition period ends at timing te12, the specific effect (inhibited image) is hidden, and the state is returned to a state in which the setting process to the automatic button effect state is allowed. Then, after that, when the above-mentioned "precursor effect" or "specific operation-related effect" is performed (see FIG. 370(e)), a specific effect reception period in which an instruction display prompting an operation appears at timing te13. ((See FIG. 370(f))). Note that, in the example shown in FIG. 370(f), although it is set as the effect reception period in which the operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001, the effect reception in which the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 is set. It may be set as a period.

In this regard, in the example productions shown in FIGS. 369 and 370(f), the specific effect reception period occurs in a state where the automatic button effect state is not set, so that the specific effect reception period The above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function at a specific timing. However, even in the case where the “third effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears can be set” is executed in the effect situation shown in FIG. 369, it is before the prohibition period is started. If the automatic button production state is set to, the specific production reception period can be generated in the state where the automatic button production state is set. In this case, the specific production reception period is generated. It becomes possible to operate the above-mentioned automatic effect function at a specific timing within the reception period.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the setting of the automatic button effect state during the change of the symbol is not the timing at which the operation button 410 is in the operation state, but the operation button 410 is in the operation state. It may be executed when it is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds). However, in this case, when the operation button 410 is operated and maintained for 2 seconds within the period of less than 2 seconds before the timing te11 shown in FIG. 369 arrives, the timing te11 is generated and thereafter. Therefore, setting to the automatic button presentation state can be permitted. Therefore, the specific effect (inhibited image) is not generated at the timing te11 at which the prohibited period is started as in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 369, but is generated at a timing later than the timing te11. Is desirable.

371 and 372 are diagrams showing a modified example of the prohibition period (here, the prohibition period related to the setting of the automatic button effect state) concerning the "specific processing relating to the effect such as effect setting".

That is, as described above, in the effect example described above with reference to FIGS. 369 and 370, when the prohibition period occurs at the timing te11 (see FIG. 369), the first specific time (eg 25 No matter how many operations (operations on the operation button 410) are performed until the end of this after the lapse of seconds, the setting operation cannot be accepted and the specific effect (prohibited image) is displayed. Is designed to make no changes.

However, in the following modified example described in detail with reference to FIGS. 371 and 372, the prohibition period is “one that requires the first specific time (for example, 25 seconds) from the occurrence to the end”. However, if a second specific time (for example, 10 seconds) shorter than the first specific time elapses after the prohibition period occurs, a player operation (operation button) for ending the prohibition period early. This is different from the above-described effect example described in detail with reference to FIG. 369 and FIG. 370 in that processing capable of allowing (operation for 410) is executable.

That is, as shown in FIG. 371 and FIG. 372(a), when the player is currently in an effect state where the automatic button effect state is not controlled, “a specific effect acceptance period in which an instruction display prompting an operation appears can be set. It is assumed that the pattern variation is started in "3 effect patterns". Then, in this modified example as well, during the execution period of the symbol variation, the production progress as the third production pattern in the state where the automatic button production state can be set (the setting operation is allowed). Will be done.

Further, at the timing te11 (see FIG. 371) before the specific effect reception period occurs, the operation reception itself for setting to the automatic button effect state or the setting process to the automatic button effect state is allowed. 369 and the figure that a prohibited effect period that is not performed is started and a specific effect (image during prohibition) that can appear only when the prohibited period occurs is displayed in the prohibited period. This is the same as the effect example described with reference to 370.

However, in this modified example, as shown in FIG. 371, in the prohibited period, a period from the timing te11 until the arrival of the timing te11a after the elapse of the second specific time (for example, 10 seconds) (period in which cancellation is not possible). Then, no matter how much operation (operation on the operation button 410) is performed within the period, no change occurs in the specific effect (inhibited image) (see FIG. 372(c). In the period from the timing te11a to the timing te12 (the timing when the first specific time (for example, 25 seconds) elapses after the prohibition period has occurred) arrives (the period in which cancellation is permitted), the operation by the player is performed. When the (operation on the operation button 410) is performed, it is possible to execute a process in which the prohibition period can be ended early.

More specifically, when the timing te11a arrives and the prohibited period becomes a state in which it can be ended early by an operation by the player (operation on the operation button 410), first, the timing te11a arrives in the effect display device 1600. The special image that has not appeared in the period up to (the period that cannot be canceled) is displayed. In this modification, as shown in FIG. 372(d), the image NJG indicating the remaining time as the prohibition period is displayed as the special image.

That is, in the prohibited period according to this modification, such an image NJG appears when the timing te11a arrives (see FIG. 372(d)), so that the prohibited period cannot be released ( It becomes possible to suggest that the transition from the timings te11 to te11a) to the period (timings te11a to te12) in which the cancellation of the prohibition period is permitted is performed, and thus, the prohibition period is shown in the remaining time. Can be made to function as an effect as to whether or not to end early.

Then, when the first operation (operation on the operation button 410) is performed within the prohibition period during which the prohibition period is permitted to be released (timing te11a to te12), the operation button 410 enters the operation state. Based on the fact, a process for ending the prohibition period early is executed. Thus, after the first operation (operation of the operation button 410) is performed, the setting operation by the player can be accepted even if the timing te12 has not arrived yet.

Here, in this modification, when the prohibition period is early ended by the player's first operation (operation of the operation button 410), the effect display device 1600 also changes the effect based on the first operation. The process that causes In this modified example, as shown in FIG. 372(e), the effect is changed by destroying the image in which the chain is attached to the padlock and displaying the characters "release successful". As a result, the specific effect (prohibited image) is also hidden before the timing te12 arrives.

Then, in the state in which the prohibition period is ended early in this way, when the second operation (operation on the operation button 410) is performed within the period before the timing te12 arrives, as shown in FIG. When the second operation is performed (here, the operation state is maintained for 2 seconds), the setting process to the automatic button effect state can be performed. In this case, in the effect display device 1600, a display (here, “auto button setting is in progress”) that accompanies the effect setting is made to appear.

Then, after that, when the above-mentioned "predictive effect" or "specific operation-related effect" is performed (see FIG. 372(f)), at timing te13, a specific effect reception period in which an instruction display prompting an operation appears appears. ((See FIG. 372(g))). Note that, in the example shown in FIG. 372(g), the production reception period in which the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001 is set, but the production reception in which the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 is set. It may be set as a period.

In this regard, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 371 and 372 (g), the specific effect reception period is generated in the state where the automatic button effect state is set, so that the specific effect reception period If no operation is performed by the player before the arrival of the specific timing, the above-mentioned automatic effect function will function. However, even in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 371 and 372 (g), the first invalid operation is performed by performing the first operation within the period (timing te11a to te12) in which the cancellation of the invalid period is permitted. In the case of the effect example shown in FIGS. 369 and 370(f), unless the setting processing to the automatic button effect state is performed by performing the early operation and performing the second operation in the early terminated state. It goes without saying that the same production situation will appear.

In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 369 to 372, the specific effect reception period is generated after a predetermined time has elapsed after the “prohibition period in which the setting process to the automatic button effect state is not allowed” is ended. The specific effect reception period may be generated immediately (in connection with the prohibition period) immediately after the “prohibition period in which the setting process to the automatic button effect state is not permitted” is ended. That is, in this case, if the prohibition period occurs when the automatic button performance state is not controlled, the specific performance acceptance period occurs while the setting opportunity for the automatic button performance state remains in the prohibited state. It becomes possible to raise the player's consciousness of participation when the production reception period has not occurred.

In the example productions shown in FIGS. 369 to 372, in the “prohibition period in which the setting process to the automatic button production state is not allowed”, when the production reception is made within the specific production reception period that occurs thereafter. As the post-operation effect, any of a plurality of effect modes in which a ratio of a relatively high expected effect mode appears, a ratio of a big hit symbol that appears due to a symbol variation in the execution state, and the like may be made to appear.

Further, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 371 and 372, based on the result of the big hit determination,
-In the third state in which the effect image of FIG. 372(e) appears, a plurality of third effect modes (for example, "padlock") in which the proportions (expectations) of the jackpot symbols appearing due to changes in the symbols in the execution state are different Any of a plurality of presentation modes in which the degree of destruction of the image with the chain attached to each other is different"),
When in the second state in which the effect image in FIG. 372(d) appears, when the third state is reached, a "specific third effect mode (a plurality of third effect modes" is selected from among a plurality of third effect modes. Among a plurality of modes, a plurality of second effect modes (for example, “a plurality of effect modes with different colors of the image NJG”) having different ratios (expectations) of the “most advantageous third effect mode” to the player appear. Make one appear,
When in the first state in which the effect images of FIGS. 372 (b) and (c) appear, when the second state is reached, a "specific second effect mode (plurality of plural second effect modes Of the second effect modes of "the second effect mode that is most advantageous to the player", a plurality of first effect modes (for example, "a plurality of effect modes having different background image colors") having different rates (expectations). It is desirable to execute a process such as causing any one of ". According to such a configuration, while the production is advanced within the prohibited period or the processing for ending the prohibited period early is executed, the expectations can be suggested stepwise by the related productions. Therefore, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game during the prohibition period can be favorably maintained and that the participation of the player is enhanced by promptly ending the prohibition period early. In this sense, the first effect mode and the second effect mode are executed as effects in which the movable ornament cannot move, and only the third effect mode that directly leads to the early end of the prohibition period can be moved in a predetermined manner. It is desirable to be able to be executed as a presentation mode for operating the decorative body. A predetermined movable decoration body is operated when a specific third effect mode appears among a plurality of third effect modes, and a predetermined movable decoration is activated when a third effect mode different from the specific third effect mode appears. The body may not move.

In addition, regarding the effects illustrated in FIGS. 370(e) and (f) and FIGS. 372(f) and (g), the operation button 410 of the plurality of operation means (the operation button 410, the sword ornament 5001 and the like) is used. The above-mentioned effect (specific operation) as to whether a period during which the operation can receive the effect occurs or a period during which the operation on another operation means (for example, the sword decoration 5001) can be accepted It may be executed as a related effect (see FIGS. 330 to 350)).

Further, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 369 to 372, it has been described that the specific effect reception period is always generated after the “prohibition period in which the setting process to the automatic button effect state is not permitted” is generated. However, it is not always necessary to generate the specific effect reception period, and after the "prohibition period in which the setting process to the automatic button effect state is not allowed" is generated, the symbol variation stops without the specific effect reception period occurring. You may make it prepare the production pattern which can be performed.

Further, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 369 to 372, for the “prohibited period in which the setting process to the automatic button effect state is not allowed”, an effect pattern with a relatively low jackpot expectation degree (for example, super reach status). It is desirable that the appearance ratio of the effect pattern (for example, the effect pattern in which the super reach state occurs) having a relatively high jackpot expectation is higher than that of the effect pattern in which the occurrence does not occur. That is, in this case, despite the appearance pattern having a relatively high jackpot expectation degree, the opportunity to execute the setting process to the automatic button effect state for a predetermined period will be forcibly lost. It becomes possible to encourage the player to participate in the operation, and it is expected that the player's consciousness of getting a big hit increases.

However, if the setting process to the automatic button effect state is completely prohibited for a predetermined period, it becomes inevitable that the player who desires to generate the automatic button effect state is less entertaining. As shown, after a certain amount of time has passed, the player can release the prohibited period early, and when it is released, the setting operation by the player to the automatic button effect state is returned to the state where it is allowed again. Is desirable.

Regarding the setting operation to the automatic button effect state, the operation target set by the operation by the player may be the operation button 410, a touch panel, a sword ornament 5001, a cross key, or other operation means. In addition, the prohibition period may be ended early by operating an operation target different from the operation target used when setting the automatic button effect state, or when setting the automatic button effect state. The prohibition period may be ended early by operating the operation target used. However, when the prohibition period is ended early by operating the operation target used when setting to the automatic button effect state, the operation mode (single press, long press, etc.) should be different from each other. Is desirable.

Note that, as described above, in FIGS. 369 to 372, the example of the effect in which the “setting process for the automatic button effect state” is adopted as the “specific process related to effect” is shown. Not limited to However, with regard to the "specific processing relating to the effect", even if the symbol variation is performed in any type as an effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination, within the execution period of the symbol variation, the operation means is operated. It is desirable that it can be executed by an operation.

[Automatic production function for movable operation means]
As described above, in the automatic button production state (specific production state), operation by the player within the production reception period (the first specific effective period or the second specific effective period when the above-mentioned another example is applied) Even if is not performed, the process (automatic effect function) that causes the same change as when the operation is performed may be executable. Also, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, even when the symbol variation is being executed, by operating a predetermined operating means (for example, the operating button 410). Settings related to the automatic button performance state can be made, and by simplifying such operations, it is possible to perform settings related to the automatic button performance state while keeping a close watch on the development progress during symbol changes. ing.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, a movable operation is provided as an operation unit in addition to the operation button 410 so as to be operable by a predetermined driving force between the original position and the operation position. A means (here, sword decoration 5001) is provided, and in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), by the player within the effect acceptance period for the movable operation means (here, sword effect object 5001). Even when the operation is not performed, the process (automatic effect function) that causes the same change as that when the operation is performed can be executed.

By the way, when the effect reception period for such movable operation means (here, the sword decoration 5001) occurs, as shown in FIG. There is a case in which the player is given an operation opportunity to move the movable operation means in the moved state from the first to the operation position. In this operation opportunity, the effect reception may be performed by an operation of moving the operation position to a position different from the original position, instead of the operation of returning the operation position to the original position.

However, when such an effect reception period occurs, there is a possibility that some abnormality/failure has occurred in the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration 5001), which causes the movable operation means (here, If the sword ornament 5001) cannot be driven from the original position to the operation position in some cases, the operation opportunity as shown in FIG. 293 (G2) cannot be properly given, and the production reception is not possible. There is a concern that the corresponding post-operation performance may not occur. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, some abnormality/failure has occurred in the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration 5001), which causes the movable operation means (here, Even when the sword ornament 5001) cannot be driven from the original position to the operation position and the effect reception period as shown in FIG. 293 (G2) occurs, the sword decoration 5001) is controlled to the automatic button effect state. During the production, a process (automatic production function) that causes the same change as when the specific operation by the player from the operation position is detected within the production reception period can be executed. ..

According to such a configuration, even if the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration 5001) becomes inoperable due to some abnormality or failure, the movable operation means can be moved by using the automatic effect function. The post-operation effect using the operation means can be appropriately made to appear.

However, when the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration 5001) is in a state in which it cannot operate due to some abnormality/fault, the operation itself for the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration 5001) itself is performed. In a difficult situation, if the operation of the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration 5001) is required to set the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the automatic button It is not possible to set to the effect state (specific effect state), and eventually the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect acceptance for the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001) cannot occur.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, first, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the operation button 410 and the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001) are used. No matter which one of the production reception periods occurs, the same production change as when the operation means (here, the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001) on which the operation opportunity is given is operated. It is possible to execute processing (automatic production function). Then, on this, setting to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) can be performed only by operating the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001). It is supposed to be.

That is, in this case, not only the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration 5001) on the side that may become inoperable when an abnormality or a failure occurs, but only by operating the general push-down operation button 410, It is possible to generate an automatic button effect state (a specific effect state) corresponding to both the operation button 410 and the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration 5001). Therefore, even if the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration 5001) is abnormal or malfunctions during the execution of the symbol variation, the operation button 410 is operated to set the automatic button effect state (specific effect state). By doing so, it becomes possible to properly generate post-operation effects corresponding to the effect reception for the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration 5001).

In order to appropriately secure the operability at the time of such an abnormality/failure, regarding the operation means (here, the operation button 410) used for the setting operation to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state). It is important that it is provided as an operating means that is basically non-driven (to the extent that it vibrates even if there is a drive system) so that it will not be subject to the above-mentioned restoration processing in the event of an abnormality or failure. I can say.

However, even if the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) has an abnormality/failure, as long as the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) maintains the stopped state, the abnormality/failure occurs. Since it is difficult for the player to recognize that the state is in the state, it cannot be expected that the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is set.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001) has an abnormality/failure at the start timing (or the end timing) of the symbol variation. A restoring process for returning the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration 5001) to the normal state (home position) is executed. It should be noted that the restoration process can be executed as the above-mentioned processing contents, and for example, a restoration operation (an operation for 5 seconds) for returning the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration 5001) to the original position is performed. , Is repeatedly executed up to a predetermined number of times (for example, three times) as an upper limit until the original position is properly returned.

According to such a configuration, the movable operation is confirmed by confirming that the restoration process is started for the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration 5001) at the start timing (or the end timing) of the symbol variation. The player can recognize that the means (here, the sword decoration 5001) is in a state of abnormality/failure. Furthermore, by confirming whether or not the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration 5001) has been properly returned to the original position as a result of the execution of the restoration process, the movable operation means (here, the sword). The player side determines whether the state in which the abnormality/fault has occurred by successful restoration processing for the ornament 5001) has been resolved, or whether the state in which the restoration process has failed and the abnormality/fault has continued is continued. You will be able to recognize. That is, in this case, when the player side recognizes that the state in which the restoration process has failed and the abnormality/fault is continuing continues to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) by operation on the operation button 410. By performing the setting for the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001), even if the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) is in a state of abnormality or failure, The post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception can be appropriately generated.

However, after confirming that the restoration process for the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration 5001) in the abnormal/fault state has failed, the setting operation to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is performed. Even if it is performed, a performance acceptance period for the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration 5001) may occur before the automatic button production state occurs (for example, during the restoration process execution period). If so, there is a concern that the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception for the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration 5001) cannot be properly generated.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a plurality of special effect reception periods may be further generated in which an operation opportunity is given to the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration 5001). No matter which of the effect patterns is selected and executed based on the result of the jackpot determination, the maximum time required for the restoration process for the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration 5001) (the restoration operation (5 (Time when operation for 2 seconds) is repeated up to the upper limit number of times (for example, 3 times), and addition time of time (here 2 seconds) required for setting operation to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) It is possible to execute a process for advancing the production so that the special production reception period is generated only after the elapse.

According to such a configuration, when the symbol variation is started in the effect pattern that can generate the special effect reception period in which the operation opportunity is given to the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001), the movable operation is performed. Even if the means (here, the sword decoration 5001) has an abnormality or a failure, the player recognizes that the abnormality or the failure has occurred before the special effect reception period occurs. However, since it becomes possible to perform the setting operation to the automatic button performance state (specific performance state), the post-operation performance according to the performance reception for the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration 5001) is appropriate. Will be able to be generated. That is, in the automatic button production state (specific production state), even if the special production reception period occurs in a state where the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration 5001) is abnormal/failed, the special production is performed. In the reception period, the same change as when the operation on the movable operation means is performed is made to the effect.

FIG. 373 is a time chart showing an example of such an effect process.

As shown in FIG. 373, in the example relating to this effect processing, when an abnormality/failure occurs in the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration 5001), the movable operation means (here Then, the restoration process for returning the sword ornament 5001) to the normal state is executed for up to 15 seconds. Further, it takes 2 seconds to perform the setting operation to the automatic button effect state. Further, the special effect reception period can be continued for a maximum of 3 seconds, and the post-operation effect corresponding to the operation of the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration 5001) is accepted. It takes 10 seconds.

Considering such time setting values, first, as an effect pattern (variation pattern) capable of generating the special effect reception period, 15 seconds (restoration processing), 2 seconds (setting operation), 3 seconds (special effect reception A time period longer than "30 seconds", which is the sum of the period) and 10 seconds (effect after operation), is allocated, and 15 seconds (restoration process) and 2 seconds (setting operation) are added. Unless the production is advanced so as to generate the special production reception period at a timing later than “second”, the pattern variation in the state where the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration 5001) has an abnormality/fault ( It is not possible to secure the above-described performance when a performance pattern that can generate a special performance reception period) is started.

Therefore, in the figure, as a plurality of effect patterns that can be selected based on the result of the big hit determination, effect patterns A to E to which different times (11 to 60 seconds of symbol variation time) are respectively assigned are illustrated. However, in the effect patterns A to C to which only the time shorter than the above-mentioned additional time “30 seconds” is allocated, only the effect progress in which the special effect reception period cannot occur is executed. .. On the other hand, in the effect patterns D and E to which a time longer than the above-mentioned addition time “30 seconds” is allocated, the special effect reception period can be generated, but the symbol variation is started. Since the special effect reception period cannot occur at a timing before “17 seconds (addition time of 15 seconds (restoration process) and 2 seconds (setting operation))”, In order to secure the above-mentioned performance when the pattern variation (production pattern that can generate the special production reception period) is started in a state where the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration 5001) is abnormal/failed. I have to.

In the example of this effect process, the special effect reception period can be generated in all of the plurality of effect patterns to which a time longer than the above-mentioned addition time “30 seconds” is assigned. The special effect reception period may be generated only in a part of a plurality of effect patterns to which a time longer than “30 seconds” is assigned.

However, in reality, if the special effect reception period occurs immediately after the addition time of 15 seconds (restoration processing) and 2 seconds (setting operation) has elapsed since the symbol variation started, the restoration processing fails. If the user does not perform the setting operation to the automatic button performance state (specific performance state) immediately after recognizing that, the special performance reception period is generated in the state where the setting is changed to the automatic button performance state (specific performance state). It is impossible and unrealistic. That is, when the player recognizes that the restoration process has failed, it usually requires time to determine whether or not to perform the setting operation to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state). It can be said that the above-mentioned effects are not effective unless the above-mentioned time setting values are designed in consideration of such time values.

In this respect, it is designed including such a time value that a plurality of operations are received and a post-operation effect is generated each time the effects are received (for example, 8 Seconds), or a long-pressing effective period (for example, 10 seconds) in which an effect is received and a post-operation effect is generated when the operation means to which an operation opportunity is given is maintained in an operation state for a predetermined time or longer. In the effective period (production acceptance period), even if the operation is started after the effective period is delayed, a plurality of operations or long presses are required for an appropriate number of times and an appropriate time before the effective period ends. It can be done over.

In view of such a fact, instead of 2 seconds (setting operation) in the above-mentioned time setting, an operation valid period (for example, 8 seconds) or a long press valid period (for example, 10 seconds) should be used. Is desirable. That is, in this case, as the effect pattern (variation pattern) capable of generating the special effect reception period, "15 seconds (restoration process)", "8 seconds or 10 seconds (multi-operation effective period or long-press effective period)", A time longer than "36 seconds" or "38 seconds" obtained by adding "3 seconds (special effect reception period)" and "10 seconds (post-operation effect)", respectively, and "15 seconds" (Restoring process) and "8 seconds or 10 seconds (multi-operation valid period or long-press valid period)" are added to generate a special effect reception period at a timing later than "23 seconds" or "25 seconds" As described above, the production is advanced as described above, and only the production pattern E among the production patterns A to E can be executed as the production pattern satisfying the condition.

Note that the operation valid period for a plurality of times (for example, 8 seconds) and the long press valid period (for example, 10 seconds) do not necessarily occur in the effect patterns (variation patterns) that can cause the special effect reception period. Alternatively, it may occur in an effect pattern different from this. In addition, as the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a), only one of the operation valid period (for example, 8 seconds) and the long press valid period (for example, 10 seconds) may be generated a plurality of times. Will set the length of the effective period on the occurrence side in place of 2 seconds (setting operation). When the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) is capable of generating both an operation valid period (for example, 8 seconds) and a long press valid period (for example, 10 seconds) multiple times, those valid periods It is desirable that the long side of is set instead of 2 seconds (setting operation).

Also, in the gaming state where the time saving function is enabled, it is required to consume the symbol variations one after another in a shorter time. Therefore, in the gaming state where the time saving function is enabled, the above-mentioned time settings are set. It is not always necessary to perform the design related to. However, in this case, there is a concern that the special effect reception period may occur during the period in which the restoration process is being performed on the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration 5001). Therefore, even during the period in which the restoration process is being performed on the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001), the player is controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) by the setting operation. It is desirable to make it possible. According to such a configuration, the post-operation performance as an effect using the movable operation means even while the restoration processing is being performed on the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration 5001). Can be executed, and an efficient process in which both the restoration process for the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration 5001) and the post-operation effect are performed in parallel can be realized. It should be noted that this processing is not limited to the gaming state in which the time saving function is enabled, and may be applied to the gaming state in which the time saving function is not enabled. In this case, the design for each time setting described above. Will not be performed.

In the example of the effect process described with reference to FIG. 373, the effect using the movable operation means may be executed as any of the effects shown in FIGS. 279 to 350. .. When a specific operation-related effect is executed, the "effect using the movable operation means" shown in the figure is realized as an effect in which the specific operation-related effect, the special effect reception period, and the post-operation effect are sequentially performed. The Rukoto.

In addition, the special effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration 5001) does not occur only when the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is controlled. When the special effect reception period occurs, even if no operation is performed, the effect reception for the movable operation means may be necessarily performed within the special effect reception period, and the post-operation effect may appear. When the automatic button production state (specific production state) is not controlled, there is an operation opportunity for the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration 5001) at least during the symbol variation in the normal game state. Although the special effect reception period to be given does not occur, the effect reception period is given in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (here, the operation button 410) that is not the target of the above-described restoration processing in the case of abnormality/failure. Is possible. Regarding the effect reception period in which the operation opportunity (here, the operation button 410) that is not the target of the above-described restoration processing in the case of abnormality/fault is given an operation opportunity, it is controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state). Can occur when When such a configuration is adopted, the above design for each time setting may be performed. However, even if the design for each time setting is not performed, the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration 5001) is It is possible to ensure the above-described performance when a performance pattern that can cause a special performance reception period is started in a state where an abnormality or a failure has occurred.

Further, in the example relating to this effect processing, control to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is performed by the setting operation by the player, but control to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) Does not necessarily have to be done by the operation of the player, for example, it is controlled based on the result of the big hit judgment, or the automatic button production state itself is not set, and the automatic production function always works. It may be provided as a playable game machine.

[Moveable production triggered by the establishment of a condition different from the condition of the symbol game]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a), when the game ball is received in the starting opening (first starting opening 2002, second starting opening 2004), the determination regarding the hit is performed. As a result, when a big hit is won, a big hit game in which a large number of game balls can be obtained is executed after executing a symbol variation in which a big hit symbol is displayed, and after the big hit game, it is advantageous to the player. It can be controlled to various game states (time saving state, probability changing state). In addition, while such a symbol game is performed, the peripheral control MPU 1511a produces an effect according to the result of the determination regarding the hit (for example, an effect pattern, various effect effects such as a timer effect, an operation effect, a look-ahead effect, etc.). As described above, it is possible to maintain the entertainment of the game until the big hit game is played.

However, only by performing an effect according to the symbol game by the main control MPU 1310a, the display change in the effect display device 1600 and the behavior of the movable decorative body (for example, the back front decoration unit 3100, the back middle movable effect unit 3200, the specification) There is a concern that the decorative member SDY (sliding material, etc.) becomes monotonous and it is difficult to maintain the pachinko machine 1 at a high operating rate for a long period.

Therefore, in this pachinko machine 1, even when another condition unrelated to the determination process related to the progress of the game and the corresponding design variation (starting condition of the design game) is satisfied, the display content and the movement on the effect display device 1600 are movable. It is possible to execute a process that can change the behavior of the ornament. That is, in this case, a display change and a movable body operation appear in a mode beyond the scope of the symbol game, and the monotonicity is eliminated, so that the pachinko machine 1 is maintained at a high operating rate for a long period. Can be expected.

Here, when another condition unrelated to the determination process related to the progress of the game and the corresponding symbol variation (starting condition of the symbol game) is established, the display contents on the effect display device 1600 and the behavior of the movable ornament are changed. As a method of causing the above, for example, each method listed below can be assumed. To change the display contents on the effect display device 1600 or the behavior of the movable decorative body when another condition unrelated to the start condition of the symbol game is satisfied, any one of the following methods is adopted. Alternatively, a method different from any of the methods listed below may be adopted, but a situation in which the symbol variation is not temporarily executed (the processing flag shown in FIG. 256 is “0”, and the number of pending calls is held. Is in a state of “0”), the above-mentioned different condition must be satisfied, and even when the different condition is satisfied in the situation, the contents displayed on the effect display device 1600 and It must be possible to cause a change in the behavior of the movable ornament.
-A technique that regularly executes a production lottery that is not related to symbol fluctuations and that obtains a specific result in this production lottery is the "establishment of another condition" described above-A cumulative number of operations for a specific operating means To reach a predetermined number as the above-mentioned "satisfaction of another condition"-RTC (real-time clock) function or operation processing in the peripheral control MPU1511a (or main control MPU1310a) measures time (for example, when power is turned on) From the above), and the fact that the measured time reaches a predetermined time is regarded as the "establishment of another condition" described above.

Generally, in a pachinko machine, when the time measured using the RTC function reaches a predetermined time, it is determined that another condition is satisfied, and a method of causing a change in the display content of the effect display device 1600 or the behavior of the movable decorative body is changed. Is often adopted. However, no matter which method is adopted, when another condition unrelated to the start condition of the symbol game is satisfied, if the display content or the behavior of the movable body is changed, until the change timing arrives. Since it usually takes a relatively long time (at least several hours, etc.), it is possible to change the displayed contents or the behavior of the movable decorative body despite such a long time. If there is a situation that cannot be done, it is feared that the interest in the game will decline.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a specific state (for example, RTC state) in which a movable body operation timing for operating the movable decorative body in a specific mode is set in advance as a start condition of the symbol game. Can be generated based on the establishment of another specific condition (for example, the measurement time by the RTC function reaches a predetermined time). And, in a situation where the movable decorative body is in an abnormal state (for example, although it should be located at the original position but not at the original position) and the specific state does not occur, there is a change in the design. When the corresponding restoration operation time comes, it is possible to start the process of causing the movable decoration body to perform a predetermined restoration operation, while the movable decoration body is in an abnormal state and a specific state occurs. In such a situation, even if the predetermined restoration operation time comes, the processing to perform the predetermined restoration operation is not started, but the processing to perform the predetermined restoration operation can be started at the predetermined time within the specific state. ..

That is, in this case, in a specific state that can be generated based on the fact that a specific condition other than the start condition of the symbol game is satisfied, the process of performing a predetermined restoration operation according to the symbol variation side is prohibited. Since it is possible to start the process of performing a predetermined restoration operation at a predetermined time in the specific state, a movable body abnormality is detected by a predetermined procedure in the specific state without being affected by the execution state of the symbol variation. It is expected that the movable decorative body is restored to perform the operation in a specific mode (operation when another condition is satisfied) more reliably.

Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 374, an example of processing contents when the movable decorative body is operated when such a specific condition is satisfied will be described. Note that, in the example shown in FIG. 374, for convenience of explanation, “an RTC state in which different display contents appear when the elapsed time from power-on is determined to have reached a predetermined time by using the RTC function ( "Specific state) is generated, and it is possible to execute a process of sequentially operating the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C according to the occurrence timing of the RTC state (specific state)". As described above, the method of causing changes in the display content of the effect display device 1600 and the behavior of the movable decorative body when another condition (specific condition) unrelated to the game start condition is satisfied is described above. As described above, each technique described below can be appropriately adopted even when another method is adopted.

Now, assuming that the RTC state (specific state) is in a state prior to occurrence, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, the remaining time until the elapsed time from power-on reaches a predetermined time (until the RTC state occurs (Remaining time) will be updated regularly. In this respect, in the example shown in FIG. 374, at the timing Rt2, the RTC state (specific state) is generated when the elapsed time from power-on reaches the predetermined time and the RTC state (specific state) is generated. Based on the above, it is possible to execute the process of sequentially operating the three movable ornaments A, B, and C. In this way, the three movable ornaments A, B, and C are sequentially operated based on the satisfaction of the condition (the satisfaction of the second condition) that is not related to the situation of the symbol variation, and the flow of the game up to now is You will be able to have a sense of expectation that will change. At this time, the display contents on the effect display device 1600 may be changed.

In order to more appropriately enhance the sense of expectation when the RTC state (specific state) occurs, for example, the RTC state is caused to function as a production period limited to a predetermined time (10 minutes), and the production is performed. If the big hit is won from the time when the period (RTC state) occurs to the time when it ends, the production progress by the production character that cannot appear when the RTC state (specific state) does not occur (normal state) ( It is more desirable to have a production privilege such as enabling the special production mode).

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 374, a condition irrelevant to the situation of the symbol variation is established even at the timing Rt1 slightly before (for example, 5 seconds before) such timing Rt2, Based on the satisfaction of the condition (the satisfaction of the first condition), the pre-display indicating that the RTC state is about to occur (the satisfaction of the second condition) is executable. That is, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this example determines whether or not the timing Rt2 has come, in addition to the timing Rt2, by periodically checking the elapsed time from power-on. When it is determined that the time has arrived, the previous display (display change) appears, and when it is determined that the timing Rt2 has arrived, the process (behavior of the movable decorative body) according to the occurrence of the RTC state is executed. .. The “previous display” can be executed as, for example, a display such as “RTC state is coming soon” or a countdown display for the timing Rt2.

According to such a configuration, when the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated in synchronization with the timing Rt2 when the RTC state (specific state) occurs, these movable body operations result in a big hit determination. Since it will be suggested to the player in advance that it is not based on (no expectation of any big hit), it is preferable to avoid a decline in the entertainment level of the game due to recognition errors by the player. You will be able to.

In particular, in the example shown in FIG. 374, at least during the period of timing Rt1 to Rt2, only the display (display not conforming to the symbol variation) that does not show any expectation as the display content on the effect display device 1600 appears. Therefore, the decorative pattern (effect pattern) is hidden so that it is not displayed. That is, in this case, as the display contents on the effect display device 1600, only the display that does not show any degree of expectation (the display that does not conform to the pattern variation) appears, and the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated. Since the processing for starting is started, it is expected that it is possible to more appropriately avoid the deterioration of the game interest due to the recognition error by the player.

Here, "pre-display appearing at timing Rt1" and "movable body operation appearing at timing Rt2" correspond to "display not conforming to symbol variation" and "behavior of movable decorative body not conforming to symbol variation", respectively. To do. Therefore, at the timings Rt1 and Rt2, the display and the behavior of the movable body occur, regardless of the execution status (including the execution status) of the symbol variation at those timings. However, depending on the execution situation of the symbol variation, the situation that the movable ornaments A, B, C are not ready for operation (the movable ornaments A, B, C are in the original position despite the arrival of the timing Rt2). It is feared that the movable decorative bodies A, B and C cannot be sequentially operated even if the timing Rt2 finally arrives.

For example, when any one of several variation patterns is selected as the symbol variation according to the result of the big hit determination, the movable decorative body A, the movable decorative body B, and the movable decorative body B are selected within the period in which the symbol variation is performed. The movable effect using the movable decorative body C may be executed, but during the execution of such movable effect, the movable body operation timing (here, when the RTC state occurs) in the RTC state described above arrives. In some cases, it is not possible to use at least the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C that are in the middle of execution as the above-mentioned “behavior of the movable decorative body that does not follow the pattern variation”. Can be assumed.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the restoration operation time corresponding to the design variation arrives, the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, as well as various movable machines included in the pachinko machine 1, are moved. It is possible to perform a movable abnormality determination such as whether or not the ornament is in the original position (normal state). Then, when it is determined (abnormality determination) that there is a movable decorative body that is not in a normal state in this movable abnormality determination, a predetermined amount is determined for the movable decorative body that is the determination target in a manner following the abnormality determination processing. By performing the restoration process for performing the restoration operation (movement to the original position, etc.), it is possible to quickly restore the movable decorative body in an abnormal state. Therefore, the movable body operation timing within the RTC state described above may be reached while the restoration process for performing the predetermined restoration operation (movement to the original position) on the movable decoration body is being performed. If there is, it becomes impossible to use this as the above-mentioned "behavior of the movable decorative body that does not conform to the pattern variation" at least for the movable decorative body among the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C that are in the middle of the restoring operation. Can be assumed.

As the "restoring operation timing corresponding to the symbol fluctuation", for example, the start timing of the symbol fluctuation (the timing of acquiring the command sent from the main control MPU 1310a side when the symbol fluctuation starts) and the symbol fluctuation It can be executed as at least one of the stop times (the time when the command sent from the main control MPU 1310a side when the symbol fluctuation is stopped) is acquired (the restoration process is executed based on the acquisition of the command). Is.

Therefore, in the example (peripheral control MPU 1511a) shown in FIG. 374, first, after at least the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs, the movable decorative body is identified by the movable body operation timing in the RTC state. When it is in the period until the operation (here, the operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is completed) is completed, the movable decorative body (the movable decorative body A, the movable decorative body B) used in the period. , The movable decorative body C) is prohibited so as not to be used as a movable effect according to the effect pattern on the pattern variation side, so that the movable object operation in a specific mode in the RTC state (movable decoration that does not conform to the symbol variation) It is possible to prevent a situation in which the behavior of the body) cannot be performed due to the movable effect on the side of changing the design.

However, at this time, even if the effect pattern corresponding to the movable effect is displayed, if the movable effect is not executed in the effect pattern, there is a concern that the enjoyment of the game may be deteriorated. In this regard, in the example (peripheral control MPU 1511a) shown in FIG. 374, at timing Rt1, only the display (display not conforming to the symbol fluctuation) that does not show any expectation as the display content on the effect display device 1600 appears. That is mentioned above.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 374, when there is a symbol variation (B variation (loose) in the figure) that is in the middle of execution when the timing Rt2 arrives, “No expectations "Display not displayed (display from timing Rt1)" is not hidden at this time, and this is changed over a period until the timing Rt2a at which the symbol variation (B variation (loose) in the figure) is stopped. I try to keep it.

According to such a configuration, at the timings Rt2 to Rt2a, the RTC state (specific state) is generated and the symbol variation is actually performed, but in the effect display device 1600, the decoration is performed. The effect pattern based on the design is hidden and only the display that does not show any expectation appears. Then, while such a display appears, since the operation by the movable decorative body according to the occurrence of the RTC state (here, the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, C) is advanced, It is expected that a decrease in the enjoyment of the game due to the fact that the movable effect according to the effect pattern is not executed within the period of the timings Rt2 to Rt2a is appropriately suppressed.

In the example shown in FIG. 374, when the symbol variation (B variation (loose) in the figure) that was in the middle of execution when the timing Rt2 arrives is ended (stopped) (when the timing Rt2a comes). , Even if it is within the operation period by the movable decorative body according to the occurrence of the RTC state, the “display without any expectation (display from timing Rt1)” that has been displayed until then is not displayed at this point. Then, the specific background (for example, in the RTC state) after the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state) can appear. Then, after this, when a new symbol variation (in the figure, C variation (loose)) is started, depending on the symbol variation even within the operation period of the movable decorative body according to the occurrence of the RTC state. The display indicating the degree of expectation such as the effect pattern and the notice effect is started as usual.

However, even if a new pattern variation (C variation (missing) in the figure) is started and the effect pattern is displayed in this way, "the timing Rt2 when the RTC state (specific state) occurs is reached. As long as the movable decorative body operates in a specific manner (here, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C sequentially operate) depending on the movable body operation timing in the RTC state, It goes without saying that the movable effect on the pattern variation side using any of the movable decorative body A, the movable decorative body B, and the movable decorative body C is prohibited. In this state, only the movable effect on the symbol variation side is prohibited, but since the movable body operation corresponding to the occurrence of the RTC state is in the middle of execution, the game is performed by prohibiting the movable effect on the symbol variation side. The decline in interest will be suppressed.

As such prohibition processing, it is determined whether or not there is a situation that should be prohibited at the start of symbol variation (C variation in the figure), and when it is determined that there is a situation that should be prohibited, the corresponding symbol variation (Figure In the above, C fluctuation) itself may be set as a prohibited target of the movable effect (at least the movable effect using any of the movable decorative body A, the movable decorative body B, and the movable decorative body C). That is, in this case, in the middle of the corresponding symbol variation (C variation in the figure), "the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs is reached, and then the movable decorative body is changed depending on the movable body operation timing in the RTC state. Even if the "period until the operation in the specific mode (here, the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, C) ends" is completed, the movable effect (until the symbol variation ends) Execution of at least a movable effect using any of the movable decorative body A, the movable decorative body B, and the movable decorative body C is not permitted.

By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 374, the timing for causing the specific background (for example, during the RTC state) after the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state) to appear is the timing Rt2a which is later than the original timing Rt2. Is a concern. However, the RTC state itself occurs at the timing Rt2, but the production privilege due to the occurrence of the RTC state (If the jackpot is won from the time the RTC state occurs until the end of the RTC state, the special production mode is controlled. Etc.) does not occur at the timing Rt2, and since only the symbol fluctuations (C and D fluctuations in the figure) after the symbol fluctuation first digested after the RTC state has occurred are targeted. It can be said that it is proper to make the specific background (for example, in the RTC state) appear when the timing Rt2a arrives.

By the way, before the timing Rt2 arrives (until the timing Rt2a arrives) until the symbol fluctuation (in the figure, B fluctuation (miss) in the figure) that was in the middle of execution is ended (stopped). ), "After the timing Rt2 when the RTC state (specific state) occurs, the movable decorative body operates in a specific mode depending on the movable body operation timing in the RTC state (here, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and It is also possible to assume a case in which the "period until the sequential operation by C)" is completed. However, even in this case, as long as the timing Rt2a does not arrive, the state in which "display without any expectation (display from timing Rt1)" is maintained. This is the example shown in FIG. 374. In the example shown in FIG. 374, the symbol variation (B variation in the figure) executed before and after the occurrence of the RTC state (before and after the timing Rt2) is targeted for the RTC effect privilege. Because not.

Furthermore, in the example (peripheral control MPU 1511a) shown in FIG. 374, at least the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs, and then the movable decorative body is identified by the movable body operation timing in the RTC state. In (the period until the operation (in this case, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated) ends), even if the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation comes, the restoration process triggered by this By prohibiting this (processing to cause the movable decorative body in an abnormal state to perform a predetermined restoration operation), the movable body operation in a specific mode in the RTC state (not conforming to the pattern variation) The behavior of the movable decorative body) can be prevented from becoming impossible due to the restoration process on the pattern variation side.

According to such a configuration, in the RTC state (specific state) that can be generated based on the establishment of a specific condition other than the game start condition, a predetermined restoration operation according to the symbol variation side is performed. The process that causes the change is prohibited, and the process that causes the predetermined restoration operation to be performed at the predetermined time in the RTC state (specific state) can be executed. It is expected that the movable body abnormality is restored by a predetermined procedure within the RTC state (specific state) without being affected by the above, and the operation of the movable decorative body in the specific mode is executed more reliably. ..

That is, in the example shown in FIG. 374, when the game is being controlled to the normal game state and the symbol variation (A variation (lost) in the figure) according to the big hit determination is in the midst of being performed. It is assumed that the timing Rt1 comes. Then, as described above, first, at the timing Rt1, as a display not conforming to the symbol variation, for example, a display such as "soon RTC state" appears on the background display on the effect display device 1600. Then, the symbol variation (in the figure, A variation (loose)) is ended before the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state occurs after the display such as "soon RTC state" is performed, and a new symbol The variation (variation B (loss)) is started. Then, the timing Rt2 is set to arrive when the design variation is in the middle of the stage, and at the timing Rt2, three movements are performed as the behavior of the movable decorative body not conforming to the design variation. Processing for sequentially operating the ornaments A, B, C is executed. The "display not conforming to the symbol variation" from the timing Rt1 is continued for a period until a new symbol variation (variation B (miss) in the figure) is stopped.

Also, although this is also described above, in the example shown in FIG. 374, three movable decorative bodies A, depending on the movable body operation timing in the RTC state after the arrival of the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs, In the period until the sequential operation by B and C is completed (normal time: timing Rt2 to Rt5, abnormal time: timing Rt2 to Rt5′)”, at least the movable decorative bodies A, B, This is prohibited so that neither the movable effect on the symbol variation side using C nor the restoration process on the symbol variation side is performed. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 374, in the period of timings Rt2 to Rt2a, although the symbol variation (B variation (loose) in the figure) is being executed, the effect display on the symbol variation side ( It is controlled as a period during which neither the display indicating the degree of expectation], the movable effect on the symbol variation side (movable body operation indicating the degree of expectation), or the restoration process on the symbol variation side is executed (No. One limitation). On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 374, in the period of timing Rt2a to Rt5, the effect display on the symbol fluctuation side (display indicating the degree of expectation) is executed, but the movable effect on the symbol fluctuation side (expected) The movable body operation indicating the degree) and the restoration process on the symbol variation side are controlled as a period in which neither is executed (second limit).

It should be noted that the control at the timings Rt2 to Rt2a (both the effect display (display indicating the degree of expectation) and the movable effect (moving body operation indicating the degree of expectation) on the symbol variation side is not executed) It is executed even if the symbol variation in the period is not a loss variation but a variation (big hit variation) that is performed based on the winning of the big hit. That is, in this case, no expected performance is executed, and when the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C reaches the timing Rt2a which is in the middle of execution, the big hit symbol suddenly appears. Therefore, as a player expecting to be in the RTC state, it becomes possible to enjoy the fun as a surprise-like production that exceeds the expectation. In addition, after the big hit pattern appears in this way, a big hit game state occurs while the three movable ornaments A, B, and C are sequentially operated.

Also, as described above, regarding the display from the timing Rt1 (only the display in which the decorative symbol is not changed and no expectation is shown), there is a change in the symbol which is being executed when the timing Rt2 arrives. The display is hidden at the stop timing Rt2a, and instead of this, a specific background (such as "in RTC state") after the RTC state occurs is displayed. In addition, when a symbol variation (variation pattern C in the figure) is newly started in a state where a specific background (such as “during RTC state”) is displayed, an effect display according to the variation pattern (expectation level is shown). Will be executed as usual. However, for the movable effect on the pattern variation side using the movable ornaments A, B, and C, after the timing Rt2a arrives, unless the process of sequentially operating the three movable ornaments A, B, and C is completed. Will be maintained as a prohibited state. Therefore, based on the result of the big hit determination, even when the effect pattern in which the movable effect on the pattern variation side using any of the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is performed is temporarily selected, Although the display in the liquid crystal, sound, lighting of the lamp, etc. are executed as usual, the movable decorative body is not operated.

Also, as described above, in the example shown in FIG. 374, after the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs, three movable ornaments A and B are set according to the movable body operation timing in the RTC state. , C until the sequential operation is completed (normal time: timing Rt2 to Rt5, abnormal time: timing Rt2 to Rt5')", the restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol fluctuation (here, the start of the symbol fluctuation Even if the time, stop time) arrives, this is prohibited so that the restoration process (the process of causing the movable decorative body in an abnormal state to perform a predetermined restoration operation) is not triggered. .. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 374, at the timing Rt2a, the stop time (restoring operation time) of the symbol fluctuation (B fluctuation (miss) in the drawing) and the symbol fluctuation (C fluctuation (miss) in the drawing). )) start timing (restoration operation timing) is reached, but at these restoration operation timings, even if there is a movable decorative body in an abnormal state, restoration is performed on the movable decorative body. No processing is executed.

However, in the period of timing Rt2 to Rt5 (at the time of abnormality, timing Rt2 to Rt5′), instead of prohibiting the restoration process on the symbol variation side in this way, first, at timing Rt2, the movable decorative body A is in an abnormal state. Is determined. Then, in the example shown in FIG. 374(f), it is determined that the movable decorative body A is not in an abnormal state, and based on the result of the determination, the movable decorative body A is operated in the normal operation mode. The processing for operating (operation during normal operation) is executed. Here, the normal operation mode of the movable decorative body A is, for example, after the movable decorative body A in the original position is moved to a predetermined effect position (first position) and then in the predetermined effect position. It can be realized as an operation mode in which the movable decorative body A is moved to the original position.

Next, it is determined whether or not the movable decorative body B is in an abnormal state at a timing Rt3 after the normal operation of the movable decorative body A is completed. Then, in the example shown in FIG. 374(f), it is determined that the movable decorative body B is not in an abnormal state, and the movable decorative body B is operated in the normal operation mode based on the result of the determination. The processing for operating (operation during normal operation) is executed. Here, the normal operation mode of the movable decorative body B is, for example, after the movable decorative body B in the original position is moved to a predetermined effect position (second position) and then in the predetermined effect position. It can be realized as an operation mode in which the movable decorative body B is moved to the original position.

Then, it is determined whether or not the movable decorative body C is in an abnormal state at a timing Rt4 after the normal operation of the movable decorative body B is completed. Then, in the example shown in FIG. 374(f), it is determined that the movable decorative body C is not in an abnormal state, and based on the result of the determination, the movable decorative body C is operated in the normal operation mode. The processing for operating (operation during normal operation) is executed. Here, the normal operation mode of the movable decorative body C is, for example, after the movable decorative body C in the original position is moved to a predetermined effect position (third position) and then in the predetermined effect position. It can be realized as an operation mode in which the movable decorative body C is moved to the original position.

Then, in the example shown in FIG. 374(e), when the timing Rt5 after the respective operations by the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially completed, the RTC state (specific state) is generated. The “behavior of the movable decorative body that does not conform to the symbol variation” is ended, and the prohibition state for the restoration process on the symbol variation side is released.

On the other hand, when it is determined in any of the abnormality determinations for the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C that the abnormal state is present, a process for causing the movable decorative body in the abnormal state to perform a predetermined restoration operation Is feasible. However, when a series of movable body operations (here, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated) at the time of occurrence of the RTC state, a predetermined operation is performed on the movable decorative body in an abnormal state. If the player feels that the restoration operation is being performed, the game becomes a nuisance, and there is a concern that the interest of the game may be reduced.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a predetermined restoration operation for a movable decorative body in an abnormal state is performed by a series of movable body movements (here, three movable movements) when the RTC state occurs. The operation is not performed independently as a separate operation (sequential operation by the ornaments A, B, and C), but is performed as a special mode operation including an operation of returning the movable ornament in the abnormal state. .. That is, in this case, the predetermined restoration operation itself for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state can be made to appear as if it is an operation incorporated in a part of the operation when the RTC state occurs. In this way, it is possible to preferably avoid a decrease in amusement of the game when performing a predetermined restoration operation on the movable decorative body in an abnormal state.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 374(f), it is assumed that the movable decorative body B is determined to be in an abnormal state at the timing Rt3 after the normal operation of the movable decorative body A is completed. However, based on the result of the abnormality determination, an abnormal time including an operation of returning (restoring) the movable decorative body B is not a process of operating the movable decorative body B in a normal operation mode (normal time operation). It is possible to execute the processing for performing the operation (special operation) in the operation mode of. Then, after this, the restored (restored) movable decorative body B is not operated again in the normal operation mode (normal operation), and the timing Rt4 (movable) shown in FIG. Similar to the timing after the operation of the ornamental body B in the normal state is finished), it is determined whether or not the movable ornamental body C is in an abnormal state. A process for operating the body C in a normal operation mode (normal operation) is executed. The time required for the normal operation of the movable decorative body B and the time required for the special operation of the movable decorative body B may or may not be the same.

With such a configuration, even if an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body B after the RTC state has occurred (for example, during the operation of the movable decorative body A), the movable decorative body B in which the abnormality has occurred Until the timing to operate comes, regardless of the situation on the symbol variation side, this will be left in an abnormal state and left alone. When the timing at which the movable decorative body B should be operated has come, the movable decorative body B is operated in a special mode including a restoring operation instead of the normal operation mode. The movable decorative body B in which the abnormality has occurred can be restored while appropriately maintaining the effect mode when the RTC state such as “sequential operation by the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C” is generated. That is, in this case, it is possible to make it appear as if one of a plurality of operation modes prepared as an operation at the time of occurrence of the RTC state has been executed, so that a predetermined restoration operation is performed on the movable decorative body in the abnormal state. It is possible to favorably avoid a decrease in interest in playing a game.

Note that the symbol variation (in the figure, C variation (loose)) started at the timing Rt2a is a sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C depending on the movable body operation timing in the RTC state. It is started at an intermediate stage and is continued until the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, C is completed. Therefore, the start time (restoration operation time) of the symbol fluctuation (in the drawing, C fluctuation (miss)) stop time (recovery operation time) and the next symbol fluctuation (in the drawing, D fluctuation (miss)) comes When doing, since the prohibition state for the restoration process on the symbol variation side has already been released, when there is a movable decorative body in an abnormal state at those times, the restoration process is executed for the movable decorative body. The Rukoto.

In the example shown in FIG. 374(f), when the movable decorative body B is operated in the “special mode including the restoring operation”, the “special mode including the restoring operation” It is only necessary to restore (return to the original position) the movable decorative body B by an operation mode different from the "mode", and for example, the minimum operation mode required to return the movable decorative body B to the original position may be used.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 374, at timing Rt1, only the display (for example, “soon RTC state” or the like) that does not show any expectation is displayed as the display content on the effect display device 1600. The display is maintained until the timing Rt2a arrives, but the display has different display contents based on the occurrence of the RTC state at the timing Rt2 (for example, "RTC preparation state"). You may switch to. However, even when the display content is switched at timing Rt2 to cause a new display to appear, during the period from timing Rt2 to Rt2a, the display content in the effect display device 1600 does not show any expectation (symbol variation). It is important that the display that does not conform to) appears.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 374, the case where the movable decorative body B has an abnormality has been described. Instead, it is desirable to operate each in a special mode including a restore operation.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 374, the movable body operation timing for operating the movable decorative body in the specific mode is set as the generation timing of the RTC state (specific state). However, the movable body operation timing may be set at a timing when a predetermined time has elapsed after the RTC state (specific state) occurred.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 374, based on the arrival of the timings Rt1 and Rt2 that are satisfied based on the function (RTC function) that does not conform to the symbol variation on the peripheral control MPU 1511a side, “Do not conform to symbol variation” It was decided to start "display" and "behavior of the movable decorative body that does not conform to the fluctuation of the design". However, instead of this, based on the command transmitted based on the function that does not conform to the symbol variation on the main control MPU 1310a side, "display not conforming to the symbol variation" or "behavior of the movable decorative body not conforming to the symbol variation" May be started.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 374, “the movable decorative body operates in a specific mode (here, 3 when the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs is reached, depending on the movable body operation timing in the RTC state). It is forbidden to prevent the restoration process on the pattern variation side from being performed during the period "until the end of the sequential operation by the two movable decorative bodies A, B, C)", and thereby the RTC state. The movable body operation (behavior of the movable decorative body that does not conform to the pattern variation) in the specific mode within the (specific state) is made difficult to occur due to competition with the restoration process on the pattern variation side. However, if the restoration process for any of the three movable ornaments A, B, and C is started immediately before the RTC state (specific state) occurs, the restoration process is in the execution state. In particular, the RTC state (specific state) may occur, and eventually the movable body operation timing within the RTC state (specific state) may arrive. That is, in this case, by the restoration process started immediately before the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state), the movable body operation (the behavior of the movable decorative body that does not conform to the pattern variation) in the specific mode in the RTC state (specific state) is performed. There is a concern that it will not be obtained. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 374, even in the period of timings Rt1 to Rt2, the restoration process for at least three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C of the various movable decorative bodies included in the pachinko machine 1 is performed. It is advisable to prohibit this so that it is not performed.

FIG. 375 is a modification of the example shown in FIG. 374. “During the period from timing Rt1 to Rt2, at least three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C of various movable decorative bodies included in the pachinko machine 1 are provided. The restoration process is not executed", which is a difference from the example shown in FIG. 374.

That is, in the example shown in FIG. 375, in the period from the arrival of the timing Rt1 to the occurrence of the RTC state (timings Rt1 to Rt2), the abnormality determination for at least three movable decorative bodies A, B, C (or , Restoration process) It does not execute itself. As a result, even if any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is in an abnormal state while a display that does not follow the symbol variation (such as "RTC state soon") is being made, this is restored. In no case, it will be left in an abnormal state.

Then, in the example shown in FIG. 375, when the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state is generated arrives, first, before performing the processing relating to the movement of the movable body in the RTC state, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, C are used. An abnormality determination (first abnormality determination) is made as to whether or not any of the above is in an abnormal state.

If it is determined that there is no abnormality in any of the three movable ornaments A, B, and C as a result of the above abnormality determination, it is determined that the movable body operation timing (second abnormality determination) in the RTC state has arrived, and FIG. The processing (processing relating to the operation of the movable body in the RTC state) described above is performed with reference to. Therefore, when the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated, the abnormality determination whether or not there is an abnormality in the movable decorative body to be operated is individually executed again, and there is no abnormality. When the determination is made, the operation in the normal mode (see FIG. 374(e)) appears, and when it is determined that there is an abnormality, the operation in the special mode (see FIG. 374(f)) appears. That is, in this case, for example, in the movable decorative body B, the first abnormality determination is executed before the processing regarding the movable body operation in the RTC state is started, and the processing regarding the movable body movement in the RTC state is started. After that, the second abnormality determination is executed before operating the movable decorative body B.

On the other hand, as a result of performing the above-described abnormality determination before executing the process related to the movable body operation in the RTC state, it is determined that any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C has an abnormality. In such a case, the restoration process for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state is executed by delaying the arrival of the movable body operation time in the RTC state. That is, the situation in which the abnormality is determined is "a situation in which the movable body operation time in the RTC state has not yet arrived, and the operation of the movable decorative body in a specific mode has not yet started". By restoring the movable decorative body in an abnormal state while maintaining the situation, the operation in the specific mode by the movable decorative body can be performed in the “normal mode” instead of the “special mode” described above. Become so.

For example, as shown in FIG. 375(f), at the timing Rt2 when the RTC state occurs, “the movable body operation timing in the RTC state has not yet arrived, and the operation of the movable ornament in a specific mode” It is assumed that it is determined that one of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C has an abnormality as a result of the abnormality determination when "is not yet started". Then, the movable decorative body that has been determined to be abnormal is maintained while maintaining the "situation in which the movable body operation time in the RTC state has not yet arrived, and the operation of the movable decorative body in a specific mode has not yet started". Restoration processing will be executed for.

That is, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 375(e) and 375(f), as compared with the case where it is determined that none of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is abnormal, in the RTC state. Although the arrival of the movable body operation timing is delayed (delay from timing Rt2 to timing Rt2b in the figure), use the period (timings Rt2 to Rt2b in the figure) created by such a delay. Thus, the movable decorative body determined to be abnormal can be restored before the movable body operation time in the RTC state is reached. After that, when the movable body operation timing in the RTC state comes, the processing as described above with reference to FIG. 374 is performed.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 375(f), it is assumed that it is determined that no abnormality has occurred in any of the movable decorative bodies when the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated. doing. That is, in this case, from the delayed timing Rt2b, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, C sequentially operate in the mode described with reference to FIG. 374(e). Then, when the timing Rt5b arrives after the three movable ornaments A, B, and C have each sequentially finished operating in the normal mode, when the RTC state (specific state) occurs, "a movable ornament that does not conform to the pattern variation" Of "behavior" is ended, and the prohibition state (prohibition state over timing Rt1 to Rt5a) for the restoration process on the symbol variation side is released.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 375(g), when it is determined that the movable decorative body B is abnormal when the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated (timing It is assumed that the abnormality is newly generated in the movable decorative body B after the abnormality determination (first abnormality determination) in Rt2 is performed (or after the restoration). That is, in this case, from the delayed timing Rt2b, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, C sequentially operate in the mode described with reference to FIG. 374(f). After the three movable ornaments A, B, and C have been sequentially operated in a manner according to each determination result (the movable ornaments A and C are normal aspects and the movable ornament B is a special aspect) When the timing Rt5b arrives, the "behavior of the movable decorative body that does not conform to the symbol variation" when the RTC state (specific state) occurs is terminated, and the prohibition state for the restoration process on the symbol variation side (the prohibition state over the timings Rt1 to Rt5b ) Will be released. That is, in this case, for example, when an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body B even in the first abnormality determination, the restoration processing (restoring operation) according to the first abnormality determination and the second abnormality determination are performed. The operation in the special mode is executed.

According to such a configuration, even if a movement abnormality occurs during the movement of the movable body immediately before or immediately after the start of the RTC state, a series of movable body movements (here, three movements of the movable body movement at the time of occurrence of the RTC state are performed). It is possible to appropriately execute the sequential operation by the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, and it is possible to preferably maintain the expectation that the RTC state has occurred.

In the example shown in FIG. 375, when there is an abnormality in the plurality of movable decorations in the abnormality determination at the timing Rt2, the restoration processing for the movable decorations in the abnormal state is sequentially executed, and then the RTC state is changed. It is desirable to execute a series of movable body operations (in this case, three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C in sequence) at the time of occurrence. In this case, a series of movable body operations at the time of occurrence of the RTC state (here, three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated by the number of movable decorative bodies to be restored). ) Is delayed for a longer time, but it becomes possible to execute a series of movable body operations in the normal mode when the RTC state occurs. The restoring operation for a plurality of movable ornaments may be executed in parallel, and in this case, it is possible to suppress the delay time until the series of movable body operations is started when the RTC state occurs. become.

However, even in the example shown in FIG. 375, if the player sometimes feels that a predetermined restoration operation is being performed on the movable decorative body that is in an abnormal state, it becomes a nuisance, and the game is entertained. Is a concern. Therefore, in the example shown in FIGS. 375(f) and 375(g), when the "restoring operation" is completed, the "sequential operation by the three movable ornaments A, B, C" is subsequently executed (sequentially executed). By doing so, the series of movable body operations up to the timings Rt5a and Rt5b including the restoration operation appearing at the timing Rt2 can be seen as "a series of movable body movements when the RTC state occurs". It is made difficult to recognize that a predetermined restoration operation is performed on the movable decorative body in an abnormal state.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, when an abnormality occurs in a situation different from these abnormality occurrence situations, a display (error code or the like) indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the movable decoration can be performed. In the example shown in FIGS. 375(f) and 375(g) as well as in the example shown in FIG. 374(f), during the period during which the restoration operation (restoration processing) is performed on the movable decorative body in the abnormal state. An abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body (during the restoration operation according to the first abnormality determination) or during the period in which the movable decorative body B is operated in the special aspect (during the special aspect according to the second abnormality determination). The display (error code, etc.) indicating that it is performing does not appear. In addition, the timing when the operation in the special mode is started after the operation in the normal mode is started, the timing when the operation in the normal mode is started after the operation in the special mode is finished, and further, in FIG. f) and (g), the display contents on the effect display device 1600 are triggered by the occurrence of these timings, for example, at the timing when the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, C is started after the restoration operation is finished. It does not cause a change in. These things also make it possible to see that a "series of movable body operation at the time of occurrence of the RTC state" is being performed and perform a predetermined restoration operation on the movable decorative body in an abnormal state. It can be said to be important in making it difficult to recognize.

Note that, in FIG. 374 and its another example, and in FIG. 375 and its another example, as the movable body operation based on the occurrence of the RTC state, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated. Not limited to, the movable decorative body (such as one or two, or three or more) that is also used in the movable effect on the pattern variation side, based on the establishment of a specific condition different from the game start condition (starting condition). It suffices to operate the movable body in a specific mode at the time when the movable body operates within the specific state.

Further, as a movable decorative body that can be operated at the movable body operation timing in such an RTC state (specific state), a frame side movable decorative body provided on the door frame 3 side (for example, movably provided The operation buttons 410, the sword decoration 5001, and the like, and a board-side movable decoration provided on the game board 5 side (for example, a back front decoration unit 3100, a back inside movable effect unit 3200, a specific decoration member SDY (paranoid object). ), etc.) and may be used respectively.

However, for example, in FIG. 374 and its another example, and in FIG. 375 and its another example, as an operation means as one of the movable decorative bodies that can be operated at the movable body operation timing in the RTC state (specific state). When the frame-side movable ornament (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001, etc.) that is also used is used, even after the timing Rt2a arrives, the frame-side movable ornament that is also used as such operation means is A situation in which "operation that does not conform to the symbol fluctuation" is occurring may occur.

That is, as described above, at the timing Rt2a, even if it is within the operation period of the movable decorative body in response to the occurrence of the RTC state, the display that has been displayed until then is displayed “no expectation (from timing Rt1). "Display)" is hidden at this point, and a specific background (for example, in the RTC state) after the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state) can appear. Then, after this, when a new symbol variation (in the figure, C variation (loose)) is started, depending on the symbol variation even within the operation period of the movable decorative body according to the occurrence of the RTC state. It is also described above that the display showing the degree of expectation such as the effect pattern and the notice effect is started as usual. Therefore, the frame-side movable decorative body (such as the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001) that is also used as the operating means is within the period in which such a new symbol variation (C variation (loose) in the figure) is performed. Despite being in a state of being subjected to a specific action according to the occurrence of the RTC state, an operation opportunity may be given to the frame-side movable decorative body that is also used as an operating means depending on the effect pattern, A situation that may cause confusion in production may occur. In the period of the timings Rt2 to Rt2a (further, the period of the timings Rt1 to Rt2 before that), only the display (display not showing any expectation) that does not conform to the symbol variation appears. Even if a symbol variation (C variation (loss) in the figure) is performed, the operation opportunity is not given within the period.

Therefore, even if the specific operating means (frame-side movable decorative body) is in the state of being subjected to the specific operation according to the occurrence of the RTC state, the specific operating means is operated according to the result of the big hit judgment. When the effect time for providing the operation opportunity has arrived, the effect display device 1600 performs a specific display (operation instruction image) that prompts the user to perform an operation with respect to the specific operation means. Even if a specific operation means in a state of performing a specific operation is operated, it is desirable not to accept the effect. According to such a configuration, when the specific operation corresponding to the occurrence of the RTC state is being executed, the situation that the operation opportunity was originally given to the specific operation means is game. It is possible to give appropriate suggestions to the person. In addition, by not accepting the operation for the specific operation means, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of a failure or abnormality due to the operation performed on the specific operation means in the operating state. You will be expected.

However, during the execution period of the specific operation according to the occurrence of the RTC state, the operation for the specific operation means is not accepted even though the specific display prompting the user to operate the specific operation means is displayed. If such a thing occurs frequently, the interest in the game may be reduced due to the lack of progress in the production. Therefore, of the frame-side movable decorations provided on the door frame 3 side (for example, the operation button 410 operably provided, the sword decoration 5001 and the like), the operation effect within the symbol variation according to the big hit determination. The operation means (for example, the operation button 410) having a relatively high occurrence rate should not be used as one of the movable decorations that can be operated at the movable body operation timing within the RTC state (specific state). It is desirable to do. In this case, during the operation period of the movable decorative body according to the occurrence of the RTC state, there is an operation opportunity for the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) in which the ratio of occurrence of the operation effect within the symbol variation is relatively high. When it is given, it is desirable that the display related to the operation instruction image and the effect reception (predetermined effect corresponding to the effect reception) when the operation is performed are executed normally.

That is, of the frame-side movable decorations provided on the door frame 3 side (for example, the operation button 410 that is provided so as to be able to operate (for example, vibrate), the sword decoration 5001 and the like), the symbol variation according to the big hit determination. Of the movable decorative body that can be operated at a movable body operation time in the RTC state (specific state) by operating a specific operation means (for example, a sword decorative body 5001) having a relatively low occurrence rate of operation effect in the inside. By using it as one, the movable ornament (for example, the sword ornament 5001) is in a state of being subjected to a specific operation according to the occurrence of the RTC state, but the movable ornament ( For example, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the effect time for giving an operation opportunity according to the result of the big hit determination is reached for the sword ornament 5001).

In addition, a frame-side movable decorative body provided on the door frame 3 side (preferably, a specific operation means in which a ratio of occurrence of operation effects within a pattern variation is relatively low) is a movable body in an RTC state (specific state). When it is used as one of the movable decorative bodies that can be operated at the time of operation, when the RTC state occurs, as an operation independent of the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, It is desirable to perform an operation using the frame-side movable ornament (for example, the sword ornament 5001). According to such a configuration, when the special operation (see FIG. 374) or the restoring operation (see FIG. 375) is performed on any of the three movable ornaments A, B, and C, Also, it becomes possible to perform an operation that does not conform to the pattern variation due to the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) without being affected (delayed or the like) by performing these operations. In this case, it is desirable that all of the three movable ornaments A, B, and C be used as a board-side movable ornament. As a result, even if any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is restored, the possibility of interference with the movable decorative bodies is eliminated, and the movable decorative bodies are provided on the door frame 3 side. It becomes possible to execute the operation by the frame-side movable decorative body in parallel.

Then, on this, after the RTC state (specific state) occurs, the frame-side movable decorative body (preferably, a specific operation means (for example, a sword decorative body) in which the occurrence ratio of the operation effect within the pattern variation is relatively low. When the time required to complete the operation (operation according to the occurrence of the RTC state) that does not conform to the symbol variation by 5001)) is “specific time”, any of the effect patterns according to the big hit determination is executed. Even in the case, as long as the "specific time" does not elapse at least after the symbol variation is started (the effect pattern is started), the predetermined operation opportunity giving timing in the effect pattern (here, the frame side movable decoration) It is desirable to make settings related to each effect pattern (internal operation opportunity giving timing) so that an operation opportunity for the body (for example, an operation opportunity for the sword decoration 5001) does not arrive.

According to such a configuration, in FIG. 374 and its another example, and in FIG. 375 and its another example, even if the symbol variation having any effect pattern is started at the timing Rt2a, within the symbol variation By the time the operation opportunity is given to the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001), the operation by the frame-side movable decorative body according to the occurrence of the RTC state (according to the occurrence of the RTC state Since the (operation) is already completed and it is possible to receive the effect, it becomes possible to enhance the effect when the RTC state occurs without sacrificing the effect on the symbol variation side.

Further, as described above, considering that the normal production control is allowed only in the symbol variation after the symbol variation that is first digested after the RTC state occurs, the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, As for the operation (the operation according to the occurrence of the RTC state) that does not follow the pattern variation by the sword ornament 5001), the execution can be started based on the occurrence of the RTC state, while the RTC state occurs. Since the pattern variation that is first digested after that will have to start after this, the frame side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is delayed by the delay time (timing Rt2 to Rt2a). ), it is possible to allow a margin to precede the completion of an operation that does not conform to the symbol variation.

In addition, when the operation when the RTC state is generated by the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is executed as an operation independent of the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, At the time of execution, it is determined whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the frame-side movable decorative body, and when it is determined that the abnormality has occurred, a special mode including a restoration operation is performed instead of the normal mode operation. It is desirable to perform the operation by the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) or perform the restoring operation and then perform the operation in the normal state mode as the subsequent operation. In this case, the "special mode including the restoring operation" also restores (returns to the original position) the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) in an operating mode different from the "normal operating mode". It is sufficient if it is sufficient, and for example, it may be the minimum operation mode required for returning to the frame-side movable ornament (for example, the sword ornament 5001).

Then, the operation when the RTC state is generated by the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is “normal mode”, “special mode including recovery operation”, and Even if the operation is performed in any of the following manners in which the normal-time operation is performed, as long as the operation is not completed, the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is not used. It is more desirable to make settings for each effect pattern so that the timing at which an operation opportunity is given does not arrive. With such a configuration, no matter which of the effect patterns according to the big hit determination is executed at the timing Rt2a, when the RTC state is generated by the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001). Regardless of whether the operation is performed in the normal mode or the mode when the abnormality is determined, the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is displayed only after the operation is completed. It becomes possible to give an operation opportunity to the user.

Further, when an operation opportunity for the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is received as an effect, at least one of the three movable decorative objects A, B, C is operated based on the effect reception. You may make it possible to perform a specific movable effect. However, in this case, when an operation opportunity is given to the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) within the pattern variation started at the timing Rt2a, the operation by the frame-side movable decorative body (RTC) Even if the operation according to the occurrence of the state has already been completed, if the sequential operation by the three movable ornaments A, B, and C is still in the stage of being executed, the operation opportunity is given. It is no longer possible to receive staging, and there is concern that the interest in playing games will decline. Therefore, when the time from the timing Rt2 required until the sequential operation by the three movable ornaments A, B, and C is performed in the normal time mode is set as the "special time", the big hit determination is made. Regardless of which one of the effect patterns according to is executed, as long as neither the “specific time” nor the “special time” has elapsed since the symbol variation was started (the effect pattern was started) , A predetermined operation opportunity giving timing in the effect pattern (here, each effect pattern (internal operation opportunity giving timing) so that the frame-side movable ornament (for example, the operation opportunity for the sword ornament 5001) does not arrive) It is desirable to make the settings related to.

When the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is also in an abnormal state within the period of timing Rt1 to Rt2, the restoration processing for the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is performed. It is desirable that the timing Rt2 arrives with the abnormal state intentionally maintained.

On the other hand, of the three movable ornaments A, B, and C, the specific movable ornament (for example, the movable ornament A whose operation sequence is early, the movable ornament which takes a long time to restore, etc.) When the abnormal state is within the period of the timings Rt1 to Rt2, the restoration process (restoration operation) for the movable ornament is prohibited, but the movable ornament different from the specific movable ornament (for example, the operation sequence is slow). When the movable decorative body B (or the movable decorative body C) or the movable decorative body that requires a short time for the restoration operation is in an abnormal state within the period of timing Rt1 to Rt2, the movable decorative body is restored. The processing (restoring operation) may be performed without prohibiting it. This means that, for example, the restoration process (restoration operation) for the movable decorative body B (or the movable decorative body C) does not have to be completed by the timing Rt2, and the movable decorative body A performs the movement when the RTC occurs. This is because if it can be completed in the meantime, the sequential operations of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, C can be executed in a normal mode.

In addition, the timing at which a series of operations of the above three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is started after the RTC state occurs, and the operation of the frame side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is started. It may be different from the timing.

[Restoring process for movement abnormality with less influence on movement production]
As described above, in this pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a), when a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state (more accurately, and when the specific state does not occur), it corresponds to a symbol variation When the restoration operation timing (for example, the start timing or the stop timing of the pattern variation) comes, the process that causes the specific movable decoration body to perform the predetermined restoration operation can be executed. However, if such a restoration process is executed regardless of the state of the production, there is a concern that the enjoyment of the game will be reduced.

For example, it is assumed that the above-mentioned "start time of symbol variation" is set as the "restoration operation time corresponding to symbol variation". Then, as shown in FIG. 376, assuming that the timing tm1 at which a new symbol variation starts in a situation where the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state has arrived, the peripheral control MPU 1511a, at least, performs each of the following processes. Will be executed.
-Based on having acquired the command sent from the main control MPU1310a side when the symbol variation is started, the effect pattern according to the symbol variation is set, and the set effect pattern is subjected to the symbol variation. Among them, based on the acquisition of the command sent from the main control MPU 1310a side when the process for effecting the production/symbol fluctuation is started (based on the arrival of the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol fluctuation), identification Processing to perform a predetermined restoration operation on the movable ornament of

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 376, it is assumed that a "specific production pattern that allows a specific movable ornament to be operated at a specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation" is set as the production pattern. Therefore, when the timing tm1 arrives, the performance progress related to "a specific effect pattern that allows a specific movable ornament to be operated at a specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation" and a predetermined restoration operation for the specific movable ornament. There will be situations where the processes to be performed are parallel to each other.

In general, in the pachinko machine 1 in which such a specific effect pattern can be executed, an effect pattern (relatively expected degree of expectation) that has a pairwise relationship with the specific effect pattern. A low performance pattern) is prepared. Then, in the production pattern having a paired relationship (production pattern of relatively low expectation), toward the specific timing tm2 even though the specific movable decorative body is not operated at the specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation. The same form of effect as in the case of "a specific effect pattern (an effect pattern with a relatively high degree of expectation) in which a specific movable decorative body can be operated at a specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation" is performed. It In this way, by providing two effect patterns that are in a pairwise relationship in terms of effect (effect pattern that moves a specific movable decorative body and effect pattern that does not move a specific movable decorative body), at the specific timing tm2. (For example, a predetermined time until the specific timing tm2 arrives), a predetermined effect having a performance effect of whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates (for example, a performance display of whether or not the movable decorative object operates). Is made executable, and the enjoyment of the game is favorably maintained due to such performance.

However, after the variation of the symbol is started, even when the specific timing tm2 arrives, there is a case where the process of performing the predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable decorative body is still in the execution state. Despite the arrival of tm2, it becomes clear that the specific movable ornament is in a situation in which it cannot perform a production operation. That is, in this case, even if the predetermined effect is performed at the specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation, the function as the predetermined effect having the effect of whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates may be lost. , There is a concern that the interest in games will decline.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 376, the production progress related to “a specific production pattern that allows a specific movable decorative body to be operated at a specific timing tm2” among the production patterns, and a predetermined development for the specific movable decorative body. When a situation occurs in which the processing for performing the restoration operation (restoration processing based on the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation) appears in parallel, irrespective of the situation of the restoration, the "specific timing until the specific timing tm2 arrives" The "processing for causing the movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoration operation" is completed. It should be noted that various methods can be adopted as the “processing for performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body”, but in the following description, “whether the abnormal state is resolved, It is assumed that "a process of repeatedly performing a restoring operation on a specific movable decorative body is performed until the predetermined upper limit number is reached".

More specifically, with regard to the “processing for causing a predetermined restoration operation to be performed on a specific movable decorative body”, restoration from the abnormal state is completed depending on the degree of abnormality of the specific movable decorative body. It takes different time to be done. For example, when the abnormal state is recovered and the original position is restored (restored) only by performing the first restoration operation on the specific movable ornament, “a predetermined restoration for the specific movable ornament is performed”. The timing tx at which the "processing for performing the operation" is completed comes at a relatively early time, but the number of times this is repeated until the restoration operation for the specific movable decorative body fails and is restored (restored) As the number of times increases, the timing tx at which the “processing for causing the predetermined movable decorative body to perform the predetermined restoring operation” is completed is delayed and delayed. Then, at the latest, if the restoration operation for the specific movable decoration fails and the restoration operation has not been performed yet, but the timing tx is exceeded when the restoration operation is performed once again, the specific movable decoration is deleted. By ending the process of performing the predetermined restoration operation while keeping the body in an abnormal state, the process of performing the predetermined restoration operation is finished before the specific timing tm arrives regardless of the restoration state. Like

In addition, when it takes x hours to perform a restoring operation for a specific movable ornament once, a symbol of one time is established so that a relationship of “x time×n times <time of timing tm1 to tm2” is established. The upper limit number of times n at which a predetermined restoration operation is repeated within a fluctuation is set, and the processing for performing the predetermined restoration operation is terminated even if the upper limit number of times n has not been restored (restored). By doing so, the process of performing the predetermined restoration operation may be ended before the specific timing tm2 arrives regardless of the restoration situation.

According to such a configuration, the production progress according to the specific production pattern that allows the specific movable decoration to be operated at the specific timing tm2 within the pattern variation, and the predetermined restoration operation for the specific movable decoration are performed in parallel. When a situation occurs, the process of performing a predetermined restoration operation is ended before the specific timing tm2 arrives regardless of the restoration situation. That is, in this case, not only when the specific movable decorative body is restored before the specific timing tm2 arrives, but also when the specific movable decorative body is not restored, the specific movable decorative body is restored at the specific timing tm2. Since the movable decorative body comes to be in a stopped state, it is possible to favorably maintain the performance of whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates when the specific timing tm2 arrives. become. For example, even if the specific movable decoration is in a stopped state at a position different from the original position, some behavior may be triggered by the arrival of the specific timing tm2, or the movable decoration does not operate. Even if the lamp included in the movable decorative body may emit light (when the lamp included in the movable decorative body emits light when the production operation by the movable decorative body is performed), it is possible to give a hope. ..

However, in reality, when the specific movable decorative body is performing a restoring operation while the above-described predetermined effect is being performed, it has a directivity whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates. The function as the predetermined presentation may be lost. Therefore, with respect to the timing tx at which the "processing for causing the predetermined movable decorative body to perform the predetermined restoring operation" is completed, the timing tx may be ended before the predetermined effect is started regardless of the state of the restoration. It can be said that it is more desirable to keep the interest in the game.

As the predetermined effect, for example, a specific movable decorative body operates “when a specific display result (for example, a display result that an attack hits) appears in the super reach effect, and when the specific display result does not appear, the operation is performed. It is possible to exemplify "a display effect that first appears in a manner that fuels whether or not a specific display result appears" when the specific movable decorative body is " When a player operates according to an effect received by the player's operation (or receives an effect but does not operate), "an effect that causes a specific display that prompts the player to perform an operation" Can be illustrated.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 376, at the timing tx at which the “processing for causing the specific movable decorative body to perform the predetermined restoring operation” is completed, the specific movable decorative body is restored (restored) from the abnormal state. It is assumed that the normal state has been reached. In this way, even when the fluctuation starts (or the "restoration operation time" such as the last time the symbol stops), the specific timing tm2 within the symbol fluctuation comes under the condition that the symbol is restored to the normal state. Then, it is possible to perform the effect operation of the specific movable decorative body at the specific timing tm2.

On the other hand, at the timing tx at which the "processing for causing the specific movable decorative body to perform the predetermined restoration operation" is completed, the specific movable decorative body cannot be restored (restored) from the abnormal state and remains in the abnormal state. When the specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation arrives, the stopped state is maintained until at least the specific timing tm2 (more accurately, timing tx) the symbol variation ends and the next restoration operation timing comes. Becomes That is, in this case, although it is not possible to perform the effect operation of the specific movable decorative body at the specific timing tm2, it is possible to favorably maintain the effect of the specific movable decorative body to operate. When the specific effect pattern is based on the big hit variation, the big hit pattern is stopped even if the specific movable decorative body does not perform the effect at the specific timing tm2, thereby providing a surprise effect. Will be able to.

However, in recent years, pachinko machines have come to be provided with a movable decorative body that performs a multi-step movement with a more complicated structure, and such a movable decorative body has a longer restoration process until it is completed. It often takes time. However, on the other hand, in the case of a specific effect pattern that allows a specific movable decorative body to be operated at a specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation, or an effect pattern that has a paired relationship with this, when those effect patterns are started. Even if the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, within a time period shorter than the time period required from the start of the pattern variation until the specific timing tm2 arrives (more preferably, the time period until the predetermined effect is performed). As described above, it is required to end the process of performing the predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable ornament. That is, in this case, each time the specific movable decorative body is brought into an abnormal state, it can be restored only in an emergency measure and in a simple manner, and this may accelerate deterioration as the specific movable decorative body. It can be.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, a special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration/diagnosis) is prepared, and from the main control MPU1310a side when the symbol variation starts. When the special effect pattern is selected based on the command sent out, while the special effect pattern is effected (while the symbol variation corresponding to the special effect pattern is being performed), a specific movement is possible. The decorative body is controlled so as not to operate and a predetermined effect (for example, effect display indicating whether or not to operate) does not appear. Then, as shown in FIGS. 377(a) and 377(d), as a result of the arrival of the timing tm11 at which the symbol variation starts in the situation where the specific movable decorative body is in the abnormal state, the production progress according to the special production pattern When a situation occurs in which the processing for performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body is performed in parallel, at least while the special effect pattern is being performed (the period until the symbol is stopped) Tries to continue the restoration process without ending it.

More specifically, in the restoration process started from the timing tm11, the abnormal state is resolved and the original position is restored (restored) only by performing the first restoration operation on the specific movable ornament. Even in such a case, the restoration process is not ended at least while the special effect pattern is being performed, and the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body is executed over the entire period.

According to such a configuration, when a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, the restoration process in a more full-scale mode is aimed at when the above-mentioned special effect pattern is performed (for example, normal diagnosis is performed even after restoration). Since it becomes possible to perform additional execution), this special production pattern will function as a production pattern for restoration/diagnosis, and will be carefully restored by the player as well. You will be able to enjoy the subsequent productions with peace of mind by watching the situation. In this sense, it is desirable to prepare the special effect pattern so that it can be selected only when the big hit judgment fails.
In addition, it is desirable that the display contents on the effect display device 1600 also have a unique display mode such as “This is an effect pattern for restoration/diagnosis.

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 377(a) and 377(d), the timing tm11 arrives when the specific movable decorative body is in the abnormal state. When the special effect pattern is performed as described above, even after the timing tm12 when the special effect pattern is ended, the restoration process started at the timing tm11 is not ended and is continued. According to such a configuration, a constraint such as "although there is an abnormality in a specific movable ornament, the restoration process must be executed for each unit in which a pattern variation is performed" is eliminated. Therefore, it becomes possible to perform the restoration process in a more authentic manner.

However, at the timing tm12 when the special effect pattern is finished, if the hold exhaustion is not interrupted and an effect pattern corresponding to a new symbol change is performed, the next restoration operation time (here, next time The design fluctuation start time) will come. At this time, if the restoration process started at the timing tm11 is still continuing, it is determined that the specific movable decorative body is still in an abnormal state (such as not located at the original position). Will be done. Then, if there is a case where a restoration process for a specific movable decorative body is newly started based on the determination, it can be substantially completed within the time when one symbol variation is performed. Since only restoration processing can be performed, the content of the processing is naturally limited, and it may be possible to accelerate deterioration as the specific movable ornament by not being able to sufficiently deal with the abnormality. ..

In this respect, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment is in a state of performing the restoration process for a specific movable decorative body, as shown in FIGS. 377(b) and 377(d). When the next restoration operation time (here, the next symbol variation start time) arrives, the restoration processing in the execution state is not ended and this is continued in such a manner that it crosses the next restoration operation time. .. According to such a configuration, even if there is a suspension during the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body, "when an abnormality occurs in the specific movable decorative body," Since the restoration process must be executed for each unit in which the symbol variation is performed" is eliminated, it becomes possible to perform the restoration process in a more serious manner.

However, as shown in FIGS. 377 (c) and (d), as a result of a new symbol variation being started when the restoration process for the specific movable ornament is being executed, the new symbol variation As a result, there may be a case where "a specific effect pattern that allows a specific movable decorative body to be operated at a specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation". Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 377(a) to 377(c), regardless of the status of the game or the performance (and the status of the restoration, etc.) after the special effect pattern is finished, the operation is started from the timing tm11. Regarding the timing tx at which the "processing for performing the predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable ornament" is completed, the time required until the specific timing tm2 within the next symbol variation arrives (more preferably, It is desirable to end the process within a shorter time than the time until a predetermined effect is performed. Even with such a configuration, in addition to the time of the timings tm11 to tm12 (the time required to digest the special effect pattern), the specific movement is performed over a relatively long time until the time of the timings tm12 to tx is ended. It is possible to continue the restoration process for the decorative body.

In addition, when a situation in which the special effect pattern (restoration/diagnosis effect pattern) is continuously executed appears after the special effect pattern (restoration/diagnosis effect pattern) is finished, Restoration processing is not ended within a new special production pattern (production pattern for restoration/diagnosis) and the pattern variation (production pattern) is repeated three times or more (after one restoration processing is started, the one The restoration process may be continued over two or more restoration operation times).

In the example shown in FIG. 377, at the timing tx when the “processing of causing the specific movable decoration body to perform the predetermined restoration operation” is completed, the specific movable decoration body is restored (restored) from the abnormal state and is normal. The situation is assumed. In this way, by continuing one restoration process across the next restoration operation time (here, the next symbol variation start time), it is a serious abnormal state that could not be restored in the past. However, this can be restored, and the specific movable decorative body can be operated at the specific timing tm2.

On the other hand, despite the fact that the one restoration process is continued across the next restoration operation time (here, the next symbol variation start time), the specific movable ornament is abnormal at the timing tx. When the state cannot be restored (restored), the symbol variation is ended from the timing tx and the stopped state is maintained until the next restoration operation time comes further. That is, in this case, although it is not possible to perform the effect operation of the specific movable decorative body at the specific timing tm2, it is possible to favorably maintain the effect of the specific movable decorative body to operate. When the specific effect pattern is based on the big hit variation, the big hit pattern is stopped even if the specific movable decorative body does not perform the effect at the specific timing tm2, thereby providing a surprise effect. Will be able to.

In addition, in a situation in which the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state and the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body is not executed, the specific operation is performed every time the restoration operation time (here, the symbol variation start time) arrives. If the restoration process for the movable ornament is repeatedly performed, if the specific movable ornament has a failure that cannot be restored, the specific movable ornament cannot be restored. It is feared that amusement of the game will be deteriorated by repeating the restoration process for the body. Therefore, even though the restoration operation time has reached the predetermined upper limit number after the specific movable decorative body is brought into an abnormal state (the number of executions of the restoration process (specific movable decorative body) reaches the predetermined upper limit number). However, if the abnormal state is not restored, it is desirable not to newly start the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body even if a new restoration operation time comes thereafter.

However, on the other hand, after a specific movable decorative body is put into an abnormal state, only a special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration/diagnosis) is continuously executed (started) by the predetermined upper limit number. If a situation occurs in which an effect pattern (for example, a specific effect pattern) different from the special effect pattern (reproduction/diagnosis effect pattern) is executed, a predetermined upper limit number of special effect patterns and their You may make it continue one restoration process over the next production pattern. That is, in this case, after the specific movable decorative body is brought into the abnormal state, the restoration operation timing has reached the predetermined upper limit number but has not been restored from the abnormal state. Even when the "+1"th restoration operation time comes, the restoration processing for the specific movable ornament is continued without being completed. As described above, regarding the aspect in which one restoration process is continued across the restoration operation time, the predetermined upper limit number is set no matter how many times the restoration operation time comes while the one restoration process is continued. It is desirable that the count of the above is treated as one restoration process so as not to be terminated so that the restoration process in a more serious manner is not hindered.

By the way, regarding such restoration processing (restoration processing performed based on the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation), a board-side movable decorative body (for example, a back front decoration unit 3100 or a back surface) provided on the game board 5 side is provided. In addition to the middle movable production unit 3200, the specific decorative member SDY (slaters, etc.), the frame-side movable decorative body provided on the door frame 3 side is basically executed in the same manner as described above. It However, of the frame-side movable decorations provided on the door frame 3 side, the frame-side movable decorations that are also used as the operating means (for example, the operation button 410 operably provided and the sword decoration 5001) In some cases, it may be restored (restored) in a manner different from that of the above-described specific movable decorative body (board-side movable decorative body).

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, as described above, during the period in which the design variation is performed, the movable operation in which the operation opportunity giving effect of giving the operation opportunity to the sword ornament 5001 is executed is executed. A system effect pattern (for example, the effect pattern shown in FIG. 341) is prepared. Also, as described above, in such an operation opportunity giving effect, "processing for moving the sword decoration 5001 from the original position to the operation position by a predetermined driving force (see FIG. 341(f))", "Processing for generating an effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 (see FIG. 341(f))", and further "display for prompting operation (character display such as "pushing in" or bar display indicating remaining time of effect reception period" Processing (see FIG. 341(f))” is performed. As a result, when the sword decoration 5001 in the state of being moved to the operation position is operated (in this case, pushed in) and the effect is received, based on the reception of the effect, the “specific decoration member SDY (shadow product) ) And the like (see FIG. 341(g)) for performing a production operation of the board-side movable decorative body" and "Process for changing display content (see FIG. 341(g))". Become. It should be noted that the board-side movable decorative body that is produced in this processing may be the specific movable decorative body described in FIGS. 376 and 377.

However, the "processing of moving the sword decoration 5001 from the original position to the operation position by a predetermined driving force" in the operation opportunity giving effect is not executed when the sword decoration 5001 is in an abnormal state and is normally performed. While it can be executed when the sword decoration body 5001 is in a normal state, it is possible to execute the "processing for generating a performance reception period for the sword decoration body 5001" and the "processing for displaying an operation prompt". It can be executed both at a certain time and in an abnormal state. Therefore, in the movable operation system effect pattern, even if the sword ornament 5001 is in an abnormal state, if the player who saw the "display for prompting the operation" operates the sword ornament 5001 and accepts the effect, “Processing for effecting the operation of the board-side movable decorative body such as the specific decorative member SDY (blend material)” and “processing for causing a change in the display content on the effect display device 1600” are performed respectively. Not only that, in the production pattern of the movable operation system, even if the sword decoration body 5001 is in an abnormal state, the sword decoration body 5001 receives an external force by such an operation by the player and the operation portion moves to cause the abnormal state. It may happen that the problem is resolved by itself.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a frame-side movable decorative body (for example, an operation button 410 operably provided or a sword decorative body 5001) that is also used as an operating unit is provided. In the case of an abnormal state, a returning process of applying a driving force for returning the frame-side movable decorative body (operating means) to the original position (in the mode described with reference to FIGS. 376 and 377). Restoration processing), at each timing of "the above-mentioned restoration operation time (here, the start time of the symbol variation)" and "after the production is received by the operation by the player in the production pattern of the movable operation system". It is feasible.

According to such a configuration, when the board-side movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, the board-side movable decoration is aimed at the timing such as the start or stop of the symbol fluctuation (more strictly, after the start or the stop). While the process to restore the ornament is performed, when the frame-side movable ornament is in an abnormal state, not only the timing such as the start and stop of the symbol fluctuation, but also the unique timing (during the fluctuation period) Of the above, the frame-side movable decorative body (operation) is aimed at an external force (operation by the player) applied to the frame-side movable decorative body (operation means) to eliminate the abnormal state). Since the processing for restoring (returning) the means) is performed, it is expected that the original position return of the frame-side movable decorative body (operating means) in the abnormal state can be realized at an early stage. ..

FIG. 378 is a time chart showing an example of processing until the sword decoration 5001 is returned to its original position when the sword decoration 5001 is used as such a frame side movable decoration (operation means). is there.

As shown in FIG. 378, a production pattern of a movable operation system (a production pattern in which an operation opportunity giving effect that gives an operation opportunity to the sword ornament 5001 is performed during the period in which the design variation is performed) is executed. Therefore, it is assumed that the “processing of moving the sword decoration 5001 from the original position to the operation position” is executed at the timing tm21. Then, when the sword ornament 5001 is located at the operation position, "a process for generating an effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001", "a display prompting an operation (character display such as "pushing in", or an effect acceptance period) When the player operates the sword decoration 5001 and receives the effect (timing tm22) while the bar display indicating the remaining time of the) is being executed (timing tm22), "a specific decoration member SDY (slave character etc.) The "processing for effecting the board-side movable decorative body" and the "processing for changing the display content on the effect display device 1600" are respectively performed. In the example shown in FIG. 378, the specific movable decorative body described in FIGS. 376 and 377 is operated as the board-side movable decorative body based on the reception of the effect.

In this respect, in the example shown in FIG. 378, at the timing tm22 when the effect is received, an abnormality occurs in the sword decoration 5001 and the sword decoration 5001 is not returned to its original position. It is assumed that another abnormality occurs in the body (movable decorative body on the board side) and it cannot be returned to its original position. At this time, a determination that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decoration 5001 and a determination that an abnormality has occurred in a specific movable ornament are made respectively, but an abnormality has occurred in the specific movable ornament. For the determination of the effect, neither the specific notification sound nor the display notification associated therewith is executed, and the determination of the abnormality of the sword decoration 5001 is accompanied by the specific notification sound and the display. It is desirable to perform at least one of the notifications. This is what the sword ornament 5001 is "placed within the reach of the player (door frame 3)", and if it is notified that this is in an abnormal state, restoration work from the abnormal state can be performed. While it is expected to be performed by the player's hand, the specific movable ornament is "the one placed on the place (game board 5) out of reach of the player", and this is in an abnormal state. This is because, when the notification is made, nothing can be assisted as the player, and merely emphasizing that the movable effect is not executed can promote the deterioration of the entertainment of the game. However, it is desirable that such notification be terminated when a predetermined time has elapsed.

More specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 378, the "moving process of the specific movable decorative body" is being performed based on the reception of the effect at the timing tm22, and the specific movable decorative body is abnormal. Although it occurs, the "processing for changing the display content on the effect display device 1600" is executed as usual to recognize that an abnormality has occurred in a specific movable decorative body. It is desirable to make it difficult. Then, after this, the sword decoration 5001 and the specific movable decoration are both in the abnormal state, and the effect pattern of the movable operation system is advanced, and the symbol variation is stopped at the timing tm23. ..

In the example shown in FIG. 378, when the timing tm23 comes, the symbol fluctuation which is already in the pending state is to be immediately digested (for example, after 0.6 seconds) (start), and the new symbol. It is assumed that the specific effect pattern described in FIG. 376 is executed as the effect pattern according to the change. That is, in the specific effect pattern, the specific movable decorative body is operated for effect at a timing tm2 when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the pattern change, but the restoration operation time (here, when the pattern change starts ), the timing tx at which the "processing for performing a predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable decorative body" is completed is within a time shorter than the timing tm2 (more preferably, regardless of the restoration situation). As described above, the process is ended before the predetermined effect is started).

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to the present embodiment, based on the fact that the restoration operation time (here, the time when the pattern variation starts) has arrived for the sword decoration body 5001 as well, "a specific movable decoration It is possible to execute a process of giving a driving force (applying a driving force) so as to return it to the original position in parallel with at least a part of the action of "the process of performing a predetermined restoring action on the body". Moreover, the timing at which such "processing for causing the sword ornament 5001 to perform a predetermined restoration operation" is completed is also within a time period shorter than the timing tm2 regardless of the state of restoration (more preferably, the predetermined rendering effect). Until it starts).

According to such a configuration, when the abnormal state of the specific movable decorative body is eliminated and the movable effect by the specific movable decorative body is performed at the timing tm2, the restoring operation by the sword decorative body 5001 is performed. Since it is not continued, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of play when the restoration operation and the movable effect are performed in parallel.

Note that in the example shown in FIG. 378, the timing at which the restoration process for the specific movable ornament is started and ended is the same as the timing at which the restoration process for the sword ornament 5001 is started and finished. However, only one of the timings may be the same or both of the timings may be different.

As for the “processing for performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable ornament,” as described with reference to FIG. 377, when a special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration/diagnosis) appears. Not only is it possible to continue after the special effect pattern is finished, but also the symbol fluctuations that are in the hold state after the special effect pattern is finished are immediately (for example, 0.6 seconds) digested (started). In such a situation, when the next restoration operation time (here, the next symbol variation start time) is crossed, the processing (one restoration processing) is not ended but can be executed in such a manner as to be continued. It is desirable that the "processing for causing the decorative body 5001 to perform a predetermined restoration operation" can be executed in the same manner (the manner described with reference to FIG. 377). That is, in this case, also regarding the “processing for causing the sword ornament 5001 to perform a predetermined restoration operation”, when the special effect pattern appears, the next restoration operation time (here, the next symbol variation start time) is straddled. Although it will be executed in the form, between the start of the next symbol variation and the time required until the timing tm2 arrives, it is to be terminated regardless of the status of restoration. Become.

Also, with respect to the sword ornament 5001 as well, after this is brought into an abnormal state, only the special effect pattern (reproduction/diagnosis effect pattern) is continuously executed for the predetermined upper limit number, and then the special effect pattern ( When a situation occurs in which an effect pattern (for example, a specific effect pattern) that is different from the effect pattern for restoration/diagnosis appears, the special effect pattern for the predetermined upper limit number and the next effect pattern are straddled. One restoration process may be continued for the sword ornament 5001.

Then, in the example shown in FIG. 378, it is assumed that the restoration process for the specific movable ornament and the restoration process for the sword ornament 5001 are completed at the timing tx, but the restoration fails in both cases. Therefore, at timing tm2, the movable effect by the specific movable decorative body is not performed, and the specific effect pattern is advanced while the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific movable decorative body are both in the abnormal state. Then, at timing tm24, the variation of the symbol will be stopped.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, an external force (does not apply a driving force by a motor or the like) to a specific movable decorative body within a period from timing tx to tm2 in a specific effect pattern. Even if it is returned to the original position (to be in the normal state) by, the effect operation by the specific movable ornament is not performed at the timing tm2. That is, it can be said that an external force (not applying a driving force by a motor or the like) is applied to a specific movable decorative body within a period of timings tx to tm2, which itself is an abnormal situation. Even in the situation of low reliability, even if a specific movable decoration is used, it is highly likely that it will fail. Therefore, it is possible to prevent this from happening. It can be said that it is desirable to do.

In addition, when the restoration process for the sword decoration 5001 fails and the abnormal state occurs again, it is desirable that neither the specific notification sound nor the display notification is performed.
That is, if the restoration processing for the sword decoration 5001 fails and the notification is given each time the abnormal state is again generated, it gives a misunderstanding that it is the responsibility of the player that the abnormal state is not resolved. Therefore, the above notification (at least one of a specific notification sound and a display notification) should be given only when the first abnormality occurs from the normal state to the abnormal state so as to encourage the repair work by the player. Is desirable.

In the example shown in FIG. 378, the sword ornament 5001 and the specific movable ornament are restored by the restoration process triggered by any restoration operation timing (here, the symbol variation start timing) that comes after the timing tm24. It is assumed that only a specific movable ornament recovers from the abnormal state. Then, while only the sword ornament 5001 is in the abnormal state, the movable operation system effect pattern is being performed again, and as shown in FIG. 378, the sword ornament 5001 in the abnormal state at the timing tm25 is If the production is accepted by the operation by the player, it is possible to expect that the abnormality that has occurred in the sword decoration 5001 has been eliminated by such an operation.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to the present embodiment, when the player receives the sword decoration 5001 in the abnormal state at the timing tm25 by the player's operation, the sword decoration 5001 is then original. Driving force can be applied to return to the position (remain in the original position). At this time, considering that the movable effect by the specific movable ornament is performed based on the reception of the effect, the period in which the process for applying the driving force to return the sword ornament 5001 to the original position is performed (once The period when the return operation is successful) occurs after the movable effect by the specific movable decorative body is started, and the movable effect by the specific movable decorative body is ended (the specific movable decorative body returns to the original position). It is desirable to end the process before returning is performed in order to make it difficult to recognize that such a returning process is being executed. However, in view of the rare chance that the sword decoration 5001 that could not be restored by such an external force (operation by the player) is increasing, the sword decoration 5001 is in the original position. If the process of applying the driving force to restore the sword decoration (returning operation to the sword decoration 5001) fails, the sword decoration 5001 is used as the original until the period after the movable effect by the specific movable decoration is finished. The process of applying the driving force to return to the position is continuously executed (the returning operation for the sword decoration 5001 is executed again) so that the player can easily recognize the abnormal situation, and It is desirable to encourage them to help. However, even when this restoration process fails, it is desirable that neither the specific notification sound nor the display notification accompanying this is performed.

Then, in the example shown in FIG. 378, it is assumed that the returning process (returning to the original position) with respect to the sword decoration body 5001 using such an external force (operation by the player) has succeeded. The sword ornament 5001 and the specific movable ornament are both kept in the normal state, and the effect pattern of the movable operation system is advanced, and the symbol variation is stopped at the timing tm26.

Thus, according to the example shown in FIG. 378, the frame-side movable decorative body (sword decorative body 5001) that is also used as the operating means is set with respect to the board-side movable decorative body (specific movable decorative body). In addition to the restoration operation timing (at the time when the symbol fluctuation starts), the restoration operation timing (timing after the reception of the effect) using an external force (operation by the player) is set. That is, although the frame-side movable decorative body (sword decorative body 5001), which is also used as the operation means, is likely to be in an abnormal state because it is directly contacted by the player, Since an opportunity for returning to the position is given a lot and various methods (a method of returning only by applying the driving force, or a method of returning using at least an external force) are used as the returning method, the abnormal state is resolved. The possibility that the game will be played will increase and the decline in the interest in the game will be suppressed.

In addition, after the sword decoration 5001 in the abnormal state is received by the operation by the player, the process of applying the driving force for returning the sword decoration 5001 to the original position is started to change the symbol. The driving force may be applied to the sword decoration 5001 with a different content (different operation mode) from the restoration processing performed when the time (for example, the timing tm23) arrives. That is, since the processing is to restore the sword decoration 5001 by using an external force (operation by the player), it is possible to perform the processing differently from the processing when the external force is not used. It is desirable to increase the probability. In addition, the processing is executed in a simple manner such that the return processing is terminated within the symbol fluctuation regardless of the status of the return, and when the return fails, a more full-scale operation is performed at the next restore operation time. It is desirable that the restoration processing be performed.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 378, the restoration operation time (here, the symbol variation start time) has reached the predetermined upper limit number, and the restoration processing for the sword ornament 5001 has been executed for that number of times. Despite this, it is not restored from the abnormal state, and even if a new restoration operation time (here, the pattern variation start time) comes, the sword decoration 5001 does not newly start the restoration process, and is movable. Even when the sword decoration body 5001 in an abnormal state is received by the player's operation at the timing tm25 when the operation system production pattern is started, the sword decoration body 5001 is displayed after the production reception. It is desirable to perform a process of applying a driving force so as to return (stay at the original position) to the original position. That is, as described above, the returning process after the reception of the effect is performed when the possibility of returning the sword ornament 5001 that could not be restored by external force (operation by the player) is high. Therefore, it can be said that it is desirable to execute the processing without giving up even in the above-described situation where the return without external force is given up.
Therefore, "a process for generating an effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 (see FIG. 341(f))", "a display prompting an operation (character display such as "pushing in", and a bar indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) It is important that the processing (display) (see FIG. 341(f))” is also performed as usual even in the above-described situation where the return without the external force is given up.

In addition, when the first operation opportunity is given such that the sword ornament 5001 is pushed in at the operation position (moves to a specific detection position), and when it is in the original position (to the specific detection position). When the operation means is provided such that the second operation opportunity may be given such that it is operated), even if the production reception occurs at the second operation opportunity for the sword decoration 5001 in the abnormal state. The driving force for returning to the original position is not given, and the driving force for returning to the original position is given only when the production reception occurs in the first operation opportunity for the sword decoration 5001 in the abnormal state. It is desirable to do so. That is, even if the effect is received when the second operation opportunity is given, the amount of movement of the operation portion is relatively small, and therefore the possibility that the abnormal state has been eliminated is naturally expected to be low.

In addition, the process of applying the driving force for returning the sword decoration 5001 in the abnormal state to the original position after the sword decoration 5001 is received by the player's operation is not necessarily effect reception. It does not need to be executed on the condition that it has been performed, and may be executed after the performance reception period ends, for example.

In the example shown in FIGS. 374 to 378, the symbol variation start timing (further, the timing after the reception of the effect) is illustrated as the restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol variation, but the restoration operation timing is As long as the predetermined timing is reached at least on the condition that the symbol variation is executed, it may be used as at least one of the symbol variation start timing and the symbol variation stop timing. When the symbol fluctuation stop timing is used as the restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol fluctuation, the restoration process is started based on the command sent from the main control MPU 1310a side when the symbol fluctuation is stopped, and this start The restoration processing is ended until the timing tm2 in the specific production pattern that has been held down arrives, or is executed so as to extend until after the end of the special production pattern that has been held down, etc. Each of the above-mentioned processes will be performed.

In addition, the appearance frequency of the special effect pattern (reproduction/diagnosis effect pattern) may be different depending on the state of the game. For example, when a special effect state in which the operation frequency of the movable decorative body becomes high occurs, an abnormal state is likely to occur due to the increase in the operation frequency. Therefore, in the special effect state, the normal effect state It is desirable to be able to play the game so that the frequency of appearance of the special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration/diagnosis) is higher than that in the above case.

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) and the specific movable decorative body which are also used as the operating means are in an abnormal state. When the above special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration/diagnosis) is performed, as shown in FIG. 377, the abnormal state continues for a period after the effect pattern corresponding to the next symbol variation is started. It is possible to continuously execute one restoration process for the movable decorative body in. However, in this case, even if a new restoration operation timing (for example, a symbol variation start timing) arrives while one restoration processing is continuously executed, the restoration processing for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state is newly performed. It does not start, but continues the one restoration process that is already in the running state without ending it. Therefore, it is possible to move the restoration process separately from the movable decorative body that is the target of the restoration process. It becomes a problem at which timing to start the restoration process for the other movable decorative body when the decorative body newly becomes in an abnormal state.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 377, the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body started at the timing tm11 is performed after a new restoration operation time (next The start time of the symbol fluctuation) is continued without being terminated even when it crosses over. In this regard, a new abnormality occurs in a movable decorative body different from the specific movable decorative body between the timing tm11 and the arrival of a new restoration operation time (the start time of the next pattern change). In this case, at least one of the following methods 1 to 3 or "both method 1 and method 2" or "both method 1 and method 3" is adopted to perform restoration processing for the other movable decorative body. It is desirable to do.

Method 1: At least when there is a relationship such as "a specific movable decorative body is provided as a board-side movable decorative body, while another movable decorative body is provided as a frame-side movable decorative body" When a new restoration operation time (the start time of the next symbol variation) arrives while the one restoration process for the movable decorative body is continuously executed, the new restoration operation timing (the next symbol variation start time) ) Has arrived, a restoration process for another movable decorative body (frame-side movable decorative body) is newly started.

According to such a method 1, the new restoration operation timing (starting timing of the next symbol variation) is treated as invalid for the restoration processing for the specific movable ornament that is already in the execution state, It is treated as effective for another movable decorative body (frame side movable decorative body) for which the restoration processing is not yet in the execution state, and the other movable decorative body is triggered by the timing (new restoration operation time). The restoration process for the body (frame-side movable decoration body) can be newly started. That is, in this case, a situation occurs in which the restoration process for a specific movable decorative body (board-side movable decorative body) and the restoration process for another movable decorative body (frame-side movable decorative body) are simultaneously executed. There is no concern that interference will occur between the movable decorations, and early restoration of the movable decorations is expected.

Method 2: At least when there is a relationship such that "a specific movable decorative body and another movable decorative body are provided as board-side movable decorative bodies", one restoration process for the specific movable decorative body continues Even if a new restoration operation time (the start time of the next pattern change) arrives during execution, at that time, the restoration processing for another movable decorative body (frame side movable decorative body) is not started, and a specific After waiting for the completion of the one restoration process for the movable decorative body, another movable decorative body (frame side movable decoration) based on the arrival of the new restoration operation time (the start time of the next pattern change). The restoration process for the body should be newly started.

According to such a method 2, the new restoration operation timing (start timing of the next symbol variation) is treated as invalid for the restoration processing for the specific movable decorative body that is already in the execution state, It is treated as effective for another movable decorative body (frame side movable decorative body) for which the restoration processing is not yet in the execution state. In this regard, when the restoration process for another movable decorative body (frame-side movable decorative body) is started, it is waited until one restoration process for a specific movable decorative body is completed. There is no concern that interference will occur between the movable decorations, and early restoration of the movable decorations is expected.

Method 3: At least when there is a relationship such that "a specific movable decorative body and another movable decorative body are both provided as a board-side movable decorative body", one restoration process for the specific movable decorative body is continued. Even if a new restoration operation time (the start time of the next pattern change) arrives during execution, another movable decorative body is triggered by the arrival of the new restoration operation time (the start time of the next pattern change). It does not execute the restoration process for the other movable decorative body and waits for the completion of one restoration process for a specific movable decorative body, and then the restoration operation time that comes after that is used as a trigger. The restoration process for the decoration body is newly started.

According to the method 3 as described above, the new restoration operation time (the start time of the next symbol variation) is the restoration processing for the specific movable decorative body which is already in the execution state, and another movable decorative body which is not in the execution state yet. Will be treated as invalid for any of the restoration processing for the above, and even if a new abnormality occurs in another movable decorative body unless one restoration processing for a specific movable decorative body is completed. No processing for the abnormal state will be executed. That is, in this case, even if one movable decorative body becomes abnormal while another one of the specific movable decorative bodies is in the execution state, the movable decorative bodies can be carefully restored one by one. As a result, it becomes possible to sufficiently deal with the abnormality, and it is expected that the progress speed of deterioration of the movable decorative body is suppressed.

(Operation button operation confirmation period)
As described above, in this pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a), as an effect corresponding to the pattern game by the main control MPU 1310a, operation by driving the operation button 410 or the sword effect operation unit 5000 (sword decoration 5001) is possible. As described above, it is possible to execute an operation-time effect using the drive-type operation means (an effect in which not only the operation but also the degree of expectation of privilege award is suggested by driving). However, even though the operation-time production can be executed, if some kind of abnormality occurs in these operation means and various operation means cannot operate normally, the player can experience the operation-time production in a manner intended by the designer. There is a concern that it will be difficult to do so, and as a result, it may lead to a decline in the entertainment appeal. Therefore, in this pachinko machine 1, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, an operation confirmation period (arbitrary operation confirmation period and automatic operation confirmation period) described later is generated as a part of maintenance regarding whether or not the operation effect is executable. It is confirmed that the player can experience the effect at the time of the operation in the manner intended by the designer, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the entertainment level of the game.

Specifically, an operation confirmation period in which the operation buttons 410 of the effect operation unit 400 and the sword decoration 5001 of the sword effect operation unit 5000 can be checked for operation will be described with reference to FIG. 379. Below, for convenience, the operation confirmation of the operation button 410 in the production operation unit 400 will be described, but a similar operation confirmation period may be provided for the sword decoration 5001 in the sword production operation unit 5000. The operation confirmation period for the operation button 410 and the operation confirmation period for the sword decoration 5001 may be generated in parallel or sequentially. Further, in order to realize more reliable confirmation work for each member, an overlapping period is not provided between the operation confirmation period for the operation button 410 and the operation confirmation period for the sword ornament 5001. It is preferable to generate these sequentially. FIG. 379 is a time chart showing an operation state of the operation button 410 in a series of operation confirmation periods (an arbitrary operation confirmation period and an automatic operation confirmation period).

As described above, the operation button 410 can be changed between the normal state (initial position) in which it does not protrude from the effect operation unit 400 and the state (operation position) in which it protrudes from the effect operation unit 400. Specifically, the effect operation unit 400 has a lock mechanism and a spring mechanism, and in a normal state, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism so as not to protrude, but a predetermined protrusion start condition is satisfied. Then, the lock mechanism is unlocked, and the operation button 410 is projected by the spring mechanism. Further, in the state where the operation button 410 is projected, when the player pushes the operation button 410 until it reaches the position of the normal state, the operation button 410 is locked again by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state. The effect operation unit 400 also has a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for returning the operation button 410 from the protruded state to the normal state. When the operation button 410 is not operated so as to return to the normal state until the end condition is satisfied (until the predetermined time elapses after the predetermined protrusion start condition is satisfied), the operation button 410 is operated normally by the drive mechanism. It will be returned to the state.

In addition, the production operation unit 400 is provided with a normal position sensor that can detect that the operation button 410 is in a normal state and a protruding position sensor that can detect that the operation button 410 is in a protruding state. ing. That is, when the predetermined protrusion start condition is not satisfied, the operation button 410 should be in the normal state. In such a case, the normal position sensor indicates that the operation button 410 is in the normal state. By detecting, it can be determined that the operation button 410 is in the normal position. On the other hand, when the predetermined protrusion start condition is satisfied, the operation button 410 should be positioned in the protruded state. By detecting, it can be determined that the operation button 410 is in the normal position.

Further, the production operation unit 400 is provided with a press detection sensor 440 that can detect that the operation button 410 has been pressed. By such detection of the pressure detection sensor 440, it is possible to determine that the operation button 410 is pressed in a normal state or the operation button 410 in a protruding state is pressed to a normal state. ..

Further, as the effects set in the variation pattern, an effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state and an effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state are provided.
In the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state, for example, while the effect is being displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, the operation button 410 in the normal state is pressed or repeatedly hit according to the instruction, The pressing (operation) is detected, and a predetermined effect result can be derived. On the other hand, in the effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state, for example, the operation button 410 in the normal state is changed to the protruding state during execution of the effect on the game board side effect display device 1600. By pressing the operation button 410 in the protruding state to a normal state according to the instruction, the pressing (operation) is detected and a predetermined effect result can be derived. It should be noted that the effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state has higher expectation (big hit expectation) than the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state. That is, when the operation button 410 is in the protruding state, the operation button 410 can be pressed with a higher expectation than in the normal state.

As shown in FIG. 379, in the arbitrary operation confirmation period of the operation confirmation period, it is confirmed whether or not the operation button 410 normally operates in a state protruding from the normal state by the operator (player or hall). It can be realized by the administrator). Specifically, when a condition for generating an operation confirmation period, which will be described later, is satisfied, the arbitrary operation confirmation period is started, and the operation button 410 in the normal state for a predetermined time (10 seconds in this embodiment) which is the generation period. When the press detection status (operation detection status) is monitored and the press (operation) of the operation button 410 in the normal state is detected, the operation button 410 is projected based on the press detection (operation detection). Change to. On the other hand, even after the condition for generating the arbitrary operation confirmation period is satisfied (while the arbitrary operation confirmation period is generated), the depression (operation) of the operation button 410 in the normal state for a predetermined time is not detected. In this case, the optional operation confirmation period is ended after the elapse of the predetermined time. According to this, for the player or the hall manager who wants to confirm whether or not the operation button 410 is normally detected and operated, the operation button 410 may be pressed during the occurrence of the arbitrary operation confirmation period, and It is possible to give confirmation that the operation button 410 is normally detected and operate, and to execute/provide the operation effect using the operation button 410 at ease.

When it is detected that the operation button 410 in the protruding state is pressed before the predetermined time elapses after the operation button 410 is pressed to be in the protruding state and the operation button 410 is pressed to the normal state. The normal operation state is restored again, and the arbitrary operation confirmation period is ended when a predetermined time has elapsed. On the other hand, when the pressing of the operation button 410 in the protruding state is not detected before the predetermined time has elapsed, the operation button 410 is forcibly brought into the normal state by being driven after the predetermined time has elapsed. Will be returned. In addition, after the arbitrary operation confirmation period is generated, the operation button 410 is pressed to be in a protruding state, and when the operation button 410 is pressed again to return to the normal state, the arbitrary operation confirmation period is ended. In such a case, it is possible to prevent an unnecessary time from elapse of a predetermined time after confirmation that the operation button 410 is normally detected and operated.

The above-described operation confirmation period (arbitrary operation confirmation period) occurs when a predetermined generation condition is satisfied. In this example, as the condition for generating the operation confirmation period, the condition is satisfied when the demonstration effect is executed in order to avoid overlapping with the operation effect. Specifically, in the demonstration effect, there is no entry into the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004 for a certain period of time after the effect set in the variation pattern is finished, and the effect set in the variation pattern is It is an effect waiting for customers when it is not started (information about the progress of the symbol game by the main control MPU 1310a is not received for a certain period of time on the peripheral control MPU 1511a side), and it is suitable for avoiding the overlap with the operation effect. In this way, by using the execution time of the demonstration effect to generate the arbitrary operation confirmation period of the confirmation operation period, the operation button 410 can be used as a boring time that the effect set in the variation pattern is not started. Can be changed to a meaningful confirmation time of whether or not the normal detection and operation is performed.

The start of the demonstration effect is an instruction by the main control MPU 1310a (for example, a demonstration effect if the first game opening 2002 or the second game opening 2004 does not enter for a certain period of time while the symbol game is not progressing. A start command) may be transmitted to the peripheral control MPU 1511a side, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a side may generate a confirmation operation period (arbitrary operation confirmation period) by receiving the start command. Also, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, an instruction (for example, a demonstration effect start command) from the main control MPU 1310a is transmitted to the peripheral control MPU 1511a side, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a side confirms the operation period (optional operation confirmation by receiving the instruction. Period) may be generated, and thereby, it is possible to avoid overlapping with the effect at the time of operation, and confirm whether or not the operation button 410 is normally detected and operated before the player starts the game. Therefore, it is possible to execute/provide the operation effect using the operation button 410 with more peace of mind.

Further, LEDs (each LED of the decoration member 432 in the operation button) are mounted on the operation button 410, and whether or not the optional operation confirmation period has occurred and the progress stage of the optional operation confirmation period (the optional operation confirmation period). The light emission mode is changed in a plurality of stages according to the state of the operation button 410 in FIG. Specifically, when the arbitrary operation confirmation period has not occurred, the LED of the operation button 410 is turned off. Then, when the arbitrary operation confirmation period occurs, the LED of the operation button 410 is set to a specific color (for example, red) and has a predetermined light amount (a confirmation period light emission mode A indicating that the arbitrary operation is possible. ) To illuminate. As a result, it is possible to notify the outside that the arbitrary operation confirmation period has occurred and that pressing of the operation button 410 is requested. Then, when the operation button 410 is pressed down to be in a protruding state after the arbitrary operation confirmation period has occurred, the LED of the operation button 410 has the same color as when the operation button 410 has not been pressed once. However, light is emitted in a mode in which the amount of light is increased by one step (emission mode B for confirmation period that suggests that an arbitrary operation is in progress). With this, even after the operation button 410 is pushed down to be in the protruding state, it is possible to notify the outside that the depression of the operation button 410 is further required. After that, when the operation button 410 is brought into a normal state by pressing the operation button 410, the LED of the operation button 410 and the operation button 410 even once until at least the remaining arbitrary operation confirmation period (predetermined time) has elapsed. Even though the color is the same as that when the button is not pressed, light is emitted in a mode in which the light amount is weaker than that in the confirmation period light emission modes A and B described above (confirmation period light emission mode C indicating completion of arbitrary operation). This makes it possible to notify the outside that the confirmation work in the arbitrary operation confirmation period has been normally performed. Even when the arbitrary operation confirmation period has not occurred, the operation button 410 may be caused to emit light in a predetermined mode, for example, in a mode different from any of the operation confirmation period light emission modes A to C. This can be exemplified.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 379, after a predetermined waiting period elapses after the arbitrary operation confirmation period ends, the operation button 410 is operated without being pressed by the player, and the operation button 410 is in the normal position. There is an automatic operation confirmation period for confirming the origin so that it is located at. In the automatic operation confirmation period, first, the operation button 410 is moved up and down several times in the vicinity of the normal state, and the normal position sensor is used to detect that the operation button 410 in the normal state is in the normal position. Checking the origin. Then, after confirming the origin, the operation button 410 is set in a protruding state, and the protruding state is operated to return to a normal state. At this time, by detecting that the operation button 410 is in a normal state by the normal position sensor, it is possible to know that the operation button 410 is operating at the normal position. According to this, it is possible to ensure that the operation button 410 operates at a normal position, and prevent the operation button 410 from shifting when the effect is produced using the operation button 410.

Further, the arbitrary operation confirmation period is set to be longer than the automatic operation confirmation period. Specifically, the predetermined time of "10 seconds" is set as the arbitrary operation confirmation period as described above, while the automatic operation confirmation period is a short time of "5 seconds" required for a series of operations. Is set. In the automatic operation confirmation period, the operation button 410 is operated to confirm the origin without being pressed by the player, in other words, the operation confirmation of the drive system is automatically advanced. On the other hand, in the arbitrary operation confirmation period, if the player does not press it, the operation button 410 in the normal state does not change to the protruding state, and if the player does not press it in the protruding state, The protruding state is maintained until the arbitrary operation confirmation period elapses. Therefore, by setting the arbitrary operation confirmation period longer than the automatic operation period, it is possible to prevent the operation button 410 from being pressed and to change the appearance of the operation button 410 in the protruding state by driving. In a situation where there is no such situation, it is possible to allow the player or hall manager to carefully check for a long period of time, but it is possible to quickly end the operation confirmation (automatic operation period) of the drive system that does not require such long-term confirmation. This is possible, and the efficiency of a series of confirmation work of the driving operation means can be improved.

In the waiting period between the arbitrary operation confirmation period and the automatic operation confirmation period, by operating the production selection left button 331 and the production selection right button 332, the frame side lens 417 and the second side lens 417 provided on the periphery of the operation button 410 are operated. A peripheral confirmation period is provided in which it is possible to confirm whether or not the button decoration portion 411b (the LEDs of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423) is turned on. The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are provided on the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 as described above, and the operation of the player can be accepted when the effect is presented. In the peripheral confirmation period, when either the production selection left button 331 or the production selection right button 332 is pressed, the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b are turned on. The mode in which the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b are turned on (for example, the light emission mode such as brightness and color) is different depending on whether or not. Therefore, during the peripheral confirmation period, by pressing the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332, it is possible to confirm whether or not the pressing is normally recognized, and the frame side lens 417 and the It is possible to confirm whether or not the two-button decoration portion 411b normally lights up, and to confirm the drive-type operation means itself through a series of operation confirmation periods (arbitrary operation confirmation period, peripheral confirmation period, automatic operation confirmation period). Not only that, but it is also possible to check the related members around it.

Further, when the operation button 410 is not pressed during the arbitrary operation confirmation period and the protruding state is not set, the peripheral confirmation period may not be provided thereafter. In such a case, even if the production selection left button 331 and the production selection right button 332 are pressed, the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b do not light up, and a series of operation confirmation period is shortened. Becomes

Further, before the series of operation confirmation periods, a vibration confirmation period is provided in which it is possible to confirm the vibration of whether or not the vibration motor 424 provided in the performance operation unit 400 operates by operating the operation button 410. There is. During the vibration confirmation period, when the operation button 410 is pressed, the vibration motor 424 operates and the effect operation unit 400 vibrates. Therefore, during the vibration confirmation period, by pressing the operation button 410, it is possible to confirm whether or not the vibration motor 424 operates and the effect operation unit 400 normally vibrates. Also, by generating a series of operation confirmation periods at a time that does not overlap with the vibration confirmation period, it is possible to prevent the confirmation of a series of operation confirmation periods from being disturbed by vibration during the vibration confirmation period, and to perform various confirmation work efficiently. realizable.

Further, when the predetermined protrusion start condition that is satisfied in the progress of the symbol game is not satisfied, the operation button 410 should be in a normal state, but due to some abnormality, the operation button 410 is operated by the normal position sensor. There is a case where the normal state is not detected and the operation button 410 is not in the normal position. As a cause, for example, when a problem occurs when returning the operation button 410 to a normal state when a predetermined protrusion end condition is satisfied, or the player does not intentionally return the operation button 410 to a normal state. If you do, it is possible. In such a case, it is determined that the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state, and control is performed to return the operation button 410 to the normal state.

As shown in FIG. 380(A), except for a series of operation confirmation periods, at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol corresponding to the start of the symbol game (at the start of effect based on the variation pattern), the special corresponding to the end of the symbol game. At the end of fluctuation of the design (at the end of effect based on the change pattern), at the timing at the start of the above-mentioned demonstration effect (timing prior to the start of a series of operation confirmation periods), is the operation button 410 in a state of abnormal protrusion? If it is determined (whether it is not in the normal position), and if it is determined that it is in an abnormally protruding state (not in the normal position), control is performed to return the operation button 410 to the normal state. Be seen. According to this, even when the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state, the operation button 410 is returned to the normal state at a timing unrelated to the effect based on the variation pattern, and the variation pattern It is possible to prevent the misunderstanding that the operation button 410 is operated as a part of the effect based on the above. Further, after the operation button 410 is returned to the normal state, even if the effect using the operation button 410 is performed, it is ensured that the operation button 410 normally operates, and a decrease in interest in the effect occurs. To prevent it.

In addition, when it is set to generate the arbitrary operation confirmation period of the confirmation operation period by using the execution time of the demonstration effect as described above, the operation button 410 is abnormal when the demonstration effect is started. When the control for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state (control for returning to the normal position) is performed in the protruding state, the start of the series of operation confirmation periods may be delayed. For example, when the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state at the timing of the start of the demonstration effect (timing prior to the start of the series of operation confirmation periods), even if the operation confirmation period is the start timing of the series of operation confirmation periods. When the operation button 410 returns to the normal state (when it returns to the normal position), the control for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state (control to return to the normal position) is given priority without starting In addition, based on that, the entire operation confirmation period may be started in a delayed manner.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 380(B), in a series of operation confirmation periods, at the start of variation of the special symbol corresponding to the start of the symbol game (at the start of effect based on the variation pattern), at the end of the symbol game. At the end of the variation of the special symbol (at the end of the effect based on the variation pattern), whether or not the operation button 410 is abnormally projected (whether or not it is in the normal position) is not determined, and the abnormality Even in the protruding state (not in the normal position), the control for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state is not performed at that time. This is in order to give priority to the operation confirmation whether or not the operation button 410 in the above-described arbitrary operation confirmation period is pushed to be in a protruding state, and the operation button arbitrarily generated during the arbitrary operation confirmation period. This is for maintaining the protruding state of 410 so as not to be terminated by the progress of the symbol game. As described above, when the operation button 410 is abnormally protruded during the operation confirmation period, the operation is performed at the end of the operation confirmation period, as in the case where the player pushes the operation button 410 into the protruded state. Control for returning the button 410 will be performed. If the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruded state is pressed to a normal state before the predetermined period as the operation confirmation period elapses, the abnormality does not have to wait for the predetermined period to elapse. The operation button 410 in the protruding state is returned to the normal state.

(Abnormal detection of sword decoration)
Next, although the blade portion 5011 (see FIG. 278 to FIG. 281) of the sword decoration body 5001 in the sword effect operation unit 5000 described above should be in the sword storage state, an abnormality occurs when it is not in the sword storage state. Detection will be described with reference to FIG. 381. FIG. 381 is a time chart showing the relationship between the operating state of the sword ornament 5001 and abnormality detection.

The sword decoration body 5001 can be changed to a sword storage state in which the sword blade portion 5011 is stored and a sword removal state in which the sword blade portion 5011 is exposed (second sword removal state). It should be noted that, in the above-mentioned production example, the state between the sword-storing state and the sword-extracting state (first sword-extracting state) is used as the production using the sword decoration 5001, but in this example, such a state is used. Not used. The sword decoration 5001 is provided with a sword position sensor that can detect that the blade portion 5011 is in the sword state and a sword position sensor that can detect that the blade portion 5011 is in the sword state. ing.
Further, the sword decoration body 5001 is provided with a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for returning the blade portion 5011 from the sword removal state to the sword storage state. In this example, the sword cutting state corresponds to an operable state in which the player can remove the blade portion 5011, and the sword removal state corresponds to an inoperable state in which the player cannot remove the blade portion 5011. ..

Further, as the effect set in the variation pattern, the effect using the sword decoration 5011 is set. As shown in FIG. 381(A), in the production using the sword decoration body 5001, an operation reception period during which the sword decoration body 5001 in the sword storage state can be removed is generated within the production time. Within the operation acceptance period, the blade portion 5011 in the sword storage state is pulled out according to an instruction (for example, "extract sword", etc.) in the display area of the game side effect display device 1600, etc. You can get the result. Then, when the player pulls out the sword decoration body 5001 and puts the blade portion 5011 into the sword cutting state within the operation acceptance period, at the end of the production time, control for returning the blade portion 5011 to the sword cutting state is performed. Done. If the player does not remove the sword decoration 5001 within the operation acceptance period and the blade portion 5011 is left in the sword storage state, the blade portion 5011 is in the sword storage state at the end of the operation reception period. Hold. It should be noted that the effect using the sword ornament 5001 is, as one of the effects using the operation button 410 described above, an effect having a higher expectation (big hit expectation) than at least an effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state. There is. That is, when the effect using the sword decoration 5001 is performed, the sword decoration 5001 can be pulled out with a higher expectation than when the operation button 410 in the normal state is pressed.

As shown in FIG. 381(B), the blade portion 5011 should be in the sword cutting state during the operation reception period, but a period other than the operation reception period that is not in the sword storage state is the predetermined period (in this example, 2 seconds), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decoration 5001 and sword restoring control for returning the blade portion 5011 to the sword storing state is performed. That is, it is possible to determine that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decoration 5001 when the blade portion 5011 is in the sword cutting state or in a state between the sword cutting state and the sword storage state, except during the operation reception period. Has become. In this example, from the time when the detection state of the sword position sensor described above is in the OFF state (the state in which the blade portion 5011 is not in the sword state), the sword state is set for the predetermined period (excluding the operation acceptance period). It is supposed to start the measurement of (not the period).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 381(C), in the operation acceptance period, the blade portion 5011 should be in the sword storage state unless the player removes the sword decoration body 5001, but it is not in the sword storage state. When it is determined that the blade has reached a predetermined period (2 seconds in this example), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decoration body 5001, and sword restoring control for returning the blade portion 5011 to the blade storing state is performed. Done. That is, during the operation acceptance period, when the player pulls out the sword decoration body 5001, the blade portion 5011 is located in the sword cutting state. Therefore, the sword decoration body is only in the state between the sword cutting state and the sword storage state. It is determined that an abnormality has occurred in 5001 and in this case, the sword decoration body 5001 is operated so that the detection state of the sword position sensor is in the ON state (the state in which the blade portion 5011 is in the sword state). .. In this example, the processing time for one cycle for returning the blade portion 5011 to the blade storage state under blade storage restoration control is set to "0.5 seconds".

Further, the operation acceptance period is set to a period (4 seconds in this example) longer than the time until it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword ornament 5001. During the operation acceptance period, when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decoration 5001, sword restoring control is performed to return the sword blade portion 5011 to the sword storage state. The remaining period of the period is likely to occur, and the player can pull out the sword decoration body 5001 during the remaining period.
Therefore, even if it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decoration 5001 within the operation reception period, it is possible to prevent the participation in the production of removing the sword decoration 5001 from being interrupted.

As described above, whether or not the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state (whether or not it is in the normal position) is determined by the start of variation of the special symbol corresponding to the start of the symbol game (based on the variation pattern). When the effect starts, the special symbol corresponding to the end of the symbol game ends (when the effect based on the change pattern ends), and at the timing of the start of the demonstration effect described above. That is, during the operation acceptance period of the operation button 410 in which the operation button 410 can be pressed, it is determined whether or not the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state (whether or not it is in a normal position). Not not. On the other hand, the determination as to whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the sword decoration 5001 is made during the operation acceptance period during which the sword decoration 5001 can be removed. Therefore, even if an abnormality occurs in the sword decoration 5001 within the operation acceptance period, it is possible to avoid the situation where the player cannot remove the sword decoration 5001 as much as possible. In addition, the effect using the sword ornament 5001 is, of the effects using the operation button 410, at least higher than the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state (a big hit expectation degree). Thus, it is possible to prevent missing the effect result in such an effect with high expectations.

In this example, the period during which the blade portion 5011 is not in the sword-reaching state reaches a predetermined period (2 seconds in this example), unless the player pulls out the sword decoration 5001 within the operation acceptance period. In this case, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decoration body 5001, but only when the blade portion 5011 is not in the sword storage state at the start of the operation reception period, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decoration body 5001. You may make a judgment. For example, at the start of the operation acceptance period, the blade portion 5011 is in a sword storage state, and after the operation acceptance period is started, it is not clear whether the player should completely remove the sword decoration body 5001. There is a possibility that the sword decoration body 5001 will be left in a state between the state and the sword storage state for a predetermined period of time, but in such a case, it can be prevented that it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decoration body 5001. ..

Further, when giving an instruction in the display area of the game side effect display device 1600, etc. regarding the removal of the sword decoration 5001, the instruction is continued regardless of the occurrence or elimination of the abnormality of the sword decoration 5001 within the operation reception period. It may be executed. For example, during the operation acceptance period, when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decoration 5001, sword restoring control for returning the sword blade portion 5011 to the sword storing state is performed. Until the time of performing” and “the remaining period of the operation acceptance period after returning the blade portion 5011 to the sword storage state”, the instruction on the display area of the game side effect display device 1600 is continued. Further, if the player pulls out the sword decoration body 5001 according to the instruction during "until the sword blade restoration control ends", the blade portion 5011 is in the sword cutting state, so that the sword blade restoration is restored. The control is forcibly terminated and the instruction is terminated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the abnormality in the sword decoration 5001 from interfering with the timing of participation in the effect of removing the sword decoration 5001.

Further, although the sword restoring control for returning the blade portion 5011 to the sword storing state is performed in this example, it is possible that the blade portion 5011 cannot be returned to the sword storing state due to catching foreign matter or the like. In this case, one cycle of sword blade restoration control, which should be completed in "0.5 seconds", may be repeated for a plurality of cycles (for example, 10 cycles). In this case, the sword restoring control for returning the blade portion 5011 to the sword cutting state is continued beyond the operation acceptance period. In such a case, the operation is performed while the sword restoring control is being performed. The result effect may be derived at the end of the acceptance period, and further, the sword restoring control may be continued after the result effect is derived. As a result, even if the abnormality of the sword decoration body 5001 cannot be resolved, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the enjoyment of the game will deteriorate without hindering the progress of the production.

(Operation button abnormality determination timing)
Next, the abnormality determination timing of the operation button 410 in the effect operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 382. FIG. 382 is a time chart showing the abnormality determination timing of the movable ornament provided on the operation button 410 and the game board 5. In this example, the abnormality determination timing of the operation button 410 that can be operated by the player will be described in comparison with the abnormality determination timing of the movable ornament that cannot be operated by the player.

The operation button 410 is a member that can be operated (touched) by the player, and is in a normal state (initial position) in which it does not project from the effect operation unit 400, and a state (operation position in which it is protruded from the effect operation unit 400). ), and can be changed to. Specifically, the effect operation unit 400 has a lock mechanism and a spring mechanism, and in a normal state, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism so as not to protrude, but a predetermined protrusion start condition is satisfied. Then, the lock mechanism is unlocked, and the operation button 410 is projected by the spring mechanism. Further, in the state where the operation button 410 is projected, when the player pushes the operation button 410 until it reaches the position of the normal state, the operation button 410 is locked again by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state.

The production operation unit 400 is provided with a normal position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button 410 is in a normal state and a protruding position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button 410 is in a protruding state. ing. In addition, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for returning the operation button 410 from the protruding state to the normal state.

As shown in FIG. 382(A), at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol corresponding to the start of the symbol game (at the time of production start based on the fluctuation pattern), at the end of variation of the special symbol corresponding to the end of the symbol game (fluctuation pattern) At the timing of the start of the demonstration effect described above, the operation button 410 should be in the normal state without the predetermined protrusion start condition being satisfied, but at those timings, If it is determined whether the operation button 410 is in the abnormally projected state (whether it is not in the normal position), and if it is determined that it is in the abnormally projected state (not in the normal position), the operation button 410 Is controlled to return the normal state. In this way, when the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state, it is returned to the normal state at least at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol, so that the effect using the operation button 410 is performed as an effect based on the fluctuation pattern. It is possible to prevent the participation in the presentation of pressing the operation button 410 when being interrupted.

In the game board 5, the back lower back movable effect unit 3100, the back upper left movable effect unit 3200, the back left movable effect unit 3300, the back upper middle movable effect unit 3400, and the back lower are provided around the game board side effect display device 1600. A movable decorative body (see FIG. 60) such as the front movable effect unit 3500 is provided. These movable ornaments are members that cannot be operated (touched) by the player, and are in a non-operating state (standby position) waiting around the game side effect display device 1600 and the game side effect display device. It is possible to change to an operation state (exposure position) exposed on the front surface of the display area 1600. Further, these movable ornaments change from a non-operating state to an operating state when a predetermined operation start condition is satisfied.

It should be noted that in the back lower back movable effect unit 3100, the back upper left movable effect unit 3200, the back left movable effect unit 3300, the back upper middle movable effect unit 3400, and the back lower front movable effect unit 3500, respective movable ornaments are not provided. A standby position sensor that can detect the operating state is provided. In addition, in the back lower back movable effect unit 3100, the back upper left movable effect unit 3200, the back left movable effect unit 3300, the back upper middle movable effect unit 3400, and the back lower front movable effect unit 3500, the movable decorative body is in a non-operating state. A drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for operating between the operating state and the operating state is provided.

As shown in FIG. 382(B), at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol corresponding to the start of the symbol game (at the start of production based on the fluctuation pattern), at the end of variation of the special symbol corresponding to the end of the symbol game (fluctuation pattern) At the timing of the start of the demonstration effect described above, the movable decorative body should be in the non-operating state without the predetermined operation start condition being satisfied, but at those timings, If it is determined whether or not the movable ornament is in the non-operating state (whether it is in the normal position), and if it is determined that it is not in the non-operating state (not in the normal position), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred. A control is performed to determine and return the movable decorative body to the non-operating state. In this way, when the movable decorative body is not in the non-moving state due to the occurrence of the abnormality, the movable decorative body is returned to the non-moving state at least at the start of the change of the special symbol, so the effect using the movable decorative body as the effect based on the change pattern When the process is performed, the movable decorative body does not operate, and it is possible to prevent the entertainment from being diminished. Further, during execution of the effect based on the variation pattern, if the movable decorative body is still positioned in front of the display area of the game-side effect display device 1600 due to the occurrence of an abnormality, the visibility of the display area is hindered. However, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of such a situation by returning to the non-operating state at least at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol.

The operation button 410 is a member that can be touched by the player, and while the player can hinder the change to the normal state or the protruding state at the timing of controlling the state, the movable ornament is It is a member that cannot be touched by the player, and cannot be changed by the player at the timing of controlling the non-operating state or the operating state. Therefore, the operation button 410 is more likely to cause an abnormality than the movable decorative body. In this regard, the operation button 410 has more chances of abnormality determination to determine whether or not an abnormality has occurred than the movable decorative body, so that even when the operation button 410 has an abnormality, it can be detected at an early stage. It is possible to return to the normal position. Therefore, although there is a high possibility that an abnormality will occur in the operation button 410, when the effect using the operation button 410 is performed as the effect based on the variation pattern, participation in the effect of pressing the operation button 410 is possible. It can be prevented from being hindered.

Further, as the effects set in the variation pattern, effects using the operation button 410 in the normal state, effects using the operation button 410 in the protruding state, and effects using the movable decorative body are performed. However, the appearance rate of the effect using the operation button 410 is higher than that of the effect using the movable decorative body. For this reason, the operation button 410 tends to be used more frequently than the movable decorative body. Anomalies are more likely to occur. However, as described above, the operation button 410 has more chances of abnormality determination for determining whether or not an abnormality has occurred than in the movable decorative body. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 is used frequently, when an effect using the operation button 410 is performed as an effect based on the variation pattern, occurrence of an abnormality may hinder participation in the effect. Can be prevented.

(Abnormal occurrence of the operation button in the performance during operation)
Next, the effect at the time of operation performed when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 383 and 384. FIG. 383 is a time chart showing the operation state of the operation button 410 in the operation effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state, and FIG. 384 is the operation effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state. 8 is a time chart showing the operating state of the operation button 410 in FIG.

As described above, the operation button 410 can be changed between the normal state (initial position) in which it does not protrude from the effect operation unit 400 and the state (operation position) in which it protrudes from the effect operation unit 400. Specifically, the effect operation unit 400 has a lock mechanism and a spring mechanism, and in a normal state, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism so as not to protrude, but a predetermined protrusion start condition is satisfied. Then, the lock mechanism is unlocked, and the operation button 410 is projected by the spring mechanism. Further, in the state where the operation button 410 is projected, when the player pushes the operation button 410 until it reaches the position of the normal state, the operation button 410 is locked again by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state. The effect operation unit 400 also has a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for returning the operation button 410 from the protruded state to the normal state. When the operation button 410 is not operated so as to return to the normal state until the end condition is satisfied (until the predetermined time elapses after the predetermined protrusion start condition is satisfied), the operation button 410 is operated normally by the drive mechanism. It will be returned to the state.

In addition, the production operation unit 400 is provided with a normal position sensor that can detect that the operation button 410 is in a normal state and a protruding position sensor that can detect that the operation button 410 is in a protruding state. ing. That is, when the predetermined protrusion start condition is not satisfied, the operation button 410 should be in the normal state. In such a case, the normal position sensor indicates that the operation button 410 is in the normal state. By detecting, it can be determined that the operation button 410 is in the normal position. On the other hand, when the predetermined protrusion start condition is satisfied, the operation button 410 should be positioned in the protruded state. By detecting, it can be determined that the operation button 410 is in the normal position.

Further, the production operation unit 400 is provided with a press detection sensor 440 that can detect that the operation button 410 has been pressed. By such detection of the pressure detection sensor 440, it is possible to determine that the operation button 410 is pressed in a normal state or the operation button 410 in a protruding state is pressed to a normal state. ..

Further, as the effects set in the variation pattern, an effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state and an effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state are provided.
It should be noted that the effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state has higher expectation (big hit expectation) than the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state. That is, when the operation button 410 is in the protruding state, the operation button 410 can be pressed with a higher expectation than in the normal state.

First, when performing an effect using the operation button 410 in a protruding state, an operation reception period during which the detection of the press detection sensor 440 becomes effective when the operation button 410 is pressed is generated. At the start, it is determined whether the operation button 410 is in a normal state, that is, whether it is in a normal position. Then, as shown in FIG. 383(A), when it is determined that the operation button 410 is in the normal state (normal position) at the start of the operation reception period, the operation button in the normal state. 410 is changed to a protruding state. Further, in the operation reception period, as the instruction effect A at the time of the protrusion operation for instructing to operate the operation button 410 in the protruding state, an instruction by the display in the display area of the game side effect display device 1600 (for example, protruding) A copy of the operation button 410 in the state, a message display of "push in the protruding operation button!", or a voice instruction from the speaker (for example, a sound of "press in the protruding operation button!") Are performed in combination.

During the operation reception period described above, by pressing the operation button 410 in the protruding state to a normal state, the pressing (operation) can be detected and a predetermined effect result can be derived.
In this way, when the protruding operation button 410 is pressed to the normal state within the operation acceptance period, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state. In addition, when the operation button 410 in the protruding state is not pressed to the normal state within the operation reception period, control for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state is performed at the end of the operation reception period. Done. Further, when the protruding operation button 410 is pressed to the normal state within the operation acceptance period, the above-described instruction effect A at the time of the protruding operation may be ended.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 383(B), when it is determined that the operation button 410 is not in the normal state (not in the normal position) at the start of the operation reception period, an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410. It is determined that the operation button 410 is operating, and the operation button 410 is maintained in the abnormally protruding state. Further, even when the operation button 410 has an abnormality, the instruction effect B at the time of the protrusion operation is performed in the operation reception period at the same timing as when the operation button 410 does not have an abnormality. The instruction effect B at the time of the protrusion operation informs the player that the positioning is equivalent to the normal protrusion although it is an abnormal protrusion. For example, an instruction by display in the display area of the game side effect display device 1600. (For example, a display imitating the operation button 410 in a protruding state, a message display such as "This is really protruding! Push the operation button without worrying!"), or a voice instruction from the speaker (for example, , "This is really a prominence! Push the operation button without worrying!", etc.). As described above, when the operation button 410 has an abnormality, the operation of changing the operation button 410 in the normal state to the protruding state is not performed. Therefore, the operation is changed to the normal state. It is not possible to recognize whether the effect using a certain operation button 410 is being performed or the effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state is being performed, and further, the operation in the protruding state. There is a risk that the player will hesitate to operate the button 410. However, the display in the display area of the game side effect display device 1600 and the instruction effect B at the time of the protruding operation are performed by the sound from the speaker, so that at least the operation button 410 in the protruding state is displayed. It is possible to recognize that the effect used is being performed. That is, even when the operation button 410 has an abnormality, it is possible to prevent the confirmation of the degree of expectation for the effect using the operation button 410 from being hindered. It should be noted that the instruction effects A and B at the time of the protrusion operation are not limited to those having different effect contents as described above, and the player is informed that the position is equivalent to the normal protrusion although it is an abnormal protrusion. If it is possible, the instruction effects A and B may be configured with the same effect contents.

Further, when performing the effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state, even if the operation button 410 is abnormal, the operation button 410 in the abnormal protruding state is pressed to a normal state. By doing so, the pressing (operation) can be detected and a predetermined effect result can be derived. Further, when the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is pressed to the normal state within the operation reception period, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism and the normal state is restored. If the operation button 410 in the abnormally projected state is not pressed to the normal state during the operation reception period, the operation button 410 in the abnormally projected state is set to the normal state at the end of the operation reception period. Control for returning to the state is performed. Further, when the protruding operation button 410 is pressed to the normal state within the operation reception period, the above-described instruction effect B at the time of the protruding operation may be ended.

Next, when performing an effect using the operation button 410 in a normal state, an operation reception period during which the detection of the press detection sensor 440 is valid when the operation button 410 is pressed is generated. At the start of, it is determined whether the operation button 410 is in the normal state, that is, whether it is in the normal position. Then, as shown in FIG. 384(A), when it is determined that the operation button 410 is in the normal state (normal position) at the start of the operation reception period, the operation button 410 is in the normal state. To maintain. Further, in the operation reception period, as the instruction effect C at the time of the normal operation for instructing to operate the operation button 410 in the normal state, the instruction by the display in the display area of the game side effect display device 1600 (for example, a normal operation). A display in which the operation button 410 in a state is reproduced, a message display of “press operation button!”, and a voice instruction from the speaker (eg, voice of “press operation button!”) are combined. Be seen. Further, during the operation acceptance period, by pressing the operation button 410 in the normal state, the pressing (operation) is detected and a predetermined effect result can be derived. Further, when the operation button 410 in a protruding state is pressed to a normal state within the operation reception period, the above-described instruction effect C at the time of normal operation may be ended.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 384(B), when it is determined that the operation button 410 is not in the normal state (not in the normal position) at the start of the operation reception period, an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410. It is determined that the operation button 410 is operating, and the operation button 410 is maintained in the abnormally protruding state. Further, even when the operation button 410 has an abnormality, the above-described instruction effect D in the normal operation is performed in the operation reception period at the same timing as when the abnormality has not occurred.
The instruction effect D for the normal operation informs the player that the current protrusion is not in the same position as the normal protrusion, and for example, an instruction by display in the display area of the game side effect display device 1600 ( For example, a display imitating the operation button 410 in a normal state, a message display such as "Press the operation button though this protrusion is not related!", or an instruction by voice from a speaker (for example, "This protrusion is not related") "Please press the operation button!", etc.). In this way, when the operation button 410 has an abnormality, an unnatural situation occurs in which the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state, but is displayed in the display area of the game side effect display device 1600. Alternatively, the instructional effect at the time of the normal operation is performed by the sound from the speaker, so that it is possible to recognize from the display and the sound that at least the operation using the operation button 410 in the normal state is performed. .. Further, when the protruding operation button 410 is pressed to the normal state within the operation reception period, the above-described instruction effect D in the normal operation may be ended. The instruction effects C and D during the normal operation are not limited to those having different effect contents as described above, and it is possible to inform the player that the current protrusion is not positioned at the same level as the regular protrusion. In this case, the instruction effects C and D during the normal operation may be configured with the same effect contents.

Further, when performing the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state, even if the operation button 410 has an abnormality, the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is pressed to the normal state. By doing so, the pressing (operation) can be detected and a predetermined effect result can be derived. However, unlike when performing the effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state, even if the operation button 410 in the abnormal protruding state is pressed to the normal state during the operation reception period, the operation is performed. The button 410 is not locked by the lock mechanism, and the abnormally projected state is maintained. Further, even at the end of the operation reception period, control for returning the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state to the normal state is not performed.

As described above, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, when performing an effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state, the operation button 410 in the abnormal protruding state is set within the operation reception period. When the button is pressed down to the normal state, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism, and the normal state is restored. On the other hand, when performing the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state, even if the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is pressed to the normal state during the operation reception period, the operation button 410 is locked. The mechanism is not locked and the abnormally protruding state is maintained. In this way, when the operation button 410 has an abnormality, whether the operation button 410 in the normal state is used to produce an effect from the appearance of the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state. , It is not possible to recognize whether the effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state is performed, but depending on whether or not the normal state is restored when the operation button 410 in the abnormal protruding state is pressed, It is possible to recognize whether or not the effect is being performed.

In addition, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruded state other than the operation reception period is operated in the same manner as the operation reception period when performing the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state. Even if the operation button 410 is pressed down to the normal state, the operation button 410 is not locked by the lock mechanism, and the abnormally projected state is maintained. In this way, when the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state, as will be described later, at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol corresponding to the start of the symbol game (at the time of starting the effect based on the variation pattern), of the symbol game. At the end of the change of the special symbol corresponding to the end (at the end of the effect based on the change pattern), the control for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state is performed at the timing of the start of the above-described demonstration effect.

Further, in the present example, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, the above-described instruction effect for the normal operation is performed during the operation acceptance period when the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state is executed. However, such an instruction effect at the time of normal operation may not be performed. This is because the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state has a lower expectation than the effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state, and therefore the instruction effect in the normal operation is performed. This is because even if the degree of expectation for the performance cannot be confirmed by not being forgotten, the player will hardly suffer any disadvantage.

Further, in the present example, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, the operation button 410 in the abnormal protrusion state is in the normal state during the operation reception period when performing the effect using the operation button 410 in the protrusion state. Although the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism to return to the normal state when pressed down, the operation button 410 is locked even if the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruded state is pressed down to the normal state. It is also possible to prevent it from being locked in and to maintain the abnormally protruding state. That is, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, regardless of whether the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state or the effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state is performed, the abnormal protrusion occurs. The operation button 410 may not be returned to the normal state when the operation button 410 in the above state is pressed to the normal state. This is because, when the operation button 410 is returned to the normal state, the player intentionally prevents the operation button 410 from returning to the normal state as the cause of the abnormality of the operation button 410. However, until the control timing for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state arrives, by leaving a trace that the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state, You can call attention.

(Notification when an operation button error occurs)
Next, a notification mode performed when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 385. FIG. 385 is a time chart showing the relationship between the operating state of the operation button 410 and the notification mode when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410.

The operation button 410 is a member that can be operated (touched) by the player, and is in a normal state (initial position) in which it does not project from the effect operation unit 400, and a state (operation position in which it is protruded from the effect operation unit 400). ), and can be changed to. Specifically, the effect operation unit 400 has a lock mechanism and a spring mechanism, and in a normal state, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism so as not to protrude, but a predetermined protrusion start condition is satisfied. Then, the lock mechanism is unlocked, and the operation button 410 is projected by the spring mechanism. Further, in the state where the operation button 410 is projected, when the player pushes the operation button 410 until it reaches the position of the normal state, the operation button 410 is locked again by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state.

The production operation unit 400 is provided with a normal position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button 410 is in a normal state and a protruding position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button 410 is in a protruding state. ing. In addition, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for returning the operation button 410 from the protruding state to the normal state.

As shown in FIG. 385(A), when performing an effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state, an operation reception period in which the detection of the pressure detection sensor 440 is effective when the operation button 410 is pressed occurs. However, at the start of the operation acceptance period, the operation button 410 in the normal state is changed to the protruding state. Then, when the protruding operation button 410 is pressed to the normal state within the operation reception period, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state.

However, if the operation button 410 is not locked by the lock mechanism due to some abnormality even though the protruding operation button 410 is pressed to the normal state within the operation acceptance period, the normal state is set. Dont return. In such a case, the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruded state, but at the end of the operation reception period, control for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state is performed. Even if the operation button 410 in the protruding state is not pressed to the normal state within the operation reception period, control for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state is completed at the end of the operation reception period. Done.

In addition, when the operation button 410 is not locked by the lock mechanism due to some abnormality despite the control for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state at the end of the operation reception period, the normal operation is performed. Do not return to the state. Thus, after the end of the operation acceptance period, when the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state, as will be described later, at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol corresponding to the start of the symbol game (based on the fluctuation pattern). At the start of production), at the end of variation of the special symbol corresponding to the end of the symbol game (at the end of production based on the variation pattern), the timing at the start of the above-mentioned demonstration production (timing prior to the start of a series of operation confirmation period) Then, the control for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state is performed again.

As described above, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 during the operation reception period, the control for returning the abnormally protruded operation button 410 to the normal state is repeated after the end of the operation reception period. Done. Further, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 during the operation acceptance period, the effect of notifying that the abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410, which will be described later, is not performed. In other words, during the operation acceptance period, there is a high possibility that an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410 due to the operation of the operation button 410, and there is a high possibility that it is not the intention of the player. An attempt is made to eliminate the abnormality of the operation button 410 without making the occurrence conspicuous.

On the other hand, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 during a period other than the operation reception period, the response is different from that in the operation reception period when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410. For example, in addition to the operation acceptance period, when the above-mentioned demonstration effect is executed, the above-described automatic operation confirmation period is also provided, and during the automatic operation confirmation period, the operation button 410 is operated without being pressed by the player. The origin is confirmed so that the operation button 410 is located at a normal position. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 385(B), in the automatic operation confirmation period, first, the operation button 410 is operated to move up and down several times in the vicinity of the normal state, and the operation button 410 in the normal state is operated. The origin is confirmed by a normal position sensor so that it can be detected that the position is normal. Then, after confirming the origin, the operation button 410 is set in a protruding state, and the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism by operating to return the protruding state to the normal state.

However, if the operation button 410 is not locked by the lock mechanism due to some abnormality despite the operation of returning the operation button 410 in the protruding state to the normal state within the automatic operation confirmation period, Does not return to a normal state. In such a case, the operation button 410 is in the abnormally projected state, and unless the operation button 410 in the abnormally projected state returns to the normal state, the abnormally projected operation button 410 is returned to the normal state. The control for is repeated. Then, when the operation button 410 does not return to the normal state at a time point when the control for returning the operation button 410 that has abnormally protruded to the normal state is performed a plurality of times (five times in this example), The automatic operation confirmation period is ended, and after the automatic operation confirmation period is ended, the control for returning the abnormally protruding operation button 410 to the normal state is not performed. That is, even if an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 during the automatic operation confirmation period and the abnormality continues after the end of the automatic operation confirmation period, such as after the end of the operation acceptance period described above, the symbol At the start of variation of the special symbol corresponding to the start of the game (at the start of production based on the variation pattern), at the end of variation of the special symbol corresponding to the end of the symbol game (at the end of production based on the variation pattern), of the demonstration production At the start timing (timing prior to the start of the series of operation confirmation periods), the control for returning the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state to the normal state is not performed.

In addition, during the automatic operation confirmation period, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, an effect of notifying that the operation button 410 has an abnormality is performed. Specifically, notification by display in the display area of the game-side effect display device 1600 (for example, display of "abnormality has occurred in operation button") or blinking of lamp/LED provided on the main body frame 4 Is issued to the outside (for example, the lamp/LED is blinked more intensely than in the normal presentation) to appeal to the outside that an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410.

As described above, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 during the automatic operation confirmation period, control for returning the abnormally protruded operation button 410 to the normal state is performed after the end of the automatic operation confirmation period. Not done In addition, during the automatic operation confirmation period, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, an effect is given to notify that the operation button 410 has an abnormality. In other words, it is highly possible that an abnormality has occurred due to the player operating the operation button 410, even though the operation button 410 is not required to be operated during the operation confirmation period, unlike the automatic operation confirmation period. Since it is highly likely that the player has intentionally performed the operation button 410, a trace that an abnormally protruding state has occurred is left to alert such an actor.

In this example, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 during the operation acceptance period, the effect of notifying that the operation button 410 has an abnormality is not performed, but such an effect may be performed. You can However, in such a case, in the automatic operation confirmation period, it is preferable to perform in a mode in which the degree of appealing to the outside is suppressed rather than the effect to be notified when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410. As a result, even after the end of the operation acceptance period, the effect of notifying the occurrence of an abnormality in the operation button 410 is not obstructed, and the effect (effect based on the variation pattern) related to the game progress can be focused. it can.

(Confirmation production when an abnormality occurs in the movable ornament)
Next, a confirmation effect performed when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body provided on the game board 5 will be described with reference to FIG. 386. FIG. 386 is a time chart showing the flow of effects when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body.

In the game board 5, the back lower back movable effect unit 3100, the back upper left movable effect unit 3200, the back left movable effect unit 3300, the back upper middle movable effect unit 3400, and the back lower are provided around the game board side effect display device 1600. A movable decorative body (see FIG. 60) such as the front movable effect unit 3500 is provided. These movable ornaments are members that cannot be operated (touched) by the player, and are in a non-operating state (standby position) waiting around the game side effect display device 1600 and the game side effect display device. It is possible to change to an operation state (exposure position) exposed on the front surface of the display area 1600. Further, these movable ornaments change from a non-operating state to an operating state when a predetermined operation start condition is satisfied.

It should be noted that in the back lower back movable effect unit 3100, the back upper left movable effect unit 3200, the back left movable effect unit 3300, the back upper middle movable effect unit 3400, and the back lower front movable effect unit 3500, respective movable ornaments are not provided. A standby position sensor that can detect the operating state is provided. In addition, in the back lower back movable effect unit 3100, the back upper left movable effect unit 3200, the back left movable effect unit 3300, the back upper middle movable effect unit 3400, and the back lower front movable effect unit 3500, the movable decorative body is in a non-operating state. A drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for operating between the operating state and the operating state is provided.

As shown in FIG. 386, at the start of variation of the special symbol corresponding to the start of the symbol game (at the start of effect based on the variation pattern), at the end of variation of the special symbol corresponding to the end of the symbol game (based on the variation pattern). At the end of the production), and at the timing of the start of the above-mentioned demonstration production (timing before the start of the series of operation confirmation periods), the movable decorative body should be in the non-operational state without the predetermined operation start condition being satisfied. However, at those timings, it was determined whether or not the movable decorative body was in the non-operating state (whether it was in the normal position), and it was determined that it was not in the non-operating state (not in the normal position). In this case, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred, and control for returning the movable decorative body to the non-operating state is performed.

However, if an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body, the movable decorative body does not return to the non-operating state even though the control for returning the movable decorative body to the non-operating state is performed. An effect is given to notify that an abnormality has occurred in the decorative body. Specifically, the display area of the game side effect display device 1600 is blacked out, and the displayed contents such as the decorative pattern and the background image that have been displayed are changed to non-display. Further, the lamp/LED provided on the main body frame 4 is made to blink rapidly. In this way, when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body, the fact that the abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body is appealed to the outside.

In addition, when the movable decorative body does not return to the non-operational state, in addition to the effect of notifying that the movable decorative body has an abnormality, it is confirmed whether or not to advance the game in the state of the abnormality. Confirmation production is performed. Specifically, in the display area of the game side effect display device 1600, a display such as "Please push the operation button when ending the abnormality notification and continuing the game" is displayed. Then, unless the operation button 410 is pressed in the confirmation effect, not only the movable ornament does not operate, but also the display contents of the game side effect display device 1600 are left with the display contents such as the decorative pattern and the background image hidden. The effects associated with the displayed contents such as lighting of lamps/LEDs provided on the body frame 4 and voice from a speaker are not performed.

On the other hand, when the operation button 410 is pressed in the confirmation effect, an effect of notifying that an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body, or a confirmation effect of confirming whether or not to advance the game in the state of the abnormality To end. After the operation button 410 is pressed in the confirmation effect, there is no change in that the movable ornament does not operate, but display contents such as a decorative pattern and a background image are displayed in the display area of the game-side effect display device 1600. As described above, the effect associated with the display content such as the lighting of the lamp/LED provided on the main body frame 4 and the sound from the speaker comes to be performed. For example, when the movable decoration is operated after the operation button 410 is pressed in the confirmation effect, the display of the display area and the lamp Although the lighting of the LED and the sound from the speaker are not changed, the movable decoration does not operate at the operation timing of the movable decoration. In this way, when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body, the confirmation effect is performed, and the game is advanced after recognizing that the movable decorative element does not operate when the effect using the movable decorative element is performed. Thus, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest due to the movable decorative body not operating. In addition, not only when the movable decorative body in the operating state does not return to the non-operating state, but also when an abnormality such as the movable decorative body stops working from the non-operating state occurs, the same confirmation effect is performed. It is being appreciated.

In this example, as the effect using the operation button 410, an effect in which the movable decorative body can be operated by pressing the operation button 410 is performed. However, when an abnormality occurs in the movable ornament, the operation is performed during the operation acceptance period in the effect using the operation button 410 (the period when the detection of the press detection sensor 440 is effective when the operation button 410 is pressed). Even if the button 410 is pressed, the movable decorative body does not move from the non-operating state to the operating state. Even in such a case, the operation button 410 can be operated by performing an effect of notifying that an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body and a confirmation effect of confirming whether or not to advance the game in the state of the abnormality. Even if the operation button 410 is pressed when the effect used is performed, it can be recognized that the movable decorative body does not operate.

In this example, as an effect using the operation button 410, there is also an effect in which a predetermined effect result can be derived without pressing the operation button 410 to move the movable decorative body. Even if an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body as described above, it does not affect the display of the display area, the lighting of the lamps/LEDs, and the sound from the speaker. For the effect that is not present, it is possible to perform the same effect as when there is no abnormality in the movable decorative body.

Further, in this example, when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body, control for returning the movable decorative body to the non-operating state is performed, and when the movable decorative body does not return to the non-operating state, the movable decorative body is restored. There is an effect to notify that an abnormality has occurred, and a confirmation effect to confirm whether to advance the game in the state where the abnormality has occurred, but when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body, You may make it perform. In such a case, after starting the confirmation effect, control for returning the movable decorative body to the non-operating state is performed. For example, when the movable decorative body returns to the non-operating state during execution of the confirmation effect, The confirmation effect may be terminated even before the operation button 410 is pressed.

(Interference avoidance operation of multiple movable bodies)
Next, an interference avoiding operation when an abnormality occurs in any one of the plurality of movable bodies that can interfere with each other will be described with reference to FIG. 387. FIG. 387 is a time chart showing the relationship between the operating state of the operating button cover 419 and the operating state of the operating button 410 during the operation receiving period. In this example, in the effect operation unit 400 of the main body frame 4, in addition to the operation buttons 410 that can be operated by the player, an operation button cover 419 is provided as an opening/closing member that determines whether or not the operation buttons 410 can be operated. The case will be described.

The operation button cover 419 is provided above the operation button 410 in a normal state, and operates the operation button 410 in a closed state in which the operation button 410 is closed so that the operation button 410 cannot be operated. As can be seen, the operation button 410 can be changed to an open state where it is exposed. In addition, the production operation unit 400 is provided with a closed position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button cover 419 is in a closed state and an open position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button cover 419 is in an opened state. ing. Further, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for moving the operation button cover 419 from the closed state to the open state and returning it from the open state to the closed state.

Like the operation buttons 410 other than this example, the operation button 410 can be changed between a normal state (initial position) in which it does not project from the effect operation unit 400 and a state (operation position) in which it protrudes from the effect operation unit 400. Has become. Specifically, the effect operation unit 400 has a lock mechanism and a spring mechanism, and in a normal state, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism so as not to protrude, but a predetermined protrusion start condition is satisfied. Then, the lock mechanism is unlocked, and the operation button 410 is projected by the spring mechanism. Further, in the state where the operation button 410 is projected, when the player pushes the operation button 410 until it reaches the position of the normal state, the operation button 410 is locked again by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state.

The production operation unit 400 is provided with a normal position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button 410 is in a normal state and a protruding position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button 410 is in a protruding state. ing. In addition, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for returning the operation button 410 from the protruding state to the normal state.

Further, as the effect set in the variation pattern, the effect using the operation button 410 is set. As shown in FIG. 387(A), in the effect using the operation button 410, an operation acceptance period during which the operation button 410 can be operated is generated within the effect time, and when the operation acceptance period occurs, The operation button cover 419 in the closed state is changed to the open state.
When it is determined that the operation button cover 419 is in the open state, the operation button 410 in the normal state is changed to the protruding state. In the operation acceptance period, a predetermined effect result can be obtained by pressing the operation button 410 in the protruding state to a normal state according to the instruction.

It should be noted that if the protruding operation button 410 is pressed to the normal state within the operation acceptance period, the operation returns to the normal state, but the protruding operation button 410 is changed to the normal state. If the button is not pressed, the operation button 410 is forcibly returned to the normal state when the operation acceptance period ends. At the end of the operation acceptance period, when it is determined that the operation button 410 is in the normal state, control for returning the operation button cover 419 in the open state to the closed state is performed.

In this example, after the operation button cover 419 in the closed state is opened, the operation button 410 in the normal state is projected and the operation button 410 in the projected state can be pressed. However, when the operation button cover 419 is brought into the open state, a problem may occur such that the operation button cover 419 stops between the closed state and the open state. That is, the operation button 410 and the operation button cover 419 have a relationship of interfering with each other if they are operated at the same time. In such a case, if the operation button 410 is controlled to project without the operation button cover 419 being left open, the operation button 410 attempting to project and the operation button cover 419 interfere with each other, and the operation button 410 Further trouble may occur between 410 and the operation button cover 419. For this reason, when the operation button cover 419 is not opened, control is performed to avoid the interference so that the operation button 410 and the operation button cover 419 do not interfere with each other.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 387(B), when the operation reception period occurs, control is performed to open the operation button cover 419 in the closed state, but when the operation button cover 419 is in the open state. If it is determined that the operation button cover 419 is abnormal, it is determined that the operation button 410 in the normal state is not in the protruding state (control to make the operation button 410 in the protruding state). Are prohibited). This can prevent the operation button 410 and the operation button cover 419 from interfering with each other when the operation button cover 419 is not opened. Even when the operation button cover 419 is stopped between the closed state and the open state before the operation reception period occurs, as long as the operation button cover 419 does not open at the time of the operation reception period. Controls the operation button 410 in the normal state to be in the protruding state (prohibits the control to set the operation button 410 in the protruding state).

Further, when the operation button cover 419 is not opened at the time of occurrence of the operation reception period but the operation button cover 419 is forcibly opened by the player's finger touch after that, Then, it is determined that the abnormality of the operation button cover 419 has been eliminated, the operation button 410 is allowed to be in the protruding state, and the operation button 410 in the normal state is controlled to be in the protruding state. As described above, when the operation button 410 and the operation button cover 419 interfere with each other, but the interference situation is resolved by the contact, the operation button 410 is set to the protruding state. Thus, it is possible to press the operation button 410 in the protruding state for the rest of the operation acceptance period. Therefore, even if it is determined that the operation button cover 419 is abnormal at the time of the operation reception period, the player pushes the operation button 410 in the protruding state by the self-help efforts of the player. It is possible to prevent obstruction of participation. After the operation button 410 in the protruding state is pressed, control is performed to return the operation button cover 419 in which the abnormality has occurred to the closed state, and the operation button cover 419 is returned to the normal state, and then the operation button The situation in which the button 410 and the operation button cover 419 interfere with each other is prevented from occurring again.

It should be noted that when the operation button cover 419 is not opened at the time of occurrence of the operation reception period but the operation button cover 419 is forcibly opened by the player's own finger touch, Although the operation button 410 in the state is in the protruding state, but when the operating button 410 in the protruding state is not pressed down to the normal state, the operation buttons 410 and The operation button cover 419 is forcibly returned to the normal state. Specifically, when the operation acceptance period ends, control is performed to return the operation button 410 to the normal state, and when it is determined that the operation button 410 is in the normal state after that, the operation button in the open state is released. Control is performed to return the cover 419 to the closed state. This prevents the situation where the operation button 410 and the operation button cover 419 interfere with each other again later.

On the other hand, when the operation button cover 419 is not opened at the time of occurrence of the operation acceptance period and the player leaves it in that state thereafter, the operation button 410 in the normal state is not brought into a protruding state. In such a case, it is not possible to participate in the effect of pressing the operation button 410 in the protruding state. Further, at the end of the operation acceptance period, control is performed to return the operation button cover 419 in which an abnormality has occurred to the closed state, so that the operation button cover 419 is eliminated from the abnormality, and the operation button 410 will be used later. This prevents the situation in which the operation button cover 419 interferes with the situation.

(Operation when an operation button abnormality occurs according to the game state)
Next, an operation when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 when the standby position of the operation button 410 is changed according to the game state will be described with reference to FIG. 388. FIG. 388 is a time chart showing operation states of the operation button 410 when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 in the non-time saving state and the time saving state. In this example, in the effect operation unit 400 of the main body frame 4, in addition to the operation buttons 410 that can be operated by the player, an operation button cover 419 is provided as an opening/closing member that determines whether or not the operation buttons 410 can be operated. The case will be described.

The operation button cover 419 is provided above the operation button 410 in a normal state, and operates the operation button 410 in a closed state in which the operation button 410 is closed so that the operation button 410 cannot be operated. As can be seen, the operation button 410 can be changed to an open state where it is exposed. In addition, the production operation unit 400 is provided with a closed position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button cover 419 is in a closed state and an open position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button cover 419 is in an opened state. ing. Further, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for moving the operation button cover 419 from the closed state to the open state and returning it from the open state to the closed state.

Like the operation buttons 410 other than this example, the operation button 410 can be changed between a normal state (initial position) in which it does not project from the effect operation unit 400 and a state (operation position) in which it protrudes from the effect operation unit 400. Has become. The effect operation unit 400 has a lock mechanism and a spring mechanism. In this example, in the non-time saving state (normal state), the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism so as not to project and is positioned in the normal state, whereas in the time saving state, the lock mechanism is locked. The operation button 410 is located in a detached state by the spring mechanism. The production operation unit 400 is provided with a normal position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button 410 is in a normal state and a protruding position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button 410 is in a protruding state. ing. In addition, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for returning the operation button 410 from the protruding state to the normal state.

In this example, in the non-time saving state (normal state), an effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state can be performed. In the production using the operation button 410 in the normal state, an operation reception period during which the operation button 410 can be operated is generated within the production time, and the operation in the closed state is generated at the time of the operation reception period. By changing the button cover 419 to the open state, the operation button 410 in the normal state can be pressed. Then, during the operation acceptance period, a predetermined effect result can be obtained by pressing the operation button 410 in the normal state according to the instruction. At the end of the operation acceptance period, control for returning the open operation button cover 419 to the closed state is performed.

In the non-time saving state (normal state), the operation button cover 419 should be in the closed state and the operation button 410 should be in the normal state except for the operation reception period. However, as shown in FIG. 388(A), when the operation button cover 419 is in the open state and the operation button 410 is in the protruding state at a predetermined abnormality determination timing, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred. After returning the operation button 410 in the protruding state to the normal state, control is performed to return the operation button cover 419 in the open state to the closed state. When the operation button 410 is in the normal state at the predetermined abnormality determination timing, but the operation button cover 419 is in the open state, only control for returning the operation button cover 419 in the open state to the closed state is performed. Is done. In addition, the predetermined abnormality determination timing is the same as other than this example, at the start of variation of the special symbol corresponding to the start of the symbol game (at the start of the effect based on the variation pattern), of the special symbol corresponding to the end of the symbol game. It is the timing when the fluctuation ends (when the effect based on the fluctuation pattern ends) and when the demo effect starts.

On the other hand, in the time saving state, it is possible to perform an effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state. In the effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state, an operation acceptance period during which the operation button 410 can be operated is generated within the effect time, and when the operation acceptance period occurs, the operation button 410 is in the protruding state. A predetermined effect result can be obtained by pressing the operation button 410 according to the instruction to a normal state. As long as it is in the time saving state, even if the operation button 410 in the protruding state is pressed down to the normal state, it is not locked by the lock mechanism and the operation button 410 is returned to the protruding state. Become.

Further, in the time saving state, the operation button cover 419 should be open and the operation button 410 should be in a protruding state. However, as shown in FIG. 388(B), when the operation button cover 419 is in the closed state and the operation button 410 is in the normal state at a predetermined abnormality determination timing, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred. After the operation button cover 419 in the closed state is returned to the open state, the control for returning the operation button 410 in the normal state to the protruding state is performed. When the operation button 410 is in the normal state at a predetermined abnormality determination timing, but the operation button cover 419 is in the open state, a control for returning the operation button 410 in the normal state to the protruding state. Only done.

As described above, in the non-time saving state (normal state), the operation button cover 419 is in the closed state and the operation button 410 is in the normal state, whereas in the time saving state, the operation button cover 419 is in the open state. In addition, the operation button 410 should be in a protruding state. As described above, it is determined that the operation button 410 and the operation button cover 419 stand by at different positions in the non-time saving state and the time saving state, but any one of the operation button 410 and the operation button cover 419 is set. When an abnormality occurs as described above, the position of the return destination of the member in which the abnormality has occurred is changed so that the operation button is used when an effect is produced using the operation button 410 at a position according to the game state. It is possible to prevent the participation in the production of operating 410 to be hindered.

[18. Production control by scheduler]
In the gaming machine, various effects are performed during the game by outputting voice, turning on/off a lamp, displaying an image, and the like, and various elaborate effects have been tried in order to enhance the interest of the game. As described above, the gaming machine controls a plurality of types of effect devices by the peripheral control board 1510, which is an effect control device, based on the command output from the main control board 1310, and executes an effect according to the game state of the game. To do. The main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 are connected by a unidirectional signal line that transmits signals in one direction.

In order to execute a plurality of types of effects in cooperation with each other, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 7-313694 discloses a control technique for realizing various effect displays by using scenario data. The scenario data is data in which symbols to be displayed on the screen are sequentially specified in time series. According to this scenario data, by preparing a control process that realizes a general-purpose process for sequentially displaying the designated symbols, there is an advantage that a wide variety of effect displays can be easily realized only by switching the scenario data. It is also possible to include the designation of BGM in the scenario data. In this case, the sound source IC outputs the designated BGM, so that the sound corresponding to the display screen can be output.

However, game machines require more elaborate presentations. In the above-mentioned conventional technology, it is difficult to perform various effects by interlocking a plurality of effect devices such as voice output, lamp lighting, and image display. For example, it was not possible to change the BGM while executing the image display according to the scenario data. Further, when outputting a sound effect in response to a user's operation during the image display, the image display and the BGM output are stopped and the sound effect is output. When the output of the sound effect is finished, the BGM and the image display are restarted from the beginning regardless of how far the BGM is played, and the effect gives a feeling of strangeness. Regarding the lighting and blinking of the lamp, it is controlled by individual programs according to the game state, regardless of the contents of the image display, and it is difficult to realize various lighting and blinking linked to the image display. there were.

[18-1. Software configuration of peripheral control unit]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1530 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the main command from the main control board 1310 and executes the game effect. In the present embodiment, each component that executes an effect based on the received main command is configured as software, but may be configured as hardware. Hereinafter, the configuration and the outline of the function for realizing the effect control in the present embodiment will be described, and then the details of each function will be described.

[18-1-1. Configuration and overview of each function]
FIG. 389 is a functional block diagram illustrating the configuration and outline of the function for executing the effect control in the present embodiment. The peripheral control unit 1530 includes an input command analysis unit 5010, an effect control unit 5020, a layer data storage unit 5030, an effect block control unit 5040, an effect block data storage unit 5050, a scheduler execution unit 5060, a scheduler data storage unit 5070, and an output module unit. 5080.

The input command analysis unit 5010 receives an input of a main command and analyzes the input command. The effect control unit 5020 acquires layer data from the layer data storage unit 5030 based on the analysis result of the main command, and determines block control information (effect block number). Explaining the layers, in the present embodiment, a layer is set for each effect division such as a background and a character, each effect element is drawn on each layer, and these layers are displayed in an overlapping manner to display an image on the liquid crystal display device. Is output. Thereby, for example, if only the background is different and the display (motion) of the character is the same, it is possible to share the layer displaying the character. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of effect data (scheduler data) and improve development efficiency. The layer data storage unit 5030 stores information for specifying the effect for each layer.

The effect block control unit 5040 receives the block control information (effect block number) determined by the effect control unit 5020, and acquires effect block data corresponding to the effect block number from the effect block data storage unit 5050. The effect block data includes scheduler data for executing an effect. With scheduler data, in order to control the effect in each effect device, a plurality of functions that instruct a predetermined process to be executed among a plurality of processes required according to the effect device are stored in the order to be executed. The data. Production block data, "liquid crystal production block data" for executing the production to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device, "liquid crystal symbol block data" for variably displaying the identification symbol on the liquid crystal display device, sound (sound), There are three types of "sub effect block data" for controlling lamps, accessories, and the like. The effect block control unit 5040 executes control according to the type of effect block data, and passes the scheduler control information including effect block data to the scheduler execution unit 5060.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 acquires the scheduler data included in the effect block data from the scheduler data storage unit 5070. Then, the scheduler data is executed, the function corresponding to each rendering device is called, and the rendering device control information is transmitted to the output module unit 5080.

The output module unit 5080 receives the rendering device control information from the scheduler execution unit 5060, and transmits rendering device drive data to each rendering device based on the rendering device control information.
Each rendering device performs an operation based on rendering device drive data. In the output module section 5080, the CPU (peripheral control MPU 1511a) provided in the effect control device (peripheral control board 1530) configures the effect control section 5020 by software, and the CPU executes another computer program. Is realized by. Note that the effect control unit 5020 may be configured by a different arithmetic circuit and may be configured as hardware.

[18-1-2. Module configuration]
Next, the details of the configuration of modules and the like that realize the above-described functions will be described. FIG. 390 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration of modules and the like in the peripheral control unit 1530 of the gaming machine of the present embodiment. Each configuration is configured as software by a computer program executed by the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1530, but part or all may be configured as hardware.

In this embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1530 processes the system module 5100 for driving each effect device. The system module 5100 includes a command analysis module 5200, a liquid crystal module 5400, a sound module 5500, a lamp module 5600, a driving device module 5700, and the like as modules related to presentation. Further, a performance control unit 5020 for creating performance device control information for driving each performance device based on the main command is included.

The system module 5100 includes a main command buffer 5110, a liquid crystal display list command buffer 5120, a lamp data output buffer 5130, a motor data output buffer 5140, and a serial control IC 5150. The main command buffer 5110 receives the main command transmitted from the main control board 1310 and transfers it to the command analysis module 5200. In the present embodiment, the main command is 3-byte one-set information, which is a command status value, a command mode value, and a checksum value of the command status and the mode value in order from the first byte, and is divided into 3 times by 8 bits. The main command buffer 5110, which is output as follows, receives this signal, evaluates the checksum value, and if the received command is not determined to be correct, discards the received command and confirms that the command is correct. If it is determined, it is passed to the command analysis module 5200.

The main command includes information indicating the contents related to the effect among the game state and the operating state of the gaming machine. For example, the main command can include the presence or absence of winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening, the result of the special drawing lottery, the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol, and the like. Further, when the present embodiment is applied to a slot machine, sensor outputs such as door opening, operation of a start lever and a stop button, rotation and stop of a reel, success or failure of a role at the time of stop, and the like can be mentioned. The commands given here are examples, and various commands can be included depending on the model of the gaming machine and the contents of the effect.

The command analysis module 5200 is included in the input command analysis unit 5010, analyzes the content of the main command, and determines whether or not the command is a command related to production. When it is determined that the command is related to the effect, the command is passed to the effect control unit 5020.

The performance control unit 5020 specifies the layer to be the target of the performance control from the layer data table based on the analysis result of the main command. Then, the block data number (effect block number) is acquired from the specified layer, and the block data number corresponding to each layer is transmitted to the effect block control unit 5040.

The effect block control unit 5040 includes a liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 and a sub effect block control unit 5320. The liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 determines control information for executing the effect of displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device. The sub effect block control unit 5320 determines control information for executing sound output, lighting/blinking of a lamp, operation of a role object, and the like.

When the effect block number is determined, the liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 executes the liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to the effect block number. The liquid crystal effect block data is block data for executing the liquid crystal display effect, and includes one or a plurality of drawing scheduler data. By executing the drawing scheduler data, the background, characters, identification patterns, etc. are displayed on the liquid crystal display device.

The liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 activates the scheduler execution unit 5060 according to the control (display) target, and executes the drawing scheduler data included in the block data. The liquid crystal display scheduler executing unit 5060 includes a liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler executing unit 5331 for displaying effect elements such as a background and characters, and a liquid crystal pattern 1f drawing scheduler executing unit 5332 for displaying an identification symbol. included.

The liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 and the liquid crystal pattern 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332 are executed in a frame cycle (1f=approximately 33.334 milliseconds) that is a screen update cycle. The liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 and the liquid crystal pattern 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332 drive the drawing scheduler data specified by the liquid crystal effect block data by the drawing scheduler, and the liquid crystal module 5400 generates a liquid crystal display list command. The liquid crystal display list command is passed to the effect display device (game board side effect display device 1600, door frame side liquid crystal display device 460) via the liquid crystal display list command buffer 5120.

The sound source built-in VDP 1540a generates display data based on the liquid crystal display list command buffer 5120 and outputs it to the effect display device (game board side effect display device 1600, door frame side liquid crystal display device 460). The display data is generated by, for example, a method of expanding the character data designated by the liquid crystal display list command in the designated position on the frame buffer.

When the effect block number is determined, the sub effect block control unit 5320 executes the sub effect block data corresponding to the effect block number. The sub effect block data is block data for executing each effect of a lamp, a sound, and a motor, and includes one or a plurality of sub effect scheduler data. By executing the sub effect scheduler data, each effect device of the lamp, the sound, and the motor performs the operation defined in advance in the sub effect scheduler data.

The sub effect block control unit 5320 activates the scheduler execution unit 5060 according to the execution cycle of various effect devices, and executes the sub effect scheduler data included in the sub effect block data. The scheduler execution unit 5060 for controlling various production devices includes a sub production 1f scheduler execution unit 5333 that controls the production device at 1-frame intervals and a sub production 1ms scheduler execution unit 5334 that controls the production devices at 1-millisecond intervals. included. In this way, by providing the scheduler execution unit according to the execution interval, it becomes possible to execute the effect according to the configuration of the gaming machine or the required specifications of the effect device. For example, since 1f corresponds to the drawing update interval, it is possible to synchronize the sound output, the operation of the accessory, and the like with the liquid crystal display. Further, if the detection interval of the sensor is in the unit of 1 ms, it becomes possible to promptly deal with a problem in the operation of the accessory.

The sub effect block control unit 5320 executes effect control other than liquid crystal display, but in the present embodiment, as an example, about three kinds of effect control of sound (sound) output, lighting/blinking of a lamp, and operation of a character product. explain. It should be noted that the effect control by the sub effect 1f scheduler execution unit 5333 and the sub effect 1ms scheduler execution unit 5334 is the same except for the execution cycle and will be described without distinction. Hereinafter, an outline of control according to the type of rendering device will be described.

First, a case of performing an effect by outputting a sound will be described. If the sub effect block data includes scheduler data for sound output, the scheduler execution unit 5060 activates the scheduler for sound output and executes the scheduler data. Then, when a sound output function (for example, SPLAY) is executed, the sound module 5500 generates sound source drive data (sound source command) based on the designated parameter. It is possible to activate a plurality of schedulers. For example, by controlling the output of BGM and effect sound effects by different schedulers, sound source drive data can be generated in parallel, and sounds can be output simultaneously. .. The sound source built-in VDP 1540a reads the sound source data designated by the sound source drive data from the liquid crystal and sound ROM 1540b, and outputs it from the speakers 921 and 573 by the audio data transmission IC 1540c.

Next, a case of performing an effect with a lamp will be described. When the sub effect block data includes the scheduler data for lamp control, the scheduler execution unit activates the lamp scheduler and executes the scheduler data. Then, when the function for controlling the lamp (for example, HPLAY) is executed, the lamp module 5600 generates the lamp driving data based on the designated parameter. Note that it is possible to activate a plurality of schedulers as in the case of sound output, and it is possible to control a plurality of lamps and layers in parallel.

The lamp module 5600 creates lamp drive data for each cycle (1 frame or 1 millisecond) and outputs it to the lamp data output buffer 5130. The lamp data output buffer 5130 has a double buffer structure, temporarily stores the lamp driving data generated by the lamp module 5600, and outputs it to the serial control IC 5150. By making the ramp data output buffer 5130 a double buffer, it is possible to simultaneously generate and output the ramp data in a single cycle. By configuring in this way, the ramp data output is changed to the next operation of the ramp data creation in response to the increase in the ramp control processing time due to the increase of the ramp system or the overlap of the ramp layers. By setting the cycle, it is sufficient that the processing related to the creation of the lamp data is completed within the processing cycle.

Specifically, when the lamp data output buffer 5130 is composed of the buffer A and the buffer B, for example, if the previously created lamp drive data is stored in the buffer A, the data for the next cycle is stored in the buffer B. Then, the previously generated lamp drive data is output from the buffer A to the serial control IC 5150 by DMA to turn on/blink each lamp. In the next cycle, the buffer is switched, the lamp driving data is output from the lamp module 5600 to the buffer A, and the lamp driving data stored in the buffer B is output to the serial control IC 5150. The case of controlling lighting/blinking of the LED is similar to that of the lamp, and the description of the control of the lamp can be replaced with the LED unless otherwise specified.

Finally, a case of controlling a driving device (for example, a motor or a solenoid) for operating the accessory is described. If the sub effect block data includes the scheduler data for controlling the drive device, the scheduler execution unit activates the scheduler for the drive device (motor scheduler) and executes the scheduler data. Then, when a drive device control function (eg, MPLAY) is executed, the drive device module 5700 generates lamp drive data based on the designated parameters. It is possible to activate a plurality of schedulers as in the case of sound output, and a plurality of drive devices can be controlled in parallel.

The drive device module 5700 creates motor drive data for each cycle and outputs it to the motor data output buffer 5140. In this embodiment, the motor drive data is created and output at a cycle of 1 millisecond. The motor data output buffer 5140 temporarily stores the motor drive data generated by the drive device module 5700 and outputs it to the serial control IC 5150. The motor drive data is output from the serial port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a regardless of the DMA. However, the output of the latch signal for reflecting the motor data to each driving device is not the same timing as the timing of outputting from the motor data output buffer 5140 to the serial control IC 5150, but the latch signal is output in the next cycle of all the motor data transmission. It is outputting. This is because the output timing of the latch signal is after the completion of the serial transmission of all the motor data, so as the serial transmission time of the motor data becomes longer, the waiting time until the completion of the serial transmission becomes an overhead, and the overall processing time for each frame cycle becomes longer. Is not enough. In the present embodiment, by shifting the timing of the latch signal output corresponding to the motor data serial transmission, the waiting time until the completion of the serial transmission is realized to 0, but a plurality of DMAs can be used depending on the CPU used. In this case, the motor drive data is serially transmitted by using the DMA and the latch signal is output by the DMA completion interrupt, so that the waiting time until the completion of the serial transmission can be set to 0 in the same manner. At the same time that the motor drive data is output, the performance drive photo information is input to the drive device module 5700 (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Each performance drive photo information is received by serial communication via the parallel-serial control IC.

[18-2. Data structure]
In this embodiment, the scheduler data can have various structures. For example, a call function for fetching other scheduler data as a part of the scheduler data may be provided. The scheduler execution unit 5060 sequentially executes the processing specified by the scheduler data, and at the time of executing the call function, temporarily executes the other scheduler data specified by the call function and then continues the processing of the original scheduler data. Will be executed. By doing so, it becomes possible to utilize general-purpose effect contents in various scenes, as in the case of calling a subroutine in a general program.

This function not only can reduce the load of creating scheduler data, but also has an effect peculiar to a gaming machine as shown below. In the gaming machine, various lottery or the like is performed during the game, and the development of the game changes depending on the result. Some players can find a subtle difference in the effect contents during the lottery and guess the lottery result and the like. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the call function can be used for general-purpose effect contents in various scenes, so that such a subtle difference can be eliminated and it is difficult to predict the lottery result and the like. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the loss of interest in the game.

As another configuration, the scheduler data may include a conditional branch function for switching the effect contents depending on the game state. The scheduler execution unit 5060 sequentially executes the processing defined by the scheduler data, and when executing the conditional branch function, determines the game state based on the main command and executes the effect contents according to the game state. .. By doing so, one scheduler data can be used to handle a variety of game states that branch. The game state used for conditional branching includes, for example, the result of a lottery performed during the game, the presence/absence of operation of buttons and the like by the player. In the spinning drum type game machine, the stopped state of the rotating reel may be used, and in the pachinko machine, the winning state to the starting winning port may be used. Further, the condition may be branched depending on whether or not an error occurs during the game.

The effect contents after the conditional branch can have various configurations. For example, after the conditional branch, the processing may be completely separated into two or more processes. Further, after performing a predetermined process by the conditional branch, the process before the branch may be restored. According to the latter mode, for example, after the process of temporarily outputting the sound effect when the button is pressed during the game, it is possible to return to the conventional effect without a feeling of strangeness.

As described above, the game machine can include various effect devices, and as an example, can include a display device for displaying an image. As the display device, various devices capable of displaying an image, such as a liquid crystal panel, a CRT, an organic EL panel, and a plasma display, can be used. The display content of the display device is controlled by the image processing device. The image processing device is a device that develops an image into a bitmap according to a predetermined display command and generates display data for displaying the image on the display device. For example, it can be configured by a combination of a VDP (Video Display Processor) and a character ROM or the like in which characters to be displayed on the screen are prepared as bitmaps.

[18-3. Basic concept of production control]
FIG. 391 is an explanatory view showing the basic concept of effect control in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. Here, a case where the main effect control is a sub effect that is executed by executing scheduler data including a function will be described, and in particular, sound output will be described as an example.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 (sub-effect scheduler execution unit 5320) activates the scheduler 5502 of the type and number according to the effect device when executing the effect. The scheduler execution unit 5060 acquires the scheduler data specified in the sub effect block data from the scheduler data storage unit 5070, and executes the function included in the scheduler data. The structure of the scheduler data will be described later.

The sound functions executed at the time of sound output include "SPLAY" for reproducing the phrase, "STOP_PH" for stopping the phrase being reproduced, "VOL_PH" for setting the volume level during phrase reproduction, and the like. These sound functions are processed by the sound module 5500, and the control designated by the parameters is executed. Upon receiving the execution of the sound function, the sound module 5500 generates sound source drive data and outputs the sound source drive data to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a.

The function processed by the sound module 5500 controls the output of the sound corresponding to the designated channel. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, 32 channels are provided, but the number of channels will be described as 4 for easy understanding. Further, the sound output by each channel is output from the speakers [1] to [4] via the volumes 5506v [1] to [4]. Note that the speakers [1] to [4] illustrated here schematically represent the outputs of the channels Ch1 to Ch4 and correspond to any one of the physical speakers provided in the gaming machine. Does not mean that

The correspondence between the scheduler 5502 and the output channels is managed by the channel management works 5507[1] to 5507[4] provided in association with the channels Ch1 to Ch4. The data structure of the channel management work 5507 is illustrated in the lower right part of the figure. The work 5507 stores a phrase number, a stereo reproduction flag, an output volume, and a loop attribute. The phrase number is information indicating which phrase is currently being reproduced. The stereo reproduction flag indicates whether or not stereo output is performed. The output volume is the volume for each channel. The loop attribute is a designation of whether or not to repeat the reproduction.
These pieces of information are designated by the sound module 5500 based on the sound function.

As described above, FIG. 391 shows the basic concept of the effect control in the present embodiment by taking the sound output control as an example. The sub-effect scheduler execution unit activates the scheduler specified by the sub-effect block data and executes the scheduler data on the scheduler. When the scheduler data is executed, the function for controlling each rendering device is called and processed by the module (sound module 5500, lamp module 5600, driving device module 5700) corresponding to each rendering device.

[18-4. Data flow in production control]
The module configuration and the basic concept of control in the effect control of the gaming machine have been described above. Next, the flow of effect control from the reception of the main command to the acquisition of the scheduler data will be described.

[18-4-1. Acquisition of data required for production control]
FIG. 392A is a diagram illustrating a configuration until data necessary for effect control of the gaming machine of the present embodiment is acquired. When the production control unit 5020 receives the main command from the main control board 1310 as described in FIG. 390, the command control module 5200 analyzes the main command and notifies the production control unit 5020 of the analysis result.

Based on the layer data table, the production control unit 5020, each layer, a variation pattern layer (a layer that produces an effect related to the variation pattern), a hold layer (a layer that produces an effect related to the hold production), a game instruction layer (a game instruction Based on the analysis result by the command analysis module 5200 for each of the layer to be performed), the communication error layer (the layer that notifies the communication error), the notification layer (the layer that performs various notifications), and the abnormality notification layer (the layer that performs the abnormality notification). , Acquisition and update management of the effect block data number corresponding to each layer. Also, the obtained effect block data number is transferred to the effect block control unit 5040. If the effect block number is, for example, a fluctuation pattern layer, based on the fluctuation pattern number, the liquid crystal effect block data combination number table for each fluctuation pattern, the liquid crystal pattern block data combination number table for each fluctuation pattern, and the sub effect block data for each fluctuation pattern It is determined from the combination number table. The unit of division of the effect block is divided into predetermined units (blocks) that are common effects within a series of effects (for example, effects that are executed from the start to the stop of the variation of the special symbol). In addition, block data including control information such as effect contents and effect time for each effect device is defined for each block. By controlling the effect for each effect block based on the effect block number, it is possible to synchronize effects by the effect devices. In addition, the arrangement of layers corresponds to the layers on the liquid crystal display. In this embodiment, the variation pattern layer is the backmost layer and the abnormality notification layer is the frontmost layer. The more important information is displayed in the foreground. This is a configuration for.

When the production block control unit 5040 receives the block data number (production block number) corresponding to each layer, the scheduler control unit (the liquid crystal production block control unit 5310, the liquid crystal symbol block control unit 5311, the sub production block) corresponding to each layer. The control unit 5320) acquires corresponding block data (liquid crystal effect block data 5051, liquid crystal symbol block data 5052, sub effect block data 5053). As described above, each block data includes scheduler data for executing the effect.

For example, when the main command is the start winning command, the hold layer is specified, and the liquid crystal effect block data 5051 for performing the hold display on the liquid crystal display screen and the sub effect block data for outputting the sound effect at the time of the start winning. 5053 is acquired. At the start of fluctuation of the special symbol, a fluctuation start command or the like is transmitted, and the fluctuation pattern layer is specified. Furthermore, the command is transmitted when the occurrence of an error or a warning is notified, and the abnormality detection layer is specified. Further, by performing the effect for each layer, a plurality of effects can be simultaneously overlapped.

When the liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 obtains the liquid crystal effect block data 5051 from the liquid crystal effect block data combination number table corresponding to each layer based on the liquid crystal effect block data number, the liquid crystal effect block 1503 draws the liquid crystal effect block scheduler 5031. Start the production 1f scheduler. The liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 further acquires liquid crystal effect schedule data 5071. Then, by executing the liquid crystal effect schedule data 5071 on the liquid crystal effect 1f scheduler, the liquid crystal module 5400 is instructed to perform the processing of the function defined in the liquid crystal effect schedule data 5071. The liquid crystal module 5400 processes the function instructed to be executed based on the specified scheduler data, creates a display list command necessary to drive the VDP 1540a, outputs the display list command to the VDP 1540a, and outputs the game board. An image is drawn on the side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. The process in the liquid crystal effect 1f scheduler is executed in synchronization with the screen update interval (1 frame).

Further, when the liquid crystal symbol block control unit 5311 acquires the liquid crystal symbol block data 5052 from the liquid crystal symbol block data combination number table corresponding to each layer based on the liquid crystal symbol block data number, the liquid crystal symbol 1f drawing scheduler executing unit 5332. The liquid crystal pattern 1f scheduler is activated by. The liquid crystal symbol 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332 further acquires liquid crystal symbol schedule data 5072. Then, by executing the liquid crystal symbol schedule data 5072 on the liquid crystal symbol 1f scheduler, the liquid crystal module 5400 is instructed to process the function defined in the liquid crystal symbol schedule data 5072. The liquid crystal module 5400 processes the function instructed to be executed based on the specified scheduler data, creates a display list command necessary to drive the VDP 1540a, outputs the display list command to the VDP 1540a, and outputs the game board. An image is drawn on the side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. The process in the liquid crystal symbol 1f scheduler is executed in synchronization with the screen update interval (1 frame).

When the sub effect block control unit 5320 acquires the sub effect block data 5053, the sub effect block control unit 5320 specifies the execution cycle (1 frame or 1 millisecond) based on the information specified in the sub effect block data 5053. If the execution cycle is one frame, the sub-effect 1f scheduler execution unit 5333 activates the sub-effect 1f scheduler, or if the execution cycle is 1 millisecond, the sub-effect 1ms scheduler execution unit 5334 causes the sub-effect 1ms. Start the scheduler.

Furthermore, the sub-effect 1f scheduler execution unit 5333 or the sub-effect 1ms scheduler execution unit 5334 acquires the sub-effect schedule data 5073 and executes it on the corresponding scheduler. The sub-effect schedule data 5073 has no difference in execution cycle, and all functions can be executed by the scheduler of all execution cycles. As a result, it becomes possible to create scheduler data that is commonly used by schedulers having different execution cycles, and the data capacity can be reduced. In addition, it is possible to quickly respond to changes in the execution cycle of the rendering device.
In addition, the same schedule data can be executed by different schedulers at the same time, which enables sharing of scheduler data, prevents the same type of failure from occurring at multiple locations, and also reduces the data capacity. it can.

Here, a specific example in which the same schedule data is simultaneously executed by different schedulers will be described. FIG. 392B is a view for explaining the liquid crystal drawing effect of the step-up notice of this embodiment. For the step-up notice, four kinds of step-up notices 1 to 4 can be executed. By executing the production in which the production contents are developed in stages, the player can expect the variation display result of the symbols. Suggest a degree.

In step-up notice 1, when the step-up 1 effect is executed, the notice effect ends. In the step-up notice 2, the step-up 2 effect occurs just before the end of the step-up 1 effect, and the notice effect ends after the step-up 2 effect ends. The same effect is executed for the step-up notices 3 and 4, and the notice effect is finished after the step-up 3 effect and the step-up 4 effect, respectively.

In the step-up notice, the sound and the lamp also execute the step-up notice production in accordance with the liquid crystal production. In sound production, different sounds are output at each stage of step-up production, so four types of scheduler data from step 1 to step 4 are defined for each progress state (stage) of production. On the other hand, in the lamp effect, since the same lamp pattern is displayed at each stage of the step-up effect, one kind of common lamp scheduler data may be defined.

When the LCD production of step-up notice progresses to the next stage, the next step-up notice is started just before the end of the step-up notice of the current stage. There is a period to be seen. As described above, in the lamp effect, it is necessary to execute the same scheduler data even for the subsequent step-up effect. However, in the present embodiment, a configuration in which the same scheduler data can be simultaneously executed by a plurality of schedulers is adopted. Has become. Therefore, when the same effect is executed at each stage, one type of common scheduler data may be defined even if the effect execution periods overlap.

Specifically, when the step up notice lamp scheduler data (SCH_LMP_STEP) is executed by the ramp scheduler (LMP_SCH01) in the step-up 1 production, the same step-up is performed when the step-up 2 production is started immediately before the end of the step-up 1 production. The advance lamp scheduler data (SCH_LMP_STEP) is executed by another lamp scheduler (LMP_SCH02). By configuring in this way, the same scheduler data can be executed at the same time (overlapping) without defining the same scheduler data in duplicate, and in the series of productions, productions of the same pattern can be performed in parallel. It has been achieved.

The sub-effect 1f scheduler execution unit 5333 or the sub-effect 1ms scheduler execution unit 5334 calls a module (sound module 5500, lamp module 5600, drive device module 5700) corresponding to the effect device to be controlled and is defined in the sub-effect schedule data 5073. To process the specified function. Each module processes a function instructed to be executed based on the designated scheduler data, creates data necessary for driving the rendering device, and outputs the drive data to the rendering device.

[18-4-2. Overview of scheduler data execution]
FIG. 393 is a diagram for explaining the flow of execution of the scheduler data of this embodiment.
The effect control unit 5020 determines effect contents based on the analysis result of the main (main board) command by the command analysis module 5200, and controls various effect devices by the sound source built-in VDP 1540a, the sound module 5500, the lamp module 5600, and the drive device module 5700. Control. FIG. 393 shows the structure of the scheduler data 5401 that is referenced to set this command.

In the present embodiment, the scheduler data 5401 is prepared for each effect number specified by the effect block control unit 5040 and stored in the peripheral control ROM 1530b. The correspondence relationship between the scheduler data 5401 and the effect number is defined in the effect management table. As shown on the left side of the figure, the effect management table includes an effect management pointer indicating the storage address of the scheduler data. Although there are as many effect management pointers as the number corresponding to the effect numbers, only five are illustrated here. In the example of the figure, for example, the effect management pointer [1] initially stores the start address A1 of the scheduler data 5401. As the processing of the scheduler data is executed, the value of the effect management pointer [1] sequentially shifts to A1 and A2.

In the present embodiment, the address value of the effect management pointer is used as the effect number. In the example of FIG. 393, the effect numbers 01H, 02H, etc. represent the storage addresses of the effect management pointers [1], [2], etc., respectively. The production number is not limited to the address value, and any identification information can be used. In this case, the effect management table may have a configuration in which effect numbers and effect management pointers are associated with each other. The scheduler execution unit 5060 searches for effect management pointers using the effect number as a key, and then stores the scheduler data in the scheduler data. Processing may be performed. If the address value of the performance management pointer is used as the performance number, the amount of data in the performance management table can be reduced, and the above-described search is unnecessary, so that the load required for processing the scheduler data can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 393, each command making up the scheduler data 5401 is basically made up of a function and a parameter. As described above, the function is a command for controlling the rendering device, for example, for instructing each module to operate the rendering device. The parameter is a variable that specifically indicates the processing content of the function. A function that does not need to specify a parameter may be provided.

The functions are classified into groups such as sequence control, lamp, sound, motor (driving device), and user. The sequence control is a basic function for performing effect control, and the lamp, the sound, and the motor are functions for controlling each effect device. Users are functions that do not belong to these groups. A specific description of the function will be described later with reference to FIGS. 396 to 398.

In the example shown in FIG. 393, the "call" function is specified at the address A2. The "call" function belongs to the sequence control group, saves the pointer value of the next function, and then sets the address designated by the parameter to the effect management pointer. The scheduler execution unit 5060 can temporarily return to the address designated by the parameter to process the scheduler data, and then return to the previous process based on the pointer value saved as described above.

The scheduler executing unit 5060 executes the address A31 specified by the parameter of the "call" function next to the address A2. A liquid crystal command is set at address A31, a voice operation number is set at A32, a lamp operation number is set at A33, and the process returns at A3n. When the production command ends these processes, it returns to the address "A2" in which "call" is designated, and shifts to the process of the next address A3.

As described above, by utilizing the "call" function, the contents of the series of blocks BL3 designated by the addresses A31 to A3n can be fetched into various parts of the scheduler data. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the capacity of the scheduler data and reduce the creation load thereof. In game machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, various lottery and the like are performed during the game, and the development of the game changes depending on the result. Some players can find a subtle difference in the effect contents during the lottery and guess the lottery result and the like. On the other hand, in the present invention, since the general-purpose effect contents can be utilized in various scenes by the call, it is possible to eliminate such subtle differences and make it difficult to predict the lottery result and the like. It is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being spoiled.

Although it is possible to use the "call" function in this way, the scheduler data 5401 of this embodiment is different from the interpreter program. As described above, the main function used in the scheduler data 5401 is to set the instruction contents to other schedulers such as “feature action number set”, “voice action number set”, and “lamp action number set”. This is because the scheduler executing unit 5060 only specifically instructs a very limited function.

In the example shown in FIG. 393, NOP (wait) is then executed at address A3. The "NOP" function waits for the designated number of frames and continues processing the scheduler data. Here, the processing of the scheduler data is on standby until the time designated by the parameter Prm[031] has elapsed. As will be described later, in this embodiment, the process is repeatedly executed by the timer interrupt. Therefore, if the value of the parameter Prm[031] is not 0 in the “NOP” function, the scheduler execution unit 5060 temporarily ends the processing of the scheduler data without performing the subsequent processing, and if this value is 0, , Perform processing to move to the function of the next address.

In the present embodiment, a work having the same format as the work area 5301 shown in FIG. 392A is used to specify the voice operation number and the like. The work area 5301 used by the system event and the work used by the scheduler execution unit 5060 are prepared separately, and the scheduler execution unit 5060 stores the voice operation number and the like in the work according to the designation of the scheduler data. Also, the layer specified by the effect control unit 5020 is provided separately from the layer for the system module (see FIG. 392A). Also in the work for each module, a plurality of voice operation numbers and lamp operation numbers can be designated in parallel from these layers.

Similarly, after the address A11 of the conditional branch, the scheduler data is defined by the function and the parameter. In the example shown in FIG. 393, no conditional branch is provided from the address A11 of the conditional branch to the end of the effect (address An). Since this range is the block BL2 different from the block BL1 described above, the accessory command (address A22), the voice action number (address A21), and the like can be specified without considering the conflict with the block BL1. .. Instead of these settings, the block BL3 or the like may be fetched by the "call" function.

In the scheduler data, the conditional branch and the "call" function may be used in combination. For example, a random number for switching the effect contents may be generated and a different address may be called according to the value of the random number. In the example shown in FIG. 393, if the condition “random number value≦Th1?” is attached to the address A2, the effects of the addresses A31 to A3n are executed when this condition is satisfied. If the address A41 (not shown) is called with a condition of "Th1<random number value≤Th2?" next to the address A2 (address A2+1), the address A31 and the subsequent addresses are determined according to the value of the random number. Different performances are executed. In this way, if different addresses are called by conditional branching according to the random number, the contents of the effect can be switched at random by the random number, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. Hereinafter, switching the effect contents in this manner is referred to as "effect lottery" in the present specification.

In the production lottery, all of the display, sound, lamp, and drive device may be switched, or only some of them may be switched. To switch all, the contents of the display, sound, and lamp should all be specified in the scheduler data called by the "call" function. To switch only a part, specify only the part to be switched in the scheduler data called by the "call" function, and specify the other parts uniformly after returning from the "call" function. do it.

Further, in the scheduler data, conditional branching and a "call" function may be used, and different scheduler data may be called according to the random number for the effect lottery. In this case, as a result of the display, the sound, the lamp, and the drive device performing the effect lottery independently, the effect modes realized by the combination become extremely diverse, and there is an advantage that the interest can be further enhanced.

However, regardless of the result of the display lottery of the display, the sound, the lamp, and the drive device, it is preferable that these productions be finished at the same time in order to realize a production without any discomfort. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the scheduler data to be selected in the effect lottery has the content that the effect ends at the same time. In addition, it is not an essential requirement that the production is finished at the same time, and the production times may not be the same.

The effect lottery using the scheduler data has various advantages in that the effect contents can be varied and the lottery mode can be switched according to the output status of the display, the sound, the lamp, and the driving device.
For example, when the drive device is executing the figure-eight distribution operation when the production lottery is instructed and other operations are limited, the drive device module 5700 prohibits the production lottery related to the drive device. May be. Similarly, regarding the display, sound, and lamp, the effect lottery may be prohibited depending on the situation when the effect lottery is instructed. In the production lottery prohibition, the production lottery may be partially prohibited by prohibiting selection of some scheduler data.

As described above, the effect lottery is to switch the effect contents by the control processing of the peripheral control board 1510, and does not affect the game itself. However, by enabling the production lottery in this way, it is possible to realize a variety of productions than the types of commands output from the main control board 1310, and it is possible to further enhance the interest.

[18-4-3. Overview of sound output control]
Next, the function of the sound module that controls the sound output will be described. FIG. 394 is an explanatory diagram showing functions of the sound module 5500 of the present embodiment. The sound module 5500 receives an instruction from the scheduler execution unit 5060, executes the process specified by the function included in the scheduler data, and outputs the sound. The sound module 5500 can receive requests from a plurality of schedulers 5502 and perform processing. Each scheduler 5502 is provided in association with a sound layer for voice.
A work 5507 for operation management is prepared for each scheduler 5502. The contents of the work 5507 will be described later.

When the scheduler operation unit 5060 identifies the voice operation number based on the scheduler control information, the scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the voice operation number table and identifies the scheduler data 5505 to be executed. The voice action number table is a table in which a sound pointer and a sound layer are associated with voice action numbers. In this embodiment, the voice action number corresponds to the storage address of the voice action number table. Although any identification information can be used as the voice action number, it is better to correspond to the storage address as in the case of the above-mentioned production number, so that the voice action number table capacity is reduced and the processing load at the time of referring to the table is reduced. Is possible.

The sound pointer specifies the storage address of the scheduler data 5505.
In this embodiment, the address SA1 is stored in the sound pointer [1].

The scheduler data 5505 is composed of functions and parameters.
Functions used in the scheduler data 5505 for controlling sound output will be described later with reference to FIGS. 397 and 398.

In the example shown in FIG. 394, the “call” function is defined at the address SA2. The scheduler execution unit 5060 executes a series of blocks after the address SA31 (not shown) and then processes the address SA3 next to the address SA2.

At address SA3, phrase reproduction is specified. The scheduler execution unit 5060 reads the phrase data 5508 corresponding to the phrase number 00H designated by the parameter and reproduces it.

Also, an example of the structure of the phrase data 5508 is shown on the right side of FIG. 394. The phrase number is identification information attached to each phrase data. In this embodiment, arbitrary identification information can be used, but the storage address of the phrase data 5508 may be used as the phrase number. In this case, the phrase number can be omitted from the phrase data 5508.

The channel is an output channel designated when the phrase is reproduced. The left and right pan pots and the upper and lower pan pots are the left/right/upper/left output balance of each speaker provided in the gaming machine. Volume is the output volume. The song number is an identification number of a sound to be reproduced.
When the tune number with built-in sound source is notified to the VDP 1540a with built-in sound source, the VDP 1540a with built-in sound source reads sound source data corresponding to the tune number from the liquid crystal and the sound ROM 1540b, and reproduces sound.
The loop is a designation of whether or not the sound is repeatedly reproduced. Stereo is a designation of whether to perform stereo output.

A work 5507 for operation management is associated with each scheduler 5502. The work 5507 stores various information shown in the drawing. The operating state indicates whether or not each layer is operating. The voice number represents the number of the scheduler data 5505 in operation. In this embodiment, the start address of the scheduler data 5505 is used.
The sound pointer is the address of the scheduler data 5505 that the scheduler 5502 is executing. In the example shown in FIG. 394, the value of the sound pointer sequentially shifts to SA2 and SA3 as the process progresses. The timer value represents the waiting time until the next function is executed. It is set when the waiting time is designated by the scheduler data 5505, and is sequentially subtracted as time passes. The sound module 5500 executes the following function when this value becomes 0.

The number of call nests and the number of loop nests represent the number of nests of calls and loops that are multiply designated by the scheduler data 5505 and the phrase number. That is, for example, when the scheduler data 5505 of another address is further called by the "call" function (second call) in the processing after the address SA31 called by the "call" function (first call) of the address SA2, the call nest The number is 2. When the second call ends and the first call returns, the number of call nests is reduced to one. The loop is similar. The call return address is a return address from the call destination and is provided according to the number of call nests. The loop start address is the start address of the loop range, and the loop count is the loop repeat count. The loop start address and the like are provided according to the number of loop nests.

[18-4-4. Overview of lamp output control]
Next, the function of the lamp module that controls the output of the lamp will be described. FIG. 395 is an explanatory diagram showing functions of the lamp module 5600 of the present embodiment. The lamp module 5600 receives an instruction from the scheduler execution unit 5060, executes the processing specified by the function included in the scheduler data, and performs lamp output, that is, lamp lighting/flashing control. Similarly to the sound module 5500, the lamp module 5600 can also accept requests from a plurality of schedulers 5602 and perform processing. Each scheduler 5602 is provided in association with a lamp layer for lamps. A work 5603 for operation management is prepared for each scheduler 5602. The contents of the work 5603 will be described later.

When the lamp execution number is specified based on the scheduler control information, the scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the lamp operation number table and specifies the scheduler data 5601 to be executed. The lamp operation number table is a table in which a lamp pointer and a lamp layer are associated with lamp operation numbers. In the present embodiment, the lamp operation number corresponds to the storage address of the lamp operation number table. Although any identification information can be used as the lamp operation number, it is possible to reduce the capacity of the lamp operation number table and the processing load when referencing the table by using the storage address, as in the case of the above-mentioned production number. There is an advantage that it is possible.

The ramp pointer designates the storage address of the scheduler data 5601. In this embodiment, the address LA1 is stored in the ramp pointer [1].

The scheduler data 5505, like the effect data (FIG. 393), is composed of functions and parameters. Functions used in the scheduler data 5505 for controlling the lamp will be described later with reference to FIG. 397.

In the example shown in FIG. 395, the "call" function is defined at the address LA2. The scheduler execution unit 5060 executes a series of blocks after the address LA31 (not shown) and then processes the address LA3 next to the address LA2.

At the address LA3, gradation pattern setting is specified. The scheduler execution unit 5060 sets the gradation pattern data 5606 stored in the address LA11 designated by the parameter. A gradation scheduler 5604 is provided in association with each of the lamp schedulers 5602. The lamp is turned on with the specified gradation data 1, and when the time specified by the timer value elapses, the lamp is displayed with the gradation data 2. Light up. Here, an example in which two kinds of gradation data are specified is shown, but even when three or more kinds of gradation data are specified, the lamp is turned on while sequentially switching the gradation data at the time interval of the timer value. By preparing a plurality of gradation pattern settings for the addresses LA12 and later, it is possible to light the lamp with various gradation patterns while changing the switching timer value between gradation data. It is also possible to provide a loop in the gradation pattern data. The gradation scheduler 5604 finishes the lighting of the lamp after executing the series of processes of the addresses LA11 to LA1n. The ramp scheduler 5602 returns to the processing of the address LA3 of the scheduler data 5601, and executes the processing of the next address until it is stopped (address LAn).

A work 5603 for operation management is associated with each scheduler 5602. The work 5603 stores various information shown in the drawing. The scheduler status indicates whether the scheduler is running. The operation pattern number represents the number of the scheduler data 5601 in operation. In this embodiment, the start address of the scheduler data 5601 is used. The scheduler timer represents the waiting time until the next function is executed. It is set when the waiting time is specified by the scheduler data, and is sequentially subtracted with the passage of time. The ramp executes the next function when this value becomes zero. The gradation data timer represents a waiting time until the next gradation data is executed when the gradation pattern data 5606 is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 395, when the gradation data defined in the address LA11 is executed, when the timer value set in the gradation data timer becomes 0, the gradation data 1 shifts to the gradation data 2. Then, when the timer value becomes 0 again, the processing of the address LA11 is ended and the processing shifts to the processing of the address LA12.

The ramp pointer is the address of the scheduler data 5601 executed by the scheduler 5602. In the example shown in FIG. 395, the value of the lamp pointer sequentially shifts to LA1, LA2, and LA3 as the process progresses. The gradation data pointer is an address of the gradation pattern data 5606 executed by the gradation scheduler 5604. In the example in the drawing, the value of the gradation data pointer sequentially shifts to LA11 and LA12 as the process proceeds.
The loop count is the loop repeat count, and the loop start address is the start address of the loop range. As with sounds, loops may be nested.

[18-4-5. Overview of drive unit control]
Next, the function of the drive device module 5700 that controls the operation of the drive device will be described. The drive device is, for example, a stepping motor. The control is similar to that of the lamp module 5600, and therefore the illustration is omitted. The drive device module 5700 receives an instruction from the scheduler execution unit 5060, executes the process specified by the function included in the scheduler data, and controls the operation of the drive device. The drive module 5700 can also receive requests from a plurality of schedulers and perform processing.

The control items of the drive device include, for example, a movement amount (rotational step angle of the stepping motor), a movement time, a movement speed (motor rotation speed), an excitation method, a trapezoidal drive, and a rotation direction.
In addition, instructions to execute a return operation to return to the origin position and mechanical end stop (when the movable range of the drive device is mechanically limited, stop while energizing to the limit position of the movable range) are given. included. In the trapezoidal drive, the speed is not changed stepwise when starting and stopping the rotation, but the rotation speed is changed at a predetermined angular acceleration.

The scheduler data is composed of functions and parameters. The functions used in the scheduler data to control the drive are described below in FIG. 398.

[18-5. function]
The example of using the function in the module used for the effect control has been described above. Here, other functions will be described. 396 to 398 are diagrams showing an example of a function in the effect control of the gaming machine of the present embodiment. As mentioned above, the functions are categorized into sequence control, lamp, sound, motor and user groups. The functions belonging to each group will be described below.

[18-5-1. Function details (sequence control)]
The functions belonging to the sequence control group are mainly functions for controlling the flow of production. FIG. 396 shows an example of a function of sequence control. The outline of each function will be described below.

“STOP” is a function that represents the end of scheduler data. “NOP” is a weighting function that waits for a time corresponding to the number of executions by specifying the number of executions as a parameter. The time depending on the number of executions differs depending on the processing cycle for executing the “NOP” function, and if it is executed in a frame cycle, one frame is about 33.334 milliseconds in the present embodiment, so the number of executions is If 30 is specified, it will wait for about 1 second, and if it is executed at a cycle of 1 ms, if the number of executions is also specified as 30, it will wait for about 30 ms. "NOP_F_VALUE" has the number of executions (number of frames), the scheduler memory number, the mask value and the comparison value as parameters, and when the condition based on the scheduler memory number, the mask value and the comparison value is satisfied, the "NOP_F_VALUE" function is terminated and the condition is changed. If not satisfied, this is a conditional wait function that waits for a time corresponding to the number of executions.

"MEMW" is a function that writes the specified value in the corresponding scheduler work area using the target scheduler work number and value as parameters. “LOOPST” is a function for performing repetitive processing (loop), specifies the beginning of the loop, and sets the number of loops as a parameter. In addition, if the number of loops is set to "0", an infinite loop is set. “LOOP” is a function for designating the end of the repeating process (loop).

“RET” is a function for returning processing to the calling block (function data). The pointer value saved by the "call" function is set in the production management table. “CALL” is the above-mentioned “call” function, which executes a process from a specified address (block), and has information such as an address value and a label for specifying a callee as a parameter. In "CALL", the pointer value of the function to be executed next is saved, and the address of the call destination is set in the effect management pointer. Then, after executing the processing of the call destination, the address saved by the above-mentioned “RET” function is set in the effect management pointer, and the processing returns to the previous processing.

The "SUBC" selects a process (block to be executed) to be called, using the scheduler work number value as an index, based on the target scheduler work number and the branch table specified in the parameters, and executes the selected process. That is, the "call" function is executed based on the specified condition. A specific example using “SUBC” will be described later with reference to FIG. 401. When the processing of the callee is completed by the "SUBC" function, the processing returns to the processing of the caller (the processing following the "SUBC" function).

"SUBJ" selects a process (block to be executed) to be called, using the scheduler work number value as an index, based on the target scheduler work number and the table specified in the parameters, and executes the selected process. That is, the “JUMP” function described later is executed based on the specified condition. A specific example using "SUBJ" will be described later with reference to FIG. The process of the callee is continued without returning to the process of the caller that executed the "SUBJ" function. "JUMP" sets the address designated by the parameter to the effect management pointer, and continues the process from the designated address or label.

“REQ” is a function for starting another scheduler specified by a parameter. A specific example using “REQ” will be described later with reference to FIG. 403. Like "REQ", "REQF" is a function for starting another scheduler specified by a parameter, and other scheduler data is overwritten until the overwrite prohibition time specified by the parameter elapses. It is prohibited to start up. In "REQ", control by a plurality of scheduler data can be executed in parallel. On the other hand, "REQF" makes it possible to independently execute the processing of the scheduler data to be executed for a specified period. For example, in the case of initialization of the accessory, another scheduler data for operating the accessory is executed and controlled. It can be prevented from being disabled.

[18-5-2. Function details (lamp)]
The function belonging to the lamp group is a function for controlling the flow of lamp production. FIG. 397 shows an example of functions relating to lamp control, and an outline of each function will be described.

“HPLAY” is a function for executing a lamp gradation data reproducing process for lighting the lamp based on the gradation data designated by the parameter. In "HPPLAY", even if the lamp is being reproduced with the same gradation data, the lamp is reset and the lamp reproduction is started from the beginning when the function is executed. The gradation data is specified by setting the gradation pattern data address, and the execution of the gradation data is instructed by clearing the gradation data timer in the work 5603.

Similar to “HPPLAY”, “KPLAY” is a function for executing a lamp gradation data reproducing process for lighting the lamp based on the gradation data designated by the parameter. With "KPLAY", if the lamp is being reproduced with the same gradation data, the lamp being reproduced is continued without being reset.

“HPPLAY2” is a function for executing the ramp gradation data reproduction process by specifying the layer in addition to the gradation data by a parameter. The processing is similar to that of "HPPLAY". Similar to “HPPLAY2”, “KPLAY2” is a function that specifies a layer in addition to gradation data by a parameter and executes a ramp gradation data reproduction process. The processing is similar to that of "KPLAY".

“HPPLAY” and “KPLAY” execute designated lamp gradation data reproducing processing for reproducing the lamp gradation data designated by the parameter. When the lamp gradation data has already been reproduced, the reproduction of the lamp gradation data is interrupted during the reproduction by "HPPLAY" and the same lamp gradation data is reproduced from the beginning, and the lamp gradation data is reproduced during the reproduction by "KPLAY". Playback continues without interruption. That is, even if the gradation data of the same lamp is executed using "KPLAY" while the lamp gradation data is being reproduced, no particular process is executed.

In addition to the function of “HPPLAY” described above, “HPPLAY2” is the same as “HPPLAY” except that the layer for reproducing the lamp gradation data is designated by the parameter and the layer is designated by the parameter.

In addition to the function of "KPLAY" described above, "KPLAY2" has the same process as "KPLAY" except that the layer for reproducing the lamp gradation data is specified by the parameter and the layer is specified by the parameter.

[18-5-3. Function details (sound)]
The function belonging to the sound group is a function for controlling the sound output. FIG. 397 and FIG. 398 list examples of functions related to sound control, and an outline of each function will be described.

"SPLAY" is a function for executing a phrase reproduction process of outputting a sound based on the phrase number designated by the parameter. In "SPLAY", even if the sound of the same phrase number is being reproduced, the sound is reset and the reproduction of the sound is started from the beginning when the function is executed. "SXPLAY" is a function for executing a phrase reproduction process for outputting a sound based on a phrase number designated by a parameter, like "SPPLAY". In "SXPLAY", when the sound of the same phrase number is being reproduced, the reproduction of the sound is continued without resetting. "STOP_PH" is a function for executing phrase stop processing for stopping the reproduction of the sound based on the phrase number designated by the parameter.

"PAN_PH" is the end of the panpot, using the transition time and the panpot end coordinate position, which are also specified by the parameters, from the voice output coordinate position when the "PAN_PH" function is started, for the phrase being played back specified by the parameter. This is a function for moving the voice output coordinate position to the coordinate position at the designated transition time. In addition to the function of the "PAN_PH" function, "PAN_PH2" can also specify the panpot start coordinate position by a parameter. Like the "PAN_PH" function, the voice output coordinates of the target phrase at the start of the function execution. This is a function for moving the audio output coordinate position from the panpot start coordinate position whose position is designated by the parameter to the panpot end coordinate position at the designated transition time.

"VOL_FADE_PH" specifies the phrase being played specified by the parameter from the volume value at the start of execution of the "VOL_FADE_PH" function to the fade end volume value using the transition time and fade end volume value also specified by the parameters. It is a function to increase/decrease the volume value at different transition times. In addition to the function of the "VOL_FADE_PH" function, "VOL_FADE_PH2" also allows the fade start volume value to be specified by a parameter. As with the "VOL_FADE_PH" function, the volume value of the target phrase at the start of function execution is a parameter. This is a function for increasing/decreasing the volume value at the transition time designated from the fade start volume value designated by the above to the fade end volume value.

"VOL_PH" is a function for increasing or decreasing the volume value of the phrase being played specified by the parameter with the volume value specified by the parameter. “VOL_MUTE_ON_PH” is a function for muting the volume of the phrase specified by the parameter. "VOL_MUTE_OFF_PH" is a function for canceling mute of the volume of the phrase specified by the parameter.

"SCPLAY" and "SXCPLAY" execute a designated channel music reproduction process for reproducing the phrase corresponding to the phrase number specified in the parameter on the specified channel.
When the same phrase has already been reproduced, the reproduction of the phrase is interrupted and the same phrase is reproduced from the beginning when the reproduction is performed by "SCPLAY", and the reproduction of the phrase is continued without interruption during the reproduction by "SXCPPLAY". That is, that is, if the same phrase is executed using "SXCPPLAY" while the phrase is being reproduced, no particular process is executed.

"PAN_CH" performs the panpot targeting the phrase by "PAN_PH" described above, whereas the panpot targeting the ch (channel) is performed. The ch is specified by the parameter and the phrase is changed to ch. Other than that, the processing is the same as "PAN_PH". Regarding “PAN_CH2”, the above-mentioned “PAN_PH2” performs the panpot targeting the phrase, whereas the “PAN_PH2” performs the panpot targeting the ch, except that the ch is specified by the parameter and the phrase is changed to ch. The processing remains the same.

“VOL_FADE_CH” performs the fade targeting the phrase while “VOL_FADE_PH” described above performs the fade targeting the ch. The ch is designated as a parameter and the phrase is changed to the ch as “VOL_FADE_PH”. Processing does not change. As for “VOL_FADE_CH2”, the above-mentioned “VOL_FADE_PH2” performs the fade targeting the phrase, whereas the fade targeting the ch target is performed, except that the ch is designated by the parameter and the phrase is changed to “CH_FADE_PH2”. Processing does not change.

"VOL_CH" increases/decreases the volume value for the phrase described above while "VOL_PH" increases/decreases the volume value for the ch. ch is specified by a parameter and the phrase is changed to ch. Other than that, the processing is the same as "VOL_PH". As for "VOL_MUTE_ON_CH", the above-mentioned "VOL_MUTE_ON_PH" mutes a phrase as a target, while mutes a ch as a target. The ch is specified by a parameter and the phrase is changed to a ch. Other than that, the process is the same as "VOL_MUTE_ON_PH". As for “VOL_MUTE_OFF_CH”, the above-mentioned “VOL_MUTE_OFF_PH” cancels the mute for the phrase, whereas the mute cancels for the ch. The ch is specified by the parameter. The process is the same as "VOL_MUTE_OFF_PH" except that is changed to ch.

[18-5-4. Function details (motor)]
The function belonging to the motor group is a function for controlling the output of the motor or the solenoid. FIG. 398 shows an example of functions relating to motor control, and an outline of each function will be described.

“MPLAY” executes a motor regeneration process that causes the motor to regenerate an operation based on the motor data number designated in the parameter. “MMPLAY” executes a motor regeneration process that causes the motor designated by the parameter to regenerate the operation based on the motor data number. “SOL_ON” executes a solenoid ON process that causes the solenoid to perform an operation based on the solenoid data number specified in the parameter. “SOL_OFF” executes a solenoid OFF process that causes the solenoid to stop the operation based on the solenoid data number specified in the parameter.

[18-5-5. Function details (user)]
The function belonging to the user's group is a function for executing the control not belonging to the group described above. An example of these functions is given in FIG. 398, and an outline of each function will be described.

"MBUF_SET" executes a motor output buffer scheduler work value setting process for setting a scheduler work value in the motor output buffer. "COMMAND" and "COMMAND0" are processes for issuing commands from within the scheduler. In "COMMAND", a command is issued to the VDP 1540a with a built-in sound source. For example, a command to start drawing is issued to the liquid crystal display device. On the other hand, the command issued by "COMMAND0" is analyzed by the command analysis module 5200, and the same operation as the main command is performed. "MEMC" executes a scheduler memory copy process for copying the contents of the work area of the scheduler being executed to the work area of another scheduler.

[18-6. Scheduler]
Next, a scheduler that calls each function will be described. The scheduler is used to execute scheduler data, which is a data string in which the functions required to execute a series of processes are defined in the execution order. Although one or more schedulers are provided for each purpose of management, all functions can be executed by all schedulers, and functions related to lamps can be executed by the sound scheduler and schedulers for character effects. There is no difference other than the processing cycle (frame or 1 ms) in the plurality of schedulers that can execute the functions for sound, and it is possible to execute all the functions in a mixed manner. There is no limit to the number of schedulers that can be executed, and a plurality of registered schedulers can be executed simultaneously.

FIG. 399 is a diagram showing an example of the scheduler definition of the present embodiment. The scheduler can be conveniently classified according to the state transition and the device to be controlled. The outline of typical types of schedulers will be described below.

First, an example of a scheduler relating to state transition will be described. There is a special figure state scheduler (special figure state SCH, TOK_SCH) for executing main state transition scheduler data for controlling the transition of the game state of the entire game. In the effect control in the peripheral control board 1510, the transition of the game state is controlled based on the command received from the main control board 1310. The processing cycle of the special figure state scheduler is 1f (frame).

Further, there is a sub-state scheduler (sub-state SCH, SUB_SCH) for executing sub-state scheduler data that controls the transition of the internal state (sub-internal state) in the peripheral control board 1510. The internal state transitions when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and transitions to another state, for example, when the player operates a production button, wins an execution lottery for production, or when a predetermined time elapses from the start of fluctuation. To do. The processing cycle of the sub-state scheduler is 1f (frame).

To the scheduler targeted for sound, the background for controlling the output of the sound output accompanying the background display and the variable display of the design, the scheduler for executing the design sound scheduler data (SND_SCH01), and the output when the notice production is executed There is a scheduler (SND_SCH02, 03) that controls the output of the sound that sounds, and a scheduler (SND_SCH04) that controls the output of the sound when the advance notice is executed by the accessory. The processing cycle of the scheduler for sound is 1f (frame).

Similar to the sound-related scheduler, a related scheduler for lamps is a background for controlling lighting/blinking of the lamp associated with the background display and the variable display of symbols, and a scheduler for executing the symbol lamp scheduler data (LMP_SCH01 ), a scheduler (LMP_SCH02, 03) that controls the lighting/blinking of the lamp when the notice production is executed, and a scheduler (LMP_SCH04) that controls the lighting/blinking of the lamp when the notice is executed by an accessory. The processing cycle of the scheduler for the ramp is 1f (frame).

Further, a scheduler that controls sounds and lamps in conjunction with each other is also defined. Such a scheduler has a sound/lamp notification layer that performs sound output and lighting/blinking of the lamp in order to notify the outside of such things as running out of balls and ball clogging and alarms due to abnormality detection by magnetic sensors. There is a scheduler (INF_SCH01 to 03) for executing the scheduler data for each layer. In addition, there is a sound/lamp general-purpose scheduler (SNDLMP_SCH01 to 05) that is generally used to execute an effect in which sound output and lighting/blinking of a lamp are linked. The processing cycle of these schedulers is 1f (frame).

The motor-targeted scheduler includes a scheduler (MOTSYS_SCH) for executing motor system scheduler data for executing system operation, a scheduler for executing motor ram clear scheduler data for performing settings when RAM is cleared ( MOTRAM_SCH), a scheduler for executing the motor accessory initialization scheduler data for initializing the placement of the accessory (MOTINI_SCH), for executing a motor accessory correction scheduler data for correcting the position of the accessory. There is a scheduler (MOTHOS_SCH), and a scheduler (MOT_SCH) for executing the operation of the accessory by the effect or the like.

The scheduler for executing the action of the accessory according to the production or the like is a general-purpose scheduler that is used without depending on the scheduler (MOT_SCH01 to 05) for controlling the action of the specific accessory or the type of the accessory. There is a scheduler (MOT_SCH05-10).

The processing cycle of the scheduler for the motor is 1 ms (milliseconds), which is shorter than the processing cycle of the scheduler for the game state management, sounds and lamps (this embodiment 1f=about 33.334 ms). Has become.

The number of schedulers controlling each target device is fixed in the present embodiment, but the number of schedulers may be controlled to dynamically increase or decrease according to the gaming state or the advance notice. As a result, each scheduler can be activated without depending on the number of prizes or the like provided in the gaming machine and the number of effects, and the restrictions for executing effects can be reduced.

[18-7. Application example of scheduler data (production 1)]
The outline of the types and functions of the scheduler used to perform a series of controls by combining the functions used in the production control and these functions has been described above. Below, specific application examples of the scheduler data and functions will be described with reference to the drawings. explain.

[18-7-1. Performance overview]
FIG. 400A is a diagram showing an example of an operation of an accessory controlled by using the scheduler data according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 400A, in the game board 5 of the present embodiment, a logo role object 5001, a star role object 5002 (a left star role object 5002a, a middle star role object 5002b, a right star role object 5002c) and a hook role object 5003. Is placed.

The logo accessory 5001 is arranged at the upper left of the game area. When the logo accessory 5001 operates, it drops (moves) from the initial position (upper position) to the intermediate position, and returns to the initial position after the performance is completed. Further, the logo accessory 5001 can move not only vertically but also can be vibrated vertically and horizontally before and after the movement.

The star role object 5002 is arranged above the game area, the left star role object 5002a is arranged on the left side, the middle star role object 5002b is arranged on the center, and the right star role object 5002c is arranged on the right side. Each star role object 5002 can be operated independently, and one or a plurality of star role objects 5002 operate at a predetermined timing according to the effect contents.

The left star role object 5002a moves to the lower left, and can move to a position slightly lower left in the center of the game area. Further, the middle starry object 5002b moves downward and can be moved to a position slightly above the center of the game area. The right star accessory 5002c moves to the lower right, and can move to a position slightly lower right in the center of the game area. Each star role object 5002 may be stopped before moving to the final arrival position, or may be stopped after returning to the final arrival position and returning to an intermediate position.

The board member 5003 is arranged above the center of the game area. The hook member 5003 can be dropped (moved) from an initial position (upper position) to an intermediate position and a lower position. Depending on the operation of the production button by the player or the lottery result of the hooked goods notice production, etc., it moves from the initial position to the intermediate position and temporarily stops, then moves to the lower position or moves from the initial position to the lower position at once. The operation mode is performed. Similar to the logo accessory 5001, the hook accessory 5003 can be vibrated vertically and horizontally before and after the movement.

Next, the flow of the notice effect executed by one symbol change will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 400B, a step-up notice, a button (BTN) cut-in notice, a group notice, a star role product notice, and a button (BTN) logo feature product fall notice will be described. It should be noted that the flow of the notice effect including the hook notice effect will be described with reference to FIG. 410.

FIG. 400B shows an example of the execution timing of the notice effect executed in the series of variable display from the start to the stop of the variation of the special symbol in the present embodiment, and is a diagram for explaining the scheduler and the scheduler data used at this time. is there. In the series of variable displays shown in FIG. 400B, the step-up notice and the button (BTN) cut-in notice are executed in the first half of the change. After that, a reach occurs, and in the latter half of the change, a group notice, a star role notice and a button (BTN) logo feature notice are executed. Scheduler data for controlling lighting of lamps, output of sound, image output, operation of character parts, and the like is executed for each notice effect.

Hereinafter, a part of the scheduler data for executing each notice effect will be extracted, and the control and the function configured by the scheduler data will be described. Specifically, the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_STP" (Fig. 401) that controls the lamp in the step-up notice, the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" (Fig. 402) that controls the lamp in the button cut-in notice, and the star role object in the star effect notice Motor scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1" (FIGS. 403 to 405) for controlling the operation of 5002 and motor scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" (FIG. 406) for controlling the operation of the logo accessory 5001 in the button logo accessory drop notice will be described.

[18-7-2. Lamp control during step-up notice]
In the step-up notice of the present embodiment, the lighting mode of the predetermined lamp is controlled so as to change stepwise according to the degree of expectation (step-up notice lottery result value). As shown in FIG. 400B, the step-up notice lamp scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_STP” belongs to the notice group 01 and is driven by the notice group 01 lamp scheduler data scheduler (lamp SCH notice 01) “LMP_SCH02”.

FIG. 401 is a diagram for explaining the content of scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_STP” that controls the lighting/blinking of the lamp in the step-up notice of the present embodiment.

When the scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_STP” is started, first, the function “SUBC:YKK_STP:TBL_LMP_STP” is executed. This function is the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC", and is executed with the target scheduler work number "YKK_STP" and the step-up notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_STP" as parameters.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the specified step-up notice branch call address table “TBL_LMP_STP” and identifies the address of the scheduler data to be branched to based on the content of the step-up notice work area “YKK_STP”. The step-up notice work area “YKK_STP” stores a step-up notice lottery result value, and corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the step-up notice branch call address table “TBL_LMP_STP”.

The address of the step-up notice lamp scheduler data is stored in the step-up notice branch call address table “TBL_LMP_STP”. Specifically, SUBC_NON, SUBC_LMP_STP1, SUBC_LMP_STP2, SUBC_LMP_STP3, and SUBC_LMP_STP4 indicating the scheduler data address are stored. It should be noted that SUBC_NON is an address for dummy call indicating that no processing is performed, and by preparing an address for dummy call, it is possible to turn off the lamp when the notice is not won. .. SUBC_LMP_STP1, SUBC_LMP_STP2, SUBC_LMP_STP3, and SUBC_LMP_STP4 are addresses of scheduler data for executing the step-up notice corresponding to the step-up number (1 to 4).

In the present embodiment, the step-up notice work area “YKK_STP” stores a lottery result value corresponding to a step-up notice with a step-up number of 4, and the scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_STP4” is executed. The scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_STP4” specifies the gradation pattern data (PTA_STP_PT1 to 4) corresponding to each step, executes the ramp gradation data reproduction process (KPLAY), and waits 90 frames (about 3 seconds) for each step. Execute the process. As a result, in each step, the lamp is lit/blinked with the corresponding gradation pattern for 3 seconds. At this time, the scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_STP4” is driven using the background and symbol lamp scheduler data scheduler “LMP_SCH01”.

After that, the function "RET" is executed in the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_STP4" to return to the processing of the calling source (scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_YKK_STP"). Further, the function "STOP" is executed, and the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_YKK_STP" is ended.

In the present embodiment, the step-up notice work area “YKK_STP” stores a lottery result value corresponding to a step-up notice with a step-up number of 4, and the scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_STP4” is executed. The scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_STP4" specifies ramp gradation pattern data (PTA_STP_PT1 to 4) corresponding to each step-up and executes a ramp gradation data reproduction process (KPLAY), and 90 frames (about 3 seconds) for each step. The wait process of is executed. As a result, in each step, the lamp is turned on and blinks in the corresponding lamp gradation pattern for 3 seconds. At this time, the scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_STP4” is driven using the notice group 01 lamp scheduler data scheduler “LMP_SCH02”.

After that, the function "RET" is executed in the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_STP4" to return to the next process of the calling source (scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_YKK_STP"). Further, the function "STOP" is executed, and the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_STP" is ended.

The step-up notice has been described above. Here, the functions that can be realized by the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" will be described. Firstly, the scheduler data for the lottery results can be called with one action for a plurality of lottery results based on the dynamically rewritten work memory contents (preliminary lottery result values in the present embodiment). is there. Depending on the contents of the notice, there are cases where the range of the lottery result value becomes several hundreds, and in the two-branch like the IF statement, the number of scheduler data for the determination increases and the management becomes complicated because it becomes complicated. On the other hand, "SUBC" easily solves the above problem by using the work memory contents as an index. Further, in the present embodiment, the number of the work memory and the number of the call address tables for branching are one, but it is also possible to process complicated conditional branching by one action by making them both. Secondly, since it takes the form of "CALL", it becomes possible to execute the common scheduler data after executing the "SUBC" function, and it is not necessary to describe the scheduler data after the branch for the number of branches. By describing one scheduler data, the same processing can be executed after all branches. Further, in order to deal with a problem in the program, when the value of the work memory exceeds the number of elements of the call address table for branching, the branching process may not be performed and the "SUBC" function may be ended.

That is, the function “SUBC” can select the scheduler data of the branch destination from the branch destinations stored in advance in the table format based on the value stored in the work area, and call the selected scheduler data. In a simple conditional branch, it is necessary to define the condition according to the number of branches and set the scheduler data of each branch destination, but with the function "SUBC", the addition or deletion of branch destinations can be performed easily. , It is possible to easily add/change the production contents and improve the development efficiency.

[18-7-3. Lamp control in button cut-in notice]
The button cut-in advance notice of the present embodiment is started in the first half of the change, and the advance notice is executed to the end by receiving the operation input of the effect button by the player within a predetermined period. Further, similar to the step-up notice, the lighting mode of the predetermined lamp is controlled according to the degree of expectation (lottery result value of the button cut-in notice).

The button cut-in notice belongs to the notice group 02, and the ramp scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT” is driven by the notice group 02 lamp scheduler data scheduler (lamp SCH notice 02) “LMP_SCH03” as shown in FIG. 400B. Since it belongs to a notice group different from the step-up notice and the scheduler data is driven by another scheduler, the notice can be executed in parallel.

FIG. 402 is a diagram illustrating the content of scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT” that controls the lamp in the button cut-in notice of the present embodiment.

When the scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT” is started, first, the function “KPLAY:LMP_SCH03:PTA_CUT_STA” is executed, and then the wait process “NOP:30” for 30 frames (about 1 second) is executed. As a result, the designated lamp lights up (blinks) for 1 second based on the gradation pattern data “PTA_CUT_STA”. At this time, the ramp scheduler “LMP_SCH03” is used.

Subsequently, a loop process for 3 seconds is executed in order to accept the input of the effect button from the player. Specifically, the function "LOOPST" is executed with the parameter loop count set to 90 times. Since one frame corresponds to one loop, 90 loops correspond to 3 seconds. In the loop processing, the functions from “LOOPST” indicating the start of the loop to the function “LOOP” indicating the end of the loop are executed a maximum number of times. Therefore, the function “SUBC:YKK_BTN:TBL_LMP_CUB” is executed up to 90 times.

Explaining the function “SUBC:YKK_BTN:TBL_LMP_CUB”, the scheduler work area index branch call “SUBC” is executed with the target scheduler work number “YKK_BTN” and the button cut-in notice branch call address table “TBL_LMP_CUB” as parameters.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the button cut-in advance notice branch call address table “TBL_LMP_CUB”, and specifies the start address of the scheduler data to be a branch destination based on the content of the button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN”. Button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN" stores the operation state of the effect button, "0: button OFF" when the effect button is not operated, "1: button ON" when the effect button is operated. Is set. The operation state of the effect button corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the button cut-in advance notice branch call address table “TBL_LMP_CUB”. Further, the contents of the button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN” are rewritten by a program for button processing outside the scheduler data.

Button ON_OFF While "0: Button OFF" is set in the work area "YKK_BTN", the button scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_CUT_BTNOFF" is selected in the button cut-in notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_CUB". It The content of the scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_CUT_BTNOFF” is only the function “RET”, and returns immediately after the function “SUBC:YKK_BTN:TBL_LMP_CUB” (function “LOOP”) of the scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT” of the calling source. Therefore, if the input of the effect button is not detected during the 90 loop processing, the loop processing is exited, the function "STOP" is executed, and the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" is ended.

On the other hand, when "1: button ON" is set in the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN", the button scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_CUT_BTNON" when the button cut-in notification button is ON in the button cut-in notification branch call address table "TBL_LMP_CUB". Is selected. The contents of the scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_CUT_BTNON” are the function “SUBJ:YKK_CUT:TBL_LMP_CUT”, and the scheduler work area index branch jump “SUBJ” is the target scheduler work number “YKK_CUT” and the button cut-in notice branch jump address table “TBL_LMP_LMP_LMP_CMP”. Is executed as a parameter.

The button cut-in notice branch jump address table "TBL_LMP_CUT" stores the address of the button cut-in notice lamp scheduler data. Specifically, SUBJ_NON, SUBJ_LMP_CUT1, SUBJ_LMP_CUT2, SUBJ_LMP_CUT3, SUBJ_LMP_CUT4 indicating the address of the scheduler data are stored. It should be noted that SUBJ_NON is an address for dummy call indicating that no processing is performed, and by preparing an address for dummy call, it is possible to turn off the lamp when the notice is not won. .. SUBJ_LMP_CUT1, SUBJ_LMP_CUT2, SUBJ_LMP_CUT3, SUBJ_LMP_CUT4 are scheduler data addresses for executing the lighting pattern (color, lighting time) of the lamp corresponding to the lottery result value of the button cut-in notice.

In the present embodiment, the button cut-in notice work area “YKK_CUT” stores the lottery result value indicating the button cut-in notice pattern (PTN) 4, and the scheduler data “SUBJ_LMP_CUT4” is executed. In the scheduler data “SUBJ_LMP_CUT4”, first, the lamp is turned on in red (gradation data pattern “PTA_CUT_RED”) by the lamp gradation data reproduction processing (KPLAY), and then the wait processing for 150 frames is executed to continue for 5 seconds. Let At this time, the ramp scheduler “LMP_SCH03” is used to drive the scheduler data. At this time, the scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_STP4” is driven using the notice group 02 lamp scheduler data scheduler “LMP_SCH03”.

Since the call of the button cut-in notice lamp scheduler data "SUBJ_LMP_CUT4" is JUMP instead of CALL, the execution of the button cut-in notice lamp scheduler data ends with the function "STOP", and the scheduler "SUBC_LMP_YKK_CUT" of the calling source returns. do not do. Therefore, the end of the scheduler "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" is terminated when the "STOP" function included in the "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" is executed and when the "STOP" function included in the schedulers "SUBJ_LMP_CUT1" to "SUBJ_LMP_CUT4" is executed 2 There is.

The button cut-in notice has been described above, but here, the functions that can be realized by the scheduler work area index branch jump “SUBJ” will be described. Firstly, the scheduler data for the lottery results can be called with one action for a plurality of lottery results based on the dynamically rewritten work memory contents (preliminary lottery result values in the present embodiment). Depending on the contents of the notice, there are some cases where the range of the lottery result value will be several hundreds, and in a two-branch like the IF statement, the number of scheduler data for judgment increases and it becomes too complicated to manage correction etc. .. "SUBJ" easily solves the above problem by using the work memory contents as an index. Further, in the present embodiment, the number of the work memory and the number of the call address tables for branching are one, but it is also possible to process complicated conditional branching by one action by making them both. Secondly, since it takes the form of "JUMP", all different processing can be executed for each branched scheduler data after the execution of the "SUBJ" function. Similarly to "SUBC", if the value of the work memory exceeds the number of elements of the call address table for branching, the branching process is not performed and the "SUBC" function is ended in order to cope with the problem of the program. You may do it.

That is, like the function “SUBC”, the function “SUBJ” selects the scheduler data of the branch destination based on the value stored in the work area from the branch destination held in advance in the table format, and selects the selected scheduler data. The processing can be transited to, and the same effect as that of the function "SUBC" can be obtained.

Also, the function "SUBJ" is different from the function "SUBC" in that it continuously executes the processing of the schedule data of the call destination and does not return to the processing of the call source, which is suitable for executing the processing alternatively. ing. For example, when the content of the effect to be executed differs depending on whether or not the effect button is operated, it is possible to suppress the overlapping effect execution by using the function “SUBJ”. On the other hand, since the function "SUBC" returns to the processing by the scheduler data of the calling source, it is possible to execute the common post-processing after the processing of the calling destination, and the processing can be simplified.

Therefore, by using the function “SUBC” and the function “SUBJ”, it is possible to simplify the structure of the scheduler data and flexibly cope with the processing branch. Furthermore, since it is easy to add/change just by changing the branch destination of the table format, it is possible to improve the development efficiency and easily change the specification of the gaming machine.

[18-7-4. Motor control in starry goods notice]
Subsequently, the control of the starry product notice executed in the latter half of the change in the present embodiment will be described. Reach occurs in the variable display of the special symbol, and when it shifts to the latter half of the variation, a group notice is generated, and the star role notice is executed independently of the group notice. The star role notice includes a plurality of types of star role products 5002 (three types of left star role product 5002a, middle star role product 5002b, and right star role product 5002c) that can be operated by a driving body (motor). By operating, the degree of expectation of symbol fluctuation is notified. Specifically, the higher the number of the star role objects 5002 that appear, the higher the degree of expectation.

The star role notice of this embodiment is executed by driving the star role notice motor scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1" by the motor scheduler "MOT_SCH02" (left star role scheduler data scheduler) as shown in FIG. 400B. To be done. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, a dedicated scheduler (MOT_SCH02 to 04) for operating the star role object 5002 is provided in advance, but a general-purpose scheduler (MOT_SCH05 to 09) can also be used. ..

403 to 405 are views for explaining the contents of scheduler data for performing motor control in the starry product notice of this embodiment. 403 is a scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1" for controlling the overall flow and the left star role object 5002a, FIG. 404 is a scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2" for controlling the right star role object 5002c, and FIG. 405 is a scheduler for controlling the middle star role object 5002b. It is a figure explaining the data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA3."

When the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1” is started, first, the function “SUBC:YKK_HYA:TBL_MOT_HYA” is executed.
This function is a scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC", and is executed with the target scheduler work number "YKK_HYA" and the star role notice branch call address table "TBL_MOT_HYA" as parameters.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the designated starry product notice branch call address table "TBL_MOT_HYA" and specifies the address of the scheduler data to be branched to based on the contents of the starry product notice work area "YKK_HYA". .. In the starry product notice work area “YKK_HYA”, the lottery result value of the starry product notice is stored and corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the starry product notice branch call address table “TBL_MOT_HYA”.

The starry product notice branch call address table "TBL_MOT_HYA" stores the address of the starry product appearance scheduler data. Specifically, SUBC_NON, SUBC_MOT_HYA1, SUBC_MOT_HYA2, and SUBC_MOT_HYA3 indicating the addresses of the scheduler data are stored. Note that SUBC_NON is an address for dummy call that indicates that no processing is performed. By preparing an address for dummy call, it is possible to disable the accessory when the notice is not won. There is. SUBC_MOT_HYA1, SUBC_MOT_HYA2, and SUBC_MOT_HYA3 are the addresses of the scheduler data for executing the starry object announcement. Specifically, SUBC_MOT_HYA1 is the left starry role 5002a only, SUBC_MOT_c2a is the left starry role 5002a, and SUBC_MOT_c2a star is the left star role. SUBC_MOT_HYA3 is scheduler data for operating all three types of star role objects 5002.

In the present embodiment, a lottery result value indicating that a star role notice for causing a left star role product 5002a, a middle star role product 5002b, and a right star role product 5002c to appear is executed in the star role effect notice work area "YKK_HYA". "3" is stored, and the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_HYA3" is executed. In addition, when only the left star role product 5002a is operated, the lottery result value of the star role product notice is "1", and when the left star role product 5002a and the right star role product 5002c are operated, the star role product advance notice lottery is performed. "2" is set as the result value.

The scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_HYA3” first specifies the parameter “PTA_HYA_LEF” indicating the pattern of the appearance operation of the left star role object 5002a, and executes the function “MPLAY” corresponding to the motor regeneration process. At this time, the function "MPLAY" is executed by the motor scheduler "MOT_SHC02" in which the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1" is executed.

Next, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the right star role object 5002c appearance scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2” by the function “REQ”. The function “REQ” is a function for executing the scheduler data designated by the parameter by the scheduler also designated by the parameter. Here, the right star role object 5002c appearance scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2" is executed using the right star role object 5002c scheduler data scheduler "MOT_SHC03". Similarly, the function "REQ" is used to execute the middle star role object 5002b appearance scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2" using the middle star role object 5002b scheduler data scheduler "MOT_SHC04". In the present embodiment, the motor regeneration process (function “MPLAY”) for operating the right star symbol 5002c and the middle star symbol 5002b is executed in the same frame as the motor regeneration process for the left star symbol 5002a. ing. As described above, the star data 5002 can be controlled in parallel by executing the scheduler data for operating the star parts 5002 by different schedulers.

Subsequently, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes a wait process “NOP:300” for 300 frames (10 seconds). During this wait time, the left star role object 5002a operates in the designated manner. After the end of the wait process, the function “RET” is executed, the calling star star trailer advance motor scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1” is returned, and the execution of the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1” is completed by the function “stop”.

Next, the control of the right star accessory 5002c will be described with reference to FIG. 404. The right star role object 5002c appearance scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2" is executed using the right star role object 5002c scheduler data scheduler "MOT_SHC03" specified at the time of execution by the function "REQ".

When the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2” is started, as shown in FIG. 404, the parameter “PTA_HYA_RGT” indicating the appearance operation pattern (pattern) of the right star role object 5002c is designated and the motor regeneration process “MPLAY” is executed. .. Then, the weight process “NOP:300” for 300 frames (10 seconds) is executed. This wait time is the operation time of the right starry prize 5002c. After the wait process is completed, the process is terminated by executing the function "STOP" without returning to the process of the scheduler data of the calling source.

Finally, with reference to FIG. 405, the control of the middle star accessory 5002b will be described. The intermediate star role 5002b appearance scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA3" is executed using the intermediate star role object 5002b scheduler data scheduler "MOT_SHC04" specified at the time of execution by the function "REQ".

When the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA3” is started, as shown in FIG. 405, the motor regeneration process “MPLAY” is executed by designating the parameter “PTA_HYA_MID” indicating the appearance operation mode (pattern) of the middle star role object 5002b. .. Then, the weight process “NOP:300” for 300 frames (10 seconds) is executed. This wait time is the operation time of the middle star role product 5002b. After the wait process is completed, the process is terminated by executing the function "STOP" without returning to the process of the scheduler data of the calling source.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the scheduler data for operating the left star role object 5002a, the scheduler data for operating the right star role object 5002c and the scheduler data for operating the middle star role object 5002b are set to the function "REQ". It becomes possible to operate each accessory in parallel by executing using. That is, the operation of each character can be executed in parallel without executing special control by executing individually defined scheduler data as needed. The advantage of executing scheduler data in parallel is that, first of all, a single accessory operation can be described without being aware of other schedulers. Furthermore, when one scheduler performs multiple operations corresponding to the advance notice pattern, the number of combinations becomes enormous, the scheduler data becomes complicated and the number of data becomes enormous. It is possible to easily control by creating and calling the minimum number of scheduler data by calling the scheduler data in parallel with each other. It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, an example has been described in which three types of character objects are operated in parallel, but it is possible to execute more character objects in parallel if the operation of the character objects is not hindered. As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to operate a plurality of accessories in parallel without requiring complicated control, and it is possible to easily realize a variety of effects.

[18-7-5. Motor control in the case of logo accessory fall notice]
Next, the control of the logo accessory drop notice executed in the latter half of the change in the present embodiment will be described. The notice of the fall of the logo character is executed independently of the notice of the group and the star. The logo accessory fall notice is a notice effect in which a logo accessory 5001 imitating a game machine logo operates so as to vertically drop in front of the game board side effect display device 1600, and a jackpot probability higher than usual is generated. Is high.

As shown in FIG. 400B, the logo character fall notice of this embodiment is performed by driving the logo character fall notice motor scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO” by the motor scheduler “MOT_SCH01” (logo character scheduler scheduler data scheduler). Executed. It is also possible to operate the logo accessory 5001 by a general-purpose scheduler (MOT_SCH05-09).

FIG. 406 is a diagram for explaining the contents of scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO” that performs motor control in the logo accessory fall notice of this embodiment.

When the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO” is started, first, the function “MPLAY:PTA_LGO_GAT” is executed, and then the wait process “NOP:30” for 30 frames (about 1 second) is executed. As a result, the designated operation is performed for 1 second based on the operation pattern data “PTA_LGO_GAT”. Specifically, the logo accessory 5001 rattles and vibrates. At this time, the motor scheduler “MOT_SCH01” is used.

Subsequently, a loop process for 3 seconds is executed in order to accept the input of the effect button from the player. Specifically, the function "LOOPST" is executed with the parameter loop count set to 90 times. As described above, in the loop processing, the function between “LOOPST” and “LOOP” is repeatedly executed. Therefore, the function “SUBC:YKK_LGO:TBL_YKK_LGO” is executed up to 90 times.

Explaining the function "SUBC:YKK_LGO:TBL_YKK_LGO", the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" is executed with the target scheduler work number "YKK_LGO" and the button logo bonus product fall notice lottery result branch call table "TBL_YKK_LGO" as parameters. It

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the button logo bonus product fall notice lottery result branch call table “TBL_YKK_LGO”, and based on the contents of the button logo bonus product notice work area “YKK_LGO”, determines the start address of the scheduler data to be the branch destination. Identify.
The result of the execution lottery for the button logo bonus fall notice is stored in the button logo bonus notice work area "YKK_LGO". Execution of the notice of the fall of the logo material When the lottery is won, "1: Execution of the notice of the fall of the logo" is set. The execution lottery result of the button logo bonus fall notice corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the button logo bonus drop notice lottery result branch call table “TBL_YKK_LGO”.

While "0: Not yet executed" is set in the button logo bonus notice work area "YKK_LGO", in the button logo bonus drop notice lottery result branch call table "TBL_YKK_LGO", the logo scheduler fall notice notice unexecuted motor scheduler The data “SUBC_YKK_LGO_NON” is selected. The content of the scheduler data “SUBC_YKK_LGO_NON” is only the function “RET”, and returns immediately after the function “SUBC:YKK_LGO:TBL_YKK_LGO” (function “LOOP”) of the scheduler “SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO” that is the calling source. Therefore, when the button logo bonus fall notice is missed in the execution lottery, the loop process is executed 90 times, the loop process is exited, the function "STOP" is executed, and the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" ends. ..

On the other hand, when "1: Logo drop notice execution" is set in the button logo bonus notice work area "YKK_LGO", that is, when the button logo bonus drop notice execution lottery is won, the button logo bonus drop is performed. In the advance notice lottery result branch call table "TBL_YKK_LGO", the motor scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_LGO_DOWN" at the time of executing the logo accessory fall notice is selected. The content of the scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_LGO_DOWN" is the function "SUBC:YKK_BTN:TBL_MOT_LGO", and the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" is the target scheduler work number "YKK_BTN" and the button logo post drop button branch call address table. It is executed with "TBL_MOT_LGO" as a parameter.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the button logo bonus fall notice button branch call address table “TBL_MOT_LGO”, and identifies the start address of the scheduler data to be branched to based on the content of the button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN”. As in the case of the button cut-in notice, the operation state of the effect button is stored in the button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN”, and when the effect button is not operated, “0: button OFF”, the effect button is operated. If it does, “1: Button ON” is set. The operation state of the effect button corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the button logo bonus fall notice branch call address table “TBL_MOT_LGO”.

Button ON_OFF While "0: Button OFF" is set in the work area "YKK_BTN", the button logo character drop notice button branch call address table "TBL_MOT_LGO" sets the motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_LGO_BTNOFF" when the logo role drop notice button is OFF. Is selected. The content of the scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_LGO_BTNOFF” is only the function “RET”, and the content immediately after the function “SUBC:YKK_BTN:TBL_MOT_LGO” (function “RET”) of the calling scheduler data “SUBC_YKK_LGO_DOWN” is returned. As a result, the process returns to the function “LOOP” of the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO”. Therefore, even if the player wins the button logo bonus fall notice execution lottery, if no input of the effect button is detected during the 90 loop processing, the process exits from the loop processing and the function “STOP” is executed. Execution is performed, and the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO” ends.

On the other hand, if "1: Button ON" is set in the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN", the button logo bonus product fall notice button branch call address table "TBL_MOT_LGO" will be displayed when the logo feature product fall notice button is ON. The data “SUBC_MOT_LGO_BTNON” is selected. The contents of the scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_LGO_BTNON” first execute the function “COMMAND:COM_LGO_ON”. The function “COMMAND” is a function for issuing a command when executing scheduler data. Here, the command “COM_LGO_ON” is issued. The command “COM_LGO_ON” is a command for causing the game board side effect display device 1600 to start drawing the effect when the logo accessory 5001 falls, and is issued to the effect control unit 5020.

Further, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the function “MPLAY:PTA_LGO_DOWN” in the same frame as the issue of the command “COM_LGO_ON”. The parameter “PTA_LGO_DOWN” is pattern data for performing the operation of dropping the logo accessory 5001. Further, a weight process for 120 frames (about 4 seconds) is executed by the function “NOP:120”. At this time, the logo accessory 5001 performs the dropping operation for 3 seconds, and stops at the dropping position for the remaining 1 second.

Further, by executing the function “MPLAY:PTA_LGO_INI”, the logo accessory 5001 is moved from the drop position to the initial position. Then, a weight process for 90 frames (about 3 seconds) is executed by the function "NOP:90", and the logo accessory 5001 is returned to the initial position during that time. After the weight process is completed, the execution of the logo accessory drop operation is completed, so the function "MEMW:YKK_LGO:0" is executed, the button logo accessory notice lottery result is rewritten to "0: not executed", and the scheduler of the calling source is executed. The process returns immediately after the function “SUBC:YKK_BTN:TBL_MOT_LGO” (function “RET”) of the data “SUBC_YKK_LGO_DOWN”. As a result, the process returns to the function “LOOP” of the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO”. It returns to the function "LOOP" of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO", but because the result of the button logo bonus notice lottery is rewritten to "0: Not executed", the scheduler data "PTA_LGO_DOWN" for dropping the button logo bonus is executed Then, the remaining number of loops is processed, and the execution of the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO” is completed by the function “STOP”.

As described above, by internally issuing a command when dropping the logo accessory 5001, the effect can be displayed on the liquid crystal only when the logo accessory 5001 is dropped and at the timing when the logo accessory 5001 is dropped. realizable. In the present embodiment, by using the function “COMMAND”, it is possible to cooperate with a plurality of types of effect devices and execute them at appropriate timings as needed, and it is possible to execute more interesting effects. ..

In the present embodiment, the effect is displayed on the liquid crystal on the sound source built-in VDP 1540a by using the function “COMMAND”. However, by controlling the command issued by the function “COMMAND” on the program side, control is transferred from the scheduler to the program. By returning once and performing complicated processing that cannot be handled by the function command, and writing the processing result to the work area used by the subsequent scheduler, processing that cannot be controlled by the function command can be performed. Further, the merit of issuing a command in the scheduler data is that the command issuing timing is the processing timing as it is, so that time management and execution determination by the program are not necessary. Further, it becomes possible to interactively process an external input (button, jog dial, touch pad) by the user which is not predetermined at the start of fluctuation and issue a command using the function “COMMAND” to perform the processing.

Further, in the present embodiment, the function “COMMAND” has a function of transmitting a command having a fixed value. However, instead of a fixed value, a work area is designated and the contents of the work area are transmitted as a command. May be.

[18-8. Example of applying scheduler data (at power-on)]
Next, the scheduler data executed in the peripheral control board 1510 when the power of the gaming machine is turned on will be described. Here, the control from the power-on of the gaming machine to the start of the game and the start of the first variable display will be described.

[18-8-1. Outline of processing]
FIG. 407 is a diagram illustrating scheduler data executed when the power of the gaming machine of the present embodiment is turned on. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, when the gaming machine is powered on, a power-on command is output from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510.

Upon receiving the power-on command, the scheduler execution unit 5060 drives the scheduler data “SCH_STS_POWERON” with the sub-state scheduler “SUB_SCH”.

When the scheduler data “SCH_STS_POWERON” is executed, the sub internal state transition scheduler is executed in a predetermined order, and the scheduler data corresponding to the sub gaming state (sub internal state) is activated. As the scheduler data “SCH_STS_POWERON” progresses, a screen corresponding to the sub internal state is displayed on the liquid crystal display screen, for example, a standby screen, a maker demo screen, a model demo title screen, a got prevention screen, etc., as shown in FIG. 407. To be done. At this time, the main game state is a standby state. When the waiting state ends, the game is started, and when the game ball is won at the start winning port, the main game state and the sub internal state transition to the changing state.

[18-8-2. Power-on control]
Subsequently, a configuration for processing various commands and scheduler data will be described. FIG. 408 is a diagram illustrating a configuration for processing commands and scheduler data in the peripheral control board 1510 of the gaming machine of the present embodiment, and a relationship between these configurations.

As described above, when the power of the gaming machine is activated or when a predetermined event occurs in the game control in the main control board 1310, the main command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 and received by the peripheral control board 1510. It As described with reference to FIG. 390, the main command is stored in the main command buffer 5110 of the system module 5100 and analyzed by the main command analysis processing in the command analysis module. The command analysis module identifies the type of event generated by the main command analysis process, activates the corresponding scheduler, and executes the scheduler data.

Further, even when the function “COMMAND0” (FIG. 397) is executed and a command is output from the scheduler, the output command is stored in the main command buffer 5110 and analyzed by the main command analysis processing, similarly to the main command. To be done.

When the main command or the command output by the function “COMMAND0” is received, a command for executing control in the peripheral control board 1510 is generated by the main command analysis processing. The commands to be generated include a command to activate the scheduler and a command to control various effect devices (sub internal output command).

In the command to start the scheduler, for example, the scheduler data for performing control corresponding to the change of the game state in the main control board 1310 and the change of the sub internal state due to the progress of control in the peripheral control board 1510, the main control board such as the start prize Scheduler data for executing effects corresponding to the event notified from 1310, scheduler data defined so that various effect devices operate in a series of modes, and the like are executed. In the present embodiment, besides starting the scheduler directly from the command, another scheduler can be started by the function "REQ" included in the scheduler data.

On the other hand, the command for controlling the effect device (command for sub internal output) is, for example, a liquid crystal command for displaying a predetermined image on the liquid crystal display device. The command for controlling the effect device is output by the function "COMMAND" included in the scheduler data, in addition to the case where the command is output based on the result of analyzing the main command. The command for controlling the effect device is temporarily stored in the sub internal output command buffer, and is processed in the order stored from the head of the buffer.

As described above, in the present embodiment, a plurality of schedulers can be hierarchically combined and executed by further activating another scheduler from the scheduler to receive one main command. As a result, various controls in the peripheral control board 1510 can be made into parts in units of scheduler data, and by combining schedulers, various types of effects can be mounted in parallel while realizing various effects controls, It is possible to improve the development efficiency of the gaming machine, such as improving the efficiency of debugging work.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the command analysis processing can be made common by the command output by the function “COMMAND0”. This makes it possible to share the scheduler data selection logic and the function parameter determination logic by command analysis, resulting in the problem that a huge number of scheduler data combinations must be managed in a table. Can be suppressed.

Next, the startup of the scheduler and the execution of the scheduler data when the power-on command is received from the main control board 1310 will be described. FIG. 409 is a diagram illustrating a process of executing scheduler data at power-on according to the present embodiment.

As described with reference to FIG. 408, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on command transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the power of the game machine is turned on, the main command analysis processing analyzes the power-on command, and the scheduler The sub-state scheduler is activated by the activation process, and the corresponding scheduler data is sequentially executed. In executing each scheduler data, the function "COMMAND0" is executed to issue a command to create a sub internal state, and further, a lamp or a sound corresponding to the sub internal state is output if necessary. ..

Specifically, the executed scheduler will be described. First, the sub-state scheduler "SUB_SCH" is used to execute the state power-on scheduler data "SCH_STS_POWERON". In the state power-on scheduler data “SCH_STS_POWERON”, the command “COM_STS_TAIKI” for transitioning to the next internal state is issued by the function “COMMANDO”, and the scheduler is stopped.

The command "COM_STS_TAIKI" is processed by the "main command analysis process", and the state standby scheduler data "SCH_STS_TAKI" corresponding to the next sub internal state is executed.

Subsequently, when the status standby scheduler data “SCH_STS_TAKI” is executed using the sub status scheduler “SUB_SCH”, the function “KPLAY:PTA_LAMP_TAIKI” is executed. As a result, the lighting of the lamp is started based on the lamp lighting pattern “PTA_LAMP_TAIKI” in the standby state. After that, the function “NOP:900” is executed to enter the standby state for 900 frames (30 seconds). After the end of the standby state, the command "COM_STS_MDEMO" for transitioning to the next internal state is issued by the function "COMMANDO", and the scheduler is stopped.

The command "COM_STS_MDEMO" is processed in the "main command analysis process", and the state maker demo scheduler data "SCH_STS_MDEMO" corresponding to the next sub internal state is executed.

Subsequently, when the state maker demo scheduler data “SCH_STS_MDEMO” is executed using the sub-state scheduler “SUB_SCH”, the function “KPLAY:PTA_LAMP_MDEMO” is executed. As a result, the lighting of the lamp is started based on the lamp lighting pattern "PTA_LAMP_MDEMO" in the maker demonstration state. After that, the function "NOP:300" is executed to enter the standby state for 300 frames (10 seconds). After the end of the standby state, the command "COM_STS_KDEMO" for transitioning to the next internal state is issued by the function "COMMANDO", and the scheduler is stopped.

The command "COM_STS_KDEMO" is processed in the "main command analysis process", and the state model demo scheduler data "SCH_STS_KDEMO" corresponding to the next sub internal state is executed.

Subsequently, when the state maker demo scheduler data “SCH_STS_KDEMO” is executed using the sub-state scheduler “SUB_SCH”, the function “KPLAY:PTA_LAMP_KDEMO” is executed. As a result, the lighting of the lamp is started based on the lamp lighting pattern "PTA_LAMP_KDEMO" in the model demonstration state. After that, the function “NOP:900” is executed to enter the standby state for 900 frames (30 seconds). After the end of the standby state, the function “COMMANDO” issues a command “COM_STS_GOTO” to transit to the next internal state, and the scheduler is stopped.

The command "COM_STS_KDEMO" is processed by the "main command analysis process", and the state goto prevention scheduler data "SCH_STS_GOTO" corresponding to the next sub internal state is executed.

Subsequently, when the state goto prevention scheduler data “SCH_STS_GOTO” is executed using the sub-state scheduler “SUB_SCH”, the function “KPLAY:PTA_LAMP_GOTO” is executed. Accordingly, the lighting of the lamp is started based on the lighting pattern of the lamp data “PTA_LAMP_GOTO” in the got prevention state. Furthermore, by executing the function “SPLAY:PTA_SND_GOTO”, the sound reproduction is started based on the sound data “PTA_SND_GOTO” in the goto prevention state. After that, by executing the function “NOP:450”, the standby state is set for 450 frames (15 seconds). After the end of the standby state, the function "COMMANDO" issues a command "COM_STS_TAIKI" to transit to the next internal state, and stops the scheduler.

The command "COM_STS_TAIKI" is processed by the "main command analysis process", and the state standby scheduler data "SCH_STS_TAKI" corresponding to the next sub internal state is executed. The gaming machine is in a playable state at this stage, the game is started, and loops in this waiting state until a game ball wins.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the internal state of the peripheral control board 1510 can be set only by receiving the power-on command transmitted from the main control board. Specifically, the function “COMMAND0” can control the main control board 1310 as if the command was issued. For example, the initialization command when the power is turned on may have fixed parameters, and is transmitted from the main control board 1310 by outputting the command with the function “COMMAND0” instead of the main command from the main control board 1310. It is possible to reduce the number of main commands. This makes it possible to reduce the capacity of the game control program of the main control board 1310, which is particularly effective when the capacity of the game control program is limited.

[18-9. Application example of scheduler data (production 2)]
Next, an example will be described in which, instead of the button cut-in notice and the button logo notice of fall of the accessory, a notice of drop of the hackatee implement is executed. Hakuyaku fall notice is divided into the first half and the latter half, and the first half notice and the second half notice are executed in cooperation. At this time, a control different from the control described so far is performed in that the control used is such that the parameters used for the first half notice are handed over to the second half notice.

[18-9-1. Performance overview]
FIG. 410 is a diagram showing an example of a notice effect in a series of variable displays from the start to the change of the special symbol in the present embodiment, and (A) is the effect executed from the change start to the end and The scheduler data for performing the effect and the scheduler to be executed are shown, and (B) is a diagram for explaining the position of the board member 5003 in the board notice of the board member falling.

In a series of variable displays shown in FIG. 410(A), a step-up notice and a button (BTN) first half notice of a hook-shaped object fall notice are executed in the first half of the change. After that, a reach occurs, and in the latter half of the change, the group notice, the notice for dropping the first half of the button-couplings that has been continued from the first half, and the notice for the second-half dropping of the barbecue are executed. Scheduler data for controlling lighting of lamps, output of sound, image output, operation of character parts, and the like is executed for each notice effect. The content of the step-up notice is as described above.

Next, with reference to FIG. 410(B), the content of the notice for dropping the hook-up object will be described. As described above, the notice of the drop of the board member is composed of the notice of the first half drop of the button (BTN) board and the notice of the latter half of the board.

In the first half of the notice of the fall of the button-knife accessory, which is the first half, the notice production is advanced by operating the production button. Therefore, even if the player has won the execution draw for the first half notice of the button-knife accessory, the drop effect of the knife-winner 5003 is not executed unless the effect button is operated. On the other hand, in the latter half part trailing notice of the kakuyakumono late fall, the production is executed based on the result of the execution lottery of the halftone notice half fall notice regardless of the operation of the production button.

If the player wins an execution lottery for the first half drop notice of the button-knife accessory and operates the effect button at a predetermined timing, the knife-actuator 5003 falls to the middle position. Furthermore, if the winning prize for execution of the latter half drop notice of the kakuyaku 5003 is won in a state where the kakuyaku 5003 has dropped to the middle position, the kakuyomi 5003 drops to the lower position. That is, the hook-shaped object 5003 drops from the upper part (upper position, initial position) to the center (middle position) in the first half of the hooked product falling notice, and drops to the lower part (lower position) in the latter half. Note that, when the execution lottery for the trailing drop of the hook-shaped object is won, it will drop to the lower portion regardless of the position of the hook-shaped object 5003. Further, when the notice of the drop of the hook product ends, the hook product 5003 returns to the upper portion (initial position).

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 410(B), the effect of the hook product drop notice is executed in six patterns. More specifically, when the result of the execution lottery of the first half drop notice of the button-knife weapon is non-winning, it does not depend on the operation of the production button. And there is a case of winning (Pattern 2). In the case of pattern 1, since the notice of the first half drop of the button-knife accessory and the notice of the latter half drop of the hook-and-knife weapon are non-winning, the hook-and-rod object 5003 is not dropped and is maintained without moving from the upper portion. In the case of pattern 2, in the trailing notice of the hook member, the hook member 5003 is located at the top without dropping, but in the trailing drop notice of the hook member, the execution lottery is won. It falls at a stretch.

When the execution draw of the button-coupling material first-half drop notice is won, the presentation mode of the button-coupling material first-half fall notice differs depending on whether or not the effect button is operated. Therefore, four patterns of staging can be executed for the notice of dropping the hook-shaped object depending on the presence/absence of operation of the effect button and the result of the execution lottery of the notice for dropping the latter half of the hook-shaped object.

If you win the execution draw of the button first half drop notice and do not operate the production button, and if the result of the execution lottery of the second half drop notice of the hook show is non-win, the hook 5003 will not drop. Remain on top (Pattern 3). If the result of the execution lottery for the second half drop notice of the barbecue product is non-winning, and if the result of the execution draw for the second half drop notice of the barbecue product is a non-winning result, at the time of operating the production button 5003 Falls from the upper part to the middle, and remains in the middle until the end of the notice for dropping the hook-shaped object (Pattern 4).

If you win the execution draw of the button half-effects first-half fall notice and do not operate the production button, and if you win the execution lottery of the half-games second-half fall notice, you will not be operating the production button. The board member 5003 does not drop until the latter half notice of falling of the latter half is started, and is positioned at the upper part, and falls from the upper part to the lower part in the latter half notice of the latter part falling (pattern 5). If you win the execution draw of the button hook first half notice, operate the production button, and if you win the execution lottery of the hook second half fall notice, the hook 5003 is from the top when you operate the production button. It drops to the middle, and further falls from the upper part to the lower part in the notice of the latter half of the kakuyakumono (pattern 6).

As described above, six patterns of presentation modes can appear in the hook product drop notice of the present embodiment, and the scheduler data for controlling the operation of the hook product 5003 in the hook product drop notice will be described below. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 410(A), the button-coupling object first-half drop notice motor scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1” for controlling the operation of the board-coupling object 5003 in the button-coupling object first-half fall notice and the latter half The second half fall notice motor scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" that controls the operation of the half prize 5003 in the fall notice will be described.

[18-9-2. Various controls in the notice of the fall of the board
FIG. 411 is a diagram for explaining the contents of the button-knife-compartment first-half-fall notice scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1” that performs motor control in the button-comb-member first-half fall notice, which is the first half of the notice of a hook-and-shaped object fall according to the present embodiment. .. As described above, when the player wins an execution lottery for the first half fall notice of the button-knife accessory, the operation of the effect button is accepted for 3 seconds by the function “LOOP”, and when the effect button is operated, the hook-and-mortar object 5003 is operated. Perform the production to be performed. If the execution lottery of the button-coupling material first-half fall notice is non-winning, and if the effect button is not operated even if the player wins, the processing is ended without operating the boarding material 5003. The motor scheduler "MOT_SCH01" is used to execute the button-halves auditors first half fall notice scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1".

When the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1” is started, first, the function “COMMAND:COM_NTA1_STA” is executed to start drawing the effect when the game board side effect display device 1600 rattles the board 5003.
After that, the function “MPLAY:PTA_NTA_GAT” is executed, and then the wait process “NOP:30” for 30 frames (about 1 second) is executed. As a result, the designated operation is performed for 1 second based on the operation pattern data “PTA_NTA_GAT”. Specifically, the hook member 5003 rattles and vibrates.

Subsequently, a loop process for 3 seconds is executed in order to accept the input of the effect button from the player. Specifically, the function "LOOPST" is executed with the parameter loop count set to 90 times. As described above, in the loop processing, the function between “LOOPST” and “LOOP” is repeatedly executed. Therefore, the function “SUBC:YKK_NTA1:TBL_YKK_NTA1” is executed up to 90 times.

Explaining the function "SUBC:YKK_NTA1:TBL_YKK_NTA1", the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" uses the target scheduler work number "YKK_NTA1" and the button hook member first half fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA1" as parameters. Executed.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the button-cage service object first-half fall notice lottery result branching call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA1”, and based on the content of the button-cash service object first-half drop notice work area “YKK_NTA1”, the scheduler data to be a branch destination. Specify the start address of. In the work area "YKK_NTA1" for the first-half notice of the fall of the button-couplings, the result of the execution lottery for the notice of the first-half fall of the button-couplings is stored. If the player wins the "non-winning" button hook first half fall notice execution lottery, "1: hook half first half fall notice execution" is set. The result of the execution lottery of the advance notice of the button-couplings first half fall corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the button call store first-half drop notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA1".

If "0: Non-win" is set in the work area "YKK_NTA1" for the first half fall notice of the button hook, the first half fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA1" for the button hook The motor scheduler data “SUBC_YKK_NTA1_NON” when the first-half drop notification is not executed is selected. The content of the scheduler data “SUBC_YKK_NTA1_NON” is only for the function “STOP”, and the result of the button hook officer first half fall notice lottery is “non-win”, so the scheduler data is not executed without executing the button hook officer first half fall notice. Ends the execution of.

On the other hand, in the case where "1: Kakeyaku-Yamai First Half Fall Notice Execution" is set in the work area "YKK_NTA1" for button-Kyaku-Yakumono Early Fall notice, that is, when the player wins the execution half-drawing for the first-half fall notice of Button Kyaku-Yakumono. , In the first half drop notice lottery result branch call table "TBL_YKK_NTA1" of the button-knife combination, the motor scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA1_DOWN" at the time of execution of the hook-shaped product notice is selected. The content of the scheduler data “SUBC_YKK_NTA1_DOWN” is the function “SUBC:YKK_BTN:TBL_MOT_NTA1”, and the scheduler work area index branch call “SUBC” is the target scheduler work number “YKK_BTN” and the button hook first half fall notice button branch call address. The table "TBL_MOT_NTA1" is used as a parameter.

The scheduler executing unit 5060 refers to the button hook first half fall notice button branch call address table “TBL_MOT_NTA1”, and specifies the start address of the scheduler data to be the branch destination based on the content of the button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN”. .. As in the case of the button cut-in notice or the button logo drop notice, the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN" stores the operation state of the effect button, and "0: Button OFF" when the effect button is not operated. When the effect button is operated, "1: button ON" is set. The operation state of the effect button corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the button-crate auditors first half fall notice branch call address table “TBL_MOT_NTA1”.

Button ON_OFF While "0: Button OFF" is set in the work area "YKK_BTN", the button scheduler for the first half fall notice button branch In the call address table "TBL_MOT_NTA1", the motor scheduler when the button knife for the first half fall notice button is OFF The data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_BTNOFF” is selected. The content of the scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_BTNOFF” is only the function “RET”, and returns immediately after the function “SUBC:YKK_BTN:TBL_MOT_NTA1” (function “RET”) of the scheduler data “SUBC_YKK_NTA1_DOWN” of the calling source. As a result, the process further returns to the function "LOOP" of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1". Therefore, even if the player wins the execution lottery of the first half drop notice of the button hook, if the input of the effect button is not detected during the 90 loop processing, the process exits from the loop processing and the function "STOP" is exited. Is executed, and the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1” ends.

On the other hand, when "1: Button ON" is set in the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN", the button hook member first half fall warning button ON in the button hook member first half fall warning button branch call address table "TBL_MOT_NTA1" Hour motor scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_BTNON” is selected. The contents of the scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_BTNON” first execute the function “COMMAND:COM_NTA_STA-MID” and issue the command “COM_NTA_STA-MID”. The command “COM_NTA_STA-MID” is a command for causing the game board side effect display device 1600 to start drawing the effect when the board is dropped, and is issued to the effect control unit 5020.

Further, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the function “MPLAY:PTA_NTA_STA-MID” in the same frame as the issue of the command “COM_NTA_STA-MID”. The parameter “PTA_NTA_STA-MID” is pattern data for performing the operation of dropping the hook member 5003 to the intermediate position. Further, a weight process of 120 frames (about 4 seconds) is executed by the function “NOP:120”, and during this period, the hook member 5003 falls to the intermediate position.

Finally, by executing the function "MEMW:SCH_MEM_NTA:1", "1" is written in the scheduler's blade position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA", and the fact that the blade member 5003 has moved to the intermediate position is recorded. After that, the execution of the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1” is ended by the function “STOP”.

After the end of the first half of the button, which is the first half of the notice of dropping the hook, the start of the second half of the notice of the hook, which is the latter half of the notice. FIG. 412 and FIG. 413 are views for explaining the contents of the Kakuyoke late fall notice scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2” that performs motor control in the Kakuyoke late fall notice, which is the latter half of the Kakuyoke fall notice of the present embodiment. is there. The motor scheduler "MOT_SCH01" is used to execute the second half drop notice scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2", similar to the button half first half drop notice scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1".

When the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2” is started, first, the function “COMMAND:COM_NTA2_STA” is executed to start drawing an effect indicating whether or not the board member 5003 is dropped on the game board side effect display device 1600. .. After that, the weighting process “NOP:90” for 90 frames (about 3 seconds) is executed.
Since the expectation of a big hit becomes large when the board member 5003 drops, the effect drawing is performed for 3 seconds to increase the player's expectation.

Subsequently, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the function “SUBC:YKK_NTA2:TBL_YKK_NTA2”. In the function "SUBC:YKK_NTA2:TBL_YKK_NTA2", the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" is executed with the target scheduler work number "YKK_NTA2" and the halberd member late fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2" as parameters. ..

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the second half of the hooked product drop notice lottery result branch call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA2”, and based on the contents of the second half of the hooked product advance notice work area “YKK_NTA2”, the scheduler data of the branch destination. Specify the start address. "YKK_NTA2" is the work area for the latter half of the kakuyakumono ware, and the result of the execution lottery for the latter half of the kakuyomi ware is stored in the work area. In the case where the player wins the second half fall notice execution of the kakuyakumono, "1: Kakeyakuyo second half fall notice execution" is set. The result of the execution lottery for the notice of the second half drop of the Kyakumono is corresponding to the index (address) of each record of the lottery late notice of the Kyakumono late notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2".

If "0: Non-win" is set in the work area "YKK_NTA2" for the second half of the kakuyakumono, the halfway down of the halfyakumono will be dropped in the call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2" for the lottery result for the halfway of the halfyakumono advance notice. The motor scheduler data “SUBC_YKK_NTA2_NON” when the notice is not executed is selected. In the scheduler data “SUBC_YKK_NTA2_NON”, the function “SUBC:SCH_MEM_NTA:TBL_YKK_NTA2NON” is executed, and the value of the scheduler position information work area “SCH_MEM_NTA” and the halberd part late fall notice lottery result “N” non-winning branch table for the non-winning A/B call call address. Branch based on.

When "0: initial position" is set in the scheduler's blade position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA", the blade member latter half drop notice is not displayed in the hook member latter half fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2NON". The runtime motor scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_NON” is selected. In the scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_NON”, the function “RET” is executed, and the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2” is restored.

When “0: initial position” is set, the motor scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_NON” is selected in the undecided half-finished product trailer drop notice result branch call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA2NON”. It In the scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_NON”, the function “RET” is executed, and the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2” is restored. After that, the value of the scheduler hull position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA" is overwritten on "0: initial position", and the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" is terminated.

On the other hand, when "1: intermediate position" is set in the scheduler position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA", the first half drop of the hook post is made in the "TBL_YKK_NTA2N" Preliminary notice/second half fall notice When not winning The motor scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON” is selected.

The first half fall notice execution/second half fall notice non-winning motor scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON” executes 120-frame (about 4 seconds) weight processing “NOP:120”. In the weight process executed here, as will be described later, there is a waiting time for returning the hook accessory 5003 to the intermediate position when it is at the lower position. Here, since the barrel accessory 5003 is originally at the intermediate position, it waits for 4 seconds.

After the end of the weight process, the function "MPLAY:PTA_NTA_INIT_MID-TOP" is executed to return the hook member 5003 from the intermediate position to the initial position. Further, in order to secure the operating time of the hook-up object 5003, a weight process “NOP:120” of 120 frames (about 4 seconds) is executed, and the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2” is restored by the function “RET”.

In addition, when "1: Hakama latter half drop notice" is set in the work area "YKK_NTA2" for the second half of the kakumono ware, the halves will be displayed in the call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2" in the lottery product second half fall notice lottery result branch call address table. Motor scheduler data “SUBC_YKK_NTA2_DOWN” is selected at the time of winning the trailing fall of the role material. In the scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA2_DOWN", the function "SUBC:SCH_MEM_NTA:TBL_YKK_NTA2DOWN" is executed, and the value of the scheduler position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA" and the branch object drop notice 2 branch call address table "NTBL_YK" based on the hook information drop notification 2 branch call address table "NTBL_YK". ..

When "0: initial position" is set in the scheduler position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA", the first half of the hook has not been notified in the "TBL_YKK_NTA2DOWN", which is the branch call address table for the second half of the hook notice drop notice. Execution/Latter half fall notice At the time of winning, the motor scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_DOWN” is selected.

In the scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_DOWN” (FIG. 413), first, the function “COMMAND:COM_NTA_STA-END” is executed and the command “COM_NTA_STA-END” is issued. The command “COM_NTA_STA-END” is a command for causing the game board side effect display device 1600 to start drawing an effect in which the hook member 5003 falls from the initial position to the lower position.

Further, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the function “MPLAY:PTA_NTA_STA-END” in the same frame as when the command “COM_NTA_STA-END” is issued. The parameter “PTA_NTA_STA-END” is pattern data for performing the operation of dropping the hook member 5003 to the lower position. Further, a weight process of 240 frames (about 8 seconds) is executed by the function "NOP:240", and during this period, the hook member 5003 is dropped from the initial position to the lower position.

Then, the function "COMMAND:COM_NTA_END" is executed and the command "COM_NTA_END" is issued at the timing when the board member 5003 moves to the lower position. The command “COM_NTA_END” is a command for causing the game board side effect display device 1600 to start drawing the effect when the board member 5003 reaches the lower position. Further, a weight process of 90 frames (about 3 seconds) is executed by the function "NOP:90", and the effect board is continued to draw the effect display device 1600.

Then, the function “MPLAY:PTA_NTA_INIT_END-MID” is executed. The parameter "PTA_NTA_INIT_END-MID" is pattern data for performing the operation of returning the hook member 5003 from the lower position to the intermediate position.

Subsequently, the function "CALL: SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON" is executed, and the above-mentioned scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON" is called to restore the hook member 5003 from the middle position to the initial position. After that, the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2” is restored by the function “RET”.

On the other hand, when "1: intermediate position" is set in the scheduler slash position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA", the sword member first half drop in the sword member second half drop notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2DOWN" Preliminary notice execution/second-half fall notice When winning, the motor scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_DOWN” is selected.

In the scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_DOWN” (FIG. 413), first, the function “COMMAND:COM_NTA_MID-END” is executed and the command “COM_NTA_MID-END” is issued. The command “COM_NTA_MID-END” is a command for causing the game board side effect display device 1600 to start drawing the effect in which the hook member 5003 falls from the intermediate position to the lower position.

Further, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the function “MPLAY:PTA_NTA_STA-END” in the same frame as when the command “COM_NTA_STA-END” is issued. The parameter “PTA_NTA_STA-END” is pattern data for performing the operation of dropping the hook member 5003 to the lower position. Further, a weight process for 120 frames (about 4 seconds) is executed by the function "NOP:120", and the hook component 5003 is dropped from the intermediate position to the lower position during this period.

Then, the function "COMMAND:COM_NTA_END" is executed and the command "COM_NTA_END" is issued at the timing when the board member 5003 moves to the lower position. The command “COM_NTA_END” is a command for causing the game board side effect display device 1600 to start drawing the effect when the board member 5003 reaches the lower position. Further, a weight process of 90 frames (about 3 seconds) is executed by the function "NOP:90", and the effect board is continued to draw the effect display device 1600.

Here, in order to match the timing of starting the operation of returning the board member 5003 to the initial position with the case where the board member 5003 is dropped from the initial position to the lower position, 120 frames (about Wait processing for 4 seconds) is executed. This time is the time required for the hook member 5003 to move from the initial position to the intermediate position.

After that, as in the case of “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_DOWN”, the function “MPLAY:PTA_NTA_INIT_END-MID” is executed to return the blade member 5003 from the lower position to the intermediate position. Further, the function “CALL: SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON” is executed to return the hook member 5003 from the middle position to the initial position. After that, the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2” is restored by the function “RET”.

When the knife member 5003 returns to the initial position and returns to the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2”, the function “MEMW:SCH_MEM_NTA:0” is executed, and the value of the blade position information work area for scheduler “SCH_MEM_NTA” is set to “0: initial position”. The scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2” is updated.

In the notice of the drop of the hook product, the scheduler data is divided into the first half and the second half, and the operation of the hook officer 5003 in the second half differs depending on whether or not the player operates the effect button in the first half. Therefore, it is possible to specify the position of the hook member 5003 by writing the position of the hook member 5003 using the function “MEMW” in the first half and acquiring the position information written in the latter half. .. Thereby, the movement amount of the motor can be determined for each position of the hook-shaped object 5003, and by calling the corresponding scheduler data, it is possible to execute the effect according to the operation result of the effect button.

In addition, even in the returning operation to the initial position after the operation of the hook member 5003, the common scheduler data is called when moving from the intermediate position to the initial position, so that the entire scheduler data can be simplified.

The function “MEMW” can refer to a common value by writing a fixed value in a predetermined area when executing scheduler data and referencing it when executing other scheduler data. As a result, it is possible to specify a value that indicates the state that changes due to the execution of multiple scheduler data when each scheduler data is executed. Therefore, it is possible to create a program code for the process according to the operation of the player, The process can be completed only by defining the scheduler data, without creating scheduler data in. This makes it possible to minimize the required number even for scheduler data that requires different processing depending on the state, making it possible to efficiently create and debug the scheduler data and facilitate management. Further, in the present embodiment, a function for writing a fixed value is used, but by specifying a work name instead of a fixed value with a parameter of the function, data is passed from the program side and processing based on command information is performed. Can be performed on the scheduler, and more complicated processing can be performed on the scheduler. The peculiar feature of the function "MEMW" is that even if the information including the function "MEMW" is not determined when the execution of the scheduler data is started, the process can be performed if the information is determined by the time the function "MEMW" is executed. This enables effective time control and interactive control.

[18-10. Example of scheduler data configuration (variation pattern)]
The flow of executing the series of notice effects has been described above. The execution contents of such a series of notice effects are drawn based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310. Furthermore, the specific effect contents are drawn for each notice effect.

Hereinafter, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310, a procedure for controlling the execution of a series of notice effects, and a basic effect related to the series of notice effects and the variation pattern (regardless of lottery other than notice effect The configuration of the scheduler data for performing a background effect and a pattern effect that are rendered one-to-one with the variation pattern) will be described.

In the present embodiment, the period from the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol to the stop of the fluctuation is managed in block units (production sections) divided into predetermined constituent units. Block, for example, from the start of the symbol fluctuation until the reach occurs, or until the symbol stops if the reach does not occur (first half fluctuation), from the reach occurrence until the symbol stops (second half fluctuation) ), from the stop of the symbol to the end of the fluctuation. Further, each block is assigned a time corresponding to the variation pattern, and the execution timing and the execution time of the notice effect within the assigned time are defined. The data corresponding to the time corresponding to each block and the basic effect to be executed are collectively referred to as block data.

In addition, the rule of block division is that, when comparing basic effects related to fluctuations in a plurality of fluctuation patterns, the same basic effect part is used as common block data, and parts with different basic effect of liquid crystal display are divided as block data. To do. Referring to FIG. 414A, in the liquid crystal effect block data combination number table (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) for each variation pattern that stores the combination of the liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to the variation pattern command in the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern “10H01H” is the normal fluctuation 6 seconds. It is a loss, and a normal variation is performed for 6 seconds, and then a design effect of the loss is performed. Since the normal fluctuation 6-second effect and the loss stop effect are also used in other fluctuation patterns, they are divided into the normal fluctuation 6-second liquid crystal effect block data (LCD01_BLK) and the loss-stop liquid crystal effect block data (LCD02_BLK).

The fluctuation pattern “10H02H” is a normal fluctuation of 12 seconds, and the normal fluctuation is performed for 12 seconds, and then the pattern effect of the failure is performed. Since the normal fluctuation 12-second effect is used for other fluctuation patterns as well, it is divided as the normal fluctuation 12-second liquid crystal effect block data (LCD03_BLK), and the lost pattern effect is exactly the same as the fluctuation pattern "10H01H". As the liquid crystal effect block data for stop of loss, the liquid crystal effect block data for stop of stop (LCD02_BLK), which is divided into liquid crystal display blocks in the variation pattern “10H01H”, is used in common. Regarding other fluctuation patterns as well, similarly, the parts that have already been converted into block data regarding the basic effect are used in common, and the parts that differ are newly converted into block data.

As described above, by performing block formation, the common basic effect part becomes a unique number of block data, and all the variation patterns and basic effects such as big hits other than variation can be performed by combining unique liquid crystal effect block data. It is possible to realize basic effects such as all fluctuation patterns and big hits other than fluctuations. Although it is important that the total amount of effect data to be created is significantly reduced, the biggest purpose of blocking is to create a liquid crystal effect that includes a specific basic effect when a specific basic effect is changed. The change is reflected in all variation patterns that use block data.

Regarding the liquid crystal display in the present embodiment, since the VDP 1540a with a built-in sound source is controlled, the format and function are completely different from the scheduler data of the sound, lamp, and accessory in the present embodiment, but each block data is basically the same. The configuration in which the rendering scheduler data for rendering and the rendering scheduler data for preview rendering are combined has the same configuration as the sub rendering block data for controlling sounds, lamps, character objects, and the like. The drawing scheduler data for liquid crystal display includes frame information, still image/moving image material ID, display position information, enlargement/reduction information, rotation angle information, and color, which are related to effects related to pictures and movies displayed on the background. It is composed of a function that can specify control information for generating a display list command for the VDP 1540a with a built-in sound source, such as information and alpha information. Further, the type and execution timing of the effect related to the notice effect generated in the block data can be specified. Information to show is embedded.

Further, in the present embodiment, the block data for variably displaying the identification symbol on the liquid crystal display device is defined as the liquid crystal symbol block data separately from the block data for performing other liquid crystal effects. This makes it possible to make the control for variably displaying the identification symbol independent of the control of other liquid crystal effects, and for example, even if the shape of the identification symbol is changed and variably displayed, a common notice effect is provided. It becomes possible to carry out with a liquid crystal display device. The drawing scheduler data for displaying symbols has the same format and function as the drawing scheduler data for displaying liquid crystals. Further, the configuration in which the drawing scheduler data for basic effect and the drawing scheduler data for notice effect relating to the design are combined for each block data is the same as the sub effect block data and the liquid crystal effect block data described above. The drawing scheduler data for symbol display has the same configuration and function as the drawing scheduler data for liquid crystal display, and in addition, information for specifying the mode of variable display of the identification symbol is embedded.

FIG. 414A is a diagram illustrating a liquid crystal effect block data combination number table (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) for each variation pattern, which stores a combination of liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to the variable pattern command in the present embodiment. FIG. 414B is a diagram illustrating a liquid crystal pattern block data combination number (ZUG_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) for each variation pattern that stores a combination of liquid crystal symbol block data corresponding to the variation pattern command in the present embodiment. FIG. 415 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern-based sub effect block data combination number table (SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) that stores a combination of sub effect block data corresponding to a change pattern command in the present embodiment.

The liquid crystal effect block data combination number table (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) for each variation pattern is a table that holds information indicating a combination of liquid crystal effect block data for each variation pattern. For example, with respect to the variation pattern number, a unique number that identifies the liquid crystal effect block data that constitutes it is held in time series. For example, when the fluctuation pattern number is "10H03H", the first half fluctuation is composed of "LCD03_BLK" which indicates normal fluctuation for 12 seconds, the latter half fluctuation is composed of "LCD04_BLK" which indicates normal short reach, and "LCD02_BLK" which indicates the time of disengagement stop. To be done. At this time, “LCD03_BLK”, “LCD04_BLK”, and “LCD02_BLK” are stored in this order. In this way, the configurations of the basic effect and the notice effect can be defined (realized) by connecting the liquid crystal effect block data for each variation pattern.

Also, as shown in FIG. 414, the same liquid crystal effect block data is used for all the same effect sections. For example, when the first-half fluctuation is a normal fluctuation of 12 seconds, "LCD03_BLK" is used regardless of the contents of the notice effect that is actually executed. As a result, the number of liquid crystal effect block data can be realized with a unique number corresponding to the type of fluctuation, and the liquid crystal effect block data can be uniquely specified for each fluctuation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 414B, the liquid crystal pattern block data combination number table for each variation pattern (ZUG_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) holds information indicating a combination of block data for each variation pattern, similarly to the liquid crystal effect block data combination number table for each variation pattern. .. Further, the sub effect block data corresponding to the variation pattern number is defined in a configuration (the same combination, the same effect time) that corresponds to the liquid crystal effect block data of the same variation pattern number on a one-to-one basis.

Further, as shown in FIG. 415, the variation pattern-based sub effect block data combination number table (SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO), like the variation pattern-based liquid crystal effect block data combination number table, provides information indicating a combination of block data for each variation pattern. Hold. Further, the sub effect block data corresponding to the variation pattern number is defined by a configuration (the same combination, the same effect time) that corresponds to the liquid crystal effect block data and the liquid crystal symbol block data of the same variation pattern number on a one-to-one basis.

Next, the procedure for executing the notice effect based on the scheduler data corresponding to the variation pattern will be described. Here, the execution procedure of the basic effect and the notice effect based on the effect scheduler data corresponding to the variation pattern “10H03H” will be described. First, an outline of a procedure for executing effect control based on liquid crystal effect block data, effect control based on liquid crystal symbol block data, and effect control based on sub effect block data will be described. FIG. 416 is a diagram illustrating an outline of effect control of the first half fluctuation (normal fluctuation of 12 seconds) of the fluctuation pattern “10H03H” in the present embodiment.

When the variation pattern command (main variation-related command) “10H03H” is received from the main control board 1310, the variation pattern number “10H03H” is specified by analyzing the command received by the command analysis module 5200, and the production control unit 5020 is specified. Notice.

As described in FIG. 392A, production control unit 5020 determines the layer to be used, determines the block data number corresponding to the layer, and based on the determined block number, changes pattern number “10H03H”. The corresponding block data number is obtained from the liquid crystal effect block data combination number table (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) by variation pattern, the liquid crystal pattern block data combination number table (ZUG_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) by variation pattern, and the sub effect block data combination number table (SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) by variation pattern To do. By setting all the block data numbers corresponding to the respective rendering devices to the same number, it becomes possible to execute all the rendering of each rendering device in synchronization.

And the production control unit 5020 transmits the block data numbers for all layers to the liquid crystal production block control unit 5310, the liquid crystal symbol block control unit 5311, and the sub production block control unit 5320.

After that, the liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 is the liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331, the liquid crystal symbol block control unit 5311 is the liquid crystal pattern 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332, and the sub effect block control unit 5320 is the sub effect 1f (1 ms) scheduler execution unit. The block data corresponding to the transmitted block data number is executed by 5333 (5334) in chronological order. Specifically, the liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 is a normal fluctuation 12 second liquid crystal effect block data “LCD03_BLK” corresponding to the first half fluctuation, and the liquid crystal pattern 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332 is a normal fluctuation 12 second liquid crystal symbol block data “ZUG03_BLK”. The sub-effect 1f (1 ms) scheduler execution unit 5333 (5334) executes the normal fluctuating 12-second sub-effect block data “SCH03_BLK”.

When the processing of the liquid crystal effect block data is started, one or a plurality of liquid crystal effect 1f schedulers corresponding to the liquid crystal effect block data are activated, and the drawing scheduler data specified according to the effect content is executed. The drawing scheduler data includes liquid crystal function information for displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device, specifies a parameter according to the effect contents, and transmits the liquid crystal function information to the liquid crystal module 5400 in a predetermined order. The liquid crystal module 5400 analyzes and executes the received liquid crystal function information, and transmits a DISPLAY list to the VDP 1540a with a built-in sound source to draw on the liquid crystal display device.

When processing the liquid crystal symbol block data, the liquid crystal symbol 1f scheduler is activated, and the drawing scheduler data according to the variable display mode of the identification symbol is executed. The procedure of drawing on the liquid crystal display device is the same as the case of processing the liquid crystal effect block data.

On the other hand, when the processing of the sub effect block data is started, one or a plurality of sub effect 1f (1 ms) schedulers corresponding to the sub effect block data are activated, and the scheduler data specified according to the effect content is executed. The scheduler may be prepared according to the execution cycle, or may be shared and the execution cycle may be set at startup.

As described above, the scheduler data includes the effect data designating function for controlling the effect devices such as the lamp (“KPLAY”), the speaker (“SPLAY”), and the accessory (“MPLAY”). It is configured to execute the specified effect by sequentially executing the effect data specification function in the defined order. The effect data designation function is transmitted to a module (a lamp module 5600, a sound module 5500, a drive (motor) module 5700, etc.) corresponding to the effect device to be controlled, and an effect by each effect device is executed by each module.

It is also possible to call other scheduler data from the scheduler data by the function "REQ, REQF". It is possible to control various effect devices by executing the effect data designation function in the scheduler data called at this time. Further, by using the command transmission function "COMMAND" or "COMMAND0", control can be performed by a command instead of a function. For example, by transmitting a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal module 5400 at the timing of executing the effect data designation function for controlling the operation of the accessory, the operation of the accessory and the drawing are linked as in the above-described hook and character fall notice effect. You can execute the effect.

Here, a procedure for performing effect control using the sub effect block data will be described. FIG. 417 is a flowchart showing the procedure of variation pattern-based sub effect block data control start processing relating to the variation pattern layer of the present embodiment.

The effect block control unit 5040 selects the change pattern layer in the effect control unit 5020 based on the change pattern number notified from the command analysis module 5200, and changes the control of the change pattern block data number corresponding to the change pattern. Control is started using the pattern-based sub effect block data combination number table (FIG. 415). The row position of the variation pattern-based sub effect block data combination number table (FIG. 415) is set to the variation pattern-based sub effect block data combination number table row index (step S7001). For example, in the case of the table shown in FIG. 415, if the variation pattern number is “10H01H”, “0” is set in the variation pattern-based sub effect block data combination number table row index, and the variation pattern number is “10H03H”. For example, since it is the third row, "2" (row-1) is set in the sub-effect block data combination number table row index for each variation pattern.

Next, the effect block control unit 5040 initializes the sub effect block data combination number table sequence index for each variation pattern with “0” (step S7002). The process starts from the sub effect block data corresponding to the first column of the designated row (variable pattern-based sub effect block data combination number table row index). Lastly, the effect block control unit 5040 causes the scheduler execution unit 5060 to execute variation pattern-based sub effect block data control scheduler activation processing (step S7003). Thereby, the scheduler for executing the sub-effect block data for each variation pattern is activated, and the scheduler data included in the sub-effect block data is executed.

FIG. 418 is a flowchart showing the procedure of variation pattern-based sub effect block data control activation processing of the present embodiment.

First, the scheduler execution unit 5060 obtains the number of the variation pattern-based sub effect block data number table from the variation pattern-based sub effect block data combination number table based on the row and column index (step S7011). Further, the sub effect block data number table row index is initialized to "0" (step S7012).
As a result, the process is started from the first record of the variation pattern-based sub effect block data combination number table identified from the variation pattern-based sub effect block data combination number table.

Then, the scheduler execution unit 5060 activates the scheduler data registered in the variation pattern-based sub effect block data (step S7013). The scheduler data is registered in the sub effect block data corresponding to each effect registered in the variation pattern-based sub effect block data number table (FIG. 420(B)). Specifically, based on the sub effect block data number table row index, the sub effect block data corresponding to each effect (background sub effect block data, sub effect block data corresponding to the notice) from the sub effect block data number table. get. One or a plurality of scheduler data is registered in the sub effect block data corresponding to each effect (background effect effect block data, sub effect effect block data corresponding to a notice), and a scheduler corresponding to each scheduler data is defined. ing. When a plurality of scheduler data items are registered, one or a plurality of scheduler data items are associated with each other based on the announcement lottery result or the like.

Furthermore, the scheduler execution unit 5060 updates the sub effect block data number table row index when the activation of all the scheduler data defined in the sub effect block data is completed, and the sub effect block data number table row index changes pattern. It is determined whether the number of elements in the row of the different sub effect block data number table is exceeded (step S7014). If the number of elements in the row of the variation pattern-based sub effect block data number table is exceeded (the result of step S7014 is "YES"), the sub effect block data control start-up processing is ended. On the other hand, if it does not exceed the number of row elements of sub-effect block data number table for each variation pattern (result of step S7014 is “NO”), the next sub-effect block data is processed.

FIG. 419 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the sub-effect block data control update processing for each variation pattern of the present embodiment. In the sub production block data control update process for each variation pattern, in the sub production block data corresponding to each production (background sub production block data, sub production block data corresponding to a notice) that constitutes the sub production block data number table for each variation pattern This is a process for executing the next variation pattern-based sub effect block data when the execution of all the scheduler data is completed. The variation pattern-based sub effect block data control update processing is periodically executed to monitor the execution status of the variation pattern-based sub effect block data.

First, the scheduler execution unit 5060 obtains the number of the variation pattern-based sub effect block data number table from the variation pattern-based sub effect block data combination number table using the variation pattern-based sub effect block data combination number table row and column index. Yes (step S7021). As a result, the sub effect block data corresponding to each effect (background sub effect block data, sub effect block data corresponding to the notice) that configures the variation pattern-based sub effect block data number table is specified and defined in the sub effect block data. It is determined whether the scheduler being executed is running (step S7022). If it is being executed (the result of step S7022 is “YES”), the execution of the scheduler is continued as it is, and the sub effect block data control update processing is ended.

Next, the scheduler execution unit 5060 causes all scheduler operations of the sub effect block data corresponding to each effect (background sub effect block data, sub effect block data corresponding to a notice) defined in the sub-effect block data for each variation pattern. When the process ends (the result of step S7022 is “NO”), the variation pattern-based sub effect block data combination number table column index is incremented, and whether or not the next column data is the end data (“DATA_END”) Is determined (step S7023). If it is the end data (the result of step S7023 is “YES”), a series of effects has been completed, so the variation pattern-based sub effect block data control update processing ends.

On the other hand, if the next column data is not the end data (result of step S7023 is “NO”), the scheduler execution unit 5060 starts execution of the variation pattern-based sub effect block data corresponding to the next column data. A variation pattern-based sub effect data block control scheduler activation process is executed (step S7024).

As described with reference to FIGS. 414A, 414B and 415, the variation pattern-based sub effect block data is defined in association with the liquid crystal effect block data and the liquid crystal symbol block data, and the corresponding block data is executed at the same timing. By setting the execution time of each block data to be the same, the effect control by the drawing scheduler, the effect control by the sub effect scheduler, and the effect control by a plurality of schedulers can be synchronized. In addition, by performing blocking, if the same variation pattern, regardless of the combination of productions and the appearance of productions, the number of activations of the production block and the scheduler defined in the production block will always be the same number of times. The complexity can be reduced, and as a result, the quality can be improved.

As described above, in the present embodiment, by synchronizing the effect control by one or a plurality of drawing schedulers and sub-effect schedulers, it is possible to coordinate the operations of various effect devices, and execute various effects without a sense of discomfort. can do. In addition, since scheduler data having the same execution time can be executed in parallel, the scheduler data for controlling various production devices can be independently developed and checked for each production device and block data. It is possible to improve the development efficiency.

FIG. 420 is a diagram illustrating a procedure of executing the basic effect and the notice effect of the variable display corresponding to the change pattern “10H03H” of the present embodiment, and (A) is the timing of executing the basic effect and the notice effect, and Execution time of notice production, (B) has shown the constitution of the sub production block data classified by fluctuation pattern. The variation pattern-based sub effect block data includes background sub effect block data and notice sub effect block data for executing the background effect and the notice effect. Note that, in FIG. 420(B), two types of sub effect block data, background block data and notice block data, are combined, but the number of sub effect block data can be changed.

As shown in FIG. 420, the sub-effect block data for each variation pattern forming the variation display of the variation pattern “10H03H” includes “SCH03_BLK” (normal variation 12 seconds), “SCH04_BLK” (normal short reach), and “SCH02_BLK” ( Loss stop). The variation pattern-based sub effect block data “SCH03_BLK” corresponds to 12 seconds from the start of variation until the left symbol and the right symbol stop. The variation pattern-based sub effect block data “SCH04_BLK” corresponds to a period in which the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped with the same identification symbol and the normal short reach is executed. The variation pattern-based sub effect block data "SCH02_BLK" corresponds to a period in which the middle symbol is stopped and the result of the variable display is confirmed to be lost, and the confirmed symbol is displayed.

In the sub-effect block data “SCH03_BLK” for each variation pattern, as shown in FIG. 420(A), the sub-effect block data relating to the advance notice of the step-up notice, the notice of the fall of the BTN logo accessory, and the notice of the symbol stop notice and the sub-effect relating to the background Block data is defined. In the sub effect block data “SCH04_BLK”, sub effect block data for cut-in notice and group notice and sub effect block data related to the background are defined. Further, in the sub effect block “SCH02_BLK”, the notice effect sub effect block data is not defined, but the sub effect block data related to the background is defined. It should be noted that in the drawing, the execution of the notice production is not duplicated, but a plurality of notice block data may be defined and executed so that a plurality of notice productions are overlapped. The contents of each notice effect shown in FIG. 420 are as described above.

The effect control by each sub effect block data will be described below. As shown in FIG. 420(B), two types of sub effect block data in the variable display of the variation pattern “10H03H” are executed in parallel. First, the sub effect block data “SCH03_BLK” for each variation pattern will be described.

In the sub-effect scheduler data related to the background, the normally changing 12-second background sub-effect block data is defined. In the normal fluctuation 12 second background sub effect block data, the sub effect scheduler number and the sub effect scheduler data related to the normal fluctuation 12 second background are defined. The normal fluctuation 12-second background sub effect block data is scheduler data related to the background, and therefore has the same effect time as the sub effect block data “SCH03_BLK”. Therefore, it is continuously executed until the sub effect block data “SCH03_BLK” ends.

Function "NOP", step-up notice sub-effect block data, BTN logo accessory drop notice sub-effect block data, and symbol stop notice sub-effect block data are defined in the sub-effect scheduler data relating to the notice. The function "NOP" serves as a weight for synchronizing with the liquid crystal effect scheduler, and is defined for performing sub effect in accordance with the liquid crystal effect. In the step-up notice sub-effect block data, a sub-effect scheduler number and sub-effect scheduler data related to the step-up notice are defined. The step-up notice sub effect block data has the same effect time as the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data. In the BTN logo bonus fall notice sub effect block data, a sub effect scheduler number and sub effect scheduler data related to the BTN logo bonus drop announcement are defined. The BTN logo accessory fall notice sub effect block data has the same effect time as the BTN logo accessory drop notice liquid crystal effect block data. In the symbol stop notice sub effect block data, the sub effect scheduler number and the sub effect scheduler data related to the symbol stop notification are defined. The symbol stop notice sub effect block data has the same effect time as the symbol stop notification liquid crystal effect block data. The variation pattern-based sub effect block data “SCH03_BLK” is configured by executing the sub effect block data in combination.

By executing the above sub effect block data in synchronization with the liquid crystal effect block data, the scheduler data of each sound, lamp, and motor defined in the sub effect block data is executed in synchronization with the liquid crystal effect. It will be.

At this time, from the end of the liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to each liquid crystal notice effect to the next liquid crystal notice effect data from the end of the liquid crystal effect block data until the start of the first liquid crystal effect block data (step-up notice) Until the start of, and from the end of the liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to the final liquid crystal notice effect (symbol stop notice) until the execution of the variation pattern sub effect block data "SCH03_BLK" ends. "NOP" is executed and waits for the specified time. In this way, by controlling the appearance timing of the sub-effect scheduler data corresponding to each liquid crystal effect block data in the fluctuation pattern-based scheduler block by the function “NOP”, the scheduler is sequentially executed at the execution timing of each notice effect by a program or the like. If the corresponding scheduler data is started without instructing the execution of the data, it is possible to execute the effect of each effect device corresponding to the liquid crystal notice effect at the designated timing. Further, the last function "NOP" of each scheduler data in the variation pattern-based sub effect block data may be omitted.

A common time is defined for each notice effect as the execution time of the notice effect set by the scheduler data that controls the effect device such as the lamp, the sound, and the accessory. As a result, the time from the start of control by the sub effect block data to the execution of each notice effect is uniquely determined, so that the control timing of each effect device can be synchronized.

Also, the time information at the time of executing the variation pattern-based sub effect block data is managed not by the start of the change but by a relative value from the time of the start of the variation pattern-based sub effect block data execution. With this, when the same variation pattern-based sub effect block data is used in a plurality of variation patterns, each effect in the variation pattern-based sub effect block data for each variation pattern has the effect start time from the start of the variation. Although different, the time value is relatively managed in the variation pattern-based sub effect block data, so that the process can be performed without any problem. In the case of the liquid crystal effect block data for each variation pattern, similarly, the liquid crystal effect block data for each variation pattern is managed by the relative value from the start of execution, and in the case of the liquid crystal pattern block data for each variation pattern, the same liquid crystal pattern block for each variation pattern It is managed as a relative value from the start of data execution.

Next, the sub effect block data “SCH04_BLK” for each variation pattern will be described. The variation pattern-based sub effect block data “SCH04_BLK” corresponds to normal short reach, but at this time, two types of sub effect block data are executed in parallel.

Normal short reach background sub effect block data is defined in the sub effect scheduler data related to the background. In the normal short reach background sub effect block data, a sub effect scheduler number and sub effect scheduler data related to the normal short reach background are defined. Since the normal short reach background sub effect block data is scheduler data related to the background, it has the same effect time as the variation pattern-based sub effect block data "SCH04_BLK". Therefore, it is continuously executed until the variation pattern-based sub effect block data “SCH04_BLK” is completed.

The function "NOP", cut-in notice sub-effect block data, and group notice sub-effect block data are defined in the sub-effect scheduler data related to the notice. The function “NOP” is a weight for synchronizing with the liquid crystal effect scheduler, and is defined to execute the sub effect in accordance with the liquid crystal effect. In the cut-in notice sub-effect block data, the sub-effect scheduler number and the sub-effect scheduler data related to the cut-in notice are defined. The cut-in notice sub effect block data has the same effect time as the cut-in notice liquid crystal effect block data. The group announcement sub effect block data defines a sub effect scheduler number and sub effect scheduler data related to the group announcement. The group notice sub effect block data has the same effect time as the group notice liquid crystal effect block data. The variation pattern-based sub effect block data "SCH04_BLK" is configured by executing the sub effect block data in combination.

By executing the above sub effect block data in synchronization with the liquid crystal effect block data, the scheduler data of each sound, lamp, and motor defined in the sub effect block data is executed in synchronization with the liquid crystal effect. It will be.

Further, the variation pattern-based sub effect block data "SCH04_BLK" has the same number of sub effect block data strings as the variation pattern-based sub effect block data "SCH03_BLK", but the number of sub effect block data strings does not increase or decrease. no problem.

Finally, in the variation pattern-based sub effect block data “SCH02_BLK”, since no effect related to the notice is performed, only the lost stop background sub effect block data is executed.
Loss stop background sub effect block data is defined in the sub effect scheduler data related to the background. In the lost stop background sub-effect block data, a sub-effect scheduler number and sub-effect scheduler data related to a normally fluctuating 12-second background are defined. Since the loss stop background sub effect block data is scheduler data related to the background, it has the same effect time as the sub effect block data “SCH02_BLK”. Therefore, it is continuously executed until the sub effect block data "SCH02_BLK" is completed.

FIG. 421 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the liquid crystal effect block data for each variation pattern and the liquid crystal pattern block data for each variation pattern of the present embodiment. With regard to the liquid crystal effect block data for each variation pattern and the liquid crystal pattern block data for each variation pattern, the function executed in the scheduler data in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is only different from the function executed in the scheduler data in the sub effect block data. Since the data format and the control method are common, the description is omitted.

Next, the configuration of the sub effect block data will be described by taking the step-up effect described in FIG. 392B as an example. First, an outline of creating liquid crystal display scheduler data for step-up notice will be described. FIG. 422 is a diagram showing an image of creating a drawing data file in step-up effect units (step-up 1 effect to effect 4) with the image synthesis/motion creation graphic tool for the step-up notice for liquid crystal display of the present embodiment. is there.

The drawing data file is created in step-up effect units, and is composed of a series of effects in which still images and moving images are combined. Further, as shown in FIG. 422, the drawing data file is converted into the liquid crystal effect scheduler data in the present embodiment by the step-up effect unit by the tool.

The reason why the drawing data file is not created one-to-one with the liquid crystal notice production (step-up notices 1 to 4) is that, for example, when only the step-up 1 production is changed, there are four types of step-up notices as in the present embodiment. If it is feasible, it is necessary to change four drawing data files. Considering the work time required for change and the risk of omission of correction, create a drawing data file with a unique number for each step. This is because it is more efficient to realize the notice by combining them.

FIG. 423 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of the effect block data of the step-up notice of this embodiment. (A) shows the configuration of the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data, and (B) shows the configuration of the step-up notice sub effect block data. As described above, although four types of step-up notices can be executed in the present embodiment, step-up notices 1 and 2 are shown in (A) and (B). In the step-up notices 3 and 4, the step-up 3 effect and the step-up 4 effect are executed at predetermined timings.

Explaining the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data, first, based on the step-up notice lottery result value acquired at the start of fluctuation, it is determined which of the step-up notices 1 to 4 is to be executed. It If the lottery result value of the step-up notice is non-winning, the process ends without executing the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data, so the step-up notice is not executed and drawing is not performed on the liquid crystal display device.

On the other hand, if the lottery result value of the step-up notice is step-up notice 1, step-up notice 1 of the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data is selected, and if the lottery result value of step-up notice is step-up notice 2, Step-up notice The step-up notice 2 of the liquid crystal effect block data is selected, and the corresponding effect block data is selected.
The effect block data of the step-up notice 2 operates in the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH01 for executing the step-up 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH02 for executing the step-up 2 liquid crystal effect scheduler data in parallel.

In the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH01, when the step-up 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data is executed, the next data to be executed is “DATA_END”, so the operation in the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH01 ends.

In addition, the function "NOP" is executed by the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH02, and after waiting for the time designated by the parameter, the step-up 2 liquid crystal effect scheduler data is executed. Step up 2 After the execution of the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is completed, the data to be executed next is “DATA_END”, so the operation in the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH02 is ended.

As described above, a plurality of variations of a single announcement can be realized by combining the announcement production scheduler data in the minimum configuration unit.

Next, the step-up notice sub effect block data will be described with reference to FIG. 423(B). The step-up notice sub effect block data is configured to correspond to the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data in a one-to-one correspondence with each other in block configuration and execution time. As a result, it is possible to dynamically synchronize all the effect devices even with a combination of the variation pattern and the preliminary announcement lottery result, and it is possible to realize an effect with a sense of unity.

The step-up notice sub effect block data differs from the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data only in the function executed by the liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the function executed by the sub effect scheduler data. Since the data format and the control method are common, the description is omitted.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the variation pattern command is received from the main control board 1310, the sub production block data stored in the data access order is acquired from the variation pattern-based sub production block data combination table “SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO”. Then, by executing the scheduler data included in the acquired sub effect block data in accordance with the data access order, it becomes possible to execute the basic effect and the preliminary effect defined in a predetermined order and at a predetermined timing. ..

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the scheduler data for controlling the various rendering devices can be executed in parallel, and the scheduler data to be executed at the same timing is defined to have the same execution time, so that the various rendering devices can be operated. The effects can be synchronized. Further, when the execution of the scheduler data is started, thereafter, a predetermined operation is performed at the timing set in the scheduler data. As a result, simply by executing the corresponding block data based on the information that specifies the effect content such as the variation pattern, the scheduler data that is hierarchically defined is automatically acquired and the effect is executed at the defined timing. It is possible to do.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, since a plurality of schedulers can be started and schedule data can be independently executed by each scheduler, it is possible to develop a plurality of types of scheduler data in parallel, which leads to a leap in development efficiency. Can be improved.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the scheduler analyzes the scheduler data described in a predetermined format and controls the rendering device. Therefore, even when the control mechanism of the gaming machine (for example, the peripheral control board 1510 or the arithmetic unit included therein) is updated, a common schedule can be provided by installing a scheduler corresponding to the new gaming machine. The data can be used. In other words, the scheduler has a function as middleware for executing common schedule data on different platforms, and it is possible to utilize software assets related to production control of the gaming machine for a long period of time.

The scheduler in this embodiment may be realized by software or hardware. When the scheduler is implemented by software, the scheduler started at the time of executing the scheduler data may be stopped after use, and the used area of the memory may be released. Memory usage can be reduced by stopping the scheduler. For example, the schedule data may be released after a predetermined time has elapsed from the completion of execution of the schedule data, or may be stopped except for the minimum scheduler when the game machine is in a customer waiting state.

[19. LCD production scheduler data production control]
Next, the details of the liquid crystal effect scheduler data forming the liquid crystal effect block data will be described. The liquid crystal effect scheduler data, like the sub effect block data, is composed of a combination of functions for controlling the effect target. In the sub effect block data, the output of sound, lighting of the lamp, operation of the driving device, etc. were controlled, but in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, drawing on the liquid crystal display device is controlled.

[19-1. LCD production scheduler function]
First, a function (scheduler function for liquid crystal effect) forming the liquid crystal effect scheduler data will be described. The liquid crystal effect scheduler function is an instruction (function, command) for effect control described in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data that constitutes the above-described liquid crystal effect block data, and a command is sent to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a by the liquid crystal effect scheduler function. Send and execute the performance. Further, when executing the scheduler function for liquid crystal effect, it is possible to change the attribute (for example, color, shape, operation content, etc.) of the object to be displayed by specifying the parameter.

[19-1-1. LCD production scheduler function]
FIG. 424 is a diagram showing an example of the scheduler function for liquid crystal effect of the present embodiment. The outline of each scheduler function for liquid crystal production will be described below.

Each liquid crystal effect scheduler function is managed for each group. In this embodiment, there are groups of coordinate setting, scale setting, rotation angle setting, α setting, frame setting, Z index setting, effect SW setting, and sub scheduler setting.

First, the functions belonging to the coordinate setting group will be described. The function belonging to the coordinate setting group is to set the liquid crystal display object by designating the coordinates of the display area of the liquid crystal display device, for example. This makes it possible to specify and display the position of the liquid crystal display target.

The functions “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_POSX”, “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_POSY”, and “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_POSZ” set the display position of the liquid crystal display target by designating the X-axis coordinate position, the Y-axis coordinate position, and the Z-axis coordinate position, respectively.

The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANCHORX" specifies the X-axis coordinate position and the function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANCHORY" specifies the Y-axis coordinate position to set the liquid crystal display target anchor point position. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANCHORXY" specifies the X-axis and Y-axis coordinate positions and sets the liquid crystal display target anchor point position. The liquid crystal display target anchor point position is the center position of the liquid crystal display target.

Next, a group to which a function for performing scaling (scale setting) of a display target (still image or moving image) belongs will be described. Scaling refers to, for example, setting the center of a display area that is designated to be enlarged or reduced when displayed on a liquid crystal display device from the size of a still image or a moving image stored in CGROM, or converting the unit of coordinates. It is to be. By setting an appropriate coordinate system in the display area and performing drawing processing, the liquid crystal display target can be displayed at an appropriate position and size.

The functions "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALE", "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEX", "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEY", "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEZ", "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEXY", and "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEXYZ" belong to the scale setting group. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALE" specifies the X-axis and Y-axis values and sets the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display target. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEX" specifies the X-axis value and sets the coordinates of the liquid crystal display target.
The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEY" specifies the Y-axis value and sets the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display target. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEZ" specifies the Z-axis value and sets the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display target. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEXY" specifies the X-axis and Y-axis values and sets the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display target. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEXYZ" specifies the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis values and sets the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display target.

Next, a group to which a function for setting an angle when the liquid crystal display object is rotated and displayed is included will be described. By storing only the reference liquid crystal display object in the CGROM and designating and displaying the angle, it becomes unnecessary to store a plurality of rotated liquid crystal display objects, and an increase in storage capacity can be suppressed. it can.

The functions “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEX”, “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEY”, “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEZ”, and “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEXYZ” belong to the rotation angle setting group. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEX" specifies the X-axis value, the function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEY" specifies the Y-axis value, and the function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEZ" specifies the Z-axis value to rotate the liquid crystal display object. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEXYZ" rotates the liquid crystal display object by designating the X-axis value, the Y-axis value, and the Z-axis value.

Next, other functions will be described. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ALPHA” is an α setting process. Specifically, the α value is specified to set the transparency of the liquid crystal display target. The α value is a numerical value indicating the degree of transparency, and can be set from transparent (colorless) that completely transmits the background color to completely opaque that does not pass the background color at all.

The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_FRAME” is a frame setting process, and specifically, sets a frame value which is a drawing update interval of the liquid crystal display target. The frame value is a numerical value indicating the interval at which the liquid crystal display object is redrawn during animation processing.

The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ZINDEX" sets the Z index of the liquid crystal display object. The Z index is a hierarchy for displaying a liquid crystal display target object, and by setting this, the liquid crystal display target object is displayed on the front side of the screen or moved to the rear side. For example, when the liquid crystal display object is the background, the Z index is set so that it is drawn at the back.

The functions “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_LCDSW”, “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_FRAMELCDSW”, and “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_KICKLCDSW” belong to the effect SW setting group for setting information on effect SW.
The effect SW, which will be described in detail later, is information incorporated in control information for performing drawing (image, moving image), and by detecting this information, a predetermined process is called back to switch effect contents. , Perform another performance. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_LCDSW” sets the effect SW information to the still image index number on the CGROM or the moving image index number on the CGROM in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_FRAMELCDSW" sets the frame effect SW information in the entire liquid crystal effect scheduler data. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_KICKLCDSW” sets SW information that defines information of special control described later in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data.

The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SUBSCH” is a function for calling the sub scheduler. By defining a highly versatile process as a sub-scheduler and calling back at a predetermined timing, it is possible to simplify the process and improve the development efficiency.

[19-1-2. LCD function scheduler function parameters]
Heretofore, an example of the liquid crystal effect scheduler function used in the gaming machine of the present embodiment has been described. Next, parameters specified when the scheduler function for liquid crystal effect is executed will be described with an example. 425 and 426 are diagrams showing an example of the parameters for the liquid crystal effect scheduler function in the present embodiment.

The parameters of the liquid crystal effect scheduler function are managed for each group similarly to the liquid crystal effect scheduler function. The LCD function scheduler function group and the parameter group are different groups. The parameter group includes sequence control, effect SW, footage setting, symbol replacement related, sub effect scheduler function, and the like.

The sequence control parameter groups include "AAD_FRAME" "AAD_POS" "AAD_POS2" "AAD_POS3" "AAD_ALPHA" "AAD_ANGLE" "AAD_ENTRY_B" "AAD_SKIP" "AAD_SKIP_B" "AAD_SCALE" "AAD_ASC_ADALE". , Etc. are included. Hereinafter, each parameter will be described.

"AAD_FRAME" is a parameter for designating a frame value and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_POS” is a parameter for designating the X-axis coordinate position and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_POS2" is a parameter for setting the X-axis and Y-axis coordinate positions, and each has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_POS3" is a parameter for setting the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis coordinate positions, and each has a length of 16 bits.

“AAD_ALPHA” is a parameter for designating the α value which is the transmittance of the liquid crystal display target, and has a length of 8 bits. “AAD_ANGLE” is a parameter for designating the rotation angle of the liquid crystal display target, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_ENTRY” is a parameter that specifies the total number of data of parameters to be set, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_ENTRY_B” is a parameter that specifies the total number of data of parameters to be set, and is two parameters divided into a length of 8 bits.

"AAD_SKIP" is a parameter that specifies the number of frames to be skipped, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_SKIP_B” is a parameter that specifies the number of frames to be skipped during liquid crystal display, and is two parameters divided into 8-bit lengths.

“AAD_SCALE” is a parameter that specifies a scale value when the coordinate system of the display area has one axis, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_SCALE2” is a parameter that specifies the enlargement or reduction ratio when the coordinate system of the display area has two axes, and each has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_SCALE3” is a parameter that specifies the enlargement or reduction ratio when the coordinate system of the display area has three axes, and each has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_SIZE” is a parameter for designating the size of the liquid crystal display target on the XY 2 axes, and each has a length of 16 bits.

The group of parameter of the production SW includes “AAD_LCDSWENTRY”, “AAD_LCDSW”, “AAD_LCDSW_PARAM”, “AAD_KICKLCDSWENTRY”, “AAD_KICKLCDSW”, “AAD_FRAMELCDSWENTRY”, “AAD_FRAMELCDSW_PARAM” and the like.

“AAD_LCDSWENTRY” is a parameter that specifies the total number of registered production SWs, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_LCDSW” is a parameter for designating the number of effect SW, and designates two numerical values each having a 16-bit length. “AAD_LCDSW_PARAM” is a parameter for passing the effect SW number and has a length of 16 bits.

“AAD_KICKLCDSWENTRY” is a parameter that specifies the total number of registered kick effect SWs, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_KICKLCDSW” is a parameter that specifies the number of the kick effect SW, and specifies two 16-bit numerical values. “AAD_FRAMELCDSWENTRY” is a parameter that specifies the total number of registered frame effect SWs, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_FRAMELCDSW_PARAM” is a parameter for passing the frame effect SW number and has a length of 16 bits.

The group of parameters for the footage setting includes “AAD_SEQFOOTENTRY”, “AAD_SEQFOOT” and the like. “AAD_SEQ FOOTENTRY” is a parameter that specifies the number of still images to be registered in a predetermined area, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_SEQFOOT” is a parameter that specifies the index number of the still image stored in the CGROM, and has a length of 16 bits.

A group of parameters related to symbol replacement includes "AAD_ZUGARA" and the like. “AAD_ZUGARA” is a parameter for designating a symbol index number and has a length of 16 bits.

"AAD_SUBENTRY" and "AAD_SUB" are included in the parameter group of the sub-effect scheduler function. “AAD_SUBENTRY” is a parameter that specifies the number of sub-scheduler function parameters, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_SUB” is a parameter that specifies the sub-scheduler function number and has a length of 16 bits.

[20. Callback control based on image information]
Performance control in a gaming machine has conventionally been realized by combining and executing a program for individually controlling various performance devices, a program for linking a plurality of performance devices, and the like. These programs are described by a program code representing the operation content and control procedure of the rendering device for each content of the notice in addition to the command associated with the variation pattern, and are created by a programmer having a high level of technology. In the liquid crystal drawing, each effect drawing data is called in a frame in which an effect is executed, and a plurality of effect drawings (background, pattern, notice, hold, etc.) are combined.

However, in recent game machines, in order to improve the performance of the hardware and the interest of the game machine, it is required to execute a wide variety of effects, and it is necessary to realize complicated effect control. As a result, each programmer is required to have a high level of skill and the number of development man-hours is increased, and it has become difficult to secure the necessary personnel (programmers) in terms of quality and quantity. Furthermore, since the total amount of program codes of the effect control program is increased, the number of man-hours required for the test for the purpose of checking the operation of the gaming machine and improving the quality is also increased.

Therefore, in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, in order to shorten the development period and improve the quality, it is not possible to realize the effect executed in cooperation with the liquid crystal drawing (image display) by the program code. Instead, the program data for the gaming machine is output by the tool for creating the liquid crystal drawing effect, and the effect is controlled based on the output program data, thereby shortening the development period and improving the quality.

Specifically, a tool capable of creating data for executing a liquid crystal drawing effect is used by allocating images and moving images displayed on the liquid crystal display device in time series. In this tool, single effect drawing data (announcement, background, design, hold, etc.) is defined as one effect block, and effect blocks are grouped for each state such as a variation pattern or a big hit to create an effect common block, A combination of a plurality of effect common blocks realizes a series of effect drawing such as a variation pattern and a big hit.

However, due to the configuration of the gaming machine, display or non-display of effects related to the lottery, replacement of effects and symbols, and interactive effects for external input by the player occur, so simply execute the combined effect common block as it is. Then, it is impossible to realize all the effects.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the effect common block is created by the above-described tool, an effect switch (effect SW) for calling a program for executing an effect at a predetermined timing or executing a predetermined control. ) Can be set (embedded). The effect SW is a flag on the RAM and is set to ON or OFF. When the effect SW set in the effect data for drawing is set, the callback is always generated regardless of whether the effect SW is “ON” or “OFF”. If the effect SW is ON in the function of the callback destination, predetermined control is performed based on the defined effect SW information corresponding to the effect SW. The effect SW is set to ON by a command issued inside the main control board 1310 or the peripheral control board 1510. The effect SW is set for the liquid crystal layer table, the liquid crystal effect common block, the liquid crystal effect block, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, each display target in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, the still image, and the moving image, respectively.

When the liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 executes and analyzes the effect block included in the effect common block at the time of drawing the liquid crystal, and detects the incorporated effect SW, the program function is dynamically called based on the detected effect SW (callback To). Then, it is possible to create a display list command based on the information processed by the called back program function, and realize ON/OFF of effect display or replacement of effect. It should be noted that the program function called by the callback can execute effects other than the liquid crystal effect (for example, sound output, lighting of lamps, operation of a role object, etc.). Further, it is also possible to perform processing such as setting information necessary for subsequent effect control, such as setting a flag and updating data in a predetermined area. As described above, by calling the program function by detecting the effect SW, it is possible to realize the display or non-display of the drawing by the plurality of effect blocks, the effect and the replacement of the symbols, and the interactive effect for the external input by the player. ..

The program function for turning on/off the liquid crystal effect and replacing the effect, which is called by the callback, is incorporated in the peripheral control unit 1530 in advance and does not need to be newly created. Therefore, designers and planners who do not have advanced program knowledge can set production elements such as images and videos during production design, and set production SW to call predefined program functions. It is possible to realize complicated performance specifications. In addition, by creating a production block (liquid crystal production scheduler data) for each production unit using the production creation tool, it is possible to greatly shorten the development period. In addition, the production content can be changed based on a random lottery result. By performing the test using the production SW without performing the test, it is possible to simplify the test process and significantly reduce the time required for the test.

[20-1. Production switch configuration]
Next, the configuration of the effect switch (SW) will be described. FIG. 427 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of the effect switch in this embodiment. The effect SW is uniquely identified by the effect SW number, and is associated with information necessary for replacing the effect and a program function called by a callback.

An effect SW group ID, an effect SW reset group ID, an effect SW attribute, an effect SW start command address, an effect replacement information table address, and the like are associated with the effect SW number.

The effect SW group is a set of effect SWs grouped according to the execution mode of the effect, and the effect SW group ID is an identifier of the effect SW group and defines which effect SW group it belongs to. The production SW reset group has the same configuration as the production SW group, and by designating the production SW reset group ID, the production SW groups belonging to the production SW reset group are set to OFF, and the productions belonging to the production SW group are collectively created. Can be hidden. The effect SW reset group ID is an identifier of the effect SW reset group. Since the effect SW group ID and the effect SW reset group ID have a bit configuration, it is possible to specify a plurality of effect SW groups.

FIG. 428 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the effect SW group of the present embodiment. Further, as described above, the effect SW includes active and passive, and the effect SW group includes one or a plurality of active effect SW and passive effect SW. Specifically, the head group number of the active effect SW and the number of active effect SW belonging to the effect SW group, and the start group number of the passive effect SW and the number of passive effect SW are included.

The effect SW attribute is information indicating the attribute of the effect SW, and specifically includes liquid crystal effect SW all reset information, replacement information, special control information, passive/active information, and the like. The liquid crystal effect SW all reset information is information that specifies whether or not the effect SW belonging to the effect group specified at the time of evaluating the effect SW is set to OFF. The replacement information is information that specifies whether to call a callback function for effect replacement when evaluating the effect SW. The special control information (special control behavior) is information that specifies whether or not to call a default callback function when evaluating the effect SW. The passive/active information indicates an evaluation method of the effect SW. The passive SW evaluates the effect SW statically, and the active evaluates the effect SW dynamically.

The effect SW activation command address is an address of an effect SW activation command table.
The effect SW activation command is a command string for setting the effect SW to ON, and the command for setting the effect SW to ON is defined in the effect SW activation command table.
FIG. 429 is a diagram showing an example of the effect SW activation command table of the present embodiment. FIG. 429 exemplifies the effect SW start command table “lcdsw_cmd_en_ykk_b051_crs_charenge_suc” and the effect SW start command table “lcdsw_cmd_act_b056_cmc_su3_out_red”. Each table includes the number of commands and data for the number of commands for determination.

[20-2. Control by production switch in step-up notice production]
Next, the effect control using the effect switch will be described by taking the step-up notice effect as an example. FIG. 430 is a diagram showing an example of a step-up notice in the present embodiment, (A) shows a stage in which the step-up notice effect is executed, and (B) is a screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device at each stage. An example is shown.

As shown in FIG. 430(A), the step-up notice of this embodiment can be executed up to four stages, and at the end of the step-up notice of each stage, the development effect to the next stage is executed. .. When the step-up notice develops, the next step-up notice effect is continuously executed, and when it does not develop, the step-up notice ends as it is.

Here, variations of the step-up notice production at each stage will be described. In the step-up notice 1 which is the first stage after the start of the step-up notice production, a production in which the display screen is filled with black is executed. At this time, the degree of expectation is suggested by the color of black and the pattern of filling. For example, when the black ink color is black, the degree of expectation is low, and the degree of expectation is high in the order of white, red, and rainbow. As for the pattern of filling, the expectation is higher as the number of positions where the filling is started is higher, and the expectation may be changed at the position where the filling is started. For example, if the filling starts from only one place in the lower left, the degree of expectation is low, and if the filling starts from two places in the lower left and upper left, the filling starts from three places in the lower left, upper left, and upper right. Expectancy increases in order, and when the filling starts from the four corners, the expectation is highest.

Further, as described above, at the end of the step-up notice of each stage, the development effect to the step-up notice of the next stage is executed. The development effect is executed in a common manner halfway in order to increase the player's expectation, regardless of whether or not the development effect actually progresses to the next stage. Explaining the case of the step-up notice 1, first, the liquid crystal display screen is filled with the combination of the black color and the filling pattern determined by lottery. After that, when the screen is completely filled, the ink is gradually removed (thinned), and the characters to be displayed in the step-up notice 2 appear. In the case where the step-up notice 2 is developed, the ink is removed as it is, the display of the characters is darkened, and the effect is continued. On the other hand, when the development effect fails, the characters are not darkened and the ink is removed and the characters are not displayed.

In step-up notice 2, characters corresponding to the degree of expectation are displayed. The pattern of letters increases in the order of "change," "sentinel," "spirit," "continue," and "one shot kill." In the presentation mode of step-up notice 2, first, the screen is filled while enlarging the area to be filled with the combination of the color of black and the variation of filling in step-up notice 1 while the characters are displayed. After that, when the screen is completely filled with black ink, the process proceeds to step-up notice 3. On the other hand, if the development rendering fails, the ink will gradually fade out before the screen is completely filled with the ink, and eventually the ink will completely disappear and the displayed characters will disappear. Will end up.

In the step-up notice 3, the liquid crystal display screen is in a state of being filled with black according to the step-up notice 2, and an effect in which the ink is gradually removed from this state is executed.
At this time, the degree of expectation is suggested according to the pattern in which the black ink flies off. For example, if the ink is being smeared from only one place on the lower left, the degree of expectation is low. The expectation is higher in the order of going, and the highest expectation is obtained when the black ink is removed from the four corners. When the characters are displayed in the process of brushing the ink and the characters are displayed on the liquid crystal display screen after all the ink has been brushed off, the development effect is successful, and the step-up notice 4 is entered. On the other hand, if no characters are displayed on the liquid crystal display screen after all the black ink has been brushed off, the development effect has failed.

The step-up notice 4 is the final step of the step-up notice, and the degree of expectation is suggested by the content (pattern) and color of the characters displayed on the liquid crystal display screen. For example, the character pattern has a high degree of expectation in the order of “game,” “opportunity,” “development,” “heat fight,” “heat,” and “happiness”.
In addition, as for the character color, the degree of expectation increases in the order of black, white, red, and rainbow. In the presentation mode of the step-up notice 4, an animation or the like in which the displayed characters are enlarged is executed.

Next, a procedure for executing the step-up notice described above by the effect SW will be described. 431 to 433 are diagrams for explaining the execution procedure of the step-up notice using the effect SW in the present embodiment. FIG. 431 is a diagram showing the correspondence between all the effect contents and the effect SW in the step-up notice 1. FIG. 432(A) shows step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data and drawing image for executing step-up notice 1 in which black ink is applied from four directions on the screen, and (B) shows red ink from the upper right and lower left of the screen. The step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the drawing image for executing the step-up notice 1 to be filled in with are shown. FIG. 433 is a diagram showing the relationship between the effect SW for changing the effect related to the step-up notice 1 and the effect.

FIG. 431 shows all the effects produced in the step-up notice 1, and is divided for each drawing (ink drawing lower left, ink drawing upper left, ink drawing lower right, ink drawing upper right, character failure, character success). The name of the effect SW and the effect contents are described in correspondence with each category. The total number of step-up effects shown in the figure is 16 effects with 4 effects for each of the lower left, upper left, lower right, and upper right drawing classifications, and 10 effects with 5 effects each for character failure and successful character drawing classifications, with a total of 26 effects. Has become. Also, there is always one effect that can be executed simultaneously in each drawing category, and only one of the drawing categories "character failure" and "character success" is executed, so the maximum effect that can be executed simultaneously with step-up notice 1 The number is 5 totals including the drawing classification “lower left”, the drawing classification “upper left”, the drawing classification “lower right”, the drawing classification “upper right” and the drawing classification “character failure” or the drawing classification “character success”.

Further, the effect determination method of each drawing segment will be specifically described in accordance with the advance notice lottery result value of the step-up notice 1. First, a lottery for the step-up notice 1 is performed to determine the effect contents related to black drawing. The effect contents relating to the black drawing are, specifically, the selection of the position where the black ink appears from the drawing classification "lower left, upper left, lower right, upper right" and the color of the black ink appearing from the appearance position of the selected black ink. Become. In addition, either the drawing category "character failure" or the drawing category "character success" is the content of the character displayed at this time.

Next, the configuration of the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the step-up notice 1 drawing image when the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data is executed without any control will be described with reference to FIG. 432(A). .. As described above, the total number of effects of the step-up notice 1 is 26 effects in total. However, in the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data, there is one for each drawing division of lower left, upper left, lower right, upper right, character failure, and character success. Only the performance data of is defined. When the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data is executed without any control, that is, when all step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data are executed at the same time, the step-up notice 1 drawing image is shown. At the same time, black ink spreads from the lower left, upper left, lower right, and upper right of the screen, the characters of "change" in the drawing classification "character failure" and the drawing classification "character success" are displayed lightly, and then the drawing classification "character The character of "change" is deleted by "failure", and at the same time, the character of "change" is clearly displayed in the drawing segment "character success".

Further, in FIG. 432(B), the drawing category “lower left” is “red”, the drawing category “upper left” is “none”, the drawing category “lower right” is “none”, and the drawing is based on the lottery result of the step-up notice 1 Issues a command in which the classification "upper right" is "red", the drawing classification "character failure" is "spirit", and the drawing classification "character success" is "none". As a result, in the drawing image, red ink spreads from the drawing category "lower left", and red ink spreads from the drawing category "upper right", and the character "Yi" is displayed lightly in the drawing category "character failure". , In the drawing category “character failure”, the character “Yuki” is deleted.

At this time, the effect SW corresponding to the effect corresponding to the content of each issued lottery command is set to ON. Specifically, "LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_RED" is set to "ON" for the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing category "lower left", and "step SW" LEFTW_S1_RED is set to "red" for the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing category "upper right" Then, "LEDSW_RIGUP_S1_RED" is set to ON, and "LEDSW_MOJI_NGS1_KIA" is set to ON for the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing category "Character failure". On the other hand, the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing category “upper left” is “none”, the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing category “lower right” is “none”, the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing category “character success” is “none” The command "" does not produce an effect, so that none of the effect SWs are set to ON and are set to OFF.

From the above, among all the effects of Step-up Notice 1, the red ink spreads from the drawing category "lower left", and the red ink spreads from the drawing category "upper right", and the drawing category "character failure" indicates "energy". It is realized that the effect SW corresponding to the case of displaying characters is set to ON corresponding to the command based on the lottery result of the step-up notice 1.

Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 433, using the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data of FIG. 432(A), an effect according to the lottery result of step-up notice 1 of FIG. 433(B) is performed. A mechanism for effect replacement will be described.

FIG. 433 is a diagram illustrating master data defined on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for each drawing segment and effect SW corresponding to replacement data to be replaced with the master data in the present embodiment. More specifically, referring to the lower left black ink effect replacement group in FIG. 433, step-up notice 1 is the effect SW corresponding to the master data of the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, and the index number on the CGROM of the moving image in which black ink spreads from the lower left. And the corresponding production SW "LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_BLK". On the other hand, the effect SW corresponding to the replacement data corresponds to the effect number “LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_WHI” corresponding to the index number on the CGROM of the video in which the white ink spreads from the lower left, and the index number on the CGROM of the video in which the red ink spreads from the lower left. The effect SW "LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_RED", and the effect SW "LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_REI" corresponding to the index number on the CGROM of the moving image in which the rainbow ink spreads from the lower left. The replacement data is not defined in the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data but is separately defined in the lower left black effect effect replacement table. Also, the effect SW “LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_BLK” corresponding to the index number on the CGROM of the moving image in which black ink spreads from the lower left of the master data is defined in both the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the lower left ink effect replacement table.

In the liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331, the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data is analyzed and executed in the process of creating a display list command in order to draw the effect, and is defined in the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data. When the effect SW “LEDSW_LEFDD_S1_BLK” that is present is used as a trigger (when detected), a callback is generated, and control is transferred from the liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 to a program function for effect replacement.

In the replacement program function called by the callback, the lower left black ink effect replacement table is referenced, all the effect SW registered in the lower left black effect effect replacement table are determined, and the effect SW set to ON is specified. To do. In the present embodiment, since the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing category “lower left” is “red” and the effect SW “LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_RED” is set to ON, “from the lower left corresponding to the effect SW “LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_RED”. The moving image number on the CGROM of "red ink" is specified.

The replacement program function called by the callback transfers the specified moving image number on the CGROM of the red ink from the lower left to the liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 and finishes the execution. When the control returns to the liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 again, the liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 determines that the CGROM corresponding to the moving image in which black ink appears from the lower left defined in the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data. Instead of creating a display list command using the above movie number, a display list command is created using the movie number on the CGROM corresponding to the movie in which red ink appears from the lower left handed over from the replacement program function. create.

The characteristic of the replacement of the effect by the callback of the present embodiment is that the control structure of the low level (the liquid crystal effect scheduler data in the present embodiment, the data structure that is easy to change and is suitable for the tooling) to the high level control structure (the present embodiment By calling a program function for replacement in the form, a program function that is not suitable for change but can execute complicated processing) by callback, it is possible to separate the detection of the timing of replacement and the replacement control. It realizes to perform complicated processing by using liquid crystal effect scheduler data which is a data structure.

Further, in the present embodiment, the processing is always executed by the callback regardless of the identifier for making a callback (ON/OFF set value of the effect SW in the present embodiment). Rather than executing the same control as the effect control of this embodiment by a callback, a structure for performing complicated control on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data side is introduced, and a complicated liquid crystal effect scheduler is executed on the liquid crystal 1f drawing scheduler execution unit side. When the effect control is realized by analyzing and executing the data, the complexity of the program code processed on the side of the liquid crystal 1f drawing scheduler execution unit increases, and when adding a new function or changing a function, be sure to do so. It is necessary to change the LCD production scheduler data. In this case, it is necessary to change both the program code and the data, which not only causes a malfunction due to a change in control, but also affects a function that was operating normally before the change, causing a new malfunction. There is a risk that

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the execution of the callback is always executed by the callback regardless of the identifier (ON/OFF setting value of the production SW) for performing the callback, and a plurality of operations executed by the callback are executed. Executability or processing content is determined in the callback function of. By creating a corresponding callback function to realize a single function, it is not necessary to change the LCD production scheduler data structure even when adding a new function or changing the function, and a call corresponding to the new function is required. This can be done by creating a back function or modifying an existing callback function. Therefore, it is less likely that the change range of the function or the range of effect of the addition is limited to the callback function to be newly added or changed, and affects other callback functions to cause a malfunction. In addition, compared with the case where the execution analysis of the LCD production scheduler data is centrally executed by a single large program, a method in which the execution analysis is performed by a plurality of callback functions for realizing each function and the LCD production scheduler data. However, the structure and structure of the program can be simplified.

In the present embodiment, the explanation has been made focusing on the replacement of the effects, but the control mechanism by the callback of the present embodiment is not only the replacement of the effects, but also the replacement of the symbols, the control of the display or non-display of the effects, and the drawing target. It is also applicable to conversion of drawing data, execution of scheduler data of other effect display devices, and conversion of scheduler data.

Here, the purpose of defining the effect SW “LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_BLK” corresponding to the index number on the CGROM of the moving image of black ink spreading from the lower left of the master data in the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the lower left ink effect replacement table explain. When the index number on the CGROM corresponding to the master production SW is not defined in the production replacement table, the relationship between the master and the replacement target, that is, the index number on the CGROM corresponding to the master production SW is always the liquid crystal production scheduler. The index number on the CGROM corresponding to the master production SW for replacement, which exists only on the data, exists only on the production replacement table. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the effect replacement table and the effect SW are each defined by several thousands. In the situation where game specifications are frequently changed or game specifications are added between the planning and development of a game machine and its introduction to the market, the consistency between the index number of the movie (image) on the CGROM and the rendering SW Is extremely difficult to maintain.

In the relationship between the index number on the CGROM and the effect SW, the index number on the CGROM corresponding to the master effect SW is erroneously defined in the effect replacement table, or conversely, the CGROM corresponding to the effect SW for replacement is erroneously defined. It is possible that the above index number is mistakenly registered in the LCD production scheduler data. In this case, a difference occurs between the command value of the effect lottery and the data number of the index number on the CGROM corresponding to the effect SW on the replacement table, and the effect is replaced with an effect different from the effect selected in the effect lottery. .. Since the degree of expectation is set for each effect, it is possible that a big jackpot-specific effect that does not appear due to fluctuations in the deviation may appear, which is a fatal defect for a gaming machine. As in the present embodiment, by defining the production replacement table including the index numbers on the CGROM corresponding to the master production SW, it is possible to confirm the consistency by comparing the total number of productions with the replacement table. Become. In addition, since the liquid crystal production scheduler data operates without any problem regardless of which data in the replacement table is defined, the control method is extremely unlikely to cause any trouble. In the present embodiment, even if the master effect defined in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is selected as a result of the effect lottery, the index number on the CGROM of the master in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is not used and always replaced. A display list command is created using the index number on the master CGROM defined in the table, and an effect is drawn.

In the step-up notice 3, as described above, the black ink is gradually erased from some or all of the vertices of the display area from the filled state, and the characters emerge when the development effect is successful. On the other hand, when the development effect fails, the characters are not displayed and the black ink is completely erased, and the step-up notice ends. In either case of success or failure, since black ink is gradually erased from the vertices of the display area, effect SW flags for four types of drawing patterns for gradually erasing black ink for each vertex are executed. (Layer) is defined. Further, two types of effect SW flags (layers) corresponding to the result of the development effect are defined.

The upper left ink replacement group, the lower right ink replacement group, the upper right ink replacement group, the character failure effect replacement group, and the character success effect replacement group other than the lower left ink replacement group shown in FIG. 433 have the same configuration and control method as the lower left ink replacement group. Is.

In the step-up notice 4, the step-up notice is not continuously executed thereafter. Therefore, the effect SW flag (layer) may be defined according to the aspect in the animation of the displayed character, or one type of effect SW flag ( Only the layer) may be defined and the type of character animation may be set by a parameter.

As described above, in the present embodiment, different types of effects are created by individually defining the drawing effect pattern for each appearance position of the black ink or the character content and setting the effect SW flag corresponding to the effect to be executed to ON. It is possible to execute or a combined effect. Since switching and combination of productions is done only by individually changing the production SW flag settings, the planner or the like who configures the production can set the parameters by the tool without the need for technology such as creating a new program. It is possible to realize various variations of production. For example, in the step-up notice 1, dozens of drawing patterns can be realized only by combining four drawing patterns depending on the appearance position of black ink and two kinds of development effect result display patterns. As a result, it is possible to minimize the number of types of programs to be developed, improve the development efficiency of production control programs for gaming machines, and improve the efficiency by efficiently inspecting the produced production control programs. You can

[20-3. Outline of control based on production switch]
Next, an outline of control based on effect switches will be described. FIG. 434 is a diagram for explaining a control procedure by the effect switch of the present embodiment, and particularly shows an evaluation procedure for setting the effect SW to ON. In the present embodiment, first, when a main command (main control command) that triggers the production start from the main control board 1310 is received, the peripheral control internal issued to the configuration in the peripheral control board 1510 by the peripheral control unit 1530. An issue command is generated. The peripheral control internal issue command is a command for executing the advance notice lottery and executing the effect by the peripheral control unit 1530.

The production SW command analysis module of the peripheral control board 1510 evaluates the analyzed main control command and the received sub-internal issue command, and sets the corresponding production SW to ON. Specifically, it is compared with the effect SW determination data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1530b to determine whether or not the data matching the received command is registered. It is determined whether or not data matching the received command is registered in the command string of the effect SW determination data, and if there is matching data, peripheral control is performed based on the effect SW number corresponding to the command string. The effect SW flag stored in the RAM 1530c is set to ON.

The effect SW determination data is composed of two types of information, and the first information is an effect SW determination command string for turning on the effect SW. The effect SW determination command string is not fixed length, and it is possible to combine a plurality of command values, a main control command value and a sub internal command value, or a peripheral control internal issue command value and a peripheral control internal command value. .. For example, the variation start designation command value and the probability state designation command value transmitted from the main control board 1310 are defined side by side, or the background control command of the peripheral control internally issued command value and the command value of the lottery result of the mini-character notice are defined side by side. It is possible.

By defining multiple commands side-by-side, for example, even if the same mini-character notice is displayed on different mini-characters for different backgrounds, the background command value is determined, and the mini-character command value is determined after the background is specified. For the first time, it is possible to specify the production of the mini character corresponding to the background, but it is necessary to make multiple determinations for the number of commands.
On the other hand, by defining the background designation command and the command value of the lottery result of the mini-character notice side by side as in the present embodiment, the effect SW corresponding to the command value can be a mini character corresponding to the background. It is not necessary to judge a plurality of times, and with respect to an effect defined by a combination of a plurality of commands, the corresponding effect can be specified in the same manner as the effect defined by a single command. Further, since a plurality of effect SWs can be defined for the same command value, it is possible to simultaneously activate a plurality of effect SWs with a single command value.

The second information of the effect SW determination data is the effect SW number, which is the index number of the effect SW flag array. The effect SW determination data is registered for all the effect SWs in the combination of the effect SW determination command value and the effect SW number.

As described above, as shown in FIG. 434, when the command “0x103001” is received, since the effect SW number “LCDSW_LEFDW_S1” is registered in the effect SW determination data, the effect SW flag stored in the RAM. Set lcdsw_flg[LCDSW_LEFDW_S1] to ON.

As described above, by setting the effect SW flag corresponding to the command, as shown in FIGS. 431 to 433, a predetermined process is called when the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for executing the corresponding notice effect is executed. Be done.

Further, in the effect SW command analysis module, a function for executing an effect based on the effect SW is defined. An example of these functions will be described below. FIG. 435 is a diagram illustrating an example of a function defined in the production SW command analysis module according to the present embodiment. Each function takes the effect SW number (LEDSW number) as an argument.

LEDSW_TST is a function that determines whether or not the effect SW number is ON from the steady program or the program that is called back. LEDSW_SET is a function for turning on the effect SW from a steady program or a called-back program, not activation of the effect SW by a command.

LEDSW_OFF is a function that turns off the effect SW from a steady program or a program that is called back. In addition, when the attribute of "all reset" is defined in the attribute of the effect SW, the reset target effect SW is based on the "reset target effect SW group ID" of the "effect SW information table" corresponding to the effect SW number. All the production SWs belonging to the group are set to OFF.

LEDSW_GET is a function that acquires the attribute information of the target production SW from the regular program or the program that is called back. LCDSW_ATIMER is a function that obtains the frame time from the activation of the active effect SW from the regular program or the called-back program.

[20-4. Implementation example of production switch]
Next, an implementation example of control using the effect switch will be described. 436 to 441 are diagrams showing a part of the program code for executing the control using the effect switch in the present embodiment. The program code shown in each drawing is written in C language.

As described above, the effect SW is set for each of the liquid crystal layer table, the liquid crystal effect common block, the liquid crystal effect block, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, each display target in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, the still image, and the moving image. Since the effect SW is set in all the effect blocks, the process based on the effect SW is always called back when the effect block is executed. Even if it is not necessary to execute a specific process, the callback is executed, it is determined in the callback function that the specific process is not executed, and the callback function is terminated.

FIG. 436 is a diagram for explaining the details of the configuration of the effect SW information table of the present embodiment, (A) is an example of a program code that defines the effect SW information table, and (B) is a bit assignment of effect SW control information. , (C) are diagrams showing an example of an effect SW group.

The effect SW information table is configured based on the effect SW information table management structure shown in (A), and includes effect SW group ID, reset target effect SW group ID, effect SW control information (effect SW attribute), effect SW. It includes command information address and performance replacement information table information.

The effect SW group ID is identification information of the effect SW group to which the corresponding effect SW belongs. The effect SW groups are grouped by functions such as effect SW for performing the same (same kind) notice effect, effect SW for holding display, effect SW for notification, and the like. ing. The effect SW group ID is represented by bits, and one effect SW can belong to a plurality of effect SW groups.

The reset target effect SW group ID is identification information for specifying the effect SW group for which the effect SW is set to OFF when “effect SW all reset” is specified in “attribute bit assignment” described later. As a result, it is possible to collectively specify the effect SWs for which processing is stopped (reset) at the same time when the effect SWs are switched. The reset target effect SW group ID is expressed by bits like the effect SW group ID, and it is possible to specify a plurality of groups.

The effect SW control information is information that defines the function of the effect SW, and specifically includes liquid crystal effect SW all reset information, replacement information, special control information, and passive/active information. The effect SW control information is composed of 16 bits, and each bit defines the function of the effect SW. The bits corresponding to the function of the effect SW are as shown in FIG. 436(B), and the contents will be described below.

The passive (PASSIVE)/active (ACTIVE) information indicates the evaluation method of the effect SW, and is "PASSIVE" when the bit is "0" and "ACTIVE" when the bit is "1". Even if the command to activate the effect SW is received multiple times during the period in which the effect SW is defined in the passive mode, the drawing effect corresponding to the effect SW is performed only once, and in the active mode, the effect in the period in which the effect SW is defined is effected. When the command to activate the SW is received a plurality of times, the effect is re-executed for the number of times the command has been received. Active is used, for example, when a drawing effect corresponding to a button press is displayed when the button is pressed multiple times within the button valid period.

The special control information (special control behavior) is information that specifies whether or not to call a default callback function when evaluating the effect SW. When the bit is set to "1", the callback function on the user side is called instead of the callback function on the system side.

The replacement information is information that calls a callback function for effect replacement when the effect SW is evaluated. If the bit is set to "1", the predefined callback function for replacement is called at the time of evaluating the production SW defined for each display target, still image, and moving image in the LCD production scheduler data. Be done.

The liquid crystal effect SW all reset information is information that specifies whether or not the effect SW belonging to the effect group specified at the time of evaluating the effect SW is set to OFF. When the bit is set to "1", the effect SW belonging to all the groups set in the "reset target effect SW group ID" is set to OFF at the time of effect SW evaluation.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 436(A). For the effect SW command information address, defined command information is output when the effect SW is set to ON at the time of effect SW evaluation. The command to be output is stored in the reference destination of the effect SW command information address, and a new effect SW control or effect is executed by the output command.

The effect SW replacement table information is a replacement table in which data to be replaced is defined when "1" is set in the replacement information bit of the effect SW control information (when "with replacement" is specified). The address of is stored. Details of the replacement table will be described later with reference to FIG. 439.

Next, the effect SW group will be described. In this embodiment, when a plurality of related effect SWs are set, they are managed as an effect group. The effect group is configured to include effect SW group ID, active effect SW head ID, active effect SW number, passive effect SW head ID, and passive effect SW number.

The effect SW group ID is an identifier of the effect SW group. In the effect SW group, the active effect SW and the passive effect SW are stored in a continuous area. The active effect SW head ID is identification information of the effect SW located at the head among the active effect SW belonging to the effect SW group. The number of active effect SWs is the number of active effect SWs arranged from the effect SW corresponding to the active effect SW head ID. The passive effect SW head ID is identification information of the effect SW located at the head among the passive effect SW belonging to the effect SW group. The number of passive effect SWs is the number of passive effect SWs arranged from the effect SWs corresponding to the passive effect SW head ID. As described above, by defining the effect SW group ID as the reset target effect SW group ID, when "effect SW all reset" is specified by "attrib bit assign", the continuous operation belongs to the effect SW group ID. It is possible to simultaneously set the plurality of passive effect SWs and the plurality of continuous active effect SWs that have been turned off.

FIG. 437 is a diagram showing an example of a program code defining the effect SW number corresponding to the effect SW in the present embodiment. In the program code shown in FIG. 437, a specific numerical value is defined for the effect SW number using the enumeration type (enum). In the present embodiment, the work area and the effect information table can be referenced using the effect SW number as an index.

By defining the effect SW numbers as an enumeration in this way, it is not necessary to directly treat the effect SW numbers with numerical values when setting or referring to the effect SW numbers in the program, and the readability of the program can be improved.

Next, the effect SW flag and the effect SW information table will be described. FIG. 438 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining the effect SW flag and the effect SW information table of the present embodiment, (A) shows the effect SW flag, and (B) shows the effect SW information table.

The effect SW flag is a flag indicating whether or not (ON/OFF) the processing based on the corresponding effect SW is executed on the callback function side that calls back. As shown in (A), the effect SW flag is stored in a byte-type array variable, and the array index corresponds to the effect SW number. When the effect SW corresponding to the effect SW number is executed, "1" (ON) is set, and when not executed, "0" (OFF) is set.

The effect SW information table is defined by the effect SW information table management structure shown in FIG. 436(A), and each element of the effect SW information table is read when the program is executed and is a constant that is not updated unless the program data is changed. Has become. Further, the effect SW information table is stored in an array having an effect SW number as an index similarly to the effect SW flag, and data corresponding to all effect SWs is stored.

Next, the effect SW replacement table information and effect SW replacement table for performing effect replacement will be described. The effect SW replacement table information is included in the effect SW information table, as shown in FIG. 436(A). FIG. 439 is a diagram showing an example of effect SW replacement table information and program data defining the effect SW replacement table included in the effect SW information table of the present embodiment, (A) is effect SW replacement table information, and (B) is ) Indicates a production SW replacement table.

FIG. 439(A) is program data showing the configuration of the effect SW replacement table information “lcdsw_cchanege_info_lefdw_s1”. The effect SW replacement table information stores the address of the effect SW replacement table, the effect SW master data, and the effect SW replacement data. The address of the effect SW replacement table is the address of the table in which the actual replacement material number is stored.

The effect SW master data is effect SW data defined in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, and in the case of “lcdsw_cchanege_info_lefdw_s1”, this corresponds to the case where the black color is black (LCDSW_LEFDW_S1_BLK). The replacement data is information indicating the material to be replaced from the master data. For example, when the black color is replaced with white (LCDSW_LEFDW_S1_WHI), the material information is replaced with the corresponding replacement data by evaluating the effect SW.

FIG. 439(B) is program data showing the configuration of the effect SW replacement table “lcdsw_cchanege_lefdw_s1”. In the production SW replacement table, first, the number of columns and the number of rows of material numbers defined in the replacement table are defined. In the present embodiment, the number of columns is 1 and the number of rows is 4. After the definition of the number of columns and the number of rows, information indicating the replacement material is stored.
In the present embodiment, the replacement information has a one-dimensional table structure, but a two-dimensional or three-dimensional table structure does not cause any problem.

As a concrete replacement method, first, the effect SW replacement table information is referred to, and all the effect SW effect switch master data and effect SW replacement data defined in the effect SW replacement table information are evaluated. At this time, one of the effect SWs defined in the effect SW replacement table information is set to ON by the command issued as a result of the effect lottery. Here, description will be made assuming that the effect SW replacement data (LCDSW_LEFDW_S1_WHI) is set to ON. The same row of the effect SW replacement table is specified by using the number of rows of the effect SW set to ON in the effect SW replacement table information as an index. The material number (CG_MOVE_LEFDW_S1_WHI) corresponds to the row of the effect SW replacement data (LCDSW_LEFDW_S1_WHI) in the effect replacement data, and the material number to be replaced is specified.
The material number is an index number that identifies a still image or a moving image on the CGROM.

[21. Layer configuration]
Next, layers for displaying images and moving images will be described. The layer can be used for a general purpose by displaying the display result by dividing the liquid crystal display object into a plurality of areas (layers, layers) and drawing the area. For example, by dividing the background layer, it is possible to draw by a common method even if the displayed character is changed.

In the present embodiment, a table that stores layer information (layer information table) is individually stored and managed, so that a change in some layers does not affect other layers. You can

FIG. 440 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining the layer information table of the present embodiment. (A) is a list storing addresses for storing each layer information table, (B) is a layer information table (background). (For use)). The effect SW described above is also defined in the layer information table, and the callback function is called by using the effect SW as a trigger to determine whether to execute the corresponding liquid crystal layer table based on the information of the effect SW in the callback function. decide. For example, when the production SW (LEDSW_BG_RIV) is ON, the river background layer table (direct_layer01_common0002) is executed. Further, FIG. 441 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining the layer information table of the present embodiment, (A) shows the contents of the layer information table (first half of notice), and (B) shows the layer information table (preliminary notice). The contents of the first half 2) are shown. The layer information tables of the first and second halves of the notice both determine the layer table to be executed by the rendering SW, like the layer information table for the background.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 440(A), a layer information table for background, symbol display, first half notice, big hit performance, character action, hold display, etc. is defined.

Also, FIG. 440(B) shows a layer information table for the background, and in the effect in the present embodiment, the sea background, the mountain background, and the river background are defined, and further, the background (time saving according to the game state is shortened. Medium background, high-precision middle background) are also defined. Further, variations can be added by changing the background color by the production SW.

FIG. 441(A) shows a layer information table for the first half of the notice, in which roulette notice, blackout notice, and window notice are defined, and a notice clear command is also defined. FIG. 441(B) shows the layer information table for the first half of the notice, in which the step-up notice, the button mini-character notice, and the conversation notice are defined. As with the first half of the notice, the layer table for clearing the notice is defined. Also defines. The notice clearing layer table is used to end the notice drawing executed in each notice layer table defined in each notice layer information table. Specifically, the effect SW group ID of the notice layer is defined as the reset target effect SW group ID of the effect SW control information of the effect SW described above, and "attribute bit all reset" is defined by "attrib bit assignment". When the effect SW (LEDSW_YKK_CLR) is set to ON, all the notice SWs of the notices belonging to the effect SW group ID defined in the effect SW group ID to be reset are set to OFF and the rendering corresponding to the effect SW is performed. Ends and disappears. It should be noted that the layer table for clearing the notice is empty because it does not produce anything.

Note that the end judgment record is stored at the end of the area allocated to the list that stores the layer table and the table that stores the layer information. When the end judgment record is detected, it is determined that the data reading is completed. It becomes possible to do. This makes it possible to dynamically change the data amount (the number of records) without setting the number of elements for each list or table in advance.

[22. Step-up notice implementation example]
Next, an implementation example of the notice effect using the liquid crystal effect block data (common block) will be described by taking the step-up notice effect as an example.

[22-1. Production layer table/LCD production block data]
FIG. 442 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining a liquid crystal layer table and a liquid crystal effect common block in the present embodiment. (A) is a liquid crystal layer table for step-up notice effect, and (B) is a liquid crystal effect common block. Shows the configuration of.

As shown in FIG. 442(A), in the liquid crystal layer table corresponding to the step-up advance notice effect, the number of liquid crystal effect common blocks registered in the liquid crystal layer table and the number of liquid crystal effect common blocks are the liquid crystal effect common blocks. It is defined in combination with the total number of drawing frames and the effect SW. In the present embodiment, the total number of drawing frames (580) frames, the effect SW “LCDSW_STEPUP”, and the common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP” are defined. A callback is executed based on the effect SW "LCDSW_STEPUP", and whether or not to execute the common block "LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP" is determined based on the information of the effect SW "LCDSW_STEPUP" in the callback function.

The liquid crystal effect common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP” is defined in the order of effect SW, total drawing frame number, loop start frame position, reproduction time, and liquid crystal effect block. As shown in FIG. 442(B), when there are a plurality of liquid crystal effect blocks, a plurality of lines are defined in the same format. After the step-up notice 4, a terminal is set, and it is configured so that the number of steps can be increased or decreased by adding or deleting the liquid crystal effect block. For example, when the step-up notice 5 is added, the data corresponding to the step-up notice 5 may be added between the step-up notice 4 and the end.

The effect SW, like the effect SW defined in the layer table, controls whether or not to execute the corresponding liquid crystal effect block based on the set value. The total rendering frame number defines the total rendering frame number of the liquid crystal rendering block. Explaining using the step-up notice 1 on the first line, it is defined that the liquid crystal effect block of the step-up notice 1 is reproduced for (150) frames. The loop start frame position is a frame position for determining which display data frame to return to after the end of reproduction of the liquid crystal effect block “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1” on the first line.

The playback time is the playback time of the liquid crystal production block “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1”. The relationship between the total play time, the loop start frame position and the play time is that the play time is the play time of the liquid crystal effect block "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1". When performing loop reproduction from the beginning or in the middle, the number of frames to be looped is added to the reproduction time, and the added number of frames is defined as the total reproduction time. Step up notice 1 The playback time of the LCD effect block of "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1" is (150) frames, so if the 50 frames of the latter half of the LCD effect block "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1" are played twice after the end of playback, the playback will be performed at the total play time. This can be realized by defining (250) frames of time (150) frames+loop reproduction time (50×2) frames and defining (100) frames at the loop start frame position. The effect of fluctuating and fluctuating without finalizing the symbol in the pseudo continuous effect can be realized by using the loop reproduction function.

Further, the reason why the loop start frame is defined as the frame immediately before the end of the reproduction even though the total reproduction time and the reproduction time of the liquid crystal effect block “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1” of the present embodiment is the same When the next rendering common block is not executed, the drawing is not updated, and in order to prevent the liquid crystal screen from stopping, when the total reproduction time is exceeded, drawing is repeated based on the loop start point.

In the present embodiment, the control by the liquid crystal effect common block "LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP" when executing the effects from step-up notice 1 to step-up notice 3 is performed after executing the lottery of the notice related to the effect on the peripheral control board 1530 and then stepping up. The peripheral control internal command related to the notice production, the step-up notice 1 command, the step-up notice 2 command, and the step-up notice 3 command are issued. Then, the step-up 1 effect SW “LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU1”, the step-up 2 effect SW “LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU2”, and the step-up 3 effect SW “LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU3” are set to ON in response to the issued command. On the other hand, the step-up 4 effect SW “LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU4” remains set to OFF because the step-up notice 4 command has not been issued.

After setting the effect SW, the callback is executed based on all the effect SW defined in the liquid crystal effect common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP”, and the callback function is called. Within the called callback function, it is determined whether or not each effect SW is set to ON, and the liquid crystal effect block corresponding to the effect SW set to ON is executed. In the LCD production common block "LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP", "LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU1", "LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU2", and "LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU3" are set to ON, so the LCD production blocks "LCD_YSU_STEP_UP_3_LCD_YKK_STEP_SU2" are set to ON. On the other hand, since "LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU4" is set to OFF, "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU4" is not executed. As described above, since it is possible to define a plurality of liquid crystal effect blocks in the liquid crystal effect common block and control whether or not to execute the liquid crystal effect block by using the effect SW, it is possible to combine and execute a plurality of notices. It is also possible to switch display/non-display of each effect.

Next, the contents of the liquid crystal effect block at each step in the step-up notice will be described. FIG. 443 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining the liquid crystal effect blocks (LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1 to 4) of each step of the step-up notice.

As the content of the liquid crystal effect block, first, the total number of data defined in the liquid crystal effect block is defined. The number of execution frames, the function, or the function used in the liquid crystal effect block, which is the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, is two types of “LCD_NOP” and “LCD_NULL” and the liquid crystal effect scheduler data. "LCD_NOP" is a function that waits for the number of execution frames, and "LCD_NULL" is a function that indicates the end of the liquid crystal effect block.

Next, the liquid crystal effect block will be specifically described. Describing with reference to the liquid crystal effect block "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU2", the first (3) indicates that "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU2" is composed of three lines of data (the number of steps is 3). In the next line, the number of execution frames (120) is designated as "LCD_NOP", and therefore, waiting is performed for (120) frames from the start of execution of the liquid crystal effect block. After waiting for (120) frames, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data “LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU2” is executed for the number of frames corresponding to the number of execution frames (175). After that, "LCD_NULL" in which the number of execution frames (1) is designated is executed, and the execution of the liquid crystal effect block "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU2" ends.

As described in FIG. 430, at the end of the step-up notice of each step of the step-up notice, it is realized by using the weight of “LCD_NOP” to realize the execution of the development effect to the step-up notice of the next stage. doing.

Specifically, the liquid crystal effect block “LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU1” does not wait, and the execution of the liquid crystal effect scheduler data “LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU1” is started. The liquid crystal effect block "LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU2" executes the wait by "LCD_NOP", waits for (120) frames, and then starts the execution of the liquid crystal effect scheduler data "LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU2", whereby the liquid crystal effect scheduler data "LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU1" is set. The liquid crystal effect scheduler data "LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU2" starts execution when (120) frames have elapsed since the execution started. Thus, at the end of the step-up notice 1, it is possible to repeatedly execute the development effect to the step-up notice 2 of the next stage.

Further, it is possible to define a plurality of liquid crystal effect scheduler data in the liquid crystal effect block in chronological order. When the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is continuously defined, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data corresponding to the period of the number of execution frames. To execute the liquid crystal effect scheduler data in the next line.

In the effect scheduler data for step-up notice 2, after the total number of functions is defined, a function NOP for waiting while executing step-up notice effect 1, a function LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU2 for executing step-up notice effect 2, Finally, the function LCD_NULL indicating the end of scheduler data is defined. Step-up notice 3 and step-up notice 4 are similarly described.

[23. Implementation example of button mini character production]
The liquid crystal effect scheduler data for the step-up notice effect has been described above. Next, a description will be given of an effect in which the mini character appears on the liquid crystal display screen by prompting the operation of the effect button while the symbol is changing and operating the effect button within the predetermined period.

[23-1. Mode of button mini character production]
FIG. 444 is a diagram for explaining the outline of the button mini character effect of the present embodiment. The button mini-character production is performed when the main command is received or when the variation starts, and the execution lottery is performed. In the button mini-character production, when the production button is operated during the acceptance period of the button operation input, a predetermined character (mini-character) is displayed on the liquid crystal display screen. In addition, the first half effective period and the second half effective period are set in the acceptance period of the button operation input, and the mini characters are displayed in different modes.

More specifically, when the winning lottery for the button mini character production is won and 90 frames (f) have elapsed from the start of variation, the first half of the button mini character becomes valid. The button mini-character first half effective period is 90 frames, and at the start of the button mini-character first half effective period, an image (moving image) prompting the user to press the button is displayed on the liquid crystal display screen. Button Mini-Character Mini-Character is displayed when the button is operated during the first half validity period. As will be specifically described later, when the button is operated during the first half effective period of the button mini character, the effect SW for displaying the mini character is set to ON, and the corresponding liquid crystal effect block is executed by the callback.

If the button is operated during the valid period of the second half of the button mini character, the mini character is displayed as in the first half of the valid period of the second half of the button mini character. In FIG. 378, the character is displayed in a mode different from the case where the button is operated during the first half of the button mini character period, but it may be displayed in the same mode, or when the button is operated during the first half period of the button mini character. The characters may be displayed in different modes as long as possible.

When the button is operated during the second half effective period of the button mini character, the mini character is displayed as in the first half effective period of the button mini character. In FIG. 444, the character is displayed in a mode different from the case where the button is operated during the first half of the button mini character period, but it may be displayed in the same mode, or when the button is operated during the first half period of the button mini character period. The characters may be displayed in different modes as long as possible.

[23-2. LCD production common block]
FIG. 445 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining a liquid crystal layer table corresponding to the button mini character effect in the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 445, the liquid crystal layer table “direct_layer05_common0002” corresponding to the button mini character effect is the total number of liquid crystal effect common blocks to be registered in the liquid crystal layer table, and the number of liquid crystal effect common blocks is the total drawing frame of the liquid crystal effect common block. It is defined in combination with the number and the effect SW. In this embodiment, the total number of drawing frames (180) frames, the effect SW “LCDSW_BTN_MINIBEF”, and the liquid crystal effect common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIBEF” are defined. Next, a total number of drawing frames (150) frames, effect SW "LCDSW_BTN_MINIAFT", and liquid crystal effect common block "LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIAFT" are defined. In the liquid crystal layer table “direct_layer05_common0002”, first, the liquid crystal effect common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIBEF” is executed during (180) frames. After that, during the (150)th frame, the liquid crystal effect common block "LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIAFT" is executed, and the execution of the liquid crystal layer table "direct_layer05_common0002" is ended.

Next, the configuration of each liquid crystal effect common block of the button mini character effect will be described. FIG. 446 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining individual common blocks of the button mini character effect in the present embodiment.

The configuration and control method of the liquid crystal effect common blocks “LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIBEF” and “LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIAFT” in FIG. 446 are the same as the effect layer table and the liquid crystal effect block data described in FIG. 442. LCD production block data "LCD_YKK_MINIBEF" and "LCD_YKK_MINIAFT" is a production SW that calls a callback function to determine whether to execute it. It becomes SW. Therefore, the drawing effect (effect block) corresponding to the effect SW is executed by the number of times the button is operated.

[23-3. LCD production block data]
FIG. 447 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining liquid crystal effect block data for executing the button mini character effect in the present embodiment.

The configuration and control method of the liquid crystal effect block data “LCD_YKK_MINIBEF” and “LCD_YKK_MINIAFT” shown in FIG. 447 are the same as the liquid crystal effect block data described in FIG. 377. Explaining the process by each liquid crystal effect block data, first, in the first half of the effect, "LCD_NOP" defined at the beginning in the liquid crystal effect block data "LCD_YKK_MINIBEF" is executed, and waits for (90) frames from the start of fluctuation. .. Then, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data "LCD_DIR_MINIBEF" corresponding to the first half effective period of the button mini character is executed for (90) frames, and the execution of the liquid crystal effect block data "LCD_YKK_MINIBEF" is ended. In the latter half of the production, "LCD_NOP" defined at the beginning of the liquid crystal production block data "LCD_YKK_MINIAFT" corresponding to the button mini character second half effective period is executed, and waits for (30) frames from the start of fluctuation. After that, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data “LCD_DIR_MINIAFT” corresponding to the button mini character latter half effective period is executed for (120) frames, and the execution of the liquid crystal effect block data “LCD_YKK_MINIAFT” is ended.

As described above, since the production SWs "LEDSW_YKK_MINIBEF" and "LEDSW_YKK_MINIAFT" are active production SWs, the production SWs "LEDSW_YKK_MINIBEF" and "LEDSW_YKK_MINIAFT" are set to ON while the liquid crystal production scheduler data "LCD_DIR_MINIBEF" and "LCD_DIR_MINIAFT" are being executed. When the command to perform is issued a plurality of times, the drawing effects corresponding to the effect SWs “LEDSW_YKK_MINIBEF” and “LEDSW_YKK_MINIAFT” are executed the number of times issued. In addition, a callback is always generated by the effect SW and the corresponding callback function is called.
The control when the button is pressed is executed in the called callback function, and the callback is executed every frame even after the button pressing control is completed and until the liquid crystal effect scheduler data execution is completed. By creating liquid crystal effect scheduler data for performing effect drawing during the button effective period and controlling it by the active effect SW, the control in which the period during which the callback is executed is determined as the button effective period without separately determining the button effective period. Is possible. For example, it is possible to count the number of times the button is repeatedly pressed by repeatedly pressing the button, and execute an effect according to the number of times. Also, by calling the sub-effect scheduler data including the function of controlling the lamp in the callback function, the lamp can be turned on in response to the button operation. Further, by calling the sub-effect scheduler data including a function for controlling the accessory, it is possible to perform an operation according to the number of button operations and execute scheduler data for returning to the initial position after the button operation valid period ends. As a procedure of returning the accessory to the initial position, for example, a production block including a function of causing the accessory to return to the initial position is made to wait by "LCD_NOP" until the button operation effective period ends.

[24. LCD production scheduler for designs]
As described above, in the present embodiment, when the notice effect is executed, it is possible to replace the drawing contents depending on the game state and the degree of expectation of the variable display game to be noticed. Similarly, it is also possible to replace the identification symbol to be variably displayed in the variable display game when a predetermined condition such as a game state is established. The outline of the procedure for replacing the identification symbol will be described below.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the variable display of the identification symbol is stopped in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and each row is assigned a reel in which the identification symbol is arranged in a predetermined order. Identification symbols are drawn on each reel in a mode according to the game state, and each reel is defined for each mode. The variable display of the identification symbol is realized by sequentially displaying the identification symbol drawn on each reel together with the background image.

The display of the identification pattern is updated for each frame similarly to the notice effect, and the effect SW is assigned. In the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for displaying the identification pattern, the index number on the CGROM of the still image or the moving image for displaying the identification pattern and the effect SW corresponding to the index number on the CGROM are defined as master data. .. A reel number is defined in the effect SW for replacing the identification pattern. The reel number represents a unique identification number displayed according to the game state and the effect. For example, when the identification symbols displayed on the mountain background, the river background, and the sea background are different, the left symbol on the mountain background is R0, the medium symbol is R1, the right symbol is R2, and the left symbol on the river background is R3, the medium symbol. Is R4, the right symbol is R5, the left symbol of the mountain background is R6, the medium symbol is R7, and the right symbol is R8. By using the reel number, it is possible to individually correspond to the game state and the effect, and it is also possible to specify the display position of the identification symbol.

Further, the reel number includes the reel index number. The reel index number is defined for each reel arrangement number of the identification symbol. With the reel arrangement, the identification pattern is displayed in order of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 0, and after 0, the design of the identification pattern and the identification pattern when returning to 1 and displaying What defines the total number and the display order of identification symbols is defined as a reel index.
It is possible to define a plurality of reel indexes.

Further, the table for replacing the identification pattern includes a replacement table of the identification pattern corresponding to the reel number and the reel index number corresponding to the reel number, and a reel replacement work number table for reel replacement. In the identification symbol replacement table, index numbers on the CGROM of still images or moving images corresponding to reel arrays are defined for each reel index.

The replacement of the identification symbol is performed using the reel index replacement work number table in addition to the identification symbol replacement table. The reel index replacement work number table defines work numbers for reel replacement on one or a plurality of RAMs corresponding to each reel index. The reel replacement work is displayed when the temporary stop symbol number value of the identification symbol related to the pseudo-variation variation, the fixed symbol number value of the identification symbol, etc. can be recognized as if the identification symbol is stopped or stopped by the player. The identification symbol number value according to the effect is stored in advance by the peripheral control program at the start of fluctuation in accordance with the effect contents.

The identification of the data for replacing the identification pattern will be described. When the callback is executed based on the production SW for the identification pattern replacement, the reel index number corresponding to the reel number in the callback function for the identification pattern replacement is set. Based on the reel index replacement work number table, the target reel index replacement work number is specified. Further, the identification symbol number value stored in the reel index replacement work is taken out, and the reel index replacement work number is corrected based on the number of displayed identification symbols produced in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data. Similarly, based on the reel index number corresponding to the reel number, the corresponding replacement table is identified by the identification symbol replacement table, and the index number on the CGROM of the still image or moving image to be replaced in the identified table is corrected. It is specified using the index replacement work number.

Further, the replacement of the identification pattern, even if the master effect defined on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is selected as in the effect replacement, the index number on the master CGROM on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is not used. The display list command is created by using the index number on the master CGROM that is always defined in the replacement table, and the effect contents are drawn.

Further, by replacing the identification pattern every frame, it is possible to immediately return to the normal display even if an incorrect identification pattern is displayed due to noise or the like. Also, by setting the reels according to the game state, even if there is a problem in replacing the identification symbol due to an error, the player can grasp the game state regardless of the content of the identification symbol. In this way, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from decreasing.

[25. Callback timing]
Next, the timing of occurrence of the callback when the production SW is detected will be described. In the present embodiment, it is possible to determine the drawing classification by the parameter passed to the function in the callback function that calls back.

FIG. 448 is a diagram showing an example of drawing divisions that can be determined in the callback function when the callback is executed by the production SW of this embodiment.

"LCD_EFF_BEF_LCD_A" causes a callback before the liquid crystal A drawing starts, and "LCD_EFF_AFT_LCD_A" causes a callback after the liquid crystal A drawing starts. Further, "LCD_EFF_BEF_LCD_B" causes a callback before the liquid crystal B drawing starts, and "LCD_EFF_AFT_LCD_B" causes a callback after the liquid crystal B drawing starts. The liquid crystal A and the liquid crystal B are different liquid crystals, and it is possible to determine whether or not the drawing of each liquid crystal is completed before or after the drawing of the liquid crystal A is completed. It becomes possible to draw on the liquid crystal A triggered by.

"LCD_EFF_BEF_ANIM" causes a callback before all drawing is started, and "LCD_EFF_AFT_ANIM" causes a callback after all drawing is completed. It is possible to initialize the frame buffer with the required background color before drawing by making a judgment before drawing, and to instruct another effect device to execute an effect when drawing is completed by making a judgment of drawing end. It will be possible.

"LCD_EFF_BEF_ANIM" causes a callback before the drawing of the corresponding layer starts, and "LCD_EFF_AFT_ANIM" causes a callback after the drawing of the corresponding layer is completed. Predetermined processing can be executed before or after the drawing of the specific layer is completed. For example, when a plurality of notifications are generated at the time of drawing the notification layer by performing the determination before starting the layer drawing, it is possible to enlarge and display the display of the notification having a higher priority. In addition, by making a judgment after starting the layer drawing, by drawing the effect around the design drawn at the timing when the design with high expectation stops before starting the pattern layer drawing, the design with high expectation It becomes possible to display the effect around the pattern only when is stopped.

As described above, it is possible to specify the drawing segment and execute the predetermined processing before or after the drawing is started. It is also possible to generate a callback for each common block. As shown in FIG. 448, "LCD_EFF_BEF_COMBLK" can generate a callback before the common block drawing is started, and "LCD_EFF_AFT_COMBLK" can generate a callback after the common block drawing is completed. Common block By stopping the execution of a specific liquid crystal effect block corresponding to a single effect that constitutes the liquid crystal effect common block by making a determination before starting drawing, and not performing effect drawing, a liquid crystal effect common block It is possible to execute a liquid crystal effect common block that is different from the liquid crystal effect common block that is scheduled to be executed at the start of variation by performing the determination after the drawing is completed.

Also, "LCD_EFF_BEF_DIR" generates a callback before the liquid crystal effect block drawing in the liquid crystal effect common block is started, and "LCD_EFF_AFT_DIR" generates a callback after the liquid crystal effect block drawing is completed. It is possible to change the liquid crystal effect block to be executed according to the result of the external input by the player by performing the determination before starting the liquid crystal effect block drawing. Further, by making a determination after the liquid crystal effect block drawing is started, it is possible to add new drawing to the content drawn by the liquid crystal effect block based on the drawing content of the liquid crystal effect block that draws a single effect. Furthermore, "LCD_EFF_BEF_CAST" can generate a callback before the drawing of a still image and a moving image in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, and "LCD_EFF_AFT_CAST" can generate a callback after the completion of the drawing of a still image and a moving image. It is possible to replace various effects by making a determination before the start of drawing a still image or a moving image. Further, it is possible to add the rendering of the effect according to the contents of replacement of various effects by making a determination after the drawing of the still image or the moving image is completed.

As described above, since the control that can be realized differs depending on the drawing section, it is very important to judge the drawing section in each callback function that has made a callback.

[26. Production switch group management]
As described above, in the present embodiment, a plurality of procedures (functions) are managed by the liquid crystal production schedule data for each liquid crystal production block, and an image or a moving image is drawn for each layer based on the state of the gaming machine or the division of the production. To be done. Further, as described above, one or a plurality of effect SWs are set in each layer.

At the time of execution of the effect, images and the like are drawn in parallel on a plurality of layers, and a plurality of liquid crystal effect schedule data are executed in parallel. For example, in the step-up notice production, when the step-up notice 1 is executed, the background layer background is drawn, and the identification symbol is drawn on the symbol layer. Further, drawing is performed according to the step-up notice 1 on the notice layer (preliminary_first half 1 layer). FIG. 449 is a diagram showing an example of the drawing results of the individual layers and the drawing results of all the layers when the notice effect is executed in the present embodiment.

At this time, one or a plurality of effect SWs are set in each layer, but if these effect SWs are individually managed, the processing may be complicated. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the effect SWs are grouped and managed for each layer, the state of the gaming machine, and the effect classification.

For example, the effect SWs assigned to each layer are grouped. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 449, a production SW group background, a production SW group design, and a production SW group notice are configured corresponding to the background layer, the symbol layer, and the notice layer. These effect SW groups may be further grouped and managed, and the effect SW may be managed for each state of the game machine or for each effect category.

In this way, by grouping and managing the effect SW, individual effect elements can be collectively controlled. For example, when changing the background currently being displayed and the pattern display and hold display that match the background to another background when starting a new change, the background layer, the pattern layer, and the hold layer are classified according to the background. The effect SWs are grouped, and the effect SWs belonging to the group are collectively set to OFF in the callback function using the callback. As a result, it is possible to collectively hide the symbol display and the hold display together with the current background together with the background. By performing the symbol display and the hold display according to the new background in the corresponding layers, a plurality of layers can be displayed. It is possible to switch the drawing only for a desired effect display from among a plurality of effect displays displayed in layers.

Also, in the production over the game state, for example, in the big hit production after the fluctuation start to the end of the fluctuation, the symbol is hidden and the background is changed to the big hit performance, but with respect to the hold, the hold drawn during the change is held. It is also possible to continuously display. In such control, the above-described target effect group to be hidden is defined as the reset target effect SW group ID, and the effect SW for which effect SW all reset is designated is a common block for the liquid crystal effect at the time of start of variation or This can be achieved by defining it in the liquid crystal effect common block when the big hit effect is started.

[27. Exception common block]
In the present embodiment described up to this point, in order to increase the interest of the player and to efficiently control the complicated game effect, all the effects are managed as a common block in units of blocks of a fixed length. With this, a production block is selected according to the variation pattern and the result of the preliminary lottery, and a series of productions such as variable display and big hits are realized by drawing based on the selected production block, and complicated control is performed. Without doing so, control was achieved to synchronize the sub-effects such as character products, lamps, and sound output with the drawing content. In the common block, a period is set that is divided at a predetermined timing from the start of the variation of the symbol to the determination of the symbol. These periods correspond to the first half variation and the second half variation, and are assigned to the variation pattern, for example. It was set according to the variation time of the design.

With this configuration, the common block can be used universally with a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns. Furthermore, by securing the independence of the notice effect executed in the first half variation and the notice effect executed in the second half variation, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in the combination of common blocks.

However, as described above, since the common blocks are separated by a predetermined period, it is difficult to realize the effect that continues from the variation start to the variation end only by combining the effect blocks having a certain length. When performing an effect that spans a plurality of such periods, the common block that precedes and the common block that follows will be associated and the versatility will be reduced, and each common block will be executed independently. Therefore, the control may be complicated in order to maintain the continuity of the effect. Therefore, in order to realize such an effect, it is necessary to create and control a program code individually, not to set the program data.

Therefore, in order to solve the above-mentioned problem, in the present embodiment, not only is a series of productions of variable display and big hits produced by combining production blocks of a fixed length in all productions, the length of the production block Is configured to allow an effect block length matched to the effect period, not exceptionally a fixed length. Furthermore, it is possible to draw by combining effect blocks with different effect times, and by also enabling effect blocks that span the combined effect blocks to be drawn at the same time, a drawing effect that continues from the start of fluctuation to the end of fluctuation is realized.

The production over a plurality of periods includes, for example, a countdown production in which a number is displayed in a countdown with the start of a symbol variation and the countdown display is continued over the first half variation and the second half variation. FIG. 450 is a diagram illustrating an example of a common block that extends over a plurality of periods according to the present embodiment. , Shows the structure of a liquid crystal notice production block by a common block extending over a plurality of periods.

In the example shown in FIG. 450, the first half variation is “normal variation 12 seconds” and the second half variation is “normal short reach”, corresponding to the variation pattern “10H03H”. As shown in FIG. 450(A), a step-up notice and a BTN logo accessory drop notice are executed in the first half change, and a cut-in notice and a group notice are executed in the second half change. The content of each notice production is as described above. The countdown notice is executed from the start of the step up notice to the end of the group notice.

In FIG. 450(B), the liquid crystal effect block data of the notice effect (step up notice, BTN logo accessory fall notice, cut-in notice and group notice) using the common block and the group notice from the start of the step up notice. The structure of the production block of the countdown notice that is executed during the period until the end is shown. The block data corresponding to the common block is as described above.

The production block of the countdown notice is composed of a function NOP that waits until the liquid crystal production notice block data starts, a liquid crystal production notice block data, and a function NOP that waits until the latter half variation ends after the liquid crystal production notice block data ends. .. Note that the function NOP that waits until the liquid crystal effect notice block data starts is the NOP that is executed before the step-up notice is started, and the function NOP that waits until the latter half change ends is the NOP that is executed after the end of the group notice. The same waiting time is set.

As described above, by enabling an exception to be set in the execution period of the effect block, it becomes possible to more flexibly operate the common block. Further, by setting the standby time before and after the start of the effect, it is possible to minimize the influence of the execution timing of other effect blocks being shifted due to the exception setting. Note that the exception common block is also controlled by a callback function using the effect SW, like other common blocks.

[28. Image conversion]
To increase the interest of the game and to shorten the processing time related to drawing, draw the drawing data for one screen of the liquid crystal display from the frame buffer, and store it in the capture storage area of the sound source built-in VDP1540a separately from the frame buffer. Then, processing such as image reuse and transformation/additional drawing was performed. As described above, by temporarily storing the drawing data in another area and using it for the drawing of the next frame, various rendering expressions have been efficiently realized.

FIG. 451 is a diagram illustrating a conventional configuration of writing an image in a frame buffer by writing an image written in each layer. As shown in FIG. 451, conventionally, the images drawn in the respective layers are overwritten in the frame buffer, written, and then output to the display device.

Specifically, first, a moving image or a still image displayed in the background layer is written in the frame buffer using the display list command. Next, the moving image or still image displayed in the symbol layer is overwritten on the frame buffer using the display list command. Furthermore, the moving image or still image displayed in the notice layer is overwritten on the frame buffer using the display list command. Finally, a moving image or a still image related to the reserved layer is overwritten on the frame buffer using the display list command to create drawing data for one frame.

After that, the peripheral control board 1530 copies the drawing data for one frame to be displayed, which is created in the frame buffer, to the capture buffer separately allocated to the RAM of the sound source built-in VDP 1540a. After newly adding an effect around the design to the drawing data stored in the capture buffer, the drawing data is written back to the frame buffer to create one frame of drawing data for the next display.

By doing so, the drawing data to be displayed in the next frame can be easily created only by adding an effect to the already created drawing data. However, in the image conversion according to such a conventional technique, only the image conversion for the drawing data for one frame can be realized, and in addition to the addition of a new drawing element for the liquid crystal drawing screen for one frame, It is limited to enlargement or reduction of the entire LCD drawing screen. It is impossible to perform image conversion on the drawing element drawn on each layer or each drawing element in the layer on the capture buffer.

The reason why image conversion cannot be performed for each drawing element is that the drawing elements in each effect, such as background, pattern, and notice, are overwritten on the frame buffer in the layer order, so for drawing elements that overlap, It will be overwritten by the drawing element of the layer drawn from. In addition, the drawing elements are a set of colored dots (points) when drawn on the frame buffer, so even if you try to extract a drawing element with a rectangle, it will be overwritten with another drawing element. This is because the data of the drawing element in the overwritten portion is lost.

At present, the need for reusing the image data for one screen of the liquid crystal display that has been drawn has become less due to the improvement in the VDP processing capacity, but the expression expression is diversified for the purpose of improving the entertainment of the game. Therefore, it is expected that the load will increase to execute complicated drawing processing.

In the present embodiment, in order to solve the above-mentioned problems and to produce more diverse effects, image data for one screen of the liquid crystal display of the created frame buffer is captured, and the captured image is transformed or newly drawn. When the image data for one screen of the liquid crystal display is newly drawn, each display unit that constitutes the image data for one screen of the liquid crystal display dynamically changes the image during the drawing. A complicated rendering expression is realized by adding a new drawing.

Specifically, single effect drawing data (announcement, background, design, hold, etc.) is defined as one effect block, and effect SW is included in the effect block unit in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for displaying by the effect block. Incorporate. Then, the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data is executed and analyzed at the time of drawing the liquid crystal, and the process (program function) is dynamically called (callback) based on the information of the rendering SW incorporated in the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data.

When changing the image, instead of drawing the corresponding effect block in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the called back program function on the frame buffer, it is allocated on the RAM of the sound source built-in VDP 1540a separately from the frame buffer. Drawing is performed on an off-screen buffer (image display information temporary storage means). Then, after changing the image or adding a new image to the image on the off-screen buffer, the image is written back on the frame buffer. By configuring in this way, in addition to changing the image of only a specific notice, adding a new image or replacing the effect of the background only, you can change the image of the image in which multiple effects are superimposed or add a new image. Additions can be realized.

Hereinafter, a configuration in which the image drawn in each layer is stored in the off-screen buffer, the image stored in the off-screen buffer is converted, and the converted image is written in the frame buffer will be specifically described. FIG. 452 is a diagram illustrating a procedure of converting the image file stored in the off-screen buffer and writing the converted image file in the frame buffer according to the present embodiment.

As described above, one or more buffers for image conversion called off-screen buffers different from the frame buffers are allocated to the RAM of the sound source built-in VDP 1540a. Then, image conversion is performed in the image conversion buffer, and complex image conversion is enabled by combining the image converted in one or more off-screen buffers and the image drawn in the frame buffer.

To further explain, the effect SW is embedded in the liquid crystal effect block data forming each layer corresponding to the effect and each liquid crystal effect scheduler data configuring the liquid crystal effect block data, and embedded when the display list command is created at the time of liquid crystal drawing. The callback function is called by the callback based on the rendered SW, and the image conversion is performed in the callback function.

In FIG. 452, first, before starting the drawing of the background layer, the drawing target is switched from the frame buffer to the off-screen buffer A in the function called back based on the effect SW. Next, at the drawing timing of each effect element of the background layer, a display list command for enlarging each effect element of the background layer is created and transmitted to the off-screen buffer A in the function called back based on the effect SW. By doing so, each enlarged background is drawn on the off-screen buffer A.

Then, before starting the drawing of the symbol layer, the drawing target is switched from the frame buffer to the off-screen buffer A and drawn in the function called back based on the effect SW. Next, at the drawing timing of each effect element of the symbol layer, an effect is added to the symbol drawn on the background drawn on the off-screen buffer A in the function called back based on the effect SW. Create a display list command. By transmitting this display list command, an effect can be added to the background and the pattern drawn in the off-screen buffer A, and the image drawn in the off-screen buffer A is overwritten on the frame buffer.

Subsequently, before the drawing of the notice layer is started, the drawing target is switched from the frame buffer to the off-screen buffer B and drawn in the function called back based on the effect SW. Next, at the timing when drawing of all effect elements related to the notice layer is completed, a display list command for rotating the notice drawing of each effect element of the notice layer in the function called back based on the effect SW. create. By transmitting this display list command, each rotated notice is drawn in the off-screen buffer B, and the image drawn in the off-screen buffer B is overwritten on the frame buffer.

Finally, all effect elements in the reserved layer are written in the frame buffer, and a liquid crystal drawing screen for one frame to be displayed this time is created.

By the above procedure, unlike the conventional image conversion described above, the image conversion is not performed for the entire screen, but for each layer drawing unit, each drawing element forming a layer, and the drawing order in the frame buffer. It can be performed.

The present embodiment is characterized in that a callback based on the same effect SW is performed a plurality of times at each drawing timing within a period from the start of drawing the liquid crystal screen for one frame to the end of drawing. The details of the types of drawing timings are as described using FIG. 448 described above.

Further, by performing the image conversion by the callback, it is not necessary to determine or monitor whether or not the image being drawn is the target of the image conversion. Furthermore, instead of starting a series of variation-related drawing, at the timing of creating a display list command that draws an image to be image-converted, an image based on the lottery result value of the preliminary lottery and the result of the interactive operation by the user's external input It is possible to determine the conversion method.

[29. RAMless transfer]
Conventionally, a display list command is created based on animation data stored in CGROM, and the created display list command is processed by the sound source built-in VDP 1540a to perform drawing when the game effect is executed. At this time, the display list command created while analyzing the animation data stored in the CGROM is stored in the buffer allocated to the peripheral control RAM 1530c, and after the display list command for one screen is created, the external request DMA (transfer means) To send the contents of the buffer to the VDP.

However, in the current situation, the production specifications are complicated and the processing load is increased, which increases the processing time such as advance notice lottery processing at the start of fluctuation, while the lamp lighting data layer combination processing and motor system due to the increase in the number of lamp systems. The processing time of motor data creation processing is also increasing due to the increase in the number. Since the processing time of peripheral control such as performance is executed in a predetermined cycle, there is a possibility that the processing cannot be completed within the cycle when the above-mentioned high-load processing is repeatedly executed. ..

Regardless of exceptional cases where processing cannot be completed within a cycle, if processing cannot be completed within a cycle steadily, game control by the main control device and effect control by peripheral control devices should be synchronized based on the processing cycle. However, there is a possibility that the progress of the game and the effect of the game by each effect device are separated, and the interest of the game is significantly reduced.

Therefore, it has been necessary to shorten the processing time of the peripheral control processing by, for example, reducing the time required for high-load processing in the peripheral control processing such as production. In view of this, in the present embodiment, the rendering processing, which has a relatively high load in the peripheral control processing, and particularly the processing time for analyzing the animation data on the CGROM described above and creating a native display list command that can be processed by the VDP1540a with a built-in sound source, A means for reducing the processing time of the entire peripheral control processing will be described.

First, a conventional procedure for transferring a display list command group for displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device to the VDP 1540a with a built-in sound source will be described. FIG. 453 is a diagram illustrating a procedure of temporarily storing the display list command group in the peripheral control RAM 1530c and then transferring the display list command group to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a.

In the procedure shown in FIG. 453, first, the liquid crystal effect scheduler display list control module acquires various liquid crystal effect scheduler data from the peripheral control ROM 1530b, and analyzes and converts the liquid crystal effect scheduler data into a VDP native display list command group. The purpose of converting the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data into a VDP native display list command group is that the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data includes information (a VDP register number or a parameter value corresponding to the register number) regarding the display list command to be transmitted to the VDP 1540a with a built-in sound source. Therefore, it is necessary to convert the liquid crystal effect scheduler data into a VDP native display list command that can be executed by the sound source built-in VDP 1540a. The converted VDP native display list command group is temporarily stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c. Also, when the callback function called by the production SW is executed when the liquid crystal production scheduler data is executed, the liquid crystal production scheduler data is analyzed and converted into a VDP native display list command group as necessary and stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c.

Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a sets the display list transfer to the external request DMA in the process of processing the liquid crystal effect scheduler data. As a result, the VDP native display list command group stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c is acquired from the peripheral control RAM 1530c by the external request DMA and transferred to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a.

Upon receiving the transferred VDP native display list command, the sound source built-in VDP 1540a temporarily stores the VDP native display list command in the display list FIFO. The sound source built-in VDP 1540a processes the display list stored in the display list FIFO from the beginning and outputs an image (moving image) to the liquid crystal display device.

As described above, the display list command group for one frame is stored in the buffer of the peripheral control RAM 1530c, and the display list command group is transferred from the buffer to the VDP 1540a by using the external request DMA in the next processing cycle when the display list command group is created. Drawing is realized by sending. However, the processing of analyzing and converting a huge amount of liquid crystal effect scheduler data for one screen into a VDP native display list command group becomes a large processing load. When a plurality of VDPs of different makers are installed in one gaming machine, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data which is an intermediate data format is analyzed and converted into a VDP native display list command group corresponding to the VDP of each maker. It becomes possible.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, a configuration in which some or all of the display list command groups can be transferred to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a without being stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c is applied. FIG. 454 is a diagram for explaining a procedure for transferring the display list command group to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a without storing it in the peripheral control RAM 1530c in the present embodiment.

In the procedure shown in FIG. 454, first, a display list transfer setting is made in the external request DMA by the liquid crystal effect scheduler display list selection management module. The external request DMA acquires the set display list command group from the peripheral control ROM 1530b, not from the peripheral control RAM 1530c.

The peripheral control ROM 1530b stores liquid crystal effect scheduler data as in the case where the display list command group is temporarily stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c. However, each liquid crystal effect scheduler data is a converted VDP native display list command group. And an interrupt display list command.

The external request DMA acquires the designated liquid crystal effect scheduler data from the peripheral control ROM 1530b based on the transfer setting by the liquid crystal effect scheduler display list selection management module, and transfers it to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a. The sound source built-in VDP 1540a temporarily stores the transferred VDP native display list command and interrupt display list command in the display list FIFO.

The sound source built-in VDP 1540a extracts a VDP native display list command from the display list FIFO, analyzes and executes the extracted VDP native display list command, and writes an image in the frame buffer. Further, the analysis of the display list is interrupted when the interrupt display list command transferred together with the VDP native display list command group is analyzed and executed, and a transfer interrupt request is generated for the external request DMA. After that, an interrupt is generated for the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

When the peripheral control MPU 1511a detects an interrupt from the sound source built-in VDP 1540a, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines in the interrupt processing module that the interrupt factor is an interrupt due to an interrupt display list command, and executes a callback. The callback function refers to the callback information table corresponding to the liquid crystal effect scheduler data to replace the effect or replace the design. The effect replacement method is the same as the description using FIG. 439 and the like described above, and the symbol replacement method is the same as the description using FIG. 439 and the like described above. In the liquid crystal effect scheduler data corresponding callback information table, effect SW corresponding to the number of interrupt display list commands defined in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is defined. The replacement information is confirmed by the callback function, a display list command is created based on the confirmed replacement information, and the display list command is transmitted to the VDP 1540a with a built-in sound source. After that, the peripheral control MPU 1511a transmits a display list analysis restart display list command to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a. The sound source built-in VDP 1540a analyzes the display list command for restarting the display list analysis, issues a transfer restart request to the external request DMA, and restarts the analysis of the display list command.

By processing only the replacement part of the effect using the callback function as described above, the peripheral control RAM 1530c (temporary storage means) can be used without performing any conversion of the VDP native display list related to all effects other than replacement. Instead, it is possible to transfer from the peripheral control ROM 1530b to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a by using the external request DMA (transfer means).

With the above configuration, the VDP native display list command group can be transferred to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a without being stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c. This makes it possible to reduce the load on the peripheral control MPU 1511a that accompanies the display of an image, and speed up the image processing. Further, since the use area of the peripheral control RAM 1530c can be saved, the storage area can be effectively used.

The peripheral control ROM 1530b may store only the frequently used VDP native display list command group and process the less frequently used VDP native display list command group by a conventional procedure. As a result, the processing of the display list command that is frequently used is shortened, so that the overall processing speed can be increased and the increase in the capacity of the peripheral control ROM 1530b can be suppressed. Further, the display list command corresponding to a highly versatile image (moving image) is stored in the peripheral control ROM 1530b, and different images are processed according to the different models and versions by the conventional procedure, thereby improving the development efficiency. Will also be possible.

[30. Alignment adjustment]
A processor (CPU, MPU) used for game control and peripheral control (production control) of a gaming machine can basically handle integer type and floating point type data types. Integer types that can be used in a 32-bit CPU are char (character, character) type, int (integer) type, and long (long integer) type, and each has a size of 1 byte, 2 bytes, and 4 bytes. ..
The floating point type is a float (single precision) type and a double (double precision) type, and has a size of 4 bytes and 8 bytes, respectively.

Whether the processor used for peripheral control of the gaming machine is a CISC processor or a RISC processor, it is possible to read/write the data stored in all addresses in 1-byte units on the memory (ROM, RAM). It has become a machine. The addresses for reading and writing data of a plurality of bytes are not limited to this. When a processor reads multi-byte data, it always reads from a byte boundary, and if it accesses across a byte boundary, an alignment violation occurs. The behavior when an alignment violation occurs depends on the processor.For example, instead of being able to continue processing, execution of the program may be delayed due to multiple memory accesses, or processing may be interrupted due to the occurrence of a runtime exception. To relax.

However, in the development of current game machines, when a program for controlling a game is executed, a data structure composed of a plurality of pieces of information in a memory (ROM, RAM) is created without being aware of alignment. There were many things. Therefore, an alignment violation may occur when the program is executed, and the execution speed of the program may decrease. In the peripheral control of the gaming machine, it is necessary to complete all the processing within a predetermined processing cycle, so that the reduction in the execution speed of the program may be a serious problem. In particular, since the performance of the game machine is configured based on a plurality of elements, it is necessary to collectively manage various information related to each element, and store various information in different types of data types. Data structure is adopted.

In order to solve the above problems, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, in the data structure configured by a plurality of information used for game control, each information is stored when the data corresponding to the data structure is stored in the memory. Explicitly embed empty data between the areas that store or. As a result, by adjusting the access start position of data by the processor and arranging information so that the processor always accesses from the byte boundary address, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of alignment violation and prevent the execution speed of the program from decreasing. You can Adjusting the alignment for all the data structures on the ROM and RAM is an enormous task, so the load on the processor is large and the processing time becomes long. It is desirable to adjust the alignment by the data structure on the ROM or RAM related to the conversion processing, the control processing related to the drawing of the liquid crystal, the lamp control processing, and the like. In addition, there is no problem in adjusting the alignment other than the processing described above.

[31. Configuration to display multiple identification symbols]
By the way, in recent years, various kinds of effects have been required in order to enhance the entertainment of the game, and therefore, the effect contents on the effect display device have become complicated and the drawing contents have become diversified. In the embodiment described so far, it is configured to display only one set of identification symbols for notifying the result of the variable display, and a relatively wide variety of effects are added to the variable display of the one set of identification symbols to play the game. Although it was mainly to proceed, there are player groups who do not like a wide variety of production among the players, and while developing a game machine that meets a wide range of player needs is a challenge, There is a possibility that amusement of the game may be deteriorated in a structure in which various kinds of effects are frequently produced. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a gaming machine that meets a wide range of player needs, a configuration capable of displaying a plurality of sets of identification symbols in a unique manner will be described below. Specifically, in the effect display device 1600, a plurality of display areas for performing variable display of identification symbols are assigned to one or a plurality of display devices (display screens), and any player needs among different player needs. In order to be able to cope with the above, it is supposed that the variable display of different sets of identification symbols is simultaneously advanced. In each display area, it is common in that the result of the variable display is notified according to the identification pattern, but it is displayed in different presentation modes such as the variation mode of the identification pattern.

[31-1. Mode of display area of identification pattern]
FIG. 455 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration having a plurality of display areas for displaying the identification symbols in displaying the plurality of sets of the identification symbols in a variable manner under the control of the peripheral control MPU 1511a in the present embodiment, (A) is a configuration example having the display area A and the display area B of the identification symbol on one display screen in the effect display device 1600, (B) is the identification symbol on each display screen when having two display screens It is a configuration example having a display area A and a display area B.

In the example shown in FIG. 455(A), the display area A and the display area B of the identification symbol are provided on one screen, the display area A is assigned to the upper portion of the screen, and the display area B is assigned to the lower portion of the screen. A first identification symbol 8010 is displayed in the display area A, and a second identification symbol 8020 is displayed in the display area B. In the example shown in FIG. 455(A), the display area A and the display area B are configured as display areas having the same size, and the display area A and the display area B are separated by a wavy boundary extending in the central lateral direction. Has been done. The first identification symbol 8010 is composed of a three-digit symbol including a first left symbol 8010a, a first middle symbol 8010b, and a first right symbol 8010c. Similarly, the second identification symbol 8020 is a three-digit symbol of the second left symbol 8020a, the second middle symbol 8020b, and the second right symbol 8020c in accordance with the first identification symbol 8010 being a three-digit symbol. Composed. The sizes of the display areas A and B are not limited to the same size and may be different sizes.

The first identification symbol 8010 and the second identification symbol 8020 start variable display at the same time and stop at the same time. The stop timing of each individual symbol (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol) of each identification symbol is arbitrary, but the timing at which the stop mode of all identification symbols is finally determined is the same.
In addition, the final stop symbol is a combination of the same stop symbols (lottery result) so that the player does not feel uncomfortable even if the player recognizes any identification symbol. For example, when the winning result is derived as the result of the lottery, the individual identification symbols of the first identification symbol 8010 are all the same symbol combination (for example, “777” etc.), and the second symbol is synchronized with the second symbol. The individual identification symbols of the identification symbol 8020 are all the same symbol combination (eg, "777" equivalent to the first identification symbol 8010). In the case of deriving a reach-out result as a result of the lottery, the individual identification symbols of the first identification symbol 8010 do not form a reach display (the left symbol and the right symbol are the same) a symbol combination (for example, “135”, "224" and the like), and in a form that is synchronized with it, individual identification symbols of the second identification symbol 8020 do not form a reach display (the left symbol and the right symbol are the same). A symbol combination (equivalent to the first identification symbol 8010). "135", "224", etc.). Further, when deriving a reach result as a result of the lottery, when the individual identification symbols of the first identification symbol 8010 constitute a reach display (the left symbol and the right symbol are the same), all the symbols are not the same. A combination (for example, "131", "242", etc.) and a combination of symbols that does not form a reach display (the left symbol and the right symbol are the same) in the individual identification symbols of the second identification symbol 8020 in synchronization with it. "135", "224", etc. equivalent to the first identification pattern 8010).

It should be noted that the first identification symbol 8010 displayed in the display area A and the second identification symbol 8020 displayed in the display area B may be a symbol display mode in which the player can recognize that they are the same symbol combination. , For example, one display area is configured to display a combination of symbols in a symbol display mode (such as "123") composed of "Chinese numerals", while the other display area is composed of "alphanumeric characters" You may make it comprised so that a symbol combination may be displayed in a display mode ("123" etc.). Further, the symbol combination may be displayed in the same type of symbol display mode in both display areas (for example, "123" is displayed in both display areas). In displaying the same type of symbol display mode, the display style (font) may be the same or different. Further, in the present embodiment, the number of digits of the first identification symbol 8010 and the second identification symbol 8020 is set to 3 digits, but if the equivalent symbol combination can be shown to the player as the finally derived symbol combination, The number of digits may be, for example, the number of digits of the first identification symbol 8010 and the second identification symbol 8020 are both two-digit, or the number of digits of the first identification symbol 8010 and the second identification symbol 8020 are both 4 It may be configured with the same number of digits or more. Although details will be described later, in the first identification symbol 8010, the number of digits may be the same as that of the second identification symbol 8020 when the stop mode of the second identification symbol 8020 is finally determined. In the variable display process of the one identification pattern 8010, the number of digits different from the final number of digits may be temporarily changed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, while adopting the same kind of symbol display mode (alphanumeric symbols in this example) in the display areas of both the first identification symbol 8010 and the second identification symbol 8020, The form of the additional decoration display added to each design is different. Specifically, the first identification symbol 8010 is displayed as an additional decoration for each identification symbol, which gives an impact to each identification symbol itself, and a variety of effects are also executed by the additional decoration display ( High decoration dynamic display). On the other hand, the second identification pattern 8020 does not have the additional decoration display like the first identification pattern 8010, or at least has the simpler additional decoration display than the first identification pattern 8010 (low. Decorative dynamic display).

Further, the types of symbols that make up the first identification symbol 8010 and the types of symbols that make up the second identification symbol 8020 do not necessarily have to correspond exactly or exactly one-on-one. For example, the first identification symbol 8010 has a numerical symbol (0 to 9) and a character symbol (for example, a symbol imitating an airplane) as the symbols that are variably displayed in each of the identification symbols according to the effect mode. The second design may be only numerical designs (0-9). Further, in this case, when the first identification symbol 8010 is stopped by the character symbol, the symbol is changed again so that the final stopped symbol is controlled to be a numerical symbol. It is conceivable that the character design may include special game elements different from the numerical design, and while the numerical design is directly connected to the final drawing result, the character design is not the final drawing result but exclusively. It can be positioned as a device used specially for the production in the process of variable display.

In the first identification symbol 8010 displayed in the display area A, various effects are performed until the result display (derivation of the lottery result) of the variable display (symbol variation) (high decorative dynamic display). For example, in the variable display of the identification symbol, the player switches from a high-speed display mode in which it is difficult to recognize the content of the identification symbol to a low-speed display mode in which the player can recognize the content of the identification symbol at a predetermined timing. Specifically, as described above, by executing the callback based on the effect SW for the identification symbol replacement, based on the stop symbol at the switching timing of the identification symbol or the stop timing of the symbol, the identification symbol replacement table And it is decided to replace the identification pattern by using the reel index replacement work number table, finely decorate the identification pattern until just before the stop, and give the player who pays attention to the first identification pattern 8010 to the fun until just before the stop. I am trying.

The first identification symbol 8010 displayed in the display area A can change all or a part of the identification symbol constituting the first identification symbol 8010 depending on the game state, the effect mode, or the type of the variation pattern of the special symbol. Therefore, the first identification symbol 8010 is to be variously changed in the progress of the game depending on the game state, the effect mode, or the type of the variation pattern of the special symbol. Specifically, a plurality of symbol sequence data of the first identification symbol 8010 displayed in the display area A is provided (for example, symbol sequence data of 0-9, symbol sequence data of 0-9, etc.), and a gaming state. At the time of switching or effect mode switching, or when selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol, a symbol row data selection effect SW (for example, a symbol corresponding to the symbol row data of 0 to 9) individually corresponding to these types of symbol row data. By setting the row data selection effect SW1, the symbol row data selection effect SW2) corresponding to the symbol row data of 0 to 9 to ON and setting the other effect SW to OFF, it is used for displaying the first identification symbol 8010. The pattern row data can be changed in various ways, and various productions can be executed.

Further, as described above, in the first identification symbol 8010, the final digit in the variable display process on the assumption that the number of digits is the same as that of the second identification symbol 8020 when finally determined. It may be configured to temporarily change to a digit number different from the number. For example, although it will be 3 digits in the end, it may be a 2 digit display only for a specific period during variable display (for example, a reach agitation period that agitates whether the reach is reached after the left symbol stops). Etc. can be illustrated. This may be executed based on the effect SW defined in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data selected based on the variation pattern or the like. For example, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data selected based on the variation pattern or the like may be used. As the effect SW to be defined, the digit number data selection effect SW corresponding to the digit number data (for example, the digit number data selection effect SW1 corresponding to the 3-digit digit number data, the digit number data corresponding to the 2-digit digit number data When two digits are displayed using the selection effect SW2, etc., various effects can be executed by setting the digit number data selection effect SW2 to ON and the other effect SW to OFF. ..

In the first identification symbol 8010, not only the identification symbol itself is changed to change the display mode, but also the effect using the additional decorative display made into the identification symbol as described above is performed. For example, as shown in FIG. 455(A), by displaying a star-shaped additional decoration 8011 on the left identification pattern 8010a of the first identification pattern 8010, an advantageous lottery result (win or the like) can be obtained in the variable display during execution. You may make it suggest that it is likely to be derived. At this time, the degree of expectation may be notified according to the number and color of the additional decorations 8011 or the type of motion (for example, the number of the additional decorations 8011 is 1 → 3 → 5 The higher the degree of expectation, the higher the degree of expectation of the color of the additional decoration 8011 in the order of white→blue→red, the higher the degree of expectation of the operation of the additional decoration 8011 in the order of static→vibration operation→rotation operation. Or). Further, by displaying the same additional decoration 8011 on the right identification pattern 8010c as well, the player can pay more attention to the effect of the first identification pattern 8010 and more clearly indicate that the degree of expectation has increased. Good. Furthermore, different additional decorations may be applied to each identification symbol to notify the degree of expectation of deriving an advantageous lottery result by any of the first identification symbols 8010.

Further, as another example, effect display control for superimposing a flame effect image (white, blue, red) which is an additional decorative display different from the above-mentioned star-shaped additional decoration 8011 on each of the symbols included in the first identification pattern 8010. You may make it perform and produce the effect which changes the flame color according to an expectation degree (for example, an expectation degree is high in order of white -> blue -> red). In this manner, when a plurality of additional decoration displays for the first identification pattern 8010 are provided, the peripheral control board 1510 performs a lottery or the like as to which of the additional decoration displays is to be displayed based on the result of the lottery failure. It suffices to reflect the determination result and execute it based on the effect SW defined in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data selected based on the variation pattern or the like.

In the display area A, the additional decoration display added to the first identification pattern 8010 is drawn in a layer different from the layer in which the identification pattern is displayed. Accordingly, the display control of the identification pattern can be a common control regardless of the presence and type of the additional decoration display. Also, by drawing the identification pattern and the additional decoration display on different layers, it is possible to specify whether to display the additional decoration display on the front side or the back side of the identification pattern, and set with the liquid crystal effect scheduler data. If this is done, it can be automatically controlled at the time of performance execution. Further, as described above, whether or not to display the additional decoration display is determined at the time of execution based on the effect SW defined in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data selected based on the variation pattern or the like, and the corresponding process is executed. Therefore, it is possible to realize a more effective effect without complicating the effect control.

Further, in the display area A where the first identification symbol 8010 is displayed, the character effect display may be executed independently of the identification symbol. For example, in the reach state in which the left identification symbol 8010a and the right identification symbol 8010c are stopped with the same symbol, the effect of displaying the character according to the degree of expectation (the advantageous lottery result may be derived depending on the type of character, action, etc.) It is also possible to execute a suggested design effect).

Further, the background display of the display area A may be changed in accordance with the degree of expectation of the lottery result in the variable display (a symbol production that suggests that an advantageous lottery result may be derived depending on the type of the background display). Also, instead of changing the background display itself, an effect of changing only the background display color may be executed (for example, the degree of expectation is high in the order of white→blue→red).

As described above, in the display area A, the character effect display and the background display are drawn on a layer different from the layer on which the identification pattern is drawn, so that the front side of the identification pattern is displayed. It is possible to specify whether to display it or to display it on the back side (for example, the front side for character effect display, the back side for background display, etc.). It can be controlled automatically. Thereby, the control for performing the variable display of the identification symbol can be made independent regardless of the aspect of the character effect display, the presence or absence of the background display change, and the type of the background display.

As an effect mode in the other display area A, the operation instruction image of the operation unit is displayed on the front side layer of the first identification symbol 8010, independently of the first identification symbol 8010, and the operation of the operation unit by the player. An operation effect according to the mode is executed (a symbol effect that suggests a possibility that an advantageous lottery result may be derived from the operation corresponding image). For example, when the player presses the effect button after displaying the button operation instruction image, the character is displayed according to the degree of expectation and the operation effect of performing a specific action is executed.

Furthermore, in the display area A, an effect linked with a movable body provided on the game board 5a may be executed (an effect that suggests that an advantageous lottery result may be derived by the movable body operation). For example, by moving the movable body arranged in the upper part of the game area 5a to a position where a part or all of the first identification pattern 8010 is blocked to the sight line of the player, it is suggested that the degree of expectation is high. Good.

Next, the display area B will be described. The second identification pattern 8020 displayed in the display area B receives the variation start command and the variation display of the identification symbol is started, and the variation display of the identification symbol is received after the variation stop command is received or after the variation time elapses. Finish and stop with the specified stop design. While the identification symbol is being variably displayed, the player has a high-speed display mode in which it is difficult to recognize the content of the identification symbol, and a simple presentation mode in which only the stop symbol is displayed after the lapse of the variation time (low Decorative dynamic display).

In the display area B, an additional decorative display made on the first identification pattern 8010, a character effect display for notifying the degree of expectation during variable display of the identification pattern, or performing an operation effect. There is no. Further, unlike the first identification symbol 8010, control for changing the display mode of the second identification symbol 8020 from the high speed display mode to the low speed display mode is not executed.
Further, even when the first identification symbol 8010 makes a temporary stop and changes again, the variable display of the second identification symbol 8020 continues.

Therefore, in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for controlling the display of the second identification symbol 8020, the effect SW for changing the display mode such as the replacement of the symbol is not defined, and it is extremely simple scheduler data. Since the effect control program only sequentially executes the contents defined in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, even with such simple scheduler data, the same effect control as in the case of performing highly decorative dynamic display is executed. The execution of the effect by the effect SW or the like is only skipped.

If the display mode is not changed during the variable display, the mode of the second identification symbol 8020 may be changed. For example, a mode of the second identification symbol 8020 corresponding to the game state or the effect mode may be prepared in advance, and the mode corresponding to the start of the variation may be selected.

As for the background display, the background display for the display area B (background other than the display area A) may be drawn. In this case, you may prepare the background corresponding to a game state and a production mode. In order to simplify the control surface, the background portion of the display area B is made transparent, and the background display of the display area A is enlarged so that the background display common to the display area A is performed. May be.

In this way, the variable display of the second identification symbol 8020 in the display area B is different from the first identification symbol 8010, and after the start of variation, a callback is executed based on the effect SW for the identification symbol replacement, or the additional decoration. It does not mean that various effects such as display are performed, and it is a simple one that specializes in waiting for which symbol combination to stop and display. For this reason, in the display area B, the player does not feel overwhelmed by the type of various effects, etc., and the game progresses with a game nature that hesitantly watches which combination of symbols is stopped and displayed.

In addition, in the display area B, an additional decorative display made on the first identification symbol 8010, a character effect display for notifying the degree of expectation during the variable display of the identification symbol, or an operation effect is executed. Since it is not necessary to do so and only the background display may be set to be transparent, various layer settings such as the first identification pattern 8010 (display area A) are unnecessary.

Further, in the upper left portion of the screen shown in FIG. 455, a fourth symbol 8030 different from the first identification symbol 8010 and the second identification symbol 8020 is displayed. The fourth symbol 8030 indicates that the variation of the special symbol is started and then stopped, and during the variation display of the special symbol, the first identification symbol 8010 and the second identification symbol 8020 are displayed. Among the variable display, the special symbol variation explicit display that indicates that the variation of the special symbol is being displayed is performed, and when the variation of the special symbol is stopped, or when it is stopped, the first identification symbol 8010, while the second identification symbol 8020 is stopped and displayed, a special symbol stop explicit display indicating that the special symbol is stopped is performed. For example, even if the identification symbol is apparently stopped (temporary stop), until the result display of the variable display is completed, the special symbol variation explicit display is performed on the fourth symbol 8030. While the special symbol variation explicit display of the fourth symbol 8030 is being performed, triangular symbols are rotated by 90 degrees at predetermined intervals and displayed as vertical stripes. Further, while the special symbol stop explicit display of the fourth symbol 8030 is being performed, the triangular symbol is displayed in a state of being painted in a predetermined color. The fourth pattern 8030 is drawn in an upper layer independent of the layer for drawing in the display area A or the display area B described above. Further, unlike the first identification symbol 8010 and the second identification symbol 8020, the fourth symbol 8030 in the present embodiment is displayed so that it can be recognized from the outside under all circumstances including a customer waiting state. In the example shown in FIG. 455, the fourth symbol 8030 is provided so as to overlap the display area A, but the invention is not necessarily limited to such a form, and the fourth symbol 8030 is provided so as to overlap the display area B. Alternatively, a display device (lamp device) different from the effect display device 1600 may perform control corresponding to the special symbol variation explicit display of the fourth symbol 8030 and the special symbol stop explicit display.

As described above, the first identification symbol 8010 and the second identification symbol 8020 tell the player what kind of lottery result was obtained, including the circumstances (hit, no reach, no reach, etc.). In contrast to the one that plays the role of transmitting, the 4th symbol is what kind of game situation (whether the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, whether it is in the stop display or in the waiting state for customers) It plays a role of transmitting it to the designer and the game machine manager (or the player). That is, although the first identification symbol 8010 and the second identification symbol 8020 have similar roles, the fourth symbol has a role that cannot be achieved in terms of transmitting the details of the lottery result to the player. There is. Further, as will be described later in detail, the first identification symbol 8010 and the second identification symbol 8020 may be temporarily erased or hidden during the variable display of the special symbol or the customer waiting state. On the other hand, the fourth symbol, in terms of always transmitting the game situation to the player, may be temporarily erased or hidden during the variable display of special symbols or the waiting state for customers. The 1 identification pattern 8010 and the 2nd identification pattern 8020 have a role that cannot be played.

Also, a hold storage display 8040 is drawn at the bottom of the screen shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, the reserved storage display of the first special symbol is drawn in the lower left portion of the screen, and although not shown, the reserved storage display of the second special symbol is drawn in the lower right portion of the screen. Further, in FIG. 455(A), although the hold storage display 8040 overlaps the display area B, there is no problem as long as it does not overlap the identification symbol. As described above, the reserved storage display 8040 is drawn on an independent layer and is arranged on the front side of the layer corresponding to the display area B. Similar to the fourth symbol 8030, it is not necessarily limited to such a form, and the hold storage display 8040 may be replaced with a display device (lamp device) different from the effect display device 1600.

As described above, in this embodiment, a layer is defined for each display area. As a result, it is possible to execute the drawing effect independently for each display area, and the highly decorative dynamic display having a high effect of effect performed in the display area A and the low decorative dynamic display executed in the display area B can be performed. And can be performed in any combination. Since the combination of the high decoration dynamic display and the low decoration dynamic display can be defined by the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, it is not necessary to change the effect control program itself, and the effect configuration can be easily created and changed. ..

Next, with reference to FIG. 455(B), an example in which the display area A and the display area B of the identification symbol are provided on each display screen when the two display screens are provided will be described. In FIG. 455(B), display areas are assigned to physically different display devices, and the display areas A and B are composed of display devices of the same size. In addition, about the structure which has a function in common with the example shown to (A), the same code|symbol is attached|subjected and description is abbreviate|omitted. The sizes of the display area A and the display area B are not limited to the same size and may be different sizes.

In the example shown in FIG. 455(B), a plurality of effect display devices are provided on the game board 5, a display area A is assigned to the main liquid crystal display device, and a display area B is assigned to the sub liquid crystal display device.
In the display area A, the first identification symbol 8010 is displayed, and the fourth symbol 8030 and the reserved storage display 8040 are drawn. On the other hand, in the display area B, the second identification pattern 8020 is displayed.

It should be noted that instead of setting the entire display area of the main liquid crystal display device as the display area A, the area for displaying the fourth symbol 8030 and the hold storage display 8040 may be different from the display area A.
Further, the fourth symbol 8030 and the hold storage display 8040 may be assigned to the display area B.

In the example shown in FIG. 455(B), the first identification symbol 8010 is in the reach state, and the decoration 8011 is drawn on the left identification symbol 8010a and the right identification symbol 8010c. Further, a notice image 8050 that indicates that it is highly possible to derive an advantageous lottery result in the variation is displayed.

Further, the second identification symbol 8020 is in a high-speed display mode for all the identification symbols during the variable display, and the player cannot recognize all the identification symbols. In the display area A, the first identification symbol 8010 is in the reach state, and the notice effect such as the notice image 8050 is displayed, but in the display area B, the above-mentioned effect is not executed and the second identification symbol is executed. The low decoration dynamic display of 8020 is only continued.

[31-2. Display Area Highlighting Mode]
As described above, in the present embodiment, the variable display of the identification symbol is performed in the display areas A and B in different display modes. In the following, while the variable display of the identification symbol displayed in each display area is executed in parallel, a selection operation is performed by the player (a switching operation unit (not shown) is operated) The control for displaying the variable display executed in the display area of 1 above with emphasis on the other display area will be described (emphasis mode, large setting).

FIG. 456 is a diagram for explaining the emphasizing aspect of the display area in which the variable display of the identification symbol is executed in the present embodiment, and (A) shows the display area A and the display area B in a standard manner (specified size). A normal pattern to be displayed, (B) is an emphasis pattern A for displaying the display area A in an emphasis mode, and (C) is an emphasis pattern B for displaying the display area B in an emphasis mode. In the present embodiment, the display area on the non-emphasized side is reduced to a wipe display (small setting, suppression mode), and the display area on the non-emphasized side is also recognizable to the player during the game progress. There is. It should be noted that the switching of the display area to be highlighted can be performed by operating a predetermined switching operation unit (switch button or the like), and even if the special symbol is not variably displayed, the variation of the special symbol It is possible to switch even during display.

The player can sequentially switch between (A) normal pattern, (B) emphasized pattern A, and (C) emphasized pattern B by operating the switching operation unit. As a switching mode, each time the player operates the switching operation unit, (A) normal pattern, (B) emphasized pattern A, and (C) emphasized pattern B may be switched in a predetermined order. However, the player may be allowed to immediately select a desired display pattern. As a configuration that allows the player to immediately select the desired display pattern, for example, the display pattern of the switching destination is set in advance so as to correspond to a plurality of types of operation modes for the switching operation unit by the player, It is configured so that the player can immediately switch to the display mode desired by the operation mode on the switching operation unit. Specifically, the display pattern of the switching destination is set to the normal pattern in response to the first operation (for example, long press for 5 seconds or more) on the switching operation unit, while the second operation for the switching operation unit (for example, less than 2 seconds). The display pattern of the switching destination is set to the emphasized pattern A in response to (short press of), and further, the display of the switching destination is displayed in response to the third operation (for example, long pressing for 2 seconds or more and less than 5 seconds) on the switching operation unit Emphasize pattern Set pattern B. For example, by performing the third operation on the switching operation unit, when the game is proceeding in the emphasis mode (emphasis pattern B) of the display area B shown in FIG. 456(C), the low decoration dynamic display in the large area. The design variation due to will progress. At this time, as shown in FIG. 456(C), in the display area A displayed on the wipe, a display corresponding to the high decoration dynamic display is performed, in which "a rare production" is performed. By performing the second operation on the switching operation unit when the player recognizes that the emphasis pattern A is set, it is possible to immediately change to the emphasized pattern A by the player's intention. As an example of “unusual production”, there is a notice production in which the character design (airplane) is temporarily stopped with the medium identification design 8010b, and when the character design can be confirmed in the display area A displayed on the wipe. By performing the second operation on the switching operation unit, it becomes possible to immediately change to the emphasizing mode of the display area A (emphasized pattern A). It should be noted that when the shift is made to the emphasis pattern A, a character effect or a character action which is not displayed in the reduced area may be performed (FIG. 456(C)→(B)).

Further, even when the display area A as shown in FIG. 456(C) is reduced (wipe) and displayed, the operation effect requiring the player's operation may be executable in the display area A. .. When the display area A is reduced (wipe) and displayed, it is considered that the operation is performed after a stipulated time from the start of the operation effect even if the player does not actually operate the switching operation unit. The operation effect may be automatically advanced in the same manner as when the switching operation unit is operated. On the other hand, in the case where the display area A as shown in FIG. 456(C) is reduced (wipe) and displayed, the effect of driving the accessory corresponding to the display area A, for example, the identification pattern is temporarily The effect of blocking and making visible at a predetermined timing requires a change in the operation mode of the accessory, which complicates the control, and thus suppresses (stops) the execution.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 456(B), when the mode for emphasizing the display area A (emphasized pattern A) is selected, the reduced (wipe) display area B is a low decoration dynamic display and symbol variation. The above-mentioned "unusual production" is not performed. Therefore, when the highlighting pattern A is selected, the background of the display area B is made transparent, or the background of the display area B is combined with the background to execute the effect in the display area A. May be improved. Even when the display area B is wiped and displayed, the visibility of the identification pattern in the display area B needs to be maintained. Therefore, the layer for drawing the identification pattern in the display area B has an image related to the display area A. It is preferable to set the layer higher than the displayed layer.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect sound effect is output corresponding to the variable display of the identification symbol in each display area. Specifically, since the first identification symbol 8010 in the display area A is variably displayed with various effects, an effect sound based on the effect mode, the game state, the variation pattern, etc. is output in accordance with those effects. To be done. Here, the sounds (BGM, effect sound effects) that are output along with the variable display of the identification symbols in the display area A and the effect to be executed are managed as one AUTO group, and sound control by the automatic channel system is performed. As a result, the upper limit of the channels to be used is limited even when the effects in the display area A are duplicated, so that it is possible to suppress the amount of resources consumed by the execution of the effects on the gaming machine. In addition, since it is possible to automatically output a sound with a high priority, it is possible to suppress complication of effect control.

On the other hand, the second identification pattern 8020 in the display area B is variably displayed in the high-speed display mode, and the effect sound to be output is also simple (variable BGM, only stop sound). Therefore, when the display area A and the display area B both have a normal pattern (FIG. 456(A)) that is not reduced (wipe) displayed, the effect sound effect corresponding to the display area B is not output, or By controlling the output sound to be small, the output of the effect sound effect corresponding to the display area B is controlled. When one of the display areas is displayed in the emphasized pattern, only the effect sound effect in the display area displayed in the emphasized pattern is output, and the effect sound effect in the reduced (wipe) display area is displayed. Is output, or the output sound is reduced to control the output of the effect sound effect corresponding to the reduced (wipe) display area.

In the standby state where the variable display of the symbols is not performed (starting memory is not held), one display area is not reduced (wipe) as shown in FIGS. 456(B) and (C). , Each display area is displayed in a normal pattern as shown in FIG. This is because the significance of emphasizing one display area in a state where the variable display of the identification pattern is not performed is small, and the screen for customer display is designed on the premise of full-screen display.

Further, when the power is turned off while the variable display of the special symbol is being performed and then the power is turned on, each identification symbol is displayed in a predetermined mode. For example, the highlighting pattern A for highlighting the display area A may be used, or the normal pattern may be used. At this time, the symbol combination displayed is set to the symbol combination for the initial state (for example, "123") regardless of the result of the immediately preceding change. In addition, when the power is turned off in a state where the symbols are not changed, and then the power is turned on, the wipe pattern is not displayed (the highlighted patterns A and B are not displayed) until the symbols start changing, and the normal pattern is used. Display the identification pattern. This is because, as described above, in the state where the symbols are not displayed in a variable manner, the significance of highlighting one display area is poor.

In the present embodiment, as described above, each display area is composed of different layers. In each display area, the area to be drawn is different depending on whether the drawing is performed in the emphasis mode or the reduced display. Specifically, the size of each layer is the same as the size of the entire display screen, and drawing is performed in the designated display area (for example, display area A). At this time, by converting the coordinate system of the drawing area, it is possible to draw by the common means even if the area size is different. Therefore, in any case, if the drawing content is the same, the display area is displayed in the default size (normal pattern), the display is enlarged (in an emphasized manner), or the display is reduced (wipe). Even if the actual size is different, it can be drawn by common means (program or data).

Therefore, a new object may be drawn only when a specific object (for example, a decoration image) is displayed in a specific display mode (for example, only an emphasis mode). For example, when a decoration image is added to the identification pattern, a layer for drawing the decoration image may be newly prepared and combined with the layer for drawing the identification pattern. At this time, by setting the priority of the layer for drawing the decoration image higher than the priority of the layer for drawing the identification pattern, the decoration image can be arranged on the front side of the identification pattern when each layer is combined. it can.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, common programs and data are used for objects (for example, identification patterns) displayed in the same image regardless of whether they are displayed in an emphasized manner or reduced. On the other hand, when displaying a decorative image overlaid on the identification pattern, prepare a layer with a higher priority than the identification pattern, draw the decorative image on the layer, and place it on the front side of the layer of the identification pattern. By arranging them, the emphasizing mode is drawn. As a result, it is not necessary to separately prepare a program or data for each display mode for an object whose drawing content is common in each display mode, such as an identification pattern, and it is possible to use the common program or data. It suffices to prepare the minimum programs and data that are differences. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in image data due to diversification of effect contents, suppress complication of effect control, and suppress an increase in storage capacity.

[31-3. Screen transition]
Subsequently, a mode of variable display of the identification symbol from the start to the change of the special symbol will be described. FIG. 457 is a diagram illustrating an example of screen transition of a configuration in which the variation display of the identification symbol of the present embodiment is performed in each of the display area A and the display area B. In the display area A, some variation of the identification symbol stops. An example in which the variation of the identification symbol stops in the display area B in conjunction with the case is shown. FIG. 458 is a diagram illustrating an example of a screen transition of a configuration in which the variable display of the identification pattern according to the present embodiment is performed in each of the display area A and the display area B. Regardless of the display mode of the display area A, when the fluctuation stops The example which displays all the stop symbols in the display area B is shown. Each screen shown in FIGS. 457 and 458 is a screen showing the same state, and both are displayed in the normal mode. Each screen will be described below.

(A) shows the state immediately after the variable display of the symbols is finished in the state where the starting memory number is 3. At this time, as described above, the triangular fourth pattern 8030 is stopped and displayed in a filled state. Further, the first identification symbol 8010 displayed in the display area A and the second identification symbol 8020 displayed in the display area 2 are both stopped and displayed with the identification symbol being “125”.

(B) is a state in which the start memory is consumed (start memory number 3→2) and the variable display of symbols is started. The first identification pattern 8010 in the display area A and the second identification pattern 8020 in the display area B are displayed in a high-speed display mode. When the variable display of the symbols is started, the fourth symbol 8030 having a triangular shape is changed from being filled to vertical stripes and is rotated and displayed.

(C) has shown the state where the left identification design 8010a of the 1st identification design 8010 stopped. In FIG. 457(C), when the left identification symbol 8010a of the first identification symbol 8010 is stopped, the left identification symbol 8020a of the second identification symbol 8020 is also stopped and displayed. On the other hand, in FIG. 458(C), even if the left identification symbol 8010a of the first identification symbol 8010 is stopped, the left identification symbol 8020a of the second identification symbol 8020 is continuously displayed in a variable manner. Further, the variable display is stopped after the left identification pattern 8010a of the first identification pattern 8010 changes from the high speed display mode to the low speed display mode. On the other hand, when the left identification pattern 8020a of the second identification pattern 8020 is stopped, the stop display is performed without shifting to the low speed display mode. This is because the variable display of the identification symbol by the display area B is intended to notify the player that the variation is occurring and to clearly display the stop symbol, rather than to enhance the effect.

(D) shows a state in which the right identification symbol 8010c of the first identification symbol 8010 is further stopped from the state of (C). At this time, the left identification symbol 8010a and the right identification symbol 8010c are stopped in the same symbol, and the reach state is reached. In the display area A, the reach effect according to the variation pattern is executed, while in the display area B, the variable display of the second identification symbol 8020 is continued without executing the special effect.

(E) shows a state in which the middle identification symbol 8010b of the first identification symbol 8010 is stopped (temporarily stopped) with the symbol of the character (airplane) in the reach state. Here, the symbol of the airplane is a symbol indicating that the variable display is restarted, and shows execution of so-called pseudo continuous variation. Therefore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 8030 continues even when the middle identification symbol 8010b is stopped, and as shown in FIG. 457(E), the middle identification symbol 8020b of the second identification symbol 8020 is The variable display is continued in the high-speed display mode. When the state where the first identification symbol 8010 is temporarily stopped for a predetermined time is continued, then, as shown in (F), the re-fluctuation of the first identification symbol 8010 and the second identification symbol 8020 is started. In the example shown in FIG. 458, the variable display in the high-speed display mode of the second identification symbol 8020 is continued regardless of the display mode such as the re-variation of the first identification symbol 8010.

(G) shows a state in which the left identification symbol 8010a of the first identification symbol 8010 is stopped after the re-variation of the first identification symbol 8010 is started. At this time, the decoration 8011 is overlaid on the left identification pattern 8010a, and it is informed that there is a high possibility (expected degree) that an advantageous lottery result can be obtained in the variation. In addition, for the second identification symbol 8020, the effect according to the degree of expectation is not particularly executed, and in FIG. 457(G), the left identification of the second identification symbol 8020 is the symbol corresponding to the left identification symbol 8010a of the first identification symbol 8010. The symbol 8020a is stopped, and the variable display in the high-speed display mode is continued in FIG. 458(G).

(H) shows a state in which the right identification symbol 8010c of the first identification symbol 8010 is further stopped from the state of (G). At this time, the left identification symbol 8010a and the right identification symbol 8010c are stopped in the same symbol ("5") to be in the reach state, and the decoration 8011 is also displayed on the right identification symbol 8010c. Thereafter, as shown in (I), the middle identification symbol 8010b also stops at the same symbol ("5") as the left identification symbol 8010a and the right identification symbol 8010c, and when the stop symbol is confirmed, the second identification symbol 8020 is also the first. Stopping at the design corresponding to the identification design 8010, the big hit effect is executed.

When the identification pattern is displayed by the highly decorative dynamic display, it is possible to realize a variety of effects and enhance the interest of the game. On the other hand, when the identification pattern is displayed by the low decoration dynamic display, it is possible to avoid the gorgeous effect and maximize the expectation for the pattern variation. In the present embodiment, a display area A that variably displays the identification pattern in the high decoration dynamic display and a display area B that variably displays the identification pattern in the low decoration dynamic display are provided, and either one of them is selected, or both are provided. By executing the variable display in parallel with the above display mode, the player can play the game in a mode that he or she likes.

Further, since it is possible for the player to freely switch between the high decoration dynamic display and the low decoration dynamic display during the variable display, for example, a display in which an effect of notifying the degree of expectation is executed when a reach occurs By highlighting the area A and highlighting the display area B in other states, a game suitable for the situation can be played.

In the above-described embodiment, the high-decoration dynamic display and the low-decoration dynamic display are executed in parallel, and the game progresses in a manner that can be visually recognized by the player. May be. For example, while the high-decoration dynamic display and the low-decoration dynamic display are executed in parallel, the player can display the display on the other side so that the player can visually recognize only the display on one side desired by the player. It is also possible to provide a movable body or the like (one side concealing means) having a function of concealing so as to make it invisible or difficult to visually recognize, and to hide the display on the other side by such a movable body. For example, the covering position overlapping all or at least a part of the display area A in FIG. 455(A) and the area where the movable body overlaps the display area A more than the covering position are small, and the effect display performed in the display area A is easily visible. To the retracted position (position above the display area A), the covering position overlapping all or at least part of the display area B in FIG. 455A, and the display area more than the covering position. A region in which the movable body overlaps B is small, and a movable lower covering body is provided at a retracted position (a position below the display region B) at which the effect display performed in the display region B can be easily viewed. When the covering condition A for hiding the area A is satisfied (first specific operation of the switching operation unit by the player, etc.), the upper covering movable body is moved to the covering position, and the covering condition B for hiding the display area B is satisfied. By doing so (a second specific operation for the switching operation unit by the player, etc.), it is possible to exemplify that the lower covering movable body is moved to the covering position. As a result, for example, without complicated control such as switching of the effect display, it is possible to concentrate on only the one side display desired by the player and allow the game to proceed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the high decoration dynamic display and the low decoration dynamic display are executed in parallel in the course of the game, but the customer waits for the demonstration by the demonstration display device 1600. It is not necessary to execute the high-decoration dynamic display and the low-decoration dynamic display in parallel during the period in which the program is performed. The decorative dynamic display may be deleted. For example, as shown in FIG. 456(A) of the above-described embodiment, the game progress in the normal pattern of displaying the display area A and the display area B in a standard manner (specified size) is finished, and after a predetermined time, the customer waits. For example, when transitioning to the state, the display area B may be erased with the display area A left, or the display area B may be erased to enlarge the display area A to a large area. It should be noted that when a new starting condition is satisfied in the customer waiting state, the display in the display area B, which is the low decoration dynamic display, may be restored.

[32. Applying production blocks to production that continues over multiple fluctuations]
Next, an example of applying an effect block to an effect that continues over a plurality of fluctuations will be described. In the above-described example, the period from the start of variation of the symbol to the stop is divided into predetermined periods, and the effect blocks corresponding to the respective periods are defined. Then, by combining these effect blocks, it is possible to suppress the complication of effect control while realizing various effects. Also, although an example was explained in which it was possible to define an effect block that exceeds a predefined period, it is limited to effect blocks that fit within one fluctuation, and for effects executed over multiple fluctuations. It was insufficient to apply the effect block.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, an example in which an effect block is applied to a series of effects executed over a plurality of fluctuations will be described. This is a series of performances that are executed over a plurality of variations. A timer effect and a background effect that are executed as a pre-reading effect (preliminary notification effect) at the time of winning a start, and a mini character effect that is executed when switching the effect mode and continues until a predetermined condition is satisfied. Will be described.

[32-1. Control of prefetch effect (preliminary notification effect)]
Before explaining the timer effect and the background effect that are executed as the pre-reading effect at the time of winning the start prize, the control of the pre-reading effect will be supplementarily described.

When a game ball is won in the starting winning opening, the main control board 1310 executes the first starting opening passing process (FIG. 135) or the second starting opening passing process (FIG. 136) according to the starting winning opening and starts the operation. A random number value is extracted (acquired) for storage (steps S5241, S5251). Then, in the first special diagram prefetch process (S5245) or the second special diagram prefetch process (S5255), based on the extracted random number value or the lottery result based on the random number value, special symbol 1 storage prefetch effect command or special symbol (2) A memory pre-reading effect command (see FIG. 90, hereinafter “special figure pre-reading effect command”) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510.

When the special control pre-reading effect command is received, the peripheral control board 1510 determines whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect based on the received command. The command from the main control board 1310 is stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process (FIG. 98). Then, the received command is analyzed by the received command analysis process (S1022) of the peripheral controller steady process in the peripheral controller power-on process (FIG. 95).

When the special figure prefetching effect command is received, the peripheral control board 1510 executes the prefetching effect control process in the received command analysis process. In the prefetch effect control process, a process for executing the normal prefetch effect for changing the start memory display and a process for executing the timer effect and the background effect described above are executed. In the prefetch effect control process, a flag indicating that the prefetch effect command has been received is set in the received command analysis process, and the prefetch effect control process may be called by the peripheral control unit steady process in the peripheral control unit power-on process (FIG. 95). Good.

In the process for executing the normal look-ahead effect for changing the start memory display, the drawing is selected based on the special figure pre-read effect command, and the changed start memory display mode is selected based on the lottery result. At this time, the mode of the start memory display may be changed only when shifting to the reach state in the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the special figure prefetching effect command. The mode of the start memory display is changed, for example, in color or shape. Then, the normal prefetching effect setting process for changing the mode of the starting memory display is executed. In the normal look-ahead effect setting process, the setting for changing the display color of the start memory display is performed, and the setting for outputting the sound effect, turning on the lamp, and moving the accessory is also performed in addition to the setting. .. The process for executing the timer effect and the background effect will be described later.

[32-2. Timer production]
The timer effect is a pre-indication effect that indicates by a countdown display that the execution time of the suggestion effect indicating the lottery result or the possibility of winning for a specific starting memory is approaching. There are roughly two types of timer effects, which are controlled as one of the above-mentioned look-ahead effects, and the variable display for the specific starting memory is started before the variable display for the specific starting memory is started. The timer effect over a plurality of fluctuations (hereinafter referred to as the prefetch timer effect) that counts down the period up to the predetermined timing and is controlled on the basis of the fluctuation pattern unlike the prefetch effect described above. A timer effect that does not span a plurality of fluctuations (hereinafter referred to as "intra-variation timer effect") that counts down a period from a predetermined timing after the fluctuation display is started to another timing of the fluctuation display for this specific start memory, and ,have. That is, both the prefetch timer effect and the within-variation timer effect are pre-notification effects in which the symbol variation for the specific starting memory is not completed, and a countdown display is performed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600, and the count display is 0. However, the prefetch timer effect is different from the intra-variation timer effect in that the countdown display is performed on the display screen over a plurality of symbol variations, though it is common in that a predetermined effect is performed. In addition, various values may be set as the initial value of the countdown display performed in the look-ahead timer effect and the intra-variation timer effect, but from the point of crossing multiple fluctuations, the average value of the initial values used in the look-ahead timer effect is This is a value relatively larger than the average value of the initial values used in the within-variation timer effect. In this embodiment, since the prefetch timer effect includes characteristic elements, the prefetch timer effect will be described in detail below.

In the process for executing the prefetch timer effect, first, it is determined whether to execute the prefetch timer effect. Since the prefetch timer effect is a prefetch effect that can be executed over a plurality of fluctuations as described above, it is sufficient to execute the prefetch timer effect before the variable display corresponding to the received special map prefetch effect command is started. It is determined whether a sufficient time is secured.
That is, it is determined whether or not the total of the fluctuation times of all the starting memories held until the fluctuation starts is a specific time or longer (40 seconds or longer in this embodiment). Further, based on the winning/losing of the starting memory of the effect execution target and the variation pattern of the starting memory, the effect of determining whether or not the prefetch timer effect can be executed is determined. In addition, the execution timing (start timing) of the prefetch timer effect is also determined when determining the effect content. As the execution timing (start timing) of the prefetching timer effect, for example, at the start of fluctuation corresponding to the starting memory stored before the starting memory of the prefetching effect target, or before the starting memory of the prefetching effect target. Either the start time of the reach of the change corresponding to the stored start memory, the end time of the change corresponding to the start memory stored before the start memory of the prefetch effect, or the like is set.

The prefetch timer effect is composed of a timer counting effect that displays a countdown and a timer end effect that is executed when the time is up. The timer counting effect and the timer end effect are continuously executed. Also, the execution time of the timer counting effect, that is, the execution timing of the timer ending effect, is different depending on the length of the timer counting effect, but it is changing with respect to the starting memory that is the prefetch target, before the reach occurrence and after the reach occurrence. And so on.

When the execution of the prefetch timer effect is determined, first, the execution time of the timer counting effect is determined. The execution time of the timer counting effect is determined based on the time from the start winning to the start of the variation corresponding to the start memory of the prefetch effect object. For example, in the present embodiment, 10 seconds is added to the total variation time of the starting memory that is held before the starting memory of the prefetching effect target, and is set as the execution timing (start timing) of the prefetching timer effect. The predetermined time calculated by subtracting the time based on the time is set as the execution time of the timer counting effect (the initial value of the countdown display). Furthermore, the contents of the effect (counting down effect pattern) executed as the timer counting effect are set. As the production pattern during the countdown, for example, pattern 1 in which the light emission mode of a specific lamp provided on the game board 5 is gradually changed to high-speed flashing as the countdown display progresses, or a specific pattern provided on the game board 5 A pattern 2 for changing the color of light emitted from the lamp as the countdown display progresses, a pattern 3 for operating a specific movable body provided on the game board 5 as the countdown display progresses, and the like, these patterns 1 to 3 are preread. Corresponding to the degree of expectation of variation in the performance target, it is set by lottery. For example, it is set such that the probability of winning increases in the order of pattern 1 → pattern 2 → pattern 3, pattern 1 is more likely to be selected than the case of winning, and pattern 2 is different from the case of winning. Both of the cases are selected at the same rate, and the pattern 3 is more easily selected in the case of hitting than in the case of falling.

After setting the contents of the effect to be executed as the timer counting effect (production pattern during countdown), the contents of the timer ending effect (post-countdown effect pattern) are set. In the timer end effect, for example, in the form of superimposing the character “End!!” on the identification pattern in a color according to the degree of expectation on the display screen (for example, the degree of expectation increases in the order of black→blue→red). It is displayed for a predetermined time, and the player is sure to recognize that the time is up. As the post-countdown effect pattern, for example, a pattern 1 in which the character color of "end!!" is black, a pattern 2 in which the character color of "end!!" is blue, and a character color of "end!!" The pattern 3 which is red and the like can be exemplified. These patterns 1 to 3 correspond to the degree of expectation of variation in the prefetch effect and are set by lottery. For example, it is set so that the hit expectancy increases in the order of pattern 1 → pattern 2 → pattern 3, and pattern 1 is more likely to be selected than the case of hit, and pattern 2 is different from the case of hit. Both of the cases are selected at the same rate, and the pattern 3 is more likely to be selected in the hitting case than in the falling case. The post-countdown effect pattern is not limited to this, and not only the character color but also characters may be decorated or characters may be displayed. You may correspond to different expectations.

As described above, after performing various settings related to the prefetch timer effect, the prefetch timer effect is executed (started) based on the satisfaction of a predetermined start condition (the arrival of the start time of the prefetch timer effect). As described above, the prefetch timer effect is configured by the timer counting effect and the timer ending effect, and the effect blocks corresponding to the timer counting effect and the timer ending effect are individually defined. These effect blocks are defined in advance, and when the execution of the prefetch timer effect is determined, the effect block of the timer counting effect and the effect block of the timer end effect are selected based on the execution time of the timer counting effect and the degree of expectation. The effect block of the timer counting effect and the effect block of the timer ending effect may be individually selected, or the effect block of the timer counting effect and the effect block of the timer ending effect are managed as a set and selected for each set. You can When the production block of the timer counting production and the production block of the timer ending production are selected, the production block of the timer counting production is executed, and after the production block is finished, the production block of the timer ending production is executed.

Further, in the effect block of the timer counting effect, only the effect contents are defined and the execution time can be variably set. As a result, it is not necessary to redundantly hold the effect blocks of the same content that differ only in execution time, and it is possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity due to diversification of effect contents. The look-ahead timer effect is not an effect in which the execution timing and the end timing are strictly determined like the effect block corresponding to the variation time described above, but is based on the execution time calculated based on various conditions as described above. Therefore, it is possible to flexibly respond to the calculated execution time of the effect. Specifically, the calculated execution time of the effect may be stored in a predetermined storage area, and the execution time of the effect stored in the predetermined storage area may be read when the effect block of the timer counting effect is started.

When the execution time of the timer counting effect can be covered, an effect block may be prepared in advance so as to cover the execution time of the timer counting effect. Since the execution time of the timer counting effect may be within a predetermined range, it may be possible to limit it to a realistic number of effect blocks even if all patterns are covered based on the number of holdings and the changing pattern (changing time). is there. For example, if the execution timing (start timing) of the prefetch timer effect is one pattern, the time from the start winning to the start of the change of the prefetch effect is set as the lower limit, and the change time of the change is added to this time, Furthermore, by setting the time obtained by subtracting the execution time of the timer end effect as the upper limit, the range of the execution time of the timer counting effect can be specified. Since it is sufficient that there is at least one effect block having the execution time included in this range, there is a possibility that a minimum number of effect blocks may be prepared. Alternatively, only the effect blocks with high execution frequency may be prepared in advance, and the effect blocks with low execution frequency may be set as effect blocks whose variable time can be variably set, and the number of effect blocks to be managed may be suppressed.

FIG. 459 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the effect block of the prefetch timer effect of the present embodiment. FIG. 460 is a diagram showing an execution example of the prefetch timer effect of the present embodiment. The execution example of the prefetch timer effect shown in FIG. 460 corresponds to FIG. 459.

459 and 460 show an example in which the prefetch timer effect is executed over the variation 1 and the variation 2. In variation 1, the first-half variation is "normal variation" and no reach, and in variation 2, the first-half variation is "normal variation", which is a big hit after the reach occurs. Note that the case where the effect is executed within each variation is as described above, and thus the description thereof is omitted here.

As shown in FIG. 460(A), when variation 1 is started, variation display of all identification symbols is started (time t0). At this time, the number of pending design variations is zero. The variation 1 is a normal variation in which reach is not generated, as described above.

Further, the variable display of the symbols is continued, and the variable display of the left symbols is stopped at a predetermined timing. After that, a start winning is generated, and the number of symbols to be reserved is 1. Whether or not to execute the prefetch timer effect is determined at the time of starting winning, the execution of the prefetch timer effect is determined here, and the timer counting effect block and the timer end effect block are selected. At this time, as shown in FIG. 460(B), only the left symbol is stopped and the other symbols are being variably displayed, and the timer display section is arranged at the lower right part of the screen (time t1). Note that in FIG. 460(B), "START" indicating the start of the timer effect is displayed instead of the remaining time of the prefetch timer effect.

Then, as shown in FIG. 460(C), the variation 1 ends, and the stop symbols of all the identification symbols are fixed (time t2). At this time, the timer counting effect is continuing, and the remaining time of the prefetch timer effect (timer counting effect) is displayed on the timer display section.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 460(D), the variation 2 to be read ahead is started, and the remaining time displayed on the timer display unit is continuously updated. Then, as shown in FIG. 460(E), when the execution of the timer counting effect is finished, the remaining time "0.00" is displayed on the timer display portion, the timer end effect block is executed, and the timer end effect is started. (Time t3). At this time, as the timer end effect, a message "End!!" indicating the end of the timer effect is displayed on the screen, or a notice image such as a character is displayed. As described above, the character color of the message displayed here is set according to the degree of expectation of the variation. Further, the content of the message may be set according to the degree of expectation of the fluctuation.

Then, as shown in FIG. 460(F), in the state where the timer end effect is continuing, the reach is generated by stopping at the same symbol “5” of the left symbol and the right symbol. Further, as shown in FIG. 460(G), the variation of the middle symbol is stopped after the timer end effect is finished, and all the symbols are fixed. Then, as shown in FIG. 460(H), the jackpot state is entered.

In the example shown in FIGS. 459 and 460, the timer end effect is executed before the reach occurrence, but the timer end effect may be executed after the reach occurrence. At this time, since the reach effect and the timer end effect are overlapped and executed, the content of the timer end effect may be determined based on the content of the reach effect of the variation. As a result, it is possible to prevent the effect from being reduced due to the effects being performed redundantly.

As described above, an effect executed over a plurality of fluctuations can be defined by the effect block, and the operation of the common block can be performed more flexibly. By defining the effect that is executed as the pre-reading effect at the time of winning a start such as the pre-reading timer effect by defining it as the common block described above, it becomes possible to standardize and simplify the effect control, and to develop the gaming machine efficiently. Can be converted.

In addition, the control of the effect block that spans a plurality of fluctuations is performed by a callback function using the effect SW as in the case of other common blocks. As a result, it is possible to move the accessory and output sound according to the progress of the prefetch timer effect, and it is possible to realize various effects.

[32-3. Background production]
Next, similar to the prefetch timer effect, the background effect, which is the advance notification effect that suggests the lottery result for the starting memory in which the symbol variation is not completed, will be described. As an outline of the background effect, the background of the display screen is changed over a plurality of symbol variations, and the background effect is finished at a predetermined timing during the change of the prefetch target. In this embodiment, the background is restored when the reach is developed during the change of the prefetch target.

FIG. 461 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the effect block of the background effect of the present embodiment. FIG. 462 is a diagram showing an execution example of the background effect of the present embodiment. The execution example of the background effect shown in FIG. 462 corresponds to FIG. 461.

FIG. 461 and FIG. 462 show an example in which the background effect is executed over variation 1, variation 2, and variation 3. Variation 1 and variation 2 develop into reach with the first half variation being "normal variation" and no reach, and variation 3 develops into reach with the first half variation being "normal variation". The description of the latter half of the fluctuation 3 is omitted. Note that, similar to the prefetch timer effect, the case where the effect is executed within each change is as described above, and thus the description thereof is omitted here.

As shown in FIG. 462(A), when variation 1 is started, variation display of all identification symbols is started (time t0). At this time, the number of symbols to be reserved is one. As described above, the fluctuation 1 is a normal fluctuation in which reach is not generated. After that, the variable display of the symbols is continued, and the left symbols are stopped. Then, at time t1, a start winning is generated, and the number of symbols to be reserved becomes 2. Here, the execution of the background effect is determined at the time of winning the start prize, and the background effect block is selected. At this time, as shown in FIG. 462(B), the background is changed from “mountain” to “sea”.

After that, as shown in FIG. 462(C), the fluctuation 1 ends, and the stop symbol is fixed (time t2). Further, as shown in FIG. 462(D), the variation 2 is started and the variation display of the identification symbol is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 462(E), the fluctuation 2 ends, and the stop symbol is confirmed (time t3). During this period, the background changed by the execution of the background effect is continuously displayed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 462(F), the variation 3 to be prefetched is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 462(G), with the development of reach in the symbol variation, the background effect ends, and the background of “sea” returns to the background of “mountain” (time t4).

Similar to the timer effect, the effect block for executing the background effect is selected and executed when the pre-reading target start winning occurs. The timing to end is the timing at which the variation that becomes the prefetch target develops to reach, that is, the remaining time of the variation that is being executed at the time of starting winning, the total variation time of the variation that is executed before the variation of the prefetch target and the prefetch It is also possible to calculate and set the total value of the first half fluctuation time of the target fluctuation. Further, the execution time may not be set in the effect block for executing the background effect, and the background effect may be continuously executed until the end condition is satisfied. The end condition in this case is to detect that the reach state is developed in the change of the prefetch target. The end condition is determined by a callback, and when the end condition is satisfied, a process for ending the background effect is called.

As described above, in the background effect according to the present embodiment, the background display is continuously changed from the start of the background effect until the reach develops in the change subject to the prefetch effect. The player recognizes that the degree of expectation of the fluctuation is high due to the background returning to the original level when the reach is developed, and the degree of attention to the latter half fluctuation is increased.

On the other hand, if the reach occurs in the change before the start of the change that is the target of the look-ahead effect, the background is temporarily restored when the reach occurs, and after the change ends, the background display is switched and the background is changed. Resume production. As a result, even if the player becomes discouraged after the occurrence of the reach and the player is discouraged, the expectation can be heightened again, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[32-4. Mini character production]
Next, the mini character effect that is started when the effect mode is switched will be described. The mini character effect is an effect in which a character (mini character) corresponding to the effect mode appears.
Since the mini-character displayed at this time is displayed only during the symbol change, the mini-character is hidden when the symbol change ends in the state where the number of held changes is 0. The hidden mini-chara may be displayed again when a predetermined condition is satisfied. In addition, the mini-character is continuously displayed over a plurality of fluctuations until it shifts to the customer waiting state. The mini character effect will be described below with reference to FIG. 463.

FIG. 463 is a diagram showing an example of the mini character effect of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 463(A), the game is continued in the "mountain" mode. In this state, as shown in FIG. 463(B), when the "mountain" mode is changed to the "sea" mode, a mini character "whale" is displayed in the left center of the screen. To change the mode, the mode is switched by operating an operation unit (effect button) (not shown).

Then, as shown in FIG. 463(C) and FIG. 463(D), the suspended symbol variation is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 463(E), when all of the pending symbol variations are completed, the customer wait state is entered, and the displayed mini-character is hidden.

Since the execution condition of the mini-character production is that the symbol variation is continuing, the mini-character production is continued if the symbol variation is in progress even if there is no suspended variation. The execution condition of the mini character effect may be, for example, a case where a start winning occurs after the customer waiting state continues for a predetermined period, other than when the mode is changed. By controlling in this way, a mini character appears even when the mode is changed, and the player can be surprised and entertaining. Moreover, you may add a game state to a determination condition as an execution condition of a mini character production. For example, in a game state in which the probability state is not clearly notified, if the probability state is a high probability state, it is possible to suggest the current game state to the player by making it easier for mini-characters to appear.

Further, the termination condition of the mini-character production may be, for example, a case where the display of the mini-character continues for a predetermined time, other than the case of shifting to the customer waiting state. With such a configuration, it is possible to give a feeling of premier to the appearance of the mini character.

The mini-character production is defined by a production block, and during execution of the mini-character production, a termination condition for the mini-character production is determined by a callback, and when the termination condition is satisfied, the mini-character production is finished. With such a configuration, it is not necessary to preset the duration of the mini character production, and it is possible to flexibly determine whether or not to continue the mini character production depending on conditions such as transition to a customer waiting state and a game state. In this way, since the termination condition of the mini-character production can be dynamically determined by the callback, it is not necessary to individually define the production block corresponding to the execution time of the mini-character production, and the production block is defined for each character. Management can be facilitated.

It should be noted that the effect blocks for effects such as the look-ahead timer effect, the background effect, and the mini character effect described above that may span multiple variations may be set in duplicate, in which case the look-ahead timer effect, the background effect, and the mini character effect are duplicated. Will be executed. In addition, a plurality of effect blocks for effects that may span a plurality of variations may be made to overlap at different timings. In that case, different starting memories to be prefetched in the prefetch timer effect and the background effect may be used, or the same start memory may be used. Even in this case, the start timing of each effect can be different. As a result, it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation for the subsequent fluctuation even after the end of one effect, and further increase the sense of expectation for the fluctuation when the same starting memory is the target of prefetching. be able to.

Further, in the case of outputting the effect sound effect by applying the automatic channel method in the effect over a plurality of fluctuations, it is different from the effect sound effect output in the effect executed in one fluctuation (for example, reach effect). You may make it allocate an AUTO group. For example, by making the effect sound of the effect executed by one change into an AUTO group that can be assigned to more channels, the output of the effect sound of the change can be prioritized, while the number of channels is reduced. Sound effect of effects over a plurality of fluctuations in the AUTO group (for example, the sound of "start!" which is the start sound of the pre-reading timer effect, the counting sound (such as a ticking sound) which is the sound during the countdown, and the timer end effect sound). It is possible to prevent a large number of channels from being occupied for a long period of time by allocating the “end!

Further, different AUTO groups may be set for each type of effect over a plurality of fluctuations. For example, an AUTO group composed of 2 channels for the prefetch timer effect and an AUTO group composed of 2 channels for the mini character effect are defined. As a result, even when the prefetch timer effect and the mini character effect are executed in parallel, the effect sound effect of each effect can be output without being disturbed. The effect sound effect in the background effect is a sound that is constantly output during continuation of the effect like BGM, or is only output when the background is switched. Therefore, an AUTO group for background effect is not set and the effect sound is used for BGM. Channel (AUTO group) may be used instead.

Control of output of effect sound, effect of movable accessory, lighting of lamps, etc. in multiple effects such as pre-reading timer effect, background effect, and mini character effect can be executed in accordance with liquid crystal display by effect SW. Is. In particular, if the end timing of the effect cannot be specified at the start of the effect, it is difficult to control the effect device at the timing preset by the sub effect block data, so the effect device works in cooperation with the liquid crystal display by the effect SW. It is possible to realize an effect with a sense of unity by controlling. Further, when outputting the effect sound of the effect whose end timing of the effect is not specified at the start of the effect, the sub effect block data for outputting the corresponding effect effect sound is repeatedly executed during the effect continuation, and at the time of the effect end. The execution of the sub effect block data may be stopped.

On the other hand, when it is possible to specify the end timing of the effect at the start of the effect like the pre-reading timer effect, the liquid crystal effect block data for effecting the display effect and the sub effect block data for effecting the sound or the accessory are parallel to each other. It is possible to execute it. As a result, it is possible to independently define the display effect and the effect by the sound or the accessory, and the effect can be configured by freely combining various effect block data. For example, a plurality of types of liquid crystal effect block data that defines the display mode of the timer in the timer counting effect and sub effect block data that defines the notification sound that is output when the timer counting effect is executed are prepared and freely combined. It is possible to diversify the production variation.

[33. Configuration 2 for displaying a plurality of identification symbols]
By the way, in recent game machines, various kinds of effects are executed in the effect display device 1600 to enhance the interest of the game, but in order to make the player visually recognize the variable display of the identification symbols, the identification symbols are displayed. There is a possibility that the effect area may be narrowed by the area that is set. In order to prevent this, the area for displaying the identification pattern is temporarily reduced. However, continuing the variable display while changing the display area of the identification pattern may complicate the control or increase the load on the control. Further, it is necessary to suppress the interest of the game by making the mode for reducing or enlarging the identification pattern suitable for the contents of the effect.

Therefore, the effect display device 1600 is provided with a plurality of display areas for performing the variable display of the identification symbols, and is configured to simultaneously advance the variable display of the plurality of sets of identification symbols. The configuration of displaying a plurality of sets of identification symbols in different modes (high decoration dynamic display, low decoration dynamic display) to meet the needs of the player has been described with reference to FIG. 455 and the like, but will be described below. In the embodiment, the variation display of the identification symbol is configured to be visible to the player in at least one of the display areas during the symbol variation. At this time, the decoration pattern of the identification pattern in each display area may be the same or different.

[33-1. An example of a configuration in which identification patterns are simultaneously displayed in multiple areas]
FIG. 464A is a diagram showing an example in which the identification symbols are variably displayed in the plurality of display areas according to the present embodiment. The display area A occupies about 70% from the upper part of the entire display area in the effect display device 1600. The display area B occupies a lower right area when viewed from the front of the entire display area. Further, the hold display is arranged at the lower left part of the screen. Further, in the present embodiment, the fourth symbol is not displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, but is displayed by a light emitting body such as an LED or a lamp not shown.

In the example shown in FIG. 464A, first, as shown in (A), the starting memory is consumed and the variable display of the identification symbol is started. At this time, the variable display of the first identification symbol is started in the display area A (first display area), and the variable display of the second identification symbol is started in the display area B (second display area).
In the present embodiment, the first identification symbol displayed in the display area A and the second identification symbol displayed in the display area B are displayed in substantially the same manner, but the first identification symbol displayed in the display area A. The second identification symbol displayed in the display area B may be any symbol display mode that allows the player to recognize that the symbol combination is the same.

Further, the first identification symbol and the second identification symbol are simultaneously displayed in a variable display and stopped at the same time, and the timings at which the stop modes of all the identification symbols are finally determined are the same. In the present embodiment, the stop timing of the individual symbols (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol) of each identification symbol is also the same, but if the decision timing of the symbols is the same, the stop timing of each symbol is arbitrary. Good.

In addition, the layers of the screen shown in FIG. 464A include a background layer, a symbol layer (first identification symbol), a symbol layer (second identification symbol), a notice layer, and the like. In the present embodiment, since the first identification symbol and the second identification symbol are displayed in the same manner, it is possible to change the coordinates and size for displaying the identification symbol and use other drawing information. As a result, the drawing data can be shared, and the data capacity can be reduced. Further, it becomes possible to share the drawing processing, and it is possible to prevent the program structure from becoming complicated.

Similar to the example described above, various effects are performed on the first identification symbol until the result display (derivation of the lottery result) of the variable display (symbol variation, dynamic display). For example, when switching the identification design from the high-speed display form to the low-speed display form, the identification design is replaced by executing a callback based on the effect SW for the identification design replacement, and the identification design can be decorated until just before the stop. it can. Further, in the present embodiment, the second identification symbol is also variably displayed in the same effect mode as the first identification symbol, but it is also possible to change the effect contents in conformity with the display area. Further, the display mode of the second identification symbol may be changed based on the effect SW defined in the first identification symbol. Thereby, the variable display of the first identification symbol and the variable display of the second identification symbol can be smoothly linked.

In this embodiment, when the variable display of the symbols is started, the left identification symbol, the right identification symbol, and the middle identification symbol are stopped in this order. FIG. 464A(B) shows a state in which the left identification symbols of the first identification symbol and the second identification symbol are stopped. At this time, the notice character in the shape of an airplane is displayed on the upper right side of the display area, and the notice character in the shape of a tree is displayed at the bottom of the display area. Note that the respective notice characters are drawn on different layers, and the images can be individually changed or deleted. As a result, it is possible to independently execute a plurality of notice effects according to the degree of expectation of variable display.

The airplane character displayed as the notice effect is displayed while being enlarged by executing an effect in which the character of the airplane is visually recognized so as to approach the front of the screen according to the degree of expectation of the big hit. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 464A(B), the character of the airplane is displayed in the reduced size in the upper left portion of the display area, and is gradually enlarged as the variable display progresses. FIG. 464A(C) is a state in which the variable display of the right identification symbol is stopped and reach is generated. The character of the airplane has moved to the upper center and is displayed larger than the character shown in FIG. 464A(B). Then, as shown in FIG. 464A(D), in the reach state, the notice effect in which the additional decorative display is displayed on the first identification symbol is executed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 464A(E), the display of the character of the airplane is further enlarged and displayed on the front side of the first identification symbol. At this time, the middle identification pattern of the first identification pattern is hidden by the character of the airplane, and then the character of the airplane further expands, and as shown in FIG. 464A(F), the display of the first identification pattern is interrupted. To be done. At this time, the variable display of the first identification symbol may be continuously displayed on the back side of the enlarged character of the airplane without being stopped.

After that, as shown in FIG. 464A(G), the variable display of the identification symbol ends, and the confirmation display is obtained. Further, as shown in FIG. 464A(H), the result of the variable display is a big hit, and the big hit game state is entered.

Subsequently, the second identification symbol will be further described. As shown in FIGS. 464A(A) and 464A(B), the variable display of the second identification symbol is executed similarly to the first identification symbol. Further, as shown in FIG. 464A(C), the left identification symbol and the right identification symbol are stopped at the same identification symbol “5”, and when the reach occurs, as shown in FIG. 464A(D), the first identification symbol. Similarly to the above, additional decoration display is also performed on the second identification pattern.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 464A(E) and 464A(F), even if the player cannot see the first identification symbol due to the notice effect in the variation display after the reach occurs, the variation display of the second identification symbol About is visible to the player.

In the present embodiment, at least one of the first identification symbol and the second identification symbol is configured to be visible to the player during the variable display of the identification symbol. Therefore, even in a state where the first identification symbol or the second identification symbol cannot be visually recognized, an additional decorative display is made to the second identification symbol in the same manner as the first identification symbol, so that the decoration aspect of the identification symbol changes. A player can be surely notified of the expectation of a big hit.

Further, the additional decoration of the first identification pattern and the additional decoration of the second identification pattern may be different. For example, the number of stars of the additional decoration is 5 and the display area is narrow in the first identification pattern having a wide display area. The maximum number of additional decoration stars may be set to 3 in the second identification pattern so that the player can easily recognize it. It is also possible for the player to judge that a high-anticipation notice image such that the first identification symbol is hidden is displayed in the state where only the second identification symbol is displayed, and also the second identification. In the case where there is no additional decoration of the design, even if the notice image in which the first identification design is hidden is displayed, it may be determined to be a so-called gasse effect with low expectation.

For the first identification symbol and the second identification symbol, common image data may be used, and each layer may be drawn in a layer corresponding to each display area, and the additional decoration may be set for each display area. In this way, the identification pattern is variably displayed in a plurality of areas, and a part of the image data necessary for the variably display is shared, thereby saving the capacity for storing the image data and achieving a variety of effects. You can

Further, not only the image data but also the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for variably displaying the identification symbol in each display area may be made common. For example, the display position (coordinates) of the identification pattern, layer-related information, etc. can be parameterized and processed in a common procedure to improve the development efficiency of production-related programs and flexibly respond to changes in production specifications. Is possible. Further, whether or not to display the additional decoration is determined only at the time of execution based on the effect SW defined in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data selected based on the variation pattern, and the corresponding processing is executed. A more highly effective effect can be realized without complicating the effect control.

In the example shown in FIG. 464A, the notice image (character) is displayed on the front side of the identification symbol so that the visual recognition of the identification symbol is hindered. The same is true even when the visual display of the variable display of the identification symbol is hindered by the operation of the accessory. For example, the movable region of the accessory may be set so that the display region B becomes visible even when the accessory moves to the front side of the display region and becomes difficult to view except the lower part of the screen.

As described above, in the present embodiment, there is a period in which it becomes difficult to visually recognize the first identification symbol due to the notice effect and only the second identification symbol can be visually recognized by the player. Therefore, a callback is executed based on the identification design replacement effect SW of the second identification design, and the identification design replacement table and the reel index replacement work number based on the stop design or the design stop timing at the identification design switching timing. By using the table, not only the second identification symbol but also the first identification symbol is replaced, so that the identification symbol is decorated until just before the stop. As a result, the decoration for the first identification symbol and the decoration for the second identification symbol can be executed at the same timing or at the interlocking timing, the effect of the effect can be increased, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Further, the display area B for displaying the second identification symbol may not be fixed. The arrangement of the display area B may be changed according to the type of notice effect, and the position for displaying the second identification symbol may be changed. For example, the coordinates of the layer corresponding to the display area B are set to values according to the notice effect. Also, a plurality of layers corresponding to the display area B may be prepared. At this time, a plurality of types of layers are prepared corresponding to the position where the second identification pattern is displayed, the parameter for displaying the corresponding layer according to the type of the notice effect is set to ON, and the parameter of the layer not to be displayed is set. Set to OFF. With this configuration, it is possible to display the second identification symbol at a preset position, and it is also possible to display the identification symbol separately from the first identification symbol and the second identification symbol, and also By setting the parameters of all layers to OFF, it is possible to display only the first identification symbol.

The display of the layer corresponding to the display area may be performed based on the effect SW defined in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data selected based on the variation pattern or the notice effect. For example, when the movable accessory moves to the front left of the screen, making it difficult to visually recognize the left side of the screen, the effect SW that sets the display area B on the right side of the screen is set to ON and the second identification symbol is displayed. However, the effect SW displayed at another position may be set to OFF.

Further, the effect sound is output corresponding to the variable display of the identification symbol in each display area, but in the present embodiment, the variable display of the first identification symbol and the variable display of the second identification symbol are executed in a similar manner. Therefore, a common effect sound effect may be output. When only the display area B having a small area is displayed, for example, the notice effect is executed on the front side, the volume of the effect sound effect is decreased, or the output of the effect sound effect is stopped. The output related to the variable display may be suppressed by giving priority to the output related to the notice effect.

Furthermore, the sound related to the variable display of the identification pattern (BGM, effect sound effect) is managed as one AUTO group, and the sound related to the notice effect (BGM, effect sound effect) is managed as another AUTO group, and the automatic channel system is used. Sound control by. At this time, by setting the priority of the AUTO group that outputs the sound related to the notice effect to a high priority, it becomes possible to automatically give priority to the output of the sound output by the notice effect, which complicates the effect control. Can be suppressed. As described above, it is possible to suppress the output of other effect sound effects that are output while the sound related to the notice effect is output by setting parameters such as whether or not to output the sound and the volume suppression value. it can.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even if it becomes difficult to visually recognize the identification symbol that is being changed and displayed due to the notice effect or the like, by performing the variable display of the identification symbol in a plurality of display areas, Since it is only necessary for the player to visually recognize the variable display of the identification symbol, it is possible to relax the restriction on the area in which the notice effect is executed. In addition, it is possible to relax restrictions on the range in which the movable accessory operates.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, since variable display in a plurality of display areas is executed in an equivalent manner, it is possible to draw using a common program or image data. On the other hand, even in the case of displaying the decorative image over the identification pattern for each display area, a layer to be displayed in front of the identification pattern for each display area is prepared, and only the program and image data corresponding to the decoration image are prepared. Can be achieved with. As a result, it is only necessary to prepare a minimum program or data that will be the difference, suppress the increase in image data due to the diversification of effect contents, suppress the complexity of effect control, and suppress the increase in storage capacity. You can

[33-2. Modification 1 of the configuration in which the identification pattern can be simultaneously displayed in a plurality of areas]
In the above-described configuration example, the identification symbols are variably displayed in the display region A and the display region B in the same manner from the start to the stop of the variation of the identification symbols, but here, in each display region, in an independent manner. An example will be described in which the identification pattern is variably displayed, and variably displayed in an equivalent manner (in synchronization) in each display area when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

FIG. 464B is a diagram showing an example in which the identification symbols are independently variably displayed in a plurality of display areas of the present embodiment, and variably displayed in an equivalent manner at a predetermined timing. In this modification, the variable display of the identification symbol is started simultaneously in each display area, but as shown in (B), even if the left symbol is stopped in the display area A, the left symbol is stopped in the display area B. The variable display is continued without being displayed. Similarly, as shown in (C), even if the right symbol is stopped and the left and right symbols form a reach mode in the display area A, the variable display of all the identification symbols is continued in the display area B.

Then, after forming the reach mode in (C), after the reach production for a predetermined period has progressed, as shown in (D), to re-change all the symbols in the left-middle-right again, re-change of the identification symbol ("Next") indicating "" is displayed on the middle symbol, and as shown in (E), the variable display of all the identification symbols is started again. Then, as shown in (F), the left and right symbols are stopped so as to form a reach mode. At the timing of this reach, the reach mode is not formed in the second identification pattern in the display area B. As described above, after the first identification symbol displayed in the display area A forms the reach mode, the symbol indicating the re-variation of the identification symbol is displayed in the middle symbol so that the re-variation is performed. Therefore, at the timing when the first identification symbol displayed in the display area A becomes the reach mode, the second identification symbol does not form the reach mode when it changes again, and the second identification when it does not change again. When the pattern forms a reach mode, it becomes possible to determine whether or not the player is to be changed again by looking at the display of the second identification symbol, which may lead to a decrease in interest (in particular, the above-mentioned re-changed symbol is displayed. It is necessary to maintain the interest as much as possible that it may be changed again for players due to the game specifications that increase the expectation of a big hit by stopping and repeating the change again). Therefore, in this modification, such a problem is solved by not forming the reach mode with the second identification pattern at the timing when the first identification pattern forms the reach mode. Then, after the reach mode is formed in the first identification pattern and a predetermined period has elapsed (for example, when the high expectation production reach production with high jackpot expectation is performed after the reach), as shown in (G), the second The display of the identification pattern is the reach mode similarly to the mode of the first identification pattern, and thereafter, the display area B is subjected to the additional decorative display in the same manner as the display area A, and the display area B has the same display mode as the display area A. The identification pattern is displayed. (H) and (I) are the same as (G) and (H) in FIG. 464A. Note that in FIG. 464B, for example, after the timing at which the high-expectation reach effect is performed, the display of the second identification symbol in the display area B is the same as the first identification symbol (in other words, the first identification symbol is For the predetermined period after the reach, the first identification symbol and the second identification symbol have different display forms), and the display area B is also provided with the additional decoration display as in the display area A. The timing may be triggered by another predetermined condition.

The predetermined condition may be, for example, the time when the last re-variation is started in the repeated execution of the temporary stop of the identification symbol, or the start timing of the re-fluctuation after the last temporary stop in the pseudo series. You can also Further, the start timing of the reach effect may be set to a timing at which the display modes of the respective display areas are made equal.

As the other predetermined condition, the predetermined condition may be satisfied when the notice effect by the specific movable accessory is executed, for example, when there is a possibility that a part of the display area cannot be visually recognized. At this time, the display mode of each display area may be made equal from the beginning on the assumption that the predetermined condition is satisfied from the start of the change, or may be matched with the execution timing of the notice effect by the specific movable accessory. The execution timing of the notice effect is, for example, the elapsed time from a specific timing such as the start of fluctuation. Further, when the movable accessory is operated by operating the effect button, the operation of the effect button may be set as a predetermined condition so that the display modes of the respective display areas are equalized.

Further, when the expectation of a big hit is high, the predetermined condition may be satisfied. This is because there is a high possibility that a flashy effect other than the effect by the movable accessory is executed. In this case as well, the predetermined condition may be satisfied from the start of the change. Furthermore, the various timings described above may be combined, for example, the timing for performing the reach effect with high expectation of a big hit, or the timing at which the last temporary change is started when the effect by the movable accessory is executed. ..

As described above, according to the present modified example, similar to the above-described embodiment, the display mode of the identification symbol in each display area is made equal while maintaining the effect of relaxing the restriction of the area in which the notice effect is executed. By adjusting the (synchronizing) timing, various effects can be realized. Further, in the first half where the frequency of execution of the effect by the movable accessory is low, the control load is reduced by simplifying the display mode of a part of the display area (low decoration mode), and in the latter half when the high-degree effect is performed. By setting the same display mode (highly decorative mode) in all the display areas, it is possible to suppress the restriction of the contents of the effect such as the operation range of the movable accessory, and to enhance the enjoyment of the game. You can

[33-3. Modification 2 of a configuration in which an identification pattern can be simultaneously displayed in a plurality of areas]
In the example described above, the identification symbols are variably displayed in the same display mode in each display area, and then the identification symbols are stopped and displayed. On the other hand, in the modified example described here, after the variable display of the identification symbol in each display area is performed, the identification symbol can be stopped and displayed in a different mode (symbol).

FIG. 464C is a diagram showing an example in which the identification symbols are variably displayed in the plurality of display areas according to the present embodiment, and stopped with different symbols. Since (A) to (F) are the same as the example shown in FIG. 464A, illustration is omitted from (C) to (E). Note that, as in the modified example 1 shown in FIG. 464B, the identification symbol may be variably displayed, and the stop symbol in each display area may be different as in the modified example 2.

In this modified example, when a plurality of types of hits are prepared, when the display is stopped and displayed in the same manner (identification pattern) in each display area, “first hit” is shown, while a different manner in each display area When stopped and displayed with the (identification pattern), a "second hit" (for example, "small hit") different from the "first hit" is shown. As shown in FIG. 464C(G), in the display area A, all the identification symbols are stopped and displayed at the same "5", "5", and "5", while in the display area B, the middle symbols are different and the identification symbol "5". "V" and "5" are displayed as a stop. In this modification, when a small hit is prepared as the second hit, for example, as shown in FIG. 464C(H), the result of the symbol variation is "second win", and if the "second win" is won, A game ball can be accepted in the V zone arranged in the game area. When a game ball wins the V zone, for example, it becomes possible to shift to a high probability state.

As described above, according to the present modification, it is possible to notify the player of the detailed content of the hit by indicating the kind of hit by the combination of the respective identification symbols stopped and displayed in the plurality of display areas. .. For example, it is also possible to indicate whether or not a "hit" is indicated by the stop symbol in the display area A and to indicate the type of "hit" in the stop symbol in the display area B.

Further, the combination of the stop symbols in each display area makes it difficult for the player to erroneously recognize the result of the variable display. Specifically, when the stop symbol in the display area A indicates "hit", the player can clearly recognize that it is a hit, for example, by stopping and displaying with the same identification symbol. It is better for the player not to erroneously recognize the display area B. For example, when the result of the variable display is “out”, the player may be stopped and displayed with the same identification symbol so as not to erroneously recognize the player. In the case of so-called "big hit", the same identification symbol is stopped and displayed in the display area A, while in the case of "small hit" where the game value provided is smaller than that of "big hit", the same identification is made only in the display area B. You may stop and display by a design.

When the type of "hit" is suggested by the display mode of the display area B, for example, when stopped and displayed with the same identification pattern as the display area A, "probable variation big hit" or different from the display area A You may make it "normal big hit" that does not shift to the probability changing state when stopped and displayed with the identification pattern. Further, only the medium symbol may be recognized as a different identification symbol to recognize the type of big hit, and as described above, if the medium symbol is “V”, it indicates that the game ball can be accepted in the V zone. The number of rounds may be suggested by stopping the symbol corresponding to the number of rounds of the big hit game in the medium symbol.

Further, the display area B may be hidden when the identification symbol is stopped, and the player may have an expectation without notifying the type of "hit" while notifying the "hit". For example, the player's sense of expectation may be increased by making it unclear whether or not the probability fluctuation state has occurred after a big hit. Further, the display area B may indicate an advantageous game state (probability change state, time reduction state, etc.) that is generated after the big hit game is over.

Further, after the player is informed of the big hit in the display mode in the display area A, the display of the identification symbol may be continued only in the display area B. If the display of the display area B is continued, the player can recognize that it is a big hit, and after notifying the big hit, by making the identification symbol in the display area A non-display, the subsequent effect is performed. The area can be secured. Further, in this case, in the display area B, "5", "5", and "5" that were displayed in the display area A from the middle of the big hit game were displayed as "5", "V", and "5" at the start of the big hit. It may be displayed according to Further, this display may be displayed until the big hit game ends and the identification symbol starts changing in the game after the big hit game, or the display may be stopped at a predetermined timing during the big hit game. .. However, even when the display is stopped during the big hit game, it is preferable to display the hit symbol in the display area A or the display area B when the game is started after the big hit game is finished. In this case, for example, in the display area B, "5", "V", and "5" were displayed at the hit timing, but after the big hit game is finished, the same "5", "V", and "5" may be used. You may change to the display of "5" "5" "5" on both sides of a game.

According to this modified example, similarly to the above-described embodiment, by performing the variable display of the identification symbol in the plurality of display regions, the restriction of the region in which the notice effect is executed can be relaxed, and the stop symbol in the plurality of display regions can be relaxed. With the combination of, it becomes possible to inform the player of the result of the game in detail, and it is possible to realize various notification modes. As a result, the player's expectation can be increased and the interest of the game can be improved.

[34. Substrate that is a constituent element of the ornament]
By the way, in recent years, in order to realize a wide variety of effects, the number of accessories (decorative bodies) mounted on the game machine has been increased, and the game has been made more enjoyable by increasing its size and deformation.
However, since the size of the game machine is set to a predetermined size, the game area is limited, and due to factors such as an increase in the size of the liquid crystal display device, the size and arrangement of the accessory are limited. Therefore, there is a possibility that the attraction of the game may be deteriorated due to a monotonous effect. The embodiments to be described below have been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide one means for increasing the size of an accessory and improving the flexibility of arrangement.

The accessory provided in the gaming machine has a decorative portion rich in decorativeness, which is visible from the player or the front side, and which enhances the enjoyment of the game, and is provided with a light-emitting body such as an LED inside. , Emits light in a mode according to the gaming state and the degree of expectation of variable display. If the light emitter is arranged on the substrate like an LED, the decorative portion includes a transmissive portion capable of transmitting the light output from the light emitter. The transmissive portion may be, for example, a transparent member capable of transmitting light, or may be one in which holes are formed in a mesh shape and light passes through the holes.

On the other hand, by providing the transmissive portion, the board on which electronic components such as LEDs and resistors are mounted can be visually recognized by the player through the transmissive portion. Usually, the board is mounted with electronic components necessary for exerting a production effect, and is not supposed to be visually recognized by the player. However, in the decorative portion having the transparent portion through which light can pass, the player may visually recognize the substrate arranged inside the decorative portion, and the decorative effect may be reduced.
On the other hand, if you make the substrate invisible by reducing the transparency of the transmissive part or using a material that reflects light from the outside on the surface of the transmissive part, you may not be able to obtain the expected effect. is there. Furthermore, when the LED is arranged at a position where the player cannot visually recognize it from the outside of the decorative portion or the transparent portion, the size of the decorative portion may unintentionally increase.

Therefore, it is an object of the present embodiment to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a reduction in the decorative effect even when the substrate is visually recognized from the transmissive portion that constitutes the decorative portion.

[34-1. Game board]
FIG. 465 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the game board 5 of the game machine in the present embodiment. In the example shown in FIG. 465, the effect display device 1600 (on the game board side) is arranged in the center of the game area 5a. Also, although not shown, in the game area 5a, like the game board 5 described above, a plurality of general winning openings and a plurality of general winning openings that are always open so as to accept the hit game balls. A mouth is a starting opening that is always open at a different position in the game area 5a so as to receive a game ball, a gate portion that detects passage of the game ball, and a game ball to the first starting opening or the second starting opening. It is equipped with a special winning opening or the like that allows any of the game balls to be accepted depending on the result of the lottery.

Furthermore, in the upper right portion of the game area 5a, a character accessory 9100 in the shape of a character "intense heat" is arranged. FIG. 466 is a perspective view showing the shape of the character accessory 9100 according to this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 466, the character accessory 9100 is a plate-shaped accessory that imitates the character shape of “intense heat”. The effect by the character role object 9100 is executed in a mode according to the degree of expectation of the symbol variation.
For example, the light emission may be performed in a color according to the degree of expectation, or the light emission mode may be changed by repeating lighting and extinguishing in a predetermined pattern. In addition, the so-called gasse effect is performed in which "big" and "heat" are turned on alternately, and when the degree of expectation is high, both characters are turned on to notify the big hit, and finally both characters are turned off. You may do it.

As will be described later, in the character role object 9100, a cover member (cover body) 9110 visually recognized by the player is configured by a transparent portion 9111 and a non-transparent portion 9112, and a mode according to the progress status of the game and the contents of the effect. The light-emitting body provided inside allows the transmissive portion 9111 to emit light. In this embodiment, the transparent portion (first area) 9111 corresponds to a character, the non-transparent portion (second area) 9112 is an outer edge portion of the character, and the transparent portion 9111 is substantially colorless and transparent. .. The non-transmissive portion 9112 may also be transmissive, and may be colored, for example, with a transmissivity different from that of the transmissive portion 9111. Details of character accessory 9100 will be described with reference to the drawings starting from FIG. 468.

Further, the character role object 9100 partially overlaps the upper right portion of the effect display device 1600, and the light output from the display area of the effect display device 1600 is applied to the back surface side of the character effect object 9100. At this time, it is also possible to execute an effect combined with the effect executed by the effect display device 1600 by making the back side of the character accessory 9100 a reflective member. Alternatively, a part of the character accessory 9100 may be configured to transmit light, and light output from the display area of the effect display device 1600 may perform an effect of transmitting the character accessory 9100.

In addition, a space is formed between the game board side effect display device 1600 and the game area 5a on the front surface side, and a snowman role object 9200 imitating the shape of a “snowman” is formed on the lower left front surface side of the effect display device 1600. Are arranged. The snowman role object 9200 is formed in the shape of a three-dimensional doll, and the player can see a part of the side surface and the back surface side of the snowman role object 9200 from the side.

FIG. 467 is a perspective view showing the shape of the snowman accessory 9200 according to this embodiment, where (A) is a front view and (B) is a rear view. The snowman role product 9200 is formed of a member having a transparent appearance, and exerts a production effect by transmitting light of a light emitting body (LED) provided inside to the outside.

The snowman accessory 9200 is externally configured with a hat portion, a head portion, and a body portion. The head portion and the body portion are made of a permeable member, and are visible to the player. The hat portion is in the shape of a bucket and is provided on the upper side of the head. The hat portion is formed of a colored member, and in this embodiment, light emitted from a light emitting body such as an LED provided inside can be transmitted. Details of the snowman accessory 9200 will be described with reference to the drawings starting from FIG. 480.

The snowman character product 9200 is executed in a manner according to the degree of expectation of symbol variation, like the character character product 9100. For example, light may be emitted in a color according to the degree of expectation, and lighting/lighting may be repeated. Further, only the head may be turned on or only the body may be turned on. Further, only the hat portion may be turned on at the first stage of the notice production to increase the player's expectation, and the head portion may be turned on toward the body portion.

[34-2. Character accessory (intense heat)]
Subsequently, a detailed configuration of the character accessory 9100 will be described. FIG. 468 is an exploded perspective view of the character accessory 9100 of this embodiment. The character role object 9100 is a character member board provided with a cover member (cover body) 9110 arranged on the front side visible to the player and a rear surface side of the cover member 9110 and mounting a light emitting body 9301 such as an LED. 9120, and a base member 9130 attached to the back surface side of the cover member 9110 and the character accessory substrate 9120.

[34-2-1. Cover member]
The cover member 9110 is formed with a peripheral wall portion 9113 projecting rearward on the outer periphery, and the character accessory substrate 9120 can be accommodated in the space on the back side surrounded by the peripheral wall portion 9113. FIG. 469 is a view of the cover member 9110 of the character accessory 9100 according to the present embodiment as viewed from the back surface side. A state in which the character accessory substrate 9120 is stored will be described later with reference to FIG. 471. As described above, the cover member 9110 is formed by the transmissive portion 9111 that can transmit light imitating the characters of “intense heat” and the non-transmissive portion 9112 that is difficult to transmit light formed on the periphery of the transmissive portion 9111. ing.

Further, the peripheral wall portion 9113 forming the outer peripheral portion of the character accessory 9100 is formed of a material that hardly transmits light, like the non-transmissive portion 9112, and may be the same member as the non-transmissive portion 9112. When the characters are individually turned on, it is necessary to provide a peripheral wall portion 9113 between the characters in order to distinguish between the characters. At this time, the character accessory substrate 9120 may be prepared for each character, or the substrates may be integrated.

The transmissive portion 9111 is made of a colorless and transparent material, and the inside of the character accessory 9100 can be visually recognized. At the time of performance execution, the light-emitting body 9301 provided inside allows the light to be transmitted to the transmissive portion 9111 and the non-transmissive portion 9112 to block the light, thereby enhancing the character of “heat” and increasing the player's expectation. be able to. Further, not only is it possible to transmit the light from the light emitting body (LED) 9301 arranged on the character accessory substrate 9120, but it is also possible for the player to visually recognize the character accessory substrate 9120 itself. ..

In the present embodiment, a light diffusion portion that diffuses light is formed in the non-transmissive portion 9112 on the back surface side of the cover member 9110. Instead of forming the light diffusion portion, a light guide member may be provided between the cover member 9110 and the character accessory substrate 9120, and the diffusion member is provided by guiding the light from the light emitting body 9301 to the transmission portion 9111. It is possible to obtain the same effect as in the case of A modification using the light guide member will be described later.

With the above configuration, the light inside the accessory can be efficiently collected with a small number of light emitters, so that the number of light emitters 9301 arranged on the character accessory substrate 9120 can be reduced or the light emission can be reduced. The degree of freedom in arranging the body 9301 can be increased.

Further, the non-transmissive portion 9112 may be formed of a transmissive material having a lower transmissivity than the transmissive portion 9111 without forming the light diffusing portion. For example, by using a colored material having transparency, the character accessory 9100 is made to emit light as a whole, and the effect is different from the case where the light diffusing section is used while highlighting the character part due to the difference in transparency. be able to.

[34-2-2. Character board]
FIG. 470 is a diagram showing a front surface side of the character accessory substrate 9120 of the character accessory 9100 of the present embodiment. In addition, FIG. 471 is a diagram showing a state in which the character accessory substrate 9120 is housed in the cover member 9110 of the character accessory 9100 of the present embodiment, and is a view showing the back surface side of the character accessory substrate 9120.

As shown in FIGS. 470 and 471, the character accessory substrate 9120 is not in a general rectangular shape, but in the shape of the character accessory 9100 according to the outer shape of the space surrounded by the peripheral wall portion 9113 of the cover member 9110. It has a similar shape. A resist colored in a predetermined color (specific color) is applied to the surface of the character accessory substrate 9120. Although various information is displayed on the character accessory substrate 9120, it may be displayed by silk printing or the like, or may be displayed by etching characters.

Further, the back surface side of the character accessory substrate 9120 is blocked by the base member 9130 in a state where it is attached to the game board 5, so that it cannot be visually recognized by the player.
Therefore, it is not necessary to set the color of the substrate to a specific color, but whether to apply the resist only on the front surface or on both surfaces by comparing the manufacturing cost for different processing of the front surface and the back surface rather than the cost of the material. Just decide.

As described above, the character accessory substrate 9120 is visible from the transparent portion 9111 of the cover member 9110. Therefore, if the color of the substrate does not match the decorative aspect of the accessory, the decorative effect may be reduced, or the electronic component arranged on the substrate may impair the decorative effect. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the character accessory substrate 9120 itself is used as one of the decorative elements. For example, the character accessory substrate 9120 is not colored in a general green color, but is colored in a color (specific color) according to the decoration mode of the accessory, or the electronic component mounted on the character accessory substrate 9120 shows the pattern of the accessory. Arrange it to be eggplant. The color according to the decoration mode of the accessory is, for example, a color associated with the character or theme appearing in the effect of the accessory (game machine). Hereinafter, a specific description will be given with reference to the drawings.

First, a specific mode for using the shape and color of the substrate provided in a decorative body such as a accessory as a decorative element will be described. As described above, the character accessory 9100 of the present embodiment has the transparent portion 9111, so that the character accessory substrate 9120 provided inside can be visually recognized. Therefore, the entire color of the character accessory 9100 is configured by coloring the character accessory substrate 9120 with a specific color that matches the decorative aspect of the character accessory 9100. For example, when the surface of the character accessory substrate 9120 is blue, the entire accessory becomes blue when the light emitting body 9301 is not emitting light, and the emission color of the light emitting body 9301 is emitting light, resulting in a completely different impression. Can be given to people. In particular, when the area occupied by the transmissive portion 9111 is large in the entire accessory, a greater effect can be obtained.

[34-2-3. Light emitter/electronic component]
A plurality of light emitting bodies (LEDs) 9301 are arranged on the front surface side of the character accessory substrate 9120. The light emitting bodies 9301 may all have the same emission color, or a plurality of different types of emission colors may be prepared. The luminous body 9301 may be lit according to the progress of the game, and the lighting place may be changed according to the contents of the effect. When there are different types of emission colors, the colors may be emitted according to the expected degree, or different types of emission colors may be turned on at the same time.

In this embodiment, the character accessory substrate 9120 is colored in a specific color as described above. Therefore, the color changes depending on the combination of the specific color of the character accessory substrate 9120 and the light emission color of the light emitter 9301. Therefore, various effects can be realized by causing the light emitter 9301 to emit light in a plurality of types of colors. It will be possible.

Further, when the light emitting body 9301 is turned off, the specific color colored on the character role material substrate 9120 is recognized. Therefore, even if the light emitting body 9301 is blinked, the character role material substrate is displayed as one effect expression. The specific color colored in 9120 and the emission color of the light emitting body 9301 can be recognized as different colors alternately. For example, as described above, when the color of the character role material substrate 9120 is colored blue, when the light-emitting body 9301 is slowly blinked in red, bright and dark are alternately provided, and the red character role and the blue character role are alternated. Can be recognized as a character of a completely different color.

Electronic components other than the light emitter 9301 are mounted on the back surface side of the character accessory substrate 9120. Specifically, the resistor 9302, the IC 9303, and the connector 9304. In the present embodiment, since these electronic components cannot be visually recognized by the player, it is sufficient if the arrangement does not cause a technical problem. Further, as shown in FIG. 471, information about the light-emitting body 9301 arranged on the front surface side is printed on the rear surface side of the character accessory substrate 9120, and the electronic components arranged on the front surface side even from the rear surface side. You can recognize information about. The information indicating the position of the light emitting body 9301 is shown by a dotted line to prevent misidentification.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 470, only the light-emitting body 9301 is arranged on the front surface side, and information regarding electronic components is not displayed. This is to prevent the decoration effect from being reduced by the player visually recognizing the characters printed on the silk (for example, the part number of the electronic part (eg, “LED1” in FIG. 471)). The information may be displayed in a color that is difficult for the player to visually recognize, for example, to improve efficiency. For example, when the color of the character accessory substrate 9120 is blue as described above, a color that is similar to the light blue, such as light blue, and whose density is adjusted to be distinguishable is adopted as the information display, and the silk screen printing is performed. Good. Alternatively, the information may be formed by etching characters.

Further, in the character role product 9100 in the present embodiment, the electronic components other than the light emitting body 9301 are arranged on the back surface side of the substrate invisible to the player, so that the electronic components such as the resistor 9302 and the IC 9303 are black. .. Further, when the electronic component has to be arranged on the front side, at least a part of the electronic component such as the rear side of the non-transmissive portion 9112 is arranged so as to be difficult for the player to see, or the color or the color which is difficult for the player to see is used. A shaped electronic component may be adopted. For example, electronic components of the same color as the specific color may be arranged on the front side.

On the other hand, as described above, in the present invention, the board provided inside the accessory is visible to the player. Therefore, an example in which the electronic component arranged on the substrate is used as a decorative element of a accessory is described.

Electronic components are arranged on the front surface side of the character accessory substrate 9120 at a position visible to the player from the transmissive portion 9111 of the cover member 9110. At this time, the electronic components are arranged so as to form the pattern of the character displayed by the character accessory 9100. For example, electronic parts are arranged at regular positions so that the characters can be decorated.

In addition, the arrangement of the light-emitting body 9301 may prevent the player from recognizing the pattern of characters during light emission. Further, by selecting a light-emitting body 9301 at a position where the electronic component can be recognized even during light emission and a light-emitting body 9301 located at a position where the electronic component cannot be recognized during light emission to emit light, The presence or absence may be switchable.

Further, an electronic component other than black may be arranged on the front surface side to serve as a decorative element. Although the transmissive portion 9111 is colorless and transparent, it may allow light to pass through as a lens member or a diffusing member, while making it difficult for the electronic component to be clearly discriminated from the player so that the player can easily recognize the pattern. It should be noted that another specific example will be described with respect to a mode in which the decoration effect is exhibited by the arrangement of the electronic components, with the snowman role product 9200 described later.

It is also possible to use the characters printed on the substrate surface side as a pattern. Instead of printing characters in colors that are difficult for the player to recognize in order to prevent the decoration effect from being impaired, the player can recognize characters that represent information on electronic components and boards as decorative elements. You may print in the form (color, shape). Thus, the pattern of the accessory can be made more complicated, or the color can be changed by printing in a color different from that of the cover member 9110, and the decorative effect can be enhanced. Further, by consolidating the characters to be printed on the board, the player can recognize that the cover member 9110 and a region of a different color from the other parts on the board are formed on the board, thereby enhancing the decorative effect of the entire accessory. You may raise it.

[34-2-4. Arrangement of luminous body]
Next, the positional relationship between the light emitting body 9301 and the transmissive portion 9111 and the non-transmissive portion 9112 of the cover member 9110 will be described. FIG. 472 is a diagram illustrating a positional relationship between the light emitting body 9301 and the transmissive portion 9111 and the non-transmissive portion 9112 of the cover member 9110 in the character accessory 9100 of the present embodiment.

In the present embodiment, the light emitting body 9301 is also arranged at a position visible from the transmissive portion 9111 and at a position on the back side of the non-transmissive portion 9112 that is difficult for the player to visually recognize. Here, the light-emitting body 9301 arranged in a position visible from the transmissive portion 9111 is a light-emitting body 9301a, and the light-emitting body 9301b arranged behind the non-transmissive portion 9112.

For example, when strong light emission is desired, the light emitting body 9301a is arranged at a position visible from the transmissive portion 9111 so that the light is directly emitted to the outside. Further, as described with reference to FIG. 469, since the light diffusion portion is provided on the back side of the non-transmissive portion 9112, it is soft to disperse the light by disposing the light emitting body 9301b on the back side of the non-transmissive portion 9112. It becomes possible to emit light.

As described above, the position of the light-emitting body 9301a may be determined in accordance with the type of the accessory, and by selecting the light-emitting body 9301 to emit light, it is possible to switch the light-emission mode with one accessory. Specifically, when it is desired to make the entire accessory strongly emit light, only the light emitting body 9301a or all the light emitting bodies 9301 may be made to emit light, and when it is desired to make the light emit soft light, only the light emitting body 9301b is made to emit light to diffuse the light. Just do it.

Further, the transmittance of the transmissive portion 9111 may be adjusted so that the light emitting body 9301a is slightly less visible without being completely colorless and transparent. For example, the transmissive portion 9111 may be made slightly less transparent (colored transparent, for example, light blue) to make it difficult to see the inside, or the surface of the transmissive portion 9111 may be processed (for example, textured) to diffuse light. In this way, it may be made difficult to visually recognize the inside. With this structure, the light-emitting body itself is hard to see, but it can emit light more strongly than when it is arranged on the back side of the non-transmissive portion 9112. Further, since the degree of freedom in the position of the light emitting body 9301 is increased, the degree of freedom in design is increased and the development efficiency can be improved.

Further, the character accessory substrate 9120 itself may not be a direct decorative element but may indirectly enhance the effect. For example, when the specific color of the character accessory substrate 9120 is white, the reflectance can be increased even when the arranged light emitter 9301 is not illuminated, and when the light emitter 9301 is illuminated, Of course, by reflecting light from the outside, it is possible to prevent the inside of the character accessory 9100 from becoming too dark.

In addition, since the specific color of the character accessory substrate 9120 is white, the character color of the character accessory 9100 can be recognized as white as a feature when the light is turned off. In this case, if a full-color LED (R, G, B color LEDs) is used for the light emitter 9301, the character color can be expressed in various colors, but the light from the light emitter 9301 and the back side of the non-transmissive portion 9112 can be expressed. The light reflected (diffused) from the light diffusing unit provided in the above and the light reflected from the substrate surface are overlapped and fused, so that a fantastic effect that cannot be expressed by a single type of light emitter 9301 can be performed. it can. At this time, various effects can be realized without using a plurality of types of light emitters 9301, so that the cost can be reduced.

As described above, in the character accessory of the present embodiment, the color of the board and the mounted electronic components are used as the decorative elements so that the player can visually recognize it. Since there is no need to do so, the degree of freedom in design can be improved. In addition, electronic components that are not decorative elements may be arranged on the back surface side of the substrate, and electronic components other than light-emitting bodies such as LEDs may be arranged on the rear surface side to use only the color of the substrate as the decoration element.

[34-2-5. Base member]
The base member 9130 has the same shape as the cover member 9110 when viewed from the front when mounted. The peripheral wall portion 9113 of the cover member 9110 and the base member 9130 are brought into contact with each other and fixed by a mounting member (not shown). At this time, the character accessory substrate 9120 may be fixed to the cover member 9110 or the base member 9130, or the character accessory substrate 9120 is not fixed and is housed in the space surrounded by the peripheral wall portion 9113 of the cover member 9110. You may do so. Wiring for transmitting a signal or supplying power to the character accessory substrate 9120 is not shown in the drawing. For example, a wiring hole is formed in the peripheral wall portion 9113 of the base member 9130 or the cover member 9110. It may be formed.

Note that the base member 9130 may be directly attached to the game board 5 by providing the cover member 9110 with an attachment portion without using the base member 9130. In this case, the character accessory substrate 9120 is attached to the cover member 9110.

[34-3. Modified example 1 of a character accessory]
Then, the shape of the character accessory substrate 9120 is not completely similar to the shape of the character accessory substrate 9100, and the outer edge of the character accessory substrate 9120 matches the outer shape of the space surrounded by the peripheral wall portion 9113 of the cover member 9110. The case of not performing will be described. In this case, since the light emitter 9301 cannot be arranged on the entire character accessory 9100, the light guide member 9140 is disposed between the cover member 9110 and the character accessory substrate 9120 to diffuse the light. The shortage of the light amount of the portion where 9301 is not arranged is compensated. The cover member 9110 and the base member 9130 are the same as those in the above-mentioned example.

FIG. 473 is a diagram showing an example of a light guide member 9140 for diffusing light from the light emitting body 9301 in the character accessory 9100 of the present embodiment. The light guide member 9140 is surrounded by the peripheral wall portion 9113 of the cover member 9110 in the same manner as the shape of the character accessory substrate 9120 described above in order to diffuse light to the entire back surface side of the cover member 9110 of the character accessory 9100. The shape is similar to the shape of the character accessory 9100 according to the outer shape of the space.

FIG. 474 is a diagram showing a front surface side of the character accessory substrate 9120 of the character accessory 9100 of the first modification of the present embodiment. Further, FIG. 475 is a diagram showing a state in which the character accessory substrate 9120 is housed in the cover member 9110 of the character accessory 9100 of the first modification of the present embodiment, and is a view showing the back surface side of the character accessory substrate 9120. The configuration other than the shape of the character accessory substrate 9120 is the same as that of the above-described embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 474 and 475, the character accessory substrate 9120 is formed with a cutout portion 9122 in which a part of the outer shape of the space surrounded by the peripheral wall portion 9113 of the cover member 9110 is lacking. Further, an attachment hole 9121 for fixing to the base member 9130 is formed in the central portion of the character accessory substrate 9120. As shown in FIG. 475, the attachment portion of the cover member 9110 is inserted into the attachment hole 9121 and attached to the base member 9130.

Similarly, the light guide member 9140 is also formed with an attachment hole so that the attachment portion of the base member 9130 can be inserted therethrough. Note that, if the ratio of the cutout portion 9122 is small and the position of the substrate does not shift, the board may be fixed by sandwiching it between the cover member 9110 and the base member 9130 without providing a mounting structure.

FIG. 476 is a diagram illustrating a positional relationship between the light emitting body 9301 and the transmissive portion 9111 and the non-transmissive portion 9112 of the cover member 9110 in the character accessory 9100 according to the modification of the present embodiment.
In this modification, since the light emitting body 9301 cannot be arranged in the cutout portion 9122, the entire character accessory 9100 is caused to emit light by guiding light by the light guide member 9140. At this time, a light diffusion portion may be provided on the back surface side of the non-transmissive portion 9112 to assist the light guide member 9140.

Therefore, in the character accessory 9100 of the present modification, a portion decorated by the character accessory substrate 9120 by using the color of the character accessory substrate 9120, an electronic component, or the like as a decorative element, and the cutout portion 9122 are formed. Therefore, the parts that are not decorated by the character accessory substrate 9120 are mixed. At this time, the light diffusing portion provided on the back surface side of the non-transmissive portion 9112 of the light guide member 9140 or the cover member 9110 can maintain the decorative effect by performing light decoration.

As described in this modification, the shape of the character accessory substrate 9120 does not have to be similar to that of the character accessory substrate 9100, and a portion not decorated by the character accessory substrate 9120 has a light guide member 9140 or a light diffusion portion. It is also possible to suppress the reduction of the decoration effect by providing the light decoration. Further, the color of the base member 9130 may be the same as the specific color of the character accessory substrate 9120 to suppress the reduction of the decorative effect. As a result, it is possible to make the shape of the character accessory substrate 9120 a relatively simple shape without making it complicated, or to increase the degree of freedom in the size of the substrate, which reduces the manufacturing cost of the substrate. The increase can be suppressed.

In addition, without using the base member 9130, the decorative portion arranged on the back surface side of the character accessory 9100 can emit light through the cutout portion 9122 to produce an effect. Good. For example, when the character role object 9100 is arranged on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1600 as in the present embodiment, an image is displayed in the upper right part of the screen to display the liquid crystal display device 1600 and the character role. You may make it perform the production|generation which the light emission production by the thing 9100 integrated. Also, the same effect can be executed by using a transparent member for the base member 9130. An example using the display of the liquid crystal display device 1600 will be described in more detail in Modification 2.

[34-4. Modified example 2 of a character accessory]
Although the cutout portion 9122 is formed in a part of the board in the modified example 1, a modified example 2 will describe an example in which the character accessory substrate 9120 described above is about half the size of the character accessory 9100.
Further, the cover member 9110 is configured to be directly attached to the game board 5 without using the base member 9130, and the character accessory 9100 in the present modification has a configuration of the cover member 9110, the character accessory substrate 9120, and the light guide. It is constituted by the member 9140.

In this modified example, as in the modified example 1, the light guide member 9140 guides light to a portion where the light emitting body 9301 cannot be arranged, and performs light decoration. Further, in this modification, since the base member 9130 is not provided, if the light emitting body is provided on the back surface side of the character accessory 9100, the light of the light emitting body can be transmitted.

FIG. 477 is a diagram showing a front surface side of a character accessory substrate 9120 of a character accessory 9100 of Modification 2 of the present embodiment, in which the character accessory substrate 9120 and the light guide member 9140 overlap. Shows the state. FIG. 478 is a diagram showing a state in which the character accessory substrate 9120 is accommodated in the cover member 9110 of the character accessory 9100 according to the modified example 2 of the present embodiment, and is a view showing the back surface side of the character accessory substrate 9120.

As shown in FIGS. 477 and 478, the character accessory substrate 9120 is configured to occupy the upper half of the character accessory 9100. Therefore, when the character accessory 9100 of this modification is attached to the game board 5, the upper half is decorated by the specific color colored on the character accessory substrate 9120, but the lower half is not decorated by the character accessory substrate 9120. Becomes On the other hand, since the lower half of the character accessory 9100 can be transmitted through the transmissive portion 9111, the discomfort may be suppressed by setting the back side of the character accessory 9100 to a specific color.

Also, different effects may be executed in the upper and lower areas. For example, in the case of a character accessory in which characters are written in two stages, the character accessory substrate 9120 is arranged on the upper side and the light emitter is arranged on the back side on the lower side to perform different effects in the upper and lower stages. Also, if this accessory is movable, it is possible to execute different effects for each stop position by disposing different light emitters for each stop position on the back surface side.

Further, the light emitting body is not limited to the LED and the lamp, and may be the liquid crystal display device 1600 as described above. For example, the LED is arranged as a light emitting body on the upper part of the game board 5, and the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1600. When it is moved downward, the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600 allows light to be transmitted from the lower part of the accessory to perform the effect.

As the image displayed on the back side of the character role object 9100, regardless of the transparent portion 9111 and the non-transparent part 9112, the same color (character role) imitating the character role object 9100 including the lower half (the cutout portion in Modification 1) is also used. It is advisable to display an image having the same shape as the specific color (where the object substrate 9120 is shown). Because the image is displayed even when the character accessory 9100 has some trouble, the game can be advanced without giving the player any anxiety due to the trouble.

With the above configuration, it is possible to realize a plurality of types of effects with one accessory, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 479, a part of the liquid crystal display device 1600 can be visually recognized by the player through the character role object 9100. Therefore, in addition to the light guided by the light guide member 9140, the light by the image (video) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600 is displayed from the back side of the character accessory 9100, and the light effect by the character accessory substrate 9120 is produced. Then, it becomes possible to execute the display effect by the liquid crystal display device 1600 in cooperation with each other. With this configuration, the lower side of the character accessory substrate 9120 serves as a boundary, and can be an element that constitutes the decoration.

FIG. 479 is a diagram showing a state in which the character accessory 9100 according to the modified example 2 of the present embodiment is attached to the game board 5. The light guide member 9140 diffuses the light from the light emitting body 9301 mounted on the character accessory substrate 9120 on the upper part of the character accessory 9100. On the other hand, the lower part of the character accessory 9100 diffuses the light (displayed image) output by the liquid crystal display device 1600 by the light guide member 9140. At this time, the light produced by the light emitting body 9301 and the light emitted from the liquid crystal display device 1600 are fused together, so that an effect produced by the character accessory 9100 and an effect produced by the liquid crystal display device 1600 can be performed in an integrated manner.

Note that effects other than the character accessory 9100 and the liquid crystal display device 1600 may be combined. For example, when the game board 5 is made of a transparent member, the luminous effect is arranged on the back surface side, or a sticker or the like is attached to enhance the decorative effect, visually observing through the transparent portion of the accessory to combine them. Can further enhance the decorative effect.

[34-5. Snowman character]
Next, the snowman role product 9200 will be described. As shown in FIG. 467, the snowman role object 9200 is a role (decorative body) imitating a snowman, and a shape in which a spherical head rests on a spherical body part slightly larger than the head. Has become. Further, a bucket-shaped hat portion is placed on the head in an inclined state. The hat portion is formed of a colored member, and in this embodiment, light emitted from a light emitting body such as an LED provided inside can be transmitted.

FIG. 480 is a diagram showing a cross-sectional view of the snowman accessory 9200 of this embodiment. The snowman accessory 9200 accommodates a board (snowman board 9220) on which electronic components including a light emitting body 9301 such as an LED are mounted inside a cover member 9210 divided into a front cover member 9210a and a back cover member 9210b. To be done.

The snowman role object 9200 is used in an effect executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and, for example, an effect such as causing an internal light-emitting body to emit light in accordance with the degree of expectation of symbol variation is executed. Further, since the cover member 9210 is made of a material that allows light to pass therethrough and is disposed on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1600, it is possible to perform an effect of transmitting or reflecting the displayed image. Good. Hereinafter, each component of the snowman role product 9200 will be specifically described.

FIG. 481 is a view of the front cover member 9210a of the snowman accessory 9200 according to the present embodiment as viewed from the rear surface side. FIG. 482 is a diagram showing the back surface side cover member 9210b of the snowman accessory 9200 of the present embodiment. FIG. 483 is a diagram showing a front surface side of the snowman board 9220 of the snowman accessory 9200 of the present embodiment. Further, FIG. 484 is a diagram showing the back surface side of the snowman substrate 9220 of the snowman accessory 9200 of the present embodiment.

The cover members 9210 (front-side cover member 9210a, back-side cover member 9210b) of the snowman role object 9200 are substantially colorless and transparent except for a part and have transparency, and a substrate (snowman substrate 9220) housed inside from the front side. ) It is possible to see the front side.

As shown in FIGS. 483 and 484, the snowman board 9220 has a shape of a snowman role object 9200, and has a very rich design. Further, the snowman substrate 9220 is coated with a resist colored in a predetermined color (specific color), like the character accessory substrate 9120. In addition, the configuration of the substrate itself is the same as that of the character accessory substrate 9120, and various electronic components are mounted on the front surface side and the back surface side. In addition, about the code|symbol of the electronic component on a board|substrate, the code|symbol common to the character accessory 9100 is used.

In this embodiment, the shape of the snowman board 9220 occupies the inside of the character so that the back side of the snowman character 9200 cannot be seen from the front. As a result, the entire snowman role object 9200 is recognized as the specific color colored on the snowman substrate 9220, and the color of the entire role character is determined. On the other hand, a cutout portion or a hole may be formed in a part of the snowman board 9220 so that the back surface side of the snowman accessory 9200 can be visually recognized. At this time, an image may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600 from the rear of the snowman role object 9200, or a decorative body such as a light-emitting body may be arranged to increase the variety of effects.

Further, the snowman role object 9200 has a three-dimensional shape, and the player can visually recognize the side surface of the snowman role object 9200 by slightly tilting the line of sight from the front. Since the cover member 9210 is transparent, the player can view the snowman substrate 9220 beyond the side surface to the back surface. In the character accessory 9100 configured so that the board cannot be viewed from the back side, it is not necessary to set the back side of the board to a specific color, but the snowman board 9220 is also colored to a back side. This makes it possible to prevent the decorative effect from decreasing even when the player approaches the liquid crystal display device 1600 and visually recognizes the snowman role object 9200 from the side. As a result, the degree of freedom of the form of the accessory can be improved, the effect of the effect can be improved, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Since the player can see the back surface beyond the side surface of the snowman board 9220, the light emitter 9301 may be arranged on the back surface side of the snowman board 9220 so that the entire snowman role object 9200 emits light from the back surface side. .. Furthermore, by coloring the back surface side of the snowman substrate 9220 in a color different from that of the front surface side, it is possible to give the player an impression different from that when only the light emitting body 9301 on the front surface side emits light. Note that the same effect can be expected by arranging light emitters 9301 of the same color as the snowman substrate 9220 but of different emission colors. With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the light emission mode of the accessory and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

As shown in FIG. 480, an opening is provided in the hat portion of the snowman role object 9200, and a code for transmitting power or a signal is inserted into the snowman substrate 9220 housed inside the snowman role object 9200. There is. Various effects are executed by causing the light-emitting body (LED) 9301 arranged on the snowman board 9220 to emit light according to the supplied power and a signal from the effect control device.

Further, as described above, the hat portion of the snowman accessory 9200 is colored (for example, red) and has transparency. The transparency of the hat portion is lower than that of the other parts of the snowman role object 9200, and it is difficult to visually recognize the inside. Therefore, a connector 9304 arranged on the snowman board 9220, a cord connected to the connector 9304, and the like are arranged on the hat portion to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize them.

The cover member 9210 (front cover member 9210a) is provided with a transparent portion B9211b having different transparency at a portion corresponding to the eyes of a snowman when the player looks from the front.
The other transmissive portions except the cap portion are transmissive portions A9211a. In the present embodiment, the transmissive portion B9211b is configured such that the inside of the snowman role object 9200 is visually recognized in a blurred state with aberrations remaining, like a soft focus (soft focus) lens. Therefore, the outlines of the electronic components arranged on the snowman board 9220 housed inside the snowman role object 9200 can be blurred and visually recognized.

Further, as shown in FIG. 483, in this embodiment, electronic components (resistors 9302) are collectively arranged on the snowman board 9220 corresponding to the portions corresponding to the eyes of the snowman role object 9200. The resistors 9302 are black electronic components and are densely arranged in a circle. When the player looks at the snowman role object 9200 during the game, the outline of the electronic component is blurred by being visually recognized through the transparent portion B9211b. As a result, the electronic components (resistors 9302) that are aggregated and arranged on the substrate are recognized as black eyes of a snowman, and a decorative element can be formed.

In addition, regarding the part number of the electronic part (the part number silk-printed such as “R1”), it is identified by the same color as the resist of the snowman substrate 9220, which is the same color as the yellow of the resist on the snowman substrate 9220, and silk-printed. There is. In the present embodiment, since the resistors are printed densely like the resistor 9302, the resistors are identifiable, and the densely printed portions serve to reflect light.

Note that in the present embodiment, the electronic component part number (the silk-printed part number such as “R1”) may also be silk-printed in black like the resistor. As described above, due to the effect of the lens, both the resistor 9302 and the resistor 9302 can be recognized as eyes of a snowman.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 484, an electronic component (IC9303) that does not form a decorative element on the back surface side of the snowman board 9220 and on the outer side when the snowman role object 9200 is installed on the game board 5. Etc.) are arranged. This makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize an electronic component having a low decoration effect or a possibility of reducing the decoration effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game due to a reduction in the effect of the effect. .. At this time, by pointing the snowman board 9220 to the center side of the game machine, it is possible to make the electronic components arranged on the back side more difficult to visually recognize.

Here, the configuration of the snowman accessory 9200 will be described focusing on the cover members 9210 (the front cover member 9210a and the rear cover member 9210b). The front surface side cover member 9210a and the rear surface side cover member 9210b need not be evenly divided in the front and rear direction. For example, one of the front surface side cover member 9210a may be formed rearward beyond the snowman substrate 9220. Good. An example in which one (inside) of the front cover member 9210a is formed rearward over the snowman substrate 9220 will be described below with reference to FIG. 485.

FIG. 485 is a view of the cross section in the horizontal direction of the snowman accessory 9200 of the present embodiment, as seen from above. As shown in FIG. 485, when the inner cover member of the front side cover member 9210a is formed so as to extend rearward beyond the side surface of the snowman board 9220, most of the appearance of the snowman role object 9200 visually recognized by the player is obtained. Is composed of the front surface side cover member 9210a. As a result, the attachment position of the front surface side cover member 9210a to the back surface side cover member 9210b (the joint between the front surface side cover member 9210a and the rear surface side cover member 9210b) is on the rear side of the snowman substrate 9220, and thus the decorativeness is high. It is possible to realize a character.

In addition, since the colorless and transparent (or substantially colorless and transparent) front side cover member 9210a extends to the rear of the snowman substrate 9220, the snowman substrate 9220 colored in white (specific color) is not only the front surface but also the back surface of the snowman substrate 9200. To white. Although it is desirable that both sides are white as in the present embodiment, since the player mainly visually recognizes from the front side, only the front side may be white.

Also, in FIG. 485, only the inner cover member of the front side cover member 9210a extends rearward beyond the snowman substrate 9220, but only the outer side extends rearward of the substrate depending on the decoration used. It is also possible to adopt a mode that extends to the rear side of the substrate on both the inside and the outside.

Further, a configuration for attaching each component of the accessory or attaching the accessory to the game board will be described. In the snowman accessory 9200 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 485, the snowman board 9220 is mounted by the board mounting portion 9213 and the mounting member 9214 formed on the back surface side cover member 9210b. At this time, the board mounting portion 9213 is preferably provided outside the snowman role object 9200, which is difficult for the player to visually recognize. Further, the front surface side cover member 9210a is attached to the back surface side cover member 9210b by a cover attaching portion (not shown), but like the board attaching portion 9213, the cover attaching portion is preferably provided outside the snowman accessory 9200. Further, the back surface side cover member 9210b is attached to a structure of the game board 5 (not shown), and like the board attachment portion 9213, the attachment portion to the structure is preferably provided outside the snowman role product 9200. In this way, by arranging the mounting portion of each component of the accessory or the mounting portion of the accessory and the game board 5 on the outside that is difficult for the player to see, it is possible to prevent the decorativeness of the accessory from being impaired. You can

The visibility is not limited to the outside of the accessory, but is also difficult to see by the player (for example, a portion made of a colored member (the hat portion in the snowman accessory 9200 of this embodiment), a lens cut for decoration, etc.) By providing a mounting portion at a position where the character is lowered, a position where the character shape is bent (a boundary portion between the head and the body in the snowman character object 9200 of the present embodiment), etc. Can be suppressed.

In the example shown in FIG. 485, the front cover member 9210a and the rear cover member 9210b constitute the snowman role object 9200, but as shown in FIG. 486, one cover member 9210 forms the shape of a snowman. You may do it. FIG. 486 is a top view of a horizontal cross section of a snowman accessory 9200 according to a modification of the present embodiment.

In the modification shown in FIG. 486, the cover member 9210 and the snowman board 9220 are attached to the game board 5 via the base body 9230. Also in this modification, as in the example shown in FIG. 485, it is preferable that both surfaces of the snowman substrate 9220 are white, but only the front surface side may be white.

In this modification, not only the inner cover member extends rearward beyond the snowman board 9220 but also extends rearward beyond the base body 9230, so that not only the snowman board 9220 but also the base body 9230 are provided to the player. Will be visible from. Therefore, in the present modification, the base body 9230 can also be configured as a decoration by using the same specific color (for example, white) as the snowman substrate 9220. As to the attachment of the cover member 9210 and the snowman board 9220 to the base body 9230, as described above, the attachment portion is provided at a location that is difficult for the player to visually recognize, and the attachment is performed by the attachment member or the like. It is possible to prevent the decorativeness from being impaired.

In this modification, only the inner side of the cover member 9210 extends rearward beyond the snowman substrate 9220 and the base body 9230, but the outer side of the cover member depends on the decoration of the accessory used. It is also possible to adopt a mode that extends behind the substrate or base body or a mode that extends to the rear side of the substrate or base body both inside and outside.

[34-6. Effects, etc.]
Generally, an electronic circuit board has a raw plate of a basic size, and the cost greatly depends on how many substrates can be taken from one raw plate based on this raw plate. Although it is designed in a quadrangular shape in a very simple way, the snowman substrate 9220 of the snowman role object 9200 of the present embodiment has a very rich design. In other words, it can be said that all the elements that compose the substrate, from the resist and the color of the substrate to the electronic parts, are used as the decorative performance of the accessory.

Note that the character accessory substrate 9120 of the character accessory described above has a substantially rectangular shape. Although it has a shape that fits in a simpler design than the snowman board 9220, it can be said that the cover body that covers the board has more functions for having a design.

As described above, inside the accessory seen in recent years, not only the light-emitting body (LED) but also the substrate on which the electronic circuit including the electronic parts for controlling the light-emitting body is formed is almost in the shape of the accessory. It is equipped together. In the first place, the substrate on which the electronic circuit is formed has a wiring that electrically connects the electronic component and the electronic component that form the electronic circuit, and a protective film is formed on the substrate surface to prevent the wiring from being oxidized. It is covered with resist).

Therefore, as a color of the accessory, attention is paid to the color of the resist as the protective film, that is, the color of the substrate. However, when the front side is provided with the transmissive portion, the electronic effect mounted on the substrate may be visually recognized from the transmissive portion, which may reduce the decorative effect as the accessory. As illustrated in the object 9100 and the snowman role object 9200, the color of the board is colored, and further, all the elements constituting the board and the mounted electronic parts themselves are used as the decorative elements to prevent the reduction of the decorative effect, and thus the game. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest of the user.

In a gaming machine, a plurality of boards on which electronic components are mounted are mounted. Of these, the main board and the payout control board provided on the back side of the gaming machine are generally housed in a colorless and transparent case, and their inspection and confirmation are easy. On the other hand, in the light-emitting decorative substrate used for the movable or non-movable decorative member mounted on the game board panel, the surface facing the player side is a lens that reflects and scatters light from the light-emitting decorative substrate. Members and the like are provided, and are attached to the game board panel on the rear side in a state of facing the effect display device attached to the game board panel. Further, on the rear surface side of the light emitting decoration substrate, a connector for connecting a flat cable for receiving a control signal or the like from the peripheral control means, a control element, a driver, a resistor, a capacitor, etc. in order to realize the function of light emitting decoration. The electronic components of are mounted. When such a game machine is installed in a game store, it is difficult to confirm whether or not there is a defect in the electronic component mounted on the rear surface of the light-emitting decoration board in the installed game machine. .. This is because the rear surface of the light-emitting decoration substrate faces the surface forming the display area of the effect display device. Therefore, means for solving such a problem will be described below.

FIG. 487 is a diagram showing the entire game board 5 in this embodiment. The game board 5 includes a game panel 1100 made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin and a game board side effect display device 1600.
In addition, the game panel 1100 includes a game area 5a, a rail member 5950, and a game panel opening 1100a. The game panel opening 1100a is formed by forming a punched physical opening in the game panel 1100. On the front side of the game board side effect display device 1600, a space is formed between the game panel 1100 and a plurality of character objects are arranged in layers in this space. Specifically, from the front side, at a position close to the back surface of the game panel 1100, the board back weed part 6800, the first giant tree part 6600, the second giant tree part 6650, the first cloud part 6700, the second A cloud character 6750 is provided. The first giant tree component 6600 is composed of a first giant tree trunk substrate 6610 and a first giant tree leaf substrate 6630, and the second giant tree component 6650 is composed of a second giant tree trunk substrate 6660 and a second giant tree leaf substrate 6680. There is. Further, a first grass role object 6470 and a second grass role object 6475 are provided behind them, a rabbit role object 6000 is provided behind them, and a mountain role object 6500 is provided behind them, and a mountain role object 6500 is provided. A game board side effect display device 1600 is provided behind 6500. By thus arranging a plurality of accessories in layers, it is possible to give a sense of depth.

FIG. 488(A) is a front view of the rabbit accessory 6000. FIG. 488(B) is a perspective view of the rabbit accessory 6000. FIG. 488(C) is an exploded perspective view of the rabbit accessory 6000. The rabbit accessory 6000 is configured as a unit by a face cover portion 6010 on the front side, a face substrate 6020 provided on the back side of the face cover portion 6010, and a body portion 6030. The face substrate 6020 has a first face light emitting unit 6023a and a second face light emitting unit 6023b as the face light emitting unit 6023 on the front surface. Further, the face substrate 6020 has a mouth ornament portion 6024 having a shape simulating a rabbit mouth. The left and right front legs of the rabbit are imitated on the vertical bottom surface of the face cover portion 6010, and the first arm portion 6016 and the second arm portion 6017 made of white opaque synthetic resin are attached. Further, at the lower end of the face substrate 6020, a body portion 6030, which is a plate-shaped member made of white opaque synthetic resin, is provided, which is similar to the body portion of a rabbit.

FIG. 489(A) is a front view of the face substrate 6020. FIG. 489(B) is a rear view of the face substrate 6020. The face board 6020 is a plate-shaped member formed of a printed board, and the front surface and the rear surface of the face board 6020 are entirely covered with a white protective film for protecting an electric circuit provided on the surface. .. Further, on the front surface side of the face substrate 6020, the LEDs forming the first face light emitting portion 6023a and the LED forming the second face light emitting portion 6023b are provided, and on the rear surface side of the face substrate 6020, the control element 6025, the driver 6026, the first The resistors 6027a to 6027f, the first capacitor 6028a, the second capacitor 6028b, and the connector 6029 are surface-mounted.

As shown in FIG. 489(A), the face substrate 6020 has a horizontally long rectangular shape, and two rectangular portions extend upward as a first ear portion 6021 and a second ear portion 6022 on the rectangular upper side. It has a shaped shape. The horizontally long rectangular portion imitates the face of a rabbit, and the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 imitate the rabbit ear. When the face cover 6010 is attached to the face substrate 6020, the first ear 6021 and the second ear 6022 are not covered by the face cover 6010, and the face substrate 6020 is exposed.

Each of the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 has a first ear decoration portion 6021a and a second ear decoration portion 6022a which imitate the inside of a rabbit ear. The first ear decoration portion 6021a and the second ear decoration portion 6022a are formed by printing with brown ink on the white protective film on the front surface of the face substrate 6020, and are regions visible in brown. ing. In addition, in the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022, regions other than the first ear decoration portion 6021a and the second ear decoration portion 6022a are covered with the white protective film described above. Also, electronic components such as the control element 6025 are not mounted on the front and rear surfaces of the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022, and the printed circuit board is used only for decoration. ..

The face substrate 6020 is provided with a first face light emitting unit 6023a and a second face light emitting unit 6023b. Specifically, the first face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b are each configured by an LED mounted on the front surface of the face substrate 6020. The first face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b can emit light under the control of the peripheral control board 1510, which will be described in detail later.

The face substrate 6020 is provided with a mouth decoration 6024. Specifically, the mouth decoration 6024 is formed by printing with pink ink on the white protective film on the front surface of the face substrate 6020, and the shape imitating the mouth of a rabbit can be visually recognized in pink. Has become. The front surface of the face substrate 6020 is configured such that the first ear decoration portion 6021a and the second ear decoration portion 6022a are brown, the mouth decoration portion 6024 is pink, and the other areas are white.

FIG. 489(B) is a diagram showing the rear surface side of the face substrate 6020. As described above, the entire rear surface of the face substrate 6020 is also covered with the white protective film for protecting the circuit, like the front face of the face substrate 6020. The first face light emitting portion 6023a and the second face light emitting portion 6023b are provided on the left and right above the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 at positions corresponding to the first face light emitting portion 6023a and the second face light emitting portion 6023b provided on the front surface side. The dotted line indicating the mounting location of "," and the character strings "LED1" and "LED2" indicating the mounted member names are formed by printing with black ink on the white protective film. .. A driver 6026 is surface-mounted between the character string “LED1” and the character string “LED2”. A character string “DR1” is formed under the driver 6026 by printing with black ink on a white protective film.

A capacitor 6028 (first capacitor 6028a and second capacitor 6028b) is surface-mounted between the dotted line showing the mounting location of the first face light emitting section 6023a and the dotted line showing the mounting location of the second face light emitting section 6023b. Further, the character strings “C1” and “C2” are formed by printing with black ink on the white protective film corresponding to the first capacitor 6028a and the second capacitor 6028b.

A resistor 6027 (first resistor 6027a to sixth resistor 6027f) is surface-mounted on the lower left side of the rear surface of the face substrate 6020. Further, the character strings "R1" to "R6" are formed by printing with black ink on the white protective film corresponding to the first resistor 6027a to the sixth resistor 6027f.

A control element 6025 including a microcomputer is surface-mounted on the right side of the region where the resistor 6027 is mounted. Further, a character string “IC1” corresponding to the control element 6025 is formed by printing with black ink on a white protective film. The control element 6025 drives the driver 6026 based on a control signal from the peripheral control board 1510, and performs lighting control of the LED forming the first face light emitting unit 6023a and the LED forming the second face light emitting unit 6023b.

A connector 6029 is surface-mounted on the lower right side of the rear surface of the face substrate 6020. Further, a character string “CN1” corresponding to the connector 6029 is formed by printing with black ink on a white protective film. A control signal from the peripheral control board 1510 is transmitted to the control element 6025 via the connector 6029, and power from the power supply board 931 is supplied to the face board 6020. The electric power supplied to the face substrate 6020 via the connector 6029 is supplied to the control element 6025, the driver 6026, the LEDs forming the first face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b, and the like.

The control element 6025, the driver 6026, the resistor 6027, the capacitor 6028, and the connector 6029 are each provided with a black main body portion and a metal terminal portion. Further, the control terminal 6025, the driver 6026, the resistor 6027, the capacitor 6028, and the metal terminal portion of the connector 6029 are surface-mounted on the face substrate 6020 by soldering. In FIG. 489(B), the main body portions of these electronic components are shown in black, and the metal terminals and solder included in these electronic components are shown in white.

FIG. 490 is a perspective view of the face cover unit 6010. The face cover portion 6010 has a box shape with an open rear, and is made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The face cover portion 6010 includes a face cover portion front surface portion 6011 that forms a front surface, a face cover portion upper surface portion 6012 that forms an upper surface, a face cover portion right surface portion 6013 that forms a right surface, and a face cover portion that forms a lower surface. The lower surface portion 6014 and the left surface portion 6015 of the face cover portion constituting the left surface.

As shown in FIGS. 488 to 490, the first face light scattering unit 6011a and the second face light scattering unit 6011a imitating the eyes of a rabbit are provided on the front surface side of the face cover front surface portion 6011 forming the front surface of the face cover portion 6010. A face light scattering unit 6011b is provided. The first face light scattering unit 6011a is provided at a position overlapping the first face light emitting unit 6023a provided on the front surface of the face substrate 6020 in a front view. Further, the second face light scattering portion 6011b is provided at a position overlapping the second face light emitting portion 6023b provided on the front surface of the face substrate 6020 in a front view. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 488(A), the first face light-scattering unit 6011a and the second face light-scattering unit 6011b are respectively viewed from the front side more than the first face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b. The outer shape of the first face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b in front view is surrounded by the first face light scattering unit 6011a and the second face light scattering unit 6011b, respectively. Is configured.

The first face light-scattering portion 6011a and the second face light-scattering portion 6011b are formed by forming a minute lens cut on the front surface side of the front face portion 6011 of the face cover portion or performing a processing to make it a satin-finished surface. When the light emitted from the portion 6023a or the second face light emitting portion 6023b is incident, it is formed by a rough surface that can diffusely reflect the light. In the face cover front surface portion 6011, the light other than the first face light scattering portion 6011a and the second face light scattering portion 6011b is incident on the light such as the first face light scattering portion 6011a and the second face light scattering portion 6011b. Is not provided, and the face substrate 6020 located in the rear is directly visible from the front. The rectangular portion forming the area excluding the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 on the face substrate 6020 and the rectangle forming the face cover portion 6010 have the same vertical and horizontal flows, and are exactly overlapped in a front view. It is provided in the position. The face substrate 6020 is screwed from the rear to screw holes provided in the face cover upper surface portion 6012, the face cover right surface portion 6013, the face cover lower surface portion 6014, the face cover left surface portion 6015, and the like. It is installed in.

The rear surface of the front face portion 6011 of the face cover portion and the face light emitting portion 6023 are provided at a predetermined interval (about 1-2 mm). With such a configuration, it becomes easy to radiate the heat generated in the face light emitting unit 6023, and it is possible to prevent the face light emitting unit 6023 from malfunctioning due to the heat generated by itself. Become. Note that, in another example, such a configuration may be adopted in the relationship between the light emitting unit and members such as a cover provided corresponding to the light emitting unit.

As described above, the rabbit accessory 6000 includes the face substrate 6020, the face cover portion 6010 that covers the front of the face substrate 6020, and the body portion 6030 provided at the lower end of the face substrate 6020. LEDs that function as the first face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b are surface-mounted on the front surface side of the face substrate 6020, and the face cover unit that constitutes the front surface side of the face cover unit 6010 that covers the front respectively. The first face light scattering unit 6011a and the second face light scattering unit 6011b provided on the front surface portion 6011 are configured to emit light. Further, electronic components such as a control element 6025, a driver 6026, a resistor 6027, a capacitor 6028, and a connector 6029 are surface-mounted on the rear surface of the face substrate 6020.

A flat cable (not shown) is connected to the connector 6029, and receives from the peripheral control board 1510 a control signal for driving an LED that constitutes the face light emitting unit 6023 mounted on the front surface of the face board 6020. Further, the flat cable supplies electric power for driving each electronic component mounted on the face substrate 6020. The control element 6025 controls the driver 6026 based on the control signal received from the peripheral control board 1510 to control the light emission mode of the LEDs forming the face light emission unit 6023.

The LED constituting the face light emitting unit 6023 is formed by encapsulating three LED chips capable of emitting red light, LED chips emitting green light, and LED chips emitting blue light with a colorless transparent resin. .. In addition, the LEDs that form the face light emitting unit 6023 are provided with three metal terminals that serve as anodes and three metal terminals that serve as cathodes of each LED chip. Further, a current flows from the driver 6026 to the anode of each LED chip, so that each LED chip can be brought into a light emitting state. Specifically, by controlling the current flowing through each LED chip by the driver 6026, it is possible to independently emit red, green, and blue.

Further, a resistor 6027 is provided between the circuits connecting the driver 6026 and the anode of each LED chip as a limiting resistor for adjusting the current flowing through the LED chip. Specifically, the first resistor 6027a to the third resistor 6027c form the driver 2026 and the face light emitting unit 6023b between the circuits that connect the anodes of the LED chips included in the driver 2026 and the LEDs that form the face light emitting unit 6023a. The fourth resistor 6027d to the sixth resistor 6027f are provided between the circuits connecting the anodes of the LED chips included in the LED. Thus, by providing the first resistor 6027a to the sixth resistor 6027f corresponding to the anode of each LED chip, the current flowing through each LED chip is adjusted, and if a short circuit occurs inside the LED, the circuit is overloaded. It prevents current from flowing.

In addition, the first capacitor 6028a is provided in a power supply terminal included in the control element 6025, and the second capacitor 6028b is provided in parallel with a power supply terminal included in the driver 6026 in an electric circuit manner, so that the control element 6025 and the driver 6026 can be stabilized. It has a function to operate.

The rabbit accessory 6000 is controlled so as to be moved by a drive mechanism (not shown) between a standby position below the front side of the game board side effect display device 1600 and a moving position near the center of the front side of the game board side effect display device 1600. It is possible to The drive mechanism is also controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. Then, the player is informed of a predetermined game content according to the moving mode and light emitting mode of the rabbit accessory 6000. For example, when the rabbit accessory 6000 is moved from the standby position to the movement position and the rabbit accessory 6000 is in the movement position, the first face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b mounted on the face substrate 6020 are Is turned on in red, and the first face-light-scattering unit 6011a and the second face-light-scattering unit 6011b are turned on in red, so that the changing state of the decorative pattern that is changing is stopped and displayed in a mode showing a big hit. It may be configured to indicate that the expectation is higher than usual. In addition, also in other embodiments, an example is shown in which a part of the accessory or a member constituting the accessory is movable, or the light emitting unit included in the accessory is controlled in a predetermined light emission mode. May be used as a staging, and the staging of the changing decorative pattern may be more likely than usual to be stopped and displayed in a mode showing a big hit depending on the staging.

As described above, in the light emitting decorative substrate (face substrate 6020) included in such a decorative member (rabbit accessory 6000), there is a possibility that a defect may occur in the light emitting function. For example, in the step of performing surface mounting on the printed circuit board that constitutes the face substrate 6020, the amount of solder on the solder surface is insufficient and electrical connection between the circuit on the printed circuit board and the electronic components to be mounted is not properly performed. In some cases, other components, tools, etc. may come into contact with the electronic components mounted on the back side of the printed circuit board during assembly in the factory, and the mounted electronic components may be lost. Further, there is a possibility that a failure may occur in the electronic component due to deterioration over time after the installation of the game machine in the game shop.

For example, in an LED that functions as a face light emitting unit 6023 capable of full-color light emission by causing the driver 6026 to emit three colors of red, blue, and green in multiple gradations, one of the six metal terminals is electrically connected. If the connection is lost, one of the three colors is intended to emit light in a controlled manner, but only two colors are actually emitted, and one color is emitted. With respect to, a non-light emitting state will occur. Such a state may occur when the LED chip fails and current does not flow, or when the resistor 6027 functioning as a limiting resistor is missing from the face substrate 6020 and the circuit is disconnected. ..
Such a situation may give the player playing the game the impression that the movable decorative member does not look good. In particular, when a plurality of LEDs are controlled to emit light of the same color, there is a possibility that only the defective LED emits light of a different emission color.
In addition, there is a risk of causing a situation in which the player misunderstands the degree of expectation of a big hit.

Further, the flat cable connected to the connector 6029 provided on the face substrate 6020 is repeatedly bent due to the repeated movement of the rabbit accessory 6000 as the movable decoration member, and the strength of the predetermined portion of the flat cable is deteriorated. It is possible to assume that the flat cable becomes disconnected and the signal transmission and the power supply to the rabbit accessory 6000 are not properly performed. Alternatively, it is possible to assume a situation in which the connector 6029 is damaged due to repeated stress on a part of the connector 6029 due to repeated movements of the rabbit accessory 6000. In this case, an unintended control signal is sent to the rabbit accessory 6000, an unintended light emission mode is shown to the player, or power is not completely supplied. In such a case, the face light emitting unit 6023 provided in the rabbit accessory 6000 does not take a lighting mode, and moves from the standby position to the moving position or from the moving position to the standby position in a light-off state. May look unattractive.

Therefore, in the present invention, when the gaming machine is turned off, the display area of the gaming board side effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized as black, and the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 located in front is reflected on the surface. It is configured to be reflected in the image. Specifically, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 may be configured to specularly reflect incident light. Alternatively, a colorless and transparent reflector (reflection sheet) is installed near the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 so as to cover the entire display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Then, the reflector may be configured to specularly reflect the incident light. With such a configuration, when there is any abnormality in the face substrate 6020 of the rabbit accessory 6000 located in front of the game board side effect display device 1600, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 located in the rear side. The contents of the abnormality can be confirmed by visually recognizing. Alternatively, it can be confirmed whether an abnormality has occurred.

FIG. 491(A) is a perspective view showing a state where the rabbit accessory 6000 is in the standby position. In FIG. 491(A), the rabbit role object 6000 is provided in the game machine so that the electronic components mounted on the face substrate 6020 included in the rabbit role object 6000 are reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. An example is shown.

In this example, the rabbit part 6000 is arranged on the front side of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the front face forming a display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the face substrate 6020 provided on the rabbit part object 6000. It is configured to be spaced apart from the back surface by a predetermined distance (specifically, about several cm). In the example shown in FIG. 491(A), a part of the driver 6026 mounted on the rear surface of the face board 6020 and the entire first resistor 6027a and second resistor 6027b are the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. It shows the state reflected in.

Note that FIG. 491(A) illustrates a state in which the rabbit accessory 6000 is viewed from the diagonally upper right, but the mounting manner of other electronic components can be viewed by looking in from another angle. For example, when the rabbit accessory 6000 is viewed from above in the center in the left-right direction, it is possible to view the entire driver 6026, the entire first capacitor 6028a, and the entire second capacitor 6028b. Alternatively, when the rabbit accessory 6000 is viewed obliquely from the upper left, it is possible to view the entire connector 6029 and the flat cable connected to the connector 6029. In this example, it is difficult to confirm the mounting mode of the control element 6025, the fifth resistor 6027e, and the sixth resistor 6027f, but this point will be described later.

FIG. 491(B) is a perspective view showing a state in which the rabbit accessory 6000 is in the standby position. In FIG. 491(B), the rabbit role object 6000 is provided in the game machine so that the electronic components mounted on the face substrate 6020 included in the rabbit role object 6000 are reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. It shows an example. In this example, it is difficult to visually recognize electronic components such as the control element 6025 and the first resistor 6027a to the sixth resistor 6027f mounted on the lower half of the rear surface of the face substrate 6020, and the entire driver 6026 and the first capacitor 6028a. It is possible to confirm the mounting mode only for a part and a part of the second capacitor 6028b. A method of visually recognizing the electronic components mounted on the lower half of the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 will be described later.

As described above, in the game machine in the power-off state, the back surface of the face substrate 6020 included in the rabbit accessory 6000 as the decoration means is configured to be reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. It is possible to check the status of the electronic components mounted on the back side of the face substrate 6020 even after the gaming machine is installed in the game store. Further, since the rear surface of the face board 6020 is covered with a white protective film and is visible in white, the face board 6020 reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 which is visible in black is visible. It is easy to do.

An example in which the entire surface and the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 are covered with a white protective film is shown, but the circuit on the face substrate 6020 is not limited to being white, and the circuit on the face substrate 6020 is configured to be covered. May be. As compared with the case where the dark color protective film is adopted, the difference between the light and dark is clear in the case where the light color protective film is adopted in the black display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Therefore, the face substrate 6020 reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is easily visible.

As a process of coloring the face substrate 6020, after forming a circuit structure by copper plating on a printed circuit board, a white protective agent is adopted as a protective agent for protecting the wiring structure, and a portion where a through hole is provided is provided. Except for this, it is desirable that a white protective film is formed by applying this protective agent to both surfaces of the printed circuit board to make the entire surface of the face substrate 6020 white. When a protective agent other than white is used as a protective agent for protecting the wiring structure, a white ink is applied onto the non-white protective agent so that the surface of the face substrate 6020 becomes white. You may.
Alternatively, by combining these aspects, a white protective agent is applied to form a protective film, and then white ink is applied onto the white protective film, so that the surface of the face substrate 6020 becomes whiter. It may be configured as follows. By forming the face substrate 6020 in this manner, the face substrate 6020 can be visually recognized in white. Note that the same method can be adopted when it is desired not only to make the substrate white but also to make it visible in other colors such as black and green. In another example, such a configuration may be adopted when the substrate has a specific color.
Although the example in which the entire surfaces of both faces of the face substrate 6020 are white has been shown, only a part of the face substrate 6020 may be colored in white, for example, only the entire rear face of the face substrate 6020 is white, or the face substrate 6020 is white. Only the predetermined area on the rear surface of which the electronic component is mounted may be white. In addition, by covering the back of the face substrate 6020 with a thin plate-shaped cover and providing a punched-out opening in this cover so that the electronic component whose mounting mode is to be confirmed can be visually confirmed, this opening is provided. Then, a specific electronic component for which it is desired to check the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 and the mounting mode may be reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. When a colorless and transparent cover is adopted as such a cover, light is diffusely reflected on the cover surface, and the visibility of electronic components mounted on the back surface of the face substrate 6020 is reduced. Further, when a colored and opaque cover is adopted as such a cover, the electronic components mounted on the back surface of the face substrate 6020 are hidden by the cover, and it becomes extremely difficult to confirm the mounting mode. .. Therefore, it is preferable to provide a punched opening so that at least a part of the electronic components mounted on the back surface of the face substrate 6020 can be seen. With such a configuration, the electronic component mounted on the back surface of the face substrate 6020 can be protected by the cover, and the electronic component to be mounted can be confirmed through the opening provided in the cover. it can. Further, by providing such an opening, heat generated from the electronic component mounted on the back surface of the face substrate 6020 can be released to the outside, and the mounted electronic component may be damaged or deteriorated by the heat. It is possible to suppress the occurrence. It should be noted that the electronic component may be configured so as not to jump out of the opening in a state where the electronic component projects rearward from the surface forming the back surface of the cover. The cover color may be black opaque or dark opaque. With such a configuration, it becomes easy to visually recognize the white face substrate 6020 exposed from the cover.

It is desirable that the color of the electronic component mounted on the face substrate 6020 has a difference in brightness from the color of the protective film that covers the face substrate 6020. Specifically, the color of the face substrate 6020 may be a bright color such as white or cream, and the color of the electronic component mounted on the face substrate 6020 may be a dark color such as black or dark blue. With such a configuration, the face substrate 6020 reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is easily visible with respect to the black display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Further, since the face board 6020 has a light color and the mounted electronic components have a dark color, the face board 6020 reflected on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is mounted on the face board 6020 and the face board 6020. The electronic components can be visually distinguished from each other.

The LED capable of emitting multicolor light is formed of a white member in order to increase the reflectance.
In this case, if the color of the face substrate 6020 is white or bright, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the mounting mode of the LED mounted on the rear surface of the face substrate 6020. In this way, when the electronic component to be mounted is white, the color of the face substrate 6020 may be black or dark. In this case, although the face board 6020 reflected on the game board side effect display device 1600 is difficult to see, the LEDs mounted on the face board 6020 are easily seen. Alternatively, a black or dark color ink may be applied to the mounted electronic component or the electronic component before being mounted to mount the electronic component on the white or light face board.

In the specification of the present application, white refers to a color that can be visually recognized when an object is irregularly and uniformly reflected (about 100 to 80%) with respect to visible light of all wavelengths of incident natural light. Further, the bright color refers to a color that is visible in, for example, a cream color or a light gray color by slightly absorbing a specific wavelength region and irregularly reflecting the remaining wavelength region. On the other hand, black refers to a color that an object uniformly absorbs most of the incident visible light of all wavelengths of natural light and becomes visible when a part (about 20 to several%) is diffusely reflected. There is. A dark color uniformly absorbs most of visible light of all wavelengths and diffuses only a part (about 20 to several%) of diffused light, but has a different light absorptivity in a specific wavelength range, and thus becomes black. It refers to a color that can be visually recognized as a close color, for example, dark blue.

The rabbit accessory 6000 shown in FIGS. 491(A) and 491(B) may be configured so that it can be manually moved from the standby position to the upper moving position. In this case, the rabbit accessory 6000 in the standby position is not made immovable by the lock mechanism when the power is cut off, and the game panel opening 1100a provided in the game panel 1100 is not provided with a so-called light guide plate. Is configured.

As a configuration for enabling the rabbit accessory 6000 to be manually moved, the immovable state will be described first. In general, when the movable decorative body is configured to be freely movable between the moving position and the standby position, when the movable decorative body is subjected to a large acceleration when the game machine is transported or installed in a game shop, etc. In addition, the movable ornament may be damaged. Therefore, a mechanism that locks the movable decorative body when it is in the standby position when the power is on is provided, and when the power is turned off when the movable decorative body is locked, the movable decorative body is locked by the lock mechanism. A method of immobilizing the body is considered. However, when such a lock mechanism is provided, it becomes difficult to move the rabbit accessory 6000 as a movable ornament by hand. Therefore, the rabbit accessory 6000 can be manually moved by configuring without providing such a lock mechanism.

Next, a light guide plate will be described as a configuration for enabling the rabbit accessory 6000 to be manually moved. The light guide plate is a plate-shaped decorative member that allows the player to visually recognize the manner in which the predetermined pattern is shining by diffusely reflecting the light incident from the side surface in the predetermined pattern provided on the surface. In addition, such a light emission pattern is configured to be visible to the player as a predetermined effect. However, if such a light guide plate is provided in the game panel opening 1100a provided in the game panel 1100, it becomes difficult or impossible to move the rabbit accessory 6000 as a movable ornament by hand. Therefore, the rabbit accessory 6000 can be manually moved by configuring such a game panel opening 1100a so as not to provide such a light guide plate.

With such a configuration, at the time of power interruption, a store clerk can directly move the rabbit accessory 6000 by hand through the game panel opening 1100a provided in the game panel 1100, and the face substrate It is possible to reflect a different area on the rear surface of 6020 in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 491(A), after the rabbit accessory 6000 is moved upward by hand, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is visually recognized so as to look into the rabbit accessory 6000 from below. This makes it easy to confirm the mounting mode of the control element 6025, the fifth resistor 6027e, and the sixth resistor 6027f, which were difficult to visually recognize until then. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 491(B), by moving the rabbit accessory 6000 upward by hand, the control element 6025 mounted on the lower half of the rear surface of the face substrate 6020, which was invisible until then, The electronic components such as the first resistor 6027a to the sixth resistor 6027f can be visually recognized.

Although the example in which the light guide plate is not provided in the game panel opening 1100a provided in the game panel 1100 is shown, when the light guide plate is provided in the game panel opening 1100a, the entire game panel opening 1100a is covered with the light guide plate. Instead, it may be configured to cover only a part of the game panel opening 1100a. Specifically, when the standby position of the rabbit role object 6000 is in the lower front of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the moving position of the rabbit role object 6000 is in the center front of the game board side effect display device 1600, The light plate may be arranged so that only the upper half of the game panel opening 1100a is covered. As described above, even if the light guide plate is provided, the game panel opening 1100a is not partially covered by the light guide plate, so that the function and effect of the rabbit are achieved by the light guide plate. By manually moving 6000, it is possible to achieve both of the functions of changing the reflection area of the face board 6020 with respect to the game board side effect display device 1600.

Although an example in which the area in which the face substrate 6020 is reflected is changed by directly moving the rabbit accessory 6000 with a hand has been shown, it is guided so that the hand cannot be inserted in the area not covered with the light guide plate in the game panel opening 1100a. The light board may be larger, in which case the rabbit accessory may be moved by an article smaller than the hand. For example, the rod-shaped member 6000 can be moved by inserting a rod-shaped member having a diameter of about 5 mm or a thin plate-shaped member having a width of 1 cm and a thickness of about 1 mm into a region of the game panel opening 1100a which is not covered by the light guide plate. It may be configured as follows. In this case, the area of the game panel opening 1100a that is not covered by the light guide plate may be of a size such that such a rod-shaped member or a plate-shaped member can be inserted. It suffices if an opening having a length of about 0.0 cm and a length of about 1.0 cm is provided. With such a configuration, the area of the game panel opening 1100a covered by the light guide plate can be increased, and the area in which the effect using the light guide plate can be produced can be increased.

If the rabbit accessory 6000 in the standby position is not equipped with a lock mechanism that makes it immovable when the power is cut off, and if the light guide plate is not provided in the game panel opening 1100a, the store clerk hands or slenders it. Although the example in which the rabbit accessory 6000 can be directly moved by the member is shown, when the accessory at the standby position is locked by the lock mechanism when the power is cut off, or the gaming panel opening 1100a is completely covered. When the light guide plate is provided as described above, the rabbit accessory 6000 cannot be manually moved, and the area in which the face board 6020 is reflected is changed with respect to the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. I can't. Such a problem is a big problem in an example in which the electronic component mounted on the rear surface of the face board 6020 is not reflected at all or almost in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 when the rabbit accessory is in the standby position. Becomes

Therefore, in such an example, by turning off the power switch provided in the gaming machine during the initial check of the movable decorative body that is executed when the power is turned on, the control unit and the drive unit of the gaming machine are turned off. If you forcibly create a state where power is not supplied to the power switch, the movable decorations at positions other than the standby position do not return to the standby position by their own weight, and the power switch is turned off or the power switch It may be configured to stop at a position that is slightly moved by its own weight from the position where is turned off. Specific examples are shown below.

At the time of the initial check, first, the lock of the rabbit role object 6000 in the standby position is released by the lock mechanism to change from the immovable state to the movable state, and then the rabbit role object 6000 starts moving to the upper moving position. To do. After the rabbit character 6000 completes its movement to the upper movement position, it stays at the movement position for a predetermined time (about 2 seconds) and then starts moving to the lower waiting position, after which the rabbit character 6000 waits. After stopping at the position, the lock mechanism changes the movable state to the immovable state, and the initial check ends. Even when the game is started and the rabbit role object 6000 is moved as an effect according to a start winning or the like, first, the rabbit role object 6000 in the standby position becomes the movable state from the immovable state, and then the rabbit role object 6000. Is controlled in a predetermined movement mode between the standby position and the movement position, and then the rabbit character product 6000 is controlled to be moved to the standby position, and then the rabbit character product 6000 is changed from the unlocked state to the locked state. And

In the gaming machine having such a configuration, by intentionally causing the power failure state, the clerk does not directly move the rabbit accessory 6000 by hand, and the rabbit accessory 6000 is mounted on the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 of the rabbit 6000. It is possible to reflect the electronic components that are present in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. In addition, at the time of the initial check, the rabbit character 6000 is configured to stay at the moving position for a predetermined time. Therefore, the rabbit character 6000 is forcibly turned off when the rabbit character 6000 stays at the moving position. Can be stopped at the moving position as it is, and the timing of turning off the power switch provided in the gaming machine to be in the power-off state does not become severe. Further, since it is possible to stop the rabbit accessory 6000 at a predetermined position, it is possible to pattern the confirmation operation of the face substrate 6020.

In addition, in the initial check, in addition to staying at the moving position for a predetermined time, when moving from the standby position to the moving position, a predetermined position between the standby position and the moving position (for example, an intermediate position between the waiting position and the moving position) At the position), the rabbit accessory 6000 stays for a predetermined time (about 2 seconds) and then moves to the moving position. When the rabbit accessory 6000 is at the predetermined position, the power switch provided on the gaming machine is turned off to turn off the power. In this case, the rabbit accessory 6000 may be configured to stay in a predetermined position. With such a configuration, the rabbit accessory 6000 can be easily stopped at different positions, and the electronic components reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized from different angles. Becomes Further, since it is possible to stop the rabbit accessory 6000 at a predetermined position, it is possible to pattern the confirmation operation of the face substrate 6020.

The example in which the rabbit accessory 6000 stays at the moving position or the predetermined position for a predetermined time at the time of the initial check has been shown. The first face light-emitting unit 6023a and the second face light-emitting unit 6023b included in may be configured to be turned on in a predetermined manner. Alternatively, at the start of the initial check, the rabbit accessory 6000 is in the standby position and is configured to turn on the first face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b in a predetermined mode before starting to move to the moving position. You may. For example, as a light emitting mode, the first face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b may be turned on in the same color. Further, it is desirable that the emission color at this time be white. With such a configuration, the clerk can confirm whether the first face light emitting unit 6023a or the second face light emitting unit 6023b has a normal light emitting state. It is possible to confirm what kind of abnormality has occurred by visually checking the back surface side of the face substrate 6020 with the gaming machine in which the accessory 6000 is at the predetermined position or the moving position being in the power-off state. In addition, it is possible to promptly identify the cause of the abnormality when the player complains about the light emission mode.

Although the example in which the first face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b are turned on in the same color has been shown, three or more face light emitting units 6023 may be provided, and each face light emitting unit 6023 may be configured to emit light in the same color. Further, it is preferable that the emission color at this time includes at least white. With such a configuration, when one of the resistors provided corresponding to the plurality of face light emitting units 6023 is missing, one face light emitting unit 6023 is different from the other face light emitting units 6023. It emits different colors (for example, if the resistor provided in series with the LED chip capable of emitting green light is missing, the LED can emit only blue and red, which is a mixture of these colors. Since the mode of emitting light in reddish purple can be visually recognized.) Therefore, it is possible to easily identify the face light emitting portion having a defect by the color of the emitted light.

When the power failure state is forcibly generated, the rabbit accessory 6000 is located in a state where it is not in the standby position. When the power is turned on in such a state, the rabbit accessory 6000 may be temporarily moved to the standby position, and then the initial operation check described above may be restarted from the beginning. With such a configuration, it is possible to stop the rabbit accessory 6000 at an appropriate position where the back surface of the face substrate 6020 is easily visible.

Various modes are conceivable for the aspect of the rabbit accessory 6000 itself, the moving aspect of the rabbit accessory 6000, and the positional relationship between the rabbit accessory 6000 and the game board side effect display device 1600. A plurality of examples will be shown below.

FIG. 492 shows an example of the rabbit accessory 6000. In this embodiment, the area of the face board 6020 reflected in the game board side effect display device 1600 is changed by moving the rabbit accessory from the lower standby position to the upper moving position. In this example, the face cover portion 6010 and the face substrate 6020 constitute the rabbit accessory 6000, which is movable between the standby position and the moving position, but the body portion 6030 is a game panel. It is configured so as not to move with respect to 1100. FIG. 492(A) shows a state in which the rabbit accessory 6000 is in the standby position, and in this state, only the upper half of the back surface of the face substrate 6020 is reflected in the game board side effect display device 1600. .. Also, regarding the control element 6025, the fifth resistor 6027e, and the sixth resistor 6027f, since the body portion 6030 is located immediately behind these electronic components, they are not reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. FIG. 492(B) shows a state in which the rabbit accessory 6000 is in the moving position, and in this state, almost the entire back surface of the face board is reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. There is.

It should be noted that when the rabbit accessory 6000 is in the standby position, the rabbit accessory 6000 may be slowly rotated about the front-rear direction by a drive mechanism (not shown). Alternatively, when the rabbit accessory 6000 is at the standby position, the rabbit accessory 6000 may be manually rotated about the front-rear direction. With such a configuration, the control element 6025, the fifth resistor 6027e, and the sixth resistor 6027f, which are originally located below the face substrate 6020 and whose mounting form is difficult to confirm, are extremely easy to visually recognize. Become.

FIG. 493 shows an example of the rabbit accessory 6000. In this embodiment, the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 are provided separately from the face substrate 6020 which constitutes the rabbit accessory 6000. The first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 have a vertically long rectangular shape. When the rabbit accessory 6000 is operating, the face cover portion 6010 and the face substrate 6020 do not move, but the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 move to the upper moving position, thereby performing a predetermined effect. Will be done.

FIG. 493(A) shows a state in which the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 are in the standby position. In this state, the game board side effect display device 1600 has the first ear portion 6021 and Only a part of the electronic component mounted on the back surface of the face substrate 6020 in a state of being hidden by the second ear portion 6022 is reflected. FIG. 493(B) shows a state in which the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 are in the moving position. In this state, the game board side effect display device 1600 has almost the back surface of the face substrate 6020. The whole area is reflected. In this way, by moving a member between the member whose electronic component mounting state is desired to be confirmed and the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the visual recognition mode of the member whose electronic component mounting state is desired to be confirmed is changed. Is possible. In addition, in the other examples, the aspects of the rabbit accessory 6000 are described, but these aspects may be applied to the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 in the example shown in FIG. 493.

FIG. 494 shows an example of the rabbit accessory 6000. In this embodiment, the body portion 6030 of the rabbit accessory 6000 is vertically long. When the rabbit accessory 6000 is in the standby position, the body portion 6030 makes the electronic components mounted on the rear surface of the rabbit accessory 6000 invisible, and when the rabbit accessory 6000 is in the moving position, the body portion is not visible. The rabbit accessory 6000 will be located above 6030. In this state, the game board side effect display device 1600 is configured so that almost the entire back surface of the face substrate 6020 is reflected.

Although the area of the face cover portion 6010 of the rabbit accessory 6000 does not change in the above-described embodiments, the member corresponding to the face cover portion 6010 is made of an opaque member in the state of moving to the moving position. Along with the game panel 1100, the movable decorative member, which is expanded in the horizontal direction to increase the area when viewed from the front, increases the area when viewed from the front, thereby increasing the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. A situation may occur in which it is difficult to visually recognize the reflection of the substrate on the display area. Therefore, when such a movable decoration member is adopted, the area in front view may be manually reduced in a state where the power is forcibly cut off during the initial check. Alternatively, the state before the area when viewed from the front is increased is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, about 2 seconds) so that the area viewed from the front does not become large when moving to the movement position during the initial check. After that, the area when viewed from the front may be increased. With such a configuration, it becomes easy to confirm the reflection of the face board 6020 in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 when the power is cut off.

An example has been shown in which the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 is reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. On the other hand, it is not preferable for the player to visually recognize the state in which the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 is reflected. For example, when an effect of darkening almost the entire display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is executed as an effect indicating that the jackpot expectation is high, an electronic device mounted on the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 by the player. Since the parts are visually recognized, there is a risk that the player will be in an awkward state instead of trying to get excited by executing the effect. Further, the decorative pattern is stopped in a manner showing a gap after the reach state is formed, when a so-called reach deviation occurs, for the purpose of dividing the game, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 Even when an effect of darkening almost the entire surface is executed, the electronic components mounted on the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 are visually recognized by the player, and when the player is out of reach, which is unfortunate for the player, Furthermore, there is a risk that the player will be in a humorous state.

Therefore, when the rabbit accessory 6000 is located at the standby position at the timing of performing the effect of darkening almost the entire display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, it is possible to see such a reflection. It is advisable to adopt a configuration that suppresses it. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 493, the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 are located in the middle of the display areas of the face substrate 6020 and the game board side effect display device 1600, so that the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6021 The face substrate 6020 is hidden from the ear portion 6022 and is suppressed from being reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 494, the body portion 6030 is located at an intermediate position between the display areas of the face substrate 6020 and the game board side effect display device 1600, so that it is hidden by these members and the game board side effect display device 1600 is hidden. The reflection of the face substrate 6020 on the display area is suppressed.

In the example shown in FIG. 492, in the case of performing an effect of darkening almost the entire display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the driver 6026, the first capacitor 6028a, the second capacitor 6028b, etc. are provided to the player. There is a risk of being visually recognized. Therefore, by performing some display only in the lower front of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player is cheerful in accordance with the effect of darkening the display area. Becomes On the lower front side of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, for example, a decorative pattern may be displayed, the number of holdings may be displayed, or the holding image indicating the jackpot expectation degree related to the change may be displayed. .. In this case, the color of the image may be darker or the size of the image may be smaller than in the case of displaying the decorative pattern, the number of held images, or the held image. Further, these may not be displayed statically but may be displayed dynamically like animation. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the reflection that occurs in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 inconspicuous during the game.

After the dark effect is started, the rabbit accessory 6000 is moved from the standby position shown in FIG. 492(A) to the movement position shown in FIG. 492(B) while the dark effect is being performed. The first ear portion 6021 and the first ear portion 6022 are moved from the standby position shown in FIG. 493(A) to the movement position shown in FIG. 493(B), or from the standby position shown in FIG. 494(A) to FIG. 494(B). The rabbit accessory 6000 may be moved to the movement position shown in FIG.
However, in this case, the electronic components mounted on the back side of the face substrate 6020 are easily visible.

Therefore, when performing the effect of moving the rabbit role object 6000 from the lower standby position to the upper movement position, an area overlapping the rabbit role object 6000 in a front view in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. You may comprise so that a glare control image which suppresses glare may be displayed. In this way, when the rabbit accessory 6600 moves, it is difficult or impossible to visually recognize the reflection of the face board 6020 in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. By displaying in the display area of the device 1600, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player is entertained.

The size of the reflection suppressing image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is the same size as the rabbit character 6000 in front view, or one size (1-2 cm) larger than the rabbit character. In the front view, the outline of the reflection suppressing image and the outline of the rabbit accessory 6000 are completely overlapped with each other, or about 1-2 mm around the rabbit accessory in the front view, the reflection suppressing image is displayed in a manner protruding. Good to do. Further, the reflection-reduced image may be formed in white or bright color. By making the color white or bright, it is possible to make the reflection less noticeable. The reflection-reduced image may be configured by using black or dark color in addition to white or bright color. Further, the reflection-reduced image may be an image that is dynamically displayed.

The timing of starting the display of the glare suppression image may be before the start of the darkening effect, at the start of the darkening effect, or when the rabbit role object 6000 starts moving during the darkening effect. When the rabbit accessory 6000 is moved from the standby position to the moving position, it is preferable that the reflection suppressing image is also moved while maintaining the positional relationship with the rabbit accessory 6000. It is advisable to display the glare-reduced image until the dark effect is completed. For example, when the rabbit accessory 6000 is stopped at the standby position during the darkening effect, it is preferable to continue displaying the glare suppression image. After that, even when the rabbit accessory 6000 returns from the standby position to the moving position, it is preferable to continue to display the glare suppression image as long as the darkening effect is performed.

It is to be noted that a plurality of such glare suppression image modes are prepared, different jackpot expectations are assigned to the glare suppression image modes, and one of the glare suppression images is displayed when the rabbit character moves. Then, it may be configured to function as an effect that suggests the jackpot expectation. For example, blue and red may be prepared as the colors of the reflection-suppressing image, and the red reflection-suppressing image may be configured to indicate that the expectation of a big hit is higher. In this case, the player also pays attention to the display mode of the reflection-suppressed image itself, so that even if the electronic component is slightly reflected, it is possible to make it difficult for such reflection to be noticed. ..

Although the point of displaying the reflection suppression image when moving the rabbit accessory 6000 has been described, the above-described aspect is also applied when moving the first ear portion 6021 and the first ear portion 6022. Good.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 493, it is desirable to set the color of the back surface of the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 to black or dark. In addition, it is desirable that no electronic component be mounted on the back surface of the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022. When mounting electronic components on the back surfaces of the first and second ear portions 6021 and 6022, it is desirable that the electronic components have a dark color. With such a configuration, the rear surfaces of the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022, which are members that suppress the reflection of the face substrate 6020 in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, are the game boards. Even if it is reflected in the display area of the side effect display device 1600, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the reflection.

Further, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 494, it is desirable that the color of the back surface of the body portion 6030 is dark. Further, it is desirable that no electronic component be mounted on the back surface of the body portion 6030. When mounting an electronic component on the back surface of the body portion 6030, it is desirable that the electronic component be dark. With such a configuration, even if the rear surface of the body portion 6030, which is a member for suppressing the reflection of the face substrate 6020, is reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the player is reflected by the reflection. Can be reduced.

The moving position of the rabbit accessory 6000 at the time of the initial check may be set to be in the center front of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. In this case, the reflection on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 can be confirmed from all directions of up, down, left and right, and the entire area of the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 can be visually recognized.

On the other hand, when performing the above-described effect of darkening almost the entire display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the rabbit accessory 6000 is moved to the center front of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. It may be configured to execute this effect after moving to the position. In this case, the rabbit role object 6000 is positioned exactly in the middle of the player's line of sight and the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the player moves his face to forcibly reflect the rabbit role object 6000. As long as the mode is not visually recognized, it is possible to prevent the situation in which the player visually recognizes the state reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. When ending the effect of darkening almost the entire display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, after making the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 bright, the rabbit role object 6000 waits from the moving position. By moving to the position, it is possible to reduce the influence of the reflection on the player.

As an example of the member reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the face substrate 6020 forming the rabbit role object 6000 is shown. You may make it possible to confirm the state of the rear surface of the member by being reflected in the display area of the board side effect display device 1600. For example, the rear surface of a relay board (not shown) provided for transmitting a control signal from the peripheral control board 1510 to the face board 6020 or supplying power from the power supply board 931 is a game board side effect display. It may be configured to be reflected in the display area of the device 1600. Further, on the back surface of the relay board, a connector, a control element, etc. to which a flat cable used for transmitting a control signal and supplying power is connected are surface-mounted. These may be configured to be reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. With such a configuration, it is possible to confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the electronic component mounted on the relay board.

Although the relationship between the standby position and the moving position of the rabbit accessory 6000 is shown in the up-and-down direction, the rabbit accessory 6000 is configured to be movable in the front-rear direction, and the rabbit accessory 6000 can be moved between the rear standby position and the front moving position. It may be configured to move. Alternatively, the rabbit accessory 6000 provided below the front surface of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 rotates about a rotation axis provided below the rabbit accessory 6000, so that the rabbit accessory The upper part of the 6000 may be movable so that the upper part of the 6000 tilts forward. It is configured to be movable between a standby position in which the rabbit accessory 6000 is in a positional relationship parallel to the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and a moving position in which the upper part of the rabbit accessory 6000 is moved so as to tilt forward. You may. Even with such a configuration, the area of the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is increased by moving the rabbit accessory 6000 from the standby position to the movement position. Is possible.

Although an example in which the game board side effect display device 1600 is fixedly provided and the rabbit accessory 6000 is movable with respect to the game board side effect display device 1600 is shown, the rabbit accessory 6000 is fixedly provided. The game board side effect display device 1600 may be configured to be movable. For example, the entire game board side effect display device 1600 may be configured to be movable backward, or the entire game board side effect display device 1600 may be configured to be rotatable around a predetermined movable axis. Alternatively, the entire game board side effect display device 1600 may be configured to be horizontally movable in the up, down, left, and right directions, and the rabbit accessory 6000 fixedly provided may be positioned in the moved direction. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the area of the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, even for a rabbit accessory fixedly provided. Become.

An example in which the game board side effect display device 1600 is fixedly provided, and the rabbit role object 6000 is movable with respect to the game board side effect display device 1600, and the game board side with respect to the fixedly provided rabbit role object 6000. Although the example in which the effect display device 1600 is movable is shown, both the game board side effect display device 1600 and the rabbit accessory 6000 may be movable. For example, the game board side effect display device 1600 may be configured to move rearward and the rabbit accessory 6000 may be configured to move forward. Alternatively, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the rabbit accessory 6000, which are not in the overlapping state in the front view, may be configured to move in the horizontal direction so as to be in the overlapping state in the front view. Good. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to increase the area of the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600.

Although an example in which one game board side effect display device 1600 is provided is shown, a plurality of effect display devices may be provided. Then, the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 may be reflected in at least one of the display areas of the plurality of effect display devices. In addition, the surface formed by the display area of one effect display device and the surface formed by the display area of another effect display device are configured to face different directions, and the rabbit accessory 6000 can be moved to the front side thereof. You may comprise. With such a configuration, the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 can be reflected in the display areas of the plurality of effect display devices from different angles, and it becomes easy to find the cause of the abnormality.

In addition, by providing a plurality of movable effect display devices and moving the effect display devices, the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 of the rabbit accessory 6000 has at least one display area of the effect display devices or a plurality of effects. You may comprise so that it may be reflected in the display area of a display device.

An example has been shown in which the rear surface of the face board 6020 is reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 when the power is forcibly forcibly cut off. The rear surface of the face substrate 6020 may be reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 by darkening almost the entire display area of the game board side effect display device 1600.

FIG. 495 shows a modification of the example shown in FIG. 487. In this embodiment, the position where the rabbit accessory 6000 shown in FIGS. 487 to 494 is provided is not the center on the lower side of the front side of the game board side effect display device 1600 but on the lower left front side of the game board side effect display device 1600. Has become. Further, a stump accessory 6100 having a shape imitating a stump is provided on the lower right side of the game board side effect display device 1600. As a whole of the game board 5, a space is formed between the game panel 1100 and the front side of the game board side effect display device 1600 as in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 487, and a plurality of spaces are formed in this space. The accessories are arranged in layers. Specifically, from the front side, at a position close to the back surface of the game panel 1100, the board back weed part 6800, the first giant tree part 6600, the second giant tree part 6650, the first cloud part 6700, the second A cloud character 6750 is provided. The first giant tree component 6600 is composed of a first giant tree trunk substrate 6610 and a first giant tree leaf substrate 6630, and the second giant tree component 6650 is composed of a second giant tree trunk substrate 6660 and a second giant tree leaf substrate 6680. There is. Further, a first grass role object 6470 and a second grass role object 6475 are provided behind them, and a third grass role object 6480 is provided behind them so that they overlap the third grass role object 6480 behind this. A fourth grass role object 6485 is provided, a rabbit role object 6000 and a stump role object 6100 are provided behind this, a mountain role object 6500 is provided behind them, and a game board side effect display is provided behind the mountain role object 6500. A device 1600 is provided. By thus arranging a plurality of accessories in layers, it is possible to give a sense of depth.

A stump portion 6200 having a shape imitating a stump, a first grass movable portion 6360 and a second grass movable portion 6370 having a shape imitating grass are provided in the lower right side of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the stump portion 6200 is provided. The first grass movable part 6360 and the second grass movable part 6370 form a stump role object 6100 as a unit.

FIG. 496 shows a stump officer 6100. A first grass movable portion 6360 is provided on the front left side of the stump portion 6200, and a second grass movable portion 6370 is provided on the front right side of the stump portion 6200. The first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 are each plate-shaped and made of a green transparent synthetic resin. The first grass movable portion 6360 has a surface formed of a green transparent synthetic resin exposed at the outer edge portion excluding the lower end portion thereof, and is visible through a member located behind. On the other hand, a portion other than the lower end portion and the outer edge is provided with a first grass decoration portion 6360a to which green ink is applied, and the rear portion of the first grass decoration portion 6360a is invisible. .. The second grass movable portion 6370 also has the same configuration as the first grass movable portion 6360 and includes a second grass decoration portion 6370a.

The 1st grass movable part 6360 and the 2nd grass movable part 6370 are the state where the 1st grass movable part 6360 and the 2nd grass movable part 6370 are located in the front surface of the stump part 6200, as shown in FIG. 496(B), the first grass movable part 6360 moves to the left from the state of being located on the front surface of the stump portion 6200, and the second grass movable part 6370 is to the right of the state of being located on the front surface of the stump portion 6200. It is possible to take the state of moving to. The first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 can be moved by a drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510.

In the state shown in FIG. 496(A), the end surface forming the right end portion of the first grass movable portion 6360 and the end surface forming the left end portion of the second grass movable portion 6370 are in contact with each other, and the stump portion 6200 located behind is in contact with the end surface. The lower half is difficult to see. At this time, a partial area of the stump opening 6210a is provided with an area where the first grass decoration portion 6360a of the first grass movable portion 6360 is not provided and a second grass decoration portion 6370a of the second grass movable portion 6370. Not visible through the area. In this state, the rear wall substrate 6352, the rear wall cover 6356, and the rear wall substrate 6352 that form the box rear wall portion 6350 of the stump box portion 6300 provided behind the stump opening portion 6210a are provided on the front surface of the rear wall substrate 6352. A part of the wall light emitting unit 6354 is configured to be visible.

In this state, as the first light emission effect, the rear wall light emitting unit 6354 is set to the light emitting mode, and the light emitted from the rear wall light emitting unit 6354 is not provided with the first grass decoration unit 6360a of the first grass movable unit 6360. The area and the area of the second grass movable portion 6370 where the second grass decoration portion 6370a is not provided are irradiated, and the area of the first grass movable portion 6360 where the first grass decoration portion 6360a is not provided and the second grass movement. The player may be configured to be able to pass through a region of the portion 6370 where the second grass decoration portion 6370a is not provided and be irradiated to the player.

On the other hand, in the state shown in FIG. 496(B), the first grass movable portion 6360 moves to the left from the state in which it is located on the front surface of the stump portion 6200, and the second grass movable portion 6370 is located on the front surface of the stump portion 6200. Since it is in the state of moving to the right from the state of moving, the visibility of the lower half of the stump portion 6200 is increased. In this state, the stump box portion 6300 is visible through the stump opening 6210a provided in the stump portion 6200.
In this state, a rear wall substrate 6352, a rear wall cover 6356, and a rear wall provided on the front surface of the rear wall substrate 6352, which form a box rear wall portion 6350 of the stump box portion 6300 provided behind the stump opening portion 6210a. The light emitting unit 6354 has changed from a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize to a state in which it is easily visible, as compared with the state before the first grass movable section 6360 and the second grass movable section 6370 have moved.

In this state, as the second light emission effect, the rear wall light emitting unit 6354 is made to emit light, and the light emitted from the rear wall light emitting unit 6354 passes through the stump opening 6210a and is directed toward the front where the player is located. It may be configured so that it can be directly irradiated. In the second light emission effect, the first grass movable portion 6360 passes through a region where the first grass decoration portion 6360a is not provided and a second grass movable portion 6370 where the second grass decoration portion 6370a is not provided. Compared with the first light emission effect in which the player is irradiated with light, it is possible to give the player a visually stronger stimulus.

It should be noted that the first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state (for example, a normal game state) (for example, a probability variation game state, a time saving game state or a jackpot game state that is advantageous over the normal game state). ), in the case of the first game state, the period during which the first light emission effect is executed is configured to be longer than the period during which the second light emission effect is executed, In this case, the period in which the second light emission effect is executed may be set longer than the period in which the first light emission effect is executed. Alternatively, the first light emitting effect is executed for a relatively longer period in the first game state than in the second game state, and the second game state is relatively longer in comparison with the first game state. The second light emission effect may be executed during the period. Also, in the first game state, only the first light emission effect is performed, and in the second game state, both the first light emission effect and the second light emission effect, or only the second light emission effect is performed. Good. The second light emission effect, which is visually more stimulating than the first light emission effect, functions as an effect (an effect that gives a special feeling) to the player, and is therefore used only in an advantageous game state. Alternatively, when the game state is advantageous, the attraction period of the player can be improved by using the effect period for a longer time.

As described above, in the second game state that is advantageous to the player, compared to the first game state that is relatively disadvantageous to the player, the player will experience a visually strong stimulus for a longer period of time. It is possible to further increase the excitement of the player who is excited due to the occurrence of the advantageous state.

FIG. 497(A) shows the stump portion 6200. The stump portion 6200 is composed of a stump plate portion 6210, which is a colored and opaque plate-shaped member provided on the front side, and a box-shaped stump box portion 6300, which is provided on the back side. The stump plate portion 6210 is a plate-shaped member, and has an outer shape that imitates a tree stump, and has a stump opening portion 6210a in the center thereof.

FIG. 497(B) shows the positional relationship between the stump plate portion 6210 and the stump box portion 6300 in a front view. In the figure, the stump plate portion 6210 and the stump opening portion 6210a are indicated by dotted lines. The front surface side of the stump box portion 6300 is arranged so as to correspond to the stump opening portion 6210a provided in the stump plate portion 6210, and imitates a state in which a hole is formed on the side surface of the stump.

FIG. 498(A) shows the stump box part 6300. The stump box portion 6300 includes a box upper wall portion 6310 forming an upper wall, a box right wall portion 6320 forming a right wall, a box lower wall portion 6330 forming a lower wall, and a box forming a left wall. It is composed of a left wall portion 6340 and a box rear wall portion 6350 that constitutes the rear wall. The box upper wall portion 6310 and the box lower wall portion 6330 are trapezoidal in plan view, the back side and the front side are parallel, and the length of the front side is longer than that of the back side. It is composed for a long time. The box right wall portion 6320 and the box left wall portion 6340 are provided such that the front side of the box is inclined outward. The box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, and the box left wall portion 6340 are made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin. With such a configuration, a sense of depth can be provided.

FIG. 498(B) is a diagram showing a state in which the stump box portion 6300 is disassembled. The box rear wall portion 6350 includes a rear wall cover 6356 located on the front side and a rear wall substrate 6352 located on the rear side. In this figure, the portion where the rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358 provided in the rear wall cover 6356 is located is schematically shown by a dotted line with respect to the rear wall substrate 6352.

FIG. 498(C) is a front view of the rear wall cover 6356. The rear wall cover 6356 has a horizontally long rectangular shape and is made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin. On the front surface of the rear wall cover 6356, a rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358 having a shape imitating root vegetables is formed. The rear wall cover light-scattering portion 6358 includes a first rear wall cover light-scattering portion 6358a having a shape imitating the root of a root vegetable and a second rear wall cover light-scattering portion 6358b having a shape imitating a root vegetable.

FIG. 498(D) is a front view of the rear wall substrate 6352. The rear wall substrate 6352 is a horizontally long rectangular printed circuit board. The front and rear surfaces of the rear wall substrate 6352 are white. On the front surface of the rear wall substrate 6352, a rear wall light emitting unit 6354 configured by surface-mounting a plurality of LEDs is provided. The rear wall substrate 6352 has the same size as the rear wall cover 6356 in a front view. The light emitted from the LEDs that form the rear wall light emitting unit 6354 is emitted toward the front perpendicular to the surface that forms the rear wall substrate 6352. The rear wall light emitting unit 6354 is provided at a position overlapping the rear wall cover light scattering unit 6358 in a front view. Specifically, the first rear-wall light-emitting unit 6354a corresponds to the first rear-wall cover light-scattering unit 6358a having a shape similar to that of a root vegetable, and the second rear-wall cover light-scattering portion has a shape similar to that of a root vegetable. A second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b is provided corresponding to the portion 6358b. As shown in FIG. 496(A), when the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 are positioned on the front surface of the stump portion 6200, the LEDs forming the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 are It is configured to be provided at a position that does not overlap in a front view with an area of the first grass movable portion 6360 where the first grass decoration portion 6360a is not provided and an area of the second grass movable portion 6370 where the second grass decoration portion 6370a is not provided. Good to do. In this case, even if the rear wall light emitting section 6354 is in the light emitting mode as an effect, the player is not directly irradiated with light, so that a visually weak stimulus is given to the player.

The rear surface of the rear wall cover 6356 and the front surface of the rear wall substrate 6352 are not in complete contact with each other, but are provided at a predetermined interval (about 1-2 mm). At this time, it is desirable to set the distance between the rear surface of the rear wall cover 6356 and the rear wall substrate 6352 so that the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b do not contact the rear surface of the rear wall cover 6356. With such a configuration, it becomes easy to dissipate the heat generated in the rear wall light emitting unit 6354, and it is possible to prevent the rear wall light emitting unit 6354 from failing due to the heat generated by itself. It will be possible.

The stump accessory 6100 is used for an effect of notifying the expectation of a big hit in a gaming machine. Specifically, from the state where the stump opening 6210a is difficult to see, the first grass moving part 6360 moves to the left and the second grass moving part 6370 moves to the right, and the stump opening 6210a becomes easy to view. Whether or not the stump opening 6210a is easily visible next time, the light emission from the box rear wall 6350 located on the back side of the stump box 6300 that is visible through the stump opening 6210a. What the mode is (for example, whether the rear wall cover light-scattering portion 6358 appears to glow red, white, or the color of the rear wall substrate 6352 positioned behind in the unlit state). It is configured so as to suggest that the expectation of the stop mode of the changing decorative pattern being stopped and displayed in a mode showing a big hit is higher than usual. For example, in each of the light emission modes of the rear wall substrate 6352 as described above, the varying degree of the decorative pattern in the changing state may be set so that the expectation level of stop display is different in a mode showing a big hit. With such a structure, the player can be greatly interested in the light emission mode of the rear wall substrate 6352.

Although an example of notifying the degree of expectation that the stop pattern of the changing decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a mode showing a big hit by the light emission mode of the rear wall substrate 6352 has been shown, the first rear wall light emitting section 6354a and the second rear wall light emission are shown. You may make it notify by making the part 6354b a different light emission mode.

For example, the first rear wall light emitting unit 6354a is not made to emit light, and the second rear wall light emitting unit 6354b is made to emit light weakly in green, whereby the first rear wall cover light scattering unit 6358a having a shape imitating the root of a root vegetable is white. The second rear wall cover light-scattering portion 6358b having a shape simulating a root vegetable is green and visible to the player. In addition, by causing the first rear wall light emitting unit 6354a to emit white light weakly and the second rear wall light emitting unit 6354b to emit green light weakly, the first rear wall cover light scattering unit 6358a having a shape simulating the root of a root vegetable can be obtained. The second rear wall cover light-scattering portion 6358b, which is white and has a shape similar to that of root vegetables, is green and can be visually recognized by the player. In addition, by causing the first rear wall light emitting unit 6354a to emit red light weakly and the second rear wall light emitting unit 6354b to emit green light weakly, the first rear wall cover light scattering unit 6358a having a shape simulating the root of a root vegetable can be obtained. The second rear wall cover light-scattering portion 6358b, which is red and has a shape simulating the root vegetables, is green and can be visually recognized by the player.

Note that the first rear wall light emitting unit 6354a is caused to emit light weakly so that the light emitted from the first rear wall light emitting unit 6354a does not strongly decorate a portion other than the first rear wall cover light scattering unit 6358a. This is because. Further, the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b is caused to emit light weakly so that the light emitted from the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b does not strongly decorate a portion other than the second rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358b. This is because. With such a configuration, it is possible to realize an effect as if only the rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358 is in the light emitting mode.

By adopting such a light emission mode, it is possible to realize an expression simulating root beet radish in the first and second light emission examples and a root carrot in the third light emission example. In addition, in the first light emission example, the color of the rear wall substrate located behind the first rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358a and the first rear wall light-emitting portion 6354a are not emitted, although the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a does not emit light. The shape of the wall-covering light-scattering portion 6358a makes it possible to express a predetermined motif (in this example, the root portion of the radish). In addition, in the relationship between the second light emission example and the third light emission example, a plurality of motifs (radish and carrot in this example) are expressed by setting different emission colors in the first rear wall light emitting unit 6354a. It is possible to do.

An example in which the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b emit light weakly can realize an effect as if only the rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358 is in the light emitting mode. However, in such an effect, by strongly emitting the first rear wall light emitting unit 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting unit 6354b, the first inner wall light emitting unit 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting unit 6354a are formed on the entire inner surface of the stump box 6300. The light from the light emitting unit 6354b may be configured to strongly reach. In this case, the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b may be configured to emit the same color (for example, white).

Even if the light from the rear wall substrate 6352 is reflected by the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, and the box left wall portion 6340 and is visible to the player side. Good. For example, in a transparent synthetic resin forming the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, and the box left wall portion 6340, a light scattering portion that can scatter each inner surface of the stump box portion 6300. May be configured. Alternatively, in the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, and the box left wall portion 6340, at least each inner surface forming the stump box portion 6300 is plated with a metal thin film such as aluminum. You may make it a reflective part by performing a process. With such a structure, light emitted from the rear wall substrate 6352 and applied to the entire inner surface of the stump box portion 6300 can be efficiently reflected toward the player. Further, in this case, the white rear wall substrate 6352 itself also has a function of diffusely reflecting light forward.

The rear wall substrate 6352 that constitutes the box rear wall portion 6350 is visible in white through the colorless and transparent rear wall cover 6356. Therefore, when the first grass movable part 6360 and the second grass movable part 6370 are respectively moved to the moving positions and the box rear wall part 6350 is visible from the stump opening 6210a, the rear wall light emitting part is visible. Even when 6354 is in the off state, the player can visually recognize that the box rear wall portion 6350 is decorated with the color of the rear wall substrate 6352 itself. Further, the rear wall cover 6356 is provided with a rear wall cover light-scattering portion 6358 that imitates the shape of a root vegetable. Even when the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 is not made to emit light, the shape of the rear wall cover light-scattering portion 6358 causes The player can visually recognize the box rear wall portion 6350 as a decorated state.

Although the example in which the rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358 has a shape imitating the shape of a root vegetable has been shown, the entire front surface of the rear wall cover 6356 may be configured as a light scattering portion. Alternatively, in the rear wall cover 6356, the entire front surface of the rear wall cover 6356 is made into a smooth shape without providing a portion that scatters the light emitted from the rear wall light emitting unit 6354, and the light emitted from the rear wall light emitting unit 6354 is illuminated. May be configured to pass through as is. Even with such a configuration, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the box rear wall portion 6350 as a decorated state by the color of the rear wall substrate 6352 itself as in the above-described example.

Although the box back wall part 6350 of the stump box part 6300 showed the example provided with the back wall light emission part 6354 and the back wall cover 6356, instead of the box back wall part 6350, the box top wall part 6310, the box right wall part 6320, A configuration corresponding to the rear wall light emitting unit 6354 or the rear wall cover 6356 may be provided in either the box lower wall portion 6330 or the box left wall portion 6340. Alternatively, with respect to at least one of the wall portions of the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, the box left wall portion 6340, and the box rear wall portion 6350 that constitute the stump box portion 6300, A configuration corresponding to the rear wall light emitting unit 6354 and the rear wall cover 6356 may be provided, and for example, the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, and the box lower wall portion 6330 that form the stump box portion 6300. Alternatively, all of the box left wall portion 6340 and the box rear wall portion 6350 may be configured to have a configuration corresponding to the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 and the rear wall cover 6356. Further, in these examples, when the structure corresponding to the rear wall light emitting unit 6354 is provided on a predetermined wall portion, the structure corresponding to the rear wall light emitting unit 6354 is not provided on the other wall portions, Alternatively, only the structure corresponding to the rear wall cover 6356 may be provided.

The box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, and the box left wall portion 6340 constituting the stump box portion 6300 are formed of a transparent or translucent synthetic resin, and the stump plate portion 6210 is transparent or It is made of a semitransparent synthetic resin, and when the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 are in the standby position, the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 is set to the light emitting state, so that the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 is separated from the rear wall light emitting portion 6354. The rear surface of the stump plate portion 6210 may be illuminated by the emitted light. With such a configuration, the light from the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 passes through the stump plate portion 6210, and the player can visually recognize the state in which the stump plate portion 6210 is decorated with light. Even if the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, the box left wall portion 6340, and the stump plate portion 6210 constituting the stump box portion 6300 are formed of colored transparent or colored translucent synthetic resin. Good. For example, these may be formed of brown synthetic resin. Alternatively, a tree pattern may be printed with brown ink on the rear surface of the stump plate portion 6210 to form an opaque or translucent region in a part of the stump plate portion.

Although the example in which the color of the rear wall substrate 6352 is white has been shown, other colors may be adopted. For example, the color of the rear wall substrate 6352 may be brown as in the stump plate portion 6210. In such a case, by turning off the first rear wall light emitting unit 6354a, it is possible to express a root vegetable to which soil is attached in the rear wall cover light scattering unit 6358.

When the first grass movable part 6360 moves to the left and the second grass movable part 6370 moves to the right, the stump opening 6210a provided in the stump plate part 6210 is exposed and the rear wall part of the box located behind Although the example in which 6350 is visible is shown, the left and right directions of the lower ends of the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 are used as the rotation axes, and the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 are The upper part of the first grass movable part 6360 and the second grass movable part 6370 is exposed to expose the stump opening 6210a provided in the stump plate part 6210 when the upper part of the first grass movable part 6360 and the second grass movable part 6370 are tilted forward. Alternatively, the box rear wall portion 6350 located at the rear may be configured to be visible.

Although an example in which the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 are provided in front of the stump portion 6200 is shown, only one of the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 is in front of the stump portion 6200. The stump opening 6210a may be exposed by moving to the right or left moving position. Alternatively, the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 are configured as an integral member, and the member moves to the right or left moving position so that the stump opening 6210a is exposed. You may comprise.

The box rear wall portion 6350 includes a rear wall substrate 6352 and a rear wall cover 6356, but the rear wall cover 6356 may be rotatable. Specifically, the upper side of the rear wall cover 6356 is used as a rotation axis so that the front surface of the rear wall cover 6356 is rotated by a drive source (not shown) so as to contact the inner surface of the box upper wall portion 6310. The left side of the wall cover 6356 may be configured to be rotated so that the front surface of the rear wall cover 6356 contacts the inner surface of the box left wall portion 6340 by a drive source (not shown). With such a configuration, the rear wall cover 6356 is located on the front side of the rear wall substrate 6352, and the rear wall substrate 6352 can be visually recognized by the player through the rear wall cover 6356. It is possible to allow the player to visually recognize the box rear wall portion 6350 in any of the modes in which the rear wall cover 6356 is not located on the front side of the 6352 and the rear wall substrate 6352 is directly visible. In addition, since the stump role object 6100 is located at the lower right of the game board side effect display device 1600 as seen from the player's perspective, the rear wall cover 6356 is rotated about the upper side or the left side as an axis to move the rear wall. The cover 6356 becomes inconspicuous. It should be noted that the right side or the variable may be rotated as an axis.

The rear wall substrate 6352 may have a larger shape than the rear wall cover 6356. For example, the rear wall substrate 6352 may have the same size and shape as the stump plate portion 6210, and the outer edges of the rear wall substrate 6352 may overlap each other in a front view. In this case, the rear wall substrate 6352 has a shape that is expanded from the original shape to the periphery. In this case, in the portion where the white rear wall substrate 6352 is expanded to the periphery, the light is emitted from the rear wall light emitting unit 6354, and the box upper wall 6310, the box right wall 6320, the box lower wall 6330, the box left wall. It is possible to reflect the light reflected rearward by the portion 6340 toward the player in front again.

Further, the light emitting portion may be provided in a portion other than the area covered by the rear wall cover 6356. For example, a light emitting portion is provided on the front surface of the rear wall substrate 6352 at the rear of the root-shaped portion or the tree-shaped portion of the stump plate portion 6210 so that the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 emits light at the same time. You may comprise. With such a configuration, it is possible to further enhance the effect of causing the rear wall light emitting unit 6354 to emit light.
Alternatively, such a rear wall substrate 6352 may be configured such that no light emitting portion other than the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 is provided. Even in this case, in the portion where the white rear wall substrate 6352 is expanded to the periphery, the light reflected backward by the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, the box left wall portion 6340, etc. It becomes possible to reflect again toward the player in front.

In the example shown in FIG. 498, the box rear wall portion 6350 is composed of a rectangular rear wall cover 6356 provided on the front side and a rectangular rear wall substrate 6352 provided on the back side. On the other hand, in the example shown below using FIG. 499, the box rear wall portion 6350 includes a rear wall cover 6356 located on the front side, a rear wall substrate 6352 located in the middle, and a rear wall plate portion 6380 located on the back side. It is composed of and. In this example, the rear wall cover 6356 has a shape imitating root vegetables, and has a first rear wall cover light-scattering portion 6358a having an outer shape imitating the root of the root vegetables and a second rear wall having an outer shape imitating the root vegetables. The wall cover light scattering portion 6358b is provided. The rear wall cover 6356 is made of a colorless transparent synthetic resin, and the color of the rear wall substrate 6352 located at the rear is visible.

The rear wall substrate 6352 has a shape that imitates a root vegetable as a whole, and is composed of a first rear wall substrate 6352a that imitates the root portion of the root vegetable and a second rear wall substrate 6352b that imitates the leaf portion of the root vegetable. A white protective film is formed of a white protective agent on the front surface and the rear surface of the first rear wall substrate 6352a. Further, a green protective film made of a green protective agent is formed on the front and rear surfaces of the second rear wall substrate 6352b. Four LEDs are surface-mounted as the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a on the first rear wall substrate 6352a. Further, two LEDs are surface-mounted on the second rear wall substrate 6352b as the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b. A rear wall cover 6356 is attached to the front surface of such a rear wall substrate 6352. Further, the rear wall plate portion 6380 has a rectangular shape, and the rear wall substrate 6352 is attached to the front surface thereof. Further, in this example, the rear wall plate portion 6380 forms the rear wall of the stump box portion 6300.

Note that the first rear wall substrate 6352a and the second rear wall substrate 6352b may be configured as separate printed circuit boards, and may be configured to function as the rear wall substrate 6352 by being attached to the respective rear wall plate portions 6380. Alternatively, the first back wall substrate 6352a and the second back wall substrate 6352b may be formed by separately coating one printed circuit board with a white protective agent and a green protective agent.

In the stump box part 6300 having such a configuration, it is preferable to execute the effect of moving the first grass movable part 6360 and the second grass movable part 6370 to the movement position as described above. Further, also in this embodiment, as a light emitting mode when the first rear wall light emitting section 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting section 6354b are used for the effect, a weak light emitting mode in which the root vegetables can be visually recognized as emitting light, You may employ|adopt the strong light emission aspect which can be visually recognized like the whole stump box part 6300 is luminescing.

Even when the first rear wall light-emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light-emitting portion 6354b are turned off, due to the colors and shapes of the first rear wall substrate 6352a and the second rear wall substrate 6352b, in the stump box portion 6300. It is possible to express a predetermined motif. In this example, the first rear wall cover light-scattering portion 6358a imitating the root portion is passed through the second rear wall cover light-scattering portion 6358b imitating the leaf portion and the second rear wall substrate 6352a is white through the second rear wall cover light-scattering portion 6358b. The rear wall substrate 6352b is visible in green. In this way, one decorative body can be formed only by the outer shape of the substrate and the color of the substrate.

In this example, a plurality of grass role products 6400 are provided below the game board side effect display device 1600 and in front of the front side of the rabbit role effect and the stump role effect.

In the example shown in FIG. 495, as the grass part 6400, the first grass part 6470 to the fourth grass part 6485 are provided between the game board side effect display device 1600 and the game area 5a as described above. There is. Below, the some embodiment in such a grass role product 6400 is shown.

A grass role product 6400 shown in FIG. 500A is formed of a grass substrate 6420 which is opaque in color, has a plate shape, and has an outer shape imitating grass. In this example, the grass substrate 6420 includes a grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422. The grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 is formed by an LED surface-mounted on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420. In addition, a grass role object 6400 illustrated in FIG. 500B includes a grass substrate 6420 which is colored and opaque and has a plate-like shape, and which has an outer shape imitating grass. In this example, the grass substrate 6420 includes a grass substrate rear surface light emitting unit 6424. The grass substrate rear surface light emitting unit 6424 is formed by an LED surface-mounted on the rear surface of the grass substrate 6420. In the example shown in FIGS. 500A and 500B, the grass substrate 6420 has an outer shape that imitates grass, and the outer shape itself has a function of decoration. White may be adopted as the color of the grass substrate 6420. In this case, the grass substrate front surface light-emitting portion 6422 is caused to emit light in green or brown, whereby the grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with the light emission color of the grass substrate front surface light-emitting portion 6422. Green or brown may be adopted as the color of the grass substrate 6420. Green can represent the color of living grass, and brown can represent the color of dead grass. This makes it possible to realize a grass-like decoration by both the color and the shape of the grass substrate 6420.

Further, as the LEDs mounted on the grass substrate 6420, LEDs of the same color as the grass substrate 6420 are adopted. Specifically, when the grass substrate 6420 is white, a white LED is used as the mounted LED. With such a configuration, the LEDs mounted on the grass substrate 6420 can be made inconspicuous. Note that, in another example, such a configuration may be adopted when the LED is provided as the light emitting unit on the substrate.

The light emitted from the LEDs forming the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 provided on the grass substrate 6420 is emitted toward the front perpendicular to the surface forming the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, it is possible to allow the player to visually recognize an effect that makes a visually strong image. When a grass front cover 6440 to be described later is provided, an LED forming the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 is arranged so that light is emitted upward upward horizontally to the surface forming the grass substrate 6420. It may be configured to be implemented in. With such a configuration, the light is emitted toward the upper end portion of the grass front cover 6440, and thus the light emitted from the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422 is transmitted to the entire grass front cover 6440. The player can visually recognize an effect as if the entire grass cover 6440 shines. Note that, in another example, such a configuration may be adopted when providing the light emitting unit on the substrate.

On the other hand, the light emitted from the LEDs that form the grass substrate rear surface light emitting unit 6424 provided on the grass substrate 6420 is irradiated horizontally upward with respect to the surface forming the grass substrate 6420. In this case, the player can visually recognize an effect as if the grass substrate 6420 was illuminated by the back light. In addition, when the rear grass cover 6460 to be described later is provided, light is emitted toward the upper end of the rear grass cover 6460. The light radiated from is transmitted, and the player can visually recognize an effect as if the entire grass back cover 6460 was illuminated. Note that, in another example, such a configuration may be adopted when providing the light emitting unit on the substrate.

Through holes (not shown) forming an electronic circuit are provided on the front surface and the rear surface of the grass substrate 6420. In addition, the metal forming the electronic circuit provided on the printed circuit board is exposed in the through hole, and when copper is used as the metal, the through hole is visually recognized in brown, which is the color of copper. .. Here, when at least a part of the grass substrate 6420 is visible to the player, the through hole may be visible to the player. In particular, when white is used as the color of the grass substrate 6420, the color of the through hole provided on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 is visually recognized by the player, and the grass substrate 6420 functions as a decoration. There is a problem that is damaged. Therefore, in order to solve such a problem, the following configuration may be adopted. For example, instead of concentrating the through holes on a predetermined position on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420, the through holes may be arranged so as to be dispersed in the entire front surface of the grass substrate 6420. Alternatively, by arranging the through hole along the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420 or by arranging the through hole on an extension line of the contour line forming the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420, the through hole can be formed in the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420. It becomes possible to visually recognize it as if it were a part. An ornamental shape simulating grass may be formed by arranging through holes linearly inside the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420 in the same shape as the outer shape. Further, one or more patterns having the same color as the through holes may be formed on a part of the front surface of the grass substrate 6420. Alternatively, one or more patterns having the same shape as the through hole may be formed on a part of the front surface of the grass substrate 6420. For example, when the through holes are brown and circular, one or more circular patterns may be formed on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 with brown ink. Although the above-described example is preferably applied to all through holes provided on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420, it may be applied to at least a part of the through holes, and even in that case, the grass substrate 6420 is also applicable. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the function as the decoration of the is damaged. In addition, you may make it provide a through hole in the board|substrate with which the accessory in another example is provided, and apply the embodiment regarding such a through hole.

FIGS. 500C to 500E show an example in which a grass cover 6440 is attached to the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 and the grass substrate 6400 is configured by the grass substrate 6420 and the grass cover 6440. The grass cover 6440 is made of synthetic resin and has an outer shape of a decorative shape simulating grass. In addition, a portion of the grass substrate 6420 on which the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 is mounted is configured to be covered by the grass cover 6440 in a front view.

In the example shown in FIG. 500C, the grass cover 6440 is smaller than the grass substrate 6420, and a part of the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 is covered by the grass cover 6440. In the example illustrated in FIG. 500D, the grass substrate 6420 and the grass cover 6440 have the same size, and the entire front surface of the grass substrate 6420 is covered with the grass cover 6440. In the example illustrated in FIG. 500E, the grass cover 6440 is larger than the grass substrate 6420, the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 is covered by the grass cover 6440, and the grass substrate 6420 has a grass outside the outer shape. The front cover 6440 is in a protruding state.

In the example shown in FIG. 500(C), both the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420 and the outer shape of the grass front cover 6440 realize a decorative aspect imitating grass. Also, a sense of depth can be provided. In addition, in the example shown in FIGS. 500D and 500E, the grass substrate 6420 located behind can be visually confirmed by forming the grass cover 6440 with a colored transparent or colorless transparent synthetic resin. May be In that case, a decorative aspect can be realized by both the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420 and the outer shape of the grass cover 6440. Also, a sense of depth can be provided.

FIGS. 500(F) to 500(H) show an example in which a grass back cover 6460 is attached to the rear surface of the grass substrate 6420, and a grass role object 6400 is configured by the grass substrate 6420 and the grass back cover 6460. The rear grass cover 6460 is made of synthetic resin and has an outer shape of a decorative shape simulating grass. Further, the grass substrate 6420 is configured such that a portion of the grass substrate 6420 on which the grass substrate rear surface light emitting unit 6424 is mounted is covered by the grass rear cover 6460.

In the example shown in FIG. 500(F), the grass cover 6460 is smaller than the grass substrate 6420, and the rear of the grass substrate 6420 is covered by the grass cover 6460. In the example shown in FIG. 500(G), the grass substrate 6420 and the rear grass cover 6460 have the same size, and the rear of the grass substrate 6420 is covered by the rear grass cover 6460. In the example shown in FIG. 500(H), the size of the rear grass cover 6460 is larger than that of the grass substrate 6420, the rear of the grass substrate 6420 is covered by the rear grass cover 6460, and the grass is located outside the contour of the grass substrate 6420. The rear cover 6460 is in a protruding state. In this example, the outer shape of the rear grass cover 6460 is visible in front view.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 500(F) and 500(G), the grass role object 6400 may be configured to be rotatable about the vertical direction. For example, drive control by the peripheral control board 1510 may rotate the grass role object 6400 by 180 degrees, and the rear grass cover 6460 may face forward. With such a structure, a visual recognition mode as shown in FIGS. 500C and 500D is obtained, and an effect similar to that of the example shown in FIGS. 500C and 500D is obtained. Become. In the example shown in FIG. 500(H), a decorative aspect can be realized by both the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420 and the outer shape of the rear grass cover 6460. Also, a sense of depth can be provided.

501(A) to 501(G) show modified examples of the example shown in FIG. 500(C). In these examples, the grass cover 6440 is smaller in size than the grass substrate 6420. Further, modifications of the specific structure of the grass cover 6440 will be described below.

In the example illustrated in FIG. 501A, a colorless and transparent grass front cover 6440 is provided in front of a white grass substrate 6420. The surface forming the grass cover 6440 is not subjected to lens cutting or matte finish and is formed smoothly, and the light passing through the grass cover 6440 is configured to pass without irregular reflection. There is. In addition, the grass cover transparent portion 6442 described later is also configured to pass the light passing therethrough without irregular reflection due to the same configuration. With such a configuration, the grass substrate 6420 located behind the grass cover 6440 can be directly viewed.

In this example, the entire grass front cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 can be made to be in a state of being decorated with the light emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 by setting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 to the light emitting state. For example, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422 is made to emit green light, the entire grass front cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 can be decorated in green.

In the example shown in FIG. 501B, a grass front cover 6440 is provided in front of a white grass substrate 6420. The grass cover 6440 is formed by an upper grass cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and a lower grass cover colored transparent portion 6442b. A grass-front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is formed of a colorless transparent synthetic resin, a grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is formed of a colored transparent synthetic resin, and a grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and a grass front formed in this way are formed. The grass cover 6440 may be configured by assembling the cover colored transparent portion 6442b. Alternatively, the entire grass front cover 6440 may be formed of a colorless transparent synthetic resin, and a colored transparent seal may be attached to a part of the front surface of the grass front cover 6440 or colored transparent printing may be applied to the grass front cover colored transparent. The portion 6442b may be formed. An example of forming the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b by sticking a colored transparent sticker or performing colored transparent printing on a part of the front surface of the grass front cover 6440 has been described. The grass cover colored transparent portion 6442b may be formed by sticking a colored transparent sticker or printing colored transparent on a part of the above. Further, it is preferable to adopt green as the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. In addition, the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b may be the same or substantially the same as the grass substrate 6420. In this case, it is possible to make the grass substrate 6420 a printed circuit board inconspicuous. Note that, in another example, such a configuration may be adopted when providing the colored transparent portion.

In this example, the white grass substrate 6420 is visible through the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. Further, since the green grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is located in front of the white grass substrate 6420, the white grass substrate 6420 can appear green. In addition, since the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is located in front of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the LEDs forming the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 are in a state in which it is difficult for the player to see the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422. It is possible to prevent the situation in which the player becomes cheerful because the player directly visually recognizes the light emitting unit 6422. On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting section 6422 is turned on, the intensity of light from the light source is reduced by the grass front cover colored transparent section 6442b, so that the player feels dazzling. It becomes possible to deter. Further, by causing the grass substrate front surface light emitting section 6422 to emit light, the entire grass front cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 can be brought into a state of being decorated with a luminescent color.

In the example shown in FIG. 501(B), FIG. 501(C) shows the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a as the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b as the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. It is an example modified to. In this example, when the grass substrate front surface light-emitting unit 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express white, green, and white aspects from the top when viewed from the front.

In the example illustrated in FIG. 501D, a grass front cover 6440 is provided in front of the white grass substrate 6420. The grass cover 6440 is provided with a grass cover light scattering section 6444 in this example. Specifically, the grass cover 6440 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and is composed of a grass transparent cover transparent part 6442a provided on the upper part and a grass cover colorless light scattering part 6444a provided on the lower part. Has been done. The grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is formed by subjecting at least one of the front surface and the rear surface of the grass front cover 6440 to lens cutting or satin finish. Preferably, the grass front cover colorless light-scattering portion 6444a is preferably formed on the front surface or both front and rear surfaces of the grass front cover 6440. In this way, the transparent and colorless synthetic resin is made semi-transparent by subjecting it to lens cutting and satin finish, so the shape of the member located behind is difficult or impossible to see, but its color With respect to, the player can visually recognize without change. Although the example in which the light scattering portion is formed on the colorless transparent synthetic resin has been shown, the light scattering portion may be formed on the colored transparent synthetic resin. In this case, it becomes possible to visually recognize the color of the colored transparent synthetic resin located in the front of the member located in the rear. Further, the color of the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b may be the same color or substantially the same color as the grass substrate 6420. In this case, it can be made inconspicuous that the grass substrate 6420 is a printed circuit board. Further, in the front grass cover 6440 and the rear grass cover 6460, a light scattering portion may be provided so as to frame the end portion that forms the outer peripheral edge in a front view. In this case, the light from the grass substrate front surface light-emitting portion 6422 and the grass substrate rear surface light-emitting portion 6424 can be diffusely reflected at the end portions of the grass front cover 6440 and the rear grass cover 6460. The outer shape of can be made to stand out. Note that, in another example, such a configuration may be adopted when providing the light scattering portion.

In this example, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is located in front of the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422, so that the LEDs forming the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 are in a state in which it is difficult for the player to see, and the LED is turned off. It is possible to prevent the situation in which the player is cheerful because the player directly visually recognizes the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422. On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is turned on, the light from the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is scattered by the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, which makes the player feel dazzling. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of.

The grass front cover colorless light-scattering portion 6444a is formed only on the front surface of the grass front cover 6440. With such a configuration, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is formed only on the rear surface of the grass front cover 6440. Compared with the case where the electronic components mounted on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 (LEDs forming the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422) appear to be blurry, the presence of the electronic components becomes less noticeable and the player It will be possible to prevent the occurrence of the situation that will be annoying. In addition, when the grass front cover colorless light-scattering portion 6444a is formed on both the front surface and the rear surface of the grass front cover 6440, electronic components mounted on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 (LEDs forming the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422) ) Can be made more inconspicuous. Further, the color of the grass substrate 6420 on the rear side can be visually confirmed through the grass front cover colorless light-scattering portion 6444a, and the color of the grass substrate 6420 is used as a decoration while blurring the shape of the electronic component mounted on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420. It is a mode that achieves the function of.

In the example shown in FIG. 501(D), FIG. 501(E) shows the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a as the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a and the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a as the grass front cover colorless transparent. This is an example modified to the portion 6442a. In this example, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express grass in a white, green, or white form from the top when viewed from the front.

The example shown in FIG. 501(F) is a modified example of the grass cover 6440 in the example shown in FIG. 501(B). In this example, a grass front cover opaque portion 6446 is provided instead of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. The grass-front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 is formed of an opaque synthetic resin, and the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 are in front of the grass. The cover 6440 may be configured. Alternatively, the entire grass front cover 6440 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and a sticker or printing that makes the rear side invisible is formed on a part of the front surface of the front grass cover 6440 to form the front grass cover opaque portion 6446. May be. In addition, by applying a seal or a print on the front surface of the front surface of the grass cover 6440 so that the rear surface cannot be visually recognized, the rear surface of the front surface of the front surface of the grass cover 6440 is not formed by forming the opaque portion 6446 of the front surface of the grass surface. The grass cover opaque portion 6446 may be formed by applying an invisible seal or printing. In this case, in the grass cover 6440, the mode is visible on the front side of the part where the seal or the print is applied. For example, when the grass cover 6440 is made of a colored and transparent synthetic resin, the color of the colored and transparent synthetic resin can be made visible, and the rear of the grass cover 6440 can be made invisible. .. When the grass front cover light scattering portion 6444 is provided on the front surface of the grass front cover 6440, the rear surface of the grass front cover 6440 is not visible while the grass front cover light scattering portion 6444 is visible. Is possible. As the color of the grass cover opaque portion 6446, yellow or brown may be adopted. In addition, white is preferably used as the color of the grass substrate 6420. Note that, in another example, such a configuration may be adopted when providing the opaque portion.

In this example, when the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 is in the off state, the grass substrate 6420 is directly visible in white, and the white color of the grass substrate 6420 is indirect via the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. Visible. On the other hand, regarding the grass cover opaque portion 6446, the color of the grass cover cover opaque portion 6446 is visible regardless of the color of the grass substrate 6420.
Although an example in which yellow or brown is used as the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 has been shown, in this mode, it is possible to express a mode in which dead grass is covered with snow.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting section 6422 is in a light emitting state, it is possible to decorate the grass substrate 6420 and the grass front cover colorless transparent section 6442a with the light emission color of the grass substrate front surface light emitting section 6422. For example, by adopting green as the light emission color, it becomes possible to decorate the grass substrate 6420 and the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a with the light emission color of the grass substrate front surface light emitting section 6422 in a green color, and a mode in which grass is growing. Can be expressed.

As the grass cover opaque portion 6446, a silver member capable of specularly reflecting light may be adopted. For example, the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 is made of a synthetic resin plated with an aluminum thin film as a whole, and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 thus configured and the grass front cover colorless transparent made of a colorless transparent synthetic resin. The grass cover 6440 may be configured by assembling the portion 6442a. Alternatively, the entire grass front cover 6440 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and a silver seal is attached to a part of the front surface of the grass front cover 6440, printing is performed with a silver paint, or a portion plated with an aluminum thin film is used. The grass cover opaque portion 6446 may be configured by providing the same. The silver-colored opaque portion has a function of reflecting light. Alternatively, a colored paint may be applied to the opaque portion formed in silver or a colored transparent seal may be attached. For example, a thin coating of yellow paint makes it possible to make the opaque portion visible in gold. Note that, in another example, such a configuration may be adopted when providing the opaque portion and the reflecting portion.

In the example shown in FIG. 501(F), the grass cover opaque portion 6446 is configured to be visible in silver. In this case, when the grass substrate front surface light-emitting unit 6422 is in the off state, the front surface of the grass front cover opaque unit 6446 is silver, and the grass front cover colorless transparent unit 6442a and the grass substrate 6420 are visible in white. It is possible to represent the form of frost or snow on the grass.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422 is set to emit light, the light emitted forward from the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422 is reflected backward by the grass cover opaque unit 6446.
Further, since the grass substrate 6420 is white, the light reflected rearward in the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 is incident on the grass substrate 6420 and scattered, and finally, the grass substrate 6420 and the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. Will be decorated. In this way, the light emitted from the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422 can be efficiently used for decoration. By providing a colored transparent layer as the frontmost layer of the grass cover opaque portion 6446, the grass cover opaque portion 6446 can be made visible in silver and in a predetermined color.

In FIG. 501(G), in the example shown in FIG. 501(F), the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is transformed into a grass front cover opaque portion 6446, and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 is transformed into a grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. It is an example. In this example, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express grass in a white, silvery, or white manner from above in a front view.

FIG. 502(A) is an example in which the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is modified into a grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b in the example shown in FIG. 501(A). As the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, green is preferably adopted. In addition, white is preferably used as the color of the grass substrate 6420. In this case, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express grass by the portion visually recognizable in white by the grass substrate 6420 and the green mode by the grass front cover colored transparent unit 6442b. Has become.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 is set to emit light, it is desirable that the light emitting color thereof be the same as or similar to the light of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, for example, green or yellow green. It is desirable to emit light. In this case, it is possible to perform an effect in a dynamic manner while keeping the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b as it is. Further, the light reflected without passing through the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b decorates the white grass substrate 6420, so that the white grass substrate 6420 can be visually recognized as green.

FIG. 502(B) is an example in which a part of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b in the example shown in FIG. 502(A) is modified into a grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b. As the color of the grass cover 6440, green may be adopted. In addition, white is preferably used as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422 is in the off state, grass in white, green, and green can be expressed from above. Further, since the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b is located in front of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, it is visible in a color in which the grass substrate 6420 white is mixed with the green of the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b. The grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 itself is configured to be difficult to see.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 is set to emit light, the light emitted from the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 is scattered by the grass front cover colored light scattering unit 6444b to decorate the grass front cover colored transparent unit 6442b. It becomes possible to set it as an aspect. Further, the exposed white grass substrate 6420 can be made visible by the emission color of the grass substrate front surface light emitting section 6422.

FIG. 502(C) shows the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b as the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b and the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444 as the grass front cover colored transparent portion in the example shown in FIG. 502(B). This is an example modified to 6442b. As the color of the grass cover 6440, green may be adopted. In addition, white is preferably used as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422 is in the off state, grass in white, green, and green can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422 is set to emit light, the light emitted from the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422 passes through the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and some light does not pass through. The light is reflected and scattered by the grass cover light scattering section 6444, and the grass cover light scattering section 6444 can be made into a decorative aspect. Further, the light diffusely reflected reaches the exposed white grass substrate 6420, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be visually recognized by the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422.

502(D) is an example in which the grass cover colored light scattering portion 6444b in the example shown in FIG. 502(B) is modified into a grass cover opaque portion 6446. As the color of the grass cover 6440, green may be adopted. As the color of the grass cover opaque portion 6446, yellow, brown, or silver is preferably adopted. In addition, white is preferably used as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422 is in the off state, white, green, yellow, brown, or silvery grass can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422 is set to emit light, the light emitted from the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422 is reflected on the back surface of the grass surface cover opaque unit 6446, and the grass surface cover colored transparent unit 6442b is displayed. It becomes possible to adopt a decoration mode. In addition, by decorating the exposed white grass substrate 6420 with the reflected light, it is possible to decorate the white grass substrate 6420 with the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422. For example, by adopting green as the light emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, it becomes possible to decorate the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass substrate 6420 in green with the light emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422. , You can express the way the grass is growing.

502(E) is modified from the example shown in FIG. 502(D) by changing the grass cover cover colored transparent portion 6442b into a grass front cover opaque portion 6446 and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 into a grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. It is an example. As the color of the grass cover 6440, green may be adopted. As the color of the grass cover opaque portion 6446, yellow, brown, or silver is preferably adopted. In addition, white is preferably used as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front surface light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, white, yellow or brown or silvery, green grass can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting section 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the grass front cover colored transparent section 6442b can be set to the decorative mode. Further, the light emitted from the grass substrate front surface light-emitting portion 6422 is scattered on the back surface of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b or reflected on the back surface of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, thereby exposing the exposed white color. By decorating the grass substrate 6420, it is possible to decorate the white grass substrate 6420 with the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422. For example, by adopting green as the light emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, it becomes possible to decorate the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass substrate 6420 in green with the light emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422. , You can express the way the grass is growing.

503(A) is an example in which the grass cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is modified to a grass cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a in the example shown in FIG. 501(A). In addition, white is preferably used as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front surface light-emitting unit 6422 is in the off state, white and white grass can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting section 6422 is in the light emitting mode, the grass front cover colorless light scattering section 6444a can be in the decorative mode. Further, the light emitted from the light emitting unit 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is scattered on the back surface of the colorless light scattering unit 6444a in front of the grass, so that the exposed white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated. It becomes possible to decorate 6420 with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the light emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, it is possible to decorate the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a and the grass substrate 6420 with the green light emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422. Therefore, it is possible to express the manner in which grass is growing.

FIG. 503(B) is an example in which part of the grass front cover colorless light-scattering portion 6444a in the example shown in FIG. 503(A) is modified into a grass front cover opaque portion 6446. As the color of the grass cover opaque portion 6446, yellow, brown, or silver is preferably adopted. In addition, white is preferably used as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front surface light-emitting unit 6422 is in the off state, white, white, yellow, brown, or silvery grass can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the grass front cover light scattering unit 6444 can be set to the decoration mode by the light reflected on the back surface of the grass front cover opaque unit 6446. In addition, since the light is scattered on the back surface of the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, the exposed white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. Becomes For example, by adopting green as the light emission color of the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422, it is possible to decorate the grass front cover colorless light scattering unit 6444a and the grass substrate 6420 with green, and a mode in which grass is growing Can be expressed.

503(C) is the same as the example shown in FIG. 503(B), and the front grass cover colorless light-scattering portion 6444a is the front grass cover opaque portion 6446, and the front grass cover opaque portion 6446 is the front grass colorless light scattering portion 6444a. This is a modified example. As the color of the grass cover opaque portion 6446, yellow, brown, or silver is preferably adopted. In addition, white is preferably used as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front surface light-emitting unit 6422 is in the off state, white, yellow or brown or silver, or white grass can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 exposed can be decorated with the light scattered by the grass front cover colorless light scattering unit 6444a. It is possible to decorate the substrate 6420 with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the light emission color of the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422, it is possible to decorate the grass front cover colorless light scattering unit 6444a and the grass substrate 6420 with green, and a mode in which grass is growing Can be expressed.

In the example shown in FIGS. 503(A) to 503(C), the grass cover 6440 is formed of a colored and transparent synthetic resin to replace the grass cover colorless light scattering section 6444a with the grass cover colored light scattering. You may make it comprise the part 6444b. Specifically, the grass cover 6440 may be formed of a green transparent synthetic resin.

FIG. 503(D) is an example in which the grass cover colorless light-scattering portion 6444a is modified into a grass cover opaque portion 6446 in the example shown in FIG. 503(C). As the color of the grass cover opaque portion 6446, yellow, brown, or silver is preferably adopted. In addition, white is preferably used as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422 is in the off state, white, yellow, brown, or silvery grass can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is set to emit light, the exposed white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated by the light reflected on the back surface of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446. It is possible to decorate the substrate 6420 with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the light emission color of the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422, it is possible to decorate the grass substrate 6420 with green, and it is possible to express a mode in which grass is growing.

In the example shown in FIGS. 501(A) to 503(D), the outer shapes of the grass cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 having a larger outer shape than the grass cover 6440 are visible to the player as decorative shapes. Is configured. In addition, the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422 includes a grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, a grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, a grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, a grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and a grass front cover opaque portion 6446. Although only one of the members is provided in a position to be covered in front view, the LEDs forming the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 are arranged behind the position forming the boundary line between these members. May be. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the LEDs configuring the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422 are mounted on the grass substrate 6420 in the off state.

For example, in the grass role object 6400 shown in FIG. 501B, the LEDs forming the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422 are provided behind the boundary line formed by the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. In the case of arranging them, since the presence of the LEDs constituting the grass substrate front surface light-emitting portion 6422 is less noticeable, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is white and the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is green. It becomes possible for the player to clearly see.

Similarly, the relationship between the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the colorless light scattering portion 6444a, the relationship between the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass front cover colored Relationship with the light scattering portion 6444b, relationship between the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, relationship between the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, grass front cover colored light Also in the relation between the scattering portion 6444b and the grass cover opaque portion 6446, when the LEDs configuring the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 are arranged behind these boundary lines, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is arranged. It is possible to make the presence of the LEDs that form the above-mentioned LED less noticeable.

Further, the relationship between the exposed portion of the grass substrate 6420 and the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, the relationship between the exposed portion of the grass substrate 6420 and the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the exposure of the grass substrate 6420. Relationship between the existing part and the grass front cover colorless light scattering part 6444a, the relationship between the part where the grass substrate 6420 is exposed and the grass front cover colored light scattering part 6444b, the part where the grass substrate 6420 is exposed and the grass front Even in the relationship with the cover opaque portion 6446, when the LEDs configuring the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 are arranged behind these boundary lines, the presence of the LEDs configuring the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is present. Can be made less noticeable.

In the combination described above, in the combination of the grass cover opaque portion 6446 and the member forming the boundary line by combining with the grass cover opaque portion 6446, the light of the LEDs that form the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is changed to By combining with the grass cover opaque portion 6446, it is possible to efficiently transmit to the member forming the boundary line.

The light from the LEDs forming the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 may be emitted perpendicularly to the grass substrate 6420, or the boundary line at the position where the LEDs forming the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 are mounted. Irradiation may be performed in a direction perpendicular to the tangent line.

For example, in the case where both are transparent members such as a combination of the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the colorless light scattering portion 6444a, the LEDs forming the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 are The irradiation direction of light may be configured to be perpendicular to the grass substrate 6420. On the other hand, in the combination of the grass cover opaque portion 6446 and the member forming the boundary line by combining with the grass cover opaque portion 6446, the boundary line at the position where the LED configuring the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is mounted is It is preferable that the light is irradiated in the direction of a member that is perpendicular to the tangent line and is combined with the grass cover opaque portion 6446 to form a boundary line.

When a rectangular LED is used as the LED forming the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422, the longitudinal direction of the LED coincides with the direction of the boundary line or the close battle of the boundary line at the position where the LED is arranged. Should be arranged like this.

In addition, when the two parts forming the boundary line are formed by one member, the LED forming the grass substrate front surface light emitting part 6422 has a width of about the same width at the part corresponding to the boundary line when viewed from the front. You may comprise so that a V-shaped groove may be provided. With such a configuration, when viewed from the front of the LED forming the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the LED forming the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is bent and visually recognized by the V-shaped groove. This makes it possible to make the presence of the LEDs that form the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422 less noticeable. It should be noted that the shape is not limited to the V-shaped groove, and any structure capable of refraction may be used. On the other hand, when the boundary line is formed by combining a plurality of members, the LED configuring the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422 is bent and visually recognized without providing such a groove. It is possible to make the presence of the LEDs that form the substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422 inconspicuous.

In the example shown in FIGS. 501(A) to 503(D), the outer shapes of the grass cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 having a larger outer shape than the grass cover 6440 are visible to the player as decorative shapes. Is configured. Thereby, a sense of depth can be provided. In addition, in the grass cover 6440, the grass transparent colorless section 6442a, the grass colored transparent section 6442b, the grass colorless colorless scattering section 6444a, the grass colored colored light scattering section 6444b, and the grass cover opaque section 6446 are formed. A decorative shape is also formed on the boundary line.

Further, since the grass substrate 6420 is exposed, the grass substrate 6420 is decorated with the color of the grass substrate 6420 itself, and the grass substrate 6420 is also decorated with the light emitted from the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422. Be seen. In particular, when the grass substrate 6420 is made white and light of a color other than white is emitted from the grass substrate front light emitting section 6422, the color of the grass substrate 6420 can be changed to the emitted color so as to be visible.

In addition, the light emitted from the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 is reflected between the grass front cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 located on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420, so that the light is emitted toward the end portion of the grass substrate 6420. Since it is configured to reflect light, it is possible to indirectly illuminate a member that constitutes the grass cover 6440 and is not located in front of the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422. In addition, each member that configures the grass role object 6400 in a different color when the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422 is turned off and when the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 is turned on can be a decorative aspect. It should be noted that by mounting the LEDs that configure the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 on the grass substrate 6420 so that light is emitted horizontally upward with respect to the surface forming the grass substrate 6420, The light can be made to reach the edge.

504(A) to 506(D) show modified examples of the example shown in FIG. 500(D). In these examples, the grass substrate 6420 and the grass cover 6440 are configured to have the same size. Further, modifications of the specific structure of the grass cover 6440 will be described below.

In the example shown in FIG. 504(A), a colorless and transparent grass front cover 6440 is provided in front of a white grass substrate 6420. The surface forming the grass cover 6440 is not subjected to lens cutting or matte finish and is formed smoothly, and the light passing through the grass cover 6440 is configured to pass without irregular reflection. There is. In this example, the entire grass cover 6440 functions as the grass cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. With such a configuration, the grass substrate 6420 located behind the grass cover colorless transparent portion 6442a can be directly visually recognized. Further, when the grass substrate front surface light-emitting unit 6422 is in the off state, the grass component 6400 as a whole can express grass in a white form.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 is set to emit light, the exposed white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color.
For example, by adopting green as the light emission color of the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422, it is possible to decorate the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass substrate 6420 with green, and express a mode in which grass grows. it can.

FIG. 504(B) is an example in which part of the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is modified to the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b in the example shown in FIG. 504(A). As the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, green is preferably adopted. In addition, white is preferably used as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422 is in the off state, white and green grass can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting section 6422 is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422, a grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, a grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, and a grass substrate 6420 which is visible through the grass front cover 6440. It is possible to decorate the plants with green, and it is possible to express the manner in which grass is growing.

In the example shown in FIG. 504(B), FIG. 504(C) shows the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a as the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b as the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. This is an example modified to. As the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, green is preferably adopted. In addition, white is preferably used as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front surface light-emitting unit 6422 is in the off state, green grass and white grass can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting section 6422 is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422, a grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, a grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, and a grass substrate 6420 which is visible through the grass front cover 6440. It is possible to decorate the plants with green, and it is possible to express the manner in which grass is growing.

FIG. 504(D) is an example in which a part of the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is modified to a grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a in the example shown in FIG. 504(A). In addition, white is preferably used as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front surface light-emitting unit 6422 is in the off state, white and white grass can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting section 6422 is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front surface light-emitting unit 6422, the grass substrate cover colorless transparent unit 6442a, the grass front cover colorless light scattering unit 6444a, and the grass substrate 6420 which can be visually recognized through the grass front cover 6440. It becomes possible to decorate and with green, and it is possible to express the manner in which grass is growing.

In the example shown in FIG. 504(D), FIG. 504(E) shows the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a as the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a and the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a as the grass front cover colorless transparent. This is a modified example of the portion 6442a. In addition, white is preferably used as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front surface light-emitting unit 6422 is in the off state, white and white grass can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting section 6422 is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front surface light-emitting unit 6422, the grass substrate cover colorless transparent unit 6442a, the grass front cover colorless light scattering unit 6444a, and the grass substrate 6420 which can be visually recognized through the grass front cover 6440. It becomes possible to decorate and with green, and it is possible to express the manner in which grass is growing.

FIG. 504(F) is an example in which a part of the grass cover colorless and transparent portion 6442a is modified to a grass cover opaque portion 6446 in the example shown in FIG. 504(A). As the color of the grass cover opaque portion 6446, yellow, brown, or silver is preferably adopted. In addition, white is preferably used as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422 is in the off state, white, yellow, brown, or silvery grass can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting section 6422 is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a are decorated with green. It becomes possible to express the manner in which grass is growing.

504(G) is the same as the example shown in FIG. 504(F) except that the grass cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is changed to a grass cover opaque portion 6446, and the grass cover opaque portion 6446 is changed to a grass cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. It is an example. As the color of the grass cover opaque portion 6446, yellow, brown, or silver is preferably adopted. In addition, white is preferably used as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express grass in a mode of yellow, brown, silver, or white from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting section 6422 is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a are decorated with green. It becomes possible to express the manner in which grass is growing.

FIG. 505(A) is an example in which the grass cover colorless and transparent portion 6442a is modified to the grass cover colored transparent portion 6442b in the example shown in FIG. 504(A). Green is preferably used as the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. In addition, white is preferably used as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express grass in a green form in the entire grass role object 6400.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting section 6422 is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the light emission color of the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b are decorated with green. It becomes possible to express the manner in which grass is growing.

505(B) is an example in which the grass cover colorless and transparent portion 6442a is modified to the grass cover colored transparent portion 6442b in the example shown in FIG. 504(D). Green is preferably used as the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. In this case, the grass front cover 6440 has a green grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b. In addition, white is preferably used as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express grass in the form of green and green from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting section 6422 is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the light emission color of the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422, the grass substrate 6420 which is visible through the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and the grass front cover 6440. It becomes possible to decorate and with green, and it is possible to express the manner in which grass is growing.

FIG. 505(C) is an example in which the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is modified to the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b in the example shown in FIG. 504(E). Green is preferably used as the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. In this case, the grass front cover 6440 has a green grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b. In addition, white is preferably used as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express grass in the form of green and green from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting section 6422 is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422, a grass front cover colored transparent unit 6442b, a grass front cover light scattering unit 6444, and a grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover 6440. It is possible to decorate the plants with green, and it is possible to express the manner in which grass is growing.

FIG. 505(D) is an example in which the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is modified to the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b in the example shown in FIG. 504(F). Green is preferably used as the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. As the color of the grass cover opaque portion 6446, yellow, brown, or silver is preferably adopted. In addition, white is preferably used as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 is in the off state, grass in a green, yellow, brown or silver mode can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting section 6422 is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the light emission color of the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b are decorated with green. It becomes possible to express the manner in which grass is growing.

505(E) is an example in which the grass cover colorless and transparent portion 6442a is modified to the grass cover colored transparent portion 6442b in the example shown in FIG. 504(G). Green is preferably used as the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. As the color of the grass cover opaque portion 6446, yellow, brown, or silver is preferably adopted. In addition, white is preferably used as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front surface light-emitting unit 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express grass in the form of yellow, brown, silver, or green from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting section 6422 is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the light emission color of the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b are decorated with green. It becomes possible to express the manner in which grass is growing.

FIG. 506(A) is an example in which the grass cover colorless colorless portion 6442a is modified to the grass cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a in the example shown in FIG. 504(A). In addition, white is preferably used as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front surface light-emitting unit 6422 is in the off state, the grass component 6400 as a whole can express grass in a white form.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting section 6422 is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422, the grass front cover colorless light scattering unit 6444a and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover colorless light scattering unit 6444a are decorated with green. It becomes possible to express the manner in which grass is growing.

506(B) is an example in which the grass cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is modified to a grass cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a in the example shown in FIG. 504(F). As the color of the grass cover opaque portion 6446, yellow, brown, or silver is preferably adopted. In addition, white is preferably used as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422 is in the off state, white or green, yellow, brown or silvery grass can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting section 6422 is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422, the grass front cover colorless light scattering unit 6444a and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover colorless light scattering unit 6444a are decorated with green. It becomes possible to express the manner in which grass is growing.

FIG. 506(C) is an example in which the grass cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is modified to the grass cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a in the example shown in FIG. 504(G). As the color of the grass cover opaque portion 6446, yellow, brown, or silver is preferably adopted. In addition, white is preferably used as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express grass in a mode of yellow, brown, silver, or white from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting section 6422 is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422, the grass front cover light scattering unit 6444 and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover light scattering unit 6444 are decorated with green. It becomes possible to express the manner in which grass is growing.

In the example shown in FIGS. 506(A) to 506(C), the grass cover 6440 is formed of a colored and transparent synthetic resin to replace the grass cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a with the grass cover colored light scattering. You may make it comprise the part 6444b. Specifically, the grass cover 6440 may be formed of a green transparent synthetic resin.

FIG. 506(D) is an example in which the grass cover colorless and transparent portion 6442a is changed to a grass cover opaque portion 6446 in the example shown in FIG. 504(A). As the color of the grass cover opaque portion 6446, yellow, brown, or silver is preferably adopted. In addition, white is preferably used as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front surface light-emitting unit 6422 is in the off state, the grass component 6400 as a whole can express grass in a yellow, brown, or silver form.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface light-emitting unit 6422 is set to emit light, light is reflected between the white grass substrate 6420 and the grass front cover opaque unit 6446 to the end portion forming the outer periphery of the grass role object 6400. Light reaches, and it becomes possible to decorate the end portion of the grass role object 6400 with a predetermined color. More specifically, when the grass role object 6400 is viewed obliquely, the end portion of the grass substrate 6420 appears to be exposed, and thus the exposed portion can be visually recognized in a state where it is illuminated with a predetermined luminescent color. For example, by adopting green as the light emission color of the grass substrate front surface light emitting section 6422, it is possible to decorate the end part forming the outer periphery of the grass role object 6400 with green, and it is possible to express a mode in which grass is growing.
In addition, even in the example in which the other grass front cover opaque portion 6446 is provided, it can be visually recognized in such a mode.

In the example shown in FIGS. 504(A) to 506(D), the outer shapes of the grass cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 of the same size as the grass cover 6440 are visible as a decorative shape to the player. It is configured. In addition, in the grass cover 6440, the grass transparent colorless section 6442a, the grass colored transparent section 6442b, the grass colorless colorless scattering section 6444a, the grass colored colored light scattering section 6444b, and the grass cover opaque section 6446 are formed. A decorative shape is also formed on the boundary line.

Further, since the color of the grass substrate 6420 is directly visible through the grass transparent cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass grass cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, decoration is performed by the color of the grass substrate 6420 itself. At the same time, the grass substrate 6420 is also decorated by the light emitted from the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422. Since the color of the grass substrate 6420 is visible through the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, the colors of the grass cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 are different. The decoration of the grass substrate 6420 is also performed by the light emitted from the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422.

In addition, the light emitted from the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 is reflected between the grass front cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 located on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420, so that the light is emitted toward the end portion of the grass substrate 6420. Since it is configured to reflect light, it is possible to indirectly illuminate a member that constitutes the grass cover 6440 and is not located in front of the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422. In addition, each member that configures the grass role object 6400 in a different color when the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422 is turned off and when the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 is turned on can be a decorative aspect.

507(A) to 509(D) show modified examples of the example shown in FIG. 500(E). In these examples, the grass cover 6440 is larger than the grass substrate 6420, the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 is covered by the grass cover 6440, and the grass cover 6440 is provided outside the contour of the grass substrate 6420. Although it is configured to protrude, a modified example of the specific structure of the grass cover 6440 will be described below.

In the example shown in FIG. 507(A), a colorless and transparent grass front cover 6440 is provided in front of the white grass substrate 6420. The surface forming the grass cover 6440 is not subjected to lens cutting or matte finish and is formed smoothly, and the light passing through the grass cover 6440 is configured to pass without irregular reflection. There is. In this example, the entire grass cover 6440 functions as the grass cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. In addition, white is preferably used as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, the grass substrate 6420 located behind the grass cover colorless transparent portion 6442a can be directly visually recognized. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front surface light-emitting unit 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express a colorless and transparent grass shape from the top.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting section 6422 is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the light emission color of the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422, it is possible to decorate the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass substrate 6420 with green, and express a mode in which grass grows. it can.

507(B) is an example in which part of the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is modified to the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b in the example shown in FIG. 507(A). As the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, green is preferably adopted. In addition, white is preferably used as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front surface light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express grass in a colorless, transparent, white, and green form from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting section 6422 is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422, a grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, a grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, and a grass substrate 6420 which is visible through the grass front cover 6440. It is possible to decorate the plants with green, and it is possible to express the manner in which grass is growing.

507(C) shows that in the example shown in FIG. 507(B), the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is a grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, and the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is a grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. This is an example modified to. As the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, green is preferably adopted. In addition, white is preferably used as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422 is in the off state, grass in a green transparent, green, and white form can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting section 6422 is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422, a grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, a grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, and a grass substrate 6420 which is visible through the grass front cover 6440. It is possible to decorate the plants with green, and it is possible to express the manner in which grass is growing.

507(D) is an example in which part of the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is modified to the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a in the example shown in FIG. 507(A). In addition, white is preferably used as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express grass in a colorless, transparent, white, or white form from the top.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting section 6422 is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, the grass front cover light scattering unit 6444, and the grass substrate 6420 which is visible through the grass front cover 6440. It is possible to decorate the plants with green, and it is possible to express the manner in which grass is growing.

FIG. 507(E) shows the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a in the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, and the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a in the example shown in FIG. 507(D) colorless front. This is an example modified to the portion 6442a. In addition, white is preferably used as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express grass in the form of colorless, translucent, white, and white from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting section 6422 is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422, the grass substrate cover colorless light scattering unit 6444a, the grass front cover colorless transparent unit 6442a, and the grass substrate 6420 which can be visually recognized through the grass front cover 6440. It becomes possible to decorate and with green, and it is possible to express the manner in which grass is growing.

507(F) is an example in which a part of the grass cover colorless and transparent portion 6442a is modified to a grass cover opaque portion 6446 in the example shown in FIG. 507(A). As the color of the grass cover opaque portion 6446, yellow, brown, or silver is preferably adopted. In addition, white is preferably used as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front surface light-emitting unit 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express grass in a colorless and transparent, white, yellow, brown, or silver mode from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting section 6422 is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a are decorated with green. It becomes possible to express the manner in which grass is growing.

507(G) is modified from the example shown in FIG. 507(F) to the grass cover colorless transparent portion 6442a as the grass cover opaque portion 6446 and the grass cover opaque portion 6446 as the grass cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. It is an example. As the color of the grass cover opaque portion 6446, yellow, brown, or silver is preferably adopted. In addition, white is preferably used as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express grass in a mode of yellow, brown, silver, or white from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting section 6422 is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a are decorated with green. It becomes possible to express the manner in which grass is growing.

FIG. 508(A) is an example in which the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is modified into a grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b in the example shown in FIG. 507(A). Green is preferably used as the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. In addition, white is preferably used as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express grass in a green transparent and green form from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting section 6422 is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the light emission color of the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b are decorated with green. It becomes possible to express the manner in which grass is growing.

508(B) is an example in which the grass cover colorless and transparent part 6442a is modified to the grass cover colored transparent part 6442b in the example shown in FIG. 507(D). Green is preferably used as the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. In addition, white is preferably used as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express grass in a green transparent, green, and green mode from the top.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting section 6422 is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the light emission color of the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422, the grass substrate 6420 which is visible through the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and the grass front cover 6440. It becomes possible to decorate and with green, and it is possible to express the manner in which grass is growing.

508(C) shows the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b in the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b and the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b in the example shown in FIG. 508(B). This is an example modified to the portion 6442b. As the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, green is preferably adopted. In addition, white is preferably used as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front surface light-emitting unit 6422 is in the off state, grass in a green translucent, green, and white form can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting section 6422 is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422, the grass substrate 6420 which can be visually seen through the grass front cover colored light diffusion unit 6444b, the grass front cover colored transparent unit 6442b, and the grass front cover 6440. It becomes possible to decorate and with green, and it is possible to express the manner in which grass is growing.

FIG. 508(D) is an example in which the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is modified to a grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b in the example shown in FIG. 507(F). Green is preferably used as the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. As the color of the grass cover opaque portion 6446, yellow, brown, or silver is preferably adopted. In addition, white is preferably used as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422 is in the off state, grass in a green transparent, green, yellow, brown, or silver mode can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting section 6422 is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the light emission color of the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b are decorated with green. It becomes possible to express the manner in which grass is growing.

508(E) is the same as the example shown in FIG. 508(D) except that the grass cover colored transparent part 6442b is changed to a grass cover opaque part 6446, and the grass cover opaque part 6446 is changed to a grass cover colored transparent part 6442b. It is an example. As the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, green is preferably adopted. As the color of the grass cover opaque portion 6446, yellow, brown, or silver is preferably adopted. In addition, white is preferably used as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express grass in the form of yellow, brown, silver, or green from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting section 6422 is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the light emission color of the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b are decorated with green. It becomes possible to express the manner in which grass is growing.

509(A) shows an example in which the grass cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is modified to a grass cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a in the example shown in FIG. 507(A). In addition, white is preferably used as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front surface light-emitting unit 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express grass that is colorless and transparent and white from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting section 6422 is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422, the grass front cover colorless light scattering unit 6444a and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover colorless light scattering unit 6444a are decorated with green. It becomes possible to express the manner in which grass is growing.

509(B) shows an example in which the grass cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is modified to the grass cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a in the example shown in FIG. 507(F). As the color of the grass cover opaque portion 6446, yellow, brown, or silver is preferably adopted. In addition, white is preferably used as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front surface light-emitting unit 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express grass in a colorless and transparent, white, yellow, brown, or silver mode from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting section 6422 is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422, the grass front cover colorless light scattering unit 6444a and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover colorless light scattering unit 6444a are decorated with green. It becomes possible to express the manner in which grass is growing.

509(C) is an example in which the grass cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is modified to a grass cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a in the example shown in FIG. 507(G). As the color of the grass cover opaque portion 6446, yellow, brown, or silver is preferably adopted. In addition, white is preferably used as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express grass in a mode of yellow, brown, silver, or white from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting section 6422 is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422, the grass front cover colorless light scattering unit 6444a and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover colorless light scattering unit 6444a are decorated with green. It becomes possible to express the manner in which grass is growing.

In the example shown in FIGS. 509(A) to 509(C), the grass cover 6440 is formed of a colored transparent synthetic resin to replace the grass cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a with the grass cover colored light scattering. You may make it comprise the part 6444b. Specifically, the grass cover 6440 may be formed of a green transparent synthetic resin.

FIG. 509(D) is an example in which the grass cover colorless and transparent portion 6442a is changed to a grass cover opaque portion 6446 in the example shown in FIG. 507(A). As the color of the grass cover opaque portion 6446, yellow, brown, or silver is preferably adopted. In addition, white is preferably used as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front surface light-emitting unit 6422 is in the off state, the grass component 6400 as a whole can express grass in a yellow, brown, or silver form.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422 is set to emit light, light is reflected between the white grass substrate 6420 and the grass front cover opaque unit 6446 to allow light to reach an end portion forming the outer periphery of the grass substrate 6420. And the light can be emitted upward or rearward at the upper end portion of the grass substrate 6420. This makes it possible to perform decoration by irradiating other members with light of a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the light emission color of the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422, it is possible to decorate the members located above and behind the end portion forming the outer periphery of the grass substrate 6420 with green. In this example, it can be said that the grass substrate 6420 is provided not to decorate the grass role object 6400 itself but to decorate other members.

In the example shown in FIGS. 507(A) to 509(D), the outer shape of at least one of the grass cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 is configured to be visible to the player as a decorative shape. In addition, in the grass cover 6440, the grass transparent colorless section 6442a, the grass colored transparent section 6442b, the grass colorless colorless scattering section 6444a, the grass colored colored light scattering section 6444b, and the grass cover opaque section 6446 are formed. A decorative shape is also formed on the boundary line.

Further, since the color of the grass substrate 6420 is in a visible state through the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass front cover light scattering portion 6444, the decoration is performed by the color of the grass substrate 6420 itself. The grass substrate 6420 is also decorated with the light emitted from the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422. In addition, the light emitted from the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 is reflected between the grass front cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 located on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420, so that the light is emitted toward the end portion of the grass substrate 6420. Since it is configured to reflect light, it is possible to indirectly illuminate a member that constitutes the grass cover 6440 and is not located in front of the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422. In addition, each member that configures the grass role object 6400 in a different color when the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422 is turned off and when the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 is turned on can be a decorative aspect.

510(A) to 510(D) show modified examples of the example shown in FIG. 500(H). In these examples, a grass substrate rear surface light emitting unit 6424 is provided on the rear surface of the grass substrate 6420. Further, the size of the rear grass cover 6460 is larger than that of the grass substrate 6420, the front surface of the rear grass cover 6460 is covered by the grass substrate 6420, and the rear grass cover 6460 extends outside the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420. Although configured, a modification of the specific structure of the grass cover 6440 will be described below.

In the example shown in FIG. 510A, a colorless and transparent rear grass cover 6460 is provided behind a white grass substrate 6420. The surface forming the rear grass cover 6460 is not subjected to lens cutting or matte finish, and is smooth. In this example, the entire grass cover 6440 functions as the grass cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. In addition, white is preferably used as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, the grass substrate 6420 and the rear grass cover colorless transparent portion 6462a located behind the grass substrate 6420 can be directly visually recognized. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front surface light-emitting unit 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express a colorless and transparent grass shape from the top.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate rear surface light emitting unit 6424 is set to the light emitting mode, the rear grass cover colorless transparent portion 6462a can be decorated. For example, by adopting green as the light emission color of the grass substrate rear surface light emitting part 6424, it becomes possible to decorate the exposed part of the rear grass cover colorless transparent part 6462a with green, and the grass grows. Aspect can be expressed.

FIG. 510(B) shows an example in which the rear grass cover colorless transparent portion 6462a is modified to the rear grass colored transparent portion 6462b in the example shown in FIG. 510(A). As a color of the rear grass cover colored transparent portion 6462b, green may be adopted. In addition, white is preferably used as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front surface light-emitting unit 6422 is in the off state, green grass and white grass can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate rear surface light emitting section 6424 is set to the light emitting mode, the grass rear cover colored transparent section 6462b can be decorated. For example, by adopting green as the light emission color of the grass substrate rear surface light emitting section 6424, it is possible to decorate a portion of the rear grass cover colored transparent section 6462b exposed in front view with green, and grass is growing. Aspect can be expressed.

FIG. 510(C) is an example in which the rear grass cover colorless transparent portion 6462a is modified to a rear grass cover colorless light scattering portion 6464a in the example shown in FIG. 510(A). In addition, white is preferably used as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express grass in a colorless, translucent, white form from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate rear surface light emitting unit 6424 is set to emit light, the grass rear cover colorless light scattering unit 6464a can be decorated. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate rear surface light emitting section 6424, it is possible to decorate the exposed portion of the rear grass cover colorless light scattering section 6464a with green, so that grass grows. It is possible to express the aspect.

FIG. 510(D) is an example in which the rear grass cover colorless transparent portion 6462a is transformed into a rear grass cover opaque portion 6466 in the example shown in FIG. 510(A). As the color of the opaque portion 6466 of the rear grass cover, yellow, brown, or silver may be adopted. In addition, white is preferably used as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express grass in a mode of yellow, brown, silver, or white from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate rear surface light emitting unit 6424 is set to emit light, the light is reflected between the white grass substrate 6420 and the grass back cover opaque unit 6466 so that light is emitted up to the end portion forming the outer periphery of the grass substrate 6420. Is reached, and it becomes possible to decorate the periphery of the end portion of the grass substrate 6420 with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the light emission color of the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422, it is possible to decorate the periphery of the edge of the grass substrate 6420 with green, and it is possible to express a mode in which grass is growing.

In the example shown in FIGS. 510(A) to 510(D), the outer shapes of the grass substrate 6420 and the rear grass cover 6460 having a larger outer shape than the grass substrate 6420 are visible to the player as decorative shapes. It is configured. As a result, a sense of depth can be provided.
Further, since the grass substrate 6420 is exposed, decoration is performed by the color of the grass substrate 6420 itself. Further, when the grass substrate rear surface light emitting unit 6424 is set to emit light in a predetermined color, the light from the grass substrate rear surface light emitting unit 6424 reaches the upper end portion of the grass grass cover 6460, and the upper end portion of the grass rear cover 6460. It becomes possible to visually recognize the manner in which is decorated with a predetermined color.

511(A) to 512(G) show modified examples of the examples shown in FIGS. 500(A) to 501(G). Specifically, in the example shown in FIGS. 511(A) to 511(B), the grass substrate 6420 is provided with a grass substrate opening 6426 having a decorative shape imitating the head of a rabbit. The rear side is visible through the substrate opening 6426.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 511(C) to 511(E) and 512(A) to 512(G), the grass cover 6440 is located in front of the grass substrate 6420, and the grass cover 6440 is located in front of the grass substrate 6420. Further, a grass front cover opening 6448 having a decorative shape imitating a rabbit head is provided, and the grass substrate 6420 is configured to be visible through the grass front cover opening 6448.

In addition, in the example shown in FIGS. 511(F) to 511(H), the grass back cover 6460 is located behind the grass substrate 6420, and the grass substrate 6420 has a decorative shape that imitates the head of a rabbit. A substrate opening 6426 is provided. The rear grass cover 6460 is configured to be visible through the grass substrate opening 6426.

511(A) is an example in which a grass substrate 6420 is provided with a grass substrate opening 6426 in the example shown in FIG. 500(A). The grass substrate opening 6426 is formed by providing a grass substrate 6420 with a punched hole-like physical opening. The grass substrate opening 6426 has a shape simulating a rabbit head. A plurality of grass substrate openings 6426 may be provided, and in this example, a grass substrate first opening 6426a and a grass substrate second opening 6426b smaller than the grass substrate first opening 6426a are provided. With such a configuration, not only the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420 but also the grass substrate opening 6426 can be provided with a decorative shape. Further, the rear can be visually recognized from the grass substrate opening 6426.

FIG. 511(B) is an example in which a grass substrate 6420 is provided with a grass substrate opening 6426 in the example shown in FIG. 500(B). The grass substrate opening 6426 is formed in such a manner that a punched hole-shaped physical opening is provided in the grass substrate 6420, and a member located at the rear through the grass substrate opening 6426 is directly visible. There is. The substrate grass substrate opening 6426 has a shape imitating the head of a rabbit. A plurality of grass substrate openings 6426 may be provided, and in this example, a grass substrate first opening 6426a and a grass substrate second opening 6426b smaller than the grass substrate first opening 6426a are provided. With such a configuration, not only the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420 but also the grass substrate opening 6426 can be provided with a decorative shape. Further, the rear side can be directly viewed from the grass substrate opening 6426.

511(C) is an example in which the grass cover 6440 is provided with a grass cover opening 6448 in the example shown in FIG. 500(C). The grass cover cover opening 6448 is formed in a manner in which a grass hole cover 6440 is provided with a punched hole-like physical opening, and the grass substrate 6420 located behind is directly visible through the grass cover cover opening 6448. It is configured to be possible. The grass cover opening 6448 has a shape imitating the head of a rabbit. A plurality of grass front cover openings 6448 may be provided, and in this example, a grass front cover first opening 6448a and a grass front cover second opening 6448b smaller than the grass front cover first opening 6448a are provided. ing.

In front view, the grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided at a position overlapping the grass substrate front surface first light emitting portion 6422a forming a part of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, and the grass front cover first opening 6448a. The first light emitting portion 6422a on the front surface of the grass substrate is directly visible. On the other hand, the grass front cover second opening 6448b is located at a position where it does not overlap with the grass substrate front surface second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422c forming part of the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 in a front view. It is provided. With such a structure, not only the outer shape of the grass cover 6440 but also the grass cover opening 6448 can be provided with a decorative shape. Further, the grass substrate 6420 can be visually recognized from the grass cover cover opening 6448, and the shape of the grass grass cover opening 6448 and the color of the grass substrate 6420 viewed from the grass grass cover opening 6448 can be viewed. The decoration is done.

When the grass substrate front surface first light emitting portion 6422a is in the light emitting mode, the grass exposed at the end surface of the grass front cover 6440 forming the grass front cover first opening 6448a and the portion where the grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided. The substrate 6420 is directly decorated by the light emitted from the grass substrate front surface first light emitting unit 6422a.

On the other hand, in the case where the grass substrate front surface second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422c are in the light emitting mode, the grass substrate front surface second light emitting portion 6422b is the end surface forming the grass front cover second opening 6448b, It becomes a form decorated with the light emitted from the third light emitting portion 6422c on the front surface of the grass substrate. On the other hand, regarding the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the grass front cover second opening 6448b is provided, the entire surface of the exposed portion is not completely illuminated, and the portion forming the outer periphery of the exposed portion is the grass substrate. The decoration is performed by the light emitted from the front second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front third light emitting portion 6422c.

FIG. 511(D) is an example in which the size of the grass cover 6440 in the example shown in FIG. 511(C) is modified to the same size as the grass substrate 6420. In addition, FIG. 511(E) is an example in which the size of the grass cover 6440 is larger than that of the grass substrate 6420 in the example shown in FIG. 511(C). Also in these examples, the same effect can be obtained by adopting the same mode as the grass cover cover opening 6448 in the example shown in FIG. 511(C).

511(F) is an example in which a grass substrate 6420 is provided with a grass substrate opening 6426 in the example shown in FIG. 500(F). The grass substrate opening 6426 is formed in a manner in which a punched hole-shaped physical opening is provided in the grass substrate 6420, and the rear grass cover 6460 located at the rear through the grass substrate opening 6426 is directly visible. It is configured. The grass substrate opening 6426 has a shape simulating a rabbit head. A plurality of grass substrate openings 6426 may be provided, and in this example, a grass substrate first opening 6426a and a grass substrate second opening 6426b smaller than the grass substrate first opening 6426a are provided. The grass substrate rear surface light emitting unit 6424 is not provided around the grass substrate first opening 6426a. Further, a grass substrate rear surface first light emitting portion 6424a and a grass substrate rear surface second light emitting portion 6424b are provided so as to sandwich the left and right sides of the grass substrate second opening portion 6426b.

With such a configuration, not only the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420 but also the grass substrate opening 6426 can be provided with a decorative shape. Further, the rear grass cover 6460 can be visually recognized from the grass substrate opening 6426. Further, decoration is performed by the shape of the grass substrate opening 6426 and the color of the rear grass cover 6460 visually recognized from the grass substrate opening 6426.

When the grass substrate rear surface first light emitting portion 6424a and the grass substrate rear surface second light emitting portion 6424b are in a light emitting mode, the grass substrate cover 6460 exposed from the grass substrate second opening portion 6426b is the grass substrate rear surface first light emitting portion 6424a. It is decorated with the light emitted from the second light emitting unit 6424b on the rear surface of the grass substrate. On the other hand, the rear grass cover 6460 exposed from the grass substrate first opening 6426a is decorated by the light emitted from the grass substrate rear surface first light emitting portion 6424a and the grass substrate rear surface second light emitting portion 6424b, but the grass rear cover 6460 is not included. The amount of light that reaches the grass substrate second opening portion 6426b is smaller than that of the exposed portion. Therefore, the portion of the rear grass cover 6460 exposed from the first grass substrate opening 6426a is decorated with a smaller amount of light than the portion of the rear grass cover 6460 exposed from the second grass substrate opening 6426b.

The grass substrate rear surface first light emitting unit 6424a may be turned off and only the grass substrate rear surface second light emitting unit 6424b may be turned on in a predetermined color (for example, green). In this case, the portion of the rear grass cover 6460 exposed from the first grass substrate opening 6426a is not substantially in a decorative state because the light does not substantially reach it, and the second grass substrate second opening of the rear grass cover 6460 is not provided. Only the portion exposed from 6426b can be in the decorative mode.

FIG. 511(G) is an example in which the size of the rear grass cover 6460 is modified to the same size as the grass substrate 6420 in the example shown in FIG. 511(F). In addition, FIG. 511(H) is an example in which the size of the rear grass cover 6460 is modified to be larger than that of the grass substrate 6420 in the example shown in FIG. 511(F). Also in these examples, the same effect can be obtained by adopting the same aspect as the grass substrate opening portion 6426 in the example shown in FIG. 511(F).

FIG. 512(A) is an example in which the grass cover 6440 is provided with a grass cover opening 6448 in the example shown in FIG. 501(A). In this example, a colorless and transparent grass front cover 6440 is provided in front of the white grass substrate 6420. In front view, the grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided at a position overlapping the grass substrate front surface first light emitting portion 6422a forming a part of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, and the grass front cover first opening 6448a. The first light emitting portion 6422a on the front surface of the grass substrate is directly visible. On the other hand, in front view, the grass front cover second opening 6448b does not overlap with the grass substrate front surface second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422c forming part of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422. It is provided at a position overlapping the grass cover 6440.

In this example, when the grass substrate front surface light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, the grass substrate 6420 is directly visible in white through the grass front cover opening 6448, and the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is visible. The grass substrate 6420 can be visually recognized as white due to the interposition. Therefore, when the grass substrate front surface light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, the shape of the rabbit formed by the grass front cover opening 6448 does not stand out. Further, since the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 provided on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 is composed of a white LED having the same color as the grass substrate 6420, the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 provided on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 stands out. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player notices the presence of the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422.

When the grass substrate front surface first light emitting portion 6422a is in the light emitting mode, the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the end face forming the grass front cover first opening 6448a and the portion where the grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided is the grass substrate 6420. The light is emitted directly from the front first light emitting unit 6422a. For example, when brown is used as the light emission color of the grass substrate front surface first light emitting portion 6422a, the grass substrate 6420 and the grass front cover first opening portion 6448a exposed at the portion where the grass front cover first opening portion 6448a is provided are removed. Although the formed end face is brown in a decorative manner, the unexposed portion of the grass substrate 6420 is visually recognized by the player as white, which is the substrate color.

On the other hand, in the case where the grass substrate front surface second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422c are in the light emitting mode, the grass substrate front surface second light emitting portion 6422b is the end surface forming the grass front cover second opening 6448b, It becomes a form decorated with the light emitted from the third light emitting portion 6422c on the front surface of the grass substrate. On the other hand, regarding the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the grass front cover second opening 6448b is provided, the entire surface of the exposed portion is not completely illuminated, and the portion forming the outer periphery of the exposed portion is the grass substrate. The decoration is performed by the light emitted from the second front light emitting portion 6422b and the third front light emitting portion 6422c of the grass substrate. For example, when green is adopted as the light emission color of the grass substrate front surface second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422c, the end surfaces forming the grass front cover 6440 and the grass front cover second opening 6448b are green. However, the vicinity of the center of the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the grass front cover second opening 6448b is provided is visually recognized by the player as white, which is the color of the grass substrate 6420.

FIG. 512B shows an example in which the grass cover 6440 is provided with a grass cover opening 6448 in the example shown in FIG. 501B. In this example, the front grass cover 6440 is formed by the upper front grass cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the lower front grass cover colored transparent portion 6442b, but the front grass opening transparent portion 6442b is formed in the front grass opening. 6448 is provided. Green is preferably used as the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. In this example, when the grass substrate front surface light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, the grass substrate 6420 is directly visible in white through the grass front cover opening 6448, and the green grass front cover colored transparent portion. By passing through 6442b, the white grass substrate 6420 is visible as green. This makes it possible to express an aspect as if a white rabbit were present in the green grass.

When the grass substrate front surface first light emitting portion 6422a is in the light emitting mode, the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the end face forming the grass front cover first opening 6448a and the portion where the grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided is the grass substrate 6420. The light is emitted directly from the front first light emitting unit 6422a. For example, when brown is used as the light emission color of the grass substrate front surface first light emitting portion 6422a, the grass substrate 6420 and the grass front cover first opening portion 6448a exposed at the portion where the grass front cover first opening portion 6448a is provided are removed. Although the formed end surface is brown and has a decorative aspect, a white grass substrate 6420 is visually recognized as a green color by the player in a portion of the grass substrate 6420 which is not exposed from the grass front cover first opening 6448a. Alternatively, when green, which is the same color as the grass front cover colored transparent portion, is adopted as the light emission color of the grass substrate front surface first light emitting portion 6422a, the grass exposed at the portion where the grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided. The end face forming the substrate 6420 and the grass front cover first opening 6448a becomes a decoration mode due to the green emission color, and has the same color as the grass front cover colored transparent part, thus expressing a mode as if a rabbit was hidden in the grass. be able to.

On the other hand, in the case where the grass substrate front surface second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422c are in the light emitting mode, the grass substrate front surface second light emitting portion 6422b is the end surface forming the grass front cover second opening 6448b, It becomes a form decorated with the light emitted from the third light emitting portion 6422c on the front surface of the grass substrate. On the other hand, regarding the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the grass front cover second opening 6448b is provided, the entire surface of the exposed portion is not completely illuminated, and the portion forming the outer periphery of the exposed portion is the grass substrate. The decoration is performed by the light emitted from the front second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front third light emitting portion 6422c. For example, when green is adopted as the light emission color of the grass substrate front surface second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422c, the end surfaces of the grass front cover 6440 and the grass front cover second opening 6448b are green. However, the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the grass front cover second opening 6448b is provided is visually recognized by the player as white, which is the color of the substrate.

In the example shown in FIG. 512(B), FIG. 512(C) shows the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a as the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b as the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. It is an example modified to. In this example, grass in white, green, and white forms can be expressed from above when viewed from the front. Further, regarding the provision of the grass cover opening 6448, the same effect can be obtained by adopting the embodiment illustrated in FIG. 512A.

FIG. 512(D) is an example in which the grass cover 6440 is provided with a grass cover opening 6448 in the example shown in FIG. 501(D). In this example, the grass cover 6440 is formed by the upper grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the lower grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, but the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a covers the grass front cover. An opening 6448 is provided. In this example, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422 is in the off state, the grass substrate 6420 is directly visible in white through the grass cover cover opening 6448, and the grass cover cover colorless light scattering unit 6444a is also visible. The white grass substrate 6420 can be visually recognized as white through the. This makes it possible to express an aspect in which a white rabbit is hidden in the white grass.

When the grass substrate front surface first light emitting portion 6422a is in the light emitting mode, the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the end face forming the grass front cover first opening 6448a and the portion where the grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided is the grass substrate 6420. The light is emitted directly from the front first light emitting unit 6422a. For example, when green is adopted as the light emission color of the grass substrate front surface first light emitting portion 6422a, the grass substrate 6420 and the grass front cover first opening portion 6448a exposed at the site where the grass front cover first opening portion 6448a is provided are removed. Although the formed end surface is green in a decorative manner, a white grass substrate 6420 is visually recognized as a white color by the player in a portion of the grass substrate 6420 that is not exposed from the grass front cover first opening 6448a.

On the other hand, in the case where the grass substrate front surface second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422c are in the light emitting mode, the grass substrate front surface second light emitting portion 6422b is the end surface forming the grass front cover second opening 6448b, It becomes a form decorated with the light emitted from the third light emitting portion 6422c on the front surface of the grass substrate. On the other hand, regarding the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the grass front cover second opening 6448b is provided, the entire surface of the exposed portion is not completely illuminated, and the portion forming the outer periphery of the exposed portion is the grass substrate. The decoration is performed by the light emitted from the front second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front third light emitting portion 6422c. For example, when green is adopted as the light emission color of the grass substrate front surface second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422c, the end surfaces of the grass front cover 6440 and the grass front cover second opening 6448b are green. However, the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the grass front cover second opening 6448b is provided is visually recognized by the player as white, which is the color of the substrate. This makes it possible to express an aspect as if a white rabbit were present in the green grass.

In the example shown in FIG. 512(D), FIG. 512(E) shows the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a as the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a and the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a as the grass front cover colorless transparent. This is an example modified to the portion 6442a. In this example, it is possible to represent white, white, and white grass from the top when viewed from the front. Further, regarding the provision of the grass cover opening 6448, the same effect can be obtained by adopting the embodiment illustrated in FIG. 512A.

FIG. 512(F) is an example in which the grass cover 6440 is provided with a grass cover opening 6448 in the example shown in FIG. 501(F). In this example, the front grass cover 6440 is formed by the upper front grass cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the lower front grass cover opaque portion 6446, and the front grass cover opaque portion 6446 has the front grass opening 6448. It is provided. As the color of the grass cover opaque portion 6446, yellow, brown, or silver is preferably adopted.
In this example, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422 is in the off state, the grass substrate 6420 is directly visible in white through the grass cover cover opening 6448, and the grass cover opaque unit 6446 is yellow. It is visible in brown or silver. This makes it possible to represent a white rabbit hiding in yellow, brown or silvery grass.

When the grass substrate front surface first light emitting portion 6422a is in the light emitting mode, the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the end face forming the grass front cover first opening 6448a and the portion where the grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided is the grass substrate 6420. The light is emitted directly from the front first light emitting unit 6422a. For example, when yellow or brown is adopted as the light emission color of the grass substrate front surface first light emitting portion 6422a, or when a white blinking manner is adopted as the light emitting manner, at the portion where the grass front cover first opening portion 6448a is provided. The exposed grass substrate 6420 and the end surface forming the grass front cover first opening 6448a are in a decorative mode in a yellow, brown, or white blinking mode. The portion of the grass substrate 6420 that is not exposed from the grass front cover first opening 6448a is visible to the player as yellow, brown, or silver that is the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446. As a result, the grass front cover first opening 6448a and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 have the same decorative aspect, and when such a light emitting aspect is used from the above-described light-off state, it is as if the white rabbit disappeared. Aspect can be expressed. On the other hand, when white is used as the light emission color of the grass substrate front surface first light emitting portion 6422a, the grass substrate 6420 and the grass front cover first opening portion 6448a exposed at the portion where the grass front cover first opening portion 6448a is provided are removed. The end face to be formed is white in a decorative manner. The portion of the grass substrate 6420 that is not exposed from the grass front cover first opening 6448a is visible to the player as yellow, brown, or silver that is the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446. As a result, in the case where the above light-emitting state is changed to such a light emitting mode, the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the grass front cover first opening 6448a was visually recognized as white only by the color of the substrate, The color of the light emitted from the first light emitting portion 6422a on the front surface of the grass substrate can be white, and the white rabbit can be expressed in a more emphasized manner.

On the other hand, in the case where the grass substrate front surface second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422c are in the light emitting mode, the grass substrate front surface second light emitting portion 6422b is the end surface forming the grass front cover second opening 6448b, It becomes a form decorated with the light emitted from the third light emitting portion 6422c on the front surface of the grass substrate. On the other hand, regarding the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the grass front cover second opening 6448b is provided, the entire surface of the exposed portion is not completely illuminated, and the portion forming the outer periphery of the exposed portion is the grass substrate. The decoration is performed by the light emitted from the front second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front third light emitting portion 6422c. For example, when white is used as the light emission color of the grass substrate front side second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422c, the opening is bordered on the end surface forming the grass front cover second opening 6448b. The grass substrate 6420 exposed in the portion where the grass front cover second opening 6448b is provided is visually recognized by the player as white, which is the color of the substrate, although it is white in the decoration mode. As a result, it is possible to more emphasize and embody a mode in which a white rabbit is hidden in yellow, brown, or silvery grass.

FIG. 512(G) is a modification of the example shown in FIG. 512(F) in which the grass cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is changed to a grass cover opaque portion 6446, and the grass cover opaque portion 6446 is changed to a grass cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. It is an example. In this example, it is possible to express grass in a white, yellow or brown or silvery, white aspect from the top when viewed from the front. Further, regarding the provision of the grass cover opening 6448, the same effect can be obtained by adopting the embodiment illustrated in FIG. 512A.

In the example shown in FIGS. 511(A) to 512(G), openings (grass substrate openings 6426 and grass) having a decorative shape are provided on the decorative member provided in front (the grass substrate 6420 and the grass front cover 6440). By providing a front cover opening 6448) and making a member provided at the rear visible, the opening having a decorative shape is visible to the player. Further, since the member provided on the front side and the member provided on the rear side are different in color, transparency, and the like, the shape of the opening can be further emphasized. Further, it may be configured to use such an opening in a decorative state as an effect.
In the examples shown in FIGS. 500(A) to 500(H) and FIGS. 501(A) to 501(G), modifications in which openings are provided are shown in FIGS. 511(A) to 512(G). However, in the example shown in FIGS. 502(A) to 510(D), an opening may be similarly provided.

Although an example in which the grass front cover opening 6448 is formed by forming a punched physical opening in the grass front cover 6440 to form a region in which the rear side can be visually recognized, the punched physical opening is formed. Instead of the method of providing, the outer shape of the visible region may be formed by the boundary line between the region where the rear is invisible or difficult to visually recognize and the region where the rear is relatively easily visible.

For example, the outside invisible area may be configured by the grass cover opaque portion 6446, and the inside easily visible area may be configured by the grass cover transparent portion 6442. Alternatively, the outside difficult-to-view area is configured by the colored grass front cover opaque section 6446, the inner-side easily visible area is configured by the grass-front cover light scattering section 6444, and the outside difficult-to-view area is colored by the colored grass. The front cover light-scattering portion 6444, the inner easily visible region is configured by the grass-front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, and the outer difficult-to-visualize region is configured by the colorless grass-front cover light-scattering portion 6444. Of the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, or the outside difficult-to-view area of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, and the inner easily visible area of the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. It may be configured by. Alternatively, the grass cover 6440 is one of the grass cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, the grass cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446. May be provided, and the inner easily visible region may be provided so as to extend over two or more regions of the above. Also with such a mode, it is possible to provide a region having a decorative shape and the rear portion of which is easily visible.

In FIGS. 512(B) to 512(G), the place where the grass cover cover opening 6448 is provided is one of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442 b, the grass front cover light scattering portion 6444, and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446. Although only the region is provided, the front cover opening 6448 may be provided so as to extend over a plurality of regions forming the front cover 6440. Specifically, the grass cover 6440 includes a grass cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, a grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, a grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, a grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and a grass front cover opaque portion. At least two of 6446 may be provided, and the grass cover opening 6448 may be provided so as to extend over two or more regions.
Although FIGS. 500(A) to 512(G) are shown to show examples in which the grass role object 6400 can be visually recognized as a decoration mode in a light-off state or a light-emitting state, these states are used as effects in a game. For example, one of these states may be configured to notify the player of a predetermined event in the gaming machine. Alternatively, it may be configured to notify the player of a predetermined event by changing when these states change from one state described above to another state described above. The predetermined event may be, for example, a big hit expectation degree or a notice indicating that the operation button 410 can be operated.

500(C) to 500(E), 501(A) to 509(D), and 511(C) to 512(G), an example in which a grass cover 6440 is provided in front of the grass substrate 6420. showed that. Although an example in which the rear grass cover 6460 is provided behind the grass substrate 6420 is shown in FIGS. 500(F) to 500(H) and FIGS. 510(A) to 510(D), the front of the grass substrate 6420 is shown. A combination of any one of the embodiments in which the grass front cover 6440 is provided on the rear side and the one in which the rear grass cover 6460 is provided at the rear of the grass substrate 6420. May be.

When combining the embodiments, it is preferable that the grass substrates 6420 have the same size. When the front grass cover 6440 and the rear grass cover 6460 are smaller than the grass substrate 6420 as in the embodiment shown in FIGS. 500(C) and 500(F), respectively, The grass cover 6460 may have the same size and the embodiments may be combined. In this case, the front edge of the grass cover 6440 and the outer edge of the rear grass cover 6460 just overlap each other when viewed from the front. When the grass substrate 6420, the front grass cover 6440, and the rear grass cover 6460 have the same size as in the embodiment shown in FIGS. 500(D) and 500(G), they are set to the same size. It is advisable to combine the embodiments. In this case, when viewed from the front, the grass cover 6440, the grass substrate 6420, and the outer edges of the grass cover 6460 just overlap each other. When the grass front cover 6440 and the rear grass cover 6460 are larger than the grass substrate 6420 as in the embodiment shown in FIGS. 500(E) and 500(H), respectively, The grass cover 6460 may have the same size and the embodiments may be combined. In this case, the front edge of the grass cover 6440 and the outer edge of the rear grass cover 6460 just overlap each other when viewed from the front. Further, the front grass cover 6440 and the rear grass cover 6460 may be made of a synthetic resin of the same color, and when the front grass cover 6440 is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, the rear grass cover 6460 is colorless and transparent. It is preferable to use the above synthetic resin. When the front grass cover 6440 is made of a green transparent synthetic resin, the rear grass cover 6460 is preferably made of a green transparent synthetic resin.

When the embodiments are combined, the grass substrate 6420 includes both the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422 and the grass substrate rear surface light emitting unit 6424. You may comprise so that one may not be provided. For example, when the examples shown in FIGS. 500(E) and 500(H) are combined, the front grass cover 6440 and the rear grass cover 6460 are larger than the grass substrate 6420 in a front view. Therefore, the rear grass cover 6460 can be decorated with the light from the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422. Further, it is possible to decorate the grass cover 6440 with light from the grass substrate rear surface light emitting unit 6424. In this case, it is desirable that the front-scattering cover 6440 and the rear-covering cover 6460 be provided with a light-scattering portion so as to frame the ends of the outer peripheral edge when viewed from the front. Note that both the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 and the grass substrate rear surface light emitting portion 6424 may not be provided. In this case, the grass substrate 6420 may be configured to have a function of relaying a signal from the peripheral control substrate 1510 to another accessory.

Any one example of the above-described grass role object 6400 may be applied to each of the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 illustrated in FIG. 496. Specifically, the outer shapes of the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 are not changed, and the areas other than the first grass decoration portion 6360a forming the outer area of the first grass movable portion 6360 are not changed. In contrast to the first grass ornamental portion 6360a forming the inner area in the first grass movable portion 6360, a member forming the outer area in any one example of the grass role object 6400 and the inner area are formed. It is good to fit a member. In addition, for the areas other than the second grass decoration section 6370a forming the outer area in the second grass movable section 6370 and the second grass decoration section 6370a forming the inner area in the second grass moving section 6370, The member forming the outer region and the member forming the inner region in any one example of the accessory 6400 may be applied.

Further, any one example of the grass role object 6400 may be applied to both the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370. For example, the example shown in FIG. 510(B) may be applied to both the first grass movable section 6360 and the second grass movable section 6370. In this case, the left and right white grass substrates 6420 are in contact with each other to form one decorative body. Further, the green transparent rear grass covers 6460 on the left and right sides are in contact with each other, thereby forming one decorative body. On the other hand, even when the first grass movable part 6360 and the second grass movable part 6370 are moved to the left and right, the left and right white grass substrates 6420 and the left and right green transparent grass rear covers 6460 each form one decorative body as a single unit. doing.

In FIG. 495, the third grass role object 6480 is provided, and the fourth grass role object 6485 is provided behind it. However, the left half of the fourth grass role object 6485 is a third position which is located in front of the third grass role object 6485. It is configured so as to be hidden by the grass role object 6480. Here, any one example of the above-described grass role object 6400 may be applied to each of the third grass role object 6480 and the fourth grass role object 6485. At this time, it is desirable that the grass substrates 6420 included in the third grass role object 6480 and the fourth grass role object 6485 have the same size. In addition, one or both of the grass substrate front surface light-emitting portion 6422 and the grass substrate rear surface light-emitting portion 6424 that can be provided in the third grass role object 6480 and the fourth grass role object 6485 are simultaneously rendered as a light emitting mode as in the above-described example. You may comprise.

In the following, an example in which the grass role object 6400 shown in FIG. 510(A) is adopted as the third grass role object 6480 and the grass role object 6400 shown in FIG. 507(E) is adopted as the fourth grass role object 6485 is shown. In this case, when the grass substrate rear surface light emitting unit 6424 included in the grass substrate 6420 of the third grass role object 6480 provided in the front is caused to emit light, the grass front cover colorless light scattering unit 6444a included in the fourth grass role object 6485, It is possible to illuminate the front grass cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the white grass substrate 6420 from the front side. In addition, the fourth grass role object 6485 can efficiently diffuse the light emitted from the third grass role object 6480 to the front to enhance the interest of the player as an effect.

On the other hand, it is possible to decorate the rear grass cover 6460 of the third grass role object 6480 by irradiating light from the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422 included in the fourth grass role object 6485. At this time, only the peripheral portion such as the upper portion of the rear grass cover 6460 can be visually recognized as a form decorated by the player, but the light passes through the rear grass cover 6460 and the light travels backward by the white grass substrate 6420. The light is diffused and reflected toward the fourth grass role object 6485, and the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a included in the fourth grass role object 6485 is decorated.

In this way, the light is alternately diffused between the third grass role object 6480 provided at the front and the fourth grass role object 6485 provided at the rear, thereby making the position of the light source invisible to the player. It is possible to efficiently reflect light forward while arranging. In particular, when a silver-colored member that can specularly reflect light is used as the front grass cover opaque portion 6446 and the rear grass cover opaque portion 6466, the light can be reflected more efficiently.

The example in which the third grass role object 6480 provided in the front and the fourth grass role object 6485 provided in the rear partly overlap with each other in the front view is shown, but the third grass role object 6480 and the fourth grass role object You may comprise so that 6485 and a front view may overlap completely. In addition, the third grass role product 6480 may be configured to be larger than the fourth grass role product 6485. Then, in a front view, the fourth grass role object 6485 may be configured to be completely hidden behind the third grass role object 6480. Alternatively, they may be arranged so that they are adjacent to each other when viewed from the front but do not overlap each other.

One or both of the third grass role object 6480 and the fourth grass role object 6485 provided at the rear may be movable as an effect. For example, the third grass role object 6480 provided at the front and the fourth grass role object 6485 provided at the rear partly overlap each other in a front view, but from this state, the third grass role object 6480 is shown. The fourth grass role object 6485 may be configured to completely overlap with each other in a front view. In this case, one of the third grass role object 6480 and the fourth grass role object 6485 moves in the left-right direction, so that the third grass role object 6480 and the fourth grass role object 6485 completely overlap in a front view. The third grass role object 6480 and the fourth grass role object 6485 can be viewed from the front by moving both the third grass role object 6480 and the fourth grass role object 6485 in the left-right direction. May be configured to completely overlap with each other. In this case, the third grass role object 6480 and the fourth grass role object 6485 may be configured to be able to move from a state where they do not overlap at all in a front view to a state where they overlap. Further, the moving direction is not limited to the horizontal direction, but may be configured to be movable in the vertical direction. In this case, it is advisable to move upward or downward by the height of the grass role itself. Even with such a configuration, the third grass role object 6480 and the fourth grass role object 6485 can be configured to move from a state where they do not overlap at all in a front view to a state where they overlap. Then, it is preferable that the third grass role object 6480 and the fourth grass role object 6485 are configured to be capable of taking the light emitting mode as in the above-described examples in a state where they are overlapped with each other in a front view.

Although an example in which the grass role object 6400 is movable is shown, the movement of the grass role object 6400 also causes the openings (the grass substrate opening 6426 and the grass front cover opening 6448) to be visible or invisible. You may make it employ|adopt as a production|generation that it changes to the state which can be visually recognized. Specifically, in a relationship between a third grass role object 6480 provided at the front and a fourth grass role object 6485 provided at the back and provided with a grass substrate opening 6426 and a grass front cover opening 6448, in a front view. From the state in which the grass substrate opening 6426 and the grass cover cover opening 6448 included in the fourth grass role object 6485 are located behind the third grass role object 6480, the third grass role object 6480 is located behind the third grass role object 6480 in the front view. 4 The grass substrate opening 6426 and the grass front cover opening 6448 included in the grass role object 6485 are changed to a state in which the grass substrate opening 6426 and the grass front cover opening 6448 are visible to the player in a front view. It is preferable to configure so that

Although an example in which the grass role object 6400 is movable is shown, the grass role object 6400 may be configured to be movable as an effect to a position overlapping the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. At this time, a predetermined image may be displayed as an effect in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Specifically, when the grass role object 6400 moves from below to a position overlapping the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the contour of the grass role object 6400 is modeled according to the movement of the grass role object 6400. The displayed image may be moved upward and displayed. At this time, it is desirable to be configured to move while displaying an image imitating the contour of the grass role object 6400 slightly above the grass role object 6400 in a front view. With such a configuration, an image simulating the contour of the grass role object 6400, the outer shape of the grass role object 6400 configured by the grass front cover 6440, the grass substrate 6422, or the back grass cover 6460, and the grass front cover 6440 are configured. The shape imitating the grass represented by the grass substrate 6420 or the like which is smaller than the boundary line between the plurality of members or which is smaller than the transparent grass front cover 6440 and visible through the grass front cover 6440 is plural when viewed from the front. The provided decoration mode can be made visible to the player. In this way, one decoration mode can be realized as an effect by the image displayed on the display device, the outer shape of the accessory, and the shape provided in the accessory. As shown in FIG. 502(B), FIG. 507(B), etc., when the grass part 6400 has two shapes when viewed from the front, one decoration mode is realized as an effect by a total of four shapes. be able to.

The back surface of the grass substrate 6420 may be configured to mount the same electronic components as those included in the rabbit accessory 6000. Further, the grass substrate 6420 is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and the LEDs constituting the grass substrate front surface light-emitting part 6422 and the grass substrate rear surface light-emitting part 6424 are attached to the grass substrate 6420 with an adhesive and power is supplied to the LEDs. Similarly, the wiring may be attached to the grass substrate 6420 with an adhesive. In this case, the grass front cover 6440 is provided with a grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, a front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, and a grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b so that this wiring is difficult for the player to see. Thus, the LED and the wiring may be located behind them. In addition, by attaching a pattern having the same shape as the LED or the wiring to the transparent grass substrate 6420 by printing or engraving, the transparency of the grass substrate 6420 is ensured, and the LED or the wiring becomes difficult for the player to see. You may comprise. In this case, by causing the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422 and the grass substrate rear surface light emitting unit 6424 to emit light, the grass front cover colored transparent unit 6442b, the front cover colorless light scattering unit 6444a, the grass front cover colored light scattering unit 6444b, the LED, and the like. The pattern having the same shape as that of the wiring may be illuminated so as to be in a decorative state. With such a configuration, these members can realize both the function of hiding the existence of the LED and the wiring and the function of decoration.

In the example shown in FIGS. 500(C) to 512(G), one grass substrate 6420 and one grass front cover 6440, or one grass substrate 6420 and one rear grass cover 6460, or one Although an example in which the grass substrate 6420 of 1 and the grass cover 6440 of 1 and the grass cover 6460 of 1 make up the grass role object 6400, one of the grass substrate 6420, the grass cover 6440, and the grass cover 6460 is shown. It is also possible to increase the number of at least one member of the above to a plurality to configure one grass role product 6400. For example, two grass front covers 6440 may be attached to one grass substrate 6420 to form one grass actor 6400, or two grass substrates 6420 may be attached to one grass front cover 6440. You may make it comprise the 1 herb part 6400. In the case where the grass substrate 6420, the grass cover 6440, and the grass cover 6460 are plural, the embodiments in the examples shown in FIGS. 500(C) to 512(G) are independently performed in each of the plural members. You may apply. For example, in a mountain government product 6500 described later, one substrate is provided with two front covers, and an opening is provided in one of the front covers to make the substrate located in the rear visible and also to be opened in the substrate. This is an example in which a section is provided.

In the example shown in FIGS. 507(A) to 509(D), a grass cover 6440 larger than the grass substrate 6420 is provided on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420. In this case, the outer edge portion of the grass substrate 6420 is visible through the grass front cover 6440, but the outer edge portion of the grass substrate 6420 is difficult to see or invisible when viewed from the front. The grass cover light scattering portion 6444 and the grass cover opaque portion 6446 are provided at least in front of the front surface of the grass substrate 6420. 6442a and the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b may be provided. Even with such a configuration, the color of the grass substrate 6420 can be used for decoration. In this case, the grass cover light scattering portion 6444 and the grass cover opaque portion 6446 may be provided so as to cover the front of the outer edge portion of the grass substrate 6420 in a strip shape. Alternatively, in the example shown in FIG. 507(D), the area occupied by the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444b in the grass front cover 6440 is enlarged upward, and the front of the outer edge portion of the grass substrate 6420 is in front of the grass front cover colorless light scatter. You may comprise so that it may be covered by the part 6444b. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 507(E), the area occupied by the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444b in the grass front cover 6440 is reduced upward so that the front of the outer edge portion of the grass substrate 6420 is in front of the grass front cover colorless light. You may comprise so that it may be covered by the scattering part 6444b. In addition, also in FIGS. 507(F) and 507(G), similarly, by enlarging or reducing the area occupied by the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 upward, the front of the outer edge portion of the grass substrate 6420 covers the grass front cover. It may be configured to be covered by the opaque portion 6446. Alternatively, the grass-front cover light-scattering portion 6444 and the grass-cover opaque portion 6444 and the grass-front cover opaque portion 6446 having a decorative shape cover at least a part of the outer edge portion of the grass substrate 6420. The same effect can be obtained even when the portion 6446 is provided.

In FIG. 487 and FIG. 495, an example in which the grass role object 6400 is provided in the area between the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the game panel 1100 is shown, but the grass role object 6400 is provided at a position other than this. It may be configured as follows. For example, the grass supporting material 6400 may be provided in a region between the game panel 1100 and the glass unit 190. Alternatively, the grass part 6400 may be provided on the member forming the door frame 3. For example, the door frame left side unit 530, the door frame right side unit 550, and the door frame top unit 570 may be configured to provide a grass role product. Note that the present invention is not limited to the grass role product 6400, and may be configured to be provided at the same position as the grass role product 6400 in other role products.

As described above, in the grass role object 6400, it is possible to execute an effect that can be visually recognized in green, white, yellow, brown, silver, or the like, by the plurality of members forming the grass role object 6400. It is possible to express lush grass, dead grass, and frost or snow on dead grass. In addition, it is possible to express a state in which the grass has changed from one mode to another mode.

In the example shown in FIG. 495, the rabbit role object 6000 and the stump role object 6100 are provided in front of the mountain role object 6500. Further, in these examples, the rabbit role object 6000 has the face light emitting part 6023, and the stump role object 6100 has the first rear wall light emitting part 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting part 6354b. It is possible to take a presentation state by irradiating the front with. By the way, in these examples, the light emitted from the light emitting portion is diffusely reflected by the members provided around the light emitting portion, and a part of the light emitted from the light emitting portion goes backward, so that the light emitted from the light emitting portion is emitted. However, there is a problem in that the efficiency of utilizing the emitted light is reduced because the light cannot be efficiently emitted forward. Therefore, an example in which the utilization efficiency of the light from the light emitting unit can be improved by reflecting the light that has traveled backward toward the front on the front side of the mountain cast 6500 that is a decorative body will be described below.

FIG. 513 shows a modified example of the rabbit accessory 6000 shown in FIG. 488 and the like.
FIG. 513(A) is a front view of the rabbit accessory 6000. FIG. 513(B) is a perspective view of the rabbit accessory 6000. FIG. 513(C) is an exploded perspective view of the rabbit accessory 6000.
The rabbit accessory 6000 is configured as a unit by a face cover portion 6010 on the front side, a face substrate 6020 provided on the back side of the face cover portion 6010, and a body portion 6030. The face substrate 6020 has a first face light emitting unit 6023a and a second face light emitting unit 6023b as the face light emitting unit 6023 on the front surface. Further, the face substrate 6020 has a mouth decoration portion 6024 having a shape imitating the mouth of a rabbit. The left and right front legs of the rabbit are imitated on the vertical bottom surface of the face cover portion 6010, and the first arm portion 6016 and the second arm portion 6017 made of white opaque synthetic resin are attached. Further, at the lower end of the face substrate 6020, a body portion 6030, which is a plate-shaped member made of white opaque synthetic resin, is provided, which is similar to the body portion of a rabbit. The face cover 6010 is made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and the first face light scatterer 6011a and the second face light scatterer are located at positions corresponding to the first face light emitter 6023a and the second face light emitter 6023b, respectively. A portion 6011b is provided. Up to this point, it has the same configuration as the rabbit accessory 6000 shown in FIG. 488 and the like.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 513(A), the face substrate 6020 does not include the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022, and has a horizontally long rectangular shape. In addition, the face substrate 6020 is concave toward the rear formed by the face cover portion upper surface portion 6012, the face cover portion right surface portion 6013, the face cover portion lower surface portion 6014, and the face cover portion left surface portion 6015 included in the face cover portion 6010. It is attached so that it fits into the part where it is attached. Further, in the face cover portion 6010, the upper surface of the face cover portion upper surface portion 6012 has a shape protruding upward at two places on the left and right, so that the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 are formed. The front surface of the face cover portion 6010 is printed with brown ink to form the first ear decoration portion 6021a and the second ear decoration portion 6022a.

When the rabbit accessory 6000 takes such a mode, light from the first face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b is irregularly reflected by the first face light scattering unit 6011a and the second face light scattering unit 6011b. After that, the face cover upper surface portion 6012, the face cover right surface portion 6013, the face cover lower surface portion 6014, the face cover left surface portion 6015, the first ear portion 6021, the first ear decoration portion 6021a, the second ear portion 6022. In the second ear decoration portion 6022a and the like, there is a possibility that the light may be reflected many times and travel toward the rear.

In addition, even when the first rear wall light emitting unit 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting unit 6354b included in the stump auditor figure 6100 illustrated in FIGS. 496 to 499 emit light, the first rear wall light emitting unit 6354a and the second rear wall Light from the light emitting unit 6354b is irregularly reflected by the first rear wall cover light scattering unit 6358a and the second rear wall cover light scattering unit 6358b, and then the box upper wall unit 6310, the box right wall unit 6320, and the box lower wall unit 6330. At the box left wall portion 6340, there is a possibility that the light may be reflected and directed backward.

Therefore, an example in which the light that has traveled backward from the rabbit role object 6000 or the stump role object 6100 is reflected forward again on the front side of the mountain role object 6500 will improve the light use efficiency, as shown below.

FIG. 514(A) shows a mountain product 6500. The dotted lines in the figure indicate the positions where the rabbit role object 6000 and the stump role object 6100 are provided. Further, regarding the rabbit accessory 6000, the outer shape of the face substrate 6020 is also indicated by a dotted line. The mountain role object 6500 includes a mountain board 6520, a first mountain front cover 6540 provided on the front left side of the mountain board 6520, and a second mountain front cover 6560 provided on the right front side of the mountain board 6520.

The mountain board 6520 is composed of a white printed circuit board having front and rear surfaces. Further, on the front surface of the mountain board 6520, a plurality of LEDs constituting the mountain board front light emitting section 6522 are mounted. Further, a mountain board opening portion 6524 is provided substantially at the center of the mountain board 6520 in the left-right direction. The mountain board opening portion 6524 is formed by forming a punched physical opening in the mountain board 6520. The member located at the rear is visible through the mountain substrate opening 6524.

The first mountain front cover 6540 is made of a colored transparent synthetic resin, and includes a first mountain front cover colored transparent portion 6542, a first mountain front cover colored light scattering portion 6544, and a first mountain front cover opening 6548. There is. With such a configuration, the white mountain substrate 6520 can be visually recognized in the color of the first mountain front cover 6540. Specifically, the color of the first mountain front cover 6540 may be blue. In this case, it is possible to represent a mode in which snow is piled up on a mountain or the mountain has a glacier. The first mountain front cover opening 6548 is formed by forming a punched physical opening in the first mountain front cover 6540. Further, the first mountain front cover opening 6548 is formed so as to straddle the first mountain front cover colored transparent portion 6542 and the first mountain front cover colored light scattering portion 6544. The mountain substrate 6520 located rearward is visible in white through the first mountain front cover opening 6548. The second mountain front cover 6560 is made of a colorless transparent synthetic resin, and includes a second mountain front cover colorless transparent portion 6562 and a second mountain front cover colorless light scattering portion 6564. With such a configuration, it is possible to represent a mode in which snow is piled up on a mountain or the mountain has a glacier. In addition, the mountain board opening 6524 and the first mountain front cover opening 6548 respectively express the aspect in which a mountain has a cave by its shape.

On the front surface of the mountain substrate 6520, mountain substrate front surface first light emitting portions 6522a to mountain substrate front surface ninth light emitting portion 6522i are provided as mountain substrate front surface light emitting portions 6522. The first mountain front cover colored transparent portion 6542 is provided in front of the first light emitting portion 6522a on the front surface of the mountain substrate. A first mountain front cover colored light scattering portion 6544 is provided in front of the mountain substrate front surface second light emitting portion 6522b. A first mountain front cover colored light scattering portion 6544 is provided in front of the third light emitting portion 6522c on the front surface of the mountain substrate, and a face substrate 6020 included in the rabbit role object 6000 in the standby position is located in front of the first mountain front cover colored light scattering portion 6544. doing. A first mountain front cover colored transparent portion 6542 is provided in front of the mountain board front fourth light emitting portion 6522d, and a face substrate 6020 included in the rabbit role object 6000 in the standby position is located in front of the first mountain front cover colored transparent portion 6542d. There is. The stump accessory 6100 is located in front of the fifth light emitting portion 6522e on the front surface of the mountain substrate. The stump accessory 6100 is located in front of the sixth light emitting portion 6522f on the front surface of the mountain substrate. A second mountain front cover colorless and transparent portion 6562 is provided in front of the seventh light emitting portion 6522g on the front surface of the mountain substrate, and a stump accessory 6100 is located further in front of it. A second mountain front cover colorless transparent portion 6562 is provided in front of the eighth light emitting portion 6522h on the mountain substrate front surface. A second mountain front cover colorless light scattering portion 6564 is provided in front of the ninth light emitting portion 6522i on the mountain substrate front surface.

When viewed from the front, the mountain role object 6500 has an area where the mountain substrate 6520 is exposed and visually recognized in white, and an area in which the front of the mountain substrate 6520 is covered with the first mountain front cover colored transparent portion 6542 and visually recognized as light blue. , A region where the front of the mountain substrate 6520 is covered with the first mountain front cover colored light scattering portion 6544 and is visible in light blue, and the mountain substrate 6520 is not located behind the first mountain front cover colored transparent portion 6542 and is blue transparent. The area that is visible in the area, the area in which the mountain substrate 6520 is not positioned behind the first mountain front cover colored light scattering portion 6542b and that is visible in semitransparent blue, and the mountain substrate opening 6524 are provided. An area in which a rear member is visible in a hole shape, an area in which the front of the mountain substrate 6520 is visually recognized as white by being covered with the second mountain front cover colorless transparent portion 6562, and an area in front of the mountain substrate 6520 are It is composed of an area that is visually recognized as white by being covered with the two-mountain front cover colorless light scattering portion 6564 and an area that is visually recognized as transparent without the mountain substrate 6520 being located behind the second mountain-front cover colorless and transparent portion 6562. ing.

FIG. 514(B) shows a state in which the rabbit role object 6000 and the stump role object 6100 described above are provided in front of such a mountain role object 6500. Behind the rabbit accessory 6000, an area where the mountain substrate 6520 is exposed and visually recognized in white, and an area in front of the mountain substrate 6520 which is visually recognized as light blue by being covered with the first mountain front cover colored transparent portion 6542. The front of the mountain substrate 6520 is covered with the first mountain front cover colored light-scattering portion 6544 and a region visible in light blue is provided, and the rabbit character object 6000 provided in front of these regions is provided with the first region. By diffusely reflecting the light from the face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b forward, it is possible to improve the light use efficiency. In addition, a region where the mountain substrate 6520 is exposed and visually recognized in white behind the stump auditors product 6100 and a front of the mountain substrate 6520 are visually recognized in white by being covered with the second mountain front cover colorless transparent portion 6562. And areas are provided, and in these areas, light from the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b included in the stump auditors product 6100 provided in the front is diffusely reflected forward. Thus, it is possible to improve the light use efficiency. As described above, in this embodiment, one substrate is configured to include a plurality of reflection regions corresponding to the plurality of members including the light emitting unit.

In addition, when the light from the rabbit character 6000 or the stump character 6100 can be reflected forward by the mountain substrate 6520 positioned behind the rabbit character 6000 or the stump character 6100 in this manner, It is desirable to increase the reflection efficiency in the substrate area hidden by the object 6000 and the stump member 6100. Specifically, it is desirable to adopt white or bright color as the color of the mountain substrate 6520. In addition, in the substrate region hidden by the rabbit role object 6000 and the stump role object 6100, the mountain substrate 6520 is exposed without providing a cover in front, or when the cover is provided, a colorless transparent cover is provided. It is better to configure it. In the example shown in FIG. 514(A), the mountain substrate 6520 is exposed in a region corresponding to the right side of the rabbit accessory 6000 when viewed from the front. Further, in the region where the mountain board 6520 is exposed, electronic components such as the mountain board front light emitting unit 6522 are not mounted on the front surface of the mountain board 6520. Further, the mountain substrate 6520 is exposed in a region corresponding to the stump accessory 6100 or is covered with the second mountain front cover colorless transparent portion 6562. By adopting such a mode, it is possible to further improve the efficiency of reflecting light forward.

Of the mountain board front surface light emitting section 6522 provided on the mountain board 6520, the mountain board front surface first light emitting section 6522a and the mountain board front surface fourth light emitting section 6522d have the first mountain front cover colored transparent section 6542 in the front. For the front second light emitting portion 6522b and the mountain substrate front third light emitting portion 6522c, the first mountain front cover colored light scattering portion 6544 is forward, and for the mountain substrate front ninth light emitting portion 6522i, the second mountain front cover forward. A colorless light scattering portion 6564 is provided. As described above, by providing the colored or light-scattering cover in front of the light emitting portion 6522 on the front surface of the mountain substrate, the player's eyes are not directly irradiated with the light from the light emitting portion. On the other hand, with respect to the mountain board front surface fifth light emitting portion 6522e and the mountain board front surface sixth light emitting portion 6522f, no cover is provided on the front side and the mountain board front surface is exposed on the front surface of the mountain board 6520. This is used to illuminate the stump part 6100 located in front by the light from the mountain substrate front surface fifth light emitting portion 6522e and the mountain substrate front surface sixth light emitting portion 6522f, and the mountain substrate front surface fifth light emitting portion 6522e, This is because the player is not directly irradiated with the light from the sixth light emitting portion 6522f on the front surface of the mountain substrate. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it inconspicuous that the mountain substrate front surface light emitting unit 6522 exists. As described above, in the mountain product 6500, the mountain board front light emitting parts 6522 are not evenly arranged on the front surface of the mountain board 6500, but the first mountain front cover 6540 located in front of the mountain board front light emitting part 6522, The second mountain front cover 6560, the rabbit role object 6000, and the stump role object 6100 are unevenly distributed.

FIG. 514(C) shows the rabbit accessory 6000 in a state of moving from the standby position to the moving position by a dotted line. In this state, the mountain board front surface third light emitting portion 6522c and the mountain board front surface fourth light emitting portion 6522d, which have been positioned so as to overlap behind the rabbit accessory 6000 in the front view, are visible to the player in the front view. Has been done. The rabbit accessory 6000 can not only emit light in the standby position as described above, but also emit light in a predetermined color as an effect even in the moving position. At this time, on the game board side effect display device 1600, effect display with the same emission color as that of the rabbit accessory 6000 may be performed. For example, when the rabbit accessory 6000 is made to emit white light, the game board side effect display device 1600 is configured to execute the effect of displaying a white line radially extending from the position where the rabbit accessory 6000 is located. Good.

FIG. 514(C) shows the rabbit accessory 6000 in a state of moving from the standby position to the moving position by a dotted line. In front view, the mountain board front side third light emitting portion 6522c and the mountain board front surface fourth light emitting portion 6522d are provided behind the rabbit role object 6000. Even when the rabbit role object 6000 is in the standby position, the rabbit role object 6000 is provided. Even when 6000 is in the moving position, it is possible to emit light in a predetermined color as an effect. For example, when the rabbit accessory 6000 is in the moving position, the mountain board front surface light-emitting portion 6522 may be configured to emit white light simultaneously with the display of the white line on the game board side effect display device 1600.

When the mountain board front side third light emitting portion 6522c and the mountain board front surface fourth light emitting portion 6522d are in the light emitting mode as a production in the state where the rabbit character object 6000 is in the standby position, the face cover portion upper surface part of the rabbit character object 6000 Light radiated from the mountain substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6522c and the mountain substrate front surface fourth light emitting portion 6522d passes through 6012, the face cover portion right surface portion 6013, the face cover portion lower surface portion 6014, and the face cover portion left surface portion 6015. The outline of the face of the rabbit becomes the light emitting mode. At this time, on the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 forming the rabbit accessory 6000, the light emitted from the mountain substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6522c and the mountain substrate front surface fourth light emitting portion 6522d and reflected toward the front is diffusely reflected backward. Then, this light is again diffusely reflected forward on the front surface of the mountain cast 6500. With such a configuration, the utilization efficiency of the emitted light can be increased.

In the example shown in FIG. 514, the mountain part 6500 is larger than the rabbit part 6000 and the stump part 6100 in the area in the front view, but the area in the front view is the rabbit part 6000 and the stump part. A character smaller than the object 6100 may be arranged behind the rabbit character 6000 and the stump character 6100 so as to exhibit the same function as the mountain character 6500. For example, such an accessory may be arranged so as to fit within the area formed by the face substrate 6020 of the rabbit accessory 6000 and the stump plate portion 6210 of the stump accessory 6100 in a front view. In addition, as such an accessory, for example, white as in a grass accessory 6400 shown in FIGS. 500A, 501A, 504A, and 510A to 510D is used. The front surface of the grass substrate 6420 may be exposed, or the front surface of the white grass substrate 6420 may be covered by the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. Even in such a configuration, the exposed white grass substrate 6420 or the white grass substrate 6420 whose front surface is covered with the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a allows the rabbit character 6000 and the stump character 6100 to be removed. It is possible to diffusely reflect light forward.

In the rabbit accessory 6000 illustrated in FIG. 513, the entire face substrate 6020 is completely accommodated in the front view with respect to the face cover portion 6010. Such an aspect may be applied to the relationship between the grass front cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 in the grass role object 6400 described above. In this case, the entire grass substrate 6420 is housed in front view of the grass cover 6440. Alternatively, it may be applied to the relationship between the rear grass cover 6460 and the grass substrate 6420 in the grass role object 6400. In this case, the entire grass substrate 6420 is accommodated in the rear cover 6460 in a front view. Specifically, for example, a plurality of substrates each having a flower-like shape are not overlapped with the rear surface of the grass cover 6440 or the front surface of the grass cover 6460 in a front view. You may comprise so that it may attach to the cover 6440 or the back cover 6460 so that each board|substrate may fully fit. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to realize decoration by combining the substrate and the grass cover 6440 or by combining the substrate and the grass cover 6460. Note that, in another example, such a configuration may be adopted when providing the substrate and the cover.

As shown in FIG. 495, in the game board 5, a space is formed between the game board side effect display device 1600 and the game panel 1100 provided in front of the game board side effect display device 1600. A plurality of accessories are provided in the space. Among these accessories, at a position close to the back surface of the game panel 1100, the first giant tree actor 6600, the second giant tree actor 6650, the first cloud actor 6700, the second cloud actor 6750, the board back weed actor 6800 is provided. These are visible through the game panel 1100 made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and have a function of decorating the rear surface of the game panel 1100.

The first giant tree component 6600 and the second giant tree component 6650 are provided so as to cover the left and right sides of the back surface of the game panel 1100. Specifically, it is composed of a first giant tree role object 6600 located on the left side of the back surface of the game panel 1100 and a second giant tree role object 6650 located on the right side of the back surface of the game panel 1100. The first giant tree component 6600 is composed of a first giant tree trunk substrate 6610 and a first giant tree leaf substrate 6630. The first giant tree board 6610 is a brown printed board, and the first giant leaf board 6630 is a green printed board. A plurality of light sources including LEDs are arranged on the rear surfaces of the first giant tree trunk substrate 6610 and the first giant tree leaf substrate 6630, and the directions of these light sources are rightward. The second giant tree component 6650 is composed of a second giant tree trunk substrate 6660 and a second giant tree leaf substrate 6680. The second giant tree substrate 6660 is a brown substrate, and the second giant tree substrate 6680 is a green substrate. A plurality of light sources including LEDs are arranged on the rear surfaces of the second giant tree trunk substrate 6660 and the first giant tree leaf substrate 6680, and the directions of these light sources are leftward. The first giant tree component 6600 is composed of a first giant tree trunk substrate 6610 and a first giant tree leaf substrate 6630, and the second giant tree component 6650 is composed of a second giant tree trunk substrate 6660 and a second giant tree leaf substrate 6680. However, the structure relating to the grass substrate 6420 of the grass role object 6400 shown in FIGS. 500(A) to 512(G) may be adopted for each of these substrates.

The first cloud role object 6700 and the second cloud role object 6750 are provided so as to cover the upper back surface of the game panel 1100. The first cloud role object 6700 and the second cloud role object 6750 are each configured by a white printed board. For each of these substrates, the structure relating to the grass substrate 6420 of the grass role object 6400 shown in FIGS. 500(A) to 512(G) may be adopted.

The first giant tree leaf substrate 6630 that constitutes the first giant tree role object 6600 and the second giant tree leaf substrate 6680 that constitutes the second huge tree role object 6650 are from the end of the game panel 1100, within the game area 5a, and further in the game. It is configured to be continuously visible to the player over the panel opening 1100a. In addition, the second cloud role object 6750 is configured to be continuously visible to the player from the outside of the game area 5a to the inside of the game area 5a and further to the game panel opening 1100a.
On the other hand, the first giant tree leaf substrate 6630 that constitutes the first giant tree role object 6600 and the second giant tree leaf substrate 6680 that constitutes the second giant tree role object 6650 are placed so as to cover the upper left and upper right sides of the game board side effect display device 1600. The game board side effect display device 1600 is configured so as not to look like a quadrangle. The mountain service 6500 is also provided so as to cover the lower left side and the lower right side of the game board side effect display device 1600 so that the game board side effect display device 1600 does not look like a quadrangle. Further, the mountain role object 6500 is provided at a position closest to the game board side effect display device 1600 among the respective effects provided in front of the game board side effect display device 1600.

FIG. 515 shows a board back weed material 6800. Board back weed material 6800 is provided close to the back surface of game panel 1100 so as to cover the lower side of the back surface of game panel 1100.
The board back weed component 6800 is composed of a board back grass substrate 6820 and a board back grass front cover 6840. The board back grass front cover 6840 may be made of, for example, a colored transparent synthetic resin, and specifically, may be made of a green transparent synthetic resin. Regarding the relationship between the board back grass substrate 6820 and the board back grass front cover 6840, the structure relating to the grass board 6420 and the grass front cover 6440 of the grass role object 6400 shown in FIGS. 500(A) to 512(G) is adopted. It may be configured to do so.
Similarly, a structure relating to the rear grass cover 6460 may be adopted for the back weed material 6800.

Board back grass role product 6800 is a passing portion for passing a game ball that has passed through a winning opening provided on the front surface side of the game panel 1100 located on the front surface and has passed through an opening provided in the game panel 1100. Are provided with a circular board back grass substrate opening 6824 and a board back grass front cover opening 6848. The game sphere that has passed through the board back grass substrate opening 6824 and the board back grass front cover opening 6848 is detected by a sensor provided in the board back grass accessory 6800. Further, a sensor for detecting a game ball is attached to the lower side of each passing portion and the back surface of the board back grass substrate 6820. With such a configuration, it becomes possible for the player to visually recognize the presence of the sensor. In addition, as shown below, the board back grass substrate opening 6824 includes a board back grass board first opening 6824a to a board back grass board fourth opening 6824d, and a board back grass front cover opening 6848 serves as a board back grass front cover. A first opening 6848a to a board back grass front cover fourth opening 6848d are provided.

The board back grass substrate first opening 6824a and the board back grass front cover first opening 6848a are circular with the same size, and are provided at positions overlapping with each other in the board back grass accessory 6800 in a front view. Then, the game ball that has moved to the back surface of the game panel 1100 by winning the winning opening provided on the front side of the game panel 1100 by the board back grass substrate first opening 6824a and the board back grass front cover first opening 6848a. To form a passage portion for passing through.

The back of the board back grass substrate second opening 6824b is not covered by the board back grass front cover 6840, and constitutes a passage portion for allowing the game ball to directly pass through the exposed board back grass substrate 6820.

The board back grass front cover second opening 6848b does not have the board back grass substrate 6820 behind it, and only the board back grass front cover second opening 6848b constitutes a passage portion for directly passing the game ball. doing. In this example, the board back grass substrate 6820 is shaped to follow the contour below the board back grass front cover second opening 6848b. With such a configuration, a path for guiding the game ball that has passed through the board back grass front cover second opening 6848b to the sensor located below while making the shape of the board back grass substrate 6820 a decorative outer shape. Can be made as hard to see as possible.

The board back grass substrate third opening 6824c and the board back grass front cover third opening 6848c are circular with the same size, and are provided at positions overlapping with each other in the board back grass accessory 6800 in a front view. Then, the game sphere that has moved to the back surface of the game panel 1100 by winning the winning opening provided on the front side of the game panel 1100 by the board back grass substrate third opening 6824c and the board back grass front cover third opening 6848c. To form a passage portion for passing through. Then, in this example, two elliptical areas are formed in the grass back cover 6840 at the upper part of the passage formed by the grass back grass substrate third opening 6824c and the grass back grass front cover third opening 6848c. By doing so, the decorative shape imitating the head of a rabbit can be visually recognized. In this way, by using the shape of the passage portion through which the game ball passes as a part of the decorative shape, the existence of the passage portion can be made inconspicuous, and the decorative function of the back weeding material 6800. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of situations such as damage to.

The board back grass substrate fourth opening 6824d and the board back grass front cover fourth opening 6848d have the same size and shape, respectively, and have a shape such that two elliptical portions project above the circular outer shape. I am doing it. In addition, these are provided at positions where they overlap in the back weed accessory 6800 in a front view. Then, a game ball that has moved to the back surface of the game panel 1100 by winning the winning opening provided on the front side of the game panel 1100 by the board back grass substrate fourth opening 6824d and the board back grass front cover fourth opening 6848d. To form a passage portion for passing through. Further, in this example, the shapes of the back turf board third opening 6824c and the back turf front cover third opening 6848c themselves are configured to be visible as a decorative shape simulating a rabbit's head. In this way, by using the shape of the passage portion through which the game ball passes as a part of the decorative shape, the existence of the passage portion can be made inconspicuous, and the decorative function of the back weeding material 6800. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of situations such as damage to.

It should be noted that a cylindrical member made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin may be arranged in the passage portion through which the game ball passes to allow the game ball to pass through. Further, it is preferable that the cylindrical member is made of a colored transparent synthetic resin, and the color of the synthetic resin is the same as that of the board back grass front cover 6840 or the board back grass substrate 6820. With such a configuration, the presence of the tubular member can be made inconspicuous, and it is possible to prevent occurrence of a situation in which the decorative function of the board back weeding material 6800 is impaired. ..

The first giant tree role product 6600, the second giant tree role product 6650, the first cloud role product 6700, the second cloud role product 6750, and the board back grass role product 6800 are attached to the front of the game panel 1100 when viewed from the front. It is located behind the game panel 1100 so as to straddle the rail member 5950. This makes it possible to visually recognize each accessory as a decoration without being aware of the presence of the rail member 5950. The entire rail member 5950 may be made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin. Alternatively, the rail member 5950 may be composed of a plurality of members in the longitudinal direction, and at least one of the members may be composed of a colorless transparent synthetic resin. With such a configuration, the visibility of each character positioned in the rear is improved, and the range in which decoration is performed can be expanded. Further, the rail member 5950 may be formed of a synthetic resin having the same color as the accessory positioned behind. For example, when the board back weeding material 6800 is visible in green, the rail member 5950 provided at a position overlapping the board weeding material 6800 in front view may be formed of a green transparent synthetic resin.

When the game ball that is driven into the game area 5a is charged, an electric discharge occurs at an unintended location, electronic components fail due to high voltage, or an electromagnetic pulse generated by the electric discharge causes an unintended illegal control element. There is a risk of control. In particular, a role that includes a printed circuit board on which electronic components are mounted, such as a first giant tree role product 6600, a second giant tree role product 6650, a first cloud role product 6700, a second cloud role product 6750, and a board back weed role product 6800. When an object is provided close to the back surface of the game panel 1100, such a situation is more likely to occur in electronic components mounted on these boards.

Therefore, in these accessories, in a mode in which the front cover is provided, at least a part of the front cover may be provided with a silver-colored opaque portion formed of the above-described metal thin film. More specifically, a front cover may be provided so that such an opaque portion is located in front of a place where electronic components are mounted on the substrate. Further, each accessory may be provided so that the front surface of each accessory that may be affected by such a charged game ball does not contact the back surface of the game panel 1100. Alternatively, at least in the area overlapping the game area 5a where the charged game balls roll and fall in front view, each accessory is provided so that the front surface of each accessory does not contact the back surface of the game panel 1100. You may comprise.

Further, it is desirable that the ground path of the ground wire (not shown) provided in the game panel 1100 and the ground path of the ground wire (not shown) provided in each accessory be separated as much as possible. For example, a ground wire (not shown) provided on the game panel 1100 is finally installed on the island facility via an earth circuit provided on each accessory, or conversely, a ground wire for each accessory is provided on the game panel 1100. It is not preferable to finally install it in the island facility via the earth circuit. Therefore, an earth circuit board having a static elimination function may be provided at a predetermined position on the back surface of the game machine so that the earth path from the game panel 1100 and the earth path from each accessory meet in the earth circuit board. .. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the influence of the charged game balls that have been driven into the game area 5a.

In FIG. 487 and FIG. 495, an example in which the board back weed part 6800 is provided below the back surface of the game panel 1100 is shown. The object 6100 may be provided below the back surface of the game panel 1100. Also in this case, the light diffusely reflected backward from the rabbit role object 6000 and the stump role object 6100 can be reflected back forward to improve the light utilization efficiency. By using the reflection function of the mountain board 6520, a prize hole unit having other decorative characters and a prize hole should be arranged in front of the mountain object in the same manner as the rabbit character 6000 and the stump character 6100. You may comprise. Also in this case, the light emitted from the light emitting portion of the decorative accessory or the winning school unit and diffusely reflected backward can be reflected forward on the front surface of the mountain substrate 6520.

Also, by providing a plurality of columnar spacers on the back surface of the front cover that constitutes these accessories, the front surface of the substrate is in contact with the top of the spacer and is not directly in contact with the back surface of the front cover. You may. As a structure of each spacer, specifically, a columnar structure having a height of about 2 mm and a diameter of about 2 mm perpendicular to the back surface of the front cover may be adopted. Further, the spacer and the front cover may be integrally formed of the same material. Further, the spacer may be configured to be provided in a region where it is more difficult to visually recognize the rear when the front cover has a plurality of regions. For example, the colored transparent portion, the colored light scattering portion, and the spacer of the front cover may be integrally molded with a green transparent synthetic resin. At this time, the spacer becomes transparent in green.
In this case, it is preferable that the colored transparent portion is not provided with a spacer, but the colored light scattering portion is provided with a spacer. By providing the spacer having such a structure, the front cover and the substrate are arranged in parallel with each other with the spacers separated by height. With such a configuration, the portion closest to the back surface of the game panel 1100 is decorated by the front cover, and the substrate is decorated at a position several mm rearward from the front cover. At this time, since the board is located rearward as compared with the case where the board is decorated in the portion closest to the back surface of the game panel 1100, while exerting a decoration effect by the color of the board and the outer shape of the board. Also, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the presence of through holes and electronic components provided on the substrate. In addition, since the back surface of the game panel 1100 and the substrate are separated from each other, it is possible to reduce the influence of discharge from the charged game balls or electromagnetic pulses on the substrate.

Board back weed part 6800, first big tree part 6600, second big part part 6650, first cloud part 6700, second cloud part 6750 are provided close to the back surface of game panel 1100, respectively. .. Specifically, it is arranged in front of the intermediate position between the surface forming the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the back surface of the game panel 1100. In addition, in the space between the board back weed part 6800, the first giant tree part 6600, the second giant part part 6650, the first cloud part 6700, the second cloud part 6750 and the game board side effect display device 1600. Is provided with a rabbit character 6000 and a stump character 6100 as movable characters. It should be noted that the rabbit role object 6000 and the stump role object 600 may be configured to be provided below the game panel 1100 in which the board backing role object 6800 is provided.

The first giant tree role product 6600, the second giant tree role product 6650, the first cloud role product 6700, and the second cloud role product 6750, which are not provided with a front cover, are provided with a light emitting portion on the front surface of the substrate. In this case, a scattering section that scatters the light emitted from the light emitting section may be formed on the back surface of the game panel 1100 that overlaps the light emitting section in a front view. Alternatively, in these accessories, even when a colored transparent or colorless transparent front cover is provided at a position overlapping the light emitting unit when viewed from the front, the scattering unit is similarly formed on the back surface of the game panel 1100. You may.

In FIGS. 496 to 499, the example in which the stump role object 6100 is provided is shown, but the members forming the stump role object 6100 may be configured to be movable as an effect. For example, the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, the box left wall portion 6340, and the box rear wall portion 6350 that configure the stump box portion 6300 may be configured to be movable as an effect.

516(A) to 516(D), in the stump box portion 6300 shown in FIGS. 498(A) and 499(A), the box upper wall portion 6310 to the box left wall portion 6340 are moved from the standby position. It is the figure which showed the state moved to the position. FIG. 516(A) shows an example in which the box upper wall portion 6310 is moved rearward until the front end portion of the box upper wall portion 6310 contacts the upper end portion of the box rear wall portion 6350. FIG. 516(B) illustrates an example in which the box right wall portion 6320 is moved leftward and rearward until the front end portion of the box right wall portion 6320 contacts the right end portion of the box rear wall portion 6350. FIG. 516C illustrates an example in which the box lower wall portion 6330 is moved rearward until the front end portion of the box lower wall portion 6330 contacts the lower end portion of the box rear wall portion 6350. FIG. 516(D) illustrates an example in which the box right wall portion 6320 is moved to the right rear until the front end portion of the box right wall portion 6320 contacts the left end portion of the box rear wall portion 6350. Note that only one wall portion of the box upper wall portion 6310 to the box left wall portion 6340 may be configured to be movable as illustrated, and the other wall portions may be configured to be immovable. A plurality of wall parts may be configured to be movable among the parts 6310 to the box left wall part 6340, and for example, all of the box upper wall part 6310 to the box left wall part 6340 may be configured to be movable.

With such a configuration, the stump plate portion 6210, the first grass movable portion 6360, and the second grass movable portion 6370 that are provided in front of the stump box portion 6300 have the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall. The irradiation mode of light from the light emitting unit 6354b can be changed. For example, in a state before moving the box upper wall portion 6310 backward, light is reflected on each inner wall of the stump box portion 6300, and the stump plate portion 6210 is illuminated with a shape corresponding to the front shape of the stump box portion 6300. The Rukoto. On the other hand, when the box upper wall portion 6310 is moved rearward, the light from the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b is not reflected in the box upper wall portion 6310, so that the rear wall light emission is not performed. The light radiated obliquely upward from the portion 6354 goes straight on and illuminates the back side of the stump plate portion 6210. Therefore, in addition to the shape corresponding to the front surface shape of the stump box portion 6300, the stump plate portion 6210 is also illuminated in the region above the front surface of the stump box portion 6300. In this way, by moving the box upper wall portion 6310, it is possible to change the illuminated area. Even when the box right wall portion 6320 to the box left wall portion 6340 are slid backward instead of the box upper wall portion 6310, the illuminated area is changed corresponding to each moved wall portion. It becomes possible.

Further, the box rear wall portion 6350 may be configured to be movable in the front-rear direction while maintaining its inclination. For example, from the state shown in FIGS. 498 (A) and 499 (A), the upper end of the box rear wall portion 6350 is the front end of the box upper wall portion 6310, and the lower end of the box rear wall portion 6350 is the box lower wall portion 6330. The box rear wall portion 6350 may be configured to be movable forward so as to be in contact with the front ends thereof. Alternatively, the state shown in FIG. 498A may be movable backward.

Further, the box upper wall portion 6310 and the box left wall portion 6340 may be configured to be rotatable with respect to the box rear wall portion 6350. For example, the box right wall portion 6320 and the box left wall portion 6340 have a rectangular shape having the same size as the box rear wall portion 6350, and the side formed by the box right wall portion 6320 and the box rear wall portion 6350, the box left wall portion 6340. It may be configured to be rotatable around the side formed by the box rear wall portion 6350 as an axis. Then, by rotating the box right wall portion 6320 and the box left wall portion 6340 inward, the front surface of the box rear wall portion 6350 is configured to be covered by the box right wall portion 6320 and the box left wall portion 6340. By rotating the right wall portion 6320 and the box left wall portion 6340 to the outside, the box rear wall portion 6350 and the box right wall portion 6320 and the box left wall portion 6340 may be in a parallel state. Further, the box upper wall portion 6310 and the box lower wall portion 6330 have a rectangular shape having the same size as the box rear wall portion 6350, and in the same manner as the box right wall portion 6320 and the box left wall portion 6340, the box rear wall portion 6350. It may be configured to be rotatable with respect to.

Although an example in which the box rear wall portion 6350 can be moved is shown, in the example shown in FIGS. 498 (A) to 498 (D), the rear wall substrate 6352 including the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 is fixedly provided and The rear wall cover 6356 forming the wall portion 6350 may be configured to be rotatable or movable in the front-rear direction similarly to the box rear wall portion 6350 described above. When the rear wall cover 6356 is rotated, it is possible to directly irradiate the stump opening 6210a with the light from the rear wall light emitting unit 6354 without passing through the rear wall cover 6356. On the other hand, when the rear wall cover 6356 is moved forward, a distance is provided between the rear wall light emitting unit 6354 and the rear wall cover 6356, and the light from the rear wall light emitting unit 6354 spreads radially and the rear wall It is possible to illuminate the entire cover 6356. In addition, when adopting such an aspect, it is advisable to set the regions of the rear wall cover 6356 other than the first rear wall cover light scattering unit 6358a and the second rear wall cover light scattering unit 6358b as scattering units. With such a configuration, the rear wall cover 6356 can be moved in the front-rear direction, so that a state in which part of the rear wall cover 6356 is illuminated and a state in which the entire rear wall cover 6356 is illuminated. Can be made visible to the player.

In the example shown in FIGS. 499(A) to 499(D), the rear wall plate portion 6380 is fixedly provided, and the rear wall substrate 6352 and the rear wall cover 6356 are provided in the above-mentioned box. Similar to the rear wall portion 6350, it may be movable in the front-rear direction.

Although examples in which the fixedly provided member may be made movable have been shown, in these examples, the first rear wall light emitting unit 6354a and The second rear wall light emitting unit 6354b may be continuously configured to maintain a predetermined light emitting mode. As the predetermined light emitting mode, for example, a mode in which the first rear wall light emitting unit 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting unit 6354b continue to be lit, periodically blinking, or a light-off state in which no light is emitted is adopted. You may do so. Further, in the case of executing the light emitting mode in which the light continues to be turned on or the light flashes periodically, the light may be continuously emitted in the same color. With such a configuration, the light emission modes of the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b are not changed, but the box upper wall portion 6310, the box rear wall portion 6350, and the rear wall cover 6356. It is possible to change the presentation mode visually recognized by the player by moving members such as.

On the other hand, the light emission mode of the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b may be changed during the period from the timing of starting the movement of the member to the timing of ending the movement of the member. Good. With such a configuration, it is possible to realize a more complicated rendering mode.

Although an example in which members such as the box upper wall portion 6310 and the box rear wall portion 6350 and the rear wall cover 6356 are moved as effects from the state shown in FIGS. 498 and 499 is shown, the box upper wall portion 6310 and the box rear portion By moving a member such as the wall portion 6350 and the rear wall cover 6356 as an effect, a predetermined one moved member may be configured to be in the state shown in FIG. 498 or FIG. 499. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to change the presentation mode visually recognized by the player.

Although the example in which the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 move in the left-right direction is shown, the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 may be configured not to move. Even with such a configuration, by moving members such as the box upper wall portion 6310, the box rear wall portion 6350, and the rear wall cover 6356, it is possible to diversify the light emission mode of the stump accessory 6100. Further, the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 may be configured as one member. In this case, the 1st grass decoration part 6360a and the 2nd grass decoration part 6370a may be constituted as one decoration part, or may be constituted as a plurality of decoration parts. In addition, the first grass decoration portion 6360a and the second grass decoration portion 6370a are colored and semi-transparent by a method such as painting or sticking a seal, and when the light from the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 is irradiated forward, the first grass decoration portion 6360a The decorative portion 6360a and the second grass decorative portion 6370a may be illuminated with light to be in a state of effect.

In addition, as shown below, the stump box 6300 and the grass plate portion 6381 constitute the stump accessory 6100 without providing the first grass movable portion 6360, the second grass movable portion 6370, and the stump plate portion 6210. You may comprise.

FIG. 517 is an example in which, in front of the stump box portion 6300, the stump plate portion 6210 is not provided, and instead of the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370, a grass plate portion 6381 that is fixedly provided is provided. Is shown. The grass plate portion may be made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. Further, the grass plate portion 6381 has a plurality of decoration portions. Specifically, a green grass plate colored transparent portion 6381a simulating the outer shape of grass, a grass plate central decorative portion 6382a simulating the shape of an animal face, a grass plate decorative portion 6382b, a grass plate right decorative portion 6382c, It is provided with a lower grass plate decorative portion 6382d, a lower grass plate decorative portion 6382e, and a colorless and transparent grass plate colorless and transparent portion 6381b which is an area other than these. The grass plate colored transparent portion 6381a, the grass plate central decorative portion 6382a, the grass plate upper decorative portion 6382b, the grass plate right decorative portion 6382c, the grass plate lower decorative portion 6382d, and the grass plate left decorative portion 6382e are respectively colorless and transparent synthetic resins. It is configured by sticking a print or a seal on the front surface or the rear surface of the grass plate portion 6381 to be formed. The grass plate central decorative portion 6382a is formed in a linear shape of the face and ears of the animal, and the rear wall substrate 6352 positioned behind is visible. On the other hand, the grass plate upper decorative portion 6382b, the grass plate right decorative portion 6382c, the grass plate lower decorative portion 6382d, and the grass plate left decorative portion 6382e are shapes that imitate the face of an animal and are translucent or colored transparent that allows light to pass therethrough. Is configured.

In such a configuration, as described above, the members such as the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, the box left wall portion 6340, the box rear wall portion 6350, and the rear wall cover 6356 are moved. By doing so, the lighting mode of the grass plate central decorative portion 6382a, the grass plate upper decorative portion 6382b, the grass plate right decorative portion 6382c, the grass plate lower decorative portion 6382d, and the grass plate left decorative portion 6382e can be changed. In particular, the grass plate upper decoration portion 6382b, the grass plate right decoration portion 6382c, the grass plate lower decoration portion 6382d, and the grass plate left decoration portion 6382e were irradiated with light from a state where light was hardly irradiated until then. The shape of each animal can be changed and the shape of each animal's face can be visually recognized by the player.

The stump box part 6300 is a box type having a box upper wall part 6310, a box right wall part 6320, a box lower wall part 6330, a box left wall part 6340, and a box rear wall part 6350, and having no front face. Although it has a shape, the position, size and shape of at least one of these members may be changed.

FIG. 518 shows a modification of the example shown in FIG. 517. In this example, the box upper wall portion 6310 and the box lower wall portion 6330 are rectangular with the same width as the box rear wall portion 6350, and the box right wall portion 6320 and the box left wall portion 6340 are relative to the box rear wall portion 6350. By providing the right angle, the stump box portion 6300 has a rectangular parallelepiped shape, the stump plate portion 6210 is not provided, and the grass plate portion 6381 is located in front of the opening of the stump box portion 6300. doing. In such a configuration, as described above, as an effect, the rear wall light emitting section 6354 is set to the light emitting mode, and the box upper wall section 6310, the box right wall section 6320, the box lower wall section 6330, and the box left wall section 6340 are formed. By rotating or sliding in the front-back direction, it is possible to change the irradiation mode of the light emitted from the rear wall light emitting unit 6354 to the grass plate portion 6381. In addition, in accordance with forming the stump box portion 6300 into a rectangular parallelepiped shape in this manner, as compared with the example shown in FIG. It is provided at a different position.

519 to 521 show modifications of the example shown in FIG. 518. In the examples shown in FIGS. 519 to 521, the shape and attachment mode of the box rear wall portion 6350 are different.
In the example shown in FIG. 519(A), the box rear wall portion 6350 is provided at a position that is half shifted leftward in a front view. FIG. 519(B) shows an enlarged state of the stump box portion 6300 in the example shown in FIG. 519(A).

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 520(A), the entire box rear wall portion 6350 is configured to be doubled in the left direction to have a double length in a front view. FIG. 520(B) shows an enlarged state of the stump box portion 6300 in the example shown in FIG. 520(A). FIG. 522(A) is a diagram showing a rear wall cover 6356 in the modified example shown in FIG. 520(A). In addition, FIG. 522(B) is a diagram showing a rear wall substrate 6352 in the modification shown in FIG. 520(A).

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 521(A), the box rear wall portion 6350 is configured so as to be reduced in size to the left half by a front view. 521(B) shows a state in which the stump box portion 6300 in the example shown in FIG. 521(A) is enlarged. FIG. 522(C) is a diagram showing a rear wall cover 6356 in the modified example shown in FIG. 521(A). Further, FIG. 522(D) is a diagram showing a rear wall substrate 6352 in the modification example shown in FIG. 521(A).

On such a premise, the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b included in the stump box portion 6300 shown in FIGS. 519 (A) and 520 (A) (details are shown in FIG. 499 (A), 499 (B), 522 (A), and 522 (B) (see FIG. 522), the grass plate center decorative portion 6382a and the grass plate left decorative portion 6382e are illuminated from the rear side in a light emission decoration state. It becomes possible. Here, by moving the box upper wall portion 6310 rearward, it is possible to bring the grass plate decorative portion 6382b into a light emitting decorative state. On the other hand, the grass plate central decorative portion 6382a is relatively inconspicuous because the amount of light emitted is reduced. Further, when the box right wall portion 6320 and the box lower wall portion 6330 are moved rearward instead of the box upper wall portion 6310, the grass plate right decoration portion 6382c and the grass plate lower decoration portion 6382d are set to the light emission decoration state. can do. Although an example in which both the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b are made to emit light is shown, in the example shown in FIG. It may be configured not to emit light in the protruding region. In this case, only the grass plate central decorative portion 6382a can be in a light emitting decorative state. From this state, as described above, the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, and the box lower wall portion 6330 may be moved rearward.

In addition, the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b included in the stump box portion 6300 illustrated in FIG. 521(A) emit light (see FIGS. 522(C) and 522(D) for details). In this state, the grass plate central decorative portion 6382a can be brought into a light emitting decorative state in which it is illuminated from behind. Here, by moving the box upper wall portion 6310 rearward, it is possible to bring the grass plate decorative portion 6382b into a light emitting decorative state. On the other hand, the grass plate central decorative portion 6382a is relatively inconspicuous because the amount of light emitted is reduced. Further, when the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, and the box left wall portion 6340 are moved rearward instead of the box upper wall portion 6310, the grass plate right decoration portion 6382c, the grass plate lower decoration portion 6382d and the grass plate left decorative portion 6382e can be in a light emitting decorative state.

In this manner, by moving the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, and the box left wall portion 6340 rearward in the state where the grass plate central decorative portion 6382a is light-emitted, The on-board decoration portion 6382b, the grass plate right decoration portion 6382c, the grass plate lower decoration portion 6382d, and the grass plate left decoration portion 6382e can be set to the light emitting decoration state. Further, at this time, the grass plate central decorative portion 6382a is in a light emitting decorative state with a weaker light amount than before. In this way, by setting the grass plate upper decoration portion 6382b, the grass plate right decoration portion 6382c, the grass plate lower decoration portion 6382d, and the grass plate left decoration portion 6382e in the light emitting decoration state, it is possible to indicate or notify of any state in the gaming machine. It may be configured as follows. For example, when there are four states with different degrees of advantage for the player, or when there are possible states, the decoration part 6382b on the grass plate is set to the light emission decoration state corresponding to the most advantageous state, and the second advantage is obtained. In response to such a state, the grass plate right decoration portion 6382c is set to a light emission decoration state, and the grass plate left decoration portion 6382e is set to a light emission decoration state to correspond to the third advantageous state. The under-grass plate decorative portion 6382d may be configured to be in a light emitting decorative state. With such a mode, it is possible to make the player have an expectation as to which wall portion moves in a state where the grass plate central decoration portion 6382a is light-emitting decorated.

Alternatively, the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b are turned off, and the grass plate central decoration portion 6382a is not light-emitted, first, the box upper wall portion 6310 and the box right wall portion 6320. , The lower box wall portion 6330 or the left wall portion 6340 of the box is moved backward, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b are set to the light emitting state. Good. With such a configuration, it is possible for the player to see which of the grass plate decorative portion 6382b, the grass plate right decorative portion 6382c, the grass plate lower decorative portion 6382d, and the grass plate left decorative portion 6382e is visible. It is possible to notify in advance. In this case, the walls are provided upright with respect to the front direction, and the player cannot always notice that the walls have moved. Therefore, the player who has been able to notice the movement of any of the walls has a great sense of expectation and watches the subsequent change to the luminous decoration mode of any of the decorations, thereby improving the interest of the game. Is possible.

Further, for example, in a game state that is disadvantageous to the player (so-called normal game state, etc.), the box upper wall portion 6310 and the box left wall portion 6340 are set to the front position (non-operating position), and the grass plate central decorative portion 6382a in front Only the case is limited to the shipping decoration mode, and the box upper wall portion 6310 and the box left wall portion are limited only when the player is in an advantageous state (for example, a probability variation state, a time saving game state, a jackpot game state). 6340 may be moved rearward to irradiate light also on the grass plate decoration portion 6382b to the grass plate left decoration portion 6382e to increase the area in the light emission decoration mode. As a result, the appearance of the light emitting region can be changed according to the interest of the player, which is improved by shifting from the disadvantageous game state to the advantageous game state.

In the example shown with reference to FIG. 519(A) and FIG. 521(A), an opening is provided on the right side of the box rear wall 6350, but in this case, for example, in the front-back direction. The moving decorative member may be configured to appear and disappear from the opening.

With reference to FIGS. 519(A) to 522(D), an example in which the box rear wall portion 6350 is shifted leftward or enlarged or reduced is shown. However, it may be configured so as to be displaced or enlarged or reduced. Further, the structure of the stump box portion 6300 is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 498, and the example shown in FIG. 499 may be adopted.

498 to 499, an example in which the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b are provided on the box rear wall portion 6350 is shown, but instead of the box rear wall portion 6350, the box upper wall portion 6310. It may be configured such that at least one wall portion of the box left wall portion 6340 is provided with a light emitting portion, a light scattering portion, or the like related to light emission.

Specifically, in the modified example shown with reference to FIGS. 517(A) to 522(D), the box upper wall portion 6310 has the light emitting unit and the light scattering unit described with reference to FIGS. 498 and 499. May be provided to illuminate the inside of the stump box portion 6300 and the grass plate portion 6381. At this time, at least one wall portion of the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, and the box left wall portion 6340 is moved backward as in the example shown in FIGS. 516(A) to 516(D). It is good to configure. With such a configuration, in the grass plate portion 6381, from the state where only the front region corresponding to the opening portion of the stump box portion 6300 is mainly illuminated, in addition to the front portion of the opening portion of the stump box portion 6300, It is possible to illuminate the right side, the lower side, and the left side. Although an example in which a light emitting unit or a light scattering unit is provided on the box upper wall 6310 to illuminate the inside of the stump box 6300 is shown, the box right wall 6320 is replaced with the box right wall 6320. Alternatively, the box lower wall portion 6330 and the box left wall portion 6340 may be provided with a light emitting portion or a light scattering portion, and the illumination mode may be changed by moving each wall portion.

The box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, and the box left wall portion 6340 are each formed in a plate shape having the same thickness. The inner wall of the wall may be inclined outward so that the thickness of the wall becomes thin.
With such a configuration, it is possible to further reflect the light reflected in the stump box portion 6300 toward the front.

To move the box upper wall portion 6310 to the box left wall portion 6340 and change the light irradiation mode to the grass plate portion 6381 as described above, the box upper wall portion 6310 to the box left wall portion 6340 are colored and opaque. It is advisable to provide a reflecting portion capable of reflecting light and a scattering portion capable of scattering light by forming the inner wall with an aluminum thin film. With such a configuration, it is possible to further emphasize the manner in which the manner of irradiating the grass plate portion 6381 with light changes. Even when the box upper wall portion 6310 and the box left wall portion 6340 are formed of a colorless transparent and colored transparent material and the inner wall and the outer wall thereof are made into a smooth aspect, the irradiation mode of light to the grass plate portion 6381 is changed. It is possible to

Although it has been described above that the members such as the box upper wall portion 6310 and the box rear wall portion 6350 and the rear wall cover 6356 may be movably deformed, the movable member may be only one of these members. It is possible to move a plurality of arbitrary members, or all the members may be movable. For example, only the box upper wall portion 6310 may be movable, and other members may be fixedly provided so as not to be movable. Further, the box upper wall portion 6310 and the box right wall portion 6320 may be movable, and other members may be fixedly provided so as not to be movable. .. Further, the box upper wall portion 6310, the box rear wall portion 6350, and the rear wall cover 6356 may all be movable. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to change the light emitting decoration mode for the grass plate portion 6381.

The box upper wall portion 6310, the box rear wall portion 6350, the rear wall cover 6356, and the like may be moved by the peripheral control board 1510 by a driving unit (not shown).
Further, the peripheral control board 1510 may control the light emission of the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a, the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b, and the like.

487 to 522, by exemplifying FIGS. 487 to 522, various movable bodies (rabbit character 6000, stump character 6100, etc.) used for rendering and decoration on the game board 5 included in the pachinko machine 1. Hereinafter, the movable body in the game board will be described. However, in the following, a movable body (hereinafter, may be referred to as a frame movable body) used for rendering and decoration of the door frame 3 included in the pachinko machine 1.
) Is provided.

FIGS. 523(A) to 523(E) show a door frame top unit 570 forming the door frame 3 as a frame movable body and a right ear frame movable body 7100 imitating the ears of an animal (specifically, a rabbit). It shows an embodiment in which the left ear frame movable body 7200 is provided. The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 can be moved in the vertical direction, but the specific structure and operation mode will be described later.

523(A) and 523(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 523(C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. 523(D) and 523(E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. 523(A), 523(C), and 523(D) show a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are housed in the door frame top unit 570. 523(B) and 523(E) show a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 protrude upward from the door frame top unit 570. FIG. 523(D) shows a state where the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are housed in the door frame top unit 570.

In the present embodiment, a door frame top unit 570 is provided above the door frame 3. A glass unit 190 is provided in the center of the door frame 3, and a game area 5a located rearward through the glass unit 190, a display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and various movable bodies in the game board. (Rabbit role object 6000, stump role object 6100, etc.) are visible.
A plate unit 320 and a handle unit 300 are provided below the door frame 3. Further, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with an operation button 410, and can accept an operation input by the player. In the figure, the upper plate 321, the lower plate 322, the ball lending button 328, the return button 329, etc. are not shown.

The door frame top unit 570 has a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped shape, and its upper surface, right side surface, and left side surface are the upper surface, right side surface, and left side surface of the door frame base unit 100 forming the outer frame 2 and the door frame 3, respectively. They are provided so as to overlap each other when viewed from the front. The door frame top unit 570 is made of white and semitransparent synthetic resin and has a thickness of about several mm, and can transmit light. The door frame top unit 570 includes a door frame top unit upper right ear opening 7000 corresponding to the vertically movable right ear frame movable body 7100 and a door corresponding to the vertically movable left ear frame movable body 7200. The frame top unit has an upper left ear opening 7010.

As shown in FIGS. 523(A) to 523(E), the door frame top unit 570 in the present embodiment includes a right ear frame movable body 7100 on the left side and a left ear frame movable body 7200 on the right side in a front view. There is. The specific structures and operation modes of these are shown below. Since the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 have basically the same structure, only the right ear frame movable body 7100 may be described as a representative in the following description.

The right ear frame movable body 7100 has a vertically long rectangular shape in a front view, and has a right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 facing forward and a right ear frame movable body second surface 7120 facing rearward. ing.
The right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 is made of an inner colored (specifically pink) transparent synthetic resin of the right ear frame movable body first surface and an outer white translucent synthetic resin. The right ear frame movable body first surface outside decorative portion 7114 is formed. The surfaces other than the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 of the right ear frame movable body 7100 (upper surface, left side surface, right side surface, right ear frame movable body second surface 7120) are outside the right ear frame movable body first surface. The decorative portion 7114 is made of the same white translucent synthetic resin. The left ear frame movable body 7200 has the same structure as the right ear frame movable body 7100.

Inside the right ear frame movable body 7100, a right ear frame movable body inside light emitting section 7116 is provided at a position overlapping with the right ear frame movable body first surface inside decoration section 7112 in a front view. Further, the right ear frame movable body outer light emitting portion 7118 is provided at a position overlapping the right ear frame movable body first surface outer decorative portion 7114 in a front view. The right-ear-frame movable-body-inside light emitting portion 7116 is specifically configured by a printed circuit board having a white protective film coated on both sides, and a light emitting diode capable of emitting light toward the player is mounted on the surface thereof. Has been done. The right ear frame movable body inner light emitting portion 7116 and the right ear frame movable body outer light emitting portion 7118 can emit light in a predetermined light emitting manner toward the front under the control of the peripheral control board 1510. The movable-body-inside light-emitting portion 7116 can light-emit the right ear frame movable-body first surface-inside decoration portion 7112, and the right ear-frame movable-body outer-light-emitting portion 7118 can light-upside the right ear-frame movable-body first surface-outside decoration portion 7114. Is. The left ear frame movable body 7200 has the same structure as the right ear frame movable body 7100.

The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are respectively driven by a drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 as shown in FIGS. 523(A), 523(C), and 523(D). From the state (first state) of being stored in the standby position in the door frame top unit 570, it is vertically upward from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570 as shown in FIGS. 523(B) and 523(E). It is possible to control to the state (second state) that is projected to the side. The upper surfaces of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are formed flush with the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570 when the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are in the standby position. Has been done. The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 have a shape imitating the ears of an animal, and are protruded vertically upward from the state of being housed in the door frame top unit 570 and the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570. By taking such a state, it is possible to decoratively express the state in which the animal's ears have moved.

In this embodiment, the door frame top unit 570 is made of white and semitransparent synthetic resin and has a thickness of about several mm. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 523(A), in the state where the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are housed in the door frame top unit 570, the right ear frame movable body inner light emitting section 7116, the right ear frame. When the movable body outer side light emitting portion 7118, the left ear frame movable body inner side light emitting portion 7216, and the left ear frame movable body outer side light emitting portion 7218 are caused to emit light in a predetermined mode, the front surface of the door frame top unit 570 is dimly emitted. It is possible for the player to visually recognize it in the closed state. Note that the door frame top unit 570 in another embodiment may have the same structure, and in this case also, the light emitted from the light emitting portion provided corresponding to the frame movable body is the door frame top unit. It is possible for the player to visually recognize the door frame top unit 570 with the light reflected and scattered inside the unit 570 and the front and side surfaces of the door frame top unit 570 being vaguely emitted.

On the other hand, in a state where the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are projected from the door frame top unit 570, the right ear frame movable body inner light emitting portion 7116, the right ear frame movable body outer light emitting portion 7118, the left ear frame. When the movable body inner side light emitting portion 7216 and the left ear frame movable body outer side light emitting portion 7218 are caused to emit light in a predetermined manner, the right ear frame movable body first surface inside decoration portion included in the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110. 7112 and the right ear frame movable body first surface outside decoration portion 7114, the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 and the left ear frame movable body first surface inside decoration portion 7212 and the left ear frame movable body first surface outside decoration portion It is possible for the player to visually recognize 7214 and a predetermined light emission effect state.

In this way, by moving the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as frame movable body), a part of the frame movable body of the outer frame 2 and the door frame base unit 100 is moved. Since it will be located above the upper surface, the area occupied by the player when looking up will increase, and the volume of the housing will appear to have increased, giving the player unprecedented surprises and fun. It becomes possible to give it to.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 524(A) to 525(B), the game board side according to the specific operation modes of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 and the operation modes of the frame movable body. With respect to the display mode of the frame movable body simulated image which is an image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 displayed on the effect display device 1600, the operation button 410 (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as an operation unit) Operation acceptance mode of player, right ear frame movable body inner light emitting portion 7116, right ear frame movable body outer light emitting portion 7118, left ear frame movable body inner light emitting portion 7216, left ear frame movable body outer light emitting portion 7218 (hereinafter, frame) An example of an effect in which a light emitting mode and the like in (a movable body light emitting unit) are combined is shown.

FIGS. 524(A) to 525(B) respectively show an operation mode of the frame movable body and a frame movable body simulated image which is an image simulating the frame movable body displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. It is a time chart showing a state, a reception state of the operation unit, a display state of an operation instruction display displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and a light emission effect state of the frame movable body light emitting unit.

In the time charts shown in FIGS. 524(A) to 525(B), t0, t1 to t34, t35, etc. are shown according to the passage of time in order to explain the timing of the effect.
The time between each timing is 1 second. In addition, these points are shown in FIGS. 533(A) to 534(B), FIGS. 539(A) to 540(B), and FIGS. 548(A) to 549(B), and the like. The same applies to each drawing and the like in which is modified.

FIG. 524(A) shows an example of the effect pattern when the player operates the operation unit during the period when the special lottery result is a big hit and the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. There is. FIG. 524(B) shows an example of the effect pattern when the player has operated the operation unit during the period when the special lottery result is lost and the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. There is. FIG. 525(A) shows an example of the effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. ing. FIG. 525(B) shows an example of the effect pattern when the special lottery result is lost and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. ing.

In each of the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 524(A) to 525(B), the manner in which the frame movable body moves, the manner in which the frame movable body simulated image is displayed, the timing at which operation acceptance for the operation unit is enabled, and the operation instruction display are displayed. The start timing and the timing at which the light emitting unit of the movable frame moves from the light emission effect state to the light off state are the same. On the other hand, the timing at which the operation instruction display ends and the timing at which the light emitting unit of the movable frame moves from the off state to the light emission effect state or the specific light emission effect state may differ depending on the effect pattern. Below, with reference to FIG. 524(A) to FIG. 525(B), a specific example of the effect in each effect pattern will be shown.

In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 524(A) to 525(B), the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are housed in the door frame top unit 570 in the initial state (before the timing t0). It is in a state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a first state or a standby state). In this state, when the reach effect state corresponding to the special lottery result occurs at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t4) between timing t0 and timing t7, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 rise simultaneously. Is started (timing t7).

At the same time, in the center of the game board side effect display device 1600, the display of the frame movable body simulated image is started. At the same time, the display of the door frame top unit simulated image, which is an image simulating the door frame top unit 570, is also started. The frame movable body simulated image specifically includes an image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and an image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200. In the frame movable body simulated image, an image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and an image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 rise as the actual right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 rise. It is dynamically displayed in the manner. The frame movable body simulated image is an image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable, in accordance with the timing (timing t9) when the rising of the actual right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 ends. The rising of the image simulating the body 7200 is finished, and thereafter, the image continues to be displayed in a mode showing a stopped state (after timing t9). The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 have completed the ascending at a timing t9, which is two seconds after starting the ascending at a timing t7 (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as a second state or an ascending state). Become.

On the other hand, at timing t9, the operation reception for the operation unit becomes effective, and the display of an image for instructing the operation on the operation unit on the game board side effect display device 1600 (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as operation instruction display) is started. It As the operation instruction display, for example, an image simulating the appearance of the operation button 410 may be displayed, or a character string instructing to operate the operation unit (for example, a character string “push!!”) may be displayed. May be. The operation valid period continues until an operation is received by the operation unit (timing t14 in the example shown below) or until a predetermined time elapses (until timing t18). Further, at the timing t9, all the frame movable body light emitting units are turned off from the state in which the light emission effect is performed.

FIGS. 524(A) and 524(B) show the effect mode when the operation unit is operated at timing t14 after the period in which the operation on the operation unit is enabled is started (timing t9). Shows. In these effect patterns, the operation instruction display ends at timing t14, and the frame movable body light emitting unit enters a predetermined light emitting effect state corresponding to the special lottery result.

FIG. 524(A) is an effect pattern in the case where the special lottery result is a big hit, and when the operation on the operation unit is performed (timing t14), the light emitting unit included in the frame movable body is changed from the unlit state to the normal state. The specific light emission effect state is different from the light emission effect state. In this way, the frame movable body light emitting unit is brought into the specific light emission effect state, which indicates to the player that the special lottery result is a big hit.

On the other hand, FIG. 524(B) is an effect pattern in the case where the special lottery result is out of alignment, and when the operation section is operated (timing t14), the frame movable body light emitting section is switched from the unlit state to the normal state. It becomes a light emission production state. In this way, the frame movable body light emitting unit is brought into the normal light emitting effect state, which indicates to the player that the special lottery result is missing.

In the specific light emission effect state, compared to the light emission mode in the normal light emission effect state, the flashing mode of light becomes faster, the light intensity becomes stronger, or the number of colors increases, so that the player feels more stimulation. It is advisable to adopt a light emission mode. In this way, the production state of a specific light emission mode different from the normal state becomes visible to the player, which indicates to the player that the special lottery result is a big hit. It should be noted that specifically, in the specific light emission effect state, the light emission effect state may be configured such that the inner portion of the frame movable body and the outer portion of the frame movable body are in different modes. For example, the inner portion of the frame movable body may be configured to be visible in a light-emission mode with stronger stimulation than the outer portion of the frame movable body. In addition, you may comprise so that this definition about a specific light emission production state and a normal light emission production state may be applied to another embodiment.

In FIGS. 525(A) and 525(B), after the period in which the operation on the operation unit is valid is started (timing t9), the operation unit is not operated by the player during the operation valid period, The production mode in the case where the operation valid period ends at timing t18 after a lapse of a predetermined time has been shown. In these effect patterns, the operation instruction display ends at the timing t18, and the frame movable body light emitting unit enters a predetermined light emitting effect state according to the special lottery result.

FIG. 525(A) is an effect pattern in the case where the special lottery result is a big hit, and at the timing (timing t18) when the operation valid period ends, the frame movable body light emitting unit emits specific light different from the normal light emitting effect state. It becomes a production state. In this way, the frame movable body light emitting unit is brought into the specific light emission effect state, which indicates to the player that the special lottery result is a big hit.

On the other hand, FIG. 525(B) is an effect pattern in the case where the special lottery result is a loss, and at the timing when the operation valid period ends (timing t18), the light emitting unit of the frame movable body enters the normal light emitting effect state. .. In this way, the light emitting unit is brought into the normal light emitting effect state, which indicates to the player that the special lottery result is a loss.

In each of the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 524(A) to 525(B), the decorative pattern that has changed at a predetermined timing (timing t20) after the end of the operation valid period corresponds to the special lottery result. Will be stopped and displayed. For example, in the case of the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 524(A) and 525(A), the special lottery result is a big hit (for example, “7” “7” “7”). In the case of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 524(B) and FIG. 525(B), the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, and the reach lost mode (for example, “7” “6” “7”) indicating that the special lottery result is lost. ), the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed.

At the timing (timing t22) when 2 seconds have elapsed after the decorative pattern stopped, the frame movable body is in the raised position (second state) while maintaining the light emission mode of either the specific light emission effect state or the normal light emission effect state. ) To the storage position (first state). At the same time, the frame movable body simulated image is in a display mode in which it descends according to the descending motion of the actual right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200. At the timing when the movement of the frame movable body to the storage position is completed (timing t24), the frame movable body simulated image becomes a display mode in which the descending has been completed in accordance with the actual descending operation of the frame movable body, and The display ends.

When the special lottery result is a big hit, the light emitting state of the movable frame may be changed from the specific light emitting effect state to the normal light emitting effect state at a predetermined timing during the big hit. If the result of the special lottery is lost, the normal light emitting effect state is continued and the next variation of the decorative pattern is started.

526(A) to 526(C) show the moving state of the frame movable body when the effect pattern shown in FIG. FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram showing changes in state, operation instruction display state, and light emission effect state of the movable frame body over time. Note that, as described above, the effect pattern shown in FIG. 524(A) is an effect pattern when the player operates the operation unit when the special lottery result is a big hit.

526 (A) shows the state at timing t5, the decorative pattern is changing in the reach state, the frame movable body is located in the storage position (first state) in the normal light emission effect state, The frame movable body simulated image is not displayed, the operation unit is in the operation invalid period, and the operation instruction display is not displayed.

FIG. 526(B) shows the state at timing t8, the decorative pattern is changing in the reach state, and the frame movable body is in the light emission effect state from the storage position (first state) to the raised position (second state). The moving image of the frame movable body is a display simulating the moving state from the stored position (first state) to the raised position (second state), and the operation unit is inoperative. It is a period and the operation instruction display is not displayed.

FIG. 526(C) shows the state at timing t11, the decorative pattern is changing in the reach state, the frame movable body is in the extinguished state in the raised position (second state), and the frame movable body simulated image is The display is imitating the frame movable body located in the raised position (second state), the operation valid period is started in the operation unit, and the image imitating the operation unit is displayed as the operation instruction display as the instruction display. ing.

FIG. 527(A) shows the state at timing t19, the decorative pattern is changing in the reach state, the frame movable body is in the raised position (second state) in the special light emission effect state, and the frame movable body simulation is performed. The image is a display imitating the raised position (second state), the operation section is in the operation invalid period, and the operation instruction display is not displayed.

FIG. 527(B) shows the state at the timing t23, in which the decorative design is stopped and displayed in the form of a square pattern indicating that the special lottery result is a big hit (for example, “7” “7” “7”). Then, the frame movable body is moving from the raised position (second state) to the storage position (first state) in the special light emission effect state, and the frame movable body simulated image is moved from the raised position (second state) to the storage position ( It is a display simulating the moving state to the first state), the operation unit is in the operation invalid period, and the operation instruction display is not displayed.

FIG. 527(C) shows the state at the timing t28, in which the decorative design is stopped and displayed in the form of a grid showing that the special lottery result is a big hit (for example, “7” “7” “7”). The frame movable body is located in the storage position (first state) in the special light emission effect state, the frame movable body simulated image is not displayed, the operation unit is in the operation invalid period, and the operation instruction display is not displayed. ..

In this way, the frame movable body simulated image is displayed at the timing when the frame movable body starts to move, so that the light emission mode changes according to the operation of the frame movable body and the operation of the operation unit. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player overlooks. In addition, since the movable frame body appears at a position that does not exist in the past in response to the result of the special lottery (for example, in response to the occurrence of the reach effect), it is possible to make the player feel a great surprise or fun. In addition, when the player operates the operation unit to change the light emission mode of the frame movable body light emitting unit, it is possible to give the player a feeling as if he or she decided the special lottery result. Becomes

528(A) to 528(F) show modified examples of the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 523(A) to 523(E). 528(A) and 528(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. 528(C) and 528(D) are plan views of the pachinko machine 1. 528(E) and 528(F) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. 528(A), 528(C), and 528(E) show a state (first state) in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are housed in the door frame top unit 570. Shows. 528(B), 528(D), and 528(F) show a state (second state) in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 protrude upward from the door frame top unit 570. ing.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 528(C) and FIG. 528(E), the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are respectively in the standby position (first state) in the foreground. The right ear frame movable body rotating shaft 7140 and the left ear frame movable body rotating shaft 7240 are provided on the side, and the right ear frame movable body is rotated by 90 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the right side. 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are in the moving state (second state) in which they are moved from the standby position (first state) to the moving position. The frame movable body having such a structure may be configured to execute the effect pattern described above with reference to FIGS. 524(A) to 525(B). Further, a modification of the time chart described later may be applied to the frame movable body having such a structure.

529(A) to 529(F) show modified examples of the movable frame body described with reference to FIGS. 528(A) to 528(F). 529(A) and 529(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. 529(C) and 529(D) are plan views of the pachinko machine 1. 5E and 529F are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. 529(A), 529(C), and 529(E) show a state (first state) in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are housed in the door frame top unit 570. ing. 529(B), 529(D), and 529(F) show a state (second state) in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 project upward from the door frame top unit 570. ing.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 529(C) and FIG. 529(E), the frame movable body has a rotation shaft on the back side, and rotates 90 degrees clockwise when viewed from the right side. As a result, the movable frame moves from the standby position (first state) to the moving position (second state).
The frame movable body having such a structure may be configured to execute the effect pattern described above with reference to FIGS. 524(A) to 525(B). Further, a modification of the time chart described later may be applied to the frame movable body having such a structure.

530(A) to 530(E) show modifications of the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 523(A) to 523(E). 530(A) and 530(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 530(C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. 530(D) and 530(E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. 530(A), 530(C), and 530(D) show a state (first state) in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are housed in the door frame top unit 570. ing. 530(B) and 530(E) show a state (second state) in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 protrude upward from the door frame top unit 570.

In this embodiment, the upper portion of the frame movable body is visible in the front view in the standby state (first state). The frame movable body having such a structure may be configured to execute the effect pattern described above with reference to FIGS. 524(A) to 525(B). Further, a modification of the time chart described later may be applied to the frame movable body having such a structure. As described above, in the standby state, a part of the frame movable body is visible in the front view, which allows the player to recall that the frame movable body moves. Also, during a normal game, only the right ear frame movable body outer light emitting portion 7118 and the left ear frame movable body outer light emitting portion 7218 are set to the normal light emission effect state, and only when the specific light emission effect state is set, the right ear frame movable body inner side. The light emitting unit 7116 and the left ear frame movable body inner light emitting unit 7216 may also be configured to emit light. Further, frame movable bodies having other structures may be configured to adopt the same light emission pattern.

531(A) to 531(F) show modified examples of the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 530(A) to 530(E). 531(A) and 531(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. 531(C) and 531(D) are plan views of the pachinko machine 1. 531(E) and 531(F) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. 531(A), 531(C), and 531(E) show a state (first state) in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are housed in the door frame top unit 570. ing. 531(B), 531(D), and 531(F) show a state (second state) in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 project upward from the door frame top unit 570. ing.

In this embodiment, the left and right frame movable bodies are adjacent to each other in the state (first state) at the standby position, and the upper part of the frame movable body is visible in a front view. In this embodiment, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are housed in the door frame top unit upper both-ear openings 7040. Further, the frame movable bodies are configured to be movable upward while being separated from each other in the left-right direction. In the state moved to the movement position (second state), it becomes visible to the player in the same state as in FIG. 523(B). The frame movable body having such a structure may be configured to execute the effect pattern described above with reference to FIGS. 524(A) to 525(B). Further, a modification of the time chart described later may be applied to the frame movable body having such a structure.

FIGS. 532(A) to 532(E) show another embodiment in which a door frame top unit 570 forming the door frame 3 is provided with a frame movable body. In the present embodiment, the frame movable body is rotatable, but the specific structure and operation mode will be described later.

532(A) and 532(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 532(C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. 532(D) and 532(E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIGS. 532(A), 532(C), and 532(D) show a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are housed in the door frame top unit 570.
FIGS. 532(B) and 532(E) show the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the right in the state shown in FIGS. 532(A) and 532(D). It shows a state in which the door frame is rotated 90 degrees and protrudes above the door frame top unit 570.

The door frame top unit 570 is made of white and semi-transparent synthetic resin, and in the storage state shown in FIG. It is invisible. On the other hand, when the player visually recognizes the door frame top unit 570 from diagonally above the right, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 can be visually recognized as shown in FIG. 532(C).

As shown in FIGS. 532(A) to 532(E), the door frame top unit 570 has a door frame top unit upper right ear opening 7000 and a door frame top unit upper left ear opening 7010. The shape of the door frame top unit upper right ear opening 7000 and the door frame top unit upper left ear opening 7010 is a vertically long rectangular shape when seen in a plan view. Further, in the door frame top unit 570, a right side light emitting portion 7050 inside the door frame top unit that illuminates the right ear frame movable body 7100 and a left side light emitting portion 7052 inside the door frame top unit that illuminates the left ear frame movable body 7200. Is provided. Except for these points, the door frame top unit 570 in the present embodiment basically has the same structure as the structure described with reference to FIGS. 523(A) to 523(E). ..

As shown in FIGS. 532(A) to 532(E), the door frame top unit 570 in the present embodiment includes a right ear frame movable body 7100 on the left side and a left ear frame movable body 7200 on the right side in a front view. There is. The specific structures and operation modes of these are shown below. Since the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 have basically the same structure, only the right ear frame movable body 7100 may be described as a representative in the following description.

532(A), 532(C), and 532(D) show the state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 is in the stored state. The right ear frame movable body 7100 in the stored state has a vertically long rectangular shape in a plan view, and has a right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 facing downward and a right ear frame movable body second surface facing upward. 7120 and 7120. The right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 is made of an inner colored (specifically pink) transparent synthetic resin of the right ear frame movable body first surface and an outer white translucent synthetic resin. The right ear frame movable body first surface outside decorative portion 7114 is formed. On the other hand, the second surface 7120 of the movable right ear frame is entirely formed of gray opaque synthetic resin. The other surfaces (upper surface, left side surface, right side surface) of the right ear frame movable body 7100 are formed of the same white translucent synthetic resin as the right ear frame movable body first surface outer decorative portion 7114. The left ear frame movable body 7200 has the same structure as the right ear frame movable body 7100.

The right ear frame movable body 7100 has a right ear frame movable body rotating shaft 7140. Further, the right ear frame movable body rotating shaft 7140 is attached near the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570. The right ear frame movable body 7100 can be rotated around the left-right direction by transmitting power from a pulse motor (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 to the right ear frame movable body rotating shaft 7140. Is. The left ear frame movable body 7200 also has a left ear frame movable body rotating shaft 7240 having a similar structure, and power from a pulse motor (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 is supplied to the left ear frame movable body rotating shaft. By being transmitted to the 7240, it is possible to rotate about the left-right direction as an axis. The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 independently rotate by a pulse motor (not shown) to rotate clockwise or counterclockwise at an arbitrary angle when viewed from the right. It is possible to stop at any angle.

As shown in FIGS. 532(A) to 532(E), the door frame top unit 570 is provided with a door frame top unit inner right light emitting portion 7050 that illuminates the right ear frame movable body 7100. The right side light emitting unit 7050 in the door frame top unit is installed in a state of being rotated about 30 degrees clockwise from the horizontal plane when viewed from the right. The right-side light emitting unit 7050 in the door frame top unit is specifically configured by a printed circuit board having a white protective film applied on both sides, and by the control of the peripheral control board 1510, the right ear frame movable body located at the rear side. A light emitting diode capable of emitting light to the first surface 7110 is mounted on the upper surface thereof. By causing the light emitting diode to emit light of a predetermined color, the first surface 7110 of the right ear frame movable body can be brought into a predetermined light emission effect mode. The left-side light emitting portion 7052 inside the door frame top unit also has the same structure as the right-side light emitting portion 7050 inside the door frame top unit.

The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are respectively driven by a drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 as shown in FIGS. 532(A), 532(C), and 532(D). The door frame top unit 570 can be stored in a standby position and can be stopped at an arbitrary position rotated by a predetermined angle. FIG. 532(B) and FIG. 532(E) are an example thereof, in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are rotated by 90 degrees clockwise when viewed from the right from the housed state, and the vertical body is moved vertically. In the state, the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 and the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 face the front and are stopped. The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 have a shape imitating the ears of an animal, and are in a state of being housed in the door frame top unit 570 and a state of being vertical from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570. By taking and, it is possible to express decoratively the state in which an animal's ears are standing.

Further, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 can be made visible to the player in a rotated state by continuously driving a drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. Is. When rotating in this manner, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 may be rotated multiple times in the same direction at a speed of about one rotation per second. 532(B) and FIG. 532(E) can also be said to show the state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are rotating. The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 may be configured to rotate clockwise a plurality of times when viewed from the right, or may be rotated counterclockwise a plurality of times when viewed from the right. It may be configured as follows. With such a configuration, the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 and the right ear frame movable body second surface 7120 are alternately visible to the player. In addition, the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 and the left ear frame movable body second surface 7220 are alternately visible to the player.

The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 can be stopped or rotated at predetermined positions, and the light is emitted from the right side light emitting section 7050 inside the door frame top unit and the left side light emitting section 7052 inside the door frame top unit. The point that the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 can be brought into a predetermined decorative state by light has been shown, but a specific example will be shown below.

As shown in FIGS. 532(A), 532(C), and 532(D), the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear of the left ear frame movable body 7200 are included. Inside the door frame top unit 570, when light is emitted from the right side light emitting unit 7050 inside the door frame top unit and the left side light emitting unit 7052 inside the door frame top unit with the frame movable body first surface 7210 facing downward. It is possible to make the entire door frame top unit 570 dimly emit light by the light reflected by. This is because the door frame top unit 570 is made of white and semi-transparent synthetic resin.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 532(B) and 532(E), the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body first of the left ear frame movable body 7200. When the light is emitted from the right side light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left side light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit with the one surface 7210 facing forward, the right ear frame movable body first is emitted by the light. It is possible for the player to visually recognize the state in which the first surface 7110 and the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 are decorated. Even in this case, a part of the light emitted from the right side light emitting unit 7050 inside the door frame top unit and the left side light emitting unit 7052 inside the door frame top unit will be transmitted to the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200. Since the door frame top unit 570 is reflected and the door frame top unit 570 is illuminated from the inside, the entire door frame top unit 570 can be visually recognized by the player in a slightly vaguely emitted state.

On the other hand, when the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are rotated and light is emitted from the door frame top unit inside right side light emitting section 7050 and the door frame top unit inside left side light emitting section 7052, the irradiation is performed. The right ear frame movable body first surface 7110, the right ear frame movable body second surface 7120, the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210, and the left ear frame movable body second surface 7220 are alternately illuminated by the emitted light. It will be in the state of being. Further, the entire door frame top unit 570 can be visually recognized by the player in a slightly vaguely lit state.

In this way, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are positioned or rotated above the upper surfaces of the outer frame 2 and the door frame base unit 100 in a stopped state. By occupying an increased area occupied by the field of view when the player looks up, it is possible to give the player an unprecedented surprise and fun by looking as if the volume of the housing increased.

Next, referring to FIGS. 533(A) to 534(B), the game board side according to the specific operation mode of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 and the operation mode of the frame movable body. With respect to the display mode of the frame movable body simulated image which is an image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 displayed on the effect display device 1600, the operation button 410 (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as an operation unit) An example of a combination of a player's operation acceptance mode, a door frame top unit inside right side light emitting unit 7050, a door frame top unit inside left side light emitting unit 7052 is shown.

FIGS. 533(A) to 534(B) respectively show an operation mode of the frame movable body and a frame movable body simulated image which is an image imitating the frame movable body displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. It is a time chart showing a state, a reception state of the operation unit, a display state of an operation instruction display displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and an irradiation mode of light to the frame movable body.

FIG. 533(A) shows an example of the effect pattern when the player operates the operation unit during the period when the special lottery result is a big hit and the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. There is. FIG. 533(B) shows an example of the effect pattern when the player operates the operation unit during the period when the special lottery result is a loss and the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. There is. FIG. 534(A) shows an example of the effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. ing. FIG. 534(B) shows an example of the effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. ing.

In each of the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 533(A) to 534(B), the timing at which the frame movable body changes from the standby state (first state) to the rotating state (second state), the display of the frame movable body simulated image The mode, the timing at which the operation acceptance for the operation unit is valid, the timing at which the operation instruction display is started, and the timing at which the light irradiation mode for the frame movable body is changed from the light emission effect state to the light off state are the same. On the other hand, the timing when the operation instruction display ends, the timing when the frame movable body changes from the rotating state (second state) to another state, the light irradiation mode for the frame movable body from the light-off state to the light emission effect state or the specific light emission effect state. There is a case that the timing becomes different depending on the effect pattern. Below, with reference to FIG. 533(A)-FIG. 534(B), the concrete production example in each production pattern is shown.

In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 533(A) to 534(B), the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are housed in the door frame top unit 570 in the initial state (before the timing t0). It is in a state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as a first state and a standby state), and specifically, the right ear frame is movable as shown in FIGS. 532(A), 532(C), and 532(D). The body first surface 7110 and the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 are in a state of facing downward. In this state, when the reach effect state corresponding to the special lottery result occurs at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t4) between the timing t0 and the timing t9, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 cause the timing t9. At the same time, the rotation is started at the same time, and the state where the rotation is continued (hereinafter, may be referred to as the second state and the rotation state). The rotation direction is a clockwise direction when viewed from the right, and the rotation speed is one rotation per second.

At the same time, in the center of the game board side effect display device 1600, the display of the frame movable body simulated image is started. At the same time, the display of the door frame top unit simulated image, which is an image simulating the door frame top unit 570, is also started. The frame movable body simulated image specifically includes an image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and an image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200. The frame movable body simulated image is the same as the image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 according to the rotation of the real right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200. It continues to be displayed dynamically in a rotating manner. The rotation speed of the image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 are also rotated at the same speed as the rotation speed of the actual frame movable body (speed of one rotation per second). Is displayed. As a result, when the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 and the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 are in a rotating state facing the front as shown in FIGS. 532(B) and 532(E), the right ear frame The image simulating the frame movable body 7100 and the image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 have the image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100, the image simulating the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110, and the left ear, respectively. An image simulating the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 included in the image simulating the frame movable body 7200 is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 as a frame movable body simulated image in a state of facing the front.

On the other hand, at timing t9, the operation reception for the operation unit becomes effective, and the display of an image for instructing the operation on the operation unit on the game board side effect display device 1600 (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as operation instruction display) is started. It As the operation instruction display, for example, an image simulating the appearance of the operation button 410 may be displayed, or a character string instructing to operate the operation unit (for example, a character string “push!!”) may be displayed. May be. The operation valid period continues until an operation is received by the operation unit (timing t14 in the example shown below) or until a predetermined time elapses (until timing t18). At timing t9, the door frame top unit inner right light emitting portion 7050 and the door frame top unit inner left light emitting portion 7052 that irradiate light to the frame movable body are turned off from the state in which the light emission effect is performed.

FIG. 533(A) and FIG. 533(B) show the effect mode when the operation unit is operated at the timing t14 after the period in which the operation on the operation unit is enabled is started (timing t9). Showing. In these effect patterns, the operation instruction display ends at timing t14, the frame movable body that has been rotating until then stops at a predetermined rotation angle corresponding to the special lottery result, and the light to the frame movable body is changed. The irradiation mode becomes a predetermined light emission effect state corresponding to the special lottery result.

FIG. 533(A) is an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit, and when the operation section is operated (timing t14), the right ear frame movable body 7100 is the right ear frame movable body first. A state in which the surface 7110 is stopped vertically with the front side being the front side and the left ear frame movable body 7200 is stopped vertically with the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 being the front side (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a third state). Become. At the same time, the light emission mode for the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 becomes a specific light emission effect state different from the normal light emission effect state. In this way, the light irradiation mode is set to the specific light emission effect state, which indicates to the player that the special lottery result is a big hit.

On the other hand, FIG. 533(B) shows an effect pattern in the case where the special lottery result is out of alignment, and when the operation section is operated (timing t14), the right ear frame movable body 7100 becomes the right ear frame movable body. A state in which the second surface 7120 is stopped vertically with the front side thereof and the left ear frame movable body 7200 is stopped vertically with the left ear frame movable body second surface 7220 being in the front side (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a fourth state). ). At the same time, the light irradiation mode for the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 is changed from the unlit state to the normal light emission effect state. As described above, the light emission mode becomes the normal light emission effect state, which indicates to the player that the special lottery result is a loss.

In FIGS. 534(A) and 534(B), after the period in which the operation on the operation unit is enabled is started (timing t9), the operation unit is not operated by the player during the operation valid period, The production mode in the case where the operation valid period ends at timing t18 after a lapse of a predetermined time has been shown. In these effect patterns, the operation instruction display ends at timing t18, the frame movable body that has been rotating until then automatically stops at a predetermined rotation angle corresponding to the special lottery result, and the frame movable body The light irradiation mode for the is a predetermined light emission effect state corresponding to the special lottery result.

FIG. 534(A) is an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit, and the right ear frame movable body 7100 causes the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 to move at the timing (timing t18) when the operation valid period ends. The left ear frame movable body 7200 is vertically stopped on the front side and is vertically stopped (the third state) with the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 being on the front side. At the same time, the light emission mode for the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 becomes a specific light emission effect state different from the normal light emission effect state. In this way, the light irradiation mode is set to the specific light emission effect state, which indicates to the player that the special lottery result is a big hit.

On the other hand, FIG. 534(B) shows an effect pattern in the case where the special lottery result is a loss, and at the timing (timing t18) when the operation valid period ends, the right ear frame movable body 7100 has the right ear frame movable body second surface. 7120 is stopped vertically with the front side being 7120, and the left ear frame movable body 7200 is vertically stopped with the second surface 7220 of the left ear frame movable body being the front side (fourth state). At the same time, the light irradiation mode for the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 is changed from the unlit state to the normal light emission effect state. As described above, the light emission mode becomes the normal light emission effect state, which indicates to the player that the special lottery result is a loss.

In each effect pattern shown in FIG. 533(A) to FIG. 534(B), at a predetermined timing (timing t20) after the end of the operation valid period, the decorative pattern that has changed corresponds to the special lottery result. Will be stopped and displayed. For example, in the case of the effect patterns shown in FIG. 533(A) and FIG. 534(A), the special lottery result is a big hit (for example, “7” “7” “7”). In the case of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 533(B) and FIG. 534(B), the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, and the reach lost mode (for example, “7”, “6”, “7”) indicating that the special lottery result is lost. ), the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed.

At the timing (timing t24) when 4 seconds have passed after the decorative pattern stopped, the frame movable body maintained the light emission mode of either the specific light emission effect state or the normal light emission effect state, and the right ear frame movable member. The state where the first surface 7110 and the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 face forward (the third state) or the right ear frame movable body second surface 7120 and the left ear frame movable body second surface 7220 face forward. The state is changed from the facing state (fourth state) to the state in which the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 and the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 face downward (first state). At the same time, the display of the frame movable body simulated image ends.

When the special lottery result is a big hit, it may be configured to change the light irradiation state to the frame movable body from the specific light emission effect state to the normal light emission effect state at a predetermined timing during the big hit. If the result of the special lottery is lost, the normal light emitting effect state is continued and the next variation of the decorative pattern is started.

As described above, the frame movable body is configured to display the frame movable body simulated image at the timing of changing from the standby state (first state) to the rotating state (second state). It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player overlooks that it is in the second state). In addition, it is possible to make the player feel a great surprise or fun by causing the movable frame body to appear at a position that has not existed in the past in response to the special lottery result (for example, in response to the occurrence of the reach effect). .. Further, triggered by the operation of the operation unit by the player, the frame movable body is stopped in a predetermined stop state (third state or fourth state), and the irradiation mode of light to the frame movable body is changed, It is possible to give the player a feeling as if he or she decided the special lottery result.

535(A) to 535(E) show modified examples of the movable frame body described with reference to FIGS. 532(A) to 532(E). FIG. 535(A) and FIG. 535(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 535(C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. 535(D) and 535(E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. 535(A), FIG. 535(C), and FIG. 535(D) show a state (first state) in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are at the standby position. FIGS. 535(B) and 535(E) show a state (second state) in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are rotating.

In this embodiment, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 have a right ear frame movable body rotating shaft 7140 and a left ear frame movable body rotating shaft 7240, respectively, at their lower portions. Further, the vertical thickness of the door frame top unit 570 is smaller than that in the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 532(A) to 532(E). Further, the right ear frame movable body rotating shaft 7140 and the left ear frame movable body rotating shaft 7240 are provided so as to be orthogonal to the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570. Further, the upper half of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are located at a position higher than the upper surfaces of the outer frame 2 and the door frame base unit 100.

When the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are in the standby position (first state), the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 and the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 face each other. positioned. On the other hand, in the rotating state, the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 rotates clockwise in plan view, and the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 rotates counterclockwise in plan view. For example, in FIGS. 535(B) and 535(E), the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 rotates clockwise 90 degrees when seen in a plan view, and the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 shows a plane view. It can be said that it shows a state of being rotated counterclockwise by 90 degrees. In this rotation mode, the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 is rotated counterclockwise when seen in a plan view, and the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 is seen as seen in a plan view. Even if a player or a store clerk at a game store carelessly brings his or her hand or face closer to the movable frame, compared to the case of rotating it around, the hand or face will be dragged behind the gaming machine, resulting in injury. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of. The frame movable body having such a structure may be configured to execute the effect pattern described above with reference to FIGS. 533(A) to 534(B). Further, a modification of the time chart described later may be applied to the frame movable body having such a structure.

536(A) to 536(E) show modified examples of the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 535(A) to 535(E). 536(A) and 536(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 536(C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. 536(D) and 536(E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. 536(A), 536(C), and 536(D) show a state (first state) in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are at the standby position. 536(B) and 536(E) show a state (second state) in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are rotating from the door frame top unit 570.

Also in this embodiment, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are provided so as to be orthogonal to the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, there is a portion where a part of the door frame top unit 570 projects upward so as to cover the top, left, right, and rear of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200. doing. Further, the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 of the left ear frame movable body 7200 are respectively colored (specifically, pink) transparent composites. It is made of resin. Further, the right ear frame movable body second surface 7120 of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body second surface 7220 of the left ear frame movable body 7200 are each formed of gray opaque synthetic resin. Also in the present embodiment, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 can be in the same state as the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 535(A) to 535(E). .. By providing the part that covers the frame movable body in this way, even if the player or a store clerk at the game store carelessly brings the hand or face close to the frame movable body, the hand or face is located behind the gaming machine. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where the person is dragged and injured. The frame movable body having such a structure may be configured to execute the effect pattern described above with reference to FIGS. 533(A) to 534(B). Further, a modification of the time chart described later may be applied to the frame movable body having such a structure.

537(A) to 537(E) show modified examples of the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 536(A) to 536(E). 537(A) and 537(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 537(C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. 537(D) and 537(E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. 537(A), 537(C), and 537(D) show a state (first state) in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are at the standby position. FIGS. 537(B) and 537(E) show a state (second state) in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are rotating from the door frame top unit 570.

Also in this embodiment, a part of the door frame top unit 570 has a portion projecting upward so as to cover the top, left, right, and rear of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200. .. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a portion protruding upward and the right ear frame movable body 7100, or a portion protruding upward and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are integrally configured, and after they are moved forward. In addition, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are configured to start rotating. FIG. 537(D) shows a state before starting the forward movement, and FIG. 537(E) shows a state in which the forward movement is completed.

Also in the present embodiment, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 can be in the same state as the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 535(A) to 535(E). ..
By providing the part that covers the frame movable body in this way, even if the player or a store clerk at the game store carelessly brings the hand or face close to the frame movable body, the hand or face is located behind the gaming machine. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where the person is dragged and injured. It should be noted that by covering the front of the portion projecting upward with a colorless transparent synthetic resin, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 can be visually recognized, but the player and the clerk of the game store cannot contact each other. It may be configured as follows.

The frame movable body having such a structure may be configured to execute the effect pattern described above with reference to FIGS. 533(A) to 534(B). In this case, the forward projecting portion and the right ear frame movable body 7100, and the upward projecting portion and the left ear frame movable body 7200 may be moved forward from timing t5 to timing t7, or from timing t7. You may go to timing t9. Further, it may be configured such that an image simulating a portion projecting upward is displayed as a frame movable body simulated image at the timing when the portion projecting upward starts to move. Further, a modification of the time chart described later may be applied to the frame movable body having such a structure.

With reference to FIGS. 523 to 525, the embodiment in which the frame movable body is provided in the door frame top unit 570 and the frame movable body simulated image is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 has been described. ~ Fig. 540 shows a modified embodiment of this embodiment. In the embodiment described below, the door frame top unit 570 includes a right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and a right ear outer frame movable body 7350 instead of the right ear frame movable body 7100, and replaces the left ear frame movable body 7200. The left ear inner side frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer side frame movable body 7450 are provided.

538(A) and 538(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. Further, FIG. 538(C) and FIG. 538(D) are plan views of the pachinko machine 1. 538(E) and 538(F) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. 538(A), 538(C), and 538(E) show inside the door frame top unit 570, the movable body 7300 for the inner right ear frame, the movable body 7350 for the outer right ear frame, the movable body 4400 for the left inner ear frame. The state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as the first state) in which the outer ear frame movable body 7450 is housed is shown. In addition, FIGS. 538(B), 538(D), and 538(F) show the door frame top unit 570 to the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, It shows a state in which the left-ear outer frame movable body 7450 projects upward (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as a second state).

As shown in FIGS. 538(A) to 538(F), the door frame top unit 570 in the present embodiment has the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 on the right side in the front view. The left-ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left-ear outer frame movable body 7450 are provided. The specific structures and operation modes of these are shown below. The right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 have basically the same structure. Therefore, in the following description, Only the right-ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right-ear outer frame movable body 7350 may be described as a representative.

In addition, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 538(A) to 538(F) and FIGS. 547(A) to 547(E) described later, the right inner ear frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, left ear inner side frame movable body 7400, and left ear outer side frame movable body 7450 may be referred to as a frame movable body. Further, in the case where the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are referred to as the inner frame movable body, and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are referred to as the outer frame movable body. There is.

The right-ear inner frame movable body 7300 is a movable body having a vertically long rectangular shape in the front-back direction in a state where the housed state is viewed in plan. The right ear inner frame movable body 7300 is in the housed state (first state), and the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310 faces upward in the housed state (first state), and faces forward in the protruding state (second state). And a right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7320 facing downward in the protruding state (second state). The first surface 7310 of the right-ear inner frame movable body is made of a colored (specifically, pink) transparent synthetic resin. The surfaces other than the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310 of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 (upper surface, left side surface, right side surface, right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7320) are white translucent synthetic resin. It is formed by. The left-ear inner frame movable body 7400 has the same structure as the right-ear inner frame movable body 7300.

The right ear outer frame movable body 7350 is a movable body having a vertically long rectangular shape in a front view, and the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360 faces forward and the right ear outer frame movable body second faces rearward. Surface 7370. The right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, the right ear outer frame movable body second surface 7370, and other surfaces (upper surface, left side surface, right side surface) of the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 are white translucent. It is made of synthetic resin. The left-ear outer frame movable body 7450 has the same structure as the right-ear outer frame movable body 7350.

Inside the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, a rectangular right ear inner frame movable body light emitting unit 7330 is provided. Further, inside the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, a square right ear outer frame movable body light emitting unit 7380 is provided.

The right ear inner frame movable body light emitting unit 7330 and the right ear outer frame movable body light emitting unit 7380 are specifically configured by a printed circuit board having a white protective film applied on both sides, and the door frame top unit 570 A light emitting diode capable of emitting light toward the player side in the protruding state (second state) is mounted on the surface thereof. The right ear inner frame movable body light emitting unit 7330 and the right ear outer frame movable body light emitting unit 7380 can emit light in a predetermined light emitting manner under the control of the peripheral control board 1510. The left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 have the same structure as the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350.

The right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are rotated by the drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 to rotate the right ear inner frame movable body 7340 and the left ear inner frame movable body. The door frame top unit 570 as shown in FIGS. 538(A), 538(C), and 538(E) is obtained by rotating the shaft 7440 as a rotation axis by 90 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the right. From the state of being stored in the standby position (the first state) upward from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570 as shown in FIGS. 538(B), 538(D), and 538(F). It is possible to control to the state (second state) that is projected to the side.

On the other hand, the right-ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left-ear outer frame movable body 7450 are moved upward by a drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, respectively, so as to respectively move to FIGS. 538(A) and 538(C). ), the state (first state) stored in the standby position in the door frame top unit 570 as shown in FIG. 538(E) is changed to FIG. 538(B), FIG. 538(D), and FIG. 538(F). It is possible to control the door frame top unit 570 to vertically project upward from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570 (second state).

The right-ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right-ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left-ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left-ear outer frame movable body 7450 respectively vertically project upward from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570. When the state (second state) is reached, as shown in FIG. 538(B), the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 is located inside the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 moves. It is visible to the player with the left-ear inner frame movable body 7400 positioned inside. The right-ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right-ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left-ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left-ear outer frame movable body 7450 have shapes imitating animal ears, and are included in the door frame top unit 570. By taking a stored state (first state) and a state in which the door frame top unit 570 projects vertically upward from the upper surface (second state), it is possible to decoratively express the state in which the animal's ears have moved. It is possible.

The right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are independently stored in the door frame top unit 570 under the control of the peripheral control board 1510 (first state) and the door frame top unit 570. It is possible to take a state of vertically projecting upward from the upper surface of the (second state).

The right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 respectively have a right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and a left ear inner frame movable body 7400 that project vertically upward from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570. When in the opened state (second state), from the state (first state) stored independently in the door frame top unit 570 by the control of the peripheral control board 1510, from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570. It is possible to change the state to a state where it vertically protrudes upward (second state).

In this embodiment, the door frame top unit 570 is made of white and semitransparent synthetic resin. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 538(A), with the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 stored in the door frame top unit 570, the right ear outer frame movable body light emitting unit 7380, the left When the outer ear frame movable body light emitting unit 7480 is caused to emit light in a predetermined mode, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the front surface of the door frame top unit 570 with the vague light emission.

On the other hand, when the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are projected from the door frame top unit 570, the right ear inner frame is movable. When the body light emitting unit 7330, the right ear outer frame movable body light emitting unit 7380, the left ear inner frame movable body light emitting unit 7430, and the left ear outer frame movable body light emitting unit 7480 emit light in a predetermined mode, the right ear inner frame The movable body first surface 7310, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, the left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410, the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 are visually recognized by the player in a predetermined light emission effect state. It is possible to let.

In addition, in the state (the second state) in which the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 protrude from the door frame top unit 570 (second state). Since the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 covers the back of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 covers the back of the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, The light emitted forward from the right ear outer frame movable body light emitting unit 7380 and the left ear outer frame movable body light emitting unit 7480 emits light to the right inner ear frame movable body second surface 7320 and the left ear inner frame movable body second surface 7420. Even if it goes to the right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7320 and the left ear inner frame movable body second surface 7420, it is diffusely reflected rearward, and finally, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360 and Since light is diffusely reflected forward by the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460, the utilization efficiency of light emitted from the right ear outer frame movable body light emitting unit 7380 and the left ear outer frame movable body light emitting unit 7480. It is possible to increase.

In this way, the right-ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right-ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left-ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left-ear outer frame movable body 7450 move to move the outer frame 2 and the door frame base unit 100. Since it is located above the upper surface, it is possible to provide the player with surprises and funs that have not been achieved in the past, as compared with the case where the movable body in the game board is moved.

Next, referring to FIGS. 539(A) to 540(B), the right inner ear frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are described. A specific operation mode, a display mode of a frame movable body simulated image which is an image simulating the frame movable body displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the operation mode of the frame movable body, and the operation button 410 (hereinafter, The operation reception mode for the player (sometimes referred to as an operation unit), the right ear inner frame movable body light emitting unit 7330, the right ear outer frame movable body light emitting unit 7380, the left ear inner frame movable body light emitting unit 7430, the left ear outer frame movable An example of an effect in which the light emission mode of the body light emitting unit 7480 (hereinafter, also referred to as a frame movable body light emitting unit) is combined is shown.

FIGS. 539(A) to 540(B) respectively show an operation mode of the frame movable body and a frame movable body simulated image which is an image imitating the frame movable body displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. It is a time chart showing a state, a reception state of the operation unit, a display state of an operation instruction display displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and a light emission effect state of the frame movable body light emitting unit.

FIG. 539(A) shows an example of the effect pattern when the player operates the operation unit during the period when the special lottery result is a big hit and the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. There is. FIG. 539(B) shows an example of the effect pattern when the player performs an operation on the operation unit during the period when the special lottery result is lost and the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. There is. FIG. 540(A) shows an example of the effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. ing. FIG. 540(B) shows an example of the effect pattern when the special lottery result is lost and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. ing.

In each effect pattern shown in FIGS. 539(A) to 540(B), timing at which the inner frame movable body changes from the stored state (first state) to the projecting state (second state), frame movable body The display mode of the simulated image, the timing when the operation acceptance for the operation unit is valid, the timing when the operation instruction display is started, and the timing when the frame movable body light emitting unit is turned off from the light emission effect state are the same. On the other hand, the presence/absence of movement of the outer frame movable body, the timing at which the operation instruction display ends, and the timing at which the frame movable body light emitting unit is switched from the light-off state to the light emission effect state or the specific light emission effect state may differ depending on the effect pattern. Below, with reference to FIG. 539(A)-FIG. 540(B), the concrete example of an effect in each effect pattern is shown.

In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 539A to 540B, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are In the initial state (before the timing t0), it is in a state of being housed in the door frame top unit 570 (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as a first state or a standby state). In this state, when the reach effect state corresponding to the special lottery result occurs at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t4) between timing t0 and timing t7, the right inner ear frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are Rotation starts in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the right (timing t7).

At the same time, in the center of the game board side effect display device 1600, display of part of the frame movable body simulated image is started. At the same time, the display of the door frame top unit simulated image, which is an image simulating the door frame top unit 570, is also started. The frame movable body simulated image specifically includes an image simulating the right inner ear frame movable body 7300, an image simulating the right outer ear frame movable body 7350, an image simulating the left inner ear frame movable body 7400, and the outer left ear. And an image simulating the frame movable body 7450.
The frame movable body simulated image is an image simulating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, in accordance with the rotation of the actual right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and left ear inner frame movable body 7400. The imitated image is dynamically displayed in a rotating manner. Note that among the frame movable body simulated images, the image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are not yet displayed at this stage. An image simulating the right inner ear frame movable body 7300, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, in accordance with the timing (timing t9) at which the rising of the actual right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and left ear inner frame movable body 7400 ends. The display of the rotating mode of the image simulating is finished, and thereafter, the image continues to be displayed in the mode showing the stopped state (after timing t9). The state in which the movable body 7300 for the inner right ear frame and the movable body 7400 for the left inner ear frame have completed the rotation at the timing t9, which is two seconds after starting the ascending at the timing t7 (hereinafter, referred to as the second state and the ascending state). There is).

On the other hand, at timing t9, the operation reception for the operation unit becomes effective, and the display of an image for instructing the operation on the operation unit on the game board side effect display device 1600 (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as operation instruction display) is started. It As the operation instruction display, for example, an image simulating the appearance of the operation button 410 may be displayed, or a character string instructing to operate the operation unit (for example, a character string “push!!”) may be displayed. May be. The operation valid period continues until an operation is received by the operation unit (timing t14 in the example shown below) or until a predetermined time elapses (until timing t18). Further, at the timing t9, all the frame movable body light emitting units are turned off from the light emission effect state.

FIGS. 539(A) and 539(B) show the effect mode when the operation unit is operated at the timing t14 after the period in which the operation on the operation unit is enabled is started (timing t9). Showing. In these effect patterns, the operation instruction display ends at timing t14, and the frame movable body light emitting unit enters a predetermined light emitting effect state corresponding to the special lottery result.

FIG. 539(A) is an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit, and when the operation unit is operated (timing t14), the frame movable body light emitting unit changes from the unlit state to the normal light emitting effect. This is a specific light emission effect state different from the state. At the same time, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 start to rise from the state (first state) housed in the door frame top unit 570, and the raising operation starts 2 seconds later (timing t16). It is in the completed state (second state). At the same time, on the game board side effect display device 1600, in addition to an image simulating the right inner ear frame movable body 7300 and an image simulating the left inner ear frame movable body 7400, which are already displayed in a stopped state, As a new frame movable body simulated image, display of an image imitating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and an image imitating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 is started. The image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are the same as the ascending operation of the actual right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and left ear outer frame movable body 7450. From the timing t14 to the timing t16, the display mode showing the stored state is changed to the display mode in which the ascending operation is completed. In this way, in the state where the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 have completed the rotating operation (second state), the light-off state is changed to the specific light emission effect state, and the light-off state is changed to the specific light emission effect. The state in which the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 which are in the state are housed in the door frame top unit 570 (the first state) are changed to the state in which the ascending operation is completed (the second state). , The image simulating the right-ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the image simulating the left-ear outer frame movable body 7450 are displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 in an ascending manner, so that a special lottery is given to the player. The results will be shown to be a big hit.

On the other hand, FIG. 539 (B) shows an effect pattern in the case where the special lottery result is out of alignment, and when the operation section is operated (timing t14), the frame movable body light emitting section emits normal light. It becomes a production state. In this case, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are kept in the stored state (first state), and no operation is performed. Further, an image simulating the right-ear outer frame movable body 7350 and an image simulating the left-ear outer frame movable body 7450 are not displayed. In this way, the special movable lottery result is given to the player due to the frame movable body light emitting section being in a normal light emitting effect state, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 not operating. It will be shown that it is a loss.

In FIGS. 540(A) and 540(B), after the period in which the operation on the operation unit is valid is started (timing t9), the operation unit is not operated by the player during the operation valid period, The production mode in the case where the operation valid period ends at timing t18 after a lapse of a predetermined time has been shown. In these effect patterns, the operation instruction display ends at the timing t18, and the frame movable body light emitting unit enters a predetermined light emitting effect state according to the special lottery result.

FIG. 540(A) is an effect pattern in the case where the special lottery result is a big hit, and at the timing (timing t18) at which the operation valid period ends, the frame movable body light emitting unit emits specific light different from the normal light emitting effect state. It becomes a production state. At the same time, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 start to rise from the state (first state) housed in the door frame top unit 570, and the raising operation starts 2 seconds later (timing t16). It is in the completed state (second state). At the same time, on the game board side effect display device 1600, in addition to an image simulating the right inner ear frame movable body 7300 and an image simulating the left inner ear frame movable body 7400, which are already displayed in a stopped state, As a new frame movable body simulated image, display of an image imitating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and an image imitating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 is started. The image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are the same as the ascending operation of the actual right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and left ear outer frame movable body 7450. From the timing t18 to the timing t20, the display mode showing the stored state is changed to the display mode in which the ascending operation is completed.

In this way, in the state where the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 have completed the rotating operation (second state), the light-off state is changed to the specific light emission effect state, and the light-off state is changed to the specific light emission effect. The state in which the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 which are in the state are housed in the door frame top unit 570 (the first state) are changed to the state in which the ascending operation is completed (the second state). , The image simulating the right-ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the image simulating the left-ear outer frame movable body 7450 are displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 in an ascending manner, so that a special lottery is given to the player. The results will be shown to be a big hit.

On the other hand, FIG. 540(B) is an effect pattern in the case where the special lottery result is a loss, and at the timing (timing t18) when the operation valid period ends, the frame movable body light emitting section is in the normal light emission effect state. In this case, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are kept in the stored state (first state), and no operation is performed. Further, an image simulating the right-ear outer frame movable body 7350 and an image simulating the left-ear outer frame movable body 7450 are not displayed. In this way, the special movable lottery result is given to the player due to the frame movable body light emitting section being in a normal light emitting effect state, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 not operating. It will be shown that it is a loss.

In each effect pattern shown in FIG. 539(A) to FIG. 540(B), at a predetermined timing (timing t24) after the end of the operation valid period, the decorative pattern that has changed corresponds to the special lottery result. Will be stopped and displayed. For example, in the case of the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 539(A) and 540(A), the special lottery result is a big hit (for example, “7” “7” “7”). In the case of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 539(B) and FIG. 540(B), the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, and the reach lost mode (for example, “7”, “6”, “7”) indicating that the special lottery result is lost. ), the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed.

At the timing (timing t26) when 2 seconds have passed after the decorative pattern stopped, the right-ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left-ear outer frame movable body 7450 are in either a specific light emission effect state or a normal light emission effect state. The movement starts from the raised position (second state) to the storage position (first state) while maintaining the light emission mode. At the same time, in accordance with the descending motions of the actual right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and left ear outer frame movable body 7450, an image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame in the frame movable body simulated image. An image simulating the movable body 7450 is displayed in a descending display mode. At the timing (timing t28) when the movement of the right-ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left-ear outer frame movable body 7450 is completed (timing t28), an image simulating the right-ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left-ear outer frame movable body 7450. The image that imitates is in a display mode in which the descending has been completed and the display is completed in accordance with the descending operation of the actual right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and left ear outer frame movable body 7450.

At the timing (timing t30) at which 2 seconds have passed after the movement of the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 to the storage position, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame are moved. The movable body 7400 starts moving from the raised position (second state) to the storage position (first state) while maintaining the light emission mode of either the specific light emission effect state or the normal light emission effect state. At the same time, the right inner ear frame movable body 7300 is imitated in the frame movable body simulated image in accordance with the movement of the actual right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and left ear inner frame movable body 7400 while rotating and descending. The image and the image simulating the left-ear inner frame movable body 7400 are in a display mode in which they descend while rotating. At the timing (timing t32) when the movement of the right inner ear frame movable body 7300 and the left inner ear frame movable body 7400 is completed (timing t32), an image simulating the right inner ear frame movable body 7300 and the left inner ear frame movable body 7400 are displayed. The image that imitates is in a display mode in which the descending has been completed and the display is completed in accordance with the descending operation of the actual inner movable frame 7300 for the right inner ear and the movable movable body for left inner frame 7400.

When the special lottery result is a big hit, the light emitting state of the movable frame may be changed from the specific light emitting effect state to the normal light emitting effect state at a predetermined timing during the big hit. If the result of the special lottery is lost, the normal light emitting effect state is continued and the next variation of the decorative pattern is started.

In this way, the frame movable body simulated image is displayed at the timing when the frame movable body starts to move, so that the light emission mode changes according to the operation of the frame movable body and the operation of the operation unit. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player overlooks. In addition, the frame movable body appears at a position that does not exist in the past in accordance with the result of the special lottery, which makes it possible for the player to feel a great surprise or fun. In addition, after the inner frame movable body is changed from the standby state (first state) to the moving state (second state), the outer frame movable body is in the standby state (first state) when the player operates the operation unit. Depending on whether or not the state changes from the moving state (second state) to the moving state (2nd state), it is possible to give the player a feeling as if he or she decided the special lottery result. Further, in a situation in which the inner frame movable body is in the moving state (second state) first, and the player can notice that the moving state is in the moving state, the player is requested to operate the operation unit. As a result, the player can operate the operation unit while having an expectation as to whether or not the outer frame movable body is in the moving state (second state) following the inner frame movable body.

541(A) to 541(E) show modified examples of the movable frame body described with reference to FIGS. 538(A) to 538(F). 541(A) and 541(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 541(C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. 541(D) and 541(E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. 541(A), 541(C), and 541(D) show the right inner ear frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left inside the door frame top unit 570. It shows a state (first state) in which the outer ear frame movable body 7450 is stored. In FIGS. 541(B) and 541(E), the door frame top unit 570 is connected to the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. The state (2nd state) which protruded upward is shown.

In this embodiment, in addition to the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are also controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. By moving upward by a drive mechanism (not shown), the state where the door frame top unit 570 is stored in the standby position as shown in FIGS. 541(A), 541(C), and 541(D), respectively ( It is possible to control from the first state) to a state (second state) in which the door frame top unit 570 vertically protrudes upward from the upper surface as shown in FIGS. 541(B) and 541(E). is there.

In addition, on the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570, the door frame top unit upper first right ear opening 7002 is provided at a position corresponding to the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 at a position corresponding to the right ear outer frame movable body 7350. The door frame top unit upper second right ear opening 7004 corresponds to the left ear inner side frame movable body 7400, and the door frame top unit upper first left ear opening 7012 corresponds to the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. The door frame top unit upper second left ear opening 7014 is provided at the position. The frame movable body having such a structure may be configured to execute the effect pattern described above with reference to FIGS. 539(A) to 540(B). Further, a modification of the time chart described later may be applied to the frame movable body having such a structure. In addition, as shown with reference to FIGS. 530(A) to 530(E), also in the frame movable body having the structure in the present embodiment, the upper part of the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are provided. May be configured so as to project from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570 in the first state.

542(A) to 542(E) show modified examples of the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 541(A) to 541(E). 542(A) and 542(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 542(C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. 542(D) and 542(E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIGS. 542(A), 542(C), and 542(D) show a right ear inner frame movable body 7300, a right ear outer frame movable body 7350, a left ear inner frame movable body 7400 in the door frame top unit 570. The state (first state) in which the left-ear outer frame movable body 7450 is stored is shown. FIGS. 542(B) and 542(E) show the door frame top unit 570 to the right inner ear frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. The state (2nd state) which protruded upward is shown.

In this embodiment, the right inner ear frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 do not move upward, but move downward by a drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. 542(A), 542(C), and 542(D), respectively, from the state (first state) stored in the standby position in the door frame top unit 570 to the state shown in FIG. 542(B). As shown in FIG. 542(E), it is possible to control the door frame top unit 570 so as to vertically project upward from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570 or downwardly from the lower surface of the door frame top unit 570 (second state). is there.

In addition, on the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570, a door frame top unit upper right ear opening 7000 is provided at a position corresponding to the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, and a door frame is provided at a position corresponding to the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. An upper left ear opening 7010 is provided on the top unit. Further, on the lower surface of the door frame top unit 570, a door frame top unit lower right ear opening 7020 is provided at a position corresponding to the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, and a door frame is provided at a position corresponding to the left ear inner frame movable body 7400. A top unit lower left ear opening 7030 is provided.

A frame movable body having such a structure may be configured to execute the effect pattern described above with reference to FIGS. 539(A) to 540(B). Further, a modification of the time chart described later may be applied to the frame movable body having such a structure. In this case, in a state where it is not clear whether the result of the special lottery will be a big hit, the inner frame movable body starts moving downward from the lower surface of the door frame top unit 570 (timing t7), and the result of the special lottery When is a big hit, the outer frame movable body starts moving upward from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570 (timing t14, timing 18, etc.). On the other hand, if the result of the special lottery is lost, the outer frame movable body does not move. With such a configuration, when the result of the special lottery is a big hit, the outer frame movable body can be visually recognized by another player or a clerk of a game store. On the other hand, if the result of the special lottery results in a loss, the inner frame movable body moves but the outer frame movable body does not move, so the player feels embarrassed or embarrassed because the result of the special lottery is lost. Can be reduced. In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 538(A) to 538(F), the animal ears are decoratively represented by the outer frame movable body and the inner frame movable body. In the embodiment described with reference to (A) to FIG. 542(E), the outer frame movable body protruding upward represents the animal's ear, and the inner frame movable body represents the animal's eye. There is.

543(A) to 543(E) and 544(A) to 544(E) show FIGS. 541(A) to 541(E) and 542(A) to 542(E). The modification of the movable frame body described above is shown. 543(A), 543(B), 544(A), and 544(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. 543(C) and 544(C) are plan views of the pachinko machine 1. 543(D), 543(E), 544(D), and 544(E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. In the present embodiment, each frame movable body is in a state of protruding downward from the lower surface of the door frame top unit 570 (first state) and a state of protruding upward from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570 (second state). It is possible to take

543(A), 543(C), and 543(D) show a state (first state) in which the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body protrude downward from the lower surface of the door frame top unit 570. There is. FIGS. 543(B) and 543(E) show a state (second state) in which the inner frame movable body projects upward from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570, and the outer frame movable body shows the door frame top unit 570. The state (first state) protruding downward from the lower surface of the is shown. 544(A), 544(C), and 544(D) show a state (first state) in which the inner frame movable body projects downward from the lower surface of the door frame top unit 570, and the outer frame movable body. Shows a state (second state) protruding upward from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570. FIGS. 544(B) and 544(E) show a state (second state) in which the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body protrude upward from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570.

In this embodiment, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are driven by a peripheral control board 1510 (not shown). It is possible to move to and stop any position from the first state to the second state by the mechanism.

In addition, on the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570, the door frame top unit upper first right ear opening 7002 is provided at a position corresponding to the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 at a position corresponding to the right ear outer frame movable body 7350. The door frame top unit upper second right ear opening 7004 corresponds to the left ear inner side frame movable body 7400, and the door frame top unit upper first left ear opening 7012 corresponds to the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. The door frame top unit upper second left ear opening 7014 is provided at the position.

Further, on the lower surface of the door frame top unit 570, the door frame top unit lower first right ear opening 7022 is provided at a position corresponding to the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, and at a position corresponding to the right ear outer frame movable body 7350. The door frame top unit lower second right ear opening 7024 corresponds to the left ear inner side frame movable body 7400, and the door frame top unit lower first left ear opening 7032 corresponds to the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. The door frame top unit lower second left ear opening 7034 is provided at the position.

The frame movable body having such a structure may be configured to execute the effect pattern described above with reference to FIGS. 539(A) to 540(B). Further, a modification of the time chart described later may be applied to the frame movable body having such a structure.

In this case, when it is not clear whether or not the result of the special lottery will be a big hit, the inner frame movable body starts moving upward from the state (first state) protruding from the lower surface of the door frame top unit 570. The movement is completed at (timing t7) and timing t9. 543(B) and 543(E) show a state in which the movement of the inner frame movable body is completed. When the result of the special lottery is a big hit, the outer frame movable body starts moving upward from the state (first state) protruding from the lower surface of the door frame top unit 570 (timing t14, timing 18, etc.). .. 544(B) and 544(E) show a state (second state) in which the movement of the outer frame movable body is completed. On the other hand, if the result of the special lottery is lost, the outer frame movable body does not move. With such a configuration, when the result of the special lottery is a big hit, the outer frame movable body can be visually recognized by another player or a clerk of a game store. On the other hand, if the result of the special lottery results in a loss, the inner frame movable body moves but the outer frame movable body does not move, so the player feels embarrassed or embarrassed because the result of the special lottery is lost. Can be reduced.

Although the example in which the inner frame movable body projects upward and enters the second state and then the outer frame movable body projects upward and enters the second state is shown, the relationship between the two may be reversed. In this case, the outer frame movable body starts the operation of protruding upward at the timing t7. After that, in the state where the movement is completed (timing t9), the states shown in FIGS. 544(A) and 544(D) are obtained. Further, at timing t14 or timing 18, the inner frame movable body may be configured to start moving upward. Two effect patterns in which the movable order of the movable frame is reversed may be configured to be executable. Further, it is preferable to set the big hit expectation degree of the effect pattern in which the outer frame movable body moves earlier than the effect pattern in which the inner frame movable body moves earlier, for example, when the outer frame movable body moves earlier. It may be configured so as to be surely a big hit.

545(A) to 546(B) show modified examples of the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 538(A) to 538(F). FIG. 545(A) and FIG. 545(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 545(C) and FIG. 545(D) are plan views of the pachinko machine 1. 546(A) and 546(B) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 545(A), FIG. 545(C), and FIG. 546(A) show inside the door frame top unit 570, the movable inner ear frame 7300, the movable outer right frame 7350, the movable inner left ear frame 7400, and the left. It shows a state (first state) in which the ear outer frame movable body 7450 is stored. 545(B), 545(D), and 546(B) show the door frame top unit 570 to the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, the left ear. The state where the outer frame movable body 7450 is projected upward (second state) is shown.

In this embodiment, the right inner ear frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left inner ear frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are all controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. It is configured to be movable upward by rotating 90 degrees clockwise when viewed from the right by a drive mechanism that does not.

The frame movable body having such a structure may be configured to execute the effect pattern described above with reference to FIGS. 539(A) to 540(B). In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 539(A) to 540(B), the outer frame movable body is in the second state after the inner frame movable body is in the second state. In the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 545(A) to 546(B), the moving order of the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body is reversed, and the outer frame movable body is moved from the timing t7 to the timing t9. After changing from the first state to the second state in, the inner frame movable body may be changed from the first state to the second state at timing t14 or timing t18. Further, a modification of the time chart described later may be applied to the frame movable body having such a structure.

With reference to FIGS. 532 to 534, the embodiment in which the frame movable body is provided in the door frame top unit 570 and the frame movable body simulated image is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 has been described. ~ Fig. 549 shows an embodiment obtained by modifying this embodiment. In the embodiment described below, the door frame top unit 570 includes a right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and a right ear outer frame movable body 7350 instead of the right ear frame movable body 7100, and replaces the left ear frame movable body 7200. The left ear inner side frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer side frame movable body 7450 are provided.

547(A) and 547(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. Further, FIG. 547(C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. Further, FIGS. 547(D) and 547(E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. In FIGS. 547(A), 547(C), and 547(D), inside the door frame top unit 570, the right inner ear frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, the left are shown. The state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as a first state) in which the ear outer frame movable body 7450 is stored is shown. In addition, FIGS. 547(B) and 547(E) show door frame top unit 570 to right ear inner frame movable body 7300, right ear outer frame movable body 7350, left ear inner frame movable body 7400, left ear outer frame movable body. The state in which the 7450 is projected upward (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the second state) is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 547(A) to 547(E), the door frame top unit 570 includes a door frame top unit upper right ear opening 7000, a door frame top unit upper left ear opening 7010, and a door frame top unit inner right side. It has a light emitting portion 7050 and a left light emitting portion 7052 inside the door frame top unit. Note that the specific structure and function of these are the same as those shown in FIGS.

As shown in FIGS. 547(A) to 547(E), the door frame top unit 570 in the present embodiment has a right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and a right ear outer frame movable body 7350 on the left side and a right ear outer frame movable body 7350 on the right side in a front view. The left-ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left-ear outer frame movable body 7450 are provided. The specific structures and operation modes of these are shown below. The right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 have basically the same structure. Therefore, in the following description, Only the right-ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right-ear outer frame movable body 7350 may be described as a representative.

FIG. 547(A), FIG. 547(C), and FIG. 547(D) show a state in which the right-ear inner frame movable body 7300 is in the stored state. The right ear inner frame movable body 7300 in the stored state has a vertically long rectangular shape in a plan view, and has a right ear inner frame movable first surface 7310 facing downward and a right ear inner frame movable body first facing upward. It has two surfaces 7320. The first surface 7310 of the right-ear inner frame movable body is made of a colored (specifically, pink) transparent synthetic resin. On the other hand, the right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7320 is made of gray opaque synthetic resin. The right ear outer frame movable member 7350 in the stored state has a vertically long rectangular shape in which the vicinity of the center is hollowed so as to surround the right ear inner frame movable member 7300 in a plan view, and the right ear outer member faces downward. It has the frame movable body first surface 7360 and the right ear outer frame movable body second surface 7370 facing upward. The right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360 is formed of white translucent synthetic resin. On the other hand, the right ear outer frame movable body second surface 7370 is formed of gray opaque synthetic resin. The left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 have the same structure as the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350.

The right-ear inner frame movable body 7300 has a right-ear inner frame movable body rotation shaft 7340 on the right side (inner side) in plan view. The right-ear outer frame movable body 7350 has a right-ear outer frame movable body rotation shaft 7390 on the left side (outside) in plan view. The right ear inner frame movable body rotating shaft 7340 and the right ear outer frame movable body rotating shaft 7390 are located on the same axis. The right ear inner frame movable body rotating shaft 7340 and the right ear outer frame movable body rotating shaft 7390 are attached near the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570. The left inner ear frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 have the same structure as the right inner ear frame movable body and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350. The right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 are powered by a pulse motor (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 by the right ear inner frame movable body rotating shaft 7340 and the right ear outer frame movable body. By being transmitted to the rotating shaft 7390, it is possible to rotate about the left-right direction. The left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 also have a left ear inner frame movable body rotating shaft 7440 and a left ear outer frame movable body rotating shaft 7490, which have the same structure. Power from a pulse motor (not shown) controlled by the control board 1510 is transmitted to the left ear inner frame movable body rotation shaft 7440 and the left ear outer frame movable body rotation shaft 7490 to rotate in the left-right direction. It is possible. The right-ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right-ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left-ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left-ear outer frame movable body 7450 are independently controlled from the right by controlling a pulse motor (not shown). It can be rotated clockwise or counterclockwise at an arbitrary angle as viewed, or can be stopped at an arbitrary angle.

As shown in FIGS. 547(A) to 547(E), inside the door frame top unit 570, the right inside the door frame top unit that illuminates the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350. A light emitting unit 7050, a left light emitting unit 7052 inside the door frame top unit that illuminates the left ear inner frame movable member 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable member 7450 are provided. Since the specific structures of the right side light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left side light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit are the same as those described with reference to FIGS. 532(A) to 532(E), they are omitted. To do.

The right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are respectively driven by a drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. (A), FIG. 547(C), and FIG. 547(D), the state in which the door frame top unit 570 is stored in the standby position is changed to a state in which it is stopped at an arbitrary position rotated by a predetermined angle. Is possible. FIG. 547(B) and FIG. 547(E) are examples thereof, and the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are stored. From the state, as viewed from the right, it is rotated 90 degrees clockwise, and in the vertical state, the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, the left ear inner frame movable body first. The surface 7410 and the left ear outer side frame movable body first surface 7460 face the front and are stopped. The right-ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right-ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left-ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left-ear outer frame movable body 7450 have shapes imitating animal ears, and are included in the door frame top unit 570. By taking a state of being housed and a state of being vertical from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570, it is possible to decoratively express the state in which the animal's ears have moved.

Further, the right-ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right-ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left-ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left-ear outer frame movable body 7450 are connected to a drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. It is also possible to allow the player to visually recognize in a rotated state by driving by driving. When rotating in this way, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are rotated at a speed of about one rotation per second. It is recommended to rotate the same direction multiple times. FIGS. 547(B) and 547(E) show a state where the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are rotating. It can also be said to indicate. The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 may be configured to rotate clockwise a plurality of times when viewed from the right, or may be rotated counterclockwise a plurality of times when viewed from the right. It may be configured as follows. With such a configuration, the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310 and the right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7320 are alternately visible to the player. Further, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360 and the right ear outer frame movable body second surface 7370 are alternately visible to the player. In addition, the left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410 and the left ear inner frame movable body second surface 7420 are alternately visible to the player. In addition, the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 and the left ear outer frame movable body second surface 7470 are alternately visible to the player.

Right ear inner frame movable body 7300, right ear outer frame movable body 7350, left ear inner frame movable body 7400, left ear outer frame movable body 7450 can be stopped or rotated at a predetermined position, inside the door frame top unit By the light emitted from the right side light emitting unit 7050 and the left side light emitting unit 7052 inside the door frame top unit, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, the left ear outer frame movable. Although it has been shown that each of the bodies 7450 can have a predetermined decoration state, a specific example will be shown below.

As shown in FIGS. 547(A), 547(C), and 547(D), the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 included in the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 are Right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, left ear inner frame movable body 7400 has left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410, left ear outer frame movable body 7450 has left ear outer frame movable body first surface When light is emitted from the right-side light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left-side light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit with the 7460 facing downward, the light reflected in the door frame top unit 570 causes It is possible to make the entire frame top unit 570 dimly emit light. This is because the door frame top unit 570 is made of white and semi-transparent synthetic resin.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 547(B) and 547(E), the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310 of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer side of the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 are included. The frame movable body first surface 7360, the left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410 of the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 of the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 move forward. When light is emitted from the right-side light emitting unit 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left-side light emitting unit 7052 in the door frame top unit in the facing state, the light causes the right-ear inner frame of the right-ear inner frame movable body 7300 to have. Movable body first surface 7310, right ear outer frame movable body 7350 has right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, left ear inner frame movable body 7400 has left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410, left ear outer side It is possible for the player to visually recognize the state in which the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 of the frame movable body 7450 is decorated. Even in this case, part of the light emitted from the door frame top unit inner right light emitting portion 7050 and the door frame top unit inner left light emitting portion 7052 illuminates the door frame top unit 570 from the inside. The player can visually recognize the entire door frame top unit 570 in a slightly vague light emission state.

On the other hand, in the state where the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are rotated, the right light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit and the door When light is emitted from the left-side light emitting unit 7052 in the frame top unit, the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310, the right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7320, the right ear outer frame movable by the emitted light. Body first surface 7360, right ear outer frame movable body second surface 7370, left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410, left ear inner frame movable body second surface 7420, left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 The left ear outer frame movable body second surface 7470 and the second surface 7470 are alternately illuminated.

Thus, above the upper surfaces of the outer frame 2 and the door frame base unit 100, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, the left ear outer frame movable body. Since the 7450 is positioned and rotated in a stopped state, it is possible to provide the player with surprises and funs that have not existed in the past as compared with the case of moving the movable body in the game board. ..

Next, with reference to FIGS. 548(A) to 549(B), the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, the left ear outer frame movable body 7450( Hereinafter, it may be referred to as a frame movable body), and a frame movable body simulation which is an image simulating the frame movable body displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the specific operation mode and the operation mode of the frame movable body. The display mode of the image, the operation acceptance mode of the player for the operation button 410 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as an operation section), the light emission mode 7050 in the door frame top unit right side, the light emission mode in the door frame top unit left side light emission section 7052, and the like. An example of a combined effect is shown.

548 (A) to FIG. 549 (B) are respectively operation modes of the frame movable bodies (right ear outer frame movable body 7350, left ear outer frame movable body 7450) provided on the outer side, and game board side effect display. A display state of a frame movable body simulated image which is an image imitating a frame movable body (right ear outer frame movable body 7350, left ear outer frame movable body 7450) provided on the outside displayed on the device 1600, and provided on the inside. Operation mode of the frame movable body (right ear inner frame movable body 7300, left ear inner frame movable body 7400) and the frame movable body (inner right ear inner side) displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. Frame movable body 7300, left ear inner side frame movable body 7400), a display state of a frame movable body simulated image, an acceptance state of the operation unit, and an operation instruction display displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. 6 is a time chart showing the display state of and the irradiation mode of light to the frame movable body.

FIG. 548(A) shows an example of the effect pattern when the player operates the operation unit during the period when the special lottery result is a big hit and the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. There is. FIG. 548(B) shows an example of the effect pattern when the player performs an operation on the operation unit during the period when the special lottery result is a loss and the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. There is. FIG. 549(A) shows an example of the effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. ing. FIG. 549(B) shows an example of the effect pattern when the special lottery result is lost and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. ing.

In each effect pattern shown in FIG. 548(A) to FIG. 549(B), the frame movable body provided outside and the frame movable body provided inside are rotated from the standby state (first state) to the rotating state (second state). ), the display state of the frame movable body simulated image, the timing at which the operation reception for the operation unit is enabled, the timing at which the operation instruction display is started, and the light irradiation state for the frame movable body is turned off from the light emission effect state. The timing to enter the state is the same. On the other hand, the timing at which the operation instruction display ends, the timing at which the frame movable body changes from the second state (rotation state) to another state, the light irradiation mode for the frame movable body from the extinguished state to the light emission effect state or the specific light emission effect state. There is a case that the timing becomes different depending on the effect pattern. Below, with reference to FIG. 548(A)-FIG. 549(B), the concrete production example in each production pattern is shown.

In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 548(A) to 549(B), the right inner ear frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are In the initial state (before the timing t0), the door frame top unit 570 is in a state of being housed (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as a first state or a standby state). Specifically, FIG. 547(A), FIG. 547(C), as shown in FIG. 547(D), right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310, right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410, left ear outer side. The frame movable body first surface 7460 faces downward. In this state, when the reach effect state corresponding to the special lottery result occurs at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t1) between timing t0 and timing t5, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360 and the left ear outer frame movable. The body first surface 7460 starts to rotate at the timing t5 at the same time, and the state where the rotation is continued (hereinafter, may be referred to as the second state or the rotating state). The rotation direction is clockwise when viewed from the right, and the rotation speed is one rotation per second.

At the same time, in the center of the game board side effect display device 1600, the display of the frame movable body simulated image is started. At the same time, the display of the door frame top unit simulated image, which is an image simulating the door frame top unit 570, is also started. Specifically, the frame movable body simulated image is an image simulating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, an image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, an image simulating the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer side. And an image simulating the frame movable body 7450. The frame movable body simulated image is an image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 in accordance with the rotation of the actual right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and left ear outer frame movable body 7450. The displayed image continues to be dynamically displayed in a manner of rotating in the same direction. The rotation speed of the image simulating the right outer ear frame movable body 7350 and the image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 also rotates at the same speed as the actual outer frame movable body rotation speed (speed of one rotation per second). Will be displayed. As a result, when the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360 and the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 are in a rotating state facing the front as shown in FIGS. 547(B) and 547(E), The image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 respectively show the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360. An image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 which is included in the model image and the image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 is directed to the front as a frame movable body simulated image as a game board side effect display device. It is displayed at 1600.

After the rotation state (second state) of the outer frame movable body continues from timing t4 to timing t9, at timing t9, the inner frame movable body (right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and left ear inner frame movable body 7400). Starts rotating at the same time, and becomes a state in which the rotation is continued (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as a second state or a rotating state). Since the rotation mode of the inner frame movable body and the display mode of the image simulating the inner frame movable body are the same as those of the outer frame movable body, description thereof will be omitted. On the other hand, at timing t9, the operation reception for the operation unit becomes effective, and the display of an image for instructing the operation on the operation unit on the game board side effect display device 1600 (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as operation instruction display) is started. It As the operation instruction display, for example, an image simulating the appearance of the operation button 410 may be displayed, or a character string instructing to operate the operation unit (for example, a character string “push!!”) may be displayed. May be. The operation valid period continues until an operation is received by the operation unit (timing t14 in the example shown below) or until a predetermined time elapses (until timing t18). At timing t9, the door frame top unit inner right light emitting portion 7050 and the door frame top unit inner left light emitting portion 7052 that irradiate light to the frame movable body are turned off from the state in which the light emission effect is performed.

FIG. 548(A) and FIG. 548(B) show the effect mode in the case where the operation section is operated at the timing t14 after the period in which the operation on the operation section is valid is started (timing t9). Shows. In these effect patterns, the operation instruction display ends at timing t14, the frame movable body that has been rotating until then stops at a predetermined rotation angle corresponding to the special lottery result, and the light to the frame movable body is changed. The irradiation mode becomes a predetermined light emission effect state corresponding to the special lottery result.

FIG. 548(A) shows an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit, and when the operation section is operated (timing t14), the right inner ear frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body are shown. 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 respectively include the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, and the left ear inner frame movable body first. The surface 7410 and the left-ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 are stopped vertically with the front side being the front side (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the third state). At the same time, a specific light emission effect in which the light irradiation mode for the right ear inner frame movable member 7300, the right ear outer frame movable member 7350, the left ear inner frame movable member 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable member 7450 is different from the normal light emission effect state It becomes a state. In this way, the light irradiation mode is set to the specific light emission effect state, which indicates to the player that the special lottery result is a big hit.

On the other hand, FIG. 548(B) shows an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss, and when the operation section is operated (timing t14), the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame. The movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are respectively the right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7320, the right ear outer frame movable body second surface 7370, and the left ear inner frame movable body first. The second surface 7420 and the left-ear outer frame movable body second surface 7470 are vertically stopped with the front side being the front side (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the fourth state). At the same time, the light irradiation mode for the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 changes from the unlit state to the normal light emission effect state. As described above, the light emission mode becomes the normal light emission effect state, which indicates to the player that the special lottery result is a loss.

In FIGS. 549(A) and 549(B), after the period in which the operation on the operation unit is valid is started (timing t9), the operation unit is not operated by the player during the operation valid period, The production mode in the case where the operation valid period ends at timing t18 after a lapse of a predetermined time that is set in advance is shown. In these effect patterns, the operation instruction display ends at timing t18, the frame movable body that has been rotating until then automatically stops at a predetermined rotation angle corresponding to the special lottery result, and the frame movable body The light irradiation mode for the is a predetermined light emission effect state corresponding to the special lottery result.

FIG. 549(A) shows an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit, and at the timing (timing t18) when the operation valid period ends, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left. The inner ear frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are respectively a right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310, a right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, a left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410, The left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 is brought to the front side and stopped vertically (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as a third state). At the same time, a specific light emission effect in which the light irradiation mode for the right ear inner frame movable member 7300, the right ear outer frame movable member 7350, the left ear inner frame movable member 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable member 7450 is different from the normal light emission effect state It becomes a state. In this way, the light irradiation mode is set to the specific light emission effect state, which indicates to the player that the special lottery result is a big hit.

On the other hand, FIG. 549(B) is an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss, and at the timing (timing t18) when the operation valid period ends, the inner right ear frame movable body 7300, the outer right ear frame movable body 7350. The left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are respectively the right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7320, the right ear outer frame movable body second surface 7370, and the left ear inner frame movable body second surface 7420. The state where the second frame 7470 of the outer frame of the left-ear outer frame is stopped vertically with the second surface 7470 being on the near side (hereinafter, may be referred to as a fourth state). At the same time, the light irradiation mode for the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 changes from the unlit state to the normal light emission effect state. As described above, the light emission mode becomes the normal light emission effect state, which indicates to the player that the special lottery result is a loss.

In this way, when the result of the special lottery is a big hit, each frame movable body is stopped in the third state, which indicates that it is a big hit, and when the result of the special lottery is a loss, It is shown that the frame movable body stops in the fourth state and is lost.

In each effect pattern shown in FIG. 548(A) to FIG. 549(B), at a predetermined timing (timing t20) after the end of the operation valid period, the decorative pattern that has changed corresponds to the special lottery result. Will be stopped and displayed. For example, in the case of the effect patterns shown in FIG. 548(A) and FIG. 549(A), the special lottery result is a big hit (for example, “7” “7” “7”). In the case of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 548(B) and FIG. 549(B), the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, and the reach lost mode (for example, “7”, “6”, “7”) indicating that the special lottery result is lost. ), the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed.

At the timing (timing t24) when 4 seconds have passed after the decorative pattern stopped, the frame movable body is movable in the right ear inner frame while maintaining the light emission mode of either the specific light emission effect state or the normal light emission effect state. A state in which the body first surface 7310, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, the left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410, the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 face forward (third state) or Right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7320, right ear outer frame movable body second surface 7370, left ear inner frame movable body second surface 7420, left ear outer frame movable body second surface 7470 faced forward ( From the fourth state), the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, the left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410, and the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 are downward. The state is changed to the state (first state) facing. At the same time, the display of the frame movable body simulated image ends.

When the special lottery result is a big hit, it may be configured to change the light irradiation state to the frame movable body from the specific light emission effect state to the normal light emission effect state at a predetermined timing during the big hit. If the result of the special lottery is lost, the normal light emitting effect state is continued and the next variation of the decorative pattern is started.

As described above, the frame movable body is configured to display the frame movable body simulated image at the timing of changing from the standby state (first state) to the rotating state (second state). It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player overlooks that it is in the second state). In addition, the frame movable body appears at a position that does not exist in the past in accordance with the result of the special lottery, which makes it possible for the player to feel a great surprise or fun. Further, after the outer frame movable body changes from the standby state (first state) to the rotating state (second state), the inner frame movable body rotates from the standby state (first state) with the start of the operation effective period. The state changes to the state (second state), and when the player operates the operation unit, the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body are in the third state or the third state indicating that the result of the special lottery is a big hit. By changing the result of the special lottery to any one of the fourth states that indicates a loss, it is possible to give the player a feeling as if he or she decided the special lottery result.

550(A) to 550(E) show modifications of the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 547(A) to 547(E). 550(A) and 550(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 550(C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. 550(D) and 550(E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. 550(A), FIG. 550(C), and FIG. 550(D) show a right ear inner frame movable body 7300, a right ear outer frame movable body 7350, a left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and a left ear outer frame movable body 7450. The state (1st state) in a standby position is shown. 550(B) and 550(E) show a state in which the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are rotating ( The second state) is shown.

In this embodiment, the vertical thickness of the door frame top unit 570 is smaller than that in the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 547(A) to 547(E), and the right inner ear frame is movable. The body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are configured to be visible from below.

In the vicinity of the front end of the door frame top unit, a right side light emitting unit 7050 in the door frame top unit is provided corresponding to the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350. Further, a left-side light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit is provided corresponding to the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. The right-side light emitting unit 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left-side light emitting unit 7052 in the door frame top unit can emit light backward. Accordingly, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 located in the rear can be brought into a predetermined light emission effect state. is there.

The frame movable body having such a structure may be configured to execute the effect pattern described above with reference to FIGS. 548(A) to 549(B). If the special lottery result is a big hit, the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, the left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410, the left ear outer frame. It is preferable that the first surface 7460 of the movable body faces the front and is stopped (third state) as shown in FIGS. 550(B) and 550(E). On the other hand, if the special lottery result is a loss, the right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7320, the right ear outer frame movable body second surface 7370, the left ear inner frame movable body second surface 7420, the left ear outer frame It is preferable that the second surface 7470 of the movable body faces the front and is stopped (fourth state). Further, a modification of the time chart described later may be applied to the frame movable body having such a structure.

551(A) to 552(B) show modified examples of the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 547(A) to 547(E). 551(A) and 551(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. 551(C) and 551(D) are plan views of the pachinko machine 1. 552(A) and 552(B) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. 551(A), FIG. 551(C), and FIG. 552(A) show a right ear inner frame movable body 7300, a right ear outer frame movable body 7350, a left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and a left ear outer frame movable body 7450. The state (1st state) in a standby position is shown. 551(B), 551(D), and 552(B) show that the right-ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right-ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left-ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left-ear outer frame movable body 7450 respectively. The state (2nd state) which is rotating is shown.

In this embodiment, the central portion of the door frame top unit 570 has a shape that is hollowed out in the left-right direction, and is visible in a U shape when viewed from the right side. In the lower part of the door frame top unit 570 that is hollowed out in the left-right direction, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame moveable body 7400 are located above the door frame top unit 570 that is hollowed out in the left-right direction. A right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and a left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are provided in each.

In the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 in the standby state (first state) as shown in FIGS. 551(A), 551(C), and 552(A). The frame movable body first surface 7310 and the left-ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410 are positioned so as to face each other.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are formed by vertically inverting a bottomed cylindrical shape in which a part of the cylindrical side surface is cut. In the standby state (first state) as shown in FIGS. 551(A), 551(C), and 552(A), in front of the right inner ear frame movable body 7300 and the left inner ear frame movable body 7400. , The right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360 and the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 face forward, and the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are It is invisible when viewed from the front. On the other hand, in the first state, when the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are visually observed from diagonally below, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame which are located inside are positioned. The lower part of the movable body 7400 can be visually recognized.

In the lower part of the door frame top unit 570, a right-side light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit is provided corresponding to the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350. Further, a left-side light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit is provided corresponding to the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. The right-side light emitting portion 7050 inside the door frame top unit and the left-side light emitting portion 7052 inside the door frame top unit can irradiate light obliquely upward and forward. As a result, the right inner ear frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left inner ear frame movable body 7400, and the left outer ear frame movable body 7450 positioned diagonally forward and upward can be brought into a predetermined light emission effect state. It is possible.

The frame movable body having such a structure may be configured to execute the effect pattern described above with reference to FIGS. 548(A) to 549(B). If the special lottery result is a big hit, as shown in FIGS. 551(B), 551(D), and 552(B), the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310, the left ear inner frame, It is preferable that the first surface 7410 of the movable body faces the front and is stopped (third state). On the other hand, if the result of the special lottery is a loss, the right inner ear frame movable body second surface 7320 and the left ear inner frame movable body second surface 7420 should face the front and stop (fourth state). .. On the other hand, regarding the right-ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left-ear outer frame movable body 7450, whether the special lottery result is a big hit or a loss, the right-ear outer frame movable body second surface 7370, the left-ear outer frame It is preferable that the second surface 7470 of the movable body faces the player. Further, a modification of the time chart described later may be applied to the frame movable body having such a structure.

553(A) to 553(D) and 554(A) to 554(B) show modified examples of the movable frame body described with reference to FIGS. 523(A) to 523(E). There is. 553(A) and 553(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. 553(C) and 553(D) are plan views of the pachinko machine 1. 554(A) and 554(B) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. 553(A), 553(C), and 554(A) show a state (first state) in which a plurality of frame movable bodies are stored at the standby position. 553(B), 553(D), and 554(B) show a state (second state) in which the plurality of frame movable bodies have moved to the movement positions.

In the embodiment described below, a door frame top unit face decoration portion 7500 is provided instead of the door frame top unit 570, and a door frame side unit right arm portion 7600, a door frame side unit left arm portion 7650, and a curtain plate bottom unit. The movable body 7700 for the right foot and the movable body 7750 for the left foot of the curtain plate bottom unit are provided.

The door frame top unit face decoration portion 7500 has a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped shape imitating a box composed of two members with a lid, and the right side surface and the left side surface thereof form the outer frame 2 and the door frame 3, respectively. The door frame base unit 100 is provided so as to overlap the right side surface and the left side surface thereof in a front view.
The upper surface of the door frame top unit face decoration portion 7500 is always located above the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame top unit face decoration part 7500 is a lid box to be overlaid on a box composed of two members with a lid, and a door frame top unit movable face 7510 which is a lid box, and a lid in a box composed of two members with a lid. And a door frame top unit 7520 below the face, which corresponds to a box to be covered.

The door frame top unit face movable body 7510 is in the shape of a lid box without a back side surface portion, is provided so as to cover the upper part of the door frame top unit lower face 7520, and is controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. It is installed so that it can be moved up and down by a drive mechanism. Further, the front side surface portion of the door frame top unit movable body 7510 on the front side has a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the door frame top unit right eye decoration is shaped like the eyes of an animal robot. A portion 7512 and a door frame top unit left eye decoration portion 7514 are provided. Like the door frame top unit 570, the door frame top unit face movable body 7510 is provided with a right ear frame movable body 7100 and a left ear frame movable body 7200 that imitate the ears of an animal. Also in this embodiment, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are configured to be vertically movable.

The door frame top unit lower face 7520 has a box-like shape with a recess capable of accommodating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and like the door frame top unit 570, the door frame top unit 570 has the same shape. It is provided in the state fixed to the upper part of 3. In addition, the door frame top unit lower face 7520 includes a door frame top unit lower face nose movable body 7522 and a door frame top unit lower face mouth opening movable body 7524.

The door frame top unit lower face nose movable body 7522 is provided so as to be embedded in the door frame top unit lower face 7520 near the center in the left-right direction on the front side surface of the door frame top unit lower face 7520. The door frame top unit face-down nose movable body 7522 has a rectangular parallelepiped shape, but has a box-like shape with an open lower surface such that the drawer door of the closet is turned upside down. The door frame top unit face lower nose movable body 7522 is movable in the front-rear direction. The door frame top unit face lower nose movable body 7522 is a frame movable body that imitates the nose and mouth of an animal robot.

The door frame top unit lower nose movable body 7522 is provided so as to be covered by the side surface portion of the door frame top unit front movable body 7510 on the front side. Therefore, the door frame top unit face lower nose movable body 7522 is invisible in a state (first state) covered by the front side surface portion of the door frame top unit facial movable body 7510. In addition, the door frame top unit lower face nose movable body 7522 cannot move forward.

When the door frame top unit face movable body 7510 moves upward and enters the second state, the door frame top unit face lower nose movable body 7522 of the door frame top unit face lower nose movable body 7522 is provided so as to be embedded in the door frame top unit lower face 7520. The front side surface is visible from the front, and the door frame top unit face lower nose movable body 7522 is movable forward.

The door frame top unit face lower mouth movable body 7524 is provided near the center in the left-right direction on the front side of the bottom surface portion of the door frame top unit lower face 7520. The door frame top unit face lower mouth movable body 7524 has a shape like a cylinder cut out in a fan shape, and has a fan shape when viewed from the right side as shown in FIGS. 554(A) and 554(B). It is provided so that the side forming the central angle is located on the right side. Door frame top unit face lower mouth movable body 7524 can rotate within a predetermined angle range with a side forming a fan-shaped central angle as a rotation axis. Moreover, the door frame top unit face lower mouth movable body 7524 does not have a curved surface located on the front side. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 553(B) and 554(B), when the door frame top unit face lower mouth movable body 7524 is rotated counterclockwise by about 35 degrees when viewed from the right side, It is configured so that the inside thereof can be viewed.

Door frame top unit face under nose movable body 7522 changes from a state (first state) provided so as to be embedded in door frame top unit lower face 7520 to a state of moving forward (second state), A state in which the door frame top unit lower face movable body 7524 is rotated about 35 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the right side from a state (first state) stored in the door frame top unit lower face 7520 (first state). By changing to two states, it is possible to decoratively represent the state in which the animal robot imitates the state in which its mouth is opened.

The door frame side unit right arm portion 7600 and the door frame side unit left arm portion 7650 are provided below the door frame top unit face decoration portion 7500 so as to project from the front surfaces of the left and right ends of the door frame base unit 100 in the front direction. ing.

The door frame side unit right arm portion 7600 includes a door frame side unit right arm case portion 7610, a door frame side unit right arm upper arm portion 7620, and a door frame side unit right arm lower arm portion 7630.

The door frame side unit right arm case portion 7610 is made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The door frame side unit right arm case portion 7610 has a box shape having a void inside, and the door frame side unit right arm upper arm portion 7620 and the door frame side unit right arm lower arm portion 7630 are movable inside. Is. The thickness of the door frame side unit right arm case portion 7610 is about several mm, and the door frame side unit right arm upper arm portion 7620 and the door frame side unit right arm lower arm portion 7630 that are moving inside are configured to be visible.

The door frame side unit right arm upper arm portion 7620 is formed of a flexible synthetic resin in a pipe shape. The length of the door frame side unit right arm upper arm portion 7620 is about 50 cm, and by rotating a reel-shaped drive mechanism (not shown) provided in the door frame top unit lower face 7520 controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, It can be rolled up and down. 553(A) and 554(A) show a state (first state) in which the door frame side unit right arm upper arm portion 7620 is wound up by a reel-shaped drive mechanism (not shown).

The door frame side unit right arm lower arm portion 7630 is formed by two members in the shape of the letter L when viewed from the side and a cylindrical member that imitates the shaft that locks them, and imitates a robot manipulator. It has a shape. Further, the end of the door frame side unit right arm upper arm portion 7620 is attached to the columnar member, and the door frame side unit right arm upper arm portion 7620 is wound up by the reel-shaped drive mechanism (not shown) described above. In the first state), the door frame side unit right arm lower arm portion 7630 is located above the door frame side unit right arm case portion 7610.

By rotating a reel-shaped drive mechanism (not shown) in a direction opposite to the winding direction, the door frame side unit right arm upper arm portion 7620 is lowered in the door frame side unit right arm case portion 7610, and the door frame side unit right arm portion 7620 is lowered. The lower arm portion 7630 is in a state of being positioned under the door frame side unit right arm case portion 7610 by its own weight. FIG. 553(B) shows a state (second state) in which the door frame side unit right arm lower arm portion 7630 is located in the lower portion inside the door frame side unit right arm case portion 7610. In the second state, the door frame side unit right arm upper arm portion 7620, which has been invisible until then, becomes visible.

The door frame side unit left arm portion 7650 has the same structure and function as the door frame side unit right arm portion 7600 which is bilaterally symmetrical. Specifically, the door frame side unit left arm case portion 7660 has the same structure and function as the door frame side unit right arm case portion 7610, and the door frame side unit left arm upper arm portion 7670 is the door frame side unit right arm upper arm. The door frame side unit left arm lower arm portion 7680 has the same structure and function as the portion 7620, and the door frame side unit right arm lower arm portion 7630 has the same structure and function as the door frame side unit right arm lower arm portion 7630. Therefore, a detailed description of each member forming the door frame side unit left arm portion 7650 will be omitted.

As for the door frame side unit left arm portion 7650, a state (first state) in which the door frame side unit left arm lower arm portion 7680 is wound up by a reel-shaped drive mechanism (not shown) similarly to the door frame side unit right arm portion 7600. By rotating the reel-shaped drive mechanism in the direction opposite to the winding direction, it is possible to take the state of being located at the lower portion (second state). For example, FIGS. 553(B) and 554(B) show a state (second state) in which the door frame side unit left arm lower arm portion 7680 is located in the lower portion. In the second state, the door frame side unit left arm upper arm portion 7670, which has been invisible until then, becomes visible.

The outside (left side in front view) or a part of the door frame side unit right arm case portion 7610 and the outside (right side in front view) whole or part of the door frame side unit left arm case portion 7660 are formed of an opaque synthetic resin. Alternatively, a colorless and transparent synthetic resin may be formed and then a colored and opaque seal or the like may be attached. It should be noted that the entire inside (right side in front view) of the door frame side unit right arm case portion 7610 and the entire inside (left side in front view) of the door frame side unit left arm case portion 7660 are preferably made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin.

With such a configuration, the door frame side unit right arm upper arm portion 7620, the door frame side unit right arm lower arm portion 7630, the door frame side unit left arm upper arm portion 7670, the door frame side unit left arm lower arm portion 7680 have moved. It becomes difficult for the left and right players to visually recognize, and it is possible for only the player who is playing the game on the pachinko machine 1 to fully enjoy the game without the other players knowing that it has operated. In addition, as described later, when these frame movable bodies are operated for the purpose of suggesting a predetermined degree of expectation, even if the special lottery result is lost after the frame movable bodies operate, other It is difficult for the player to visually recognize it, and it is difficult for the other player to feel embarrassed.

The curtain plate member 50 has a curtain plate bottom unit right foot movable body 7700 on the left side in front view and a curtain plate bottom unit left foot movable body 7750 on the right side in front view. The curtain plate bottom unit right leg movable body 7700 and the curtain plate bottom unit left leg movable body 7750 are the tray unit 320 in the standby position (first state) as shown in FIGS. 553(A) and 554(A). Each is located below the handle unit 300.

The curtain plate bottom unit right foot movable body 7700 is composed of a curtain plate bottom unit right foot snake part 7710 and a curtain plate bottom unit right foot tip part 7720. The curtain plate bottom unit right foot snake part 7710 has a cylindrical shape. Further, the right bottom of foot portion 7720 of the curtain plate bottom unit has a rectangular parallelepiped shape imitating the shape of a foot, and has two circular recesses in the portion corresponding to the sole of the foot. The curtain plate bottom unit right foot tip portion 7720 is attached to the front surface of the curtain plate bottom unit right foot snake portion 7710. Therefore, the curtain plate bottom unit right foot snake part 7710 and the curtain plate bottom unit right foot tip part 7720 operate integrally.

A drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 is provided in the lower portion of the outer frame 2, and it is possible to move the curtain plate bottom unit right foot snake part 7710 in the front-rear direction. Further, it is possible to rotate the curtain plate bottom unit right foot snake part 7710 by a predetermined angle about the longitudinal direction of the curtain plate bottom unit right foot snake part 7710.

For example, after moving the curtain plate bottom unit right foot snare 7710 from the standby position (first state) shown in FIGS. 553(A) and 554(A) by a predetermined distance, the front view It may be configured to rotate 90 degrees clockwise and operate in a stopped state (second state). FIGS. 553(B) and 554(B) show the curtain plate bottom unit right foot snake 7710 in the stopped state (second state) in this manner.

The curtain plate bottom unit left foot movable body 7750 has the same structure and function as the left and right symmetrical with the curtain plate bottom unit right foot movable body 7700. Specifically, the curtain plate bottom unit left foot snake part 7760 has the same structure and function as the curtain plate bottom unit right foot snake part 7710, and the curtain plate bottom unit left foot tip part 7770 is the curtain plate bottom unit right foot. It has the same structure and function as the front portion 7720. For this reason, detailed description of each member constituting the curtain plate bottom unit left leg movable body 7750 is omitted.

By providing the frame movable body below the gaming machine in this manner, the player does not visually recognize the operation of the frame movable body as in the conventional case, but rather a part of the body such as the player's arm. By the contact of the frame movable body, it is possible to give the player an unprecedented sensory experience in which the player recognizes that the frame movable body has moved.

With reference to FIG. 553 and FIG. 554, an embodiment in which a plurality of frame movable bodies are provided in the pachinko machine 1 and they operate is shown. Specifically, the door frame top unit face movable body 7510, the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, the door frame top unit face lower nose movable body 7522, the door frame top unit face lower mouth movable body 7524. , Door frame side unit right arm upper arm portion 7620, door frame side unit right arm lower arm portion 7630, door frame side unit left arm upper arm portion 7670, door frame side unit left arm lower arm portion 7680, curtain board bottom unit right foot movable body 7700, curtain board From the state (first state) in which the bottom unit left foot movable body 7750 is in the standby position shown in FIGS. 553(A), 553(C), and 554(A) as a frame movable body, respectively, FIG. ), FIG. 553(D), and FIG. 554(B) are in the moving position (second state). Further, the peripheral control board 1510 controls the driving means (not shown) provided for each frame movable body in correspondence with each frame movable body, whereby the first state and the second state can be obtained. ..

In addition, each frame movable body may be provided with a light emitting means controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 so that the normal light emitting effect state and the specific light emitting effect state as described above can be set.

The effect patterns shown in FIGS. 524(A) to 525(B), the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 533(A) to 534(B), or effects obtained by transforming these effect patterns are applied to each of the frame movable bodies. It may be configured to be applied to a pattern so as to operate or emit light.

The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are provided on the door frame top unit face movable body 7510. The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear in the state (first state) of being housed in the door frame top unit movable body 7510 after the door frame top unit movable body 7510 is set to the second state in which it is positioned above. The frame movable body 7200 and the frame movable body 7200 may be configured to project upward (second state). Further, such an operation may be applied to the time charts shown in FIGS. 539(A) to 540(B) and time charts of modified examples thereof. Specifically, in each of the time charts, first, the door frame top unit facial movable body 7510 is changed from the first state to the second state, and the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear are responded to in response to an operation on the operation unit. The frame movable body 7200 may be configured to change from the first state to the second state.

Alternatively, after the door frame top unit face movable body 7510 is placed in the second state in which it is positioned above, the door frame top unit face lower nose movable body is stored in the door frame top unit lower face 7520 (first state). The 7522 may be configured so as to project forward (second state). Further, such an operation may be applied to the time charts shown in FIGS. 539(A) to 540(B) and time charts of modified examples thereof. Specifically, in each time chart, first, the door frame top unit face movable body 7510 is changed from the first state to the second state, and the door frame top unit face lower nose movable body is responded to in response to an operation on the operation unit. The 7522 may be configured to change from the first state to the second state.

Further, after the door frame top unit face lower nose movable body 7522 is changed from the first state to the second state, the door frame top unit face lower mouth movable body 7524 is changed from the first state to the second state. Good. Further, such an operation may be applied to the time charts shown in FIGS. 539(A) to 540(B) and time charts of modified examples thereof.

Alternatively, the door frame top unit face lower mouth movable body 7524 is changed from the first state to the second state, and then the door frame top unit face lower nose movable body 7522 is changed from the first state to the second state. Good. Further, such an operation may be applied to the time charts shown in FIGS. 539(A) to 540(B) and time charts of modified examples thereof.

FIGS. 555(A) to 555(K) show modified examples of the display mode of the frame movable body simulated image which can be applied to the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 524(A) to 525(B). It is a thing. In addition, FIG. 555(A) collectively expresses each effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 524(A) to 525(B).

FIG. 555(B) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the frame movable body simulated image displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. is there. In this effect pattern, the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image is started at timing t4, and the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image is completed at timing t6. After that, at timing t7, the raising operation of the movable frame body is started.

By arranging such an operation/display pattern to be executable as an effect, the display of the frame movable body simulated image gives a notice that the frame movable body operates. Further, the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image allows the player to recognize how the frame movable body operates, and the player who sees such a frame movable body simulated image can The motion of the movable body can be visually recognized from the start of the motion. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player misses the operation of the frame movable body. Further, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player, who has inadvertently touched the movable frame body, injured his/her finger or the like. It can also be shown that the player, who has placed lightweight luggage on the frame movable body, moves them to another position. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player is injured due to a dropped luggage, and a load is applied to the drive unit that moves the movable frame body.

FIG. 555(C) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the frame movable body simulated image displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. is there. In this effect pattern, the ascending operation of the movable ear frame is completed at timing t9, then the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image is started at timing t10, and the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image is started at timing t12. Is completed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the movement of the movable frame body to the raised position (moving position). Therefore, if the player does not notice the movement of the frame movable body, the frame movable body that has completed the movement to the raised position suddenly becomes visible to such a player, which is a great surprise. It is possible to give to someone. In addition, since the frame movable body simulated image is displayed after moving to the raised position, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player misses the moved frame movable body. Further, the player can know how the frame movable body has moved.

FIG. 555(D) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the frame movable body simulated image displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. is there. In this effect pattern, the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image is started at timing t6, then the raising operation of the frame movable body is started at timing t7, and the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image is started at timing t8. Is completed, and the raising operation of the movable frame body is completed at timing t9.

With such a configuration, the display of the frame movable body simulated image serves as a notice that the frame movable body moves. It is possible to let the player recognize how the frame movable body operates. The movement of the movable frame can be visually recognized from the start of movement. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player overlooks the movement of the frame movable body. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player, who has inadvertently touched the frame movable body, injured his/her finger or the like.

FIG. 555(E) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the frame movable body simulated image displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. is there. In this effect pattern, the raising operation of the frame movable body is started at timing t7, then the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image is started at timing t8, and the raising operation of the frame movable body is completed at timing t9. At timing t10, the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image is completed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to surprise the player by the fact that the frame movable body has begun to move. Further, it is possible to inform the player that the frame movable body has started to move.

FIG. 555(F) is a time chart showing the operation pattern of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the frame movable body simulated image displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. is there. In this effect pattern, the frame movable body simulated image is dynamically displayed from timing t3 to timing t7 (4 seconds). On the other hand, the raising operation of the movable frame body is performed from the timing t7 to the timing t9 (2 seconds). The frame movable body simulated image is dynamically displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 at a speed half that of the actual movement of the frame movable body.

With such a configuration, the player can recognize in detail how the frame movable body moves.

FIG. 555(G) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the frame movable body simulated image displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. is there. In this effect pattern, the frame movable body simulated image is dynamically displayed from timing t5 to timing t9 (4 seconds). On the other hand, the raising operation of the movable frame body is performed from the timing t7 to the timing t9 (2 seconds). The frame movable body simulated image is dynamically displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 at a speed half that of the actual movement of the frame movable body.

With such a configuration, the player can recognize in detail how the frame movable body moves.

FIG. 555(H) is a time chart showing the operation pattern of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the frame movable body simulated image displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. is there. In this effect pattern, the moving operation of the movable frame body is performed from the timing t7 to the timing t9 (2 seconds), and then the dynamic display of the movable frame body image is performed from the timing t9 to the timing t13 (4 seconds). Be seen. The frame movable body simulated image is dynamically displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 at a speed half that of the actual movement of the frame movable body.

With such a configuration, it becomes possible for the player to recognize in detail how the frame movable body has moved.

FIG. 555(I) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the frame movable body simulated image displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. is there. In this effect pattern, the frame movable object simulated image is dynamically displayed from timing t5 to timing t7 (2 seconds), and then the frame movable object simulated image is dynamically displayed again from timing t7 to timing t9. Done. On the other hand, the raising operation of the movable frame body is performed from the timing t7 to the timing t9 (2 seconds). Note that the frame movable body simulated image may be dynamically displayed three times or more. For example, the frame movable body simulated image may be dynamically displayed at timing t3 to timing t5.

With such a configuration, it becomes possible for the player to recognize how the frame movable body moves.

FIG. 555(J) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the frame movable body simulated image displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. is there. In this effect pattern, the frame movable body simulated image is dynamically displayed from timing t7 to timing t9 (2 seconds), and then the frame movable body simulated image is dynamically displayed again from timing t9 to timing t11. Done. On the other hand, the raising operation of the movable frame body is performed from the timing t7 to the timing t9 (2 seconds). The number of times the frame movable object simulated image is dynamically displayed may be three or more. For example, the frame movable object simulated image may be dynamically displayed at timings t11 to t13.

With such a configuration, it becomes possible for the player to recognize how the frame movable body has moved.

FIG. 555(K) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the frame movable body simulated image displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. is there. In this effect pattern, three times in total are performed from the timing t4 to the timing t5, the timing t5 to the timing t6, and the timing t6 to the timing t7, which are the timings before the frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state. The frame movable body simulated image is changed from the display manner simulating the first state to the display manner simulating the second state at a speed twice that of the frame movable body. Note that such display may be performed twice in total from timing t5 to timing t6 and from timing t6 to timing t7, or may be performed only once from timing t6 to timing t7.

With such a configuration, it is possible for the player to recognize in a short time how the frame movable body moves. Further, since the frame movable body simulated image is displayed quickly, the eyes become accustomed to seeing the operation of the actual frame movable body, and the player can fully enjoy the operation mode of the actual frame movable body. Is possible. In addition, by displaying a plurality of times, it becomes possible for the player to further recognize the operation mode.

Each effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 555(A) to 555(K) may be configured to be executed corresponding to a predetermined situation in the pachinko machine 1. In this case, the expectation level for the big hit and the appearance frequency may be different for each effect pattern. For example, when a predetermined reach effect is generated, one of the effect patterns described in FIGS. 555(A) to 555(K) is selected and executed. Good. Further, the effect pattern described with reference to FIG. 555(A) has the highest appearance frequency, and the appearance frequency gradually decreases as the effect patterns described with reference to FIGS. 555(B) to 555(K) are gradually generated. In the performance pattern described with reference to FIG. 555(A), the expectation degree for the big hit is the lowest, and as the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 555(B) to 555(K) is gradually obtained, the expectation degree for the big hit is gradually increased. The effect pattern to be executed may be selected based on the jackpot lottery result so as to increase. Further, each of the modified examples described below may also be configured to be executed with a predetermined expectation level or appearance frequency.

With such a configuration, when an effect pattern for a frame movable body that is different from the normal appearance appears, the player's expectation for a jackpot is not greater than the effect pattern for a normal frame movable body. It will be possible to feel it.

In addition, you may comprise so that some of the example productions shown in FIGS. 555(A) to 555(K) may be combined and executed as an production. In this case, it is preferable that the game board side effect display device 1600 is combined so that the plurality of frame movable body simulated images are not displayed at the same time. For example, by performing the effect pattern shown in FIG. 555(K) from the timing t4 to the timing t7, and by executing the effect pattern shown in FIG. 555(J) from the timing t7 to the timing t11, effects produced by both effect patterns are achieved. It is possible to execute an effect pattern capable of playing both of the above.

556(A) to 556(E) are modified examples of the light emitting mode of the light emitting unit of the frame movable body that can be applied to the effect patterns described with reference to FIGS. 524(A) to 525(B). It is shown. In addition, FIG. 556(A) collectively expresses each effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 524(A) to 525(B).

FIG. 556(B) shows an effect pattern in which the light emitting unit of the frame movable body is turned off at the timing (timing t7) at which the frame movable body starts moving from the standby position to the movement position. Further, in FIG. 556(C), at a timing (timing t5) prior to the timing (timing t7) at which the frame movable body starts moving from the standby position to the movement position, the light emitting unit of the frame movable body is turned off. The production pattern is shown.

In this way, at a timing before the movable frame body is in the second state, the light emitting portion of the movable frame body is in the off state, and that state is until the operation portion is operated, or until the operation valid period ends. By being maintained, it becomes difficult for the player to notice that the frame movable body is moving from the standby position to the moving position. Then, in such a situation, when the player operates the operation unit, the frame movable body that has completed the movement to the movement position suddenly emits light from the unlit state (a special light emission effect state or a light emission effect). State), it is possible to give a great surprise to the player.

FIG. 556(D) shows an effect pattern in which, instead of turning off the light emitting unit of the frame movable body at timing t9, the state in which light emission is suppressed is set. The state in which the light emission is suppressed may be, for example, light emission with a longer blinking period or smaller light amount than in the light emission effect state.

In this way, instead of turning off the light, the light emission is suppressed to obtain the same effect as when the light is turned off.

FIG. 556(E) shows an effect pattern in which the light emitting portion of the frame movable body is set to the specific light emission effect state instead of being turned off at the timing t9. This effect pattern may be selected only when the special lottery result is a big hit. Although an example is shown in which the light emitting portion of the frame movable body is set to the specific light emission effect state at the timing t9 when the frame movable body is in the second state, the timing t7 when the frame movable body starts the operation or the frame movement is performed. At timing t5, which is the timing before the body starts moving, the light emitting unit of the frame movable body may be brought into the specific light emission effect state.

Instead of turning off the light, the state of the light emitting unit of the frame movable body is suddenly set to the specific light emission effect state, so that the player can have a great expectation for the big hit.

557(A) to 557(E) show modified examples of the display mode of the frame movable body simulated image which can be applied to the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 533(A) to 534(B). It is a thing. In addition, FIG. 557(A) collectively expresses each effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 533(A) to 534(B).

FIG. 557(B) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the frame movable body simulated image displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. is there. In this effect pattern, the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image is started at timing t7, and then at timing t9, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 at the standby position (first state). Starts rotating and enters a rotating state (second state).

As described above, the image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 move at the same speed as the rotation speed of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200. Is displayed. Therefore, between the timing t7 and the timing t9, the image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 are rotated twice, and then the right ear frame movable body 7100 is displayed. Then, the left ear frame movable body 7200 actually starts rotating. The timing at which the display of the frame movable body simulated image is started may be earlier. For example, if it is configured to start the display of the frame movable body simulated image at timing t5, a display in which the image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 are rotated four times are executed. After that, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 actually start rotating.

As described above, by displaying the frame movable body simulated image before the frame movable body starts to operate, the display of the frame movable body simulated image gives a notice that the frame movable body operates. .. In addition, the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image enables the player to recognize how the frame movable body operates. Then, the player who sees such a frame movable body simulated image can visually recognize the operation of the frame movable body from the start time of the operation. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player overlooks the operation of the frame movable body. In addition, the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image is repeatedly performed before the frame movable body starts the operation, so that the player can surely recognize how the frame movable body operates. Becomes In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from inadvertently touching the frame movable body from injuring his/her finger or the like. It can also be shown that the player, who has placed lightweight luggage on the frame movable body, moves them to another position. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player is injured due to a dropped luggage, and a load is applied to the drive unit that moves the movable frame body.

FIG. 557(C) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the frame movable body simulated image displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. is there. In this effect pattern, at timing t9, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 at the standby position (first state) start rotating to be in the rotating state (second state), and then the timing. At t11, the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image is started.

As described above, by arranging the frame movable body simulated image to be displayed after the frame movable body starts to operate, the player notices that the frame movable body has changed to the rotating state (second state). It is possible to make it difficult to get hit. Therefore, when the player does not notice the change in the state of the frame movable body, the frame movable body in the rotating state is suddenly visually recognized by the player, which can give a great surprise to the player. Becomes

FIG. 557(D) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the frame movable body simulated image displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. is there. In this effect pattern, dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image is started at timing t7. From the timing t7 to the timing t9, the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image is performed at a high speed (two rotations per second). Thereafter, at timing t9, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 in the standby position (first state) start rotating and enter the rotating state (second state).

As described above, by arranging the frame movable body simulated image to be rotated and displayed at a faster speed (twice the speed) than the actual frame movable body before the frame movable body starts its operation, It becomes possible to get accustomed to the operation mode when the state changes to the rotation state (second state).

FIG. 557(E) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the frame movable body simulated image displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. is there. In this effect pattern, dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image is started at timing t5. From timing t5 to timing t9, the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image is performed at a low speed (half a rotation per second). Thereafter, at timing t9, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 in the standby position (first state) start rotating and enter the rotating state (second state).

As described above, the frame movable body simulated image is rotated and displayed at a slower speed (half speed) than the actual frame movable body before the frame movable body starts its operation. It becomes possible for a player who feels that the operation mode is too fast when the body changes to the rotation state (second state) to know the operation mode of the frame movable body.

Embodiments described with reference to FIGS. 538 to 540 and the like, and modifications of the embodiments, regarding modifications of the display form of the frame movable body simulated image shown in FIGS. 555(B) to 555(E). It may be configured to be executable as an effect pattern by appropriately applying to the inner frame movable body in.

Embodiments described with reference to FIGS. 547 to 549 and the like regarding modifications of the display mode of the frame movable body simulated image shown in FIGS. 557(B) to 557(E) and modifications of those embodiments. It may be applied to either one of the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body in, or may be configured to be applied to both in the same manner so as to be executable as an effect pattern.

In the examples described above with reference to FIG. 539 and FIG. 540 and FIG. 548 and FIG. 549, respectively, after the first frame movable body is changed from the first state to the second state, that state is maintained for a certain period of time. After that, the second frame movable body is configured to change from the first state to the second state. Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 539 and 540, it is configured such that it takes a predetermined time when changing the first frame movable body from the first state to the second state.

With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player misses the aspect in which the frame movable body changes the state.

In the effect examples described above with reference to FIGS. 524 and 525, FIG. 533 and FIG. 534, FIG. 539 and FIG. 540, and FIG. 548 and FIG. 549, respectively, the frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state. At the same timing as the timing, the frame movable body simulated image is configured to be dynamically displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 in the same manner as the changing manner of the actual frame movable body. C), FIGS. 555(E), 555(H), and 557(C), as described above with reference to FIGS. 555(H) and 557(C), the actual frame is generated at the timing before the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image is started. The movable body may be configured to start an operation of changing from the first state to the second state, or to change from the first state to the second state.

With such a configuration, a player who sees the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image can easily find the frame movable body in operation without noticing that the actual frame movable body is operating. It becomes possible to do.

In the examples described above with reference to FIG. 533 and FIG. 534, FIG. 539 and FIG. 540, and FIG. 548 and FIG. 549, respectively, the result of the special lottery is that the player operates the operation unit during the operation valid period. In some cases, the state of the frame movable body may change from the first state to the second state, or may change from the second state to any one of the third state and the fourth state. ..

With such a configuration, the player determines the position of the operation unit and the position of the frame movable body in which the state may change, and then operates with the line of sight to the frame movable body. It becomes possible for the player to operate the operation unit at a desired timing without looking at the unit. Accordingly, it is possible to reliably visually confirm whether or not the state of the frame movable body changes, and to what state the frame movable body changes if the state changes.

In the examples described above with reference to FIG. 533 and FIG. 534, FIG. 539 and FIG. 540, and FIG. 548 and FIG. 549, respectively, an image for instructing an operation on the operation unit is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. Although it is configured, a production pattern for displaying a special operation instruction image that can be displayed only when the result of the special lottery is a big hit may be configured to be executable in addition to the example described above. For example, as the operation instruction image, the image of the movable frame may be displayed simultaneously in a manner included in the image of the operation unit.

With such a configuration, the player can recognize that the result of the special lottery is a big hit when visually recognizing the special operation instruction image, and that the frame movable body is always operated when the operation unit is operated.
As a result, it is possible to operate the operation unit with the line of sight of the movable frame body, and to fully enjoy the operation of the movable frame body.

In the examples described above with reference to FIG. 524 and FIG. 525, FIG. 533 and FIG. 534, FIG. 539 and FIG. 540, and FIG. 548 and FIG. The light emitting part that can emit light is provided separately from the frame movable body, and after the frame movable body changes its state, it is turned off at the same timing as the operation valid period starts, and the operation section is operated. Although it is configured to be in a light emission effect state in a predetermined light emission mode in accordance with the timing or the end of the operation valid period, as described with reference to FIGS. 556(D) and 556(E), the operation valid period is set. In the above, it is not always necessary to turn off the light, and a light emitting effect state that can be distinguished from a normal light emitting effect state may be configured. For example, when only the outer frame movable body is turned off and the inner frame movable body is in the specific light emission effect state, or the right frame movable body is in the off state and the left frame movable body is in the specific light emission effect state, a big hit. It may be configured to notify that the occurrence of. Alternatively, all the frame movable bodies are turned off until the operation effective period, and the inner frame movable body is made to emit light according to the occurrence of the operation effective period to notify that the operation effective period has occurred, and then the operation unit It may be configured such that the light emission effect state of all the frame-side movable bodies is changed to the light emission effect state according to the special lottery result in response to the operation to or the end of the operation effective period.

In this way, the light emitting state of the frame movable body changes to a different state according to the change of the state of the frame movable body, and thus it becomes easy to grasp that the frame movable body has operated by the change of the light emission mode. Further, when at least a part of the frame movable body is illuminated, there is an effect that the player is less likely to be injured when the frame movable body is moved, as compared with the case where the frame movable body is in the off state. is there

In the examples described above with reference to FIGS. 524 and 525, FIG. 533 and FIG. 534, FIG. 539 and FIG. 540, and FIG. 548 and FIG. 549, respectively, the timing at which the frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state 555 (B) is configured such that the frame movable body simulated image is dynamically displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 in the same mode as the actual frame movable body changing mode at the same timing as in FIG. ), FIGS. 555(D), 555(F), 555(G), 555(I), 555(K), 557(B), 557(D), and 557(E). As described above with reference to the actual frame movable body, at a timing before the timing of starting the operation of changing the actual frame movable body from the first state to the second state or the timing of changing the actual frame movable body from the first state to the second state. The dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image may be started.

With such a configuration, the frame movable body can be visually recognized in a state in which how the frame movable body operates in advance is grasped, so that each movement of the frame movable body is missed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation. In particular, such a configuration is effective when the movable frame body moves in a complicated manner as shown in the time charts of FIGS. 539 and 540 or 548 and 549.

In the examples described above with reference to FIG. 524 and FIG. 525, and FIG. 539 and FIG. 540, respectively, the frame movable body has the same time (2 seconds) as the frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state. The simulated image is configured to be dynamically displayed at the same speed as the change mode of the actual frame movable body. However, as described above with reference to FIG. 555(K), the frame movable body simulated image is displayed. The speed from the display mode of the state imitating the first state to the display mode of the state imitating the second state may be faster than the speed at which the frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state.

In this way, from the display mode of the state in which the frame movable body simulated image imitates the first state in a time (1 second) shorter than the time (2 seconds) in which the frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state. By configuring the display mode to mimic the second state, the eyes are accustomed to the quick movement of the frame movable body simulated image, so that the actual frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state. In that case, it becomes possible to fully enjoy the movement.

In the examples described above with reference to FIGS. 533 and 534 and FIGS. 548 and 549, the frame movable body is configured to rotate once per second in the second state. As described above with reference to the frame movable body, the frame movable body simulated image may be dynamically displayed in a manner of rotating at a faster speed before the frame movable body enters the second state. For example, the frame movable body may be set to the second state after the frame movable body simulated image is displayed so as to rotate once or a plurality of times at a speed of one rotation in 0.5 seconds.

In this manner, the dynamic display is performed such that the frame movable body simulated image makes one rotation in a shorter time (0.5 seconds) than the time (1 second) required for the frame movable body to make one rotation. By doing so, the eyes become accustomed to the quick movement of the frame movable body simulated image, and thus it becomes possible to fully enjoy the actual rotational movement of the frame movable body in the second state.

In the examples described above with reference to FIG. 524 and FIG. 525, and FIG. 539 and FIG. 540, respectively, the frame movable body has the same time (2 seconds) as the frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state. The simulated image is configured to be dynamically displayed at the same speed as the change mode of the actual frame movable body. Refer to FIGS. 555(F), 555(G), and 555(H). As described above, the speed at which the frame movable body changes from the display state in which the first state is imitated to the state in which the second movable state is imitated is changed from the first state to the second state. It may be slower than the changing speed.

In this manner, the frame movable body simulation image displays a state in which the frame movable body simulated image imitates the first state over a longer time (4 seconds) than the time (2 seconds) in which the frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state. By configuring the display mode to be a display mode imitating the second state from the mode, even if the player feels that the motion of the frame movable body is too fast for the player, the frame movable body simulated image is viewed. By doing so, the player can recognize the operation mode.

In the examples described above with reference to FIGS. 533 and 534 and FIGS. 548 and 549, the frame movable body is configured to rotate once per second in the second state. As described above with reference to the frame movable body, before the frame movable body is in the second state, the frame movable body simulated image may be dynamically displayed in a mode of rotating at a slower speed. For example, the frame movable body may be set to the second state after the frame movable body simulated image is displayed so as to rotate once or a plurality of times at a speed of one rotation in 0.5 seconds.
In this manner, the dynamic display is performed such that the frame movable body simulated image makes one rotation over a time (2 seconds) longer than the time (1 second) required for the frame movable body to make one rotation. By doing so, even if the player feels that the rotation operation of the actual frame movable body in the second state is too fast for the player, the player recognizes the operation mode by looking at the frame movable body simulated image. It becomes possible.

In the examples described above with reference to FIG. 524 and FIG. 525, and FIG. 539 and FIG. 540, respectively, the frame movable body simulated image is the same as the state in which the actual frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state. However, it is configured such that the display that dynamically changes from the image showing the state imitating the first state to the image showing the state imitating the second state is performed only once, as shown in FIG. As described with reference to FIGS. 555(J) and 555(K), such a display of the frame movable body simulated image may be performed plural times.

In the examples described above with reference to FIGS. 533 and 534 and FIGS. 548 and 549, respectively, the frame movable body simulated image is displayed at the same timing as the timing when the frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state. When the actual frame movable body continues to be in the second state (rotation state), the frame movable body simulated image is dynamically rotated and displayed in the same manner as the changing manner of the actual frame movable body. It is configured. Therefore, the frame movable body simulated image is repeatedly rotated and displayed in a loop.

In this way, the state in which the state of the frame movable body changes is dynamically displayed as a frame movable body simulated image a plurality of times, or when the frame movable body is in a state of changing cyclically, it is adjusted to the state. By repeatedly and dynamically displaying the frame movable body simulated image in a manner of periodically changing, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player overlooks that the frame movable body has changed from the first state to the second state. Is possible.

558(A) to 559(B) show modified examples of the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 524(A) to 525(B). In the present embodiment, in synchronization with the start of the operation effective period (timing t9), the state in which the frame movable body is in the standby position (first state) starts to change to the state in which the movement is completed (second state). Point, a frame movable body simulated image is not displayed, a sign is displayed from timing t7 to timing t9 before the operation valid period occurs, when an operation is performed on the operation unit (timing t14), or the operation is performed. This is different from the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 524(A) to 525(B) in that the post-operation display is performed when the operation valid period ends without being performed (timing t18). With respect to points other than these (for example, the light emission effect state of the frame movable body, the stop timing of the decorative pattern, etc.), since the effect modes are basically common, description of the parts having the same effect modes will be omitted. The different parts described above will be mainly described below.

FIG. 558(A) shows an example of the effect pattern when the player operates the operation unit during the period when the special lottery result is a big hit and the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. There is. FIG. 558(B) shows an example of the effect pattern when the player performs an operation on the operation unit during a period when the special lottery result is a loss and the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. There is. FIG. 559(A) shows an example of the effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. ing. FIG. 559(B) shows an example of the effect pattern when the special lottery result is lost and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. ing.

In each of the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 558(A) to 559(B), the sign display, which is a display indicating that the operation valid period is generated, is started at timing t7 on the game board side effect display device 1600. .. As a sign display, the character "Push?" is displayed as an image and continues until the timing t9 when the operation valid period starts. At timing t9, the operation valid period is started, and the text "Push!!" is displayed as an image as an operation instruction display indicating that the operation unit has entered the acceptance state. The operation instruction display ends when an operation is performed on the operation unit (timing t14) or when the operation is not performed and the operation valid period ends (timing t18), and instead, "!" is displayed as the post-operation display. Display characters as an image. The display after the operation is continued for 2 seconds and then terminated (timing t16 or timing t20).

On the other hand, at the timing t9, the movable frame starts to move from the state in which the frame movable body is turned off and is in the standby position (first state), and at timing t11, the movement is completed (second state). Become.

In this way, before the movement of the frame movable body starts or during the movement, the player performs a display (symptom display or operation instruction display) that distracts the consciousness from the frame movable body. When the operation is performed, the frame movable body is changed from the light-off state to the specific light emission effect state or the normal light emission effect state, whereby the line of sight of the player is guided to the frame movable element. Then, since the player feels that the frame movable body has changed from the first state to the second state, it is possible to give a great surprise to the player. Further, even if it takes time to change the state of the frame movable body from the first state to the second state, the frame movable body is brought into the second state by the indication and the operation instruction display. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of situations such as feeling annoyed feelings. Further, since it becomes possible to slowly move the frame movable body, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of a situation in which the player who is carelessly touching the frame movable body is injured.

560(A) to 561(B) show modified examples of the effect patterns described with reference to FIGS. 558(A) to 559(B). In the present embodiment, the state in which the frame movable body is in the standby position (first state) is adjusted in accordance with the timing (t14) when the operation unit is operated or the timing (timing t9) when the operation valid period ends. 558 (A) to the point that the change to the completed state (second state) is started, and that the frame movable body changes to the second state only when the special lottery result is a big hit. This is different from the effect pattern described with reference to FIG. 559(B). With respect to points other than these (for example, the light emission effect state of the frame movable body, the stop timing of the decorative pattern, etc.), since the effect modes are basically common, description of the parts having the same effect modes will be omitted. The different parts described above will be mainly described below.

FIG. 560(A) shows an example of the effect pattern when the player operates the operation unit during the period when the special lottery result is a big hit and the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. There is. FIG. 560(B) shows an example of the effect pattern when the player performs an operation on the operation unit during the period when the special lottery result is lost and the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. There is. FIG. 561(A) shows an example of the effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. ing. FIG. 561(B) shows an example of the effect pattern when the special lottery result is lost and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. ing.

In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 560(A) and 560(B), the operation of the operation section is performed by the player while the operation valid period is generated and the operation instruction display is being performed (timing t14). If the special lottery result is a big hit, the frame movable body is moved from the standby position (first state) to the completed movement (second state) and the post-operation display is performed ( Timing t14 to timing t16), if the special lottery result is a loss, the effect pattern in which only the post-operation display is performed without changing from the state (first state) in which the frame movable body is in the standby position is shown. There is.

In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 561(A) and 561(B), when the special lottery result is a big hit at the timing (t18) when the operation valid period ends, the movable frame body is in the standby position. When the movement from the (first state) to the completed state (second state) is performed and the post-operation display is performed (timing t18 to timing t20), if the special lottery result is lost, the frame movable body Shows the effect pattern in which only the post-operation display is performed without changing from the state (first state) in the standby position.

In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 560(A) and 561(A), at the timing t22, the state in which the movement of the frame movable body is completed (second state) is changed to the state in the standby position (first state). The movement is started, and the movement to the standby position is completed at timing t24.

In this way, even after the player has operated the operation unit, the post-operation display is performed instead of the operation instruction display, so that the game is started from the frame movable body that changes the state from the first state to the second state. It is possible to distract the person. Then, by terminating the display after the operation at the timing when the change of the frame movable body to the second state is completed, the player finally notices that the frame movable body is in the second state, which is large for the player. It is possible to give surprise. Further, even if it takes time to change the state of the frame movable body from the first state to the second state, the player is irritated that the frame movable body becomes the second state by the post-operation display. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of situations such as feeling emotions. Further, since it becomes possible to slowly move the frame movable body, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of a situation in which the player who is carelessly touching the frame movable body is injured.

The timing for changing the frame movable body from the extinguished state to the specific light emission effect state is configured to be performed at the timing (timing t16) when the frame movable body completes the change from the first state to the second state. May be. With such a configuration, it becomes more difficult for the player to notice the change in the state of the frame movable body.

562(A) to 563(B) show modified examples of the effect patterns described with reference to FIGS. 539(A) to 540(B). In the present embodiment, in accordance with the start of the operation valid period (timing t7), a change from the state in which the inner frame movable body is in the standby position (first state) to the state in which the movement is completed (second state). A point to start, a frame movable body simulated image is not displayed, a sign is displayed from timing t5 to timing t7 before the operation valid period occurs, or when an operation is performed on the operation unit (timing t11) or operation Is not performed and the post-operation display is performed when the operation valid period ends (timing t16), which is different from the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 539(A) to 540(B). With respect to points other than these (for example, the light emission effect state of the frame movable body, the stop timing of the decorative pattern, etc.), since the effect modes are basically common, description of the parts having the same effect modes will be omitted. The different parts described above will be mainly described below.

FIG. 562(A) shows an example of the effect pattern when the player operates the operation unit during the period when the special lottery result is a big hit and the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. There is. FIG. 562(B) shows an example of the effect pattern when the player operates the operation unit during the period when the special lottery result is a loss and the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. There is. FIG. 563(A) shows an example of the effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. ing. FIG. 563(B) shows an example of the effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. ing.

In each of the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 562(A) to 563(B), a sign display, which is a display indicating that the operation valid period is generated, is started at timing t5 on the game board side effect display device 1600. .. As a sign display, the character "Push?" is displayed as an image and continues until the timing t7 when the operation valid period starts. At timing t7, the operation valid period is started, and the character "Push!!" is displayed as an image as an operation instruction display indicating that the operation unit is in the reception state. The operation instruction display ends when an operation is performed on the operation unit (timing t11) or when the operation effective period ends without any operation (timing t16), and instead, "!" is displayed as the post-operation display. Display characters as an image. The display after the operation is continued for 2 seconds and then ended (timing t13 or timing t18).

On the other hand, at the timing t7, the movement of the inner frame movable body is turned off and at the standby position (first state), the movement is started, and at the timing t9, the movement is completed (second state). Becomes

In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 562(A) and 562(B), the operation is performed on the operation unit by the player while the operation valid period is generated and the operation instruction display is being performed (timing t11). If the special lottery result is a big hit, the outer frame movable body is moved from the standby position (first state) to the completed movement (second state) and the post-operation display is performed. (Timing t11 to timing t13) If the special lottery result is a loss, the effect pattern in which only the post-operation display is displayed without changing from the state (first state) in which the outer frame movable body is in the standby position is shown. Has been done.

In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 563(A) and 563(B), when the special lottery result is a big hit at the timing (t16) when the operation valid period ends, the outer frame movable body is at the standby position. In addition to moving from the state (first state) to the completed state (second state), display after operation is performed (timing t16 to timing t18), and if the special lottery result is lost, the frame can be moved. The effect pattern is shown in which only the post-operation display is performed without changing from the state in which the body is in the standby position (first state).

Then, in the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 562(A) and 563(A), the outer frame movable body completes the change from the second state to the first state from timing t26 to timing t28. In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 562(A) to 563(B), the inner frame movable body completes the change from the second state to the first state from timing t30 to timing t32, and a series of frame movable bodies. Operation ends.

In this way, the player's consciousness is improved by performing a display (symptom display or operation instruction display) that distracts the consciousness from the frame movable body before or during the movement of the inner frame movable body. It concentrates on the game board side effect display device 1600. Further, even while the outer frame movable body is moving after the player operates the operation unit, the post-operation display is performed instead of the operation instruction display that has been performed up to that point, so that the player's consciousness is improved. It continues to be directed to the game board side effect display device 1600. With such a configuration, the player feels as if both the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body had changed from the first state to the second state before they knew it. It is possible to give. Even if it takes time to change the state of the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body from the first state to the second state, the inner frame movable body can be moved by the indication, the operation instruction display, and the post-operation display. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player feels annoyed when the body or the outer frame movable body is in the second state. Further, since it becomes possible to slowly move the frame movable body, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of a situation in which the player who is carelessly touching the frame movable body is injured.

Note that the timing of changing the frame movable body from the extinguished state to the specific light emission effect state is performed at the timing (timing t13 or timing t18) when the outer frame movable body completes the change from the first state to the second state. It may be configured as follows. With such a configuration, it becomes more difficult for the player to notice the change in the state of the frame movable body.

FIGS. 564(A) to 565(B) show modified examples of the effect patterns described with reference to FIGS. 539(A) to 540(B). In the present embodiment, when the operation of the operation unit is performed (timing t11) or when the operation valid period ends (timing t16), the inner frame movable body is moved from the standby position (first state) to the standby position. , The movement to the completed state (second state) is started, and then the outer frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state, the frame movable body simulated image is not displayed, and the operation valid period is A sign is displayed from the timing t5 to the timing t7 before the occurrence, and the display after the operation is performed when the operation unit is operated (timing t11) or when the operation valid period ends without any operation (timing t16). 539 (A) to 540 (B) is different from the effect pattern described with reference to FIG. With respect to points other than these (for example, the light emission effect state of the frame movable body, the stop timing of the decorative pattern, etc.), since the effect modes are basically common, description of the parts having the same effect modes will be omitted. The different parts described above will be mainly described below.

FIG. 564(A) shows an example of the effect pattern when the player operates the operation unit during the period when the special lottery result is a big hit and the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. There is. FIG. 564(B) shows an example of the effect pattern when the player operates the operation unit during the period when the special lottery result is a loss and the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. There is. FIG. 565(A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. ing. FIG. 565(B) shows an example of the effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. ing.

In each of the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 564(A) to 565(B), the sign display, which is a display indicating that the operation valid period is generated, is started at timing t5 on the game board side effect display device 1600. .. As a sign display, the character "Push?" is displayed as an image and continues until the timing t7 when the operation valid period starts. At the timing t7, the operation valid period is started, and the character "Push!!" is displayed as an image as an operation instruction display indicating that the operation unit is in the reception state. The operation instruction display ends when an operation is performed on the operation unit (timing t11) or when the operation effective period ends without any operation (timing t16), and instead, "!" is displayed as the post-operation display. Display characters as an image. The display after the operation is continued for 2 seconds and then ended (timing t13 or timing t18).

In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 564(A) and 564(B), the player operates the operation unit while the operation valid period is generated and the operation instruction display is being performed (timing t11). When the result of the special lottery is a big hit, after the inner frame movable body is in the standby position (first state), the state is changed to the state in which the movement is completed (second state) (timing t11 to timing t13). , When the outer frame movable body is in the standby position (first state) is changed to the completed state (second state) (timing t15 to timing t17) and the special lottery result is lost, An effect pattern that does not change from the state (first state) in which the outer frame movable body is in the standby position is shown.

In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 565(A) and 565(B), when the special lottery result is a big hit at the timing (t16) when the operation valid period ends, the inner frame movable body is at the standby position. After the state (first state) is changed to the completed state (second state) (timing t16 to timing t18), the movement is completed from the state (first state) in which the outer frame movable body is at the standby position. When the state (second state) is changed (timing t20 to timing t22) and the special lottery result is a loss, the effect pattern that does not change from the state (first state) in which the outer frame movable body is at the standby position is obtained. It is shown.

Then, in the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 564(A) and 565(A), the outer frame movable body completes the change from the second state to the first state from timing t26 to timing t28. Also, in the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 564(A) and 565(B), the inner frame movable body completes the change from the second state to the first state from timing t30 to timing t32, and a series of frame movable bodies. Operation ends.

In this way, the inner frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state, triggered by the player's operation on the operation unit, and then the outer frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state. By changing the state, the mode in which the frame movable body changes the state is slowly observed by the player, and from the viewpoint of the player, the degree of excitement gradually increases over time.

The effect patterns described with reference to FIGS. 562(A) to 563(B) and the effect patterns described with reference to FIGS. 564(A) to 565(B) are executed according to the game state. You may comprise.

For example, in the case of a normal game state in which the average variation time of the decorative pattern is relatively long (during non-stochastic variation, non-time saving, non-electric power support, etc.), FIGS. 564(A) to 565(B) It is preferable to execute the effect pattern described with reference to. In this case, the player can thoroughly enjoy the movement of the frame movable body because the effect is performed in a state where a big hit is unlikely to occur.

On the other hand, it is a state that can occur after a big hit once occurs, compared to the normal game state, the average variation time of the decorative symbol is relatively short In the case of short working hours, during power support, etc.), the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 562(A) to 563(B) may be executed. In this case, the time from when the operating unit is operated until the frame movable body becomes the second state is short, and it is possible to shift to the big hit game state with good tempo.

In the normal game state, only the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 564(A) to 565(B) can be executed, and in the state advantageous to the player, FIGS. 562(A) to 563(B). ), only the effect pattern described with reference to FIG.
Alternatively, in the normal game state, the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 564(A) to 565(B) is more than the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 562(A) to 563(B). 562(A) to 563(B) are more effective than the effect patterns described with reference to FIGS. 564(A) to 565(B) in a state in which the ratio of execution is high and which is advantageous to the player. You may comprise so that the ratio of execution of the effect pattern demonstrated with reference may be made high.

In addition, the timing of executing the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 564(A) to 565(B) is configured to be executed at an earlier stage, not immediately before the stop display of the decorative pattern is performed. Good. For example, before the decorative pattern forms the reach state, the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 564(A) to 565(B) is executed without stopping the decorative pattern, and the inner frame movable body and the outer side are executed. When the frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state, the decorative pattern may be configured to form a reach state. With such a configuration, the player who visually recognizes the manner in which the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body operate over time gradually feels the expectation that the result of the special lottery will be a big hit. It is possible to raise it. The timing at which the decorative pattern forms the reach state is preferably performed when the outer frame movable body is in the second state (for example, timing t24).

Further, after executing the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 564(A) to 565(B) as an effect of whether or not the reach state is formed, immediately before the decorative pattern is stopped. Even if it is configured to execute the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 562(A) to 563(B) or the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 564(A) to 565(B) at timing. Good.

In this way, after executing the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 564(A) to 565(B) as an effect of whether or not the reach state is formed, at the timing immediately before the decorative pattern stops. When the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 562(A) to 563(B) and the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 564(A) to 565(B) are configured to be executed, As a mode in which FIG. 564(A) to FIG. 565(B) is modified as an effect pattern of whether or not the reach state is formed, the frame movable body is merely an effect without accepting an operation on the operation unit by the player. It may be configured to execute an operating effect pattern. In this case, the operation invalid period is continued as the acceptance state of the operation unit, and the omen display, the operation instruction display, and the post-operation display are naturally not performed. By executing the effect pattern in such a modified mode, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player finds it troublesome to operate the operation unit when the expectation of a big hit is not so high.

In the effect patterns described with reference to FIGS. 562(A) to 563(B), an example is shown in which the character “Push?” is displayed as an image as a sign display, but this image is displayed as an operation instruction. You may display so that it may move to a position. In addition, it is preferable to move the frame movable body so as to move away from a position. For example, when the operation instruction display is performed in the central portion of the game board side effect display device 1600, as a sign display, from a position directly above or diagonally above the game board side effect display device 1600 toward the central portion. It is preferable that the character "Push?" is moved and displayed, and stopped and displayed in the center. Further, as the post-operation display, the character “!!” may be configured to move from the central portion of the game board side effect display device 1600 to a position directly below or obliquely below the game board side effect display device 1600. With such a configuration, it is possible to further distract the player from the upper frame movable body. As will be described later, when the frame movable body is provided below the game board side effect display device 1600, the warning display and the post-operation display may be moved upward in the opposite manner.

In the effect patterns described with reference to FIG. 564(A) to FIG. 565(B), an example in which the character “Push?” is displayed as an image as a sign display has been shown, but this image is displayed as an operation instruction. You may display so that it may move to a position. Further, it is preferable to move the frame movable body so as to approach a certain position. For example, when the operation instruction display is performed in the central part of the game board side effect display device 1600, the character "Push?" is moved and displayed from the lower part of the game board side effect display device 1600 to the central part as a sign display. It is good to configure so that. Further, as the post-operation display, the character “!!” may be configured to move from the central part of the game board side effect display device 1600 to the upper part of the game board side effect display device 1600. With such a configuration, the player's line of sight can be guided to the frame movable body, and the player can visually recognize the entire frame movable body as a whole.

In addition, the operation instruction display may be configured to display the character "!! Push!!" as a special operation instruction display that is generated only when the special lottery result is a big hit. In addition, instead of the character "!!" as the display after operation, the characters "push!!" which is the operation instruction display and the character "!!push!!" which is the special operation instruction display are continuously displayed as they are. May be. In addition, in response to the special operation instruction display “!!push!!”, the characters “!?push?!” are displayed as a special sign display, and “!! "!" may be displayed. In this way, the special characters that are displayed only when the result of the special lottery is a big hit are displayed continuously before the operation effective period and after the operation of the operation unit, which gives a great satisfaction to the player. It becomes possible.

See FIGS. 524(A) to 525(B) for FIGS. 566(A) to 566(D), FIGS. 567(A) to 567(C), and 568(A) to 568(C). This is a modification of the effect pattern described above. In these modifications, only one of the right ear frame movable body 7100 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the first frame movable body) and the left ear frame movable body 7200 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the second frame movable body). May be moved, the timings of moving the first frame movable body and the second frame movable body may be different, and the first frame movable body may be the same as the first frame movable body. Although the simulated frame movable body image is displayed, the frame movable body simulated image simulating the second frame movable body is not basically displayed for the second frame movable body, and the frame movable body is irrelevant to the operation on the operation unit. Is mainly different in that the timing at which the frame movable body operates is not limited to the timing immediately before the decorative pattern stops.

The effect patterns shown in FIG. 566(A) to FIG. 566(D), FIG. 567(A) to FIG. 567(C), and FIG. 568(A) to FIG. 568(C) are effects that are performed while the decorative symbol is changing. It is a pattern, and shows a state in which a predetermined number of seconds have elapsed from the start of variation of the decorative design (for example, 10 seconds have elapsed from the start of variation of the decorative design at timing t0).

In the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566(A), the first frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state from timing t5 to timing t7, and maintains the second state for a predetermined time (8 seconds). After that (timing t7 to timing t15), the second state changes to the first state (timing t15 to timing t17). Further, a frame movable body simulated image simulating the first frame movable body is changed from the first state to the second state in accordance with the operation of the first frame movable body, and is continuously displayed for a predetermined time in the second state. Then, the second state is changed to the second state (timing t5 to timing t17). On the other hand, the second frame movable body maintains the first state without moving from the standby position.
Further, the frame movable body simulated image simulating the second frame movable body is not displayed.

On the other hand, in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566(B), the second frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state from timing t5 to timing t7, and after maintaining the second state for a predetermined time (timing From t7 to timing t15), the second state changes to the first state (timing t15 to timing t17). When the second frame movable body operates, the frame movable body simulated image simulating the second frame movable body is not displayed. On the other hand, the first frame movable body maintains the first state without moving from the standby position. Further, the frame movable body simulated image simulating the first frame movable body is not displayed.

Comparing the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566(A) with the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566(B), in the case of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566(A), a frame movable body simulation simulating the first frame movable body is simulated. Since the image is displayed, it is easy for the player to notice that the first frame movable body has operated. On the other hand, in the case of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566(B), even if the second frame movable body is operated, the frame movable body simulated image simulating the second frame movable body is not displayed. , It is difficult for the player to notice that the second frame movable body has operated.

When the first frame movable body or the second frame movable body operates, the expectation that the special lottery result corresponding to the changing decorative pattern is a big hit is the first frame movable body or the second frame movable body operates. It is preferable to configure so that the effect pattern is selected so as to be higher than the case where it is not performed. For example, the expectations when the first frame movable body operates and the expectations when the second frame movable body operates may each be 10%. In the case of such a configuration, the frame movable body simulated image simulating the first frame movable body is displayed, and thus the first frame movable body is in an operating state with the eye on the first frame movable body. Players who have noticed that will have a sense of expectation for the big hit.

On the other hand, in order to notice the operation of the second frame movable body, it is necessary to look away from the game board side effect display device 1600 on which the decorative pattern is displayed and look at the second frame movable body. Therefore, it is frequently checked whether or not the second frame movable body is operating, or when the second frame movable body is accidentally turned to the direction in which the second frame movable body is provided, the second frame movable body is operated. You will notice that you are. In this case, the player feels that he/she can know that the expectation for the jackpot is high by his/her own power, and as a part of the effect that the frame movable body simulated image simulating the first frame movable body is displayed. Compared with the case where the one-frame movable body is visually recognized, a great sense of accomplishment is felt.

With such a configuration, the player's interest in the frame movable body can be further increased, and the player's interest, which has been within a predetermined range around the game board 5 in the past, can be further directed to the outside. It becomes possible to spread.

In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 566(A) and 566(B), the example in which the expectation when the first frame movable body and the second frame movable body operate is the same 10% is shown. ), the expectation when the second frame movable body operates in the effect pattern may be set higher than the expectation when the first frame movable body operates in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566(A). .. For example, the effect pattern may be selected so that the expected degree when the second frame movable body operates is 15% and the expected degree when the first frame movable body operates is 10%. With such a configuration, the player who notices that the second frame movable body is operating will feel a greater sense of accomplishment.

The effect pattern shown in FIG. 566(C) is an effect pattern obtained by modifying the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566(B). In this effect pattern, the time during which the second frame movable body is in the second state (timing t7 to timing t21) is 14 seconds, and the second frame movable body is second in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566(B). It is longer than 8 seconds which is the time (timing t7 to timing t15) in which the state is maintained. In this way, by making the time during which the second frame movable body is in the second state longer than the time during which the first frame movable body is in the second state, the player can set the second frame movable body to the second state. Being in the 2 state makes it easier to notice.

The expectation of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566(C) may be set higher than the expectation of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566(B). For example, the effect pattern may be selected so that the expectation of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566(B) is 15% and the expectation of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566(C) is 25%. .. With such a configuration, the player feels a greater expectation as to how much the second state is maintained from the moment when he notices that the second frame movable body is operating. The timing at which the player notices that the second frame movable body is in the second state is not constant, and it may not be known from when the player was in the second state, so the duration of being in the second state The more you continue, the greater the expectation the player will have.

In the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566(B) and the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566(C), the longer the duration of which the second frame movable body is in the second state, the higher the degree of expectation that the special lottery result is a big hit. Although the embodiment is shown in which the height is set higher, three or more effect patterns having different times in the second state may be provided. For example, an effect pattern that maintains the second state from timing t7 to timing t27 may be made executable, and the expectation of this effect pattern may be 30%.

In the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566(B) and the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566(C), the longer the duration in which the second frame movable body is in the second state, the higher the expectation that the special lottery result will be a big hit. Although it is configured to be higher, the expectation degree is suggested by the number of times the second frame movable body is in the second state, not the duration of the second frame movable body being in the second state. Good.
The effect pattern shown in FIG. 566(D) shows an example thereof. The production pattern shown in FIG. 566(D) shows an example in which the second movable frame moves from the first state to the second state twice, but the second movable frame does not perform the second operation. Alternatively, an effect pattern in which the third motion is performed after the second motion may be configured to be executable. Also in this case, it is preferable that the expectation level increases as the number of operations increases. For example, the degree of expectation when the second frame movable body operates only once is 15%, the degree of expectation when the second frame movable body operates twice is 25%, and the second frame movable body is three times It is preferable that the expectation when operating is 35%. In this way, by configuring the second frame movable body so that the degree of expectation increases as the number of times of movement of the second frame movable body increases, the player who notices at an early timing that the second frame movable body is operating is The second frame movable body is visually recognized with a great sense of expectation as to how many times the second frame movable body operates.

The effect pattern shown in FIG. 567(A) is an effect pattern obtained by modifying the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566(A). In this effect pattern, the operation mode of the first frame movable body and the display mode of the frame movable body simulated image simulating the first frame movable body are the same as the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566(A) (until timing t20. There is no difference in the mode of production). On the other hand, in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 567(A), the second frame movable body starts changing from the first state to the second state at timing t21, and changes to the second state from timing t23 to timing t33. It differs from the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566(A) in that it returns to the first state at t35. Further, in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 567(A), when moving the second frame movable body, the frame movable body simulated image simulating the second frame movable body is not displayed.

In the gaming machine capable of executing the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566(A) and the effect pattern shown in FIG. 567(A), when one of the effect patterns is executed at a predetermined timing while the decorative design is changing. The first movable frame moves from the first state to the second state, and then returns to the first state, and then the second movable frame moves to the first state at a timing when a predetermined time (4 seconds) has elapsed. In the case where it is not maintained and becomes the second state (when the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566(A) is selected) and when the second frame movable body is changed from the first state to the second state (FIG. 567(A)). (When the effect pattern shown is selected).

With such a configuration, after the player's line of sight once faces the first frame movable body during the operation of the first frame movable body, before the player's line of sight returns to the game board side effect display device 1600, Since the two-frame movable body may move, it is possible to let a player with little experience in playing the game recognize that the second-frame movable body may move.

The expectation of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 567(A) may be set higher than the expectation of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566(A). For example, the effect pattern may be selected so that the expectation of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 567(A) is 25% and the expectation of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566(A) is 10%. .. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player have an expectation that the second frame movable body will move after the first frame movable body moves.

The effect patterns shown in FIGS. 567(B) and 567(C) are effect patterns obtained by modifying the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566(A). This effect pattern differs from the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566(A) in that the operation of the first frame movable body and the display of the frame movable body simulated image simulating the first frame movable body are performed a plurality of times.

In the effect patterns shown in FIG. 567(B) and FIG. 567(C), the first frame movable body starts changing from the first state to the second state at timing t2, and from timing t4 to timing t6. After changing to the second state and returning to the first state at timing t8, the change from the first state to the second state is started again at timing t11, the second state is started from timing t13 to timing t15, and the second state is started at timing t17. The state returns to the 1 state. Further, in synchronization with the operation of the first frame movable body, the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image simulating the first frame movable body is performed.

Thereafter, in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 567(C), the second frame movable body starts changing from the first state to the second state at timing t21, and changes to the second state from timing t23 to timing t33. At t35, the state returns to the first state. On the other hand, in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 567(B), the operation of the second frame movable body is not performed.

In a gaming machine capable of executing the effect pattern shown in FIG. 567(B) and the effect pattern shown in FIG. 567(C), in the case of executing one of the effect patterns at a predetermined timing while the decorative pattern is changing. Is the second frame at the timing (timing t21) when a predetermined time (4 seconds) has elapsed after the first frame movable body changed from the first state to the second state and then returned to the first state (timing t17). There may be a case where the movable body changes from the first state to the second state, and a case where the second frame movable body maintains the first state and does not enter the second state.

With such a configuration, after the player's line of sight continues to face the first frame movable body during the operation of the first frame movable body, before the player's line of sight returns to the game board side effect display device 1600. Since the second frame movable body may move, it is possible for a player with little game experience to recognize that the second frame movable body may operate.

The degree of expectation of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 567(C) may be set higher than the degree of expectation of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 567(B). For example, the effect patterns may be selected so that the expectation of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 567(B) is 25% and the expectation of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 567(C) is 35%. .. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player have an expectation that the second frame movable body will move after the first frame movable body moves.

The effect patterns shown in FIGS. 568(A) to 568(C) are effect patterns obtained by modifying the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566(A). This effect pattern differs from the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566(A) in that the second frame movable body may move at a timing before the operation of the first frame movable body.

In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 568(A) to 568(C), the timing at which the first frame movable body operates and the timing at which the frame movable body simulated image simulating the first frame movable body are displayed are the same. .. Specifically, the first frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state from timing t21 to timing t23, and after maintaining the second state for a predetermined time (8 seconds) (timing t23 to timing t31). ), and changes from the second state to the first state (timing t31 to timing t33). Also, a frame movable body simulated image simulating the first frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state in accordance with the operation of the first frame movable body, and is continuously displayed for a predetermined time in the second state. Then, the second state is changed to the first state (timing t21 to timing t33).

On the other hand, in each effect pattern shown in FIGS. 568(A) to 568(C), the operation mode of the second frame movable body is different as shown below.

In the effect pattern shown in FIG. 568(A), the second frame movable body continues to be in the first state in the period from t0 to t39, and is not in the second state. In the effect pattern shown in FIG. 568(B), the second frame movable body starts changing from the first state to the second state at timing t5, enters the second state from timing t7 to timing t15, and ends at timing t17. In, the state returns to the first state. In the effect pattern shown in FIG. 568(C), the second frame movable body starts changing from the first state to the second state at timing t5, enters the second state from timing t7 to timing t33, and ends at timing t35. In, the state returns to the first state. It should be noted that in any of the effect patterns, the frame movable body simulated image simulating the second frame movable body is not displayed.

The expectation level of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 568(C) is set higher than that of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 568(B), and the expectation level of the effect pattern shown in FIG. ) May be higher than the expectation of the effect pattern. For example, the expectation of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 568(A) is 10%, the expectation of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 568(B) is 20%, and the expectation of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 568(C) is 30%. The effect pattern may be selected so as to be %.

Comparing the effect pattern shown in FIG. 568(A) with the effect pattern shown in FIG. 568(B), when the effect pattern shown in FIG. 568(B) is executed, the player may miss the operation of the second frame movable body. is there. For the player who can visually recognize the movement of the second frame movable body, the expectation degree can be recognized to be 20% by the movement of the first frame movable body thereafter. On the other hand, for a player who does not notice that the second frame movable body has operated, even if the first frame movable body operates, the exact degree of expectation is not well understood.

Comparing the effect pattern shown in FIG. 568(A) with the effect pattern shown in FIG. 568(C), in the case of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 568(C), the second frame is moved after the first frame movable body has moved. The movable body continues to be in the moving position (second state). Therefore, the player who notices that the first frame movable body is in the second state by looking at the frame movable body simulated image simulating the first frame movable body confirms the state of the second frame movable body. When the second frame movable body is not operating at that time and is in the first state, it can be recognized that the expectation is not so high. On the other hand, when the second frame movable body is operating at that time and is in the second state, it can be recognized that the degree of expectation is relatively high.

Comparing the effect pattern shown in FIG. 568(B) with the effect pattern shown in FIG. 568(C), when the player notices that the second frame movable body is in the second state, the second The player becomes interested in the fact that the first frame movable body may move while the frame movable body is in the second state. Then, when the first frame movable body operates and enters the second state, the player can recognize that the degree of expectation is high. On the other hand, when the second frame movable body is in the first state before the first frame movable body is in the first state, the player recognizes that the degree of expectation is relatively low. Becomes

In the effect pattern shown in FIG. 568(C), the second frame movable body is set to the first state after the first frame movable body is in the first state. With such a configuration, it is possible to entertain the player for a long period of time in a state of high expectation for the player.

Although the embodiment has been described with the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 shown in FIG. 523 as the first frame movable body and the second frame movable body, respectively, the right ear as shown in FIG. The movable frame body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 may be configured as the first movable frame body and the second movable frame body, respectively, so as to execute the effect patterns described above.

Although the embodiment has been described with the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 shown in FIG. 523 as the first frame movable body and the second frame movable body, respectively, it is shown in FIG. 538, FIG. 547, etc. One or both of the right ear inner side frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer side frame movable body 7350 is set as the first frame movable body, and either the left ear inner side frame movable body 7400 or the left ear outer side frame movable body 7450 is set. Alternatively, both may be the second frame movable body. A state in which one or both of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 is in the second state is a second state of the first frame movable body, and the left ear inner frame movable body is 7400 and the left-ear outer frame movable body 7450, or a state in which one or both of them are in the second state may be configured to execute the above-described production pattern, as the second state of the second frame movable body. ..

When executing the above-described effect pattern in the embodiment shown in FIG. 538, etc., FIG. 547, etc., one of the right ear inner side frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer side frame movable body 7350 is changed from the first state to the second state. After that, setting the other of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 from the first state to the second state is referred to as changing the first frame movable body from the first state to the second state. It may be adopted as the operation to perform. In addition, after the other of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 is changed from the second state to the first state, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 are Changing one of the second states from the second state to the first state may be adopted as the operation of changing the first frame movable body from the second state to the first state.

Similarly, in the case of executing the effect pattern described above in the embodiments shown in FIGS. 538, 547, etc., one of the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 is moved from the first state. After setting the second state, the other of the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 is changed from the first state to the second state. You may employ|adopt as operation|movement made into 2 states. In addition, after the other of the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 is changed from the second state to the first state, of the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. Changing one of the second states from the second state to the first state may be adopted as the operation of changing the second frame movable body from the second state to the first state.

In this way, the change in the state caused by the continuous operation of the plurality of frame movable bodies may be summarized as the change in the state of one frame movable body.

The right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 are used as the first frame movable bodies to change the state, and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are used as the second frame movable body. Although the example in which the state is changed has been shown, only one of the right inner ear frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 is configured to operate as the first frame movable body, and the other does not operate and is in the standby state. It may be configured to remain as it is. Alternatively, only one of the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 is configured to operate as the second frame movable body, and the other is configured not to operate and remain in the standby state. May be.

For example, of the right-ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right-ear outer frame movable body 7350, only the right-ear inner frame movable body 7300 is changed to the first frame movable body, and the left-ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left-ear inner frame movable body 7400 are changed. The outer ear frame movable body 7450 may be configured to change the state as a second frame movable body.

In this case, the first frame movable body and the second frame movable body have different areas visually recognized in a front view and a side view. Specifically, since the first frame movable body is composed of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the visible area is relatively small, and the second frame movable body is the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear. Since it is composed of the outer frame movable body 7450, the visible area becomes relatively large.

With such a configuration, when the state of the first frame movable body is relatively small, a frame movable body simulated image corresponding to the change of the state of the first frame movable body is displayed when the state is changed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player overlooks the change in the state of the first frame movable body. On the other hand, when changing the state of the relatively large second frame movable body, the second frame movable body changes the state by not displaying the frame movable body simulated image corresponding to the second frame movable body. When the player becomes aware of this, it is possible to give a greater surprise to the player.

The structure of the plurality of movable frame members described with reference to FIGS. 553 and 554 may be configured to execute the effect pattern described above.

For example, the curtain plate bottom unit right foot movable body 7700 may be the first frame movable body, and the curtain plate bottom unit left foot movable body 7750 may be the second frame movable body. Furthermore, the state in which the curtain plate bottom unit right leg movable body 7700 and the curtain plate bottom unit left leg movable body 7750 are in the standby positions shown in FIGS. 553(A), 553(C), and 554(A) is the first state. , 553(B), 553(D), and 554(B) may be configured to execute the above-mentioned effect pattern with the state at the moving position as the second state.

Alternatively, the door frame side unit right arm upper arm portion 7620 and the door frame side unit right arm lower arm portion 7630 are used as the first frame movable body, and the door frame side unit left arm upper arm portion 7670 and the door frame side unit left arm lower arm portion 7680 are used as the second frame. It may be a movable body. Further, the door frame side unit right arm upper arm portion 7620, the door frame side unit right arm lower arm portion 7630, the door frame side unit left arm upper arm portion 7670, and the door frame side unit left arm lower arm portion 7680 are shown in FIGS. 553(A) and 553( C), the state at the standby position shown in FIG. 554(A) is the first state, and the state at the moving position shown in FIGS. 553(B), 553(D), 554(B) is the second state. Alternatively, the above-described effect pattern may be executed.

For example, when the effect pattern shown in FIG. 567(A) is executed, the door frame side unit right arm upper arm portion 7620 and the door frame side unit right arm lower arm portion 7630 become the door frame side unit right arm upper arm portion 7620 and the door frame. While displaying a frame movable body simulated image simulating the side unit right arm lower arm portion 7630, after changing from the state in the standby position (first state) to the state in the moving position (second state), the state changes to the standby position. The state changes to a certain state (first state), and then the door frame side unit left arm upper arm portion 7670 and the door frame side unit left arm lower arm portion 7680 become the door frame side unit left arm upper arm portion 7670 and the door frame side unit left arm lower arm portion. Without displaying the frame movable body simulation image simulating 7680, the state at the standby position (first state) is changed to the state at the moving position (second state), and then the state at the standby position (first state) State).

Alternatively, one or both of the curtain board bottom unit right foot movable body 7700 and the curtain board bottom unit left foot movable body 7750 are used as the first frame movable body, and the door frame top unit face decoration portion 7500 has the door frame top unit face movable. At least one of a body 7510, a right ear frame movable body 7100, a left ear frame movable body 7200, a door frame top unit lower face nose movable body 7522, and a door frame top unit lower face mouth movable body 7524 is a second frame movable body. May be Further, the curtain plate bottom unit right foot movable body 7700, the curtain board bottom unit left foot movable body 7750, the door frame top unit face movable body 7510, the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, the door frame top unit face lower surface. A state in which the nose movable body 7522 and the door frame top unit face lower mouth movable body 7524 are at the standby positions shown in FIGS. 553(A), 553(C), and 554(A) is referred to as a first state, and FIG. B), FIG. 553(D), and the state at the moving position shown in FIG. 554(B) may be set as the second state, and the effect pattern described above may be executed.

For example, the curtain pattern bottom unit right leg movable body 7700 may be a first frame movable body, and the door frame top unit facial movable body 7510 may be a second frame movable body to execute the above-described effect pattern. In this case, the frame movable body simulated image is not displayed for the door frame top unit facial movable body 7510 which is larger than the curtain board bottom unit right leg movable body 7700. With such a configuration, when the player notices that the door frame top unit facial movable body 7510 (second frame movable body) is changing the state, a greater surprise is given to the player. Can be given.

In addition to the door frame top unit movable body 7510, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are also movable as a second frame, and the door frame top unit movable body 7510 is stored below. After the upward movement from the closed position is completed, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are housed in the door frame top unit facial movable body 7510 and the upward movement is completed. This state may be the second state of the second frame movable body.

In this way, the first frame movable body and the second frame movable body are provided at positions facing each other across the game area 5a and the game board side effect display device 1600 with a distance therebetween, whereby the player Is configured such that when one of the movable frame bodies is visually recognized, the other movable frame body is less likely to be visually recognized by the player. In particular, when the effect pattern as shown in FIG. 567(A) is executed, the player's consciousness is concentrated on the first frame movable body, and the second frame movable body at a far position on the visual angle is in the field of view. It will not enter. Then, it becomes possible to give the player who is aware of the state after the operation of the second frame movable body a big surprise that the second frame movable body has changed to an unexpected state.

Although the production pattern that does not display the frame movable body simulated image simulating the second frame movable body when the second frame movable body is operated has been shown, the frame movable body simulating the second frame movable body only for a short time. It may be configured to display a simulated image. In this case, the game board side effect display device 1600 displays a frame movable body simulated image simulating the second frame movable body for a short period (for example, 1 second) in a predetermined period in the latter half of the second frame movable body being in the second state. May be displayed. For example, it may be configured to display a frame movable body simulated image simulating the second frame movable body from timing t30 to timing t31 in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 567(A).

With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player does not notice that the second frame movable body has operated.

Alternatively, the frame movable body simulated image simulating the second frame movable body may be displayed from timing t33 to timing t34 in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 567(A).

In the case of such a configuration, the player visually recognizes the state in which the second frame movable body is changing from the second state to the first state, and the player recognizes that the second frame movable body is You will feel the regret that you could not enjoy the second state. Thereby, in the subsequent games, it becomes possible to raise the consciousness that the second frame movable body may be operating unknowingly.

Although the effect pattern in which the frame movable body operates is shown with reference to FIGS. 524(A) to 525(B), when the frame movable body is moved in this manner, the player moves to an unexpected position. When the movable frame body is located after the movement, the player may make his or her hand or head violently contact with the movable frame body, and the player may be injured or the movable frame body may be damaged. On the other hand, in the gaming machine capable of operating the frame movable body, in addition to the operation of the frame movable body, various effects are performed on the game board 5 side, and effects are executed in an excessive manner for the player. There is a risk that The embodiments described below are intended to solve such problems. 569 and 570, 571 and 572, 573 and 574, 575 and 576 are shown in FIGS. 524 and 525, 533 and 534, 539 and 540, 548 and 549, respectively. It shows a modified example of the effect pattern described with reference to each.

In each of the embodiments shown in FIGS. 569 and 570, 571 and 572, 573 and 574, and 575 and 576, the volume of the fluctuating effect sound is lowered from the normal state at a predetermined timing. It is configured to be in the suppressed state. The variation effect sound is a sound in which a predetermined music is reproduced in accordance with the variation of the decorative pattern and is recognized by the player like background music. For example, a musical piece consisting of a voice sung by a predetermined singer and the performance sounds of a plurality of musical instruments is played for several minutes, and during that period, the variation of the decorative pattern (for example, the variation results of the decorative pattern are all non-reachable and the variation time is 10 on average). In case of about 2 seconds) is performed multiple times. By outputting such a fluctuating effect sound to the player, it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game. A plurality of such music pieces may be prepared in advance, and the reproduction of a different music piece may be started at the timing when the reproduction of a certain music piece is completed. Alternatively, in accordance with the change in the gaming state, the music that has been reproduced up to that point may be faded out during reproduction, and another music different from the music that was being reproduced may be reproduced. In the present embodiment, the state in which the effect is excessive is suppressed by suppressing the volume of such a variable effect sound in accordance with the timing at which the frame movable body operates.

In addition, in the present embodiment, a special sound that reminds the player that the frame movable body operates or that the frame movable body operates is reproduced for a short time in synchronization with the timing when the frame movable body operates. .. As the special evoking sound, instead of emitting a sound that is recognized as a series of music that is played for a long time like a variable effect sound, a sound effect (for example, a chime sound such as "ping pawn") is played in 1 second. Alternatively, it is preferable to reproduce a music piece whose reproduction is finished in a short period of time (for example, 2 seconds), or to reproduce a sound like tapping a drum continuously (for example, a sound such as “dococodoco...”) for several seconds. Further, it is preferable that the sound forming the special arousal sound does not include the musical instrument sound used as a part of the variation effect sound. In addition, the special alert sound is output at a predetermined volume without being affected by the output state of the variable effect sound. For example, even in the normal state in which the volume of the fluctuating effect sound is not suppressed or in the suppression state in which the volume of the fluctuating effect sound is suppressed, the special evoking sound is output at the predetermined volume. Further, it is preferable that the volume of the special alert sound is larger than the volume of the fluctuating effect sound in the suppressed state. In the production pattern described below, the state in which the special evoking sound is output may be maintained for about 10 seconds. In this case, it is preferable to repeatedly reproduce such a sound effect or a music piece whose reproduction is finished in a short period of time, and maintain the state in which the special evoking sound is output.

In this way, by suppressing the volume of the fluctuating effect sound and generating the special evoking sound in accordance with the operation of the frame movable body, it is possible to prevent the effect provided to the player from becoming excessive. Become. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the player from being injured or being damaged by the frame movable body coming into contact with the frame movable body.

In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 569(A) to 570(B), the variable effect is generated at the timing (timing t7) when the frame movable body starts moving from the standby position (first state) to the movement position. The sound state is set to the suppressed state and the special arousal sound is output. The output of the special alert sound is configured to end at the timing when the operation on the operation unit is performed (timing t14) or at the timing when the operation valid period ends (timing t18). Further, the variation effect sound suppression state is also configured to end at the timing when the operation unit is operated (timing t14) or the timing when the operation valid period ends (timing t18).

In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 571(A) to 572(B), the timing (timing t9) at which the frame movable body is changed from the state in which the frame movable body is in the standby position (first state) to the state in which rotation is started (second state). ), the state of the variable effect sound is set to the suppressed state and the state of outputting the special evoking sound is configured. The output of the special alert sound is configured to end at the timing when the operation on the operation unit is performed (timing t14) or at the timing when the operation valid period ends (timing t18). The variation effect sound suppression state is also configured to end at the timing when the operation unit is operated (timing t14) or the timing when the operation valid period ends (timing t18).

In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 573(A) to 574(B), fluctuations occur at the timing (timing t7) at which the inner frame movable body starts moving from the standby position (first state) to the movement position. The state of the effect sound is set to the suppressed state and the state of outputting the special evoking sound is configured. The output of the special alert sound is configured to end at the timing when the operation on the operation unit is performed (timing t14) or at the timing when the operation valid period ends (timing t18). Further, the variation effect sound suppression state is also configured to end at the timing when the operation unit is operated (timing t14) or the timing when the operation valid period ends (timing t18).

In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 575(A) to 576(B), timing (timing) when the inner frame movable body is in the standby position (first state) and started to rotate (second state). At t5), the state of the variable effect sound is set to the suppressed state and the state of outputting the special evoking sound is configured. The output of the special alert sound is configured to end at the timing when the operation on the operation unit is performed (timing t14) or at the timing when the operation valid period ends (timing t18). Further, the variation effect sound suppression state is also configured to end at the timing when the operation unit is operated (timing t14) or the timing when the operation valid period ends (timing t18).

In this way, the effect state becomes excessive by changing the output state of the variable effect sound from the normal state to the suppressed state and changing the special evoking sound from the non-output state to the output state at the timing when the frame movable body starts operating. This can be suppressed.

Further, as shown with reference to FIGS. 573(A) to 574(B), when a plurality of frame movable bodies can sequentially operate, at the timing when the second frame movable body starts operating. The output state of the fluctuating effect sound is changed from the suppressed state to the normal state, and the special alert sound is changed from the output state to the non-output state. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation effect sound necessary for the effect from being excessively stopped.

The timing for returning the output state of the fluctuating effect sound from the suppressed state to the normal state and the timing for turning off the output state of the special evoking sound are when the player operates the operation unit or when the operation valid period ends. It's time to do it. This is because the predetermined time has elapsed since the movable frame body moved, so that it is less meaningful to suppress the variation effect sound, and the frame movable body simulated image is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 to display the frame. This is because the player notices that the movable body has moved.

On the other hand, the timing at which the output state of the fluctuating effect sound is changed from the suppressed state to the normal state or the timing at which the output state of the special evoking sound is changed from the output state to the non-output state may be set when the frame movable body returns to the first state. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player is injured or the frame movable body is damaged due to the player contacting the frame movable body. In the case of the effect pattern in which the plurality of frame movable bodies return to the first state at different timings, the output state of the fluctuating effect sound is suppressed at the latest timing when the frame movable body that is in the first state returns to the first state. It is preferable to return the state to the normal state and change the output state of the special alert sound from the output state to the non-output state.

Alternatively, the timing for changing the output state of the variable effect sound from the suppressed state to the normal state at the timing when the operation unit is operated or the timing when the operation valid period ends, while changing the special audible sound from the output state to the non-output state May be when the frame movable body returns to the first state. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player is injured or the frame movable body is damaged due to the player contacting the frame movable body.

Alternatively, the special alert sound is changed from the output state to the non-output state at the timing when the operation unit is operated or when the operation valid period ends, and the timing at which the output state of the variable effect sound is returned from the suppressed state to the normal state is set. The time may be when the frame movable body returns to the first state.
With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player is injured or the frame movable body is damaged due to the player contacting the frame movable body.

If there are a plurality of frame movable bodies and there are a plurality of timings at which the frame movable bodies start operating, as in the effect patterns described with reference to FIGS. 573 and 574, and FIGS. 575 and 576, respectively, a plurality of frame movable bodies It may be configured to output different special calling sounds corresponding to each of the above.

In the effect patterns described with reference to FIGS. 573 and 574, the output state of the variable effect sound is suppressed at the timing when the operation unit is operated (timing t14) or at the timing when the operation valid period ends (timing t18). Although an example is shown in which the state is changed to the normal state and the special sound is not output, the fluctuation effect sound is suppressed and the special sound is generated even after the timing when the operation part is operated or the operation valid period ends. The sound output state may be continued in some cases.

For example, in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 573(A), until the timing t15 when the outer frame movable body is moving to the movement position or the timing t16 when the outer frame movable body completes the movement to the movement position, or the outer frame movement is performed. It may be configured to continue the variation effect sound suppression state or the special awakening sound output state until timing t27 when the body is moving to the standby position or timing t28 when the outer frame movable body completes the movement to the standby position. ..

Also, in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 574(A), until the timing t19 when the outer frame movable body is moving to the movement position or the timing t20 when the outer frame movable body completes the movement to the movement position, or the outer frame movement is performed. It may be configured to continue the variation effect sound suppression state or the special awakening sound output state until timing t27 when the body is moving to the standby position or timing t28 when the outer frame movable body completes the movement to the standby position. ..

On the other hand, in the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 573(B) and 574(B), the effect patterns are not transformed, and in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 573(B), the effect shown in FIG. 574(B) at timing t14. In the pattern, at the timing t18, the output state of the fluctuating effect sound is changed from the suppressed state to the normal state, and the special alert sound is set to the non-output state.

In this way, when the outer frame movable body operates (that is, when the special lottery result is a big hit), the variation effect sound suppression state and the special awakening sound output state are changed according to the operation of the outer frame movable body. By being configured to continue, the player may be injured when the player comes into contact with the outer frame movable body that is moving to the moving position or has moved to the moving position (second state), It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the outer frame movable body is damaged. In particular, the outer frame movable body starts moving at the timing when it is determined that the special lottery result is a big hit, so the player feels a great deal of excitement, but according to such an embodiment, It is possible to make the player recognize that the outer frame movable body is operating without making the player entertain.

The timing of outputting the special alert sound may be limited. For example, the special alert sound is output only during at least one of the period in which the frame movable body is changing from the first state to the second state and the period in which the frame movable body is changing from the second state to the first state. May be.

For example, in the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 569(A) to 570(B), a period during which the frame movable body is changing from the first state to the second state (a period from timing t7 to timing t9), the frame movable body. The special alert sound is output only in at least one of the periods (the period from the timing t22 to the timing t24) during which is changing from the second state to the first state, and the special alert sounds are not output in the other periods. You may comprise. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player comes into contact with the frame movable body.

In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 573(A) and 574(B), the inner frame movable body is changing from the first state to the second state (the period from timing t7 to timing t9), the inner frame. The special evoking sound is output only in at least one period of the period in which the movable body is changing from the second state to the first state (the period from timing t30 to timing t32), and the special evoking sound is not output in other periods. It may be configured as follows. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the situation in which the player comes into contact with the frame movable body.

Further, in the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 573(A) and 574(A), the period during which the outer frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state (in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 573(A), timing t14). From the timing t16 to the timing t16, in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 574(A) from the timing t18 to the timing t20), the outer frame movable body changes from the second state to the first state (timing t26 to timing t28). The special alert sound may be output only in at least one period, and the special alert sound may not be output in other periods. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the situation in which the player comes into contact with the frame movable body.

Also, a period during which the inner frame movable body is changing from the first state to the second state (a period from timing t7 to timing t9), and a period during which the inner frame movable body is changing from the second state to the first state (timing During a period from t30 to timing t32), a period during which the outer frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state (in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 573(A), the period from timing t14 to timing t16, and FIG. 574(A)). In the effect pattern shown, from the timing t18 to the timing t20), during at least one of the period (timing t26 to timing t28) during which the outer frame movable body changes from the second state to the first state, the special awakening sound is generated. It may be configured such that the special alerting sound is output during other periods.
Even with such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the situation in which the player comes into contact with the frame movable body.

In each of the effect patterns described above, the state of the variable effect sound may be set to the suppressed state, and then the special sound may be output with a slight delay. For example, the special alert sound may be output 2 seconds after the variation effect sound is suppressed. For example, in the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 569(A) to 570(B), the variable effect sound may be suppressed at the timing t7, and then the special alert sound may be output at the timing t9. With such a configuration, the player can clearly recognize that the variation effect sound is in a suppressed state and that the special evoking sound has a property different from that of the variation effect sound.

Alternatively, in each of the above-described effect patterns, the state of the variable effect sound may be set to the suppressed state at a timing that is a predetermined time before the timing at which the special evoking sound is output. For example, the variation effect sound may be suppressed 2 seconds before the timing of outputting the special alert sound. For example, in the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 569(A) to 570(B), the variable effect sound may be suppressed at the timing t5, and then the special alert sound may be output at the timing t7. With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly recognize that the variation effect sound is in a suppressed state and that the special evoking sound has a property different from that of the variation effect sound.

The timing for ending the output of the special alert sound may be a predetermined timing. For example, the special alert sound may be output only for the first two seconds after the movable frame starts moving. For example, in the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 569(A) to 570(B), the variable effect sound is suppressed at timing t7, the special sound is output, and the special sound is output at timing t9. It may be configured to end. The variable effect sound may end at the timing when the operation unit is operated (timing t14) or at the timing when the operation valid period ends (timing t18). With such a configuration, the variation effect sound continues to be suppressed even after the timing at which the output of the special arousal sound ends, so that the player can easily recognize that the special arousal sound has been output.

The fluctuation effect sound may be suppressed and the special evoking sound may be output before the operation of the movable frame body is started. For example, the fluctuation effect sound may be suppressed and the special evoking sound may be output at a timing of 2 seconds before the frame movable body starts moving. For example, in the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 569(A) to 570(B), the variable effect sound is suppressed at timing t5, the output of the special evoking sound is started, and the state of the frame movable body is started at timing t7. May be configured to start the operation of changing the state from the first state to the second state. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that the frame movable body moves, and it is possible to prevent the player from contacting the frame movable body and being injured.

The operation valid period may be generated in accordance with the timing when the operation of the frame movable body is started and the variation effect sound is suppressed. For example, in the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 573(A) to 574(B), an operation valid period is generated at timing t7, operation instruction display is started, and the light emission effect state of the frame movable body is turned off. It is good to configure as follows. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that the frame movable body moves, and it is possible to prevent the player from contacting the frame movable body and being injured.

By slowly rotating the frame movable body in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 532, 535, 536, and 537 by a predetermined angle, the time charts shown in FIGS. 524(A) to 525(B). Alternatively, it may be operated like the frame movable body in the modified examples of the time charts shown in FIGS. 524(A) to 525(B). For example, the frame movable body in the embodiment shown in FIG. 532 may be rotated 90 degrees clockwise as viewed from the right over 2 seconds. When moving the frame movable body to the standby position, it is preferable to rotate the frame movable body 90 degrees counterclockwise as viewed from the right over 2 seconds.

Further, the outer frame movable body and the inner frame movable body in the embodiments shown with reference to FIGS. 547, 550, 551 and 552, respectively, are shown in the time charts shown in FIGS. 539 and 540 or FIGS. 539 and 540. It may be operated like the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body in the modification of the time chart shown in FIG. For example, the outer frame movable body in the embodiment shown in FIG. 547 may be rotated 90 degrees clockwise as viewed from the right over 2 seconds. Furthermore, the special lottery result is a big hit, and the inner frame movable body may be rotated 90 degrees clockwise as viewed from the right over 2 seconds at the timing when the operation portion is operated or the operation valid period end timing. .. When moving to the standby position, the inner frame movable body is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the right over 2 seconds, and then the outer frame movable body is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the right over 2 seconds. It is good to rotate 90 degrees around.

The frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 523, 528, 529, 530, and 531 is described with reference to FIGS. 538, 541, 542, 543 and 544, and 545 and 546, respectively. In the state in which the inner frame movable body described above, the outer frame movable body described with reference to FIG. 538, FIG. 541, FIG. 542, FIG. 543 and FIG. 544, and FIG. 545 and FIG. The body, or one or both of the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body may be configured to continue the vertical movement of about 1 to 2 cm or the rotation movement of about 5 degrees. With such a configuration, it is possible for the player to easily notice that the movable frame body, the movable inner frame body, and the movable outer frame body have moved to the second state.

In the embodiments described with reference to FIGS. 533 and 534 and FIGS. 548 and 549, respectively, the rotation direction of the frame movable body is clockwise as viewed from the right side. Therefore, as compared with the case where the rotation direction of the frame movable body is counterclockwise when viewed from the right side, when the player puts his or her hand on the frame, the hand or the like is caught in the door frame top unit 570. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of situations.

On the other hand, in the embodiments shown in FIGS. 533 and 534, 548 and 549, the frame movable body may be configured to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the right side. With such a configuration, the rotating body is visually recognized as approaching the player, and the player can visually recognize the frame movable body in a powerful manner.

In the embodiments shown in FIGS. 533 and 534 and FIGS. 548 and 549, the frame movable body, the inner frame movable body, and the outer frame movable body are not rotated when they are rotated around 360 degrees or more in the second state. It may be configured such that the rotation operation in the clockwise direction when viewed from the right and the counterclockwise rotation operation when viewed from the right are alternately repeated within the moving range. For example, as shown in FIG. 532(B), FIG. 532(E) or FIG. 547(B), FIG. 547(E), with the frame movable body, the inner frame movable body, and the outer frame movable body standing upright, The frame movable body, the inner frame movable body, and the outer frame movable body may be configured to repeat the rotating operation within a range of 45 degrees on the front side and 45 degrees on the rear side. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player's hand or the like is caught on the frame and the hand or the like is caught in the door frame top unit 570.

In addition, in the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body shown in FIGS. 547(A) to 547(E), when the inner frame movable body performs the rotating operation in the clockwise direction when viewed from the right side, When the movable frame body rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the right, and when the movable inner frame rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the right, the movable outer frame moves from the right when viewed from the right. It may be configured so as to perform a rotating operation around it. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player's hand or the like is caught on the frame and the hand or the like is caught in the door frame top unit 570.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 523 and 538, the frame movable body includes the light emitting unit, but the frame movable body is illuminated at a predetermined position outside the frame movable body (for example, inside the door frame top unit 570). It may be configured such that it has a light emitting section for illuminating the movable frame body. Alternatively, both of them may be provided, and the frame movable body may be illuminated by the light emitting section of the frame movable body and the light emitting section outside the frame movable body to be in a predetermined effect state.

On the other hand, in the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 532(A) to 532(E) and 547(A) to 547(E), right-side light emission in the door frame top unit corresponds to the frame movable body. The example in which the door portion 7050 and the left-side light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit are provided in the door frame top unit 570 has been described. The inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are provided with light emitting portions respectively, so that the door frame top unit inner right light emitting portion 7050, the door The movable frame may be configured to emit light in the same light emitting mode as the left light emitting portion 7052 in the frame top unit. Alternatively, both of them may be provided, and the frame movable body may be illuminated by the light emitting section of the frame movable body and the light emitting section outside the frame movable body to be in a predetermined effect state.

With reference to FIGS. 523 to 576, examples have been shown in which the frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state, or changes from the second state to the third state or the fourth state. A player or a store clerk at a game store pushes the frame movable body in the middle of changing to the second state or the frame movable body that has completed the transition from the second state to the fourth state with his/her hand, so that the initial stage is reluctant. The configuration may be such that it can be returned to the state of being positioned (first state). In this case, a drive mechanism (not shown) that drives the frame movable body is provided with a sensor capable of detecting the position of the frame movable body, and when the frame movable body is positioned at the initial position at a timing that should not be positioned at the initial position, May determine that an operation such as pushing has been performed by a player or a store clerk of the game shop, and the frame movable body may be configured to remain at the initial position without further operating the drive mechanism.

With such a configuration, the frame movable body can be returned to the initial position (first state) by the player or the clerk of the game store at any timing. Further, even when a heavy article (such as a bag carried by the player) is placed on the frame movable body, the drive mechanism for operating the frame movable body is controlled so as not to operate the frame movable body. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the load on the drive mechanism. In addition, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a player or a clerk of a game store is injured.

Referring to FIGS. 523 to 576, modifications of the basic structure of the frame movable body and the structure of the frame movable body, a basic control mode of the frame movable body and a modification of the control mode of the frame movable body are shown. However, the predetermined embodiment or modification of the control mode of the frame movable body may be applied to the predetermined embodiment or modification of the structure of the frame movable body. Further, one or more other examples or modified examples of the structure of the frame movable body may be applied to the predetermined examples or modified examples of the structure of the frame movable body. Further, one or more other examples or modified examples of the control mode of the frame movable body may be applied to the predetermined examples or modified examples of the control mode of the frame movable body.

The embodiments may be applied by combining the production examples in the embodiments and the technical matters in the production examples in combination. Further, the technical matters in the respective accessory configurations may be combined and applied to form an embodiment.

(Second embodiment)
The second embodiment will be described below based on the embodiment shown in FIGS. 577 to 604.

[35. Improper measures against obstacle nails]
By the way, a plurality of obstacle nails are installed in the rolling area of the game ball in the gaming machine, but conventionally, the obstacle nail is illegally bent by a malicious player, etc., so that the game ball is won. There was a fraudulent act of leading many gaming balls to the prize hole illegally.

For example, if you enter a game store after closing the store, open the door frame and bend the obstacle nail directly with a tool etc., or open a piano wire etc. into the game area during the game and open the obstacle nail. An illegal act such as bending the game ball in an advantageous direction is illegally performed, and such an illegal act causes a great deal of damage to the game shop. The embodiments to be described below have been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a means for preventing fraudulent acts on an obstacle nail.

[35-1. Game board]
FIG. 577 shows a front view of the game board 5′ in the second embodiment, and FIG. 578 shows an exploded front perspective view of the game board 5′. As shown in the figure, the game board 5'in the present embodiment mainly includes a front unit 2000, a game panel 1100, and a back unit 3000.

The back unit 3000 is mainly composed of a movable effect unit 3600 for performing movable effect by various movable members, and a game board side effect display device 1600 arranged behind the movable effect unit 3600 for displaying game information and effect display as an image. Has been done. The effects produced by the game board side effect display device 1600 and the movable effect unit 3600 are configured to be visible to the player through an opening formed in the center of the game panel 1100.

As shown in the exploded front perspective view of the game board 5′ shown in FIG. 578 and the exploded front perspective view of the game panel 1100 shown in FIG. 579, the panel board 1110 has a front component member 1000 on its front side. An outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 are attached, a plurality of obstacle nails 1200, various winning devices (general winning opening 2001, first starting opening 2002), and the like are provided, and an opening extending to the central portion of the panel plate 1110. The front unit 2000 is fitted into the portion from the front and is fixed to the panel plate 1110 from the front by a screw (not shown).

[35-2. Panel board]
The panel board 1110 in this embodiment is formed of a colorless and transparent acrylic plate material having a thickness of about 10 mm. Examples of the material of the panel board 1110 include transparent synthetic resin boards such as polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, and methacrylic resin.

In addition, a plurality of obstacle nails 1200 are planted in the panel board 1110 in the present embodiment, and the left side game area 5'a and the right side game area 5b are arranged in the panel board 1110 in correspondence with the shooting direction of the game ball. It is configured on the front. That is, as shown in the exploded front perspective view of FIG. 579, a right side game area 5b is formed as a rolling area of a game ball shot by a player's right hit, and the right side of the panel plate 1110 is centered. A panel convex portion 1117 having a convex shape toward the opening is integrally formed with the panel plate 1110. Then, on the front side of the panel convex portion 1117, obstacle nails 1201 to 1218 are planted as shown in the arrangement plan view of the obstacle nails of FIG. 582.

[35-3. Table unit]
As shown in the exploded front perspective view of the game panel 1100 of FIG. 579, the table unit 2000 in the present embodiment is formed in a substantially annular shape by a colorless and transparent acrylic plate material having a thickness of about 2 mm, and mainly, The stage 2530, the warp outlet 2522, the special winning opening 2005, the flow path device 2700, an area cover member 2600 described later, and the like are included.

Further, as shown in the enlarged front perspective view of the game panel 1100 of FIG. 580 and the exploded front perspective view of the area cover member 2600 of FIG. 581, the front view right side of the table unit 2000 has a game ball shot by a right hit. A flow path device 2700 for receiving and flowing down the flow path device 2700 is provided. The flow path device 2700 includes a first flow path forming member 2720a and a second flow path that are provided in parallel on the left and right as illustrated in FIG. 581. And the forming member 2720b.

Above the first flow path forming member 2720a and the second flow path forming member 2720b, a first flow path entrance ball port 2710a and a second flow path entrance ball port 2710b for receiving a game ball shot by right-handing are provided respectively. Further, the lower part is provided with a first flow path outlet 2730a and a second flow path outlet 2730b. Therefore, the game ball shot by right-handing enters the first flow path entrance 2710a or the second flow path entrance 2710b and is discharged from the first flow path outlet 2730a or the second flow path exit 2730b. Then, the game ball is configured to be discharged to the right side game area 5b formed on the panel plate 1110 described above.

[35-4. Right game area]
In this embodiment, obstacle nails 1201 to 1218 are planted in the panel convex portion 1117 that constitutes the right game area 5b as described above, and more specifically, the arrangement plan view of the obstacle nails in FIG. 582. Obstacle nails 1201 to 1218 are implanted in the arrangement as shown in FIG. 1 to form the flow paths of a plurality of game balls. That is, three obstruction nails 1201, 1202, 1203 are planted at equal intervals above the panel convex portion 1117, and 12 obstruction nails 1204 to 1215 are below the two obstruction nails 1202 in the substantially vertical direction. The obstruction nails are planted in a manner close to each other. Further, three obstacle nails 1216 to 1218 are planted adjacent to each other in a substantially oblique direction below the nails. In the present embodiment, the obstacle nails are planted in the above-described arrangement, but the arrangement is not necessarily limited to such arrangement, and the obstacle nails may be appropriately planted in arbitrary positions. It is possible.

[35-5. Area cover member]
Further, as shown in the enlarged front perspective view of the game panel 1100 of FIG. 580 and the exploded front perspective view of the area cover member 2600 of FIG. 581, the table unit 2000 of the present embodiment includes the above-described flow path device 2700 and the right side. A region cover member 2600 is attached so as to cover the game region 5b from the front side.

The area cover member 2600 of the present embodiment is formed of a colorless and transparent acrylic plate material having a thickness of about 2 mm and extending in the vertical direction as shown in the drawing. According to such a configuration, it is possible to visually recognize the rolling state of the game ball on the back side through the area cover member 2600 while covering the flow path device 2700 and the right side game area 5b.

Note that the thickness of the area cover member 2600 is not necessarily limited to the thickness in this embodiment and can be changed as appropriate, and the material forming the area cover member 2600 can also be, for example, polycarbonate resin, It is also possible to use a colorless and transparent synthetic resin plate such as polyarylate resin or methacrylic resin.

Further, the area cover member 2600 is formed in a substantially flat shape on both the front surface and the back surface, and a penetrating portion 2610 including penetrating portions 2611 to 2620 is formed at a lower position in front view as a plurality of openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. ing. Then, these penetrating portions 2611 to 2620 are configured to function as accommodating portions capable of accommodating the nail heads of the obstacle nails 1201 to 1218 implanted in the panel convex portion 1117 of the right game area 5b.

More specifically, as shown in the enlarged front perspective view of the game panel 1100 of FIG. 580 and the exploded rear perspective view of the region cover member 2600 of FIG. 583, the front cover circular penetrating portion 2611 of the region cover member 2600 is shown. To 2613, the nail heads of the obstacle nails 1201 to 1203 are accommodated, and the obstruction nails of the obstacle nails 1204 to 1209 and 1212 to 1215 that are close to each other are included in the elongated hole-shaped penetrating portions 2614 to 2618. Two penetrating portions 2619 that are housed two by two and have a long hole that is longer than the penetrating portions 2614 to 2618 are configured to house the nail heads of three obstacle nails 1216 to 1218. Further, a penetrating portion 2620 having a notch in a part thereof is formed at the right end of the area cover member 2600 when viewed from the front, and the penetrating portion 2620 has a nail head of two adjacent obstacle nails 1210 and 1211. Is configured to be accommodated.

Further, as shown in the exploded rear perspective view of the area cover member 2600 in FIG. 583, a plurality of ball restricting protrusions 2640 are integrally formed on the back surface side of the area cover member 2600, and the area cover member 2600 is concerned. By contacting the ball restricting projection 2640 with the game ball rolling on the back side of the game ball, it is possible to reduce the flow-down speed of the game ball, prevent ball clogging, and regulate the rolling direction. ..

Further, as shown in an exploded rear perspective view of the area cover member 2600 of FIG. 583, mounting bosses 2630 to 2633 are integrally provided on the back surface side of the area cover member 2600 and removed from the front of the game panel 1100. To prevent this, the area cover member 2600 is fixed by screws (not shown) on the back side. Further, as shown in FIG. 583, screws are screwed from the rear of the game panel 1100 to the mounting bosses 2630, 2631, 2633 so that the area cover member 2600 cannot be easily removed from the back side of the game panel 1100. Although the screw can be accessed, the screw screwed to the mounting boss 2632 is blocked by the panel plate 1110 so that the screw cannot be accessed. More specifically, since the mounting bosses 2630 to 2633 are screwed to the front unit 2000 fixed to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 with screws, the front cover 2000 itself is temporarily removed when the area cover member 2600 is removed. It is constructed so that it must be removed from the panel board 1110. With such a configuration, for example, it becomes difficult for a malicious player or the like to remove the area cover member 2600, and it is possible to suppress the act of illegally bending the obstacle nail.

In addition, as shown in the exploded front perspective view of the area cover member 2600 in FIG. 581, the first flow path inlet 2710a and the second flow path inlet 2710b, the first flow path outlet 2730a, and the second flow path outlet 2730b. The area cover member 2600 is attached to the front surface side of the area cover member 2600 to cover the area cover member 2600, thereby forming respective flow paths. That is, since the area cover member 2600 is an indispensable constituent member that constitutes a part of the flow path of the game ball, for example, a malicious player or the like removes the area cover member 2600 and implants it in the right game area 5b. Even if the obstructed nails 1201 to 1218 are illegally bent and the game is played as it is, the game ball cannot move as designed in the state where the area cover member 2600 is removed, and the ball is jammed or the surrounding area. It is configured to lead to damage of parts and the like, and it becomes difficult to play a normal game. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the act of illegally bending the obstacle nail by removing the area cover member 2600.

Subsequently, FIGS. 584 (a) to (c) show cross-sectional views of the portion where the obstacle nail is implanted in the right game area 5b. Specifically, the aspect in which the nail heads of the obstacle nails 1201 to 1209 and 1212 to 1218 planted in the panel convex portion 1117 are accommodated in the penetrating portion 2610 of the area cover member 2600 is illustrated, and the present embodiment. Then, the nail head of each obstacle nail is configured to be accommodated within the thickness of the area cover member 2600.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the thickness of the area cover member 2600 is 2 mm, and the dimension (h) from the front surface of the panel projection 1117 in which each obstacle nail is implanted to the front surface of the area cover member 2600. Is about 18 mm. The distance (w) between the center of the nail head of each obstacle nail and the end of each penetrating portion 2610 of the area cover member 2600 is about 4 mm. Therefore, since the diameter of the nail head of the obstacle nail is about 4 mm, the gap between the outer peripheral end of the nail head and the open end of each penetrating portion 2610 is about 2 mm.

More specifically, the present embodiment will be described. In the cross-sectional view of FIG. 584(a), the manner in which the nail heads of the obstacle nails 1201 to 1203 are accommodated in the penetrating portions 2611 to 2613 is shown in a cross-sectional view. In this case, the gap from the nail head outer peripheral end of the obstacle nails 1201 to 1203 to the open end of the penetrating portions 2611 to 2613 provided in the area cover member 2600 is about 2 mm as described above. The center of the nail head and the center of each penetrating portion are configured to coincide with each other.

In the cross-sectional view of FIG. 584(b), the accommodation mode of the nail heads of the obstacle nails 1204-1209 and 1212-1215 with respect to the penetrating portions 2614-2618 is shown. In this case, the gap from the nail head outer peripheral ends of the pair of obstacle nails 1204 to 1209 and 1212 to 1215 which are close to each other to the open end of the penetrating portions 2611 to 2613 provided in the area cover member 2600 is the same as described above. It is about 2 mm.

In the cross-sectional view of FIG. 584(c), the manner in which the nail heads of the obstacle nails 1216 to 1218 are accommodated in the penetrating portion 2619 is shown in a cross-sectional view. In this case, the gap from the nail head outer peripheral ends of the obstacle nails 1216 to 1218 to the opening end of the penetrating portion 2619 provided in the area cover member 2600 is about 2 mm as described above.

As described above, since the gap between the nail head outer peripheral end of the obstacle nail and the opening end of the penetrating portion 2610 forming the accommodating portion is only about 2 mm, a tool for bending the obstacle nail is used. It becomes difficult to insert, and even if the obstacle nail is bent illegally by some method, the nail head outer peripheral end of the obstacle nail interferes with the opening end of the penetrating portion 2610. The degree of bending is very slight, and as a result, it is possible to suppress the act of illegally bending the obstacle nail. Further, when the obstructing nail is illegally bent, the center position of the penetrating portion 2610 and the center position of the nail head of the obstructing nail are eccentric. Therefore, it is possible to easily misconduct by visually recognizing the eccentric aspect from the front. It will be possible to discover.

[35-6. Other Embodiments]
As described above, the present embodiment has been described based on the description of each drawing, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to the above embodiment, and the following implementation configurations can be modified.

For example, the correspondence relationship between the obstacle nail and the penetrating portion 2610 forming the housing portion of the obstacle nail is as described above based on the embodiment shown in the cross-sectional view of FIG. 584, but such an implementation is not always necessary. The shape of the inner peripheral surface of the penetrating portion 2610 is not limited to the above-described shape, and various modifications can be made as follows.

In the example of the penetrating part 2610a illustrated in the cross-sectional views of FIGS. 597(a) to (c), in the inner peripheral surface of the penetrating part 2610a, at two positions on the front side of the region cover member 2600a and the panel plate 1110 side, It forms a small convex section. With such a configuration, when a tool or the like is forcibly inserted in order to bend the obstruction nail 1220 illegally, traces such as chips and dents are likely to remain on the convex portion, and thus fraud can be easily found. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the act of illegally bending the obstacle nail.

On the other hand, in the example of the penetrating portion 2610a illustrated in the cross-sectional views of FIGS. 598(a) to 598(g), a convex portion facing the obstacle nail 1220 is formed in the central portion of the inner peripheral surface of the penetrating portion 2610a. There is. With such a configuration, when a tool or the like is forcibly inserted to bend the obstruction nail 1220 illegally, a mark such as a chip or a dent remains on the convex portion, so that the misconduct can be easily found, It is possible to suppress the act of illegally bending the obstacle nail. Further, compared with the embodiment shown in the cross-sectional views of FIGS. 597(a) to 597(c) described above, it is possible to easily perform processing to form the convex portion.

Further, in the example of the penetrating portion 2610a illustrated in FIGS. 599(a) to 599(d) and the cross-sectional views of FIGS. 600(a) to (d), the area cover member 2600a within the inner peripheral surface of the penetrating portion 2610a. A convex portion having a small cross section is formed on either the front side or the panel plate 1110 side. With such a configuration, when a tool or the like is forcibly inserted to bend the obstruction nail 1220 illegally, a mark such as a chip or a dent remains on the convex portion, so that the misconduct can be easily found, It is possible to suppress the act of illegally bending the obstacle nail.

In the example illustrated in the cross-sectional views of FIGS. 601(a) to 601(e), the front side of the area cover member 2600a is integrally closed with the area cover member 2600a within the inner peripheral surface of the penetrating portion 2610a, An accommodation recess 2670 for accommodating the nail head is formed. According to such a configuration, since the obstacle nail 1220 cannot be accessed from the front side of the area cover member 2600a, it is possible to prevent the act of illegally bending the obstacle nail 1220. Furthermore, when the above-mentioned closed part is destroyed and a tool or the like is inserted, the traces will remain, making it easier to detect fraudulent acts and curbing the act of illegally bending the obstacle nail. Becomes

Further, in the example illustrated in the cross-sectional views of FIGS. 602(a) to 602(c), a rib of about several millimeters may be provided at the open end of the penetrating portion 2610a provided in the area cover member 2600a. According to such a configuration, a tool for illegally bending the obstacle nail, a piano wire, or the like becomes difficult to access the nail head of the obstacle nail 1220 housed in the penetrating portion 2610a, and the tool is forced. When such a tool is inserted, marks such as chips and dents are left on the rib, so it is possible to further suppress the act of illegally bending the obstacle nail. Further, by providing the ribs, the strength of the penetrating portion 2610a can be increased, and the rigidity of the area cover member 2600a itself can be increased.

In addition, in the present embodiment and the above-mentioned other examples, various aspects of the penetrating portion which constitutes the accommodating portion of the obstacle nail are illustrated, but the penetrating portion having a notch portion or the penetrating portion having a plurality of notch portions, various Various forms can be adopted as long as they can accommodate all or a part of the obstacle nail in a front view including the penetrating portion having a different shape and function as the accommodating portion.

Further, a decorative seal provided with a decorative pattern may be attached to the front surface of the area cover member 2600 to improve the design of the area cover member 2600 itself, and also the nail head outer circumference of the obstacle nail. When a tool or the like is forcibly inserted into the gap between the end portion and the opening end portion of the penetrating portion 2610, traces such as scratches or peeling remain on the decoration seal, which makes it easy to detect fraudulent activity. Therefore, it becomes possible to further suppress the act of illegally bending the obstacle nail. By attaching a decorative seal with a through hole corresponding to the through portion 2610 to the surface of the area cover member 2600, the decoration of the game area at the rear position of the obstacle nail (so-called a game board is attached). In contrast to the conventional technique in which decoration by a cell sheet (cell decoration) is only performed, a decorative seal with a through hole attached to the area cover member 2600 allows a game area close to the obstacle nail in the front position of the obstacle nail. The decoration can be realized. In addition, by adopting a decorative sticker to be attached to the area cover member 2600 in combination with the cell decoration, three-dimensional decoration is realized on both the rear side and the front side of the obstacle nail, and in a game area that has never existed before. New decoration is possible. In this case, as the area cover member 2600, a transparent member is used, and as the decoration seal attached to the area cover member 2600, one having a light transmitting portion through which the rear cell decoration area can be visually recognized is adopted. Preferably. In the above embodiment, the sheet-shaped decorative seal is described as an example, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to such a seal, and painting or plating is applied to the game area where the obstacle nail is planted or the area cover member 2600. You may make it decorate directly by methods, such as processing.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the area cover member 2600 is formed as a single body and is attached to the front surface side of the front unit 2000, but the embodiment is not necessarily limited to this embodiment. For example, in the game panel 1100. You may make it integrally formed with the various prize-winning devices, the decoration member, etc. which are provided. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the time and effort of attaching the area cover member 2600 in the manufacturing process of the gaming machine.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the area cover member 2600 is configured as a single member that covers the flow path device 2700 and the right game area 5b, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this embodiment, and for example, The area cover member 2600 may be divided into a member that covers the flow path device 2700 and a member that covers the right-side game area 5b, and the area cover member 2600 may be attached to the front unit 2000 respectively.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the flow path device 2700 and the right side game area 5b are covered with the area cover member 2600, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this example, and the left side game area 5'a The area cover member 2600 can be attached to any position.

For example, the area cover member 2600a of the present invention can be attached to the game area shown in the front view of FIG. 594(a) in the manner shown in the front view of FIG. 594(b). More specifically, in the illustrated embodiment, the area cover member 2600a accommodates a substantially quadrangular penetrating portion 2651 for accommodating a nail head of a so-called jump nail 1231 and a so-called nail head of a life nail 1230. Notch-shaped penetrating part 2650, notch-shaped penetrating part 2652 that accommodates the nail heads of the two left guide nails 1232, and long hole shape that houses the nail heads of the four right guide nails 1233 And the four bosses 2660 formed integrally with the area cover member 2600a are fixed by screws from the back surface side of the panel plate 1110. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the act of illegally bending the obstacle nail for each obstacle nail that greatly affects the winning rate of the game ball to the first starting opening 2002. Further, since the area cover member 2600a is fixed by screws from the back side of the panel plate 1110, the screws cannot be easily accessed, and it is possible to prevent the act of illegally bending the obstacle nail. ing. In addition, although the said Example provides the area|region cover member 2600a so that the obstruction nail|planted around the 1st starting opening 2002 may be accommodated, it is not necessarily limited to this and another game area. In addition, an area cover member 2600a may be provided, and the entire game area can be covered with a single area cover member 2600a.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as shown in the enlarged front perspective view of FIG. 580, the penetrating portion 2620 having the cutout portion formed in the area cover member 2600 is formed by the member forming the outer edge of the game area. Although the cross section of the cutout portion is configured to be closed, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment, and for example, a center accessory placed in the game area or an outer wall surface of various winning devices is used. The cutout portion of the penetrating portion may be closed. In addition, the cutout portion in the penetrating portion may be provided in any direction of the area cover member 2600. In this case, the other cutout portion is provided at a position opposite to the cutout portion. Can be configured to close.

Further, FIG. 603 illustrates an installation mode of the area cover member 2600 in another embodiment. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 603(a), the obstacle nails 1212 and 1213 are accommodated in the penetrating portion 2617 which is the accommodating portion of the obstacle nail, and the notch portion is formed in a part of the penetrating portion 2617. Is provided.

In the mode shown in FIG. 603(a), it is shown that all the obstacle nails including the obstacle nails 1212 and 1213 are in the state position as designed, and the penetration portion 2617 has two By locating the nail head of the obstacle nail 1213 on the inner side of the line connecting the cutout end portions 2617a, it is possible to visually recognize that the obstacle nail 1213 is in the state position as designed.

On the other hand, in the mode illustrated in FIG. 603(b), the obstacle nail 1213 is shown to be bent improperly, and the nail head of the obstacle nail 1213 forms a line connecting the two notched end portions 2617a. By being visually recognized in the state of exceeding, it is possible to easily visually recognize that the obstacle nail is bent illegally. Note that FIG. 603(a) shows an example in which the obstacle nail 1213 is inside the line connecting the two notched end portions 2617a as designed, but the obstacle nail 1213 has two notches. The area cover member 2600 is formed so that the position located on the line connecting the end portions 2617a (so that the obstacle nail 1213 overlaps the line connecting the two notched end portions 2617a in a front view) is as designed. Alternatively, even in this case, as shown in FIG. 603(b), if the line exceeds the line connecting the two notched end portions 2617a, it is possible to easily detect the dishonesty.

[36. Measures to facilitate confirmation of nail position]
By the way, in a pachinko machine as a game machine, the payout rate (winning degree) is greatly influenced by adjustment of an obstacle nail planted on the board surface of the game board. Depending on the payout rate, the number of customers will change drastically and the sales of game halls will be greatly affected. Therefore, it is necessary to check the state of the obstacle nail at the time of installing the game machine and at an appropriate timing after the installation, and adjust the obstacle nail as necessary. Therefore, conventionally, a nail sheet has been used to easily and accurately check the states of a plurality of obstacle nails and adjust the nails.

The nail sheet is made of a semitransparent or transparent plastic material film or paper material, and is formed into a thin sheet shape. Then, on the surface of the nail sheet, a pattern corresponding to each obstacle nail is printed in the same manner as the gauge arrangement of the obstacle nails implanted in the game board.

Then, in order to confirm the consistency between the gauge arrangement of the obstacle nails actually implanted in the game board and the designed gauge arrangement printed on the nail sheet, conventionally, it is printed on the nail sheet together with the above gauge arrangement. Obstacle nails that are planted on the game board after aligning various accessory devices and prize winning devices, etc. on the upper surfaces of the various accessory devices and prize winning devices actually placed on the game board. I was checking the gauge arrangement.

However, in general, in addition to obstacle nails, various winning devices, windmills, stages, decorative members, etc. are arranged on the game board, and the various members are the amount of protrusion in the front-back direction of the game machine. Are also varied. Then, when the nail sheet that is thin and can be freely deformed is arranged on the game board, it is quite difficult for a skilled person to arrange the nail sheet so that the nail sheet is not twisted due to the unevenness of the back surface of the nail sheet. As a result, there has been a problem that it is not possible to accurately grasp the consistency between the gauge arrangement of the obstacle nails implanted in the game board and the gauge arrangement printed on the nail sheet.

The embodiments to be described below have been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of relatively easily confirming the position of an obstacle nail.

[36-1. Nail sheet]
FIG. 585 shows a front view of a nail sheet 5000 corresponding to the game panel 1100 in the present embodiment. In the nail sheet 5000, the gauge arrangement of the obstacle nail print body 5200 and the patterns of various arrangement members around the obstacle nail print body 5200 are printed in black on the A4 size transparent film sheet 5100.

Further, in order to confirm the gauge arrangement at a plurality of positions on the game panel 1100 by using the limited range in the nail sheet 5000, in the example illustrated in FIG. 585, the nail sheet 5000 is printed in the first area. The body 5110 and the second area printing body 5120 are printed, and the gauge arrays corresponding to the two obstacle nail implantation areas and the peripheral arrangement members are printed separately.

When confirming the gauge arrangement of the faulty nails actually implanted using the nail sheet 5000 shown in FIG. 585, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 586, the first area printing body 5110. The outer edge of the area cover member 2600 and a plurality of penetrating portions 2610 printed on the area cover member 2600 are accurately aligned and overlapped on the game panel 1100, and the obstacle nail printed body 5200 is printed and the obstacle nails implanted on the back surface. Check that there is no gap between

[36-2. Area cover member]
As described above, the area cover member 2600 of the present embodiment is shown in an enlarged front perspective view of the game panel 1100 of FIG. 580, an arrangement plan view of obstacle nails of FIG. 582, and an exploded rear perspective view of the area cover member 2600 of FIG. 583. As shown, the nail heads of the obstacle nails 1201 to 1203 are respectively accommodated with respect to the penetrating portions 2611 to 2613 having a circular shape in a front view of the area cover member 2600, and the penetrating portions 2614 to 2618 having oblong holes have the penetrating portions 2614 to 2618. Of the obstacle nails 1204-1209, 1212-1215, two obstacle nails that are close to each other are accommodated, and the penetration portion 2619 having a longer hole than the penetration portions 2614-2618 has three obstacle nails 1216. -1212 nail heads are configured to be received. Further, a penetrating portion 2620 having a part of a notch is formed at the right end of the area cover member 2600 when viewed from the front, and the penetrating portion 2620 has a nail head of two adjacent obstacle nails 1210 and 1211. Is configured to be accommodated.

Further, as shown in the exploded rear perspective view of FIG. 583, mounting bosses 2630 to 2633 are integrally provided on the back side of the area cover member 2600 so that the area cover cannot be removed from the front of the game panel 1100. It is screwed on the back side of the member 2600. Further, as shown in FIG. 583, screws are screwed from the rear of the game panel 1100 to the mounting bosses 2630, 2631, 2633 so that the area cover member 2600 cannot be easily removed from the back side of the game panel 1100. Although the screw can be accessed, the screw screwed to the mounting boss 2632 is blocked by the panel plate 1110 so that the screw cannot be accessed. More specifically, since the mounting bosses 2630 to 2633 are screwed to the front unit 2000 fixed to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 with screws, the front cover 2000 itself is temporarily removed when the area cover member 2600 is removed. It is constructed so that it must be removed from the panel board 1110.

Further, as shown in the exploded front perspective view of the area cover member 2600 of FIG. 581, the area cover member 2600 of the present embodiment covers the flow path device 2700 and the right game area 5b in which a plurality of obstacle nails are implanted. Thus, the game panel 1100 is provided, and a wide and flat surface is formed on the game panel. With such a characteristic configuration, when a very soft nail sheet 5000 is placed on the game panel 1100, the nail sheet 5000 is overlapped on the flat surface to affect various members and obstacle nails having different forward protrusion amounts. The nail sheet 5000 can be stably superposed on the game panel 1100 without being subjected to any deformation and without causing any twist even if not experienced.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as shown in the front view of FIG. 577, the special winning opening 2005 is arranged below the right-side game area 5b, and a big winning not shown on the front side of the special winning opening 2005. A mouth cover member is provided. Like the area cover member 2600, the special winning opening cover member is formed such that the front surface and the back surface have flat surfaces, and the area cover member 2600 installed above the special winning opening cover member. And the front side is attached so that it is flush. With such a configuration, the area cover member 2600 and the special winning opening cover member can form a wider range of flat surfaces on the game panel 1100, and the nail sheet 5000 is further formed on the game panel 1100. It is possible to stack them stably.

Furthermore, as described above based on the enlarged front perspective view of FIG. 580 and the rear perspective view of the game panel 1100 of FIG. 583, the area cover member 2600 of the present embodiment accommodates the nail heads of the obstacle nails, A plurality of penetrating portions 2610 having different shapes are formed, and in positioning at the time of overlapping the nail sheets 5000, easily by superimposing the shape of the penetrating portions printed on the nail sheet 5000 on the penetrating portion 2610 on the back surface, In addition, it is possible to accurately check the gauge arrangement of the nails by accurately aligning the nail sheet 5000 and observing the eccentricity between the nails and the penetrating portion.

[36-3. Other Embodiments]
As described above, the present embodiment has been described based on the description of each drawing, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to the above embodiment, and the following implementation configurations can be modified.

In the above-described embodiment, the area cover member 2600 is configured as a single member that covers the flow path device 2700 and the right game area 5b, but is not necessarily limited to this embodiment, and for example, the area cover. The member 2600 may be divided into a member that covers the flow path device 2700 and a member that covers the right game area 5b, and may be provided on the game panel 1100. That is, even if the area cover member 2600 having a flat surface on the front surface side is divided and mounted on the game panel 1100, one large flat surface can be formed, so that the nail sheet 5000 is stably provided on the area cover member. It can be stacked on the front of the 2600.

Further, the area cover member 2600 may be integrally formed so as to cover a wider game area, and by such a configuration, the nail sheet 5000 can be stably stacked on the front surface of the area cover member 2600. Is.

Further, the area cover member 2600 in the above-described embodiment is constituted by a single member capable of covering the flow path device 2700 and the right side game area 5b, but in addition, in the left side game area 5'a It may be configured to cover any area with a single area cover member or a plurality of area cover members. For example, as shown in the front view of FIG. 594(b), a plurality of areas around the first starting port 2002 may be provided. Providing the area cover member 2600a for accommodating the obstacle nail is also an example. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to easily and accurately overlap the nail sheets 5000 at any place on the game panel 1100, and it is possible to quickly check the gauge arrangement of the obstacle nails. Become.

(Third Embodiment)
The third embodiment will be described below based on the embodiment illustrated in FIGS. 577 to 604.

[37. Measures to visually check the condition of obstacle nails]
By the way, in a pachinko machine as a game machine, multiple obstacle nails are installed, but the obstacle nails are illegally bent by a malicious player etc., and many game balls are illegally won in the winning hole. There was an act of cheating. For the purpose of preventing such fraudulent activity, a decorative cover is provided on the winning opening device and a decorative cover is provided on the winning opening device so that the obstacle nail for the introduction port, which is conventionally planted immediately above the winning opening device, cannot be bent illegally. A concentric restriction part is provided at a position corresponding to the obstacle for the introduction port. (For example, JP 2008-188259 A).

In general, since the payout rate (winning rate) is greatly affected by the adjustment of the obstacle nails that are planted on the board surface of the game board, many players have difficulty in choosing the game table to play. If there is a great interest in the direction of inclination of the nail and the state of the obstacle nail is disadvantageous to the game, there is a tendency that the game machine does not play the game.

On the other hand, in the conventional technique as described above, for example, as shown in FIG. 8 of Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2008-188259, when a player looks in from the front to check the state of the entry nail, Since the relative positional relationship between the entrance nail and the regulation portion that forms the penetrating portion can be grasped, the fact that the entrance nail is inclined in a direction disadvantageous to the winning of the game ball If it is recognized, there is a risk that the interest may be reduced.

The embodiments described below are made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in interest.

[37-1. Area cover member]
In order to address the above-described problems, in this embodiment, as in the example illustrated in FIG. 587, the area cover member 2600a having the penetrating portion 2610a that accommodates the nail heads of the obstacle nails 1219 and 1220 is provided. The biggest feature is the point.

The area cover member 2600a in this embodiment illustrated in FIG. 587 has a basic configuration in common with the above-described second embodiment, and in the same manner as the area cover member 2600 of the second embodiment, the obstacle nail 1219. No. 1220 is housed in the penetrating portion 2610a.

On the other hand, the area cover member 2600a in the present embodiment is an obstacle nail 1219 that is planted in the vicinity of the first starting opening 2002, which greatly affects the winning degree of the game ball into the first starting opening 2002 under the above-mentioned problems. No. 1220 is housed in the penetrating portion 2610a.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 587(a), the area cover member 2600a is attached to the decorative member of the first starting port 2002, and at the same time, the nail heads of the obstacle nails 1219 and 1220 are shown in FIG. It is accommodated in the penetrating portion 2610a in the manner shown in FIG.

As a method of attaching the area cover member 2600a to the first starting port 2002, as shown in FIG. 587(c), it is possible to attach it to the decorative member of the first starting port 2002 using a well-known fixing method. It is possible. Further, as shown in FIG. 587(d), it is also possible to integrally mold and attach the decorative member of the first starting port 2002.

As an example of the present embodiment, FIG. 588 illustrates a plurality of embodiments in which the center position of the penetrating portion 2610a formed in the area cover member 2600a is shifted from the center position of the nail heads of the obstacle nails 1219 and 1220. ing.

That is, in order to solve the above-mentioned conventional problems, the center of the nail heads of the obstacle nails 1219 and 1220 is attached to the area cover member 2600a without bending or adjusting the obstacle nails 1219 and 1220 that are actually implanted. By forming (eccentric) the penetrating part 2610a whose center position is displaced from the position, is the state advantageous or disadvantageous compared to the actual state of implanting the obstacle nail (such as the bending state of the obstacle nail)? As shown in FIG.

For example, in the example shown in the front view of FIG. 588(a), the center position of the penetrating portion 2610a on the right side in front view is formed by shifting to the left side of the center position of the nail head of the obstacle nail 1220. It is possible to make a player who sees such an eccentricity illusion that the obstacle nail 1220 on the right side is spread outward, and to motivate the player to play the game machine.

Further, in the example illustrated in the front view of FIG. 588(b), the center position of the penetrating portion 2610a on the left side in front view is formed by shifting the center position to the right side of the center position of the nail head of the obstacle nail 1219. It is possible to cause the player who sees the illusion that the obstacle nail 1219 on the left side is expanded to the outside, and to motivate the player to play the game machine.

Further, in the example shown in the front view of FIG. 588(c), the center positions of the penetrating portions 2610a on both sides are formed so as to be displaced inward from the center positions of the nail heads of the obstacle nails 1219 and 1220. It is possible to cause the player who sees the illusion that the obstacle nails 1219 and 1220 on both sides are spread outward, and to motivate the player to play the game machine.

On the other hand, in the example illustrated in the front view of FIG. 588(d), the center position of the penetrating portion 2610a on the right side in front view is formed by shifting the center position of the obstacle nail 1220 to the right of the center position of the nail head of the obstacle nail 1220. It is possible to make the player who sees the illusion that the obstacle nail 1220 on the right side is bent inward. The player visually recognizing such an aspect assumes that the ball passage between the obstacle nail 1219 and the obstacle nail 1220 is narrowed, which is disadvantageous in winning the game ball to the first starting opening 2002. Since the obstacle nail 1220 on the right side is not bent inward, the game ball is won in the first starting opening 2002 with a normal winning frequency. With such a configuration, it is possible to show an unexpected winning mode to the player and improve the interest in the game.

Further, in the example illustrated in the front view of FIG. 588(e), the center position of the penetrating portion 2610a on the left side in front view is formed by being shifted to the left side of the center position of the nail head of the obstacle nail 1219, thereby forming It is possible to make the player who sees the illusion that the obstacle nail 1219 on the left side is bent inward. The player visually recognizing such an aspect assumes that the ball passage between the obstacle nail 1219 and the obstacle nail 1220 is narrowed, which is disadvantageous in winning the game ball to the first starting opening 2002. Since the obstacle nail 1219 on the left side is not bent inward, the game ball is won in the first starting opening 2002 with a normal winning frequency. With such a configuration, it is possible to show an unexpected winning mode to the player and improve the interest in the game.

Further, in the example illustrated in the front view of FIG. 588(f), the center positions of the penetrating portions 2610a on both sides are formed by being shifted outward from the center positions of the nail heads of the obstacle nails 1219 and 1220, thereby forming this. It is possible for the player who sees the illusion that the obstacle nails 1219 and 1220 on both sides are bent inward. The player visually recognizing such an aspect assumes that the ball passage between the obstacle nail 1219 and the obstacle nail 1220 is narrowed, which is disadvantageous in winning the game ball to the first starting opening 2002. Since the obstacle nails 1219 and 1220 on both sides are not bent inward, the game balls are won in the first starting opening 2002 with a normal winning frequency. With such a configuration, it is possible to show an unexpected winning mode to the player and improve the interest in the game.

In the above-described embodiment, as illustrated in FIGS. 588 (a) to (f), the area cover members 2600a having different positions where the penetrating portions 2610a are formed are manufactured and appropriately replaced to replace the first starting opening 2002. It is very troublesome because it needs to be attached to the decoration part of the. Therefore, in the following, based on FIGS. 589(a) to (e), it is possible to reduce the time and effort for manufacturing a plurality of area cover members 2600a, and the time and effort for storing and exchanging the plurality of area cover members 2600a at the game shop side. An embodiment will be described.

As shown in the front view of FIG. 589(a), in this embodiment, four penetrating portions 2610a are formed in one area cover member 2600a, and two penetrating portions 2610a located below are penetrating two penetrating portions 2610a located above. It is formed inside 2610a. When the triangular mark shown in the figure is attached to the decorative portion of the first starting port 2002 with the mark facing upward, as shown in the front view of FIG. 589(b), the penetrating portions 2610a on both sides are formed. It is possible for the player to visually recognize the state in which the center position and the center positions of the nail heads of the obstacle nails 1219 and 1220 on both sides coincide with each other. Further, without replacing the area cover member 2600a, when the mark of the Δ shape is turned downward by rotating it by 180 degrees, as shown in the front view of FIG. 589(c), the central positions of the penetrating portions 2610a on both sides are set. The nails 1219 and 1220 on both sides can be arranged inward of the center of the nail heads, thereby giving the player the illusion that the nails 1219 and 1220 on both sides are spread outward. It is possible.

Also, as shown in FIG. 589(d), when the area cover member 2600a is rotated 90 degrees to the right and the triangle mark is installed on the right side, the obstacle nail 1219 on the left side is expanded outward. It is possible to make the player illusion that, on the other hand, as shown in FIG. 589(e), when the area cover member 2600a is rotated 90 degrees to the left and the mark of the Δ shape is set to the left side, the right side is set. It is possible to give the illusion to the player that the obstacle nail 1220 is extended slightly upward. With such a configuration, it is possible to variously change the visual recognition mode for the player with one area cover member 2600a without increasing the number of members of the area cover member 2600a.

[37-3. Other Embodiments]
Although the present embodiment has been described above based on the description of each drawing, the present invention is not necessarily limited to the above embodiment, and the following implementation configurations can be modified.

For example, as shown in FIG. 590(a), the area cover member 2600a may be formed with an egg-shaped penetrating portion 2610a and attached to the first starting port 2002, as shown in FIG. 590(b). By moving the area cover member 2600a downward from the installation mode to the installation mode shown in FIG. 590(c), the obstruction nails 1219, 1220 on both sides are outwardly extended to the player viewed from the front. It is possible to make the illusion. With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the player's motivation to play the game machine.

Further, the shape of the penetrating portion 2610a is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and the penetrating portion 2610a may have various shapes as long as the player can visually recognize the relative positional relationship between the penetrating portion 2610a and the obstacle nail. can do. For example, as shown in FIG. 591(a), the shape of the penetrating portion 2610a may be a substantially rectangular shape with the R portions arranged at the corners, and as shown in FIG. 591(b). Similarly, it is also possible to make it a square shape.

Further, the penetrating portion 2610a of the present invention is not necessarily limited to the closed shape, and as shown in FIG. 591(c), the penetrating portion having a notch shape is formed in the horizontal direction to form the obstacle nail 1219. , 1220 nail heads may be accommodated. Also, as shown in FIG. 591(d), a notch-shaped penetrating portion may be formed in an oblique direction to accommodate the nail heads of the obstacle nails 1219 and 1220.

Further, the penetrating portion 2610a of the present invention may house the nail heads of a plurality of obstructing nails in one penetrating portion 2610a from the viewpoint of making the state of the obstructing nail visible, for example, in FIG. 592(a). As shown in the figure, the penetrating portion 2610a provided in the area cover member 2600a has a long hole, and the nail heads of the plurality of obstacle nails 1221 and 1222 (or 1223 and 1224) are accommodated in one penetrating portion 2610a. It can also be configured as follows. Then, as shown in FIG. 592(b), by forming the two elongated hole-shaped penetrating portions 2610a in the area cover member 2600a at the inner position, the obstacle nails 1221 and 1222 are provided to the player visually recognized from the front. , 1223, 1224 may be illusion that they are spread out. With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the player's motivation to play the game machine.

Further, in the above-described various embodiments, the area cover member is targeted for the obstacle nails planted in the vicinity of the first starting opening 2002, such as so-called life nails that greatly affect the winning rate to the first starting opening 2002. Although the installation mode of the 2600a has been described, it is not necessarily limited to the obstacle nails as described above, and if the obstacle nails are planted in the game area, the obstacle nails at any position, The area cover member 2600a may be installed to accommodate the obstacle nail in the penetrating portion 2610a. That is, the player is made to visually recognize the relative positional relationship between the nail head of the obstacle nail and the penetrating portion 2610a provided in the area cover member 2600a, and whether the state of the obstacle nail is advantageous to the game or not is disadvantageous. If it is possible to recognize whether the game machine is in such a state, it is possible to improve the motivation to play the game machine.

For example, another embodiment illustrated in the front views of FIGS. 594 and 595 illustrates the installation of the area cover member 2600a that accommodates a plurality of obstacle nails implanted around the first starting port 2002. More specifically, in the illustrated embodiment, the area cover member 2600a includes a penetrating portion 2651 having a substantially rectangular shape for accommodating a nail head of a so-called jump nail 1231 and a nail head of a so-called life nail 1230. Notch-shaped penetrating portion 2650 that accommodates the left-side guide nails 1232, a notch-shaped penetrating portion 2652 that houses the nail heads of the two left guide nails 1232, and a length that accommodates the nail heads of the four right guide nails 1233 A hole-shaped penetrating portion 2653 is formed and fixed to the four boss portions 2660 formed integrally with the area cover member 2600a from the back surface side of the panel plate 1110 with screws.

And the area|region cover member 2600a is provided in the aspect shown by FIG. 594(b) with respect to the game area shown by FIG. 594(a). The area cover member 2600a provided in FIG. 594(b) is configured so that the state of the jump nail 1231 and the life nail 1230 can be visually recognized by the player in neither advantageous nor disadvantageous state. In addition, the nail head of the jump nail 1231 is located at the center of the penetrating portion 2651, and the nail head of the life nail 1230 is located below the penetrating portion 2650.

On the other hand, the area cover member 2600a illustrated in FIGS. 595(a) and 595(b) includes the area cover member 2600a of FIG. 594(b) and a penetrating portion 2651 that accommodates the nail heads of the jump nails 1231, respectively. The formation correspondence of the penetrating portion 2650 that accommodates the nail head of the life nail 1230 is different, and the area cover member 2600a illustrated in FIG. 595(a) includes the penetrating portion 2651 that accommodates the nail head of the jump nail 1231. The penetrating portions 2650, which are shifted downward and accommodate the nail heads of the life nails 1230, are formed longer. With such a configuration, the player who visually recognizes the states of the jump nail 1231 and the life nail 1230 shown in FIG. 595(a) is first in the jump nail 1231 and the life nail 1230 from the corresponding positional relationship with each penetrating portion. It is possible to increase the player's motivation to play the game by illusion that it is in an advantageous state for winning in the starting opening 2002.

On the contrary, in the area cover member 2600a illustrated in FIG. 595(b), the penetrating portion 2651 that accommodates the nail head of the jump nail 1231 is shifted upward, and the penetrating portion 2650 that accommodates the nail head of the life nail 1230. Are formed to be short. With such a configuration, the player who visually recognizes the states of the jump nail 1231 and the life nail 1230 shown in FIG. 595(b) is first in the jump nail 1231 and the life nail 1230 from the corresponding positional relationship with each penetrating portion. It is possible to increase the player's interest in selecting a game machine to play, by illusion that he/she is in a disadvantageous state for winning a prize in the starting opening 2002. Further, even if it is visually recognized in a disadvantageous state, the state of the actual jump nail 1231 and the life nail 1230 is not bent in a state disadvantageous to winning, so that the winning rate to the first starting opening 2002 is high. It does not go down. Therefore, the player who played the game while visually recognizing that the state of the jump nail 1231 or the life nail 1230 is in a disadvantageous state is surprising or uplifting with respect to the relatively good winning rate to the first starting opening 2002. You can feel it.

The corresponding positional relationship between the life nail 1230 and the penetrating portion 2650 is not limited to the embodiment shown in FIGS. 594 and 595. For example, as shown in the front view of FIG. Depending on whether the nail head is located inside the line connecting the ends of the notch portion of the penetrating portion 2650 or outside the line connecting the ends, the state of the game nail is determined. It is also possible to configure so that it can be grasped.

Further, the method of installing the area cover member 2600a on the game panel 1100 is not limited to the method of fixing the area starter member 2600a to the decorative member of the first starting opening 2002, and is, for example, the front view of FIG. 592(c). As shown in the sectional view of FIG. 592(d) or (e), it is possible to fix the area cover member 2600a to the panel plate 1110 from the front side with screws or the like. As a fixing method, a mounting boss may be integrally molded with the panel plate 1110 as shown in the sectional view of FIG. 592(d), or as shown in the sectional view of FIG. 592(e). A screw hole may be provided on the 1110 side, in which case a mounting portion is arranged below the obstacle nail so as not to hinder the rolling of the game ball as shown in the front view of FIG. 592(c). Preferably.

Further, the manner of attaching the area cover member 2600a to the panel plate 1110 is not limited to the above-mentioned embodiment, and as shown in FIGS. 593(a) and 593(b), screwing from the rear side of the game panel 1100. It is also possible to fix the area cover member 2600a, and with such a configuration, the area cover member 2600a cannot be easily removed from the front side of the gaming machine, and thus the act of bending the obstacle nail unlawfully is taken. It becomes possible to prevent it.

In addition, in the present embodiment and the above-mentioned other examples, various aspects of the penetrating portion which constitutes the accommodating portion of the obstacle nail are illustrated, but the penetrating portion having a notch portion or the penetrating portion having a plurality of notch portions, various Various forms can be adopted as long as they can accommodate all or a part of the obstacle nail in a front view including the penetrating portion having a different shape and function as the accommodating portion.

[38. Frame movable body]
By the way, in the gaming machine described with reference to FIGS. 523 to 576 and the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-093655, the progress state of the game is shown to the player by the display content on a predetermined display means, By operating the movable decoration means provided on the frame forming the outer shape of the gaming machine at a predetermined timing, it is possible to make the player feel entertaining. However, some players find it difficult to move the line of sight from the predetermined display means to the movable decoration means provided on the frame forming the outer shape of the gaming machine, and do not move the line of sight to the movable decoration means that has operated. In such a case, there is a possibility that the player cannot fully feel the interest of operating the movable decoration means.

In the following, the movable decoration provided on the frame body forming the outer shape of the game machine is felt by the player having trouble moving the line of sight to the movable decoration means provided on the frame body forming the outer shape of the game machine. An embodiment of the gaming machine that allows the player to feel a sufficient interest even when the line of sight is not moved to the means will be described.

605 and 606 show an embodiment obtained by modifying the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 523. In the embodiment shown in FIGS. 605 and 606, in the door frame top unit 570, in addition to the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, there is a frame movable body having a shape imitating root vegetables. It has a root vegetable frame movable body 7800 that can move in any direction.

605(A), 605(B), 606(A), and 606(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 605 (C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. 605(D) and 605(E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 606(C) is a front view showing the internal structure of the movable root vegetable frame 7800. In FIGS. 605(A), 605(C), and 605(D), the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 are at the standby position in the door frame top unit 570. It shows the stored state. FIG. 605(B) shows a state in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is stored in the standby position in the door frame top unit 570, and the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 have moved to the movement positions. There is. FIG. 606(A) shows a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are stored at the standby position in the door frame top unit 570, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is moved to the moving position. There is. 605(E) and FIG. 606(B) show a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 have moved to the movement positions.

As shown in FIG. 606(C), the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 has a root vegetable frame movable body first cover portion 7802 that imitates a root vegetable leaf on the right side in a front view. In addition, it has a root vegetable frame movable body second cover portion 7804 that imitates the root of a root vegetable on the left side when viewed from the front. The root vegetable frame movable body first cover portion 7802 and the root vegetable frame movable body second cover portion 7804 are each made of white translucent synthetic resin, and the root vegetable frame movable body light emitting portion 7810 is provided inside.

As shown in FIGS. 605(A) and 605(B), etc., the lower end of the right connecting linear member 7820 is attached to a predetermined position on the left side of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 when viewed from the front. Further, the lower end of the left connecting linear member 7830 is attached to a predetermined position on the right side of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 when viewed from the front. On the other hand, the upper end portion of the right connecting linear member 7820 is connected to the right vertical moving mechanism 7825. Further, the upper end portion of the left connecting linear member 7830 is connected to the left vertical movement drive mechanism 7835. The right connecting linear member 7820 and the left connecting linear member 7830 are string-shaped and have a predetermined length.

The right connecting linear member 7820 and the left connecting linear member 7830 are specifically configured by a cylindrical cable, and inside thereof, a signal from the peripheral control board 1510 is transmitted to the root vegetable frame movable body 7800. A signal line (not shown) and a power supply line (not shown) that supplies power to the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 are provided. The signal line and the power supply line may be provided inside either one of the right connecting linear member 7820 and the left connecting linear member 7830. Note that, instead of transmitting a signal or supplying power to the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 by wire, a signal from the peripheral control board 1510 is wirelessly transmitted to the root vegetable frame movable body 7800, Power may be supplied to the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 from the door frame 3 side in a non-contact manner by using a loop antenna or the like.

The right-side up-and-down drive mechanism 7825 and the left-side up-and-down drive mechanism 7835 each have a rotation mechanism (not shown). By rotating this rotation mechanism based on drive control by the peripheral control board 1510, the cylindrical cable The right connecting linear member 7820 and the left connecting linear member 7830 configured by can be rolled up or rolled down.

An opening (not shown) is provided on the lower surface of the door frame top unit 570, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is moved downward from the state housed in the door frame top unit 570 by passing through the opening. It is possible to set it in a state of being located on the front side of the game board side effect display device 1600, or to be in a state of being housed in the door frame top unit 570 from a state of being located on the front side of the game board side effect display device 1600. is there. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 605(A), when the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is located at the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570, by rotating the rotating mechanism in a predetermined direction, As shown in FIG. 606(A), it is possible to move the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 so as to be located at the movement position in front of the game board side effect display device 1600. In addition, by rotating the rotation mechanism in the direction opposite to the predetermined direction, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is moved from the state in which it is located at the front moving position of the game board side effect display device 1600 shown in FIG. The door frame top unit 570 shown in 605(A) can be moved so as to be positioned at the standby position.

As shown in FIG. 606(C), the movable root vegetable frame 7800 has a movable root vegetable frame light emitting portion 7810 therein. Specifically, the root vegetable frame movable body light emitting section 7810 has a shape along the outer shapes of the root vegetable frame movable body first cover portion 7802 and the root vegetable frame movable body second cover portion 7804 which constitute the front surface of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800. It is composed of a white printed circuit board. As a concrete configuration of the root vegetable frame movable body light emitting unit 7810, for example, the configuration described above for the face substrate 6020 may be adopted. By driving and controlling a plurality of light sources (for example, full-color LEDs) mounted on the front surface side of the printed circuit board by the peripheral control board 1510, the root vegetable frame movable body first cover portion 7802 and the root vegetable frame movable body second cover portion 7804 are separated. It is possible to provide a luminescent decoration mode of a predetermined luminescent color.

As the light emitting mode of the root vegetable frame movable body light emitting unit 7810, a light emitting mode similar to the above-described light emitting mode of the rear wall substrate 6352 may be adopted. For example, a plurality of light sources corresponding to the root vegetable frame movable body second cover portion 7804, which is a portion simulating the root of the root vegetable frame movable portion 7810, emits white light, and the root vegetable frame movable body which is a portion simulating a leaf. By making a plurality of light sources corresponding to one cover portion 7802 emit green light, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 can be made to have a light emission decoration mode imitating a radish. On the other hand, a plurality of light sources corresponding to the root vegetable frame movable body second cover portion 7804, which is a portion simulating a root, emit red light, and a plurality of light sources corresponding to the root vegetable frame movable body first cover portion 7802, which is a portion simulating a leaf. It is possible to make the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 have a light-emitting decoration mode imitating carrot by causing the light source of No. 2 to emit green light.

Although an example in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is provided by modifying the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 523 is shown, FIGS. 528 to 532, 535 to 538, 541 to 547, and 550 to 550 are illustrated. In the embodiment described with reference to 554, a root vegetable frame movable body 7800 may be provided. Further, in such an embodiment, it may be configured to execute the following presentation mode. In the embodiment in which the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are operable, among these frame movable bodies, The root vegetable frame movable body 7800 may be moved in response to the operation of at least one frame movable body (movement from the standby position to the movement position, change from the stopped state to the rotated state, etc.).

In the following, an effect mode using the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 607 and 608. 607(A) and FIG. 607(B) show moving states of the first movable decorative means (right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200), and simulated images simulating the first movable decorative means. It is a time chart which showed the display mode and the moving state of the 2nd movable decoration means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800). Further, FIGS. 608(A) to 608(C) are front views showing the state of the gaming machine at a predetermined timing in such an effect mode.

Note that in the time chart shown in FIG. 607, in order to explain the timing of the effect, it is expressed as t0, t1 to t34, t35, etc. according to the passage of time. The time between each timing is 1 second. These points are the same in the time charts shown in the drawings such as FIG. 611, FIG. 613, FIG. 614, and FIG. 618 to FIG.

FIG. 607(A) shows an effect mode using the gaming machine described with reference to FIGS. 605 and 606. First, the variation of the decorative design is started in the game board side effect display device 1600 at a predetermined timing before the timing t0, and at timing t7, the left and right decorative designs are temporarily stopped with the same design, and only the central decorative design is varied. The reach state (for example, “4↓4”) is set.

At timing t7, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 start moving from the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570 to an upper moving position by drive control by the peripheral control board 1510. To do. At the same time, at timing t7, the game board side effect display device 1600 starts displaying a simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570, the right ear frame movable body 7100, and the left ear frame movable body 7200.

FIG. 608(A) shows a state in which the decorative pattern is in the reach state at the timing t7 and the display of the simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570 is started. The display of the simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 is started immediately after this (for example, 0.1 seconds later).

From timing t7 to timing t9, drive control for moving the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 to the movement position is performed. At the same time, a simulated image simulating the manner in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 move to the movement position is dynamically displayed.

At timing t9, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 complete the movement to the movement positions. At the same time, a simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and a simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 are also displayed in a mode imitating a state in which the movement to the movement position is completed.

FIG. 608(B) shows a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 have completed moving to the movement positions at the timing t9, and the simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable. It shows a state in which a simulated image simulating the body 7200 is displayed in a mode simulating a state in which the movement to the movement position is completed.

Next, at a timing t13, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts moving from a state of being in the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570 to a state of being in a moving position moved downward from the door frame top unit 570. .. At timing t14, the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the movement position is completed. In this state, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 overlaps the display positions of the simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 in the game board side effect display device 1600 in a front view. It will be positioned in a stationary state. At the same time, at timing t14, the display of the simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570, the right ear frame movable body 7100, and the left ear frame movable body 7200 that have been displayed until then is ended.

In FIG. 608(C), at timing t14, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 displays a simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 in the game board side effect display device 1600. The figure shows a state in which it has moved to a position where it overlaps with the position where it has been viewed from the front.

Next, at timing t18, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts changing from a state in which it is moved downward from the door frame top unit 570 to a state in which it is in the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570. .. At timing t19, the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the standby position is completed.

Next, at timing t22, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 start moving from the upper moving position to the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570. From timing t22 to timing t24, drive control for moving the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 to the standby position is performed. At this time, the simulated image simulating the manner in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 move to the movement position is not displayed. At timing t24, the movement of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 to the standby position is completed.

At a predetermined timing after the timing t24, the variation of the central decorative symbol that has been varying ends, and the result of the special lottery is a jackpot (for example, "444") or the result of the special lottery. A symbol (for example, "454") indicating that the game is lost is stopped and displayed.

FIG. 607(B) has a root vegetable frame movable body 7800 described with reference to FIGS. 605 and 606, a game having a rotatable right ear frame movable body 7100 and a left ear frame movable body 7200 as shown in FIG. The production mode when applied to the machine is shown.

First, the variation of the decorative design is started in the game board side effect display device 1600 at a predetermined timing before the timing t0, and at timing t7, the left and right decorative designs are temporarily stopped with the same design, and only the central decorative design is varied. Reach. At timing t7, the drive control by the peripheral control board 1510 causes the movable state of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 to change from the stopped state in the door frame top unit 570 to the rotated state. At the same time, at timing t7, the game board side effect display device 1600 starts displaying a simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570, the right ear frame movable body 7100, and the left ear frame movable body 7200.

Next, at a timing t13, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts moving from the state of being in the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570 to the state of being in the moving position moved downward from the door frame top unit 570. .. At timing t14, the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the movement position is completed. In this state, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 overlaps the display positions of the simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 in the game board side effect display device 1600 in a front view. It will be positioned in a stationary state. At the same time, at timing t14, the display of the simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570, the right ear frame movable body 7100, and the left ear frame movable body 7200 that have been displayed until then is ended.

Next, at a timing t18, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts changing from a state in which it is moved downward from the door frame top unit 570 to a state in which it is in a standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570. .. At timing t19, the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the standby position is completed. At timing t24, the states of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 change from the rotating state to the stopped state housed in the door frame top unit 570.

At a predetermined timing after the timing t24, the variation of the central decorative symbol that has been varying ends, and the result of the special lottery is a jackpot (for example, "444") or the result of the special lottery. A symbol (for example, "454") indicating that the game is lost is stopped and displayed.

During the game, the player is in a state of continuing to look at the predetermined display means (game board side effect display device 1600) in which an effect based on the lottery result of the lottery means is performed. According to the drive control of the provided first movable decoration means (right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200), a simulated image simulating the first movable decoration means is displayed on a predetermined display means. As a result, the player is informed that the first movable decoration means is drive-controlled, so that the player does not notice that the first movable decoration means is drive-controlled. , A situation in which the player cannot feel the interest due to the drive control of the first movable decoration means, or the player carelessly contacts the first movable decoration means and is injured. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of such a situation.

On the other hand, a player who is reluctant to visually recognize the drive control of the first movable decoration means, for example, feeling tired, directly recognizes that the first movable decoration means is drive-controlled. Instead of visually recognizing, it is possible to virtually experience the operation of the first movable decoration means by seeing a simulated image that is displayed on a predetermined display means and imitating the first movable decoration means.

Further, since the second movable decoration means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) moves to a position overlapping in front view with the display position of the simulated image simulating the first movable decoration means, the first movable decoration means moves. Despite the fact that the decorative means is controlled to be driven, a negative player who does not move the line of sight with respect to the first movable decorative means places a burden on the passive player such as moving the line of sight. Instead, it is possible to have a sense of interest due to the movement of the second movable decoration means. In addition, it becomes possible for such a passive player to regain the aggressiveness to the game.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 607(A) and 607(B), the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is configured to move to the front of the game board side effect display device 1600 at the timing t13. In addition to the production mode in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves to the front of the game board side effect display device 1600, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 does not move to the front of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame. An effect mode in which the player is continuously positioned at the standby position in the top unit 570 may be configured to be executable. With such a configuration, after displaying the simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 changes the right ear frame movable body 7100 to the right ear frame movable body 7100. A production mode in which the simulated image and the simulated image of the left ear frame movable body 7200 are moved to a position where they overlap in a front view with respect to the display position, and a production mode in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 continues to be in the standby position. And can be performed.

Further, when the production mode in which the movable root vegetable frame 7800 moves is executed, the degree of expectation that the big hit state occurs is higher than in the case where the production mode in which the movable movable root vegetable frame 7800 does not move is executed. You may comprise.

With such a configuration, after displaying the simulated image simulating the first movable decoration means (right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200), the second movable decoration means (root vegetable frame movable body). 7800) is drive-controlled to move to a position where the display position of the simulated image simulating the first movable decoration means overlaps in a front view, and the second movable decoration means is on standby. Since the second effect mode that continues to be in the position is executed, the player is interested in whether or not the second movable decoration means moves.

In addition, when the first effect mode is executed and when the second effect mode is executed, a state (big hit state) that is more advantageous to the player when the first effect mode is executed is When the expectation of occurrence is increased, it is possible to further increase the player's interest in the movement of the second movable decoration means.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 607(A) and 607(B), the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves to the front of the game board side effect display device 1600 from the timing t13 to the timing t14. Although configured, a plurality of operation modes may be provided when the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves to the front of the game board side effect display device 1600. For example, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 temporarily stops at a position intermediate between the standby position and the moving position (between timing t13 and timing t14), and then returns to the standby position (timing t15). Alternatively, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is temporarily stopped at a position intermediate between the standby position and the movement position (between timing t13 and timing t14), and then moved to the movement position (timing t15). May be configured to execute. In this case, when the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is moved to the movement position, it is preferable that the expectation that the big hit state will occur is higher.

Alternatively, in the period (timing t14 to timing t18) after the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 completes the movement to the game board side effect display device 1600 and then starts to move into the door frame top unit 570, the root vegetable frame movable body. In addition to the mode in which the 7800 is stopped in front of the game board side effect display device 1600, it may be configured to move in a predetermined operation mode within the range in front of the game board side effect display device 1600.

Further, a plurality of operation modes may be provided when the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves into the door frame top unit 570 and returns. For example, in addition to the effect mode in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 returns from the moving position to the standby position from timing t18 to timing t19, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is temporarily stopped at a position intermediate between the standby position and the moving position. It may be configured to execute an effect mode in which the player is returned to the standby position (timing t20) (between timings t18 and t19).

The manner in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves from the standby position to the movement position, the manner in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is in the movement position, and the manner in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves from the movement position to the standby position are shown. An operation mode in which the above operation modes are combined may be adopted as a plurality of operation modes for operating the root vegetable frame movable body 7800. Furthermore, the degree of expectation that the big hit state may occur may be different depending on the plurality of operation modes.

With such a configuration, in addition to whether or not the second movable decoration means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) moves, drive control is performed in any one of a plurality of operation modes when it moves. Therefore, in addition to whether or not the second movable decoration means moves, the player is interested in what kind of operation mode the second movable decoration means moves.

Furthermore, when the expectation that a state advantageous for the player (a big hit state) is generated varies depending on the operation mode, the player is asked how the second movable decoration means moves. It is possible to increase the expectation of.

The root vegetable frame movable body 7800 may be turned off until the game board side effect display device 1600 is moved to the front, and may be configured to be in the light emission decoration state when the movement to the movement position is completed. .. Specifically, from timing t13 to timing t14, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is turned off, and at the timing t14 when the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the moving position is completed, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is set to the light emission decoration state. The light emitting decoration state may be continued until the timing t18 when the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts moving to the storage position. Alternatively, the light emitting decoration state may be continued until timing t19 when the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 completes the movement to the storage position. In addition, as the light emission decoration state, it is preferable to select either one of the light emission mode in the mode imitating the radish and the light emission mode in the mode imitating the carrot, based on the special lottery result.

In this way, after the second movable decoration means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) is moved to the movement position in front of the predetermined display means (game board side effect display device 1600) in the off state, the light emission decoration is made at the movement position. By setting the state, it is possible to give a great surprise to the player. Further, by setting the light emission decoration state based on the special lottery result, it is possible to make the player have an expectation that the special lottery result will be in a state (big hit) advantageous to the player. Further, when the second movable decoration means is housed in the standby position, the light emitting decoration state is continued, so that the first movable decoration means located on the extension of the moving direction of the second movable decoration means can be prevented. It is possible to make the player hold him.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 607 and FIG. 608, at the same time as the operation of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 starts, in the substantially central display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. The display of the simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 is started. Further, in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 607(A), at the same time when the movement of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 to the movement position is completed, the game board side effect display device 1600 is displayed. In the approximately central display area, display is completed to complete the movement of the simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 to the movement position. Further, as in the timing t9 to timing t14 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 607(A) and the timing t7 to timing t14 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 607(B), the right ear frame movable from the standby position to the moving position is movable. In the same manner as the operating state of the body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the operating state of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 that are in the rotating state from the non-rotating state at the standby position, in these periods. A simulated image simulating the movable right ear frame 7100 and a simulated image simulating the movable left ear frame 7200 may be displayed.

With such a configuration, the first movable decoration means is changed from the first state (state at the standby position) to the second state (state at the moving position or rotating state). The states of the (right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200) can be accurately grasped by visually recognizing a predetermined display means (game board side effect display device 1600).

On the other hand, in a mode different from the operating state of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, the display of the simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 is performed. It may be configured to do so.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 607(A), a moving image in which the simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 move and appear from timing t7 to timing t9. Although the dynamic display is performed, the dynamic display may be performed again from the timing t9 to the timing t11, and further from the timing t11 to the timing t13.

Thus, the first movable decoration means (right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200) provided on the frame body changes from the first state (standby state) to the second state (moving state). After the change, the dynamic display of the simulated image simulating the operation mode of the first movable decoration means is performed on the predetermined display means (game board side effect display device 1600) so that the player can make the first movement. It is possible to get interested in the operation of the decoration means. In the example described above, such dynamic display is performed twice (the period from the timing t9 to the timing t11 and the period from the timing t11 to the timing t13), but the dynamic display may be performed once. It may be three times or more.

Also, at timing t9 in the example shown in FIG. 607(A), the simulation image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 is separated from the simulation image simulating the door frame top unit 570, and the game board side effect display device is displayed. It may be configured such that the upward movement is started in the display area of 1600, then the upward movement in the display area is performed, and the movement to the outside of the display area is completed at timing t11. Further, from the timing t11 to the timing t13, the same dynamic display may be performed for the simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200. FIG. 609(A) is a diagram showing a state at timing t10 in such an embodiment, in which the simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 is separated from the simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570. The state of moving upward is shown.

In this example, the first movable decorative means (right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200) provided on the frame body moves from the first state (standby state) to the second state (moving position). After changing to the state of being positioned), in a predetermined display means (game board side effect display device 1600), a simulated image simulating the first movable decoration means (simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear). It is configured such that a simulated image simulating the frame movable body 7200) is moved in a predetermined direction that suggests the position where the first movable decoration means is provided. Further, the first movable decoration means is configured to be located on an extension line in the moving direction of the simulated image imitating the first movable decoration means in a front view.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify that the first movable decoration means operates to change from the first state to the second state. Further, the position where the first movable decoration means is provided can be directly suggested, and the player can be interested in the operation of the first movable decoration means. In addition, an operation which cannot be the actual operation of the first movable decoration means is performed by a simulated image simulating the first movable decoration means. In this respect as well, the player is interested in the operation of the first movable decoration means. It is possible to get it.

Alternatively, from timing t9 to timing t14 in the example shown in FIG. 607(A), a simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and a simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 are displayed on the door frame top unit 570. You may comprise so that it may be displayed dynamically so that it may appear and disappear alternately from the simulated image. FIG. 609(B) shows a state in which the simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 is half-stored in the simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570.

In this example, the first movable decorative means (right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200) provided on the frame body moves from the first state (standby state) to the second state (moving position). After changing to the state of being positioned), in a predetermined display means (game board side effect display device 1600), a simulated image simulating the first movable decoration means (simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear). A simulated image simulating the movable frame body 7200) is displayed in a manner of moving back and forth in a predetermined direction. Further, the first movable decoration means is configured to be located on an extension line in the direction of reciprocating movement when viewed from the front.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify that the first movable decoration means has operated and has changed from the first state to the second state. Further, it is possible to suggest the position where the first movable decoration means is provided, and it is possible to make the player have an interest in the operation of the first movable decoration means. Further, the comical display of the simulated image simulating the first movable decoration means enables the player to have an interest in the operation of the first movable decoration means.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 609(A) and 609(B), the first movable decorative means (right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200) provided on the frame body is provided. After changing from the first state (standby state) to the second state (state located at the moving position), the first movable decoration means is the first in the predetermined display means (game board side effect display device 1600). In a mode different from the mode of changing from the state of No. 2 to the state of No. 2, the dynamic display of the simulated image imitating the first movable decoration means (ear pops out upward, ear moves steadily) is performed. I am configuring.

With such a configuration, it becomes possible for the player to take an interest in what the actual operation mode of the first movable decoration means is.

On the other hand, from timing t9 to timing t14 in the effect mode shown in FIG. 607(A), a simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and a simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 are dynamically displayed in a predetermined color. It may be configured to do so. For example, in a simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100, after displaying an image in which the part simulating the inner side of the ear is red and the part simulating the outer side of the ear is white, the colors are exchanged and the ears are replaced. The display operation of displaying an image in which the portion simulating the inside of the ears is white and the portion simulating the outside of the ears is red may be repeated a plurality of times (for example, 5 times by changing the color every second). .. In addition, such a display operation may be performed at the same time in a simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200. FIG. 610(A) shows a simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and a simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200, in which the portion simulating the inside of the ear is white and the portion outside the ear is It is the figure which showed the state which displayed the image whose modeled part was red.

On the other hand, the simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 may be displayed in a predetermined color without being changed. FIG. 610(B) shows, as a simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100, an image in which both the portion simulating the inner side of the ear and the portion simulating the outer side of the ear are pink, and the left ear frame movable body 7200. It is the figure which showed the production mode which continues displaying the image which both the part which imitated the inner side of the ear and the part which imitated the outer side of the ear are continuously displayed as a simulated image imitating.

With such a configuration, it becomes possible for the player to take an interest in what the actual light-emission production mode of the first movable decoration means is.

Depending on the effect modes described with reference to FIGS. 609 and 610, the degree of expectation that the big hit state may occur may be different. For example, the effect mode described with reference to FIG. 609(A) is configured such that the degree of expectation that a big hit state will occur is higher than the effect mode described with reference to FIG. 609(B). Good. Further, the effect mode described with reference to FIG. 610(A) is configured such that the degree of expectation that a big hit state will occur is higher than the effect mode described with reference to FIG. 610(B). Good.

Further, it may be configured to execute an effect mode in which the effect mode described with reference to FIG. 609 and the effect mode described with reference to FIG. 610 are combined. For example, the effect described with reference to FIG. 609(B) rather than the effect mode in which the effect mode described with reference to FIG. 609(A) and the effect mode described with reference to FIG. 610(A) are combined. The effect mode in which the mode and the effect mode described with reference to FIG. 610(B) are combined may be configured so that the degree of expectation that the big hit state will occur is higher.

Further, it is preferable that the effect mode in which the expectation that a big hit state occurs is higher has a lower rate of execution of the effect mode. For example, the performance mode is set such that the ratio of the number of executions of the production mode having a lower expectation of occurrence of the big hit state to the number of executions of the production mode having a higher expectation of occurrence of the big hit state is 9:1. Set the execution rate.

With such a configuration, a simulated image simulating the first movable decoration means (a simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100) displayed on the predetermined display means (game board side effect display device 1600). By providing a plurality of display modes of the simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200, monotony as an effect is lost, and it becomes possible for the player to have an interest in the first movable decoration means. .. In addition, an action of directly visually recognizing the operation itself of the first movable decoration means and an action of visually observing a simulated image simulating the first movable decoration means to know the degree of expectation that a state advantageous to the player will occur. It becomes possible to provide the player with an interest in which action to enjoy.

In addition, the display mode of the simulated image simulating the first movable decoration means indicates to the player the degree of expectation that a state (big hit state) advantageous to the player will occur, so that the first movable decoration means is visually recognized. In particular, it becomes possible for the passive player to recognize again the presence of the first movable decoration means.

In addition, the higher the degree of expectation that a player-favorable state (big hit state) occurs, the lower the rate of execution of that effect mode, so that normally the degree of expectation is low and the execution rate is high. Although many aspects are visually recognized, it is surprising that the production aspect having a high expectation degree and a low execution ratio is rarely (for example, once in 10 times) visually recognized. Then, the player who visually recognizes the latter effect mode is more interested in the first movable decoration means in combination with the excitement due to the fact that the expectation degree is high.

Light emission is performed so that the light emitting states of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are recognized in the same manner as the simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200. It may be configured so as to allow it. For example, in the state shown in FIG. 610(A), the outside of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 is made to emit red light, and in the state shown in FIG. The entire frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 may be configured to emit pink light.

In this way, the light emitting mode in the second state (the state in which the movable body is located at the moving position) of the first movable decorative means (the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200) provided on the frame body is set to a predetermined value. Of the first movable decoration means displayed on the display means (game board side effect display device 1600) (simulated image of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200). By making the image color the same as that of (image), the player who was visually recognizing the predetermined display means can quickly recognize the first movable decoration means when trying to visually recognize the first movable decoration means. Is possible.

In the substantially central display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the root symbol frame movable body 7800 is moved in a configuration in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode according to the result of the special lottery after the variation of the decorative symbol is started. It may be configured as follows.

For example, when operating the root vegetable frame movable body 7800, in the approximate center of the game board side effect display device 1600, the variation of the decorative pattern is started, and from the state in which the variation of the decorative pattern is performed, the decorative pattern being changed. Is moved to the upper right of the game board side effect display device 1600, and is variably displayed in a reduced size, and in the display area in the approximate center of the game board side effect display device 1600, a simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100. The display of the simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 may be started.

After that, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is moved from the standby position to a position overlapping the substantially central display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and further from the position overlapping the substantially central display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. After moving the frame movable body 7800 in the direction to be housed in the door frame top unit 570, the decorative pattern displayed on the upper right until then is moved to the approximate center of the game board side effect display device 1600, and then the original size. It may be configured such that the variable display is continued after being expanded to, and finally the stop display is performed in a mode that suggests the lottery result.

When such a variation mode of the decorative symbol is adopted, the variation of the decorative symbol is repeated a plurality of times in the approximate center of the game board side effect display device 1600.

With such a configuration, the line of sight of the player stays at a predetermined position of the predetermined display means (approximately the center of the game board side effect display device 1600), and the first movable decoration means (right ear frame movable). For a passive player who is stressed to visually recognize the drive control of the body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200), the display of a simulated image simulating the first movable decoration means and the second movable The movement of the decoration means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) causes the movement of the line of sight to be felt to be forced, and it is possible to prevent the situation in which the player feels stress.

The variation of the decorative symbol is started in the approximate center of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the size of the decorative symbol is smaller than the decorative symbol displayed in the approximate center of the game board side effect display device 1600 at the upper right of the game board side effect display device 1600. While the variation of the decorative pattern is started, the variation of each decorative pattern is being performed, and the variation display of the variation of the decorative symbol in the upper right of the game board side effect display device 1600 is continued in the game board side. The display of the decorative pattern displayed in the approximate center of the effect display device 1600 is temporarily terminated, and in the approximate center of the game board side effect display device 1600, a simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body. The display of the simulated image simulating the 7200 may be started.

After that, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is moved from the standby position to a position overlapping the substantially central display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and further, the root vegetable frame movable from the position overlapping the center of the game board side effect display device 1600. After moving the body 7800 in the direction to be housed in the door frame top unit 570, the variable display of the decorative pattern in the approximate center of the game board side effect display device 1600 is restarted, and finally with the decorative pattern displayed in the upper right. The display may be stopped and displayed in a manner that suggests the lottery result.

When such a variation mode of the decorative symbol is adopted, the variation of the decorative symbol is repeated a plurality of times in the approximate center and upper right of the game board side effect display device 1600.

With such a configuration, the line of sight of the player stays at a predetermined position of a predetermined display means (approximately the center of the game board side effect display device 1600 where a relatively large decorative pattern is displayed). , The first movable decoration means for a passive player who is stressed to visually recognize the drive control of the first movable decoration means (the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200). It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player feels stress by causing the user to feel the movement of his or her line of sight by displaying a simulated image imitating the above and moving the second movable decoration means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800). It becomes possible to do.

Although an example in which a small decorative pattern is displayed on the upper right of the game board side effect display device 1600 is shown, it is configured to be displayed on the lower right or lower left of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is displayed. During the period of moving from the standby position to the moving position (FIG. 607(A), timing t13 to timing t14 in FIG. 607(B)), the period of moving position (timing t14 to timing t18), the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves. During the period of moving from the position to the standby position (FIG. 607(A), timing t18 to timing t19 in FIG. 607(B)), a small decorative pattern is configured not to be hidden by the root vegetable frame movable body 7800. May be. Specifically, in these periods, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 and the small-sized decorative pattern may not be overlapped in a front view.

Thus, by the movement of the second movable decoration means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800), the predetermined position of the predetermined display means (of the game board side effect display device 1600 in which a relatively small decorative pattern is displayed). By configuring so that the decorative pattern displayed in the lower right or lower left is not hidden, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a passive player feels that the effect is excessive.

In the effect mode described later with reference to FIG. 613, FIG. 614, etc., when displaying a simulated image and a decorative pattern that imitate the model on the game board side effect display device 1600, these display methods may be adopted.

In response to the display of the simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200, it is possible to determine when the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves in the game board side effect display device 1600. The waiting time may be displayed. A plurality of display modes will be described below with reference to FIGS. 611(A) and 611(B). FIG. 611(A) shows a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 607(A). Further, FIG. 611(B) shows a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 607(B).

The display of the standby time is, for example, “1” from the timing t8 to the timing t9 in the display area between the simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200. A number is displayed, a number "2" is displayed from timing t9 to timing t10, a number "3" is displayed from timing t10 to timing t11, and a number "4" is displayed from timing t11 to timing t12. A character string “GO!!” (note that the notation is abbreviated as “GO” in FIG. 611(A)) may be displayed from timing t12 to timing t13. In addition to such display of numbers and characters, a character string “If root vegetables fall...?” is displayed from timing t7 to timing t8 as a simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame. You may comprise so that it may display in the display area between the simulated image which imitated the movable body 7200.

Alternatively, without displaying such numbers or characters, from timing t7 to timing t13, the character string "If the root vegetables fall...?" is displayed as a simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame. You may comprise so that it may display in the display area between the simulated image which imitated the movable body 7200.

In this way, images (“1”, “2”, “3”, “4”, “GO!!”) indicating the waiting time until the second movable decoration means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) operate. By adopting a configuration in which the display is performed on a predetermined display means (game board side effect display device 1600), it is attempted to visually recognize the first movable decoration means (right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200). It becomes possible for the player to recognize the timing at which the second movable decoration means operates, and by displaying a simulated image simulating the first movable decoration means, the player's line of sight is moved to the first movable decoration means. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a person misses the operation of the second movable decoration means. Further, for a passive player who does not move his or her line of sight with respect to the first movable decoration means, the operation timing of the second movable decoration means is suggested, so that the line of sight is moved from the predetermined display means. The operation of the second movable decoration means can be made to wait without being performed.

Further, at the same timing (timing t7) as the timing of displaying the simulated image simulating the first movable decoration means, an image indicating that the second movable decoration means operates at a predetermined timing (“root vegetables fall "...?") is displayed, the player can simultaneously recognize that the first movable decoration means operates and the second movable decoration means operates, and moves the line of sight. Especially, the active player does not notice that the display moves to the first movable decoration means before moving, and the display suggesting that the second movable decoration means operates is displayed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the operation of the second movable decoration means is overlooked.

In addition, by displaying an image that indicates a waiting time until the second movable decoration means operates in the vicinity of the simulated image simulating the first movable decoration means, the player can display the second movable decoration means. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the user does not notice that the image indicating the waiting time until the operation of the means is displayed.

Example of displaying an image suggesting a waiting time until the second movable decoration unit operates in the display area between the simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 The second movable decoration means operates so as to overlap the upper side of either or both of the simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200. You may comprise so that the image which shows the waiting time until it and the image which shows that the 2nd movable decoration means operate may be displayed.

By adopting such a configuration, an image indicating that the player waits until the second movable decoration means operates or an image that indicates that the second movable decoration means operates is displayed. It is possible to further suppress the occurrence of a situation in which you do not notice that you are present.

In response to the display of the simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200, it is possible to determine when the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves in the game board side effect display device 1600. Although the example of displaying the waiting time is shown, the same suggestion may be given by sound instead of or in addition to such a display. For example, in the display area between the simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200, as shown in FIGS. 611(A) and 611(B), The voice "1" is output from t8 to the timing t9, the voice "ni" is output from the timing t9 to the timing t10, the voice "san" is output from the timing t10 to the timing t11, and from the timing t11 to the timing t12. It may be configured to output the voice "Yon" and the voice "Go" from the timing t12 to the timing t13. Alternatively, from the timing t7 to the timing t13, a line saying "If you have a good time" is output as a voice, or some melody (a melody of about 6 seconds, which is output at least at the timing t13) is output. You may comprise.

By adopting such a configuration that outputs a sound indicating the waiting time until the second movable decoration means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) operates, the first movable decoration means (right ear frame movable body 7100). , The left ear frame movable body 7200) can visually recognize the timing at which the second movable decoration means operates, even when the player moves his or her line of sight to the first movable decoration means. Therefore, it is possible to enjoy the operation of the first movable decoration means until just before the second movable decoration means operates.

Further, in the case of a player who does not move his or her line of sight with respect to the first movable decoration means, the player visually recognizes a predetermined display means (game board side effect display device 1600) that produces an effect based on the lottery result of the lottery means. Regarding the action itself, the operation of the mobile phone or smart phone is not always required to continue visual recognition on the predetermined display means, but the operation timing of the second movable decoration means is audibly indicated to the player by a sound. Therefore, it is possible to restore the motivation to visually recognize the predetermined display means and the second movable decoration means.

With reference to FIGS. 607(A) and 607(B), an embodiment in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves to a position where it overlaps with a simulated image simulating the left and right ear frame movable bodies in a front view is shown. After moving the frame movable body 7800 to the movement position, the frame movable body 7800 may be periodically moved up and down at the movement position. For example, in the four seconds from the timing t14 to the timing t18, such a vertical movement may be repeated four times by performing an operation of moving upward once a second and then moving downward. .. In this movement, at least a part of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is viewed from the front in the area where the simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 are displayed. It may be configured to move within the overlapping range.

In this way, the position where the second movable decorative means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) is displayed as a simulated image simulating the first movable decorative means (right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200) is displayed. After moving to a moving position that overlaps in front view, at least a part of the second movable decoration means moves so as to overlap in a front view with the area where the simulated image simulating the first movable decoration means was displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the passive player feels stress due to the operation of the second movable decoration means after the movement to the movement position.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 605 and 606, since the player can directly contact the root vegetable frame movable body 7800, the player is injured by the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 that has dropped downward. Alternatively, there is a possibility that a player pulls the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 downward to destroy the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 and the like. Therefore, an embodiment obtained by modifying the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 605 and 606 will be described below with reference to FIG. 612. In this embodiment, it is difficult for a player to contact the root vegetable frame movable body 7800.

612(A) and 612(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 612(C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. 612(D) and 612(E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. 612(A), 612(C), and 612(D) show that the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 are at the standby position in the door frame top unit 570. It shows the stored state. 612(B) and 612(E) show a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 have the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moved to the movement position.

As shown in FIG. 612, in this embodiment, a root vegetable frame movable body cover unit 7850 that covers the moving area of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is provided. The root vegetable frame movable body cover unit 7850 is provided in front of the door frame base unit 100 and below the door frame top unit 570, and has a cover unit frame 7852 having a square shape in a front view and a right triangle shape in a side view, A cover unit front surface portion 7854 that covers a square portion formed on the front surface by the cover unit frame 7852, a cover unit right side surface portion 7856 that covers right-angled triangular portions formed on the left and right side surfaces by the cover unit frame 7852, and a cover unit left side And a surface portion 7858.

The cover unit frame 7852 is made of colored (specifically, green) opaque synthetic resin. The cover unit frame 7852 may be made of metal in order to increase its strength. The cover unit frame 7852 has a function of holding the cover unit front surface portion 7854, the cover unit right side surface portion 7856, and the cover unit left side surface portion 7858.

The cover unit front surface portion 7854, the cover unit right side surface portion 7856, and the cover unit left side surface portion 7858 are each formed of a flat plate-shaped colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The cover unit front surface portion 7854 is configured to be attached to the cover unit frame 7852 in a state in which an upper portion of the cover unit front portion 7854 is tilted so as to be located on the front side. The cover unit right side surface portion 7856 and the cover unit left side surface portion 7858 are provided so as to face each other at the left and right end portions of the gaming machine.

The player can visually recognize the operating state of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 through the colorless and transparent cover unit front surface portion 7854. In addition, a player who plays a game in an adjacent gaming machine can visually recognize the operating state of the gaming board side effect display device 1600 and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 via the cover unit right side surface portion 7856 and the cover unit left side surface portion 7858. It is possible.

A gaming machine having such a configuration may be configured to execute the effect mode described with reference to FIG. 607 and the like.

In this way, the protective member (cover unit front surface portion 7854, cover unit right side surface portion 7856, cover unit left side surface portion 7858) is arranged so as to surround the moving area of the second movable decoration means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800), By making it difficult for the player to contact the second movable decoration means and adopting a configuration in which the player can visually recognize the second movable decoration means through the transparent protection member, the second While maintaining the visibility of the movable decoration means and the impact on the player when the second movable decoration means operates, the situation in which the player is injured by the movement of the second movable decoration means, It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the second movable decoration means is destroyed by the player.

Although an example in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 and the root vegetable frame movable body cover unit 7850 are provided by modifying the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 523 is shown, FIGS. 528 to 532, 535 to 538, and 541. In the embodiments described with reference to FIGS. 547 and 550 to 554, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 and the root vegetable frame movable body cover unit 7850 may be provided. Further, in such an embodiment, each effect aspect described in the present specification may be configured to be executed.

The example in which the cover unit frame 7852 holds the cover unit front surface portion 7854, the cover unit right side surface portion 7856, and the cover unit left side surface portion 7858 has been described, but either one or both of the cover unit right side surface portion 7856 and the cover unit left side surface portion 7858 may be held. You may comprise so that it may not be provided. For example, the cover unit frame 7852 may have only the cover unit front surface portion 7854, or the cover unit frame 7852 may have only the cover unit front surface portion 7854 and the cover unit left side surface portion 7858.

In this way, the protective member (cover unit front surface portion 7854. or cover unit front surface portion 7854 and cover unit right side surface portion 7856. or cover unit front surface) so as to surround the moving area of the second movable decoration means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800). The portion 7854 and the left side surface portion 7858 of the cover unit are arranged so as to be in contact with the second movable decoration means from the side (from the right and left sides, or from the left side only, or from the right side only). By adopting a configuration in which the player can visually recognize the second movable decoration means through the protection member, the visibility of the second movable decoration means and the operation of the second movable decoration means can be performed. The situation in which the player is injured by the movement of the second movable decoration means while maintaining the impact on the player, or the situation in which the player impulsively destroys the second movable decoration means. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of. Further, since it becomes possible to contact the second movable decoration means from the side surface where the protective member is not provided, even if some abnormality occurs in the second movable decoration means, maintenance such as repair is performed by a clerk of the game store. Etc. can be performed.

According to the embodiments shown with reference to FIG. 605 to FIG. 612 and the like, it is possible for the player to fully enjoy the interest of operating the movable decoration means provided in the frame body that forms the outer shape of the gaming machine. Even if it is not possible, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player's interest is reduced.

[39. Frame movable body]
By the way, in the gaming machine described with reference to FIGS. 523 to 576 and the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2016-093655, the progress state of the game is shown to the player by the display content on the predetermined display means, It is possible to make the player feel interesting by driving the modeled body provided on the frame that constitutes the outer shape of the gaming machine at a predetermined timing. However, there is room for improvement in the presentation mode when a plurality of shaped bodies are provided on the frame body.

Hereinafter, an embodiment of a gaming machine that allows a player to have a sufficient interest even if the frame body has a plurality of drivable shaped bodies will be described.

The gaming machine in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 541 and the like includes a right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and a left ear inner frame movable body 7400 (hereinafter, referred to as “ear inner frame movable”) that is a frame movable body that imitates the inside of the ear. Body)), right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and left ear outer frame movable body 7450 (hereinafter, may be referred to as “outer ear frame movable body”), which are frame movable bodies that imitate the outside of the ear. These four frame movable bodies can be independently placed in the standby position and the moving position.

Below, with reference to FIG. 613, FIG. 614, FIG. 615, and FIG. 616, the first effect mode using the outer ear frame movable body and the second effect mode using the inner ear frame movable body will be described. .. 613 and 614 are time charts for the first effect mode and the second effect mode, and FIGS. 615 and 616 are front views showing the state of the gaming machine at a predetermined timing in such effect mode. ..

The first effect mode will be described below with reference to FIGS. 613(A) and 615. Note that the effect modes shown in FIGS. 613(A) and 613(B) have movable inner ear frame movable bodies and outer ear frame movable bodies as in the gaming machine described with reference to FIG. 541. The production mode applicable to the game machine is shown.

First, the variation of the decorative symbol is started in the game board side effect display device 1600 at a predetermined timing before the timing t0, and at the timing t4, the left and right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped with the same symbol, and only the central decorative symbol is varied. The reach state (for example, “4↓4”) is set.

At timing t8, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are moved from the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570 to an upper moving position by drive control by the peripheral control board 1510. To start. At the same time, at timing t8, the game board side effect display device 1600 starts displaying a simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450.

FIG. 615(A) shows a state in which the display of the simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570 is started at the timing t8. It should be noted that the display of the simulated image simulating the right-ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left-ear outer frame movable body 7450 is started immediately after this (for example, 0.1 seconds later).

From timing t8 to timing t10, drive control for moving the right-ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left-ear outer frame movable body 7450 to the movement position is performed. At the same time, a simulated image simulating the manner in which the right outer ear frame movable body 7350 moves to the moving position and a simulated image simulating the manner in which the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 moves to the moving position are dynamically displayed. To be done.

Next, at timing t10, the right-ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left-ear outer frame movable body 7450 complete the movement to the movement positions. At the same time, the simulated image simulating the right outer ear frame movable body 7350 and the simulated image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are also displayed in a mode simulating the state where the movement to the movement position is completed.

FIG. 615(B) shows a state in which the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 have completed moving to the movement positions at timing t10, and a simulated image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left side. The figure shows a state in which a simulated image simulating the outer-ear frame movable body 7450 is displayed in a manner simulating a state in which the movement to the movement position is completed.

From timing t10 to timing t16, the right-ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left-ear outer frame movable body 7450 continue to be in the moving position. At the same time, the display of the simulated image simulating the mode in which the movable right outer ear frame 7350 is located at the moving position and the simulated image simulating the mode in which the movable movable outer frame 7450 at the left ear frame is located at the moving position are continued.

Next, at timing t16, the right-ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left-ear outer frame movable body 7450 start moving from the upper moving position to the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570. At the same time, a simulated image simulating the right outer ear frame movable body 7350 and a simulated image simulating the left outer ear frame movable body 7450 are dynamically displayed in a mode of starting to move to the standby position.

From timing t16 to timing t18, drive control is performed in which the right-ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left-ear outer frame movable body 7450 move to the standby position. A simulated image simulating the manner in which the right outer ear frame movable body 7350 moves to the standby position and a simulated image simulating the manner in which the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 moves to the standby position are dynamically displayed. ..

At timing t18, the movement of the right-ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left-ear outer frame movable body 7450 to the standby position is completed, and the state is stored in the door frame top unit 570. At the same time, the display mode of the simulated image simulating the right outer ear frame movable body 7350 and the simulated image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 becomes the display mode in which the movement to the standby position is completed. Specifically, after a state in which only the simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570 is displayed for a moment, the display of the simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570 is also terminated.

At a predetermined timing after the timing t18, the variation of the central decorative design that has been varying ends, and the result of the special lottery is a jackpot (for example, "444") or the result of the special lottery. A symbol (for example, "454") indicating that the game is lost is stopped and displayed.

The second effect mode will be described below with reference to FIGS. 613(B) and 616. First, the variation of the decorative symbol is started in the game board side effect display device 1600 at a predetermined timing before the timing t0, and at the timing t4, the left and right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped with the same symbol, and only the central decorative symbol is varied. The reach state (for example, “4↓4”) is set.

At timing t5, the game board side effect display device 1600 starts displaying a simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570, the right inner ear frame movable body 7300, and the left inner ear frame movable body 7400.

FIG. 616(A) shows a state in which the display of the simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570 is started at the timing t5. It should be noted that the display of the simulated image imitating the movable body inside the right ear frame 7300 and the movable frame inside the left ear frame 7400 is started immediately after this (for example, 0.1 seconds later).

From timing t5 to timing t7, a simulated image simulating the manner in which the right inner ear frame movable body 7300 moves to the moving position and a simulated image simulating the manner in which the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 moves to the moving position. Is displayed dynamically.

At timing t7, a simulated image simulating the right inner ear frame movable body 7300 and a simulated image simulating the left inner ear frame movable body 7400 are displayed in a manner simulating a state where the movement to the movement position is completed.

FIG. 616(B) shows a state in which the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are still accommodated in the door frame top unit 570 at the timing t7, and the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 is imitated. It shows a state in which the simulated image and the simulated image simulating the left-ear inner frame movable body 7400 are displayed in a mode simulating the state in which the movement to the movement position is completed.

Next, at timing t8, the right inner ear frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are moved from the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570 to an upper moving position by drive control by the peripheral control board 1510. To start moving.

Next, at timing t10, the right-ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left-ear inner frame movable body 7400 complete the movement to the movement positions.

FIG. 616(C) shows a state in which the right inner ear frame movable body 7300 and the left inner ear frame movable body 7400 have completed moving to the movement positions at a timing t10, and a simulated image simulating the right inner ear frame movable body 7300 and the left side. It shows a state in which a simulated image imitating the movable inner ear frame 7400 is displayed in a mode imitating a state in which the movement to the movement position is completed.

From the timing t10 to the timing t16, the right inner ear frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 continue to be in the moving position. At the same time, a simulated image imitating the mode in which the right inner ear frame movable body 7300 is located at the moving position and a imitative image imitating the mode in which the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 is located at the moving position are displayed.

Next, at timing t16, the right-ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left-ear inner frame movable body 7400 start moving from the upper moving position to the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570. At the same time, a simulated image simulating the right inner ear frame movable body 7300 and a simulated image simulating the left inner ear frame movable body 7400 are dynamically displayed in a mode of starting to move to the standby position.

From timing t16 to timing t18, drive control is performed in which the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 move to the standby position. A simulated image simulating the manner in which the right inner ear frame movable body 7300 moves to the standby position and a simulated image simulating the manner in which the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 moves to the standby position are dynamically displayed. ..

At the timing t18, the movement of the right inner ear frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 to the standby position is completed, and the state is stored in the door frame top unit 570. At the same time, the display mode of the simulated image simulating the right inner ear frame movable body 7300 and the simulated image simulating the left inner ear frame movable body 7400 becomes the display mode in which the movement to the standby position is completed. Specifically, after a state in which only the simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570 is displayed for a moment, the display of the simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570 is also terminated.

At a predetermined timing after the timing t18, the variation of the central decorative design that has been varying ends, and the result of the special lottery is a jackpot (for example, "444") or the result of the special lottery. A symbol (for example, "454") indicating that the game is lost is stopped and displayed.

The right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 that are drive-controlled in the second effect mode are the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame that are drive controlled in the first effect mode. Compared to the body 7450, the area in front view in the state of moving to the movement position is smaller. Therefore, in the second effect mode, after the display of the simulated image simulating the right inner ear frame movable body 7300 and the simulated image simulating the left inner ear frame movable body 7400 is started, a predetermined time elapses, and then the right inner ear frame is displayed. By performing drive control of the frame movable body 7300 and the left-ear inner frame movable body 7400, it is configured to supplement the sense of volume as an effect.

In addition, the first and second effect modes shown in FIGS. 613(A) and 613(B) are movable in the inner ear frame movable body like the gaming machine described with reference to FIG. 541. Although the example of applying to the gaming machine having the outer ear frame movable body is shown, it may be applied to the gaming machine described with reference to FIG. 542. In this case, since the ear inner frame movable body moves from the upper standby position to the lower movement position, the simulated image of the ear inner frame movable body is also displayed from above in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. The display mode moves downward. Further, it may be applied to the gaming machine described with reference to FIGS. 543 and 544. In this case, since the inner ear frame movable body and the outer ear frame movable body are respectively moved from the lower standby position to the upper moving position, the simulated images of the inner ear frame movable body and the outer ear frame movable body are also played. In the display area of the board side effect display device 1600, the display mode is such that it moves from the lower side to the upper side. Alternatively, the inner ear frame movable body and the outer ear frame movable body are respectively moved from the upper standby position to the lower movement position, and the simulated images of the inner ear frame movable body and the outer ear frame movable body are also on the game board side. A display mode in which the display mode moves from the upper side to the lower side in the display area of the effect display device 1600 may be used.

The first effect mode will be described below with reference to FIG. 614(A). The effect modes shown in FIGS. 614(A) and 614(B) can be applied to a gaming machine having rotatable inner ear frame movable bodies and outer ear frame movable bodies as shown in FIGS. 547, 550 and the like. It shows a different production mode.

First, the variation of the decorative design is started in the game board side effect display device 1600 at a predetermined timing before the timing t0, and at timing t4, the left and right decorative designs are temporarily stopped with the same design, and only the central decorative design is varied. The reach state (for example, “4↓4”) is set.

At timing t8, the drive control by the peripheral control board 1510 causes the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 to change from the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570 to the rotated state. .. At the same time, at timing t8, the game board side effect display device 1600 starts displaying a simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. The right-ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left-ear outer frame movable body 7450 are displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 in a dynamic manner simulating a rotated state.

From timing t8 to timing t18, the rotating states of the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450, the door frame top unit 570, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, and the left in the game board side effect display device 1600. The display of the simulated image simulating the outer ear frame movable body 7450 is continued.

At timing t18, the states of the right-ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left-ear outer frame movable body 7450 change from the rotating state to the stopped state housed in the door frame top unit 570. At the same time, the display of the simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 ends.

At a predetermined timing after the timing t24, the variation of the central decorative symbol that has been varying ends, and the result of the special lottery is a jackpot (for example, "444") or the result of the special lottery. A symbol (for example, "454") indicating that the game is lost is stopped and displayed.

The second effect mode will be described below with reference to FIG. 614(B). First, the variation of the decorative design is started in the game board side effect display device 1600 at a predetermined timing before the timing t0, and at timing t4, the left and right decorative designs are temporarily stopped with the same design, and only the central decorative design is varied. The reach state (for example, “4↓4”) is set.

At timing t5, the game board side effect display device 1600 starts displaying a simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570, the right inner ear frame movable body 7300, and the left inner ear frame movable body 7400. The right-ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left-ear inner frame movable body 7400 are displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 in a dynamic manner simulating a rotated state.

At timing t8, the drive control by the peripheral control board 1510 causes the movable inner-ear frame 7300 and the movable inner-ear frame 7400 to move from the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570 to the rotated state. ..

From timing t8 to timing t18, the rotation states of the right inner ear frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the door frame top unit 570, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, and the left in the game board side effect display device 1600. The display of the simulated image imitating the movable inner frame 7400 is continued.

At timing t18, the states of the right inner ear frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 change from the rotating state to the stopped state housed in the door frame top unit 570. At the same time, the display of the simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570, the right inner ear frame movable body 7300, and the left inner ear frame movable body 7400 ends.

At a predetermined timing after the timing t24, the variation of the central decorative symbol that has been varying ends, and the result of the special lottery is a jackpot (for example, "444") or the result of the special lottery. A symbol (for example, "454") indicating that the game is lost is stopped and displayed.

The right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 that are drive-controlled in the second effect mode are the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame that are drive controlled in the first effect mode. Compared to the body 7450, the maximum area visually recognized in a front view in a rotated state is smaller. Therefore, in the second effect mode, after the display of the simulated image simulating the right inner ear frame movable body 7300 and the simulated image simulating the left inner ear frame movable body 7400 is started, a predetermined time elapses, and then the right inner ear frame is displayed. By performing drive control of the frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body, it is configured to supplement the sense of volume as an effect.

Thus, the first shaped body (right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and left ear outer frame movable body 7450) provided on the frame body and the second shaped body (right ear inner frame movable body 7300) provided on the frame body. In the gaming machine capable of driving and controlling the inner frame movable body 7400 of the left ear and a predetermined display means (game board side effect display device 1600), display of a simulated image simulating the second modeling object is started and then predetermined. The driving of the second shaped body is started at the timing when time has elapsed. Accordingly, even when a plurality of shaped bodies are provided on the frame body, it is possible to visually increase the sense of volume in the effect using the second shaped body. In addition, by displaying a simulated image that imitates the second molded body in advance on the predetermined display unit, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the drive control of the second molded body. ..

In addition, among a plurality of modeled objects (first modeled object and second modeled object) provided in the gaming machine, the size of the modeled object itself and the amount of visual change when the modeled object is drive-controlled are relatively large. When the drive control of the second shaped body, which is small and the drive control is hardly noticeable, is performed at a timing when a predetermined time has elapsed after the display of the simulated image simulating the second shaped body is started, It is configured to start driving the shaped body of. As a result, it is possible to visually increase the sense of volume with respect to the effect using the second shaped body in which the size and the amount of visual change when the drive is controlled are small and the drive control is less noticeable. Become. In addition, since the simulated image that imitates the second shaped body is displayed on the predetermined display unit in advance, the driving of the second shaped body is likely to be overlooked due to its relatively small size and the like. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player misses the control.

In addition, at a timing corresponding to the driving of the first shaped body (the movable body 7350 on the outer side of the right ear frame and the movable body 7450 on the left side of the outer ear frame), a simulated image simulating the first molded body is displayed on a predetermined display means (game board). By displaying on the side effect display device 1600), it is possible to show the player that the first shaped body is drive-controlled.

Hereinafter, modified examples of the first effect mode and the second effect mode described with reference to FIG. 613 will be described with reference to FIG. 617.

FIG. 617(A) shows a modification of the display mode of the simulated image of the first modeled object in the first effect mode described with reference to FIG. 613(A). In the first modification, the display for changing the simulated image of the first modeling object from the first state to the second state is performed from timing t7 to timing t9. Further, in the second modification, the display for changing the simulated image of the first modeling object from the first state to the second state is performed from timing t9 to timing t11. Further, in the modified example 3, after the display for changing the simulated image of the first modeling object from the first state to the second state is performed from the timing t7 to the timing t9, the display imitating the second state is displayed. Ends at the timing t11, and the display for changing the simulated image of the first modeling object from the first state to the second state is performed from the timing t11 to the timing t13.

As described above, the timing at which the display of the simulated image simulating the first model is started may be slightly behind the timing at which the drive control of the first model is started. Alternatively, the timing at which the display of the simulated image simulating the first model is ended may be the timing before the timing at which the first model is in the first state. Even when such a configuration is adopted, the same effect can be obtained.

FIG. 617(B) shows a modification of the display mode of the simulated image of the second modeling object in the second effect mode described with reference to FIG. 613(B). In the first modification, the display of the simulated image of the second molded body in the second state is performed from timing t5 to timing t8. Further, in the modified example 2, the display of the simulated image of the second molded body in the second state is performed from the timing t5 to the timing t9.

In this way, as the simulated image of the second molded body, an image simulating the state where the second molded body is drive-controlled to be in the second state is suddenly displayed, and the drive control of the second molded body is performed. The display may be continued until the start timing. Even when such a configuration is adopted, the same effect can be obtained.

Hereinafter, modified examples of the first effect mode and the second effect mode described with reference to FIG. 614 will be described with reference to FIG. 618.

FIG. 618(A) shows a modification of the display mode of the simulated image of the first modeled object in the first effect mode described with reference to FIG. 614(A). In the first modification, the display of the simulated image of the first shaped body is performed from the timing t7 to the timing t18. In Modification 2, the simulated image of the first modeled object is displayed from timing t9 to timing t18. Further, in the modified example 3, the display of the simulated image of the first shaped body is performed from the timing t7 to the timing t13.

As described above, the timing at which the display of the simulated image simulating the first model is started may be slightly behind the timing at which the drive control of the first model is started. Alternatively, the timing at which the display of the simulated image simulating the first model is ended may be the timing before the timing at which the first model is in the first state. Even when such a configuration is adopted, the same effect can be obtained.

FIG. 618(B) shows a modification of the display mode of the simulated image of the second model in the second effect mode described with reference to FIG. 614(B). In the first modification, the display of the simulated image of the second molded body in the second state is performed from timing t5 to timing t8. Further, in the modified example 2, the display of the simulated image of the second molded body in the second state is performed from the timing t5 to the timing t9.

In this way, as the simulated image of the second molded body, an image simulating the state in which the second molded body is drive-controlled to be in the second state is displayed, and the drive control of the second molded body is started. You may comprise so that it may continue to display until the timing. Even when such a configuration is adopted, the same effect can be obtained.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 613(A) and 614(A), the simulated image imitating the first modeling object in the first effect mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. However, the simulated image simulating the first modeled body may not be displayed in the first effect mode.

With such a configuration, it is possible to secure a display area in a predetermined display means (game board side effect display device 1600), and for example, in the vicinity of the center of the predetermined display means without reducing the decorative pattern. It is possible to continue displaying.

Alternatively, instead of displaying the simulated image imitating the first modeled object in the first effect mode, a display indicating that the first modeled object is drive-controlled may be performed. For example, the game board side effect display device 1600 may be configured to display "May my ears pop out?" or "If I look up?".

With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player does not notice that the first shaped body is drive-controlled.

In the first molded body and the second molded body, the second molded body has a smaller area in front view in a drive-controlled state and is less conspicuous. Therefore, in order to secure a sense of volume as an effect, Before the second molded body is drive-controlled, a simulated image simulating the second molded body is displayed. However, even when the second molded body is not conspicuous in another mode, the second modeled body is similarly displayed. You may comprise so that the simulated image which imitated the modeling body may be displayed.

When the amount of movement in the vertical direction or the horizontal direction when the drive is controlled is shorter in the second shaped body than in the first shaped body, the second shaped body is less noticeable. For example, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 615 and 616, the first shaped body (right ear outer frame movable body 7350, left ear outer frame movable body 7450) is drive-controlled to move upward from the standby position. 10 cm, when the second molded body (right ear inner frame movable body 7300, left ear inner frame movable body 7400) is drive-controlled and moves upward by 5 cm from the standby position, the drive control of the second molded body is Less noticeable than the first model. In such a case, it is possible to secure a sense of volume as an effect by displaying the simulated image of the second molded body.

In this way, when the movement distance of the second shaped body is smaller than the movement distance of the first shaped body when the drive control is performed, the second shaped body is driven before the drive control of the second shaped body. By displaying the simulated image of, it is possible to secure a sense of volume as an effect.

Alternatively, when the moving speed of the first model and the second model is controlled to be lower than that of the second model, the first model and the second model that are rotatable are driven. In the case where the angular velocity when rotated by control is slower in the second model, in the case where the time during which drive control is performed in the first model and the second model is shorter in the second model Alternatively, the simulated image of the second molded body may be displayed prior to the drive control of the second molded body. Also in this case, it is possible to secure a sense of volume as an effect in the effect using the second shaped body.

The dynamic display of the simulated image simulating the second model is configured to be performed a plurality of times, and the expectation that the special lottery result will be a big hit depending on the number of dynamic displays is configured to be shown to the player. Good. For example, in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 613(B), in addition to the dynamic display performed from the timing t5 to the timing t7, it is possible to execute an effect mode in which the same dynamic display is performed from the timing t3 to the timing t5. You may comprise. Furthermore, a performance mode in which similar dynamic display is performed may be configured to be executable from timing t1 to timing t3. Further, in addition to the dynamic display performed from the timing t5 to the timing t7, it may be possible to execute an effect mode in which the same dynamic display is performed from the timing t7 to the timing t9. Further, a performance mode in which similar dynamic display is performed may be configured to be executable from timing t9 to timing t11.

In this way, the dynamic display of the simulated image simulating the second molded body is repeatedly executed before or after the drive control of the second molded body, and a state advantageous to the player is generated depending on the number of times of repetition. With the structure that suggests the degree of expectation, it is possible to further increase the volume feeling as the effect of the second shaped body, and in addition, the movement of the second shaped body provided on the frame body. Either of the act of directly visually recognizing itself or the act of visually observing a simulated image simulating the second modeling object displayed on a predetermined display means and knowing the degree of expectation that a state advantageous to the player will occur. It is possible to provide the player with the interest of enjoying the game.

In addition, a plurality of simulated images with different display modes are prepared in advance as simulated images simulating the second modeling object, and the expectation that the special lottery result will be a big hit depending on the type of the displayed simulated image is given to the player. It may be configured as shown. For example, when a large simulated image simulating the second model and a small simulated image simulating the second model are prepared in advance, and a large simulated image simulating the second model is displayed. May be configured so that the expectation that the special lottery result will be a big hit is higher. Alternatively, a white simulated image simulating the second model and a red simulated image simulating the second model are prepared in advance, and a red simulated image simulating the second model is displayed. In the case where the special lottery result is obtained, the expectation that the special lottery result is a big hit may be higher.

As described above, it is possible to execute a plurality of different display modes as the dynamic display mode of the simulated image simulating the second modeling object, and suggest the degree of expectation that a state advantageous to the player will occur depending on the type of the displayed simulated image. With such a configuration, the variation of the display mode of the simulated image imitating the second modeling object is increased, and it is possible to further increase the sense of volume as a production, and in addition, it is provided in the frame body. The act of directly visually recognizing the motion of the formed second molded body and visually observing a simulated image simulating the second molded body displayed on a predetermined display means are expected to create a state advantageous to the player. It is possible to provide the player with an interest in which of the actions of knowing the degree to enjoy.

In this way, when suggesting the degree of expectation that a state advantageous to the player will occur by the display mode of the simulated image simulating the second model, the second model is driven and controlled. Although the operation itself of the second molded body is the same, the operation mode of the second molded body is different, and the degree of expectation that a state advantageous to the player occurs depending on the operation mode of the second molded body. It may be configured to suggest.

In the second effect mode, after the simulated image simulating the second molded object is displayed, the second molded object is drive-controlled, but the effect mode in which the simulated image is not displayed is also executable. Good. For example, from timing t5 to timing t18 in the second effect mode described with reference to FIGS. 613(B) and 614(B), the display mode of the simulated image of the second modeling object continues without being displayed. It is good to configure as follows.

As described above, by configuring the third effect mode not accompanied by the display of the simulated image of the second modeling object to be executable in addition to the first effect mode and the second effect mode, the first effect mode is achieved. It is possible to provide the player with an effect mode having a surprising and tense feeling that the second molded body, which is relatively inconspicuous as compared with the molded body, is driving unexpectedly.

When driving the first shaped body, a evoking sound indicating that the first shaped body is driven may be output. For example, in the first effect mode described with reference to FIGS. 613(A) and 614(A), from the timing t6 to the timing t8, which is the timing before the drive control of the first modeling object, the first It may be configured to output an evoking sound indicating that the shaped body of FIG. Alternatively, the evoking sound indicating that the first modeling object is driven is output from timing t6 to timing t10 so that the evoking sound is output even after the drive control of the first modeling object. Good to configure. Alternatively, the evoking sound indicating that the first modeling object is being driven is output from timing t8 to timing t12 so that the evoking sound is output after the drive control of the first modeling object is started. It is good to configure as follows.

With such a configuration, the player can be driven by driving the first shaped body having a relatively large size or movement amount among the plurality of shaped bodies (the first shaped body and the second shaped body). It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation such as a problem. When the second shaped body is driven, since a simulated image simulating the second shaped body is displayed, such an evoking sound is not output.

613(A), FIG. 614(A), and the like, an example in which a voicing sound is output during a predetermined period (timing t6 to timing t8 or timing t6 to timing t10) has been shown. As a configuration, the configuration relating to the special arousal sound described above with reference to FIGS. 569 and 570 may be adopted.

When driving the second molded body, the BGM is changed during the change in either the display period of the simulated image simulating the second molded body or the period during the drive control of the second molded body, or both. The volume of the output variable effect sound may be suppressed. For example, in the second effect mode described with reference to FIGS. 613(A) and 613(B), the variable effect sound is output in a normal mode until timing t5 to simulate the second modeling object. In the period from the timing t5 to the timing t8 which is a period from the display of the image to the start of the drive control of the second shaped body, the variable effect sound is output in a mode in which it is suppressed as compared with the normal mode. Good to configure. Alternatively, until the timing t5, the variable effect sound is output in a normal mode, and is a period from the display of the simulated image simulating the second modeling object to the end of the drive control of the second modeling object. In the period from the timing t5 to the timing t18, the variation effect sound may be output in a mode in which it is suppressed as compared with the normal mode. It should be noted that in the suppressed state, the volume may be set to half or less as compared with the normal state.

As described above, the output state of the fluctuating effect sound is changed from the normal state to the suppressed state in accordance with the display of the simulated image simulating the second molded body, so that the plurality of molded bodies (the first molded body and the second molded body It is possible for the player to concentrate on driving or being driven of the second molded body having a relatively small size among the molded bodies.

According to the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 613 to 616 and the like, by providing a plurality of modeling bodies on the frame body, the size of each modeling body and the movable range when driving each modeling body can be improved. Even in the case of being limited, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player feels less interesting when driving the individual shaped bodies alone.

[40. Frame movable body]
By the way, in the gaming machine described with reference to FIGS. 523 to 576 and the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2016-093655, the movable decoration means provided in the frame body forming the outer shape of the gaming machine is operated. This makes it possible for the player to have an interest. However, if the player does not notice such an operation of the movable decoration means, there is a possibility that the player may get injured by bringing his head or fingers into contact with the movable decoration means. there were.

Hereinafter, an embodiment of the gaming machine capable of suppressing the occurrence of the injury of the player by the movable decoration means will be described.

Hereinafter, the first effect mode and the second effect mode applicable to the gaming machine described with reference to FIG. 612 will be described with reference to FIGS. 619(A) and 619(B). In addition, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 in the present embodiment is provided in the root vegetable frame movable body cover unit 7850 as described with reference to FIGS. 612(A) to 612(E), and is brought into contact with the player. Is difficult to configure.

The first effect mode using the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 will be described below with reference to FIG. 619(A).

In the first effect mode, first, the variation of the decorative design is started on the game board side effect display device 1600 at a predetermined timing before the timing t0, and at timing t4, the left and right decorative designs are temporarily stopped with the same design, The reach state (for example, “4↓4”) in which only the decorative pattern in the center changes is set.

Next, at timing t5, the output of the evoking sound for notifying that the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are operating is started. Next, at timing t7, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are moved from the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570 to the upper moving position by drive control by the peripheral control board 1510. To start.

From timing t7 to timing t9, drive control for moving the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 to the movement position is performed. At this time, the evoking sound is also continuously output.

At timing t9, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 complete the movement to the movement positions. At the same time, the output of the arousing sound that has been continuously output from timing t5 ends.

Next, at a timing t21, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts moving from the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570 to the moving position moved downward from the door frame top unit 570. .. At timing t22, the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the movement position is completed. From the timing t22 to the timing t25, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is positioned in a stationary state at a position overlapping substantially in the center of the game board side effect display device 1600 in a front view.

Next, at timing t25, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts changing from a state in which it is moved downward from the door frame top unit 570 to a state in which it is in a standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570. .. At timing t26, the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the standby position is completed.

Next, at timing t28, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 start moving from the upper moving position to the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570.

From timing t28 to timing t30, drive control for moving the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 to the standby position is performed. At timing t30, the movement of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 to the standby position is completed.

At a predetermined timing after the timing t30, the variation of the central decorative symbol that has been varying ends, and the result of the special lottery is a symbol (for example, “444”) or the result of the special lottery. A symbol (for example, "454") indicating that the game is lost is stopped and displayed.

The second effect mode using the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 will be described below with reference to FIG. 619(B). In the second effect mode, unlike the first effect mode, no audible sound is output. Further, the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 are configured to simultaneously start the operation.

In the second effect mode, first, the variation of the decorative design is started in the game board side effect display device 1600 at a predetermined timing before the timing t0, and at the timing t4, the left and right decorative designs are temporarily stopped with the same design, The reach state (for example, “4↓4”) in which only the decorative pattern in the center changes is set.

Next, at a timing t21, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts moving from the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570 to the moving position moved downward from the door frame top unit 570. .. At the same time, the drive control by the peripheral control board 1510 causes the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 to start moving from the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570 to the upper moving position.

At timing t22, the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the movement position is completed. From the timing t22 to the timing t25, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is positioned in a stationary state at a position overlapping substantially in the center of the game board side effect display device 1600 in a front view. On the other hand, at timing t23, the movement of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 to the movement position is completed.

Next, at timing t25, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts changing from a state in which it is moved downward from the door frame top unit 570 to a state in which it is in a standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570. .. At timing t26, the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the standby position is completed.

Next, at timing t28, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 start moving from the upper moving position to the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570.

From timing t28 to timing t30, drive control for moving the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 to the standby position is performed. At timing t30, the movement of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 to the standby position is completed.

At a predetermined timing after the timing t30, the variation of the central decorative symbol that has been varying ends, and the result of the special lottery is a symbol (for example, “444”) or the result of the special lottery. A symbol (for example, "454") indicating that the game is lost is stopped and displayed.

In the following, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 and the root vegetable frame movable body cover unit 7850 which the gaming machine described with reference to FIG. 612 has, the rotatable right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear described with reference to FIG. A first effect mode and a second effect mode that are applicable to a gaming machine having a frame movable body 7200 and can be executed in the applied gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 620(A) and 620(B). To do.

Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 620(A), a first effect mode using the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 will be described.

In the first effect mode, first, the variation of the decorative design is started on the game board side effect display device 1600 at a predetermined timing before the timing t0, and at timing t4, the left and right decorative designs are temporarily stopped with the same design, The reach state (for example, “4↓4”) in which only the decorative pattern in the center changes is set.

Next, at timing t5, the output of the evoking sound notifying that the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are operating is then started. Next, at timing t7, the drive control by the peripheral control board 1510 changes the state of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 from the standby state housed in the door frame top unit 570 to the rotating state. Let

At timing t9, the output of the arousing sound that has been continuously output from timing t5 ends.

Next, at a timing t21, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts moving from the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570 to the moving position moved downward from the door frame top unit 570. .. At timing t22, the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the movement position is completed. From the timing t22 to the timing t25, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is positioned in a stationary state at a position overlapping substantially in the center of the game board side effect display device 1600 in a front view.

Next, at timing t25, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts changing from a state in which it is moved downward from the door frame top unit 570 to a state in which it is in a standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570. .. At timing t26, the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the standby position is completed. Next, at a timing t30, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are changed from the rotating state to the state in which the rotation is stopped and the state is stored in the standby position.

At a predetermined timing after the timing t30, the variation of the central decorative symbol that has been varying ends, and the result of the special lottery is a symbol (for example, “444”) or the result of the special lottery. A symbol (for example, "454") indicating that the game is lost is stopped and displayed.

The second effect mode using the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 will be described below with reference to FIG. 620(B). In the second effect mode, unlike the first effect mode, no audible sound is output. Further, the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 are configured to simultaneously start the operation.

In the second effect mode, first, the variation of the decorative design is started in the game board side effect display device 1600 at a predetermined timing before the timing t0, and at the timing t4, the left and right decorative designs are temporarily stopped with the same design, The reach state (for example, “4↓4”) in which only the decorative pattern in the center changes is set.

Next, at the timing t21, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 change their states from the standby state housed in the door frame top unit 570 to the rotating state by drive control by the peripheral control board 1510. Let

At the timing t21, at the same time, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts moving from the state in which it is stored in the door frame top unit 570 to the standby position to the state in which it moves downward from the door frame top unit 570. .. At timing t22, the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the movement position is completed. From the timing t22 to the timing t25, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is positioned in a stationary state at a position overlapping substantially in the center of the game board side effect display device 1600 in a front view.

Next, at timing t25, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts changing from a state in which it is moved downward from the door frame top unit 570 to a state in which it is in a standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570. .. At timing t26, the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the standby position is completed. Next, at a timing t30, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are changed from the rotating state to the state in which the rotation is stopped and the state is stored in the standby position.

At a predetermined timing after the timing t30, the variation of the central decorative symbol that has been varying ends, and the result of the special lottery is a symbol (for example, "444") or the result of the special lottery. A symbol (for example, "454") indicating that the game is lost is stopped and displayed.

In the first effect mode and the second effect mode described with reference to FIGS. 619(A) and 619(B), or with the first effect mode described with reference to FIGS. 620(A) and 620(B). In the effect mode and the second effect mode, the operation mode of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is common. On the other hand, in the first effect mode, after the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 operate with the output of the evoked sound, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 operates after a predetermined time has elapsed. On the other hand, in the second effect mode, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 start the operation at the same timing as the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 without outputting the evoking sound. It is configured.

In this way, when the first movable decorative means (right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200) provided on the frame body operates independently, a voicing sound is output in advance, so the game Since the player pays attention to the first movable decoration means, the player may be injured by contacting the first movable decoration means by an inadvertent movement of the player (for example, standing up). It is possible to suppress the occurrence.

On the other hand, when the second movable decoration means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) is operated together with the first movable decoration means, no evoking sound is output. This is because the second movable decoration means moves to a position where it overlaps with a predetermined display means (game board side effect display device 1600) when viewed from the front, so that the player's consciousness is directed to the vicinity of the predetermined display means. This is because it is difficult for a player to perform an inadvertent operation, and even if the first movable decoration means provided on the frame is operating, the player is less likely to be injured.

Although an example in which a voicing sound is output in a predetermined period (timing t5 to timing t9) has been described with reference to FIGS. 619 (A) and 620 (A), etc., FIG. 569 and FIG. The configuration relating to the special arousal sound described above with reference to 570 and the like may be adopted.

FIG. 621 shows a modification of the effect mode described with reference to FIG. 619. Further, FIG. 622 shows a modification of the effect mode described with reference to FIG. 620. In these modifications, in the second effect mode, at the timing t22 when the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is completed, the movement of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 to the movement position is performed. The moving operation is configured to be started.

In this way, at the timing when the second movable decoration means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) starts operating and moves to a position overlapping the predetermined display means (game board side effect display device 1600) in the front view, By starting the operation of the first movable decoration means (the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200), the player's consciousness is directed to the vicinity of the predetermined display means, and the player is careless. It becomes difficult for the player to perform an operation, and even if the first movable decoration means provided on the frame operates, the player is less likely to be injured.

The second effect mode may be configured to have a higher expectation that the special lottery result will be a big hit than the first effect mode. Moreover, you may comprise so that the frequency with which a 1st production mode is performed becomes higher than the frequency with which a 2nd production mode is performed. For example, out of 100 times the special lottery is performed, the first effect mode is performed about 5 times (executed with a probability of 5%) and the second effect mode is performed about once (executed with a probability of 1%). It may be configured to be performed.

As described above, in the first effect mode in which the execution frequency is high and the expectation that a big hit is low, the first movable decoration means (the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear that frequently occur) is generated by outputting the evoking sound. The motion of the frame movable body 7200) is evoked to the player. Since the player's consciousness for the first movable decoration means is distracted due to low expectations in particular, it is effective to make such an alert.

On the other hand, in the second effect mode in which the execution frequency is low and the expectation that a big hit is high, the audible sound is not output, and the operation of the second movable decoration means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) together with the first movable decoration means. I am making it. In this case, since the expectation of the big hit is high, the player's line of sight is concentrated near the predetermined display means (game board side effect display device 1600) where the second movable decoration means moves, and the careless movement ( It is not necessary to output a voicing sound when operating the first movable decoration means, because it is difficult to perform (such as standing up).

On the other hand, for the clerk of the game shop, since the operation of the first movable decoration means can be visually recognized from a distance, there is a high possibility that a state advantageous to the player (a jackpot state as an example) occurs. Can be recognized, and it becomes possible to provide the player with a predetermined service (for example, exchange of a dollar box or stop processing in a quantitative gaming machine).

In addition, if a voicing sound is output in a state of high expectation, it may be possible for the player to enter into a hilarious state, but by not outputting an evoking sound, the occurrence of such a situation is suppressed. It becomes possible to do.

It may be configured such that the evoking sound is output in the early stage or the middle stage of the fluctuation of the decorative pattern, but the evoking sound is not output in the middle stage of the changing of the decorative pattern.

With such a configuration, an unnecessary sound is not output at the end of the fluctuation when the fluctuation result of the decorative symbol is shown, and the player can concentrate on the mode in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed on the predetermined display means. ..

In the first effect mode, the variable effect sound may be suppressed when outputting the evoking sound. For example, in the period from the timing t5 to the timing t9 and the period from the timing t4 to the timing t10 in the first effect mode shown in FIGS. It is good to do.

On the other hand, in the second effect mode, the variation effect sound is suppressed until the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves downward, and the variation effect sound is released at the same time when the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 drops and moves. You may. For example, in the period from the timing t18 to the timing t21 and the period from the timing t18 to the timing t26 in the second effect mode shown in FIGS. 619 and 620, the output state of the fluctuating effect sound is changed from the normal state to the suppressed state in which the volume is low. It is good to do.

With such a configuration, in the first effect mode, since the evoking sound is output in a state where the variable effect sound is suppressed, it is possible for the player to operate the first movable decoration means. Will be effectively notified.

Further, in the second effect mode, the movement of the second movable decoration means is suppressed by keeping the variable effect sound suppressed for a predetermined period before the second movable decoration means starts moving. It will be easier for players to reach.

Although an example of suppressing the fluctuation effect sound in a predetermined period has been shown with reference to FIGS. 619 and 620 and the like, the configuration relating to the fluctuation effect sound and the evoking sound has been described above with reference to FIGS. 569 and 570 and the like. You may employ|adopt the structure which concerns on a change effect sound and a special alert sound.

In the first effect mode, the operation of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 may be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. For example, as in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 609(A), a simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are simulated in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. The display for moving the simulated image upward may be configured to be displayed from the timing t5 to the timing t9 in the first effect mode described with reference to FIGS. 619 and 620.

On the other hand, in the second effect mode, the game board side effect display device 1600 may be configured not to perform such display when the right ear frame movable member 7100 and the left ear frame movable member 7200 operate.

By performing such a display, it is possible to easily inform the player that the first movable decoration means operates in the first effect mode. On the other hand, in the second effect mode, by preventing such a display when the first movable decoration means operates, it is possible to prevent the effect around the predetermined display means from becoming excessive. You can The predetermined display unit is not limited to the simulated image simulating the first movable decoration unit, and another image (for example, an image of an upward arrow) may be displayed in a mode that suggests the position where the first movable decoration unit is provided. May be displayed.

In the first effect mode and the second effect mode, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moved to the movement position is moved to the standby position based on the operation of the predetermined operation unit (push button, lever, etc.) by the player. It may be configured so as to be able to. For example, in the first effect mode and the second effect mode, when the player operates a predetermined operation unit at timing t23, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is moved from the moving position from timing t23 to timing t24. It is better to move it to the standby position.

In this way, the time during which the second movable decoration means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) is located at the moving position may be changed according to the operation by the player. As a result, it becomes difficult for other players to notice that the second movable decoration means is operating, and there is a high expectation that another player will have a favorable state (big hit state). It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation such as being harassed due to a strain.

In the modified examples of the first effect mode and the second effect mode in FIGS. 621 and 622, when the player operates the predetermined operation unit, compared to the case where the operation is not performed on the predetermined operation unit by the player. The first movable decoration means may be configured to be driven early. That is, in the modified examples in FIGS. 621 and 622, the player who repeatedly plays the second movable decoration means that starts to operate before the operation of the first decorating means is repeatedly viewed by the player. As a result, the operation of the first movable decoration means cannot be waited for. For this reason, the operation of the second movable decoration means is not started after the operation of the second movable decoration means is always performed for a certain fixed period, but the operation of the second movable decoration means is started by button operation. By making it possible to drive the first movable decoration means at an appropriate timing after the completion of the game, the first movable decoration means can be quickly operated for a player who is watching the same effect many times. It is possible to give an opportunity to make it possible to suppress the decline in interest. It should be noted that such a predetermined operation may be configured to start the process of returning the second movable decoration means to the standby position, and even when a predetermined operation is performed, the first movable decoration means is returned to the standby position at a predetermined timing. The process of returning the second movable decoration means to the standby position may be started.

According to the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 619, FIG. 620, etc., the player's attention can be produced based on the lottery result without outputting a voicing sound when operating the first movable decoration means. It is possible to direct the player's consciousness to the vicinity of a predetermined display means to be performed, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where the player is injured by the first movable decoration means.

In the above-described embodiment, the left and right ear frame movable bodies have a high expectation that a big hit, which is a state advantageous to the player, is high by executing a predetermined effect mode among a plurality of different effect modes. Although it has been shown that the player is informed by operating the, it is configured to inform the player of the degree of expectation that other game content other than the degree of expectation that a big hit will occur. May be.

For example, although it is decided that a big hit will occur, it may be configured to notify the content of the profit to be given to the player during the big hit. As the content of the profit, for example, the type of the profit may be notified, or the amount of the profit may be notified.

Alternatively, it may be configured to notify the content of the profit to be given to the player after the big hit. For example, it may be configured to notify the type of profit to be given to the player after the big hit, or to notify the amount of profit to be given to the player after the big hit. ..

In this way, not only the degree of expectation that a state advantageous to the player (a big hit state as an example) will occur, but the amount of profit given to the player in the state advantageous to the player (as an example, given to the player Expectation about the number of coins to be played and the number of times the big winning opening is opened, etc., which can be newly generated after the state advantageous to the player ends (for example, the probability change state or Den Chu support) The expected degree of occurrence of a state), the type of profit to be given to the player in the game newly generated after the advantageous state for the player ends (for example, the probability variation state or the electric chew support state) and the amount ( As an example, even when it is configured to notify the number of fluctuations in which the probability variation state continues and the number of fluctuations in which the power tube support continues, it is possible to achieve the same effects as those of the above-described embodiments.

The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 have a high expectation that a big hit, which is an advantageous state for the player, is generated by executing a predetermined effect aspect out of a plurality of different effect aspects. Although it has been shown that the player is notified by operating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, the left ear outer frame movable body 7450, etc. Alternatively, it may be configured to include that it is determined that the big hit is expected as the big hit occurrence (100% big hit occurs). For example, in each of the above-described embodiments, a 50% big hit is generated when the first effect mode is executed, and a 100% big hit is generated when the second effect mode is executed. It may be configured to occur.

In the above-described embodiment, the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, the left ear outer frame movable. When the simulated image simulating the body 7450 and the like is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, the simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570 is also displayed at the same time. The simulated image may be displayed for a few seconds (for example, 2 seconds) in advance, and then the simulated images simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 to the left outer ear frame movable body 7450 may be displayed. .. For example, in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 607(A), a simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570 may be displayed from timing t5 to timing t7.

Further, the simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570 does not move while being fixedly displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and the right ear frame is movable with respect to the simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570. A simulated image of the body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 moves upward. It is better to configure it.

In this way, movable movable decoration means and drivable shaped bodies (right ear frame movable body 7100, left ear frame movable body 7200, right ear inner frame movable body 7300, right ear outer frame movable body 7350, left ear inner side) A unit (door frame top unit 570) for displaying and displaying a simulated image simulating the frame movable body 7400, the left ear outer frame movable body 7450) and storing and holding movable movable decorative means and drivable shaped bodies. By being configured to display a simulated image imitating the above, the player can easily understand the operation mode and drive mode of the movable decoration means that can be operated and the driveable molded body.

In particular, a simulated image simulating a unit (door frame top unit 570) that stores and holds movable movable decoration means and drivable shaped body is displayed on a predetermined display means (game board side effect display device 1600). By fixedly displaying in a predetermined area, it becomes possible for the player to easily understand the operation mode and drive mode of the movable decorative means that is more operable and the driveable molded body.

In addition, a unit that stores or holds the movable decorative means or the drivable shaped body operable at a timing before the timing of displaying the simulated image simulating the movable movable decorative means or the drivable shaped body. By displaying the simulated image imitating the (door frame top unit 570), the player's expectation for the operation of the movable decoration means and the drive of the modeled body is increased. Further, since the player can visually recognize the operation of the movable decoration means and the drive of the shaped body from the timing when the operation of the movable decoration means and the drive of the shaped body are started, the player can see the operation of the movable decoration means and the drive of the shaped body. Can be enjoyed for a longer time.

In addition, in each of the above-described embodiments, the simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570 may not be displayed.

Instead of the operation of the movable root vegetable frame 7800, the rabbit accessory 6000 described with reference to FIG. 487 and the like is configured to be operated in the same manner (for example, in the vertical direction), and the various effect modes described above are executed. It may be configured to do so. Also in this case, it is possible to achieve the same effect as each of the above-described effect modes.

The right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are door frame top units. Although the example of operating between the state of being housed in the 570 and the state of projecting upward from the door frame top unit 570 has been shown, the present invention is not limited to such a change in state but may be changed in other states. .. For example, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 may be configured to operate from a state in which they are half protruding from the door frame top unit 570 to a state in which they are completely protruded from the door frame top unit 570.

In this way, from the first state in which the first movable decoration means is located at the first position (the state where the first movable decoration means is stored in the door frame top unit 570 and the state where the door frame top unit 570 is half popped out) to the second position. Even when it is configured to operate between the second state (the state where the door frame top unit 570 is completely popped out), the above-described effect can be obtained.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 607, FIG. 619, etc., a state where the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is housed in the door frame top unit 570 and a front view of the game board side effect display device 1600 approximately in the center. Although the example of operating between the states of overlapping with each other has been shown, the change of the state is not limited to such a state, and another state may be changed. For example, from the state where the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is located at a position overlapping substantially the lower part of the game board side effect display device 1600 in the front view, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 overlaps the approximate center of the game board side effect display device 1600 in the front view. It may be configured to operate in a position-in-position.

In this way, the second movable decoration means is located at the first position in the first state (stored in the door frame top unit 570, and substantially overlaps with the lower portion of the game board side effect display device 1600 in a front view). Position state) to a second state (a state where the game board side effect display device 1600 is located at a position overlapping with the substantial center in a front view) of the game board side effect display device 1600. Even in such a case, the above-mentioned effects can be achieved.

The technical matters in the structure of the gaming machine in the embodiment may be combined and applied to form the embodiment. Further, the embodiments may be applied by combining the production examples and the technical items in the production examples. Further, the technical matters in the respective accessory configurations may be combined and applied to form an embodiment. Further, these technical items may be combined and applied as an embodiment.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to the preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements can be made without departing from the gist of the present invention as shown below. And the design can be changed.

That is, in the embodiment, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine is shown, but the invention is not limited to this, and the invention is applied to a pachi-slot machine or a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachi-slot machine are fused. However, even in this case, the same effect can be obtained.

1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5'Game board 5a Game area 190 Glass unit 530 Door frame left side unit 550 Door frame right side unit 570 Door frame top unit 931 Power supply board 1000 Front component 1001 Outer rail 1002 Inner rail 1100 Game panel 1100a Game panel opening 1110 Panel board 1117 Panel convex part 1200 Obstacle nail 1201 Obstacle nail 1202 Obstacle nail 1203 Obstacle nail 1204 Obstacle nail 1205 Obstacle nail 1206 Obstacle nail 1207 Obstacle nail 1208 Obstacle nail 1209 Obstacle nail 1210 obstacle nail 1211 obstacle nail 1212 obstacle nail 1213 obstacle nail 1214 obstacle nail 1215 obstacle nail 1216 obstacle nail 1217 obstacle nail 1218 obstacle nail 1219 obstacle nail 1220 obstacle nail 1221 obstacle nail 1222 obstacle nail 1223 obstacle nail 1224 obstacle nail 1231 jump nail 1230 life nail Nail 1232 Left guide nail 1233 Right guide nail 1402 Normal symbol display 1403 First special symbol display 1404 First special reserved number indicator 1405 Second special symbol indicator 1406 Second special reserved number indicator 1407 Round indicator 1500 Surroundings Control unit 1510 Peripheral control board 1600 Game board side effect display device 2000 Table unit 2001 General winning opening 2002 First starting opening 2003 Gate part 2004 Second starting opening 2005 Great winning opening 2522 Warp exit 2530 Stage 2600 Area cover member 2600a Area cover member 2610 Penetration part 2610a Penetration part 2611 Penetration part 2612 Penetration part 2613 Penetration part 2614 Penetration part 2615 Penetration part 2616 Penetration part 2617 Penetration part 2617a Notch end part 2618 Penetration part 2619 Penetration part 2620 Penetration part 2630 Attachment boss 2631 Attachment boss 2632 2633 Mounting boss 2640 Ball restriction protrusion 2650 Penetration part 2651 Penetration part 2652 Penetration part 2653 Penetration part 2660 Boss part 2670 Storage recess 2700 Flow path device 2710a First flow path entrance 2710b Second flow path entrance 2720a First flow path forming member 2720b Second flow path forming member 2730a First flow Road outlet 2730b Second flow outlet 5000 Nail sheet 5100 Film sheet 5110 First area print 5120 Second area print 5200 Obstacle nail print 5950 Rail member 6000 Rabbit role 6010 Face cover 6011 Face cover front 6011a 1 Face Light Scattering Part 6011b Second Face Light Scattering Part 6012 Face Cover Top Face 6013 Face Cover Right Face 6014 Face Cover Bottom Face 6015 Face Cover Left Face 6016 First Arm 6017 Second Arm 6020 Face Board 6021 First ear portion 6021a First ear decoration portion 6022 Second ear portion 6022a Second ear decoration portion 6023 Face light emitting portion 6023a First face light emitting portion 6023b Second face light emitting portion 6024 Ornament portion 6025 Control element 6026 Driver 6027 Resistor 6027a 1 resistance 6027b 2nd resistance 6027c 3rd resistance 6027d 4th resistance 6027e 5th resistance 6027f 6th resistance 6028 capacitor 6028a 1st capacitor 6028b 2nd capacitor 6029 connector 6030 body part 6100 stump 6200 stump 6210 stump stump 6210a Opening 6300 Stump box 6310 Box upper wall 6320 Box right wall 6330 Box lower wall 6340 Box left wall 6350 Box rear wall 6352 Rear wall substrate 6352a First rear wall substrate 6352b Second rear wall substrate 6354 Rear wall Light emitting portion 6354a First rear wall light emitting portion 6354b Second rear wall light emitting portion 6356 Rear wall cover 6358 Rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358a First rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358b Second rear wall light scattering portion 6360 First grass movable Part 6360a First grass decorative part 6370 Second grass movable part 6370a Second grass decorative part 6380 Rear wall plate part 6381 Grass plate part 6381a Grass plate colored transparent part 6381b Grass plate colorless transparent part 6382a Grass plate central decorative part 6382b On grass plate Decorative part 6382c Grass plate right decorative part 6382d Grass plate lower decorative part 6382e Grass plate left decorative part 6400 Grass accessory 6420 Grass substrate 6422 Grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422a Grass substrate front first light emitting portion 6422b Grass substrate front second light emitting portion 6422c Grass substrate front side third light emitting portion 6424 Grass substrate rear surface light emitting portion 6424a Grass substrate rear surface first Light emitting unit 6424b Grass substrate rear surface Second light emitting unit 6426 Grass substrate opening 6426a Grass substrate first opening 6426b Grass substrate second opening 6440 Grass front cover 6442 Grass front cover Transparent portion 6442a Grass front cover Colorless transparent portion 6442b Grass front cover Colored transparent part 6444 Grass front cover Light scattering part 6444a Grass front cover Colorless light scattering part 6444b Grass front cover Colored light scattering part 6446 Grass front cover Opaque part 6448 Grass front cover opening 6448a Grass front cover 1st opening 6448b Grass front cover Second opening 6460 Grass back cover 6462 Grass back cover Transparent portion 6462a Grass back cover Colorless transparent portion 6462b Grass back cover Colored transparent portion 6464 Grass back cover Light scattering portion 6464a Grass back cover Colorless light scattering portion 6464b Grass back cover Colored light scattering Part 6466 Grass back cover opaque part 6470 1st grass role 6475 2nd grass role 6480 3rd grass role 6485 4th grass role 6500 Mountain glove 6520 Mountain board 6522 Mountain board front light emitting part 6522a Mountain board front 1st Light emitting part 6522b Mountain board front 2nd light emitting part 6522c Mountain board front 3rd light emitting part 6522d Mountain board front 4th light emitting part 6522e Mountain board front 5th light emitting part 6522f Mountain board front 6th light emitting part 6522g Mountain board front 7th light emitting part 6522h mountain substrate front eighth light emitting part 6522i mountain substrate front ninth light emitting part 6524 mountain substrate opening 6540 first mountain front cover 6542 first mountain front cover colored transparent part 6544 first mountain front cover colored light scattering part 6548 first mountain Front cover opening 6560 2nd mountain front cover 6562 2nd mountain front cover colorless transparent part 6564 2nd mountain front cover colorless light scattering part 6600 1st giant tree component 6610 1st giant tree trunk substrate 6630 1st giant tree leaf substrate 6650 2nd Giant tree part 6660 Second big tree trunk substrate 6680 Second big tree board 6700 First cloud part 6750 Second cloud part 6800 Board back grass part 6820 Board back grass board 6822 Board back grass board Front light emitting part 6824 Board back grass Board opening 6824a Board back grass board 1st opening 6824b Board back grass board 2nd opening 6824c Board back grass board 3rd opening 6824d Board back grass board 4th opening 6840 Board back grass cover 6842 Board back grass front Cover colored transparent part 6844 Board back grass front cover Colored light scattering part 6848 Board back grass front cover opening Part 6848a Board back grass front cover 1st opening 6848b Board back grass front cover 2nd opening 6848c Board back grass front cover 3rd opening 6848d Board back grass front cover 4th opening 7000 Door frame top unit upper right ear opening Part 7002 Door frame top unit upper first right ear opening 7004 Door frame top unit upper second right ear opening 7010 Door frame top unit upper left ear opening 7012 Door frame top unit upper first left ear opening 7014 Door frame Top unit upper 2nd left ear opening 7020 Door frame top unit lower right ear opening 7022 Door frame top unit lower 1st right ear opening 7024 Door frame top unit lower 2nd right ear opening 7030 Door frame top unit lower left Ear opening 7032 Door frame top unit lower 1st left ear opening 7034 Door frame top unit lower 2nd left ear opening 7040 Door frame top unit upper Both ears opening 7050 Door frame top unit inner right light emitting portion 7052 Door frame top Left side light emitting unit in the unit 7100 Right ear frame movable body 7110 Right ear frame movable body first surface 7112 Right ear frame movable body first surface inner decoration section 7114 Right ear frame movable body first surface outer decoration section 7116 Right ear frame movable body Inner light emitting unit 7118 Right ear frame movable body Outer light emitting unit 7120 Right ear frame movable body second surface 7140 Right ear frame movable body rotating shaft 7200 Left ear frame movable body 7210 Left ear frame movable body first surface 7212 Left ear frame movable Body first surface inner decorative portion 7214 Left ear frame movable body First surface outer decorative portion 7216 Left ear frame movable body inner light emitting portion 7218 Left ear frame movable outer light emitting portion 7220 Left ear frame movable body second surface 7240 Left ear frame Movable body rotating shaft 7300 Right ear inner frame movable body 7310 Right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7320 Right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7330 Right ear inner frame movable body light emitting unit 7340 Right ear inner frame movable body rotation Axis 7350 Right ear outer frame movable body 7360 Right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7370 Right ear outer frame movable body second surface 7380 Right ear outer frame movable body light emitting unit 7390 Right ear outer frame movable body rotating shaft 7400 Left ear Inner frame movable body 7410 Left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7420 Left ear inner frame movable body second surface 7430 Left ear inner frame movable body Light emitting unit 7440 Left ear inner frame movable body Rotating shaft 7450 Left ear outer frame movable body 7460 Left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7470 Left ear outer frame movable body second surface 7480 Left ear outer frame movable body light emitting unit 7490 Left ear outer frame movable body rotating shaft 7 500 Door frame top unit face decoration 7510 Door frame top unit Face movable 7512 Door frame top unit Right eye decoration 7514 Door frame top unit Left eye decoration 7520 Door frame top unit Lower face 7522 Door frame top unit Face lower nose movable body 7524 Door frame top unit Face lower mouth movable body 7600 Door frame side unit Right arm part 7610 Door frame side unit Right arm case part 7620 Door frame side unit Right arm Upper arm part 7630 Door frame side unit Right arm Lower arm part 7650 Door frame side unit Left arm part 7660 Door frame side unit Left arm case part 7670 Door frame side unit Left arm upper arm part 7680 Door frame side unit Left arm Lower arm part 7700 Curtain board bottom unit Right foot movable body 7710 Curtain board bottom unit Right foot snake part 7720 Curtain board bottom unit Right foot tip part 7750 Curtain Board bottom unit left foot movable body 7760 Curtain board bottom unit left foot snake section 7770 Curtain board bottom unit left foot tip portion 7800 Root vegetable frame movable body 7802 Root vegetable frame movable body first cover portion 7804 Root vegetable frame movable body second cover portion 7810 Root vegetable frame movable body Light emitting part 7820 Right connecting linear member 7825 Right vertical moving drive mechanism 7830 Left connecting linear member 7835 Left vertical moving drive mechanism 7850 Root vegetable frame movable body cover unit 7852 Cover unit frame 7854 Cover unit front surface 7856 Cover unit right side surface 7858 Cover unit Left side part 9100 Character accessory 9110 Cover member (cover body)
9111 Transmission part (first area)
9112 Non-transmissive part (second region)
9120 Character accessory substrate 9130 Base member 9200 Snowman accessory 9210 Cover member 9210a Front cover member 9210b Back cover member 9220 Snowman substrate 9301 Light emitter (LED)
9302 resistance

Claims (1)

A frame that forms the outer shape of the gaming machine,
A lottery means for performing a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition,
An effect performing means for performing an effect using a predetermined display means based on a lottery result of the lottery means; a first shaped body that is provided in the frame body and can be driven by the effect executing means;
A second shaped body that is provided on the frame body and can be driven by the effect executing means,
The effect execution means, based on the lottery result,
A first effect mode for displaying a specific effect display on the predetermined display means and driving the first modeling object;
A second effect mode in which, after displaying a dynamic display using a simulated image simulating the second shaped body on the predetermined display means, the second shaped body is driven.
Is feasible,
In the second effect mode, the driving of the second molded body is performed at a position where it does not overlap with the display of the simulated image of the second molded body in front view from before driving to after driving . The display of the simulated image of the second molded body, which is displayed before the driving of the molded body, is not hidden and is displayed even when the driving of the second molded body is performed. A gaming machine characterized by that.